b'i?\xc2\xab;^5 \n\n\n\n\n\n\n,\xc2\xbbsi%\xc2\xabtM,, ,^^,v\xc2\xbb \n\n\n\n- :.^:* \n\n\n\nr^?:^^\'^\'*\'<\'\'\'>.v-. .^\xe2\x96\xa0\xe2\x80\xa2, \n\n\n\n\'" \'^\';yi-;y< \n\n\n\n!\xe2\x96\xa0:>\'\'\xe2\x96\xa0 \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n1^ \n\n\n\n\n\n\nV ^,-:?.^ \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n>\' \n\n\'*\xc2\xbb" \n\n\n\nJ...;^*c;- \n\n\n\n\n\n\n*\'\'.V*t# \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\xe2\x80\xa2 V- \n\n\n\n\n\n\nA\' \xe2\x80\xa2\xe2\x80\xa2\xe2\x96\xa0\'\xe2\x96\xa0- \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nIfcffr \n\n\n\n\n\xc2\xbb / \n\n\n\nt^. . \'Jf \n\n\n\n\xe2\x96\xa0\xe2\x96\xa0*\xe2\x80\xa2 - .^^ \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\xe2\x80\xa2*\' .. .\'-- i^^-^-r \n\n\n\n^..\xe2\x96\xa0^.. \n\n\n\n\xe2\x96\xa0 wr \xe2\x96\xa0 \' r * 1\' \n\nWW -\xc2\xbb \xc2\xab -.-^^ I r \' .^ \n\n\n\n\' . / ; \' \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nQass-IP i ^SS \nBook \' K SS . \n\n\n\n/ \n\n\n\nL \n\n\n\nGRAMMAR \n\n\n\nOF \n\n\n\nTHE GREEK LANGUAGE, \n\nFOE THE USE OF \n\nHIGH SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES. \n\nBY / \n\nDR. RAPHAEL KUHNER, \n\nCONaECTOB or THE LTCEUK, QAMOTKR. \n\nTBANSLATED FBOM THE GEBMAN \nBY \n\nB. B. EDWARDS, \n\nLATB FKOFE8SOB IN THE THEOLOGICAL SBMIN1.BT, AND \n\nS. H. TAYLOR, \n\nPRINCIPAL OF PHILLIPS ACADSMT, AVDOTXB. \n\n\n\nSIXTH EDITION. \n\n\n\nNEW-YORK : \nD. APPLETON & COMPANY \n\n846 & 848 BROADWAY. \nM.DCCC.UX. \n\n\n\n\n\n\n7-:"i \n\n\n\nEntered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1852, by \n\nD. Appleton & Co., \n\nIn the Clerk\'s Office of the District Court of the United States \n\nfor the Southern District of New York. \n\n\n\n\n\n\n4 \n\n\n\nPREFACE. \n\n\n\nRaphaet, Kuhxer, the author of the following Grammar \nW2^ born at Gotha, in 1802. From 1812 to 1821, he \nLJiQJed at the celebrated gymnasium in his native city. \nAmong his classical teachers were DOring, Rost and Wiiste- \nmann. From 1821 to 1824, he enjoyed, at the University \nof Gottingen, the instructions of Mitscherlich, Dissen and \nOttfried MuUer. While there, he prepared an essay on \nthe philosophical writings of Cicero, which received a \nprize. Since 1824, he has been a teacher in the Lyceum \nat Hanover. The principal works from the pen of Dr. \nKuhner are the following : \n\n1. Versuch einer neuen Anordnung der griechischen Syntax, \n\nmit Beispielen begleitet. 1829. " Attempt towards a \nnew Arrangement of the Greek Syntax," etc. \n\n2. M. Tull. Ciceronis Tusculan. Disputationum libri. 1829 \n\ned. altera 1835 ; ed. tertia 1846. \n\n3. Sammtliche Anomaliendes griechischen Verbs in Attisch. \n\nDialecte, 1831. " Anomalies of the Greek Verb, etc. \n\n4. Ausfuhrliche Grammatik der griechischen Sprache, in 2 \n\nTheilen, 1834, 1835. " Copious Grammar of the Greek \nLanguage, in two Parts." The second Part of this \ngrammar, containing the Syntax, translated by W. E. \nJelf, of the University of Oxford, was published in \n1842; the first Part in 1845. A second edition of \nJelfs translation of this work was published in 1851. \nThis work is, however, only in part a translation, Mr. \n\n\n\nA* \n\n\n\n/ \'^ AmM!iw!m?mBsmB!9i\'\'i9fr * .\'^^^ \xe2\x96\xa0\'viy?. \n\n\n\nVI PREFACE. \n\n\'\xe2\x96\xa0 I \n\nJelf being th6 author of the remarks on the Cases , the \nparticle dv, the compound verbs, etc. \n\n5. Schulgramms^fik der griechischen Sprache, 1836 ; zweite \n\ndurchaus vcrbesserte u. vermehrtfe Auflage, 1843; \ndritte .yje^besserte und* vermehrte Auflage 1851. \n" School* Qxammar of the Greek Language, third \nedition,^tei^roved and ^enlarged." The present vol- \nume is -a translation of this Grammar, from the \nsheets, furnished for this purpose by the author. \n\n6. Elementa^ammatik der griechischen Sprache, neunte \n\nAuflage-,1850. " Elementary Grammar of the Greek \nLanguage, containing a series of Greek and Eng- \nlish exercises for translation with the requisite vocab- \nularies.\'^ \xe2\x80\xa2 "This Grammar, translated by Mr. S. H. \nTaylor, pne of the translators of the* present volume, \nhas passed through eleven editions in this country. \n\n7. Xenophontis de Socrate Commentarii, 1841. \n\n8. Elementargrammatik der lateihischen Sprache, siebent \n\nAuflage, 1850. " Elementary Grammar of the Latin \nLanguage with Exercises." This Grammar, trans- \nlated by Prof. Champlin, of WaterviUe College, hsis \npassed through several editions in this country. \n\n9. Lateinische Vorschule nebst eingereihten lateinischen \n\nund deutschen Ubersetzungsaufgaben, vierte Auflage, \n\n1849. \n10. Schulgrammatik der lateinischen Sprache, dritte sehr \n\nverbesserte Auflage, 1850. " School Grammar of \n\nthe Latin Language, third edition, greatly improved." \nDr. Kiihner has also published in the Bibliotheca Graeca \nthe first part of his edition of Xenophon\'s Anabasis. \n\nFrom the above statements, it wdll be seen that Dr. \nKiihner has enjoyed the most favorable opportmiities for \npreparing the work, a translation of which is now pre- \nsented to the public. The names of his early instructors \nare among the most honored in classical philology. For \n\n\n\nPREFACE. VU \n\nnearly thirty years, he has been a teacher in one of the \nprincipal German gymnasia, and has thus had ample facili- \nties for testing in practice the principles which he has \nadopted in his Grammars. At the same time, he has pur- \nsued the study of the classical authors with the greatest \ndiligence, in connection with the productions which his \nlearned countrymen are constantly publishing on the differ- \nent parts of Latin and Greek grammar. Of course, his \nworks might be expected to combine the advantages of \nsound, scientific principles with a skilful adaptation to prac- \ntical use. The " School Grammar of the Greek Lan- \nguage," being his latest publication, contains the results of \nhis most mature studies. Its chief excellences, it may be \nwell, perhaps, briefly to indicate. \n\nFirst, The grammar is based on a profound and accurate \nknowledge of the genius and principles of the Greek lan- \nguage. The author adopts substantially the views which \nare maintained by Becker, Grimm, Hupfeld and others, and \nwhich are fully unfolded in the German grammars of \nBecker. According to these views, the forms and changes \nof language are the result of established laws, and not of \naccident or arbitrary arrangement. Consequently, language \nmay be subjected to scientific analysis and classification. \nThe multitude of details may be embraced under a few \ncomprehensive principles, and the whole may have some- \nwhat of the completeness and spirit of a living, organic \nsystem. Dr. Kiihner\'s grammar is not a collection of de- \ntached observations, or of rules which have no connection, \nexcept a numerical one. It is a natural classification of \nthe essential elements of the language, an orderly exhibi- \ntion of its real phenomena. It is, at the same time, a truly \npractical grammar, fitted for its object, not by a theorist in \nhis closet, but by an experienced instructor in his school. \n\nSecond, The author has adopted a clear and satisfactory \narrangement of his materials. This can be seen by an \n\n\n\n\\rm PREFACE \n\nexamination of the table of contents. To those, indeed, \nwho are familiar only with the common distribution of \nsubjects in our Greek grammars, the arrangement of Dr. \nKiihner may appear somewhat obscure and complicated. \nA slight acquaintance, however, with the plan on which \nthe Syntax, for example, is constructed, will show that he \nhas followed the true and logical method. Abundant \nproofs of the justness of this remark may be seen in the \nexhibition of compound sentences. The particles are \ntreated, not as isolated, independent words, but as a com- \nponent and indissoluble part of discourse. \n\nThird, Fulness and pertinence of illustration. The cor- \nrectness of every principle advanced, especially in the Syn- \ntax, is vouched for by copious citations from the classics. \nK, in any case, a principle is stated in an abstract form, or \nif a degree of obscurity rests upon the enunciation of it, \nits meaning may be readily discovered by reference to the \nillustration. The paradigms contain much more complete \nexemplifications of conjugation and declension than are to \nbe found in the grammars in common use in this coun- \ntry. In this connection, it may be stated, that Dr. Kiihner \nhas chosen a pure verb as the model of regular inflection. \nHe can thus exhibit the stem unchanged, throughout the \nentire conjugation. \n\nFourth, The perfect analysis to which the forms of the \nlanguage, especially of the verb, is subjected, may be men- \ntioned as another excellence of the grammar. In learning \na paradigm, in the manner which the author points out, the \npupil first resolves the verb into its elements, and then \nrearranges these elementary parts into a complete form. \nIn this method, and in no other, can he attain a mastery \nof this most difficult portion of the subject. \n\nFifth, Every part of the grammar is equally elaborated. \nThe closing pages exhibit the same fulness and conscien- \ntious accuracy, which characterize the forms, or the first \n\n\n\nPREFACE. IX \n\nportions of the S}ntax. No part can be justly charged \nwith deficiency or with superfluous statement. The view \nof the Third Declension, the scientific list of Irregular \nVerbs, the Dialectic peculiarities, the observations on the \nUse and Position of the Article, on the INIiddle and Passive \nVerbs, on the delicate shades of thought indicated by the \nModes and Tenses, and on the difference between the use \nof the Participle and Infinitive, may be referred to as spe- \ncimens of careful observation and nice analysis. \n\nThe Appendix on Versification has been supplied by the \ntranslators, the grammar of Kiihner containing nothing on \nthat subject. The materials were drawn from a variety of \nsources. A more full view is less necessary, as the excel- \nlent work of Munk on Greek and Roman Metres, trans- \nlated by Profs. Beck and Felton, is now accessible. \n\nMuch pains have been taken in verifying the almost in- \nnumerable references to classical authors. The very few \nexceptions are those cases where the author made use of \nan edition of a classic not accessible to the translators. Li \nthis verification, the following editions of prose authors \nwere used : Kiihner\'s edition of the Memorabilia ; Weiske\'s \nand Tauchnitz\'s editions of the other works of Xenophon ; \nSchafer\'s and Tauchnitz\'s editions of Herodotus ; Becker\'s \nand Tauchnitz\'s editions of Thucydides ; Dobson\'s edition \nof the Oratores Attici ; and Stallbaum\'s Plato. There are \nslight variations in numbering the lines of poetry in difler- \nent editions, particularly in the tragedians. \n\nThe present edition has been prepared from the third \nGerman edition, in which the author had made many im- \nportant improvements, particularly in the Syntax, having \navailed himself of the corrections or remarks of his learned \nfriends and his reviewers. This the translators have en- \ndeavored to put into such a form as would best meet the \nwants of American scholars. They have not aimed merely \n\n\n\nX PREFACE. \n\nat a translation ; it has been their object to state in as clear \nand concise a manner as possible the principles contained \nin the original, without reference to the particular form in \nwhich the statements were there made. The translators \nhave also added principles and illustrations of their own, \nwhere it seemed desirable. \n\nThe numbering of the paragraphs has not been changed \nin the present edition, and most of the subdivisions and \nRemarks are the same as in the former edition. The \nchanges in this respect have been so few, that it has not \nbeen thought necessary to indicate them. \n\nThe labor of preparing the first edition cf this work was \nshared equally by the translators ; so, also, in the second \nedition as far as the 210th page. At this point in the \nprogress of the work, the state of Professor Edwards\'s \nhealth made it necessary for him to relinquish his labors in \nconnection with it, for the purpose of seeking a milder \nclimate. After a few months\' residence in one of the South- \nern States, he was called away from his labors on earth, \ndeeply lamented by his associate, and the large circle of \nfriends to whom his character presented so many attractive \nquahties. His loss will be extensively felt also m the cause \nof Biblical and Classical literature, for which none cher- \nished a deeper interest, and for the promotion of which he \ncontributed with great zeal and success the rich stores of \nhis elegant and varied learning. \n\nThe proofs of the Grammar have been read by Mr. P. \nS. Byers, an associate Instructor in Phillips Academy, to \nwhom special acknowledgments are due for these services^ \nas well as for many valuable suggestions. \n\nAndover, July 15, 1852. \n\n\n\nTABLE OF COxNTENTS. \n\n\n\nETYMOLOGY. \n\nSECTION L \xe2\x80\x94 SOUNDS OF THE <.ANGUAGE. \n\nChapter I. \xe2\x80\x94 Lettecs axd Souxds op the Languaob. \n\n\n\nAXPUABET \n\nSounds of the Letters . . . \nHistory of the Alphabet. \n\nOrgans of Speech \n\nVowels , \n\nConsonants \n\nBreathings , \n\nChanges of Letters \n\n\n\nM \n\n2a \n\n2b \n3 \n4 \n\n5 \ntj \n7 \n\n\n\nChanges of the Vowels 8 \xe2\x80\x94 1 6 \n\nHiatus 8 \n\nContraction of Vowels 9 \n\n\n\nCrasis 10, 1 1 \n\nSynizcsis 12 \n\nElision 13, U \n\nN Paragogic (4<p\xe2\x82\xac?u(u(rTiK6y) ; \n\novru(s) ; ^{ aniWff ; o\' \'k 15 \nStrengthening and N\\ r^ \n\nof Vowels IG \n\n\n\nProl\' III. Shortening. In- \n\ntci ^ and Variation, ... \xc2\xa7 16 \nInfluence of a Vowel or Con- \nsonant on another vowel. ... 16 \nSyncope, Omission of a Vowel 16 \n\nr ic Prothesis 16 \n\n( \' of the Consonants... 17 \xe2\x80\x94 25 \n\nMutes 17 \n\nLiquids 18 \n\nMutes and Liquids, Liquids and \n\nMntes 19 \n\nSibilant <r with Mut. and Liq... 20 \n\nChange of separated Consonants 21 \n\nMetathesis of Liquids 22 \n\nDoubling of Consonants 23 \n\nSin \' Mg and Addition of \n\nC< us 24 \n\nExpulsion and Omission of \n\nConsonant:* 25 \n\n\n\nCuAPT. II. \xe2\x80\x94 Syllables. \n\n\n\nNature and Division of Syllables 26 \n\nQuantity of Syllables 27 \n\nQuantity of the Penult 28 \n\nA-Ccents 29 \n\nChange and Removal of the \nAccent by Inflection, Compo- \nsition and Contraction 30 \n\nChange and Removal of the Ac- \ncent in connected Discourse 31 \xe2\x80\x94 35 \n\n\n\nI. Grave instead of the ocuto 31 \n\nII. Crasis 31 \n\nIII. Elision 31 \n\nAnastrojthe 31 \n\nAtonies or Proclitics... 32 \n\nEnclitics 33 \xe2\x80\x94 35 \n\nDivision of Syllables 36 \n\nPunctuation Maiks \xe2\x80\x94 Diastole. 37 \n\n\n\nIV. \n\nV. \n\nVI. \n\n\n\nSECT. IL \xe2\x80\x94 GRAMMATIC2VL FORMS. \n\nDivision 0/ the Parts 0/ Speech. \xe2\x80\x94 Injlection. \n\nCuAPT. L \xe2\x80\x94 The Scbstaktive. \n\n\n\nDifferent kinds of Substantives. . . 39 \n\nGender of Substantives 40 \n\nNumber, Case aad Decleusiou ... 41 \n\n\n\nFirst Declension 42 \n\nI. Feminines 43 \n\nII. Masculines 44 \n\n\n\nxu \n\n\n\nCONTENTS. \n\n\n\nQuantity and Accentuation . \xc2\xa7 45 \n\nSecond Declension 46 \n\nContraction of the second Dec. 47 \nAttic second Declension. ... 48 \n\nAccentuation 49 \n\nEemarks on Gender 50 \n\nThird Declension 51 \n\nEemarks on the Case-endings 52, 53 \n\nParadigms 54\xe2\x80\x9463 \n\nQuantity 64 \n\nAccentuation 65 \n\n\n\nGender 66 \n\nAnomalous Nouns 67, 68 \n\nDefective Nouns 69 \n\nInterchange of Forms in the \n\nDeclensions 70 \xe2\x80\x94 72 \n\nI. Redundant Nouns 70 \n\nII. Heteroclites 71 \n\nIII. Metaplasts 72 \n\nIndeclinable and Defective \n\nNouns 73 \n\n\n\nChapt. II. \xe2\x80\x94 The Adjective 4J\xc2\xabrD Paeticiple. \n\n\n\nNature, Gender and Declension 74 \n\nAccentuation 75 \n\nSummary of the Adjective and \n\nPart. Endings 76\xe2\x80\x9480 \n\nI. Adjectives and Partici- \nples of three Endings. . 76, 77 \nII. Adjectives of two Endings 78, 79 \nIII. Adjectives of one Ending 80 \n\n\n\nComparison of Adjectives 81 \n\nA. -Tcpos, -Tooa, -Tepov; -raroSf \n\n-rdrr], -Ta\'rtv 82 \n\nB. -iuu, -lOV, -Qll/y -OV] -IffTOSf -71, \n\n-ov 83 \n\nAnomalous forms of Comparison. 84 \n\nComparison of Adverbs 85 \n\n\n\nChapt. III. \xe2\x80\x94 The Peokoux. \n\n\n\nNature and Division of Pronouns 86 \n\nI. Personal Pronouns 87-90 \n\nII. Demonstrative Pronouns 91 \nIII. Relative Pronouns 92 \n\n\n\nIV. Indefinite and Interrogative \n\nPronouns 93 \n\nCorrelative Pronouns 94 \n\nLengthening of the Pronoun 95 \n\n\n\nChapt. IV. \xe2\x80\x94 The Numeeals. \n\n\n\nNature and Division of Numerals 96 \nNumeral Signs 97 \n\n\n\nPrincipal classes of Numerals. ... 98 \nRemarks on the Numerals 99 \n\n\n\nChapt. V. \xe2\x80\x94 The Adveeb. \nNature and Division of Adverbs 100 I Formation of Adverbs . \n\n\n\n101 \n\n\n\nChapt. VI. \xe2\x80\x94 The Veeb. \n\n\n\nNature and Division of the Verb 102 \n\nClasses 102 \n\nTenses 103 \n\nModes 104 \n\nInfinitive and Participle 105 \n\nPersons and Numbers 106 \n\nConjugation of Verbs in -\xc2\xab 107 \n\nStem, Augment, Reduplication \n\nand Characteristic 108 \n\nInflection-endings 109 \n\na. Tense-characteristic and \n\nTense-endings 110 \n\nb. Personal-endings and Mode- \n\nvowels 11 1 \xe2\x80\x94 1 14 \n\nFull Paradigm of a Regular Verb 115 \nRemarks on the Inflection-endings 116 \nRemarks on the Formation of the \nAttic Future 117 \n\n\n\nAccentuation of the Verb 118 \n\nFurther view of Aug. and Redup. 119 \n\n(a) Syllabic Augment 120 \n\n(b) Temporal Augment. . 121, 122 \n\nReduplication 123 \n\nAttic Reduplication 124 \n\nAug. and Redup. in Compounds 125-6 \nFormation of the Tenses of Verbs \n\nin -o) 127 \xe2\x80\x94 167 \n\nDivision of Verbs in -\xc2\xab according \n\nto the Characteristic 127 \n\nDerivation of Tenses 128 \n\nI. Formation of the Tenses of \n\nPure Verbs 129 \n\na. With a short Characteristic- \n\nvowel 13C \n\nb. With (T in Aor. Pass, and Perf. \n\nMid. or Pass 131 \n\n\n\nCONTENTS. \n\n\n\nXIU \n\n\n\nParadigms of Pure Verbs \xc2\xa7 132\xe2\x80\x94137 \n\nA. Uncon traded Pure Verbs. . 132 \n\n(a) Without <r in the Mid. or \n\nPass 132 \n\n(b) With (T in the Mid. and \n\nPass 133 \n\nB. Contract Pure Verbs... 134 \xe2\x80\x94 136 \nRemarks on contract verbs... 137 \n\n11. Formation of the Tenses of \n\nImpure Verbs 138 \n\nStrengthening of the Stem 139 \n\nVariation of the Stem-vowel. . . . 140 \nRemarks on the Secondary Tenses 141 \n\nA. Formation of the Tenses of \n\nMute Verbs 142\xe2\x80\x94144 \n\nRemarks on the Characteristic 143 \nParadigms of Mute Verbs 145 \xe2\x80\x94 148 \n\nB. Formation of the Tenses of \n\nLiquid Verbs 149 \n\nParadigms 150\xe2\x80\x94153 \n\nPeculiarities in the Formation of \n\nSingle Verbs 154 \n\nSyncope 155 \n\nMetathesis 156 \n\nVerbs in -cwwith Stem of the Pres. \n\nstrengthened 157 \n\nI. Verbs with v inserted 1 58 \n\nII. Verbs with the syllable vf 159 \n\nni. Verbs with av or auv 160 \n\nIV. Verbs in -okw, -iaKw 161 \n\nV. Verbs in -3a. 162 \n\nVI. Verbs with Reduplication. 163 \nVII. Verbs whose Pure Stem- \nvowel o is strengthened by i 164 \nVIII. Verbs which assume \xc2\xab... 165 \nVerbs which assume an < in form- \ning the Tenses 166 \n\nVerbs whose Tenses are formed \n\nfrom different Roots 167 \n\nConjugation of Verbs in -/u . . . . 168 \nDivision of Verbs in -fxi 169 \n\n\n\nCharacteristic-vowel and Strength- \nening of the Stem of the Pres. ^170 \n\nMode-vowels 171 \n\nPersonal-endings 172 \n\nFormation of the Tenses. . . 173, 174 \n\nParadigms 175 \n\nRemarks on the Paradigms 176 \n\nSummary of Verbs in -fxi. . 172 \xe2\x80\x94 190 \n\nI. Verbs in -fu which annex the \n\nPersonal-endings immediate- \nly to the Stem-vowel 177 \n\n(a)\' Verbs in -a 177 \n\n\xe2\x99\xa677/11 178 \n\nDeponents 179 \n\n(b) Verbs in -e 180 \n\n(c) Verbs :r -1 : EZ/xj. \xe2\x80\x94 Eifii. . . 181 \n\nII. Verbs in -/*\xc2\xbb which annex yvv \n\nor w to the Stem- vowel . . 182 \n\nFormation of the Tenses 182 \n\nSummary of this class of Verbs 183 \n\n\xe2\x80\x94188 \n\nA. Verbs whose Stem ends in a \n\nVowel 183\xe2\x80\x94186 \n\n(a) in -a 183 \n\n(b) in -\xe2\x82\xac 184 \n\n(c) in-i 185 \n\n(d) in-o 186 \n\nB. Verbs w^hose Stem ends in a \n\nConsonant 187,188 \n\n(a) in a Mute 187 \n\n(b) in a Liquid 188 \n\nInflection of *\xc2\xab?/*\xc2\xab and ^tiai 189, 190 \n\nVerbs in -\xc2\xab analogous in Forma- \ntion to those in -m . . 191 \xe2\x80\x94 196 \nI. Second Aor. Act. and Mid- \ndle 191, 192 \n\nIL Perf. and Plup. Act.. . 193, 194 \n\nOlia and KoiKa 1 95 \n\nIII. Present and Imperfect. ... 196 \nSummary of Deponent Passives. 197 \nSummarv of Active Verbs with a \nMid. Fut 198 \n\n\n\nChapt. VII. \xe2\x80\x94 Prepositions, Conjunctions and Interjections 199 \n\n\n\nPECLXIARITIES OF THE DIALECTS. \n\n\n\nA. Orthography. \nDigamma or Labial Breathing F. 200 \n\nInterchange of the Vowels 201 \n\nInterchange of the Consonants 202-204 \n\nChange of the Vowels 205-207 \n\nContraction, Diaeresis 205 \n\nCrasis, Synizesis, Elision, N Par- \n\nagogic, Hiatus 206 \n\nLengthening and Shortening of \nthe Vowels. \xe2\x80\x94 Syncope. \xe2\x80\x94 Apo- \n\ncoj/e 207 \n\nB \n\n\n\nProthesis and Insertion of Vowels 207 \n\nChanges of Consonants 208 \n\nQuantitv 209 \n\nh. Dialectic Forms. \n\nDeclensions 210- 214 \n\nHomeric Suffix <pi or ^iv 210 \n\nFirst Declension 211 \n\nSecond Declension 21S \n\nThird Declension 213 \n\nAnomalous and Defective \nWords. Metaplasts 214 \n\n\n\nXIV \n\n\n\nCONTENTS. \n\n\n\nThe Adjective \xc2\xa7215 \n\nComparison 216 \n\nPronouns 217 \n\nNumerals 218 \n\nThe Verb 219-230 \n\nAugment and Reduplication . . 219 \nPersonal-endings and Mode- \nvowels 220 \n\nEpic and Ionic Iterative Form 221 \nContraction and Resolution in \nVerbs 222 \n\n\n\nFormation of the Tenses ... \xc2\xa7 223 \n\nConjugation in -^t ....... . 224 \n\nE(>i and Eifii 225, 226 \n\nVerbs in -a> vsdth a Sec. Aor. an- \nalogous to Verbs in -/tt . . . . 227 \n\nVerbs in -w with a Perf. and \nPlup. Act. like Verbs in -fii 228 \n\nVerbs in -w with a Pres. and \nImpf. Act. like Verbs in -fii 229 \n\nList of Dialectic Verbs 230 \n\n\n\nSECT. III.\xe2\x80\x94 FORMATION OF WORDS. \n\n\n\nEadical Words, StemSjDerivatives 231 \n\nA. Derivation 232-235 \n\nI. Verbs 232 \n\nII. Substantives 233 \n\n\n\nIII. Adjectives 234 \n\nIV. Adverbs 235 \n\nB. Compounds 236 \n\nFormation of Compounds 237 \n\n\n\nSYNTAX. \n\nSECT.! \xe2\x80\x94 SYNTAX OF THE SBIPLE SENTENCE. \n\nChapt. I. \xe2\x80\x94 Parts op a Simple Sentence. \n\n\n\nNature of a Sentence. \xe2\x80\x94 Subject \nand Predicate 238 \n\nComparison. Attribute and Ob- \nject 239 \n\nAgreement 240 \n\nExceptions to the general rules of \nAgreement 241 \n\nAgreement when there are several \nSubjects 242 \n\nRemarks on Peculiarities in use of \nNumber 243 \n\nThe Article 244 \n\nPosition of the Article 245 \n\nUse of the Article with Pronouns \n\nand Numerals 246 \n\nThe Article as a Demon, and \nRel. Pronoun 247 \n\n\n\nClasses of Verbs 248 \n\nA. Active form 249 \n\nB. JVIiddle 250 \n\nC. Passive 251 \n\nRemarks on Deponents 252 \n\nTenses and Modes 253 \n\nA. Particular View of the Tenses 254 \n\n(a) Principal tenses: Pres., \nPerf., Fut 255 \n\n(b) Hist. Tenses : Aor., Impf, \n\nPlup 256 \n\nTenses of the Subord. Modes 257 \n\nB. Particular View of the Modes 258 \nUse of the Subj.,Opt.and Imp. 259 \n\nThe Modes ^^^th &v 260 \n\nPosition and Repetition of &v 251 \n\n\n\nChapt. n. \xe2\x80\x94 Attkibutiye Construction. \n\n\n\nEllipsis of the Substantive .... 263 \n(a) Attributive Adjective .... 264 \n\n\n\n(b) Attributive Grenitive .... 265 \n\n(c) Apposition 266 \n\n\n\nChapt. m. \xe2\x80\x94 Objective Construction. \n\n\n\nThe Cases 268 \n\nNominative and Vocative . . . 269 \n(1) Genitive 270 \n\nA. Local Relation 271 \n\nB. Causal Relation 272 \n\n(a) Active Genitive 273 \n\n(b) Causal Genitive 274 \n\n\n\nI \n\n\n\n(c) Gren. denoting mutual re- \nlations 275 \n\n(2) Accusative 276 \n\nA. Local Relation 277 \n\nB. Causal Relation 278 \n\n(a) Ace. denoting effect . . . 278 \n\n(b) Acc.of the Object on which \n\nthe action is performed . 279 \n\n\n\nCONTEJ^TS. \n\n\n\nXV \n\n\n\nTwo Accusatives ^280 \n\nRemarks on the Ace. with the \n\nPassive 281 \n\n(3) Dative 282 \n\nA. Local Dative 283 \n\nB. Dative as a personal Object 284 \n\nC. Dative of the thing 285 \n\nn. Construction of Prepositions . 286 \n\n\n\n(1) Prepositions with the Gren. \n\nonly \xc2\xa7 287, 288 \n\n(2) With the Dative only . . . .\' 289 \n\n(3) With the Accusative\' onlv . 290 \n\n(4) With the Gen. and Ace, 291-294 \n\n(5) With the Gen., Dat. and \n\nAce 295-299 \n\nRemarks on peculiarities of the \n\nPrepositions 300 \n\n\n\nChapt. IV. \xe2\x80\x94 The Pronoun as Subject, Predicate, Attribute and \n\nObject. \n\n\n\nI. Personal Pronouns 302 \n\nII. Remaining Pronouns 303 \n\n\n\nProspective and Retrospective \nUse of the Pronoun 304 \n\n\n\nChapt. V. \xe2\x80\x94 The Infinitive and Participle used as an Attributb \n\nAND Object. \n\n\n\nA. The Infinitive 305 \n\n(I) Inf. as an Object without \n\nthe Article 306 \n\nNom., Gen., Dat. and Ace. \nwith the Inf. 307 \n\n(II) Inf. with the Article .... 308 \n\nB. The Participle 309 \n\n(I) The Part, as the Comple- \nment of the Verb .... 310 \n\n\n\nRemarks on the Inter- \nchange of the Part, and \n\nthe Inf. 311 \n\n(II) Part, used to express Ad- \nverbial Subordinate Re- \nlations 312 \n\nSpecial Peculiarities in the \nParticipial Construction 313 \n\n\n\nChapt. VI. \xe2\x80\x94 Tile Adverbial Objective. \n\n\n\nA. A^, Btjto, ^\xc2\xbb\', Srjdfv, Sr]irovbfUy \n\nSai 315 \n\nB. Coniinnative Advcbs 316 \n\n\n\nC. Empliatic ^ . 76, xcp, rol 317 \n\nD. Mc<rative i.^iLi ^^-^ 318 \n\n\n\nSECT, n. \xe2\x80\x94 SYNTAX OF THE COilPOUNT) SENTENCE. \nChapt. VIL A. \xe2\x80\x94 Coordination. \n\n\n\nDiflercnt Forms of Coordinate \n\nSentences 320 \n\nI. Copulative Coordinate Sen- \ntences 321 \n\nII. Adversative Coordinate Sen- \ntences 322 \n\n\n\nIII. Disjunctive Coordinate Sen- \ntences 323 \n\nIV. Causal Coordinate Sen- \ntences 324 \n\nRemarks on Asyndeton 325 \n\n\n\nChapt. VIII. B. \xe2\x80\x94 Subordination. \n\n\n\nPrincipal and Subordinate Sen- \ntences 326 \n\nSequence of Subjunctive Tenses \n\nin Subordinate Sentences 327\xc2\xbb \n\nUse of Modes in Subordinate \n\nClauses 327b \n\nI. Substantive Clauses 328 \n\nA. Introduced by 8tj or ws, that 329 \n\nB. Introduced by Jva, so //ui/, etc 330 \n\nII. Adjective Clauses 331 \n\n\n\nAgreement of the Rel. Pron. . . 332 \nModes in Adjective Clauses . . 333 \nConnection of several Adjective \n\nClauses 33-\xc2\xab \n\nInt< \' \xe2\x96\xa0 \xe2\x80\xa2 of the Subordinate \n\nCi ith the Adj. Clause 334 \nIII. Adverbial Clauses 335 \n\nA. Adverbial Clauses of Place 336 \n\nB. Adverbial Clauses of Time 337 \n\nC. Causal Adv. Clauses . 338 \xe2\x80\x94 340 \n\n\n\nXVI \n\n\n\nCONTENTS. \n\n\n\nI. Denoting Ground or \n\nCause \xc2\xa7 338 \n\n11. Denoting Condition 339, 340 \nIII. Denoting Consequence \n\nor Effect 341 \n\n\n\nD. Adverbial Clauses denoting \n\nManner and Quantity 342, 343 \nI. Comparative Adv.Clauses \n\ndenoting Manner 342 \n\n11. Comparative Adv.Clauses \ndenoting Quantity 343 \n\n\n\nChapt. IX. \xe2\x80\x94 Intekeogative Sentences. \nI. Interrogatives 344 Ellipsis, Brachylogy, Zeugma, \n\n\n\nII. Oblique Discourse 345 \n\nIII. Special Peculiarities in the \nConstruction of Words and Sen- \ntences 346, 347 \n\n\n\nContraction, Pleonasm 346 \n\nAnacoluthon 347 \n\n\n\nChapt. X. \xe2\x80\x94 Position of Words 348 \n\n\n\nAppendix A. \xe2\x80\x94 Versification Page 574 \nAppendix B. Abbreviations \nin writing 587 \n\n\n\nIndex of Subjects Page 589 \n\nGreek Index 602 \n\nIndex for the Forms of Verbs 614 \n\n\n\nABBREVIATIONS. \n\nAesch. Aeschylus, Ag. Agamemnon, S. Septem adv. Th. \xe2\x80\x94 Ar. Aristophanes.\xe2\x80\x94 \nDem. Demosthenes, 01. Olynth., Ph. Philipp., Cor. Corona, Chers. Chersones., Aph. \nAphobus. \xe2\x80\x94 \'Eur. Euripides, M.. Medea, C. Cyclops, H. Hecuba, 0. Orestes, H. F. \nHercules Furens, Hipp. Hippolytus. \xe2\x80\x94 Her. Herodotus. \xe2\x80\x94 Isae. Isaeus. \xe2\x80\x94 Lys. Ly- \nsias. \xe2\x80\x94 PI. Plato, Cr. Crito, L. Leges, Th. Theages, Men. 3Ieno, Soph. Sophista, \nCrat. Cratylus, Prot. Protagoras, Phil. Philebits, Rp. Respuhlica. \xe2\x80\x94 Soph. Sopho- \ncles, O. C. Oedipus Colo7}eus, O. R. Oedipus Rex, Ant. Antigone, Ph. Philoctetes, \nAj. Ajax, El. Electra, \xe2\x80\x94 X. Xenophon, C. Commentarii, An. Atiabasis, H. Hellen \ntea, S. Symposiu7)i, R. Ath. Respuhlica Atheniens., R. L. Respubl. Lacedaem., O. \nOeconomicus, Ag. Agesilaus, R. Equ. /il. Equestris. \n\n\n\nGREEK GRAMMAR. \n\n\n\nDIALECTS OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. \n\n1. The Greek language was divide\'d into many difFerent \ndialects, the most highly cultivated of which were the \n^olic, Doric, Ionic, and Attic. The ^olic prevailed in \nBoeotia, Thessaly, and in the ^olian colonies in Asia \nMinor; the Doric, throughout the Peloponnesus, and in the \nDorian colonies in Asia INDnor, Italy, and Sicily ; the \nIonic, in the Ionian colonies in Asia Minor ; the Attic, in \nAttica. \n\n2. The ^olic and Doric dialects are characterized by \nharshness and roughness, being the opposite of the Ionic, \nwhich is distinguished for delicacy and softness. The \nAttic dialect holds a beautiful medium between the two \nformer and the Ionic, as it skilfully combines the soft and \npleasant forms of the Ionic \\vith the strong and full-toned \nforms of the Doric. \n\n3. The Ionic dialect is divided into the Older and the \nLater Ionic. The older Ionic is the language of Homv. \nand of his school, although these poets were not satisfied \nwith their own dialect merely, but were able, in accordance \nwith the true principles of art, to select, from all the \ndialects, those forms which corresponded to the nature of \ntheir poetry ; and to employ \xe2\x80\x94 since the regular laws of \nversification had much influence in forming the language \n\n2 \n\n\n\n14 GREEK DIALECTS. \n\n\xe2\x80\x94 a peculiar and definite poetic language, called the Epic, \nor Homeric. This had a great effect on the language of \nall the Greek poets even to the latest times. We find the \nlater Ionic in the works of the historian Herodotus, born \n484 B. c, and of Hippocrates, b. 460 b. c. \n\n4. The Attic dialect is divided, in accordance with cer- \ntain peculiarities, into the Older, the Middle, and the Latei \nAttic. The older is used by Thucydides, b. 472 b. c. ; the \ntragic poets ; -^schylus, who died 456 b. c. ; Sophocles, \nb. 497 B. c, d. 405 b. c. ; Euripides, b. 480 b. c. ; and the \nmore ancient comic writers, e. g. Aristophanes, d. 390 b. c. j \nby several orators, e. g. Antiphon, b. 479 b. c, and An- \ndocides, b. 467 b. c. The middle Attic is used by Plato, \nb. 430 B. c. ; Xenophon, b. 447 b. c. ; and the orator Iso- \ncrates, b. b. c. 436. The later Attic is employed by De- \nmosthenes, b. 385 B. c, and other orators, the later comic \nwriters, and the prose authors in more recent times, who \nsought to preserve in their works the language of the earlier \nwriters. \n\n5. After the freedom of the Greeks had been destroyed \nby Philip, king of Macedon, the Attic dialect came to be \nthe common written language. As it extended, not only \nover all Greece, but also over the Macedonian provinces of \nSyria and Egypt, it lost much of its peculiar stamp by the \nintroduction of foreign forms and words, and it then \nreceived the name of the Common, or Hellenic language, \nri KOLvr), or \' EKkrjvLKT] Bcd\\,\xe2\x82\xacKTo<;. It was used, e. g. by Apol* \niodorus, Diodorus, and Plutarch. \n\n\n\nETYMOLOGY. \n\n\n\nSECTION I. \n\n\n\nCHAPTER L \n\n\n\nLett \n\n\ners : \n\n\nand Sounds \n\n\nof t.ie L \n\n\naiiguage. \n\n\n\n\n\n\n^ 1. Alp. \n\n\nhabet. \n\n\n\n\nThe Greek Alphabet consists of twenty- \n\n\nfour letters. \n\n\nFOBM. \n\n\nSound. \n\n\nName. \n\n\nV A \n\n\na \n\n\na \n\n\n^A\\(f>a \n\n\nAlpha \n\n\n\xe2\x80\xa2:. B \n\n\n^ \n\n\nb \n\n\nBrira \n\n\nBeta \n\n\n1r \n\n\n7 \n\n\ng \n\n\nrdfjLfia \n\n\nGamma \n\n\n1^ \n\n\n8 \n\n\nd \n\n\nAiXra \n\n\nDelta \n\n\nE \n\n\n\xe2\x82\xac \n\n\ne short \n\n\n^EyjrlXop \n\n\nEpsllon \n\n\n\\z \n\n\nK \n\n\nz \n\n\nZijra \n\n\nZeta \n\n\n?>H \n\n\nv \n\n\nelong \n\n\n"Hra \n\n\nEta \n\n\n00 \n\n\n^6 \n\n\nth \n\n\nGjJTa \n\n\nTheta \n\n\n\xe2\x96\xa0\xc2\xbb! \n\n\nI \n\n\n\xe2\x80\xa2 \n\n1 \n\n\n^loiTa \n\n\nIota \n\n\n:dk \n\n\nK \n\n\nk \n\n\nKairira \n\n\nKappa \n\n\nbA \n\n\n\\ \n\n\n1 \n\n\nAdfjL^Ba \n\n\nLambda \n\n\nDM \n\n\nH\' \n\n\nm \n\n\nMv \n\n\nMu \n\n\n;n \n\n\nV \n\n\nn \n\n\nNO \n\n\nNu \n\n\nH \n\n\nf \n\n\nX \n\n\nat \n\n\nXi \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nshort \n\n\n*0 fUKpOP \n\n\nOmikron \n\n\nIn \n\n\nTT \n\n\nP \n\n\nm \n\n\nPi \n\n\nIp \n\n\nP \n\n\nr \n\n\n\xe2\x80\xa2Pw \n\n\nKho \n\n\n6S \n\n\n0-9 \n\n\ns \n\n\nXl\'yfui \n\n\nSigma \n\n\n7T \n\n\nT \n\n\nt \n\n\nTav \n\n\nTau \n\n\nT \n\n\nV \n\n\nu \n\n\n"T^irlXov \n\n\nUpsllon \n\n\n* \n\n\n^ \n\n\nph \n\n\n^l \n\n\nPhi \n\n\nX \n\n\nX \n\n\neh \n\n\nXI \n\n\nChi \n\n\n*\xe2\x80\xa2 \n\n\n\'dr \n\n\nps \n\n\nW2 \n\n\nPsi \n\n\nn \n\n\n(O \n\n\nolong \n\n\n\'*I2fM\xe2\x82\xacya \n\n\nOmega. \n\n\n\n16 SOUNDS OF PAETICULAR LETTERS. [\xe2\x99\xa6 Z \n\nEemabk 1. Sigma at the end of a word takes the fonn s, e. g. treia-fiSs, in \nmost editions of the classics. This small s is also used in the middle of com- \npound words, if the first part of the compound ends with Sigma, though such \na usage is contrary to the authority of the manuscripts, e. g. irpos<p4pu or \nirpo(r<pep6Df Suyyej/^s or Svcyevfis. \n\nEem. 2. When a and t come together, both letters may be expressed by one \ncharacter, s-, Sti, or Stigma. \n\nEem. 3. Besides their use as alphabetic characters, e and v were originally \nused as mere marks of aspiration, the former for the spiritus asper {\xc2\xa7 6), for which \nin the earliest times H was also employed, the latter for the Digamma (\xc2\xa7 25) ; \nhence, as letters, they were called, in opposition to their use as aspirates, e \\pi\\6y \nand v\\pi\\6u, i. e. unaspirated. Omicron and Omega (small and large o) derive \ntheir name from their relative size. \n\nEem. 4. The principle on which most of the ivytters of the Greek alphabet \nare named, is entirely different from that adopted in this country and among \nthe European nations, at the present day. We name each letter by the sound \nIt represents, as a, Z>, c, adding a vowel to the consonants in order to vocalize \nthem. But among the Orientals, from whom the Greek alphabet was derived^ \nthe name was not determined by the sound of the letter. They gave their \nletters the name of some familiar object, the first sound or syllable of which \nwas the alphabetic character to be represented. For example, the Phoenicians \nand Hebrews called the first letter of the alphabet Aleph (Greek Alpha), which \nmeans an ox : now the first sound or syllable of Aleph is the character or \nelement to be i*epresented. The second letter was Beth (Greek Beta), a house, \nthe first sound of which is the character to be represented. The third is Gimel \n( Greek Gamma), a camel. This mode of jj^ming letters, undoubtedly originated \nfrom the custom of designating those letters by the picture of the object from \nwhich they derived the name, instead of by the characters now used. Thus \nAleph was represented by the picture of an ox, Beth by that of a house, etc. \n\n^ 2a. Sounds of particular Letters. \n\nThe sound of the letters is indicated by the Eoman characters opposite to \nthem. The following remarks on particular letters are all that is needed in \naddition : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nEemaek. The sounds given to the following letters are those more usually \nadopted in pronouncing the Greek in New England ; but the usage is not \nentirely uniform. \n\nA has the sound of a in fan, when it is followed by a consonant in the same \nsyllable, e. g. xo-^-^ds; the sound of a in fate, when it stands before a. single \nconsonant which is followed by two vowels, the first of which is e or i, e. g. \navaa-Toia-ecDs, crTpaTid>Tr]s ; also, when it forms a syllable by itself, or ends a \nsyllable not final, e. g. fiey-d-Xii], arpa-rSs] it has the sound of a in father, when \nit is followed by a single p, in the same syllable, and also when it ends a word ; \nbut a final in monosyllables has the sound of a in fate, e. g. Bdp-^arpos, ydp. \n\n\n\ni 2b.] BRIEF HISTORY OF THE ALPHABET. \\1 \n\n7, before 7, k, x\xc2\xbb ^^^ l\xc2\xbb ^^s the sound of ng in angle, or nasal 71 m ancle, e. g \n6,yyf\\oSy ang-gslos ; KKayyr}, clangor; \'Ayxia-qs, Anchises (Angchises) ; avjKoirr], \nsyncope ; \\dpvy^, larynx. 7 before vowels always has the hard sound, like g in \nget ; also before consonants, except 7, k, x> f > e. g. 7/70^. \n\n6 has the sound of short e in 7\xc2\xabe/, when it is followed by a consonant in the \ngame syllable, e. g. fi4y-as, fifT-d ; the sound of long e in me, when it ends a \nword or a syllable, or when it forms a syllable by itself, e. g. 7*, ^e-w, $a(Tt\\- \n\nf-fS. \' \n\nt\\ has the sound of e in me, e. g. ikovi]. \n\nh has the sound of th in thick, e. g. ^dyaros. \n\nI has the sound of i in mine, when it ends a word or syllable, or forms a \nsyllable by itself, e. g. i\\iri-(ri, 5ri, ireS-l-ov ; the sound of i in pin, when it is \nfollowed by a consonant in the same syllable, e. g. irpiV, Kiy-Svyos. \n\nK always has the hard sound of k, and was expressed in Latin by c, e. g. \nKiKiKia, Cilicia ; KfKpoxp, Cecrops ; KiKcpwy, Cicero. \n\nI, at the beginning of a word or syllable, has the sound of z, e. g. {eVos ; else- \nwhere, the sound of x, e. g. Sio^uw, irpS^iy, &ua^. \n\no has the sound of short in not, when it is followed by a consonant in the \nsame syllable, e. g. \\6y-os, Kv-pos ; the sound of long in go, when it ends a \nword or syllable, or forms a syllable by itself, e. g. r6, vn6y ^o-6s, ro^-o-njs. \n\ntr has the sharp sound of s in son ; except it stands before /x, in the middle \nof a word, or at the end of a word after tj or \xc2\xab, where it has the sound of z, \ne. g. <TKT]v{], voixifffia, yns, KdXws : before 1 it does not have the sound of sh, as in \nLatin, but retains its simple sound, e. g. ^Aala =A-si-a, not A-shi-a. \n\nT followed by ( has its simple sound, never the sound of sli, as in Latin, e. g. \nTaXarla = Galati-a, not Galashi-a ; Kptrlas =Kriti-as, not Krishi-<is ; Aiyvirrioi. \n\nV has the sound of u in tulip, e. g. rvxn j t>ut before p the sound of u in pure, \ne. g. TTvp, yf(pvpa. \n\nX has the hard sound of ch in chasm, e. g. raxvs. \n\nw has the sound of long o in note, e. g. &.yu. \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 2b. Brief history of the Alphabet . \n\n1. The Greeks derived most of their alphabet from the Phoenicians. Ac- \ncording to the common tradition, letters were brought into Greece by Cadmus, \na Phanician. The Phoenician alphabet, being nearly the same as the Hebrew, \', \nconsisted of 22 letters, the names of which are, Aleph, Beth, Gimel, Daleth, ! \nHe,(Vau]i Zain, Heth, Teth, Jod, Kaph, Lamed, Mim, Nun, Samech, Oin, Pe, \n(Tsadej ( Koph) Resch. Schin, Thau. Van. the 6th letter of the Phoenician \nalphabet, was rejected by the Greeks as an alphabetic character, and used only \nas the numeral sign for 6. Koph (Greek Koppa), the 19th letter of the Phoe- \nnician alphabet, was also rejected, because its sound so nearly resembled that \nof Kaph (Greek Kappa), and was used as the numeral sign for 100. Zain \nand Tsade were modifications of the same sound ; Tsade. like the Greek Zeta. \n\n2* \n\n\n\n18 ORGANS OF SPEECH. [} 3, \n\nrepresents the sound of both, and takes the place of Zain, becoming the 6th \nletter of the Greek alphabet, while Zain (Greek San, Sampi), was rejected as an \nalphabetic character, and used as a numerical sign for 900. Thus 19 letters of \nthe Phoenician alphabet were adopted by the Greeks, as alphabetic characters. \nThese are the first 19 letters of the present alphabet. To these the Greeks \nthemselves added the five last letters of the alphabet, viz., u, ^, Xj ^t w. This \nseems to be the most rational view of the formation of the Greek alphabet, \nthough somewhat different from the common legendary account, which repre- \nsents Cadmus as bringing only 16 letters into Greece, viz., a, P, y, S, e, i, k, A, \n\nfl, V, O, IT, p, a, T, V. \n\n2. The alphabet was not brought at once into its present complete form. \nThe old Attic alphabet contained but 21 letters. H was considered merely as \na breathing, and the place of r] and <w was supplied by e and o, and that of ;// \nand I by *5 and X2, e. g. AI0EP [alHp), EX0PON (ix^pwy), *2TXAI {^vxai), \nX5TN {^iu). The alphabet is said to have been completed in the time of the \nPersian war, by Simonides, who added E, Y, and n, and changed the breathing \nH, to the long vowel 97. The lonians first adopted the present full alphabet \nof 24 letters, and by them it was communicated to the Athenians. This full \nalphabet was first used in Attic inscriptions \'in the archonship of Euclides, \nB.C. 403, before this period only the old Attic alphabet is found in Attic \ninscriptions. \n\n3. The early Greeks used the capital letters exclusively, and left no spaces \nbetween the words, e. g. METAAETOTTONpinEXEIPno<f>02, i. e. ^uera 5e rov- \nTov eiTre Xeipi(ro<(>os. The cursive, or small character, was not introduced till \nvery late. A document has been found in Egypt written in the cursive char- \nacter, 104 B. c. But cursive writing was not in general use till long after that \ntime. It is first found in manuscripts in the eighth century. \n\n4. The early Greeks commonly wrote in the Oriental manner, i. e. from \nright to left, as may be seen in several inscriptions. Other inscriptions, how- \never, of equal antiquity, are written from left to right, proving that both modes \nwere in use. A third method was from left to right and right to left alternate- \nly. This was called Pova-TpocpTjdSv^ because it resembled the tm-ning about of \n\n.oxen in ploughing. Solon\'s laws were written in this way. But in the time of \nHerodotus, the Greeks wrote only from left to right. \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 3. Organs of Sp eech. \n\n1. The organs of speech, used in forming or articulating \nwords, are the palate, the tlii-oat, the tongue, and the hps. \n\n2. The sounds wliich are emitted almost ^vithout an}^ action \nof the tluoat, tongue, and hps, and \\^\'\'liicli proceed in the freest \nmanner from the breast, are called Vowels; the rest, Conso- \nnants. \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 4.] VOWELS. 19 \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 4. Vowels . \n\n1. The Greek has seven vowels, a, t, v, which may be \nlong or short, \xe2\x82\xac and o, which are always short, rj and cd \nwhich are always long. The character (") over one of the \nvowels a, i, v, shows that the vowel is short ; (") that it is \nlong ; (") that it may be either long or short, e. g. a, a, d. \n\nRemarf 1 a, I, and v are called the principal vowels, because they denote \nthe principal sounds ; the other vowels are called subordinate, because their \nsounds are the intermediates of the principal sounds. Thus, the sound of 6 is \nintermediate between a and t, the sound of o is intermediate between a and v ; \n7] is produced by lengthening 6 or o, a> by lengthening o. The relation of these \nvowels may be illustrated by the following diagram : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nA \n\n\n\n\n2. When two vowels are so combined as to form but \none sound, the sound so produced is called a diphthong. \nWhen both the vowels are sounded, the diphthong is called \nproper ; when only one, improper. \n\n3. The Greek diphthongs originate from the union of the \nvowels a, e, o, v, t), cj, with the vowels c and v, thus : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\no -f- 1 = oi, pronounced like ai in aisle, e. g. a3f|, \n\na -{\xe2\x96\xa0 V =^ av, " " au in laud, " j/oCs, \n\ne -\\- I = fly " " ei in sleight, " 5eii/6s, \n\n\n\nri + \n\n\n\n{\xe2\x96\xa0 " " CM in feudal, \xc2\xbb \n\n\n\ne7rA.eu<ra, rju^oj/, \n\n\n\no -\\- t =^ oiy " " oi in oil, " koiv6s, \no -{- V = ovj *\' " ou in sound, " ovpau6sj \nV -\\- I = vif " " whi in ivhine, " vlos, \n\xc2\xab -j- " = *"\'> (o^^ylo^ic,) " " ou in sound, " 0}vr6s ; also the im- \nproper diphthongs, a, 77, \xc2\xab (i. e. o -}- i, tj -)- j, <\xc2\xbb -f- 1) ; " al<rxp^, Kepcf, rfj, r^. \n\nRem. 2. The pronunciation of the diphtliongs a, 77, q> is the same as that of \nthe simple vowels d, 17, \xc2\xab, though the ancient Greeks probably gave the i a \nslight sound after the other vowel. \n\nRem. 3. With capital letters, the Iota subscript of (jt, ri, ai, is placed in a \nline witli the vowels, but is not pronounced, c. g. TXil KAAni=Ty koA.^, t^ \nAiSjfy but ^5p. \n\n\n\n20 VOWELS. [^ 4. \n\nEem. 4. The Iota subscript, which in the most flourishing period of the \nGreek language was always pronounced, at length became a silent letter, and \nwas either omitted in writing, or was written under the vowel to which it \nbelonged. It was first written under the vowel in the thirteenth century. \n\nEem. 5. The following examples will show how the Eomans sounded the \ndiphthongs : ai is expressed by the diphthong ae, et by I and c, oi by oe, ovhju] \nV was generally expressed by y, e. g. \n\n*a7S/3os, Phaedrus ; Edpos, Eurus ; 0/JOKey, Thraces ; \n\nTAavKos, Glaucus ; \'Boiaria, Bceotia ; \xc2\xaepfj<Ta\'a, Thressa ; \n\nNelXos, Nilus ; Movffa, Musa ; rpayecSSs, tragoedus ; \n\nAvKeTov, Lyceum; EiKel^via, Ilithyia; Kvpos, Cyrus. \n\nIn words adopted later, the Eomans exprei^ed co by o, as cpS-f], ode. \n\nEem. 6. When two vowels, which would regularly form a diphthong, are tc \nbe pronounced separately, it is indicated by two points, called Diaeresis, placet \nover the second vowel (t, u), e. g. alS6i, for al5o7, oi\'s, &i>irj/os. If the acute \naccent is on the t or v, it is placed between the points ; if the circumflex, over \nthem, as aiSrjs, /cAei\'Si, irpats. \n\nEem. 7. The pronunciation given under \xc2\xa7 2a, as well as that given to the \ndiphthongs above, is the one more generally adopted in New England. The \noriginal pronunciarlcoi of the Greek is lost. It is, therefore, the commo* cus- \ntom for scholars (in each country) to pronounce it according to the analogy of \ntheir own language. This is the method proposed by Erasmus in the sixteenth \ncentury, and is generally adopted in Europe at the present day. The pronun- \nciation defended by Eeuchlin \' in the same century, corresponds nearly with \nthe modern Greek. \n\n^ For the benefit of those who may wish to compare the two modes, the fol- \nlowing explanation of the Eeuchlinian is extracted from the Greek Grammar \nof Sophocles: "A is pronoimced like a m. father, far. /3, 7, 5, like h,g hard, \nd; in later times, like Eomaic )8, 7, 5. Before ac, 7, x> l> 7 had the soimd of \nng in hang, e, like Eomaic e, or Italian e. (, like z, but stronger, tj, like French \n^, as in f^te. &, like th in thin, ether, saith. j, like i in machine, k, like k\\ \nA, /i, like I, m, respectively, j/, like n. At the end of a word it was often pro- \nnounced and written as if it were a part of the next word. |, in the Attic \ndialect, like |s 5 in the other dialects, like ks. In later times, the sound ks pre- \nvailed. 0, like Eomaic 0, or Italian 0. ir, like p. p, like r. At the begin- \nning of a word it was rolled; when it was doubled, only the second one was \nrolled. It was rolled, also, after 3-, </>, x* <^\', like s in soft, past. Before /t, it \nwas, in later times, sounded like ^, and even changed into ^ in writing ; as \nZfxvpva, for "X/jLvpua, in an inscription, t, like t in tell, strong, v, like French u. \n<p, \\ikcf, but stronger. x> ^^^^ Eomaic x\xc2\xbb German ch, or Spanish j (x). j|^, in \nthe Attic dialect, like ^s ; in the other dialects, like iry. In later times, the \nsound ITS prevailed, w, like in note, nearly. When a consonant was doubfed \nin writing, it was doubled also in pronunciation. During the most flourishing \nperiod of the language, both the vowels of a diphthong were distinctly heard \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 5.] CONSONANTS. 21 \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 5. Consonants. \n\n1. The consonants are divided, first, according to the dif- \nferent organs of speech, by which they are formed, into \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nPalatals, y /c \'^(^ \nLinguals, B r^ v\\ p a, \nLabials, /8 tt </> /l6. \n\nRemark 1. The consonants, which are produced by the same organ of \nspeech, are called cognate consonants ; thus y, k, x \'-^^ cognate consonants. \n\n2. Consonants are divided again, according to the greater \nor the less influence of the organs of speech in their forma- \ntion, into breathings, liquids, and mutes. \n\n(a) The Breathings form a kind of transition from the \nvowels to the consonants. There are three breath- \nings : the lingual <t; the Spiritus Asper (\'), correspond- \ning to our /t (\xc2\xa7 6) ; and the labial F (Digamma) ; on \nthe last, see the remarks upon the Dialects. \n\n(b) The Liquids, \\ /jl v p, are so called, because they easily \ncoalesce with the other consonants. \n\nRem. 2. The Breathings and Liquids are also included under the conimo:i \nname of semivowels, forming a kind of transition to the full vowels. \n\n\n\nDtrring the brazen age, and probably during the latter part of the silver age. \nthe diphthongs cu, 6i, ou, had each the power of a single vowel, cu, like ai in \naisle; in later times, like 17, or French i ; during the latter part of the brazen \nage, like e. 01/, like ou in our, house; in later times, like ay, af. \xc2\xab<, like ei in \nfreight^ nearly ; in later times, like 1. During the silver and brazen ages, \xe2\x82\xac was \noften prefixed to t long, merely to mark its quantity; as Kf^eivta, ruacu, ranrjaau. \nAnd when quantity began to be disregarded, even short i was represented by \n\xc2\xab* ; as EiciScopo;, EiVojcpaTrjs, yvfi.ycurtiapx\'ho\'o-^- <i\'\xc2\xbb like eh-oo rapidly pro- \nnounced ; in later times, like ey, ef. ot, like oi in oil, nearly, ov, like oh-oo \nrapidly pronounced ; in later times, like 00 in moon, or like French ou, Italian \xc2\xab. \nWhen the Boeotians used ov for u, they pronounced it long or short, according \nas the original v was long or short ; thiw, in oGSwp, oovvy it was short, like 00 in \nhooh ; in oCAt?, kaovXia, long, like 00 in moon, w, like wi in twist ; ui, like whi in \nwhip; in later times, like v. As to the diphthongs a, r), <^, du, rju, a>u, tney \ndiffered from ai, \xe2\x82\xaci, oi, au, cu, ov only in the prolongation of the first vowel. \nIn later times, qi, p, tp were pronormced lik\xc2\xab d, tj, w, respectively." \xe2\x80\x94 Tb. \n\n\n\n22 \n\n\n\nBREATHINGS. \n\n\n\n[\xe2\x99\xa6\xc2\xab. \n\n\n\n(c) The Mutes are formed by the strongest exertion of the \norgans of speech ; they are, yS73^/c7rT</)%. \n\n3. The Mutes are divided, \n\n(a) According to the organ of speech used in pronouncing \nthem, into three Palatals, three Linguals, and three \nLabials ; \n\n(b) According to their names, .nto tijree Kappa, three \nTau, and three Pi-mutes ; \n\n(c) According to the force of articulation, into three smooth, \nthree medial, and three rough Mutes. \n\nRem. 3. Hence each of the nine mutes may be considered in a threefold \npoint of view, e. g. 7 may be called a palatal, a kappa-mute, or a medial, ac- \ncording as we wish to bring into view the organ by which it is pronounced, its \nname, or the force of articulation, a medial mute requiring less force to articu- \nlate it than a rough mute. \n\n\n\n\n\nSMOOTH. \n\n\nMEDIAL. \n\n\nROUGH. \n\n\n\n\nPalatals \n\n\nK \n\n\ny \n\n\nX \n\n\nKappa-mutes \nTan -mutes \n\n\nLinguals \n\n\nT \n\n\n8 \n\n\n& \n\n\nLabials \n\n\nTT \n\n\niS \n\n\n</> \n\n\nPi-mutes \n\n\n\nRem. 4. The consonants, which are produced by the same effort of the \norgans, are called coordinate, e. g. the smooth mutes, k, it, t, are coordinate. \n\n4. From the coalescence of the Mutes with the Breath- \ning cr, three double consonants originate, \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n\xc2\xab|/ from TTtr jSo* <p(r, as rvypw {ira-), x\xc2\xb0-^^ (j^o"), KaT7j\\i;|/ (^o")? \n\nI from Kor ya X""? ^^ K6pa^ {\'^(^)i Ae|&) (yo\'), oyv^ {x\'^)> \n\n^ is not, like \\|/ and ^, to be regarded as a sound compounded of two con- \nsonants, but as a soft hissing sound, to be pronounced like a soft \xc2\xab\xe2\x80\xa2 \nOnly in the adverbs in ^e, is ^ to be considered as composed of <r5, e. g. \n. *ASrr}vaC\xe2\x82\xac instead of \'Ai^yosSe; also, fivCvJ^ {close), for ^vcrd-rju (from fivveoo, \nto stop, Perf. fi^fiva-fj-aL). It may be regarded, perhaps, as a transposition \nof sounds, as when the ^olic and Doric dialects use, in the middle of \na word, cS instead of ^, e. g. fieXlaSerai for /xeA^^erai. \n\n\xc2\xa7 6. Breathings. \n1. Every word beginning with a vowel has a smooth or \na rough Breathing; the former (Spiritus Lenis) is indi- \n\n\n\nW 7, 8] HIATUS. 23 \n\ncated by the mark ( \' ) ; the latter (Spiritus Asper) by the j \nmark ( \' ). The rough breathing answers to the English 1 \nand Latin A, e. g. laropia, Jiistoria^ history. The smooth \\ \nbreathing is connected with every vowel which has not the \' \nrough ; but the smooth has no influence on the pronuncia- \ntion, e. g. ^AiroWcoVi Apollo. \n\nRemark 1. With diphthongs, the breathing is placed over the second vowel, \ne. g. oTos, 6v3t5s, avriKa. But when the improper diphthongs, a, 77, a>, are capital \nletters, the breathing is placed over the first vowel, as these three diphthongs \nare regarded, to a certain extent, as simple vowels, e. g. "AxStjs (^5rjs) ; \'^Hi,\'\'Xlt \n\nRem. 2. Originally, the Greeks had no mark for the smooth breathing. The \nrough breathing was at first denoted by E or H. But when H came to be used \nas a vowel, Aristophanes of Byzantium, about 200 years b. c, divided it into \ntwo characters I- and i, the former as the sign of the rough breathing, the \nlatter of the smooth. Later, these became ( "") and ( ), and at last { * ) and ( \' ). \n\nRem. 3. The liquid p at the beginning of words has the rough breathing,* \ne. g. ^dfiSos. When two p\'s come together, the first has the smooth breathing, \nthe last the rough, e. g. nu/3^os, Pyrrhus ; but some editors omit both breath- \nings, e. g. Uvppos. \n\nRem. 4. At the beginning of a word, v always has the rough breathing, 1 \nexcept in the ^olic dialect. \n\n\n\nCHANGES OF LETTERS. \n\n\xc2\xa7 7. General RemarJc. \n\nBoth the vowels and consonants are subject to a variety of \nchanges. These changes result from the tendency of the \nlanguage to euphony, from their grammatical significance, and \nfrom the difference of dialects. The last will be considered \nin treating of the Dialects. \n\n\n\nI. Changes of the Vowels. \n\nk 8. Hiatus. \n\nThe concurrence of two vowels in two successive sylla- \nbles or words, occasions a harshness in the pronunciation. \n\n\n\n24 EUPHONIC CONTRACTION OF VOWELS. [f 9. \n\ncalled Hiatus. This is avoided by Contraction, Crasis, \nSynizesis, and Elision. \n\nEemaek 1. The poets, particularly the Attic, were decidedly averse to the \nHiatus of two vowels in two successive words ; among the prose-writers, the \norators sought most carefully to avoid it. \n\nRem. 2. In the Iambuses of the tragic poets, the Hiatus is allowed in the \ninterrogative rl; what? e.g. Tt odv ,- ri elires ,- among the comic poets, its use is \nmostly confined to ri, \'6ri, ire pi, &, e.g. on is, on ovxi, Tepl vfiwy, also in ovSe \n(fx-nSe) els (4V), ne unus quidem, to distinguish it from ovdeis, nullus. In addition \nto its use in the Iambic measure, the Hiatus is found frequently, even in the \nTragedians, who endeavored to avoid it when possible ; still, it is mostly limited \nto special cases ; for example, it occurs with interjections and imperatives, e. g. \nS>,vai, &ua (up!), iS^t, as r^t, l[^i fioi Traidv, Soph. Ph. 832; oAA.\' &va, cf iSpd \nva>y, Aj. 194. On the Hiatus ia the Epic dialect, see \xc2\xa7 200. \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 9. A. Contraction of Vowels. \n\nContraction is the union of two successive vowels in the \nsame word into one long syllable. These contractions arise \neither from the natural coalescence of two successive vowels, \nin accordance with the laws of euphony, or from grammatical \nprinciples. The first kind of contractions is called euphonic, \nthe latter, grammatical. In the Common language, the follow- \ning contractions occur : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n\n\nI. Euphonic Contractions. \n\n\n\n(a) a -j- o = d as \xe2\x80\xa2 oreAao = a^Ka. \ne -f. e = et *\' ^ix^^ = <{>i\\ei (Corap. No. U.) \ni -f~ * =^ * " ""(^pra = TTopri \n\n-{- = ov *\' v6os = vovs \n\n(b) o -f- e 7^ . " rZ/xae = ri/ttd \na -f- rj > " Tifidrjre = n/xan \n\n= a " vnoai" = v^do \n\n\n\na -\\- I = <f. " yrtpai = yflpa. \n\n\n\n\n\nI S \'t f \'I 4 \n\na -f- } " nfxdofxev = nyLup-cv \n\no -J- \'\xc2\xab\' ^ n/jLau/JLev = nfiwfiev \n\no -f- et ) " n/jLciecs = nfi5.s \n\na -T P } * Tifiarjs = Ti/i(ys \n\na -\\- 01 = y " npdoLfxi = n/jLc^/xi \n\na -{- ov = 0) " rifidov = nfxS) \n\n\n\n(c) \xe2\x82\xac 4- a = ij " Tc/xea = Teix\xc2\xbb? (Comp. No. II.) \n\nt -|- t = 6i " Tiix^\'i = reix^t \n\n\xe2\x82\xac -f- = OU " <plK4ofl^V = (pl\\OVljL\xe2\x82\xacV \n\ne -f- \xc2\xab {o}) = 0) (y) " (piXeo} = <pi\\u, oarita = 6ffr4 \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 9.] GRAMMATICAL CONTRACTIONS. 25 \n\n\n\ne +\xc2\xab \n\n\n= et \n\n\nas: \n\n\n(}>i\\4eis = <pi\\eis \n\n\n-+v \n\n\n= 1? \n\n\n(( \n\n\n(piXeris = (pi\\T)S \n\n\ne -\\- 01 \n\n\n= 01 \n\n\n(C \n\n\n<pi\\4ois = (piXois \n\n\ne -j- ou \n\n\n= ow \n\n\n(( \n\n\n<pi\\4ov = <pi\\ov \n\n\n(d) 77 + 6 \n\n\n= "n \n\n\n(( \n\n\nuAi^eerca = vKricrffa \n\n\nr/4-t \n\n\n= V \n\n\nu \n\n\nQpTjiaaa = Qpnaca \n\n\n7? +\xe2\x82\xact \n\n\n= v \n\n\n(C \n\n\nTlfi\'flClS = rifjL\'^5 \n\n\n(e) * + a \n\n\n\n\n(( \n\n\nvSprias = irdprls \n\n\n* +e \n\n\n= I \n\n\nC( \n\n\nTrSpries = irSpris \n\n\n(f)o+\xc2\xab \n\n\n= ft) \n\n\nu \n\n\ncu56a = cuSu (Comp. No. 11.) \n\n\no+e \n\n\n= 01/ \n\n\n(( \n\n\nfiia-^oe = /xia^ov \n\n\n+r/ \n\n\n= (O \n\n\n(C \n\n\nfiia^Srjre = fiicr^oiTe \n\n\no+t \n\n\n= 01 \n\n\n(( \n\n\nou56i = al5o7 \n\n\nN -f~ \'\xc2\xab\' (^) \n\n\n= ft) (ft)) \n\n\n(( \n\n\nfjLicr^Sci) = jLttcTi^-a), TrX6(i} = ttA.^ \n\n\nVo -(- at \n\n\n= at \n\n\n(( \n\n\na,TrX6ai = airXai \n\n\n-}- \xe2\x82\xact \n\n\n\n\nC( \n\n\nfiia^od = ixi(r^o7 (Comp. Rem. 2.; \n\n\n-\\-V \n\n\n= 01 \n\n\n(( \n\n\nfj.icr^6Ti = fxia^oT * \n\n\n\xc2\xbbo -|- ot \n\n\n\n\n(( \n\n\nfiKX^doLfjii ^= (jLi(r^o7ui \n\n\nvo -f- ou \n\n\n= ov \n\n\n(( \n\n\nIJLia^Sovcri = fj.i(T^ov(Ti \n\n\n(g) I\' H- a \n\n\n\n\n(( \n\n\nix^vas = Ix^tjs \n\n\nv+e \n\n\n= V \n\n\n(( \n\n\nIx^ei = ix^vs \n\n\nu H-r? \n\n\n\n\nC( \n\n\n5eiKvvT]Tat = Set/cfOrat (rarely) \n\n\n(h)\xc2\xab + a \n\n\n= 0) \n\n\nu \n\n\n^paja = \xc2\xa5ip(t) (only in Ace. of soEie Sub. of \n\n\na> + I \n\n\n= <Sf) \n\n\nu \n\n\n\\uii(TTos = \\<f(TTos. [3d Dec. \n\n\n\nRemark 1. The above contractions take place in accordance with the fol- \nlowing principles: (1) Both vowels are retained and form a diphthong, e. g. \nrelx^\'i = Tclx^i, atB6\'i =^ cuho7. (2) Both vowels coalesce into a cognate long \nvowel or diphthong, e. g. Tt/xao/xe*/ = rifiufxev, alSoa = cuSw. (3) A short vowel \nis absorbed by a diphthong or long vowel preceding or following it ; e. g. \n*<^i\\\xe2\x82\xacft) = (piKw, <pi\\eov = <pi\\ov, vK-fjeffcra = vKrjarcra. (4) The short vowels, o, t, \nV, absorb the following vowel and become long ; e. g. riuae = rlfidy Ix^vas = \ntX>^vs. (5) A short vowel coalesces with the first vowel of a diphthong, ac- \ncording to the preceding principles ; when the second vowel is t, it is subscriljed \nwith o, Tj, a>, but if it is any other vowel it is dropped ; e. g. rifidris \xe2\x80\x94 rifias, \nTi^doifii = Tiix(fiii = Tifidov = Tt/icD, Tinrreai = ti^ttttj. \n\nn. Grammatical Contractions. \n\n(a) e -f- \xc2\xab = i?* particularly in the third Dec., e. g. rpi^pee = rpiiipT), yevet \n\n= yivT], \n\n(b) 6 -f- a = d in the second Dec, e. g. otrr^a = cxtto., xP^^^\xc2\xb0- = XP"** \n\n(PI.), and elsewhere, if a vowel precedes, e. g. IlfpiKke-ea =*\xc2\xbb \nIlept/cAed, K\\4-fa = /cXed, vyi-ea = vyia ; in the Acc. PL \nFem. of Adjectives in -eoy, -eo, -eov, e. g. xp^<^4-as = xp^f"? ; \nfinally, in the Pern, of Adjectives in -eos, -4a, -eov, when \nthese endings are preceded by a vowel or p, e. g. epe-eoy, \n\xe2\x82\xac-6a, 4-\xe2\x82\xac0t/ = epeoDs, ipea, ipeovyj apyvpeos, 4ay eoy = ovs, \na, ovv. \n\n3 \n\n\n\n26 CRASIS. [^ 10 \n\n\xc2\xab -|- a = 77 in tiie !Fem. Sing, of adjectives in -eo5, not preceded by st \nvowel or p ; e. g. xputreo = XP^^V> xpy<reos = XP^^V^\' \n\n\xe2\x82\xac -f- a = \xe2\x82\xaci in Accusatives PL in eas of third Dec, e. g. ara<pe-as = <ra \n(peis ; so ir6Xeis, irTjxeis, eyxeAets, from TrSXeas, etc. \n{1) -\\- a = d in Adjectives in 605^ or), oov., e.g. ottaJ-o = arrXa. \n\n-\\- 7} = 71 in Adjectives in 60s, otj, 6ov, e. g. airXS-rj = ottA^. \n\n-{- a = 01/ in Accusative PL of fiovs ; so also fiei^oas = /itei^oy^, anrf \nthe like. \n\nEem. 2. The contraction of oet into ou is found only in the Inf. Act. of \nferbs in Sw, and is accounted for from the fact that the Inf. originally ended in \nev, not in eiv (consequently, not fiia^6^iv = ixkt^ovv, but ixur^6ev = fiic^ovv), \nand in adjectives in Seis, e. g. \'07r<Jets = ^O-kovs, in which the root ends in oerr, \nand consequently the i does not belong to the root. On the accentuation of \ncontract forms, see \xc2\xa7 30. \n\nRem. 3. The Tragic poets sometimes neglect the contractions on account \nof the measure, yet only in the lyric and anapestic passages, not written in the \npure Attic dialect, e. g. /coAeco, Aesch. Ag. 147 ; rpoixiav. Prom. 542 5 yeUeoSf \nSept. 936; iVeo, Soph. OC. 182; eipei, Trach, 114. \n\nRem. 4. Sometisses the grammatical importance of the ending, or the form \nof the nominative, prevents the usual contraction, especially if the ending \nwould thereby become doubtful. \n\n\xc2\xa7 10. B. Crasis. \n\n1. Crasis (Kpaai^) is the coalescence of the final and \ninitial vowels of two successive words into one long sylla- \nble, e. g. TO 6voiJLa=rovvo/jba, to e7ro9=Toi\'7ro?. \n\nRemark 1. The mark of Crasis is the same as that of the Spiritus \nLenis ( \' ), and is named Coronis. It is placed over the vowel or diphthong \nformed by Crasis, but is omitted when the word begins \xe2\x96\xa0with a vowel or diph- \nthong so formed, because it would then coincide with the Spiritus Lenis, e. g. \nTct aya^d = raya^d ; h &v = av, & 6.v^payire = Hv^pwir^. On the accentuation, \nsee \xc2\xa7 31, II ; on the change of the smooth Mute into the rough before the \nSpiritus Asper, as rh v5(op = ^ovSwpf see 4 below, and \xc2\xa7 17, Rem. 3. \n\n2. Crasis is found only with closely connected words, the first \nof which is unimportant; hence it most frequently occurs, (a) \nwith the article, e. g. 6 av\'^p = avT^p, rov avSpos = ravSpos ; \xe2\x80\x94 (b) \nfrequently with Kat and the interjection w, e. g. /cat ape-r^ = Kopcrq, \nw av^poiTTi = oiv-^pooTTC, w dyo^e = oiya^i, w avcx^ = wva^ ; \xe2\x80\x94 (c) some- \nwhat often in eyw with oTSa and oT/xat, e. g. ey(S8a, ryw/Aai; \xe2\x80\x94 \n(d) less often with the neuter relative o and a, as o eyw, a eyw = \novyw, dy(6; with rot, ftevrot, ovrot, particularly in comiection \n\n\n\nMl.) MOST COMMON INSTANCES OF CRASIS. 27 \n\nwith av, apa, e. g. rav (seldom in prose), fievrav; rapa and ovrapa \n(poetic) ; but seldom with tt/do, e. g. irpovpyov for Trpo ^ou ; fre- \nquently in composition with the augment e, as irpovSioKa. \n\n3. As the second word is the most important, it has properly \na greater influence on the form of the Crasis, than the first ; on \nthis principle it is to be explained, that the Iota subscript is \nused only when the t belongs to the last of the two vowels, \ne. g. ^at etra = Kara, eyw oT8a = eyw5a ; on the contrary, koI en-ct- \nTtt = KOTTCLTa ; ai ayaJ^aC = dya^ot, tw o;)(Xa) = Toj;(A.a). \n\n4. When Crasis occurs with the article, and an a follows, the \nvowels of the article \xe2\x80\x94 even ov and m \xe2\x80\x94 -are combined with the \nfollowing a into a long a, and, if the article is aspirated, the \naspirate is transferred to the long a, e. g. 6 avrip = dnjp, ol avSpts \n= aj/8pe9, TO aXq^is = rdXry^c?, to, oAAa = raXXa, tov avSpo^ = ravSpos, \nTu) avBpC = ravSpC ; also, TOV avTOv = tovtov, t<3 avrul = ravrcp. \n\nRem. 2. Also the forms of the article ending in o, o, ov, w, ip, o<, ai, among \nthe Attic poets, combine with the first vowel of ertpos (Doric direpos), and \nform long o ; when the second word has the aspirate, as here, the preceding \nsmooth mute must be changed into the cognate rough; see also \xc2\xa7 17, Rem. 3 \ne. g.: \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nTck erepo = ^&T\xe2\x82\xacpa 6 ercpos = arepos rod krepov = ^arepov \n\nT(f krepo) = ^arepcf) oi erepoi = arepoi cu trepai = S.T\xe2\x82\xacpcu \n\n5. In Crasis, <u of the particle Kal coalesces with the follow- \ning vowel, the a being sometimes retained and sometimes \nabsorbed, e. g. koX iKiXvos = KaKctvos, koI av = Kavy koI cv = KOLv, KoX \niyo) = Kayco [xat el = Kei, kol ets = /ceis, poetic], koI -^XS^ov = ktJXSov \n[moI ov = KOVj KOL \xe2\x82\xacvSaifio)v = KevBouix(i)Vj poetic]. \n\n$ 11. Summary of the most co\'tnmon instances of \n\nCrasis. \n\n(a) The following cases conform to the rules of contractioif \ngiven in \xc2\xa7 9 : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\no-j-a=d; o-f-\xe2\x82\xac = a; a-\\-o = oi\\ o-f-o = <w; \n\no -\\- e = OV] o-f-t=ot; \'7-i"\xe2\x82\xac = \'7j a -{- a = ot. \n\n(b) The following instances belong to Crasis only : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n-(- u = ou as: rb S5a>p = ^nijSwp (\xc2\xa7 17, Rem. 3.) \no -\\- av = av " rh avr6 = ravr6 \n\xe2\x80\xa2 \xe2\x96\xa0+- Oi = ^ \xe2\x96\xa0\'" h cdriov = T^riov \n\n\n\n-h oi \n\n\n= V \n\n\nas \n\n\n4-97 \n\n\n= n \n\n\nu \n\n\n\xc2\xab + 6 \n\n\n= CO \n\n\nu \n\n\n\xc2\xab 4" \n\n\n= w \n\n\n(( \n\n\n01 -\\- a \n\n\n= a \n\n\nu \n\n\n01 -{- e \n\n\n= ov \n\n\n<( \n\n\nov-{- \xe2\x82\xac \n\n\n== ov \n\n\nu \n\n\nov -\\- \n\n\n= ov \n\n\n(( \n\n\nov -\\- V \n\n\n= ov \n\n\nC( \n\n\n7] +7] \n\n\n= v \n\n\na \n\n\na) -\\- 01 \n\n\n= 4? \n\n\n(( \n\n\nou + 1? \n\n\n= \xe2\x80\xa2)7 \n\n\n(( \n\n\nov -f- ov \n\n\n:= OU \n\n\n(C \n\n\nat 4" f * \n\n\n= 9 \n\n\n(C \n\n\n\n28 SYNIZESIS. ELISION. [^ 12, 13. \n\n6 olvos = ^vos \n\nrh Tjn^Tepou = ^rf/j-erepov {\xc2\xa7 17, Rem. 3.) \n\nfi4uroi. &,y = /xevT&v \n\n<roi icTTiv = (ToZcTTiVy fwi eS(J/c\xe2\x82\xact = fiov56K\xe2\x82\xaci (both poetic, \n\nirov i(TTiv = iroZariv \n\nTov hvofxmos = rovuSfxaros \n\nrod liSaTos = ^oUSaros (\xc2\xa717, Rem. 3.) \n\nTTJ vH\'^p\'f = ^fiepcf, (^ 17, Rem. 3.) \n\niy(i} olSa = iy^da \n\nrod rjfieTepov = ^fxerepov, poetic. (\xc2\xa717, Rem. 3.) \n\nrod ovpavov = rovpavov \n\nKoi etra = K^ra \n\n(c) Here belong the examples given under \xc2\xa7 10, 4 and 5. \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 12. C. Synizesis. \n\n1. Synizesis is the contraction in pronunciation of two \nvowels into one syllable, e. g. when fir) ov is pronounced as \na monosyllable. It can occur only among the poets,^ but \nmay have been used in the common colloquial language. \n\nRemaek. The difference between Contraction and Synizesis is, that in the \nordinary Contraction and also in Crasis, the contraction is made in writing, \ne. g. <^t\\\xc2\xab from <piX4<i), rovpavov from rov ovpavov ; but in Synizesis, it is made \nonly in the pronunciation, both vowels or diphthongs being WTitten out in fall. \n\n2. In the Attic poets, Synizesis occurs almost exclusively \nbetween two words, viz., with liru, % 5> M^ followed by \xe2\x82\xacl, ov, a, \noLy e. g. cTret ov, rj ovSei? (dissyllable), /x^ o^ (monosyllable), /a^ \naAAoi, eyo) ov (dissyllable), and eyw \xe2\x82\xaci//,t S. Ph. 577 ; also, in a \nfew single words and forms, e. g. ^eot (=^ot, monosyllable), \ncwpttKa (=a)paKa, trissyllable), dvewy/xeVos ( = dvavy/xo/o?, four sylla- \nbles), particularly in the Ionic- Attic Genitive -ews, as Oyja-iui^ \n(dissyllable). On Synizesis in Homer, see \xc2\xa7 236. \n\n\xc2\xa7 13. D. Elision. \n\n1. Elision is the omission of a short final vowel before \nthe initial vowel of the following word. It occurs also Id \ncompounds, but the apostrophe is then omitted. \n\n\n\n4 14.] USE OF ELISION IN THE POETS. 29 \n\nRemark 1. The mark of Elision is tne same as mat of the Spiritus Lenis, \nand is called apostrophe, as toOt\' earny, yivon &v. \n\nRem. 2. Elision differs from Crasis in that the former elides the vowel, \nwhile the latter lengthens it, e. g. a\\A\' &y\xe2\x82\xac (Elision), to. ^AAa = toAAo (Crasis). \nThis distinction, however, does not hold, when the second word begins with a \nlong vowel or diphthong, e. g. rh axn6 = ravrS. \n\n2. In the prose writers, Elision is confined mainly to the \nfollowing cases, where it often occurs : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) In prepositions which end in a vowel, except irepl and irph\', also fiexpi \nand &xph used as prepositions, but rarely in eVe/co, e. g. 51 oIkou, ctt\' oiKov, but \nnepl oXkov, irph oXkov. Elision is regular in composition, except with irepi, iTp6, \nand sometimes a.fi(pl, e, g. ov6A^e?i(/, but irepiop^yj \n\n(b) In conjunctions and adverbs, dAAc\xc2\xa3, &pa, ^pa, aixa, e?To, eTreiTo, /j-aKa, \nfxiXicra, rdxa, and in many other adverbs ending in a before liy ; also in tlie \nfollowing adverbs and conjunctions, \'iva, ye, re, 5\xe2\x82\xac, ouSe, jUT/5e, warty &re (noi \n3Ti), TTore (with the compounds, as oihrorc), r6r\xe2\x82\xac, \xe2\x82\xactj, ovk4ti, /tTjAceVi} e. g. oAA* \navroSy ap oZv, fidKuTT ii/] \n\n(c) In forms of pronouns in a, o, e, as raDro, roiavra, oAAa, riya ; irdrepa \nmore rare ; tovto, ai/rS, i/xc, tre, era (never inT<^, to) ; also in nouns and adjectives \nof the second and third declensions, ending in o, as a/iiapr^^/xoTa, etc. ; &pi<TTa, \netc. ; ip/ya-i e. g. raOr\' axni, vdvr* aya^dy xP^IJ^oa ils <pepei ; \n\n(d) In <pr]/xiy 6Wa, ola^ay and generally in verbal forms in /**, ai, i,\'a, \xc2\xab, o, e. g. \n(pijfi iy(t)y ol5\' &y5pa, i\\4ycT* &y, ^rvirrovr &yy yeyon\'\' &v ; of the forms which \nadmit the y Paragogic (^ 15), in prose, only ia-ri often suffers elision ; \n\n(e) In certain familiar phrases, as vt) aC e^rj. \n\nRem. 3. The above elisions are most frequent in the orators, particularly \nIsocrates, much more seldom in the historians. \n\nRem. 4. A smooth mute before an aspirate is changed into the correspond- \ning rough, as rrdy^" oaa. \n\nRem. 5. A vowel, followed by a punctuation-mark, cannot be elided. Hence, \nin words closely connected, as j/^Af e<^, the comma is omitted, for in such cases, \nwithout doubt, the ancients pronounced the words in quick succession. On \naccent in Elision, see \xc2\xa7 31, III. \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 14. Use of Elision in the Poets* \n\n1. The use of Elision in poetry is very frequent, and much more extended \nthan in prose ; yet the following points are to be noted : A word ending in v is \nnever elided ; nor o, t, o in a monosyllable ; hence the article t6, and the pro- \nnouns r\\ and Tt, are not elided ; and vepi in no case, \xe2\x80\x94 at least among the Attic \npoets, \xe2\x80\x94 nor ort, fi^xfiiy i-xph nor substantive adverbs of place ending in ^i \n[o^i excepted), and very rarely the Optative ending in ete. \n\n2. The Elision of the i in the Dat. of the third Dec, particularly in the \nBing., is very rare in the Attic poets, and is even doubted by many. \n\n3. The verbal endings, ncuy rot, aSfaiy which are short in respect to the \n\n.\xe2\x99\xa65# \n\n\n\n30 N Paragogic. [i 15. \n\naccent, are rarely elided in the Attic poets 5 the Datives fioi and trol are neve? \nelided. \n\n4. In the verbal forms which may take the v Paragogic {i<pe\\KV(rTiK6p), the \npoets use Elision or the y, according to the necessities of the verse. \n\n5. Sometimes in Attic poetry, a weak and grammatically unimportant sylla- \nble is excluded by a preceding long vowel ; this is specially the case with the \naugment e, e. g. rax^^ \' Tropeva-au, Soph. OC. 1602, eTret \'SaKpytra, Phil. 360. This \nomission of the vowel is called aphaeresis {a<paipe<ns). It can also occur after \na punctuation-mark, e. g. <ppd(r(a \' \'iretS^ ^|\xc2\xab * Vi rovToi9. \n\nf 15. "N JParagogtc (e^eX/cvcrrtKov). \xe2\x80\x94 OuTco(s). \xe2\x80\x94 ^E^ and \n\neK. \xe2\x80\x94 0^(k). \n\n1. Another means of avoiding the concurrence of t^vo vowels \nin two successive words is by appending a v, {v IfjiekKva-TLKov, or \nParagogic,) to certain final syllables, viz. : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) to the Dat. PL in en, to the adverbs iripva-i, TravraTrdcn, and \n\nall adverbs of place in o-i, as iracnv oVe^a ; rj nAaratoo-tv \n\n\xe2\x80\xa2^yeju-ovta ; \n(j8) to the third Pers. Sing, and PL in <n, as rvTrrova-Lv e/x^ \n\nTiS^rja-LV Iv rfj rpaTri^rj ; SO also with eo-rt ; \n(y) to the third Pers. Sing, in e, e. g. tnmrev c/xe; \n(S) to the numeral eiKoo^t, though even before vowels the v \n\nis often omitted, e. g. ct/coo-tv avSpes and ctKoo-t o.vhp^<s ; \n(c) to the Demonstrative 6 (^ 95, e) but rarely, and then \n\nalways after o; e. g. ovrocrtv, iKCWoa-iv, Tovrovaiv, ovroio-iv ; \n(^) to the Epic particles, v6 and kI, and to the Epic suflix ^i; \n\nhence also to v6<T<f)L. \n\nRemark. The poets place the y Paragogic before a consonant, so as to make \na short syllable long by position. In Attic prose, it stands regularly at the end \nof a book or section ; it is, also, sometimes found before the longer punctuation- \nmarks, and sometimes elsewhere for the sake of a more emphatic pronun \nelation. \n\n2. The adverb ovtco? always retains its fuU form before a \nvowel, but drops the final s before a consonant, e. g. ovrtoq iiroCrj- \n0-6V, but ovTOi TTotco ; still, ovTO)s may stand even before consonants, \nwhen it is to be made emphatic, e. g. ovrw? yc, Xen. C. 3. 6, 9. \n\n3. So the Prep, c^ retains its full form before vowels and at \nthe end of a sentence, but before consonants becomes ck, e. g. \nii ilp-qvrjsy but CK -njs dpyjvrjs ; SO also in composition, e. g. c^cAau- \n\n\n\nf 16.] STRENGTHENING AND WEAKENING OF VOWELS. 31 \n\nWW, but eKTcXeLv. It also has its full form when it stands after \nthe word it governs, and is then accented, dpriviq^ e^. \n\n4. So ovK has its fuU form before a vowel, e. g. ovk al<rxp6<i\\ \nbefore a vowel with the rough breathing it becomes ovx\xc2\xbb e. g. \novx -^Sv?; but before a consonant, ov, e. g. ov koXos; so also ixr^Kin \n{instead of firj In) after the analogy of ovKeVt. \n\nKem. 2. When ou stands at the end of a discourse, or of a sentence, and is \nto be pronounced with emphasis, the form oit with the acute accent is used \neven before a vowel ; in this case there must be an actual break in the discourse, \nas when oH stands at the end of an answer expressed interrogatively, witliout \nconnection with what follows, as Uws yhp of/; \'^Ap\' oZv ktX. Xen. C. 4. 2, 37 j \nor when it is found in the answer only, and corresponds to our No ; it is found \nespecially in antithetical sentences, e. g. Taya^d^ rb. 5e koko o i : "Eav 5e kt\\. \nXen. C. 1. 2, 42 ; Ai^ovs els rhv iroraixhv ipftiirrovi/, i^iKvovvrx ^e ov, oire efiXair- \nToy ovSeua. An. 4. 8, 3. If, on the contrary, the following sentence is closely \nconnected with the preceding, then it is written oitK, e. g. ovKy oAAek kt\\. Xen. \nC. 2. 6, 11. and 13 ; 4. 6, 2 ; ovk, el or ijv kt\\. Hell. 1. 7, 19. \n\nM6. Strejigthening, Weakening, Prolongation, SJwrtening, Inter- \nchange, and Variation of Vowels. \xe2\x80\x94 Influence of a Vowel or \na Consonant on another Vowel. \xe2\x80\x94 Syncope. \xe2\x80\x94 Omission of a \nVowel. \xe2\x80\x94 Euplionic Prothesis. \n\nThe changes, which further take place in vowels, are : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n1. Strengthening of vowels ; this consists in changing a weaker vowel into a \nstronger (see \xc2\xa7 4, Rem. 1). There are diiFerent degrees of strength in the \nvoweb ; the weakest is e. The strengthening takes place, e. g. in words of the \nthird Dec. in os, Gen. -eos; the pure stem of these words ends in es: in the \nNom., however, which prefers fuller forms, the weaker e is changed into the \nsxronger o (in Latin into m), e. g. yivos, germs, Gen. yeveos (instead of yft/\xe2\x82\xac(r-os), \ngenSr-is. In yoyt and 56pv (Gen. y6var-os, 56paT-os), a, the final vowel" of the \nstem, is changed into the stronger v. \n\n2. The weakening or attenuation of vowels ; this is the opposite of the \nchange just described ; it occurs, e. g. in substantives of the third Dec. in -ts, -<, \n-vy, -V ; in these, the stronger stem- vowels i and v are changed into the weaker e, \ne. g. tt6\\is, ir6\\cu)S ; irrixvs, irTjxews ; alvarri, aivdireos ] &.(Ttv, Screoy. So with \nadjectives in -iis, -u, e. g. y\\vKvs, y\\vKv, Gen. -eos. \n\n3. Prolongation of vowels ; this changes a short vowel into a long vowel or \ndiphthong, viz. a into tj or cu ; i into t or et ; v into i) or eu ; e into 77 or et ; into 0$ \nor ov. This prolongation takes place either for the sake of euphony, or from \ngrammatical reasons, or from both together ; in the poets often on account of the \nmetre. The prolongation of vowels is very prevalent in the Greek language. \nOne instance only is here mentioned, namely, the strengthening of the Present \ntense in Mute and Liquid verbs, e. g. Kptvco, vxtuuf K-fi^w, (paivcoy AeiVw, (peOym, \n\n\n\n32 INTERCHANGE AND VARIATION OF VOWELS. [\xc2\xa7 16. \n\ninstead of Kpfvco, irXvyci), K&^Wy tpavwy XtTrw, <pvya>. \xe2\x80\x94 The reason of the prolon- \ngation is very often found in the omission of a y with a Tau-mute, more rarely \nof a mere x/, or in the omission of a tr after a Liquid, or of a final Sigma, e. g. \no^ovs instead of o^6vTSy Sidovs instead of 5i56uts, fiovX^vwv instead of fiovXexf \novrs ; [i4\\d.s instead of fXiXavs ; %<T(p7i\\a instead of eafaXca, ^yyeiKa instead of \niJYY^Kaa, \xe2\x82\xac(p^eipa instead of ((p^epaa; prirwp instead of p-fjTops, iroifjLTjv instead \nof Ttoiy.4vs, Saiixwy instead of BaifjLous, cuddos instead of ot5o(rs, oA.^3^s instead of \n\n4. Shortening of vowels. See the remarks on the Dialects \xc2\xa7 207. \n\n5. Interchange of vowels ; this consists in softening a long vowel into, a \nshort one, and as a compensation, in lengthening the short vowel immediately \nfollowing. Thus, in the Ionic and Attic dialects, ea instead of do, e. g. iA.ews, \n-ft);/, instead of iKaos, -ovy Kectis instead of Ados, v^dis instead of vdos, MeveAews \ninstead of MeveXdos ; further, in the Attic dialect, ^oujikicas, ^ouxiXid instead of \nthe Ionic PacriXTJos, -^a; so also, TrSXecos, ir^x^*\'^> Attic, instead of -kSkios, \niT\'fjxvos ; e is weaker than i and v, see No. 2. \n\n6. Variation, i. e. the change of the radical vowel e into o and a, for the \nformation of the tenses (\xc2\xa7 140) and derivatives (\xc2\xa7 231, 6); when et in the \nPresent is lengthened from the radical t, it becomes oi in the second Perf., but \nwhen from the radical e, it becomes o ; e. g. Tpe<|)co, rerpocpa, irpa<p7}i/ ; AeiVw \n(root AtTr), AeAoiTra; (p^elpa} (root (p^\xe2\x82\xacp),e(p^opa, icp^aprju\', (pXcyw, ^Ao| ; Tp\xe2\x82\xacX\xc2\xab*i \nrpoxos] Tpecpta, rpocpri, Tpo<p\xe2\x82\xacvs, rpacpepSs. Comp. Germ, stehle, gestohlen, stahl, \nEnglish, ring, rang, rung. The tj is changed into a>, e. g. ap^yw, apwyf}. \n\nRemark 1. Whether the a is to be regarded as a variation, or rather as a \neuphonic change of e, introduced by a preceding or following Liquid, paitic- \nularly p and A, sometimes even /j. and y, may be doubted. Comp. iTpawovy \nirpd^rjv, i(rTp(i(pr]y, ifipdxw, iSdpTjy, icp^dpTiv, iaraXTjy, erafioy, itcrcwov with \ni\\^4yr]v, \xe2\x82\xacTekoy. \n\n7. Change of a vowel by the influence of another vowel or of a consonant \nHere belong two special cases : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) The Attic writers change the Ionic tj into a after the vowels \xe2\x82\xac and i and \nthe diphthongs ending with i, sometimes even after other vowels, and \nafter the Liquid p, e. g. \xc2\xab5ea (Ion. iSer)), aocpia, XP^\'"* ^H-^po-y o-PT^P^ \niiridfa, iirepdva ; \n\n(b) The union-vowel e in verbs in \xc2\xab, is changed into o before the terminations \nbeginning with fx and y, e. g. /SouAcvo/tev, ^vXeioyrai, e/SouAeuo^ucv, c/Sow \nXevovTO. \n\n8. Syncope {(TvyKOTr-fi), i. e. the omission of e in the middle of a word between \na Mute and a Liquid, or between two Liquids, or between xt ; the same, also, \noccurs in the declension of certain substantives of the third Dec, e. g. -KarpSs \ninstead of iraripos ; in the forming of the Present tense of certain verbs, e. g. \nyiyvo^iai instead of yiycuofiai, ttitttco instead of irnreTO), fxifivu instead, of fu/xeyw ; \nand in the formation of the tenses of some verbs, e. g. iryp6fir)v from iydpu ; \nSyncope rarely occurs after <r, e. g. itrxoy, kcmStiiiv, ea-rcu, instead of eaexoy, \niffejrSixrjy, effeTai. A striking example of Syncope is found in ^A^ov instead \nof iiXv^oy, from \'EAET0a. Comp. \xc2\xa7 155. \n\n\n\nU7.1 \n\n\n\nMUTES. \n\n\n\n33 \n\n\n\n9. Apocope. See on the Dialects, ^ 207. \n\n10. One of the vowels a, e, o is prefixed to several words, for the sake of \neuphony. This is called euphonic prothesis, e. g. otrTepoTr^ and cTcpoTr^, aarcKpls \nand aTa<pisi \xe2\x82\xacx3-\xe2\x82\xacs and X"^^\'^* iK\xe2\x82\xac7vos and kcIuos, cid-eAw and 3^eAa>, OKpvoeis and \nKpiosy oSvpofiai and 8vpofji.ai, okcWo) and kcAAo;, etc. \n\nRem. 2. From these euphonic letters care must be taken to distinguish \n( 1 ) a when it stands for and, e. g. a-fivyeii/, to avert, or when used instead of \navd, e. g. anixra-eiu, to tear up, or instead of the a or a copulative with the \nmeaning of a/jM, from which also a intensive has been formed ; (2) \xe2\x82\xac, when it \nis used instead of e| or \xe2\x82\xacV, e. g. iyclpeiu, to wake up, iptvyeiUf eructare, ipe^eiy, \nirritare ; (3) o with the meaning of dfiov, e. g. dfiix^V- \n\n\n\nII. Changes of the Consonants. \n\n$ 17. a. Mutes, \n\n1. The changes of the consonants arise, in a gieat degree, \nfrom the tendency of language to assimilate different sounds. \nThis assimilation is either a mejre resemblance in sounds, as \nwhen XcA.ey-Tat*is changed into XcXeKrat, the smooth t chang* \nixig the medial y into the smooth k ; or it is a complete identity \nin sounds, as when a-uv-piTTToi is changed into crvppLTrTO). \xe2\x80\x94 \nSometimes, however, the language shuns a sameness in sound, \nand seeks to remove it by changing similar sounds into dissim- \nilar, e. g. \'7r\xe2\x82\xac-<f>iXr]Ka for <^\xe2\x82\xac-<^tXr;Ka, "Xo-Trffno for ^acfxfxx). \n\n2. A Pi-mute (tt /? <^) or a Kappa-mute (k y x) before a Tau- \nmute (t 8 <^) must be coordinate Avith the Tau-mute, i. e. only \na smooth Mute {tr k) can stand before the smooth t ; only a \nmedial {p y) before the medial 8; only an aspirate (<^ x) before \nthe aspirate S; consequently, ttt and kt; /38 and y8; <f>& and \nX-^* e. g. \n\n\n\n/3 before t i \n\n\ninto T as : \n\n\nfrom \n\n\nrplfice) \n\n\nreTpifi-Ttu \n\n\n= TfTpiirrai \n\n\n^ " \n\n\nT \n\n\nu \n\n\nfl- " \n\n\n( " \n\n\nypd<poi)) \n\n\nyeypa<p-Tai \n\n\n= yfypairreu \n\n\n7 " \n\n\nT \n\n\n(( \n\n\nK " \n\n\n( " \n\n\n\\4yb>) \n\n\n\\4K\xe2\x82\xacy-rai \n\n\n= AeAe/cTou \n\n\nX " \n\n\nT \n\n\nu \n\n\nK " ( \n\n\n(( \n\n\n^pex\xc2\xab) \n\n\n/3ej8p\xe2\x82\xacX-Toi \n\n\n= fiefipiKTCU \n\n\nIT " \n\n\n8 \n\n\nu \n\n\np " ( \n\n\n(( \n\n\nKinrrw) \n\n\nKUTT-Sa \n\n\n= KvfiSa \n\n\n\xe2\x80\xa2^ " \n\n\n8 \n\n\n(( \n\n\n/3 " ( \n\n\nu \n\n\nypd(pw) \n\n\nypd<p-Sriv \n\n\n= ypd^StiV \n\n\nK " \n\n\n8 \n\n\nu \n\n\n7 " < \n\n\n1 r. \n\n\n7rA.\xe2\x82\xacKw) \n\n\n\'IT\\4K-ht]V \n\n\n= Tr\\4y5T}y \n\n\nX " \n\n\n8 \n\n\n(( \n\n\n7 " 1 \n\n\n[ ^\' \n\n\nfipexo) \n\n\nPpex-Sw \n\n\n= Ppey5r]V \n\n\nJT " \n\n\nS^ \n\n\n(t \n\n\n<t> " ( \n\n\n[ " \n\n\nTre/iTTO)) \n\n\niir\xe2\x82\xacfnr-^v \n\n\n= iirc/xcp^v \n\n\n$ " \n\n\n\xc2\xbb \n\n\n(( \n\n\n4> " \n\n\n( " \n\n\nTpifio}) \n\n\niTpl^-Sn\\v \n\n\n= ^rpitp^v \n\n\nK " \n\n\n\xc2\xbb \n\n\n(( \n\n\nX" ( \n\n\nf cc \n\n\nirXe/co)) \n\n\niir\\fK-^v \n\n\n= iirXex^v \n\n\n> " \n\n\n\xc2\xbb \n\n\nu \n\n\nX " ( \n\n\nC( \n\n\n\\e7Ci> ) \n\n\niKcy-^v \n\n\n= i\\4x^v. \n\n\n\n34 MUTES. p 17 \n\nKemakk 1. The preposition 4k remains unchanged, probably by virtne of an \noriginal movable (r> thus e/cs, e. g. eKdovycUy iK^eit/ai, etc., not iySovyaiy ix^eipou. \n\n3. The smooth. Mutes (tt k t) before a rough breathing, are \nchanged into the cognate aspirates (</>;?( ^), not only in inflec- \ntion and derivation, but also in two separate words, the rough \nbreathiug being transferred from the vowel to the smooth Mute ; \nbut the medials (^ y 8) are thus changed only in the iuflection \nof the verb ; elsewhere there is no change, hence : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nitTT* ov = a(^\' ov, iir-fi/xepos (from enl, rj/x^pa) == i<p\'{]ixcpos \n\niiTvcpaivo) (from eTrt, v(paly(o) = icpvcpaivo), rervTr-a = rervcpa \n\novK Sffius = oi/x dclws, BeK-fifxepos (from deKa^ 7]fj.4pa) = Sex\'^IH-^pos \n\navT\xe2\x82\xac\\K(a = aif^e\\Kw = from ayri, e\'A/c<w), but ouSeis (not ov^ds, from aits\' and efr) \n\ne^\\oy-a = ^iKoxo-i but Ae^\' krepav (not Aex\' kripav) \n\nrerpifi-a = rerpi^o, but TpTjS\' ovtws (not rpT^\' ovrws). \n\nRem. 2. The negative ovk [ov) thus becomes oi\xc2\xbbx> 6. g. oux ^5^s; yet this \nchange does not occur before the aspirate p, e. g. ov piirru. In some com- \npounds, the smooth Mute is retained even in the Attic dialect, according to \nIonic usage, e. g. airrjMwTrjs {east wind, from airo and 7}\\tos), \\evKnnros {one who \nrides a white horse, from \\\xe2\x82\xacvk6s and \'liriros), KpdTiinroSf etc. \n\nRem. 3. This change of the smooth Mute before the rough breathing takes \nplace also in Crasis {^ IQ and 11), e. g. t^ erepo = ^drepa, rh tfidriov = ^olfid- \nrioVy KoX erepos = x^\'^^P^^t \'^\xc2\xb0* \'^^\xc2\xb0- 2o"r\'s, \'6tr(us = x^<^^i x^^\'^^^i X^\'"\'^^\' ^^^ \nthis Crasis is only poetic. When the smooth Mutes ttt or kt precede the rough \nbreathing, both must be changed into Aspirates (No. 2), e. g. \xe2\x82\xac^>3^/xepos instead \nof e7rT7j/xe/)os (from Ittto, rjixepa), vvx^^ o\\7jv instead of yvicr\' ^Kriv. Attic prose \nuses also the full forms, e. g. vvKra HXrjv. \n\nRem. 4. In some compounds, the aspirated liquid p changes the preceding \nsmooth Mute into the Aspirate, e. g. (ppolfxiov, formed by Crasis from irpooifuov \n(from \'Kp6 and oinos) \\ re^piTriroy (from Tc^rpa.and \'linros), bpdcraw from r<ipiluTaw\\ \nso (ppovSos from \'irp6 and 6S6s. \n\n4. On the contrary, a rough Mute cannot stand before the \nsame rough Mute, but is changed into the corresponding smooth, \ne.g. ^aTTcjxx), BciK^^os, tCtStj, \'AtSCs\', not ^acfxfuDy Ba;^09, tC^^tj, \nASS^Lsi on the same principle, when p is doubled, the first \nAspirate disappears, e. g. Ilvf>po<s, not IIvppos. \n\n5. A Tau-mute (t 8 ^) before another Tau-mute is changed \ninto o- (comp. claustrum from claudo) ; but it disappears before \nK (in Perf and Plup. Act), e. g. \n\niirel^-^v (from irei^a)) becomes hcflcr^v \n\nvei^-reos ( " irel^ot) " ireiCT^os \n\ni]pelS-Sfr]v ( " ipeiSw) " TipeiaSujv \n\nveiTii^-Ka ( " Tfi^) " Threuca. \n\n\n\nf 18.] LIQUIDS. 35 \n\n6. The T, which in the Attic dialect very often becomes o-, is \nfrequently changed into o- by the influence of a foUowmg t, e. g. \nTrXovcTLos (instead of ttXovtlo^, from ttXovtos), ^A/jlo^ovo-los (instead \nof ^Afia^ovvT-Los), MtA-^o-tog (from MiAtttos), \'Ax\'^pova-Los (instead \nof ^Ax^povT-Los), ovaia (instead of ovt-lo), ycpovaca (instead of \nyepovT-Lo), evLavaLo<; (from cvtavros). Tlie t sometimes changes \nby assimilation the other Tau-mutes, and the Palatals, into o- ; \nthus in the forms of the Comparative in -acroiv and -^(dv, where \nthere is a double change, first of the Tau-mute or Palatal to tr \nby means of the i, and then the assimilation of the t to a, e. g. \n^paBv^ (/3/)a8tW, ^paa-LOiv), jSpda-a-QiVj pocr,, 7ra)(ys (7ra;^tW, ttcut- \ntW), TracrcroiVy poet, ftcyas, /xeL^oiv (instead of jxeyCtDv), ra^yS} \n^dcrcroyv (instead of Ta;(-tW). \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 18. b. Liquids. \n\n1. The Liquid v is sometimes changed into a. This takes \nplace, e. g. in the Ace. Sing, tliird Dec. of substantives, whose \nstem ends with a consonant, e. g. Kopa^, KopaK-a (not KopaK-iv)^ \nXa/x7ra9, kafx-rrdS-a. The same change, also, sometimes takes \nplace in the tliird Pers. PI. Perf. and Plup. Mid. and Pass, of \nmute and hquid verbs, which properly should end in -vrot and \n\'VTo (as in pure verbs, e. g. p^/SovXevvrai, ifSe^ovXevvro), e. g. \nT\xe2\x82\xacTpL<f>dTaLy lT\xe2\x82\xacTpt(^a.TOy TTCTrAe^arai, Tcra^^ttrat, to-KCuaSarai, KcxyipiSdrcUy \ni<f>SdpdTaL (instead of jirpLf^vraL, ireTpL^vro, etc., from rpi^-ui, \nTrXtK-oi, rda-cr-tOy q-Kevd^-oty )((DpL^-(jj, ffiSeip-u)). See \xc2\xa7 116, 15. \n\n2. N before a Liquid is changed into the same Liquid, e. g. \n\n<rvu-\\oyi^w becomes avWoyi^w avy-fierpla becomes trvufierpla \n\niv-fjiivoi " d/xfieya) trvy-piirra) " (Tvpftiina). \n\nRemark. Comp. iZZino, iTwrnineo, instead of in/ino, i/jwineo. Assimilation \ntakes place in 6\\\\vfiif instead of 6\\yvfii. \xe2\x80\x94 \'\xc2\xa3\xc2\xbb\' before ^is not assimilated, e. g. \nivpiirru ; yet f^f>vbfj.o5 is more frequent than ivpv^ixos ; on the contrary, ivXtuc- \nm*iu stands instead of iWeucKevo}. \n\n3. M initial before a Liquid is changed into /?, e. g \n\nfjiXirreiv (from fieXi) becomes $\\Itt\xe2\x82\xaciv \n\nfifOT65 ( " fi6posy mors) " fiporSs. \n\n\n\n36 \n\n\n\nMUTES AND LIQUIDS. \n\n\n\n[Uy \n\n\n\n$ 19 c. Mutes and Liquids. \xe2\x80\x94 Liquids and Mutes, \n1. A Pi-mute (tt y8 </>) before ft is changed into //,, \n\n\n\na Kappa-miite (k y x) \na Tau-mute (t S ^) \n\n(a) Pi-mute: rerpiP-fxai \n\n\\e\\enr-ixai \nyeypacp-fxai \n\n(/8) Kappa-mute: iriirK^K-jxai \n\\4Aey-fJLai. \n\n{y) Tau-mute: ^uvT-fiai \n\nipT]p^iZ-lxai \n\nKeKOfjLid-fxai \n\n\n\n/* \n\nfrom rplfia>) \n\nirAeKw) \nAeyw) \n\nepeiSw) \nirei^a ) \n\n\n\ny^ \n\n\n\n(( \n\n\n\nor, e. g. \n\n\n\nbecomes reTpL/xfiai \n\n" AcAei^/itti \n\n" yiypaixfxcu \n\n" ireirXiynat \n\nremains A.e\\e7fuu \nbecomes p^fipeyfjuu \n\nip^peicTfiai \n\nKeKSjXKT/J.ai. \n\n\n\nRemark 1. In some words, the Kappa and Tau-mutes are not changed \nbefore /j., e. g. a/c/i^, irSTfios, XaxfJ-^s, Kcv^/xcav, etc. In some words, even x \nstands before /x, instead of the original k or y, e. g. ia}x/^<is from Ic^kw, ttAoxM\' \nfrom 7rAe/ca>. The preposition e/c, in composition, is not changed, e. g. iKfiav- \n\n2. The medial p before v is changed into /a, e. g. \n\n(refi-v6$ (from a-efiofiai) becomes ffe/xvSs \nipefi-vSs { " epe;8os) " ipcfxySs. \n\n\\ N before a Pi-mute (tt p (f> xj/) is changed into /a, \nN before a Kappa-mute {k y x i^ changed into y, \nN before a Tau-mute (t 8 ^) is not changed, e. g. \n\n\n\niu-ireipla becomes ifiireipla \niv-fidWco " 6>j3aAAa> \n\n%v-<pp(\xc2\xbbiv " efKppwu \n\nfy-x^/Oxos " \xe2\x82\xaciJ.\\pvxos \nbut ffvvTeivd}, (Tvvdeci), avvbiu}. \n\n\n\ntrvv-KoXio} becomes (rvyKoXfce \nCuu-yiyyaxTKU " criryyi\'yi\'wo-KW \n\n(Tvv-xpovos " avyxpovos \n\ncvy-^eo) " (riryleoj j \n\nComp. i\xc2\xbbi6uo, ij/iprimo. \n\n\n\nRem. 2. The enclitics are not changed, e. g. pWep, rStrye, not oTTrtp, etc. \nRem, 3. Also at the end of a word, v before a Pi-mnte, as well as before ft, \n\xe2\x80\xa2was, without doubt, pronounced like /i, and before a Kappa-mute, like y ; and \n10 it is found in ancient inscriptions, e. g. TOMIIATEPAKAITHMMHTEPa, \nrOrXPHMASTISMON (i. e. rhy Trarepa Kol T7V jJ-rir^pa, rhv xp\'\'7;"aT<(r^oV). So also \nk and a are used instead of v before \\ and <r, e g. \'EAAHMNOI, \'E22AMO) \n<i. e. \xc2\xab}\' Aiifiyo), iv \'^.d/xa). \n\n\n\nf 20.] THE SIBILANT O" WITH MUTES AND LIQUIDS. \n\n\n\n37 \n\n\n\nI 20. d. Use of the Sibilant or, with Mutes and \n\nLiquids. \n\n1. A Pi-mute (tt /8 <^) with o- is changed into j/^, \n\na Kappa-mute (k y x) "^^^^ o" i^ changed into ^, \na Tau-mute (t 8 ^) disappears before cr, e. g. \n\n\n\n(o) Pi-mute: \n\n\nXiiiTffa \n\n\n[from AcIttw) \n\n\nbecomes Xelypa \n\n\n\n\nrplfitrw 1 \n\n\n\n\nrpi^ca) \n\n\n(( \n\n\nrpl\\l/u \n\n\n\n\nypd<p(r<i) 1 \n\n\n\n\nypd(f>a)) \n\n\n(( \n\n\nypd^pu \n\n\n0) Kappa-mute \n\n\n: irAe/cffw \n\n\n\n\nir\\\xe2\x82\xacKa}) \n\n\n(( \n\n\nirAefw \n\n\n\n\n\\4y(ra) \n\n\n\n\nAeyw) \n\n\n(( \n\n\n\\e|cB \n\n\n\n\nfipexa-o) \n\n\n\n\n/Bpe\'xcw) \n\n\n(( \n\n\n/3pe|\xc2\xab \n\n\n(7) Tau-mute: \n\n\nauvTffco 1 \n\n\n\n\naj/vT\xc2\xab) \n\n\n(( \n\n\nayucw \n\n\n\n\nipiihao) \n\n\n\n\n\xe2\x82\xacpe/5w) \n\n\n(( \n\n\nip^lact \n\n\n\n\nvei^ffd) \n\n\n\n\nirei^cw) \n\n\n(( \n\n\nVilffOt \n\n\n\n\ni\\TriS<ra} \n\n\n\n\n6\'AirrC\xc2\xab) \n\n\n(C \n\n\ni\\Trf<T6 \n\n\n\nRemark 1. Comp. duxi, rexi, coxi ; from duco, re^ro, cogno. The Prep. iK \nbefore <r is an exception, e. g. eKaci^o}, not i^ctxrw. \xe2\x80\x94 In ttovs, Gen. iroS-Ss, and \nin the Perf. active Part, in -<^s, Gen. -6t-os, after the Tau-mute disappears, the \npreceding vowel is lengthened. \n\n2. N disappears before o-; but when v is joined with a Tau- \nmute, both disappear before cr, but the short vowel before a, is \nlengthened : e into \xe2\x82\xacl, o into ov, a, t, v into a, I, i), Comp. Rem. 3, \ne.g. \n\nTv<p^\xe2\x82\xacvr-<ri becomes rv(p^e7<ri \\eovr-<ri becomes \\cov<ri \n\n(nrivZ-tjo) " cnrciao} eXfiiu^-ai " eX/JLicri \n\nTi^avT-cri " Tx^affi ieiKvvyr-ffi " SeiKyvt\'i \n\n5alfJiov-ffi " SaifjLOffi Rfyoipum-ffi " e,fuo(poiJ<Ti. \n\nRem. 2. Exceptions : \'Ei/, e. g. iv(mipa> ; iroi\'- before o- with another conso- \nnant, e. g. \xe2\x96\xa0n-dyo\'/coTros, in some words is assimilated ; e. g. ird(T(ro<pos is used as \nwell as irdvaocpos, etc. (in irdXiu the usage varies) ; also in some inflective and \nderivative forms in -aai and -<ns from verbs in -a/i/a>, e. g. irftpaycai (from \ntl>alv(o), -Kiiravtris (from ireTro/vw), and in the substantives, t] ihfxivs, earth-icorm, t) \niTflpivSj wagon-basket, tj Tipvys^ v is retained before <r. \xe2\x80\x94 In composition, the v in \ntr!)v is changed into <r before <t followed by a vowel, e. g. trvacdi^di (from <ri)v and \n(Tti^w) ; but before a followed by a consonant, or before ^, it disappears, e. g. triv \n(TTfUia. becomes avarrifia, aw-^vyia becomes av^vyla. \xe2\x80\x94 In x\'o-p^^f^h vr is dropped ; \non the contrary, in tcUos, fifKds (Gen. -ai/os), tcrdsy efs (Gen. -iv6s)^ els, and in \nthe third Pers. PI. of the principal tenses (see ^ 103), e. g. Pov\\evovai (instead \nof fiovXfvoyffi), the o/nission of the simple v is compensated by lengthening \nthe vowel. \n\n3. On the contrary, in the Aorist of Liquid verbs, or is omitted \n\n4 \n\n\n\nS8 CHANGE OF CONSONANTS. [^ 21 \n\nafter the Liquid, but the omission is compensated, by lengthen- \ning the stem-vowel, e. g. \n\njjyye\\-a-a becomes ^77e<A.a eve/x-ffa becomes evei/xa \n\netpav-ffa " ^<pTjya tcpbep-ffa * i<pbitpgu \n\nRem. 3. Sigma is likewise omitted before a in the future of Liquid verbs, c \nbeing inserted before <r for the sake of an easier pronunciation, and e\xc2\xab being con- \ntracted into ft), e. g. aYY\xe2\x82\xac\\-4-ffa}, ayyeXu. So too in the Nom. of the third Dec \nthe final Sigma is omitted, when y or p precedes, and the short vowel is \nlengthened, e. g. eiKciv instead of \xe2\x82\xaclK6v-Sy Troifi\'fiv instead of iroifilv-Sy pitrup \ninstead of p-fjTop-s, cu^p instead of al^4p-s. \xe2\x80\x94 T and c are omitted in the Nom. \nof substantives and participles in -uy. Gen. -ovt-os ; but, as a compensation, o is \nlengthened into \xc2\xab, e. g. Xeovr-s becomes AeW, ^ovK^vovt-s becomes fiovXevojy. \n\nHem. 4. In eyvvfii (instead of eff-yvfii, ves-tio) the cr is assimilatei\' to the \nfollowing V, and in el/jLi (instead of iar-fii) a- is omitted, but e is lengthened \ninto e(. \n\n\xc2\xa721. e. Change of separated Consonants. \n\n1. Sometimes a consonant affects another consonant, though \nthey do not immediately follow one another, but are separated \nby a vowel or even by two syllables. Thus, one \\ changes \nanother k into p, e. g. KecfxxXapyia (instead of Ke^oAoXywi from \noAyctv), yXwa-a-apyta (instead of yXwa-a-aXyLo) , dpyoXeos (instead of \ndXyaXeos from aXyelv) ; the sufiix wXiy becomes wpijy when a k pre- \ncedes, e. g. -^oA-TTCOp^. \n\n2. In the reduplication of verbs whose stem begins witli a \nrough mute, instead of repeating this mute, which would be \nthe regular formation, the first rou^h mute is changed into the \ncorresponding smooth, thus : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n<pe-<pi\\r]Ka (from </)t\\e\xc2\xab) is changed into x\xe2\x82\xac<pl\\7}Ka, \nX^\'X^Ka ( " X^\'*) " " KcxvKu \n\nM-3i)/u (stem0E) " " ri^fu. \n\nLikewise in the verbs, dvew, to sacrifice, and rt^evcu (stem eE), to piace, b of \nthe root is changed into t, in the passive forms which begin with .& : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nirv-^Vy Tv-^ao/jLai, ire-^y, T\xe2\x82\xac-^aofjuu, instead of i^-^v, er^e-dijv. \n\nSo also, for the sake of euphony, the p is not reduplicated, and instead of it \n1^^ is used, e. g. eppxn]Ka. \n\n3. In words whose stem begins with t and ends with an \nAspirate mute, the aspiration is transferred to the preceding \n\n\n\nf$ 22, 23.] METATHESIS OF THE LIQUIDS. 39 \n\nsmooth T, when the Aspirate before the formative syllable be- \nginning with cr, T, and /a, must, according to the laws of euphony \n(H 17, 2; 19, 1 ; 20, 1), be changed into a smooth consonant; \nby this transposition, t is changed into the Aspirate ^. Such a \nchange is called the Metathecis of the aspiration. \n\nThus, Tpi<p-o} [Tirpo<pa Perf.) is changed into {^piir-ffo}) ^p^co, ^peir-r^p, {^peit- \nfxa) ^pefifjLa; \nra(p-f], TA*-a), racprjvai (second Aor. Pass.), into ^drpoo, ^dir-r(c, (red-air- \nuai) Te^a/jLfiai (but third Pers. PI. reTd<paTai, 6. g. Her. 6, 103, with one \nof the better MSS. is to be lead instead of re^dfarai) ; \nrpixpoSf TPT*-w into ^pv\\pca, ^pinr-ru} [re^pim-fxai), re^pvfifuUf \nrp4x-o into (^pcK-cofxai) ^pf^ofiai; \xe2\x80\x94 rpix-^s into ^pt|, ^pi^lv] \nraxvs, in the comparative, becomes bdaawv. Por the same reason, the \nfuture e|a), from ex^, to have, is the proper form, the aspiration of \nthe X being transfciTed to the smooth breathing and making it \nrough. \n\nRemark 1. Tev|a) from Teux\xc2\xab, and rpvl<a from rpvx<\xc2\xbby remain unchanged. \n\nRem. 2. Where the passive endings of the above verbs, rpecpco, TA*fl \n{ddTTTO)), TPT*n (^pinrru), begin with 3-, the aspiration of the two final conso- \nnants <p^, changes t, the initial consonant of the stem, into ^, e. g. \n\ni^p4<p-Shri]/, dp\xe2\x82\xac<p-^vat, ^pi(p-^a\xe2\x82\xac(T^aiy \n\nRem. 3. In the imperative ending of the first Aor. Pass., where both sylla- \nbles should begin with ,^, namely, bT}^i, not the first, but the last aspirate mute \nis changed into the corresponding smooth ; thus 37rr<, e. g. fiov\\\xe2\x82\xacv^Ti. \n\n$ 22. Metathesis of the Liquids. \n\nThe Liquids, and also the Lingual t when ir precedes, often \nchange place with a preceding vowel, for the sake of euphony. \nThe vowel then usually becomes long. Tliis lengthening of \nthe vowel distinguishes Metathesis from Syncope (the latter \nbeing the mere omission of c), e. g. /xt-/xj^o-Kco (from the root ftev, \nCOmp. mens), ^vrjo-Kdi (from ^av-iiv), rerfi-qKa (from TC/x-etv), \n^el3X.r]Ka (from (SaX-eiv), Trnjaroixac (from Trcrofiat). \n\n^ 23. Doubling of Consonants. \n\n1. Consonants are doubled, in the first place, for the sake of \neuphony, e. g. l3aSvppoo<; from /?a^v and pim ; tppeov instead of \n^cov; in the second place, in consequence of the concurrence \n\n\n\n40 STRENGTHENING AND ADDITION OP CONSONANT.?. [5 24 \n\nof like or similar sounds, in the infle\'^tion and derivation, e. g \nO/-V0/I.09 (from ev and vofxos), cX-XetTro) (instead of cvX.), a-vix-fjia^o% \n(instead of o-wfi.), XikcLfx-fxaL (instead of Ae\\ct7r/A.), X^fx-fxa (in- \nstead of X^TT/xa), KOfJL-jxa (instead of kott/xo), raor-a-oi or Tar-TQ) \n(instead of rdy-croi), rjcramf or TjTTcav (instead of T7K-tW), /xoXXov \n(instead of fxaX-iov), aXXos (instead of oXtos, alius). \n\n2. In the Common language, only the Liquids, \\, /x, v, j^^ the \nSibilant <r, and the Mute t, can be doubled; yet tt and k are \nalso doubled in single words, e. g. itttto?, a horse ; k6kko<;, a berry. \nThe Medial y is often doubled, but this letter thus doubled is \nsoftened in the pronunciation (\xc2\xa7 2). Two Aspirates are not \ndoubled (\xc2\xa7 17, 4). \n\n3. p is doubled when the augment is prefixed, e. g. ^pcov, \nand in composition, when it is preceded by a short vowel, e. g. \napprjKTOS, (3aS^vppoo<s \', but ev-pcooros (from ev and pmnrvp^i). \n\nRemark. In imitation of Homer, the Tragic writers also double the c, yet \nmuch less frequently than Homer, e. g. r6(T(Tov, Soph. Aj. 185; 6\\^<r<xas, 390; \niffffvSni, 294; ixiffcr}. Ant. 1223 ; ^tra-erai, -ffisch. Pers. 122 ; so also in the Dat. \nPL of the third Dec. eaai. \n\n$ 24. Strengthening and Addition of Consonants. \n\n1. Consonants are frequently strengthened, in the inflection, by the addition \nof a corresponding consonant, namely : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) The Labials (jS tt ^) by r, e. g. fixdir-r-u (instead of fixd^-o)), tvit-t-w \n(instead of tutt-co), piir-T-w (instead of picp-w) ; sometimes also by c, which \nassimilates the preceding Labial (thus ccr, Attic tt), e. g. \xe2\x80\xa2jr\xe2\x82\xac<r<r\xc2\xab (root \nTreir), Att. ttcttcw, Put. ircrpo), the poetic iacrofiai. Put. 6\\^oixou ; in 5et//<\xc2\xbb \n(instead of Se\'^oj), ^ and o- are changed into i\\f ; . \n\n(b) The Palatals (7 k x) ^^ strengthened by <r, which assimilates the pre- \nceding Palatal (thus orffy Att. tt), or, though more seldom, the Palatal \nunites with the a- and is changed into ^, e. g. Tcur-tr-a, Att. TdT-r-o* \n(instead of rdy-w), <ppi(r-(r-(i}, Att. (pplr-r-m (instead of (pplK-w), $\'fi<T-<T-(i>, \nAtt. j8^T-T-a> (instead of firix-o)] Kpd^w (instead of Kpdy(a),rpl(o} (instead \nof Tpiyai) ; a Kappa-mute with <r is seldom changed into |, e. g. ai/|\xc2\xab \n(aug-eo), aA6|a>, oSa|ft> and oSo^co; the strengthening t Ls found only in \nvcKTCo and tIktoj. \n\n(c) The Linguals (5t(^) are strengthened by (T, which with the preceding \nLingual is changed into ^, e. g. <f>pd(Q} (instead of (ppaSu), or, though \nmore seldom, c assimilates the preceding Tau-mute, e. g. xiacoum and \nXlrojiai, epeVtrco, ipirToo (instead of ipero}), KOpvacro} (instead of Kopv^). \n\n2. The unpleasant concurrence of fxp and vp in the middle of some words, \noccasioned by the omission of a vowel, is softened by inserting /8 between i^p \n\n\n\nf 25.] EXPULSION AND OMISSION OF CONSONANTS. 41 \n\nand 5 bet"ween vp^ thus, in fi\xe2\x82\xac<n]fi-0-pia (formed from /Afffrj/xepla, ix^fftiixpia)^ yttix\' \nfi-p6s (from ya/x-e-p6s, yafipSs)., av-d-p6s (fi\'Om avepoSy ayp6s). \n\n3. N also is used to strengthen the Labials, especially in poetry, so as to make \na syllable long by position, e. g. TVfjiiravov (fr\'om tvtt-t-co), crTp6fj.fio5 (from arpe- \n\n\' ^\xc2\xab) ; ^d/x^os (rdtpos) ] Kopififirj (ko/ju^tj) ; ^pS/xfios {Tp4(j)\xe2\x82\xaciv) ] ofx(pr\\ (eiVeti\')} \nvvjjLcpri (nubere) ; bfipifios and S/xfipifioSi yduv/xos and pui/vfivos. In the present \ntense of many verbs, this strengthening v is found, e. g. irvv^duofMai, ^icfydvia^ \nKafjifiduw instead of irv^oijuuy ^iyu, \\dfi(o. On the change of y, see \xc2\xa7 19, 3. On \nthe V Paragogic, see \xc2\xa7 15, 1. \n\n4. 2 also is prefixed to some words, but mostly to such as begin with fi, e. g \nI fiuSi^ and (TfiuSi^, fjLiKp6s and a/xiKpSs ; a strengthening o- is also inserted before /i \n\\ and T in the Perf. JVIid. or Pass., and before ^ in the first Aor. Pass., e. g. rereKe- \n\n\' a-fxai, r\xe2\x82\xacTe\\\xe2\x82\xac-<r-rai, ireXe-ff-^v (\xc2\xa7 131); also in the derivation and composition \nof words, <r is frequently inserted for the sake of euphony, e. g. a-ei-ff-iJiSs, irav- \nff-dvifxosy fioyo-ar-rSKos, etc. ; instead of o-, (^ also is inserted before fi, e. g. \nHVKrj-^-fi6s, opxn-^-H-^Sf (rKap-^-fx6s from <r/ca/pa>, nop-^fiSs from irclpu. \n\n\n\n$ 25. Expulsion and Omission of Consonants. \n\n1. In inflection, a is very often omitted between two A^owels, e. g. rvimpj \nirvTrroVf tvtttoio instead of Tinrre-a-ai or TU7rTrj-(rot, \xe2\x82\xacTU7rT\xe2\x82\xac-<r-o, TVTnoi-(r-o] \ny4ui-os, 7 \xe2\x82\xac\xc2\xbb\'\xe2\x82\xac-\xc2\xab 1/ instead of y4v\xe2\x82\xac-(r-os, y^vi-a-uv (comp. gene-r-is, gene-r-um). \nAt the end of a word, and after Pi and Kappa-mutes, it is retained, e. g. yivos^ \nTxjy^u} (=TU7r(raj), irAe|\xc2\xab (= irAeVa-w), but after the Liquids, in inflection, as \nwell as commonly at the end of a word, it is omitted, e. g. \xc2\xa5iyyii\\a (instead \nof ^TyeX-c-o), iiyyiXci (instead of ayyeX-d-c-w, ayy\xe2\x82\xac\\-4-u), fiiiTup (instead \nof p^Top-s). Comp. \xc2\xa7 20, Eem. 3. \n\n2. The Digamraa softened into the vowel v (\xc2\xa7 200) is omitted: (a) in the \nmiddle of the word between two vowels, e. g. a}6y (oi)F6y), ovum, 6is {6Fi<i), ovis, \ntddv {alFdy), aevum, vfos (peFos), novus, o-kuiSs {aKaiF6s), scaevus, fio6s (fioFSs), \nbovis ; 3-60), ir\\e\xc2\xab, iri/ew, i\\da> instead of ^eFw, etc. ; (b) at the beginning of \nthe word before vowels and p, e. g. ohos {Fo7uos), vinum, eap (Feap), ver, U \n(Fis) vis, oJkos {FoiKos}, vicus, iSelu {Fide7u), vidcrc, ia^s (Fea^s), vestis, \npiiyvvfii {Ffrriyi/v(xi), frango. On the contrary, the Digamma (this softened v) \nis retained in connection with a preceding o, e, o, with which it then coalesces \nand forms a diphthong : (o) at the end of a word, e. g. $od (instead of p6F^, \n/Soa-tAeu, etc.; ()8) before a consonant, e. g. $ovs (fiSFs, bovs, bos), vavs {vdFs)^ \nnavis, fiovv, fiovci, fiacriXevs, fiaaiKevai, ^evaofxai, trX^ixrofxai, trvixxrofiai, iXavvta. \nBut when an t or u precedes it, then it disappears before a consonant, but \nlengthens the t or u, e. g. k7s (instead of k\'iFs), evs (instead of avFs) Ix^i \n(instead, of Ix^vFs), Ace. kIu, cvv, lx^v\\ but it disappears also, in this case, \nIn the middle of a word between vowels, e. g. AX-6s, Kl-6sy av-ds^ Ix^-os (instead \nof AtF-6s, kXF-6s, <rvF-6s, Ix^vF-os. \n\n4* \n\n\n\nt^M \n\n\n\n42 EXPULSION AND OMISSION OF CONSONANTS. [\xc2\xa7 25- \n\n3. Since the Greek language admits an accumulation of three consonants, \nonly in composition, not in simple words, unless the first or the last is a \nLiquid, then, if in the inflection of the verb, a termination beginning with (r3 \nis appended to the consonant of the root, the <t is dropped : \xe2\x80\x94 \xe2\x96\xa0 \n\nKeKeiTT-ff^oiv (from Xei-rr-w) becomes A\xe2\x82\xacA.ei<|)3-\xc2\xabv (\xc2\xa7 17 J 2.) \n\\(\\4yaSrai ( " Aey-o)) " AeK^x^at (\xc2\xa717,2.) \n\niffrdK-a^ai ( " criXK-w) " iardT^ou. \n\nBemark. On the omission of a Tau-mute, and a y and tn- before a; and a a \nafter a Liquid, see \xc2\xa7 20. On rreirefifiai, catpiyfjuu, etc. instead of 7re7re^t/i/iat, \ne(r<piyyij.ai, see \xc2\xa7 144, R. 2. \' In composition, v is often omitted, e g. IIui^o/ctJ- \nr\'os, \'AiroWS-dupos, instead of Hv^ojKT.f \'A7roAA(Jj/5. \n\n4. Some words may drop their final consonant, either to avoid an accumula- \ntion of consonants, or, in verse, to prevent a syllable becoming hug by position. \nIn addition to the words mentioned under \xc2\xa7 15, namely, ovk (ou), e| (e/c), oikws \n{ovTu), which usually retain their final consonant before a vowel to prevent \nHiatus, but drop it before consonants, here belong, \n\n(a) adverbs of place in ^ev, e. g. npSa^ev, &Tri(r^\xe2\x82\xacv, vircp^cv, etc., which never \ndrop the v before a consonant, in prose, but very often in Epic poetry, \nmore seldom in the Attic poets ; \n\n{h) /xexpts and &xpis, which, however, in the best classical writers, drop \ntheir a, not only before consonants, but commonly even before vowels, \ne. g. fi^xpi \'Ava^aySpov, PI. Hipp. Maj. 281, c 5 fte\'xpt imav^a. Id. Svmp. \n210, e ; fi^xpi otou, X. C. 4. 7, 2 ; /ne\'xpt ipv^pas ^aXdTJTjs, Id. Cy. 8. \n6,20; \n\n(c) the adverbs arpe/xas, ^fiiras, ixearjyvs, avriKpvs, Ayeccs, &<pvwSy which in \npoetry may drop their 5, but never in prose ; in the Ionic dialect, numeral \nadverbs in -ukis also frequently drop the a before consonants, e. g. \niroWdKi. Her. 2, 2. \n\n5. A genuine Greek word can end only in one of the three Liquids, y, <r (\xc2\xbb^, \nf , i. e. ir<r, Kir) and p. The two words, ovk, not, and ex, out of, form only an \napparent exception, since, as Proclitics (\xc2\xa7 32), they incline to the following \nword, and, as it were, become a part of it. This law of euphony occasions \neither the omission of all other consonants, or it changes them into one of the \nthree Liquids just named; hence, aa/ia (G^n. adofiar-os), instead of av/juxr, \nydXa (Gen. yd\\aKT-os), instead of ydXoKT, Xeay (Gen. Xcoyr-os), instead of \n\\4ovr, i$ov\\\xe2\x82\xacvov instead of i^ovXevovr, \xe2\x80\x94 re pas (Gen. rfpar^s), instead of \nTepoT, K\xe2\x82\xacpas (Gen. Kdpar-os), instead of kc/jot, fi4\\i (Gen. /teAxr-os), instead \n\nof lki\\tT, \n\n\n\nW 26, 27. 1 NATURE AND QUANTITY OF SYLLABLES. 43 \n\nCHAPTER n. \nSyll ables. \n\n$26. Nature and Division of Syllables. \n\n1. Every vowel, pronounced by itself, or in connection with \none or more consonants, is called a syllable. \n\n2. A word consists of one or more syllables. When a word \nconsists of several syllables, a distinction is made bet\'ween the \nstem-syllables and the syllables of inflection or derivation. \nThe stem-syllables express the essential idea of the ^vord, the \nsyllables of inflection or derivation, the relations of the idea. \nThus, e. g. in ye-ypa</)-a, the middle syllable is the stem-syllable ; \nthe two others, syllables of inflection : in Trpay-^a^ the first is \nthe stem-syllable ; the last, the syllable of derivation. \n\n$27. Quantity of Syllables. \n\n1. A syllable is short or long, by nature, according as its \nvowel is short or long. \n\n2. Every syllable is long wliich contains a diphthong, or a \nsimple long vowel, or two vowels contracted into one, e. g. \n^ovXevw ; ripoi<i ; aKOiv (from dcKCDv), ^orpvs (from ySorpt\'tt?), \n\n3. A syllable with a short vowel becomes long by position, \nwhen two or three consonants, or a double consonant (^ i ip), \nfollow the short vowel, e. g. ortAAw, tvi/\'uvtc^, Kopd^ (^opoxos) \nTpdiri^a. \n\nRemark 1. The pronunciation* of a syllable long by nature, and of one \nlong by position, differs in this, that the former is pronounced long, but tho \nlatter not. When a syllable long by nature is also long by p6sition, its pronun- \nciation must be protracted. Hence a distmction is made in pronouncing such \nwords as TrparTw, irpa^is, irpcLyfia (d), and tcittw, rd^is, rdyfia (d). \n\nRem. 2. But when a short vowel stands before a Mute and a Liquid (Positio \ndebi/is), it commonly remains short in the Attic dialect, because the sound of \nthe Liquids, being less distinct than the Mutes, they are pronounced with more \n\n\' The method of pronunciation stated in this remark is adopted in many of \nthe Gennan gymnasia, and in some of the schools in England and Scotland, \nbut not to any extent in this country. \xe2\x80\x94 Tk. \n\n\n\n44 QUANTITY OF THE PENULT. [\\ 2S. \n\nease, e. g. &reKvos, dverrKos, \'aK/x-f], 0oTpvs, SiSpax/J-os, yet in two cases the posi- \ntion of the Mute and Liquid lengthens the short vowel : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\na) in compounds, e. g. \'%Kvi^(a ; \n\nb) when one of the Medials (j3 7 S) stands before one of the three Liquids \n(\\ /* J/), e. g. fivfikos, eijoSfios, TreirXiyfjLai ; in tragic trimeter, ^\\ also lengthen \nthe preceding short vowel. \n\nIt is obvious that a vowel long by nature cannot be shortened by a Mute and \nLiquid, e. g. i^iivvrpov. \n\n4. A syllable, which, contains one of the three doubtful \nvowels (a, t, v), cannot, in the same word, be pronounced long \nand short, but must be either long or short. \n\n\n\ny 28. Quantity of the Penult. \n\nIn order to a correct pronunciation, the quantity of the three \ndoubtful vowels, a, i, and v, in the penult of words of three or \nmore syllables, must be determined. The following are the \nprincipal instances in which the penult is long. The quantity \nof the syllables of inflection is treated in connection with the \nForms : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nThe penult is long, \n\n1. In substantives in -awv (Gen. -aovos or -acows), in substantives of two or \nmore syllables in -iwv (Gen. -iovos\\ but -"iwv. Gen. -tuvos), and in forms of the \ncomparative in -lavy -lov (Gen. -lovos)^ e. g. hirawv, -ovos, 6, r], companion, Ilotrei- \nddojv, -<avos ; Ktciv, -ovos, ri, pillar, fipaxfov, -ovos^ 6, arm, \'AfKptwv, -ovos ; but \nAevKaXfwv, -covos ; KaKKtoDV, koKKIov, more beautiful. \n\nExceptions. The two Oxytones, t] Tfidiv (X), shore, and generally ^ x^oiv, snow. \nIn Homer, the comparatives in -iwv, lov, are always short, where the versifica- \ntion admits. \n\n2. In oxytoned proper names in -dv6sf and in the compounds in -dy6s (from \n&ya}, to lead, and &yvv[jLi, to break), -dvup and -Kpdvos, e. g. \'Aaidv6s, KoxdySst \ncaptain ; vavdy6s, naufrdgus ; Bidvccp, dUpdvos, having two horns. \n\n3. In adjectives in -d-ns (Fern. -dXs) derived from verbs- in -a\xc2\xab, in proper \nnames in -drTjs, in substantives in -h-ns (Eem. -Ttw), and in those in -vt7}s of the \nfirst Dec. (Fem. -dris), and in proper names in -rrrj, e. g. axpdrjs, untouched; \nEv(t>pdTr]s, Mii^ptSaTTjy, TroXhriSf -ov, citizen (Fem. ttoXItis) : irpea-fivrris, -ovy old \n,nan ; \'A<ppo5tTr], \'Afx^irpiTT]. \n\nExceptions: (a) to the proper names in -orrjs: roAaTTjs, AaA/xarTjs, Sap^-njs, \nall in -fidTrjs and -(pdr-ns, and compounds formed from verbal roots, e. g. \'SwKpa- \nr7]s] \xe2\x80\x94 (b) KplT-fis, judge, from, the short root Kpl, ktXttjs, builder, and ^vttjs, \none who sacrifices. \n\n4. In Proparoxytones in -IKos, -i\\ov, -Ivos, -Ivovy in words in -ivn, -Iva, \n\'\xe2\x82\xacvr],-vva, in those in -vyosj when <r does not precede the ending; in Pro- \n\n\n\n$ 28.] QUANTITY OF THE PENULT. 45 \n\nProparoxytones in -Up a, and in adjectives in -vpos with a preceding long \nsyllable, e. g. \n\n\'O ^jxlKos, multitude; Sayrh/T], gift ; b Kivdvvosj danger ; \n\nir45l\\op, shoe ; AXyTvay y4(f)vpa, bridge ; \n\n7] Kafilvos, oven ; alffx^m}, shame : l(rxi>pos, strong ; \n\nffeXIvoy, parsley ; &fMvva, defence; (but ox^pos and ixvpSs), firm. \n\nRemark 1. The following may be added to the Proparoxytones in -ivos \nand -Opo, namely, b x\'^^v6s^ rein; 6 iplvSsy wild fig-tree; and ^ KoAAupa, coarse \nbread. \n\nExceptions. ElXaTrfvr], feast, and compounds in -yvy as (from yvv-ft^ woman), \nC. g. au5p6yvv OS, and Kopvurj, club. \n\n5. In substantives in -vtos, whose antepenult is long, and in compound \nadjectives in -SaKpvros and -rpvTos (from SoKpvo}, Tpu\xc2\xab), and also in sub- \nstantives in -Ojtio, -vyii, and -vyuv, and in adverbs in -05 or, e. g. \n\n6 KWKvrSs, wailing ; &Tpvros, indestructible ; 6\\o\\vyfiy vluhtus ; \n\noSdKpvTos, without tears ; \'(dpvfiaj -oltos, seat; 6\\o\\vyuu, ululatus, \n\nfioTpv56vf in clusters. \nException. Map/mpvyf}, splendor. \n\n6. In dissyllabic Oxy tones in -i\\6s, -ip-6s, -ivSs, -i6sy -vxSs, -v(jl6s, \n-vv6s, and in Paroxytones in -i^ij, -vvt], e. g. \n\nx\\/i\\6s, bare ; t} piu6s, skin ; 6 f>vfi6s, pale ; ^vvSs, common ; \n\n6 x^\'^^ifidder; 6 ""los, dart; 6 ^fi6s, mind; Au/iTj, injury; \n\n6 ?un6sf hunger ; 6 x^^^^f juice ; so, &^fios, etc. ; A^w*^* excu6e. \n\nExceptions. Bi6s {6), bow ; irAvvSs (i), washing-trough. \n\n7. In dissyllables in -dos, -avSs (oxytoned), and in dissyllables in -to, which \nbegin with two consonants, e. g. \n\n6 vd.6s, temple ; (pdvos, bnlliant ; (rrfa, pebble ; (pXld, door-post. \n\nEem. 2. The following maybe added to dissyllables in -la: KoXid, shed; \navia, trouble ; Kovta, dust ; and to those in -aos, the variable \'tXaas, and the proper \nnames in -d o s, e. g. \'AfitpidpoLos ; Olv6/xaos is an exception. \n\nExceptions. Ta6s or tocJjs (6), peacock; ffKid U), shadow. \n\n8. The following single words should also be noted: \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nI. d. \n\n"AKpdros, unmixed; veavis, young girl ; rioLpa, turban ; \n\navidpSs, troublesome; oiradSs, attendant; (pdAapos, clear; \n\naii^aSris, self-sufficient ; a-ivdiri, mustard ; 6 ^\\vdpos, tattle. \n\nAlso the proper names, "Afidais, "Avdiros, "Apdros, A-qjxdpdTos, \xc2\xa9edrcS, \'litraj/, \nriptdTros, SapdTTjy (Serapis), \'S.rvfi^dXos, ^dpcrd\\os. \n\nII. r. \n\n*AKpl^i\\s, exact ; iuliH], rebuke ; irap^evoTrhrtjs, gallant. \n\nt<pd^Ifios, strong; epT^os, day-laborer; \n\nrh rdplxos, pickled fish ; 6 7} x\xc2\xab^t3\xc2\xab^\'\'\xc2\xbb swaJkw; \n\n\n\n46 ACCENTS. [^ 29. \n\nAlso the proper names, \'A7x^o\'\'7^\xc2\xbb TpdvlKos, Evplrros, KAXkos (r),*\'0\xc2\xabrrpiy, Boia-Ipu. \nThe following dissyllables should be noted for the sake of the compounds: \nrl/j.-fj, honor; viKi], victory ; (pv\\-fjy tribe ; "vKin^ forest ; \\it6sj little; iilKpSs, small; \n\nin. V. \n\n\'A/*u)ti\xc2\xabj/, blameless; ipvK<a, to holdback; ?^<pvpov, booty; \n\n&<rv\\oy, asylum ; 6 l\\v6st ^^\'* V trdrrvpos, papyrus ; \n\navT-fi {v}, war-cry; iyvi/rji the ham; trirvpov, bran. \n\nAlso the proper names, "A^vdos, ^Apxvras, Bi^vvSs, Ai6vv(ros, Kafxfib<ri]s, Kip- \nKvpa, KcokvtSs. And the dissyllables, >pvx^h soul; 6 Tvpos, cheese; 6 rrvpSs, wheat; \ni Xpv(r6s, gold; Kvirt], grief; y^vxp^Sy cold. \n\nk 29. Accents \n\n1. The written accent designates the tone -syllable, according \nto the original Greek pronunciation. The accented syllable \nwas pronounced with a particular stress as w^ell as elevation of \nvoice. The same is true of the modern Greek. In Enghsh, \ntoo, while the stress of the accented syllable is more particu- \nlarly prominent, there is \xe2\x80\xa2 often also an accompanying elevation \nof the voice, but not so much as in the modem Greek. \n\n2. In the pronunciation of Greek prose, the accent and quan- \ntity were both regarded ; thus, in avSporn-o\'s, while the accentual \nstress was laid on the a, the proper quantity of the penult w was \npreserved. Compare analogous Enghsh words, as siinrisingt \noutpouring, in which both the accent on the antepenult and the \nlength of the penult are observed. \n\n3. How the Greeks observed both the accent and quantity in \npoetry, cannot now be determined. But as it was generally \nsung or recited in the style of chanting, the accent was probably \ndisregarded, as is constantly done in singing at present \n\n4. The Greek has the following marks for the tone or accent \n(7r/D09(i)8iat) : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) The an^ite (- ) to denote the sharp or clear tone, e. g. \nXoyo9 ; \n\n(b) The circumflex (-) io d.ei\\oie Wie protracted ox idnding \ntone, e. g. o-co/xa. Tliis accent consists in uniting the rising \nand falling tone in pronoimcing a long syllable, since, e. g \nthe word o-co/xa was probably pronounced as aoofxa ; \n\n(c) The grave (-) to denote XhefaUirig or heavy tone. \n\n\n\nf 29.] ACCENTS. 4** \n\nRemark 1. The mark of the falling tone was not used. Hence not &v^pci)- \nwhs, \\6yhSi but iv^pcoTTos, \\iyos. The mark of the grave was used only to \ndistinguish certain words, e. g. rls, some one, and rls, who ? and, as Avill be seen \nin \xc2\xa7 31, I, instead of the acute on the final syllable of words in connected \ndiscourse. \n\nRem. 2. The accent stands upon the second vowel of diphthongs ; at the \nbeginning of words commencing with a vowel, the acute and grave stand \nafter the breathing, but the circumflex over it, e. g. o7ra|, avX^ios, tiv etirpj,, \ntZpos, oSfia. But in capital letters, in connection with the diphthongs ^, ??, y, \nthe accent and the breathing stand upon the first vowel, e. g. "AiSrjs. On the \ndiaeresis, see \xc2\xa7 4, Rem. 6. \n\nRem, 3. The grave accent diflFered from the acute as the weaker from the \nstronger accent in ddrim^ntal, or in the Juatin f^neratdrum, the penultimate accent \nin both words being much stronger than the preceding one. The circumflex \naccent denoted a tone like the circumflex inflection in English. \n\nRem. 4. In the United States and Great Britain, Greek is not generally \npronounced by the accents, no regard being had to these so far as the pronun- \nciation is concerned. In a few institutions, however, the pronucciation is \nregulated by the accent ; but where this is the case, the grave and circumflex \naccents are pronoimced in the same manner as the acute. No difference is \ntherefore made in the pronunciation of rifi-ff and ti/x^, nor between yvufjLcu and \nyvdfiais. In these and all similar cases, the Greeks must have made distinc- \ntions. \n\n5. The accent can stand only on one of the last three sylla- \nbles of a word; it was not any natural difficulty but merely \nGreek usage wliich prevented the accent from being placed \nfurther backpthan the antepenult. \n\n6. The acute stands on one of the last tln^ee syllables, whether \ntliis is long or short, e. g. koXo?, av^pomovy 7r6X\xe2\x82\xacfjio<; ; but upon the \nantepenult, only when the last syllable is short, and is also not \nlong by position, e. g. av^powro?, but av^puyrrov. \n\n7. The circumflex stands only on one of the last two sylla- \nbles, and the syllable on which it stands must always be long \nby nature, e. g. rovy o-w/xa ; but it stands upon the penult only \nwhen the ultimate is short, or long only by position, e. g. r^1x^> \n)(p^fx(Xy 7rpa|t9, avAa^, Gen. -aico?, KoXavpoi/\', KaTrjXiKJ/, ArjfxCjva^. \n\nRem. 5, Also in substantives in -l^ and -v^ (Gen. -Ikos, -vkos), i and v long \nby nature, are considered as short in respect to accentuation, e. g. <^om|, Gen. \n\n-iKOSy KTJpV^, Gen. -VKOS. \n\n8. If, therefore, the antepenult is accented, it can have only \nthe acute ; but if the penult is accented, and is long by nature. \n\n\n\n48 ACCENTS. |i 29 \n\nit must have the circumflex, when the ultimate is short, e. g. \nTet^o?, Trparre, but the acute, when the ultimate ^ is long, e. g. \nr\xe2\x82\xacLxov<;, Trpdrroi ; if the penult is short it has only the acute, e. g. \nTttTTw, raTTe. On the ultimate, either the acute or the circumflex \nstands, e. g. TrarTj/a, TrarpoiVy nomiuatives accented on the ulti- \nmate usually have the acute, e. g. iTrrrcvs Trora/iot, ^-qp. \n\nBem. 6. In the inflection-endings, -ai and -ox, and in the adverbs, irp6iraXtu \nand eKira\\ai, the diphthongs, in respect to the accent, are considered short, e. g. \nrpdwe^ai, TinrreTcu, yKwffffoUf iy^payiroi, ;^ci;pot. The optative endings, -o i and \n-oi, e. g. nn\'fia\'aij iKXeltroi, Xc/irot, and the adverb otKoi, domi, at home, are long; \non the contrary, oIkoi, houses, from oIkos. \n\nRem. 7. In the old Ionic and Attic declension, u is considered as short \nin respect to accent, having only half its usual length, as it takes the place of o, \ne. g. M\xe2\x82\xacv4\\\xe2\x82\xac(i)s, avctr/ewv ; \xe2\x80\x94 irdKeus^ irSXeccv \xe2\x80\x94 ; TXcus, &y7jpc05. Gen. IXeo), ayriptc ; \nbut if adjectives like tXioss are declined according to the third Dec, they are \naccented regularly, e. g. <pi\\oye\\u>s, <pi\\oy(\\atTos ; so also in the Dat. Sing, and \nPL, as well as in the. Gen. and Dat. Dual, where the penult is long, e. g. iyripttSy \niyfipcf), ayf]p(f)s, ayi}p(^v. \n\nRem. 8. In the words, cll^e, that, vcdyly certainly, the penult has the acute, \napparently contrary to the rule ; but these must be treated as separate words. \nThe accentuation of the words cfre, oUrf, ZsTrtp, ^is, rovsSf, etc., is to bo \nexplained on the ground, that they are compounded with Enclitics (^ 33). \n\nRem. 9. According to the condition of the last syllable with respect to \naccent, words have the following names: \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) Oxytoncs, when the ultimate has the acute, e. g. rrru^s, kokSsj ^p\\ \n\n(b) Paroxytoncs, when the penult has the acute, e. g. -rvrrw ; \n\n(c) Proparoxytones, when the antepenult has the acute, e. ^iv^petros, rvr- \nrSfifVos, iu^pamoi, Tinrr6iJ.evoi\\ \n\n(d) Perispom^na, when the ultimate has the circumflex, e. g. kokus] \n\n(e) ProperispomCna, when the penult has the circtimflex, e. g. vpay^ia, ^- \nAoC\'ca 5 \n\n(f ) Baiytones, when the ultimate is unaccented, e. g. irpdy^ueray -rp^yfui. \n\n\' Hence the accent often enables us to determine the quantity of syllables, \ne. g. from the acute on the antepenult of Toi^pia, /ioHrpta, we infer tliat the \nultimate is short, othonvise the accent could not stand funhcr \' \' \' \' ^ \npenult, No. 6, above; \xe2\x80\x94 from the circumflex on vlros and x^. . \nsyllables are long by nature, 7; \xe2\x80\x94 from the circumflex on fuUpa and crt.. .;. \nthat the ultimate is short, 7 ; \xe2\x80\x94 from the acute on x^pa^&pa, and "Hpo, V\xe2\x80\x94.i \nthe ultimate is long, othenvise the penult of these words must be ciroumtioxed, \n8; \xe2\x80\x94 from the acute on <^i\\os and irouciKos, that the penult of these words i\xc2\xbb \nshort, otherwise they miiit have been circuniflexed, 8. \xe2\x80\x94 Tb. \n\n\n\ni 30.] CHANGE AND REMOVAL OF THE ACCENT. 49 \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 30. Change and Removal of the Accent hy Inflec \ntion, Composition, and Contraction. \n\n1. When a word is changed by inflection, either in the quan- \ntity of its final syllable or in the number of its syllables, there \nis generally a change or removal of the accent. \n\n(a) By lengthening the final syllable, \n\n(a) a Proparoxytone becomes a Paroxytone, e. g. 7roA.e/i.os, \n\nTToXilXOV ; \n\n(y8) a Properispomenon, a Parox^\'tone, e. g. Tctx\xc2\xa9?, tcixov? ; \n(y) an Oxytone, a Perispomenon, e. g. ^cos, Seov. Yet this \nchange is limited to particular cases. See M5, 7, a, \n\n(b) By shortening the filial syllable, \n\n(a) a dissyllabic Parox}i;one witli a penult long by nature \nbecomes a Properispomenon, e. g. <f>\xe2\x82\xacvyoiy (^ciyc, itpam \n(but ram) ; \n.()8) a polysyllabic Paroxytone, whether the penult is long \nor short, becomes a Proparoxytone, e. g. ySovXeucj, Pov- \nXcve. \n\n(c) By prefixing a syllable or syllables to a word, the accent \nis commonly removed towards the beginning of the word, e. g. \n</>\xe2\x82\xacvya), \xe2\x82\xac00701\'; so also in compounds, always in verbs, com- \nmonly in substantives and adjectives, e. g. 65os crvvoSo?, ^cos \n<l>tX63\xe2\x82\xacosi TLyLxi arlfio^, <f>ixry\xe2\x82\xac aTr6<f>\xe2\x82\xacvy\xe2\x82\xac. But whcn syllables \nare appended to a word, the accent is removed towards the \nend of the word, C. g. rvTrroj, rvTrro/ic^a, n;0<^;croyxc^a. \n\nRemark 1. -The particular cases of the change of accent by inflection, and \nthe exceptions to the gfcneral rules here stated, will be seen below, under the \naccentuation of the several parts of speech. \n\n2. The following principles apply in contraction : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(1) Wlien neither of the two syllables to be contracted is \naccented, the contracted syllable also is imaccented ; and the \nsyllable which had the accent previous to contraction, still \nretains it, e. g. <^iXe\xe2\x82\xac = </)t!X\xe2\x82\xaci (but </)tAc\xe2\x82\xact = (fnXel), yiveL = y\xe2\x82\xacV\xe2\x82\xacL (Init \nycvctov = ycvtoF). \n\n5 \n\n\n\n60 CHANGE OF THE ACCENT. [^ 3l. \n\n(2) But when one of the two syllables to be contracted is \naccented, the contracted syllable also is accented, \n\n(a) when the contracted syllable is the antepenult or penult, \nit takes the accent which the general rules require, e. g. \n\nAyaivdoixai = ayairSojiai <(>i\\e6ixevo5 = (piXov^^vos \n\niaraSros = iffraiTOS op^6ovffi = op^ovffi \n\nvXi\\\xe2\x82\xac(T(Ta = vKri<T<Ta tiixoSvtuv = rificivTccv ; \n\n(b) when the contracted syllable is the ultimate, it takes the \n\nacute, when the last of the syllables to be contracted had \n\nthe acute ; the chcumfLex, when the first of the syllables \n\nwas accented, e. g. eo-racos = ka-rui^, VX^^ "^ \'^X\xc2\xb0\'\'* \n\nRem. 2. The exceptions to the principles stated, will be seen below, under \nthe contract Declensions and Conjugations. \n\nCHANGE AND REMOVAI OF THE ACCENT IN CONNECTED \n\nDISCOURSE. \n\n\xc2\xa731. I. Grave instead of the Acute. \xe2\x80\x94 II. Crasis. \xe2\x80\x94 \nIII. Elision. \xe2\x80\x94 IV. Anastrophe. \n\nI. In connected discourse, the Oxytones receive the mark of \nthe grave, i. e. by the close connection of the words with each \nother the sharp tone is weakened or depressed, e. g. Et /x^ \nfx7]Tpvir] TrepiKoXXr]^ \'HepL/Boia rjv. But the acute must stand before \nevery punctuation-mark by which an actual di\\ision is made \nin the thought, as well as at the end of the verse, e. g. \'O /xcv \nKvpob Irrepaae rbv wora/Aoj/, oi \xc2\xa7\xe2\x82\xac irokipnot a7ri(f>vyov. \n\nExceptions. The interrogatives rls, t/, quis 1 who ? quid ? ichai f always \nremain oxytoned. \n\nRemark 1. When an Oxytone is not closely connected with the other \nwords, i. e. when it is treated grammatically, the acute remains, e. g. elrh fi^ \n\\4yeis \xe2\x80\x94 rh av^p Suo/xa. \n\nII. Words united by Crasis {\xc2\xa7 10), have only the accent ol \nthe second word, that being the more important, e. g. TayoJ^ait \nfrom TO dya^oV. \\Vlien the second word is a dissyllabic Paroxy- \ntone with a short final syllable, the accent, accorduig to \xc2\xa7 30, 2, \n(2) (a), is changed into the circumflex, e. g. to l^ro? = tovttos, \nTa oAAa = ToXAa, to epyov = Tovpyov | to. ottXxi = ^J^ttAo, eytu oi/iat :^ \neyw/xat. \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 32.] ATONICS OR PROCLITICS. 51 \n\nIII. When an unaccented vowel is elided {\xc2\xa7 13), the accent \nof the word is not changed, e. g. tovt Icmv. But if the elided \nvowel is accented, its accent is thrown back upon the preceding \nsyllable, as an acute ; yet, when the elided word is a preposi- \ntion or one of the particles, dAXa, ov8c, /xT^Se (and the poetic \n^Se, tSe), the accent wholly disappears, and also when the \naccented vowel of monosyllabic words is elided, e. g. \n\niroAAcb iira^ov = ttoAA\' iira^ov rrapa ifiov = irap ifiov \n\nSeiya ipuras = Sfiy\' ipun^s anh kaurov = d<^\' kavrov \n\n<f>r}fi\\ iy(t> = (jyfjfi iyta oAAa iyu> = dAA\' iy^ \n\ncuVxpcf \xe2\x82\xac\\e^as = aXaxp e^e^as ovSe iyto = ovS" iyca \n\n(irrh, ^<rav = eTrr* ^cay \xe2\x96\xa0^ Se 8s := i) S* 3s. \n\nIV. Anastrophe. When a preposition follows the word which \nit should precede, the tone of the preposition naturally inclines \nback to its word, and hence the accent is removed from the \nultimate to the penult; this drawing back of the accent is \ncalled Anastrophe (dvacrTpo(t>7]) , e. g. \n\nfidxij^ eft but M fidxTls Ufwy &Tro but airh pfuv \n\n\'idaKTjy Kara " Kark \'l^aKrjv KoAwv irfpi " irepl koXuv. \n\nHem. 2. The prepositions, a^l<pi^ ami, aud, Sid, and the poetic hrai, inrdpy \niiai, TTopai, do not admit Anastrophe. If the preposition stands between an \nadjective and a substantive, according to Aristarchus the Anastrophe is found \nonly when the substantive stands first, e. g. e.av^(f em SiKjjerr* (but Siy^evri 4irl \nBdy^Cj)). Other Grammarians reject the Anastrophe in both cases. \xe2\x80\x94 In poetry, \nvfpi is subject to Anastrophe only when it governs the Gen., but then very \noften, and even when the Gen. and irtpl are separated by other words. See \n\xc2\xa7 300, (c.) \n\nRem. 3. Prepositions, moreover, admit Anastrophe, when they are used \ninstead of abridged forms of the verb, e. g. &va instead of avdaby^n ; fXfTa, irdpa, \nfiTi, vvo, irepi, tvi, instead of the indicative present of tivai, compounded with \nthese prepositions, e. g. ^7\xc2\xab irdpa instead of irdpa/jn, ir4pi instead of irtpUaTi ; \nalso, when the preposition is separated from the verb and placed after it, which \nis often the case in the Epic dialect, e. g. oAeVos itiro irdvras kralpovs. But the \naccent of ^^6 is drawn back without any reason, in such phrases as airh ^a\\d(r- \niTTjs oIk\xe2\x82\xac7u, avh cTKOTTov, ott\' i\\iriSos, and the like ; in such cases it is properly on \nthe ultimate. \n\n\n\n^ 32. V. Atonies or Proclitics. \n\nAtonies or Proclitics, are certain monosyllables which, in \nconnected discourse, are so closely united to the following \n\n\n\n52 ENCLITICS. [^ 33. \n\nword, that they coalesce with it, and lose their accent. They \naxe : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) the forms of the article, 6, 17, ot, at; \n\n(b) the prepositions, cv, cts (is), iK (ii), m, ad; but if c| is \nafter the word w^hich it governs, and at the end of a verse, \nor before a punctuation-mark, it retains the accent, e. g. \nKa/cw c^, H. I, 472 ; in prose, c^ does not stand after its \ncase. \n\n(c) the conjunctions, ws (as), d\\ but if ws follows the word \nwhich it should precede, it has the accent ; this position, \nhowever, is found only among the poets, e. g. KaKol Stq, \nfor o)? KaKoi; \n\n(d) ov {ovK, ovx), not ; but at the end of a sentence and with \nthe meaning No, it has the accent, ov (ovk). Comp. \n\xc2\xa7 15, Rem. 2. \n\n\xc2\xa7 33. VI. Enclitics. \n\nEnclitics are certain words of one or two syllables, wliich, m \nconnected discourse, are so closely joined, in particular cases, \nto the preceding word, that they either lose their tone or throw \nit back upon the precediag word, e. g. ^tXo? n?, TroXe/tos T19. \nThey are : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) the verbs elfil, to be, and (^Tj/i/, to sat/, in the Pres. Indie, except the second \nPers. Sing., el, thou art, and (pps, thou sayest ; \n\n(b) the foUo-sving forms of the three personal pronouns in the Attic dia- \nlect : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n\n\nT. P. S. p.ov \nfiol \nMe\' \n\n\n\nn. p. s. ffov \n\ncol \nc4 \n\n\n\nIII. p. S. ov Dual. a<puiiv PL v(pl<n {v) \n\n\n\n01 \n\nI, fly ; \n\n\n\n(c) the indefinite pronouns, tIs, t1, through all the cases and numbers, \ntogether with the abridged forms rod and rcf, and the indefinite adverbs xdiSy \nirdi, iri], irov, iroStl, Trobiv, irol, -nori 5 but the corresponding interrogative pro- \nnouns are always accented, e. g. t/s, tI, trSis, etc. ; \n\n(d) the following particles in the Attic dialect, t\xe2\x82\xac, toI, ye, vvv, Tep (and in \nthe Epic, /ce, kcV, vv, pd), and the inseparable particle Se, \xc2\xa7 34, Rem. 3. \n\nRemark. Several small words are combined with these enclitics, forming \nwith them one word, with a meaning of its own, e. g. cfre, oGre, firirf, Ssre, \n&STrep, \'oiTis, etc. \n\n\n\ni 34.] INCLINATION OP THE ACCENT. 53 \n\n\n\n^ 34:, Inclination of the Accent. \n\n1. An Qxytone so unites with the following enclitic, that the \naccent, which is commonly grave in the middle of a sentence \n(^ 31, I), again becomes acute, e. g. \n\n^p ris for b7]p r\\s koKos iariv for KoXhs earh \n\nKai Ttves " Kol tip is iroTaix6s 76 " iroTafihs ye \n\nKa\\6s re " Ka\\hs t4 vora/JLoi rives " iroTafxol rives. \n\n2. A Perispomenon unites with tne following enclitic without \nfurther change of the accent, e. g. \n\n<pu>s ri for (pus rl <l>i\\e7 ris for (piXei rU \n\n<pci>s icrriv \'\' (^ws ecriV KoXov rivos " koXov rtv6s. \n\nRemark 1. A Perispomenon followed by a dissyllabic enclitic, is regarded \nas an Oxytone. For as (pus ianv, for example, are considered as one word in \nrespect to accent, and as the circumflex cannot go further back than the penult \n(\xc2\xa7 29, 7), the Perispomenon must be regarded as an Oxytone. Long syllables \nin enclitics are treated as short in respect to the accent ; hence oTvrivoiv, Zvri- \nvQ)v, are viewed as separate words, e. g. koXuv nvuv. \n\n3. A Pai\'oxytone unites with the following monosyllabic \nenchtic without further change of the accent ; but there is no \ninclination when the enclitic is a dissyllable, e. g. \n\n<pi\\os fiov for <plKos fxov but <pi\\os iarlv, <pi\\oi (pcurlv \n&X\\os ira\xc2\xbbs " &AAos irws \'\' &Wos vore, &W(i)V rivStv. \n\nKem. 2. It is evident that if there was an inclination of the accent when a \nParoxytone was followed by a dissyllabic enclitic, the accent would stand on \nthe fourth syllable, e. g. ^\'Xoi-<pa<TiVy which is contrary to the usa^^c of the \nlanguage. \n\n4. A Proparoxytone and a Properispomenon unite ^vith the \nfollowing enclitic, and take an acute accent on the last sylla- \nble; this syllable, forms the tone-syllable for the following \nenchtic, as av^^pw-Tros rt?, e. g. \n\n&v^pa}Tr6s Tis for 6.v^p(i}Tros t\\s ctwjjA ri for cSifia r\\ \n\n^.v^pwirol rives " iv^payKoi rives au/xd iffriv " trcvfjLa early. \n\nException.\' A Properispomenon, ending in ^ or 1^, does not admit the incli- \nnation of a dissyllabic enclitic, e. g. o5a.o^ riv6s, oSAo| earlvy <l>o(yi^ iariy^ t-fipv^ \nearivf \\cu\\wl/ eariv. \n\n5* \n\n\n\n^4 ENCLITICS ACJENTEIf. [\xc2\xa7 35 \n\nRem. 3. The local suifix 5e (^e), which expresses the relation to a place^ \nwhither, coalesces with substantives according to the rules of inclination, e. g. \n\n"OXv/jLTToude \'2,<f)rjrT6vde oi/pavSvSe Ilv^Side (from Tlv^d) \n\nSo \'A^TjJ\'a^e (i. e. \'A^vasSe), ITAoTata^e {UKaraiai), xa^fJ^C^ {x\xc2\xb0-H-^^ Ace.) The \nsuffix Se when appended to the Demon, pronoun draws the accent of this pro- \nnoun to the syllable before Se. In the oblique cases, these strengthened \npronouns are accented according to the rules for Oxytones, ^ 45, 7 (a), e. g. \n\nrSffos \xe2\x80\x94 roaSsde, rocovde, roff^Se, roa-fivSe, roaSivZe^ \n\nroLOs \xe2\x80\x94 TotosSe, rr}XLK05 \xe2\x80\x94 ttjAikSsSc, roiai \xe2\x80\x94 roialSef \n\n5. \xc2\xa5/ben several enclitics occur together, each throws back \nits accent on the preceding, e. g. el Trip tls cri /xot ^lycrt Trore. \n\n$35. Enclitics accented. \n\nSome enclitics, whose signification allows them to be in a measure indepen- \ndent, are accented in the following cases : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n1. \'EcT^ (j/) is accented on the penult, when it stands in connection with an \nInf. for elecTTt (r), and after the particles ctAA\', \xe2\x82\xact, ouk, /a^, ws, kuI, /xev, oti, irov, \nand the pi\'onoun tout", and also at the beginning of a sentence, e. g. jSe?v iffnv \n(licet videre), et ianv, ovk fffriv, tout eariVj iari ^eos, etc.; the other forms of \nflfil which are capable of inclination, retain the usual accent on the ultimate, \nwhen they stand at the beginning of a sentence, e. g. elal ^eoi. \n\n2. The forms of (prj/xi Avliich are capable of inclination, retain the accent, \nwhen they stand at the beginning of a sentence, and also when they are sep- \narated from the preceding word by a punctuation-mark, e. g. <f>r}iA iyd. \xe2\x80\x94 "Earip \n\n3. The enclitic Pers. pronouns, <roD, aoif <r4, oT, ffcpitri (v), retain their accent: \n(a) when an accented Prep, precedes, e. g. iraph <rov, fiera ere, irphs aoi. But \n\nthe enclitic fonns of \xe2\x99\xa6lie first Pers. pronoun are not used with accented \nprepositions, but, instead of them, the longer and regularly accented \nforms, e. g. \n\nTrap\' ifiov not irapd fiov irphs i/xol not irp6s fioi \n\nKOT ifi4 " Kard fie vepi i/JLOv " vepl fiov. \n\nRemark 1. There are, however, a few instances of enclitics of the first Pers. \npronoun standing with accented pi-epositions, e. g. Trp6s fie. PI. SjTnp. 218, c. \n\nRem. 2. When the emphasis is on the preposition, there is an inclination \nof the accent, e. g. iiri ce ^ cvv croi, X. An. 7. 7, 32 (against yon, rather than with \nyou). \xe2\x80\x94 The enclitic forms are used with the unaccented prepositions, e. g. \xe2\x82\xac\xc2\xab \n(jlov, ^v fioi, es 0-6, \xe2\x82\xacs fie, ck <tov, ev aoi. But when the emphasis is on the pro- \nnoun, there is no inclination, and instead of /noO, /xof, fi4, \xe2\x80\x94 e/xoD, e/tof, e/xe, are \nused, e. g. 4u ifiol, aJO^ ovk iu aoL \n\n\n\nI 36.] DIVISION OF SYLLABLES. 55 \n\n(h) The enclitic pronouns generally retain their accent when they are em- \nphatic, as in antitheses, e. g. e>e /col (r4 ; e>e ^ <re ; hence the forms oh, of, \ne, are accented only when they are used as reflexive pronouns. \n\n4. The pronoun rls is accented when it stands at the beginning of a sentence, \ne. g. rives Xiyovtriv, \n\n5. There is no inclination, when the accent of the word on which the enclitic \nrests disappears by Elision, e. g. KoAbs S* iariv, but KoXhs 5e itrriv \xe2\x80\x94 iroKKol 3* \nwrivf but TToAAol 5e eiffiv.. \n\n\n\n6 36. Divisio7i of Syllables , \n\nPreliminary Remarks. The division of syllables, according to our mode \nof pronouncing Greek, depends in part upon the place of the accent. The \nterm accent and (xccented^ througliout these niles, is used ^nth reference to our \npronunciation of the Greek, and not to the ^\\Titten accent on the Greek words. \n\nThe accent (stress) is on the penult in dissyllables, and on the antepenult in \npolysyllables, when the penult is short. The accent on the penult or antepenult \nis called the primary accent. If two syllables precede the primary accent, there \nis a secondary accent on the first syllable of the Avord. \n\nThe following rules exhibit the more general method of dividing syllables, \nexcept where the pronunciation is regulated by the Greek accent : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n1. A single consonant between the vowels of the penult and ultimate is \njoined to the latter, e. g. ii-yoi, ira-pd, fid-\\a, \'l-va, 1-t6s, i-x^^^Pt 7r(^Ae-/ios, crrpaTeu- \n(la, X"^^"^^^* ?wxci-y6s, inroXa-fidov. \n\nException. In dissyllables, a single consonant following 6 or o is joined to \nthe first syllable, e. g. A.J7-0S, TeA.-oy, \'trep-l, or-i, iro\\-v, ex\'*^) (Tr6\\-os. \n\n2. The double consonants f and \\^ are joined to the vowel preceding them ; \nc. g. Td|-aj, Zi^-os, irpa^-is, bLVTira^-dfievos. But ^ is joined to the vowel following \nit, except when it stands after e or 0, or after an accented vowel in the ante- \npenult, \xe2\x80\x94 in which case it is joined with these vowels; e. g. vo/ii-C/w, vojii-^i, \napnrd-^(a ; but rpdire^-ay 6^-os, uofii^-oynv, apird^-oyiev. \n\n3. A single consonant (except in the penult) before or after the vowels a and \n% having the accent, and also a single consonant bqfore or after e and having \nthe accent, is joinei to these vowels: e. g. ay-a^6s, -rror-afLus, j8a-<rtA-ea, v-iro\\- \naPdv, S-Trdr-epos, rl^-of^ev, a-irop-ia, ev-SiK-la, iin-^lfx-ia\\ for a single consonant \nafter a long rovel, etc., see 4.* \n\nException. A single consonant preceded by o, and followed by two vowels, \nthe first of which is e or i, is joined to the vowel after it ; e. g. arpa-Tid, aucuTTd- \n<rea>5, ffTpa-ri^ris (not (npai-id, etc.). \n\n4. A single consonant after a long vowel, a diphthong or u, is joined to the \nvowel following", e. g. o7roT7j-A.(J-^t, i<p7]-^iepos, (piXw-repos, affoXov-^la, OLKOv-craTe \nfii-piaSy a^v-fjiiay (pv-yovres, (pv-yofxev. \n\nException.. A single consonant following long a or t in the antepenult, and \nhaving the accent, is joined with the vowel preceding ; e. g. airoKpfu-aTo, iav \n(tdp-aaev. \n\n\n\n56 DIVISION OF THE PARTS OF SPEECH, ETC. [^ 37, 38 \n\n5. Two single consonants coming together in the middle of a word, art \nseparated ; e. g. iro\\-\\d, ta-rdvai, re^-vrjKa, ^ap-paXscus, KXvTorex-VT}S. \n\nException. A mute and liquid are sometimes joined to the following vowel \\ \ne. g. iri-rpaxrxof. \n\n6. When three consonants come together in the middle of a word, the last \ntwo, if a mute and liquid, are joined to the following vowel ; if not, the last \nonly ; e. g. &u-^pco\'n-os, av-dpia, but irepcp-^v. \n\n7. Compounds are divided into their constituent parts, when the first part \nends with a consonant ; but if the first part ends with a vowel followed by a \nshort syllable, the compound is divided, like a simple word ; e. g. iK-fiaivw^ \n(rvi/\xe2\x82\xacK-<pct>vr}<nSf irpS^-effis, auaS-acrts, but wtto-^tijs, not vTro<p-^]rT}s \', so \xe2\x80\xa2jrapa- \n\n\xc2\xa7 37. Punctuation-marks \xe2\x80\x94 Diastole . \n\n1. The colon and semicolon are indicated by the same mark, a point above \nthe line, e. g. ES eXe|os \xe2\x80\xa2 ttclvt^s yap uixoX6y7]cav. The interrogation-mark is \nour semicolon, e. g. Tis ravia iirolria-ev ; who did this ? The period, comma, and \nmark of exclamation have the same characters as in English; the mark of \nexclamation is rarely used. \n\n2. The Diastole (or Hypodiastole), which has the same character as the \ncomma, is used to distinguish certain compound words from others of like \nsound, but of dissimilar meaning, e. g. o, ri, whatever, and otx, that, since ; S, t\xe2\x82\xac, \nwhatever^ and Sre, when. More recently, such words are generally separated in \nwriting marely, e. g. \'6 t<, 2 re. \n\n\n\nSECTION II. \n\nETYMOLOGY, OR GRAMMATICAL FORMS. \n\n$38. Division of the Pai\'ts of Speech. \xe2\x80\x94 Inflection \n\n1. Etymology relates to the form and meaning of the Parts \nof Speech. \n\n2. The Parts of Speech are : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(1) Substantives, which denote anytliing wliich exists, any \nobject (person or tiling) ; as onan, rose, house, virtue; \n\n(2) Adjectives, which denote a property or quahty; 2iS greats \nsmallf red, beautiful, hateful; \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 38.] DIVISION OF THE PARTS OF SPEECH. INFLECTION. 57 \n\n(3) Pronouns, which denote the relation of the object spoken \nof to the speaker (\xc2\xa7 86) ; as J, thoUf he, this, that, mine, thine, \nhis; \n\n(4) Numerals, which denote the number or quantity of an \nobject; as one, two, three, many, few ; \n\n(5) Verbs, which denote an action or state; as to hhom, to \nwake, to sleep, to love, to censure ; \n\n(6) Adverbs, which denote the way and manner in which an \naction takes place, or the relations of place, time, manner, qual- \nity, and number; as here, yesterday, heautifuUy (=in a beautiful \nmanner), perJmps, often, rarely ; \n\n(7) Prepositions, wliich denote the relation of space, time, \netc. of an object to an action or thing; as (to stand) before the \nhouse, after sunset, before sleep ; \n\n(8) Conjunctions, wliich connect words and sentences, or \ndetermine the relation between sentences ; as and, but, because. \n\n3. Words are either essential *wox^s, i. e. such as express a \nnotion, or idea, viz. the substantive, adjective, verb, and the \nadverbs derived from them ; or formal words, i. e. such as \nexpress merely the relations of the idea to the speaker or some \none else, viz. the pronoun, numeral, preposition, conjunction, the \nadverbs derived from them, and the verb cTmi, to be, when it is \nused as a copula, with an adjective or substantive for its predi- \ncate; as 6 avSpwnros \'^vrjros cart v. \n\nRemark. Besides the parts of speech above mentioned, there are certain \norganic sounds, called interjections ; as alas ! oh ! ah ! They express neither \nan idea nor the relation of an idea, and hence are not to be considered as proper \nwords. \xe2\x80\x94 Prepositions, conjunctions, and adverbs not derived from adjectives \nand substantives, are included under the common name of Particles. \n\n4. Inflection is the variation or modification of a word in \norder to indicate its diflerent relations. The inflection of the \nsubstantive, adjective, pronoun, and numeral, is termed Declen- \nsion ; the inflection of the verb. Conjugation. The other parts \nof speech do not admit inflection. \n\n\n\n68 DIFFERENT KINDS AND GENDER OP SUBSTANTIVES. [H 39, 40 \n\nCHAPTER I. \nThe Substantive. \n\n$39. Different kinds of Substantives. \n\n1. When a substantive (^ 38) indicates an object, which has \nan actual, independent existence, it is termed a Concrete substan- \ntive, e. g. man, woman, lion, earth, flower, host ; but when the \nsubstantive indicates an action or quahty, which is only conceived \nof as being something actual or independent, it is called an \nAbstract substantive, e. g. virtue, wisdom. \n\n2. The Concretes are, \n\n(a) Proper nouns, when they denote only single persons or \nthings, and not a class ; as Cyrus, Plato, Hellas, Athens ; \n\n(b) Appellatives, when they denote an entire class or an \nindividual of a class ; as mortqj,, tree, man, woman, flower. \n\nRemark. Appellatives are called material nouns, when they indicate the \nsimple material, e. g. milk, dust, water, gold, coin, grain ; collective nouns, when \nthey designate many single persons or things as one whole, e. g. mankind^ \ncavalry, fleet ; nouns of quantity, when they denote measure or weight, e. g. a \nbushel, a pound. \n\n$40. Gender of Substantives. \n\nSubstantives have three genders, as in Latin ; the gender is \ndetermined partly by the meaning of the substantives, and \npartly by their endings. The last mode will be more fully \ntreated under the several declensions. The following general \nrules determine the gender of substantives \xe2\x80\xa2by their mean- \n\n\n\ning: \n\n\n\n1. The names of males, of nations, winds, months, and most \nrivers, are masculine, e. g. 6 ^ao-tXcvs, the king; oi "EXXrjie^y 6 \nVaix-qXuav (January, nearly) ; 6 *AA^\xe2\x82\xacto9, the Alpheus ; 6 ^post tJie \nsoutJieast loind. \n\nRemark 1. Exceptions : Diminutives in -ov, which are not proper names \n(these are conceived of as things and are neuter) ; e. g. rh /xfipdniov, the lad \n(but proper names of females in -ov are feminine, e. g. rj A(6yTioy) ; also ri \nkvSpdiroSov, a slave, mancipium; to ircuStKd, a favorite; and some rivers, e.g. \n^ 2ti;|, and also some according to the ending,\' e. g. ^ A^dij. \n\n2. The names of females are feminine, e. g. fj fn^pt mother. \n\n\n\n$ 40.] GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. 59 \n\n3. The names of the letters, infinitives, all indeclinable \nwords, and every word used as a mere s;jT.Tibol, are neuter, e. g. \nTO Xa/xySSo, TO TVTTretv, the Striking ; to jj-i^rjp, the word mother. \n\nRem. 2. The gender of the names of mountains is determined by their \nendings-, hence (a) masculine, \'EK^k^i/, -wvos, etc.; those in -os, Gen. -on, e.g. \nIlapva(x6s\\ in -ws, -\xc2\xab, e. g.^A^ws (d^Epul, derived from the name of a person, \nis particularly to be observed) ; (b) feminine, those in -17 (a), Gen. -rjs, e. g. \nAj\'tj/17, "IStj, OJfrTj ; those in -tj and -us, e. g. "AA-n-ts, Gen. -ews, "A\\7reis, -eajv, \nKctpa/i^ts, -tSos, "O-i^pus, -uos (masculine in Lat.), lla.pvr]s, -fi^os } (c) neuter, those \nin -oj/, e. g. AuKotoj/, n^\\<ov. \n\nRem. 3. The gender of the names of places also is determined almost entirely \nby the endings ; only a few of these are feminine, properly agreeing with the fem- \ninine appellatives 77], X\'*>P\'^i vrjaos (i. e. viovcra x^pa); t^oKis to be supplied with \nthem; (a) names of cities and islands in -os, -ov, e. g. ^ Kopivbos [ttSKls]., v \'P65os \n[vrjaos], ri AtjAos [vrjo-os] (except 6 \'OyxTlf^T 6s, 6 \'ClpuirSs, 6 Alyia\\6s, 6 Kdvcairos :, \nusually 6 \'OpxofJ.ei\'^s, b \'AKiapros; but generally t] UvKos and t] ^EiriSavpos) ; and \nthe following names of countries : r) A^yirTrros, 7] XeppSyrfaos, rj "\'Hiret^os, \xe2\x96\xa0>] IleAo- \n7r6vvT](ros ; (b) names of cities in -uu, e. g. i] Ba^v\\<tii/, -wvos, tj AaKeSaift&jj/, -ovos, \n7] \'Av^huiv, -6yos, ^ Xa\\Kr}d(i)v, -ovos, 7] Kapxv^<^^i -ovos (except 6 Oluewu and 6 \nBpavpuv, -uvQs, usually 6 Mapa^cvy, -wvos; but commonly tj 2t/cucii/, -wi/os) ; (c) \nif Tpoi(r]w, -Tjvos. The gender of the others is determined by the endings. \nHence, \n\n(a) All names of countries in -os, Gen. -ou (except those named above), are \nmasculine, e. g. 6 B6criropos, \'la^iJ.6s, USutos, \'EWtisttovtos, Alyui\\6s ; all plural \nnames of cities in -01, Gen. -wu, e.g. *tAi7r7rot; names of cities in -ovs. Gen. \n\xe2\x80\xa2ovvTos, e. g. 6 \'Tipovs (some of these are used both as masculine and feminine, \ne. g. *t\\oOs ; \'Afia^ovs, Kepaaovs, \'Pa/uroCs, 2jSoi5s, and TpaiT((ovs, are feminine \nonly) ; those in -as. Gen. -avros, c. g. 6 Tdpas; those in -eus, Gen. -cws, e. g. \n6 ^avoTfvs ; finally, 6 Mda-qs, Gen. -tjtos ; \n\n(b) All names of countries of the first Dec. and those of the third, which \nhave feminine endings, are feminine (see \xc2\xa7 66, II), e. g. ij \'EAeucts, -ivos, ri \n^aXafits, -7vos, CtC. ; \n\n(c) All in -oj/, Gen. -ou; plurals in -o. Gen. -uv, and those in -os, Gen. -ovs, \nare neuter, e. g. rb "Wiov, to AevKrpa, rh \'\'Apyos, Gen. -ovs. \n\n4. The names of persons wliich have only one form for the \nMasc. and Fem. are of common gender, e. g. 6 17 ^co\'s, god and \ngoddess ; orj irats, boy and girl. \n\nRem. 4. Movable substantives are such as change their ending so as to \nindicate the natural gender, e. g. b fiwtriKfvs^ king ; i] fiaaiXeia, queen. See For- \nmation of Words. \n\nRem. 5. Substantives (mostly names of animals) which have but one gram- \nmatical gender, either Masc. or Fem., to denote both genders, are called \nEpicenes (eTriKoiva), e. g. r] akaytrri^, the fox, whether the male or female fox : 7} \n&pKros, the bear; ij KdiJ.r}\\os, the camel; 6 fivs, the mouse; i} xf^*5ci>\', the swallow ; \nh ols, the sheep ; fj jSoDs (collectively), ot $6\xe2\x82\xacs, cattle; 6 \'imros, horse (indefinitely), \nbut in PI., ai linroi ; but when the natural gender is to be distinguished, ipprtu^ \nmale, or ^\\vs. female, is added, e. g. \\ayws 6 ^\\vs, the female hare; oAcotttjI ri \n&^(>r}v, the male fox ; or the gender may be indicated by prefixing the article, or \nby another adjective, e. g. 6 &pKTos, the male bear. Some masculine names of \nanimals have also the corresponding feminine forms, e.g. b K4<av, a lion: ^ \nA.\xe2\x82\xacaii/a, a lioness. See Rem. 4. \xe2\x80\x94 Here belong, in the second place, the Masc. \nnames of persons in the PI., which include the Fem., e. g. oi yoviis, the parenU \noi ircuSes, libeii, the children (sons and daughters). \n\n\n\n60 \n\n\n\nNUMBER CASE, AND DECLENSION. FIRST DEC. [^ 41,4? \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa741. Number, Case, and Declension. \n\n1. The Greek has three Numbers ; the Singular, denoting one \nperson or thing ; the Plural more than one ; and the Dual, two. \n\nRemark 1. The dual is not often used; it is found most frequently in the \nAttic dialect ; it does not occur in the ^olic, nor in the Hellenistic Greek \n\n2. The Greek has five Cases,i Nominative, Genitive, Dative, \nAccusative, and Vocative. \n\nRem. 2. The Nom. and Voc, as they represent an object as independent of \nany other, are called independent cases (casus recti) ; the others, as they rep- \nresent an object as dependent on or related to some other, are called dependent \ncases {casus ohliqui). \n\nRem. 3. Neuter substantives and adjectives have the same form in the Nom^ \nAce, and Voc. of all numbers. The dual has only two case-endings ; one for \nthe Nom., Ace, and Voc, the other for the Gen. and Dat. \n\n3. Tliere are in the Greek tliree difierent ways of inflecting \nsubstantives; distinguished as the First, Second, and Tliird \nDeclensions. \n\nRem. 4. The three declensions may be reduced to two principal declensions, \nviz. the strong and the weak. The case-endings of the strong are prominent and \nclearly distinguishable, while those of the weak are less distinctly marked. \nWords of the third Dec. belong to the strong, those of the first and second to \nthe weak. In tiie third Dec. the case-endings uniformly appear pure ; in the \nfirst and second this is less so, because in these declensions the stems end in a \nvowel, and hence combine with the case-endings which begin with a vowel. \nThe inflexion of both the principal declensions, in the Masc. and ^\'em^ is as \nfollows : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n\n\n\n\nSingular. \n\n\nPlural. \n\n\nDual. \n\n\n\n\nStrong. \n\n\nWeak. \n\n\nStrong. \n\n\nWeak. \n\n\nStrong. \n\n\nWeak. \n\n\nNom. \n\n\ns \n\n\nI\xe2\x80\x94 II s \n\n\nfS \n\n\nI \n\n\n6 \n\n\n6 \n\n\nGen. \n\n\n05 \n\n\nS \n\n\nwv \n\n\noev \n\n\nOIV \n\n\nUf \n\n\nDat. \n\n\nt \n\n\n\n\nci{v) \n\n\nIS \n\n\noiy \n\n\ntr \n\n\nAce. \n\n\nV and a \n\n\nV \n\n\nas \n\n\nOS \n\n\ne \n\n\nc \n\n\n\nM2. First Declension. \n\nThe fii\'st declension has four endings, a and 17 feminine ; ds \nand Tf]<; mascuhne. \n\n\n\n\' See a fuller statement under the Cases in the Syntax, 4 268, seq. \n\n\n\n\xc2\xab43.] \n\n\n\nNOUNS OF THE FEMININE GENDER. \n\n\n\n61 \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nEndings. \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nSingular. \n\n\nPlural. \n\n\nDual. \n\n\nNom. \n\n\nd d or 77 \n\n\nas or TJS \n\n\nat \n\n\nd \n\n\nGen. \n\n\nTjS OS \n\n\nvs \n\n\nov \n\n\nuv \n\n\naiv \n\n\nDat. \n\n\nV 9 \n\n\nV \n\n\nf V \n\n\nous \n\n\naiv \n\n\nAce. \n\n\nav Ov \n\n\nw \n\n\nav Tjv \n\n\nas \n\n\na \n\n\nVoc. \n\n\nd d \n\n\nV\' \n\n\nd 7?, d. \n\n\nai \n\n\nd. \n\n\n\nRemark 1. It will be seen from the above terminations, that the plural as \nwell as the dual endings are the same, whatever may be the form of the singu- \nlar. \n\nRem. 2, The original ending of the Dat. PI. was ai<ri (v), as in the second \nDec. to" \xc2\xbb(\xc2\xbb\'), e.g. SiKatcri, rala-i, KofjiiraTcri, ^\xe2\x82\xaco7<ti, afiiKpoiai, aya^o7<ri. This \nform is also found in the Attic poets, and is not foreign even to prose, at least \nto that of Plato, especially in the second Dec. Even the Ionic form -^<ri (y) \nis sometimes used by the Attic poets. \n\n\n\n$ 43. Nou7is of the Feminine Gender. \n\n1. (a) The Nom. ends in a or a, wliich remains in all the \nCases, if it is preceded by p, \xe2\x82\xac, or i {a jnire), e. g. x^P^ land; \nihia,form; aocfiLa, icisdom ; -xpiiOi utility ; evvoiOy benevolence ; here \nalso belong the contracts in a (see No. 2), e. g. ftm; some sub- \nstantives in d, e. g. dAxiXa, war-cry, and some proper names, e. g. \n*Av8pofif.Ba, ArySd, rcAd, <I>tA.o^ryXd, Gen. -as, Dat. -a, Acc. -ai/. \n\nRemark 1. Th) following words whose stem ends in p, take the ending tj \ninstead of a: nSprj, vxaiden; nd^fiTjy cheek; Sfpr}^ neck; ii^dprj, uxiter-gruel ; and \nsome proper names introduced from the Ionic dialect, e. g. *E<pvp7j ; the 77 then \nremains through all the cases of the Sing. \xe2\x80\x94 If any other vowel than e- or 1, \nprecedes, the Nom. and all the cases of the Sing, have 77, e. g. lucort, <pxrfi, <rK\xe2\x82\xacvfif \n^0)7} ; except irSa, (/rass ; XP<^\xc2\xab\xc2\xbb ^^^^^ > arSa, porch ; yva, field ; ciKva, rjourd ; \nKopva, uxdmit-tree ; i\\ia, olive-tree; dA\xc2\xab(\xc2\xa3, threshing f oar ; Nauerj/cda, all Gen. -as. \n\n(b) Tlie Nom. ends in a, which remains only in the Acc. and \nVoc. ; but in the Gen. and Dat, it is changed into 1;, if the o is \npreceded by X, XX, a-, era (tt), ^, ^, x^/. \n\nRem. 2. The ending is commonly in a when v precedes, e. g. extSvo (so es- \npecially in words in -aiva) ; but 77 is often found, as is always the case in the \nSuflSx ffvvr]y e. g. fv<ppo<TVinj, also ^oimij, irpvixm] and irpvfiva, irdyr} and iruya. \nAlaiTa is the only word ending in a preceded by a single t. \n\n(c) In other cases, the Nom. ends in 77, which remains \nthroughout the singular. \n\n6 \n\n\n\n62 \n\n\n\nNOUNS OF THE MASCULINE GENDER. \n\n\n\n[M4. \n\n\n\n2. If a is preceded by c or a, -ea is contracted in most w^ords \ninto rj, and -da into a in all the Cases (comp. poppas, \xc2\xa7 44, 3). \nThe final syllable remains circumflexed in all the Cases. \n\nBem. 3. The first Dec. is called the a declension, as its uninflected forms \nend in o, e. g. yud>fj.Tj from the uninflected yydjjLca (comp. o-u/ceo), veavias from \nthe uninflected veavia, iroKirns from TroA^reo; the second, the o declension, as \nits uninflected forms end in o, e. g. \\6yosj uninflected form x6yo ; the third, the \nconsonant declension, as its uninflected forms end in a consonant, and the vowels \nand V, which originated from consonants. \n\nParadigms. \n\n\n\n\n\na) 9j through all the cases. \n\n\nb) d through \n\n\nall (lie cases. \n\n\nc) d, Gen. 7]s. 1 \n\n\n\n\nOpinion. \n\n\nFig-tree. \n\n\nShadow. \n\n\nLand. \n\n\nHammer. \n\n\nLioness. \n\n\nS. N. \n\n\n7) yvufiT] \n\n\n(ruK-( \xe2\x82\xac0)97 \n\n\n(TKl-oL \n\n\nXwpd \n\n\n<r(pvpd \n\n\nX4aivd \n\n\nG. \n\n\nT7]S yvd}fJ.1}S \n\n\n(TV/C-TJS \n\n\n(TKi-as \n\n\nX^pd-s \n\n\n<T<pvpds \n\n\n\\\xe2\x82\xacaiinr]s \n\n\nD. \n\n\nTTJ yycofi-p \n\n\n(Tu/c-77 \n\n\n(TKi-a \n\n\nXwp? \n\n\nacpvpa \n\n\nX^aivri \n\n\nA. \n\n\nt)]v yvwfjLTiv \n\n\narvK-T]v \n\n\n(TKl-aV \n\n\nX(*>pd.y \n\n\n<T<pvpdv \n\n\n\\eaivdy \n\n\nV. \n\n\nS> yvufit] \n\n\n(TVK-T) \n\n\n(TKl-i. \n\n\nXd>pd \n\n\na(pvpd \n\n\n\\4cui/d \n\n\nP. N. \n\n\nat yvu/xai \n\n\n(TVK-ai \n\n\nOTKi-ai \n\n\nXa>pai \n\n\n(Tcjyvpai \n\n\n\\4aivcu \n\n\nG. \n\n\nTu>p yvwjxuv \n\n\ncrvK-wv \n\n\naKi-wv \n\n\nX(>}ptvv \n\n\nacpvpwv \n\n\nXfaiuoljt/ \n\n\nD. \n\n\nrais yvw/xais \n\n\n(TVK-ais \n\n\n(TKl-aiS \n\n\nXf^po-is \n\n\n(r<pvpats \n\n\nXecuuais \n\n\nA. \n\n\nTos yvdofxds \n\n\ncrvK-as \n\n\n(TKl-aS \n\n\nXc*>pds \n\n\n(T<pvpds \n\n\nAecuVds \n\n\nv. \n\n\nS) yvuixai \n\n\navK-ai \n\n\n(TKi-ai \n\n\nXopai \n\n\n(TtpVpOU \n\n\n\\eaiycu \n\n\nDual. \n\n\nTci> yi/ccjxd \n\n\narvK-a \n\n\n(TKi-a \n\n\nXdpd \n\n\n<T<pvpd \n\n\nKeaivd \n\n\n\n\nra7v yvdojxaiv \n\n\navK-ouv \n\n\n(TKl-aiV \n\n\nX^pouv \n\n\n(T<pvpcuv \n\n\n\\\xe2\x82\xacCUVCUV. \n\n\n\nKemark 1. On the form of the article t\xc2\xab instead of t<\xc2\xa3, see ^ 241, Rem. 10. \nOn the declension of the article ^, see \xc2\xa7 91. The & standing before the singu- \nlar and plural Voc. is a mere exclamation. \n\nKem. 2. On the contraction of -6a into -77, see \xc2\xa7 9, 11. (a) ; in the plural and \ndual of the first and second declensions, however, -ea is contracted into a. \nComp. \xc2\xa7 9, IL (b). Nouns in -aa are contracted as follows: N. /xvday /ivS \n{mina), G. fxydas, /xvasj D. fJLvda, fiva, A. fivata , uvav ; PI. N. fiycuj etc. \n\n\n\n$44. IL Nouns oj\' the Masculine Gender. \n\n1. The Gen. O\'f masculine nouns ends in -ov; nouns in -a? \nret/iin the a in the Dat., Ace, and Voc, and those in -t;? retain \nthe 17 in the Ace. and Dat. Sing. \n\n2. The Voc. of substantives in -779 ends in a : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(1) All in -nys, e. g. to^ottj^, Voc. to^oto, 7rpo<f>-qTrj^f Voc. 7rpo<f>rj" \nTa; (2) all m -lys composed of a substantive and a verb, e. g \nyecDjaexpT/s, Vqc. yect)/;(,\xe2\x82\xacrpa, /x^jpoTrwA?;?, a solve-sellerf Voc. fivpo \n\n\n\nH4.] \n\n\n\nMASCULINE NOUNS. FIRST DECLENSION. \n\n\n\n63 \n\n\n\nTTwXa; (3) national names in -t/?, e. g. ILipcn]^, a Persian, Voc. \nHipa-a. \xe2\x80\x94 All other nouns in -lys have the Voc. in 17, e. g. Uipcrq^^ \nPerses (the name of a man), Voc. liipaif]. \n\n3. The remarks on contract feminine nouns (^ 43, 2), ap- \nply to Masc. nouns contracted from -ea?, e. g. *Ep/u,%, poppas. \nIn ^opiasy the ca is contracted into a, and not into 77, since p \nprecedes, ^ 43, 1 (a). The doubling of the p in poppas is merely \naccidental. \n\nRemark 1. Contrary to \xc2\xa7 43, I, compounds of fi^rpio) (to measure), as \ny\xe2\x82\xacUfji.4rp7]s, end in -77s instead of -as ; on the contrary, several proper names, etc, \nas TliXoirlSas and yeyyaSas, a noble, end in -as instead of -tjs. \n\nRem. 2. Several masculine nouns in -as have the Doric Gen. in d, namc/y, \nvaTpaXoias, fn\\Tpa\\oias, patricide, matricide; opvi^o^pas, fowler; also several \nproper names, particularly those which are Doric or foreign, e. g.^YAay, Gen. \n\'TAd, 2/foVos, -d, \'A^j/ZySas, -d, 2uAAas, -d ; (the pure Greek, and also several \nof the celebrated Doric names, e. g. \'Apx^ras, Aewj/iSas, tlavcravias (also the \nBoeotian \'Evafieivd^vSas), commonly have ov ;) finally, contracts in as, c g. \nBop^as, Gen. fio^f>a. \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nParadigms \n\n\n\xe2\x80\xa2 \n\n\n\n\n\n\nCitizen. \n\n\nMercurv. \n\n\nYouth. \n\n\nFowler. \n\n\nSing. N. \n\n\nTToXh-r]s \n\n\n\'Epfi (eos) rjs \n\n\nVfavfds \n\n\nopyi^o^pds \n\n\nG. \n\n\nTToXirov \n\n\n\'Epfxov \n\n\nveauiov \n\n\nopvi^o^\'fjpd \n\n\nD. \n\n\niroXiTT} \n\n\n\'Ep!"^ \n\n\nveavia \n\n\nopyi^o^-fjp^ \n\n\nA. \n\n\n\xe2\x96\xa0JTOAlTTJJ\' \n\n\n\'Epix9iv \n\n\nveavidu \n\n\nopvi^oSri)pdv \n\n\nV. \n\n\ntoX.7t& \n\n\n\'Epfirj \n\n\nyeavld \n\n\nopvi^obiipd \n\n\nPlur. N. \n\n\niroAtTai \n\n\n\'Epfj-al \n\n\nveaviat \n\n\nopvi^o^ripai \n\n\nG. \n\n\nTOKITUU \n\n\n\'Epixuu \n\n\nVfavLcou \n\n\nopvL^obripuv \n\n\nD. \n\n\niroKiTais \n\n\n\'Epfious \n\n\nveaviais \n\n\nopuibo^pais \n\n\nA. \n\n\nTTOAlTdS \n\n\n\'Epfias \n\n\nveavids \n\n\nopui^o^ripds \n\n\nV. \n\n\nirokTrai \n\n\n\'Ep/xa7 \n\n\nveaviai \n\n\nopvi^o^qpai \n\n\nDual. \n\n\n\xe2\x96\xa0JToAtTd \n\n\n\'Ep/xa \n\n\nveavid \n\n\nopvi^o^pd \n\n\n\n\niroXlraiv \n\n\n\'Ep[xa7y \n\n\nyeauiaip \n\n\nopvi^o^-i]paiv \n\n\n\nRem. 3. The Ionic Grenitive-ending -cw of Masc. nouns in -tjs (\xc2\xa7 211), is \nretained even in the Attic dialect in some proper names, e. g. 0(\xc2\xa3Aew from \n\xc2\xa9oA^s, T^pew from TirjpTjs. \xe2\x80\x94 The contract ^op^as is also found in the Attic \nwriters in the uncontracted form ; thus, fiopeas, X. An. 5. 7, 7. PI. Phaedr. 229, \nb. ^opeov, Th. 3, 23. /Sopeov, 3, 4. \n\nRem. 4. The ending tjs occurs, also, in the third Dec. To the first Dec. \nbelong: (a) proper names in -(Stjs and -c\xc2\xa357jy, e.g. \xc2\xa9ou/cjSiStjs, \'Arpe/STjy (from \n*Arpe and iSrjs), Mi\\rid5r}s, as well as gontile nouns, e. g. 27ropTiaT7jr ; (b) nouns \nin -TTjs derived from verbs, e. g. voi-fir-qs from iroidco] (c) compounds consisting \nof a substantive and verb, or of a substantive compounded with another of tho \nfirst Dec, e. g. iraiSorpt^rjSt /3i/3Atoirc\xc2\xa3Ai7S, d/; j^eSf/oj*. \n\n\n\n64 QUANTITY AND ACCENTUATION. FIRST DEC. [^5 \n\n\n\n$45. Quantity and Accentuation of the First \n\nDeclension. \n\na. Quantity. \n\n1. The Nom. ending o is short in all words, which have the Gen. in -rjy [\xc2\xa7 43, \n1 (b)] ; but long in those which have the Gen, in -os, e. g. im\\4a., a-Kid, a-ocpidy \nnaiSeia, XP^ \'"? Xpo\'i, T^a, VH-^P\xc2\xb0^> A-qSoL, a\\a\\i, etc. ; the same is tme of the Fern, \nending of adjectives in os, e. g. ihev^epd, StKo/d. \n\nExceptions. \n\nThe following classes of words have o short in the Nom. : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) Dissyllables, and some Polysyllabic names of places in -ota, e. g. \'lariouOf \nJlAdraia. \n\n(b) Trisyllables and Polysyllables in -eid, e. g. dX^ejo, M^Scm, /SaciAeia, \nqueen^ y\\vK\xe2\x82\xac7a, except abstracts from verbs in -ew\xc2\xab, e. g. ficuriKfia, king- \ndom ; Sov\\eia, servitude (from jSactXeuw, SovXevw) ; \n\n(c) the names and designation of females, etc. in -rpia^ e. g. i/zcUrpta, afemaU \nmusician, words in -via, e. g. fivla, r\xe2\x82\xacTv<pv7ay the numeral /i/d, and, finally, \nsome poetic words ; \n\n(d) Trisyllables and Polysyllables in -oia, e. g. eijvoia, &voia] \n\n(e) words in -pd whose penult is long by a diphthong (except av), by, v, or \nby pfi, e. g. irelpajfjAxaipa] y4<pvpa., (Tcpvpa; Tiv^pd. \'Eralpd, vaXaiaTpaiy \nAfc^pa, ^aidpa, /coAAvpo, are exceptions. \n\n2. The Voc. ending o is always short in nouns in -tjs ; but always long in \nnouns in -as, e. g. iroA.Td from iroKiT-qs, yeayla. from veay\'ias. The quantity of \nFem. nouns in -d and -d, is the same in the Voc. as in the Nom. \n\n3. The Dual ending a is always long, e. g. Moutrd from Mov<ra. \n\n4. The Ace. ending av is like the Nom., e. g. Movtray, x"P^ frova. MoOo-d, \nX^oa. \n\n5 The ending as is always long, e. g. t^ rpoKf^ds from rpdreCa, 6 veaylas, \nTohs veoflas, rrjs oIkIols, ras oIkiols. \n\nb. Accentuation. \n\n6. The accent remains on the tone-syllable of the Nom., as long as the laws \nof accentuation permit {\xc2\xa7 30^. \n\nExceptions. \n\n(a) The Voc. Secnrora from 56<r7r<^T7js, lord ; \n\n(b) The Gen. PI. of the first Dec. always has the final syllable oav circum- \nflexed, which is caused by the contraction of the old ending deoy, e. g. \n\\\xe2\x82\xacaivwy from \\4aiua, vcaviwy from veayias. \xe2\x80\x94 But the substantives, XF^\' \nri]s, creditor ; acpvri, anchovy : irrjcrlai, ino}}soons ; and x^o\'^\xc2\xbb^s, irild-boar^ \nare exceptions ; in the Gen. PI. they remain Paroxytones, tlius xp^<"\'^\'f \nh<pi<aVi injalojv (but cupvwy, XPVO^^*\' from oufurfis, unapt; xi"}*\'^os, us^/xd). \n\n\n\ni \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 46.] \n\n\n\nSECOND DECLENSfON. \n\n\n\n65 \n\n\n\nBemabk. On the accentuation of Adjectives, see \xc2\xa7 75. \n\n7 The accent of the Nom. is changed, according to the quantity of the final \nByllable, thus : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) Oxytones become Perispomena in the Gen. and Dat. of the three num- \nbers, e. g. (Nom. Tifiij) rifiys, -p, -uv, -cuv, -ous, this holds, also, in the \nsecond Dec; e. g. d-f6s, -ov, -^ -uv, -o7y; \n\n(b) Paroxytones with a short penult remain so through all the Cases, except \nthe Gen. PL, which is always circumflexed on the last syllable; but \nParoxytones with a long penult become Properispomena, if the last syl- \nlable is short, as in the Nom. PI., and in the Voc. Sing, in a of Masc. \nnouns in -Tjy (\xc2\xa7 44), e. g. ypdofirj, yvuf/ai, but yvufiuv] iroKtTTjs, ttoXTto,, \nvoX^rai, but -KoXnuv] on the contrary, 5f\xc2\xab7j, Sfkot, but Zikwv ; \n\n(c) Properispomena become Paroxytones, if the last syllable is long, e. g. \nMoi/o\'d, TAovaris ; \n\n(d) Proparoxy tones become Paroxytones, if the last syllable is long, e. g. \nKiauva, \\eaiinjs. \n\n\n\nM6. Second Declension. \n\nThe Second Declension has two endings, os and ov ; nouns \nin -o? are mostly masculine, but often feminine (^ 50) ; those \nin -01/ are neuter ; except Fern, diminutive proper names in -ov, \ne. g. ^ TXvKtpLov (} 40), \n\n\n\nEndings. \n\n\n\nI \n\n\n\n\n\nSingular. \n\n\nPlural. \n\n\nDual. \n\n\nNora. \n\n\n05 ov \n\n\n01 \n\n\n\n\na \n\n\na \n\n\nGen. \n\n\nov \n\n\n\n\ncov \n\n\n\n\notv \n\n\nDat. \n\n\nV \n\n\n\n\n015 \n\n\n\n\noiv \n\n\nAce. \n\n\nov \n\n\novs \n\n\n\n\na \n\n\n<l> \n\n\nVoc. \n\n\nOS and e ov. \n\n\n01 \n\n\n\n\na. \n\n\n0). \n\n\n\nKemark 1 . The Gen. and Dat. endings of the different genders are the \nsame in all numbers; neuters have the Nom., Ace, and Voc. alike in aU \nnumbers, and in the plural they end in a. \n\nRem. 2. On th3 form of the Dat. PI. okti (v), see \xc2\xa7 42, Rem. 2. \n\n\n\n6* \n\n\n\n66 \n\n\n\nSECOND DECLENSION. \n\n\n\nParadigms. \n\n\n\n[U7. \n\n\n\n\n\nWord. \n\n\nIsland. \n\n\nGod. \n\n\nMessenger. \n\n\nFig. \n\n\nS.N. \n\n\n6 \\6y-os \n\n\n7] VT\\aos \n\n\n6(^)^eos \n\n\n6 &yy\xe2\x82\xac\\os \n\n\nrb cvKOv \n\n\nG. \n\n\nTov x6y-ov \n\n\nT7JS vi\\(XOV \n\n\nTOV ^eov \n\n\nayy4\\ov \n\n\nTOV CVKOV \n\n\nD. \n\n\nT(^ \\6y-ca \n\n\nTp VT\\Xr(JO \n\n\nT(f 3^ey \n\n\nayyeAoj \n\n\nT(JJ CVK(f \n\n\nA. \n\n\nThv Koy-ov \n\n\nT^v vr\\<sov \n\n\nrhv biSu \n\n\n&yy\xe2\x82\xac\\ov \n\n\nTh (TVKOV \n\n\nV. \n\n\nSi X6y-e \n\n\nS) Vr}<T\xe2\x82\xac \n\n\nSi Sti6s \n\n\n6776X6 \n\n\nSi ffVKOV \n\n\nP.N. \n\n\n01 K6y-oi \n\n\nal V7J(roi \n\n\nOt ^\xe2\x82\xac0l \n\n\nS77\xe2\x82\xacA.ot \n\n\nTh. avKa \n\n\nG. \n\n\nrwv Koy-wv \n\n\nTU>V VT\\CrU}V \n\n\nrwv ^eav \n\n\na.yy4\\oiV \n\n\nrwv (TVKwv \n\n\nD. \n\n\nTols xSy-ois \n\n\nrais vf]<Tois \n\n\nrols (S-eoTy \n\n\nayy\xe2\x82\xac\\ois \n\n\nrois avKOis \n\n\nA. \n\n\nrovs \\6y-ovs \n\n\nras vi](Tovs \n\n\nTovs ^eovs \n\n\na,yy4\\ovs \n\n\nra avKa \n\n\nV. \n\n\nS> \\6y-oi \n\n\nSi vriffoi \n\n\n& ^eoi \n\n\n&yyi\\OL \n\n\nSi ffvKa \n\n\nD, \n\n\nTCi} \\6y-ct) \n\n\nTCt VT]<TOi \n\n\nTw ^eci) \n\n\nayyeKai \n\n\nTOO avKto \n\n\n\n\nrotv \\6y-oiv \n\n\nTOUU vi\\(TOLV \n\n\nro7y ^eo7v \n\n\nayyihoiv \n\n\nroiv avKOiv. \n\n\n\nRem. 3. The Voc. of words in -os commonly ends in 6, though bften in -osy \ne. g. Si (plKe, and 5 (plXos ; always S> ^cos in classic Greek. \n\n$47. Contraction of the Second Declension. \n\n1. A small number of substantives, with o or c before the \ncase-ending, are contracted in the Attic dialect {k 9). \n\nParadigms. \n\n\n\n\n\nNavigation. \n\n\nCircumnavigation. \n\n\nBone. 1 \n\n\nS.N. \n\n\n6 ttXSos \n\n\nttXovs \n\n\n6 irepiirXoos \n\n\nireplirXovs \n\n\nrh oarcov \n\n\noarovy \n\n\nG. \n\n\n\xe2\x96\xa0n\\6Qv \n\n\nir\\ou \n\n\niTepnr\\6ov \n\n\nvepiirXov \n\n\noarcov \n\n\nOtTTOV \n\n\nD. \n\n\nTT\\6ci} \n\n\nttA.^ \n\n\nirepnr\\6c{} \n\n\nTTtplirXcfi \n\n\nOCTfOi \n\n\nOffTCj.\' \n\n\nA. \n\n\nirXoov \n\n\nTr\\ovv \n\n\n\xe2\x80\xa2Kfp\'nrXoov \n\n\nTTtpiirXovy \n\n\nOCTfOV \n\n\noarovy \n\n\nV. \n\n\nir\\6e \n\n\nirXov \n\n\n\xe2\x96\xa0irfpLTrXoe \n\n\nTTipilCXOV \n\n\noanov \n\n\no<rrovv \n\n\nP.N. \n\n\n\'Tr\\6oi \n\n\nttAo? \n\n\nirepiirXooi \n\n\niTfplirXoi \n\n\noaria \n\n\n6<rra \n\n\nG. \n\n\nir\\6(tiv \n\n\nK\\u}V \n\n\niTfpnrXowv \n\n\niTfp\'nrXwv \n\n\nOCTfOiV \n\n\noaruv \n\n\nD. \n\n\nttXSols \n\n\nir\\o7s \n\n\nicepnr\\6ois \n\n\nTrfplirXois \n\n\notrreois \n\n\noarois \n\n\nA. \n\n\n\xe2\x96\xa0jr\\6ovs \n\n\nitKovs \n\n\nTTfpnrXSovs \n\n\nvepiTrXovs \n\n\noarta \n\n\nocrra \n\n\nV. \n\n\nTr\\6oi \n\n\nir\\oi \n\n\nircplTTkooi \n\n\n-irepiTrXoi \n\n\noarea \n\n\noara \n\n\nD. \n\n\nTr\\6cii \n\n\nirKui \n\n\nirfpnr\\6w \n\n\nireplvXai \n\n\noaTfoo \n\n\nOOTOtf \n\n\n\n\nTr\\6oiv \n\n\nir\\6iv \n\n\nTrepiirXooiv \n\n\nTfplirXoiv \n\n\noartoiv \n\n\nooToty \n\n\n\nOnly the following nouns besides the above are contracted in tliis manner : J \nv6os, vovs^ the mind ; o p6os, f>ovs, a stream ; & ^povsy noise ; 6 x*\'"^^* dozm ; S dSeA- \n<pidovs, a nephew; 6 ^iryarpiSovs^ (jrandson ; 6 av\xe2\x82\xacy\\>taSovs^ son of a sister\'s child. \n\nRemark. Uncontractcd forms sometimes occur even in the Attic dialect \nthough seldom in substantives, e. g. vow^ Plato, Prot. 344. a ; much oftener in \nadjectives, particulai-ly neuters in -oa^ as rk &yoa, h-\xe2\x82\xacp6irXoa. On the contrac- \ntion of ca into a in the PI. see \xc2\xa7 9, 11. (b). \n\n\n\nW 48, 49.J \n\n\n\nTHE ATTIC SECOND DECLENSION. \n\n\n\n67 \n\n\n\nM8. The Attic Second Declension. \n\nSeveral substantives and adjectives have the endings cos \n(Masc. and Fern.) and wv (Neut.), instead of 09 and ov; they \nretain the m through all the Cases instead of the common \nvowels and diphthongs of the second Dec. and subscribe i \nunder w where the regular form has w or ot ; thus, ox; and a \nbecome w ; os, ov, and ov9 become w?, wv, and cos ; ot, ot?, and ow \nbecome co, cos, and cov ; \xe2\x80\x94 co, w, and mv remain unchanged. The \nVoc. is the same as the Nom \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nParadigms \n\n\n\xe2\x80\xa2 \n\n\n\n\n\n\nPeople. \n\n\nTable. \n\n\nHare. \n\n\nHaU. \n\n\nSing. N. \n\n\n6 \\i-di)S \n\n\n7] ndx-us \n\n\n& Kay-(Ls \n\n\nrh av<ay\xe2\x82\xac-ti)v \n\n\nG. \n\n\n\\i-<Ai \n\n\nKoX-d) \n\n\nXay-ta \n\n\navwy^-o) \n\n\nD. \n\n\nAe-y \n\n\nKaK-o} \n\n\n\\ay-(p \n\n\nai/u>ye-cp \n\n\nA. \n\n\n\\i-uv \n\n\nkolK-uu \n\n\n\\ay-civ \n\n\nat/uye-cav \n\n\nV. \n\n\n\\\xe2\x82\xac-U5 \n\n\nKaK-tas \n\n\n\\ay-(as \n\n\nayuryf-coy \n\n\nPlur. N. \n\n\n\\\xe2\x82\xac (p \n\n\nK(i\\-tf) \n\n\nXay-tf \n\n\navuy\xe2\x82\xac-(o \n\n\nG. \n\n\n\\e-wu \n\n\nKd\\-tay \n\n\nKay-iav \n\n\navuiye-coy \n\n\nD. \n\n\n\\f-^5 \n\n\nKoi\\-evs \n\n\nAuT"^! \n\n\navarye-ws \n\n\nA. \n\n\n\\(-<i>S \n\n\nKci\\-(i}S \n\n\nXay-ws \n\n\nayuryf-u \n\n\nV. \n\n\n\\f-(p \n\n\nKd\\-<f \n\n\nKay-if \n\n\naywye-co \n\n\nD. N. A. V. \n\n\nKf-d \n\n\nK<lk-tO \n\n\n\\ay-d) \n\n\nav(ayi-(a \n\n\nG. and D. \n\n\n\\(-^V \n\n\nK(i\\-U>V \n\n\n\\ay-(2v \n\n\navwye-wv. \n\n\n\nRemark 1. Some words of the Masc. and Fem. gender often reject the v \nin the Ace. Sing., namely, 6 \\ayu)s, the hare; (Ace. rhv Xaywu and XaytS), and \ncommonly v (tcs, the dawn ; rj &\\usy a threshing-floor ; rj Ktus, rj Ka>s, d "A^us, 77 \nT\xc2\xab\xc2\xabr, and the adjectives liyr)p<DSj not old ; iiriir\\e(i}S,fiiU; inrep^fws, .7"\'%- \n\nRem. 2. This Declension is termed Attic, because, if a word of tliis class \nhas another form, e. g. Xeds and ,Xa6s, vtds and ya6s, McytKeus and Me>/\xe2\x82\xac\\dos, \nthe Attic writers are accustomed to select the form in -e\xc2\xaby; though, in the \nbest Attic writers, the non-Attic forms also may be found. On the interchange \nof the long vowel in this Declension, see \xc2\xa7 16, 5. \n\n\n\n$ 49. Accentuatio7i of Second Declension. \n\n1. The accent remains on the tone-syllable of the Nom. as long as the quan- \ntity of the final syllable permits; the Yoc. &5\xe2\x82\xacA4)e from a5eA(^<Js, 6roMer, is \nan exception. \n\n2. The change of accent is the same as in the first Dec. (\xc2\xa7 45, 7) ; in the \nGen. PL, however, only oxytones, e. g. ^^6$^ are perispomena ; the rest are pro \nparoxytones. See the Paradigm*. \n\n\n\n68 REMARKS ON THE GENDER OF THE ENDING OS. [^ 50. \n\nS. The following exceptions to the rules given for the accentuation of con \ntracts in \xc2\xa7 30, 2, should be observed : (a) the Dual in \xc2\xab of words in -oos, -toy, \n-\xe2\x82\xacov, has the acute instead of the circumflex, e. g. ttXow ^ irKd, oa-Tfw ^^ baru, \ninstead of ttAo), oarS):, \xe2\x80\x94 (b) compounds and polysyllabic proper names, which \nretain the accent even on the penult, when it would regularly stand as a cir- \ncumflex on the contracted syllable, e. g. ireptTrAii-ou = irep fir A. ow (instead of \nTrepiTfAoO), from TrepiirXoos = irepiTrKovs] U\xe2\x82\xacipi^6-ov = Tlfipi^ov (instead of \nVleipi^ov), from Ileipi^oos = Ileipl^ovs] also adjectives, e. g. \xe2\x82\xacw6-ov = evvov (no^ \nevroO), from eijyoos = cvpous ] yet the accent is never removed to the antepenult ; \nthus, irepiirKoi, liOt TrepiTrAot ; KaK6voi, not k6.kovoi\\ \xe2\x80\x94 (c) t^ Kaviov, basket, takes \nthe circumflex on the ultimate, in the contract forms; hence Kaveov = Kayovv \n(instead of Kavow) ; \xe2\x80\x94 (d) words in -Zi6s = Sous denoting kindred, have the cir- \ncumflex instead of the acute on the ultimate, e. g. a5e\\<pi5e6s = dScX^tSoCs, \nnephew (instead of dSeA^tSous). It maybe stated as the rale, that &\\1 simple \\ \nsubstantives and adjectives in -eos and -oos take the circumflex on the contracted | \nsyllable, hence Kavow, a5\xe2\x82\xac\\<pi5ovs, xp^^^vs (from xp<^<\'\'C\'Os). \n\n4. In the Attic Dec, Px\'opapoxytones retain the acute accent on the antepe- \nnult through all the cases and numbers. See \xc2\xa7 29, Rem. 7. Oxytones in -<ij \nretain the acute accent in the Grcn. Sing., contrary to ^ 45, 7 (a), e, g. X^dj. O \nhere absorbs o, the inflection-vowel of the Gen. (e. g. \\6yo-o ^= \\6yov), which \naccounts for this unusual accentuation, thus Kidi instead of Ae\xc2\xab6-o. \n\n\n\nk 50. Remarks on the Gender of the Ending os. \n\nSubstantives in -os are regularly Masc. ; yet many are Fem. In addition to \nthe names of countries, cities, and islands, mentioned under the general rule \nin \xc2\xa7 40, the following exceptions occur, which may be divided into general \nclasses \xe2\x80\xa2 \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) Substantives which denote certan products of trees and plants, e. g. \nrj &Kv\\os, accrrn ; tj fidxdvos, acorn ; rj ^vaaros, Jine linen ; ri Sok6sj a beam ; ^ \npdfiSos, a staff; rj $ifi\\os, bark of the papyrus ; rj t^/o^or, rush mat; \n\n(b) Such as denote stones and earths, e. g. 6 ^ At^os, a stone; tj aX^j, partic-] \nularly a precious stone ; t} ^(pos., a small stone ; ^ i//({/t/ior, sand ; t} (nroSoSf ashes ;| \n7] fiiKros, red earth; t] KpixTraXXos, crystal {6 KpvaraXXos, ice) ; tj fidaayos, a touch\' \nstone; t] ^Ae/crpoy, electrum; rj afidpaySos, a smaraf^dus ; f} fiuKos, a clod ; rjytnffos, \ngypsum; tj va\\os, glass; i] riTovos, chalk; rj ApyiXos, clay ; rj irAiK^os, brick; ^ \n&<rfio\\os, soot ; t] K6irpos, ordure ; t) &a(j>aX.T0s, bitumen ; \n\n(c) Such as denote a hollow or cavity, e. g. ri KdpSoiros, kneading-trough ; ^ icifitif \nrSs and t] x^^^s, a box ; 7} aop6s, a coffin; rj Xijv6s, a tcine-press; tj X-fjKv^Sy an \noil-Jiask : t) Kanlvos, an oven ; f) <po3piap.6sy a chest ; r] -rviXos, tub ; \n\n(d) Such as express the idea of a uxiy, e. g. rj 6S6sy a road; rj afLa^tT6s (sc \n656s), a carriage-road ; t} rpifios and ^ irpairoSy a foot-path; rj rd^posy a ditch ; \n\n(e) Many of the above substantives were originally adjectives, and hence \nappear as feminine nouns, because the substantives with which they properly \nagree are feminine. There are also many others, e. g. ^ aUxtios (sc ^/\xc2\xab]L \n\n\n\nI \n\n\n\n?{ 51, 52."\' \n\n\n\nTHIRD DECLENSION. \n\n\n\n69 \n\n\n\nuouse-door; tj fjireipos (se. 7^), the mainland] t] 6.vvSpos (sc. 7^), thirsty land, desert ; \nT} veos (sc. xci;po),aya/?oi^,;?eZc?; rj vija-os (from ve7y, sc. 7^), an island; r) 5taAc/c- \nros (sc. (payfj), a dialect; tj avyKXriros (sc. fiovXr}), senate; 7} fidp^iros (sc. Au/jo), \nlyre; t] Sidficrpos (sc. ypanfjL-f}), diameter; 7] (more seldom 6) &KaTos (sc. vavs), \nboat; 7] ^6\\os (sc. oMa), round building, etc.; \n\n(f ) Several feminine nouns which stand alone, and hence specially to be \nnoted, e. g. ^ y6<ros, sickness ; 7] yvd^os, jaw-bone ; t] SpSaos^ dew ; 7) fi-ffpivdos, \ntwine ; \n\n(g) Some words which have a different meaning in different genders, e. g. \n& tinroy, horse ; t] tmros, mare, also cavalry ; 6 Xe/cl^os, pea-soup ; tj Ae/cti^oy, the \nj/oUc of an egg. \n\nRemark. On the diminutives in -ov, see \xc2\xa7 40, Rem. 1. \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa751. Third Declension. \nThe third Declension has the following Case-endings: \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n\n\n\nSingular. \n\n\nPlural. \n\n\nDual. \n\n\nNom. \n\nGen. \n\nDat. \n\nAce. \n\nVoc. \n\n\ns Neut. \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nOS \n\nw \n\n( \n\nV and d Neut. \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nmostlv as the Nom. : Neut. \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n\ney ; Neut. d \nwv \n\nds ; \xe2\x80\x94 d \nft; \xe2\x80\x94 d. \n\n\ne \n\noiv \n\noiv \n\n\xe2\x82\xac \n\n\n\nRemarks oic the Case-endings. \nk 52. A- Nominative. \n\n1. The Nom. of Masculine and Feminine nouns ends in 9, \ne. g. 6 Kopo^ (instead of Kopax-?), 17 XalXai/^ (instead of XaiXa7r-s) \nStill, the laws of euphony do not always allow the s to be an \nnexed to the stem; it is either rejected entirely, or, as a com \npensation, the short vowel of the stem is lengthened {h 16, 3). \nBut when the stem allows s to be aimexed, the usual euphonic \n{k 20) changes take place in the final consonant of the stem. \n\n2. In this way all Masc. and Fem. nouns may be divided into \nthree classes : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(ay The first class includes words, which in the Nom. assume \nthe gender-sign s, e. g. \n\n\' (p\\f&-6s \n\nK6paK-0S \n\nXafJLirdS-os \nyiyavT-os \nSe\\<l>7y-os \n^o-6s \n\n\n\n\n\n\' (p\\\xe2\x82\xac$ \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\'v \n\n\n<p\\t$-s \n\n\n4>X\xe2\x82\xacV(\xc2\xab20, 1) \n\n\n\n\n\n\nKOpaK \n\n\n\n\nC3 \n\n\n6 \n\n\nKOpOK-S \n\n\n\xc2\xab({pa4(M0, 1) \n\n\n\xe2\x80\xa2\xe2\x80\xa2 \n\n\niJ \n\n\nXa^iiraS \n\n\n\n\n\n\nV \n\n\nKafiirdS-s \n\n\nXofiTrds (4 20. 1) \n\n\n> \n\n\nyiyam \n\n\n\n\nc \xe2\x96\xa0 \n\n\n6 \n\n\nyiyavr-s \n\n\nylyds (\xc2\xa7 20. 2) \n\n\n\n\ncc \n\n\ntfXipJv \n\n\n\n\nB \n\n\n6 \n\n\nS\xe2\x82\xac\\(ptv-s \n\n\nS\xe2\x82\xac\\<pls (\xc2\xa7 20, 2) \n\n\n<o \n\n\n\n\n^dF {fiov, \n\n\nbov) \n\n\n\n\n\n6 \n\n\nh $6F-s {b6vs) \n\n\n$ovs, bos (\xc2\xa7 25, 2) \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n[a:F \n\n\n\n\n^^ \n\n\n16 \n\n\nAtF-s \n\n\nAfs(\xc2\xa725,2) \n\n\n\n\n\nb \n\n\n\n70 THIRD DECLENSION. [\xe2\x99\xa6 53 \n\n\n\n(b) The second class includes words, which in the Nom, i \n\n\n\nreject the gender-sign s, but, as a compensation, lengthen the \nshort final vowel of the stem, \xe2\x82\xac into rj, o into a> (H 16, 3, and \n20, Rem. 3), e. g. \n\n\n\nm \n\n\n\nTTOlfjLCy \n\n\n.. \n\n\n6 nroiirqv \n\n\n\\eoi/r \n\n\ng \n\n\n6 {\\4uur) \\iwv \n\n\npr]TOp \n\n\no \n\n\n6 ^-fiTcop \n\n\nalSos \n\n\n7} aiSws \n\n\n\nC \n\n\n\niroj/xev-or \n\\4oyr-os \nf>T\\rop-os \n^ ((u56a-os) alZ6-os\\ \n\n\n\n(c) The third class includes words, which in the Nom. have \nthe stem pure, since the stem neither assumes the gender-sign \ns, nor lengthens its final vowel, e. g. \n\n^p .. { ^ ^p (instead of 3^p-s) \n\n\n\n6 \n\n\n\nalcav \xc2\xa3 J ^ alwv { " " aluv-s) c \n\n\n\n\' bT]p-6s \n\naluy-os \n\n{?lp<tKT-os) ^pto-os \n^ idfiofrr-os. \n\n\n\n\n\n\nireTrept \n\nae\\as g \n\nawfxar o \n\nrepar \n\n\n\nSaimpr \'^ [t] Safiap ( " " Sifiapr-s, Sdixapr) \n\n3. Neuters exhibit the pure stem in the Nom. ; still, euphony \ndoes not permit a word to end in t (^ 25, 5). Hence, in this \ncase, the t is either wholly rejected (as in the Masc. XcW, Gen. \nXcon-os), or is changed into the corresponding <r (^ 25, 5), e. g. \n\nrh TreVf pt ^ f imrfpi-os or \xc2\xab-oy \n\nT^ ae\\as c J (aeXcur-os) (rcAa-o; \n\nTi> ((ra>/iaT) cw/xa ^ ] au^iar-os \nrh {rfpar) Ttpas [ Tepor-oj. \n\nRemark. The stem irvp is lengthened in the Nona., contrary to the rale : \nrh irvp. Gen. irvp-6s. \n\n\xc2\xa7 53. B. The remaining Cases. \n\n1. The remainmg Cases (wath a few exceptions, which will \nbe specially treated), are formed by appending tlie endings to \nthe stem, e. g \n\nStem KopoK ]Som. K6pa^ Gen. kSpok-os PI. Nom. K6paK-(s. \n\n2. In forming the Dat PI. by appending the syllable a-i to \nstems ending in a consonant, the same changes take plac\xe2\x82\xac as \nhave already been noticed in regard to the Nom. of similar \nwords [^ 52, 2 (a)], e. g. \n\n(p\\ffi-(rl = (pKe^l^i K6paK-<ri = KSpa^i AafiToSsTi = Xofirdoi \n\nylyavT\'ffi = ylyaai oh6in-ai = ohowri $oF-iri = $ovcL \n\nThe following points also are to be noted : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n3. (a) The Ace. Sing, has the form in -v ^vith masculines and \n\n\n\n^ 53.] THIRD DECLENSION. 71 \n\nfeminines in -t9, -v5, -av^f and -ov<s, whose stems end in -i, -v, -av, \nand -ov, e. g. \n\nStem TToA-t Nom. v6\\ts Ace. ir(^A.iv, Stem fiorpv Nom. ^orpvs Ace. ^orpvv \n\nvaF vav vdFs vavs vaFv vavy, fioF 0ov fi6Fs fiovs fi6Fy $ovy. \n\nBut the Ace. has the form in -a,\' when the stem ends in a con- \nsonant, e. g. <^X6^, cfiXixj/, (fiXe/ia \xe2\x80\x94 KopaK, K6pa$, KopaK-a \xe2\x80\x94 XxLfnraS, \nXafXTrd^, Aa/x7ra8-a. \n\n(b) Yet barytoned substantives in -is and -V5, of two or more \nsyllables, whose stems end with a Tau-mute, in prose have only \nthe form in v, e. g. \n\nStem ^pt5 Nom. epty Acc.ipiv (poet. cpt5-a; in the dramatists Iptv) \n\nopvi^ tpvis tpviv (poet. 6pvi^-a) \n\nKopv^ nSpvs K6pvv (poet. K6pv^-a) \n\nXoptT X*P** X^^ (poet, x^"^\'*")- \n\nIn prose there are hut few exceptions, e. g. TtpyAa, X. H. 3. 1, 15, and else- \nwhere (instead of Tepyiv) from 17 r^p^js; x\'^*"\'"\'* (instead of xe^P\'"). ih. 3. 5, 16; \nin constant use rpiiroSa, tripod. (X. An. 7. 3, 27, r air IS a is to he read instead \nof rAviia.) The goddess x^f"* has xt^P\'^a in the Ace; still, in Luc. Deor. d. \n15, 1 and 2, tV X*^"\'* \n\nRemark 1. Oxy tones of one or more syllables have only the regular form \nin \xe2\x80\xa2\xc2\xab, e. g. (iro5) ttovs, Ace. iroS-o; (^XinS) ^Krls, Ace. ^\\ir(5-a; (x^a^vS) x^*" \nfivs, Ace. x^\xc2\xabM"^5-a. The monosyllable K\\fls, Gen. k\\(i5-6s, contrarj\' to the \nrule, usually has the Ace. kAcii/, instead of kAcTS-o. \n\n4. Tlie Voc. is like the stem, e. g. 8at/xa>v, Gen. Sat/xov-o?, Voc. \n\nBaufiov. Still, euphony does not always allow the stem-form to \n\nappear. Hence the following points should be noted : \xe2\x80\x94 \n(1) The Voc. is like the stem in the following cases: \xe2\x80\x94 \n(a) When the final vowels of the stem, c and o, in the Nom. \n\nare lengthened into rj and w, the short stem-vowel reappears in \n\nthe Voc, e. g. \n\nZaipLwv Gen. Saifioy-os Voc. Scu/xoy \n\nyepwu yipovr-os ytpov [mslc&di of yipovr) \n\nH-V\'^VP fJLTJTfp-05 H-VTfp \n\n2a)KpoT7jy 2a>*tpaT\xe2\x82\xac-os (instead of ta-os) ^SMnpans. \n\n\n\n* It is probable that the Ace. Sing, in the third declension as well as in the \nfirst and second, originally ended in v ; but where the stem ended in a conso- \nnant, the V could not be appended without a union-vowel ; a was used for this \npurpose; hence, e. g. ^(Jpcofaj/ ; the termination ;/ was at length omitted The \nAce. ending a, may therefore strictly be regarded as a union-vowel. \n\n\n\n72 THIRD DECLENSION. [$ 53 \n\nExceptions: OKytoned substantives (not adjectives) retain the lengthened \nvowel, e. g. \xe2\x80\xa2 \n\n\'TToifj.\'fiVf Gen. TToifiev-os, Voc. itoiixiip (not voifxiv)^ \nexcept the three oxytones : \xe2\x96\xa0jrar\'fip, av-fip, and 5a^p, which, in the Voc, take \nagain the short stem- vowel e, but with the accent drawn back, thus : iraTep, \n&vep, daep. According to this analogy, even \'HpaK\\{\xe2\x82\xacr))TJs (stem \'HpdKXees) is \nshortened in the Voc. by the later writers, into "HpoucXes. \n\n(b) Adjectives in -d?. Gen, -avo<s, and also adjectives (not \nparticiples, see Rem. 5), whose stems end in -vr, have in the \nVoc. a form Hke the neuter (or the stem) ; iras and its com- \npounds are exceptions, e. g. \n\nfjLiXdsy Gen. av-os Neut. and Voc. fi^Xav \n\nXapieiSf \xe2\x82\xacvr-05 X\'*/\'\'^*\' (instead of xap\'tJ^j \xc2\xa7 52, 3). \n\nSo substantives in -ds. Gen. -avro?, have the Voc. in -av (instead \nof -an-), \xc2\xa7 52, 3, e. g. \n\nyiyas Gen. avr-os Voc. 7^70*\' (instead of 7(70*0-) \n\nKciXx"^ aj/T-os KoAxctv \n\nAids COT-OS Aldv. \n\nEem. 2. Some substantives of this class, with the r reject also the v, but as \na compensation lengthen the short o, e. g. "ArKas, Gen. -ayr-os, Voc. "ArXd, \nno\\vdoi/xdSi Voc. noA.uS(\xc2\xa3/id. \n\n(c) Substantives in -is, -vs, -avs, -cvs, and -ovs, whose stems \nend in -t, -v, -av, -cv, and -ov, have the Voc. like the stem, the \ns of the Nom. being rejected, e. g. \n\nudvTis Voc. fidvTi ; irpccrfivs Voc. irpea-fiv ; /uOs Voc. fiC ; erus Voc. <rv ; X/s Voc. \nA.t ; 7paOs Voc. 7pou ; ficuriXcis Voc. /BacriXeG ; )8oDs Voc. fiov. \n\nThe word ttoTs, Gen. iraid-os, has Trat in the Voc, since, by rejecting the gender- \nsign s, the stem would end in 5 (TralS), a letter which canilot end a word, and \nmust be dropped. \n\nRem. 3. Substantives in -ty, -vs, -ous, whose stems end in a consonant, have \nthe Voc. like the Nom., e. g. S opvis, Kopvst ttovs. Still, some substantives in \n-15, Gen. -ivos, have the Voc. like the stem, e. g. 5 Se\\<l>iv (also 5eA^/s), from \n$e\\<pis., Gren. -7t/os. \n\n(d) The Voc. is like the stem in all words, wliich in the \nNom have their stem pure, e. g. ^p, aiwv, etc. ; but \'AttoXXwv \n(Gen. \'(jivos), Iloo-etSaiv (-cuvos) and acorrjp (-^pos) are exceptions, \nthe Vocatives being w "AttoAAgv, Ilo\'o-ctSov, aCjTep, with the accent \ndrawn back. \n\n\n\nI \n\n\n\n$ 54.] THIRD DECLENSION. 73 \n\n(2) The Voc. is not like the stem, but like the Nom., in most \nwords whose stems end in one of the consonants which cannot \nenphonically stand as the final letter (\xc2\xa7 25, 5), because after \ndropping the stem-consonant, frequently it could not be de- \ntermined from the Voc. what the true sten* was ; e. g. from \nadp^. Gen. (TapK-6<s, the Voc. would be adp (instead of adpK) ; from \no <^(05, Gen. <^a)T-os, Voc. <^w (instead of ^wt) ; from vtij/, Gen. \nvi^-o?, Voc. vt (instead of vicji) ; from wi/^. Gen. wtt-os, Voc. w \n(instead of wtt) ; from irov^y Gen. ttoS-os, ^\'^oc. tt\xc2\xae. \n\nRem. 4. The Voc. of &va^, king, in the Common language, is like the Nom. \nS) &va^, or by Crasis &va^] but in the solemn language of prayer: & &ya (in \nHom. and the Attic poets, e. g. Soph. O. C. 1485 : Zeu &ya, <rol <put/co), or S>va \n(instead of 6.vaKr, according to \xc2\xa7 25, 5). \n\n3. Substantives in -ci and -ws, whose stems end in -09, have \nthe Voc. neither like the stem, nor the Nom., but, contrary to \nall analogy, in -ot, e. g. \n\nStem r)xos N. t]x^ Gr- VX^\'^^ (instead of \xe2\x96\xa0r]x^<^-os) V. ^xor( instead oirixoo\'i, rix^-i) \nodSos alSds al56-os ( " " cuSJir-os) alSo7 ( " " al56a--i cuSo-\'i) \n\nRem. 5. The Voc. of all participles is like the Nom., e. g. S tvtttcov, tctu- \n<p<&5, Tv\\pas, rv^uVy BeiKi/vs. "Apxd^V) Voc. &pxoy, when a substantive, is an \nexception. \n\n\n\nA. Words, which in the Gen. have a consonant before the ending \n-05, i. e. WORDS whose stem ends in a consonant. \n\n$ 54. I. The Nom. adds a to the stem \n\n(a) Tlie stem ends in X ; thus : 6 ^ aXs, Gen, oA-os, Dat. PI. \naX-o-i(v). See Rem. 1. \n[ * (b) Tlie stem ends in a Pi or Kappa-mute \xe2\x80\x94 /S, tt, <f>; y, yy; \nKy pK (rj crdp^, aapK\'Os), and x- See \xc2\xa7 52, 2 (a). \n\n(c) The stem ends in a Tau-mute \xe2\x80\x94 S, r, kt, S^, v^^. See \n^ 52, 2 (a). On the Ace. see \xc2\xa7 53, 3 (b). \n\nThe stems of the Neuter, belonging to this class, end in t and kt (yaXaKr), \nbut, according to \xc2\xa7 25, 5, reject the t and kt ; thus : (tw/jlu instead of trw/iaT, and \nyd\\a instead of yd\\aKT ; or, according to \xc2\xa7 52, 3, they change the r into a- ; on \nthe omission of the t before <rt in the Dat. PI. see \xc2\xa7 20, 1. \n\n(d) The stem ends in v or vt. See $ 52, 2 (a). \n\n7 \n\n\n\n1 \n\n\n\n74 \n\n\n\nTHIRD DECLENSION. \n\n\n\n[*54. \n\n\n\n\n\n7}y Storm. \n\n\n71, Torch. \n\n\n7], Helmet. \' \n\n\nrh, Body, tj, Nose. 6, Tooth. ] \n\n\nSing. N. \n\n\nKaiXdip \n\n\nXafiirds \n\n\nKopvs \n\n\n(Tcofia pis \n\n\noSovs \n\n\nG. \n\n\nKalXair-os \n\n\nXa/xirdd-os \n\n\nK6pv^-os \n\n\n(rdjxaT-os ^lu-Ss \n\n\n6d6vT-as \n\n\nD. \n\n\nAaiAoTT-t \n\n\nXafxirdS-i \n\n\nK6pv^-i \n\n\n(r(*>ixaT-i plu-i \n\n\n6S6uT-i \n\n\nA. \n\n\nAatAdTT-a \n\n\nAa/A7ra5-a \n\n\nK6pVV \n\n\nacHi-ia piv-a \n\n\n6S6vT-a \n\n\nV. \n\nPlur. N. \n\n\n\\a7K&^ * \n\n\nAa/XTTcts \n\n\nK6pVS \n\n\n(r(a(j.a ptu \n\n\nodous \n\n\nXaiXoLTT-cs \n\n\nAO;U7ra5-es \n\n\nKSpv^-es \n\n\nff(aixaT-a p7v-es \n\n\n656vT-es \n\n\nG. \n\n\nXaiXaiv-av \n\n\nKaixTrdS-ccv \n\n\nKOpli^-COV \n\n\nacafidT-ODV piv-icv \n\n\noMuT-oiv \n\n\nD. \n\n\nKaLXw\\iL[v) \n\n\n\\afnrd-(n{v) K6pv-(n{v) \n\n\nadnj.a-(n[v) pl-ai^y) \n\n\no^ov-(n{v) \n\n\nA. \n\n\nKalhair-as \n\n\n\\a[A,irdS-ai \n\n\nKopu^-as \n\n\n<TtafjiaT-a pilu-as \n\n\nohSvT-as \n\n\nV. \n\n\nXalXair-es \n\n\n\\afnrdS-es \n\n\nKopv^-es \n\n\nff^fiar-a (iTv-es \n\n\n6d6uT-es \n\n\nD.N.A.Y. \n\n\n\\ai\\air-e \n\n\nAa/x7raS-6 \n\n\nKOpV^- \xe2\x82\xac \n\n\nffciofxaT-e pTi/-e \n\n\n6B6vT-e \n\n\nG. and D. \n\n\nXaiXair-oiv \n\n\nhafiTrdS-oiv \n\n\nKOpV^:-)lV \n\n\nffconaT-oiv plv-otv \n\n\nohSuT-oiy. \n\n\n\nSo: 6 K6pa^, -oLKos, raven; 6 Xdpvy^, -vyyos, throat; 6, t] 6pvis, -l^os, bird; 6 \n&va^, -aKTos, king ; rj \'4\\fj.ivs, -tv^os, tape-worm ; 6 5e\\<ptsf -7voSy dolphin ; 6 71705, \n-ayros, giant, etc. \n\nEemark 1. The stem of nouns in -^ and -| commonly ends in the smooth \nTT and K ; the stem of those in -7I ends in -77, except 6, r) Xvy^, Gen. XvyK-Ss, \nlynx {hutrj Xvy^, Gen. KvYy-^s, hiccough). Instead of <pdpvyyos from 7] (pdpvy^y \nthroat, the poets, according to the necessities of the verse, use <pdpvyos also. On \nTj ^pi^, Tpix^s, hair, see \xc2\xa7 21, 3. \n\nRem. 2. The word t] aAs, Gen. aX-6s, signifying sea, and in the Fem. gender, \nis only poetic, and the Sing, 6 aXs, signifying salt, is only Ionic and poetic ; \nelsewhere, only ol aAes, salt, occurs (PL Symp. 177, b. Lys. 209, e). \n\nEem. 3. To class (c) belong also the contracts in -T}is, Gen. -7}iSo5 = -ps, \np5os, e. g. 7j irap\'ps, cheek, TrapySos. \n\nRem. 4. The stem of rh o5s, ear, is wt, thus : Gen. q}-t6s, Dat. wrf, PI. 5to, \n&TO}v, d)crt(j\'). The word rh repas, according to the rule of the ancient gram- \nmarians, usually admits .contraction in the plural, among the Attic writers, \nafter the t is dropped: repd, repav (but X. C. 1. 4, 15. PI. Phil. 14, e. Hipp \n300, e. ripaTo) ; \xe2\x80\x94 t^ y^pas, reward of honor ; rh yrjpas, old age; rh Kpias, flesh, \nand rh Kepas, horn, reject t in all the Numbers, and then suffer contraction in the \nGen. and Dat. Sing., and throughout the Dual and Plural (except the Dat.Pl.) ; \nyet Kepds, besides these forms, has the regular form with t ; Thucyd. uses the \ncontracted forms ; the uncontracted Kepara occurs only in 5, 71. Kepws is uni- \nformly employed in the phrase iirl K^pus, in column. When the a, contracted \nfrom aa, is used by the poets as short, it must be considered a case of elision, \nnot of contraction ; the same is true also of Neuters in -as, -aos, -os, -eos, e. g \nt^era (fr. <rKe-n-as) instead of akdirji, kAco (fr. k\\\xe2\x82\xacos) instead of icAe\'a \n\n\n\n^55.] \n\n\n\nTHIRD DECLENSION. \n\n\n\n75 \n\n\n\nSing. N. \nG. \nD. \n\n\n\nPlur. N. \nG. \nD. \n\n\n\nDual. \n\n\n\nrh repas, wonder. \nrepar-os \nrepar-i \' \n\n\n\nrh Kepas, hom. rh Kpeas, flesh. \n\nKepar-os and Kepus (Kpea-os) npeus \nKepar-i and Kepc^ {Kp4a-i) Kpea \n\n\n\nrepar-a and repa \nrepdr-wv and repuv \nr4pa-<li{v) \n\n\n\nKepar-a and K^pd \nKcptxT-wv and Kepuy \nK\xe2\x82\xacpa-<ri(v) \n\n\n\n(Kpea-a) Kped \n{Kped-ct)v) Kpcwy \nKp4a-(ri{v) \n\n\n\nrepar-e \nrepdr-oiu \n\n\n\nK4par-e and Kcpd \nKepdr-oiv and Kep^u \n\n\n\n(Kpea-e) Kped \n(Kped-oiv) Kpe^y. \n\n\n\nEem. 5. To class (d) belong also the contracts, in -6eis, Gen. -6evros = oGs, \novvTos, e. g. & trXoKovs, cake, Gen. -TrXaKovuros ; also in -"fjeis, Gen. --fjevros = -ijSf \n\'TJvTos, e. g. Tifi\'^s, honorable, Tifirjvros. \n\nEem. 6. For the irregular lengthening of the vowel in icrelsy els, jueXdy, and \ntiLkos, see \xc2\xa7 20, Eem. 2. \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 55. II. The Nom. rejects 9, hut lengthens the short \nfinal vowel of the stem \xe2\x82\xac or o into rj or (n Q 16, 3). \n\n1. The stem ends in -v, -vr, and -p. For the omission of v, \nand VT, before o-t, see \xc2\xa7 20, 2, and for the omission of t, in the \nNom. of stems ending in vr, e. g. Aewv, see $ 25, 5. \n\n2. The following substantives in \'r)p: 6 iraTrjp, father ; rj /a-jJ- \nrqpi mother ; rj SvydTrjp, daiighter ; -^ yaa-ri^p, helly ; rq Arjfii^pj \nDemeter (Ceres), and o dvrjp, man, diiFer from those in the above \nparadigms only in rejecting e in the Gen. and Dat. Sing, and \nDat. PL (\xc2\xa7 16, 8), and in inserting an a in the Dat. PI. before \nthe ending criy to soften the pronunciation. \n\nThe word avf}p (stem av4p), rejects \xe2\x82\xac in all Cases and Numbers, except the \nVoc. Sing., but inserts a S (\xc2\xa7 24, 2), thus: Gen. avdp6sf Dat. avdpl, Ace. &uSpay \nVoc. &u\xe2\x82\xacpy PI. &vdp\xe2\x82\xacSf avZpSiv., au8pd<ri{y), dySpaSy etc. \n\n\n\n\n\nd, Shepherd \n\n\n. 6, Lion. \n\n\n6, Orator. \n\n\n6, Father. \n\n\n7}, Daughter. \n\n\nSing. N. \n\n\niroiix-fiv \n\n\n\\\xe2\x82\xac(l)V \n\n\np4]T(tSp \n\n\nirar-fip \n\n\n^vydrrip \n\n\nG. \n\n\niroifxev-os \n\n\n\\4oVT-OS \n\n\np-l]TOp-OS \n\n\niraTp-6s \n\n\n^vyarpos \n\n\nD. \n\n\nTTOlfieV-t \n\n\nk4ovt-i \n\n\np7]rop-i \n\n\nirarp-i \n\n\n^iryarpi \n\n\nA. \n\n\nTToifiev-a \n\n\n\\4ovT-a \n\n\np7]Top-a \n\n\nirarep-a \n\n\n^vyarcpa \n\n\nV. \n\n\niroifjL-fjj/ \n\n\n\\4otf \n\n\nprjrop \n\n\nxarep \n\n\n^vyarep \n\n\nPlur. N. \n\n\niroifih-es \n\n\n\\4oin--es \n\n\n^{jTOp-CS \n\n\niroTep-es \n\n\nbvyarepes \n\n\nG. \n\n\niroificu-cov \n\n\n\\e6vT-oov \n\n\nprjTSp-wu \n\n\nTrarep-cov \n\n\n^iryar4pay \n\n\nD. \n\n\ntroifie-aiiv) \n\n\n\\4ov(tl[v) \n\n\n^rirop-tn{v) \n\n\niraTp-a-a\'i{v) \n\n\n^uyarpacri{v) \n\n\nA. \n\n\niroifiev-as \n\n\nx4ovT-as \n\n\npi]TOp-Q.S \n\n\nvarep-as \n\n\n^vyarepas \n\n\nV. \n\n\nTToififv-es \n\n\n\\4oyT-\xe2\x82\xacs \n\n\n^7)7 op-es \n\n\nirarep-es \n\n\n^vyaT4pes \n\n\nDual. \n\n\niroifieu-e \n\n\n\\4ovT-e \n\n\np-fjTop-e \n\n\n"Trarep-e \n\n\n^vyar4pe \n^vyarepoiv. \n\n\n\n\niroifiev-oiv \n\n\nXeivr-oiv \n\n\np7}r6p-oiv \n\n\nTraT4p-oiv \n\n\n\n76 \n\n\n\nTHIRD DECLENSION. \n\n\n\n[^56 \n\n\n\nBemark 1. The substantive ^ x^^P> hand^ belongs to nouns of class No. 2, \nand differs from them only in not lengthening the e of the stem (x^p) into ij, \nbut into \xe2\x82\xact, e. g. x^^P instead of xh^ 5 ^^ is irregular in retaining the \xe2\x82\xact in \ninflection, thus : x^^P^ X^W^j ^*^-5 <Jxcept in the Dat. PI. and the Gen. and Dat. \nDual x^pf^i{v)i x^po"\'- Yet in poetry, the short as well as the long form is used \nin all the Cases, as the necessities of the verse require, e. g. xc\'fx^^ and x^P^^y \nX^poiv and x^^po^f, X^P^^ ^\'nd x^ipeo-t. \n\nEem. 2. The following nouns in -\xc2\xabv, Gen. -ovos, reject the v in particular \nCases, and suffer contraction : ^ eiKiv, image, eUSuos, e\'lKoyi, eiK6va, et/cJi\'os, etc., \ntogether with the Ionic and poetic forms : Gen. ^Ikovs, Acc. \xe2\x82\xac</cc6, Acc. PI. (Ikovs \n(the irregular accent is to be noted in e\'lKci and tlKovs) ; r) arjddiv, nightingale^ \nGen. ar]S6vos and otjSoCs, Dat. arjSoi; t) X\'^^^^^f\'i swallow, Gen. x^AtSt^vos, Dat \nXfA.\'5o?. \n\nEem. 3. To class No. 2, belongs the obsolete Nom. o, ^ \'APH\'N, lamb; the \nNom. of this is supplied by ^ ^7 a/xuSs, Gen. apv6s, Dat. appl, Acc. Spj/o, PI. \nNqjn. &py\xe2\x82\xacs, Gen. apvcov, Dat. d/)m(rt(;\'), Acc. ^/>vas; farther, the word 6 aariip, \n-epos, star, though not syncopated like iror^p, etc. belongs to this class on account \nof -the assumed a in the Dat. PI. a(rrpa(Ti{v). In substantives belonging to \nclass No. 2, the accent of the Gen. and Dat. Sing, (and in the word atrfip, also \nthat of the Gen. PI. and Gen. and Dat. Dual) is removed by syncope to the last \nsyllable, and that of the Dat. PL to the penult, e. g. warpSs, narpi, avdpwVf \nTraTpa(ri{v). The word At] /x-firrip has a varying accent, viz. A^firjrpos, A-fjfiTj- \nTpi, Voc. A\'f]firiT\xe2\x82\xacp (but Acc. ArifirjTepa). So also ^ttyarep Voc. of ^ydri/jp. \nOn the Voc. of ttot^p and airf)p, see \xc2\xa7 53, 4 (1) (a). In poetry, according to the \nnecessities of the verse, are found ^vyarpes, ^vyaTpwu, A\'f]fj.r)Tpa, and also, on \nthe contrary, varepos, ^vyarcpos, ^uTjrept. \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 56. III. The Stem of the Nom. is pure. \n\nThe s is omitted without changing the final vowel of the \nstem. The stem ends in v, vr, p, and (only in Sdfiap, wife) in \npr. The Case-endings are appended to the Nom. without \nchange. On the omission of t in stems ending in vr and pr, see \n\xc2\xa7 25, 5 ; and on the omission of v, rr, before o-t, see k 20, 2. \n\n\n\n\n\n6, Paean. \n\n\n6, Age. \n\n\n6, Xenophon. \n\n\n6, Wild beast \n\n\nrh, Nectar. \n\n\nSing. N. \n\n\niraiav \n\n\naldov \n\n\naevocpoiy \n\n\n^^P , \n\n\nVCKTap \n\n\nG. \n\n\niraiav-os \n\n\ntuwv-os \n\n\naeyoipcovT-os \n\n\n^p-6s \n\n\nyeKTap-os \n\n\nD. \n\n\niraiav-i \n\n\naiwv-i \n\n\nZevocpwyT\'i \n\n\n^vp-i \n\n\ny\xe2\x82\xacKrap-i \n\n\nA. \n\n\n\xe2\x80\xa2jraiav-a \n\n\natwu-a \n\n\np,ivo(pS>yT-a \n\n\n^7jp-a \n\n\nyeKTap \n\n\nV. \n\n\ntraiav \n\n\nalciy \n\n\n^eyocpuy \n\n\n^^p \n\n\nysKTap \n\n\nPlur. N \n\n\niraiaiz-es \n\n\nalwv-es \n\n\n"EeuocpaJUT-es \n\n\n^^p-\xe2\x82\xacS \n\n\nveKTap a \n\n\nG. \n\n\niraiav-au \n\n\nalwv-av \n\n\naevocpaivT-wy \n\n\n^7]p-ay \n\n\nV\xe2\x82\xacKT(ip-a)y \n\n\nD. \n\n\niram-ort(j/) \n\n\notw-a\'t(v) \n\n\ns,eyo(pu-(Tt{y) \n\n\n^p-(ri{u) \n\n\nyeKTapffi 1/) \n\n\nA. \n\n\niraiay-as \n\n\natctiu-as \n\n\naevoipfavT-as \n\n\n^7jp-as \n\n\nyeKTop a \n\n\nV. \n\n\nvaiay-es \n\n\naiay-es \n\n\na\xe2\x82\xacyo(pwyT-es \n\n\n^p-es \n\n\ny^KTop-a \n\n\nDual. \n\n\nvaiav-f \n\n\natwy-e \n\n\n"SevocpuvT-e \n\n\n^p-e \n\n\nyeKTap-f \n\n\n\n\niraikv-oiv \n\n\nal^y-oiy \n\n\naeyoipciyT-oiy \n\n\n^p-o7y \n\n\nyeKrdp-oiy. \n\n\n\nf 57.] \n\n\n\nTHIRD DECLENSION. \n\n\n\n77 \n\n\n\nRemark 1. The three words in -\xc2\xabj/, Gen. -wj/os: \'ATreJAAwj/, UocrfiSSfv^ ^ \noAwv, threshing-floor^ drop v in the Ace. Sing., and suffer contraction; thus, \n(\'AWAXwya, \'A7r<^AA\xc2\xaba) \'ATreJAAw, nocetSw, oA\xc2\xab (on oAcw, comp. \xc2\xa7 48, Rem. 1, on \nKvKeuj, \xc2\xa7 213, 11). Also the Ace. y\\ix\'^i from 7} yXiix^^ ^^ fiXrixf^v, penny- \nroyal, Gen. -ojj/os, is found in Aristophanes. \n\nRkm. 2. All the Neuters belonging to this class end in -p {ap, op, up, up), \ne. g. Th v\xe2\x82\xacKTap, ^Top, iriXwp, nvp (Gen. irvpSs). The word rh iap, spring, may \nalso be contracted, e. g. ^p, Gen. -^pos. \n\n\n\nB. Words which hate a vowel before the ending -os jln the Gen. \nk 57. I. Words in -ctjs, -avs, -ovs. \n\n1. The stem of substantives in -cv?, -av<s, -ovs, ends in v (from \nthe Digamma F) ; s is the gender-sign. On the omission of v \nbetween vowels, see \xc2\xa7 25, 2. \n\n2. Substantives in -cvs have -cd in the Ace. Sing., and -eds in \nthe Ace. PL, from e-Pa, iFas; the omission of the F lengthens \nthe a and as. These nouns have the Attic form in the Gen. \nSing., viz. -cws instead of -eo?, and in the Dat. Sing, and Nom. \nPL admit contraction, which is not usual in the Ace. PL When \na vowel precedes the ending -ev?, as, e. g. xoe^s, \'EvjSoevs, the end- \nings -ews, -\xe2\x82\xac(j}v, -cd, -eds are also contracted into -w?, -wv, -a, -as. \nNouns in -av<s and -ovs are contracted only in the Ace. PL, which \nis then like the Nom. PL, as in all contracts of Dec. III. \n\n\n\n\n\n6, King. \n\n\n6, A measure. \n\n\n6, 7], Ox. \n\n\n7), Old woman. \n\n\nSing. N. \n\n\n^acriXevs \n\n\nXoevs ^ \n\n\nfiovs, bos for bovs \n\n\nypavs \n\n\nG. \n\n\nfia<ri\\4-(i}S \n\n\nXG{eci))cos \n\n\nfio-6s, bov-is \n\n\nypa-os \n\n\nD. \n\n\nfiaaiKu \n\n\nXO" \n\n\nfio-i; bov-i \n\n\nypd-t \n\n\nA. \n\n\nfia(ri\\4-d \n\n\nXo(ed)a \n\n\nfiovu \n\n\nypavv \n\n\nV. \n\n\nfia(ri\\cv \n\n\nXoev \n\n\nPod \n\n\nypav \n\n\nPlur. N. \n\n\nfia<ri\\e7s \n\n\nXoe7s \n\n\nfi6-\xe2\x82\xac5 \n\n\nypa-es \n\n\nG. \n\n\nfia(Ti\\4-(t)u \n\n\nXo(4(i})cov \n\n\nfio-wv, bo-um \n\n\nypa-tav \n\n\nD. \n\n\nPa(n\\\xe2\x82\xacv(n{v) \n\n\nXoevciii/) \n\n\nP0V(Ti{v) \n\n\nypav(rl{v) \n\n\nA. \n\n\n^aa-iKe-ds (and \n\n\neis) xo{4a)cis \n\n\nfiovs \n\n\nypavs \n\n\nV. \n\n\nfiaaiK^Ts \n\n\nXO\xe2\x82\xaclS \n\n\n/3o-\xe2\x82\xacS \n\n\nypa-es \n\n\nDual. \n\n\nfia<ri\\4-\xe2\x82\xac \n\n\nXO" \n\n\nfi6-e \n\n\nypa-e \n\n\n\' fia(ri\\4-0LV \n\n\nXoeoiu \n\n\nfio-o7u \n\n\nypa-oiv. \n\n\n\nRemark 1. Among the Attic poets, the Gen. Sing, of nouns in -eis some- \ntimes ends in -eos instead of -ews; thus 07j(re\'os, apiffreos, and the. Ace. Sing., \nnot only in the Attic, but in all the poets, sometimes ends in -tj, instead of -4d, \ne. g. Upri, ^vyypaipTJ. The Nom. and Voc. PI. in the older Attic writers, \n\n\' Commonly written x<^oy> contract x^vs. \n\n7# \n\n\n\n78 THIRD DECLENSION. [H 58, 59. \n\nespecially in Thucydides, end also in -tjs (formed from the Ionic -^es), e. g. \n8a(Ti\\7js, linrTjs, UKarai^s instead of UKaraieTs. The uncontracted Nom. \xc2\xaer]<r4\xe2\x82\xacs \noccurs in PI. Theaet. 169, 6. The Ace. ending -els instead of -4as is very \ncommon in Xen., e.g. rohs lirirels^ C. 3. 5, 19. rovs yoi/cTs, 2. 2, 14. ypa<p\xe2\x82\xac7sf \n(r/cvTeis, xa^Ke7s, 3. 7, 6. robs fiaaiXeis, 3. 9, 10. and elsewhere, but more seldom \namong the other Attic prose writers. The Ace. vi^is is regular in all the Attic \nwriters. \n\nRem. 2. The following are declined like xoeiJs : Uupaieisy Gen. Ueipaius, \nAce. Tleipaia, 6 ayvieis^ altar before the door, Gen. ayviws, Ace. ayvia, Ace. PI. \nayvias, and several proper names, e. g. \'Eperpias, iZreipius, MtjAiS, Evfiocas, \nEujSoa, Ev^oas, UAaraias, Awpias ; yet the uncontracted forms are often found \nin proper names, e. g. @e(riri4av, QeffirieaSf Sretpteo, XlAaTatewj\', \'Eperptecov, \nAwpifMv, Ueipaiewy (in Thu., X., PI., Dem.). The uncontracted forms are \nregular in a\\i\xe2\x82\xacvs, fisherman, aXiioos, a\\im, aAteas, \n\nRem. 3. The Nom. PL of fiovs and ypMs are always uncontracted in good \nAttic writers : B6es, ypaes ; on the contrary, in the Ace. only the contract forms \nypavs and vavs occur 5 the Ace. PI. fiovs is the common form ; fi6as occurs only \nvery seldom. \n\nRem. 4. Only 6 x^^^i ^ measure, a mound, and rj poVs, vinegar-tree, are de- \nclined like fiovs ; but in the PL both without contraction ; only 7] vavs {vdFs, \nnavis), is declined like ypavs \', still, this noun is quite irregular; see \xc2\xa7 68. \n\n\xc2\xa758. 11. Words in -r)s, -cs (Gen. -\xe2\x82\xacos); -ws (Geti. \n-wos), -(OS and -w (Gen. -oos^; -as (Gen. -aos), -os \n(Gen. -eos). \n\nThe stem of words of tliis class ends in s. On the omission \nof cr, see \xc2\xa7 25, 1. In the Dat. PL, a a- is omitted. \n\n\xc2\xa7 59. 1^1) Words in -lys and -es. \n\n1. The endings -17s and -es belong only to adjectives (the \nending -lys is Masc. and Fem., the ending -cs neuter), and to \nproper names, terminating like adjectives, in -^anys, -fievr]?, \n-ycurj<s, -KpoLTT)^, -ixrjSr]<;, -ttci-^t^s, -o-^eviys, -tcA,i;s, -k->]S7]<s, -avS^r]\';, -epKr]?, \n-/Sapyj?, -dprjs (-^p^?)> -dpKr]\';, -veLKT}?, .-Aa/X7nys, \'aa.Krj\'s, -rvp^ijs, and \n{KXir]<s) K\\rj<5. The neuter exhibits the pure stem (^ 52, 3) ; but \nin the Masc. and Fem., c, the short final vowel of the stem, is \nlengthened into rj [\xc2\xa7 52, 2 (b)]. \n\n2. The words of this class, after dropping o-, suffer contraction \nin all the Cases, except the Noni. and Voc. Sing, and Dat, PL ; \nand nouns in -/cXer;?, which are already contracted in the Nom. \nSing, (into kX^s), suffer a double contraction in the Dat. Sing. \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa759.] \n\n\n\nTHIRD DECLENSION. \n\n\n\n79 \n\n\n\nN. \nG. \nD. \nA. \nV. \n\n\n\nG. \n\nN. \nD. \nA. \nV. \n\n\n\nSingular. \n\n\n\nPlural. \n\n\n\n<Ta(p^s, clear. \n\n\n\naa,d)is \n\n\n\n{<ra<p4-os) \' (ra<povs \n(<ro</)6-i) aa<pet \n{(Ta(pe-a) aa(pT] <ra<pes \n<Ta(pes aa(p4s \n\nDual N. A. V \nG. and D \n\nSingular. \nii rpi-fjpTjs, trireme. \n\n{TpL->lp\xe2\x82\xac-Os) Tpi-f^pOVS \n\n{rpi-fipe-i) Tpi-fipei \n{Tpi7)pe-a) Tpi-fiprj \nTpiiipes \n\n\n\n{<ra(pe-es) (ra<pe7s \n\n{ cra(p4-ci3v ) cracpuy \n(ra(p4-(Tt(v) \n\n(aacpi-as) aacpels \n\n{cra(p4-es) aracpeTs \n\ncra((>4-\xe2\x82\xac <ra^ij \n\na\'a(p4-oiu. ixacpoiv. \n\nPlural. \n\nyrpiilpf-es) Tpirjpeis \n{TpLrip4-a}v) TpiTjpcov \nTpi7jpe-(ri{y) \n(rpf^pe-os) Tpi-fipets \n{Tpirjpe-es) Tpcrjpeis \n\nSingular. \n\n\n\n(<ra<^e-o) <ra<pri \n\n\n\n{<ra(p4-a) \n(aa^4-a) \n\n\n\naacprj \naa(pT] \n\n\n\nDual. \n\nTpiT]pe-e \nrpn]p4-oiy rpiiipoiv \n\n\n\nL \n\n\n\nG. \nD. \nA. \n\nV. \n\n\n\n"SMKpdrrjs {\'n.epiK\\4r]s) IlepiKAirs \n\n\'2,oi}Kp6.Tov5 (ITepi/cAee-os) Ilejot/cAeouy \n\n"l^o^Kparei (nept/cA-ee-t) (XlepiKA-eet) TlepiKXei \n\n2\xc2\xab/cpaT77 (nepifcAee-o) nepi/cXed (Poet, also HepmK^) \n\nSwKpares (llepiKAees) TlepiKkeis. \n\n\n\nEemaek 1. On the contraction in the Dual of ee into rj (not into et), and in \nthe Ace. PL of -eas into -eis, see \xc2\xa7 9, II. When a vowel precedes the endings \n-7JS, -\xe2\x82\xacs, then -eo in proper names in -kKtjs is always contracted into -d, and \ncommonly also in adjectires (\xc2\xa7 9, II. ), e.g. nept/cAeVa = Ilepi/cAed; a/cAei^y. \nwithout fame, oucKeea = oKAeS, vytirjy, healthy, vyi4a = vyia, ivde\'f]s, poor, iySkca = \nevdea, inrep(pvf]s, supernatural, vtrep<pv4a = irjrep(pva (Ace. Sing. Masc. and Nom., \nAce, and Voc. PI. neuter) ; but sometimes the contraction into -tj occurs, e. g. \nwyiTj, 5i(pv7i, a.(pv7j, avrocpvTJ, X. R. Equ. 7, 11 (in all the MSS.). The Ace. PI. \nMasc. and Fern, has -eis, e. g. vyicis, avTO(pv\xe2\x82\xacis. \n\nRem. 2. Proper names in -Kpdrvs, -a^4vr}s, -y4v\'t]s, -(pdvrfs, etc., also "ApTjs \n(Voc. "Apes), form the Ace. Sing, both according to the first and third Dec, \nand are hence called Heteroclites (i. e. of different declensions), e. g. \'XcoKparT) \nand \'S.wKpdr-qv, according to Dec. I., \'A\\Kafi4vr] and -fiey-qu, \'Ayria-^4yT] and \n\'(r^4vTiv, "Aprj and -rjy, etc. ; Plato commonly uses the form in -77, Xenophon that \nin -7iy, other writers botTi, without distinction ; in words in -yrjs. the form in -vriv \nis preferred to that in -*/7j. (The Gen. of "ApTjs in good prose is \'\'Apews [often in \nPlato], yet in the poets "Apeos is also used according to the necessities of the \nverse.) But in words in -kAtjs, the Ace. in -K\\rjv is first used in later writers. \nThe PI. is declined according to Dec. I., e. g. \'Api<rTO(pd,uou, tois AecoKparais, rohs \n\'Api(TTO(pd.vas, Tohs A7ffioa^4yas ] still, \'HpojcAees occurs in PL Theaet. 169, 6. \n\nRem. 3. The Gen. PL of rpi-fjpris occurs, also, in the uncontracted form, viz. \nTpir\\p4(t}v ; but in all the other Cases it is uniformly contracted ; the Dual \nalso in words of this class occurs in an uncontracted form in Attic writers, \n^\xe2\x80\xa2&- kvYY^^^^i ^^d the Tragedians use the uncontracted forms of proper names \n\n\n\n* caip4-os from <ra((>4<r-os, the a of the stem being dropped j and so in the \nOther Cases, except the Nom. and Voc. \n\n\n\n80 \n\n\n\nTHIRD DECLENSION. \n\n\n\n[H 60, 6.. \n\n\n\nin -K\\4ris = K\\rjsj according to the necessities of the verse, e. g. \'Hpo/cAcrjy, Dat. \n-/cAe\'ej, Voc. -K\\6es. The contract Ace. in -K\\rj is rare. The Voc. & "HpuKKes, \nas an exclamation, belongs to the later prose. \n\nRem. 4. The irregular accent of the Gen. PI. and Dual is to be noted, viz. \nTpiTipav (instead of rpnjpcou from. rpi7]pea>v)^ Tpirjpoiv (X. H. 1. 5, 19. 5. 4, 56). In \naddition to this word, adjectives in -r}^s and the word avTdpKTjs, have the like \naccent, e. g. awri^ioiv = crwrj^wv, avrapKewp = avfdpKuv. \n\n\n\n^ 60. (2) Words in -cos. Gen. -o>os, and in -ws and -w. \n\nGen. -00^. \n\n-A \n\n^ (a) -as, Gen. -aos. \n\nThus, e. g. o rj S(i)<;, Jackal, Gen. -9^wos, etc. Polysyllables have \nthe Ace. Sing, and PI. either contrac^^ed or uncontracted, e. g. \n6 ^/ocos, hero, tov ypoio. and ^/3o>, tovs ^pwas and ^pws. \n\n{h)-a>s and -co, Gen. -oos. \nSubstantives of these endings are always feminine. The \nstem ends in -os. The short final vowel, according to $ 52, 2 \n(b), is lengthened into w. The ending -ws, however, is retained \nin the Attic and Common language only in the substantive \natS(05 (stem atSos), and in poetry in ^a>s, morning (in Eurip.) ; \nbut in all other words, it has been changed into a smoother \nform, so that the Nom. ends in -w, e. g. i7xw (stem t7x\xc2\xb00- ^^ \nthe Voc. in oT, see ^ 53, 4 (3). The Dual and PL are formed \nhke the ending -os of Dec. II, ; thus, atSoi, rjx^^y ^tc. \n\n\n\nSing. N. \n\n\n7} ald(os (stem alSos), shame. \n\n\n7] rix<^ (stem vxos)^ echo. \n\n\nG. \n\n\n(alS6-os) aldovs \n\n\n(vx6-os) vxovs \n\n\nD. \n\n\n(alS6-\'C) al^oi \n\n\nivx^-i) vxoT \n\n\nA. \n\n\n(aldo-a) aiSw \n\n\n(vx^-a) 7)x^ \n\n\nV. \n\n\n{alBo-\'i) al5o7. \n\n\n(r/xcJ-i) 7)X0\'. \n\n\n\nk 61. (3) Words in -as. Gen. -aos, and in -os. Gen. -eos. \n\n(a) -OS, Gen. -aos. \nOnly the Neuters to o-eXas, light, and ro SeVas, goblet, belong to \nthis class : Gen. o-cA.a-os, Dat. aika-\'i, and a-iX-a ; PL oreA.a-a and \n(xiX-a, Gen. creXd-biv, Dat. o\'\xe2\x82\xacXa-o-t(v) ; Dual o^eXa-e, crcXa-oii/. \n\nRemark 1. On the poetic shortening of the contract o, see \xc2\xa7 54, Rem. 4. \nIn the following four Neuters in -os, the o in the Gen., Dat., and in the PL, it^i \nchanged, according to Ionic usage, into the weaker e, viz. V \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa762.] \n\n\n\nTHIRD DECLENSION. \n\n\n\n8^ \n\n\n\nBperas (poet.), image, Gen. /SpeVeos, PI. fiperea and iSpcrrj, fipereccv \nKuas {\xe2\x96\xa0poet), place, PI. in Homer, Kciea, K(i\xe2\x82\xac(ri{y). \novSas (poet.), ground, Gen. oiiSeoSf Dat. ot/Sei\' and oi/Sti (Horn.) \nKve<pas (poet, and prose), darkness. Gen. Kv4<paos Epic, Kv4<pov5 Attic, Kv4<pdl \nEpic, /cW<|>a Attic. \n\n(b) -OS, Gen. -cos. \n\nAll substantives of this class are also neuter. In the Nom., \n\n\xe2\x82\xac, the stem- vowel of the last syllable, is changed into o (^ 16, 1). \n\n\n\nSg.N.A. \nG. \nD. \n\n\nT^ yevos (instead \n(yeVe-os) \n{yeve-\'i) \n\n\nof y eves), genus. \nyevovs \nyevei \n\n\nrh K\\eos (instead of K\\ees), glory. \n(/fA.ee-os) K\\eovs \n(/cAee-t) Kheei \n\n\nPlur. N. \nG. \nD. \n\n\n{yive-a) \nyevi-uv and \ny4ve-<Ti{v) \n\n\nyetni \nyeviav \n\n\n(kAcVo) K\\4a \n(K\\4-a)v) K\\ewv \nK\\4\xe2\x82\xac-a-i{v) \n\n\nDual. \n\n\n(yeve-e) \n(yeve-oiv) \n\n\nyevri \nyevoiv \n\n\n(/cAe\'e-e) k\\4ij \n(K\\e4-oiv) K\\eo7u. \n\n\n\nRem. 2. On the contraction of \xe2\x82\xac6 into tj (instead of ei), and of ea into a \n(instead of 77), when a vowel precedes, see \xc2\xa7 9, 11. On the poetic shortening \nof the contracted d in kAco, see ^ 54, Rem. 4. \n\nRem. 3. The uncontracted form of the Gen. PI. is not unusual, e. g. opeW, \njSeAeW, KcpSeW, and almost without exception av^4(it}V, in PI. Polit. 260, a., the \nuncontracted Dual in \xe2\x82\xac\xe2\x82\xac occurs : tovtw ri) y4vee. In the lyric portions of the \nAttic tragedians, \'iT6^ea, axeo, etc. occur. \n\nin. "WOEDS IN -ly, -VSy -If -V. \n\n\xc2\xa7 62. (1) Words in -Is, -vs* \n\nThe substantives in -I5, -i3s originally ended in -tJFV, -vJPs. \nSee ^ 25, 2. \n\n\n\nSing. N. \n\n\n6 k7s, corn-worm. \n\n\n7) (tCs, sow. \n\n\nb 1x^5, fish. \n\n\nG. \n\n\nkX-6s \n\n\nffv-6s \n\n\nix^v\'os \n\n\nD. \n\n\nkU \n\n\nav-l \n\n\nix^i--i \n\n\nA. \n\n\nKlV \n\n\navy \n\n\nix^vv \n\n\nV. \n\n\nKt \n\n\n<rv \n\n\nix^ \n\n\nPlur. N. \n\n\nKt-es \n\n\n(Tv-es \n\n\nIx^-es \n\n\nG. \n\n\nKl-COV \n\n\ncrv-wv \n\n\nIx^v-ov \n\n\nD. \n\n\nK\'i-crl{v) \n\n\n<rv-a-i{v) \n\n\nix^v-<Ti(v) \n\n\nA. \n\n\nKt-as \n\n\nav-as, Attic <rvs \n\n\nix^v-as, Attic Ix^vs \n\n\nV. \n\n\nnt-es \n\n\n<rv-es m \n\n\nIx^t-es \n\n\nDual. \n\n\nkU \n\n\narv-e \n\n\n(Ix^t-e) ix^v \n\n\n\n\nkX-oiv . \n\n\n<rv-o7v \n\n\nix^i>-oiv. \n\n\n\nRemark. The contracted Nom. PI. ot &pKvs occurs in X. Ven. 2, 9 ; 6, 2 j \n10. 2, 19. \n\n\n\n82 \n\n\n\nTHIRD DECLENSION. \n\n\n\n[Us \n\n\n\n\xe2\x96\xa0V. \n\n\n\n$ 63. (2) Words in -ts, -t, -rs. \n\nThe stem of these substantives ends in X or v. The stem- \nvowels t and V remain only in the Ace. and Voc. Sing. ; in the \nother Cases they are changed into e (M6, 2). In the Gen. \nSing, and PL, masculine and feminine substantives take the \nAttic form in -ws and -cov, in which the w has no influence on \nthe accent (comp. ^29, Rem. 7). In the Dat Sing, and in the \nNom. and Ace. PL, contraction occurs. \n\n\n\nSing. N. \n\n\n7} TToAts, city. \n\n\n6 \'TTJxvs, cubit, rh ffivdirt, mustard. \n\n\nrh &(TTv, city. \n\n\nG. \n\n\nirSKe-as \n\n\n\xe2\x96\xa0n-//%e-a)s \n\n\nanraTre-os \n\n\nda-re-os \n\n\nD. \n\n\n7r(JAet \n\n\nw^Xet \n\n\nffiudrrei \n\n\n&ffTei \n\n\nA. \n\n\nir6\\iu \n\n\nirrix^y \n\n\naivairi \n\n\n&(TTV \n\n\n.V. \n\n\ntt6Ki \n\n\nirrixv \n\n\ncivain \n\n\n&<rTV \n\n\nPlur. N. \n\n\ntroKiis \n\n\nTT-hx^is \n\n\ntrivdtri] \n\n\n&arii \n\n\nG. \n\n\nir6\\e-(i>u \n\n\nir-qx^-OiiV \n\n\naivaTre-wv \n\n\naare-MV \n\n\nD. \n\n\nir6\\e-(n{v) \n\n\nTri)xe-(n{v) \n\n\n<nydire-(ri(v) \n\n\n&(rT\xe2\x82\xac-(ri{v) \n\n\nA. \n\n\nirSXeis \n\n\nTriix^\'^s \n\n\naivdiTT] \n\n\n&(TTt} \n\n\nV. \n\n\n\'3r6\\\xe2\x82\xacLS \n\n\nvnxeis \n\n\ncivdirri \n\n\n&<rTr) \n\n\nDual. \n\n\n7r6\\e-\xe2\x82\xac \n\n\nir-hx^-e \n\n\naivd-K^-\xe2\x82\xac \n\n\n&(rT\xe2\x82\xac-\xe2\x82\xac \n\n\n\n\niroXe-oiu \n\n\nTTflX^-OlV \n\n\nffivairi-oiv \n\n\nacrre-on/. \n\n\n\nRemark 1. Here belong all substantives in -|ts, -\\]/i5, most in -a-is and many \nothers, e.g. t] kSpis, dust; 6 fidvr is ^ prophet ; rj 6<piSi serpent ; t] ttIo-t is, faith; ri \ntifipiSi abuse; d ireAe/cwy, axe; 6 vpea-fivs, old man; rh viirept, pepper ; rh riy/d- \nfiapi, cinnabar; rh iruv (poet.), herd (without contraction). Adjectives in -ws, \n-\xe2\x82\xac?\xc2\xab, -V are declined in the Masc. and Neut. like tttjxv^ and &<Trv, except that the \nGen. Masc. takes the regular forms -eos, -eW (not -ews, -easy), e. g. ridvs, ^Seos. \n\nRem. 2. In the Attic poets, though probably only in the lyric passages, the \nGen. in -eos, from substantives in -is, occurs, e. g. ttSKcos. \n\nRem. 3. In X. An. 4. 7, 16, the contracted Gen. TrrjxSiv is found. Instead \nof the Dual forai in -ee, one in -tj is also used ; likewise a form in -et (instead \nof -6\xe2\x82\xac), is quoted by the ancient grammarians from Aeschines. \xe2\x80\x94 The Ace. PL \nof nouns in -vs sometimes occurs uncontracted in the Attic poets, e. g. ir-f^x^tts- \n\nRem. 4. Neuters in -i and -v have the Attic Gen. Sing, very seldom, e. g. \n&(rrew5, Eur. Bacch. 838 (831). Or. 761 (751). \n\nRem. 5. Adjectives in -"is, -t, e. g. WpXs, XSpX, skilful, and some substantives \nin -Is, which are partly poetic, have the regular inflection : i-os, i-t, i-es, etc., \nor both forms together, e. g. t) fxrjvis, anger (also /xiividos, etc.), 6 7} oTs, sheep ; rh \nirewepi (Gen. -epios and -eos)^ pepper; 6 t) irSpris, calf; 6 t) irStris, spouse (Gen. \nirSffios, but Dat. always irotrei) ; rj rpoiris, keel (also rpoiriSos, etc.) ; rj rvpa-is, \ntower {Gtin. rvpffios,^. An. 7. 8, 12. rvpaiv, ib. 13, but Plural rvptrns, rvptrea-iy \netc.) ; 7] ndyadis (Gen. -los, Dat. fiaydSi, X. An. 7. 3, 32) ; some proper names, \ne. g. \'iv4yue<Tis, "ipis (Gen. -los, etc.), X. An. 1. 2, 12; 6. 2, 1 (5. 10, 1), finally \none noun in -iJs, ri ^7x\xc2\xabXwy, but only in the Sing. \n\n\n\n^ 64, 65.1 \n\n\n\nTHIRD DECLENSION. \n\n\n\n83 \n\n\n\nSing.N. \n\n\n6, 7] irSpTiSy calf. \n\n\n7] \xe2\x82\xac7X\xe2\x82\xacAuy, eel. \n\n\no, ^ oTs, sheep. \n\n\nG. \n\n\n\'n-6pTi-os \n\n\n4yx^^v-os \n\n\not<^$ \n\n\nD. \n\n\nir6pri-i and irSpTl \n\n\n\xe2\x82\xac7xe^y-i" \n\n\noli \n\n\nA. \n\n\nirSpTiy \n\n\neyx^^vy \n\n\noJv \n\n\nV. \n\n\nir6pTi \n\n\n\xe2\x82\xac7xeAu \n\n\noh \n\n\nPlur. N. \n\n\n\xe2\x96\xa0jTopTi-es and Tt6prls \n\n\ne7xeA.ets \n\n\nehs \n\n\nG. \n\n\niropri-wv \n\n\n4yX^^^-oov \n\n\nOl(DV \n\n\nD. \n\n\nir6pTi-<ri(v) \n\n\n\xe2\x82\xac7xeAe-(rt(j\') \n\n\nolai{v) \n\n\nA. \n\n\niropTi-as and irSprn \n\n\n67xeA.eis \n\n\noTas and oh \n\n\nV. \n\n\nTr6pTi-es and irSpTis \n\n\ne7xeAeiy \n\n\noles \n\n\nDual. \n\n\nvSpTi-e \n\n\n67xeA.e-e \n\n\noh \n\n\n\n\nTTopri-oiv \n\n\ne7xeA.e-0ij\' \n\n\nOIOIV \n\n\n\nKem. 6. Xenophon uses the Ionic forms of oh : aiV, oies, otwv, oias, and 6jls. \n\n\xc2\xa7 64. Quantity of the Third Declension, \n\n1. The inflection-endings -o, -t, -u, and -os, are short \n\nException : The o in the Ace Sing, and PL of substantives in -eis is long, \ne. g. \'t})v i\xe2\x82\xacp4d, Tovs Upias from 6 Upevs, priest. \n\n2. Words, whose Nom. ends in -a|, -t|, -u|, -ai^, -ti|/, -i/i//, -<j, and -w, have the \npenult of the Cases which increase, either short or long, according as the \nvowel of the above endings is long or short by nature ; a, i, v, are long in all \nGenitives in -siluos, -tj/os, -wos, e. g. 6 ^cipd^, breastplate, -olkos ; 6 ph\\i, reed, piTr6s ; \n7] okt/s, ray, -Tvos^ but r/ ^aJAol, clod, -aKos, 7] i\\irfs, hope, -tSos, See fuller \nexplanations in Larger Grammar, Part I. \xc2\xa7 291. \n\n\n\n$ 65. Accentuation of the Third Declension. \n\n1. The accent remains on the tone-syllable of the Nom. as long as the laws \nof accentuation (\xc2\xa7 30) permit, e. g. rb irpayfia, deed, irpdyfiaTos (but irpayfjLaTwv), \nrh ivofxa, name, ovofiaros (but ovofiaTcav), 6 t) x^^\'^ci\'\') swallow, xeAtScivos, Eevo- \n<pa)u, -(iuTos., -uvT\xe2\x82\xacs, -(avToov. Particular exceptions have been noticed in the \nParadigms. \n\n2. Monosyllables are accented in the Gen. and Dat. of all Numbers on the \nfinal syllable ; the long syllable wv and oiv having the cireumflex ; the others, \nthe acute, e. g. 6 fi-fju, fi7]u6s, fiTjvi, jxtivoIv, iit^v&v, fn](ri{u). \n\nExceptions: \n(a) The following ten substantives are Paroxytones in the Gen. PI. and Gen. \nand Dat. Dual: tj Bas, torch; 6 S/j.d!>Sj slave; 6 tj ^ds, jackal; rh KPA2, poet. \n(Gen. KparSs), head; rh ods (Gen. wtSs), ear; 6 t) ttoTs, child; & <r4\\s, moth; 6 t) \nTp^s, Trojan, Trojan woman; f} (pcfs (Gen. (pca^6s), a burning; rh (pus (Gen. \n^aros), light; e. g. SdfSwi/, Sa.dotVf bdxDV, Kpdrcau, ioruiv, &roiv, iraiScov, TraiSoiv, \nrewv, Tp(ia>v, <pa)Z(cv, (pdorwv (on the contrary, rui/ dfxuaiv from al Suuai, rS>v \nTptawv from ot Tpwaly ruy <p<arS)v from 6 <pcas, man; rwv ^uSiv from ri i^a>^, \ninjury). \n\n\n\nP4 THIRD DECLENSION. [$ 65 \n\n(b) The following contracts, according to the nature of the final syllable, are \neither Properispomona or Paroxytones, in the Gen. and Dat. of all Numbers, \nas in the other Cases, e. g. rh eap (Epic ^p), spring; Krjp (Epic from Keap), heart; \n6 \\as (from Kaas), stone; 6 irpciu (from Trpvycij/), hill, e. g. ^pos (rarer eapos), ^pt \n(rarer eapi), Krjposy K\'^piy \\aos, Aai, xdav^ irpcovos, irpuyi. \n\nRemark. The following contracts, on the other hand, follow the principal \nrule (No. 2) : o-Tedp = arrip, tallow; ariaros = (Ttt^tSs, <ppeap, well, (ppedros and \n<PP7]t6s, pi. (ppTjTioy, \xc2\xa9p?!, OppI, Qp-fjiKos = OpaKos, and Opp/cJs, oh, olos, oli, \nolwu, ol<ri{v). \n\n(c) Monosyllabic participles, as well as the pronoun ris ; quis? retain the \naccent, through all the Cases, on the stem-syllable ; but the pronoun iras and \n6 Udu is an Oxytone in the Gen. and Dat. Sing. ; in the other Cases either a \nParoxytone or a Properispomenon, according to the nature of the final syllable, \ne. g. <pvs, <pi>vros, Sov, ovTos, ovri, tvTav, oZ(n{v), ttvToiv^ tIs, tIvos, rlvi, etc. ; Tray, \niravrSs, Travri, irdi/Tuv, iravroiu, Traaiiv), 6 Tidy, Havos, ro7s Ilaa\'L{y). \n\n3. T]ie following are accented, in the Gen. and Dat. of all Numbers, like \nmonosyllabic substantives : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) 7] yvyf], wife (yuvaiKos, yvvaiKi, yvyaiKolv, yvvaiKcay, yvvai^i{v) ; but yvvax- \nKa, yvyaiKes, etc.) 5 or] Kvuy, dog {Kvyos, Kvyi, Kvyoiy, Kvy&v, Kvai{v) ; but \nKvya, Kvyes, etc.) ; \n\n(b) Syncopated substantives in -rjp, on which see \xc2\xa7 55, 2 ; \n\n(c) Compounds of els, unus, in Gen. and Dat. Sing., e. g. ovSeis, ovdevSs, \nouSej\'i ; but ovdevcay, ov5e<ri{v), so jutjScis, firj^eySs, etc.; \n\n(d) The Attic poetic forms, Sop6s, dopl, from 56pv. \n\n4. For the accentuation of substantives in -is, -vs. Gen. -e\xc2\xaby, see \xc2\xa7 63 ; of \nthose in -c6 (\xc2\xa7 60), the irregular accentuation of the Ace. Sing, of ^x<^\xc2\xab \xe2\x80\x94 VX^ \n(instead of -^x^)) \'should be noted. \n\n5. (a) In the Voc. of sync^cpated substantives (\xc2\xa7 55, 2) in -rip, the accent, \ncontrary to the principal rule, is drawn back as far as possible, e. g. & irdrep, \ndvyarep, Avur}Tep, &y\xe2\x82\xacp\', SO also (a) in the following substantives; \'AttoAAwv \n(ayos), riocretSwj/ {couos), aar-fip (rjpos), \'A/xcpiay {ioyos), Sai\'^p (epos) ; thus, & \n"AiroWoy, nSaeidoy, (ra)Tep,\'\'Afi(pioy, daep\\ \xe2\x80\x94 (b) in compound substantives in \n-cov, Gen. -oyos, in adjectives in -coy. Gen. -oyos, whether simple or compound ; \nalso in comparatives in -icay,. -coy (in adjectives and comparatives, also, in the \nneuter gender), e. g. \'Aydixefxvoy from \' Ay afie/xyuy, ^ApiffTSyeiTov from ^Apiaro- \nyeiTwy (but \'lacrov, TlaXaiixoy, ^iXrjfioy, etc. as simple) : & and t^ ^idaifiov, \xc2\xa7> and \nrb ix4r}/xoy, S) and rh KdWiou ; (the following are exceptions : 5 AaKeBaT/noy from \nAaKedaiixcoy, compounds in -<pp(t}y, e. g. 5 AvKocppov from AvK6(ppay, Ev^vcppoy from \nEv^vfppcav, S} and rh Sdifpoy from Sai\'^pwi/ ;) \xe2\x80\x94 (c) in the compound Paroxytones in \n\xe2\x96\xa0^s, mentioned in \xc2\xa7 59, e. g. Sco/f/jares, Arj/xScr^eves ; 3 and rh a^^dScs from av^d- \nBrjs, (piXdXri^es from (piKaK-fi^tjs (but aX-q^es from oAtji^s as a simple), o^Top/ces, \nKatcSriSres. \xe2\x80\x94 (Adjectives and substantives in -arjs, -wSrjs, -wXtjs, -up-qs, -TjpT/s, are \nexceptions, e. g. ehwh-qs, evwdes, a/i^c^Tjs afx(pct)\xe2\x82\xacs, irayuXris irayuXes, yecapTjs vewpes, \n^i(p\'f]p7)s ^KpTJpes, 7) Tpffiprfs Tpiripes, Aidprjs S> Ai&pes. \n\n(b) The Voc. of nouns in -avs, -evs, -ovs, -\xc2\xab, and -us is Perispomenon, e. g j \nypav, Pa(ri\\\xe2\x82\xacv, )8oC, SaTr^o?, atSoT. s \n\n1 \n\n\n\n^ 66.] THIRD DECLENSION. 86 \n\n\n\n^ 66. Gender of the Third Declension. \n\nThe natural gender \xe2\x80\x94 the masculine and feminine \xe2\x80\x94 is distinguished in tho \nthird Declension, not by a special form, but partly by the signification, partly \nby the forms, and in part by usage alone. The following rules will aid in \ndetermining the gender: \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nI. Masculines: (A) all nouns whose Nom. and stem (which can be recognized \nby the Genitive) end in -av, Gen. -av-os ; -uv. Gen. -ovr-os and -uvr-os ; -vvy \nGen. -vv-05 (only & fiocra-vv, tower) ; -eis, Gen. -ev-os (only 6 Krelsf comb) ; -as, \nGen. -avT-os] -ovs, Gen. -ovt-os, -ovvt-os^ -od-os {d irovs) ; -\xc2\xabp, Gen. -op-os; -euy, \nGen. -ews ; -tjs, Gen. (-e-os) -ovs ; -ws, Gen. -a-os ; \n\n(B) the following with exceptions : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) in -T]v, Gen. \'rjvos ; but 6 ?; x^^t goose; \xe2\x80\x94 in -r]Vy Gen. -ev-os ; but 6 tj aS-fjUf \ngland, and tj <ppi]v, diaphragm ; \n\n(b) in -wv, Gen. -wv-os] but ^ oAav, threshing-floor; rj jSA.^x*"\' o^ 7^^X*\'*\'\xc2\xbb \npenny-royal; t] fieX^ddiy (poet.), care; ^ fi-fiKwv, poppy; t] irAaraydov, rattle \n(but 6 ttK. petal of the poppy) ; ij Tprjpwv^ pigeon; t] avXdiv (poet., but prose \ni), ravine; ^ 6 KdScav hell; \n\n(c) in Tjp, Gen. -rip-os ; but ^ /c^p, j/?i^e (on account of ^ K^p, goddess of fate) ; \n\n5 ^ ^oucrTTjp, hammer; (those in -Tjp contracted from -eap, are neuter: rh \nKTJp (poet.). Gen. Krjpos, heart; rh ^ap, Gen. ^pos, spring;) \xe2\x80\x94 in -Tjp, Gen. \n-pos ; but 7} yacTi]p, ya<rTp6sf belly ; \xe2\x80\x94 in -rip, Gen. -ep-os ; but 6 t} cd^rjp^ \nether; 6 t) a-fjp, air; \n\n(d) in -eip, Gren. -eip-os; but t] x^^Pt hand (regularly, 6 avrlx^ip, the thumb) ; \n\n(e) in -up, Gen. -cop-os ; but t^ \'ixcop (poet.), booty; rh \'ir4\\a>p (poet.), monster; \n\n(f ) in -ovs, Gen. -o-os, see \xc2\xa7 57, Eem. 4; \n\n(g) in -cos. Gen. -\xc2\xabt-os; but rh ^wy, %Af; \n"(h) in \'^, G\xc2\xabn. -ttos, -j8os. \n\nII. Feminines: (A) aZ^ nouns in -ay, Gen. -c(S-os; -ety, Gen. -etS-os (only ^ \nKAety, key) ; -ai/y, Gen. -e-oy ; -ivs. Gen. -iv^-os ] -vvs. Gen. -u\xc2\xbb\'(&-oy ; -Tjy, Gen. \n\xe2\x80\xa2TjT-oy; -jy, Gen. -tr-oy (oisJy t] x^pis) ; -uy, Gen. -v5-oy and -ui^^-oy; -(6 and -c6y, \nG\xc2\xabn. -(J-oy ; \n\n(B) the following nouns with exceptions : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) in -jy, Gen. -i-os; but 5 x^^^i P^^^ wine; 6 <poi\\Kis, a part of a ship ; 6 \n&pTis, carpenter\'s tool; 6 icic, corn-worm; 6 yXdvis, a hind offlsh; 6 \\7s \n(Epic), lion, r<id 6 ri oh, sheep; \xe2\x80\x94 in -is. Gen. -eus, but 6 ^px\'^j testicle {ij \n6pX^s, a kind of olive) ; 6 6(pis, serpent; 6 (later also tj) ex\xc2\xab, viper; 6 (later \n7]) K6pis, bug ; at and at Kvp$ei5, law-tables; \xe2\x80\x94 in -is, Gen. -i5-os\', but 6 (p^6is, \n-iSoy, a kind of cake; tj 6 riypis. Gen. -toy and -iSos, tiger; \xe2\x80\x94 in -jy, Gen. \n-i^-os; but 6 7] opvis, bird; \xe2\x80\x94 in -is. Gen. -7v-os] but 6 S\xe2\x82\xac\\<pis, dolphin; & \nIktIs, weasel; 6 tj ^is, heap ; 6 reXfiis, marsh-mud; \n\n(b) in -uy, Gen. -i/-oy; but o fi6rpvs, cluster; 6 bprivvs, footstool; 6 tx^vs,fish\'j \n\n6 fAvs, mouse ; 6 v4kvs, corpse ; 6 ffrdxvs, ear of corn ; 6 (tkSWvs, mode of \ntonsure ; 6 r7<pvs, the night-mare; 6 kolvSvs, a Median gai^mentf 6 rj Is or <rvs, \n\n8 \n\n\n\n^5 THIRD DECLENSION. U ^\'^\xe2\x80\xa2 \n\nswme; 6 ix.xdudpvs, tun-Jisk> V (later also 6) hx^Ws, ed; 6 xp^ixvs, a sea- \nJisk ; \xe2\x80\x94 in -US, Gen. -\xe2\x82\xac\xc2\xabs ; but S irdheKvs, axe ; o Trrix^s, cubit ; \n(c) in -wK, Gen. -ou-os ; but 6 &Kfia>u, anvil; 5 irpiccu, saw; 6 Kapciu, rule; 6 \nS|\xc2\xabi/, axle; 6 a^iffau, earthen-vessel; 6 iiri<rela,v, flag ; 6 h k^\'w", P^"^^^/ ^ \nK\\aUv and ^Kp^ixc^u, bough; S \\ayciy,gulf; 6 irKary^u, doll ; 6 fivpfiv^d,^, \nant\'s nest ; 6 tj oKsKTpvdy, cock and hen. \nRemark 1. Nouns in -f are partly masculine, partly feminine, except those \xe2\x80\xa2 \nin -o| (Gen. -Akos), which are masculine ; most of those in -| are feminine ; the \nlarger part of those in -t// are masculine, but many are feminine, e. g. v koXou- \npo^, -OTTOS, shepherd\'s crook; t] KalKa^, tempest; Ai t^^ {vox), bir6s, voice; v (rarely \n6) &^p, wTr65,face; t] (pKirp, </)\\e/3os, vein; v xe\'p\'\'\xc2\xabl\'> holy-water; v KaTri\\i^i>, -i<^s, \nupper story, etc. \n\nIII. Neuters: (A) all in -a, Gen. -ot-os; ->?, Gen. -rjT-os (only rh Kdpri) ; -t, , \nGen. -IT-OS (only rh fi4\\t with its compounds) ; -vp, Gen. -vp-os (only t5 ttu^. Gen. \nirvp-6s, fire) ; -ap. Gen. -ar-os or -Tjp, Gen. -tjt-os ; -op, Gen. -op-os ; -as. Gen. -ar-os ; \n-oy, Gen. (-e-os) -ousj -t, Gen. -eos ; -u. Gen. -v-os, and -eoy, and -ar-oy, \xc2\xa7 68, 1 5 \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(B) the following with exceptions: (a) -ap. Gen. -ap-os; but ^ rffip, star- \nling; (b) -OS, Gen. -o-os; but ^ Aas, stone; (c) -wp, Gen. -ot-os (except 6 ax<i>p, \niX^Pi eo\'Tup, T]\\\xe2\x82\xacKTap, ^ 68, 15). \n\nRem. 2. The following single words may be noted in addition : tj dais, Gen. \nSair-6s, feast ; rh ffroSs or ffTais, araiT6s, dough; rh ads, Gen. wt-6s, ear. \n\n\xc2\xa7 67. Anomalous Forms of the Third Declension. \n\nAll substantives, whose inflection differs from the rules and \nanalogies above given, are inckided under the irregular substan- \ntives of the third Dec. All the anomalous forms of the third \nDec. may be divided into three classes : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) The first class includes those substantives whose Norn, cannot be derived, \naccording to general analogy, from the Genitive-stem, e. g. rj yvvi], wife, G\xc2\xabn. \nyvpaiK-6s. \n\n(b) The second class inc^ades those substantives, which, with one Nom. \nform, have in some or all of the Cases, two modes of formation ; both of these, \nhowever, may come, in accordance with the general rules, from one form of the \nNom., e. g. 6 ^ opvis, Gen. -J^os, bird, PL Spvi^es and opveis, as if from opyis. \nGen. -ews. These substantives are called Heteroclites (i. e. of diflferent declen- \nsions or irregularly declined). \n\n(c) The third class includes substantives, which, with one Nom. form, admit, \nin some or all of the Cases, two modes of formation, one of which may be \nderived from the Nom. form in use, but the other supposes a different Nom. \nform, e. g. ^epdrrwv, -ovtos, servant. Ace. ^epd-n-oyra and poet, ^epanra, as if from \n&6po4\'. This formation is called Metaplasm (transformation), and the substan- \ntives included under it, Metaplasts. The Nom. form, presupposed in this case, \nis called the Theme. \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa768.] ANOMALOUS FORMS OF THIRD DEC. 87 \n\n{ 68. Anomalous Forms of the Third Declenion. ^ \n\n1. Tow (to, knee), and Sdpv (roy spear), see $ 54 (c). \n\nIn the tragic poets, the Epic forms, yovvaTa and yovva, yovvcuri., occur ; \n\nalso in the Attic poets, the Gen. Zopos, Dat. 5opj, and even S6pei, and \n^Pl. Soprf instead of dopara, are formed from 56pv] and in the phrase, Sopl \n^iKuv, to take a prisoner of war^ this Dat. form is retained even by the Attic \n\nprose writers. \n\n2. Vvvri [rj, woman), Gen, ywaiAc-o? (as if from yuvai^), Dat. \nywatK-L, Acc yvvoLK-a, Yocyvvai; PL yui/atKcs, yuvatxwv, yui/at^t (v), \nyvvoLKas; on the accentuation, see \xc2\xa7 65, 3 (a). \n\n3. Aopv, see yowy No. 1. \n\n4. Z\xe2\x82\xacV9, Gen. Ato\'s, Dat. At^ Acc. Ata (as if from ^is), Voc. \n2kv. \n\nPoet, corresponding forms are Z-nuSs, ZTyy/, Ztjj/o. \n\n5. \xc2\xa9cpaTTODv (6, servant), -ovros. In Eurip. Acc. Sepairaj PI. \n.^epaTTc?, $ 67 (c). \n\n6. Kdpa (to, head), an Epic and poetic "^vord, Gen. Kpar-os, \nDat. K/HXTt and Kapa, Acc. to Kapa, to Kpara (jov KpaTO, \xc2\xa7 214); \nAcc. PI. Tovs KpaTtt?, \xc2\xa7 67 (c). \n\n7. KA.\xe2\x82\xacts (17, ^\'cy), Gen. kAciS-os, Dat. kAciS-i, Acc. kXciv (^ 53, \nRem. 1), later AcXctSa; PI. Nom. and Acc. kXcis, and KXeiSes, \nxXctSa?, ^ 67 (b). \n\nOld Attic, KX\'ps, K\\riS6s, .fcApSt, kAj^So. \n\n8. Kvwf (6, -^j ^ic^), Gen. kvv-os, Dat. Kvvt, Acc. Kvva, Voc. kvov; \n\nPI. KW\xe2\x82\xac5, ICJVWVf KVCTL, KVVtt?. \n\n9. AC-rra (to, oil, fatness), in the Epic dialect always in the \nplirases, oXeLij/acr^aL Xltt eA.aiu), )(p2a-ai and ^toracr^at XtV* cXato), and \nso also in the Attic prose, aA,ct<^\xe2\x82\xaco-^ai, ^Ua-^ai Xc-n-a; XiVa is thus \nan abridged Dat. instead of XiTrat, XiTro, from to XtVa, Gen. -aos, \nbut eXatov must be considered as an adjective from cAoo, olive, \nso that XtVa cXatov means olive-oil. \n\n10. MapTV5 (6, ivitness). Gen. /xaprvpo^s, Dat. fidpTvpi, Acc. \nfjMpfj-upa, and in Simonides /xapTw; Dat. PI. /xapTvo-t (v). \n\n11. Nav9(T7, ship), Gen. vew?, Dat. vryt, Acc. vaw, Voc. want- \ning ; Dual, Gen. and Dat. vcoiv ( Nom. and Acc. wanting) ; PL \nvrJ\xe2\x82\xac<s, veojv, vavcrt (v), vavs. Comp. ypav<;, ^ 57. \n\nIn Attic poets and later prose also, vTj6sy tnjl, K^a, etc \n\n\n\nS6 DKFBCTIVKS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. [t 9^ \n\n\xe2\x80\xa22. "Opvts (^ 17, 6i>^). Gen- 5pvZ^-o9, etc. The PL has a col- \nlateral fonn declined Uke tro\\t9, except the Bat. : opvl^^ and \nJp\xc2\xbbti?, opix^wy and 6pv\xe2\x82\xaco\xc2\xbb\'y ofyy\'urt, opvlSa^, o/neis, and opvis, \xc2\xa7 67 (b). \nSo \'A\xc2\xbbtixafxrts, \'A\xc2\xbbtix<V>o-i&>s, and \'Avaxtifxretos. \n\nIn the Attic ^vTiters, the i is sometimes short, Spylst 6py1y, Aristoph. At. 16. \n270. 335 (but ^prls, bpyify 70, 103, 73). # \n\n13. nyv$ (17, place of meeting), Gen. irvKv-o^y Dat rrw^ Ace. \n\xe2\x80\xa2vmti. \n\n14. 2 175 (o, moth), Gen. o-c-os; PL o-ees. Gen. o-cW, etc.; in the \nlater \\rriters, Gen. (tttos. \n\n15. 2ko)p (to, </irt), Gen. o-xa-os, etc., and rSwp (rojicater). \nGen. i\'>5aro9, etc. To both of these belong : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n16. ^piap (to, a iceU), and areap (to, taUow), Gren. -caros and \n-rjTo^ (a long in Attic, short in Epic). \n\n17. <l>^o\'ts, <j>Sol<: (o, QTt of cooking). Gen. <^ot-os and (from \n<^oi9) <^oS-os; PL ^o\xe2\x82\xacis and <^^of\xc2\xa7\xe2\x82\xacs. \n\n18. XoCs (o, a measure), x**^* X\xc2\xb0^ X\xc2\xae^"*\'* X^\xc2\xbb X**^*\'* y^"^^\'^ X\xc2\xb0**\' \nlike ^vs (\xc2\xa7 57) ; also Gen. x^^^j Acc. x^^ Acc. PL xoas, as if \nfrom ypfx^. The latter forms are preferred by the Attic writers ; \nxois, with the meaning of mound, is inflected only like ^oOs. \nThe form x*>^^ is Ionic, Bat xoei. \n\n19. Xpcog (64 skin), -xpnyr-oSi xf*<*"\'*\xc2\xbb )(pCrra. Collateral forms in \nthe Ionic dialect and the Attic poets, axe. Gen. xpo-o^j ^poh XP^ \nlike cu3a>s. The Dat x/*$ is found in certain phrases with cv, \ne. g. cv xp<5 KcipeaSoL, Xen, HelL 1. 7, 8. ^\'pct cv xpw, i^ shaves close \nto th\xc2\xbb ikin, it comes liome, Soplu Aj. 786. \n\n\\ \n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 69. Defective 2\\ouns of the Third Declension, \n\nSome notm^s of the third Dec. are wanting in one or more of the Cases, and \n\xe2\x80\xa2re, consequentlr, called Defectives. Existing forms, however, of such substan- \ntives, are found, for the most part, only in certain phrases, e. g. \n\nXptms (rh, efefe), Ionic-Attic form for the Nom., Gen., and Ace; also rh \nXP\xc2\xab\xc2\xbbs\xc2\xbb Gen. xp^vs, PL to. xp^ Gen. xP^ur ; the Dat. and Dual are wanting ; \niimf and vrap (only as Xom. and Ace), in dreaming and tcaJcing ; ^^>\xe2\x82\xacXos (only J \nas Xom. and in the construction of the Ace with the Inf.), advantage; n^ \nonlj in the phrase xnrh }jAKii$, under the arm. \n\n\n\nI \n\ni \n\n\n\ni$ 70, 71.] REDUNDANT NOUNS. HETEROCLITES. 89 \n\nBemarks on the Declensioks. 4( \n\nklO. I. Redundant Nouns. \n\nNouns are called Redundant, wliich have two modes of \ninflection in all or in most of the Cases : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nA. They belong to the same declension, \n\n(a) of the same gender, e. g. \n\n6 \\^^s and \\d6s, people; S veds and vd6s, temple; 6 Kayds and \\ay6s, hare; \nb KaXws, rope, PL also ndhoi ; ^ aAcos, ihreshing-Jloor, PI. also ot oAot ; t] Fopyd \nand Topydiv. \n\n(b) of different genders (hence called heterogeneous), e. g. \n\nb pwTos and t^ vwtov, back (the last form was regarded by the Atticists as the \nonly proper form, still rhv vwtov Xen. R. Equ. 3, 3) ; b ^uyJs and rb C^^^^ yoke. \n\xe2\x80\x94 In the PI. the neuter fonn of these heterogeneous nouns is more frequently \nused, e. g. b cItos, to. fflra ; ot Secrfioi, and more commonly rh deafxoi ; b ara^fiSst \na station, balance, ot (rra^fioi and t^ a-To^fxd, stations, and rck aTa^p.a., sometimes \nalso balances; ol C^yoi does not probably occur. \n\nB. To different declensions, and commonly of difierent gen- \nders (heterogeneous), e. g. \n\nb <p^6yyos and t] (p^oyyii, voice; b x^pos and t] x^P\xc2\xb0"> space; t} 6x^ ^^^ ^ \niix^os, rising ground; tj di\\\\/a and rh Si\\pos, thirst; tj vdirrj (the older form) and rh \nvdiros, valley, etc. It should be observed further, that the word b irpiff^vs, elder, \nhas only Ace. Trpecrfiw, Voc. 7rp4crfiv; these three forms are almost entirelj \npoetic {irpeff^vTepos and TrpftrfivTaTos formed from this, are in frequent use) ; \nin the Common Language, b Trpea-fivrrjSi -ov, elder ; in the meaning of messenger, \nenvoy, the Common Language uses in the Sing, b \xe2\x96\xa0n-pecjSeuTi^s, -ov ; but in the \nPL ol and rovs irp^trfieis, irpea-pewv, Trpiafieai ; also, t5 SaKpvov and rh duKpv \ntear. The latter and older form is retained in the poetic dialect ; still, the Dat. \nPL SdKpvffi is found even in the Attic prose-writers (Thu. 7, 75; Dem. c. Onet. \nL \xc2\xa7 32). \n\n\xc2\xa771. II Heteroclites. \n\nHeterochtes [\xc2\xa7 67 (b)] have two modes of formation ; they \nare either of the third Dec, which have been aheady presented \ntogether (} 68), or of two different declensions. Those of dif- \nferent declensions are, e. g. as follows : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nA. Of the Pirst and Third Declension. \nSeveral substantives in -r]s are inflected, either in whole or in \npart, according to the first and tliird declensions : \xe2\x80\x94 \n(a) Some in -tjj, Gen. -ov and -rjros, through all the Cases according to both \n\n8* \n\n\n\n90 THIRD DEC. METAPLASTS. [\xe2\x99\xa672. \n\ndeclensions : S fivK^s, mushroom, Gen. fivKov and fivicnros, and some proper \nnames, e. g. Xdpris. The name 0a\\^s, in the old Attic, has ths Ionic Gen. \nform 0c(Ae(k\xc2\xbb, Dat. @a\\fj, Ace. QaKriv] in the later writers, QaXoZ and edxrrros^ \n\xc2\xaed\\rjTi and \xc2\xa9oA-Tjra. Observe that the accent is drawn back on e<\xc2\xa3A.ec.;. \n\n(b) The proper names mentioned, \xc2\xa7 59, Eem. 2, have r} as well as j^v in the \nAce. Sing. only. \n\nB. Of the Second and Third Declensions. \n\n(a) Of the Common second and third declensions : several \nsubstantives in -os, as masculine, are inflected according to the \nsecond Dec, but as neuter, according to the third Dec, e. g. 6 \nand TO oxos, chariot, tov o^ov and oxoyx:, rov oxov and to oxos ; 6 \nand TO (TKOTos, darkness. \n\n(b) Of the contract second and third declensions : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nTrp6xoos (t], vxitering-pot), Att. irpSxovSy Gen. irp6xov, etc., Dat. PL ir^<^OMn \n(like fiovs, fiovcrlv). \nOlSiiruvs, Gen. OlSiiroSos and (poet.) OlSlirov, Dat. OlUroSif Ace. OtSiToSa and \n\nOtStVouj/, Voc. OlSiirov. \n\n(c) Of the Attic second and third declensions : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nIn the Ace. Sing., 6 yehois, laughter ^ y4x.(Dros, y4\\cerij Ace. y^Kotra and \nyeKaVf and the three following: irdrpast patruus, /jL-fp-ptes, avunculus, and \nMivus, which, in the Gen. and Ace. Sing., are inflected according to the third \nDec. and the Attic second Dec. 5 in the other Cases, according to the third \nDec. \n\nirdrpus, Gen. irdrpca and irdrpuos, Dat. irdrpon, Acc. trdrptev and wdrpva] \nMivvs, Gen. Mlua and Miytaosy Dat. Miym, Acc. Mlim (^ 48, Rem. 1), Mliwr \nand Miyua. \n\n\xc2\xa7 72. Ill Metaplasts. \n\nMetaplasts [k 67 (c)] like HeterocUtes, have two modes of \nformation ; they are either of the third declension, which have \nbeen already presented together (68), or of two different declen- \nsions. Those of different declensions are, e. g. as follows : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) Of the Common second and third declensions : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nA4ySpoy {rh, tree), Gen. S&dpov, etc.; but in the Dat. PL among the Attic \nwiiters, Se\'i/Speo-t (from the stem rh AENAP02) and UySpois] the first form is \nregarded by the Atticists as the better. To this stem belong, also, the forms \nT^ 5\xe2\x82\xac%ei and rh. SeVSpTj, which occur in the Attic poets, and in later prose \n\nwriters. \n\nKotya>y6s (6, partaker), Gen. Koiyuyov, etc.; Xenophon uses the forms m \nKoivwyes and rohs Koiyuyas (from KOINXIN). \n\n\n\ni \n\n\n\n73 I INDECLINABLE AND DEFECTIVE NOUNS. 91 \n\n\n\nKpivov (t^, lily) Gren. Kpivov, etc., with the secondary form in the Dat. PI. \nKplvtai in Aristoph. from the PI. Kplyea (in Herod.). Comp. SevSpov. \n\nAas {Sy stone), Gen. Xaos and in Soph. O. C. 196. \\dov. \n\n\'O 6vfipo5 [and poetic rh oveipov], dream, (Jen. ov^ipov and ovelparos. \n\nTlvp (rhfjire), irvpos. But PL, ret irup<{, uxitch-Jires, according to the second \nDec. \n\nTi6s {6, son), Gen. v/ou, etc. Together with this formation, there is another \naccording to the third Dec, much in use, particularly in the Attic writers, from \nthe theme \'TIET2, Gen. vUosy Dat. vU7 (Ace. vUa is rejected) ; PI. vUTst Gen. \nvUuy, Dat. uiV<rt, Acc. {vUas), Attic vU7s (\xc2\xa7 57, Rem. 1); Dual, vUe, Gren. \nvUoiv. \n\n(b) Of the Attic second and third declensions : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nThe three substantives, rj aXws, threshing-Jioor ; 6 raus, peacock; and 6 rix^tiy, \nwhirlwind, have, together with the common inflection according to the Attic \nsecond declension, another according to the third declension, in -wvos, etc., e. g. \nrvtpuva, \n\nKemahk. The words ^ S.\\us and 6 raws are generally declined accord- \ning to the Attic second Dec, Acc. Sing. Si\\iuy, rawy ; still, the y is commonly \nrejected from aAa>r in the Acc, ^ 48, Rem. 1. But the forms Sxayos, \xc2\xa3a.wkc5, \ni\\(D(ri(y), rauvi, rauya, raaxriyf etc., are used on account of their greater \nperspicuity. \n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 73. Ifideclinable and Defective Nouns. \n\n1. Substantives which do not vary the termination, but retain in all the Cases \nthe form of the Nom., arc called indeclinable. Except foreign proper names, aa \n6 \'Afipaafi, rov \'A/Spooft, and the indeclinable cardinal numbers, all indeclinable \nnouns are of the neuter gender. Here belong especially : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) The names of the letters, e. g. t^, rov, rtf, &X<pa ; \n\n(b) Most of the cardinal numbers, e. g. Stna aySpaiy; \n\n(c) Th, TOW, Ty, xp*\xc2\xabK, necessity, destiny, and ^efus with iariy and thou, and \nseveral foreign words, e. g. ri, toD, t^ ircUrx* 5 \n\n(d) The substantive infinitives, e. g. rh, rov, r<f yp<i<p(iy. \n\n2. Some substantives are used only in the Sing., or only in the PI. Such \nwords may be termed defective in number. The reason of it is found, either \nin the meaning of the word, or simply in usage, e. g. 6 al^p, ether ; ol drrjaiai, \nthe Etesian wind ; al \'A^yai^ Athens ; ra \'OKvfiiria, the Olympic games. Comp. \nfurther, S}-ntax, \xc2\xa7 243. \n\n3. It has been already noted, ^ 69, that some substantives are fotmd only in \niingle Cases (Defectiva casu). \n\n\n\n92 ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES. [H 74, 75 j \n\nCHAPTER n. \n\nThe Adjective and Participle. \n\n$74. Gender and Declension of the Adj ectiv e \n\nand Participle. \n\n1. The Adjective and the Participle, like the Substantive, \nhave three genders, being varied by inflection to agree with \nthe gender of their substantive. But aU adjectives have \nnot separate forms for the three genders ; many have but \ntwo endings, one for the Masc. and Fem., the other for the \nINeuter, e. g. 6 a-w^poiv avrjp, r) a-w^poiv ^vvrj, to acjcjypov \nT6KV0V. Several, indeed, have but one ending, commonly \nused only for the Masc. and Fem. See ^ 80, e. g. 6 <f>vya^ \navrjp, rj <j)vya<i yvvrj, \n\n2. In Adjectives and Participles of three endings, the \nMasc. and Neuter belong to the same declension (second or \nthird), and the Neuter is Hke the Masc. in the Gen. and \nDat. ; the Fem. is always of the first Dec. \n\nRemark 1. Hence, in an Adjective in -os of three endings, the Masc is \ndeclined like KSyos (\xc2\xa7 46), the Fern, like 5f/crj or ffKid (\xc2\xa7 44), and the Neut. \nlike (rvKou (46). \n\nRem. 2. The declension of Adjectives and Participles differs only in a few \npoints from that of the Substantive ; these will be noted hereafter. But it may \nbe remarked here, as an essential deviation, that Participles always have the \nVoc. of the third Dec. like the Nom., \xc2\xa7 53, Rem. 5. \n\n^75. Accentuation of Adjectives and Participles. \n\nThe accentuation of Adjectives and Participles is like that \nof Substantives, with a few exceptions, wliich are now to be \nnoted : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n1. The Fern, is accented on the same syllable as the Masc. through all the \nCases, where the nature of the final syllable permits, e. g. koXSs, KoX-f}, iraXoV; \nKod(pos, Ko{><pn, Kov<t>ov] xap^ew/ Xopieo-ca, Xapi^v ; fieXas, fi\xe2\x82\xac?^iya, /lieXay; -c\'pij*\', \nTepetm, repcv ; ^apvs, fiapua, ^apv ; jSouAeucras, fiovXevaaaa, $ov\\edaay \' ri^fls, \n\n\n\ni 75.] ACCENTUATION OF ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES. 92 \n\nRemark 1. In adjectives in -os, -77, -ou, or -05, -a, -oy, the Fem., on accounl \nof the length of the final syllable {77, d), must be a Paroxytone, when the Masc. \nis a Proparoxytone, or a Properispomenon, e. g. av^puirivosy ay^pMiriur], a.v^p6- \nirivovj i\\(v^\xe2\x82\xacpoSy i\\\xe2\x82\xacV^\xe2\x82\xacpd, eKev^epoy^ KOv<pos, K0v<p7], KOv<poy] anrovdcuoSf (Tirov- \n5oid, airovSauov ; but, when the final syllable in the declension is short, it again \ntakes the accentuation of the Masc, i. e. it becomes again a Proparoxytone, or \na Properispomenon, e. g. av^pdiriyai, i\\\xe2\x82\xacV^\xe2\x82\xacpai, Kov<paiy (rirov^aiai, like ay^pdiiri\' \nyoi, i\\\xe2\x82\xacvdepoi, Kov(poi, <rirovdatot. Hence the difference between \'P^Stot, AvKiai \n{yvyouKcs), as adjectives, and \'Po5 fa 1, Au/cfo<, as substantives, according to \n\xc2\xa7 45, 6. \n\n2. Participles accent the same syllable in the Neuter Nom. as in the Masc, \nwhen the nature of the syllable permits, e. g. \n\niraiSevuy, iratSevoy rifx-fjaayf rinrjcov \n\n<pi\\wy, <pi\\ovv \\iiru>y, Xiiroy. \n\nBem. 2. Yet Adjectives sometimes deviate from this rule, see \xc2\xa7 65, 5. \n\n3. Contracts in -ovs, -tJ, -ovy, from -eoy, -ed, -fov, 60s, -61], or 6a, -6ov (except \nthe Nom. and Ace Dual Masc and Neuter, which arc Oxytones, \xc2\xa7 49, 3), are \nPerispomena through all the Cases and Numbers, though the uncontracted \nforms of those in -coy are Proparoxytones, e. g. apyvpfos = apyvpovs, apyvpeor \n= apyvpovy. On contracted compounds in -00s, -oov, e. g. ^tiyovs, tdyovy, see \nS 49, 3. \n\n4. Barytone feminines of adjectives and participles, whose Masc. is of the \nthird declension, arc Perispomena [\xc2\xa7 45, 6 (b)] iu the Gen. ^l., but all the \nother Cases retain the accent of the Masc, e. g. \n\nfiapvs, -e?a, -u Gren. PL fiapfuv, fiapfiwy \n\n;i^apiejs, -letrcra, -Uy " ;^ap\xc2\xbbeWa>\xc2\xbb\', x*P*\'<^<^\'^*\' \n\nfifKas, fjifKcuya, /MfKay " fiiXdvuy, fjLf\\aiv<t>v \n\n"Kcis, iraaa, way " \xe2\x96\xa0ndvTuVy iraffuy \n\nrv<p^\xe2\x82\xaclst -u(ra, -fy " Tvip^fyroty, Tv<p^\xe2\x82\xac lawu \n\nTv\\\\/as, rinpaffa, rv^ay " rxj^ayruy, rvy^aa iay; but, \n\ni.vbpuiriyosy -iyj], -lyoy " i v ,^ /> w tt f 1/ a\xc2\xbb v, as Masc, F., and N. \n\ni\\\xe2\x82\xacvb\xe2\x82\xacpos, -(pa, -epoy *\' ^ Ac u,^\xe2\x82\xac pwv, as Masc, F., and N. \n\nrirKr6/x(yoSy -fyri, -fyoy " t u x t /* c i/ \xc2\xab y, as Masc, F., and N. \n\nHem. 3. On the accentuation of the monosyllable irus, and of monosyllabic \nparticiples in the Gen. and Dat., see \xc2\xa7 65, 2 (c). \n\nRem. 4. On the accentuation of the Nominative of compound adjectives, \nthe following things are to be noted : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) Those in -oy, when the last part is formed of a substantive or adjective, \nfollow the general rule [\xc2\xa7 30, 1, (c)], and are Proparoxytones, e. g. <pi\\^ \nTfKyos (from TfKvov), irayKOKot (from kokos). But if the last part ia \nformed of a verb, then adjectives with a long penult, are Oxytones, e. g. \ny^vxowofiTT6s, nf\\(nroi6s, S(iy(i}Tr6s, dS-rry6s ; but those with a short penult, \narc commonly Paroxytones, if they have an active sense, but if a passive, \nProparoxytones, e. g. \n\nKi^o&6\\os, one castinq stones ; \\i^6$o\\os, cast doum by stones ; \n\npi7]rpoKr6vos, matricide ; ^\xe2\x96\xa0r}Tp6KTovoSy slain hi/ a mother ; \n\n^poTp6<pos, nourishing wild beasts : ^p6Tpo(f>os, no irished by wild lie itis. \n\nWords compounded with prepositions, a privative and intensive, tit and \n\n\n\n94 ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES OF THREE ENDINGS. [^ 76. \n\n8w, and a^i, ayav, &p*, apri, ipi, vf^i, (a, ^av, and 7ro\\v, are always Pro \nparoxytones, and hence exceptions to the rule respecting words with a \n\nshort penult. , . a -^^.u \n\n(\\)) Verbal adjectives in -r6s remain Oxy tones, even m compounds, if they \nliave three endings, but are Proparoxytones, if they have but two. See \n\n(c) All comp^ounds in -ir\\U, -p<^h -^P\'^l* -<^<?\'^\xc2\xbb are Oxytones. \n\n\n\nSnMMABY OP THE ADJECTIVE AND PaBTICIPLE EnDINGB. \n\n\n\n$76. I. Adjectives and Participles of three \n\nEndings. \n\n\n\nL -ost \n\n\n\n\xe2\x80\xa2ov\\ \n\n\n\n-OS, -o, -ov: \n\n\n\nNom. \n\n\naya^os, \n\n\nGen. \n\n\naya^oVf \n\n\nNom. \n\n\n6ydoo5, \n\n\nGen. PI. \n\n\noydooov. \n\n\nNom. \n\n\nypa(p6/x\xe2\x82\xacvos, \n\n\nGen. PL \n\n\nypa(poix4vaVi \n\n\nNom. \n\n\nhiKaios, \n\n\nGen. \n\n\nSiKaioVf \n\n\nGen. PL \n\n\ndiKaiwVf \n\n\nNom. \n\n\niX^pos, \n\n\nGen. \n\n\ndx^pov, \n\n\nNom. \n\n\na^pSos, \n\n\nGen. \n\n\na^p6ovy \n\n\nGen. PL \n\n\na^p6a}V, \n\n\n\nayd^Ji \n\n\naya^6v, good, \n\n\naya^TJSt \n\n\n\\yaSfov \n\n\noySSi], \n\n\n6ySoov, eighth, \n\n\n6yS6wVf \n\n\n6y56wy { \xc2\xa7 75, 4.) \n\n\nypcKpofieyrii \n\n\nypaxpofievov \n\n\nypa<pOfieva)Pi \n\n\nypa<pon4v(i}v \n\n\ndiKaid, \n\n\nZ\'lKaiov, just, \n\n\nSiKaidSi \n\n\nSiKalov \n\n\nSiKaiuv, \n\n\nSiKalav \n\n\nix^pa, \n\n\niX^P^^i hostile. \n\n\niX^pas, \n\n\nix^pov \n\n\na^pod, \n\n\na8rp6ov,fuU, \n\n\na^pSdSf \n\n\na^poov \n\n\na^p6(i}Uf \n\n\na^pouv. \n\n\n\nMost of the adjectives belong to this class. The Fem. ends in a, when pre- \nceded by t or p, \xc2\xa7 43, 1. Still, adjectives in -oos have \xe2\x80\xa26a in the Pem., when p \nprecedes o, otherwise, -6rj, e. g. a^p6a, yet 6y567]. On the accentuation of \nadjectives in -os, -rj (d), -oy, see \xc2\xa7 75. \n\nAdjectives in -eos, -4 a, -eov, which denote the material, e. g. xP^^^^\'^y \ngolden; apyvpeos, silver; Kepdneos, earthen; and multiplicative adjectives in \n-6 5, -6 rj, -6 V, e. g. airX6os, single ; SnrxSos, double, are contracted. On the \naccentuation of those in -eos, -ea, -eov, see \xc2\xa7 75, 3, and on the contraction of \nthose in -eo into -a, -orj into -ij, and -6a into -a, see \xc2\xa7 9, II. \n\n\n\nXpvff-eosy \n\n\nXpv(r-ea, \n\n\nXpic-eov \n\n\nXpvff-ovs, \n\n\nXpv(r-Tj, \n\n\nXpvo\'-ovy \n\n\nip4-eos. \n\n\nepe-ed, \n\n\nipi-eov \n\n\nipe-ovs. \n\n\nipe-a, ^ \n\n\nipe-ovv \n\n\napyvp-eos, \n\n\napyvp-ea, \n\n\napyvp-\xe2\x82\xacOV \n\n\napyvp-ovs, \n\n\napyvp-a, \n\n\napyvp-ovv \n\n\nSnr\\-6o5, \n\n\ndnr\\-6r], \n\n\n5nr\\-6ov \n\n\nSnr\\-ovs, \n\n\n5nr\\-rj, \n\n\n5nr\\-ovy. \n\n\n\nRemark 1. Contraction is seldom omitted in Attic classic prose, not unfre- \nquently in the Tragedians, e. g. xpi^o-eo, Xen. Ag. 5, 5 ; yet d ,^ p <J o s, -({ d, -6ov, \ncrowded, is rarely found contracted; St/c poos, -6 a, -6ov, two-pronged, is com- \nmonly contracted in the Masc. and Neut., ^iKpovs, SiKpovv, but in the Pen- the \nnncontracted form is usual, rj diKp6a; 5 7 So os is always uncontracted. \n\nII. -ts, -eTd, -t: Nom. y\\vKvs, yKvKcia, yXvKi, sweet, \nGen. yXvKfos, yXvKelas, yXvKcos \n\nGen. PL yXvKeuv, yXvKsiwv, yXvKiwv (\xc2\xa7 75, 4.) \n\n\n\n} 76.] ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES OF THREE ENDINGS. 95 \n\nThe declension of the Masc. is like irrjxvs, though with the common genitives \nin -eos, -ewv ; the declension of the Neut. is like 6.<rTv, yet always uncontracted in \nthe PL (-eo). The only deviations from the regular accentuation are, i]fua-vs, \nr]fxl<r\xe2\x82\xacM, ^fiia-v, half; ^\\vs, ^^\\eia, ^\\v, female ; irpeV^Sus, old (used only in the \nMasc), and some poetic forms. \xc2\xa9ijAus is sometimes used as feminine in Homer \nand in the Tragedians. \n\nRem. 2. The adjective 7} /n t er u s, in the Attic writers, has both the contracted \nand uncontracted forms in the Ace. PL, Tj/xia-eis and Tj/jLia-eas : also the Neut. \nri^lffca is found in several passages in Demosthenes in the contracted form \n^/lio-rj. Sometimes the Ionic Fem. form -ea occurs, e. g. irKaria, X. R. Equ. 1, \n14. (in all MSS.) rjniaeas, PL Menon,- 83, c. in the best MSS. \n\nIIJ. -vs, -vffai -tv. Nom. SetKvvs, SeiKuvtra, SeiKvvv, shoimng, \n\nGen. SeiKviuTOs, deiKyv(rr]s, SciKvvmos \n\nGen. PL SeiKuvvruv, SeiKvv(ruy, deiKviyruv (^ 75,4.) \n\nNom. ((>V5, (pvcra, <pvv, produced, \n\nGen. (pvuTos, <pv(T7is, (pvvTos [^ 65, 2 (c).] \n\nGen. PL (pvyruv, (pvauv, (pvvra>v. \n\nSo the Pres. and second Aor. Act. participles of verbs in -fii. For the de- \nclension of the Masc. and Neut., see \xc2\xa7 54 (d). \n\nIV. -e t s, -6 cr <r a, -\xe2\x82\xac V : Nom. x\xc2\xabf *^\'^> X\xc2\xabP^f \'\'\xe2\x96\xa0<\'\'\xc2\xab> X\xc2\xabP\'f \xc2\xbb\'> lovely, \n\nG\xc2\xabn. x^p\'^^f^^^i x\xc2\xb0^^^^\'^\'\'l^i X^P\'^\'\'\'\'\'\'\'^ \n\nG^n. PL x\'V*\'""\'^\'\'* x^\'P\'^^^\'^^^i x\xc2\xb0\'P\'^^*^^^\' \n\nTor the declension of the Masc. and Neut., see \xc2\xa7 54 (d), the only difference \nbeing that the Dat. PL ends in -\xe2\x82\xac<rj, not -\xe2\x82\xac\xc2\xab<n, e. g. xap\'fo"\'. \xe2\x80\x94 The Masc. and \nNeut. is in the Nom. a Paroxytone, in the Fem. a Proparoxytone ; yet the \nancient grammarians prescribe that the Neut. of x<V^^\'^ should be accented on \nthe antepenult, hence xap*e\xc2\xbb/. \n\nRem. 3. Some of the adjectives in -^e is, -^ e o- c o, -7} c \xc2\xbb/, and -0 ets, -6t^\' \n<ra, -6e y, admit contraction, e. g. \n\nNom. rifi-fi-eis, Tifj.\'ff-effaa, rifirj-ey, honored^ \n\nGren. TlflTJVTOS, TLIJ.T}(TaT]S, Tifjirivros \n\nNom. /u\xe2\x82\xac\\iT(^-6ts, fi\'e\\tT6-\xe2\x82\xac(T(ra, ij.\xe2\x82\xackn6-fv, honeyed, \nGen. yLfXnovvTOs, fi\xe2\x82\xac\\iTOva(rr}s , fieKirovyros. \n\nV. -elsy -eTo-o, -4y: Nom. Acic^eis, A\xe2\x82\xact<^de?o\'o, Xci^eV, relictus, \n\nGen. \\\xe2\x82\xaci(p^euTos, \\ei(p^\xe2\x82\xaci(rr}s, \\\xe2\x82\xaci<pbevTos \n\nGen. PL XeKp^fyTuu, \\\xe2\x82\xacL<p^\xe2\x82\xacicruy, Aei(^cW\xc2\xabv \n\nNom. Ti^eis, ri^\xe2\x82\xac7(ra, ri^fu, placing, \n\nGen. Ti^evTOS, ri^eiarjs, Tt^euros. \n\nFor the declension of the Masc. and Neut., see \xc2\xa7 54 (d), and also in the Dat \nPL, e. g. rvcp^eltri. So likewise the first and second Aor. Pass. Participle, and \nthe Pres. and second Aor. Active Part, of Ti3i7/it and \'/tj/ij, e. g. ic/y, UTaa, IcV, \n\nVI. -d s, -aiya, -ay : Nom. fieXas, fi4\\aiva, ix4\\av, black, \n\nGen. fiihavos, fi\xe2\x82\xac\\alyT]s, iJ.f\\S.vos \n\nGen. PL fjLfXaviov, nfXaivwy, n\xe2\x82\xac\\ayioy. \n\nIn the same manner only rdxas, rdXaiya, raXav, unhappy, the feminine Voc. \nof which has also toAcu\'. For the declension of the Masc, and Neut., see ^ 54 \n(d), with Rem. 6. \n\n\n\n96 ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES OF THREE ENDINGS. [$ 76. \n\nVTI. -aSf -o<ra, -au: Nom. nas, iraffa, irav, all, every, \nGen. irayrSs, Trd(rr}\xe2\x82\xac, iravros \n\nGen. PL Trdurwy, Tracwv, irdvTwu. \n\nIn the same manner only the compounds of iras, e. g. anas (oirdtra, oirov), \ntrjixiras, irponas, etc. ; these compounds have a short a in the Neut., in dac- \ntylic and anapestic verse. See \xc2\xa7 54 (d), for the declension of the Masc. and \nNeut., and \xc2\xa7 65, 2 (c), for the accentuation of the simple adjective in the Gen. \nand Dat. PI. and Dual. \n\nVm. -aSf -a era, -ay: Nom. Xeti|/ds, \\ei\\pdcra, Xeirpav, having lefi^ \nGen. \\\xe2\x82\xaciy\\ioa/TOS, Aei^da\'rfs, \\ei\\pavTos \n\nGen. PI. Kei^j/avTcoy, Xei\\pa(r&v, \\ei\\^dvT(i}v. \n\nSo the first Aor. Act. Part., and also the Pres. and second Aor. Act. Part, of \ntrrtjfii: ia-rds, -aaa, -dv] ffrds, -a(ra, -dv. For the declension, see \xc2\xa7 54 (d). \n\nIX. -Tjy, -eiva, -ei/: Nom. rcpriv, repeiya, repev {\'poetic), smooth, \n\nGen. repevos, repeiyrjs, repevos \n\nGen. PI. repeuau, repeivwy, repevuy. \n\nNo other adjective is thus declined. For the declension, see \xc2\xa7 55, 1. \n\nX. -0 i s, -0 V or a , -6 V : Nom. Sidovs, SiBovcra, Bidoy, giving, \n\nGen. 5iS6yTos, diSovcn^s, SiSofTos \nGen. PI. diSSyrwv, SiSovawy, diSSyray. \n\nThus only the Part. Pres. and the second Aor. Act. (5o<5y, dovaa, 5Jv, (Jen. \n\'i6yros, Souo-Tjs, Gen. PI. Fem. 5ov(ruy) of verbs in -w^t. \n\nXI. -ct> y, -0 c a, -Sy: Nom. eK^^y, eKoGtro, eK6y, willing, \n\nGen. \xe2\x82\xacK6yTos, kKOvcr-qs, eK6yT0S \n\nGen, PI. \xe2\x82\xacK6yTuy, kKovawy, kK6yrwy. \n\nThus only the compound oe\'/cwj\', commonly i.K<ay, &K-ov<ra, uKoy. For the \ndeclension, see \xc2\xa7 54 (d). \n\nXII. -\xc2\xab y,-ov(Ta,-oy: Nom. XelTray, Xeiirovara, \\e7iroy, leaving. \n\nGen. AetTTovTOs, Xenroixrrjs, Xeiiroyros \n\nGen. PI. \\enr6yTwy, Kenrovauy, XenrSyrcoy. \n\n_ So also the Pres., Fut., and second Aor. Act. Part., the last, however, with a \ndifferent accentuation : -dy, -ova-a, -6v, e. g. Kiirdiv, -ova-a, -6y. For the declen- \nsion, see \xc2\xa7 54 (d). In the same manner, the Present participles of contract \nverbs in -dw, -ew, and -6w, e. g. \n\nNom. Tt/iSv, -Qa-a, -wy Nom. <pi\\uy, -ova-a, -ody \n\nGen. TifiuvTos, -c^o-tjs, \'Uvtos Gen. PI. ^iXovyruy, -ovffuy, -oiyrwv. \n\nGen. PL Tifid>yTwy, -wo-wv, -dyTay. Nom. jukt^-wj/, -ovaa, -ody \n\nGen. PL fiKr^ovyrav, -ovawy, -ovyray. \n\nThe Fut. Act. Part, of Liquid verbs is declined like <pi\\wv, <piXov(ra, <piXodv, \n<jren. <piXovyTos, etc., e. g. cTTrepSiy, -odaa, -ovy (formed from (nrep^wy, etc.), from \nirveipUf to sow. \n\nXIII. -d>s -v7a -OS -.Nom. reTv<p(is, reTV((>v7a, T\xe2\x82\xacTV(p6s, having struck, \n\nGen. rerucpoTos, Tervcpvlas, rervcpoTOS \n\nGen. PI. TCTvcpoTcoy, T\xe2\x82\xacTV((>viwy, reTv<p6Ta}y. \n\nOn the form ^ards, -\xc2\xab<ro, iffrds and -65, etc., see below, \xc2\xa7 193, Eem. 2 and 3. \n\n\n\n^ 7V.J \n\n\n\nADJECTIVES. PARADIGMS. \n\n\n\n97 \n\n\n\nXIV. The adjectives, fieyas, fxcyaXT], fieya, great^ iroXvs, iroW-fiy \n\xc2\xab o \\ V, much, are irregular in the Nom., Ace., and Voc. of the Masc. and Neut. \nSJag. I the other parts are regular : but even iroW6v instead of ttoKw or ttoA-u, \noccurs in the Attic poets; Aesch. S. 824, uses the Voc. /xeyaXe; Trpaos, \nirpaeTa, irpaov^ soft, is also in\'egular ; it has, throughout the Fem., in the \nPI. and l)ual Neut., as also in the Gen. PI. Masc, and sometimes, also, in the \nother Cases of the Masc. PL, a form like irpavsy -eta, -v (comp. y\\vKvSy -ewe, -u), \nwhich occurs in the Dialects. See the Paradigm. \n\n\n\n$ 77. Paradigms. \n\n\n\nS.N. \n\n\naya^-os \n\n\naya^-\'fl \n\n\naya^-ov, good \n\n\n<pi\\l-05 \n\n\n(pi\\L-d \n\n\n<^iA\xc2\xa3-oi/,lovely \n\n\nG. \n\n\ndya^-oD \n\n\naya^-T]S \n\n\naya^-ov \n\n\n(piXi-Qv \n\n\n<pi\\i-ds \n\n\n<p\'Xi-Qv \n\n\nD. \n\n\nayoL^-i^ \n\n\naya^-f) \n\n\naya^-cp \n\n\n(pl\\l-Cp \n\n\n(piki-a \n\n\n(piXl-cp \n\n\nA. \n\n\naya^-6v \n\n\na.ya^--i]V \n\n\naya^-6v \n\n\n(piXi-oy \n\n\n(pi\\i-dv \n\n\n<pi\\l-(A \n\n\nV. \n\n\nayci^-e \naya^-ol \n\n\naya^-\'i] \nayoAt-ai \n\n\ndyad-oV \naya^-d \n\n\n(pl\\l-\xe2\x82\xac \n\n\n(pi\\l-d \n\n\n<pl\\i ov \n\n\nP.N. \n\n\n<pl\\i-oi. \n\n\n<pi\\i-ai \n\n\n<pi\\i-a \n\n\nG. \n\n\naya^-S>v \n\n\nayoA-wv \n\n\naya^-uv \n\n\n(piki-cay \n\n\n<f>i\\l-cou \n\n\n(piXi-wv \n\n\nD. \n\n\naya^-ols \n\n\naya^-ais \n\n\naya^o7s \n\n\n(pi\\i-ois \n\n\n(pikl-ais \n\n\n<pl\\i-0l5 \n\n\nA. \n\n\nayaSt-Qvs \n\n\naya^-ds \n\n\naya^-d \n\n\n<plXl-0V5 \n\n\n<pi\\i-ds \n\n\n(pi\\i-a \n\n\nV. \n\n\naya^-oi \n\n\nayaSr-ai \n\n\naya^-d \n\n\n(pi\\i-oi \n\n\n<plki-ai \n\n\n<pl\\i-a \n\n\nDual. \n\n\naya^-(x> \n\n\nayoA-k \n\n\naya^-ci \n\n\n(piXi-o) \n\n\n(pi\\i-d \n\n\n(piXi-o) \n\n\n\n\naya^-o\'iu \n\n\naya^-ouv \n\n\naya^-0.7}/. \n\n\n(piXi-oiu \n\n\n(piXi-aiv \n\n\n(piXi-oiu. \n\n\nS. N. \\y\\vKvs \n\n\ny\\vKf:7a \n\n\nyXvKv, sweet \n\n\nwpaos \n\n\n\'7rpae7a \n\n\nirpaov, soft \n\n\nG. \\y\\vK4-05 \n\n\nyXvKeids \n\n\nyKvK4-05 \n\n\n\xe2\x96\xa0npdov \n\n\n\xe2\x96\xa0jrpaeids \n\n\nirpaov \n\n\nD. j7A.uk 6? \n\n\ny\\vKeia, \n\n\nyKvKU \n\n\nirpao) \n\n\nTrpaeia \n\n\nTrpacp \n\n\nA. \\y\\vKvu \n\n\nyXvKeiav \n\n\nyXvKv \n\n\n\xe2\x96\xa0Tpaov \n\n\nTTpaciav \n\n\nirpaou \n\n\nV. yKvKV \n\n\ny\\vK\xe2\x82\xac7a \n\n\nyXvKv \n\n\nTrpaos{c) \n\n\nirpaeia \n\n\nirpaov \n\n\nP. N. y\\vKe7s \n\n\ny\\vKf:7ai \n\n\nyXvKea \n\n\nTrpaoi, TTp \n\n\na\xe2\x82\xac7s \'irpae7ai irpaea \n\n\nG. yXvK^uv \n\n\nyXvKciuv \n\n\ny\\vK4ei>u \n\n\nvpaewv \n\n\nTTpaeiOiV Trpaecop \n\n\nD. y\\vK(<n[v) yXvKiiais \n\n\ny\\VK\xe2\x82\xac(Tl{v) \n\n\nirpaois, TTp \n\n\naecTi IT pae \n\n\niais Tc pa4a i\\ \n\n\nA. yXvKus \n\n\nyXvKeids \n\n\ny\\vK\xe2\x82\xaca \n\n\nirpaovs, TTp \n\n\nae IS irpae \n\n\nids TT pa4a 1 \n\n\nV. \n\n\ny\\vK\xe2\x82\xac7s \n\n\ny\\vK(7ai \n\n\nyXvK^a \n\n\nirpaoi, IT p \n\n\nae7s \'7rpae7ai irpada 1 \n\n\nDual. \n\n\nyXvKee \n\n\ny\\vK((d \n\n\nyXvKce \n\n\nirpdu) \n\n\nirpaeid \n\n\nirpdo} 1 \n\n\nyKvKioiv \n\n\ny\\vKeiaiv \n\n\nyXvK^oiv \n\n\nirpdoiv \n\n\nTrpaeiaiv rrpdoiu. 1 \n\n\nS.N. \n\n\nXapUis \n\n\nXaplecrcra \n\n\nXo-pi^v \n\n\nK^icp\'^eis \n\n\n\\\xe2\x82\xaci(pi^e7aa \n\n\n\\\xe2\x82\xaci(p^4u \n\n\nG. \n\n\nXaptet\'Toy \n\n\nXapL\xe2\x82\xac(T<rr]s \n\n\nXapievros \n\n\nKfKp^fVTOS \n\n\n\\\xe2\x82\xacl(p^el(T7]S \n\n\nX\xe2\x82\xacl(p^\xe2\x82\xacJ/TOS \n\n\nD. \n\n\nXo.pievTi \n\n\nX<ipi((T<Tri \n\n\nXO-pl^VTl \n\n\nXCKp^fVTl \n\n\n\\ei<p^ei(rT} \n\n\nXeKp^euTi \n\n\nA. \n\n\nXaplevTU \n\n\nXapiecrcrav \n\n\nX^piei/ \n\n\nA-et^^vra \n\n\n\\ei<p^e7(rau \n\n\n\\\xe2\x82\xacl(p^6V \n\n\nV. \n\n\nXopiiv \n\n\nXapifcrara \n\n\nXa-pi-^v \n\n\nXeicp^els \n\n\nXtL(p^\xe2\x82\xac7(Ta \n\n\n\\ei<p^4v \n\n\nP.N. \n\n\nXapievres \n\n\nXapiecra-ai \n\n\nXapifvra \n\n\n\\ei(p^\xe2\x82\xacvrfs \n\n\n\\\xe2\x82\xaci<p^\xe2\x82\xac7crai \n\n\nX\xe2\x82\xacl<p^\xe2\x82\xacVTa \n\n\nG. \n\n\nXcpi^moiv \n\n\nXOLpi((T<Tu>v xctp\'f *"\'"&>;\' \n\n\n\\\xe2\x82\xacl(p^\xe2\x82\xacVTCVy \n\n\nKeKp^eicrwu Aeicp^ej/Tcov | \n\n\nD. \n\n\nXapie(Ti{v) \n\n\nXapiea-aais x\xc2\xabP\'fO\'*{\xc2\xbb\') \n\n\n\\\xe2\x82\xaci<p^c7(Ti(r \n\n\n\\\xe2\x82\xaci(p^ei(rais \n\n\n\\\xe2\x82\xaci<p^e7(ri{u) \n\n\nA. \n\n\nXaplcirras \n\n\nXapte(T(ras \n\n\nXapt^iura \n\n\n\\\xe2\x82\xacl(p^\xe2\x82\xacl\'ro:S \n\n\n\\\xe2\x82\xaci(pSreLcrds \n\n\n\\ei(p^4uTa \n\n\nV. \n\n\nXapiemes \n\n\nXapiecr<rai \n\n\nXO-pieuTa \n\n\n\\ei<j>^4v^\xe2\x82\xacS \n\n\n\\\xe2\x82\xacL(p^\xe2\x82\xac7(raL \n\n\n\\\xe2\x82\xaci(p^evra \n\n\nDual. \n\n\nXO-piivre \n\n\nXapi^o\'crd \n\n\nXapievre \n\n\n\\\xe2\x82\xaci(p^4ure \n\n\n\\\xe2\x82\xacl<p^\xe2\x82\xacl(Td \n\n\n\\\xe2\x82\xaci(p^euTe \n\n\n\n\nXaptevroiu \n\n\nXapt^o\'Caiv xapte\xc2\xbbn-oii/. I \n\n\n\\\xe2\x82\xaci(p^\xe2\x82\xacinoiv \n\n\nKeKp^eiaaiP \n\n\n\' \\\xe2\x82\xacl(p^\xe2\x82\xacVTOlI/. \n\n\n\n98 \n\n\n\nADJECTIVES. TARADIGMS. \n\n\n\n[U7 \n\n\n\nXpvcreos \n\n\nXpvffea \n\n\nXpvffeov, golden \n\n\nairXovs \nairXovs \n\n\nairXoT) \nairXri \n\n\na\'Kx6ov, single \naTrXovv \n\n\nXpvffovs \n\n\nXpva-ii \n\n\nXpvffovv \n\n\nVt II 1 y^yj t\' J \n\n\n\xc2\xa3 f \n\n\n\xc2\xab \xe2\x96\xa0* / \n\n\nXpvcreov \n\n\nXpvffeas \n\n\nXpvffeov \n\n\na-KXoov \nairXov \n\n\nairTs^ris \na-rrXTJs \n\n\noTrXoov \nairXov \n\n\nXpvffou \n\n\nXpva-Tjs \n\n\nXpVCTOV \n\n\n\n\nc / \n\n\nanX6cf \ncfirXcf \n\narrxSov \natrXovv \n\n\nXpV(Ti(p \n\nXpvcrv \n\n\nXpvcrec^ \nXpvcv \n\n\nXpvcrew \nXpva-(f \n\n\nairXoca \naiTX(^ \n\n\naTrXoT] \nairX\'p \n\n\nXpvcreov \nXpvffovv \n\n\nXpvcreay \nXpva-TJv \n\n\nXpva-ovv \n\n\nairXSov \nairXovv \n\n\nairX6r}v \nairXTJv \n\n\ndoubtful \n\n\nXpv<T4a \nXpvo-rj- \n\n\nXpxxfeov \nXpvffovv \n\n\ndoubtful \n\n\nairXS-r} \nottAt) \n\n\nairXSov \nairXovv \n\n\nXpv(Teoi \nXpvcoT \n\n\nXpvffeai \nXpvcai \n\n\nXpixfeo- \nXpva\'n \n\n\nairXdoi \nairXo7 \n\n\nairXoai \nairXcCi \n\n\naTrX6a \nairXa \n\n\nXpvfficov \nXpvcrciv \n\n\nXpvffeuv \nXpvawv \n\n\nXpvffewv \nXpvcrwv \n\n\nOTrXSav \naTrXS)V \n\n\nairXScav \nairXav \n\n\nairX6a>v \nairXcov \n\n\nXpixTeois \nXpyfTOLS \n\n\nXpvcreais \nXpvcais \n\n\nXpv(r4ois \nXpvffoTs \n\n\nanx6ois \ncarXols \n\n\na\'rrX6ais \na7r\\ats \n\n\na-rrXoois \narrXols \n\n\nXpvffeovs \n\n\nXpva-eds \n\n\nXpvcrea. \n\n\nairXSovs \n\n\nairXSas \n\n\nairX6a \n\n\nXpvorovs \n\n\nXpvffas \n\n\nxpva\'a \n\n\ncfirXovs \n\n\nairXas \n\n\nairXa \n\n\nXpvcreoi \n\n\nXp^Ceai \n\n\nxpvcrea \n\n\nairXooi \n\n\naTTX6ai \n\n\na-rrXSa \n\n\nXpvo\'ol \n\n\nXpvaai \n\n\nxpva\'a \n\n\navXoi \n\n\naTrXo- \n\n\na-TrXa \n\n\nXpvffew \n\n\nXpvared \n\n\nXpva\'eio \n\n\naTrX6(o \n\n\na7rA.o\'a \n\n\nairXoca \n\n\nXputrw \n\n\nXpva\'a \n\n\nXpvcS) \n\n\nairXci \n\n\na7rA.a \n\n\nairXo} \n\n\nXpv(r4oLu \n\n\nXpvcreaiv \n\n\nXpvareoiv \n\n\natrXSoiv \n\n\nawXaaiv \n\n\na.trX6oiv \n\n\nXpvTotv \n\n\nXpVffOLV \n\n\nXpv(To7v \n\n\nairXolv \n\n\nairXoAV \n\n\nairXoiv \n\n\napyvpeos \n\n\napyvpea \n\n\napyvpeov, silver \n\n\nTerv(pws \n\n\nTeTV(pv7a \n\n\nT\xe2\x82\xacTV(p6s, having \n\n\napyvpovs \n\n\napyvpa \n\n\napyvpovv \n\n\nTeTV(p6T0S \n\n\nTeTvcpvias \n\nf \n\n\nrero<p6Tos [struck. \n\n\n5 / \n\n\n\xc2\xbb / \n\n\n5 \xe2\x96\xa0 / \n\n\nrervcpoTL \nTervcpSra \n\n\nrervmvia \n\n\napyvpeov \n\n\napyvpeas \n\n5 \xc2\xab \n\n\napyvpeov \n\n\nrervcpvTav \n\n\n1 \n\nT erv<p6s \n\n\napyvpov \n\n\napyvpas \n\n\napyvpov \n\n\napyvpea \n\n\napyvpet} \n\n\napyvpea \n\n\nrervcpSres \n\n\nTeTV(pviat \n\n\nrervcpSra \n\n\napyvpcp \n\n\napyvpa \n\n\napyvp^ \n\n\nTerv(p6T(i)p \n\n\nTeTV(pVlUV \n\n\nrervcpoToov \n\n\n5 / \n\n\n\xe2\x96\xa0> / \n\n\n\' \' \n\n\nrervcpScri \n\n1. / _ \n\n\nTeTV(pvlais \n\n\nreTvcpocn \nTeTv<p6ra \n\n\napyvpeov \n\n\napyvpeav \n\n\napyvpeov \n\n\napyvpovv \n\n\napyvpav \n\n\napyvpovv \n\n\nreTV(poTas \n\n\nreTvcpvias \n\n\napyvpee \n\n\napyvpea \n\n\napyvpeov \n\n\nTCTvcpSre \n\n\nTeTvcpvia \n\n\nrervcpSre \n\n\n\n\napyvpa. . \n\n\napyvpovv \n\n\nTerv(p6T0iv Tervcpviaiv \n\n\nrervcpSroiv \n\n\nTTOXVS \n\n\niroXXri \n\n\nTToX-u, much \n\n\nixeyas \n\n\nIxeydXri \n\n\nfi e 7 a, great \n\n\nTTOWOV \n\n\niroXXrjs \n\n\niroXXou \n\n\nfieyaXov \n\n\n/xeydXrjs \n\n\nfieydXov \n\n\niroW^ \n\n\nTTOXX^ \n\n\n\'iroXX(f \n\n\nfj-eydXca \n\n\nfxeydx-p \n\n\nfieydXti) \n\n\nTTOXVV \n\n\niroXXriv \n\n\nTT oXii \n\n\nfxeyav \n\n\nfieydXriv \n\n\nfxey a \n\n\nTTOXV \n\nTToWoi \n\n\niroXXi] \n"TToXXai \n\n\niroXv \n\nTTOXXd \n\n\nfieya \n\n\nfxeydXr) \n\n\nfx eya \n\n\nfieydXoi \n\n\nfieydXai \n\n\nHeydXa \n\n\niroXXoov \n\n\nTTOXXWV \n\n\niroXXcov \n\n\nfieydXav \n\n\nfieydXoov \n\n\nfxeydXotv \n\n\nTToXXols \n\n\nTToXXa7s \n\n\nTroXXo7s \n\n\nfieydXois \n\n\n/j-eydXaLS \n\n\nfjLeydXois \n\n\nTTOXXOVS \n\n\nnoXXds \n\n\niroXXa \n\n\nfieydXovs \n\n\nfieydXas \n\n\nfieydXa \n\n\nTTOXXoi \n\n\niroXXai \n\n\nTTOXXd \n\n\nfxeydXoi \n\n\n[xeydXai \n\n\nfieydXa \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nfieydXa \n\n\nfJLeydXa \n\n\nfxeydXw \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nfieyaXoiv \n\n\nfieydXaiv \n\n\nfxeydXoiv \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 78.] \n\n\n\nADJECTIVES OP TWO ENDINGS. \n\n\n\n99 \n\n\n\nue\\as \n\n\nfieXaiva \n\n\nficXav, black \n\n\niras \n\n\nvaaa \n\n\nTray, all \n\n\nfi\xe2\x82\xac\\a.t/os \n\n\n/jLeXalirrjs \n\n\nfxeXdvos \n\n\nTravr6s \n\n\nTrdcrris \n\n\nirayrSs \n\n\nfxeXavi \n\n\nfxeXaiyr] \n\n\nfieXaui \n\n\n\xe2\x96\xa0Kayri \n\n\nirda-p \n\n\niravri \n\n\nfieXava \n\n\nfieKaivav \n\n\nix4xav \n\n\nirdvTa \n\n\niraaav \n\n\nTray \n\n\nfieXav \n\n\nfx4\\aiva \n\n\nficXav \n\n\niras \n\n\niraffa \n\n\nTray \n\n\nfxiXavfiS \n\n\nfjL\xe2\x82\xac\\aivau \n\n\nfieXava \n\n\nirdyrcs \n\n\n\xe2\x80\xa2jraffca \n\n\nTrdyra \n\n\nIxeXduMv \n\n\njx^Xaiviov \n\n\nfxeXdvoty \n\n\nirdyrwv \n\n\niraauy \n\n\nTrdyrwv \n\n\nlj.4Xa<Ti \n\n\nfieXaivais \n\n\nfj-eXaffi \n\n\niracri \n\n\nTrdcrous \n\n\nTract \n\n\n/xcXavas \n\n\nfieXaiuas \n\n\nfieXava \n\n\nTTdvTas \n\n\nirdcas \n\n\nTcayra \n\n\nfjLe\\av\xe2\x82\xacS \n\n\nfieXaivai \n\n\nfiiXava \n\n\nirdvres \n\n\niraffou \n\n\nTravra \n\n\nfjLe\\ave \n\n\nfieXaiva \n\n\nfieXave \n\n\nTrdyre \n\n\nirdcrd \n\n\nTrdyre \n\n\nfieXdvoLV \n\n\n/xeXaivaiv \n\n\nfieXduoiv. \n\n\nTtdyroLv \n\n\n\xe2\x96\xa0trdaaiv \n\n\nTrdyroiv. \n\n\narks \n\n\n(TTCLCa \n\n\nffToiv, standing \n\n\nXiiruy \n\n\nXiirovtra \n\n\nXnr6y, leaving \n\n\ncrrdvTos \n\n\n<TTdcrr}s \n\n\nardyros \n\n\nXiir6yT05 \n\n\nXiirova-fis \n\n\nXiTToyros \n\n\narduTi \n\n\nffrdei^ \n\n\ncrrdyri \n\n\nXnr6yTi \n\n\nXlTTOVCTT} \n\n\nXnrSyri \n\n\nffravra \n\n\naraaav \n\n\nardv \n\n\nXinSyra \n\n\nXnrovtrav \n\n\nXnr6y \n\n\n<rrds \n\n\naraffa \n\n\nardv \n\n\nXnrojy \n\n\nXiTTovffa \n\n\nXnr6v \n\n\nardures \n\n\naracrai \n\n\nardvra \n\n\nXiirSm-es \n\n\nXiTTOvaai \n\n\nXnr6yra \n\n\na-rdin-cov \n\n\naraffSiv \n\n\nffrdvTuv \n\n\nXnr6yT<t}y \n\n\nXnrov(Tu>y \n\n\nXnr6yT(i)y \n\n\nCTaailv) \n\n\ncrdffais \n\n\na7a.cri{v) \n\n\nXnrov(n{y) \n\n\nXiTTovcraLS \n\n\nXnrov<ri{y) \n\n\naratnas \n\n\ncrrdads \n\n\narduTa \n\n\nXnr6yTas \n\n\nXiTTovaas \n\n\nXnrSyra \n\n\naravres \n\n\n(TTaaai \n\n\nardvra \n\n\nXiTToyres \n\n\nXiirovaai \n\n\nXiirSyra \n\n\ntrravTc \n\n\n(Trdaa \n\n\n(TTdyre \n\n\nXnr6yr\xe2\x82\xac \n\n\nXiTTovad \n\n\nXiirSvTf \n\n\n(TTduTOlV \n\n\n(rrdaaiv \n\n\n(Trdmoiv. \n\n\nXnr6yT0iy \n\n\nXiirovcraiy \n\n\nXnr6vT0iv. \n\n\n(pavuv \n\n\n(pafovaa \n\n\n(pavovVj about to \n\n\n^fvyvvi \n\n\n^\xe2\x82\xacvyyv(Ta \n\n\n^ev7>/vv, joining \n\n\n(pavQvvros \n\n\n(pavovcnjs \n\n\n(pavovuTos [show \n\n\n^fvyyvyros \n\n\n(evyyv(Trjs \n\n\n^ixryyvvTOS \n\n\n(pavovvri \n\n\n(paVOVCTT) \n\n\n(pavovyri \n\n\nCfvyyvyri \n\n\n^\xe2\x82\xacvyyv(rp \n\n\n^(xryvvyri \n\n\n(pavovvTa \n\n\n(pavovady \n\n\n(pavovvra \n\n\n^evyyvm-a \n\n\n(fvyyvffay \n\n\n^evyvvv \n\n\n(pauwu \n\n\n(pauovad \n\n\n(pavovv \n\n\n^evyyvs \n\n\n^evyyvaa \n\n\n(fvyyvy \n\n\nipavovims \n\n\n(pauovcrai \n\n\n(papovvra \n\n\nCfvyyvyrfs \n\n\n^fvyyvaai \n\n\nC^vyyvyra \n\n\n(pavovvruiv \n\n\n(pavovacav \n\n\n(pavovin-(j)V \n\n\nCfvyyvyruy (fvyyv(Tu>y \n\n\n(^eiryyvyTcoy \n\n\n(pavovcTi \n\n\n(pavovaais \n\n\nipavovai \n\n\n^evyyvai \n\n\n(evyyvaais \n\n\n(^\xe2\x82\xacuyyv(ri \n\n\n(pavovyras \n\n\n(pavovffds \n\n\n(payovyras \n\n\n^evyyvyras \n\n\n^fvyyv<Tas \n\n\n^fvyyvyra \n\n\n(pavovmes \n\n\n<pavov(Tai \n\n\n<payodirra \n\n\n^evyyvyres \n\n\n^(iryyvaai \n\n\n((vyyvyra \n\n\n(pauovpre \n\n\n<pavov(Td \n\n\n<pavovyre \n\n\n^firyyvyre \n\n\n(evyyvard \n\n\n^cvyyvyre \n\n\n<pavovvToiv \n\n\n(pavovaaiv \n\n\n(payovyroiy. \n\n\n^fvyyvyroiy ^evyyvauiy \n\n\n^(vyyvyroiy. \n\n\n\nRemark. All participles in -us are declined like XcKp^ds (see \xc2\xa7 76, V.) ; all \nparticiples in -us, like htiKyvs (see \xc2\xa7 76, III.) ; all participles in -as, like a-rds (see \n^ 76, VIII.): the Pres. Fut. and second Aor. Part. Active, like XnrcLy (\xc2\xa7 76, \nXII.) ; the Fut. Act. Part, of Liquid verbs, like arrepuiy (\xc2\xa7 76, XII.) \n\n\xc2\xa7 78. II. Adjectives of two Endings. \n\nAdjectives in -09 of two endings are declined like aya$6<s, \nexcept that they have no separate form for the feminine, the \nsame form being used for the masculine and feminine. \n\n\n\nLife. \n\n\n\n100 \n\n\n\nADJECTIVES OF TWO ENDINGS. [i 78 \n\n\n\n\xe2\x96\xa0os,-ov\\ 6ri &\\oyos, rh &\\oyov, irratiotuil \nTo this class belong, \n\n\n\nfa) A few simple adjectives without particular denrative endings, e. g. 6 ^ \nBdpBapo,, not Greek; \\dfipos, vehement; \'^^lepos, gentle; XoiSopos, calumniating; \nTi^acrSs, mild; x^po-oy, unfruitful; ^(rvxos, silent; Sairauos, extravagant; ew\\os, \n\n^^(b) Sost simple adjectives with the derivative-endings -los and -clos, and \n\'luos e. o-.Sfi awT-hpios, saving; 6 v fia(ri\\\xe2\x82\xacios, regal; 6 v yud>pifios, recognizable; \n\n(c) All compounds, e. g. 6 rj d\\oyos, rh &\\oyov, irrational; 6 t] apy6s (instead \nof aepySs), inactive (but apy6s, -ri, -6v, bright) ; 6 tj irdyKaXos, very fair (but Ka\\6s, \n-^ -6u); or] TrdWeuKos, very white (but \\\xe2\x82\xacVk6s, -tj, -6v) ; ^eo-rrvevaTos, -ov, divindy \ninspired (but ttv^vcttos, -i?, -6v)\\ adjectives compounded with adjectives in \n-k6s, which then become Proparoxytones, e. g. 6 ^ ^evZaTriKos^ not pure Attic, \nbut {\'AttikSs, -^, -6v) 7] fiiffoirepaiKos (but UipffiKSs, -i], -6u). \n\nExceptions are adjectives derived from compound verbs with the deriva- \ntive-endings -k6s, which remain Oxytones; those in -re as, which remain \nParoxytones, e. g. iiriSeiKTiKos, -i], -6u, from iTriSeiKuvfn ; those in -t<Js- vary \nbetween two and three endings, e. g. au6KT6sy -fj, -6u (from oi/ex\xc2\xab), and ayeicrSsf \n\'6v, see Lobeck, ad S. Aj. 1296. Paralipp. p. 482, sq. Poppo ad Th. 2, 41, 4. \nBut when compounds in -t6s, -r-fi, -t6v, are again compounded, they have but \ntwo endings, and are Proparoxytones, e. g. ^ ^ aKaToaKevaa-ros. \n\nRemark 1. Comparatives and Superlatives have three endings, even when \nthe Positive has but two, though there are some rare exceptions, e. g. airopdrc \npos 7) A^i//(s, Thu. 5, 110. Svsififio\\<i)TaTos 7) AoKpis, Id. 3, 110. \n\nH. -ovs, -ovv] 6 7] evuovs, rh evvovv, benevolent. \n\nAdjectives with these endings are, \n\n(a) Those compounded with the contracted substantives vovs and ir\\oCy, and \nhence in the Masc. and Fem. are declined like these, but in the Neuter like \nharovv (\xc2\xa7 47), yet the Neuter PL in -oa does not admit contraction, consequently \nTO ivvoa. On the accentuation, see \xc2\xa7 49, 3. \n\nRem. 2. Attic writers sometimes omit the contraction in the PL, e. g. koko- \nv6oi5 X. Cy. 8. 2, 1. Kpv^iv6ovs X. Ag. 11,5. Usvooi X. H. 2. 1, 2. \n\n(b) Such as are compounded with the substantive Trovy, e. g. 67} iroXuxour, \nrb TToKvTrovv, and are inflected like it, but in the Ace. Sing., even as Oihlirovs \n[\xc2\xa7 71, B. (b)], are partly of the\' contract second Dec. and partly of the third, \ne. g. Gen. ttoKvttoBos and iroKinrov ; Ace. iroXviroda and iroAvirouv, etc. \n\nRem. 3. In several adjectives of this kind, e. g. iirovy, fipaSinrovs, Slrovst \naunrrSTrovs, the inflection does not follow the second Dec. \n\nIII. -cos, -co f] 6 71 \'/A.6c\xc2\xabjs, t^ iXe\xc2\xab\xc2\xbb\', compassionate. ^ \n\nAdjectives of these endings are like the Attic second Dec. (M^). \n\nRem. 4. The Ace. commonly ends in -av, but in a number of compound \nwords, it ends in -w (\xc2\xa7 48, Rem. 1), e. g. a^iSxpew, audTrkeu, &y7jp<u (in respect to \nthe accentuation, see \xc2\xa7 29, Rem. 7), eViTrAew, inrepxpeo). \n\nRem. 5. There are three endings to the simple adjective : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nUXews, -TTXe\'a, tv\\4u)v, full, Gen. TrAe\'w, TrXe\'as, ir\\e\'aj, PL -jrXcw, irXe\'oi, ic\\U\\ the \ncompounds are either of two endings, e. g. 6 i) audnKews, rh avaTrX^wy, Pl.\'ot cu \ncKTrXeo) {tTnre7s eKTrkew X. Cy. 6. 2, 7. ^kttXcw rpdireCai X. Hier. 1. IS), to ^kttXh* \nX. Cy. 3, 1, 28. 1, 6, 7, and even the Norn. PL ir\\4w, of the simple adjective \n18 not seldom used for the Masc. and Fern., or they have (yet more seldom) \n\n\n\njf 78.] ADJECTIVES OF TWO ENDINGS. 101 \n\nthree endings, e. g. avdirXews, avairXea (PI. Phaedon 83, d.), avdirXeoov. Eur. \nAle. 730, has irXeov, after the example of Homer, as Neuter Sing. So like* \nwise compounds, seldom in the Sing., e. g. to (fxivKiov^ Soph., oftener in tha \nPL, e. g. l/iTTA-eoi PI. Rp. 6. 505, c. and very frequently in the Neuter, e. g. \ne\xc2\xabirAea X. Cy. 6. 2, 7, and 8. wepiVAea 6. 2, 33. Also froni t\'Aews, Plato Phaedon \n95, a. has \'/Xea as Neut. PI. \n\nRem. 6. \'O t) aus, rh o-S>v^ salvus, is formed from the old word 2A02 by \ncontraction. In addition to the Nom. aus, auv, this word forms only the Ace. \nSing, awv, like the Attic second Dec. ; it has also the Ace. auov. The form aa \n(from (Toa), occurs as Fem. Sing, in Eurip. Fr. 629. (Dind.) and as Neut. PI. in \nPlat. Critias, 111, c. in the best MSS. The PI. consists of forms from trws of \nthe second Dec. and of forms from the lengthened a-uos, namely : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nPI. N. ol at am (from aS>ts)^ and ol awoi, at (rcoaif N. awa, rarely ca. \nA. robs Toy crus (from ercDas), and robs arwovs, N. aHa, rarely ca. \n\nThe Singular forms of crwos are very rare in the Attic writers, e. g. auos, X. \nAn. 3. 1, 32. \n\nRem. 7. The compounds of Kfpas and yeXas are partly like the Attic \nsecond Dec, partly lake the third Dec, e. g. 6 i] xP^^^>^^P^^i """^ xp^^^\'^^P^*\'^ \nGen. ;^pu(rd/cepa> and xP^^^oKfpcoros ; 6 \xe2\x80\xa2^ (piXoyeXws, Th (piXoy^Kuv, Gen. <piK6y(\\(i} \nand (^iKoy^KwTos ] ^ovKepus, Gen. fiovKepo) and fiovKepuros, so fVKfpus. The \nadjective Svsepus follows the third Dec only, e. g. dvsfpasros, etc. Forms like \nthe Common second Dec. originate from forms of the Attic second Dec, e. g. \n5lK\xe2\x82\xacpoy, trfjKepoi, &K\xe2\x82\xacpa. On the accentuation, see \xc2\xa7 29, Rem. 7. \n\nIV. -ay. -ov; N. i ^ aaxppuv, rh ffuxppov, prudent, \nG. ToC Trjs rod auxppovos (according to \xc2\xa7 55, 1). \n\nRem. 8. From 6 tj irluVf/at, comes also the Fem. form trUipa, even in prose \nwriters; so also irpScppaa-aa from 6 r) irp6<pp<i)y, occurs in the poets. \n\nRem. 9. Here belong, also, the Comparatives in -wv, -ovj -twvy -lov; but in \nrespect to the declension of these it is to be noted, that, after the rejection of \nK, they are contracted in the Ace. Sing., and in the Nom., Ace, and Voc. PI. \nSee the Paradigms, \xc2\xa7 79. In the Attic ANTiters, the uncontractcd forms in -ova, \n-oves, -ovas, frequently occur, e. g. ficl^oya, ixdrToya, KoWioya, iXdrTovis, \nKaxiovis, fjLfi^ovfSy fifXriovfS, irXdovcs, ^TTOj/as, fifXTlovas, iXdrrouas, X. Cy. 5. 2, \n36. 7. 5, 83. 2. 1, 23. 2. 1, 13. 5. 2, 36. Hell. 6. 5, 52. Cy. 7. 5, 70. On the accen- \ntuation, see \xc2\xa7 65, 5. \n\nV. -ij s, -e s ; N. (S ^ aXrj^s, rh a\\r]bfSj trtie, \n\nG. rov rijs rov aXrj^eos, aXrj^ovs (^ 59). \n\nOn the contraction of -4a into -o (instead of -rj), where a vowel precedes, see \n^ 59, Rem. 1. \n\nRem. 10. Compounds in -(rrjs (from ^ros, Gen. tVoyy), are either of two \nendings, e. g, \xe2\x96\xa0jropeiW x\'Aut^, PI. Rp. 10. 615, a. TrepjJSoj rfj xtAjfTe?, Phacd. 249, \na., or they take a particular Fem. form, namely, -tris. Gen. -eTiSoy, e. g. \niirrfrr}!, F. firrtris] rpioKovrovKibtav a-irovZwv, Th. 1, 87. \n\nRem. 11. Simple adjectives in -tjs are Oxytoncs, except ir\\i]py]s, irXajpej, \nfull. On the accentuation of the Voc. and of the Neuter, see \xc2\xa7 65, 5, and on \nthe accentuation of the Gen. PI. ^ 59, Rem. 4. \n\nVI. -17 V, -6 \xc2\xbb\' ; N. i ^ &^^17>\', Ti> i^^ei/ \n\nG. rov TTjs rov 6.p^ivos (\xc2\xa7 55, 1). No other word like this. \n\n* \n\nVII. -o>p, -op ; N. 6 \xe2\x80\xa2^ airdrup, rh Jiirarop, fatherless, \n\nG. ToC rris rov airdropos (\xc2\xa7 55, I). In like manner onLr \n\nafivrwp, &fjLr}rop. \n\n9* \n\n\n\n102 \n\n\n\nPARADIGMS OF ADJECTIVES. \n\n\n\n[U9 \n\n\n\nVin. \'IS. -I ; (a) N. 6 ^ \'idpis, rh %*, knowing, \n\nG.rov TTJs rod Wpios (\xc2\xa7 63, Rem. 5). \n\nIn like manner, only yrjffns, temperate, and rpScpis, nourished. In addition to \nthe form in -los, these adjectives have another in -iSos, but more rare, and only \npoetic, e. g. XdpiSa, %t5ey. \n\n(b) l^.dv ivxapis, rh e^xaph agreeable, \nG. rod T^s rod evxdp^ros. \n\nHere belong the compounds of x<^P\'^> \'^\'^\'rpis, IXirty, <pp6vrLs, which are \ndeclined like the simples, e. g. et/e\\7rts, ^^eXiri, Gen. eveKTriSos ; (pL\\6irarpiSy Gen. \n(piXoirdrpiSos ; the Acc. ends according to \xc2\xa7 53, 3, in -iv, e. g. fUeAiriv, eHxap^v, \nbut compounds of ttJajs, when they refer to persons, are inflected in the Attic \ndialect in -idos, e. g. (piX6TroXis, Gen. -Sos, yet in tbi Acc, (piKSiroMv and -iSo; \nstill, as epithets of cities, etc., they are inflected like Tr6his, e. g. KoXAiiroAxs, \nSiKaiS-rroXis, etc.. Gen. /caAAiTrtJAews, etc. \n\nIX. -i/s, -V] (a) N. 6 ^ ^Sawpw, rb &SaKpv, tearless. \n\nSo compounds of Sa/cpu ; yet these inflect only the Acc. Sing, like the third \nDec, e. g. \xe2\x96\xa0&daKpvu, ISTeut. &daKpv. The other Cases are supplied by aSoKpOrosy \n-oy, Gen. -ov, according to the second Dec. \n\n(b) N. 6 -^ SiVrjxvs, rh StTTTjxy, two ells long, \nG. TOW rrjs rod dnrfjx^os. \n\nHere belong the compounds of tttjxvs ; the declension is like ykvKvs, yXvici \n(^\xc2\xa7 76, II. and 77), except that the Neuter PL in -ea is contracted into -77, like \nJSurrri, e. g. StTrvjXTj. \n\nX \'ovs, -ov, IS. b 7] fjt.ov6Sovs, rh fiovSdoy, one-toothed, \nG. rod rrjs rod fjLov6Sovros. \n\nSo the remaining compounds of oSovs. For the Dec, see \xc2\xa7 54 (d). \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 79. Paradigms. \n\n\n\n\n\n\nS.N. \n\n\neudo^os \n\n\n^vdo^ov \n\n\nSlirovs \n\n\n\n\nSiirovv \n\n\nG. \n\n\nevSolou \n\n\nivS6^ov \n\n\n\n\n5i7ro5oy \n\n\n\n\nD. \n\n\nivdS^o} \n\n\nivdo^cp \n\n\n\n\nSlTToSt \n\n\n\n\nA. \n\n\nej/5o^oj/ \n\n\nevSo^ov \n\n\nSiTToSa and Siirovy \n\n\niiirovy \n\n\nV. \n\n\nevBo^e \n\n\n^uSo^ou \n\n\nSiirov \n\n\n\n\nSlirouy \n\n\nP.N. \n\n\ncvdo^oi \n\n\n\xe2\x82\xacpSo^a \n\n\nS^TToSey \n\n\n\n\nSiiroSa \n\n\nG. \n\n\niyd6^(i}V \n\n\nivS6^cov \n\n\n\n\nSnrSSvy \n\n\n\n\nD. \n\n\niySS^ois \n\n\nevSo^ois \n\n\n\n\nSiirocri \n\n\n\n\nA. \n\n\nivSd^ovs \n\n\nevdo^ovs \n\n\n, diTTodas \n\n\n\n\nStiroSo \n\n\nV. \n\n\neuBo^oi \n\n\neydo^a \n\n\nS\'lToSes \n\n\n\n\nSiToSa \n\n\nDual. \n\n\nivdo^w \n\n\nivdo^w \n\n\n\n\nSiTToSe \n\n\n\n\n\n\nivBS^oiv \n\n\niuSo^oiv. \n\n\n\n\nSnrSSotv. \n\n\n\n\n\n\xc2\xa779.] \n\n\n\nPARADIGMS OF ADJECTIVES. \n\n\n\n103 \n\n\n\nS.N. \n\n\nfVTrk{o-os)ovs eijTr\\{o-0v)ovv \n\n\ntXeojy \n\n\n\'lAeaov \n\n\nG. \n\n\neihrXott \n\n\n\n\nIXeu \n\n\nD. \n\n\neihrXcf} \n\n\n\n\n\' VXeoj \n\n\nA, \n\n\ncvttXovv \n\n\n\n\nXkewv \n\n\nV. \n\n\ndoubtful \n\n\nTAewy \n\n\n%\\^(av \n\n\nP.N. \n\n\nihrXoi \xe2\x82\xacvir\\oa \n\n\ntXeqp \n\n\n?Aeft) \n\n\nG. \n\n\niihrXuv \n\n\n\n\n%\\i(t}V \n\n\nD. \n\n\neihrXois \n\n\n\n\nfXews \n\n\nA. \n\n\neihrXovs evirXoa \n\n\nJ\\\xe2\x82\xacU5 \n\n\nTAco) \n\n\nV. \n\n\ne^TrXot \xe2\x82\xacU7rA.oo \n\n\nt\\eco \n\n\n\'iKca \n\n\nDual. \n\n\neijTr\\(i) \n\n\n\n\nT\\e<y \n\n\n\n\nevirkoip. \n\n\n\n\nIK^wv. \n\n\nS.N. \n\n\nexiSaiiJ.oiV etSaifMoy \n\n\ne\'xi^fw \n\n\n^x^tov \n\n\npL^i^wy lJ-^7(oy \n\n\nG. \n\n\nevSaifiovos \n\n\nix^i \n\n\noyos \n\n\nfieiCovos \n\n\nD. \n\n\nevSai/xovi \n\n\nix^i \n\n\noyi \n\n\nud(oyi \n\n\nA. \n\n\nfv5aifj.ova ^HSoufioy \n\n\n^Xi^^o\'\'tt-{a) \n\n\ncx^ioj/ \n\n\nfifi^ot^ ixfl^o) pLci^oy \n\n\nV. \n\n\niHSaifwy \n\n\ntx^^o" \n\n\nfl\xe2\x82\xac7(0U \n\n\nP.N. \n\n\nfvBalfioves edSaifioya \n\n\ndx^i\'Oyfi \n\n\n^x^\'^of^o- \n\n\nfiel^oves fifiCoya \n\n\n\n\n\n\nix^tovs \n\n\niX^iw \n\n\npiel^ovs M^^C*^ \n\n\nG. \n\n\nevSaifi6vo3V \n\n\niX^i \n\n\n6yuv \n\n\nIJ.ei^6ya)v \n\n\nD. \n\n\n\xe2\x82\xacvSaijxo(Ti{v) \n\n\ncX^io(ri{y) \n\n\nHeiCo<ri{v) \n\n\nA. \n\n\nevSaifiovas iuhaifiova \n\n\neX^^oyas \n\n\niX^ioya \n\n\nfjLfiCoyas fifiCoya \n\n\n\n\n\n\niX^lovs \n\n\n^X^lca \n\n\nfi(l(ous fifiCe^ \n\n\nV. \n\n\nivZai^ioviS fvBcdfioya \n\n\nlike the N \n\n\nominative. \n\n\nlike the Nominative. \n\n\nDual. \n\n\nfvSalnove \n\n\nix^l \n\n\n0V\xe2\x82\xac \n\n\nlielCove \n\n\n\n\nfvhaiyiivoiv. \n\n\n4x^i \n\n\n6voty. \n\n\nfiei(6you/. \n\n\nS.N. \n\n\na\\T}i^s aK^}^is \n\n\nvyi-ns \n\n\nt 1 \n\n\nG. \n\n\naK7}^(f-os)ovs \n\n\n1 \n\n\nr)\'j(\xc2\xab-os)oCy \n\n\nD. \n\n\naXri^{4-\'i)f7 \n\n\n\n\n^7t(c-t)cr \n\n\nA. \n\n\noA7j3{ 4-a ) Tj oAT/i^e\'s \n\n\n^7* {4-a) \n\n\na\' \\rfi4s \n\n\nV. \n\n\noATj^f\'y \n\n\n1 \n\n\njyifs \n\n\nP.N. \n\n\nlLkri^{4-(s)\xe2\x82\xac7s iL\\Tjb{\xe2\x82\xac-a)ri \n\n\nvyi(4-\xe2\x82\xacs)\xe2\x82\xac\'i \n\n\n5 vyi{4-a)a* \n\n\nG. \n\n\naKri^{f-u)v)uy^ \n\n\n\n\n\\rYi{4-uy)uv \n\n\nD. \n\n\ndA7j^6<n(v) \n\n\n1 \n\n\njyi4<Ti{y) \n\n\nA. \n\n\naXri^{e-as)f7s aATj^(\xe2\x82\xac-a)^ \n\n\nvyi{4-as)f\'i \n\n\nV vyi{4-a)a \n\n\nV. \n\n\nlike the Nominative. \n\n\nlike t \n\n\nJic Nominative. \n\n\nDuuL \n\n\naKi]^{f-f)Ti \n\n\n\\ \n\n\n>yi(\xe2\x82\xac-\xe2\x82\xac)7J \n\n\n\n\na.Kr]^{\xe2\x82\xac-oiy)o7y. \n\n\n\n\n\\jyi{4-oiv)o7y. \n\n\nS.N. \n\n\ntUxttpiS eCxapi \n\n\na-KOLTUp \n\n\n6.iraTop \n\n\n.G. \n\n\niVX^plTOS \n\n\n( \n\n\nxiraropos \n\n\nD. \n\n\nfvxapiTi \n\n\n( \n\n\niTrdropi \n\n\nA. \n\n\n\xe2\x82\xacux<fptTo and ivx^ptv et\'X\'V* \n\n\nkira.ropa \n\n\niiroTop \n\n\nV. \n\n\niijXapi. \n\n\n\n\niwarop \n\n\nP.N. \n\n\nevx^pires (vxo-ptra \n\n\nairJiTopfs \n\n\nairdropa \n\n\nG. \n\n\niVXOLpiTtDV \n\n\n\n\niirarSpwy \n\n\nD. \n\n\nfvxapKTi \n\n\n{ \n\n\nxirdropai \n\n\nA. \n\n\n\xe2\x82\xacvXOLpnas ivxo-pt^oi \n\n\natrdTopas \n\n\nairdropa \n\n\nV. \n\n\neitXoipiTfS \xe2\x82\xacvx<iptTa \n\n\nairdTopfs \n\n\navaTopa \n\n\nDual. \n\n\ntiixd-piTe \n\n\nI \n\n\ni.TrdTop\xe2\x82\xac \n\n\n\n\nevxoLpir \n\n\noiv \n\n\'^9. Kom. 4. \n\n\n4 \n\n\niTrarSpoiy, \n\n\n\' but /I \n\n\n\xe2\x96\xa0VVT,b4-C^V = ffVVT]bu>V, k \n\n\n\xc2\xab \xc2\xab 59. "Rom. 1. ^ \n\n\n\n104 \n\n\n\nADJECTIVES OP ONE ENHING. \n\n\n\n[$6( \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 80. Ill Adjectives of one Ending. \n\nAdjectives of one ending have no separate form for the Neu \nter, partly because their meaning is of such a nature that the> \ngenerally occur in connection with persons, and partly because \ntheir formation admits of no separate neuter form. In poetry. \nhowever, these adjectives sometimes occur in those Cases in \nwhich the Neut. form is like that of the Masc. and Fern., i. e \nin the Gen. and Dat., even in connection with neuter substan- \ntives, e. g, ixavtdcriv Xvcra-i^fJiarriv, Eur. Or. 264. cv TrivTjTL o-w/ixxTC, la \nEL 375. They very seldom take a separate form for the Neut, \ne. g. hrrjkvsi iiriQXvSa e^vea. Her. 8, 73 ; a derivative a-ijective is \ncommonly used, where the neuter is to be denoted. \n\n\n\nEndings. \nI. -aSf Gen. -ov; 6 fxoviasy Gen. fiovlov, single (Paroxjtone). \nII. -as, Gen. -auros: 6 t] h.Kdp.as, Gen. -avros, unwearied (Paroxytone). \nin. -dsf Gen. -dSos: 67} <pvy6.s. Gen. <pvydSos, fugitive (Oxytone). \n\nIV. -ap, Gen. -apos: only ndKap, though the Fern, form fitUcupa is sometimes \nfound. \n\nV. -r] 5, Gen. -ov: 6 e.^eXojn-fjs, Gen. 4^e\\oirrov, voluntary. \n\nSome of these adjectives take, in connection with Fem, substantives, a sepa- \nrate Fem. form in -is (Gen. -tSos), e. g. eua>Trr]s, Fem. fvuiris, fair-looking. They \nare Paroxytones, except e^eKovrrjs, eKoyrfjs, and vfipiarris. \n\nVI. -7JS, Gen. -tjtos: 6 tj apyTjs, Gen. apyJjTos, ichite. \n\nSo all compounds in -^vtjs, -S^i^y, -fi^s, -irX-fis, and -Kfx-fis, and soi: \nadjectives, e.g. yvfivrjs, naked; x^p^vs, needy; irivris, }x>or ; 7r\\a*Tjs, . \netc. \n\nVU. -i]v. Gen. -^ j/os : by} airr-fiv, Gen. airrTivosy unfeathered. In like manner \n\nno other, \n\nVin. -(is, Gen. -utos: 6 tj ayvcas, Gen. ayvuros, utiknown. \n\nSo all compounds in -^pds, -yvds, and -xpds, and also aTrrds, Jirm. \n\nIX. -15, Gen. -iSos: 67} avd?ucis, Gen. avdXKiSos, potcerless. \n\n\n\nle \n\n\n\nThese adjectives after the omission of a feminine substantive to v, \nbelong, are Uke those in -ds, -ddos, e. g. i, \'EWds (sc. 7^), used as su \ne. g. 7j war pis ( sc. 77) ) , fatherland. \n\nX. -vs. Gen. -vSos: orj ve-qAvs, Gen. ve-fiKvSos, one lately come. \nIn like manner only a few other compounds. \n\n\n\n^7 \n\n3, \n\n\n\n^ gl ] COMPARISON OP ADJECTIVES. 105 \n\nXL -{, Gren. -yos, -Kosy -^os : 6 rj Spiraf, Gren. -0701, rapacious. \n\n6 7} ^A.t|, " -Hkos, equal. \n6 7} fiuyij^f " -^X^^i one-hoofed. \n\nXII. -tf\', Gren. \'iros\'- 6 V cdyi\\i\\pj Gen. -tiros, high, \n\nXin. Such as end in an unchanged substantive, e. g. fiiraiy, childless ; fuucpS\' \nX^\'pt long-handed; aifT6x^ip, done with one^s own hand; fxajcpaluv, long-lived; \nuaKpavxWy long-necked ; XevKouriris, having a white shield. The declension of such \nadjectives is like that of the substantives, e. g. iwxpavx^vos. On the compounds \nof vovsy however, comp. \xc2\xa7 78, IL (b). \n\n$ 81. Comparison of Adjectives. T^" \n\n1. The quality expressed by an adjective may belong to \nan object in different degrees : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) When the quality belongs to one object in a higher \ndegree than to another, the form is called the Comparative, \ne. g. Plato was more learned than Xenophon. \n\n(b) When the quaUty in the highest degree belongs to an \nobject, the form is called the Superlative, e. g. Plato was \nthe MOST learned of the disciples of Socrates. \n\n(c) The form of the adjective which expresses its simple \nmeaning without aiiy comparison, is called the Positive, \ne. g. Plato was learned. \n\n2. Only the adjective and adverb are susceptible of com- \nparison ; the participle does not admit it, except in a few \nrare cases, where the participle has the meaning of an \nadjective, e. g. \xe2\x82\xacpp<Diievo<i, -eaTepc^, -eararof;. \n\n3. The Greek has two classes of terminations for the \nComparative and Superlative. The first, and much the \nmost common, is -repofi^ -Tcpd, -Tcpov, for the Compara- \ntive, and -TttTo?, -TaT77, -rarov, for the Superlative; the \nsecond is \'{if)(ov, -(Z)oj/, or -(ov, -oi/, for the Comparative, \nand - (t) 0-T0 9, - (t) cm?, -{tjarov, for the Superlative. The \nt is the union-vowel. \n\n4. The first class of terminations is appended to the stem \nof the adjective by the connecting syllables o (o)), ai, t9, e?; \nhence the general rule : In most adje-ctives^ the usual end\' \ning-s are appended to the stem by means of the connecting \nsyllable. \n\n\n\n106 \n\n\n\nADJECTIVES. FIRST FORM OP COMPARISON. \n\n\n\n[^82 \n\n\n\nRemark. Instead of the single forms of the Comparative and Superlative, \nthe Greek, like the Latin, can prefix ^laXXov (magis) and fidKicrra (maxime) to \nthe Positive. This periphrasis is necessary in all adjectives, which, for the sake \nof euphony, have no Comparative form. \n\n\xc2\xa7 82. A. First Form of Comparison. \n\nComparative, -repos, -Tepd, -repov; \nSuperlative, -raros, -raTTj, -rarov. \n\nThese endings are appended to the stem of the adjective; \nthe stem is found by rejecting os in the Nom. of the second \npec, and the same syllable in the Gen. of the third Dec. \n\nI. Adjectives in -os, -\xe2\x96\xa0>; (-a), -ov. \n\n(a) Most adjectives of this class annex the above endings to \nthe stem by means of the union -vowel o or a> ; the union -vowel \nis o, when a syllable long by nature or by position (^ 27, 3), pre- \ncedes, but 0), when a short syllable precedes, \xe2\x80\x94 o> being then \nused to prevent the concurrence of too many short syllables, \ne.g. \n\nCom. KOV<P\'6-T\xe2\x82\xacpOS) \n\n" l(rxvp-6-T\xe2\x82\xacpoSf \n\n" \\\xe2\x82\xacTrT-6-T\xe2\x82\xacpOSf \n\n" (r<poZp-6-TcpoSy \n" TriKp-6-r\xe2\x82\xacpoSf \n" ffo(p-a>-TepoSy \n\na^L-u-repos, \n\n\n\nKov(p-oSf light, \niffxvp-^s, strong^ \nXeiTT-Ss, thin, \n<r(po5p-6sj vehement, \niriKp-6s, hitter, \n<ro<p-6s, wise, \niX^p-6s, Jirm, \n&^l-os, worthy, \n\n\n\nup \n\n\n. Kov<P\'6-r or OS, -77, -oiff \n\n\n\n\nIffx^p-^ccTos, \n\n\n\n\nA,eirT-<^TaTor, \n\n\n\n\nffcpoip-S-^aroSy \n\n\n\n\niriKp-6-TaroSf \n\n\n\n\nao<f>-^^aTOSf \n\n\n\n\niX^p-ti^aTOSf \n\n\n\n\na^-w-TOToj. \n\n\n\nEemark 1. A mute and liquid here always make a syllable long by posi- \ntion, though the Attic poets, on account of the verse, sometimes consider such \nsyllable as short, e. g. ebTCKvdraros from dhcKyos, Eur. Hec. 579. 618. (Pors.), \nSvsiroTfidcTepa, Id. Ph. 1367. \n\n(b) Contracts in -cos = -ovs and -oos = -ovs are contracted also \nit the forms of Comparison ; the first contract c and a> the union- \nvowel into (o; the last assume the union-syUable cs and contract \nin with the preceding 0, e. g. \n\niropcpip-^os = Trop<pvp-ovs hn\\-6os = orX-ovj \n\niropcpvp-ecirepos = Trop<l>vp-<i-r\xe2\x82\xacpos Lir\\o-4(r-rfpos = krK-ois-r^pos \n\n^opct>vp.,ciTaTos = iTop<pvp-<i>-Ta.ros k^\\o-4cr-TaTos = iirX-o,J<r-TaTOf. \n\nHere belong also contracts of two endings in -ovs and -ouv, e. g d?K^i =- \n\n^u-ovs, Neut. eiiy.ooy = ,iiu.ovy, Com. d,yo.4<rT,pos = .iyois-r.pos, Sup. ^^ \n\niff-raros =\xc2\xbb tvu-ova-raros. \n\n\n\n^S2.] ADJECTIVES. FIRST FORM OF COMPARISON. 107 \n\nBem. 2. Adjectives in -oos take also the uncontracted forms of the Compara- \ntive and Superlative in -owrepos, -ouyraros^ e. g. ivKvoumpoi, X. K. Equ. 1, 10. \n\niVXpOUTCpOSy X. O. 10, 11. \n\n(c) The following adjectives in -a* os: yepaios, old; TraXat- \n09, ancient; Trcpatos, on the oilier side; cr;(oXaros, at leisure^ \nassume -xipo^ and -raros Avithout a union-vowel, e. g. \n\n7\xe2\x82\xacpat-<iy, Com. ycpod-Tqjo^, Sup. yepai-Taros, \n\niraXai-os-t " iraXal-repos, " iroAoi-TOTOS. \n\nRem. 3. TlaKaiSs and trxoA^aloy have also the usual forms of Compari- \n60n ; irakoudrepos, ffxo\\ou6T\xe2\x82\xacpo5y SO also yepai^ifposy Ajitiph. 4, p. 125, 6. \n\n(d) The following adjectives in -os: cvStos, calm; ^orv^^os, \nquiet; 18109, peculiar; 10-09, equal; /x\xe2\x82\xaco-0 9, middle; op ^p 10 9, \nearly ; 01/^109, late; TrapaTrk-qa-Lo^y similar; and irptliio^, in tlie \nmorning, assume the union-syllable at, the Comparative and \nSuperlative thus becoming like the preceding words in -aio9, \ne. g. \n\nfjLur-os, Com. fua-ai-rfposy Sup. ftfcr-ai-raroSy \n\ntSl-OSy \'* iSl-al-T(pOSy *\' iSi-Ou\'-TOTOJ. \n\nRem. 4. Sometimes also the common form is found, e. g. rjcrvxuTfposy \nT)<rvx<i^oTos ] <ptKwr(posy ^iXtHnaeros are the usual fonns in the Attic writers. \nHere belong also the adverbial forms wpiaialrepoyy vpuHcuTfroy from irpwios ; thus \nin Plato; likewise irpwirfpoy and wputTara; thus always, as it seems, in Thu. \n(Popp. ad 7, 19, 1), also in Xen. Anab. 3. 4, 1. trpvi-rtpoy according to the best \nMSS. (on the contrary -rpiclcdraray Cy. 8. 8, 9). The adjective <f>l\\os has \nthree forms: (pikdrtpos seldom (e. g. Xen. C. 3. 11, 18.), and ^lAalraror, \nt^tXalrtpos seldom in prose (e. g. Xen. An. 1. 9, 29, though one good Ms. has \n^i\\u)T(pov), and (^iXa/raror seldom in prose (e.g. Xen. H. 7.3,8.), <pl\\Tfpos \npoetic, and ^/Atotoj very frequent ; the Comparative is tisually expressed by \nfuiWou <l>l\\os. In addition to these three forms, also the Superlative ^l\\urros \n(as in Homer, the Comparative <f>ikio3y) is found in Attic poetry. \n\nRem. 5. The two adjectives, fiiaoi, middle, and vtosy young, have a special \nSuperlative form, fitaarosy ytaros] but this is in use only when a series \nof objects is to be made prominent, pLtirttros denoting the very middle of the \nseries, and y^aros the last or most remote, whereas fjL\xc2\xabralTccTos expresses the \nidea of the middle in general, and y^tvraros retains the primary signification \nof the adjective, young, new. In prose, ytaros is used only in reference to the \ntones of music {ytaros <f>d6yyos)] and then the Feminine is contracted, i^ttj, \ntlie lowest line or string. \n\n(e) Two adjectives in -09: ipptofxivo\'Sf strong, and aKpdros, \nunmixed, append the union-syllable \xe2\x82\xac9 to the stem, e g. cppw/xcv- \n\n\n\n108 \n\n\n\nADJECTIVES. FIRST FORM OF COMPARISON. [^82. \n\n\n\n^(T-T\xe2\x82\xacpoSy Ippi^ixcv-id-rarosy aKpar-ecr-Tepos, aKpaT-ea-raTos. So also \natSotos has alSoL-ecr-Taros in the superlative. \n\nRem. 6. Turther, the adjectives, &<l>^oyos, rich; ffirovSalos, zeahus; and \n^ffii^vos, glad, sometimes take the above form, as a^bov4<rr(pos, -icraros, \ntogether with the common form, -c^repos, -draros. From ^.afifvos is formed \nifffM^uc^repos, and the adVerbial neuter, ao-^ei/o^Tara and a<r/i*j/-e(r-ToTa.\xe2\x80\x94 Several \nother adjectives also have this fonnation, yet for the most part only in poetry, \ne.g. etCwpos, unmixed (of wine) ; rjdvixos, sweet; iTriiredos, fat (iiriirf^firrepos, \nX. H. 7. 4, 13), and all contracts in -ovs; comp. (b). The forms in -farfpos, \n-iaraToSy belong properly to adjectives in -77s and -uv. \n\n(f) The following adjectives in -os: XaAo5, talJcative ; fiovo- \n<l>dyosy eating alone; 6i{/ocf>dyo?, dainty; and irroixosy poor, \ndrop 05, and append the syllable 15, e. g. XdX-09, Com, XaX-ur- \nreposy Sup. AaA-tcr-raTOS ; ttt^xos has also Sup. Trrwxoraros. \n\nEem. 7. These endings properly belong to adjectives in -tjy, Gen. -ov. \n\nII. Adjectives in -rjs, Gen. -ov, and i/^ev8-/js, -c\'s. Gen. -co?, drop \n-iy?, and append the syllable -19, e.g. KXhrr-rj^ (Gen. -ov), tJiievish, \nCom. KXemr-Lcr-Tepos, Sup. /c\\c7rT-u7-TaTos ; ipcvS\'Car-Tepo^, \\l/evS-UT- \n\nTttTOS. \n\nExceptions. "t^puTT-^s, -ov, insolent, has vfipt<rr6rfpos, X. An. 5. 8, 3, vfipitrr6- \nraros, X. An. 5. 8, 22. C. 1. 2, 12. From uKpar-fis (Gen. -e\'oy) is the Com. oic/Hx- \n\nTf<rTepos, to distinguish it from aKparftrraToSf No. (e). \n\nIII. Adjectives of the third Declension. Tlie Comparison- \nendings are appended to the stem of the adjectives, either \ndirectly or by inserting the syllable -es (also -w). \n\n(1) Those in -vs, -eta, -v, 779, -c? (Gen. -eo9=-of9), o^ \n\n-av, and the word p^aKap, happy, append the endings of Com- \nparison directly to the pure stem, wliich appears in the Neuter \nform, e. g. \n\n\xe2\x80\xa2yXvKvs, Neut. -V \xe2\x80\x94 y\\vKv-n-fpo5 yXvKv^aroi \n\na\\v^s, Neut. -es \xe2\x80\x94 oXTj^eV-rcpoy aAij^eV-Tcrroy \n\nA*e^\xc2\xaby> Neut. -au \xe2\x80\x94 fieXdv-Tcpos fifXav^ecros \n\nTaXas, Neut. -av \xe2\x80\x94 ToXdv-repos raXiiy-raTos \n\nfiaKap, \xe2\x80\x94 fiaKap-Tfpos fuucdp-raros. \n\nEem. 8. The adjectives 7,dis, raxis, and toXvs are compared in -iww tmi \n\xe2\x80\xa2\xc2\xbby. See \xc2\xa7 83, 1. \n\n(2) Adjectives m -wv, -ov (Gen. -0V09), assmne -C9, e. g. \n\nevdai[xwu, Neut. eiiSaifiov, happy. \n\nCom. \xe2\x82\xacv5ai(xoy-e(r-repos. Sap. evSai/iOK-^-roroi. \n\n\n\nI \n\n\n\n5 83.] ADJECTIVES. SECOND FORM OF COMPARISON. 109 \n\n(3) Adjectives in -$ sometimes assume -e?, sometimes -ts, \n\ne.g. \n\ni^Al|, Gen. cu^X\xc2\xab/f-oy, groiving old, SpTa|, Gen. SipTrary-os, rapax, \nCom. k<pr)KiK-(<X-repoSj Com. apTray-iff-repoSt \n\nSup. iup7j\\iK-4<r-TaTOs, Sup. apvay-(^-Tccros. \n\n(4) Adjectives in -cis, -ev, whose stem ends in vt, append the \nComparison-endings directly to the stem, the last t being \nchanged into a; and the preceding v being then dropped (^ 20, 2). \n\nXapiftSf -itVf Gen. x\xc2\xb0f\'^^\'^\'\xc2\xb0^i pleasant. \n\nCom. xaf>^\xc2\xabo^"^<poy\xc2\xbb Sup. x^f ^**\'\'^\'*\'\'"o^* \n\n(5) The compounds of x*^\'^ assimie w, e. g. \n\nMxofi^t Gen. iirixdpiT-os, pleasant. \n\nCom. iirixapiT-tif-r\xc2\xabpoSt Sup. iirixoiptr o^oroy. \n\n\'Ax\xc2\xab/>io\'Te/)^\xc2\xbb in Homer, comes from kxapif-^tpos ; comp. No. U). \n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 83. B. Second Form of Comparison, \n\nComparative, -i\'cdv, Neut -Zov, or -cov, Neut. -ov. \nSuperlative, -loros, \'Ca-rrjy -kttov. \n\nBsMARK 1. On the quantity of i in -Ivyj -toy, see ^ 28, 1 ; on the declension, \n4 78, Rem. 9; and on the accent, ^ 65, 5 (a). \n\nThis form of Comparison includes, \n\nL Some adjectives in -v9, which drop -v? and append \'Ujy, \netc.; this usually apphes only to rjSv^, sivect, and raxv% swift \n(the other form of these adjectives in -vrcpo?, -vraT09, is some- \ntimes used, but not by Attic writers). Ta^v? has in the \nComparative ddUrawv (Att Sdrrajv)^ Neut. ^oo-o-oi\' (^aTTOK). \nComp. H 21, 3, and 17, 6. Ta^i^wv is found only among the \nlater writers. Thus, \n\nrjS-vs, Com. rfS-toty^ Neut. %8-So0, Sup. IJ8-\xc2\xabrToj, -17, -cy. \n\nrax-vs, " d<iff<Tetyf Att. 3((TTo\xc2\xbby, Ncut. dcurcrov, Att. ^ottov, Sup. rdxi<rros \n\nRem. 2. The other adjectives in -^\xc2\xbb, as Pa^vs^ deep; ffapvs, heavy; fipa- \n8ur, slow; fipax^s, short; ykvKvsj sweet; Sa<rvSf Oiick ; (vp6s, wide; i^uT, \nsfiarv ; irptafivsy old; iici/j, swiji, hare the form in -vrfpos, -vraros (^ 82, \nni.j ; in Attic poetry, however, single examples of these adjectives arc found \nwith the other form, e. g. fip<ixi<rroSf trptafiurrosj &Ki<rros. \n\nII. Tlie following adjectives in -pos: alcrxpo^tbase ; ix^po^, \nhostile; KvBposy Juynorable; and oLKTpos, ivretched (but always \n\n:o \n\n\n\n110 ADJECTIVES ANOMALOUS FORMS OF COMPARISON. [^ 84. \n\noiKT/3OT\xe2\x82\xacp05 in the Comparative), \xe2\x80\x94 the ending -pos here also \nbeing dropped, e. g. alamos, Com. aiax-i^ov, Neut ata-x-lov, Sup. \natcr^-icTTos. \n\nBem. 3. OtKTKTTOs, KvSiuv, Kidurros, are poetic. Besides this form, in -iwv, \netc., which is preferred by the Attic writers, the above adjectives have also, \nthough seldom, the other form in -dreposy -6rarosy e. g. \xe2\x82\xacXi&^p<^TaTo^ ; but always, \nin prose, ottcrpSraTos \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 84. Anomalous Forms of Comparison. \n\n\n\nPositive. \naya^6sj good^ \n\n\n\n2. K(uc6sj bad, \n\n3. Kd\\6sf beautiful, \n\n4. a}y.y\xe2\x82\xaciv6sf painful, \n\n5. fiaKp6$y long, \n\n6. fiiKpSs, small, \n\n7. 6\\(yos,few, \n\n8. fiiyas, great, \n\n9. TToKvs, much, \n\n10. fx^dios, easy, \n\n11. iriiroav, ripe, \n\n12. iriwVffat, \n\n\n\nComparative. \nafieiuuv, Neut. &f*\xe2\x82\xacivov \n\n{fi4\\Tepos, Poet.) \nHpeia-a-OfV, Att. Kpeirruv \n\n((peprepos, Poet.) \n\nT^Ctrwr, Att. f^TTWV \n\nKoAAtwy \naA.76tj\'<JT6poy \n\nfiaKporepos \n\n{fidcrffwy, Poet.) \n\nfxiKpSrepos \n\nixdffcrwv, Att. iKarruv \n\nirXe(c\xc2\xbb\xc2\xbb\', or 7r\\4a)V \n\nireirairepos \n\'tTi6rcpos \n\n\n\nSuperlative. \n&pi(Tros \nfieAriaros \n{$e\\raros, Poet.) \n\nKpOTlffrOS \n\\cp(TTOS \n\n{(pipraros, <f>cpi<nts, Poet.) \n\nKaKlffTOS \n\nXfipKrTos \nAdv. ^Ki<rra \nKd?J>Li(rTos \noKyeiyoraTOS \n&\\yiaT05 \n\nfiaKpOTOTOS \n\nfUKpOTOTOS \ni\\dxi<TT05 \n\nhxiyurros \nfiiyiffros \n\npamos \nveirairaros \n\nTriSTOTOS. \n\n\n\nEemakk I. The Superlative ^aroy (from>^y, the god of war), and the \nComp. a/teWv, have particularly the idea of braven/, boldness; fieXrlwy, like the \nLatm melior, signifies better, in a moral sense, though by no means confined to \nthat ; \\cpa>u IS mostly used in such phrases as \\^6u 4<rri, it is better, and \\v<rros \nmostly m the Voc. & x^Vre. The poetic Superlative <p4p^crros is found in \nriato, m the exclamation 5 <p4ptar. ! most worthy ! The irregular forms of \nliiKpds, xiz ixdtrtrcou, ixdxicrros, express both the idea of smallness and fewness \n[oKtyos]\', but f^eiwu generally expresses the idea of fewness, seldom that of \nmallness;^ the regular forms of f...p6s, viz. ^..pSr.pos, -oVaro., always retain \ntheir ongmal idea of .maZ^.e.., and also 6?.iy^<rros that of fewness, though iMyos \noften signifies small. > & ^ \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 84.] ADJJECTIVES. \xe2\x80\x94 ANOMALOUS FORMS OF COMPARISON. 11\' \n\nRem. 2. The use of the longer and shorter form of the Comparative TrAe/wi/, \nn-Aewj\', should be particularly noted. The neuter ttk4ov is more frequent than \nTrAeToj\', especially when it is used adverbially ; irXiovos and vXeiovos, irhiovt \nand it\\eioyii Ace. ir\\4a), irKiova, and jrKeioD, are used indiscriminately ; PL Nom. \nand Ace, usually -n-Xdovs, also TrXetores and irKciovas (but not irXiovs) ; irKclco \nis much more frequent than irAew ; \'7r\\et6va}v and TrXeioai are more frequent than \nrKfSywv and Tr\\4o<Ti, Finally, the shortened form of the Neut. Sing, irx^iv \n(formed from irX^\'iov), but limited to such phrases as irXiiu ^ ixvpioi, should be \nmentioned as a special Atticism. \n\nSeveral adjectives, which express the idea of an order or \nseries, have only the Comparative and Superlative forms, \nbecause, on account of their signification, \'Jiey cannot be used \nabsolutely, but only in comparison. An adVerb of place is \nusually the root of these forms of Comparison, e. g. \n\n^from Trpci), Trpo\'Tepovfprior), irpuTos (primus ),^rs<. \n\n" Uvu), ay an epos (superior), avdoraros (supremus). \n\n" vTTcp), inreprcpos (superior), higher, inrepraros, Poet. vTraros (supremus). \n\n" inro\'i). varepos (posterior), later, varaTos (postremus), last. \n\n" ^f), ea-xaros (extremus), outermost. \n\n" irXriaiov, prope), {irXTjaios, Homeric), \xe2\x96\xa0nXtjo\'iairepos, or irXricrUffTfpos \n(proprior), nearer, irXTja-ialrarosy -effraros (proximus), nearest. \n( " irp6cru),far, vpoffcaT epos, farther, irpoadoTaTos, farthest. \n\nEem. 3. Other adjectives in the Comparative and Superlative, which are* \nalso derived from adverbs, have no Positive form of the adjective, e. g. ijpefia, \nquietly, ijpefjieffTepos, i)p\xe2\x82\xac/x4(rraros ; irpotpyoVf useful, irpovpyiodrepos, more useful^ \n\xe2\x80\xa2npovpyiaiTaros. \n\nRem. 4. Comparatives and Superlatives are also formed from substantives. \nHere two cases are to be distinguished : (a) when the substantive, both in form \nand signification, is the Positive from which the Comparative and Superlative \nmay be formed, i. e. when the substantive can be considered as an adjective, \ne. g. ^ovXos, slave, hovX6T(poSy more slavish; \xe2\x80\x94 (b) when the substantive, in \nrespect to the signification, is not really the Positive, but only in respect to the \nform can be considered as the basis of the Comparative and Superlative, the \nproper Positive form having been lost, (comp. Kpana-Tos from the Epic Kparvs, \n^A-e^xio-Tos from the Epic ixiyx\'fis.) Numerous examples of the last kind may \nbe found in poetry, particularly in Epic. See \xc2\xa7 216, Rem. 2. \n\nRem. 5. For the sake of greater emphasis, the Comparative and Superla- \ntive are sometimes compared, e. g. ^ax"-\'\'\'"^ (Superl.), eVxaTc^repos, 60-xot\xc2\xab6to- \nros ; so Trpdn-iffTos from irpSnos. This is frequent in the Comic writers, seldom \nin Homer and the Tragedians, \xc2\xa7till more seldom in prose. \n\n\n\n112 \n\n\n\nCOMPARISON OF ADVEEB8. \n\n\n\n[^85. \n\n\n\n^ 85. Comparison of Adverbs. \n\n1. Adverbs derived from adjectives, when compared, have \ncommonly no independent adverbial ending ; the Comparative \nis expressed by the Ace. Sing, neuter of the Comparative \nadjective, and the Superlative by the Ace. Pi. neuter of the \nSuperlative, e. g. \n\n\n\nG0^5)S \n\n\nfrom cro<p65) \n\n\nCom \n\n\n.\'(ro(bd>r(pov \n\n\nSup \n\n\n. (TixpdfTaTa \n\n\nffacpm \n\n\n\' " aracp-fis) \n\n\n\n\n(Ta<p4(rTepov \n\n\n\n\nacupfarara \n\n\nXapt^J^Tcos 1 \n\n\n" x\xc2\xabP^\xc2\xab\'^) \n\n\n\n\nXapi^o\'Tcpou \n\n\n\n\nXapt^fO^on-a \n\n\nfvdaifAWws \n\n\n" fevBalfxay) \n\n\n\n\nevSaifioyfO\'Ttpov \n\n\n\n\nfvSaifioyeoTaTa \n\n\nala-xpSis \n\n\n" at(rxp6s) \n\n\n\n\natffxiov \n\n\n\n\ntda-x^orra \n\n\n7}5e0i)S \n\n\n{ \xc2\xab ^5,5.) \n\n\n\n\n?lSiov \n\n\n\n\n^JSmtto \n\n\nrax^os \n\n\n[ \xc2\xab rax^s) \n\n\n\n\n^a<r<rov, TTov \n\n\n\n\nrdxio^To, \n\n\n\nEemark 1. The Singular of the Comparative is used, because only two \nobjects are compared, and it is afl&rmed that one of these is better, etc. than \nthe other ; but the Plural of the Superlative, because the object compared is \nthe best, etc. of many others. \n\nRem. 2. But sometimes these adverbs also retain in the Comparative the \nadverbial ending of the Positive -ws-, e. g. xa^fTorre\'pws, ii\\r}^\xc2\xabarepws, nox^po- \nTepwSf KuWiovas, especially /xci^SvoiSy etc. The Neuter Singular is seldom used \nin the Superlative, and belongs mostly to poetry. \n\n\n\n2. All original adverbs in \n\n\n\n-0), e. g. av(i)f KOTO), c^o), arWf etc., \nretain the ending -w regularly in the Comparative, and almost \nuniformly in the Superlative, e. g. \n\n\n\n&va>, above, \nKdrwy below, \n\n\n\nCom. avuTepci) \n\nKOTUTfpw \n\n\n\nSup. avwrirtt \nKccTearirm. \n\n\n\nIn like manner, most other original adverbs have the ending \n\xe2\x80\xa2w in the Comparative and Superlative, e. g. \n\n\n\nayxoy* near, \nirepd, ultra, \nrr]\\ov, far, \neKds, far, \n\n\n\nCom. ayxor4p(if \nirepcuTepw \n\nTTjXoTepft) \n\n\xe2\x82\xacKa<rT(pu \niyyirrepoa \n\n\n\nSup. ayx\'"\'\'*\'\'\'\'* \n\nSup. wanting \n\nTTjXOTOTW \n\n(Kcurrdrot \niyyvrdxoi and \niyyvTara \nfyyiara (rarely). \n\n\n\nW 86, 87-1 \n\n\n\nTHE pro:mouns cyo), cru, ou. \n\n\n\n113 \n\n\n\nCHAPTER III. \n\n\n\nThe Pronoun. \n\n\n\n$ 86. Nature and Division of Pronouns. \n\n1. Pronouns do not, like substantives, express the idea \nof an object, but only the relation of an object to the \nspeaker ; i. e. they show whether the object is the speaker \nhimself (the first person), or the person or thing addressed \n(the second person), or the person or thing spoken of (the \nthird person), e. g. / (the teacher) give to thee (the scholar) \nit (the book). \n\n2. All pronouns are divided into five principal classes : \n(1) Personal, (2) Demonstrative, (3) Relative, (4) Interrog- \native, (5) Indefinite Pronouns. Pronouns are again di- \nvided, according to their signification and form, into (a) \nSubstantive, (b) Adjective, and (c) Adverbial Pronouns, \ne. g. \xe2\x82\xac70) rairra hroir)(Ta\\ (a) /, thoti^ he^ she^ it; (b) my^ thy^ \n\nMs; (c) here^ there^ thus. \n\nI. Pehsonal Pronouns. \n\nA. Substantive Personal Pronouns. \n\n^ 87. The simple cyw, ego^ <rv, tu, ov, sui. \n\n\n\nNoin. iyd), I \n\nGcxi. fjLov (fiov), ^y^v, of me \n\nDat. fxoi (/iO(), ifjLol, to me \n\nArc- ^f (yuc), 4fji4, me \n\nN. A. I vd), ice both, us both \n\'G. D. y^^y of us both, to us \nboth \n\n\n\nNona, vi^fi^t \xc2\xbbpc \n\nGen. rji^oivy of us \n\nDat. ^/uij/, to us \n\nAce. T)fiaSy us \n\n\n\nSingular. \n(TV, tfiou \n\naov (arov), of thee \n<rol (<roi), to thee \nert ((Tc), the^ \n\nDual. \n\na^y you both \na<fx^y, of you both, \nI to you bi)th \n\nPlural. \nfi^cTj, y\xc2\xab (0) \nvfiiav, of you (u) \nvfiiVy to you (u) \nvfMis, you {v) \n\n10* \n\n\n\nwanting \n\nou (ou), of himself, etc. \nof (ol), \' \'/\', etc. \n\n\xc2\xab (if), hi ,, etc \n\na<p<Dey Ace. (Poet.), them both \nfftpcoly {<r<pu>ty), of them both, \nto them both \n\n\n\n(r<^\xe2\x82\xac?j, Nent. <r<p\xe2\x82\xaca (Poet.), ((r<^\xe2\x82\xac\xc2\xab) \n(r<puy, of them [if^^y \n\nff^l(Ti(y) {<T<pi<Ti[v]), to them \nffipus, Neut. (T<p(a ((r</>\xe2\x82\xaca), them. \n\n\n\n\n114 THE REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS ifiaVTOV, <T\xe2\x82\xacaVTOV, caVTOV. [\xc2\xa7 88. \n\nKemark 1. The forms susceptible of inclination are put in a parenthesis, \nwitliout any mark of accent. Comp. H 33 (b), and 35, 3. On the accentuation \nand use of the third Pers. of the Pronoun, see \xc2\xa7 302, Rem. 3. The Vocative \nis here, as in the following paradigms, omitted, because, when it occurs, it is \nalways like the Nominative. \n\nRem. 2. The Gen. Sing, of these three pronouns, in imitation of Homer, \noften has, among the Attic poets, also the forms ifie^eVf a-e^ev, e^ev: these \nfoi-ms always retain their accent, except when e^ey is not used as a reflexive \n(stii), but as a pronoun of the third person {ejus). Comp. \xc2\xa7 35, 3 (b). \n\nRem. 3. The Ace. Sing, and PL of ov ha^ in Attic poetry also the form \nvlv {yiu) signifying him, her, it, PI. them, e. g. Soph. OR. 868. 1331, instead of \nainovs and avrds. See the Dialects, \xc2\xa7 217. \n\nRem. 4. The oblique Cases of ^/ie?s and v/xeTsi when not emphatic, some- \ntimes undergo a certain inclination among the poets, being written in the fol- \nlowing manner: ^fj.au vixav, ^fjiiv vixiv, or ?i/mv vfuv; still, this inclination \ncannot take place if a Paroxytone precedes. The shorter form of the pronoun \nof the third Pers. is used in the Dat. and Ace. PI. by the poets (also by the \nAttic writers}, e. g. Dat. <r(pl (or a-cpiv) instead of (r^i(ri{y)., to them, Ace. ir(p4 \ninstead of <T^as, them. Both forms, a<pl and c(piv, though sellom, are used by \nthe poets as the Dat. Sing. ; the form (r<|)\xe2\x82\xac, on the contrary, is used much more \nfrequently as the Ace. Sing, instead of ain6py -V> -<^> also as reflexive instead \nof eavT6v. \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 88. (b) The Reflexive Pronouns, ifxavTov, acavrov, \n\niavTov . \n\n\n\nI. \n\n\n\nG. \n\n\nifJMVTOV, -TJS, of \n\n\n\n\nmyself \n\n\nD. \n\n\ne/iauT^, -i}, to \n\n\n\n\nmyself \n\n\nA. \n\n\nifiavrSu, -"fip, \n\n\n\n\nmyself \n\n\nG. \n\n\nTjfjLwv avraVf of \n\n\n\n\nourselves \n\n\nD. \n\n\nT}fi7v avTols, -a7s. \n\n\n\n\nto ourselves \n\n\nA. \n\n\nVfias avTovs, -ds. \n\n\n\n\nourselves \n\n\n\nSingular. \n(TeavTov, -^s, or \ncravTov, -rjs, of thyself \n(reavT(fi, i}, or \naravT^, f, to thyself \nareavrSv, --qv, or \n(Tavr6v, -S]v, thysdf \n\nPlural. \n\nvfxSiv ovtZv, of your- \nselves \n\nvfuy avTciis, -ais, to \nyourselves \n\nv/xas avTovs, -ds, \nyourselves \n\n\n\neavTov, -rjs, or \n\navTov, -rjs, of himself, of herself \nkavrcf, -fj, or [itself \n\navrcp, --p, to himself, to herself, to \nkavr&u, -^v, -6, or \\itself \n\navTovy -^Vy -6, himself, herself. \n\n\n\neairrcov or avrwv, or \n(Tcpwy avTuv, of themselves \nkavTois -cus, or avTo7s -a2s, or \n(r<pi(Tiv avTots -cus, to themselves \neavrovs, -ds, -d, or avrovs, -ds, \n\n-d, or \n<r(pas avrovs, -ds, c^ca cdnd, \n\nthemselves. \n\n\n\n^^ 89-91.] RECIPROCAL AND DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 115 \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 89. (c) Reciprocal Pronouns. \n\nTo express reciprocal relation, the Greek has a special pro- \nnominal form, which is made by the coalescence of oAAot oAAwv, \noAAoi oAAoig, oAAot oAAovs, into one word. From the nature of \nthe relation, this word can have no Singular. \n\n\n\nPlural Gen. \nDat. \nAce. \n\n\n\noAA^A.wj\', of one another \noAATjXojy, -cits, -ois \noAAtjA-Ous, -as, -a \n\n\n\nDual a\\Xr}\\oiv, -aiv, -oiv \ndAATjAoiJ/, -aiv, -oiv \niAAi7A&>, -d, -\xc2\xab. \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 90. B. Adjective Personal Pronouns. \n\nPersonal pronouns, having the form of adjectives, are called \nPossessive pronouns, since they express possession. They are \nformed from the Genitive of substantive personal pronouns : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n4lJi6sy -"f], \xe2\x80\xa26vy mens, -a, -um, from i/xov ; 7)fi4rfpos, -re\'pd, -repov, noster, -tra, -trum^ \n\nfrom TjfiSiv ; \n<r(Js, -4], -6v, tuns, -a, -urn, from <rov : vfiereposy -repd, -repoVf vester, -tra, -trum, \n\nfrom vfiwv ; \natpcrepos, -repd, -repov, suus, -a, -urn, from <r<p(iv (used in speaking of many ; \n\nwhen single persons or things are spoken of, Att. prose always uses the \n\nGen. louTov, -ris). The Epic form, 8s, ^, 2j/, sums, -a, -urn, also occurs in \n\nthe Tragedians, though seldom. \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 91. II. Demonstrative Pronouns. \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nSingular. \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nthe \n\n\n\n\nhie \n\n\nhaee \n\n\nhoc \n\n\nipse \n\n\nipsa \n\n\nipsum \n\n\nNom. \n\n\n6 \n\n\n^ r6 \n\n\nOVTOS \n\n\naUTTJ \n\n\nrovTO \n\n\novtSs \n\n\navTt] \n\n\nq.vt6 \n\n\nGeo. \n\n\nrov \n\n\nTTJS TOV \n\n\nTOVTOV \n\n\nTttVTTJS \n\n\nTOVTOV \n\n\navTov \n\n\nOLT7JS \n\n\navTOv \n\n\nDat. \n\n\nT^ \n\n\nTj7 r(f \n\n\nTOVTO) \n\n\nravrri \n\n\nTOVTCO \n\n\navT^ \n\n\navT^ \n\n\navT^ \n\n\nAce. \n\n\nt6v \n\n\nT-fjy t6 \n\n\nTovrov \n\n\nravTTjv \n\n\nTOVTO \n\n\nuvtSu \n\n\navT-qv \n\n\nainS \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nPlural. \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nNom. \n\n\nol \n\n\nat rd \n\n\nOVTOl \n\n\nOVTOt \n\n\nTOVTa \n\n\navToi \n\n\nainal \n\n\navToi \n\n\nGen. \n\n\nTWV \n\n\nTwv robv \n\n\nrovTuv \n\n\nTOVTUV \n\n\nTOVTO)V \n\n\navTU)U \n\n\navTcou \n\n\navTUiU \n\n\nDat. \n\n\nTols \n\n\nrais ro7s \n\n\nTOVTOIS \n\n\nravrais \n\n\nTOVTOIS \n\n\navTols \n\n\navTois \n\n\navToli \n\n\nAce. \n\n\nTOVS \n\n\nTOS TO, \n\n\nTOVTOVS \n\n\nravras \nDual \n\n\nTOVTa \n\n\navTovs \n\n\navTas \n\n\navToi, \n\n\nN.A. \n\n\nrd) \n\n\n(rd) rd, \n\n\nTOVTU) \n\n\n(raurd) \n\n\nTOVTU \n\n\navToi \n\n\navTa \n\n\n9 / \n\navTCi) \n\n\nG.D. \n\n\nToiv \n\n\nToiv rolv \n\n\nTOVTOIV \n\n\nrainaiy \n\n\nTOVTOIV \n\n\navTotu \n\n\navTouu \n\n\navTolv. \n\n\n\n1. The pronoun ovtos is composed of the article 6, tj, t6, and the pronoun \navr^s; where the article has o, a, or oi, they combine with the first syllable \nof ainSs and make ov; all other vowels of the article are absorbed by the \n\n\n\n110 \n\n\n\nRELATIVE PRONOUN. \n\n\n\n[$92 \n\n\n\nfirst syllable of avros. Hence the first syllable of ovtos ends in ov where the \narticle has o, \xc2\xab, or oi ; elsewhere in av. The same rule holds when ainSs is \ncompounded with an adjective pronoun, e. g. roaovTos (from roaos and outJs). \n\nExiunples : 6 avrSs = outos, ^ avr-fi \xe2\x80\x94 avrri, rh avr6 = rovro ; rod ahrov = \nroxnov, ti> out^s = toutt??, etc. ; so toVos avT6s = tocoDto^, 7 oVrj out^ = toc- \nouTTj, TcJcroj/ avrS = roffovro, r6<Tov avrov = roaovrov, etc. \n\n2. Like 5, ^, t({ is declined, \'6he, iJSe, rcJSe, roCSe, r^sSe, PI. o?5e, a\'/Se, rctSe ; \nLike OVTOS are declined, too-oStos, Tocravrr], ro(rovro{v), tantus, -a, -um, roiov- \nTos, ToiavTrj, TOLovro{v), talis, -e, TrjKiKodros, rrjXiKavrr], t7j\\ikovto{v), sogreat, \nso old; it is to be noted, that the neuter Sing., besides the form in o has \nalso the common form in oj/ ; \nLike avTos is \xe2\x80\xa2 declined, e/ceTj/os, iKelvr], iKe7vo, he, she, it, SaAos, &W% 2(AAo, \nalius, alia, aliud, the neuter Sing, here also ending in o. \n\nEemakk 1. The neuter form in o seems to hare rejected a S, as may be \ninferred from the Latin, is, ea, id, ille, -a, -ud, alius, -a, -ud. \xe2\x80\x94 On the Dua|. \nforms, rd, Ta7u, raira, rairaiv, see \xc2\xa7 241, Rem. 10 (b). \xe2\x80\x94 Listead of iKeTvoSf thftl \nIonic K\xe2\x82\xac7vos is also used in Attic poetry ; this word occurs somewhat frequently \nin Attic prose, but always after a long vowel or diphthong ; nence Aphaeresis \n(\xc2\xa7 14, 5) must be assumed here, as ^ \'/ceiVws, PI. Rp. 2. 370, a. \n\n\n\nJ \n\n\n\nI \n\n\n\n\n\nSingular. \n\n\nPlural. \n\n\n\n\nNom. \n\n\nroffovros ro(rg.vTr] To<rovTo{v) \n\n\nroffovTot rocavrai \n\n\nTocavra \n\n\nGen. \n\n\nTOffOVTOV TOCaVTTJS TOffOVTOV \n\n\nroffOVTOOV TO(TOVTb>V \n\n\nTocroinwv \n\n\nDat. \n\n\nTocrovTco TOffavrri Toaovrca \n\n\nToaovrois roffainrais \n\n\nroaovTois \n\n\nAce \n\n\n1 TOffovTov roffairnv ro(rovro{v) \n\n\nToffovrovs roffavras \n\n\nToaavra \n\n\n\n\nDual. \n\n\n\n\n\n\nK A. \n\n\nroffovTw Toffavra toctovto) \n\n\n\n\n\n\nG.D. \n\n\nroffovTOLV roffavraiv Tocrovroiv. \n\n\n\n\n\nRem. 2. The article usually coalesces by Crasis (\xc2\xa7 10) with aiirSs and forms \none word, viz. avT6s (instead oi 6 avrSs, idem), avr-f], ravr6, usually tou- \nr6v (instead of rb aM), ravrov^ butTTjs aiirris, ravr^, ravr\'p (to distinguish \nit from TavTT), this), but rhv avrov, tV out^v, aiiroi, avrai, ravrd (instead of \nTO avTd, to distinguish it from toOto, haec), but tuv avrtov, rois avrols, etc. \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 92. in. Relative Pronou \n\n\n\nN. \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nSingular. \n\n\n\n\n\n\nPlural. \n\n\n\n\n\n\nDual. \n\n\n\n\nNom. \n\n\nSs \n\n\n^ \n\n\ng \n\n\no\'l \n\n\nat \n\n\n& \n\n\n& \n\n\n& \n\n\ns> \n\n\nGen. \nDat. \n\n\noi, \n\n\nV^ \n? \n\n\nol \n\n\noh \n\n\nwv \naXs \n\n\n1- \nwv \n\noTs \n\n\noTv \n\nOIV \n\n\nalp \n\nCUV \n\n\noTv \noTv \n\n\nAce. \n\n\nHy \n\n\n^v \n\n\n\'6 \n\n\noSs \n\n\nUs \n\n\ns. \n\n\n& \n\n\n& \n\n\n&. \n\n\n\n4 93.1 \n\n\n\nINDEFINITE AND INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS., \n\n\n\n117 \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 93. IV. Indefinite and Interrogative Pronouns. \n\nThe Indefinite and InteiTOgative Pronouns are denoted \nby the same form, but are distinguished by the accent and \nposition, the Indefinite being encHtic (\xc2\xa7 33) and placed after \nsome word or words, the Interrogative being always accented \nand placed before. \n\n"Remark 1. When the interrogative pronouns stand in an indirect question, \nthe relative 5 is placed before their stem, which, however (except in the case \nof fisris), is not inflected, e. g. SnoioSf 6ir6<T0Sf oirSrepos, etc. \n\n\n\nSing. N. \n\n\ntIs, some one N. rl, some thing \n\n\nris ; quis ? \n\n\nrl; quid?] \n\n\nG. \n\n\nriv6s, or rov \n\n\n\n\nTtVos, or ToD 1 \n\n\nD. \n\n\nTij/ly or T^ \n\n\n\n\nTiVi, or T^J \n\n\n\n\nA. \n\n\nTivd N. t\\ \n\n\nriva. \n\n\nrl \n\n\nPlur. N. \n\n\nTives N. riyd and Stto \n\n\nTiues \n\n\nrlua \n\n\nG. \n\n\nTivcHv \n\n\n\n\nTivasv \n\n\n\n\nD. \n\n\nTi(ri{v) \n\n\n\n\ntI<tl{u) \n\n\n\n\nA. \n\n\nTivds N. Tivd and &rra \n\n\nrivas \n\n\nriva \n\n\nDual N. A. \n\n\nriv\xe2\x82\xac \n\n\n\n\nrive \n\n\n\n\nG. and D. \n\n\nrivo7v \n\n\n\n\nrivoiv. \n\n\n\n\nN. \n\n\n^STiSy whoever ^tis \'6 ri \n\n\no\'irives alrives ariva, \n\n\nor Sirra \n\n\na. \n\n\nOVTIVOS, or StOU ^STIVOS \n\n\nuvTivwv (rarely Stuu) \n\n\n\n\nD. \n\n\n^Tivi, or OTca frivi \n\n\notsTi(ri{v) (rarely \'6Toi(n[u] ) aTsTi<n{v) oTsri(ri{y)\\ \n\n\nA. \n\n\n6vTtva \xc2\xa5ivTiua \'6 ri \n\n\novsrivas asrivas ariva., \n\n\nor arra \n\n\n\n\nDual N. A. &Tiv\xe2\x82\xac^ \n\n\niTive, G. D. oTvTivoiVi oStnivotv. \n\n\n\n\n\nRem. 2. The form &rra not enclitic (Ion. &(r<ra) is often used instead of nvd \nin connection with adjectives, e. g. deiva &rra, fiiKpa &rra^ or placed first, e. g. \n^v ykp S)j &rra roidSe, PL Phaedon. 60, e. On the accent of uyrivuv, otm-ivoiv, \natvrivoiv^ see \xc2\xa7 34, Rem. 1. The shorter forms, Stou, \'drw, etc. are used by the \ndramatists almost always ; \'6tov^ \'6rca are also used by the orators ; but Stwj/, \n\'6roori{v) are very rare in prose. The negative coinpounds of rls, viz. o^ns, \noUri, ii-{]ris, fi-fiTh ^0 one, nothing, inflect the simple rls merely, e. g. ovrtvos, \noih-tves, etc. These forms are poetic ; instead of them, prose writers use ovSeis, \nfirfBeis ; only oihi and fi-^jri are used in prose with the adverbial meaning, in no \nrespect, not at all, and in the phrase, ofiri ye Sr} {fi^ri ye S^), let alone then, much \nless. \n\n\n\nSing. N. \n\n\n5 T] rh Se7va, some one, \n\n\nsome thing \n\n\nPlur. 01 Selves \n\n\nG. \n\n\nrov rrjs rov Servos \n\n\n\n\nruv Seivwv \n\n\nD. \n\n\nr(S rfj rcf} Selui \n\n\n\n\nwanting \n\n\nA. \n\n\nrhv rrju rh Se7ua \n\n\n\n\nrovs SeTyas. \n\n\n\nRem. 3. AeTva is also used indeclinably, though seldom, e. g. rod r^ rdp \nde7ya. \n\n\n\n118 \n\n\n\nCORRELATIVE PRONOUNS. \n\n\n\n1*94 \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 94. Correlative Pronouns. \n\nUnder Correlative Pronouns are included all those which \nexpress a mutual relation (correlation) to each other, so that if \none implies a question, the other with a corresponding form \ncontains the answer. \n\n1. This mutual relation is either a general or a definite one. The general \ncorrelation is expressed hyrls; ri,- who? what? rls,T\\,some one, some thing; \n856, ovros, he, this ; iKtlvos, that one ; ovSels, no one ; \'6 s, who, which, etc. Here \nthe fonns of the correlatives do not correspond with each other, except in the \ncase of rls. For example, if a question is asked tj tIs, the answer may be by \nrls, bSe, ovTos, etc. \n\n2. The definite correlation has four different forms, viz. the Interrogative, \nIndefinite, Demonstrative, and Kelative. This fourfold correlation belongs both \nto adjective and adverbial pronouns. All the four forms come from the same \nroot, but they are distinguished, partly by a different accent, partly by a differ- \nent initial ; the Interrogative begin with tt, the Indefinite have the same form, \nthough with a different accent, the Demonstrative begin with r, and the \nRelative with the Spiritus Asper. The indirect interrogatives, as shown above, \n\xc2\xa7 93, Eem. 1, place the relative 6 before the initial ir. \n\n3. Correlative adjective pronouns express relations of quantity and qucdity ; \ncorrelative adverbial pronouns, the relations of place, time, and manner, or \ncondition. \n\n\n\n(a) Adjective Correlatives. \n\n\n\nInterrogative. \n\n\nIndefinite. \n\n\nDemonstrative. \n\n\nRelat. and De- \npend. Inten-og. \n\n\n\xe2\x96\xa0n6(Tos, -77, -ov ; \nhow great? how \nmuch ? quan- \ntus? \n\n\ntto<t6s, -i], -6v, \nof a certain \nsize, or number, \naliquantus \n\n\nToffos, -7], -ov, so great, so \n\nmuch, tantus \nToerJcrSe, ro<T-f}Be, Toa\'6vSe \nTocrovTos, -aVTTI, -ovTo(v) \n\n\nSoros, -7], -ov and \ndirSaos, -t], -ov, \nas great, as \nmuch, quantus \n\n\niroios, -d. -ov ; \nof what kind? \nqualis ? \n\n\nTTods, -d, -6v, of \na certain kind \n\n\nTo7os, -d, -ov, of such a \n\nkind, talis \nroi6sS\xe2\x82\xac, ToidSe, roiSvSe \nroiovTos, -avTt], -ovro{v) \n\n\noTos, -d, -ov and \noTToTos. -a, -ov, \n\nof wliat hjul, \nqualis \n\n\nTTTjA-t/coy, -7j, -ov ; \nhow great? how \nold? \n\n\nwanting \n\n\nT7)\\iKos, -77, -ov, so great, so \nTr]\\iK6s5e, -^8e, -oVSe [old \nrr}XiKovTos,-avTr}, -ovto{v) \n\n\nr}\\(Kos, 11, -ov and \n\n6Tn}\\iKos, -77, -ov, \n\nas great, as old. \n\n\n\nRemark 1. The simple forms tJo-os and to7os are seldom used in Attic \nprose ; rSaos and ro7os are found in the phrase, roTos =fj to7os, PL Phaedr. 271, \n\nd, and elsewhere ; rScos koI toVos (PL ib.) ; 4k rixrov (so long time since), PI. \nLeg. 642, at end ; rStrip with a Comparative, corresponding to tbe relative Bata. \n\ne. g. Th. 8, 24. X. Cy. 1. 6, 26. Vect. 4, 32. \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 95.] \n\n\n\nLENGTHENING OP THE PRONOUN. \n\n\n\n(b) Adverbial Correlatives. \n\n\n\n119 \n\n\n\nInterrogative. \n\n\nIndefinite. \n\n\nDemonstrative. \n\n\nRelative. \n\n\nIndirect \nInterrog. \n\n\nvov ; where ? \n\nubi? \n\xe2\x96\xa0ir6^\xe2\x82\xacv; whence? \n\nunde? \nvoT; whither? \n\nquo? \n\n\nirov, somewhere, \n\nalicubi \niro^cv, from some \n\nplace, alicunde \nTToi, to some place, \n\naliquo \n\n\nwanting (hie, \n\nibi) \nwanting (hinc, \n\ninde) \nwanting (eo) \n\n\nov, where, \n\nubi \n\'6^ev, whence, \n\nunde \nof, whither, \n\nquo \n\n\noirov, where. \nubi \n\nivhence,\\in6.e \niiroi,whither. \nquo \n\n\nir6re ; when ? \nquando 1 \n\nirr}ulKa ; quo \ntemporis punc- \nto? quoti ho- \nrsL? \n\n\nTTore, some time, \naliquando \n\nwanting \n\n\nt6t\xe2\x82\xac, then, turn \n\nTTfvi- "I hoc \nkSSs 1 ipso \nTTqvi- \\ tcm- \nKovra J pore \n\n\n\'6r\xe2\x82\xac, when, \nquum \n\nriviKa, when, \nquo ipso \ntempore \n\n\nwhen, \n\nquando \ndirriviKa, \nwhen, quo \nipso tem- \npore \n\n\ntt5)s ; how? \nirrj ; whither ? \nhow? \n\n\nTTcas, some how \nTT^, to some place, \nthither, in some way \n\n\novT(t}{s) wSe, so \nrfjSe ( hither, \nravrr] \\ or here \n\n\nus, now \n^, tvhere, \nwhither \n\n\noircas, how \nwhither. \n\n\n\nRem. 2. The forms to express the idea of here, there (hie, ibi), wanting in \nthe Common language, are supplied by iurav^a, iv^dde^ and the idea of hence, \nthence (hinc, inde), by iv^fvSe, ivrev^ev; eu^a and ey^ev in the old and poetic \nlanguage have both a demonstrative and relative sense, but in prose only a \nrelative sense, except in certain phrases, e. g. ev^a /xev \xe2\x80\x94 \xe2\x82\xacv^a Se, hie, illic, \nfv^ev Koi ev^ev, hinc, illinc, and when the signification of place is changed to \nthat of time, e. g. iv^a Keyei, then he says, ev^eVf thereupon. The forms rds, thus, \nrfiy hither, here, are poetic ; &s (instead of ovrws), is also for the most part \npoetic ; in prose, it is confined almost wholly to certain phrases, e. g. koI &s, vel \nsic, ouS* ()U7}S\') &s, ne sic quidem, and in comparisons, us \xe2\x80\x94 Ss, ut \xe2\x80\x94 sic, PI. Rp. \n7. 530, d. Prot. 326, d. ; also &s ovv, so then, Th. 3, 37. \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 95. Lengthening of the Pronoun. \n\nSome small words are so appended to the pronouns, for the purpose of giving \na particular turn to their signification, that they coalesce and form one word. \nThey are the following : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) The enclitic ye is joined to the Personal pronouns of the first and second \nperson, in order to make the person emphatic, by putting him in contrast with \nothers, e. g. e7&>76, I for my part. The pronoun iyco then draws back its accent \nin the Nom. and Dat. e. g. \xe2\x82\xac70; ye, i/xovye, efio lye, ^H-^y^i cvye. As ye can be \njoined with any other word, so also with any other pronoun, but it does not \nfonn one word with the pronoun, e. g. ovr6s ye. \n\n(b) The particles S^ (most commonly Si^Trore), and oZv, are appended to \nrelatives compounded of interrogatives or indefinites, as well as to o(tos, in \norder to make the meaning general or indefinite, i. e. to extend it to everything \nembraced in the object denoted by the pronoun, e. g. bsris^i], osrisSrjTroTe, Ssris- \nSrfirorovv, dsrisovv, 7}risovv, driovv, whoever it be, I know not ivho, nescio quis, qui\xc2\xbb \ncunque (Gen. ouriuosovu or Srovovu, Tjsrivosovv, Dat. cpnviovv or bruovv, etc.) ; \xe2\x80\x94 \nivoaos^T], bn-oaosovv, otrosSifjTroTe, quantuscunque ; \xe2\x80\x94 oirrjKiKosovv, however greats \nhov) old soever ; so also usTrtpovv [comp. (d)]. \n\n\n\n120 NATURE AND DIVISION OF NUMERALS. [$ 96. \n\n(c) The siiffix 56 is joined with some demonstratives for the purpose of \nstrengthening their dcnionsti*ative relation, e. g. \'6Se, 7}5e, rSSe ; Toi6sSe ; Toa6s- \nl( ; rr)\\iK6sif, from lolos, rSffos, ttjA^kos, wliich change their accent after Se is \noppcndod {\xc2\xa7 34, llcni. 3). \n\n(d) The enclitic vfpis appended to all relatives, in order to strengthen the \nreference to a demonstrative, and thus to connect the relative more closely with \nits antecedent ; hence it denotes, even who, which, the very man, who, etc. e. g. \nii-Kfp, ^ir\xe2\x82\xacp, hirfp (Gen. ovirep, etc.) ; offosTrep, olSsirep (Gen. Scrovirep, o\'lovirep, etc.) j \ni^ivfp, S^etnrep. \n\n(c) The inseparable demonstrative f, is appended to demonstratives and some \nfew adverbs, always giving them a stronger demonstrative sense. It takes the \nacute accent (which yet, according to \xc2\xa7 31, 1., is changed into tlie grave in con- \nnected discourse) and absorbs every short vowel immediately preceding it, and \nalso shortens the long vowels and diphthongs : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\novTofft, this here (hicce, celui-ci), avr^t, tovtx, ^ \n\nGen. rovrovf, TouTTjcrr, Dat. rovr^f, ravr\'^t, PI. ovroii, avraif, tuvti] \n\ndU, rjSf, ToSt from \'65e ; wSf from wSe ; oiiruai from oiircos ; \n\niyrev^evt from ivrev^ey ; iu^aSf from iy^dde ; pvvf from pvv ; Sevpl from Sevpo, \n\n\n\nCHAPTER IV. \nThe Numerals. \n\n\xc2\xa7 96. Nature and Division of Numerals. \n\n1. Numerals express the relation of number and quantity. \nThey are divided into the following classes, according to their \nsignification : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) Cardinals, which express a definite number absolutely, \nand answer the question, hmjo many ? e. g. one, two, three. The \nfirst four Numerals and the round numbers from 200 (StaKoVtot) \nto 10,000 (jxvpioL) and their compounds, are declined; but all the \nothers are indeclinable. The thousands are expressed by \nadverbial Numerals, e. g. rpisxtAioi, 3000. \n\n(b) Ordinals, which denote a series, and answer the question, \nwhich one in the series? All have the three endings of adjec- \ntives, -09, -r), -ov, except Se^Vcpo?, which has -o?, -a, -ov. All up \nto 19, except 2, 7, 8, end in -ros and have the accent as near \nas possible to the beginning of the word. From 20 upwards \nthey end in -aT6<;. \n\nKemark 1. Adverbial Ordinals, which also denote a series, are expressed by \nthe Neut. Sing, or PL, with or without the article, but sometimes also with the \nadverbial ending -\xc2\xab., e. g. npciro,, rh \'^pSirou, nrpS,ra, rk -rrpccra, ^p6ro,s. \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 96.] NATURE AND DIVISION OF NUMERALS. 121 \n\n(c) Numeral adverbs, virhich express how often, or how many \ntimes anything has happened, and which answer the question, \nhmv many times ? They are formed, except the first thi-ee, from \nthe ordinals with the ending -aKts, e. g. irevraKisj Jive times \n(^ 98). \n\n(d) Multiples, which show the number of parts of which \na whole is composed, and answer the question, how many fold? \nAll are compounded of irXovs, and are adjectives of thi\'ee end- \nings, -ovs, -Tfy \'ovv {^ 76, I, and 77). \n\nairKovs, -Ti, -ovv, single; ^nrXovs {2), rpiirXovs (3), T\xe2\x82\xacTpa7rA.oOs, (4), Trej\'TOTrA.oys \n(5), 6|o7rA.oi5s (6), kirrairXovs (7), o/ctottAoSs (8), ivvaTrXovs (9J, Se/cairA-oys (10), \nkKaTovratrXovs (100), xtXtairAoCs (1000), ixvpiairKovs (10,000). \n\nRem. 2. The adverbial Multiples in answer to the question, how many \nfold ? or into how many parts ? are formed from the Cardinals with the ending \n"Xa or -XV and -x^s, e. g. irivraxo-i Trevraxv, rrevraxctis. \n\n(e) Proportionals, which denote ^proportion, and answer the \nquestion, how many times more ? All are compounded with the \nendings -TrXao-tos, -id, -lov (more seldom -TrXaortW, -ov, e. g. Ikotov- \nTaTrXaaicov, -op\') : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nSiirAoo\'toy, twice as much (as another which is taken as an unit), rpiirXda-ios \n(3), T\xe2\x82\xacTpaTr\\d(rios (4), TrevTarrXaffios (5), e^airXdaios (6), eTrrairXdcrios (7), OKTa- \nirXdcLos (8), evvaTrXdffios (9), 5e/ca7rA.o(rtos (10), kKarovrairXdo\'ios (100), x\'^\'o- \n)rX({<rios (1000), fivpioirXdffios (10,000). \n\n(f ) Substantive Numerals, which express the abstract idea \nof r^imber. Except the first, all are formed from the Cardinals \nwitn the ending -as. Gen. -dSos : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n7] fjLovds (from (xSvos, only), more seldom ^ kvds, unity ; ^vds, duality; rpids (3). \nrerpds (4), irevrds or ire fx-irrds (5), e|as ^6), c^Bofxds (7), oySoas (8), ivveds (9). \n$6Kas (10), eiKas (20), rpiaKds (30), TerrapaKovrds (40), ircurvKOf/rds (50), e/ca- \nToyras (100), xtAtos (1000), /iuptoy (10,000), Suo fivpidSes (20,000). \n\nEem. 3. In addition to the Numerals mentioned above, there is still another \nclass, which does not, like those, express a definite number, but either an \nindefinite number or an indefinite quantity, e. g. evioi, some ; Trdures, all ; iroX- \n>Qt, many (\xc2\xa7 77); oXiyot, few ; oXi-yov, oXlya, a little; ovSels, no one; owSeV, \ntiothing, etc. \n\n2. Numerals, like pronouns, are divided, according to theii \nsignification and form, into Substantive, Adjective, and Adver- \nbial Numerals, e. g. rpets ^X%v ; 6 TptVos dw^p ; rpts. \n\n11 \n\n\n\n122 \n\n\n\nNUMERALS. \n\n\n\n[H 97, 98 \n\n\n\n^ 97. Numeral Signs. \n\n1. Tlie Numeral Signs are tlie twenty-four letters of the Greek alphabet, to \nwhich three obsolete letters are added, viz. after e, Bad, or the Digamma F, of \nSt?, r ; the last character is taken from the figure r, which is a mutilated form \nof the Digamma, but which has only an accidental resemblance to the abbre- \nviation of <r (s-) and t (\xc2\xa7 1, Kem. 2); \xe2\x80\x94 Koirva, 5) as the sign for 90; \xe2\x80\x94 2a/iir7, \n*^ , as the sign for 900. \n\n2. The first eight letters, i. e. from ato ^ with the Bad or St?, denote the \nunits ; the following eight, i. e. from t to ir with the KSirira, the tens ; the last \neight, i. e. from p to w with the So/att?, the hundreds. \n\n3. Up to 999, the letters as numeral signs, are distinguished by a mark \nplaced over them, and when two or more letters stand together, as numeral \nsigns, only the last has this mark. With 1000, the alphabet begins again, but \nthe letters are distinguished by a mark placed under them, thus, o\' = 1, ^o = \n1000, i\' = 10, ,t = 10,000, ,\xe2\x82\xact//;tj8\' = 5742, ,a\xc2\xab/tj8\' = 1842, p\' = 100, j> = \n100,000. \n\n\n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 98. Frin \n\n\ncipal Cla \n\n\nsses of Numerals. \n\n\n\n\nCardinals. \n\n\n\n\nOrdinals. \n\n\nlo\' \n\n\neh, fiid, %v \n\n\n\n\nirpoiros, -rj, -ov, primus, -a, -Tim \n\n\n2)3\' \n\n\nUo \n\n\n\xe2\x96\xa0 \n\n\nSeirepos, -o, -ov \n\n\nsy \n\n\nrpus, rpla \n\n\n\n\nrplroSf -7], -ov \n\n\n4S\' \n\n\nrerrapes, -a, or \n\n\nreffCapeSy -a \n\n\nTerapTos, -7}, -ov \n\n\n5 6\' \n\n\nireyre \n\n\n\n\nvefjiiTTOs, -77, -ov \n\n\nBr\' \n\n\nH \n\n\n\n\neKToSy -r), -ov \n\n\nU\' \n\n\nfirrd \n\n\n\n\n\xe2\x82\xac0So{ios, -rj, -ov \n\n\n8V \n\n\nokt6 \n\n\n\n\n^ySoos, -7}, -ov \n\n\n93 \n\n\nivvia \n\n\n\n\nivaros, -77, -ov \n\n\n10 t\' \n\n\nUKa \n\n\n\n\ndeKuros, -jj, -ov \n\n\n11 m\' \n\n\ncVSe/ca \n\n\n\n\nevdcKaros, -77, -ov \n\n\n,.12t)8\' \n\n\nSc^Se/ci; \n\n\n\n\nSaScKOTOs, -77, -ov \n\n\n13 t-^ \n\n\nTpeis {rpla) Kol 5e/ca* \n\n\nrplros, -77, -ov Kol 5e/coTos, -77- -ov\' \n\n\n14 i5\' \n\n\nTirTapes[a) koX Se\'/ca* \n\n\nrirapros, -77, -ov Kol Sckotos, -77, -ov \n\n\n15 je\' \n\n\nirej/TeKotSe/fa \n\n\n\n\nvefiTTTOS, -77, -ov Kol SeKUTOs, -77, -ov \n\n\n16 ir\' \n\n\nc/c/caiSe/co \n\n\n\n\n\xe2\x82\xac/cTos, -77, -ov Kol Se/caroy, -77, -ov \n\n\n17 *C\' \n\n\nkirraKalhiKa \n\n\n\n\n\xe2\x82\xacj85o/ioy, -77, -ov Kal Sckutos, -77, -oi\' \n\n\nIStrj\' \n\n\noKTUKaiScKa \n\n\n\n\nS7S00S, -77, -ov Koi Se\'/caTos, -77, -ov \n\n\n19 i^ \n\n\nii/veaKaiScKa \n\n\n\n\nivaros, -77, -ov Kai SeKaros, -77, -ov \n\n\n20 k\' \n\n\n\xe2\x82\xaciKoai{v) \n\n\n\n\n6JK00-T0S, -1^, -6v \n\n\n\n\' The rare Attic form rpisKaideKa is indeclinable. \n\' The non-Attic form nffaapaKaiSeKa is indeclinable. \nThe forms given from the 13th to the 19th are preferable to Tpis/coiScicaTos, \nTfTTopcucaiS^^/caTos, irevTeKaiSeKaros, etc. \n\n\n\n^98.] \n\n\n\nNUMERALS. \n\n\n\n123 \n\n\n\n21 \n30 \n\n40 \n\n50 \n\n60 \n\n70 \n\n80 \n\n90 \n\n100 \n\n200 \n\n300 \n\n400 \n\nC^O \n\n600 \n\n(700 \n\n800 \n\n900 \n\n(lOOO \n\n2000 \n\n3000 \n\n(;4000 \n\n5000 \n\n6000 \n\n7000 \n\n8000 \n\n9000 \n\n10,000 \n\n20,000 \n\n100,000 \n\n1,000,000 \n\n8,000,000 \n\n\n\nCardAnals \n\n\\\' rpioLKOvra \n\nfi\' nrrapaLKovra \n\ni/ iretrrrjKoma \n\no\' efidofi-fiKovra \n\ni/ 6y5oT)KOVTa \n\n5\' iyev^KOPra \n\np\' \xe2\x82\xacKar6v \n\n</ SioKSffioi, -cUy -a \n\nt\' TpidK6<rioi, -at, -a \n\ni/ TerpaK6(riot, -at, -a \n\n^\' veyroLKSffiott -\xc2\xab, -a \n\nx! . e^oLKoffioi, -at, -a \n\nr^i\' e\'nTdK6aioiy -aiy -a \n\nfa oKrco.K6at.oiy -ot, -a \n\n\'^\' kwd-Koaioiy -at, -a \n\n,i3 Zis-)(iKioiy -ot, -a \n\n/7 rpisxi^ioiy -aiy -a \n\nJ8 riTpdKisxiXioiy -aiy -o \n\n^6 irevTOKtyx/Xtot, -at, -a \n\n^r e^oKtsx^A-tot, -aiy -a \n\n^^ iirraKisxi^toh \'\xc2\xab*\xc2\xbb "<* \n\n^17 OKTCtKtSX\'^tOt, -at, -o \n\n^ ivydKisxi\\toty -oUy -a \n\n^t fivpioiy -ot, -a \n\n^K disfxvpioi, -CUy -a \n\nfi ScKaKisfivpioiy -aiy -a \n\nifi eKaTouroKis/xvpioiy -aty -a \n\nKfi SiaKO(riaKisfx.vpioiy -at, -a \n\n\n\nOrdinals. \nfiKOffrhsy -^y -hvy vpuros, -17, -op \nTpidJco<Tr6sy -"fly \xe2\x80\xa26v \nTerrapaKOffrSsy --fly -6v \nTTivniKoarSsy -^, -6u \nf^aKocrroSy -"fly -&v \nifiSofifiKoo\'roSy -4iy -6v \noydortKoarSs, -^, \xe2\x80\xa26u \niveyijKOffTSs, -^, -6v \nfKaroffTSs, -i\\y -6v \n5idKO(rioffr6s, -^, -6v \nTpiaKOffioffrSs, -ill -ov \nrerpaKoaioffrSs, -Vj, -6y \nTtivraKoaioarSsi -^, -6v \n\nf^aKOfflOffTSs, -7j, -&v \n\nkirraKoo\'ioffTSs, -^, -oy \nOKraKoarioffrSs, -^, -oy \niyvaKo<Tio<rT6sy -^, -6y \nXt^ioffrSs, -fi, -oy \n5tsx\'A.to(rT<Jy, -^, -6y \nTpisxt^^o<TT6s, -^, -6y \nT\xe2\x82\xacTpaKi5Xi^o<rT6s, -^, -6y \nv\xe2\x82\xacyTaKisxi^iOffT6s, -rj, -6v \n\xe2\x82\xac|oKtsxtAtO(rT(Js, -^, -6v \n\nCTTTOKtSXtA.tOO\'TtJs, -^, -6v \n\n6KTaKisxi^i\'OffT6s, -^, -6y \niyyoKisx^^ioc\'T^s, -"fi, -6y \nfivpioarSsf -ill \'^v \ndisixvpioffrSs, -^, -Sy \nSeKaKisfivpioffTos, -^, -6y \n\xe2\x82\xacKaToyraKiSfivpioar6s, -"fj, -Sy \nSiaKOffiaKisfivpioffrSs, -^, -6y. \n\n\n\n1 S,ira^y once \n\n2 Sisy twice \n\n3 rpfs \n\n4 rerpaKis \n\n5 Tr\xe2\x82\xacj/T(t/cis \n\n6 \xe2\x82\xac|aKty \n\n7 kirriKis \n\n8 oKrdKis \n\n9 iyyeduetSy ivaKis \n\n10 S^kiLkis \n\n11 iySeKdKis \n\n12 SwSeKciKis \n\n\n\nNumeral Adverbs. \n\n13 rpisKaiZeKdKis 50 \n\n14 rerrapesKaidcKfiKis 60 \n\n15 veyrekaiSeKaKis 70 \n\n16 eKKaiSeKaKts 80 \n\n17 evraKatSeKaKis 90 \n\n18 OKTW/CatScKClKlf 100 \n\n19 iyyeaKaiSeKaKis 200 \n\n20 elKoaaKis 300 \n\n21 CtKOO-ClKtS OTTOI 1000 \n\n22 elKoadids Sis 2000 \n30 TptaKoyTcC/fts 10,000 \n40 TvrrapaKovriKis 20,000 \n\n\n\nireyrriKoyrd.Kis \n\nk^7]K0Vrd.KlS \n\nkfiSofxriKovTd.Kti \n\nOyZoTlKOVTtXKlS \n\nivcyriKOvrdKis \n\ncKaroyrdKis \n\nSiaKOtTidKis \n\nrpiaKoaidKis \n\nXi^idKis \n\nSisx^^^dKis \n\nfivpiaKis \n\nSlSflvpiiiKlS. \n\n\n\n124 \n\n\n\nREMARKS ON THE NUMERALS. [^ 99 \n\n\n\n^ 99. Remarks. \n\n1. The rarer subordinate forms of 13, U, etc., used by later writers, are \nj\xe2\x82\xacKOTp\xc2\xabs, Neut. liKarpia, SeKaTerrapes, -a, SeKaTreVre, etc. \n\n2 yiioioi, 10,000, when Paroxytone {fivpioi), signifies innumerable. \n\n3 In compound numerals, the smaller number either precedes the larger, \nand then always with Kui, or it follows the larger, usually with kuI, sometimes \nwithout it. The first order corresponds with the usage in English, e. g. Jive \nand twenty; the second only in part, e. g. twenty-Jive, e. g. \n\n25 : ireirre Kol elKoaiiv), or eUoffi Koi irevre, \n345 : nevre Kal rerrapdKovTa Ka\\ rpiaKSffioif or rpituc. rerr. Koi ir. \n\nThe same holds of the Ordinals, e. g. \n\nve/JLTTTOs Kol eiKOCTrSs, or elKOffrhs Kot irefXTnos. \n\n4. The tens compounded with 8 or 9 are frequently expressed in the form of \nsubtraction, by means of the participle of Se7v, to want, which agrees with th\xc2\xab \nlarger number, e. g. \n\n49 : rreyr^Koma hhs Seovra irri^, undequinquaginta anni, \n48 : irevriiKOVTa 5vo7v Zeovra cttj, duodequinquaginta anni, \n39 : v^es jjuas Ziovaai reTrapdKovTa^ undequadraginta naves. \n\nSo with the Ordinals, e. g. \n\n49 : hhs Sewj/ TrevTTjKOCTbs av^p, undequinquagesimus vir. \n\n5. Fractions are usually expressed by fiepos or fjLo7pa. These wqrds, as \ndenominators of the fraction, are put in the Gen., depending on the numeral \nwhich denotes the numerator. If they are expressed as denominators, they are \nunderstood with the numeral denoting the numerator; if they are expressed \nas numerators, they are understood with the numeral denoting the denominator, \ne. g. -^ is Tuv irevre (lepav rh Bvo [fieprj], or ruv triine \\}i\xe2\x82\xacpuv\\ rh. hvo fi^pr], two \nparts of the Jive; | is ruv okt2i> fioipuv ai irivre [jtioTpot], or twv okt^ \\}ioip5)v\\ al \niio fiolpai. But one half is expressed by compounds with 7]fii, e. g. r]fxiBap\xe2\x82\xaciK6vy \nhalf a daric ; so in the PL rpla, irevre rjfxiZapeiKa., a daric and a half two darics \nand a Jialf \xe2\x80\x94 Fractions are also expressed by an ordinal with fxoptov or fiepos^ \ne. g. rpiTr\\n6piov or rp\'nov fXfpos = J, irefjiirroy fjLepos = j\', a, mixed number is \nalso expressed by rj/xi preceded by a numeral, e. g. ireWe rj/xiSapeiKd = 2^ darics, \nalso by inl prefixed to an ordinal, e. g. eTrlrpiTov = 1 J, iiriirefnrTov = 1-|. \n\n6. The Cardinal numbers compounded with <Tvy are equivalent to the Latin \ndistributives, e. g. avyBvo (bini), two together, two at a time, each two, (rvyrpea \n(temi), arifiireyTi (quini), etc. \n\n\n\n* Fifty years, wanting one. \n\n\n\n{ 100.] NATURE AND DIVISION OF THE ADVERB. \n\n7. Declension of the first four Numerals : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n\n\n125 \n\n\n\nNom. \n\n\n\xe2\x82\xac15 \n\n\nfiia eV \n\n\nbvo \n\n\nGen. \n\n\n\xe2\x82\xacv6s \n\n\nftias \xe2\x82\xacy6s \n\n\nSvoTu (very seldom Sveiv) \n\n\nDat. \n\n\nkvi \n\n\nfiia fvi \n\n\nSvo7v (Suo-tM Ionic and Th. 8, 101.) \n\n\nAce. \n\n\n\n\nfiiav ev \n\n\novo \n\n\nNom. \n\n\nTpc7s \n\n\nNeut. rpla \n\n\nrerrapes, or reffa-apes Neut. rirrapa \n\n\nGen. \n\n\nTpiav \n\n\n\n\nT\xe2\x82\xacTTdp(aV \n\n\nDat. \n\n\nTpi(ri(v) \n\n\n\n\nreTTapcrilu) \n\n\nAce. \n\n\nTp\xe2\x82\xaclS \n\n\nNeut. rpia \n\n\nr4rrapas Neut. rirrapa \n\n\n\nKemark. Like efs are also declined ohbeis and /xijSefy, no one ; like efs too \nthey have the irregular accent, e. g. ovSels, ou5e/ito, ov5eV, Gen. ov5ev6s, ovSe- \nfjLicis, Dat. ovSeui, ovdefj-i^, etc. ; but in the PI. ovSeves {fnjSeves), -eVwf, -e<n{v), \n\xe2\x80\xa2evas. Comp. further, \xc2\xa7 65, 3 (c). The form Svo;, instead of 5uo, seems to be \nforeign to the Attic dialect. Avo is often used as indeclinable in all the Cases. \n"AfKpw, both, is declined like Svo, Gen. and Dat. a{A<poiv, Ace. &/x(pa. \n\n\n\nCHAPTER V. \n\n\n\nThe Adverb. \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 100. Nature and division of the Adverb. \n\nAdverbs (\xc2\xa7\xc2\xa738 and 314) are indeclinable words, denoting \nthe relations of place, time, manner, modality, intensity, ajid \nrepetition. They are formed either from essential words \n(\xc2\xa7 38, 3), viz. Substantives, Adjectives, Participles, or from \nformal words, viz. Pronouns and Numerals, or they are \nprimitive words, e. g. ou, {jltj, Kal, ^r^v, ^, av, etc. \n\n(a) Adverbs of place, e. g. ovpav6^eVy coelitus, travraxni ubivis; \n(Td) Adverbs of time, e. g. vvKTosp, noctu, vvv^ nunc; \n\n(c) Adverbs of manner, e. g. koXSjs, ovto}{s) \\ \n\n(d) Adverbs of modality, which, e. g. vai and ov[k), express an affirmation and \nnegation, or e, g. }xi\\v, rol, ^, ^ fxi]v, St?, itrws, ttov, &v, iravrus, etc. which \nexpress certainty, dejiniteness, uncertainty, conditionality ; \n\n(e) Adverbs of intensity and frequency, e. g. /xoAo, ttcCku, itoXJ;, oVoj/, etc. rpis, \nthree times; aZ^is, again; iroWaKis, often. \n\n11* \n\n\n\n126 \n\n\n\nFORMATION OF ADVERBS. \n\n\n\n[UOl \n\n\n\n^ 101. Formation of Adverbs. \n\n1. Most Adverbs axe formed from adjectives by the ending \n-COS. This ending is annexed to the pure stem of the adjective ; \nhence, as the stem of adjectives of the third Dec. appears in the \nGen., and as adjectives in the Gen. PL are accented Hke \nadverbs, the following rule for the formation of adverbs from \nadjectives may be given: \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nOwm^e -wv, the ending of the adjective in the Gen. Fl, into -co?. \n\n\n\ne.g. \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n<pi\\-os, lovely, Gen. H \n\n\n. <pl\\-WJ/ \n\n\nAdv. <pi\\-as \n\n\nKaK-6s, fair, \n\n\n(( \n\n\nKoK-Siv \n\n\nKoK-m \n\n\nKaipi-os, timely, \n\n\n(( \n\n\nKaipi-oav \n\n\nKaipi-ws \n\n\naTr\\{6-os)ovs, simple. \n\n\n(( \n\n\nair\\{6-<i\xc2\xbbv)(l\xc2\xbbv \n\n\n07rA{o-\xc2\xabs)\xc2\xab* \n\n\ntiv[o-os)ovs, benevolent, \n\n\n(C \n\n\n[\xe2\x82\xacvv6-uv) eivoiv \n\n\n{fxfvS-ws) eiiuces \n\n\nttSs, a//, TTavrSs, \n\n\n(C \n\n\niravr-uv \n\n\nvduT-us \n\n\nffdlxppwy, prudent, \n\n\n(( \n\n\nff<a<pp6v-(av \n\n\nffOKppSv-WS \n\n\nXapi^is, pleasant, \n\n\n(C \n\n\nXapi^vr-otv \n\n\nXapievr-(i)s \n\n\nrax^s, swift. \n\n\n- (C \n\n\nrax^-diV \n\n\nTOXf-WS \n\n\nfieyas, great. \n\n\n(( \n\n\nfxeydK-MV \n\n\nfiiydx-us \n\n\niiKrj^s, true, \n\n\n(( \n\n\naKi\\^{i-<av)wv \n\n\na,\\ri^{4-a}s)as \n\n\novi/^^s, accustomed, \n\n\nC( \n\n\n{avvq^i-fcv) avvii^wv \n\n\n(<ruv?j^e-\xc2\xab5) avvfj^ws. \n\n\n\nEemark 1. On the accent of compounds in -^^cos, and of the compound \navrdpKuSf see \xc2\xa7 59, Rem. 4, also on the accent of ewus, instead of ewws, \xc2\xa7 49, \n3. On the comparison of Adverbs, see \xc2\xa7 85. \n\n2. In addition to the adverbs with the ending -ws, there are \nmany which have the endings of the Gen., Dat., or Ace. \n\n(a) The Gen. ending appears in many adverbs in -r]<s and -ou, \ne. g. e^s, icfie$rj<s, in order; eiaTrivrjs, suddenly ; ttov, ahcubi; ttov, \nubi ? oTTov, ov, ubi ; avrov, ibi ; ovSapLov, nowhere. \n\n(b) The Dat., or an obsolete Abl. or Locative^ ending, occurs \nin the following adverbs, \n\n(o) In adverbs with the ending -?, e. g. ^pi, in the morning, comp. \xe2\x96\xa0^p, spring, \nawpt, unseasonahlij ; ewTjTi (Dor. eVaTj), aeK-nri^ ckovti, acKovrt; in adverbs \nof manner in -ei and -f, from adjectives in -qs and -tjs, and almost exclu- \nsively in adverbs compounded of a privatfve and iras or avrSs, e. g. \nTTwopnei and navopfit On the use of both forms, see Large Grammar, \nTart I, \xc2\xa7 .363 (^8). \n\n\n\n* The Locative Case, is one which denotes the place where. \n\n\n\nf 102.] CLASSES OP THE VERB. 127 \n\n(^) In local adverbs in -o?, commonly derived from substantives of the sec- \nond Dec, e. g. ^I<T^fj.o7 from \'la^fMSs, tlv^o7 from Uv^di, Mcy apo7 {rh \nMeyapa)^ Tleipaioc, KiKvyi/oi from 7] KiKVPva), oiy Hiroi, quo, whither, oXkoi, \ndomi, from oIkos, \n\nEem, 2. Adverbs in -oT, derived from substantives, denote an indefinite \nwhere, but those derived from pronouns commonly denote the direction whither ^ \nyet sometimes the indefinite where. \n\n(7) In local adverbs in -ot. This ending occurs only in a few forms, e. g. \nXa/J-aii humi, ird\\ai. To this form corresponds th^e PI. locative form \n-71 a- 1 (v), or where i precedes, -daiv, derived from substantives of the first \nDec. 5 this ending originally belonged to plural substantives only, but \nwas transferred later to substantives in the singular number, e. g, S-fifirj- \n(ri{v) from 0^)8at, *Ad^v7j<n{v) from \'A^uai, UKaTaiaai{v) from IlAaTotai: \nHepycur\'nari{i/) from Uepyaa^, \'OAu/*7rtd(rt(j\') from \'O^vfiiria. \n\n(S) In adverbs in 17 and -d, e. g. SaAtj, erepr), ve^rj, on foot ; Kpv(prj, \\d^pd, \nci/CTj, temere; ovSafirj, Srinoffia, publice; Koiyrj, in oommon ; iSia, privatim; \nKOfiiST}, diligenter ; also tttj, oirg, irdarni, % ttj, t^Sc, tovttj, etc. ; tj and a com- \nmonly have an Iota subscript. \n\n(c) The Ace. ending occurs in the following forms, \n\n(a) In the endings -mv and -ai\', e.g. vpdriv, fmKpiu^far; ircpav and treprjv^ \n\ntrans (but v4pa, uUra), etc.; so also of substantives, e. g. SUtjv, instar; \n\naxpiiiv {acme), scarcely ; Bupedv, gratis, \n{fi) In the ending -ov, e. g. SripSu, diu; (T^fitpov, hodie; afjpiov, to-morrow, \n{y) In the endings -Soy, -Sriy, -5a (adverljs of manner), e. g. avroa-x^^Sy, \n\ncominus ; ^c\'ScJi\', linroTpoxd-STjv, aTroaraSd. \n(5) In some substantive forms in the Ace. of the third Dec, e. g. x*^P\xc2\xab\'j fo^ \n\nthe sake of; irpofiKa, gratuitously. \n\n\n\nf \n\n\n\nCHAPTER VL \n\nThe Verb. \n\nNattire and Division op the Verb. \n\n$ 102. Classes of the Verb. \n\n1. The Verb expresses an action or state, which is af- \nfirmed of a subject, e. g. the father writes, the rose blooms, \nthe boy sleeps, God is loved. \n\n2. Verbs are divided into the following classes : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(1) Active verbs, which express an action, that the sub- \nject itself performs or manifests, e. g. <ypd(j)Wy to write; \n^aXkco, to bloom (comp. \xc2\xa7 248) ; \n\n(2) Middle or Reflexive verbs, which express an action \nthat the subject performs on itself, the subject being. \n\n\n\n128 VERBS. TENSES. [^ 103 \n\ntherefore, both agent and object, e. g. /SovXevo/jiac, 1 \n\nadvise myself^ I deliberate ; \n(3) Passive verbs, which express an action that the sulT- \n\nject receives from another object, e. g. rvTrTOfiai vtto \n\nTtv6<;, I am sjnitten by some one. \n3. Verbs, which are used only in the middle form, are \ncalled Deponent. They have either a reflexive or intransi- \ntive meaning. They are divided into Middle Deponents, \nwhich have a middle form for their Aorist and Futm-e, e. g. \n\')(apL^oixat, gratificofyA-OX. i\'^aptadf^rjv, Fut. \'^apLovfiat] and \ninto Passive Deponents, which have a Passive form for \ntheir Aorist, but commonly a middle form for their Fut., \ne. g. iv^v/jLeofMat, mecum reputo, Aor. ive^v/nif^Tjv, mecum \nreputavi, Fut. iv^vfiriaoiJbai, mecum reputabo. Comp. \xc2\xa7 197. \n\nk 103. The Tenses. \n\n1. The Tenses denote the time of the action of the verb. \nThe Greek has the following Tenses : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nI. (1) Present, /3ouXei;&), I advise^ \\ \n\n(2) Perfect, ^efiovXevKa, I have advised; j \nII. (3) Imperfect, ifiovXevov, I was advising", \n\n(4) Pluperfect, ijSejSovXevKeiv, I had advised, \n\n(5) Aorist, i^ovXevaa, I advised (indefinite) ; \nIII. (6) Future, fiovXevaco, I shall or will advise, \n\n(7) Future Perfect (almost exclusively in the mid- \ndle form), /Se/SovXevaofjLai, I shall have advised my- \nself, or / shall have been advised. \n\n2. All the Tenses may be divided into, \n\na. Principal tenses : Present, Perfect, and Future; \n\nb. Historical tenses: Imperfect, Pluperfect, and Aorist. \n\nRemark. The Greek has two forms for the Perf. and Pluperf. Act., two for \ntlie simple Fut. Pass., and two each for the Act., Pass., and Mid. Aorist ; these \ntwo forms may be distinguished as Primary and Secondary tenses ; i. e. the \nfirst Perfect is a primary tense, the second Peifect a secondary tense, etc. \nStill, only a very few verbs have both forms; most verbs construct the above \ntenses with one or the other form, but not with both. No verb has aU the \n\n\n\n^ 104, 105.] VERBS. MODES. \xe2\x80\x94 PARTICIPIALS. 12SJ \n\ntenses. Pure verbs (\xc2\xa7 108, 5) form, with very few exceptions, only the primary \ntenses. Mute and liquid verbs (\xc2\xa7 108, 5) may form both the primary and \nsecondary tenses, but no verb has all the forms in use. The Fut. Perf., which \nis found in but few verbs, is entirely wanting in liquid verbs. It is seldom \nfound in verbs which have the temporal augment (\xc2\xa7 121), e. g. aip4w, to take^ \n^p^lcrofjLai, PI. Prot. 338, c, aTifxaw, to dishonor^ ririix^xrofMiif Dem. 19, 284. \n\n\n\n$ 104. The Modes, \n\nThe Modes denote the manner iri which the action of \nthe verb is represented, whether as a direct affirmation, a \ncondition, or a command, etc. (comp. \xc2\xa7 258, seq.) The \nGreek has the following Modes : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nI. The Indicative, which makes a direct affirmation, e. g \nthe rose blooms, bloomed, will bloom. \n\nII. The Subjunctive, which expresses what is merely \nconceived, or conditional. The Subjunctive of the his- \ntorical tenses is called the Optative. Comp. ypdcpoifMo with \nscribere7n* \n\nKemark. See \xc2\xa7 257, 2 (a), (b), and Eem. 1, for the manner in which the \nAorist may use both forms of the Subj., and how the Future may have an \nOptative. \n\nIII. The Imperative, which expresses a command, e. g. \n^ovXeve, advise. \n\n> \n\n\xc2\xa7 105. Participials (^Infinitive and Participle^j \n\nBesides the modes, the verb has two forms, which, aa \nthey partake both of the nature of the verb and also of \nthe nature of the substantive and adjective, are called \nParticipials ; \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) The Infinitive, which is the substantive participial, \ne. g. e^eXft) ^ovXeveiv, I wish to advise, and to fiovXevecv, \nthe advising-. \n\n(b) The Participle, which is the adjective participial, e. g. \nfiovXevcov avr]p, a counsellor. \n\nRemark. These two participials may be called verbum ivfinitum ; the rfr \nmaiuing forms of the verb, verbum finitunu \n\n\n\n130 VERBS. \xe2\x80\x94 STEM, AUGMENT, AND REDUPLICATION. [H 106-109 \n\n$ 106. The Persons and Numbers. \n\nThe personal forms of the verb show whether the sub- \nject of the verb be the speaker himself (J, we^ first person) ; \nor a person or thing addressed (thou^ you^ second person) ; or \na person or thing spoken of (Ae, she^ it, third person). They \nalso show the relation of number : Singular, Dual, and \nPlural (comp. \xc2\xa7 41, 1), e. g. jSovKevco, J, the speaker, advise; \n/8ouXeu\xe2\x82\xact9, thou, the person addressed, advisest; fiovXevec, he^ \nshe, it, the person or thing spoken of, advises ; fiovXeverov, \nye two, the persons addressed, advise ; /SovXevovac, they, the \npersons spoken of, advise. \n\nRemark 1. The student will at once observe that the ending, or personal \nforms of the Greek verb, determines the person and number without the subject \nbeing expressed. So in Latin. But in English, as the verb is not varied so \nas to indicate the person and number of itself, the subject must be expressed. \n\nRem. 2. There is no separate form for the first Pers. Dual throughout the \nAct., and none for the Pass. Aorists ; in these instances it is expressed by the \nform of the first Pers. PL \n\n$ 107. Conjugation. \n\nConjugation is the inflection of the verb in its Persons, \nNumbers, Modes, Tenses, and Voices. The Greek has \ntwo forms of conjugation, that in -co, which includes much \nthe larger number of verbs, e. g. fiovXev-to, and the older, \noriginal conjugation in -/it, e. g. Larrj-fii, to station. \n\n\n\nConjugation op Verbs in \n\n\n\n-w. \n\n\n\nn08. Stem, Augment, and Reduplication. \xe2\x80\x94 Char- \nacteristic. \n\n1. Every verb is divided into the stem, which contains the \nground-form of the verb, and into the syllables of formation, by \nwhich the relations of person, number, tense, etc. are denoted. \nThe stem is found in most verbs in -w by cutting off the ending \nof the first Pers. Ind. Pres., e. g. pov\\e6\'u>, A^y-w, rpl/S-io. \n\n\n\nW 109, no.] VERBS. INFLECTION AND TENSE-ENDINGS. 131 \n\n2. The syllables of formation are either annexed as endings \nto the stem, and are then called inflection-endings, e. g. ^ovX^v-o), \n/3ov\\\xe2\x82\xacv-(ro)j (3ov\\\xe2\x82\xacv-(TOfjiaiy OX are prefixed to the stem, and are \nthen called Augment and Reduplication, e. g. i-jSovXevovy I was \nadvising ; /8e-)8ovAevKa, I have advised. For a change in the stem \nof many verbs, e. g. Tphr-m, re-T/ao^-a, i-TpaTr-rjv, see ^ 140. \n\n3. The Augment is e prefixed to the stem of vetbs which \nbegin with a consonant, e. g. i-fiovXevaa, I advised; but in \nverbs which begin with a vowel, it consists in lengthening the \nfirst stem-vowel, a and c into tj (and in some cases into \xc2\xab), i and \nV into I and v, and o into w. The Augment implies past time, \nand hence belongs to all the historical tenses (Imperfect, \nAorist, and Pluperfect) ; but it is confined to the Indicative. \n\n4. Reduplication consists in repeating the first stem-conso- \nnant with \xe2\x82\xac, when the stem begins with a consonant ; but when \nthe stem begins with a vowel, the RedupHcation is the same as \nthe augment, e. g. jSe-l^ovXevKa, I have advised; \'iKcrcvKa, I have \nsupplicated, from "ikctcv-o). The RedupHcation denotes the com- \npletion of the action, and hence belongs to the Perfect, Pluper- \nfect, and Future Perfect For a fuller view of the Augmenl \nand Reduplication, see M19, sq. \n\n5. The last letter of the stem, after the ending -co is cut ofl. \nis called the verb- characteristic, or merely the characteristic, \nbecause, according to this, verbs in -co are divided into difierent \nclasses ; according as the characteristic is a vowel, a mute, or \na liquid, verbs are divided into pure, mute, and hquid verbs, e. g \n^ovXev-o), TLfxd-io (pure verbs), Tpt/?-<o (mute), ^atV-to (liquid). \n\n\xc2\xa7 109. Inflection- endings. \n\nIn the inflection-endings, so far as they denote the relation \nof tense, mode, and person, there are three difierent elements : \nthe tense-characteristic, the mode-vowel, and the personal- \nending, e. g. y3ovX\xe2\x82\xacv-cr-o-/>tat. \n\n$ 110. (a) Tense-characteristic and Tense-endings. \n\n1. The tense-characteristic is that consonant which stands \nnext after the stem of the verb, and is the characteristic mark \n\n\n\n132 VERBS. PERSONAL-ENDINGS AND MODE-VOWELS. [^111. \n\nof the tense. In pure verbs, k is the tense-characteristic of the* \n!Pcrf and Pkip. Ind. Act., e. g. \n\n0e-fiov\\\xe2\x82\xacv-K-a i-fie-fiov\\ei-K-\xe2\x82\xactv ; \n\nthe characteristic of the Fut. and first Aor. Act. and Mid., and \ntlie Fut. Perf is a, e. g. \n\nPov\\ev-(r-(i> ^ovMv-cr-ofjuu fie-fiovXei-ff-ofuu \n\nthe characteristic of the first Aor. Pass, is 5; the first Fut. \nPass, has, besides the tense-characteristic <r, the ending of the \nfirst Aor. Pass, -^rj, thus, \n\nThe primary tenses only (\xc2\xa7 103, Rem.) have a tense-charac- \nteristic. \n\n2. The tense -characteristic, together with the ending follow- \ning, is called the tense-ending. Thus, e. g. in the form ySov- \nXevo-ft), cr is the tense-characteristic of the Fut., and the syllable \no-o) is the tense-ending of the Fut. The stem of the verb, \ntogether with the tense-characteristic and the augment or \nreduplication, is called the tense-stem. Thus, e. g. in l^ov- \nXcvcr-a, i^ovXeva- is the tense-stem of the first Aor. Act. \n\n\n\n$ 111. (b) Personal-endings and Mode-vowels. \n\nThe personal-ending denotes the person of the verb, and \ntakes a difierent form according to the different persons and \nnumbers; the mode-vowel connects the tense-stem and the \npersonal-ending, and takes a different form according to the \ndifferent modes, e. g. \n\n1 Pers. Sing. Ind. Pres. M. fiov\\ei-o-fmi Subj. PouX^i-u-fuu \n\n3 " " \xc2\xab Put. " fiov\\ei-<r-e-Tat Opt. fiovKei-fr-oi-ro \n\n1 \xc2\xab PL " Pres. \xc2\xab fiov\\ev-6-fjie^a Subj. )8ouAeu-c6-)iie^a \n\n2 " " " " " )8ouAe.5-6-(r^6 \xc2\xab ^ov\\e{>-r,-(rSre \n\n1 " Sing. \xc2\xab A. I. \xc2\xab 4fiov\\ev-(r-d-f^7iy " ^ov\\ei-(r-u-fiai \n\n^ " " " " " ifiov\\Gv-(r-a-TO Opt. fiov\\eu-(r-ai-TO. \n\nRemark. In the above forms, )8ou\\eu is the verb-stem, and ^vXev, ySouAeuc, \nand ifiovXeviT are the tense-stems, namely, of the Pres., Put., and first Aor. \nMid. ; the endings -^at, -rat, etc., are the personal-endings, and the vowels o, \n\xc2\xab, \xe2\x82\xac, o\xc2\xa3, 7/ o, ai, are the mode-vowels. The mode-vowels e and o of the Indie \nare lengthened into ij and w in the Subj. \n\n\n\nH 112, 113.] MODE-VOWELS. ^PERSONAL-ENDINGS. \n\n\n\n133 \n\n\n\n\n\n\xc2\xab 112. \n\n\nSummary of \n\n\nthe \n\n\nMode-vowels. \n\n\n\n\n\n\nIndicative. \n\n\nSubj. \n\n\nOpt. \n\n\nImpr. \n\n\nInf. \n\n\nPart. \n\n\nPerson. \n\n\nPres. and Put. \nActive. \n\n\nImpf., A. II. A. and \nM. and Prs.and P.M. \n\n\nAct. Mid. \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nS. 1. \n\n\n(0 \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\na> \n\n\nCO \n\n\not \n\n\n\xe2\x80\x94 \n\n\net, 6 \n\n\nCO, \n\n\n2. \n\n\nfi \n\n\n\n\n\xe2\x82\xac \n\n\n?7 \n\n\nV \n\n\n01 \n\n\n6 \n\n\n\n\n\n\n3. \n\n\n\xe2\x82\xac1 \n\n\n\n\n\xe2\x82\xac \n\n\n?? \n\n\nV \n\n\n01 \n\n\ne \n\n\n\n\n\n\nD. 1. \n\n\n\xe2\x80\x94 \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n<a \n\n\n01 \n\n\n- \n\n\n\n\n\n\n2. \n\n\n\xe2\x82\xac \n\n\n\n\ne \n\n\n\xe2\x96\xa0n \n\n\nV \n\n\n01 \n\n\ne \n\n\n\n\n\n\n3. \n\n\nC \n\n\n\n\n\xe2\x82\xac \n\n\nV \n\n\nV \n\n\n01 \n\n\nc \n\n\n\n\n\n\nP. 1. \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n0) \n\n\n(t) \n\n\n01 \n\n\n- \n\n\n\n\n\n\n2. \n\n\n6 \n\n\n\n\ne \n\n\nv \n\n\nV \n\n\not \n\n\n6 \n\n\n\n\n\n\n3. \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n0) \n\n\nCO \n\n\n01 \n\n\n6 \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nIndicative. \n\n\nOptative. \n\n\nImpr. \n\n\nInfinitive. \n\n\nPerson. \n\n\nPlpf. \n\n\nA. I. M. \n\n\nA. I. A. and \nPf. A. \n\n\nA. L A. \nand M. \n\n\nA. LA. and M. \n\n\nA. I. A. and M. \na \n\n\nS. 1. \n\n\n61 \n\n\na \n\n\na \n\n\nai \n\n\n\xe2\x80\x94 \n\n\n2. \n3. \n\n\nei \nei \n\n\na \na \n\n\na \n\ne \n\n\nai \n\n\na \na \n\n\n\n\n\n\nD. 1. \n\n\n- \n\n\na \n\n\n- \n\n\nai \n\n\n- \n\n\nParticiple. \n\n\n2. \n\n3. \n\nP. 1. \n\n\nei \n\n\xe2\x82\xac1 \n61 \n\n\na \na \na \n\n\na \na \na \n\n\nai \nai \nai \n\n\na \na \n\n\nA. I. A. and M. \nand P\xc2\xa3 A. \n\n\n2. \n\n\n\xe2\x82\xac( \n\n\na \n\n\na \n\n\nai \n\n\na \n\n\na \n\n\n3. \n\n\n(\xc2\xab)\xe2\x82\xac \n\n\nw \n\na \n\n\na \n\n\nai \n\n\na \n\n\n\n\n\n$ 113. Personal-endings \n\n\nof Verbs in -w. \n\n\nI. Active Form. \n\n\nII. Middle Form. \\ \n\n\nA. Ind. and Subj. \nthe Princ. tenses. \n\n\nB. Ind. and Opt. \nthe Hist, tenses. \n\n\nA. Ind. and Subj. \nthe Princ. tenses. \n\n\nB. Ind. and Opt. \n\nthe Hist, tenses. \n\n\nSing. 1. \n\n2. \n\n3. \nDual 1. \n\n2. \n\n3. \nPlur. 1. \n\n2. \n\n3. \n\n\nTOV \nTOV \n\nfiev \n\nT\xe2\x82\xac \n\n{vTi) <ri{v) \n\n\nJ/, Opt. fjt,i \n\n5 \nTOV \n\nrriv \nfiev \n\nT6 \n\nv, ffav \n\n\nflat \nffai \nTat \nixe^ov \n\nff^OV \nff^OV \n\nffSte \n\nvrai (aToi) \n\n\nlJ.r,v \n\nffOy \n\nTO \n\nfie^ov \nffhov \n\nff^TJV \n\nfjLe^a \n\nVTO (oTo) \n\n\nC. Imperative. \n\n\nC. Imperative. \n\n\nSing. 2. \nDual 2. \nPlur. 2. \n\n\n3. TCO \nTOV 3. TCOV \nT\xe2\x82\xac 3. TCOffaV \n\n\nSing. 2. { 0-0 ) 3. ff^co \n\nDual 2. ff^ov 3. a^cov \n\nPlur. 2. a^e 3. ff^coffav^ ff^otr \n\n\nD. Infinitive. \n\n\nD. Infinitive. \n\n\nV Pres., Put., and Aor. II. \n\nvai Peif. Act. and Aor. I. and II. Pass. \n\nt Aor. I. \n\n\nff^ai \n\n\nE. Participle. \n\n\nE. Participle. \n\n\nStem j/T, mth exception of the Perf., \nwhose stem ends in -ot. \n\n\nfievos, fJi-evriy fxevov ; \nfievos, iueKrj, fievov, Perf. \n\n\n\n12 \n\n\n\n134 PERSONAL-ENDINGS. [$ 114. \n\nRemark. The Personal-endings follow so directly the mode-vowel, and are \n80 closely joined to it, that often the two do not appear separately, but are \nunited together, e. g. fiov\\evff-T]s, instead of iSouAcuo\'-Tj-ts, jSouAev-??, instead of \nfiouA.ej5-6-at (a and \xe2\x82\xac coalescing and i being subscribed). \n\n$ 114. Difference between the Personai-endings in \nthe Principal and the Historical Tenses. \n\n1. The difference between the Principal and Historical tenses is important. \nThe Principal tenses (Pres., Perf., and Put.) form the second and third Pers. \nDual with the same ending -ox/, e. g. jSouXeu-e-TOj/ /SouXeu-e-rov ; fiov\\\xe2\x82\xacv-e-<r^ov \n^ov\\ei-\xe2\x82\xac-a^ov ] the Historical tenses also form the second Pers. Dual in -oi^, \nbut the third in -riv, e. g. \n\n2. The Principal tenses form the third Pers. PI. Act. in -(ri{v), from -vn, \n\'Vffiy and the Mid. in -yrai ; the Historical tenses in the Active, in -v, and Mid., \nin \'vro^ e. g. \n\nfiov\\\xe2\x82\xacv-o-y(rt = fiov\\iv-ov<ri{y) i$ov\\\xe2\x82\xacx/-o-y \n6ov\\e6-o-vrai 40ov\\ev-o-vTo. \n\nEemark. In fiov\\\xe2\x82\xacvovai the v is dropped, and as a compensation the o pre- \nceding it is lengthened ; so also in the Put. Act. Comp. 116, 5. \n\n3. The Principal tenses in the Sing. Mid. end in -fiauy -<raij t<u ; the Histori- \ncal in \'fiTjVt \'ffo, -TO, e. g. \n\nfiov\\\xe2\x82\xac{>-o-fiai i$ov\\\xe2\x82\xacv-6-n\'r]y \n\nj8ouA.\xe2\x82\xaci5-e-<rat = ^ovXiv-rj, i$ov\\\xe2\x82\xacv-e-ff o = ifiov\\\xe2\x82\xacv-ov \n\ni8ou\\\xe2\x82\xact5-6-ra< ifiovKev-e-r o. \n\n4. The Personal-endings of the Subj. in the Principal tenses are like those \nof the Ind. in the same tenses ; the Opt. are like those of the Ind. of the Hii- \ntorical tenses ; \n\nSubj. Pov\\euri-TOP \n" fiov\\ev7]-<T^oy \n" fiov\\ev(D-<r I (y) \n" fiovKevwyrai \n*\' fiov\\ev(i>-fiat \n" j8oi/A.ev-j7 \n" fiovKevTj-rat \n2 and 3 Du. \xc2\xab Impf.^^o v\\\xe2\x82\xact5\xe2\x82\xac-T oy.-^-rrjy Opt. /So v\\6uot-T o y, -oi-r ij r \n\nifiov\\\xe2\x82\xacie-(r^oy, \'^\'Or^Tjy " fiov\\\xe2\x82\xacvoi-(r^oy, -oi-obiiP \n3 PI. \xc2\xab " i^i\\\xe2\x82\xacvo-y \xc2\xab PovXeioL-ey \n\n4fi0V\\\xe2\x82\xac60-yTO \xc2\xab\xc2\xab fi0V\\\xe2\x82\xacV0l-VT0 \n\niSing." \'^ mov\\,v6-t,r,y \xc2\xab fiov\\,vol-fiv y \n\n2 " \xc2\xab "(^^ou\\ei5e-o-o) \xe2\x82\xac\'^ou\\\xe2\x82\xac.J-ov \'\' ($ov\\e6oi-iro) fiov\\^oi-o \n\n\n\n2 and 3 Du. Ini. Pr. fiovKeie-rop \n\n\n\n\nfiov\\ev\xe2\x82\xac-ff^op \n\n\n3 PL \xc2\xab \n\n\n" /3ow\\ei5ou-<rt{ /) \n\n\n\n\nfiov\\eio-vra \n\n\n1 Sing. \xc2\xab \n\n\n" $ov\\^vo\'fiai \n\n\n2 \'\xe2\x80\xa2 \xc2\xab \n\n\n" fiovXei-j) \n\n\n3 " \xc2\xab \n\n\n" fiovXeie-rai \n\n\n\ni 115.] CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB IN -(i>. 135 \n\n$ 115, Conjugation of the Regular Verb in -co. \nPbelimikabt Eemabks. \n\n1. Since pure verbs do not form the secondary tenses {\xc2\xa7 103, Rem.) these \ntenses are supplied in the Paradigm from two mute verbs and one liquid \nverb {rpifi-ojy Kelir-u, stem Ain, <pait/-w, *AN), so as to exhibit a full Conju- \ngation. \n\n2. In learning the table, we are to note, \n\n(1) That the Greek forms may always be resolved into, (a) Personal-ending, \n(b) Mode-vowel, (c) Tense-characteristic, (d) Tense^stem, (e) Verb-stem, (f ) \nAugment, or Reduplication. \n\n(2) The s/x7C\xe2\x82\xac<f forms, e. g. /3oii\\\xe2\x82\xacu-\xe2\x82\xac TO \xc2\xbb/, ^ovAtu-rj t o v, third Pers. Du. Ind. \nand Subj. Pres., may direct attention to the difference between the Historical \ntenses in the Ind. and Opt., and the Principal tenses. \n\n(3) Similar forms, as well as those that differ only in accentuation, are \ndistinguished by a star (*). The learner should compare these together, e. g. \npov\\\xe2\x82\xacv<ra>, 1. Sing. Ind. Fut. Act. or 1. Sing. Subj. I. Aor. Act.; fiovXtvaaif \n2. Sing. Imp. I. Aor. Mid., fiov\\ev<Tai, 3, Sing. Opt. I. Aor. Act., fiov\\\xe2\x82\xacv<T0Uf \nInf I. Aor. Act. \n\n(4) The accentuation (^ 118) should be learned with the form. The follow- \ning general rule will suffice for beginners : 27/e accent of the verb is as far from \nthe end as the fnal syllable will permit. Those forms, whose accentuation \ndeviates from this rule, are indicated by a dagger (t). \n\n(5) "When the Paradigm is thus thoroughly learned, the pupil may first \nresolve the forms either of fiovXfvw, or any pure verb, into their elements, i. e. \nPersonal-ending, Mode- rowel, etc. ; observing this order, \\iz. fiovKtvcru is, (1) \nfirst Pers., (2) Sing., (3| Ind., (4) Fut., (5) Act., (6) from fiov\\(vw, to advise; \nthen he may arrange the elementary parts of the form, and in the following \norder: (1) Verb-stem, (2) Augment, or Reduplication, (3) Tense-characteristic, \n(4) Tense-stem, (5) Mode-vowel, (6) Tense-stem with Mode-vowel, (7) Per \nsonal ending, (8) Tense-stem with Mode-vowel and Personal-ending. E. g. \nWhat would be the form in Greek of the phrase, he advised himself using the \nAor. of the Pres., fiov\\fv-w, to advise ? Answer : The Verb-stem is /SovAeu-, \nAugment, 4, thus ifiovXfv ; the Tense-characteristic of the first Aor. Mid. is <r, \nthus Tense-stem is i-fiov\\\xe2\x82\xacv-(r ; the Mode-vowel of the first Aor, Ind. Mid. is a ; \nthus, 4-fiov\\ev-<r-a ; the Personal-ending of the third Pers. Sing, of an Historical \ntense of the Mid. is to ; thus, i-fiov\\ev-a-a-ro. \n\nRemark. By making himself familiar with the above elements, the pupil \nc\xc2\xabn construct from the root any form of the verb he may wish. \n\n\n\n136 \n\n\n\nPARADIGM OF THE REGULAR VERBS IN \n\n\n\n-0), \n\n\n\n[i U5. \n\n\n\nTenses. \n\n\n\nPresent, \n\nTense- \nstem: \nfiovAev- \n\n\n\nImperfect, \n\nTense- \nstem: \ne-j8ouAev- \n\n\n\nPer/ect Z, \n\nTense- \nstem: \n/3e-j8ou\\eu-/c \n\n\n\nPluper- \nfect L, \n\nTense- \nstem : \n\n8ov\\ev-K- \n\n\n\nPerf. 11. \nPlpf. 11. \n\nAorist Z, \n\nTense- \n\nstem: \n\ni-^ovXev-ff- \n\n\n\nAorist IL, \ne-AiTT- \n\nFuture^ \nfiovXev-ff- \n\n\n\nm \n\n\n\nid \xc2\xae \n\n\n\nS. 1. \n\n2. \n\n3. \nD.2. \n\n3. \nP,l. \n\n2. \n\n3. \n\n\n\nS. 1. \n\n2. \n\n3. \nD.2. \n\n3. \nP. 1. \n\n2. \n\n3. \n\n\n\nS. 1. \n\n2. \n\n3. \nD.2. \n\n3. \n\nP. 1. \n2. \n3. \n\n\n\nD \n\n\n\nS. 1. \n2. \n3. \n2. \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\ns. \n\n\n1. \n\n\n\n\n2. \n\n\n\n\n3, \n\n\nD \n\n\n.2. \n\n\n\n\n3. \n\n\nP. \n\n\n1. \n\n\n\n\n2. \n\n\n\n\n3. \n\n\nS. \n\n\n1. \n\n\n\n\n2. \n\n\ns. \n\n\n1. \n\n\n\nIndicative. \n\n\n\n^ov\\ei)-a,^ I advise, \nfiov\\\xe2\x82\xacv-eis, thou advisest, \nfiov\\\xe2\x82\xaci-\xe2\x82\xaci, he, she, it advises, \nfiov\\\xe2\x82\xacv-erov, ye two advise, \nfiovXev-eroy, they two advise, \n^ovX^v-ofiev, we advise, \nySouAeu-ere,* you advise, \nfiov\\e6-ov<ri{j/), they advise, \n\n\n\nfiovK^v-o),* I may advise, \n\nfiovXei-Tis ^ \n\n)8ouAeu-77* \n\nfiovXev-rjToy \n\nfiov\\ev-T) Toy \n\n^ovXev-ufiey \n\nfiov\\ev-r]Te \n\nPov\\ev-a>(ri{v) \n\n\n\ni-^ovXev-oy,* I was advising, \ni-^ovXev-es, thou wast advising, \ni-fiovXev-e{y), he, she, it was adv. \ni-fiovXe6-eToy, ye two were adv. \ni-fiovX\xe2\x82\xacv-\xe2\x82\xacT7]y, they two were adv. \n\xe2\x82\xac-fiovXev-ofi\xe2\x82\xacv, we were advising, \ni-^ovXev-ere, you were advising, \ni-fiovXev-ou,* they were advising, \n\n\n\nfie-^ovXev-K-a, I have advised, \n^e-fiovXev-K-as, thou hast adv\'d, \nfie-0ovXev-K-\xe2\x82\xac{y),* he, she, it has a \n^e-^ovXev-K-aroy, ye two have a. \n)8e-j8ov\\eu-/c-a ray, they two have \n\nadvised, \nfie-fiovXev-K-afxev, we have adv^d, \n^-fiovXev-K-aTe, you have adv^d, \njSe-jSoi/Aeu-K-d c i (v), they have a. \n\n\n\ni-fie-$ovXev-K-eiy, I had advised, \ni-fie-fiovXev-K-\xe2\x82\xacis, thou hadst adv. \ni-fie-fiovXcv-K-ei, he, she, it had ad. \ni-^e-fiovXev-K-eiToy, ye two had \n\nadvised, \ni-fie-fiovXev-K-e iTt] y,they two had \n\nadvised, \ni-fii-^ovXcv-K-eifiev, we had adv \ni-fie-fiovXev-K-ene, you had adv. \ne-j8e-/3ouA\xe2\x82\xacu K-eaay, they had a \n\n\n\n6-i \n\n\n\nTri-^r)v-a,^ I appear, \n-Tre-^Tjv-etj\',^ / appeared, \n\n-fiovXev-cr-a, I advised (indef.), \n-fiovXev-ff-as, thou advisedst, \n^ovXev-cr-e{v), he, she, it adv\'d, \n^ovXev-(T-aToy, ye two advised, \n^ovX^v-cr-dr-qv, they two adv\'d, \nfiovXev-ff-afiey, we advised, \n^ovXev-<r-aT\xe2\x82\xac, you advised, \n^ovXev-a-a v, they advised. \n\n\n\nSubjunctive \nof the Principal tenses. \n\n\n\n$e-fiovX\xe2\x82\xacv-K-u,Imayhavea. \n$\xe2\x82\xac-^ouXev-K-r)s \n^e-0ovXev-K-T} \n)8 e-)3oi\xc2\xbb Ae u-K-T/TO V \n^\xe2\x82\xac-fiovXev-K-7] Toy \n\n^e-fiovXev-K-cofjiey \n\nfi\xe2\x82\xac-$ovXev-K-rjTe \n\nfie-fiovXcv-K-oxrtly) \n\n\n\n"Ke-cjyfty-cOf I may appear. \n\n\n\nfiovXev-a-u,* I may advise, \n\n\'0ovXfv-(r-T}s \n\n$ovXev-<r-T} * \n\n)8ouAeu-<r-77Toi\' \n\n$ovXev-(r-r} Toy \n\n^ovXev-cr-ufiey \n\njSouAev-a-TTTe \n\njSouAe v-<r-a>(n ( V ) \n\n\n\ne-Xiir-oy, Ileft, \n\ne-AiTT-es, etc. declined like Impf. \nInd. \n\n\n\nj8ouA\xe2\x82\xacu-<r-a),* / shall advise, \nlike the Indie. Pres. \n\n\n\nA(7r-w, etc., like the Subj. \nPres. \n\n\n\n\' The inflection of the 2d Perf. in all the Modes and Participles, is like that of the 1st Perf. \n\n\n\n\n\n\n$ 115.] PARADIGM OF THE REGULAR VERBS IN -0). \n\n\n\n137 \n\n\n\nModes. 1 \n\n\nParticipials. 1 \n\n\n\n\nOptative \ni. e. Snbj. of Historical tenses. \n\n\nImperative. \n\n\nInfin. \n\n\nParticip. \n\n\n\n\n\n\n|8ovX6y-\xe2\x82\xac, advise, \nfiovXcv-eria, let him ad. \nfiov\\ev-\xe2\x82\xacToy,ye two ad. \nfiovKev-fTwy, let them \n\nboth advise, \n/3ouA.\xe2\x82\xacu-eTe,* do ye ad. \nfiovXev-fTwaay, usually \n\n\nfiovXev- \n\neiy, \n\nto \nadvise. \n\n\n8ov\\\xe2\x82\xacv-cay \nBovKev-ovaa \nBov\\e\xc2\xa3-oy^ \nG.)8ou> ev-oyros \n\nfiovXev-ovarjs, \n\nadvising, \n\n\n\n\nfiovXev-Syruy,* let them a. | \n\n\n\n\nfiov\\\xe2\x82\xacv-oifjLi, I might advise, \n\nfiov\\ev-ois \n\nfiov\\\xe2\x82\xacv-oi \n\nfiovKev-oiTov \n\nfi0V\\\xe2\x82\xacV-0lT7JV \n\nP0V\\\xe2\x82\xacV-0lljLfy \n\nfi0V\\\xe2\x82\xacV-0LT\xe2\x82\xac \n\nfiovXev-0 1 e y \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n[fi\xe2\x82\xac-$ov\\\xe2\x82\xacVK-\xe2\x82\xac,*] etc., \nlike the Imp. Pres. \nyet only a few Per- \nfects, and such as \nhave the meaning \nof the Pres., form \n\n\n\\ev- \n\nK-eVat,t \n\nto have \n\nadvised, \n\n\n^\xe2\x82\xac-fiovX\xe2\x82\xacv-K-v7d\\ \n\nfie-fiovX(v-K-6s\'\\ \n\nG. -k-6tos, -k- \n\nvlas, having \n\nadvised, \n\n\n\n\n\n\nan Imperative. \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nfie-fiovKfi-K-oifii, I mig. have a. \nfic-fiov\\evK-ots \n\n0\xe2\x82\xac-$OV\\\xe2\x82\xacV-K-Ol \n\nfie-fiov\\({t-K-oiTOV \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n/8e-/3ouA.\xe2\x82\xacu-K-o /t Tj V \n\n\n\xe2\x80\xa2 \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nfi\xe2\x82\xac-fiov\\fV-K-Olfl\xe2\x82\xacV \n\n)8\xe2\x82\xac-/3ouAeu-K-ojTe \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nirf-<p^y-oifii, I might appear. \n\n\nire-ifyrjy-e, appear. \n\n\nye-yai,\'\\ \n\n\nwc-^v-jist \n\n\n\n\nfiovXfv-a-aifii, I might advise, \n0ov\\\xe2\x82\xacv-<r-aii, or -eias \nfiov\\fv-<r-ai,* or -\xe2\x82\xaci\xe2\x82\xac{v) \nfiov\\ev-(r-aiTov \n^ov\\ev-a-alrT} V \n^ovKfv-ff-aifify \n\nfiov\\\xe2\x82\xacv-(T-a ley, OT -eiav \n\n\nfiovKev-<r-ov, advise, \n/3ouAeu-<r-aTftj \nfiov\\\xe2\x82\xacv-<r-aToy \n$ov\\ev-(r-dTwv \n\nfiov\\\xe2\x82\xacv-<r-ar\xe2\x82\xac \nfiov\\ev-(r-dTCt}(ray, usua \n\n\nAev- \na-oi,*t \n\nto \nadvise, \n\n\n0ovX\xe2\x82\xacv-(r-ds \nfiovXev-<T-dffa \n^ovXev-ff-dv^ \nGenitive : \n^ovXev-tT-ayros \nfiovXev-a-dar\\s, \nhaving advised, \n\n\n\n\nly -adyrcDy* 1 \n\n\n\n\nkItt-oi/xi, etc., like the Opt. \nImpf. \n\n\n\\it-\xe2\x82\xac, etc., like the \nImp. Pres. \n\n\nXlTT- \n\ne7yy t \n\n\nXiir-doyfOvaa, 6yX \nG. 6yTos, ouCTjs, \n\n\n\n\n$ov\\ev-(T-oiiJ.i, I would advise, \n1 like the Opt. Impf. . \n\n\n\n\nfiOV\\\xe2\x82\xacV- \n\n<r-eiy. \n\n\nfiovXev-<r-(oy, \netc. like Pr. Pt. \n\n\n\n\n2 The inflection of the 2d Pluperf. \n\n\nis like that of the Ist Plapei \n\n\nrf., both in the Ind. and Opt. | \n\n\n\n12* \n\n\n\n138 \n\n\n\nPARADIGM OF THE REGULAK VERBS IN -Ci>. \n\n\n\ntU15 \n\n\n\nTenses. \n\n\n\nPresent^ \n\nTense- \nstem: \n\n\n\nImperfect, \n\nTense- \nstem: \n\n\n\nPerfect, \n\nTense- \nstem: \nfie-fiov\\ev \n\n\n\nPluperfect, \n\nTense- \nstem: \n\n^ovKev- \n\n\n\nAorist L, \n\nTense- \nstem: \n\n\n\nAorist 11. \n\n\n\nFuture, \n\n\n\nPut. Per/., \n\n\n\ng \xc2\xa7 S \n\n55 ^ \n\n\n\nS. 1. \n\n2. \n\n3. \nD.l. \n\n2, \n\n3. \nP.l. \n\n2. \n\n3. \n\n\n\nS. 1. \n\n2. \n\n3. \nD.l, \n\n2. \n\n3. \nP.l. \n\n2. \n\n3. \n\n\n\nS. 1. \n\n2. \n\n3. \nD.l. \n\n2. \n\n3. \nP.l. \n\n2. \n\n3. \n\n\n\nS. 1. \n\n2. \n\n3. \nD.l. \n\n2. \n\n3. \nP.l. \n\n2. \n\n3. \n\n\n\nS. 1. \n\n2. \n\n3. \nD.l. \n\n2. \n\n3. \nP.l. \n\n2. \n\n3. \n\n\n\nS. 1. \n\n\n\nS. 1. \n\n\n\nS.l. \n\n\n\nThe \n\n\n\nIndicative. \n\n\n\n^ovXev-ofiai, I deliberate, or am \n\n\n\nfiov\\ev-r} * \n/3ov\\ev-erai \n\nfi0V\\\xe2\x82\xacV-6/JL\xe2\x82\xac^0U \n\nfiov\\\xe2\x82\xac!L)-\xe2\x82\xac<r^oy \nfiov\\e6-\xe2\x82\xac <r ^ jr \nfiovXev-Sfxe^a \nfiovXev-ear^e * \nfiovXev-ovrai \n\n\n\n[advised, \n\n\n\n\xe2\x82\xac-, \n\n\n\ne-, \n\n\n\n6- \n\n\n\n\xe2\x96\xa0fiov\\\xe2\x82\xacv-6fJLr]Vy \n\xe2\x96\xa0fiov\\ev-o V \n\xe2\x96\xa0fiov\\\xe2\x82\xacv-eTO \n\xe2\x96\xa0fiovKev-S/xe^ov \n^ov\\\xe2\x82\xac^-e(r^oy \n\nfiovXev-opTO \n\n\n\nwas ddiber- \n[ating, \n\n\n\n$e-fiov\\\xe2\x82\xacv-fjL a t, I have deliberated, \n\nfi\xe2\x82\xac-fiov\\ev-<rai \n\nj8e-)8ouA.eu-T a t \n\n^e-fiov\\ev-fxe^a \nj8e-)8ouA.eu-i/Tot \n\n\n\ni-fi\xe2\x82\xac-fiov\\ev-fi r]v, 1 had deliber- \n\n\n\n6-i \n\n\n\ne-, \n\n\n\n\xe2\x80\xa2j8e-j8ouA.ei;-(ro \n\xe2\x96\xa0fie-fiov\\ev-T \n\xe2\x80\xa2jSe-^ouAeu-ytteS^ov \n\xe2\x96\xa0fie-fiov\\\xe2\x82\xacv-<r^ov \n\n\xe2\x80\xa2j8e-)8ouAeu-/ie3^o \n\n\xe2\x96\xa0fi\xe2\x82\xac-fiov\\ev-vro \n\n\n\n[ated, \n\n\n\n6- \n\n\n\ne- \n\n\n\nfiovKev-(T-dfjii]v, I deliberated, \nfiovXev-ff-w [(indefinite) \n\n\xe2\x96\xa0)30/A\\\xe2\x82\xacU-(r-OT0 \n\nj8ouA\xe2\x82\xacu-(r-a<ri&^o\xc2\xbb\' \n\n)8ou\\eu-<r-ci(r3-7ji\' \n\n\xe2\x96\xa0)8ou\\eu-(r-0|UeiS^a \n\njSouAeu-o\'-oo\'S^e \n\nfiov\\\xe2\x82\xacv-(r-avTo \n\n\n\ni-KiTT-Sfiriv, I remained, like Ind. \nImperf. \n\n\n\n^ov\\ev-<T-oficu, I shall deliberate, \nlike Pres. Indie. \n\n\n\n^\xe2\x82\xac-^ou\\\xe2\x82\xacv-a-ofi.ai, I shall have de- \nliberated, like Pres. Indie. \n\n\n\nSubjunctive \nof the Principal tenses. \n\n\n\nfiov\\cv-<a fx a ly I may de- \n\n\n\nfiovKev-rj * \n\nfiov\\ev-T}Tai \n\nfiov\\ev-d!>iJ.\xe2\x82\xac^oy \n\nfiovXev rfff^ov \n\nfiov\\\xe2\x82\xacv-7](r^e \n0ov\\fv-ct/VTai \n\n\n\n[liberatey \n\n\n\nP\xe2\x82\xac-$ov\\\xe2\x82\xacv-fifuos, i, I may \nfif-$ovXev-fi\xe2\x82\xacyos 171 [have \nfie-fiov\\ru-fi4vos ^ [delib- \n[erated. \nBe-Pov\\\xe2\x82\xacv-fi(va) ?irov \n\nBe-fiov\\ev-fifyoi ifity \nfiffiovkev-fieyoi ^e \nfie-^vXfv-fieyoi 2xTi \n\n\n\n$ov\\fv-cr-w fiai, I may de- \n/3ouAey-<r-T7 * [libaratA, \nfiovKev-ff-j) rai \n$ov\\eu-<r-<afifd^oy \nfiov\\(v-(r-Tjabor \nfiov\\\xe2\x82\xacv-(r-Tf aboy \nBov\\\xe2\x82\xacv-(r-cl)fi(ba \nfiov\\(v-<r-rjorb\xe2\x82\xac \n$ov\\cv-(T\'<i} yrai \n\n\n\n\\iv-(Dfxau, I may rejnain, \nlike Pres. Subj. \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 115.] \n\n\n\nPARADIGM OF THE REGULAR VERBS IN -CO. \n\n\n\n139 \n\n\n\n\n\nVIODES . 1 \n\n\nParticipials. 1 \n\n\n\n\nOptative \ni. e. Subj. of Hist, tenses. \n\n\nImperative. \n\n\nInfin. \n\n\nParticip. \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nfiov\\\xe2\x82\xacv- \n\n\nfiov\\\xe2\x82\xacu-6ix(yos \nfiovKexJ-o/icvq \n\n\n\n\n\n\n/3ouAev-ou, deliberatCy \n\n\nfa^ai, \n\n\n\n\n\n\n/3ouA.eu-eV<3-a> \n\n\nto deliber- \nate, \n\n\nfiov\\ev-6fjL\xe2\x82\xacvoy, \ndeliberating, \n\n\n\n\n\n\n$ov\\(v-e<r^oy \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nfiov\\\xe2\x82\xacv-4a^u}y * \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nfiov\\\xe2\x82\xacv-\xe2\x82\xac(r^u(ray, usually \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nfiovKev-ea^tDy * | \n\n\n\n\nfiovXeu-olfxri y, I might \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nfiov\\e{>-oio [deliberate, \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nfiovKeij-o I T \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nfiov\\(v-olixf^ov \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nfiov\\fv-oi<r^ov \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nfiovKfj-o i <r ^ ri y \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nfiovKfv-oifMf^a \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nfiov\\\xe2\x82\xacv-oiadf \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nfiov\\ev-o I y r \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n/36-)8ouAeu- \n\n\n$\xe2\x82\xacfiov\\\xe2\x82\xacv-fi4yos^ \n\n\n\n\n\n\nfif-Pov\\\xe2\x82\xacv-<ro, deliberate. \n\n\n<r(^oi,t to \n\n\nfiffiovKfv-fifyT) \n\n\n\n\n\n\nfi\xe2\x82\xac-fiov\\\xe2\x82\xacv-(rdu) \n\n\nhave delib- \nerated, \n\n\n/8\xc2\xabj8ouA6y-/i\xe2\x82\xac- \nyoy,^ having \n\n\n\n\n\n\nfif-fiov\\fif-a^oy \n\n\n\n\ndeliberated, \n\n\n\n\n\n\n^(-fiovKfv-a^wy * \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nfi\xe2\x82\xac-fiov\\\xe2\x82\xacv-/xeyos elfrji/, / \n\n\n/3\xe2\x82\xac-/3oi;A\xe2\x82\xact\'^-(r,^a><rai\', usual \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\ny &e-fiov\\ev-a^wy \xe2\x99\xa6 | \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nfic-fiov\\fv-fi(yo5 fJris\\rni\'t \nfif-fiov\\fv-fi\xe2\x82\xacyos ftr) \\de- \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n[liberate. \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nfif-$Ov\\(V-fJL\xe2\x82\xacVQ} ffrfToy \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nfif-fiovXcv-fi(y<i3 el-f]Trjy \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n0\xe2\x82\xac-fiov\\\xe2\x82\xacv-fji.4yoi firj/xfy \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n0\xe2\x82\xac-fiov\\\xe2\x82\xacV-ljLfyOl efT7T6 \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n$\xe2\x82\xac-fiov\\\xe2\x82\xacv-fi(yo. (Xr)<Tay \nfiov\\\xe2\x82\xacv-<r-a inv, I might \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n/SouAcu- \n\n\n0ov\\fv-a-dfjLeyos \n\n\n\n\nfiov\\fv-a-a 1 [deliberate, \n\n\n$ov\\\xe2\x82\xacv-<T-ai,* deliberate, \n\n\nar-aa-^ou. \n\n\nfiov\\\xe2\x82\xacv-(r-aix4yT} \n\n\n\n\nfiov\\(v-a-a I T \n\n\nfiov\\fv-(r-dadu \n\n\nto deliber- \n\n\nfiov\\ev-<T-dfjLfyoy \n\n\n\n\nfiovXev-a-oufif^oy \n\n\n\n\nate, \n\n\nhaving deliber- \n\n\n\n\nPov\\\xe2\x82\xacv-a-ou<T^oy \n\n\n$ov\\\xe2\x82\xacv-(T-a(rboy \n\n\n\n\nated, \n\n\n\n\nfiov\\\xe2\x82\xacv-a--a l(T^r}y \n\n\nfiov\\iv-<r-<iab<i)y * \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nfiov\\\xe2\x82\xacv-a--aifi\xe2\x82\xac^a \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nfiov\\fv-<r-ai(r^\xe2\x82\xac \n$ovX\xe2\x82\xacv-<r\'aivTO \nKnr-oifn]v,Iinight remain, \n\n\nfiov\\fv-(r-d<T^tM)(ray, usual \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nly fiov\\(v-<T-<i<Tb<i>y* 1 \n\n\n\n\n\\iirov,\'\\ -cViJfc, like Pres. \n\n\n\\nT-4(Tbai\\ \n\n\nKnr-6fXiyos, -o- \n\n\n\n\nlike Opt. Impf. \nfiov\\(v-a-oifir)y,I m. have \n\n\nImp. \n\n\n\n\nfieyjj, -6fjL\xe2\x82\xacyoy \n\n\n\n\n\n\nfiovKev- \n\n\nfiov\\ev-ar-6fj.f- \n\n\nt \n\n\ndeliberatedXikeOpt.lmp. \n\n\n\n\n\n\nyos, -7], -oy \n$\xe2\x82\xac-Pov\\cv-(r-6- \n\n\nfie-$ov\\\xe2\x82\xacv-(r-olnriy, Ish\'\'d \n\n\n\n\n\n\ndeliberate, like Opt. Imp. \n\n\n\n\ntr-ea^ai \\ /jlcvos, -tj, -oy. J \n\n\n\n140 VERBS. REMARKS ON THE INFLECTION-ENDINGS. [$116 \n\n\n\nTenses. \n\n\nNumbers \n\nand \nPersons. \n\n\nThe \n\n\nIndicative. \n\n\nSubjunctive \nof the Principal teases. \n\n\n\n\nAorist /., \n\nTense- \nstem : \n\ni-fi0V\\\xe2\x82\xacV-^- \n\n\nS. 1. \n\n2. \n\n3. \nD.2. \n\n3. \nP. 1. \n\n2. \n\n3. \n\nS. 1. \n2. \n\n\ni-fiov\\ev-^-r]u, I was advised. \n\ne-)8ouAeu-3-77Toy \n\ne-j8ouAeu-3-7jTe \n\n\n^ov\\tv-^-a>, I might have \n0ov\\\xe2\x82\xacv-^-ps [been advised. \n\nfiovXev-^-riTov \nfiovXev-^-T] TOV \nfiovXev-^-wfiev \n\n^OVX\xe2\x82\xacV-^-T}T\xe2\x82\xac* \n\nfiovXev-^-uailv) \n\n\n\n\nFuture I. \n\n\n^ovXiv-^-(T-o[jLai, I shall he adv. \nl3ovAev-^-f}-(r-v, etc., like the \nInd. Pres.\'Mid. \n\n\n\n\n\n\nAorist II. \n\n\nS. 1. \n2. \n\nS. 1. \n2. \n\n\ni-rpi^-riu, I was rubbed, \ni-Tpifi-r}s, etc., like the first \nAor. Ind. Pass. \n\n\nrpifi-w, Imay have been mb\'d, \nTpi^-f)s, etc., like the first \nAor. Subj. Pass. \n\n\n\n\nFut. U. \n\n\nTpi^-^-cr-ofxai, I shall be rubbed, \nTpLfi-T]-(T-ri, etc., like the first \nPut. Ind. Pass. \n\n\n\n\n\n\nVerbal Adjectives : ^ovXcv-r6s, -^, -6v, advised, \n\n\n\n\n\n^ 116. Remarks on the Inflection- endings. \n\n1. The personal-endings of verbs in -u are apocopated forms, as may be \nshown from the older conjugation in -fii, and in part from the dialects {\xc2\xa7 220, \n1); thus, -fii in the first Pers. Sing. Ind. and Subj. Act. and -ri in the third \nPers. have disappeared, e. g. fiovXev-u instead of fiovXev-o-fii or fiovXev-ufu, \nPovXev-\xe2\x82\xaci instead of ^ovXev-e-n (by the dropping of -fii in fiovXev-o-fii, the o is \nlengthened into a, and by the dropping of -rt in fiovXfv-e-ri, e is lengthened \ninto ei) ; in the first Pers. Sing, first Aor. Ind. Act., v has disappeared, e. g. \nifiovXevaa instead of ilSovXevaav ] in the second Pers. Sing. Imp. Act., except \nthe first Aor., -^i has disappeared, e. g. fiovXeve instead of fiovXev-e-^i ; but the \nfirst Aor. Imp. Act. has a different ending -ov, e. g. fiovXev-a-ov. \n\n2. The second Pers. Sing. Act. has the ending -o-^a in the Common lan- \nguage in the following forms only : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\noJ<r^a, nosti, from the Perf. oTBa; ^dei<rSta and ^5v<r^a, Plpf. of olSui \ni<p-n<r^a, Impf. fiom 0,,/./, to say; ^cba, Impf. from \xc2\xab>/, to be ; ^^icS^a, \nImpf from e?/xj, to go. \n\n3. There is no special form for the first Pers. Dual Act., or for the first \nand second Aor. Pass.; the first Pers. m. is used for this purpose. Comp. \n^ 106, Rem. 2. r t- f \n\n4. The original form of the first Pers. PI. Act. is -^e. (not -^.v). Coma, \nthe Dialects, \xc2\xa7220 6, and the Latin ending -mus, e. g. yp^i^-o-^.s, scnh-umus. \n\n5. The ongmal form of the third Pers. PI. Act. of the Principal tenses was \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 116.] VERBS. REMARKS ON THE INFLECTION-ENDINGS. 141 \n\n\n\nSIVE \n\n\n\n\n\nModes. \n\n\nParticipials. | \n\n\n\n\nOptative \ni, e. Subj. of the Hist, tenses. \n\n\nImperative. \n\n\nInfin. \n\n\nParticiple. \n\n\n\n\n^ov\\ev-^-iltji\xc2\xbby I might be \nfiov\\ev-d-\xe2\x82\xaci7i5 [advised, \n\n$ov\\ev-&-eir]ix(v and -eifiey \nfiov\\ev-h-\xe2\x82\xacir}T\xe2\x82\xac and -eire \n\n\n^ov\\\xe2\x82\xacv-^-trn, be thou ad- \nfiov\\\xe2\x82\xacv-b-i)ru [vised, \n\nPov\\ev-^-7iTu<ray \n\n\nfiovAev- \n\nto be ad- \nvised, \n\n\n&ov\\cv-^-e7crd\\ \nySouXeu-i^eVt \n\nGenitive : \nfiov\\\xe2\x82\xacv-^-4yTOS \nfiov\\\xe2\x82\xacv-^-ei(rr)s, \n\nbeing advised. \n\n\n\n\n6ov\\ev-^-a-oiiJ.T]y, I should \nbe advised, etc., like the \nIrapf. Opt. Mid. \n\n\n\n\n$0V\\\xe2\x82\xacV- \n\n\nfieyos, -7], -ov \n\n\n\n\nrpifi-cir}v, I might be rubbed, \nrpifi-eiris, etc., like the first \nAor. Opt. Pass. \n\n\nrpl$-T}^i, --ffTw, etc., like \nthe first Aor. Imp. Pass. \n\n\nrpifi- \nrjyai \n\n\nTpij8-e/s,t etc., \nlike first Aor. \nPart. Pass. \n\n\n\n\nrpifi-T]-<T-oifi\'nv, I should be \nrubbed, etc., like the first \nFut. Opt. Pass. \n\n\nTpt^T]- \n\n\nTpi$-r)-a-6(jL\xe2\x82\xacyos, \n-V, -oy \n\n\nfiovKev-reos, -rta, -reov, to be advised. j \n\n\n\n-vTi; when t was changed into c, v was dropped (\xc2\xa7 20, 2), e. g. fiovXfvoyri = \nfiovXevoyffi = fiovXevovtri. On the irregular lengthening of the vowel pre- \nceding the V, see \xc2\xa7 20, Rem. 2. \n\n6. In the first Pers. Sing. Plup. Act., Attic writers use, together with the \nform in -ftj/, a forai in -17, which arises from the Ionic ending of the Plup. -co, \ne. g. ifiefiov\\\xe2\x82\xacVK-T} instead of -K-eiy. The mode-vowel et in the third Pers. PI. \nis commonly shortened into e, e. g. ifiefiovXiv-K-e-aay instead of ifiefiovKiv-K- \nft-aay. \n\n7. The first Pers. Sing. Opt. Act. has the ending -fii in verbs in -u, e. g. \nirotScu-a fxi, Traideva-ai-fjii] but the ending -rjy in the first and second Aor. Pass., \naccording to the analogy of verbs in -fxi. This rj remains tlirough all the per- \nsons and numbers, tly>ugh it is often dropped in the Dual and PL, especially \nin the third Pers. PI. and then, etij/iej/ = eT/iei/, cfr/re = cTtc, eirjaay = eieu, e. g \niraidev^dTjfiey and iraiSevi^eT/Liei\', fiyTja^eirrre and -S^frre, (pavelrja-ay X. H. 6. 5, \n25., irpoKpi^d-naay Ibid. 34., \'iTcfx<p^i\'n]<Tav Th. 1, 38, and (more frequently) \n\n8. The Attic Optative endings -tjj\', -ijy, -r/, etc., and the third Pers. PI. -ev \n(rarer -r)<Tav) which appropriately belong to verbs in -/xi, are used with verbs in \n\xe2\x80\xa2<\xc2\xbb, in the following cases : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) Most commonly in the Imperf. Opt. of contract verbs, e. g. nixtf-qv, \n(piXolrju, ixKr^oiTfy ] , \n\n(b) In all Futures in -a>, e. g. (pawoirjy Soph. Aj. 313., ipoirj Xen. Cy. 3. 1, \n14, from the Fut. <pavio, ipco ; \n\n(c) Somewhat often in the second Plup., e. g. iKTre(pevyol7jy S. 0. R. 840., \nxpoe\\rj\\v^oir}s X. Cy. 2. 4, 17., irfiroidoir} Ar. Acharn. 940; \n\n\n\n142 VERBS. REMARKS ON THE INFLECTION-ENDINGS. [\xc2\xa7 116- \n\n(d) In the second Aor. cxo^V^ uniformly {ecrxov from ex\xc2\xbb) > still, not gen- \nerally in compounds, e. g. irapiffxoip-i- \n\n9. The forms of the first Aor. Opt. Act. in -ems, -etc (v), -eiav, instead of \n-ajs, -an, -aiv, have passed from the -a:olic Opt. in -eio, -ctos, etc., into com- \nmon use in all the dialects, and are employed by the Attic writers more fre- \nquently than the regular forms, e. g. iSouAeucr-etas, -et6(y), -eiay. \n\nKemark. The second Pers. Dual Act. of the Historical tenses often ends, \namong the Attic writers, in -t)V instead of -ov, e. g. elireTrjv PI. Symp. 189, c, \niireSTju-na-dTrjy Euthyd. 273, e., ijffrrjv 294, e., iXey\xe2\x82\xacTT]v L, 705, d., iKoivwmrjad- \nTTji/ lb. 753, a. On the Dialects, see \xc2\xa7 220, 9. \n\n10. The Middle endings -o*ot and -<rOf when immediately preceded by a \nmode-vowel, drop cr (\xc2\xa7 25, 1), and then coalesce, except in the Opt., with the \nmode-vowel, e. g. \n\n/3ou\\\xe2\x82\xaci5-e-crat BovXev-e-ai = fiov\\ev--p \n\nfiovXev-rj-ffai 8ov\\ev-7)-ai = /SouAcv-t; \n\nfiov\\\xe2\x82\xacv-oi-(ro fiov\\ev-oi-o \n\nifiovKei-e-ffo ifiov\\\xe2\x82\xacV-e-o = e)8ouA.6<5-ou \n\nifiov\\\xe2\x82\xacv<T-a-ffo ifiovXevff-a-o = cj8ouA,eu<r-<w. \n\n1^1. In the second Pers. Sing. Pres. and Put. Mid. and Pass., the Attic writers \n^ a subordinate ending in -et, together with the ending -t;, e. g. fiov\\ev-ri and \n-et, Pov\\ev(T-ri and -et, )8ej8pu\\ev<r-7; and -et, )8ouA.ei;^<r-77 and -et, rpifirjcrri, and -et, \nTTotp and -e?, 6\\f and -et. This form in -et passed from the Attic conversational \nlanguage, into the written language ; hence it is the regular form in the Come- \ndies of Aristophanes, but is avoided by the tragedians. Also Thucydides \nand Xenophon use it ; other writers, as Plato and the orators, employ both \nforms ; yet three verbs always take the form -et, namely, \n\nfioiXofiai fiovXei (but Subj. fioiXri) \n\ndtojxai oUi (but Subj. aitri) \n\n6\\l/ofiat Put. iypei, \n\n12. Together with the endings of the third Pers. PL Imperative Act. and \nPass. -(Twaauy -Aruffavy -a^wa-av, the abbreviated forms -Svrcoy, -JLvruVy \n-ff^wv, are used; and since they are employed very frequently by Attic \nwriters, they are called Attic forms. These abbreviated Imperatives of the \nActive Voice are like the Gen. PI. of the Participle of each tense respectively, \nexcept the Peifect ; and the Middle form -ar^uv is like the third Pers. Dual, \ne.g. \n\nPres. Act. fiovXeveraxrav and PovKevdvruv \n\nPerf. " ireiroi^irwaav " ireTrotS^Jj/Twj\' (Gen. Part. ireirot^^t^Twy) \n\nAor. I. " ^ovKivffdTUffav " fiovXevffdpTccv \n\nPres. Mid. fiovXevicr^acav " fiovKevecr^cov \n\nAor. *\' aKerpda-^wa-av " ffKe^da-^wv. \nThe Aor. Pass, ending -ivtwv or -iirtav, abridged from -^Taxraj/, is found in \nPI. Legg. 856, d. veficp^evTuv, and lb. 737, e. Siavefi-q^Tuv (according to several \nMSS.). \n\n\n\n^ 117.] VERBS. ATTie FUTURE. 143 \n\n13. Besides the simple form of the Subj. Perf. and the Opt. Plup. Act., a \nperiphrasis, formed by the Perf. Part, and the Subj. or Opt. of thai {to 6e), 5, \n^ftjj/, is very frequent, e. g. 7r\xe2\x82\xacirat5euKc\xc2\xab>s 5, educaverim ; ireTrcuSevKciis e\'irju, educa- \nvtssem. Yet this form seems to denote a circumstance or condition, more than a \nsimple completed action ; comp. PL Hipp. M. 302, a. 6i /ce/c /a ijKcis rt, ^ reTpcc \nu4vos, ft imrKt\\yfiivos, ^ fiAA\' briovv rrenov^iiss kKaripos tj/xuv eTrj, ov KoX afi<p6- \nTfpoi o5 Tovro ireirSy^oiixev] examples of the simple forms are, a,\'ir\xe2\x82\xaci\\\'n<pri, PL \nRp. 614, a., ilX\'i]<pa><Tiv Polit. 269, c, iixvenTWKOL X. An. 5. 7, 26., RaraX^XoliToiev \nX. H. 3. 2, 8., airoKcxccp^KOt ib. 5, 23., vTnjper\'ffKOi ib. 5. 2, 3., ir^Troi^KOi Th. 8, \n108., isfie^K-ffKoiev ib. 2, 48. \xe2\x80\x94 The Imp. Perf. does not often occur in the Act., \ne. g. 7e7\xc2\xabj/\xe2\x82\xac, Eur. Or. 1220. \n\n14. The Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass, append the personal-endings to the \ntense-stem without a mode-vowel, and hence they cannot form the Subj. and \nOpt. (mth few exceptions, which will be further treated below, \xc2\xa7 154, 9), \nbut must also be expressed periphrastically by means of the Participle and \nflyai, e. g. ireiraiSev/xevos &, e^Tji/, educatxis sim, essem, \n\n15. The third Pers. Ind. Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass, of pure verbs ends in \n-vrai, -VTO, e. g. fiefiovXevvrai, i^efiovKevvro ; but in mute and liquid verbs, this \nformation is not possible. Hence the Attic writers usually express this person \nperiphrastically, by means of the Perf Part, and et<rl{v), sunt, ^<rav, erant ; the^ \nolder and middle Attic writers, however, sometimes use the Ionic forms -aroi, \n-oTo (instead of -rrcu, -vro) ; the a of these endings is aspirated after the \nKappa and Pi-mutes, and hence changes the preceding smooth Kappa or Pi- \nmute into the corresponding rough (comp. \xc2\xa7 144) ; but this a is not aspirated \nafter the Tau-mutes ; thus, \n\nrpifi-oty to rub, Perf. ri-Tpi/x-fiai 3 \'P.Terpl(paTai (for TfTpifivrai) Pip. ir\xe2\x82\xacTpl<paTO \nir\\eK-(i)j to twine, ir4-ir\\ey-fJMi \nrdrT-o), to arrange, ri-ray-fiai \nX(j}pi^-(i}, to separate, K\xe2\x82\xac-x<*ipio-HMi \n<p^eip"V, to destroy, \xe2\x82\xac-<pdap-(jicu \n\n16. The two Aorists Pass, follow the analogy of verbs in -/tt, and hence are \nnot treated here. \n\n\n\n4 117. Remarks on the Formation of the Attic \n\nFuture. \n\n1. When one of the short vowels o, e, I, in the Put. Act. and Mid. of verbs \nin -{Tw, -ffofiai, from stems of two or more syllables, precedes <r, certain verbs, \nafter dropping c, take the circumflexed ending -cD, -ovfmi ; because it was fre- \nquently used by the Attic writers instead of the regular form, this is called \nthe Attic Future, e. g. ixdw (usually iXaiyco), to drive, i\\d-<r-(a, Put. Att. i\\u, -oty, \n\xe2\x80\xa2qt, -Stov, -ufievj -are, -Si(ri{y) ; T\xe2\x82\xac\\e\xc2\xab, to finish, T\xe2\x82\xac\\\xe2\x82\xac-<r-w, Put. Att. reAeS, -eTs, -\xe2\x82\xac?, \n\'iiroVy -ov/xev, -elre, -ov<Ti{v); reXe-ff-ofxai {reKeofjLai), reAoC/xat, -e?, -errot, etc.; \nKouiCwj to carry. Put. KOfii-<r-Wy Put. Att. Ko/uwy -ms, -tet, -leiTov^ -lovfisvy -letre, \n\n\n\nireirAcxareu ( " v4ir\\\xe2\x82\xacKvrai) \n\n\ncireirAe\'xctTO \n\n\nreraxo-Tai ( " rerayvrai) \n\n\nirerdxaTO \n\n\n/C\xe2\x82\xacX\xc2\xabp^SaTat( " K\xe2\x82\xacX\xc2\xab^pi5j^oi) \n\n\n4K\xe2\x82\xacX(^pi^o.TO \n\n\ni<l>^dpa.Tai ( " i(()^apvrou) \n\n\ne^cfpoTO. \n\n\n\n144 VERBS. ACCENTUATION. [^ 118. \n\niov<ri{v) ; KoyLiovfxai, -\xc2\xab\xe2\x82\xac?, -teTTot, -loifxe^ov, etc. This Fut. is inflected like the \nforms of contract verbs. \n\n2. This form of the Fut. is found only in the Ind., Inf , and Part. ; never in \nthe Opt., thus, re\\co, reXelv, reAcDj/ ; but TeXeffoifii. The verbs which have this \nform are the following: (a) i\\dw {i\\a6vw), to drive; reAea*, to finish; /coAew, \nto call; and, though seldom, aAew, to grind;\xe2\x80\x94 (b) all verbs in -t\'^w (character. \n5^ 5 _ (c) a few verbs in -c^C\xc2\xab> very generally fiifidCc \'\xe2\x96\xa0, \xe2\x80\x94 (d) of verbs in -m, all \n\\n-6.vvvfn. and also afjt,<pi4vvviJLi,toclothe{afjL(j)i(o, -leTs, etc.). A few exceptions \nto this Fut. are found even in the Attic dialect, e. g. iKdtra) X. Cy. 1. 4, 20., e\\d- \nffovras X. An. 7. 7, 55., reXea-ova-iu Cy. 8. 6, 3., KoXeffeis 2. 3, 22., j/ofxiaovcri 3. \n], 27. (according to the best MSS.) rl/rjcpiffecr^e, Isae. de Cleonym. hered. \xc2\xa7 51. \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 118. Accentuation of the Verb. \n\n1. Primary Law. The accent is drawn back from the end of the word \n^ towards the beginning, as far as the nature of the final syllable permits, e. g. \n\njSoi^Aewe, fiovXevofiai, fiov\\\xe2\x82\xacV(roVf iravaov, rvxpov, but fiovXeveis, fiovXeveiy. On \nthe ending -at, see \xc2\xa7 29, E. 6. \n\n2. This law holds good in compounds, e. g. <j>epe \'irp6scf)\xe2\x82\xacpe, (pevye eKcpcvye, \nX^Tire oTTt^AetTre ; also in words in the Subj., when they are not contracted, e. gr \n\xc2\xabaTa(rx\xc2\xab, Kardcrxv^i Kcnda\'X\'^lJ\'-^Vi iirlffira, iiriffirps (but avafiuy airoffTSof Sta5\xc2\xab, \n\xe2\x96\xa0na.pa.ZS>, ava^wfA^v, etc., on account of the contraction, avafidoo, avafida/jLeu, etc.). \nStill, this rule has the following exceptions : (a) the accent cannot go back \nbeyond the syllable of the preceding word, which before the composition, had \nthe accent, e. g. air6Bos {aird the preceding word being accented on the ultimate), \nffufj-irpois, iiriffx^s, iirides (not 6,Trodos, (Tvfnrpoes, eTrjtrxes, cTrtSes) ; (b) the accent \ncannot go back of the first two words of the compound, as in the examples \njust quoted, and also trwe\'/cSos, TrapevSes (not avveKdos, but like e/cSos; not \nTrdpeu^es, but like ev^es) ; (c) the accent cannot go back of an existing augment \n(this holds of the Impf., Aor., and Plup. as well as of the Perf.), e. g. irposeTxov \nlike elxoj\', Trapeffxov like taxov, ^i/qyov like ?iyov, i^rjv like ^u (not irpSseix^\'^t \nirdpeffxov, e^-nyov, e^r/j/) ; so also iTposrJKOj. like fjKOV, aireipyov like eJpyov, but \nImp. 6.ir\xe2\x82\xacipye, also a<p7KTai, acplKTo, like f/cTai, Tkto. \n\nExceptions to the Primary Law. \n\n3. The accent is on the ultimate in the following forms : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) In the Inf. second Aor. Act. as circumflex, and in the Masc. and Neut. \nSing. Part, of the same tense as acute, e. g. XnreTu (from Awreetj/), Xnrcay, -6v] \nand in the second Pers. Sing. Imp. second Aor. Act. of the five verbs, etVe, \n^A^\xe2\x82\xac, evpe, Xa^e, and i5e (but in composition, iirenre, OTrJAajSe, &ireX^\xe2\x82\xac, etside). \n\n(b) Also in the Imp. second Aor. Mid. as circumflex, e. g. Xafiov, Stov (from \nTifS^rj/xi). \n\nRemark 1. In compounds, the Imp. (not Participials) of the second Aor. \nAct. draws back the accent in all verbs according to the primary law, e. g. \n(K^aXe, e^cA^c, gkSos, eKdon, airSSos, a.Tr6doTe, /ueraSos, fj-erdSoTi (yet not &Tro5o5f \n\n\n\nJ 118.] VERBS. ACCENTUATION. 145 \n\nfitToSos, see No. 2), but iK^oKuv, iK^aXdv, e/c\\t7re?j/, i^eX^dv, etc. But in the \nImp. Sing, second Aor. Mid. of verbs in -w, the circumflex remains on the \nultimate in compounds also, e. g. iKfiaXov, a<piKOv, iKKiirov, iiriXa^ov, d<^eA.ou, \niyeyeyKov ; so in verbs in -/xt, when the verb is compounded with a monosylla- \nbic preposition, e. g. irpoSou, iv^ov, acpov ; yet the accent is drawn back, when \nthe verb is compounded with a dissyllabic preposition, e. g. aTr65ov, Kard^ov, \nairS^ov ; but in the Dual and PL of the second Aor. Mid., the accent is in all \ncases drawn back, e. g. iK^dXea-^e, oTroAajSetrS^e, irp6So<r^ef ey^ia^e, &<pe<r^\xe2\x82\xacf \n\n(c) The acute stands on the ultimate in all participles in -s (Gen. -ros), con- \nsequently in all active Participles of verbs in -fii, as well as in those of the iirst \nand second Perf. Act. and first and second Aor. Pass, of all verbs, e. g. jSejSow- \n\\\xe2\x82\xacVK(t>s (Gren. -Stos), \'iT\xe2\x82\xac<p7}vdos (Gen. -otos), fiovXev^eis {Gen. -eyros), rwrels (Gen. \n\xe2\x80\xa2tyros), Iffrds (Gen. -dyros), ri^eis (Gen. -4yTos), SiSovs (Gen. -Svtos), Seixyis \n(Gen. -{lyros), Bicurrdsf iK^eis, irpodovsf Gen. dicurrdyros, iK^eyros, Trpo86yTos\xc2\xbb \n\nKem. 2. The first Aor. Act. Part., which is always paroxytone, is an excep- \ntion, e. g. iraiSiiaaSy Gen. iraiSevaayros. \n\n(d) In the Sing, of the first and second Aor. Subj. Pass, as circumflex, e. g. \nBovXev^w, Tpifiu (cS being contracted from -ecu). \n\n4. The accent is on the penult in the following forms : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) In the Inf. of Perf. Mid. or Pass., of first Aor. Act. and second Aor. \nMid. ; also in all infinitives in -yai, hence in all active infinitives according to \nthe formation in -fii, as well as in the Inf. of first and second Aor. Pass, and \nof the first and second Perf. Act. of all verbs, e. g. rerixp^ai, ^e^ovXeva^cUf \nT6Ti/t7j(r3\'Ot, ire^tA7jO\'(^aJ, fie/xior^uff^ai] \xe2\x80\x94 (pvXd^ai, fiovXevaai, rifiriffcu, (piX\'^aaiy \niuff^utrcUj \xe2\x80\x94 Xiirea^ai, iK^ec^ai, SiaB6ff^ai] \xe2\x80\x94 lardvai, ri^eyai, 5iB6yaiy SeiKyvycUf \nar^vait iK<rrr)you, ^e7you, iK^e7you, dovyaif fieraBovyai, : \xe2\x80\x94 ^ovXev^yai, rpifiTJyai ; \n>\xe2\x80\x94 fiefiovXevKcycUy XeXoiirfyai. \n\n(b) In the Participle Perf. Mid. or Pass., e. g. fiePovXevfxeyos, -fieyri, -fiiyov, \nrerturjixeyoSy Tre<piXrjiJ.4yos. \n\n(c) As circumflex in the Dual and Plu. of the first and second Aor. Subj. \nPass., e. g. fiovXev^wfiey. \n\nKem. 3. The three corresponding forms of the Inf. first Aor. Act., Imp. \nfirst Aor. Mid., and the third Pers. Sing. Opt. first Aor. Act., when they consist \nof three or more syllables, whose penult is long by nature, are distinguished \nfrom one another by the accent, in the following manner : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nInf. 1st Aor. A. )8ou\\6i}<roj, Imp. 1st Aor. M. PovX^vtrai, Opt. 1st Aor. A. PovXeva-ai, \nirotTJcai, TToiriffoUf iroi-fjffai. \n\nBut when the penult is short by nature or long only by position, the Inf. \nfirst Aor. Act. corresponds with the third Pers. Sing. Opt., fiLrst Aor. Act., e. g \n<t>vXd4cu ; but Imp. first Aor. Mid. tpvXa^ai. \n\n13 \n\n\n\n146 VERBS. SYLLABIC AUGMENT. [^\xc2\xa7 119, 120. \n\n\n\n* 119. Further view of the Augment and Redu- \nplication. \n\n1. After the general view of the Augment and Reduplication \n{k 108, 3), it is necessary to treat them more particularly. \n\n2. As has been already seen, all the historical tenses (the \nImpf , Plup., and Aor.) take the augment, but retain it only in \nthe Ind. There are two augments, the syllabic and temporal. \n\nk 120. (a) Syllabic Augment, \n\n1. The syllabic augment belongs to those verbs whose stem \nbegins with a consonant, and consists in prefixing ci to the \nstem, in the Impf. and Aorists, but to the reduplication in the \nPlup. In this way, the verb is increased by one syllable, and \nhence this augment is called the syllabic augment, e. g. /3ov- \nAev\xc2\xabj), Impf. i-/3ovX\xe2\x82\xacvov, Aor. c-jSovXevo-a, Plup. i-/3e-/^vX\xe2\x82\xacVK\xe2\x82\xacLv. \n\n2. If the stem begins with p, this letter is doubled when the \naugment is prefixed (\xc2\xa7 23, 3), e. g. pltttod, to throw, Impf. eppurrov, \nAor. \'dppLxj/aj Perf. epptcfia. Plup. eppL<f)\xe2\x82\xaccv. \n\nEemaek 1. The three verbs fiovXofiai, to vnU ; Svvafiai, tobe able; and \nueWu, to be about to do, to intend, among the Attic writers take r;, instead of e, \nfor the augment ; still, this is found more among the later than the earlier \nAttic writers, e. g. ifiov\\riSn)y and rjfiovX-fjStnv ; ihwafi-qv and Tfivvikfi-nv, iSvirf)^v \nand ijSvvi^v (Taut always iBwdaSniu) ; e/ieAAov and ^{jl^KKov. The Aorist is \nvery seldom VeAA7j(ro (comp. X. H. 7. 4, 16. 26). \n\nRem. 2. Among the Attic writers, the augment \xe2\x82\xac is often omitted in the \nPluperfect ; in compounds, when the preposition ends with a vowel ; in sim- \npFes, when a vowel which is not to be elided precedes, e. g. ava$e$T]Kei, X. An. \n5, 2, 15 ; KaToZ^Zpaixi]KC(rav, X. H. 5. 3, 1 ; KaraXeXenrro, X. Cy. 4. 1, 9 ; Ktfra \nTreiTTciKei, Th. 4, 90 ; ai arvv^Kai yeyeyr^vTO, X. Cy. 3. 2, 24 (according to the \nbest MSS.) ; but in the Impf. and Aorists, the syllabic augment is omitted \n\n\n\nAccordmg to analogy, we may suppose that \xe2\x82\xac is prefixed to all verbs in the \naugmented tenses, whether the verbs begin with a vowel or consonant. If the \nverb begins with a consonant, \xe2\x82\xac appears as an additional svllable. e. g. l-irpar- \nToi/, but if with a vowel, e is assimilated with that vowel and lengthens it, if it \nis not already long, e. g. 6.ya}, Impf. ^ayou = ^yoy ; e\'^e\'Xoj, Impf e\'e^eXov = fj^e- \nXou ; oiceWw, Impf 46k\xe2\x82\xac\\\\ou = &Ke\\\\ov. K the word beains A\\-ith a long vowel, \nIt absorbs 6, e.g. -^Xt^o-Kw, Impf. i-fiXacXKou = i^XaaKou ; ii^iCw, Im-pf. iciSuCoy = \n&^iQ)y When the verb begins with e, the augment \xe2\x82\xac is sometimes contracted \nWith this into \xe2\x82\xact, e. g. dxovy instead of ^x^y. \n\n\n\nH 121, 121.] VERBS. TEMPORAL AUGMENT. \n\n\n\n147 \n\n\n\nonly in the lyric parts of the tragedies, and here not often ; in the dramatic \nportions it is rarely omitted, and only in the speeches of the messengers {p-qaeis \n4\'y7\xe2\x82\xacA.t*coi) ; also at the beginning and middle of the trimeter, and likewise at the \nbeginning of a sentence, and even in these cases but seldom. The Impf. \nXPV^t which, together with ixpv^t is used in prose, is an exception. \n\n\n\n$ 121. (b) Temporal Augment. \n\nThe temporal augment belongs to verbs, whose stem begins \nwith a vowel ; it consists in lengthening the first stem -vowel. \nThis is caUed the temporal augment because it increases the \ntime, e. g. \n\n\n\na becomes \n\n\n\xc2\xbb?, e.g. \n\n\n\'\'a.yu \n\n\nImpf. ^yov \n\n\nPerf. ?ixa \n\n\nPlup. ^X\xc2\xab*\xc2\xbb\' \n\n\nc \n\n\n\xc2\xbb?, " \n\n\ni\\-irtCa \n\n\nu \n\n\n1j\\iri(ov \n\n\n" ^Airi/ca \n\n\nu \n\n\ni]\\TrlKUV \n\n\nr \n\n\nh " \n\n\n*lKfT\xe2\x82\xacV(a \n\n\nn \n\n\n\'iKerevov \n\n\n" \'iKtrevKa \n\n\nu \n\n\n\'iKerevKeiy \n\n\n" \n\n\n\xc2\xab, \xc2\xbb \n\n\n6fil\\\xe2\x82\xacW \n\n\ncc \n\n\nuyilKovv \n\n\n" ufxlk-nKa \n\n\nu \n\n\nwfj.iX\'fjKfiy \n\n\nc \xc2\xab \n\n\nV, \xc2\xbb \n\n\n\'vfiplCoo \n\n\n(( \n\n\n"v^piCov \n\n\n" "vfipiKa \n\n\n(( \n\n\n\'vfipLKiiy \n\n\nOL " \n\n\nV^ " \n\n\nalpcu \n\n\nu \n\n\nflpovi/ \n\n\n" ^pTjKa \n\n\n(C \n\n\nrip^Kfiv \n\n\nou " \n\n\n\xe2\x80\x9eu, " \n\n\nav\\4cD \n\n\n(( \n\n\n7}ij\\0Vlf \n\n\n" 7ii\\r]Ka \n\n\n(( \n\n\nT]V\\\'f)K\xe2\x82\xaciy \n\n\not " \n\n\nV, " \n\n\noIktI^w \n\n\n(( \n\n\n^tcTi(oy \n\n\n" ^KTIKU \n\n\n(( \n\n\nifKrUeiy. \n\n\n\nRemark. Verbs which .begin with tj, f, u, a\xc2\xbb, oVf and \xe2\x82\xact, do not admit the \naugment, e. g. rirrdofxaiy to be overcome, Impf rirrdix-ny, Perf ?irrijfiai, Plup. \nTjTTTjfiriv ] \'iirSu, to press, Aor. "\'tTroxro; \'vtry6<D, to lull to sleep, Aor. "uTrvoxra ; \n\xc2\xbb<^6A\xe2\x82\xacw, to benefit, Impf. u<pi\\iov\', ovri^u^to vx)und, Impf. oina^ov; 6)f/c\xc2\xab, \nto yield, Impf. cTkov, Aor. clfa; ctKo^w, to liken, is an exception, which among \nthe Attic writers, though seldom, is augmented, e. g. clf/co^ov, eiKaaa, ^^Kaaixai, \nseldom fiKaCov (e. g. Th. 6, 92. fJKaCoyy in the best MSS.), ^/caao, rlKaa-fiai. \nAlso those verbs whose stem begins with cu, are usually without an augment, \ne. g. etjxonai, to supplicate, fvxofMTjy, more rarely i]vx^y^w^ l^ut Perf lilyiiai (not \niZyfjiou) ; fvpiffKUy to find, in good prose, always omits the augment. \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 122. Remarks on the Augment. \n\nI. Verbs beginning with a followed by a vowel, have d instead of 17, e. g. \n\'dt\xc2\xab, (poet.), to perceive, Impf. "aiov; but those beginning with d, ou, and 01 fol- \nlowed by a vowel, do not admit the augment, e. g. \'oTjS/^onioi, to Aaue an un- \npleasant sensation, Impf \'dTjSi^OjUT?*\' ; avaivw, to dry, Impf. aiaivov; olaKiCu, to \nsteer, Impf oldKi(ov ; also audxiaKO}, to destroy, though no vowel follows d, has \novoAoxro, avaXuKa, as well as avrjAwcro, airfiXwKa. But the poetic aei\'Sw (prose \n^5\xc2\xab), to smgr, and ato-o-cu (Att. ^o-cw), to 7*usA, take the augment, e.g. ^\xe2\x82\xaci5oj/ (prose \npSo;/), ij\'i^a (Att. 77|a) ; o5^o/iaj, to believe, ifSfjirjyf etc. does not belong here, since \nthe following ox, is not a part of the stem. \n\n\n\n148 VERBS. REDUPLICATION. [f 123 \n\n2. Some verbs also beginning with oi and followed by a consonant, do not \ntake the augment, e.g. oiKovpiw, to guard the house, Aor. olKovfni<ra ; otviCu^ to \nsmdlofwine, Impf. olyiCov, olv6co,to intoxicate, Perf. Mid. or Pass, olywfieifos \nand <fvo)fi.ivos ; oltrrpdu, to make furious, Aor. olarpriaa, \n\n3. The twelve following verbs, beginning with e, have \xe2\x82\xact instead of t] for the \naugment, viz. eaw, to permit, Impf. efwi\', Aor. etoura; i^i(u), to accustom, (to \nwhich belongs also eta^a, to He accustomed, from the Epic e^w) ; fttra, poetic \nAor. (stem \'EA), to place (in prose only, Part. Aor. Mid. iora^ievos and fla-dfieyos, \nestablishing, founding) ; ehiffcrwyto mnd; %\\K(a,to draw; Aor. ttkKvaa (stem \n\'EAKT) ; cTAoj\', to take, Aor. (stem *EA) of oupeoj; txofiai, to follow ; 4pyd- \n(ofiaiftowork; epvu, kptrv^Wyto creep,to go; ear idw, to entertain ; tx*^*^ \nhave (on the Epic etfiai, see \xc2\xa7 230). \n\n4. The six following verbs take the syUabic, instead of the temporal, \naugment : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n&yyvfii, to break, Aor. \xe2\x82\xaco|o, etc. (^ 187, 1). \n\naA-fcKo/Aot^capior, Perf. \xe2\x82\xac&\\ci)Ka and ^A\xc2\xabKa, captns sum (\xc2\xa7 161, 1). \n\navSdvwy to please (Ion. and poet.), Impf. lcu/5ai/o)/, Perf. IdSo, Aor. IdSor \n\n(\xc2\xa7 230.) \novpeWf mingere, ioipovv, iovpr]Ka, \nw^iuy to push, i^^ow, etc. (sometimes without the augment, e. g. Siw^ovyrOf \n\nTh. 2, 84; ^^alff^Tjo-tu\', X. H. 4. 3, 12 ; &^\xe2\x82\xaci, PI. Charm. 155, c). \nwy4ofxaif to buy, Impf. iuyovfiiju {uvovfi-qvy Lys. Purg. Sacril. 108. ^ 4; i^et- \n\nvovvTO, Aeschin. c. Ctes. c. 33; avruviiTo, Andoc. p. 122.), Aor. iwyrjad- \n\nHT]v (see however \xc2\xa7 179, 6.), Perf. idyriiiai. \n\n5. The verb I op to^cd, to celebrate a feast, takes the augment in the second \nsyllable, Impf. ^dipraCou. The same is true of the following forms of the \nPlup.n.: \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n\xe2\x96\xa0 EIKil, second Perf. eoiKo, lam like, Plup. itpKeiy. \neXirofiai, to hope, second Perf eoAiro, I hope, Plup. idXxeiy.} \nEPrfl, to do, second Perf. eopya, Plup. idpyeiy. ) ^ \n\n6. The three following verbs take the temporal and syllabic augment at the \nsame time, the Spiritus Asper of the stem being then transferred to the e of \nthe augment : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nopdw, to see, Impf edpwv, Perf. edpouca, edtpofiat. \n\nayoiycojto open, Impf aveuyov, Aor. avew^a (Inf. ovoZfoi), etc. \n\na^iaKOfiaiytobe taken, Aor. ea\\ay (Inf. aXuvai, a), and 7ika>y. \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 123. Reduplication. \n\n1. Reduplication (H08, 4) is the repeating the first conso- \nnant of the stem with c. Tliis imphes a completed action, and \nhence is p refixed to the Perf.,i e. g. Xe\'-AvKo, to the Fut. Perf, \n\nP.U^\'^\'wl\' ^\\ "^ay say that the first letter of aU verbs is repeated in the \nren., wnetner the verb begins with a vowel or a consonant. When the conso- \n\n\n\n1 \n\n\n\nf 123.] \n\n\n\nVERBS. \n\n\n\nREDUPLICATION. \n\n\n\n149 \n\n\n\ne. g. K\xe2\x82\xac\'KO(rix-q(TOfX(u (from Koa-fiiw), and to the Plup., which, as an \nhistorical tense, takes also the augment c before the redupUca- \ntion, e. g. i-^e-(3ovXevK\xe2\x82\xacLv. This remains in all the modes, as \nwell as in the Inf and Part. \n\n2. Those verbs only admit the reduplication, whose stem \nbegins with a single consonant or with a mute and liquid ; but \nverbs beginning with p, yv, yX, ^X,\' take only the simple aug- \nment, except fSXaTTTU} )8cy8Xa<^a, /3A.acr</>\'>y/xca) ySeySXao-j^Tj/u-T/Ka, and \n/SXooravw ^i^XaxrrqKa and l^XaxrrqKay e. g. \n\n\n\nA.j;\xc2\xab, to loose, \n^u, to sacrifice, \n<j)vT(v<a, to plant, \nXoptvu, to dance, \nypd<pu, to icrite, \nK\\iy<t), to bend down, \nKpivu, to judge, \n\xe2\x80\xa2KVfoiy to breathe, \nb\\auy to bruise, \n{^iirru, to throw, \nyvwpl^u), to make known, \nfiKoKfiw, to be slothful, \nyXv^t to carve, \n\n\n\nPerf. \\(-\\vKa \n\n\n\nT6-^KO (\xc2\xa721, 2.) \nire-ipvr^vKa (\xc2\xa7 21, 2.) \nKf-x6pfVKa (\xc2\xa721, 2.) \nyf-ypa<pa \n\nK\xe2\x82\xac-K\\lKa \nKf-KplKa \nTTe-TTVeUKO \n\nT6-^AoKa (\xc2\xa7 21, 2.) \n^pP^pa (\xc2\xa7 23, 3.) \ni-yt/upiKa \n\n\n\nPlup. i-\\\xe2\x82\xac-\\VK\xe2\x82\xaclV \n\n" i-Trf-<pvr\xe2\x82\xacVKfU^ \n\n" i-K\xe2\x82\xac-XOpfVK\xe2\x82\xaciy \n\n" i-y\xe2\x82\xac-ypd<p(iy \n\n*\' 4-Ke-K\\lK(iy \n\n" 4-Ki-ltpiKflV \n\n" i-TTf-irvevKfty \n\n" i-Tf-d\\dK\xe2\x82\xaciy \n\n" 4^l>l<puy \n\n" i-yvupiK\xe2\x82\xaciv \n\n" i-fi\\aK6muy \n\n" 4-y\\v<p\xe2\x82\xaciy. \n\n\n\n3. Besides the verbs just mentioned beginning with p, yv, ySA, \nyX, the reduplication is not used, when the stem begins with a \ndouble consonant or with two single consonants, which are not \na mute and hquid, or with three consonants, e. g. \n\n\n\n^7j\\({\xc2\xab, to emulate. \n\n\nPerf. i-Ci\\\\b,Ka \n\n\nPlup. i-Cr}\\aiK(iy \n\n\nIcvJcD, to entertain, \n\n\nt( \n\n\ni-^4vtDKa \n\n\ntt \n\n\ni-^fyuKfiv \n\n\ntf<\xc2\xa3AAa>, to sing. \n\n\n(( \n\n\nt-^oKKa \n\n\n\xc2\xab \n\n\ni-ipd\\K(iy \n\n\n(Tirdpo), to sow. \n\n\n" \n\n\nt-c-KopKa \n\n\ni( \n\n\ni-(ma.pKiiv \n\n\nKTi(o), to Imild, \n\n\n(( \n\n\nt-KTiKa \n\n\ncc \n\n\ni-KTiKiiy \n\n\nirrv<r<Tu, tofM, \n\n\n(( \n\n\nt-trrvxa- \n\n\nu \n\n\ni-irrvxfiy \n\n\n(TTparriyeWf to be a \n\n\ngeneral, " \n\n\ni-<rrpar-fiyT]Ka \n\n\nu \n\n\ni-a-TparrtyiiKfiy \n\n\n\nnant is repeated, c is joined with it in order to vocalize it. If the verb begins \nwith a vowel, the vowel is doubled and the two coalesce, if the initial vowel is \nshort, and thus form a long vowel ; but if the initial vowel is long, it absorbs \nthe other, e. g. \n\n6y<i>, Perf. properly &ax\xc2\xb0\' = ^X\xc2\xb0- \n\n" " itytpKa = ijyfpKa \n\n" " 6oiKT)Ka = (fKrjKa. \n\nSometimes when the verb begins with \xe2\x82\xac, the double e, instead of coalescing \ninto -1), is contracted into -ci, e. g. idu, Perf. eJfcufo, instead of ijoKa. \n\n* "Words beginning with these letters are excepted on account of the diffi- \nculty of repeating them. \n\n13* \n\n\n\ndye loco f \n\nolKCWy \n\n\n\n150 VERBS. ATTIO EEDUPLICATION. [^ 124 \n\nRemark 1. The two verbs mfiyfia-Kta (stem MNA), to remind, and Krdo- \nv.ai, to acquire, though their stem begins with two consonants, which are not a \nmute and a liquid, still take the reduplication, [ie-fivvfJMi, K\xe2\x82\xac-KTT)fmi, i-fie-fiirfifirjv^ \ni-Ke-KT-fj/x-nu. The regular form iKrrinai^ is Ionic, but it is found also in Aesch. \nProm. 792, and in Plato with Ke-KTriixai; likewise in Th. 2, 62. \xe2\x96\xa0n-pore/cTTj/LteVa \n(as according to the MSS. it must probably be read, though elsewhere, Th. \nalways uses KCKT-nfiai). Perfects f )rmed by Metathesis or Syncope, are seem- \ning exceptions to the rules of reduplication, e. g. SeS/xrjKa, Hirraficu, etc. (\xc2\xa7\xc2\xa722, \nand 16, 8.) \n\n4. Five verbs beginning with a liquid do not repeat this \nliquid, but take et for the augment : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nXafifidvcoy to take, Perf, ei\\r}(pa Plup. \xe2\x82\xacl\\-fi<p\xe2\x82\xaciv \n\n\\ayxd.va, to obtain, " \xe2\x82\xac?X7jx\xc2\xab " etA^x^"\' \n\n\\4yw, (TuAAeyw, to aillect, . " <rvuel\\oxa, ffwelXcyfiou " (rvvfi\\6xfiy \n\'PEXl, to say, " elprjKa " etfrfiKeiu \n\nfieipoixai, to obtain, " iiixaprai (with rough breathing), it isfaied. \n\nRem. 2. The regular reduplication is sometimes found in the Attic poets, \ne. g. XeX-fififxe^a, ^vWeXeyfievoSj also in Xen. eTrjAeAey/ueVoi. occurs, Cy. 3. 3, 41 \n(Altorf, aireiX^yfi&oi), and e/cAeAex<^\xc2\xab*> H. 1. 6, 16.\xe2\x80\x94-Aia\\4yoiJ.ai, to converse, \nhas Perf. di,ei\\eyfiai, though the simple Ae7\xc2\xab, in the sense of to say, always \ntakes the regular reduplication, AeAey^ot, dictus sum (Perf. Act wanting) \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 124. Attic Reduplication. \n\n1. Several verbs, beginning with a, e, or o, repeat, in the Perf. \nand Plup. before the temporal augment, the first two letters of \nthe stem This is called the Attic Reduphcation Tlie Plup. \nthen veiy rarely takes an additional augment ; e. g. SuopwpvKTo, \nX. An. 7. 8, 14 ; so rjK-r]K6\xe2\x82\xacLv, but sometimes oKT^Koai/. \n\n2. The verbs, which in the Attic dialect have this reduphca- \ntion, are the following : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) Those whose second stem-syllable is short by nature : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\noAew, -\xc2\xab, to grind, ifi^a,^ .\xc2\xa3, to vomit, \n\n(oA-i^A\xe2\x82\xac\xc2\xabro) oA-i]A6(r/*ot in-fjixcKa ifi-fifiefffuu \n\n(aA-7jAe/c6tj/) aX-TjXea-firiu ifi-rtixeKeiv ifx-nnffffi-nv \n\nap6co, -w, to plough, ixdai (e\'Aauvco), to drive, \n\n{ap-fjpoKo) ap-fjpo/xai eA-7)Aa/ca eA-^Aajuoi \n\n{ap-np6Keiv) ap-rjp6fi.r]v eA-jjAoKetj/ e\'A-iyAti/tTjv \n\n\'OMOn, 6fj.vv(ii, to swear, \'OAEH, 6\\\\vfii, to destroy, \n\nOfi-dnoKa ofi-(i)fio<Tfiai oK-dX^Ka Perf. 11. 6\\-a)\\a (\'OAn) \n\ndfi-u)fi6Kuv 6fi-afi6(Tfi\'nv oA-wAeKeti; Plup. II. oA-tiAeu\' \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 125.] AUGMENT AND REDUPLICATION IN COMPOUNDS. 151 \n\ni\\4yx(^i to conviitce, opirTtt), to dig^ \n\n{iX-^KiyX") i^-\'fl^^y^\'OU. op-d}pvxa. op-cipxryficu and &pvyfjuxi \n\n(^A.-TjXeyx^"\') eA--7?Ae7)LC7jv op-upvx^\'-V 6p-(i)pvyfMT]v and wpvyfirjv. \n\nFurther: eAfo-o-o), to wind^ (^A-^XiXo), i\\-i]\\iyijmi (the rough breathing be- \ning rejected), and in good usage among later writers, ctXtyyuot ; S^w (\'OAfl), \nto smeZZ, 55-ft>5a ; (p4pu) {\'ENEKCi.) ^ to carnf^ iu\'-fivoxa, iv^veyixai] i<r^i<u (\'EAXl), \nto eat^ iS-\'fiSoKou, iS-riSefffmi-^ ^7"> to lead, Perf. usually ^x\xc2\xab5 u\'/rjoxa (instead \' \nof 07-^70x09 so as to soften the pronunciation) is later, and is rejected by the \nAtticists as not Attic, though in Lysias 5 but Perf. Mid. or Pass, always ^7/nat. \n\n(b) Those wliich in the second stem-syllable have a vowel \nlong by nature, and shorten this after prefixing the reduphcation \n(except epctiSco) : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\ni\\ci^\xc2\xbb, to anoint, Ilkovw^ to hear, \n\niX-TjA-tc^cj^ a.\\-i]\\lpiix.T]U ij K-f} k6 e iv fjKOVfffJc/jv \n\n\'EAETOn, epxa^iou, to cone, ip^iSw, to prop, \n\ni\\--fi\\v^a i p\'-qpuKa 4p--f]pn<riKU \n\ni\\-Tj\\v^en/ i p-7]p^iK(iv 4p-ripd(Tfj.\'qv \n\niiyfipco, to collect, iyelpw, to wake, \n\niy-4fyfpKa ay--fiy(pfiat ( iy-ijy tpKa ) iy- -fiye p /lai \n\nh.y-r]y4pKUV i.y-r]y(piJ.7p> ( iy-rjyfpK\xe2\x82\xaciu) iy-7jy 4 pfiri y. \n\nSo from iyupw comes the second Perf. iyp^opa (on account of euphony \ninstead of ^7-^770^0), Itvake, second Plup. Act. iyprrySpciv, I awoke. \n\nRemark 1. The forms included in parentheses are such as are not found \nin good Attic prose. \n\nRem. 2. The verb Hywy to lead, forms the second Aor. Act. and Mid., and ( \n0\xe2\x82\xacpa>, to carry, forms all the Aorists with this reduplication ; here, however, the \nreduplicated vowel takes the temporal augment, and that only in the Ind., and \nthe vowel of the stem remains pure : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nHyu, to lead, Aor. II. I^y-ayoy, Inf. ayay\xe2\x82\xac7u, Aor. II. Mid. T)yay6fir\\v ; \n(pep 03, to carry (stem \'EFK), Aor. II. i}v-\xe2\x82\xacyKov, Inf. iy-eyKuUf Aor. L ^v-eyKa^ \nInf. ip-eyKou, Aor. Pass. 7]v-4x^v, In\xc2\xa3 iv-tx^^f"- \n\n\n\n$ 125. Augment and Reduplication in Compound \n\nWords. \n\n1 First rule. Verbs compounded with prepositions take the \naugment and reduplication between the preposition and the \nverb ; the final vowel of prepositions, except Trepi and Trpo, is \nehded [H3, 2, (a)] ; Trpo frequently combines with the augment \nby means of Crasis {k 10), and becomes tt/dov; Ik before the \nsyllabic augment is changed to c^ (M5, 3 ) ; and ev and <rvv \n\n\n\n152 \n\n\n\nVERBS. REMARKS. \n\n\n\n[$ 126. \n\n\n\nresume their v which had been assimilated {\xc2\xa7 18, 2), or changed \n(^ 19, 3), or dropped (20, 2), e. g. \n\nOTro-j8o\\Aa), to throw from, Im. hir-efiaXKov Pf. aTro-$4^\\vKa Pip. oir-c^e^X^Kictr \nnepi-fidWu, to throw around, irepi-efia^Aou irepi-fie^KvKa vepi-ifieMKfiP \n\nI irpo-efiaWou \n\n\n\nTrpovfiaWov \ni^-4^aXKov \n\niy-eyiyuS/xriv \niv-4fiaXKov \n\n\n\nirpo-fi\xe2\x82\xacP\\r]Ka \nTrpo-fi\xe2\x82\xacfi\\r]Ka \n\nffvv-eiKoxa \nffvy-e^fiKpa \niy-yeyoya \n\n(rvu-effKfvoKa \n\n\n\nvpo-i^(fi\\r}Kfiy \nvpoiiPefiK-fiKeiy \n\navv-ei\\6x^iv \navv-\xe2\x82\xacppi<f>\xe2\x82\xaciy \niy-eyeyoufiv \n\nCVV-iCKivijCflV. \n\n\n\nb vpo-fidWo), to throw before, \n\niK-fid\\Xa}, to throw out, \n\n(rv\\-\\4ya, to collect together, \n\nffvp-piirTco, to throw together, \nJ iy-yiyuo/jMif to be in, \nwf ili-fidXhi)}, to throw in, \nf- cu-CKeuet^w, to pack up, \n\n2. Second rule. Verbs compounded with Sv<s, take the aug \nment and reduplication, (a) at the beginning, when the stem \nof the simple verb begins with a consonant or with t] or (a; (b) \n\n\'" but in the middle, when the stem of the simple verb begins \nwith a vowel, except rj or w, e. g. \n\n\' Svs-rvx^w, to be unfortunate, 4-Svs-ruxovv 5e-5vs-Tux7j/fa i-S^-ivsTux^Keiy \nI dvs-oyireco, to make ashamed, i-Bvs-dyirovv he-Svs-anrriKa 4-Se-dvs-unrf)K\xe2\x82\xaciv \nZvs-ap^ffriw^ to be displeased, Sus-Tjpeorouy Svs-rjpearTjKU ivs-TtpfffrfiKfiy. \n\nRemark 1. Verbs compounded with 65 may take the augment and redupli- \ncation at the beginning or in the middle, yet they commonly omit them at the \nbeginning, and euepyerew usually in the middle, e. g. \n\nev-Tvx4(o, to be fortunate, Impf. Tjv-Tvxeou, but commonly ev^ix^oy \n\nev-ux^ouai, to feast well, " ev-uxeSfnjv \n\n\xe2\x82\xacu-6p7eTcw, to do good, " \xe2\x82\xacv-r]py4r\xe2\x82\xac0Vf but commonly ev-epyfreoVf Perf. \n\n\xe2\x82\xacu-7jp7eT7j/co, but commonly cu-epyeTTjKo. \n\n3. Third Rule. All other compoimds take the augment and \nreduplication at the beginning, e. g. \n\ntiv^o\\oy4(a, to relab)) iixv^oXSyeop u\xe2\x82\xac-fiv^x6yrjKa \n\not/co5ofie&>, to build, ^KoSSfieov yKo5<^/x7jKa. \n\nThus irappricftdCoiMai (from -rrapprfa-la, and this from vay aod ()vffis), to speak \nopenly, Aor. i-nrap^riaiaadfiriUy Perf. ire-ira/J^Tjafoo-jiuu. \n\nRem. 2. \'OSoiroiew has the Perf. &i(meiroiri<r^ai, X. An. 5. 3, 1. Lycurg. c. \n\nLeocr. \xc2\xa7 139, has \'nnroT\xe2\x82\xacTp6((yr}Key. \n\n\n\n\n\n\nj 126. Remarks. \n\n1. The six following words compounded with prepositions take the augment \nin both places, viz. at the beginning of the simple verb and before the preposi- \ntion : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n\n\n} 126.] VERBS. REMARKS. 153 \n\nAnirfxofMUy to clothe one^s self, Impf. iifiweixSixrfv,^ or a/xireiX\' Aor. 7ifi,-Ke<Tx6fn]v* \nav4xofuu, to endure (not avfX\'\'>)i^\'\' ^veixonw " i)ve(Tx6fM-qy \n\naix<piyvo\xe2\x82\xacw, to be uncertain^ " iiix<p(yy6ovv and iffKpiyvSovv \n\nayop^Soiy to raise up^ " ijywp^ovv Perf. ^vup^uKa " ^vwphwatt \n\ntyox^^ofy to molest, " tivwx^ow " T^yux^Vto- " ^voix^\'\')^^ \n\nnapoiyfu, to riot, " 4Trap<pyovy " ircTrop^j/TjKa *\' iirapcfyrjffa. \n\n2. The analogy of these verbs is followed by three others, which are not \ncompounded with prepositions, but are derived from other compound words, \nviz. \n\nHiairdu) (from SiaiTayfood), (a) to feed, (b) to be a judge, Impf iSirlrwy and \nSi^Ttoy, Aor. ^SijjTTjo-a and StpTTjera ; Perf. ScSjjfTTjKa ; Impf. Mid. Sirirdixrfy \n\nBioKoyfo), to serve (from SioKoyos, servant), Impf. iSirindyovy and Sir^KSyovyf \nPerf. SeSirjKdyrjKa \n\nafjL<pi(T^-nr4co (from AM4>I2BHTH5), to dispute, Impf. iif^\xc2\xabT$r]Tovy and i]fi<pur- \n\nfiT]TOVy. \n\n3. Exceptions to the first rule. Several verbs compounded with prepositions, \ntake the augment before the preposition, since they have nearly the same \nsignification as the simple verbs, e. g. \n\niifi<piyyo(u {yocu)), to be uncertain, Impf. ijfupiyydovy, or i]fi<(>fyy6ovy (No. 1) \n\nkfjLcpifyyvfxi, to clothe, Aor. T]fi(pi((ra, Perf. ijfKpUafiai \n\niiriffrafxai, to know, Impf. ^irtCTO/UTjf \n\niupl7)fii, to dismiss, " itplovy and i}<plovy, or r}<p\'eiy [diK9 \n\nHci^iCo, to set, " iKd^iCoy (old Att. also Ka^7(oy), Pf KeKi- \n\nKa^e(ofiai, to ait, " iKCl^((6^l\xe2\x96\xa0nyalld Ko^fC (without Aug.) \n\nKd^/xai, to sit, " iKCL^^iqv and Ka^ixr)y \n\nKo^fvSu, to sleep, \xe2\x80\xa2\' iKd^fvSoy, seldom ko^vSov. \n\n4. Those verbs are apparently an exception to the first rule, which are not \nformed by the composition of a simple verb with a preposition, but by deriva- \ntion from a word already compounded, e. g. \n\niyayriovfiai^ to oppose one\'s self to (from ivayrios) Impf. T]vayrioitir)v \n\nkyriZiK^w, to defend at law ( " kyrlZiKos) \'* i)ynZiKOvy scndi ^vrkhiKOVV \n\niLyrifio\\4cD, to hit uix>n ( " iin-<)3o\\^) " Tjyrifi6\\ovy \n\niniropau, to fjiti It htj traffic ( " i/xiropij) " iffiiropwy \n\nifATr\xe2\x82\xacS6(i), to estaUish ( " ifiirtSos) \'\' i}fjLir(Sovy. \n\n5. Many verbs, however, which apparently are formed only by derivation, are \ntreated, even by the best classical writers, as if they were compounded of a \nsimple verb and a preposition. Thus, \xe2\x96\xa0wapavo^i.fu, iraprjySfjMvy and irapfySnovy, \n\'irapriv6fj.r}<ra, Perf. irapay\xe2\x82\xacv6fnjKa, although it is not from -napd and ayo/xfu or \nyofifo), which two verbs are not in use, but from the compound irapdyofios ; so \nfurther, iyxfip<\'> (from \'ErXEIP02), to take in hand, Impf. iy^x^lpovy; iirt^v \nfi(<D (from \'Eni0TMO2), todesire, Impf iirf^vnow ; iv^vfM^ojjiai, Aor. ivtbvfi^- \n^y, Perf. 4yri^vfi-qfiai; KaTTjyopfu) (from KaTrjyopos), to accuse, Impf. KaTr\\y6- \npovy, Perf. Karriy6pT]Ka\', ir po^vfiovfiai (from Trp6^nos), to desire earnestly^ \nImpf. irpov^vfiovfiTjy and irpo^fiovfi-qy ; so iyKUfiid^eiy, irpo<^7jT\xc2\xabi5ct>\', iytdpt^eiVf \niKK\\r}<Ti<i((iy, inroTrrfvay, 4irirr}iiifiy, 4ix<payi^(iy, avvfpyuy, etc. \n\n* So PI. Phaed. 87, 6, according to most and the best MSS. \n\n\xe2\x80\xa2 Eur. Med. 1128, and Aristoph. Thesm. 165. \n\n\n\n154 VE7.BS IN -o>. DERIVATION OF TENSES. [H 127, 128 \n\n\n\nFormation of the Tenses op Verbs in -\xc2\xbb. \n\n( 127. Division of Verbs in -w according to the \n\nCharacteristic. \n\nVerbs in -o) are divided into two principal classes, accord* \ning to the difference of the characteristic (\xc2\xa7 108, 5) : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nI. Pure verbs, whose characteristic is a vowel ; these arc* \nagain divided into two classes : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nA. Uncontracted verbs, whose characteristic is a vowel, \nexcept a, e, o, e. g. TraiBev-co, to educate ; Xu-o), to loose ; \n\nB. Contract verbs, whose characteristic is a, e, or o, e. g. \nTLfjid-w, to honor ; (piXi-co, to love ; fiLcr^o-co, to let out \nfor hire. \n\nII. Impure verbs, whose characteristic is a consonant; \nthese are again divided into two classes : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nA. Mute verbs, whose characteristic is one of the nine \nmutes, e. g. Xelir-oi), to leave ; 7r\\eK-(o, to twine ; Trel^-ay, \nto persuade ; \n\nB. Liquid verbs, whose characteristic is one of the four \nliquids, X, fx, v, p, e. g. ar/yeW-co, to announce ; vifi-cj, \ntq divide ; ^atV-w, to show ; <f>^eCp-(Oy to destroy. \n\nRemark. According to the accentuation of the first Pers. Pres. Ind. Act., \nall verbs are divided into : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) Barytones, whose final syllable in the first Pers. Pres. Ind. Act. is not \naccented, e. g. \\u-w, \xe2\x80\xa2kx4k-w, etc. ; \n\n(b) Perispomena, whose final syllable is circumflexed in the first Pers. ; these \nare consequently contract verbs, e. g. t*/a\xc2\xab, <pi7^^ /ua^A. \n\n\xc2\xa7 128. Derivation of Tenses. \n\nAll tenses are formed from the stem of the verb, the inflection-endings men- \ntioned above (\xc2\xa7 113), being appended to this. The Primary tenses only have \na distinct tense-characteristic (\xc2\xa7 110); this is always wanting in the Pres. \nand Impf., the mode-vowels and personal-endings being sufficient; but the \nPres. and Impf. very frequently strengthen or increase the pure stem, e. g. \nTtJTTT-w (pure stem TTH), kfxapr-dvc (pure stem \'AMAPT) ; the Secondary tenses \nnever admit such an increase, but are formed from the pure stem, and without \nthe tense-characteristic ; yet, in certain cases (\xc2\xa7 140), they admit a change of \n\n\n\n\\ 129.] FORMATION OP THE TENSES OF PURE VERBS. 155 \n\nthe stem-vowel. Hence, certain tenses, which are formed from a common stem, \nmay be distinguished from each other and classed by themselves. Tenses, \nincluded in such a class, may be said to be derived from one another. The \nprincipal classes are the three following : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nI. Tenses, which may strengthen the pure stem. These are the Pres. and \nImpf. Act., Mid., or Pass,, e. g, \n\n(pure stem TTII) tutt-t-co rinr-r-oficu \n\nn. Tenses, which have a tense-characteristic. These are the Primary \ntenses, e. g. \n\n(a) First Perf. and first Plup. Act., e. g. (7r\xe2\x82\xac-<^pa5-/co) Tr4-<ppaKa, i-ire-<ppi- #7\xe2\x80\x94 i\' \n\n(b) Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass. These do not have the tense-charac- \nteristic; from the Perf. ISIid. or Pass, the Put. Perf. is formed by \nrejecting -fxai and annexing -aoixcu, e. g. Tc-TV(x-ficu (instead of Termr- \nfJMi), irf-rvfi/jLTiVy rdTvtpofiai (instead of r^rvTraofuu). The Perf. has \na short vowel, but the Put. Act. and Mid. a long vowel, e. g. Auew, \nAeAvfca, XeA.v/t\xc2\xabu, Auao?, Avcro/iou, Sew, SeSrjKa, SeSejuat, Srjao), SrjaofMU ; \nso the Put. Perf. has a long vowel, e. g. XeXiaofiai, Si^a-o/xai ; \n\n(c) First Fut. and Aor. Act. and Mid., e. g. rvxpco Tw\\iofmt \n\nt-rxf^a 4-Tv^dfi7iv ; \n\n(d) First Aor. and first Fut. Pass., e. g. i-rv<p-^v Tvcp-^arofxai. \n\nIII. Tenses, which are formed from the pure stem without a tense-character- \nistic, may yet, in certain cases, admit a change of the stem- vowel. These \nare the Secondary tenses, e. g. \n\n(a) The second Perf. and second Plup. Act. e. g. re-riJir-o, i-re-rvir-eiv ; \n\n(b) The second Aor. Act. and Mid., e. g. e-\\ad^-ovy i-\\a^-6fiT]v from Aov\' \n^dvo> (pure stem AA0) ; \n\n(c) Tha second Aor. and second Fut. Pass., e. g. ^-tStt-t/v, TCir-^<ro/wu. \n\n\xc2\xa7 129. I. Formation of the Tenses of Pure Verbs. \n\n1. In pure verbs, both Barytoned and Perispomena, the \ntense-endings are commonly appended to the unchanged char- \nacteristic of the verb, e. g. /3ov\\\xe2\x82\xacv-o-o), /Sefiovkiv-Ka. Pure verbs \ncommonly form no Secondary tenses, but only the Primary \ntenses; the Perf. with k (ko), the Fut. and Aor. with o- and 3 \n(o-o), era, 3r]v, ^Tjcro-zxat). Pure verbs, however, are subject to the \nfollowing regular change in the stem : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n2. The short characteristic vowel of the Pres. and Impf, is \nlengthened in the other tenses, viz. \n\n2 into r, e. g. ixrjvfw, to be angry, ixTjvt-a-o), 4-fi-iivTaa, etc. \n\na " Vf " Kci)\\v-(i) (u commonly long), to hinder, KaXv-aa>, Kc-KdiKvuatf etc \n\n\n\n156 TENSES OF PURE VERBS WITH SHORT VOWEL. [\xc2\xa7 130 \n\nc into 7j, e. g. </)tA.e-w {<pt\\S>), to love, (piX-fi-ffu, ire-KpiKri-Ka, etc. \n\n" a>, " {xiaSro-ta {fii(r^a>), to let out for hire, fjuff^do-ffw, fie-fxiffdw-Ka, etc. \n\na " 7j, " TiiM-a (rifiw), to honor, Tt^^?-<rw, re-rifiTi-Kaf etc. \n\nEemakk 1. a is lengthened into o, when e, t, or p precedes it [comp. \xc2\xa7 43, \nI, (a)], e. g. \n\n^d-\xc2\xbb, to permit, ed-cw, efatra, 6?a/fa, eta/xai, \xe2\x82\xaci<l^r)V\', effria-Wy to entertain, kaiit- \ncw ; (pcopa-w, to steal, <pa>pa-(T(a ; but iyyvd-u, to give as a pledge, iyyv-i^trw ; fioaat, \nto call out, fi(yf](rofjm, ifionffa (like 07S077). \n\nThe two following imitate those in -eda, -\xc2\xbb(\xc2\xa3\xc2\xab, -pdooj viz. \naXoa-Wyto strike, to thresh, old Att. Fut. a\\oa-<ra> ; but usually oAo^cw; \nd.Kpo&-ofiai, to hear, Fut. aKpo&ffo/aai, Aoe ijKpodtrifnty (like a^poa). \n\nBem. 2. The verbs xpda, to give an oracle; xP^\'^F-^-h to use; and rirpdv \nto bore, though p precedeSj lengthen 0. into tj, e. g. xpvo\'oju.ai, rpiiaw. \n\nk 130. Formation of the Tenses of Pure Verbs with \na short Characteristic-vowel. \n\nThe following pure verbs, contrary to the rule {h 129, 2) re- \ntain the short characteristic-vowel, either in formings all the \ntenses, or in particular tenses. Most of these verbs assume a \no- in the Perf. Mid. or Pass, and first Aor, Pass., and in the \ntenses derived from these, and also in the verbal adjectives ; \nsuch verbs are designated by : Pass, with cr. \n\n(a) -iu>. \n\nXpfca, to sting, Put. xP^\'^\'^t \xe2\x96\xa0^\'^\' \xc2\xabXP\'<^\xc2\xab) I\'lf- XP^\'^\xc2\xb0\'-^- Pass, with <r; (but xP^\'^y \nto anoint, Fut. xp^^^i ^^r. exp^ara, Inf. xp\'\'\'\'\xc2\xab\'> Aor. Mid. exp^dfirtv ; Perf. \nMid. or Pass. /cexpt-<r-/teu, Kexp\'io-^ai\', Aor. Pass. ixP^-a-^v; verbal adj. \nXpto-Tos). \n\nRemark 1. iircdw, to perceive, of the Ionic dialect, belongs here (\xc2\xa7 230), \nThe poetie otw is found only in the Pres. and Impf. ("diov, ^ 122, 1). \n\n(b) -iJ\xc2\xab. \n\n1. \'ArucD (also old Ait.avvToa) to complete, Put. aw(r\xc2\xab; Aor. ^yvffa, Pasa, \nwith ff. \n\nftpuoj (also old Att. op^Tcej), to draw water. Put. apiffw] Aw. ijpvffo. Pass, \n\nwith ff. \nftua>(u), to close, e, g. the eyes, Put. fivffw, Aor. \xe2\x82\xac/tC<ra; but Perf. pUftvKOj to bs \n\nclosed, to be silent. \nvrva{v), to spit, Put. irTvffw; Aor. eirrvaa. Pass, with ff {hrrv-ff-^v), verbal \n\nadj. TTTV-ff-TSs. \n\n2. The following dissyllables in -vw lengthen the short characteristic-vowel \nIn the Put and Aor. Act. and Mid. and in Put. Perf. Mid., and 5u\xc2\xab also in the \nPerf. and Plup. Act. j but they resume the short vowel in the Perf. and Plup. \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 130.] TENSES OF PURE VERBS WITH SHORT VOWEL. 157 \n\nAct. (except 5u\xc2\xab), Mid. or Pass., in the Aor. and Fut. Pass., and in verbal \nadjectives : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nZ^Ufto torap up, Fut. hvffw Aor. eSuca Perf. ScJuaco ScSu/kcu Aor Pass. 4Sv^y \n^{>Wt to sacrifice, " ^ffw " t^vaa " re^Ka re^ixai " " irv^v \nA<J\xc2\xab, to loose, " hvffw " (\\v(ra " \\4\\vKa \\e\\vficu " " eAudTjr. \n\nHem. 2. The doubtful vowel u is commonly used as long in the Pres. and \nImpf. by the Attic poets ; but in prose it must be considered as short j hence to \nbe accented fiiJe, urt/e, AtJc, etc., and not /ttSe, htCc, AOc, etc. \n\n(C) -OM. \n\nTfXdw, to laugh, Fut yeXaaofuu (seldom y^XcUrw) ) Aor. ^cAcuro. Pass. \n\nwith <r. \ni\\du} (usually i\\avyu>), to drive, Fut. i\\&<T(i> (Att. iXu), etc. See \xc2\xa7 158, 3. \n3Xe\xc2\xa3w, to bruise, ^X&act, etc. Pass, with <r (Ter^Ao-c-fiat, i^\\6.-<T-^v). \nKXdo), to break, KK&au, etc. Pass, with <r (KiKXa-rr-ficu, iK\\d,-a-^v). \nXa\\da), to loosen, xoX^w, etc. Pass, with o* {ixa^d-(r-^v). \nZ ay. dot (usually 5a/iciC\xc2\xab), domo, Aor. dSdfiaaa. Pass, with <r. \n\xe2\x80\xa2Kepdw, to transport, to sell, Fut. vepaurw, Aor. ^Te\'pd<ro; Perf. ireir^poKa (but \n\n\xe2\x96\xa0K\xe2\x82\xacpd(o, to pass over, Intrans., Fut. irepiffu ; Aor. ^ircpeuro). These seven \n\nverb^. have a liquid before the characteristic-vowel a. \nffirdtOt to draw, airado), etc. Pass, with or {iffird-ff-^v). \ncxdd), to loose, to open, trxacw, etc. \n\n(d) -6\xc2\xbb. \n\n1. AlSeofiai, to reverence. See \xc2\xa7 166, 1. \n\niiKfOfiatf to heal, aKeaofiai, ^kco-o/lct/v ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. ffKc-<r-/\xc2\xabii ; Aor. Pass. \n\ni A e\xc2\xab, <o ^\'nc?, to beat, dA6-(r-\xc2\xab, Att., yet seldom iA\xc2\xabD ; Aor. ^Acera; Perf. Mid. or \n\nPass. aX-fiKefffKu {^ 117, 2, and 124, 2). \nkpnita, to suffice, etc. Pass, with <r. \n4fi4u, to vomit, Fut. ifxfirw, etc.; Perf. Act. i^ffi/xeKa ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, ifiiinfff\' \n\nfxai (\xc2\xa7 124, 2). \nfew, to 602/ (usually intrans., and ^ivwtu, usually trans.). Pass, with <r. \n|e\xc2\xab, to scrape. Pass with \xc2\xabr. \xe2\x80\x94 tcA ^\xc2\xab, to accomplish. Pass, with <r (\xc2\xa7 117, 2). \nrpeu, to tremble, -6(r\xc2\xbb, etc.; verbal adj. rpe-tr-rSs. \xe2\x80\x94 X**** \'^ /wm^- See \xc2\xa7 154, \n\nRem. 1. \n\n2. The following have in some tenses the long, in others the short vowel: \xe2\x80\x94 \nalvfo) (in Attic prose 4iraiyfv), to praise, Fut. alviffu ; Aor. fiviffa; Perf. fjueKaj \n\nAor. Pass, fjve^y, Fut. Pass. cwVei^o-o^nai ; verb. adj. cuyfT6s, -rcoy; but \n\nPerf Mid. or Pass, ^vrfucu. \naip4w, to choose, Aor. Pass, ^pfdtjv; also ripii^v, alpija-w, fjpTjKu, fjprjixau \nyan\xe2\x82\xacw, to marry, Fut. yaniw] Aor. iynfM; Perf YcyctfCTjKo; Aor. Pass, eyafxii^v \n\n{I vxis taken to wife). \ndfw, to bind, S^fia-u, eSTja-a^ iSriadfjirjv ; but SdSeKo, 8e5e/*ai, iS4^v, Fut. Perf. \n\nSeSriaofmi is commonly used for Ss^crofiat (the latter is used by Dem. and \n\nlater writers). \n\n14 \n\n\n\n158 VERBS. \xe2\x80\x94 AORIST AND FUTURE PASSIVE WITH <T. [} 131. \n\nKU\\4(v, to call, Fut. KoXiffo), Att. koKS) (\xc2\xa7 117,2); Aor. ^KciXeera; Perf. Act \nK^KXvKa] Perf. Mid. or Pass. KeKKrifiaif Jam called; Put. Perf. KeK\\-{](rofua, \nI shall be called; Aor. Pass. iKA-fi^y; Put. Tass. K\\v^<rofiai ^ Fut. Alid. \nKoXovfmi ; Aor. Mid. iKa\\\xe2\x82\xac(rdixr]v. \n\niro\xc2\xbb4a>, to desire, iro^ea-ofxai, Lys. 8, 18, PI. Phaed. 97, a. ; iirS^effa, Isoc. 4, 122. 19, \n17; elsewhere, iro^a-a, iir6^(ra] Perf. Act. veirS^KW, imrS^fjMi \\ Aor. \n\nPass, ivo^eff^v* \nKovew, laboro, Fut. irovfiffci}, etc. {to work) ; iroviffw {to he in pain) ; Perf. ir\xe2\x82\xacir<J- \nyjjKtt in both senses; Mid. and Pass, always have ??, e. g. ivoyrjadfjLrjv and \nirroyfi^v, Perf. ireirSyrifiau \n\n(e) -o\xc2\xab. \n\nAf \xc2\xabJ\xc2\xab, \xc2\xabo |9?oM5ri^, Fut. oi,p6(r60j Aor ^po<ra; Perf. Mid. or Pass, afyfipofica (\xc2\xa7 124, \n2) ; Aor. Pass. rjpS^Vr, \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 131. Formation of the Aor. and Fut, Pass., and \nthe Perf.i Pluperf. Mid. or Pass, with cr, \n\n1. Pure verbs, which retain the short characteristic-vowel in \nforming the tenses, in the Aor, and Fut Pass, and in the Perf. \nand Plup. Mid. or Pass, (also in the verb, adj.), unite the tense- \nendings &rjv, {Aai, etc. to the tense -forms by inserting o- 130), \ne g. \n\nTe\\\xe2\x82\xac-<r-^(rOjWot i-re-reXf-ff-firjy. \n\n2. Besides these verbs, several others also, which either have \na long characteristic-vowel in the stem, or lengthen the short \ncharacteristic-vowel of the stem in forming the tenses, have the \nsame formation, viz. \n\naKoiwfto hear, Aor. Pass, \'^/co^-or-^i/, Fut. Pass, axov-ff-^a-ofiai, Perf. Mid. \nor Pass. ^Kou-<r-/tot, Plup, riKoii-xr-jxriv, iva{>a>,to kindle; /C6\\\xe2\x82\xaci5\xc2\xab, to command; \nthe Deponent StoTopoKeAevo/iai, to arouse; Kvaia, Kvf]oa, to scratch {K^Kyau-a-\'ficuy \nKcKvri-ff-fiat, iKval-(T-Srt]V, iKvfj-ar-^v) ; Kv\\fo),to roll; Aeuw, to stone {i\\ev-ff-^v, \nPerf. seems to be wanting) ; |t}\xc2\xab, to scrape; iralu, to strike; va\\alu,to wresde \n{ivaXai-tr-^rjv) ; ir\\\xe2\x82\xac\xc2\xab, to sail; vpiu), to saw ; Trralo), to strike against, to stum- \nble; ^aia (poetic), to destroy; <relw, to shake; Sa>, to rain, Aor. Pass. v-<r-^y, \nI was rained upon, Perf. Pass. S-<r-juot {\xe2\x82\xac(^u-(r-/xeVoy, X. Yen. 9, 5), Fut. Sa-ofuu \n(instead of i-<r-^-cr-o/iot) ; <pp4uy to send (only in compounds, e. g. \xc2\xabto-\xc2\xab^., \n4K(p., to lead in), Fut. (pp\'ffa-a, etc., Mid. <f>p^(rofiai, Aor. Pass, itppri-a-^v ; x<^\xc2\xab\xc2\xbb *<* \nheap up (K6x\xc2\xab-o--/ioi, ixd-or-^p) ; xpf^\xc2\xab, ^ give an oracle {Kexpri-ff-ficu, ixp^v \ndvv, ^ 129, Rem. 2) ; xpfw, to anoint [\xc2\xa7 130, (a)] ; rl/aiw, to touch {fi>au-(x-ijuu, \nHippocr.). \n\n\n\nf 131.] VERBS. -\xe2\x80\x94AORIST AND FUTURE PASSIVE WITH (T. 159 \n\n3. The following vary between the regular \'formation and \nthat with o- : \xe2\x80\x94 ^ \n\n7 e i5 \xc2\xab, to cause to taste, Mid. to taste, to enjoy, Perf. Mid. or Pass, yey^vfiai (Eurip.); \n\nbut Aor. Pass, probably iy^v-c^v. Comp. 7\xe2\x82\xaci;/<a, but ytv-a-^eoi/. \nBpdw^ to do, Put. Spdawf etc.; Perf. S^Spwca; Perf. Mid. or Pass. diBpafiai and \n\nSeSpa-a-fxai (Th.) ; Aor. Pass. iSpda^v (Th.). Verbal adjective Spa-ff-ros, \n\nSpa-ff-T^os, \n\nd^pavo), to break in pieces, Perf. Mid. or Pass, rf^pav-ff-fiai (Plat, re^pavfiai) ; \n\nAor. Pass, i^pav-ff-driy. Verbal adjective ^pav-a-rSs. \nKhaloDf Att. K\\ia)y to weep, Perf. Mid. or Pass. KeKAav/xai and KCKXav-a-ficu. \nK\\elu, to shut, Perf. Mid. or Pass. KtKKftfjuu commonly, KiKXei-a-fiat Aristoph.; \n\nK^KKri/jLai Tragedians, Thu., sometimes PI., rarely Xen. ; Aor. Pass. iK\\cl- \n\na-dTjv, Attic ^kKt^-(t-^u (Th.) ; Put. Pass. KAet-<r-,&^(ro/uu. Verbal adjective \n\nfcAci-ff-rrfs, K\\T)-<r-T6s. \nKo\\ovuj to maim, Perf. Mid. or Pass. K\xe2\x82\xacK6\\ovfjuu and KfKoKov-a-ixau ; Aor. \n\nPass. ^KoXov-a-^v and ^KoXoidjiv. \nK pov CO, to strike upon, Verf. Mid. or Pass. Kt/cpou/iai and (seldom) KCKpova-iuu \n\n(X. H. 7. 4, 26) ; Aor. Pass. iKpo{fa-^v. \nvtw, to heap up, Put. vii<ra>y etc. ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, vci/tj/wu {yfyrj-tr-fxcu doubt- \nful) ; but Aor. Pass, ivii-cr-^v CArrian). Verbal adjective vrtr6s. \nveu (collateral form yijdw),to spin, Perf. Mid. or Pass. viin)-<T-nai\', but Aor. \n\nPass. iirf)^v. Verbal adjective intr6s. \ny^iw, to rub, Perf. Mid. or Pass, fi^^iat and ?\xc2\xbb^-<r-/Mu; Aor. Pass, ^i/^^v and \n\ni}^-<r-^y (instead of which the Attic writers use (rlrqyfuu, f\\\\r{ix^y from \n\nff}Xo>) \n\n4. The following verbs assume o- in the Aor. Pass., but not \nin the Perf : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nfiifiyi}ffKa> (MNA-n), to remind, Pf. fiefiyrifiat, I remember, A. P. ifitrfi-a-bTiv \nirvcu, to blow, X(irvvfmi (poet.) ivytv-a-^y \n\nXpdofjLca (xf\xc2\xab/\xc2\xab\xc2\xab)) utor, KtxpVfJMi ixp^\'^\'^^ \n\nitavot, to cause to cease, tojinish, xeVou/io* iirav-or-^y \n\nand iirav^riv, iroi/.^<ro/ta . Ion. and Th. Verbal adjective irav-tr-rios. \n\n5. The follouang verbs, though they retain the short charac- \nteristic-vowel in the Perf and Aor. Pass., do not assume <r : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nIxm, Stva, \\vu [^ 130 (b), 2], iXiLoy [\xc2\xa7 130 (c)], alyiu, aiptu, Uu [Hj 130 (d), 2], \niLp6u> [S 130 (e)], xe\xc2\xab [\xc2\xa7 154, Rem. 1], <rcu\xc2\xab, to excite (\xc2\xa7 230) \n\n\n\n160 \n\n\n\ntJNCONTRACTED AND CONTRACT VERBS. \n\n\n\n132-134. \n\n\n\nParadigms op Puke Vbbbb. \n\nA. Uncontracted Pure Verbs. \n\n\xc2\xa7 132. (a) without a- in the Mid. and Pass. \n\n\n\nKi^xiiw, to hinder. ACTIVE. | \n\n\nPres. \n\n\nk(d\\v-o) Perf. \n\n\nKe-K^-\\v-Ka \n\n\nPut. \n\n\nKwKt-crw \n\n\nAor. \n\n\ni-K(i>\\v-(ra \n\n\nMIDDLE. 1 \n\n\nPres. \n\n\nKW\\t-OlJLai \n\n\nPerf. \n\n\nKf-K<ll)\\v-fiai \n\n\nPut. \n\n\nKuXv-aoficu 1 Aor.\' \n\n\ni-KvKO-cd- \n\n\nPASSIVE. 1 \n\n\nAor. \n\n\ni-KwXv-difiv \n\n\nPut. \n\n\nKtt\\v-^(rofJuu. 1 \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 133. (b) with <r in the Mid. and Pass. (\\ 131). \n\n\n\nPerf. S.l. \n\n\nK\xe2\x82\xac-K4\\ev-<r-fiai \n\n\nImperative. \n\n\nInfinitive. \n\n\nMid. -2. \n\n\nKe-KcXev-ffai \n\n\nKi-KfkfV-ffO \n\n\nKf-KfXiV-C^XU \n\n\nor 3. \n\n\n/C6-KeAeu-(r-Tot \n\n\nKe-Kf\\\xe2\x82\xacv-a^w \n\n\nParticiple. \n\n\nPass. 1. \n\n\nK\xe2\x82\xac-Ke\\\xe2\x82\xacv-(r\'/xf^ov \n\n\n\n\nInd. D.2. \n\n\nK\xe2\x82\xac-K\xe2\x82\xac\\eV-a^OV \n\n\nK\xe2\x82\xac-Kf\\(V-<r^V \n\n\nKf\'Ke\\(v-<T-fi(ros \n\n\n3. \n\n\nKe-Kc\\ev-(r^ov \n\n\nKf-KfXfv-ff^uy \n\n\nSubjunctive. \n\n\nP. 1. \n\n\nK\xe2\x82\xac-K\xe2\x82\xac\\\xe2\x82\xacV-<T-IJ.e^a \n\n\n\n\nK(-Kf\\ev-<r-fi(yos 2> \n\n\n2. \n\n\n/ce-KcAeu-flrd^e \n\n\n/CC-*t\xe2\x82\xac\\\xe2\x82\xacU-0\'(^e \n\n\n\n\n3. \n\n\nK\xe2\x82\xac-Ke\\\xe2\x82\xacv-<r-fji.\xe2\x82\xacvoi cl<rl{v) \n\n\nKe-KeXfi-a^ffoi \n\n\n/ or K(-K(\\ev-ffbuv\'\\ \n\n\nPlupf. \xe2\x80\x9e , \nMid. or ^- l- \n\n\ni-Ke-Ke\\\xe2\x82\xacv-(r-firjv D. i-K\xe2\x82\xac-Ke\\\xe2\x82\xac6-<r-fJLi^ov P. \n\n\ni-K\xe2\x82\xac-Kf\\ru-<r-nfba \n\n\nPass. i\' \n\n\ne-Ke-K4\\\xe2\x82\xacv-cro " i-Kf-K4\\\xe2\x82\xacv-c^oy " \n\n\ni-K(-K\xe2\x82\xac\\fV-<rb\xe2\x82\xac \n\n\nInd. ^\xe2\x80\xa2 \n\n\ni-K\xe2\x82\xac-K4\\ev-Cr-T0 " i-K\xe2\x82\xac-Kf\\(V-<r^V " \n\n\nK(-K(\\fv-<T-fi(yoi ^ffay \n\n\nOpt. \n\n\nK\xe2\x82\xac-Ke\\\xe2\x82\xacV-<r-fJL4v05 iXr\\v \n\n\n\n\nAorist Pass. \n\n\ne-K\xe2\x82\xacKev-(r-^v Future Pass. k(\\ \n\n\nfv-ff-^aofitu. \n\n\n\nB. Contract Pure Verbs. \n\n$ 134. Preliminary Remarks. \n\n1. The characteristic of contract pure verbs is either a, \xe2\x82\xac, or o {S 127) ; the^e \nare contracted with the mode-vowel following. The contraction, which is made \naccording to the rules stated above (\xc2\xa7 9, 1.), belongs only to the Pres. and \nImpf. Act. and Mid., because in these two tenses only is the characteristic- \nvowel followed by another vowel. The Paragogic v in the third Pers. Sing. \nImpf Act. disappears in the contraction. On the tense-formation, see H \n129-131. \n\n\n\n? 134.] PRELIMINARY REMARKS. 16J \n\n2. The contract forms of verbs in -(\xc2\xa3\xc2\xab in the Indicative and Subjunctive are \nthe same ; contracts in -6(0 have the same form for the second and third Pers. \nSing, in the Indie. Opt. and Subj. viz. -o7s, -o7. \n\n3. The contracted Infinitive of verbs in -cL\xc2\xbb, which, in onr editions of the \nclassics, is more commonly written with\xc2\xaban Iota Subscript, is without that letter \nin the ancient inscriptions, being contracted from -a*y, e. g. rifiay, not rifi^y. \n\n4. If only one syllable follows the parenthesis in the paradigm, the termina- \ntion of the uncontracted form is the last syllable in the parenthesis, and the \nsyllable after the parenthesis is the termination of the contracted form, e. g. \nrtfi{<i-w)u = rifidw, ri/iu, rifi(d-fiv)ay = ri^idfiv, rifia.y\\ but if more than one \nsyllabic follows the parenthesis, the syllabic, or syllables, after the last hyphen \nis the common ending of the contract and uncontracted forms, the uncontracted \nword embracing all the letters of the form except the vowel after the parea- \nthesis ; the contract, all without the parcnthesiji \n\n\n\nu* \n\n\n\n162 \n\n\n\nPARADIGMS OF CONTRACT VERBS. \n\n\n\n[^ 135 \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 135. Paradig^ns of \n\n\n\nACTIVE. \n\n\n\xc2\xbb 1 \nlit \n\n0* \n\nIndioa- \n\ntive, \n\n\nS s \n\na g s \n3 * s \n\n\nPresent. \n\n\nCharacteristic a. \n\n\nCharacteristic \xe2\x82\xac. \n\n\nCharacteristic o. \n\n\nS. 1. \n\n2. \n\n3. \nD.l. \n\n2. \n\n3. \nP. 1. \n\n2. \n\n3. \n\n\nTi^(a-w)\xc2\xab, to honor, \n\nTifi{d-e)a-70V \n\nrifJ.{d-\xe2\x82\xac)a-Tov \n\nTiix(d-o)co-fJ.\xe2\x82\xacV \n\nTifj.{d-e)a-T\xe2\x82\xac \n\nTiix{d-ov)co-(n{v) \n\n\n^tA{\xe2\x82\xac-et)et \n0tX(c-e)\xe2\x82\xac?-Toi/ \n^tA(e-o)oC-^\xe2\x82\xacV \n^tA{\xe2\x82\xac-ou)oy-<rt(i\') \n\n\n\xe2\x80\xa2iiad{6-(i})a>, to let, \nfit(T^{6-fis)o7s \n\nfll(T^{6-e)0V-T0V \nHUT^(6-0)0V-fJi\xe2\x82\xacV \n\nfii<T^{6^v)ov-<ri{y) \n\n\nSub- \njunc- \ntive, \n\n\nS. 1. \n\n2. \n\n3. \nD.l. \n\n2. \n\n3. \nP. 1. \n\n2. \n\n3. \n\n\nTifJL{d-a>)c!} \n\nTiix{d-T)s)as \n\nriiJ.{d-ri)\xc2\xa7 \n\nrifi{d-ri)a-TOU \n\nTl[J.{d-7f)a-T0V \n\nTt/i(a-w)(i-/iev \n\nrifi(d-r})a-Te \n\nTiiJ.{d-ai)co-(ri{v) \n\n\n- 1-H \n\n3 \n\n1 \n\n\n^iA(e-w)ctf \n\n<J!>tA(\xe2\x82\xac-T7s)^J \n\n\xc2\xabj>t\\(e-T7)7; \n\n<pi\\{4-\'n)ri-rov \n<pi\\[4-ri)ri-Toy \n<pi\\{4-w)uf-fi\xe2\x82\xacy \n\n<jt)(\\(e-\xc2\xab)(i-(Tj(i\') \n\n\nfii(T^(^s)o7s \n\nHie ^{6-ri)M-Toy \nfji.<r^(6-7i)a>-roy \npit(r^{6\'u)o)-fifv \n4u<r(^( <J-rj)\xc2\xab-Tc \nfii(r^{6-co)ci-<ri(y) \n\n\nImpera- \ntive, \n\n\nS.2. \n\n3. \nD.2. \n\n3. \nP. 2. \n\n3. \n\n\nTlix{a-e)a \n\nTifi(a-4)d-T(i} \n\nri/ji{d-e)a-TOV \n\nTifi{a-4)d-T(i}v \n\nri(x(d-\xe2\x82\xac)a-T\xe2\x82\xac \n\nriix{a-4)d-Tw(Tav, or \n\n7ilJ,(a-6)w-inct>u \n\n\n(pi\\{e-\xe2\x82\xac)\xe2\x82\xact \n<pi\\((-4)\xe2\x82\xacl-r6o \n<pi\\(4-()(7-rov \n<pi\\(\xe2\x82\xac-4)\xe2\x82\xaci-r{i}y \n\n(pl\\{4-()\xe2\x82\xac7-T\xe2\x82\xac \n\n(pi\\(e-4)\xe2\x82\xacl-ro><ray or \n<pi\\(\xe2\x82\xac-6)ov-vrb)y \n\n<pi\\(4-eiy)fti\' \n\n\nIJU(rb{o-4)ov-r(i) \n/it<r^( 6-f )ov-Toy \nfu(r^(o-4)ov-T(Dy \n\nHi(T^{ 0-4 ) ov-rtacay \nor iJU(Tb(o-6)ov-yTwy \n\n\nInfin. \n\n\n\n\nTifx(d-eiv)av \n\n\nfii<r^(6\'fiy)ovy \n\n\nPartici- \nple, \n\n\nNom. \nGen. \n\n\nTiix(d-(i}v)wv \n\nTi/i{d-ov)oi}-(ra \n\nrifJL{d-ov)Siv \n\nri[jL{d-o)u-vT05 \n\nTi(jL(a-ov)w-<Tris \n\n\n</)iA( 6-0)1/) oil\' \n\n<pi\\{4-ov)ov-(ra \n\n<pi\\{4-ov)ovy \n\n(pi\\{4-o)ov-yros \n\n(pi\\(f-ov)ov-<njs \n\n\nfiicrb^{6-<i)y)wy \n\nfu<Tb(6-ov)ov-a\'a \n\nfU(T^(6-ov)ovy \n\nfllff^(6-0)0V-VT0S \n\nfu<rb{o-ov)ov-(nts. \n\n\nImperfect. \n\n\nIndica- \ntive, \n\n\nS. 1. \n\n2. \n\n3. \nD.l. \n\n2. \n\n3. \nP. 1. \n\n2. \n\n3. \n\n\nirliJL{a-ov)(av \niTlix{a-es)as \neTt;it(o-e)a \n\niTifjL{d-e)a-Tov \niTtn(a-4)d-Tr)v \n\niTlfi(d-o)w-[i\xe2\x82\xacU \n\niTifA,{d-e)a-Te \niTifJi,(a-oy)a}v \n\n\ni(pi\\(e-ov)ovv \n6<^(A(e-e)ct \n\n\xe2\x82\xac^tA(\xe2\x82\xac-\xe2\x82\xac)er-TOI\' \ni<pl\\((-4)fi-TTJV \n\ni(pi\\(4-o)ov-fiev \n\ni<pl\\{4-\xe2\x82\xac)\xe2\x82\xac7-T\xe2\x82\xac \n\n,i<plK(e-ov)ovv \n\n\n4fju<r^{o-oy)ovy \nifjLl(r^(o-e5)ovs \nilM(r^{o-e)ov \n\nifu<r^( 6-e ) ov^oy \n4fua-^{o-4)ov-rriy \nitii(Tb(6-o)ov-fi\xe2\x82\xacy \n\nifjiia^(o-ov)ovy \n\n\n\nk 135.] \n\n\n\nPARADIGMS OF CONTRACT VERBS. \n\n\n\n163 \n\n\n\nContract Verbs. \n\n\n\n\n\nMIDDLE. \n\n\n\n\nPresent. \n\n\n\n\nCharacteristic, o. \n\n\nCharacteristic c. \n\n\nCharacteristic o. \n\n\n\n\nrifi(d-o)u-fJMi \n\n\n^jA( \xc2\xab-o)oD-/xax \n\n\nfll<T^(6-0)0V-ljLai \n\n\n\n\nrifjL(d\'T]}^ \n\n\n<f>i\\{4-i^)fi \n\n\nHt(r^(6--p)oi \n\n\n\n\nTJ/x((\xc2\xa3-\xe2\x82\xac)a-Tai \n\n\n<t>i\\((-()(T-Tat \n\n\nfn<r^{6-\xe2\x82\xac)ov-Tai \n\n\n\n\nTifjL(a-6)u-fji(boy \n\n\n<Pl\\ ( \xe2\x82\xac-0 ) OU-/X\xe2\x82\xacd^OV \n\n\nfiia^{o-6)ov-ix(^oy \n\n\n\n\nTifi{d-()a-a^ov \n\n\n<pi\\((-()(7-<r^oy \n\n\n/u(r3-( o\'-cjoC-trdov \n\n\n\n\nTtfjL{d-f)a-(r^ot> \n\n\n<pi\\{f-()c7-<Tdoy \n\n\nfJH<rd(6-()ov-crboy \n\n\n\n\nTifi{a-6}(i-fifda \n\n\nipi\\(f-6)ov-fi(da \n\n\ntu<rd{o-6)ov-ti(da \n\n\n\n\nTifi{d-()a-(r^e \n\n\n<piK{(-f)(7-ffd\xe2\x82\xac \n\n\nfn<r.^(<J-\xe2\x82\xac)ou-o\'3\xc2\xab \n\n\n\n\nTifi(d-o)u-yTcu \n\n\n<f>i\\(\xc2\xab-o)ov-yrcu \n\n\n/ii<r^(6-o)ov-yTcu \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n<Pl\\((-w)o^fJLCU \n\n\nfjii<rd(6-w)ci>-fuu \n\n\n\n\nriix{d-T))q. \n\n\n\n\n<plk{(-p)T) \n\n\ntinTd(6-yi)o7 \n\n\n\n\nriiJL(d-r})a-Tcu \n\n\n\n\n<pi\\((-r})yj-rai \n\n\nfU(Td{6-rj)a>-rai \n\n\n\n\nrifi{a-w) at-fifbov \n\n\n\n\n^i\\{f-u)u-fi(doy \n\n\nfii<rb(o-(i>)u-fifboy \n\n\n\n\nrifi{d-rj)a-<T^oy \n\n\nfo \n\n\n<pi\\(f-r))ri-adoy \n\n\nfuad(6-rf )ii-aboy \n\n\n\n\nTifji{d-rt)a-<rdoy \n\n\n\n\n<pi\\{4-ri)ri-<Tdoy \n\n\n/juod(6-r] )u-<r^oy \n\n\n\n\nTin{a-c!i)u>-/j,f^a \n\n\n\xc2\xbb \n\n\n<fn\\{(-w)(i>-utda \n\n\nfil<T^( 0-w)ci>-flf^ \n\n\n\n\nrifjL{d-ri)a-<Tdf \n\n\n5\' \n\n\n^iA(<\'-7j)7j-(r3\xc2\xab \n\n\nfiiab(6-rj)(ii}-a^\xe2\x82\xac \n\n\n\n\nrtfi{d-w)ci-vrcu \n\n\n\n\n^i\\(t-w)\xc2\xbb-yrai \n\n\nfiur^(6\'v)v-yrcu \n\n\n\n\nTifJi(d-ov)w \n\n\n^i\\{f-ov)ov \n\n\nfii(r^(6-ou)ov \n\n\n\n\nTifi{a-t)d abxi> \n\n\n^n\\(t-4)(i-(rb<ii \n\n\nfii<T^(0\'t j ov-<T^a> \n\n\n\n\nrifi{d-f)a.c^oy \n\n\n^i\\(4-t)t7-ffdoy \n\n\nfua^( 6-t )ov-<T^oy \n\n\n\n\nrift(a-()d-<rbwy \n\n\n^i\\{t-4)fl-adoiy \n\n\nfuffd(o-4)oi^-arduy \n\n\n\n\nTiiJL{d-\xc2\xab)a-<rd( \n\n\n<f>iK(4-t)t7-ad\xc2\xab \n\n\nfAiad(6-()ov-<rdt \n\n\n\n\nTifi{a-\xc2\xab)d-<Tdu)<Tay, or \n\n\n<pi\\{f-f)fl-iTb<i><ray, Of \n\n\nfjiiad(o-()ov-(r^eo<ray, or \n\n\n\n\nriiJ.(a-t]d-(Td<M>y \n\n\n(pi\\{e-t)fi-<Tdwy \n\n\nfiier^{n-()ov-advy \n\n\n\n\nTi/x{<i-\xc2\xab)a-<ri^ou \n\n\ntf\'. 0.1 \n\npt\\(t-6 jov-fityos \n\n\n\n\nTtn{a-6)<t>-n(vo$ \n\n\nfiiafi(u-6 )ov-fi(yos \n\n\n\n\nTifji{a-o)<i>-n(yri \n\n\n<fn\\(*-o)ov-n4yTf \n\n\nfiur^(o-o)ov-fi(yrj \n\n\n\n\nTKu(a-6)<\xc2\xbbffji\xc2\xabyoy \n\n\n<f>iX{f-6)ov-fi\xc2\xabyoy \n\n\nfiiad{o^)ov-fifyoy \n\n\n\n\nTtfi{a-o)<D-tityov \n\n\n<pi\\{f-o)ov-fjLtyov \n\n\nfuab(o-o)oi/-fji(yov \n\n\n\n\nrifi{a-o)(i>-fi(yrft \n\n\n\xc2\xabpi\\((-o )ovfi4yrii \n\n\nfiitrb ( 0-0 )oi/-/x\xc2\xab\'n7r. \n\n\n\n\nImperfect. \n\n\n\n\n\n\n^TI/x(o-({)w-/ll7J\xc2\xbb\' \n\n\n4^i\\{*-6)ov-fX7iy \n\n\n4fiiad{o-6)ov-fiijy \n\n\n\n\n4r^|x(d^ov)w \n\n\n4^i\\((-ov)ov \n\n\n4fLiad{6-ov)ov \n\n\n\n\n^T\xc2\xbb/i(\xc2\xab(-e)a-TO \n\n\n4<pt\\{4-()(7-TO \n\n\n4fjiia-d{6\'f)ov-7o \n\n\n\n\niTi/x{a-6)u-fi(doy \n\n\nf(pi\\{ (-6)ov-fi(boy \n\n\n4ni<Td {o-6) ov-fit^op \n\n\n\n\niTin{d-()a-(r^oy \n\n\n4^iX(4-f)t7-aboy \n\n\n4fiKT^( 6-( )ov-a^oy \n\n\n\n\niTiiJ.(a-4)d-a^v \n\n\ni<piK(f4)fi-<Tdjjy \n\n\n4fi.tcb{o-4)ov-<rb7iy \n\n\n\n\nt Ti^.( u-6 ) al-/,tCi^a \n\n\n4<t>i\\(f-6)ov-fx(i^a \n\n\n4fn<rb{ 0-6 ) ov-fif^a \n\n\n\n\nirtfi^d f )a-<rdc \n\n\niifnK{4-f}(7-a^( \n\n\n4fjLiad{6-()ov-<rdf \n\n\n\n\nirtfAik o)(v-yro \n\n\n4<pi\\(4-o)ov-yro \n\n\n4fii<T^{6-o)ov-yro \n\n\n\n164 \n\n\n\nPARADIGMS OF CONTRACT VERBS. \n\n\n\n[f 136. \n\n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 136. With short Vowel \n\n\n\nTenses. \n\n\n\nPresent, \n\nImperfect, \n\nPerfect, \n\nPluperfect, \n\nFuture, \n\nAorist, \n\n\n\nAorist, \n\n\n\nACTIVE. \n\n\n\nCharacteristic o. \n\n\n\n<nr{d-(a)a, to draWy \ne(rir(a-ov)a>v \n\ni<Tira.K\xe2\x82\xaciv \n\nffiraffO) \n\ni(nra.<ra \n\n\n\ne<rird-<r-^r]v \n\n\n\nCharacteristic 6. \n\n\n\nT\xe2\x82\xacA.(\xe2\x82\xac-\xc2\xab)cD, tocom- \n^\xe2\x82\xacA.( i-ov)ovv\\pl\xe2\x82\xacte, \n\nT\xe2\x82\xacTeA.\xe2\x82\xacKa \n\neTeTeXc/ceu/ \n\nTeAw \n\neTe\\\xe2\x82\xac(ro \n\n\n\nCharacteristic o. \n\n\n\nap{ i-w )w,to plough, \n\n1^p(o-oy)ovy \n\nap-r\\poKa \n\nap-r)p6K(tv \n\nap6cu \n\nfjpoffa \n\n\n\nPAS \n\n\n\nire\\4-a-^r}v | 7)p6^y \n\n\n\nVerbal adjectives : (nra-tr-Tfos, -reo, -tcW \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 136.] \n\n\n\nPARADIGMS OF CONTRACT VERBS. \n\n\n\n165 \n\n\n\na \n1 \n\n1 \n\n\nImpeTfect. \n\n\nCharacteristic a. \n\n\nCharacteristic c. \n\n\nCharacteristic o. \n\n\n\n\nTifi(a-oi)(^-fi7\\y \n\nrifji(d-oi)<f-o \n\nrifi[d-oi)(j)-TO \n\nrifi{a-ol)tf-fjLf^oy \n\nrifi(d-oi)^-<T^oy \n\nriiJ.{a-oi}<p-(r^y \n\nTi/4(<\xc2\xa3-o\xc2\xbb)y-(ri^\xe2\x82\xac \nTifi(d-oi)^-yTO \n\n\n^i\\{f-oi)oi-yLi\\y \n\n(piK{4-oi)o7-o \n\n<pi\\{4-oi)o7-TO \n\n<(>i\\{\xe2\x82\xac-ol)oi-ti\xe2\x82\xac^oy \n\n<fn\\{4-oi)o7-(r^oy \n\n<pi\\{f-oi)ol-a^y \n\n(pi\\(f-oi)oi-tifba \n\n<l>i\\(4-oi)o7-(rl^f \n\ntpi\\{4-oi)o7-yTO \n\n\nfu<r^{o-oi)ol-firjy \n\nfU(T^{6-Ol)o7-0 \n\nfU(r.^(d-oi)o?-TO \nfiia^i o-ol)oi-fif^oy \nfjua^ ( 6-01 ) o7-ado\xc2\xbb \n/u<r^{o-oi)oi-<r^y \nfu<Td( o-oi)oi-fiida \nfiia^l 6-oi)o7-<rd\xe2\x82\xac \nfjiUTd(6-oi)o7-yro \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\xe2\x96\xa0 \n\n\n\n\n\n\nTtrifirifuu \n\n\n\xe2\x96\xa0Wt<fti\\j)fUU \n\n\nfjLffda^wficu \n\n\n\n\nirtTifiiffirjy \niir\xc2\xabp(i)pd^r}y \n\n\niti^Oj\\fi.r\\y \n\n\n^HfHia^ufiriy \n\n\n\n\nrtfi-fttrofMcu ^piffofioi \n\n\n^iX\'i)aofuu \n\n\ntmrbtaMroficu \n\n\n\n\niTip.ri<rdfiriy i^paurdfirjy \n\n\ni<pi\\r}ad^rfy \n\n\nifua^wadtmy \n\n\n\n\nrtTifA\'f}aofuu iTf^pAcro^icu, irt<pi\\4\\ffOfiau \n\n\nfif/jLta^wa-ofiat \n\n\nSIVE. \n\n\n1 Future, | rtfiri^ffofuu ^pd^ffo^uu J ^iXrt^cofuu \\ fuabxa^aofuu \n\n\n<pi\\rf-r(os, -Tt\'o, -T(oy, fiKTbu-Tfos, -rtUt -riov. \n\n\n\nin forming the Tenses. \n\n\n\nMIDDLE. \n\n\n\nCharacteristic \n\n\n\n<nr(<i-o)a>-/iai \n\ni<Tir{a-6)<M>-firiy \n\nHffira-a-fiai \n\n4(nrd-<r-fir}y \n\n<nra.(Tonai \n\n4(nraad^iriy \n\n\n\nCharacteristic \n\n\n\nT\xe2\x82\xac>\xc2\xbb (-o)ov-HCU \n\n4Tf\\{e-6)ov-fn)y \n\nr(T4\\f-<r-fiai \n\nirtr(K4-<r-lii\\y \n\nTfXOVfdXU \n\nIrtKiadfiny \n\n\n\nCharacteristic o. \n\n\n\nap(6-o)ov-^i \n\nr)p(o-6)ov-fXT]y \n\nkp-\'{}fH>fiau \n\nap-rip6nT]y \n\nap6aofjMi \n\nTfpoadfii]y \n\n\n\ns I V ]\xe2\x80\xa2: . \n\n\n1 Future, | <rTa-<r-d^(ro/tai | r\xc2\xabX.f-<r-^\'fjaofiai \n\n\napo^ffofuu 1 \n\n\nre\\(-(r-r(os, -4a., -4oy^ ipo-r4os, -4a^ -toy. 1 \n\n\n\n166 REMARKS ON THE CONJ. OF CONTRACT VERBS. [^ 137 \n\nRemark. On the formation of the Perf. and Aor. Pass, with <r, see \xc2\xa7\xc2\xa7 130. \n131 ; on the omission of the <r in afyftpofiai, ripo^^, see \xc2\xa7 131, 5 ; and on the Attifc \nReduplication in ap-hpojxai, see k 124, 2. The further inflection of effira-a-fiai, \ni<rird-<r-H7]v, TereKe-ff-fiai, iT\xe2\x82\xacTe\\4-<T-fir]v, is like that of K\xe2\x82\xacK4\\\xe2\x82\xacv-(r-fx.ai, \xc2\xa7 133. On \nthe Attic Fut., reKeffu = reAw, -eTs, etc., reXearof^ai = Te\\ovfiai, rcAp [e*], \netc., see \xc2\xa7 117. \n\n$ 137. Remarks on the Conjugation of Contract \n\nVerbs. \n\n1. The Attic dialect omits contraction only in the cases mentioned under \n4 9. Rem. 3 ; but verbs in -e\xc2\xab with a monosyllabic stem, e. g. \xe2\x96\xa0jrA.ew, to sail, \xe2\x96\xa0jrveWf \nto blow, ^4w, to i-un, etc. are uniformly uncontracted, except in the syllable -\xc2\xab \n(from -eei or -ee), e. g. \n\nAct. Pr. Ind. TrXew, ir\\e7s, irKet, ir\\eofi\xe2\x82\xacV, ttXcztc, \'ir\\4ov(ri{v), \n\nSubj. irAeco, TrAeps, ttAct;, irXeafiey, TrAeijre, 7rAe\xc2\xab(rt(j\'), \n\nImp. TrAe?. Inf. irAeli\'. Part. TrAewv. \nImpf. Ind. cTTAeor, eirXeis, cTrAet, iirKeofieUf eirAeTTe, cTrAeoi\'. \n\nOpt. irXeoifii, ir\\4ots, etc. \nMid. Pr. Ind. irXcofiai, ttAct?, irAerrot, irAecJ/ieS-ov, 7rA\xe2\x82\xacro\'3^oj\', etc. \n\nInf. irAeia^ai. Taxt. v\\e 6 fieyos. Impf. iir\\\xe2\x82\xac 6 firj v. \n\n2. The verb Sea;, to bind, is commonly contracted in all the forms, particu- \nlarly in compounds, e. g. rh Sovy, rod Sovyros, diaSovfiai, KareSovy, But Se?, it \nis necessary, and Seofjiai, to need, follow the analogy of verbs in -ew, with a \nmonosyllabic stem, e. g. tJ> 5eoj/, Seofiai, BeTir^ai; uncontracted forms of deofiai \noccur, instead of those contracted into -e i, e. g. Seerot, Seea-^ai, iSeero, Xen., \nand sometimes also forms of other verbs belonging here are uncontracted, e. g. \niTTAcej/, X. H. 6. 2, 27 ; irAeet, Th. 4, 28 5 ffvvix^ev, PI. Rp. 379, e. \n\n3. Several verbs deviate in contraction from the general rules, e. g. \n\n(a) -oe, -act, -07;, are contracted into -?? and -p, instead of into -a and -9, e. g. \nC(<i- w^ \xc2\xab, to live, Cys, -0, -^tov, -^^re, Inf. ^j/. Imp. Cv, Impf. eCwK, -tjj, \n-?j, -TjTcr/, -^TTjj/, -Tjre; \xe2\x80\x94 iret \xc2\xbb\'(\xc2\xab\xc2\xa3-\xc2\xab) u, to hunger, Inf. iretj\'^j/, etc. ; \xe2\x80\x94 St\xc2\xbb|\'- \n({{-w)<\xc2\xab, to thirst, Si^pijs, etc. Inf. Sti//ij>/; \xe2\x80\x94 Ky(d-)w, to scratch, Inf. Kyrjy; \n\xe2\x80\x94 (TfM{d-o) a, to smear, Inf. fffirjy] \xe2\x80\x94 ^{d-a) \xc2\xab, to rub, Inf. ^^j\'j \xe2\x80\x94 xp (\xc2\xab-<>) \nw-fiai, to use, xpVi XPVTai, xpvo\'^at] so airoxpoifiai, to have enough, \nOTToxp^o\'S^at ; \xe2\x80\x94 a\'ir6xpV (abridged from airoxpp), \xc2\xabi suffices, Inf airoxfynvy \nImpf avexpr] ] \xe2\x80\x94 % P (<^ \xe2\x96\xa0 \'^l \xc2\xab\xc2\xbb ^0 5\'^^\'^ an oracle, to prophesy, XPV^> XPV^ ?CPW\' \nb) -00 and -oe are contracted, as in the Ionic, into -\xc2\xab, instead of into -ov, and \n-(^77 into -(f, instead of into -o7, e. g. ^t7((^-\xc2\xab)w, to freeze, Inf ^i7wj\' \n(Aristoph., but ^t7oCi/, X. Cy. 5. 1, 11), Part. G. ^lywyros (Aristoph., but \n^lyoiyrwy, X. H. 4. 5, 4), and [ny&aa (Simon, de muUer. 26), Subj. ^ly^ \n(PI. Gorg. 517, d.), Opt. piyt^n (Hippocr.). \n\nRemark 1. The Ionic verb iBp6<a,to sweat, corresponds in respect to con- \ntraction with piy6w, to freeze, though with an opposite meaning: ihpSiffi^ \n^p4Wt IBpSxxa, ISptoyres, \n\n\n\n$ 138.] FORMATION OP THE TENSES OF IMPURE VERBS. 167 \n\n4. The following things are to be noted on the nse of the Attic forms of the \nOpt. in -riv (\xc2\xa7 116, 8), viz. in the Sing., especially in the first and second person, \nof verbs in -ew and -6uf the form in -olrjv is far more in use than the common \nform, and in verbs in -du it is used almost exclusively ; but in the Dual and \nPI. the common form is more in use. The third Pers. PL has always the \nshorter form, except that Aeschin., 2, \xc2\xa7 108, Bekk., uses SoKolrja-av. \n\n5. The verb \\ovu), to wash, though properly not a contract, admits contrac- \ntion in all the forms of the Impf Act. and of the Pres. and Impf Mid., which \nhave -6 or -o in the ending, e. g. \xe2\x82\xac\\ov instead of eAoue. i\\ov/x\xe2\x82\xacv instead of i\\oi- \nofiev, Mid. Kov/xai (Xoex, Aristoph. Nub. 835. according to MSS.), \\ovrai, etc., \nImp. \\ovy Inf. \\ov<r^aiy Impf. eXov/xTji\', 4\\ovy 4\\ovto, etc., as if from the stem \nAOEn ; still, uncontracted forms are found, e. g. Xovofiaif iKovovro (Xen.). \n\nRem. 2. On the change of the accent in contraction, see \xc2\xa7 30, 2. \n\n\n\nn.FORMATION OF THE TeNSES OF ImFUBE VbRBS. \n\n$ 138. General Remarks. \nPure and Impure Stem. \xe2\x80\x94 Theme. \n\n1. Impure verbs (^ 127, II.) undergo a variety of changes in \nthe stem. In the first place, the stem of the verb is strength- \nened : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) Either by an additional consonant, e. g. t^it-t-w, stem TTII ; Kpo^-w, stem \nKPAr ; (ppdCuy stem *PAA ; and even by inserting an entii-e syllable, e. g. \nafiapr-dv-Uy Stem \'AMAPT ; \n\n(b) Or by lengthening the stem-vowel, e. g. ^e^y-w, stem *Yr; \\^.^-\xc2\xab, stem \nAA0 ; r-i]K-(a, stem TAK ; \n\n(c) Or secondly there is a change of the stem-vowel in some of the tenses ; \nthis change may be called a Variation (\xc2\xa7 16, 6), e. g. fcA.e7rT-\xc2\xab, \xe2\x82\xac-/cXoir-ij\xc2\xbb\', \nK4-K\\o<p-a ; comp. Eng. ring, rang, rung. \n\n2. The original and simple stem is to be distinguished from \nthe strengthened stem ; the first is called the pure stem, the \nlast, the impure. The Pres. and Impf. commonly contain the \nimpure stem ; the Secondary tenses, when such are formed, and \nspecially the second Aor., contain the pure stem ; the remaining \ntenses may contain either the pure or the impure stem, e. g. \n\n"Pres. T&Tr-T-w, to strike, Aor. II. Pass. e-TuTr-T?;/ \'Eut. Act. rinpot} (rinr-aw) \n" \\dir-w, to leave, " Act. ^-KXtr-ov " " Xci^w (X^iir-ffw) \n\n" crcpdC\'O, to kill, " Pass. ^-(r<|)a7-\'>7V " " cr^d^w {(Ttpdy-trw) \n\n" <palv-a), to show, " " \xc2\xab - ^ a \xc2\xbb/ - tjv " Mid. <p a v-ou/iou \n\n*\xe2\x80\xa2 <p^elp-Wy to dest7-oy, " " 4-<f>^a.p-7}p " Act. ^;^ep-\xc2\xbb. \n\n\n\n-V \n\n\n\n168 IMPURE VERBS. STRENGTHENING OF THE STEM; [i 139 \n\n3. When a form of a verb cannot be derived from the Pres. \ntense in use, another Present is assumed ; this assumed Pres. \nmay be termed the Theme (-^c/xa), and is printed in capitals, \nto distinguish it from the Pres. in actual use ; thus, e. g. fjtcvfa \nis the Pres. in use, ^YVil is the assumed Pres., or the Thtme, \ndesigned merely to form the second Aor., \xe2\x82\xac-<f>vy-ov. \n\n\n\n$ 139. Strengthening of the Stem. \n\n! 1. The stem is strengthened, first, by adding another conso- \nnant to the simple characteristic consonant of the stem, e. g. \n\nrinrrw (twx) , to strike, Aor. XL Pass, i-rtv-riif \n\nrdrru {ray), to arrange, " " i-rAy-tiP \n\nKp<i(w (Kpay),to en/, \'* Act. f-Kpay-ow, \n\n2. Yet the strengthened stem is found only in the Pres. and \nImpf ; in the other tenses the simple stem appears, e. g. \n\nPres. rvwru Impf. (rmrroy Aor. II. Pass, frvrrjr Fut. rvifw (nJrerw). \n\nRemark 1. The characteristic of the pure stem, e. g. w in Tm-n is called \nthe pure characteristic ; that of the impure stem, e. g. \xc2\xabt in t^wt-*, the impure \ncharacteristic \n\n3. The stem of many verbs is strengthened also by length- \nening the short stem-vowel in tlie Pres. and Impf ; this short \nrowel reappears in the second Aor., and in hquid verbs, in the \nFut Thus, \n\na is changed into rj In mute verbs, \n\na " cu in liquid verbs, \n\n\xc2\xab " ct in liquid verbs, \n\nI " ei in mute verbs, \n\nI " i in mute and liquid verbs, \n\nH " in mute and liquid verbs, \n\n" eu in mute verbs, \n\nRem. 2. This strengthening of the stem distinguishes the Impf. Ind. and \nOpt. from the same modes of the second Aor. ; likewise the Pres, Subj. and \nImpf from the same modes of the second Aor., e. g. txpa^ov fg / wryor, Kp^C**^* \ntcpdyoifii, KpdCv Kpdyw, icpd^f Kpdye]^- l\\fivoy tXJirof, Xfivotfu xAr^yu, x.\'\xc2\xbb\xc2\xbb \n}dxo\xc2\xbb, XeTre AJfire. \n\n\n\nc-g \n\n\n. (r-Xd^-or) X4fim \n\n\nu \n\n\n(^ar-i) ^altm \n\n\n(( \n\n\ni^btp-m) ^flpm \n\n\ni( \n\n\n(f-XiT-or) \\fl*m \n\n\ni( \n\n\n{i-rpt$-Jip) rptfim \n\n\nIt \n\n\n(^-^piy-Hr) fp6y^ \n\n\nu \n\n\n(i-^vy-ow) ^vym. \n\n\n\n(( \n\n\nu \n\n\ni-TpAtp-rjv \n\n\nt( \n\n\nu \n\n\n4-<TT pS.(l>-r]y \n\n\n(( \n\n\n(I \n\n\ni-fip&x-vy \n\n\nit \n\n\nC( \n\n\ni-S&p-rjy \n\n\n({ \n\n\n(( \n\n\ni-<rr&\\-riv \n\n\n(t \n\n\ni( \n\n\ni-airdp-ijy \n\n\n(( \n\n\nt( \n\n\ni-(f>bi,p-7jy \n\n\ni( \n\n\nAct. \n\n\ni-rafi-ov. \n\n\n\n^ 140.] VERBS. CHANGE OP THE STEM-VOWEL. 169 \n\n$ 140. Change or Variation of the Stem-vowel. \n\n1. The change or variation of the stem- vowel [k 13S, 1 (c)], \noccurs only in the Secondary tenses, with the exception of a \nfew first Perfects. \n\n2. Most mute and all liquid verbs, with a monosyllabic stem, \nand with c as a stem-vowel, take the vaiiahle a in the second \nAor., e. g. \n\nrpeir-Uy to turn, Aor. 11. Act. e-rpair-ov \n\nK\\iiT-T-Uy to steal, " Pass. ^-kAStt-tji\' \n\nrpe<p-(i), to nourish, \n\n(TTpf(p-u, to turn, \n\nfipex-w, to wet, \n\nUp-o), to flay, \n\narreW-u, to send, \n\n<nr(ip-(D, to sow, \n\n<p^iip-w, to destroy, \n\nTffiy-u, to cut. \n\nThe second Aor. erafiov (from rtfiyct, to cut), is very rare in Attic prose (Th. 1. \' \n81. rdfjicofiev) ; regular ?T\xe2\x82\xac/iov ; the second Aor. 4$p(xw (from /Spf\'xw, to wet), is \npoetic and late ; common form ifipfx^f- The first Act Pass, irpfcp^v (from \nTpeVo)), ibp(<p^u ({T.rp\xe2\x82\xac<pu), i<rrpf<p^v (fr. aTpftfxa), belong more to poetry than \nprose ; iK\\4<p^y (fr. KKf-rrru) Ionic and Eur. Or. 1575 {K\\e<pdeis). Afpte, <nrcfpa), \nand ip^elpu, have no first Aor. Pass. The variable a does not occur in polysyl- \nlables, e. g. f)Yyf\\oy, T/77eATj\xc2\xbb\', &(p(\\oy, riy(p6fn]v. \n\nRemark 1. As this variable vowel distinguishes the Impf. from the second \nAor. Act., e. g. (Tpcirov (Impf.), irpuKov (Aor. II.), in some verbs of this class \n(2, above), whose secon d Aor. A ct, is not in use, the variable vowel does not occur \nin the second Aor. Pass.^Tjiecause that tense cannot be mistaken for the Impf., \nsee \xc2\xa7 141, Rem., e. g. /3 A e\'lr a>, to see, Impf. t-fiXttr-ov, second Aor. Pass, i-fikeir- \n1JV (first Aor. Pass, is wanting); \\fyu, to collect (in compounds), second Aor. \nPass. Kore-Xeyriu, ffvyeXfyrjv (more seldom Aor. I. awektx^t^\'j H^^^X^\'^] ^^\'^^^^ \nthe meaning to say, always iXcx^*\')] so also Xtir-u, to peal, i-Xiir-r\\v (first \nAor. Pass, wanting); ttAck-w, /o 6rq/V/, usually i-irXdK-rjv, but also i-irx4K-7)v \nPlat, (first Aor. Pass. ^nXtx^t\'t Aesch. Eum. 259) ; <px4y-u, to bum, i-<pX(y-r)v \n(more seldom i<px4x^v) ; if\'cyw, to censure, ^-i^ey-^jv, first Aor. Pass, wanting. \n\nRem. 2. The verb itA^ttw, to strike, when uncompounded, retains the tj \nin the second Aor. and second Put. Pass., but when compounded, it takes the \nvariable d; thus, ^-irXrry-Tji/, irXTtyfiaofiat, i^e-vXay-rju, Kare-irXay-rju, iK-TrXdyfj\' \naofiai] CT\\irus, to make rotten, and t^k\xc2\xab, to melt (trans.), also have the variable o; \nhence Perf. (ria-qira, I am rotten, second Aor. Pass, iaairnv, second Fut. Pass. \n<Tairi\\<Toimi ; Fut. ri^^a>, Aor. \xe2\x82\xacTtj|o; second Perf. t^ttiku, Tarn melted; second Aor. \nPass, iraicnv, also first Aor. Pass. ^t^X\'^*\'. 1*1- \'^^^- 61- b., Eur. Supp. 1033. \n\n15 \n\n\n\n170 VERBS. CHANGE OF THE STEM-VOWEL. [f 14D. \n\n3. Liquid verbs with a monosyllabic stem and with \xe2\x82\xac for a \nfstem-vowel, take the variable a, not only in the second Aor., but \n\nalso in the first Perf. Act., in the Perf. Mid. or Pass., and the \n; first Aor. Pass., e. g. \n\n<rT\xe2\x82\xacAA.a>, to send, Tut. <TTe\\-S) Tf. c-ardK-Ka e-ffToX-fuu Aor. *-<rn\xc2\xa3\\-J^r \ntp^eipu, to destroy, Fut. <p^ep-Se Pf. e-<p^ap-Ka f<p^ap-fmi. \n\nThe first Aor. Pass. i<rToi\\^v is poetic ; the first Aor. Pass, of Sepv, mnlptt, \n(p^elpo) is not in use ; but instead of it the second Aor. Pass., thus, iSAprjVy \nia-n-dpyrjVy icp^dpiju. The variable a does not occur in polysyllables, e. g. \n^\'77eA/fa, ^yyeh^v from ayyiXXu, ayfiyepfiai, ^4p^v from ayelpw. Comp. \nNo. 1. \n\n4. Mute verbs, which have c in the final stem-syllable of the \nPres., take the variable o in the second Perf ; but those which \nhave \xc2\xab, take ot; liquid-verbs, which have c or \xc2\xab in this syllable, \ntake o, e. g. \n\nSepKOfjuti (poet.), to see, Se^opjca Sfp*** ^oflay, Seiopa \n\nrpe^u, to nourish, TeTpo<f>a iyflpw, to wake, 4yp^op\xc2\xbb, I awoke, \n\nKe\'nro), to leave, \\e\\onra tfrrfipui, to sow, ^cnropa \n\nvel^a, to persuade, iriiroi^af I trust, <(>^eipcDy to destroy, i<l>^opa poetic, (ec^opica, \nprose). \n\nf Eem. 3. Here are classed the following: anomalous second Perfs. ; ^^ \n\nj (Epic), e^oo^a instead of el^a, to be tcont, dat^fpcu, tlc^wSy Plup. uti^fiy; \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nI \'EIAXi, video, oUa, I know; \xe2\x80\x94 \'EIKXl, eoiKa, to be like, to appear, Plup. 4(pK\xe2\x82\xaciy; \xe2\x80\x94 \n\ncAttw (poet.), to cause to hope, coXira, I hope. Plup. iuXvfip, I hoped ; \xe2\x80\x94 \'EPm, to \n\ndo, eopya, Plup. icapyeiv j \xe2\x80\x94 pijy-wfii, to break, t/J^oryo, I am broken (but on <Hprm, \n\nsee Riem. 2). \n\n5. The following take the variable o in the first Perf also, \ncontrary to the rule in No. 1. \n\nK\\4vTa>, to steal, first Perf. k e/c\\o^o, but Perf. Mid. or Pass. KfK\\\xe2\x82\xac/ifiai (very \nI rare and only poet. K^KKafifjuxi). \n\nI \\4yca, to collect, first Perf. avvelKoxa, i^(l\\oxa]hut Perf. Mid. or Pass. \navvd\\\xe2\x82\xacyi.tcu. \nvcfiTTw, to send, first Verf. v 4 v a fi<f> a] but Perf. ^lid. or Pass, verffifimi. \nTpfirco, to turn, first Perf. T4Tpo<pa (like the second Perf. of rp4<lm, to nourish) j \nand r4Tpcupa ; still, this last form is rare ; the more usual form is rirpo^ \nThe variable a in the Perf. Act. is not found elsewhere, and is probably \nhere used only to distinguish it from rerpoc^ Perf. of Tp4<f>ci. \n\n6. The following mute verbs with a monosyllabic stem, and \nwith \xe2\x82\xac for a stem-vowel, lilve Hqiiid verbs (Xo. 3), take the \nvariable a in the Perf. Mid. or Pass. ; still, the a is not foujid in \nthe first Aor. Pass., as is the case in hquid verbs, e. g. \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 141.] VERBS. REMARKS ON THE SECONDARY TENSES. 171 \n\n<rrp(<f>Ut to turn, f*f. Mid. or Pass, ta-rpafifiai, but first Aor. Pass. i<rTp4<p^r \nrpeKUytotumj " " rerpafifiaij " " irptip^y \n\nTp4<l>a), to nourish, " " Tt^pafinai, " " i!^p4<p^v. \n\nOn K\\firrWf see No. 5. \n\n\n\n$ 141. Remarks on the Secondary Tenses. \n\n1. The Secondary tenses differ from the Primary, partly in wanting the , \ntense-characteristic, and consequently in appending the personal-endings {-oVf j \n\'6firjVf -tiv^ -ijiTOfuu, -a, and -fiy) immediately to the pure characteristic of the \nverb, e. g. \xe2\x82\xac-AJir-oj\', second Aor., but ^-irai5ei/-o--a, first Aor. ; partly, in being \nformed throughout from an unchanged pure verb-stem (except the Perf. which \nprefers a long vowel, see No. 2), e. g. Xelvw, t-Klir-ovy <p(vyu t\'<pvy-ov\\ and \npartly, in taking the ranoWc vowel, e. g. (Trpt\'^w 4-arpd<P\'r)y CTpdi^ -^tro/ieu, \nbut i-ffrpf<^^v (^ 140, 2). \n\n2. The second Perf. either lengthens the short stem-vowel I into i, d into tj, \nand, when it stands after other vowels or p, into d, e. g. \n\nKp<i(w, to cry out, second Aor, t-Kpay-ov second Perf. nt-Kpay-a \n<ppi(r<Tw, to shudder, stem : tPIK (I) " iri-<pplK-a \n\nbdWWf to bloom, Fut. ;^dA.-u\xc2\xbb " Te-,^\\-a; \n\n80, vc\'t^va, XfKrjba from \xe2\x99\xa6AN-\xc2\xab, AA9-\xc2\xab ; or it retains the long vowel or diph- \nthong of the Pres., e. g. irf<pfvya from <^6i>y\xc2\xbb (but second Aor. Act. ^<^D7o\xc2\xbb\'), \nT\xc2\xabTTjKo, fftoypra from t^k\xc2\xab, a-fprw (but second Aor. Pass, irijajv, iatmiv, see \n\n4 140, Rem. 2) ; a short vowel occurs only in the cases referred to in ^ 124, and \n\n5 140, 4. \n\nRemark. Those verbs whose second Aor. Act. could not be distinguished \nfrom the Impf , or at least, only by the quantity of the stem-vowel, have no \nsecond Aor. Act. and Mid., but only the second Aor. Pass., since this last form \nhas a different ending from the Impf, and could not be mistaken for it, e. g. \n\nypi/fxa Impf typwpov A. I. typa^a A. II. Act. want. A. 11. P. ^yputp-nv (A. I. P. does \n\nnot occur in classical writers). \nKKtyct " tK\\lyov *\' I^KXIya " " A. II. P. ^KAfioji/ ( A. I. P. eVAi- \n\nbijy in Aristoph). \n\\^6x\xc2\xab " Hvxoy " ^v^a " " \'\xe2\x99\xa6 ^^\'i^X\'?\'\'. I^\'a^- {^hv^ \n\nAristoph. Nub. 152 [with the variation \'^x*^*^\'] ^^^ often iu the later writers j \nA. I. i^vx^y, Plat.). \n\n3. The following points, also, are to be noted : (a) There is no verb which, \ntogether with the second Aorist, forms the three first Aorists; (b) There is no \nverb which has in use at the same time the second Aor. Act. and Mid. and the \nsecond Aor. Pass. ; but all verbs, which form the second Aor. have either the \nsecond Aor. Act. and Mid. only, or the second Aor. Pass. only. A single \nexception, in regard to both the particulars specified, is seen in the verb Tpeirw^ \nto turn, which has three first Aorists together with three second Aorists : irpairov \n(Ion.), iTpa.v6fXT)v, iTpimfy, \xe2\x82\xacrp(\\l^a (the common form in Attic), drpeypdnriy \n(transitive, e. g. rpr^sur^ax *is <t>vyi)y, to put tofligld), iTpi<pbi]y (used more by the \n\n\n\n172 FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF MUTE-VERBS. [\\ 142 \n\npoets, see \xc2\xa7 140, 2) ; but in compounds, e. g. i-iriTpe<p^vaif Antiph. 4. 126, 4 \n127, 5). \n\nThere are but few exceptions to the statement under (b), since the second \nAor. Act. and Mid. and the second Aor. Pass., occur but rarely, and mostly \nin the poet, dialect, e. g. ervvoy Eur., and irvirriv ; iKXirov and 4?d:Tn]v ; e\\ci(l>^Vy \nand veiy seldom i\\nr6/xr]u. \n\n4. It is rare that a verb has both Aor. forms ; where this is the case, the two \nforms are used under certain conditions, namely : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) The two Aor. forms of the Act. and Mid. have a different meaning, i. e. \nthe first Aor. has a transitive meaning, the second Aor., an intransitive. The \nsame is true of the two forms of the Perf., where they are constructed from the \nsame verb. See \xc2\xa7 249, 2. \n\n(b) The two forms of the Aor. belong either to different dialects, or differ- \nent periods, or to different species of literature, prose or poetry. Still, in some \nverbs, both forms occur even in prose, e. g. aTrrjWdx^v, and usually lirTjAAaTTj*\', \nB\\a(p^mi and ^Kafirivaiy both for ex. in Thuc. Several verbs in p3etry have a \nsecond Aor. Act., which in prose have commonly a first Aor. only, e. g. tcrflvwy \nto kill, Aor. prose, eKxeivay poet. %K7avov and ^ktciv, \n\n(c) The two Aorists stand in such a relation to each other, that the forms \nof one Aorist take the place of the forms of the other not in use, and in this \nway each supplies, respectively, the place of the other, as will be seen under \nthe verbs ri^fjn and SiSajju. \n\n\n\nA. Formation of the Tenses of Mute-Vekbb. \n\n\xc2\xa7 142. Classes of Mute Verbs. \n\nMute verbs are divided, like mute letters, into three \nI classes, according to their characteristic ; in each of these \n\' classes, verbs with a pure characteristic in the Pres. and \nImpf. are distinguished from those with an impure charac- \nteristic (\xc2\xa7 139, Kem. 1) : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n1. Verbs, whose characteristic is a Pi-mute (ft tt, (j) pure \n\ncharacteristic; ttt ([\xc2\xa7 24, 1] impure characteristic), \ne. g. \n\n(a) Pure characteristic : 7re/x7r-a), to send ; rpl^-o), to \nrub ; rypd(j)-o), to write ; \n\n(b) Impure characteristic : tuttt-q), to strike (pure char- \nacteristic TT, pure stem TTTl) ; fixdirr-coy to injure \n(ft BAAB) ; /StW-o), to hurl (</>, \'PI^). \n\n2. Verbs, whose characteristic is a Kappa-mute {k, 7, x \n\n\n\n\xc2\xbb J43.] MUTE VERBS. REMARKS ON THE CHARACTERISTIC. 173 \n\npure characteristic ; aa or Attic tt [\xc2\xa7 24, 1] impure \ncharacteristic), e. g. \n\n(a) Pure characteristic: ifKeK-iOj to weave; cuy-co, to \nlead; Tevy^w, to prepare; \n\n(b) Impure characteristic: (pplacr-co, Att. <j>pLrr-Q), to \nshudder (pure characteristic k, pure stem ^PIK) ; \nrdo-cr-co, Att. rdrT-co, to arrange (7, TAT) ; ^ijacr-co, \nAtt. /37?TT-e\xc2\xbb, to cough (x, BHX), \n\n3. Verbs, whose characteristic is a Tau-mute (r, S, ^, \npure characteristic ; ^ [\xc2\xa7 24, 1] impure characteristic), \n\n(a) Pure characteristic: dvvT-(a,to complete; aS-w, to \\ \nsing ; Tret^-o), to persuade ; \n\n(b) Impure characteristic : <f)pd^-co, to say (pure charac- ^ \ntvistic S, pure stem ^PAA), \n\n\xc2\xa7 143. Remarks on the Characteristic. \n\n1. The following mute verbs in -irrcu and -o-o-w (-ttw) form the Secondary \ntenses, especially the second Aor. Pass., and have for their characteristic : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nir: kA-cttt-oj, to steal; K6Trr-u, to cut; TtJirr-o), to strike (second Aor. Passive \n\ni-K\\air-riu, etc.). \xe2\x80\xa2 \n/8: fi\\dxr-ci}, to injure, and Kpinrr-os, to conceal (second Aor. Pass. i-^\\a$-t]v \n\nand 4fi\\d<p^v, i- Kpvfi-r]y and iKpixp^v). \n<p : fidTTT-ci), to tinge; ^dirr-w, to bury; bpvTrr-<a^ to break; ^dirr-w^ to sew to- \n\ngether ; pi-rrT-co, to cast; c/caTTT-w, to dig (second Aor. Pass. i-^a<p-rtv^ \n\ni-T a<p-T]v, i-r pv<p-T\\u, ip-^a.<p-7\\v, i p- pf(p-T}v and 6/}^i^i^rjj/, i-aKo.^- \n\n\xe2\x96\xa0nv). \n\nk: <ppi<ra-(i}, to shudder (second Perf. tr4-<f>plK-a). \n\ny: a70\\.d(Tff<t}, to change (second Aor. Pass. aKXay-rivaij first Aor." Pass. \naKXax^r\\vai, poetic). ^d(T<Tu, to knead (fiay-rivai). opvffao), to dig {opvy-rjvai \nand opvx^i\'O\'t), 7rA^<rtra), to strike {i-ir\\\'fiy-7]i/, e^e-TrXdy-Tjv), Trpdaau, Att. \nirpcLTTu, to do (TTe-TTpdy- a),<r<pdC<i} (Attic mostly \xc2\xa9"(^ottw), to kill {i-(T<pdy- \nnv, rarely, and never in Attic prose, iatpdx^v), rda-aw, to arrange {Tdyels, \nEur., elsewhere eToxi^"), <ppda<r(a, to hedge round {i<ppdy-r]u and i<ppdx^v)- \n\n2. Two verbs strengthen the pure characteristic k by t, like verbs with the \nimpure characteristic ttt : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nire/cT-w (commonly ireKTeco, also \xe2\x96\xa0Trff/co)), to shear, to comb, Put. 7re|&j, etc. , \nstill, Keipeiv is commonly used for ircKTeiu with the meaning to shear, and \nKT\xe2\x82\xacui^\xe2\x82\xaciv and ^aivfiu with the meaning to comb ; \n\ntIkt-oj (formed from ti-t4k-(o), to beget. Put. rt^ofiai, second Aor. Act. \niT\xe2\x82\xacKOV, second Perf. reroKa, \n\n3. The following verbs in -ffo-u, -ttu have a Tau-mute, not a Kappa- \nmute, for the pure characteristics apfx6TT<a (non-Attic apix6C<a), to Jit, Put. \n-6<T{a; \xe2\x80\x94 fixirTO), to take honey, Put. -iaw; \xe2\x80\x94 kpd<T(T(o (non-Attic fipdCu), to \nshake; \xe2\x80\x94 ipeaao), to row, Put. -eVw; \xe2\x80\x94 vdffffa), to scatter, Put. -aora> ; \xe2\x80\x94 vXda- \n<r\xc2\xab, to form, Put. -ocw ; \xe2\x80\x94 tt t / <r ir \xc2\xab, to husk, Put. -iffw ; \xe2\x80\x94 and Poet, ifidcrffa, to \n\n15* \n\n\n\n174 FORMATION OF THE TENSES OP MUTE VERBS. |} 144 \n\nwhip, Ynt. -da-o) J KVilxrffw, to sleep, "Fnt. -dxra \', K e v ff a- w, to looh,\'FvLt. \\\xe2\x82\xacv<ra)\\ \nKiffffOfiai (poetic, especially Horn., also Kiroixai),to pray, Aor. cAtera/xTyj/, \niXirSfx-nv; vla-ffofiai, veiffff ofiai, to go, Fut. veicrofiai\', Kop6<rffu, to equip \n( Epic Perf. Ke-K6pv^ -fiai ). \n\nHere are classed derivatives in -dirrw. At^t^TTw, to hunger ; ovetpdrrwy \nto dream ; iirvdiTra), to be sleepy. \n\n4. The following verbs in -o-cw vary between the two formations : vd(r<Ta>y \nto press together, Fut. vd^a, etc. ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, vevacfiai ; verbal Adj. ycurrSs ; \n\xe2\x80\x94 a(\\>v(T<T(t) (Poet.), to draw, JFut. -i;|\xc2\xab, Aor. ^<pv(ra, r)({>v(rdfn}v. \n\n5. Of verbs in - ^w, whose pure characteristic is a Tau-mute, commonly S, \nthere are only a few primitives, e. g. e^o jtt at, Poet., Ko^e^ofjiai, prose, / seof \nmyself, \'{(w, commonly ko3-iX\xc2\xab> to seat; <rxtC<^> to separate; x^C\xc2\xab\xc2\xbb alvum \ndejicere ; yet there are very many derivatives, namely, all in -dCa> and most in \n-/^w, e. g. iMCo}, elKdCtDf etc. \n\n6. Verbs in - (a, whose pure characteristic is a Kappa-mute, commonly y, \nare mostly Onomatopoetics, i. e. words whose sound corresponds to the sense ; \nthe greater part of these denote a call, or sound, e. g. aid C\xc2\xab, to groan, Fut. \nalalia \', aKaXd^a, to shout (ou5o|a(ri3-ai, to spea^, Aor. wanting in Her.); ypt^u, \nto grunt; Ko\'iC^i ^^ squeak, to grunt (like a swine), Fut. Koi^w; Kpd^a, to \nsa\'eam, Aor. eKpayov] Kpdo^^, to caw, to croak; fxaffriCco, to whip; oSci^o;, to \nscratch ; oifj.6 ^w, to lament, Fut. olfjL^^ofj.ai ; 6Ko\\v ^tu, to cry out, to shout ; pv<r- \nrd^ot), to drag about; ard^a and araXd^Uy to trickle; arevd^o), to sigh, \na\'n]pl^()3, to make firm; ffrl^w, to mark, to prick; cvpi^w, to whistle (Fut. \nffupi^ofiai, etc.; ffvplffu, etc., later, and not Attic) : <r<pdC(\xc2\xbb (Attic mostly <r^dr- \n7w), to kill ; <T<pv ^ai, to throb ; rpi ^w, to chirp {rerplya, Ion. and poet.) ; <pXv Cu, \nto bubble, and the Poet, fi d (w, to prate, Fut. fid^u, third Pers. Perf. Mid. or \nPass. jSejSaKToi ; fiptC^^y to slumber {fip7^ai); S ai(o}, to divide, to kill ; iXeXi^w, \nto whirl, to tumble; ivapl^ay spolio ; ^ e^w, to do (eopya). \n\n7. The following verbs in - (w vary between the two modes of formation : \nfia<rrd(<ii3,to lift up, to suppoH, Fut. -dcca, etc., Aor. ifiaardx^y ; \xe2\x80\x94 Surrd Ca, \nto doubt, dia-Tdarw, from which the verbal Subst. Siffray/xos and 5i<rra(ris; \xe2\x80\x94 vva- \nT d ^\xc2\xab, to nod, to sleep, Fut. -da-co, Aor. evvaraea, in the later writers wcrd^o), \netc., e. g. Plut. Brut. 36;^ \xe2\x80\x94 irat^w, to jest, Fut. irai^ovfjLai and nal^ofxai, Aor. \nAtt. eiraia-a (in later writers irrai^a, ir4iraixa), Perf. Mid. or Pass. Att. ireiraiaiMi \n(in later writers ireiraiy/jLai, itraix^y) ] verbal Adj. iraia-rcos ; \xe2\x80\x94 apird Ca, to rob, \nAtt. apitd(rQp.ai, ripiraffa, etc. (but in the Epic and Common language ap-rrd^co and \n-darw, etc., second Aor. Pass. r}pTrdYnv) ; \xe2\x80\x94 fii Cw, to moan, has fi. 5, 20. iire/xv^av, \nbut in Hippocr. e/xvarey. \n\n8. The following verbs in -^w have 77 for a pure characteristic : K\\<\xc2\xa3^ft>, to \nsound, to cry, Perf. Ke-KXayy-a, Fut. KXdy^u, Aor. eKXay^a; \xe2\x80\x94 irXdCo (poet.) to \ncause to wander, Fut. irXdy^a^ etc. Aor. Pass, iirxdyx^i\' ; \xe2\x80\x94 ffaXTti^w^to blow a \ntrumpet, Fut. -iy^a, etc. (later also -f<r\xc2\xab, etc.) \n\n$ 144. Formation of the Tenses. \n\nMute verbs form the Fut. and the first Aor. Act. and \nMid. with the tense-characteristic o-, and the first Perf. and \nfirst Plup. Act. with the aspirated i endings -a and -elv, when \nthe characteristic is a Pi or Kappa-mute; but with the \n\n\n\nThe Perf Act. of all verbs properly ends in /co, but where k is preceded by \na Pi or Kappa -mute, that mute combines with k and is changed into the cor- \nrespondmg rough. On the contrary, a Tau-mute before k is dropped, e. g. \nT\xe2\x82\xacTV7r/co = rirvipa ; irfirpdyKa = veirpdxa, but veireiKa instead of xeireif^Ko. \n\n\n\nk 144.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF MUTE VERBS. 175 \n\nendings -/ca, -Kecv, when the characteristic is a Tau-mute ; \nthough the Tau-mute is omitted before k (\xc2\xa7 17, 5). \n\nRemark 1. For the change of a Tau-mute into <r, before fi in the Perf Mid. \nor Pass, see \xc2\xa7 19, 1 ; for the change of a Tau-mute into <r before t, see \xc2\xa7 17, 5, \nbut this <r is omitted before c of the personal-endings, e. g. ircVeto\'iuoi, -ctcu, \n^((ppcurfiai, -ffTou. ; but second Pers. TreTrei-o\'oi, v4(ppa-(rai instead of 7re7ret<r-<r<u, \ntrefpcur-cau The vowels o, t, w are short in verbs which have a Tau-mute as a \ncharacteristic before endings with the tense-chara\xc2\xabteristic <r and k {-ku, -Keiy), \ne. g. <ppdC<ih (ppatrwj ecppaffa, irccppaKa ; irXdcrcuy to Jbrm, Tr\\a<r<a ; vo/xf^cw, to thinkj \n4y6fu<ra ; K\\v(a}, to wash, K\\v<ru, etc ; in like manner, short vowels remain short, \ne. g. apfidC\'^^ YipfxoKa. \n\nEem. 2. On the changes which the mutes undergo by the addition of the j \nendings beginning with <r, ^, )u, or r, and before the aspirated endings -o, -\xe2\x82\xactV,l \nsee \xc2\xa7^ 17, 2 and 3, 19, 1. 20, 1 ; on the lengthening of -e into -et before o* of \nverbs in -eySo) or -ev^a, e. g. a-irevS-o}, Put. {<nreV5-<rw) (Tireia-u, Aor. (ia-imca^ \nPerf. Mid. or Pass. ea-\'rreia-fjLai, see \xc2\xa7 20, 2 5 on the omission of o- in endings \nbeginning with a^, e. g. K\xe2\x82\xacKpv(p^ai instead of Ke/fpui^i^t {K^Kpvcpa^ai), irenXex- \n^ai instead of ireirKe^^ai, see \xc2\xa7 25, 3 ; on the endings of the third Pers. PI. \nPerf and Plup. Mid. or Pass., -arai and -a to instead of -yraiy -vro, see \xc2\xa7^18, \n1 and 116, 15 ; on the Ifariable vowel in the Secondary tenses, and in some first \nPerfects and Perfects Mid. or Pass^ see \xc2\xa7 140 ; on the Att. Put. of verbs in \n-d((o, and -f^w, e. g. fiifid^u), Put. fitfido-w, /3ti8\xc2\xab, -^s, -^, \xe2\x80\xa2wrov^ -wfieUf etc., KOfdC<** \nFut. KOfjtt&ce, KOfiiw, -tely, etc., see \xc2\xa7 117. \n\nEem. 3. "When /* precedes a Pi-mute, which is the characteristic of th\xc2\xab \nverb, e. g- in irtfiir-a, the /* is rejected in the Perf Mid- or Pass, before endings \nbeginning with fi] thus, irefiv-co, to send, ire-ire fj.-fj.ai (instead of ire-irefnr-fjjcu, ire- \nirefifx-fjxu), ir4ir\xe2\x82\xacfj.\\pai, ireircjUiTTat, etc., Inf. ireirffx(p^ai, Part, ireirefxfjivos ; so \nndfiTTT-w, to bend down, Ke-Kafx-fxai (instead of Ke-KafJ-ir-fiaiy K4-Kafj.fx-fj.ai). Also \nwhen two gammas would stand before /u, one 7 is omitted, e. g. c<piyy-(t)^ to tie, \nt-fftpiy-fioi -(instead of \xe2\x82\xac-<r(^i77-/Mn), 6<r0tyfai, ta^vyKTau, etc., Inf i<r<piyx^ctiy \nPart. i<T<f>iyfi4yo5 ; so i^eXeyxo), to convince, i^\xe2\x82\xac\\-{i\\eyfj.ai (instead of i^eK-fiXeyxf^ait \ni^eX-fiyyfiat), i^eXriXey^aij etc. Both the jj. and y are here dropped to prevent \nthe concurrence of three consonants \n\n\n\n176 \n\n\n\nPARADIGMS OP MUTE VERBS. \n\n\n\nf$ 143 \n\n\n\nParadigms OF Mute Vekbs. \n^ 145. A- Verbs, whose Characteristic is a Pi-mute \n\n(a) Pure Characteristic, )3, tt, <p (Put. -^ft>). \n\n* rpT^o), to rub. \n\n\n\nACTIVE. \n\n\n\nInd. rptfi-o) Subj. rpifi-<a Imp. TpIjS-e Inf. rpifi-eiy Part, rpifi-wy \n\nInd. ^-rpl^-ov Opt. Tpf^-oifxi \n\nInd. (Te-Tpr/3-o) r4-rpl(p-a Subj. T\xe2\x82\xac-rpf<p-co Imp. not used. Inf. re- \n\nrpl^-eyat Part. T\xe2\x82\xac-rpi(p-(t)s \nInd. (e-Te-Tfir)8-eiV) i-T\xe2\x82\xac-rpi(j)-eiu Opt. re-TpT<p-oifjLi \nInd. (Tpij8-(r\xc2\xab) Tpi\\p(a Opt. Tpi\\l/oifj.i Inf. ipi^eiv .Part, rpli^aiv \nInd. \xe2\x82\xac-TpL^a Subj. rpixl/u Opt. rplypaifiai Imp. Tp7\\\\/ov Inf. rf\'i^cu \n\nPart. Tpti/^as. \n\n\n\nPres. \nImpf. \nPerf. \n\nPlup. \nPut. \nAor. I. \n\n\n\nMIDDLE. \n\n\n\nPres. \nImpf. \n\n\n\nInd. Tpifi-ofiai Subj. Tpifi-wfxai Imp. rpifi-ov Inf. rpifi-ea^ai Part. \nInd. i-rpllS-ofj.rjv Opt. rpl^-oifx-riv \n\n\n\nPerf. \n\n\n\nInd. 1 \n\n\nS. \n\n\n1. \n\n\n\n\n2. \n\n\n\n\n3. \n\n\nD \n\n\n1. \n\n\n\n\n2. \n\n\n\n\n3. \n\n\nP. \n\n\n1. \n\n\n\n\n2. \n\n\n\n\n3. \n\n\n\n{re-rpifi-ixai) \n\nre-rpifM-fxai \n\nTe-Tpi^pat \n\nTe-rpiTT-Tai \n\nT\xe2\x82\xac-TpifjL-ixe^ov \n\nri-rpi<p-^op \n\nre-rpKp-^ov \n\nre-TpifJL-fjie^a \n\nT4-Tpi(p-^\xe2\x82\xac \n\nTe-Tpiu-fxevoi et(ri{v) \nor Te-Tpi(p-a.Tai \n\n\n\nImperative. ^ \n(re-Tpj^S-co) \nTe-Tpi\xc2\xbb^o \nTe-Tpi(p-^a> \n\nTe-Tpicp-^ou \n\nTC-Tpi(p-^(VV \nT\xe2\x82\xac-Tpi(p-^e \n\nr\xe2\x82\xac-Tpi(p-^Q}(rav \nor re-Tpi<p-^a}V \n\n\n\nInfinitive. \n(re-TpT^B-id^cu) \n\nParticiple. \nTe-rpifi-fxevoSy -r;, -oy \n\nSubjunctive. \nre-rpifi-fieyos 5 \n\n\n\nPlup. \nInd. \n\nOpt. \n\n\n\nS. 1. \n2. \n3. \n\n\n\ni-Te-Tpifi-fiTiV D. i-Te-Tpifi-fie^ov \ni-Te-Tpiypo e-Te rpicp-^ou \n\ni-re-rpiir-TO i-Te-Tpicp-^rfV \n\nTe-TpiyL-fxivos e\'lrju \n\n\n\nP. i-re-Tplfi-fie^a \ni-Te-Tpi<p-^\xe2\x82\xac \nre-Tpi/x-^evoi r^cav \n\n[or i-T\xe2\x82\xac-Tpi(p-a.TO \n\n\n\nPut. \nAor. I. \n\nP.Pf. \n\n\n\nAor. I. \n\nPut. I. \n\nAIL \n\nP.IL \n\n\n\nInd. rplypofiai Opt. Tpi\\polfj.\'r)v Inf. Tpii|/e(r.^ai Part. rpv^Sfx^vos \n\nInd. i-rpi^dfirju Subj. TptT|/W|Uai Opt. TpL\\l/aliJLr}v Imp. rpT^/\'eu Inf. \n\nrplxl/aa^ai Part. Tptij/a/xej/os \nInd. Te-Tpt;|/o/iat Opt. T^-Tpi-^oiyi\'r]v Inf. re-TpfTfea-S-cu Part. Tc-Tpiif\'cJ- \n\n\n\nPASSIVE. \n\n\n\nInd. {i-Tpi^-Stvv) i-Tpl(p-^v Subj. rpi<p-^(a Opt. Tpi<f>-^ei-nv Inf. \n\nTpi(p-Strjvai Imp. Tpicp-SrrjTi Part, rpi^-^eis, (instead of I. Aor. \n\nPass., commonly II. Aor. Pass.) \nInd. rpi<p-h7\\<rofj.ai Opt. rpKp-^aolpi-qv Inf. Tpi<p-^ae<r^cu Part, rpt^ \n\nInd. i-Tpffi-nv Subj. rptyS-w Opt. rpt^-^i-qv Imp. rptp-TjSn Inf. Tp^iS- \n\ni]j/ai Part, rpf^-eis \nInd. Tp\'i^-\'fja-ofiai Opt. rptfi-rjaoifXT]}/ Inf. Tp1fi-f]ae(r^ai Part. rpjiS- \n\n\n\nVerbal adjective: (Tpii8-T({s) rptTr-rc^s, -^, -Jj/, TpiTr-reos, -eo, -e\'ov. \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6^ 146, 147.] PARADIGMS OF MUTE VERBS. \n\n\n\n177 \n\n\n\n^ 146. (b) Impure Characteristic, irr in Pres. and Impf. (Put. -pw). \n\nK^TTTaf to cut. \n\n\n\n>aa \n\n\nACTIVE. \n\n\nMIDDLE. [ PASSIVE. \n\n\nPres. \n\n\nKOTTT-W \n\n\nKOTTT-O/iCU \n\n\nPerf. I. \n\n\n(K\xe2\x82\xac-K<nr-a) K4-K0<p-a \n\n\nKe-Koix-fMi, like re-Tpi/ifiai \n\n\nPerf. n. \n\n\nKe-Koir-a (Horn.) \n\n\n\n\nA. I. i-K6(p-^v \n\n\nPut. \n\n\n{Kotr-ffw) Ko;|/ft> \n\n\nK6\\\\/ofxai \n\n\nP. I. KO(t>-^aofiai \n\n\nAor. I. \n\n\ne-Koi|/a \n\n\n4-K0\\l/dfx.riv \n\n\nA. II. i-KSir-T^y \n\n\nPut. Pf. \n\n\n\n\nK\xe2\x82\xac-K6\\\\/oixai \n\n\nP. n. Koir-T](roiJMi \n\n\nVerbal adjective : kott-tos, -V;, -6y, Koir-rios, -reo, -r4ov. 1 \n\n\n\n\nInflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass. \n\n\nKifX \n\n\nir-T-\xc2\xab, to bend down {KeKaiX\'/xai for KeKafi/jL-fiou, \xc2\xa7 144, Rem. 3). \n\n\nInd. \n\n\nS. 1. \n\n\nK\xe2\x82\xacKafjLfJ.ai \n\n\nImperative. \n\n\nInfinitive. \n\n\n\n\n2. \n\n\nKiKa/jLypai \n\n\nKfKafi^O \n\n\nKCKdfKp^ai \n\n\n\n\n3. \nD. 1. \n\n\nKfKafnrrai \n\nKfKd^lfli^OV \n\n\nKeKdfKp^u) \n\n\nParticiple. \n\n\n\n\n2. \n\n\nKfKa/JLp^Ot/ \n\n\nKiKdfxcpbwv / Subjunctive. \n\n\n\n\n3. \n\n\nKeKa/jLcp^ov \n\n\n\n\nP. 1. \n\n\nK\xe2\x82\xacK(iflfJ.\xe2\x82\xac^a \n\n\n\n\nKeKafijJLfyos & 1 \n\n\n\n\n2. \n\n\nK\xe2\x82\xacKafi(p^e \n\n\n/ceVa/x03^6 \n\n\n\n\n\n\n3. \n\n\nK\xe2\x82\xacKafXfi4yoi elal{v) \n\n\nKCKdii<p^(i)<rav, oi Ke/f\xc2\xab\xc2\xa3/Lt^id^w\xc2\xbb/] 1 \n\n\nVerbal adjective : KaninrSsy -i], -6v, KafXTTTfos, -r^a, -reoy. 1 \n\n\n\n\'$ 147. B. Verbs, whose Characteristic is a Kappa* \n\nmute (y, K, x)\' \n\n(a) Pure Characteristic, 7, ac, %. (b) Impure Characteristic in the Pres. and \n\nImpf., (Tffy Att. TT, rarer ^. \n\nir\\//c-ctf, ^0 weave. Put. -|a>. rao-cw, Att. tottco, ^0 arrange. \n\n\n\nACTIVE. \n\n\nMIDDLE. \n\n\nACTIVE. \n\n\nMIDDLE. \n\n\nPres. \nPerf. \n\nPut. \nF.Pf. \n\n\n(rre-\'TrKeK-a) \n^ / . \' \n7r6-irAeX"\xc2\xab \n(7r\\^K-orctf) 7rA.e|\xc2\xab \n\n\nirKfK-ofiai \n{ire-irXeK-fiai) \nire-irKey-fiai \nirXe^oixai \n\n\nrd(T(r-a) \n{re-Tay-a) \nTt-Tox-a \n{rdy-cro}) rd^w \n\n\nrdtrff-ofuu \n\nTi-rayfiai \n\nrd^of-LOX \n\nre-rd^oaou \n\n\nPASSIVE. \n\n\nAor. I. \nPut. I. \nA. II. \nF. II. \n\n\ntrXix-^O\'OfJLai \n4-Tr\\dK-T)V and i-irX4K-T]v \n\'jr\\aK-\'f}(TOfiai \n\n\n(i-rdy-^v) i-rdx-^v \n\nrax-^VCOfKU \ni-rdy-rjv \nray-\'fia\'ofj.ai \n\n\nVerbal adjective : 7rAe/cT<Js, -17, -6v ; irXcK-reos, -Tea, -reW ; tuktSs, raKrios. \n\n\n\n1T8 \n\n\n\nPARADIGMS OP MUTE VERBS. \n\n\n\n[^ 148. \n\n\n\nInflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass. \n\n\n1 \n\n\ntSo-o-cw, to arrange, and o-cptyyw (\xc2\xa7 144, Rem. 3), to bind. j \n\n\nInd. S. 1. \n\n\nr^rayixai \n\n\ni(r<piynai \n\n\nImperative. j \n\n\n2. \n\n\nTfTO^ai \n\n\n\xe2\x82\xac(r<piy^ai \n\n\nTCTO^O \n\n\n\xe2\x82\xac<r<piy^o \n\n\n3. \n\n\nreroKTai \n\n\n(orcpiyKTai \n\n\nrerax^(a \n\n\nia<piyx^6o \n\n\nD.l. \n\n\nrerdy/Me^ov \n\n\niacpiyfxe^ov \n\n\n\n\n\n\n2. \n\n\nrerax^ou \n\n\n\xe2\x82\xac(r<piyx^oy \n\n\nterax^ov \n\n\netrtpiyx^oy \n\n\n3. \n\n\nrirax^ov \n\n\necripiyx^ov \n\n\nrerdx^ojy \n\n\niff(piyX^(i3V \n\n\nP. 1. \n\n\nTcrdyix^^a \n\n\nicrcpiyfi^^a \n\n\n\n\n\n\n2. \n\n\nretax^e \n\n\ni(r(piyx^^ \n\n\nrerax^e \n\n\ne(r<piyX^\xe2\x82\xac \n\n\n3. \n\n\nTerayfieuoi et<ri{v), \n\n\ni<f(piyfi4uoi \xe2\x82\xacl(ri{f) \n\n\nrerdx^d\'O\'av, \n\n\ni<r<f>iyx^(>>(rayi \n\n\n\n\nor reraxo-Tat \n\n\n\n\nor Terdx^uy \n\n\nor ia<l>iyx^(i>y \n\n\nInf. rerdx^cu \n\n\n^a<piyX^0Li Part, rerayfievos \n\n\nia-ipiy/xevos. \n\n\n\nRemark. The student will observe particularly the changes which take \nplace in the inflection of the Perf. Pass, of these verbs : rerpifi\'/xai (instead of \nTeTpiP-fiai), iS before ^ being changed into /* ; Terpi^pat (instead of TfTpiir\'aai)^ \nIT and <r forming ip; rerpiir-Tai, the characteristic it remaining unchanged ; \nrerpicp\'^oy (instead of rerpiir-^ov), the characteristic v being changed into <p, to \nbe of the same order as the 3^ following (\xc2\xa7 17, 2) ; so others similar. In like \nmanner, ritwyiiai : T^Ta|ot (instead of riray-aai), y and a forming | ; riraicrat \n(instead of rirayrai)^ y being changed into k, to be of the same order as the \nT following 5 rirax^ov (instead of TiraySroy), y being changed to correspond \nwith &. \n\n\n\n-X-i \n\n\n\nk 148. C. Verbs, whose Characteristic is a Tau- \n\nmute (8, T, ^). \n\n(a) Pure Characteristic, 5, t, d^. (b) Impure Characteristic in Pres. and Impf, \n\n^, rarer cv. \xe2\x80\x94 Put. <rw. \n\n\n\nACTIVE. \n\n\nMIDDLE. \n\n\nACTIVE. \n\n\nMIDDLE. \n\n\nPres. \n\nImpf. \nPerf. \n\nPlup. \nPut. \n\nAor. I. \nP.Pf. \n\n\nto deceive, \ne-ypevS-oy \n[e-rpevd-Ka) \n\n\n^\xe2\x82\xacvS-ofiai, \n\nto lie. \ni-rpevd-SfJLTjy \n{e-ipevd-fiai) \n\n(\xc2\xbb|/\xe2\x82\xacuS-(ro/\xc2\xab\xc2\xab) \n\ni-^ev-a-dfiriv \ni-ypev-ffofiai \n\n\n(ppdCfc. \nto say, \ne-<ppaC-oy \n(^(-(ppaS-Ka) \nire-tppd-Ka \ni-ir\xe2\x82\xac-<ppa-K\xe2\x82\xaciv \n{(ppdS-ffu) \n(ppa-aco \n%-<ppa.-a(X \n\n\nippdC-onai, \nto think, \n4-<PpaC-6n7jy \n{\xe2\x96\xa0K4-<(>paS-ijLat) \n7r4\'<ppa(r-fiai \n4-iri-<Ppd(T-}irjv \n{<ppdS-(rofjuu) \n\n<ppd-(TOIJMl \n\n4(ppa-<rdii\'ny \nire-ippd-a-ofJLCu \n\n\nPASSIVE. 1 \n\n\nAor. I. \nPut. I. \n\n\n(i-^evS-^y) i-ypeitr-^y \n\n^\xe2\x82\xacV(r-^(rofxai \n\n\n{i-<PpdS-^v) i-<ppd(r-bT)y \n\n<Ppaa-^i(TOfJLCu \n\n\nVerbal Adj. : (t^euS-re\'oj) ^^vtr-rios, -r4a, -r4oy ; ippcux-rios, -rU, -reoy, \\ \n\n\n\ni 149.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF LIQUID VERBS. \n\n\n\n179 \n\n\n\nInflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass. \n\n\n\nInd. S. 1. \n\n\n^^ifir-fJLeu \n\n\n2. \n\n\nt\\l/\xe2\x82\xacv-crai \n\n\n3. \n\n\nej^cu<r-Tai \n\n\nD. 1. \n\n\niy\\ifi(T-ix\xe2\x82\xac^ov \n\n\n2. \n\n\nf\\f/\xe2\x82\xacV-0 ^ov \n\n\n3. \n\n\nt\\(/\xe2\x82\xacV-O^OV \n\n\nP. 1. \n\n\n^\xe2\x82\xacvff-fie^a \n\n\n2. \n\n\n\xe2\x82\xac\\pexj-a-^e \n\n\n3. \n\n\neTl/\xe2\x82\xacV<r-/ji.euoi elarl{y) \n\n\n\nImperative. \ni\\l/(v-a^ea<rav, or \n\n\n\n\xe2\x82\xac\\ /ey \n\n\n\nInfinitive. \n\nParticiple. \n4-\\l/\xe2\x82\xacvar-fi4yoSy -77, -ov \n\nSubjunctive. \ni-\\p\xe2\x82\xacV(r-fievos 2>. \n\n\n\nRemark. Sti^co, to save, has in the Perf. Mid. or Pass, areaw-fuu from <rc^ \n^Attic), and aea-uxrfiai, but Aor. iadlt^Vj verbal Adj. awareos. \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 149. FOEMATION OP THE TeNSES OP LiQUID VeKBS. \n\n1. Liquid verbs (\xc2\xa7 127, II. B.) form the Fut. Act. and \nMid. and the first Aor, Act. and Mid. without the tense- \ncharacteristic a (\xc2\xa720, 3) but the Perf. Act. with the tense- \ncharacteristic K, e, g. \n\nffipdWot (stem 2*AA.), Fut <r<^oA-ft), first Aor. e-a-cp-nX-Uy Perf. e-o-^oA-Ko, \n\nRemark 1. The endings of the Put. in liquid verbs, namely, -cD, -ovfrnij are \nformed by contraction from -c<ra>, -fao/xai after the rejection of o- (\xc2\xa7 20, 3). The \ninflection of these contracted endings is like that of contracts in -\xe2\x82\xac\xc2\xab in the \nPres. Act. and Mid.: <^iA-\xc2\xab, <pi\\-ovfiai (\xc2\xa7 135) ; <r is omitted in the Put. of liquid \nverbs, to prevent the harshness occasioned by the combination of that letter with \nthe preceding liquid. The Fut. Perf. is wanting in liquid verbs. \n\n2. The Present tense of Liquid verbs, with the exception \nof a few whose stem-vowel is \xe2\x82\xac, is strengthened, either by- \ndoubling the characteristic \\, or by inserting the liquid v \nafter the characteristic ; also, by lengthening the short stem- \nvowel, as in all verbs in -fvo), -vvco, -vpo), or by changing it \ninto a diphthong (\xc2\xa7 16, 3), e. g. a(j)aX-\\-a), Te/z.-i/-<\xc2\xbb, Kpiv-co, \ndjjLvv-co, KTew-cj, (paiv-ci) (stems X^AA, TEM, KPIJV(t), \n\'AMTN(v), KTEN, ^AN) ; but /xeVo), vifi-co with a pure \nstem. \n\n3. Except the Pres. and Impf. the tenses are formed from \nthe pure stem, but the final vowel of the stem is lengthened \nin the first Aor. Act. and Mid. (see No. 5), e. g. acpdW-ca \n(X^AA), Fut. cr(^aX-w, second Aor. Pass, i-acpdk-rjv, first \nPerf. Act. \xe2\x82\xac-<r(f>a\\-Ka, first Aor. Act. \xe2\x82\xac-a<f>\'q\\\'Cu The second \nAorists Act. and Mid. rarely occur, and scarcely at \xc2\xa3dl in \n\n\n\n180 FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF LIQUID VERBS, [} 14? \n\nprose ; on the contrary, the second Aor. Pass, is more in use \nthan the first Aor. ; the first Aor. is wholly wantiiig in many \nverbs. \n\n4. In liquid verbs with an impure characteristic, the \nground-form of the stem is not borrowed, as in the case \nof mute verbs, from the second Aor., but \'from the Fut., \nsince only a few verbs of this class form a second Aor. Act, \nand Mid. \n\n5. Liquid verbs are divided into four classes according as \nthe stem-vowel of the Fut. is d, e, I, or v before the ending o). \nIn the first Aor. Act. and Mid. d is lengthened into ??, \xe2\x82\xac into \n\xe2\x82\xact, I into Ij V into v (\xc2\xa7 16, 3). Thus : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nX, I. Class with a in the Future. \n\nPres. Fut. A\xc2\xab^. \n\n(r<pdw-(i), to deceive, c\'<pa\\-(a i-a<pr\\X-a \n\nKoifiv-a, to lalxjr, KafM-ovfiou wanting \n\nreKfiaip-a, to point out, TeK/xap-w i-rcKfx-qp-a \n\n<palv-03, to show, tpau-u t-cprjv-a. \n\n11. Class with c in the Future. \n\njtieVw, to remain, fiev-ui e-fieiv-a \n\nhrfyiKK-u, to announce, ayye\\-w ^yyciX-a \n\nr\xe2\x82\xacfxv-a, to cut, rffx-u wanting \n\nv4fi-o}, to divide, v^fi-Ci t-vcin-a \n\nKTeiv-w, to kill, kt\xe2\x82\xacv-u e-/CTetv-a \n\ntfieip-w, to desire, Ififp-u ifieip-a \n\nin. Class with \xc2\xbb in the Future. \nriW-a, to pluck, TtA-w ^-rlA-a \n\nKptu-w, to separate, KpXv-w %-Kplv-a. \n\nIV. Class with v in the Future. \navp-ca, to draw, trvp-a %-(rvp-a \n\nafiiu-w, to defend, kfivv-u ijfivv-a. \n\n_ Eem. 2. The following verbs in -aivw of the first class take d in the Aor. \ninstead of ??, namely, jo-xwij/cu, to make emaciated (t(rx\xc2\xbb\'dj/a, Icrxvavcu) ; KepSaiyety \nto gain (iKepMva, KepSauai) ; KoiXaivw, to hollow out {iKoiXdva, KOiXavai) ; XevtcaLyet. \nto whiten; opyaiyw, to enrage; ^ir^Traiva}, to ripen; also all verbs in -paivw, e. g. \n7repaiJ/w,^Fut. TvepavS), Aor. iirepaua, Inf. -rrepavai (except TerpaiVw, to bore, irfTfrf \nva, rerpriyai), and all in -laiyu, e. g. Tnaiua, to make fat, i-rrlava, viavou (except \nuiaivw, to stain, fiirivai, rarely ^jawj). \xe2\x80\x94 The verbs trnfxalvca, to give a signal, and \nKo^aipa), to purify, have both arifiwai (Avhich is usual anions tlie Attic writers), \nKaSirripai, and (rrjfxavai, KoStapai. Also aXpa, to raise, and SXxo/toi, to leap, are \nformed with a : dpai, aXaa^ai, but in the Ind. the a is changed into tj on account \nof the augment, e. g. ^pa, TjXdfxriu (second Aor. rj\\6fji-nv is not used in the Ind. \nand very rarely elsewhere). Comp. on a, \xc2\xa7 16, 7 (a) \n\n\n\nf 149.J FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF LIQUID VERBS. 181 \n\n6. The first Peif. Act. of verbs with the characteristic v \n(according to \xc2\xa7 19, 3), must end in -7/ca, e. g. /jLe/juiay-Ko^ \nPlut. (from /jbcaLvo) instead of fMe-fiiav-Ko), ire<f)ajyKa^ Dinarch. \n(from (palvco), Trapco^vyKa, Polyb. (from Trapo^vvco, to excite^* \nBut the form in -jKa is found only among later writers. The \nbest writers endeavor to avoid it, sometimes by dropping the \nV, e. g. KeKpiKa, KeicKlica from Kpivco, kKlvco (so also KeKephaKa, \namong later WTiters, also KeKepBar/Ka, but KeKepBrjKa, Dem. \n56, 30. from Kephaivw) ; or also, as in kt\xe2\x82\xacivo), by using the \nform of the second Perf., e. g. aTre/crova, in the sense of the \nfirst Perf. (^e/crcvyKa, eKraKa, from the time of Maenander), \nor, as in the case of verbs in -ivco, by not forming any Perf., \nas, e. g. in fievco, by forming it from a new theme, as fMefii- \nvr)Ka from MENESl, \n\n7. The three following verbs with the characteristic v \ndrop that letter, not only in the Perf. and Plup. Act, but \nalso in the Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass, and in the first \nAor. Pass. : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nKpfyuy to separate, KfKpiKa KiKpifxxu iKptbrjy \n\nK\\ivw, to bend down, KtKKiKa KeKKlfiai iK\\t^v (the 2d Aor, 4K\\tyrjv is rare). \n\nTXuy\xc2\xab, to uxishy (ir(ir\\ma) irivXvfjuu ivKvdriv (Hippoc.) \n\nRem. 3. Telvw, to stretch, and KTeivw, to kill, form the above-mentioned tenses \nfrom new themes, viz. TAfl, KTANfl, KTAfl, thus : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nTCTOKO TfTOLfiai iro^v \n\ntKTuKa (and eitrayKa) eKT&fiai ^kt^^u [iKrdv^v among the later writers); \n\nyet the forms of KTeivco here presented, are not Attic. The Attic writers use \niKTova as the Perf. Act. (see No. 6), and instead of cKra^iai and iKrd^v, sub- \nstitute Tf^vrjKa and aire^avov in passive phrases with vir6 and the Gen., or \nayvpriixai and avrjpe^v, without a preposition. \n\nKem. 4. Kpifca, K\\lv(i), rrXvuw, and KTeluw, among the poets, often retain v in \nthe first Aor. Pass, according to the necessities of the verse, e. g. iKkiv^Vf \niwXvu^u; in prose, these forms seem to be doubtful, yet Kar\xe2\x82\xacK\\iu^ is found in \nX. Hell. 4. 1, 30, in all the copies. \n\n8. On the formation of the Perf. Mid., the following \npoints should be noted : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nVerbs in -alpu and uj/a>, usually drop the v before the endings beginning with \nfi, and insert <r to strengthen the syllable, e. g. <paiy-a) trecpa-ff-fjuu ire-<pd-(r-fjLf^a\\ \nvcpaivo} u^acr/xot ; fxepaivo> [Me/AdpacTfjLai (Luc.) 5 (njfialuti} (Ttarnxaayiai ; trepaivu ireiri\' \npaafxai ; paiv<a tppacixai ; iraxyvw ireTrdxvffiJLat ; ^Suj/co 7}Su(r/io< ; Keinvvo} AeAeV- \nrvafuxi] o^vyu Ht^vafjioi ] ^\\vuu> Tcd^Awr/nou (Luc); iriaifxa ireiriouriMU ] rpaxvvv \n\n16 \n\n\n\n182 \n\n\n\nPARADIGMS OF LIQUID VERBS. \n\n\n\n:^ 150. \n\n\n\nrer pdxvfTfxai (Luc.) ; hvfialvo/xai \\e\\vixafffi4yoi elcri{v); fualvot fiffilafffxat ; but \nsome verbs of this kind assimilate the v to the following fi, e. g. ^ripaiv-ai, \ni^-flpafi-fiai instead of i^-ftpavfiai (also \xe2\x82\xac|^pcwr/*at), irapo^wu, irapci^vfifiou, odaxw-o* \n^irxvufnat (Homer) ; a very few verbs drop y among the later writers, without \nsubstituting a strengthening <r; the vowel, however, is made long, e. g. rpaxw-w^ \nto make rough, re-rpdxv-fiai also TeTpdxva-fuu and reTpdxvfMfiai. It is evident that \nin the personal-endings, except those beginning with /tt, the y remains, e. g. \nV\xe2\x82\xac(l>a(r-/iaii \xe2\x80\xa2K4<pav-vai, ire-<l>avrai, i^^pafi-fiai, -avarai, \'avrai, fjax^finou, -vvccuy \n-vvTai, -ifi\'fie^oy (see ipaiy-a> and ^r^palywy \xc2\xa7 151) ; still, it is to be noted that the \nform of the second Pers. Sing., in -yffou, is rare ; instead of it the Part, with \nrt is used, e. g. ire<paa-fi4yo5 ef, etc. \n\nEem. 5. On the omission of <r in endings beginning with o-^, s<,\xc2\xab 4 25, 3 ; \non the variable a, in the first Perf. Act. and Mid. and in the first Aor. Pass., and \nalso in the second Aorists of liquid verbs with a monosyllabic stem and the \nstem-vowel e, see \xc2\xa7 140, 3 ; on the Perf. of aytlpwy and iydpw with Att. Redup., \nsee \xc2\xa7 124, 2 (b). \n\n9. In the second Perf. (which, however, belongs only to \na few verbs) the short stem-vowel before the ending -a, is \nlengthened, as in the first Aor. Act., except in verbs with e \nin the Fut, which take the variable o (\xc2\xa7 140, 4), e. g. <f>aiv-(o, \nfirst Aor. e-^v-a^ second Perf. 7re-(jyr]v-a\', but airelp-a), Fut. \ncirep-S), second Perf. e-airop-cu \n\nBem. 6. Second Aorists Act. and Mid. are rare in liquid verbs, e. g. efiaXov^ \ni0a\\6fjir]v, eKOLvoyj iVTapov (doubtful in prose) from $dWut koxvw, m-cupw, icrel- \nvw ; Aorists are also formed from some irregular verbs ; a few verbs, also, have \na second Aor. Pass., e. g. those with monosyllabic stems, as Sepw, iSdprjVy ^\xe2\x82\xac^ \npUf orreAAw, <paiyuj puaivwy KXivWy etc. \n\n\n\nh 150. Paradigms of Liquid Verbs. \n\noTfyiXXwy to announce. \n\n\n\nACTIVE \n\n\n\nPres. a-yy4\\Kw Perf. I. \xc2\xa5iyycK-Ka Perf. 11. l-\xc2\xab^op-\xc2\xab, perdidi, from ^pSt^ip-^ \n\n\n\nFut. Ind \n\n\n\nAor. T. \n\nAor. II. \n\n(rare) \n\n\n\nS \n\n\n\nD, \n\n\n\nayy^K-Si \n\nayyeX-etrov \n\n077\xe2\x82\xac\\-erT\xe2\x82\xac \n\n\n\nOpt. ayyf\\o7fu \nd776\\o7s \nayy^Ko\'i \nayyiXoTrov \nayyeKolrTjy \naYye^oifjLey \n\nayycXoTey \n\n\n\nor d77eA.o^77J\' \n" ayyeXoljjs \n\n" iyycXolrrroy \n\n*\' O77\xe2\x82\xacA0t^T7JI\' \n\n" ayyeXolrifiey \n\n" 0776X0177x6 \n\nd77eA.or\xe2\x82\xacV \n\n\n\nInf. d77fX6?y Part. ayyeXuv, -ovaa, -ovy \n\n\n\niJYy^i\\-a, ayyeiXw, aYyelXaifxi, 67761X01\', i77eTXai, d77\xe2\x82\xac^\\as \nInd. ^77eA.-o\xc2\xbb\' Subj. o776\'\\w Opt. a77\xe2\x82\xac\\ot;tu Imp. itrycAc \nInfoTTeXeTr Part. aYyeXciy, -ovffa, -6v. \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 151.] \n\n\n\nPARADIGMS OF LtQtflD VERBS. \n\n\n\n183 \n\n\n\nMIDDLE. 1 \n\n\nPcrf. Ind. \n\n\nS. 1. \n\n\n\xc2\xa5tyy^\\-fxai \n\n\nImperative. \n\n\nInfinitive. \n\n\n\n\n2. \n\n\n^77\xe2\x82\xacA.-<rat \n\n\n^yyek-cro \n\n\n\xe2\x80\xa2^776A-i^ai \n\n\n\n\n3. \n\n\n^77\xe2\x82\xacA-Tat \n\n\nriyy4\\-^a> \n\n\nParticiple. \n\n\n\n\nD. 1. \n\n\n\xe2\x80\xa2^77eA-/te3^\xc2\xabi\' \n\n\n\n\n^ry7\xe2\x82\xacA.-/Li\xe2\x82\xacVoy \n\n\n\n\n2. \n\n\n^77eA.-i&^o\xc2\xbb\' \n\n\nijyy^^-^oy \n\n\nSubjunctive. \n\n\n\n\n3. \n\n\n^yytA-iS-oi/ \n\n\niryy4\\-^wy \n\n\niryy^^-ft\'^yos 5 \n\n\n\n\nP. 1. \n\n\n^JTyeA-ztcei^a \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n2. \n\n\n^77eA.-d^\xe2\x82\xac \n\n\nijYyiX-^f \n\n\n\n\n\n\n3. \n\n\nijYyiK-fjiivoi \xe2\x82\xact<n\'(i\') \n\n\n^77eA,^ctf(roi\', or rfYy4\\-^wv] \n\n\nPlup. Ind. \n\n\nijyy4\\ \n\n\n-/UTJV, -ao^ -TOy -flCfS-Oy, \n\n\n\'dovy -i^v, -jnedo, -i^\xe2\x82\xac, 7iYY^^4voi ^crav \n\n\nFut. Ind. \n\n\nS. 1. \n\n\nA77e\\-oDjtMU \n\n\nOpt. dTyeA-o^/UTji/ [ Infinitive. \n\n\n\n\n2. \n\n\nd77\xe2\x82\xacA-^, or -\xe2\x82\xaci \n\n\ni77\xe2\x82\xacA-oro \n\n\n\xe2\x80\xa2y7eA.-er(r3^at \n\n\n\n\n3. \n\n\na77\xe2\x82\xac\\-errca \n\n\ni77\xe2\x82\xac\\-orTo \n\n\nParticiple. \n\n\n\n\nD. 1. \n\n\noyyeA-ou^ei^oj/ \n\n\nayycA-oifie^ou \n\n\ndyycA.-ow^evos \n\n\n\n\n2. \n\n\n&77\xe2\x82\xacA.-er(rd^o*> \n\n\niLyyeK-oia^dov \n\n\n\n\n\n\n3. \n\n\nayye\\-c7(r^otf \n\n\nkyy\xe2\x82\xac\\-ol(T^v \n\n\n\n\n\n\nP. 1. \n\n\noyyeA-ou/uei^a \n\n\naYYf\\-oliu.\xe2\x82\xacda \n\n\n\n\n\n\n2. \n\n\n077e\\-er<rd^6 \n\n\nayy\xe2\x82\xac\\-o7a^e \n\n\n\n\n\n\n3. \n\n\n077\xe2\x82\xac\\-oi5ktcu \n\n\norfyiK-oivro \n\n\n\n\nAor I. \n\n\nInd. i}yy ciK-dfirjv, etc. \n\n\n1 \n\n\nAor. n. \n\n\nInd. riyy(\\-6fir]v Subj. ayyeK-ufiai Opt. ajy(\\olfir]U Imp. \n\n\n(rare) \n\n\nikyye\\-ov Inf. ayye\\-e(r^ai Part. iLyyf\\-6/JL\xe2\x82\xacV0S. \n\n\nVerbal adjective : ayyeK-reos, -rca, -t4ov. 1 \n\n\n\nV \n\n\n\n^ 151. Shorter Paradigms, arranged according to the \nstem-vowel of the Future. \n\n(a) with & in the Future: <T(pd\\\\w, fnllo; (palyw, to sAow, Mid. \n\nto appear. \n\n\n\nACTIVE. \n\n\n\nPres. \nPcrf. I. \nPerf. II. \nFut. \nAor. I. \n\n\n\n(r<pdw-(a \nf-(r<pr]\\-a \n\n\n\nMIDDLE. \n\n\n\nfftfxiW-oficu \n\n<T(pa\\ovfiai \nwanting \n\n\n\nACTIVE. \n\n\n\n(ire-tpay-Ka) \n\n\n\nMIDDLE. \n\n\n\nir(-<fnfv-a, 1 appear, \n(f>av-u \n\n\n\n<paiv-o/j.ai \nx4-<pa(r-fxai \n\n\n\n<pay-ovfiou \' \n\n\n\n* I shall appear, a.iro<p., I shall affirm. * Prose iirec^., it xvas affirmed by me. \n\n\n\nPASSIVE. \n\n\n\nAor. I. \nFut. I. \nAor. II. \nFut. II. \n\n\n\ni-<r<pd\\-^v (poet.) \n(r(pa\\-^-f](TOnai (poet.) \n\ni-(r<p&\\-r}u \ncr(paK-{i<rofiat \n\n\n\ni-<pdy-^v, I appeared, \n\n<pou/-^<rofxai \ni-(p&u-rfy, I appeared, \n\n<pav-4\\<rofJLai, [ will appear. \n\n\n\nVerbal adjective : (r<^aX-Teoj, -reo, -rfou, <f>av-rfos. \n\n\n\n184 \n\n\n\nPARADIGMS OF LIQUID VEEBS. \n\n\n\n[^ 152, 153 \n\n\n\nInflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass, of \n^aiu\'Ujtoshow; ^t] palu-w, to dry, a.ni relu-w {^ 149, Eem. 3), to sfretcA. \n\n\nlud. S. 1. \n\n2. \n\n3. \nD. 1. \n\n2. \n\n3, \nP. 1. \n\n2. \n\n3. \n\n\nire-cpour-fiai \n\n7re-(pav-(rai \n\nire-ipau-rai \n\n7r\xe2\x82\xac-(pd(r-/J.fbov \n\nire-<pav-bov \n\n7r4-<pav-bov \n\nTre-ipda-fx^ba \n\niri-cpav-be \n\nire-cpacr-fieuot. eiVt(i/) \n\n\ni-^-fjpafi-fjLOU \n\n4-\\i]pav-<Taj. \n\ni-^ijpav-Tcu \n\n4-^7ipdfJL-fj.ebov \n\n4-^7]pay-boy \n\n4-\\r]pav-hov \n\n4-^ripdfJ.-fJ-fba \n\n4-\\i]pav-b\xe2\x82\xac \n\n4-\\r}pafx-ix4voi i\\<Ti(v) \n\n\nre-rd-fuu \nrt-TCL-cax \n\nre-ri-ficbov \n\nTi-ra-abov \n\nre-ra-ffdov \n\nTf-T&-fji\xe2\x82\xacba \n\nTf-ra-abe \nTf-ra-yrou \n\n\nImp. S. 2. \n\n3. \n\nD.2. \n\n3. \n\nP. 2. \n\n3. \n\n\n[iri-cpav-ao) \nire-cpdv-bw \nTr4<pav-bov \nTre-cpdu-bwv \nire-<pav-b\xe2\x82\xac \nTre-<pdy-bucrav, or \nTre-(pdu-bav \n\n\n{4-^7ipav-(To) \n4-^ripdu-bco \n4-\\i]pav-bov \n\ni-^7)pdv-b(DV \n\n4-\\-npau-be \n4-^r]pdv-b(D<ray, or \n4-^7)pdu-b(i)y \n\n\nr4 Td-<ro \n\nr\xe2\x82\xac-rd-aboa \n\nre-ra-aboh \n\nn-rd-cbtcv \n\nrc-^a-abc \n\nr(\'rd-<rbti)(Tay, Of \n\nTt-rd-abuv \n\n\nInf. \n\n\nire-cpdy-bai \n\n\n4-^t\\pdv-h<u \n\n\nTcrd-abai \n\n\nPart. \n\n\nire-cpaa-fxepos \n\n\ne-^T]pafi-^euos \n\n\nre-rd-fifyos \n\n\n\n5 152. (b) with \xe2\x82\xac in the Future: \'Ifielp-w (Ion. and Poet.), to \ndesire, and ariWu, to send. \n\n\n\nACTIVE. \n\n\nMIDDLE. \n\n\nACTIVE. \n\n\nMIDDLE. \n\n\nPres. \nPerf. I. \nPut. \nAor. I. \n\n\nIfifip-O) \n\'Ifiep-Ka \nIfxip-S) \n\'IfjLfip-a \n\n\nIfxeip-ofxau \n\'ififp-fiat \nifxep-ouficu \ntlj.eip-dfj.r}y \n\n\nar4w-w \nf-a-ToX-Ka \n\ne-(rrfi\\-a \n\n\n<rr4w-ofiat \nf-areiK-fJuu \n\n<m\\-ovfuu \ni-arfiX-dfiTfy \n\n\nPASSIVE. 1 \n\n\nAor. I. \nPut. I. \n\n\nlfi4p-^v \nllxcp-bi](TO(xai \n\n\n4-(TTd\\-^y A. II. i-irriX-Tiv \n<rTa\\-^<rofmi F. II. a-ToK-^ffofjuu \n\n\nVerbal Adj. t/xep-ros, -^, -6y, i/xep-reosy -r4a, -r4ov, araX-ros, (rraX.-r4os. \nRemark. The inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass, is like ^\xe2\x82\xacX-/iax. \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 153. (c) "With i and v in the Future, \n(o) t(aa-co, to pluck; ffvptoy to draw; ^Xuv-w, to defile. \n\n\n\nPres. \n\nPerf. \n\nPut. \nAor, 1. \nA. I. P. \nP. I. P. \n\n\n\nriKK-ofiat \nre-TiX-Ka \n\nT4-Tl\\-fJLaL \n\nTiA-w r\'lX-ov/xai \ne-TtA-a 4-Ti\\-d^i]y \ne-TiK-brjy \n\nri\\-bT](TofjLat \n\n\n\nffvp-Ci} \n\ncvp-ofiai \na-ffvp-Ka \nc4-(Tvp-pMi \n\ncvp-u (ri\'p-ovficu \ne-avp-a 4-<Tvp-dfiriy \n\n4-(TVp-bT]V \n\ncvp-^aofxai \n\n\n\nAor. 11. and Put. II. P. i-(rtp-r,y, ai-p-fxrofiou \n\n\n\nfio\\vy-ct \nfioKvy-OfUU \n\nfie-fi6\\va-fiau \n\nfjio\\vy-u fjLoXiy\'Ov/Juu \n4-fi6\\vya 4-fxoKvv-dti\'r\\v \n\n4-fJt.0kVV-dT}V \n\nfioKvy-dijcofuu \n\n\n\nVerbal Adj. ti\\-t6s, nX-reos, avp-rSs, (rvp-T4o5, fioXvy-rSs, no\\vv-r4os. \nRemark 1. The inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass, of r4Ti\\-,iai, (r4-<rvp- \nfiat, is like ^77eA-/xat, and that of fie- fi6\\v(r-fjiai like ir4-<paff-fuuy that of paxw/i" \nixai (from atVxw-a>, to shame), like 4-^-f,paiJ.-iMii. \n\n\n\n^ 154.] PECULIARITIES IN THE FORMATION OF VERBS \n\n\n\n185 \n\n\n\n()8) K?dy-u, to bend down; ir\\vv-Uy to loash, with y dropped (\xc2\xa7 149, 7). \n\n\n\nACTIVE. \n\n\n\nPres. \nPerf. \nPut. \nAor. I. \n\n\n\nKXiV-(0 \n\nKKty-w \ni-KXlv-a \n\n\n\nMIDDLE. \n\n\n\nKXtv-ofxax \nKc-KKl-fxai \nKXtv-ovixai \ni-KKiv-a.fxr]v \n\n\n\nACTIVE. \n\n\n\nTTf-KKv-Ka \n\nir\\vv-u \ne-TrKvv-a \n\n\n\nMIDDLE. \n\n\n\nirXvy-ofiai \n\xe2\x96\xa0ir4-Tr\\v-fjLai \nirXvy-ov/JLai \ni-irXvy-dfJL-qv \n\n\n\nPASSIVE. \n\n\n\nAor. I. \nAor. II. \n\n\n\n4-K\\f-^U Put. I. /fAl-i^O-O/iOi \n\ni-KXiv-i\\v Put. II. KAiV-7;(ro/xat \n\n\n\ni-irXv\'^v irXv-^aoficu \n\n\n\nVerbal Adj. kM-tSs^ -^, -6^^ K\\i-r4os, -ria, -reov, ir\\u-TJs, xAu-reos. \nHem. 2. The inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass. k4-k\\X-imii and ire-TrXO- \nfiw. is like re-To-fWH, and corresponds with that of pure verbs. \n\n\n\n-k=- \n\n\n\nk 154. Special Peculiarities in the Formation of \nsingle Verbs, both Pure and Impure. \n\n1. The Future of very many Active verbs is in the Middle \nform, e. g, aKovin, I hear, Fiit. aKovcro/xat, I shall hear, Aor. -^\'^ovcro, \nIheard. See k 198. \n\n2. The following verbs in -aico or -atu and -cw, whose stem \nended originally in -av \' and -cv (aF, iF), resume the v in the \nAorist and Future (^ 25, 2) : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nKcdw (old Attic icdw seldom, and without contraction), to hum, Put. Katxru; Aor. \n\ne/couco; Perf. KeKavKa; Perf. Mid. or Pass. KfKoy/xai ; Aor. Pass, c/cau^i/; \n\nPut. Pass. Kav^crofiai; verbal Adj. /caucTeos, kuvctos, KavT6s] but second \n\nAor. Act. iK&riVy I burned, Intrans., in the Ion. and later writers. \nK\\al(o {kKOu seldom, and \\N\'ithout contraction), to weep, KXavffoixai or KXavaovfjLcu \n\n(No. 3), KXaixrw late ; first Aor. Act. t/cXai/o-a, etc. ; Perf. Pass. KfKXavfiou ; \n\nAor. Pass. iKXava^v late. See \xc2\xa7 166, 18. \n^\xe2\x82\xac(1), to run, Put. ^eixTo/iai or ^\xe2\x82\xacv(rovfiat (No. 3), ^tvau late; the other tenses \n\nare wanting. See rp4x<\xc2\xbb, ^ 167, 5. \nV(Q}, to swim, Put. vivffoiiai or j/euo\'oiJ/nat (No. 3) ; Aor. ci/eutra; Perf. veVeu/fo. \njrAe\'ft), <o saiV, Put. TrAeworo/xoi, usually irAeucroC/xot (No. 3) ; Aor. eirAeuo-o; Perf. \n\nireirAev/ca; Perf. Mid. or Pass. TrcTrAevor/icu ; Aor. Pass. ^irAcyc.^j\' ; verbal \n\nAdj. XA\xe2\x82\xacU(rT60S. \n\n\' The u in the Put. of these verbs is occasioned by the reappearance of th\xc2\xa9 \nDigamma {F) softened into the vowel v. Tbe Digamma would regularly \nstand in the Pres. before the personal-ending <w, l)ut is omitted where it comes \nbetween two vowels : it appears, however, in tbe Put., as it there stands before \nthe consonant <r. This is analogous to the disappearance, in the Pres., of some \naspirate, perhaps h (comp. velio), in the Latin verbs flue, struo, and tbe reap- \npearance of the same in the Perf. before s, with which it combines and forms x, \n\n16* \n\n\n\n186 PECULIARITIES IN THE FORMATION OF VERBS. [^ 154. \n\niryew, to blow, Fut. irye^ffofiai or vyeva-odfuu (No. 3); AoT. f-wvewra; Pert \n\nTreWeu/ca ; late Fut. we^o-w, and Aor. Pass. iTri/eia^y. \npew, to Jlow^ Fut. piiffofxai ; Aor. eppcvcra ; both forms extremely rare in the \n\nAttic, which uses instead of them pxrfjffofjuut ^ppvr^v (\xc2\xa7 192, 7), and so also \n\nthe Perf. ip^irjKa. \n\nEemak\xc2\xab 1. The verb x*\xc2\xae (x^^f^* X*\'^\'")\' ^\xc2\xb0 P^^ <^> differs from the pre- \nceding verbs: Fut. xe\xc2\xab; Fut. Mid. x^^l^^ (see No. 4); Aor. \xe2\x82\xacx\xc2\xabi, Subj. xe\xc2\xbb. \nInf. xf\xc2\xab\'> Inap. x\xc2\xab<"\'\xc2\xbb X^\'^\'^^1 e^^i -^o^- -^^d- ^X"^/*\'?" (see No. 7); Perf. Act \nKex^Ka; Perf. Mid. or Pass. K4x^imi\\ Aor. Pass, ^x^"? ^\'it. Perf. xv^<ro;Mu \n(\xc2\xa7 223, R. 2). The forms with ew belong only to the Epic; Fut. x\xc2\xab\'^\xc2\xbbj ^or. \n\xe2\x82\xacX\xe2\x82\xacva. \n\n3. The circuniflexed Fut. in -ov/Aai which properly belongs to \nliquid verbs only, is used by the Doric WTiters with other verbs \nalso, whose Future would regularly be in -o-w or -a-ofiau, e. g. \nrvij/Wj -elsy \'\xe2\x82\xacL, \'ovfxev, -etrc, -ovvrai ; Tuij/ov^iy etc. ; this is called the \nDoric Fut. and is in common use in the following verbs, yet \nonly in the Middle form, with the signification of the Fut \nAct. : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(peiy-b), tojlee^ Fut. ^tev^ovfuu and <l>tv^ofuu \n\niral^-a, to sport, " xai^ov^uu " "wai^ofuu \n\nXeC-\xc2\xab\xc2\xbb alvum exonerare, " x*<\'\'<\'^\'/"" \n\nir{irT-\xc2\xab, to fall, " -wfcovfuu (nETG) \n\nirvp^duouai, to inquire, " trtvffovfuu, usually -rewrafjuu, \n\nand also in those mentioned under No. 2 : KKaiu, \xc2\xab-A.\xc2\xabw, rvtw, i4w, \n\n4. Future without the tense-characteristic. The Fut. of the \nfollowing verbs, being without the Fut. characteristic <r, and \nhaving the inflection of the Present, takes entirely tlie form of \na Present, viz. : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n?5-\xc2\xab, Epic, usually eV^fw, to eat, Fut. n-ofuu; irlvw (nin), to drink; Fut. \xc2\xab-i- \nofiai ; x\xe2\x82\xac\xc2\xbb, to pour out, Fut. x^\'w, Xf \'J, X^h etc. ; Fut. Mid. x^ofuu (see Rem. 1 ). \n\n5. Also two mute verbs take the Future form of liquid verbs \nin \'ovfxai without o- : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nfidx-ofiai, tojight, Fut. fiax-ovficu (formed from the Ion. fmX\'f<rofuu). \ne^ofiai (\'EAn), to sit, Fut. {iS-ovfiai) Ko^eS-ovfuu. \n\n6. The Fut. Perf of the following verbs has an Act form: \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nbviiffKu, to die, Perf. r4^Ka, lam dead, Fut. Perf. Tebv4)^w or -lo^uu, I shall \nbe dead ; \n\nIffTTifii, to station, Perf. eo-Tjj/co, / stand, Fut. Perf. ear^ot or -iotuut I skaU \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 155,] VERBS. SYNCOPE. 187 \n\ndand. \'E<rT^|\xc2\xab and redvii^o) are old Attic ; k<rri\\^otuu and Te,^|o/\xc2\xabu are \nonly in the Attic, X. Cy. 6. 2, 17. \n\n7. The three following verbs, though not liquid, form the \nfirst Aor. according to the analogy of the second Aor., \\\\\'ithout \nthe tense-characteristic a : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nfheiy (second Aor.), to say, first Aor. cTir-a; tptpw (*ErKfl), to bear, first Aor. \nfjyeyi^a (second Aor. IjyfyKoy) ; x<\xc2\xabi ^X*<* (see Rem. 1). \n\nRem. 2. In the second Aor. iirtvovj from nET-a> (irlirr-w), to fall, the c is \nnot the tense-characteristic, but belongs to the stem, the t having here been \nchanged into <r (Dor. timov). The first Aor. tinaa, is late ; in Eurip. Ale. 471 \nand Troad. 294, the readings are not sufficiently confirmed. \n\n8. The following pure and impure- verbs form the Perf Subj. \nand Plup. Opt. Mid. or Pass, without the aid of the auxiliary \n\xe2\x82\xac^u\\ the impiu"e verbs by assuming an \xe2\x82\xac as their characteristic \nin forming the tenses, become analogous to pure verbs : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nKri-onai^ I obtain, Perf. KtKrrifuu, I possess, Sul\xc2\xbbj. Kftcru/juu, -ij, -^toi ; Plup. \niKfKr-finrjy, I fX)ssfsstJ. Opt. Kffcnjfirjy, Kftcnjo, k(kt^to or K(Kr(fnir]y, -tfo, \n\n/Aifiy^aKfn (MNAH), to remind, Perf. fifnyrjfjxu, I remember, Subj. fiffiywfuu, -p, \n\n-rireu ; Plup. ifitfiy^ntfy, Opt. fiffiyrifir^y, -fjo, -pro or fxffiyp^nrjyf -yo, -^ro, and \n\nin X. An. I. 7, 5. ntfxvoio (in all the MSS.). \nfidWw, to throw (BAA), Perf. /3\xe2\x82\xac^Atj/\xc2\xabu, second Pers. PI. Perf. Subj. Sio^e- \n\n$\\ri<r^\xc2\xab, Andoc. p. 22. ^ 24. \nKa\\4(i>, to name, Perf. KtKXi^^uu, I am named; Plup. lK(K\\-{iyLi\\v, Opt. KtKXpurjyf \n\n-fjo, -TJro, \n\nRem. 3. ^Krerfi^cbou may be found in PI. Rp, 564, c ; at present, however, \nthe right reading is itcrfrfi^fffadoy, according to most MSS. \n\n\n\n$ 155. Syncope. \n\n1. A few verbs, in some forms, suffer Syncope (\xc2\xa7 16, S). \nE. g. the following words in prose : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\niTfTOfuu, to fly, Aor. iirr6yir]y, irrftrbai, Fut. irr^aoficu (c syncopated). \n\niyeipm, to wake, second Aor. riyp6fjiriy (also the Inf. (ypforbcu with the accent \nof the Pres.), I aivoke (Vyep^", I v^as awake), (\xc2\xab\xc2\xab or \xc2\xbb syncopated.) \n\ntpxonai, to go, second Aor. ^\\^oy^ Inf iKbeTy, etc., from \'EAET0CI (u synco- \npated), (^ 167, 2.) \n\ntifuUf to suppose, instead of oiofuu, vf^V instead of (f6yki\\v. \n\n\n\n188 VERBS. METATHESIS. [$ 156 \n\n2. This Syncope occurs most frequently after the redu\xc2\xab \nplication ; thus, e. g. \n\na. In the Present: \nylyuofxai, to become, instead of yi-yevofxai, stem TENXl. \nfii/xvo}, to remain, Poet., instead of (xi-fj.4vw. \n\nTriiTTw, to fall, instead of iri-ireTO), stem llETCi, \n\n7rnrpd(TK<i} from irepdco. ^ \n\nb. In the Perfect: \n\nireTdvuvfii, to spreaa ovt, Tr4irTaiJt.ai] ireirT\xc2\xab/co (from HETO), to fall. \n\n$ 156. Metathesis. \n\nf 1. Metathesis (\xc2\xa7 22) occurs in the formation of the tenses \nof several verbs, most frequently in the Perf., Plup., first \nAor. Pass., and first Fut. Pass, (seldom in the second Aor. \nAct), sometimes also in the Pres., both for the sake of an \neasier or more euphonic form, and, in poetry, for the sake \nof making a syllable long by position. \n\n2. In the Common language, the following verbs are \nsubject to Metathesis : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nfid\\\\w,to throw, Put. jSaAw (jSaAA^^j Aristoph. Vesp. 222); Aor. e$aXop\', \nAor. Mid. i^axSfj.rju ; BAA: Perf. jSe\'iSATj/co; Perf. Mid. or Pass. fiefiKi)- \nfiai] AoY.\'PsiSS. ifi\\7)^T]v; Put. Pass. i8A77^<ro;uoi ; Put. Perf. )36)3AVo.t\xc2\xabt\'- \n\nSafidw, usually Sojua^o;, to tame, Put. dafxaa-co; Aor. iSdfiaffa] AMA: Perf. 545- \nlxi\\Ka; Perf Mid. or Pass. SeSfj-Tj/xai ; Aor. Pass, id/iij^\'ny, ildfi-riv. \n\n54(j.(o, to build {mostly Poet, and Ion.) ; Aor. Act. eSeifia ; Aor. Mid. e5ei/io/i7jy ; \nAME: Perf. SeBfx-nKa; Perf. Mid. or Pass. SiSfiijuai. \n\nSfvi](TKas,to die, Aor. imi^avov; Perf. Te^vrjKa. \n\n^pcixTKw, to leap, Aoi*. e^opov. \n\nKa\\4a, to call (Poet. KiKK-fiaKa, like ^vfia-Ku), Put. ko\\\xc2\xab; Perf. /ce/cXijKo. \n\nKdfivw, laboro, Aor. eKafiow, Perf. KeKfiriKa. \n\n(T/ceAAw, o-zceAeoj, to make dry, second Aor. %(TK\\-nv) Perf. \xe2\x82\xac<r/cXijKa; Put. \na/cATjco/iot. \n\nT^ixvu, to cut; Aor. irc(iov\\ Perf. r4Tfji.r]Ka. \n\nr^-flffofittii Iwill bear; Aor. erA^jv; Perf. rerArj/co, from the stem TAAA. \n\nRemark, When the stem of the verb is dissyllabic, then the vowel, trans- \nposed by Metathesis coalesces with the following vowel; (a) In inflection: \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nKepd\'vuvfii (Poet. Kepd-a), to mingle; Put. Kepaaa ; Perf. IVIid. or Pass. Kc/cpd \n\n/lai instead of K^-Kp4a-ixai; Aor. Pass. ^Kpab-qv. \nvivpdffKWytoseU (instead of tnirepda-Kw^ TrnrpedffKO)), from vepoLcc (hencc Put \n\n\n\n157, 158, "\xe2\x80\xa2 VERBS IN -a> WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. \n\n\n\n183 \n\n\n\nvepaffu) \', Perf. \xe2\x96\xa0JTC\'Trpd/ca, flreTpd/tto. ; Aor. Pass. iTrpad^Tjy] Fut. Perf. \n\nireiTfxio\'o/tat. \nffTope-yvv/jLi, to strow ; secondary form ffTpdJvvvfii (instead oi arp^6vwij.i)\\ \n\n"Exxi. ff r p di (T w \\ Aor. IcTpwo-a; Perf. Mid. or Pass. \xe2\x82\xac(rrpo)uai; Aor. \n\nPass, iarpu^rjv. \nireXd^ca, appropinquo, to bring to, ireXd^a), irXoL^u; Aor. Pass. eTreA.ao\'i^v ; \n\nPoet. Att. iirxd^rjv] second Aor. Att. ^irAd/trji\'; Perf. Mid. or Pass. \n\nAtt. v4ir\\a fiat, \n(b) The same holds also in the stem of the verb ^parru, to disturb (formed \nfrom rapdrTUj TpadTTw), an Attic form of rapdaffw ; Aor. e^pa^a. \n\n\n\n{ 157. Verbs in -o> with the Stem of the Present \n\nstrengthened. \n\n1. It has already been seen {kk 138-140), that the stem of \nmany verbs is strengthened in the Present ; but tliis strength- \nening remains only in the Present and Imperfect. Besides the \nmodes of strengthening aheady mentioned, by t {tttj kt), a- (cro-, \n^), and by lengthening the stem- vowel, there are others, which \nwill now be specified. \n\nRemark. All the forms which are assumed for the sake of constructing the \ntenses in use, are indicated by capitals (\xc2\xa7 138, 3). The abbreviations, D. M., \nsignify Deponent Middle, and D. P., Deponent Passive (\xc2\xa7 102, 3). The fj. i, placed \nin parenthesis, shows that the form standing before it, is analogous to the con- \njugation in -fjLi, to be treated below. See \xc2\xa7 191. \n\n\n\nM58. I. Verbs, whose Pure Stem is strengthened in the \nPres. and Imp/, by inserting v before the ending. \n\nPeeliminart Remark. \'Qaivu lengthens the stem-vowel a into ai ; \xe2\x82\xacAavj/a>, \na into av \', hvvw and irivcay v and I into and r. \n\n1. BatVo), to go (BA-), Fut. ySTJo-o/xat; Perf piji-qKa {k 194, 2); \nsecond Aor. tj^-qv (jxl, \xc2\xa7 191); the Pass, occurs in compounds, \ne. g. ava^aiVOfxaL, dva^c/?a/x,at, 7rapa^\xe2\x82\xac)8a/xat, ave^a^rjv, TrapejSaSrpf \n[H 130 (c), and 131, 5]. Verbal adjectives, ySaros, fSarios. \n\nRemark. First Aor. Act. I/Stjo-o, and Put. /3i^(r\xc2\xab, are transitive, / brought^ \nvnll bring, and belong only to the poetic, Ionic, and later writers \n\n2. Svv(x), to go in, to go under, to put on. The unstrengthened \nverb Sua) (KareBvo)) has in the Pres., in the Fut Svao) and first \nAor. Act. eSuo-a, a transitive signification, to wrap up, to immerse, \n\n\n\nt90 VERBS IN -0> WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. [\\ 158. \n\nto sink; (so also Perf. in X. An. 5. 8, 23, dTroSeSvKo/;) Aor. \nPass. iSv^rjv; Fut. Pass. Sv^a-ofxat [$ 130 (b),2].. But the Mid. \nBvofjLai, BeSvfxai, Sva-ofxaL, iBvadfjiTjv, signifies to wrap up one\'s self, to \ngo into, or under, to clothe one\'s self; likewise the Perf. Se\'Svxa \nand the Aor. ISw (/xt, ^ 191), have an intransitive signification, \nlike hvofiai. Verbal adjectives, hvT6<iy hvrios. \n\n3. eXawo), to drive (secondary form cXtu, -as, etc. poetic, yet \nalso in X. Cy. 8. 3, 32. a-jriXa, Imp.) ; Fut. eXoo-w (in later writers, \nthough also X. An. 7. 7, 56. cAao-ovras), commonly Att. IXw, -as, \n-a. Inf. eAav (^ 117); Aor. -^Aao-a; Peif. eX^Xa/ca; Mid. to drive \nfrmn me, Aor. rjXaadfxrjv ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. iX-qXajxax ; Inf. cXi^- \nXao-^at [^ 124, 2 (a)] ; Aor. Pass. rfXa^riv [a in the tense-forma- \ntion, k 130 (c) ; without <r, f 131, 5]. \xe2\x80\x94 Verbal adjectives, eXaros, \nIXarios (X. Hipparch. 2, 7). \n\n4. S^vyctf and ^vu (poet.), to rage, Fut. j^cw, etc. ; second Aor. Part, ^ififvos \n{fii), raging. \n\n5. TTiVw, io drink, Fut. irtofxai ($ 154, 4), among the later \nwriters Tnovfjiai, but also, in X. Symp. 4, 7. Trteto-^e ; second Aor. \narXov, Inf Trteiv, Part. Trtwv, Imp. ttl&l ($ 191), poet., and seldom \nprose TTte ; IIG- Perf iriTnoKa ; Perf Mid. or Pass. TrcVo/xai ; Aor. \nPass, eTTo^v, Fut. Pass. 7ro^>jo-o/xat [^^ 130 (c), and 131, 5J. \nVerbal adjectives, ttotos, Troreos. \n\n6. rtv(i>, to pay, to expiate, Fut. tictw; Aor. erlcra; Perf. Act. \nrerlKo.\', Perf Mid. or Pass. Tmc/xat, Aor. Pass. ItMtjv {k 131). \nMid. rtvofxaL, to get pay from, to avenge, to punish, Tio-o/Aat, cTicra- \nfxrjv. Verbal Adj. rtoreov. In the Pres. and Impf the penult is \nlong in Epic, short in Attic ; in the other tenses, it is long in all \nthe poets. \n\nTlu, to honor, rtffu, irlcra, rerinaiy Poet. \n\n7. <f>S^dv(o, to anticipate, Fut. ^5^o-oju,at, more rarely ^^ao-w, e g. \nX. Cy. 5. 4, 38. 7. 1, 19; first. Aor. I^^aora, and (in prose more \nseldom) second Aor. etfi\'^rjv (fii, \xc2\xa7 191) ; Perf \xe2\x82\xac<^^aKa. In Pres, \nand Impf. d in Epic, a in Attic. \n\n8. (/)3-/j/\xc2\xab (poet., rarely prose and only in the Pres., e. g. PL Phaedr. 246, e. \nSymp 211, a.), to perish (seldom to consume), Fut. <j>^f(rou and Aor. e^Itra, trans. \nto consume. \xe2\x80\x94 Intrans., Fut. p^ia-ofxai ; Perf. e^jywou, ecp^tvrai ; Plup. and second \nAor. i<(>^ffjLT]v, Subj. (p^ia/xai, Opt. ^^IfiTjv, (p^Tro, Imp. <p^ia^. Inf. <^(<r3^eu. \n\n\n\n$ 159.] VERBS IN -<u WITH STEENGTHENED STEM. 191 \n\nPart. 4>^iix\xe2\x82\xacvost e. g. X. Cy. 8. 7, 18. roti ^t/xej/ow, <Ae <feacf (/tt, ^ 192). Verbal \nadjective, (t>^w6s. \nHere belong also three verbs, whose pure stem ends with a consonant : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n9. 8a/cvo>, to bite, Aor. eSaKov ; Fut. 8?^^ofiat (late StJ^w) ; Perf. \nAor. SeSiyxa; Perf. Mid. or Pass. SiSrjyfMaL; Aor. Mid. i&qidfxrjv \n( Hippoc.) ; Aor. Pass. iS-^x^V^ 5 ^^t- Pass. 8r})(3T]<rojxaL, \n\n10. Kafxvoi, to labor, to be weary, Aor. cKa/xov; Fut. Kafiovfxai\'f \nPerf. K\xe2\x82\xacK[xrjKa (\xc2\xa7 156, 2). \n\n11. Tijxvoiy to cut, Fut. Tc/xoi; Aor. h-eixov (era/xot/, ^ 140, 2) ; \nPerf. ThfXTjKa (^ 156, 2) ; Mid. ^ cw^ for one\'s self (something) ; \nAor. Mid. irefiofiTjv; Perf Mid. or Pass. TeV/xTy/xat (Subj. ririuia-- \n^ov, \xc2\xa7 154, Rem. 3); Aor. Pass. ct/om}^7^v; Fut. Perf TCT/ATJo-o/xat. \nVerbal Adj. rfirp-os, rfiririo^. \n\n$ 159. II. Verbs, whose Pure Stem is strengthened in \nthe Pres. and Impf. by inserting the syllable vt \nbefore the ending. \n\n1. Pv-v\xe2\x82\xac(o,to stop icp, Fut. l3v<T<j); Aor. l/3vo-a; Perf Mid. or Pass. \n)8\xe2\x82\xac^v(r/xat; Aor. Mid. i(3v<rdiJL\'qv ; Aor. Pass. if^xKr^riv {k 131). \n\nPres. i8ua>, not used by the Attic writers. \n\n2. LK-viofiai (the simple is seldom used in prose, e. g. Th. 5, ) \n40. PI. Phaedr. 276, d., the compound being generally used/ \ninstead of it), d^tKvco/xcu, to come, Fut. d(f>L$o/xaL ; Aor. dcJHKofnfjv, \nd<fiLK\xe2\x82\xac(T^aL ; Perf. dcfHyfxcu, d(f)Lx^o-L \', Plup. dffytyfJirjVy d<^lKTO. Verb. \n\nAdj. tKT09. \n\n3. Kvv-\xe2\x82\xacio, to kiss, Fut. Kva-oi: Aor. \xe2\x82\xacKvcra [^ 130 (b)]. But Trpos- \nKtn/\xe2\x82\xaco), to worship, Fut. TrposKwiJo-w ; Aor. irposiKvvqcra (also poetic \n7rpos\xe2\x82\xacKi;cra, Inf. 7rposKvo-at). \n\n4. vmcrx-vloiMaL (vTrLa-x-ofxaL Ion.), strengthened form of v7rej(o/>tai, \nproperly, ^o AoZc:? cwe*5 self under, to promise, Aor. vTrearx\'OfJirjVj Imp. \nV7ro(7;(ov ; but Fut. v7rocr^o"o/xat ; Perf vTrco^/xat. So, d/XTncrxyov^ \nfiai or djXTrexofjicu, to clothe (from d/i,7re;(a>, io surround), Impf. d/iTrci- \n;(ov, Fut. dfxcfii^o}, Aor. T^fnrurxoVf dfXTrur)(\xe2\x82\xacLVi Fut. d^t^i^ofiai\'y Aor. \nrifji.7nxr\\6fjir)v and rj/jLTreaxpfJirjv (026, 1). \n\n\n\n192 VERBS WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. [\xc2\xa7 160. \n\n^ 160. III. Verbs, whose Pure Stem is strengthened in \nthe Pres. and Impf. by inserting the syllable av, \nmore rarely atv, before the ending. \n\na. a,v or aiv is inserted without any change. \n\nPreliminary Eemark. All verbs of this kind form their tenses from a \nfcfireefold stem, viz. the Pres. and Impf. from the strengthened stem, the second \nAor. from the pure stem, the Put. and Perf. from a third stem, consisting of a \npure stem and an assumed e, which is changed in the inflection into tj ; hence \nthe Put. and Perf are formed like the same tenses of verbs in -ew. \xe2\x80\x94 The a in \nthe ending -av<a is also short in Epic (except in the three verbs, iKavu}, <pSfdvwy \nand Kixdvco) ; but long in iKdvca in Attic. \n\nX. alaS^-av-ofxai (seldom ato-^o/>tat), tO perceive, Aor. \'QO-^-ofirjv, \nala^\xe2\x82\xac(rS^aL \', Perf. rfr^-qixai\', Fnt. aio-\xc2\xab^^(ro/xat ; verb. Adj. aui^rp-6^. \n2. a/xapxavw, to miss, Aor. rjfxapTOV (late rjixdpTTjaa) ; Fut. a/xap- \n\nTT^ao/xaL (ajjiapTrja-d), only in Alexandrine Greek) ; Perf. rjixapr-qKa; \nPerf Pass, rjfxdprrjfxai\', Aor. Pass. rjfiapr-^Srjv (X. An. 5 9, 21. \nVect. 4, 37). Verb. Adj. dfiapTrp-iov. \n-^ 3. aTTC^^avo/Aat, to be hated, Aor. dirqy^^opiypf (poet. r])(&6iJ.7]v) \', \nInf. d7rix^\xe2\x82\xaca^aL with irregular accent ; Fut. dTrex^-qcrojxaL ; Perf \nair-qx^riixaiy I am hated. \n\n4. avidvco (and av^w), to increase, Fut. av^o-w; Aor. rpj^aa; \nPerf TjvirjKa ; Mid. and Pass, to thrive, Perf. -qv^ixaL ; Fut. av^]- \n(TOfxai and av^S-qorojjiaL ; Aor. tjv^Stjv. \n\n5. (SXaarTavoi, to sprout, Aor. cySAaorov (later ipXdaTTjaa) ; Fut. \n/3Xao-T^o-a) ; Perf i/SXda-rrjKa and ^e^XdcTTYjKa (^ 123, 2). \n\n6. BapS-dvoi, commonly in composition, KaroS., to sleep, Aor. \nKariBapSov ( KaraSap^erra, Aristoph. Plut. 300) ; Fut. KaTa&xp5ijo-o- \nfxat; Perf. KaraSeddpSrjKa. \n\n7. lldvio and Ka^i^dvw, secondary form of t^w, Ko^t^w. See \n$ 166, 16. \n\n8. KXayydvoi, used of dogs, a secondary form of kXo^o), /o c;"y \nOW^, Fut. Kkdy^oi {K\xe2\x82\xacK\\dyiofiaL, Aiistopli. Vesp. 930) ; Aor. eK-Xay^o, \nacXayov, Eur. Ipll. T. 1062; Perf KeKXayya (old form KexX-qya). \n\n9. oiSavw, oiSatVo) (also otSaco, ocSeco), to swell, Fut oIStJo-o); Perf. \n\n10. oA.ta-.9^av(o (6A.to--^aa\'a> used by later writers), to slip, Aor. \nwXto-^ov; Fut. oAio-^T^ao) ; Perf wAtV^Ka (first Aor. oiXiaSrja-a \nlater). \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 160.] VERBS IN -0) WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. 193 \n\n11. oo-^patvo/xat, to smelly Aor. cja-cfypofiyjv\', Fut. 6a-<^pricroiJXU. \n\nPres. o<T(ppa.cbai. was a rare Attic form ; Aor. a)<T<Pfni<Td[jir]v and oaippav^vou \nlate. \n\n12. o^XtcTKavo) (rare Inf. o^Xetv, Part. ocfiXotv), to be liable to a \nfine, to incur punishment (the double strengthening wtk and av \nis to be noted) ; Aor. w<f>\\ov (axfyXyjara, Lys. 13, 65. and by later \nwriters) ; Fut. 6<f>\\T^<T(D ; Perf. w<f)\\r]Ka ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. \n^(fiXrjfJUiL. \n\nb. av is appended to the pure stem, and v is inserted before \n,the Characteristic-consonant. \n\nPreliminaey Remark. The short vowel in the middle of the pure stem \nis changed into a long one, in inflection. The v is subject to the usual changes \nbefore the Pi and Kappa-mutes (\xc2\xa7 19, 3). \n\n13. Ipvyyavui (mstead of ipv-v-yavoi), TUCto, Aor. ripvyov J lut \nIpcv^oyLai. \n\n14. 5iyyttV(o, to touch, Aor. tBtXyoV, Fut. ^tiofxai. \n\n15. Xay^avw, to obtain by lot, Aor. e\\a;^ov; Fut. X^^o/xai; Perf. \n\xe2\x82\xacLX.r)xa (rarely XeXoyx* from AEPX-, comp. TrcVov^a, tto^clv, ttcv- \ni^os) ; Perf Mid. or Pass. elXyjyfJi^L (023, 4) ; Aor. Pass. iXrJx^rjv, \nVerbal Adj. Xr^KTcos. \n\n16. Xafjif3avo}y to take, Aor. tXapov, Imp. XdjSe and Attic Xa/?\xe2\x82\xac( \n[Hi 8, 3 (a)]; Fut. X#o/xat; Perf etX>7</)a; Perf Mid. or Pass. I \n\xe2\x82\xacL\\r)fxiJM.L (H23, 4), (XiXrjfxaL Aesch. Ag. 876) ; Aor. Mid. iXaPofxrjv;] \nAor. Pass. cXtJ^^t/v ; Fut. Pass. Xr;^^Tjo-o/Aat. Verbal Adj. XT^Trro\'^\' \n\n17. Xav-^avo) (poet, and also Zi. O. 7, 31, also XtJ^w), to be con- \ncealcdy Aor. eXa^o\xc2\xbb\' (I. Aor. eXrycra late in simple words) ; Fut. \nXt/o-o); Perf XeXiy^o, J a?/i concealed; Mid. Xav^avo/xat (Ion. and \npoet, also XrjSojxaL), in prose cTrtX. (seldom cttX.), to forget, Fut. \nX-qa-OfxaL; Perf XiX-qa-yLai (^ 131) ; Aor. cXo^o/XT^v; Fut. Perf XeX?}- \n<ro/xai, Eur. Ale. 1981. \n\n18. Xi/A7rav(o, rare secondary form of Xclttw. \n\n19. fxav^dvwy to learn, Aor. l/xa^oi/; Fut. fiaS-^crofiaL] Perf. \nfi\xe2\x82\xacfxd^Ka. \xe2\x80\x94 The a remains short, and the Fut. and Perf are \nformed from the stem MA0E, according to No. a. Verb. Adj \nfia3rp-6<Sy /JLa^yp-ios. \n\n20. TrvvSavoaaiy to inquire, to perceive, Aor. lirv%ixr)v ; Perf. ttc- \n\n17 \n\n\n\n194 VERBS IN -0) WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. [j 161 \n\nirva-fiaL, TrcTrucrat, etc. (\xc2\xa7 131); Fut 7revcro/xm (very jarely vevfrov- \nfiai, \xc2\xa7 154, 3). Verb. Adj. Treva-ros, TrevaT\xe2\x82\xaco<;. \n\n21. Tvyxavo), to happen, Aor. ervxav, Fut. reviofiou (TEYX-) ; \nPerf. TeruxqKO\' (TYXE- according to No. a). The transitive of \nthis verb is the, poetic revx^, paro. \n\n22. <f>vyyavio, secondary form of </)evyo), to flee, Fut. <l>\xe2\x82\xacviofjuu \nand -iodfiat 154, 3) ; Aor. \xe2\x82\xac<^vyov ; Perf 7r\xe2\x82\xac<j>\xe2\x82\xacvya. Verb. Adj. \n\n, fjiCVKTo^j -reos. \n^i 23. xavSavo), ^0 hold, contain (spoken of vessels), Aor. e)(a3ov ; \nPerf with a Pres. signification K^x^vha\', Fut. xdcxoijuax (stem \nXENA-, comp. hra^ovj Trciicrofuxt). \n\nk 161. IV. Fer65, whose Pure Stem is strengthened in \nthe Pres. and Impf. by annexing the two conso- \nnants, (TK or the syllable \\,(tk. \n\n5/c is annexed, when the stem-characteristic is a vowel, and utk, when it is a \nconsonant ; Kv-taK(o and xp\'7-^o\'f o/"" ^re exceptions. Most verbs, whose pare \nstem ends with a consonant, form the Future, etc. according to the analogy of \npure verbs, in -aa>, -eco, and -6(i}, e. g. evp-laKu, Fut. ivpif-aco from \'ETPE- j ofiffkUr- \nKb), Fut. ayL^Ka-aoi from \'AMBAO-. Some of these verbs, in the Pres. and Impf., \ntake a reduplication also, which consists in repeating the first consonant of the \nstem with i, and may be called the improper reduplication. Most of these verbs \ncorrespond to the Latin Inchoatives in sco : yi-YvwaKoi, T]$dtTKw, yrjpdtTKct. \n\n1. oA-to-K-o/xat, to be taken, to be conquered, with tliis meaning, is \nused as the Pass, of ai/jcto, Inipf rjXia-KOfirjv; CAA.O-) Fut aXtoao/uu ; \nsecond Aor. -^Xwv, Att. tiXtov and ^Xwv (fit, ^ 192, 9), Itras taken ; \nPerf. ^\\(i)Ka, and Att. coXwKa and tjXwkcl, I have been taken (Aug., \n\xc2\xa7 122, 4 and 6). The Active is supphed by alpeLv, signifj\'ing, to \ntake captive, to conquer. Verb. Adj. aXwrd?. Xen. uses both \ncoXcov and -^Xwv, An. 4, 4. 21. ; Tliu. only eoAxuv and caXwKa ; Plato \nalso only caAcoKa. \n\n2. d/xjSAio-Ko) (seldom afxfSXoo}), to miscarry (*AArBAO-), Fut \na/x^Xwo-o) ; Aor. ^fx/SXaio-a ; Perf ^/x^AxoKa ; Perf Pass. ^fipXwfiai ; \nAor. Pass. rjfxpXw^v. \n\n3. dvajSiwo-Ko/xat, (a) to recall to life, (b) to live again, Aor. \ndve/Siwo-a/xT^v, I recalled to life; but second Aor. avcftiojv (/it, $ 19*2, \n10), J lived again. \n\n4. avaXLo-KOi (also dvdXoo)), ifo Spend, to consume, Impf. aat\'jXurKop \n(avdXovv without Aug.) ; Fut dvdAtuo-o) ; Aor. aWjXuxra and avor \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 161.] VERBS IN -0) WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. 195 \n\nXoxro, KarrjvdXxiXTa ; Perf. am^XcoKa and dvdXoiKa ; Perf. IVIid. or Pass. \nain^\\(Dfjuu and avdXuyfUiL ; Aor. ovcLXw-^Tyv, dvT^Xw^v ; Flit. Pass. \navaXtJi>&\'q<TOfiai. Thu. and the Tragedians preferred the unaiig- \nmented forms ; Plato and the orators, the augmented. \n\n5. opco-KO), to please, Fut d/DcVw; Aor. i^pco-a [^ 130 (d)] ; (Perf. \napnqp\xe2\x82\xacKa in Sext. Emp. ;) Mid. with Accusative, to appease, to \nsatisfy, Fut. dpta-ofxaty Aesch. Suppl. 654 ; Perf. IVIid. or Pass. ^p\xe2\x82\xaca- \nfjua; Aor. Pass. rjpia-^Vj Soph. Ant. 500. Verbal Adj opcoTos. \n\n6. ^L^puxTKuif to eat (Fut. Att. ISofuu from co-^uo, second Aor \ntxt>ayov), Perf ^/SpoiKa; Part. /Jc^ptis (^ 194) ; Perf Mid. or Pass \npippuijjMx (Aor. Pass. \xe2\x82\xacfipu>&rjv, and Fut. Pass, ^pco^yjo-o/xat non \nAttic ; instead, the forms of cV^wo are used). \n\n7. ytyuA<TKto (mostly Poet.), to call, to mal-e htoum, Fut. yeywyii<ru; Aoi \niy(yuinfi<ra; Perf. yiytDvay with a Present sig:nification ; \xe2\x80\x94 further, ytyuvtiTto^ \nXen., yfyueviivf Poet., seldom prose, e. g. PL Hipp. M. 292, d, from the Prim. \n\nrarflNEn. ^ \n\n8. yrjpda-KU} (or yrjpaui), senesco, to grow old, Fut. yrjpdcroixai (sel- \ndom yrjpacTo) Plato) ; Aor. iyrjpaxra (ill Aesch. Suppl. 901., Trans. \nto cause to grow old), Inf yrjpcurai (instead of it yrjpavai, from an \nold second Aor. iyripay, was preferred by the Attics, fit, ^ 192, 1) ; \nPerf yeytjpoKOj lam old. \n\n9. yiyyuHTKoj (yawKO)), cog fiasco, to know (PNO-), Fut. yvtoa-o- \nftm] second Aor. iyvtov (ju, \xe2\x99\xa6 191); Perf iyvioKa; Perf Mid. or \nPass, tyvtoa-fiax (^ 131); Aor. Pass, eyvwa^v, Fut. Pass. yvuxrSij\' \naofuu. Verbal Adj. yvoxrro? (old form yyunos), yvoxrrios. \n\n10. StSpttOTKu), to run away (only in compounds, e. g. aTroS., oc8., \nSia3.), Fut. Spao-ofuu; Perf StSpdica; second Aor. iZpav (/xt, ^ If 2, \n\n11. \xe2\x82\xacvp((TK(Dy to fiiul, second Aor. crpov; Imp. cvpc [^ 118, 3 \n(a)]; CEYPE-) Fut cvpijo-w; Perf tv^Ka\\ Perf Mid. or Pass. \nevprjfiai; Aor. PasS. evpiSrjv [^ 130 (d)] ; Fut. Pass. il\'prjSyaofJiat\', \nMid. /o obtain, Aor. npofxrjv (Aug. ^ 121, Rem.). Verbal Adj. \ncvpero9, cvptfTto^. \n\n12. r]fta(TK(i}y pubesco, to become marriageable, Fut. rjfii^cro}; Aor. \nrj^ija-a ; Perf rjftrjKa (r}/3d<ji, to be young, but avTy/Jdw, ^ become \nyoung again). \n\n13. ^\'7/<TKo>, commonly dTro-^o-Kco, to ^/e (Metathesis, ^ 156, \n2), (0AN-) Aor. d7r<^a\xc2\xbb\'ov (Poet tSavov\\ ^avwv\', ol ^avoWcs, the \n\n\n\n196 VERBS IN -0) WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. [i 161 \n\ndead, axso in prose) ; Fut. aTroSavovfiai (Poet. Savovfuu) ; Perf. \nre-^vTjKa (not dTrore^i/r^/ca) both in prose and poetry, tc\'^o/io\' \n(\xc2\xa7 194), etc., Inf. Tc^mmt; Fut. Perf. t\xe2\x82\xac^|(o (^ 154, 6), and \namong later writers rc-^^lo/xat, / shall be dead. Verbal Adj. \n\xc2\xbb9i/?yT09, mortal. \n\n14. SpuxTKOi (\xc2\xa7 156, 2), ^0 spring, to leap, Aor. c^opov; Fut. \nS^opovfiai ; Perf. ri^opa. \n\n15. Ikda-KOfjiaL, to propitiate, Fut. t\\ao-o/>uu; Aor. L IXoo-a/xTi\'; Aor. \nPass. tAaor-^Tyv. \n\n16. /xc^vcTKO), ^0 intoxicate, Fut. /ac-^vo-w; Aor. c/xt^vo-a. But \n/xe^uo), ^0 6e intoxicated (only Pres. and Impf ), borrows its tenses \nfrom the Passive, e. g. ifxe^vaS-qv (^ 131). \n\nw 17. fXLfiv^aKU), to remind (MNA-), Fut fun^o) ; Aor. Ifiinrja-a ; Mid. \n^0 remind one\'s self, to remember, also to mention ; Perf. fji\xe2\x82\xacfivrjiuuj \nmemini, I remember, I am mhulful (Redup. k 123, Rem. 1), \nSubj. jxcjxvCjfJiaiy -17, -rJTOL (j 154, 6), Imp. pL\xe2\x82\xacp.vr)ao\\ Plup. \xe2\x82\xacfJL\xe2\x82\xacfun^\' \nfxrjv, I remembered, Opt. fxejxv^fnjv, -^o, -^yro, or /i\xe2\x82\xac/xi^/xt;v, -u\xc2\xbbo, -^ro \n(^ 154, 8); Fut. Perf ficfxvi^o/jLaLy Is/tall be viimlful (among the \nTragedians also, / will onoition) ; Aor. ifivrjcrSrjVf I reryicmbered \n(ifjivr](rdixr}v Poet.) ; Fut. /uivTyo-^r/ao/iat, / shall remember (d?ro/UT7- \ncrofxaiy Th. 1, 137). \n\n18. TrdoT^u) (formed from tto^o-ko), by transferring the aspiration \nof ^ to k), to expeiience a soisation, to suffer, Aor. Iva^ov , \n(HEN\xc2\xa9-) Fut. TTctcro/xat; Perf. TritrovSa. Verbal Adj. vaJ^oi. \n\n19. TTtTrtcTKw, to give to dmdc, Fut. ttio-cu; Aor. \xe2\x82\xac7rl<ra. \n\n20. TTiTrpdo-Ka), ^0 5c//, rare in Pres. Act. (Fut. and Aor. in the \nOommoii language expressed by aTroSoicropu, d7rc8o/\xc2\xab;v); Perf. \niriirpaKa (^ 156, Rem.) ; Perf IVIid. or Pass. -jriTrpapuax (Llf. v^irpaar- \n.^at, often instead of the Aor. ) ; Aor. hrpdJ^ ; Fut. Perf irtrpa.- \naofxai in the sense of the simple Fut. TrpaJ^ijcropjaL, wliich is rare \nand not Ati;ic. Verbal Adj. Trpdro\'s, Trpdrcos. \n\n21. OTeplaKO) (seldom orcpco), dTrocrripowTa^t Isoc. 12, 243, \naccording to the Ms. Urb.), to deprive of, Fut. oT\xc2\xabpi}otu; Aor. \niariprjcra ] Perf icrriprjKa] IVIid. and Pass. OTcpi\'o-KO/im, artpovfuu^ \nprivor; but (Tripop.aiy lam deprived, Fut. ariprjcropnuj rarer artp/rf- \nSrjaroixat ( ttTrooTepcicr^e, Andoc. Myst. 149); Perf. \xe2\x82\xacaT\xe2\x82\xacp7jfxxu; Aor. \ncoTcpTJ^r/v. The simple occurs most frequently in tlie middle \nform ; in the Act., tlie compound dTroarepla-Kw is more firequent \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6\xe2\x99\xa6 162, 163.] VERBS IN -Q> WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. 197 \n\n22. TLTpoiaK(i)j to woufid, Fut. rpiocrw ; Aor. trpina-a ; Perf. IMid. \nor Pass. T\xe2\x82\xacTp<i)fJL(Uy Inf. reTpwa-Sax, Part. Terpoifxevos ; Aor. erfHo&Tjv ; \nFut. TfHoS^-qo-ofUU and rpoxToyuOii. Verbal Adj. rporros. \n\n23. <f>dcrKiOy to say, to think (Ind. and Lnp. very rare), Lnpf. \n<L<j>axTKOv; Fut. \xe2\x82\xacf>T]cr(i}; Aor. i<f>rj(xa. \xe2\x80\x94 (Pass. l<^>axTKcrOi S. Ph. 111). \n\n2-1. x^i^*^* to gape (XAN-, among the later wTiters xcuvw), Aor. \nc^oj/oK ; Fut. )(avovfixu ; Perf. K\xe2\x82\xac)(qva, to staiul open. \n\nRemakk. In li^AffKw, doc-no, the k belonf:^ing to the stem i> m n. ufjthened \nby <T prefixed ; hence the k remains in fonnin;r the tenses, Fut. SjSo^w ; Aor. IZl- \nia^a : l\\rf\'. SdiSaxa ; Perf. Miil. or Tiiss. ifHSayfuu ; Aor. Pass. iSiddx^y\' \nVerb. Adj. SiiaKT6s, -rios. The same usaj:e is fouml in the Kpii- \'and poetic \nverbs, cJ^vku, kkwTKu, KatTKu. See ^ 230. \n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 162. V. Verbs which have a Secondary Form Z7t -^w. \n\nSeveral verbs, particularly in poetry, have secondary forms in -dw, e. g. \n^kcyt^fty, poetic (instead of ^Ktytir), to bum; ^ytptdoyrat and i}(p4- \nboyrai. Epic, instead of iLytlpoyrcu and iu\'ipoyrcu. Here belong also the end- \nings -a^ov and -^oifu of the Impf., and -xi^tiy of the Pres. Inf , which arc used \neven in Aitic prose, e. g. oAt^w, to ward ojf, tnigie Inf. dAKcL^ciK (stem *AAK); \ni^i/fw, to vxird off, OfivyiL^fiy, Impf. Iffxvya^oy ; \xe2\x80\x94 iiuKv, to pursue, StuKO^ctr, \nImpf. iiiJfKo^oy, aUo prose ; \xe2\x80\x94 (ficw, to yield, Impf. fUa^y, (i\xc2\xabrc(doi/u ] \xe2\x80\x94 ftpyttt \nto thut up, Impf. and Aor. (tpyo^or\\ \xe2\x80\x94 (x*** \'<^ ftave, ax*^\xc2\xabiy (in Homer (rxe3<cty \nas Aor V \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 163. VI. Verbs, tchose Pure Stem is strengthened in \nthe Pres. and Impf. by prefixing a Reduplication. \n\nThe redaplicnt- \xe2\x80\xa2 \xe2\x80\xa2- \xe2\x80\xa2\xe2\x96\xa0\xe2\x80\xa2 ~ \xe2\x80\xa2"- the first consonant of the root with \n\nthe vowel I. In i ^ ^ cts, there are also verbs, which take \n\nthe Attic reduplication, i. e. they repeat the first two letters of the root ; see \nixax^C"^! kwwplcTKtt^ kpaplvKt, ^ 230. \n\n1. Pi.pauCuif to make go, to convey, Fut. Att. PtPC), -^9, -a (still \nalso ^i^turui, X. An. 4, 8. 8. 5. 2, 10). Verbal Adj. /Jt^oor^o?. \n\n2. yiyvopju (yiyopLox) instead of ytytvopxu (\xe2\x99\xa6 155, 2), to become, \nto be, (FEN-) Aor. iytyofirjv (late Attic lycvi^Syjv) ; Fut. yevrjaopjxi \n(PI. Parm. 141, e. ytyrjarrax, Jiet, and moreover -ycvc^Tjo-crcu, efficie- \ntur) ; Perf yeycn^^ttu, I have become, foetus sum, exstiti, and yiyova \nwith a present signification, I am, implying lam by birth; eycvo- \n^rpf and yirfova are aLso used as preterites of c^t, to be. \n\n3. 7ri7rra> (instead of TriTrerw, k 155, 2), to fall, Il-ip. TrtTrrc; \n(HET-) Fut TTco-or/ioi (k 151,3); Aor. hrifxov (very seldom first \n\n17* \n\n\n\n198 VERBS IN -O) WITH STEENGTHENED STEM. [{^ 164, 164 \n\nAor. \xc2\xa37r6o-a), \xc2\xa7 154, Rem. 2 ; Perf. iriTrroxa with irregular variable \nvowel (Part. TrcTrro)?, TrcTmoros, Poet ^ 194, 5). \n\n4. Ttr/Dtto), to 5we, Fut. T/)T}a-a>; Aor. erp-qa-a. More usual the \nsecondary form rerpaivoi, Fut. Terpavai; Aor. ereTprjva (^ 149, Pwem. \n2) ; Perf. rerprjKa, rerp-qixai. Verbal Adj. rp7p-6s. \n\nSeveral verbs of class IV (^ 161) belong here, as yiyvdxTKWy and several verbi \nin -fii, as 5i5a>/it. \n\n^ 164. VII. Verbs, whose Pw e Stem-vowel a is \nstrengthened in the Pres. and Imp/, by i. \n\nHere belong the dialectic verbs, mostly Epic and poetic : aycdofuuj to be t*- \ndv/nant; Sow, to divide and bum ; fialofuu, to rage ; valttf to dicell. See \\ 230. \n\n\xc2\xa7 165. VIII. Verbs, whose Pure Stem assumes c in the \n\nPres. and Imp/. \n\n1. yayMccj, to marry (of the man), Perf yeyafnjKa: but Fut \nyajxu>; Aor. eyrj/jiay y^/xat (lyafx-qcra first in Mcnander, then in \nLucian. ; ya/xr^o-ctas with the better reading ya/xT/o-cicis in X. Cy. \n8. 4, 20). Mid. ya/xov/xat (with the Dat.), to marry (of the \nwoman, nubo), Fut. ya/xov/xat; Aor. eyijixafirp^ ; Perf. yeyd^-qfuu. \nPass, in matrimonium ducor, Aor. eya/iT/^T/r, etc. [i 130 (d), 2]. \n\n2. yrjSeo), Poet., unially Perf yeyrjSa (also prose), to rejoice, \nFut. yyjSijao). \n\n3. SoKco), to 5CC7W, vidcor, to think, Fut. 8o^ (8o*o}<rci> poet) ; \nAor. eSo^a (cSo\'KT^o-a Poet) ; Aor. Pass. KaTa8o;^^\xe2\x82\xaci9, Antiph. 2. 116, \n2; Perf. Mid. or Pass. St\'Soy/xai (StSo\'/o^/Aai, Ionic and Eurip.), \nvisus sum. \n\n4. KTinrea} (Poet.), to resound, Fut. -^<r\xc2\xab, etc.; second Aor. Ilicrvror (Epic and \n6. 0. C. 1450) ; first Aor. iKTxnrriffa (ib. 1606). \n\n5. fiapTvpeixif to bear witness, Fut. /xaprvpi/o-a), etc. But ftofripo\' \nfiai, Dep. Mid. to ca/Z (W icit7icsscs. \n\n6. ivpeoi, to shear, to shave, IVIid. ^vpofxat ; Aor. i^vpofirp\' ; but \nPerf. i^vprjfxai. \n\n7. to^eo), to push, Impf. cfo^ovr; Fut. (oo-o) and co^ijotu; Aor. \ncojcra, wo-at ; Perf. ecoKa late, Plut. ; Fut. IVIid. wcrop.ai ; Aor. ctixrd- \n^rjv ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. Iwcr/xat ; Aor. Pass, cioa&ijv ; Fut Pass. \ntoo-^ijo-o/iat (Aug. \xc2\xa7 122, 4). Verbal Adj. uxtt6s\xc2\xbb -tcos. \n\n\n\nX \n\n\n\ni 166.] VERBS IN -O) WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. 199 \n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 166. Verbs, whose Stem is Pure in the Pres. and \nImpf.y but which assume a?i \xe2\x82\xac in forming the \ntenses. \n\nThis change has taken place in the formation of verbs in -few, partly from \nnecessity, as is the case with verbs whose characteristic is f , y^ ; partly for the \nsake of perspicuity, that the root may not wholly disappear by the introduction \nof consonants, as in verbs whose characteristic is (tk, x^ 5 *^^^ partly from mere \nchoice or the desire of euphony, as in verbs whose characteristic is 5, t, Qy X, \nP> \'\xe2\x96\xa0\'i f f X> *> *"> *\xc2\xbb "*\xe2\x80\xa2 The \xe2\x82\xac is changed into ij in inflection. Exceptions : \n\n1. aiSofxaij to fed shame, to fear (Pres. and Impf old poetic, in the Common \nlanguage atitofuu), Impf aii6firit\' without Aug.; Fut. oiJeVo/tox and \xe2\x80\xa2\xe2\x96\xa0fiaonai \n{iircuS\xe2\x82\xac<rb^<rofuuy Eur. Iph. A. 889) ; Perf. i/jif <th\xc2\xabvos, Dcm. Aristocr. 646, 1 ; \nAor. iJ8((re(fi7ji\' (with Ace), as a law-term in Attic prose, signifj-ing to pardon a \ntuppliant ; but also in poetry, signifying to be asJuuHed of to fear ; but in this \nsense riitar^v is commonly used. \n\n2. ak\xe2\x82\xac$w, to ward offl Act seldom in prose, X. Cy. 4. 3. 2, dXc\'^- \nciy; Flit. aXi$ijcr(a (Aor. i^Xc^iyo-o, lloiii.) ; Mid. to tvard off from \nones self Fut. dLXt^iJao/xat (dXe^o/tot as Fut. of *AAEK- is rare, \ne. g. S. Or. 171. 539. X. An. 7. 7, 3) ; Aor. yMdfxrjv (I\'lkc^adfxrjv, \nHorn, and X. Aii. 1. 3, 6. in all the best MSS.) (Inf. second \nAor. aXtcdScLv, used by the Trag., ^ 162.) \n\n3. av$ut, to increase ; see av$at^, ^ 160, 4. \n\n4. dxSofiai, to be vexed, Fut. dxSitrofjuu, and in prose usually \nAx^^frSridopju (both with the same signification); Aor. rjxSia-Srjv \n(H31). \n\n5. ft6<TKu), to feed, Fut. fioa-Kifo-u) ; Aor. cfioa-Krjau ; INlid. luliaus. \nto feed, to eat. Verbal Adj. ySoro?, Poatcrp-toq. \n\n6. povXofwx, to Irish (second Pors. puvkci, ^ 116, 11), Fut. ySou- \nXrja-ofJMi; Peril pipovXrjyuai \\ Aor. ipovXrjSrjv and -tipovXySTjv (Aug., \n4 120, Rem. 1). \n\n7. 8\xe2\x82\xac<u, to want, to need, usually Impers. Set, it is iranting, it is \nnecessary {k 137, 2), Subj. So;, Part. Uov, Inf. Sc^; Impf. cSa, Opt \nScoi; Fut S<7jo-<t; Aor. \xe2\x82\xacS\xc2\xab7/o-\xe2\x82\xac( i\') ; Perf. Sc8o7K\xe2\x82\xac(v\') ; INIid. Sco/xat, ^a \n7ieed, Fut. So/o-o/xcu; Aor. i^jSrjv\\ Perf. 8cS\xe2\x82\xac7//i.<u. \n\n6. l^iXiii and ^c\\<o, to will, Impf y^tXov and l^fXov; Fut \n\xc2\xa3^\xe2\x82\xacA.7/<ra> and ^cA\xc2\xbb}o-w; Aor. -^SiXTjcra and i^iXya-a; Perf only \n\n\n\n200 VERBS IN -0) WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. [$ 166 \n\n9. \xe2\x82\xactXa), ctXXo), lAXo), also ciXeo), to press, to shut up, Fut. ciAt/o-w, \nPerf. Mid. or Pass. \xe2\x82\xaciAr;/xat ; Aor. Pass. elXrj^rp^. \n\n10. IAkw, ^0 ^raw, Put. cX^w (which is preferred to the other \nform cAkvo-co from \'EAKYfi) ; Aor. ctXKvo-a (\xc2\xa7 122, 3), cXxwo* \n(more common than cTA^a) ; Perf etX/crKa; INIid. to draw to one\'s \nself, eXKvaofxaL, elXKvo-dfxriv ; Aor. Pass., Fut. Pass., and Perf Mid \nor Pass, only el\\KvaSr]v, cAKuo-^TJo-o/xai, elkKvafxai. \n\n11. \'EIPOMAI, Aor. rjpofJirp^, I inquired, ipeaSai, efxofxai, tf>oifirjv, \nipov, ip6iJievo<s ; Fut. iprjcrofjiaL. Tlie other tenses are supplied by \nipo)Tav; but the Aor. ripdyrqa-a is rejected. \n\n12. Ippo), to go forth, Fut. Ipp-qaw, Aor. rjpprja-a; Perf ijpprjKa. \n\n13. cvSw, commonly ko^cvSw, ^o ^/^cp, Fut. ko^cvSt/o-w ; Aor. rare \nand late; Perf wanting (Aug., \xc2\xa7) 121, Rem. and 126, 3). Verb. \nAdj. KaS^ev^rqriov. \n\n14. e)((u, to have, to Iiold, Jmipf. c\'xo? 122, 3); Aor. arxov \n(instead of c-cre^ov), Inf (rx^^v, Imp. (rxc?, Tropao^c? according to \nverbs in /xt (in composition also (rx^, as Kardcrxf, Tropao^c), Subj. \n0^(0), -yg, Trapdo-xw, irapdcrxo^f CtC, Opt. axoLrjv {fit, ^ 1^2, Rem.), \nbut in compounds Trapdarxotftt, etc., Part, o^w*\' ; Fut. c^w and \no-x^frw; Perf ecrxqKa; Aor. Mid. eaxofj^rp^t Subj. axwfuuj Opt. oxo*- \n/XT^v, Imp. orxou, Trapdcrxpv, Inf. crx^cr^ai, To^acr\\icrS(u, Part. <rxoft<vo5 ; \nFut. \xe2\x82\xac^o/xat and (rxr]CToixaL ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. Icrxqiim ; Aor. Pass. \nicrx^^yjv (not used in good Attic). Verbal Adj. cxtos, and oflener \npoetic (tx\xe2\x82\xact6<;, -t\xe2\x82\xaco<;. \n\n15. \xe2\x82\xac1/^(0, to cook, Fut. o/o}o-o> (Fut. Mid. ci/ajcro/xai. Plat. Rp. 372, \nc.) ; Aor. rj^rja-a; Aor. Pass. r]{Jn]Sr)v \', Perf. IMid. or Pass, iffn/jfjuu. \nVerbal Adj. \xe2\x82\xaccli&6<;, or ei/\'T/ros, ci/^t/tcos. \n\n16. t^w (Plat. Symp. 196, 6), commonly Ka^i\'^u), /o ifo/, to \xc2\xab/, \nImpf iKd^ilov, old Attic Ko^r^ov; Fut. ko^uL (117, 2); Aor. \niKdTia-a, old Attic Ko^ro-a (\xc2\xa7 120, 3) ; (Perf KcxoL^tKa;) iVIid. /^eai \nmyself Fut. Ka^t^-^o-o/xat ; Aor. kKaBL(jdp.rjVy I seated for myself I \ncaused to sit. But Ko^c^o/xat, I seat myself I sit, Impf iKaBttpfxyjv \\ \nFut. Ka\xc2\xab^c8ov/xat. \n\n17. KT^So), ^0 ?w\xc2\xabZ;e aitiious (Act. only Epic), Fut. K\xc2\xbb/8i}(ru) ; Perf \nKeKrjBa, I am a7ixious ; Mid. KtjBofxaL, to be afixious, in prose only \nPres. and Impf; in Aesch. S. 138, is found Imp. Aor. Md. \nKrjSecrai. \n\n18. KAato), to weep (KXa<o seldom, and without contraction;, \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 166.J VERBS IN -0) WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. 201 \n\nFut. KAavtro/Aat ( KXavo-ov/xm, $ 154, 2, in Aiistoph.), rarer (in \nDeiD.) KXjourjcrii), 01 KXdrj(Ttii] Aor. wXavaa] iKXava-dfJLrjv, S. Tracll. \n153; Perf. KcxAav/Acu, and later KCKAavcr/iai (^ 131, 3). Comp. \n^ 154, 2. Fut. Perf. Kc/cXauo-erat, Aristoph. Nub. 1440. Verbal \nAdj. KXavtrros and KXauro?, KXavoTios. \n\n19. fxaxofj-axy to ^g Jit, Fut. fiaxovfjuLL, ^ 154, 5 (Epic and late \nprose fui)(i]aofji(u) ; Aor. l^\\icrafji.-qv ; Perf. fjie^d)(i]fxcu ; Aor. Pass. \nifjLa)(ta-^7jv late. Verbal Adj. /ia;^crcos and /xa^^cos. \n\n20. /xcAAtu, ^o intend, to be about to do, hence i?o delay, Lnpf. \nc/AcAAoi/ and ^/xcWov ; Fut. /xcAA^w ; Aor. ifxiWtjaa ; Pass. ^eAAe<r- \n^at, to 6e J7M^ o^ delayed. (Aug., $ 120, Rem. 1.) Verbal Adj. \n/acXt/tcov. \n\n21. fteXct yuoi, cume mihi est, t^ concerns me, I lay it to heart \n(rarely personal /xtAxo), Fut. /-icX^ci; Aor. \xe2\x82\xac/AeA.>/o-c(i/) ; Perf. \nfi\xe2\x82\xacfiiXrjK\xe2\x82\xac(v) ; Mid. fjifXofiau, commonly iirLfiiXofiai (and CTri/xeXov/Aai, \nbut Lif. probably iinfiiXia-Sau) ; Fut. cVi/xcXT/o-o/xat (sometimes \nCTrifitXrjSrja-ufjLai) ; Pi\'rf. iTnfi\xe2\x82\xacficX.rjfjiaL \', Aor. cttc/xcAtJ^v. Verbal \n\nAdj. CTTl/XtXT/TCOK. \n\nThe componnds, e. p. /lero^/Xf i, pomitet, are used as irapcrsonals only ; sel- \ndom fjL(rafi(\\ofjuu, tu niK\'nl (Thuc), Aor. /uTf/i\xc2\xabAT)i^v (late); fi(fir)\\u>s, caring W \n\n22. /AvC<^, to \xc2\xab/cZ:, Fut. /xv(^T/o-o>, etc. \n\n23. o^u), to jww//, i. e. to f mi/ a;i o^<?r, Fut. o^tJo-w ; Aor. w^T/o-a \n(Perf o&o&i with the meaning of tlie Pres. in Homer and the \nlater writers, \xe2\x99\xa6 124, 2). \n\n24. olofixu and oTfjuUf to think, second Pers. out {k 116, 11); \nImpf (Mfirjv and f^ip^ \', Fut. oiija-ofjuai ; Aor. torjStjVf oiTjSrjvai ; Perf. \nwanting. (Aug., \xe2\x99\xa6 122, 1.) Verbal Adj. oiT^rco?. \n\nThe abbreviated forms, olfiat, ^firfy, are used in prose a.s a mere paren- \nthetic expression, like the Lat. credo, and hence arc often employed in an \nironical sense; oXofiai, on the contrary, has such a sense, only when it is a \ngoverning verb ; still, this dilfereace of usage is not fully obsen ed even by the \nbest Attic writers. \n\n25. oLxofiaiy I am gone, huve gone (\\vith sense of Perf), abii^ \nImpf ioxofjLTjv (sense of Aor., also Plup.), I went away, had gone, \nFut olxT^aofiai ; Perf toxrjfiai, commonly as a compound, e. g \nirapia)(rjfi(Uj X. An. 2. 4, 1. in the best MSS., Ion. and Att. Poet \n\n\n\n\n202 VERBS IN -Q> WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. [^ 166 \n\n(HxwKa (so originate, otxa, ot/c-wxa, otx-w/ca, comp. the Epic oK^xa \nfrom ^w, ^230). \n\n26. 6<^e6Aa), to awe, debeo, I ought, must, Fut oi^etXTyo-o) ; Aor. \n&<^\xe2\x82\xaciXrj(xa ; Perf. uxjaiXriKa ; second Aor. un^cKov, -C9, -\xe2\x82\xac(v) (first and \nsecond Pers. PL not used), in forms expressing a w\'w/i, utinam. \n\n27. Trato), ^0 5M/^e, Fut. Tratcro) ( Att. secondary form TraiTJo-w in \nAristoph.) ; Aor. eTrauj-a; Perf TreVatKa (the simple late); Aor. \nMid. iTraurdfjLrjv; Pass, with o- (M31. 2) ; yet instead of ircTrcuir- \nyxat and iTrata-S-qv, lirXrpfqv and TriirXrjyiJicu were commonly used \nVerbal Adj. Trato-reos. \n\n28. Tre/oSo), usually TrepSo/xat, emittcre Jlatum, Aor. iirapSov ; Fut \ntrapSr^o-o/xat ; Perf. iriwopha (^ 140, 4). \n\n29. TreroyLiat, ^0 y?y, Fut. (TrcTqcrofxaL, Aristoph.) commonly 7m;- \n(ro/x.at ; Aor. commonly in prose and in the Comic writers, cttto- \n/x.Tyi\', TTTecT\'S^at (rarer iTrrdfiTjv ; tirrqvy ttto), irralrjVy Trr^aiy Trras, poet. \nand in the later writers (^ 192, 2) ; Perf TrtTrorr^/xot (Aristoph.). \n\xe2\x80\x94 Syncope (>? 155, 1). \n\n\' 30. o-KeAAo) (or o-KeXeto), ^o d//?/, Aor. co-kXt/v (^ 192, 4), and Perf \n\xe2\x82\xaca-KXr]Ka, and Fut. cTKXrjaofjiaL, intrans. io dry up, to icUJicr. \xe2\x80\x94 Met- \nathesis, \xc2\xa7 156, 2. \n\n31. TVTTTO), to strike, Fut. Attic rvTrnjait) (tvt/^o). Homer); (Aor. \nI. hvTrrqcra late; Irvi/^a, Hom. ; Aor. IL trvTTovy Eur. Ion. 779; for \nthe Aor. of this word, the Attics use cTraro^a, t-raura ;) (Perf. \nr\xe2\x82\xacTV7rTr)Ka, Pollux) ; Fut. Mid. rvTrrqcrofiaLy Aristoph. Kub. 1382. \nPass, blows icill he injiicted; Perf Tcn\'/x/icu, Aesch. (Tcrvmy/iOi \nlate) ; Aor. Pass, irinrqv {iTVTmqSrjv late). Verbal Adj. rvrnp-io^, \n\n32. )(aLpo}f to rejoice, Fut. ^(aLpTjcru) (xopi/cro/xat late) ; Aor. \xe2\x82\xac\\afrrj\xc2\xa5 \n(fii, ^ 192, 8); Perf KcxdprjKa (Aristoph. and Herod.), I have \nrejoiced, and KcxdprjixaL (poet.), I am glad. Verbal Adj. \\apr6^. \n\nRemark 1. Of the preceding classes, there belong here verbs in -<u\'o\xc2\xbb 15 i60), \nand inricxv^oiiai, of those in \xc2\xa7 159. \n\nRem. 2. With these verbs several liquid verbs are classed {S 149, 6) ; still, \nt ley form the Fut. and the Aor. regularly, e. g. \n\nfiivci, to remain, Put. /ifv\xc2\xab; Aor. ifx^iva] Perf. fiffierjiKeu Verbal Adj. \n\nfjicverSs, ix\xe2\x82\xacV\xe2\x82\xacr4os. \np4/x(D, to divide, Fut. ve/jui\', Aor. llvfifjM] Perf. ycvefirjKa; Aor. Pass. ^r\xe2\x82\xac- \n\nfiil^\'tjv. \xe2\x80\x94 Mid. v^fiofxat. Put. vefiovficu; Aor. iy^ifidfirip ] Perf. Mid. of \n\nPass. v\xe2\x82\xacy4fjir}(jLai. Verbal Adj. vc/hijtcos. \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 167.] VERBS WITH TENSES FEOM 1 IPF\xc2\xa3RENT ROOTS. 203 \n\n\\ 167. Verbs, whose Tenses are formed from different \nRoots, and which are classed together only in \nrespect to Significatio7i. \n\n1. atpcco, to take, to capture, e. g. a city, Lnpf. ^pow; Fut \ncup^d); Perf. ^pT/Ka; Aor. (from \'EA) cIXov, cActj/; Aor. Pass. \niJpc^iyv; Fut. Pass. cupc^Tjcroftai \\k 130 (d)]. \xe2\x80\x94 !Mid. to choose, Aor. \nctXd/x7;v; Fut. aipTJo-o/Aoi ; Perf. IVIid. or Pass. ^pTy/xai; Fut. Perf. \njjpT/cro^ai, PI. Prot.*338, b. Verbal Adj. oipcTo?, -Tio<i, \n\n2. ipxo^iat, to go, to come (only the Indie, of the Pres. in use in \nAttic, the remaining modes and the participials being borrowed \nfrom ci/tit (^ 181) ; thus, ^pxofixu, Iw, t^t, Uvai, uox\'), Lnipf. rjpxofjirjv, \ncommonly ^cti/ and ya. Opt. loi^i; Fut. cT/xi, Isludl go (t/^w, I shall \ncowc); \xe2\x80\x94 (*E.VEY0-) Perf Ik^kvBa [k 124,^ (b)J ; Fut. iXetaofjLon \nalmost exclusively poetical and later prose, still also Lys. p. \n165, Ul; Aor. 5X^ov,\'a5o>, iXdotfii, Ikdi f^ 118, 3 (a)], ikSelvy \niX^wv. Verbal Adj. /xctcXcvotc\'oi\'. \n\n"Epxofiiu has in common the signification of to come and to go ; the idea of \ncoming commonly l)elong8 to the form from 4\\^uy, and the idea a/going to that \nof cffii. But in compounds, each of these three verbs expresses both ideas, and\' \nonly the preposition limits it to the one or to the other signification. \n\n3. ia-Sut}, to eal, Impf rja-Siov; (\xc2\xa9Sw, Ep.) Fut cSo/xat, ($ 154, 4) ; \nPerf iSrjSoKa ; Aor. \xe2\x82\xac<f>ayov, <^y\xe2\x82\xaciv ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. i8rjS\xe2\x82\xaccrfiaLf \n(4 124), 2; Aor. Pass. itScV^v. Verbal Adj. iScarros, tScorco?. \n\n4. opdju), to see, Impf liopiuv; Perf. iwpajca (Poet, also copd/ca, \nAug., ^ 122, 6) ; Aor. (from *IA-) clSoi\', idoj, iSot/xt, i^c, ^ 118, 3 (a), \nlB\xe2\x82\xaciv, iSi^v. (On the second Perf olSa, / kfwiv, see ^ 195.) Fut \n(from \'on) oif/ofiai (2. Pers. o(/^\xe2\x82\xac^ Hl6, 11). \xe2\x80\x94 ]Mid. or Pass. 6pw- \nfuu\', Perf. IVLd. or Pass, iwpafiaiy or w^fxat, a\xc2\xbb\xc2\xab/^at, etc. ; Lif a><^^cu; \nAor. Mid. ciSo/ii/v, iScV^cu, iSoC (and witli the meaning ecce, t8ov)i \nas a simple only Poet; Aor. Pass. w<l>3rjv, 6<f>S7Jvax; Fut o</)^7jcr- \n\nOfiai. Verbal Adj. opdros and otttos, dTrrt\'o?. \n\n5. Tpi\\uiy to rtni, (APEM-) Fut. Spa/xoD/xat; Aor. iSpa/xov; Perf \nScSptipT/Ka; Perf Mid. or Pass. iTnBiBpdfirjfiaL (X. O. 15. 1). Verb. \n\nAdj. Sp\xe2\x82\xacKTfOV. \n\nI^pflofiai, H^pt^a, rare and poet. \xe2\x80\x94 Second Perf. only Epic Seipofm (APEMn). \n\n6. <f>\xe2\x82\xacp(jj (oidy Pres. and Impf), to bear, fOI-) Fut. ouroi (Aor. \nImp. olb-c, oiVero), brifig, in Aristoph., see $ 230, under ^cpw) ; \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n\n\n204 CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN -/U. [$ 168 \n\nfEPKO, or \'ENEPKO) Aor. II. rjveyKov (rarer Aor. L ^e)Kai), -es, \n-e(v), -o/ACV, -\xe2\x82\xacTe, -ov (and -a/ACV, -are, -av), {k 124, Pwem. 2), Opt \neveyKOLfxij etc. (rarer -at/xt, etc.), Inf. eveyKctv, Part. iveyKwv (rarer \ncvey/cas), Imp. ej/cyKc, -erw, etc. (and -arw, etc.) ; \xe2\x80\x94 CENEK-) Perf. \neu^voxa {\xc2\xa7 124, 2) ; Mid. to carry off, carry away, win. Put. oto-o- \nuat; Perf. Mid. or Pass. cvTJvcy/xat (-ylat, -yta-ax, or cvtJvcktcu) ; Aor. \nMid. rjveyKafX7]v, eueyKai, -acr^ai, -afxcvoS] Pass, (a) tO be borne, \ncarried, (b) to bear one\'s self, to hasten; Aor. Pass. rjvix-^\\ Fut \nh/ex^rj(ToiiaL (rarer otcr-^T^o-o/xat). Verb. Adj. oiotos, oioT\xe2\x82\xac09 (Poet. \n\n7. <^77/xt (^ 178), ^0 5<2?/, Impf \xe2\x82\xac<f)rjv A\\ath the meaning of the \nAor. also (fxivai and <f)d^ (\xc2\xa7 178, Pvem. 2); \xe2\x80\x94 CEII-) Aor. cSrov, \nctTTco, ciVoi/xt, C67re [^ 118, 3 (a)], (the other forms of the Imp. are \nrarely or never used, compound TrpoctTrc), etTrcii/, \xe2\x82\xachru)v (first Aor. \neiTra, not very frequent in Attic WTiters, more frequent ciTra^ \nvery frequent enraTe, rarely ctTrav, Imp. \xe2\x82\xaciTrov rarely, very frequent \nciTTctTw, ctTrarov, eiTrarwv, and always ciTrarc ; all other forms "wnnt- \ning in the Att). From the Epic Pres. cl^, come Fut. c/xi, Perf. \nctpr/Ka, Perf Mid. or Pass. cipT^/ouit (^ 123, 4);~CPE-.) Aor. Pass. \n\xe2\x82\xacppr]^r]v {Ippi^v appears not to be Attic), piy^\'cu, pry^ct?; Fut. \nPass. pr).^rjaojxaL and eip-qaofxaL. \xe2\x80\x94 jNIid. only in compounds, Fut \nairepovfiaL, and first Aor. dTrctVao-^ai, to deny, to be wearied out, to \ngive up, like afruiruv. Verbal Adj. prp-6<s, prjrto^. \n\nInstead of the Pres. (pvfiit other words are sometimes used, particularly in \ncomposition. Compare awayopevu), I forbid, afrf7Tov, I forbade ; iyriKry^f I \ncontradict, aureitroi/, I contradicted, the compounds of ciVcTv in the Aor. being \nmore frequent than airrjy6p\xe2\x82\xacv(ra and aj/Tc\'\\e|ou So, ayopfvtt riva KtucwSy I speak \nill of one, but avril-nov kukw^. \n\n\xc2\xa7 168. Conjugation of Verbs in -/ii. \n\n1. Verbs in -fit, the number of which is small, differ from \nthose in -co, principally in taking different personal-endings \nin the Pres. and Impf., several also in the second Aor. Act. \nand Mid. ; and also in omitting the mode-vowel in the Ind. \nof the above tenses. The formation of the remaining \n\n* The first Aor. is preferred to the second, in the first Pers. Sinjr- Indie, when \nthe next word begins with a consonant ; also in the persons of the Imp. which \nhave o ; hence eveyKey but iveyKdju. \n\n\n\ni 169.] DIVISION OF VERBS IN -/Al. 203 \n\ntenses is like that of verbs in -w, with a few exceptions. Li \nomitting the mode-vowel, these verbs are analogous to those \nin -dco, -ico, and -oco. \n\n2. In the Pres. and Impf., most verbs in -/jll with a mono- \nsyllabic stem, take a reduplication (\xc2\xa7 163) ; this consists in \nrepeating the first consonant of the stem wdth c, when the \nstem begins with a simple consonant or a mute and liquid; \nbut, when the stem begins with or, ttt, or with an aspirated \nvowel, c with the rough breathing is prefixed to the stem. \nThese verbs are the following : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n2TA t-OTTj-^i nPA wi-fi-itfji-fu \n\nXPA KJ-xpi7-M* -^E {iiSrj-fu) 5i8(a(ri{v) \n\nBA {fii-fi-n-fii) $i$<is eE rt-drj-fu \n\nHTA tirra-ncu \'E l-rj-fu \n\nHAA irl-fi-ir\\ri-fn AO Si-Sw-fU, \n\nRemark. Most verbs in -fii do not follow this conju;;ation throughout in \nthe three tenses above named, but only in some particular forms ; four verbs, \nribriiUy to put ; Vm\\fu^ to place ; 8i8\xc2\xab/u, to givt^ and Tt;/*!, to send, have this \nconjugation most full, though even these have forms in use borrowed from the \nconjugation in -w, together with several forms of the inflection in -fu. See \n^ 172, Rem. 8 \n\n$ 1G9. Division of Verbs in -/xt. \n\nVerbs in -/x^ are divided into two principal classes : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n1. Such as annex the personal-ending to the stem-vowel. \nThe stem of verbs of this class ends : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) in a, e. g. t-ff-n^-iu^ to place^ Stem 2TA- \n\n\' (b) " \xe2\x82\xac, " ri-dij-fu, to put, " eE- \n\n(c) " o, " 8f-\xc2\xab\xc2\xab-/u, to ^i\xc2\xbb\xc2\xab, " AO- \n\n(d) " I, " tlfUytogo, " \'I- \n\n(e) " <r, " eift/, instead of iff id, to be, " *E2-. \n\n2. Such as annex to their stems the syllable -wv or -in), \nand then append to this syllable the personal-endings. The \nBtem of verbs of this class ends : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nA. In one of the four vowels, a, e, t, o, and assumes -wij \n\n(a) in o, e. g. ffKihd-wv-fjUy to scatter^ Stem 2KEAA- \n\n(b) " \xc2\xab, " Kopi-vvv-tii, to satisfy, " KOPE- \n\n(c) *\' J, only rl-vvv-m, to atone, " TI- \n\n(d) " o, e. g. <rrpu>-vyv-iMy to spread out^ " 3TP0-. \n\n18 \n\n\n\nt06 VERBS IN -fLL STEM OF THE PRES. STRENGTHENED. [^ 170 \n\nB. In a consonant, and assumes -z/u. \n\n(a) in a mute, e. g. SeiK-yv-fit, to shoWj Stem AEIK- \n\n(b) " liquid, " ofi-vv-fxi, to swear, " \'OM-. \nEemark 1. When a diphthong precedes the final consonant of the stem \n\nthat consonant is omitted before the -w, except it be a Kappa-mute, e. g. \na^-vvfiai Stem \'AlP (comp. aip-a>, &p-vviJ.ou) \ndai-vvfjLi *\' A AIT (comp. Sais, Sair-Ss) \n\nKai-pv(jiai " KAIA from KAA (comp. Perf. KfKaS-/jxUy KiKcuTfuu) \nKTci-yvixi " KTEIN from KTEN (Fut. KTcy-w) ] but \nSeltc-yv/jLiy e\'lpy-vvfUj ^evy-yOfMi, o\'ly-yvfii. \n\nRem. 2. Verbs of the second class, \xe2\x80\x94 those in -Ofu, \xe2\x80\x94 form only the Pres. \nand Impf. like verbs in fii, and even in these tenses, only a part of the forms \nare in -vfii, the others in -uw; in the Sing. Impf the forms in -v\xc2\xbb are predomi- \nnant, and in the Pres. Subj. and in the Impf Opt., these are the regular forms. \nThe verb crPe-uyv-fii, from the stem 2BE-, is the only verb of this class which \nforms the second Aor., namely, cafirtv ; several verbs in -\xc2\xab, form their second \nAor. according to the analogy of these verbs, e. g. Svw, tZvy. \n\n\xc2\xa7 170. Characteristic-vowel and Strengthening of \nthe Stem of the Present. \n\n1. In verbs of the first class, the short characteristic -vowel \nof the stem, a, c, o, is lengthened in the Pres., Impf., and \nsecond Aor. Act. : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\na and e into 77, and into u. \nStill, in verbs in -c and -o this lengthening extends only to the \nInd. Sing, of these three tenses ; but in verbs in -a, to the Dual \nand PL Ind. also, and likewise to the entire Imp. and the \nsecond Aor. Inf Act. In the second Aor. Inf Act of verbs in \n-e and -o, \xe2\x82\xac is lengthened into ct, and o into ov, e. g. ^ci-veu, Sov- \nvat. But in the same tenses of the Mid., the short character- \nistic-vowel remains tlnroughout. \n\n2. Verbs in -i3/Ai, whose stems end in a vowel, and hence \nannex -vw, retain the short characteristic-vowel, except those \nwhose stem ends in -o, e. g. crrpo)-wvfiL (2TP0-) ; but verbs \nwhose stems end in a consonant, and hence annex -w, are \nstrengthened in the stem of the Pres. by lengthening the stem \nvowel, namely, \n\na becomes 7;, as in irffy-vvfUy second Aor. Pass. hr&y-Tfy \na " cuy " oX-vvfuu instead of ipw/\xc2\xabu, stem \'AP, *AIP \n\xe2\x82\xac " ct, " SfU-vvni, stem AEK, hence Ion. ^f{a \n\xc2\xbb " fVf " ^\xe2\x82\xacvy-yvfUf second Aor. j\'^ass. 4Cvy-ny. \n\n\n\nff 171, 17?.] VERBS IN -/mt.\xe2\x80\x94 PERSONAL-ENDINGS. 207 \n\n$ 171. Mode-vowels. \n\n1. The Ind. Pres., Impf., and second Aor. do not take the \nmode- vowel {k 168, 1), and hence the personal-endings are \n9 \' "^exed immediately to the stem of the verb, e. g. \n\nt-trra- fifv i\'Tl-^f-fiey \xe2\x82\xac\'5o-fi\xe2\x82\xacy \n\nt-(rrd-fieda i-ri-b4-iJ.\xe2\x82\xac^a i-SS\'/xc^a. \n\n2. Tlie Siibj. has the mode-vowels m and rj, as in verbs in -o>; \nbut these vowels coalesce witli the characteristic-vowel and \nform one syllable ; this coalescence differs from the contraction \nof verbs in -w, as follows : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\ndri and cti; coalesce into rj and ^ (not, as in contracts in -dwf into a and f ), op \ncoalesces into ^ (not, as in contracts in -609, into 01), e. g. \n\ni-(rrd-\xc2\xab = l-aru i-CTa-pj = i\'lrr^s i-<rrd-ri-rcu ^ I-ottj-tou \n\nard-oi = aTu (tto-tjj = arijs \n\nRemark 1. This form of the Subj. of Xar-nfii and ridrifu is like the Subj. \nof the two Aorihts Pass, of all verbs, e. g. tu^\xc2\xab, -fjj, -p, etc., rmr-w, -py, -p, \nfrom rvK-TUy ara-^w, -pi, -p, from T<mj/ii. \n\nRem. 2. The Subj. of verbs in -Ofu is like that of verbs in -u\xc2\xab, e. g. itucyvu^ \n-<Jpr, etc. \n\n3. The Impf and second Aor. Opt. have the mode-vowel t, \nwhich is annexed to the characteristic-vowel, and with it forms \na diphthong, e. g. \n\nImpf. Opt. A. l-<rra-t-fiv = l-rred-riv Aor. II. A. <rrcd-riv Impf. M. l-aTal-fjirj:r \nri-bf-iffp = ri-^ti-rir dd-rfv ri-^fl-firiy \n\nSi-So-i-rfy = SiSol-riy Soi-rjy it-ioi-firjy. \n\nRem. 3. The Opt. of verbs in -\xe2\x82\xac (rl^fii) is like the Aorists Opt. Tass. of \nall verbs, e. g. \xc2\xabrra-d\xc2\xabf-i}\xc2\xbb\', Tu<^-d\xc2\xab(-ijv, rvw-d-jfy. \n\nRem. 4. The Impf. Opt. of verbs in -u^i, like the Subj. Pres., follows the \nfcrm in -\xc2\xab, e. g. S^iKyvoifii. The few exceptions will be considered below. \n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 172. Personal-endings. \n\n1. Tlie following are the personal endings for the Act. : \xe2\x80\x94 \n(a) For the Indicative Present, \n\n\n\nSing. 1. \n2. \n\na. \n\n\n\n\xe2\x80\xa2fi I J-<rT7}-fi t \n\n-s (properly -tn) X-<rrrj-s \n\n-<ri{y) (properly -ri) X-<mj-<ri{y) \n\n\n\n208 \n\n\n\nVERBS IN -/Xt. PERSONAL-ENDINGS. \n\n\n\n[\\ 172. \n\n\n\nDual 2. -Tov %-<rra-Tov \n\n3 .rrov t-ffra-Toy \n\nPlur. 1. -fJifv (properly -fits) l-ara-ixey \n\n2. -re T-<rTo-T6 \n\n3. [-i/o-t(\xc2\xbb\')] (properly -yrt) [t-ffTa-tni T-\xc2\xabrTa-<ri( r )]. \n\nThe ending of the third Pers. PI. -p(ri{v) is changed into -dai{y), and thei \nis contracted with the preceding stem-vowel of the verb. Still, the Attic dia- \nlect admits contraction only in the stems ending in -a, thus : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nfrom i-ffra-vfft is formed l-crToffi {l-<rra-din) \n\n" rl-^e-vffi " Ti-^e7(ri Att. ri-bi-axn \n\n\xc2\xab Zi-Zo-vffi " 5t-5ov(rt " Zi-U-wri \n\nRemark 1. The uncontracted form in -ea<r*, -6affiy -vd(r\xc2\xbb, is the only one \nused in Attic prose, though it also occurs in the Ionic dialect ; the contracted \nform in -eTo-t, -oZffi, -vffi, is the usual form in the Ionic writers, reir seldom in \nthe Attic poets. But from V (stem \'E), to send, this Attic form \'imti (con- \ntracted from i-e-do-t) always occiurs. \n\n(b) The personal-endings of the Subj. Pres. and second \nAor. do not differ from those of verbs in -w. \n\n(c) The following are used for the Impf. and second Aor. \nInd.: \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nSing. 1. -V Impf. l-cmj-r i-rl-^y \n\n2. -5 l-cmi-s i-ri-^s \n\n3. - T-OTTJ i^l-dii \nDual 2. -TOK A. n. (-(rrrj-Toy H-^t-roy \n\n3. -T7ji/ i-(rri]-T^v i-bf-njp \n\nPlur. 1. -fify (properly -ju\xe2\x82\xacs) i-<Trr\\\'tiiv f-^-fity \n\n2. -re \xe2\x82\xac-(rT7j-T\xc2\xab ?-(^\xc2\xab-tc \n\n3. -<ray ll-arrj-cay t-^f-<ray. \n\nRem. 2. The Ind. of the two Aorists Pass, of all verbs is like the second \nAor. earriv, e. g. eTuTr-Tjv, i-ara-^Vf -tjs, -tj, -i|tov, -ip^y, -^tuyt "if\'* -V"*\'* \n\n(d) The personal-endings of the Opt. Impf and second Aor. \n(except the first Pers. Sing.) differ from those of the Opt of \nthe historical tenses of verbs in -tu, only in being preceded by \n-q ; comp. the endings of jSovXevoi/xt, (SovXeva-aifxi, etc. "with tliose \nof \n\nffral-rjv, i-arTcd-rjv ^d-r)v ri-^ei-rjy SoZ-ijm Si-ioi-rjv. \nRem. 3. In the Dual and PL Impf Opt., the -tj is commonly rejected in the \nAttic dialect, and the ending of the third Pers. PI. -Tjaay is almost alwnys \n\nBhortened into -evy e. g. \n\nri^ei-r)ix\xe2\x82\xacV = ri^eifisy i(rrcd-riT\xe2\x82\xac = toTtuTt \n\n\n\n} 172.] \n\n\n\nVERBS IN -fit. PERSONAL-ENDINGS. \n\n\n\n209 \n\n\n\nThe same holds of the Opt. Pass. Aorists of all verbs, e. g. -Kou^ev^flijfxiv =\xc2\xbb \nircuBfv^-ufiev (wholly like ri^drju). \xe2\x80\x94 On the contrary, in the second Aor. Opt. \nAct. of To-TTj/tii, Tii^T?/ii, SiSwjjUy the abbreviated fonns are very rare, except the \nthird Pers. PL, which is commonly abridged. \n\nRem. 4. The forms SiSc^v and Stfijy also occur, \n(e) Tlie endings of the Pres. and second Aor. Imp. are: \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n\n\nSing. 2. \n\n\n-Sn \n\n\n{1-<rra-^t) \n\n\n{rl-^cSn) \n\n\n{U-lo-Sn) \n\n\n3. \n\n\n-T\xc2\xab \n\n\nl-<TTd-ru \n\n\nri-^4-rw \n\n\nSi-56-ru \n\n\nDii:il 2. \n\n\n-TOJ/ \n\n\nX-ffra-rov \n\n\nrl-^e-Toy \n\n\nSi-So-Toy \n\n\n3. \n\n\n-TbtV \n\n\ni-crrd-Tuy \n\n\nTi-d4-rcDV \n\n\nSi-56-ruy \n\n\nPlural 2. \n\n\n-T\xc2\xab \n\n\nX-ara-re \n\n\nri-df-T\xe2\x82\xac \n\n\n5j-5o-t\xe2\x82\xac \n\n\n3. \n\n\n"Twaav \n\n\ni-ard-Toxray \n\n\nri-^i-roxTov \n\n\nSi-S6-T(i>(ray \n\n\n\n\n\n\nor i-ffrdyruy \n\n\nri-^4vru)V \n\n\nSi-56yT(i)y. \n\n\n\nRem. 5. The second Pers. Sing. Imp. Pres. rejects the ending -^i, and, as a \ncompensation, lengthens the short characteristic-vowel, namely, a into 77, e into \nci, o into ovj V into 0, \n\nT-ord-di becomes 1-<rrri ri-^f-^i becomes rl-^fi \n\nSl-So-^t " Sl-Sov SdK-yi-di SfUyv, \n\nThe ending -bi is retained in the Pres. only in a very few verbs, e. g. <pd^i \nfrom <p7jfjt.l, ttr^i from ei>i/\xc2\xbb ^* from tJfUy and some others ; it also occurs in cer- \ntain Perfects of verbs in -ct, e. g. rt^ya^i. \n\nIn the second Aor. of rl^/ju^ Tfj/ii, and 8t8\xc2\xbb/Lu, the ending bi is softened into \n;; thus, dt-di becomes btSt i-^i = ?}, io-^i =\xe2\x96\xa0 86s ; but in the second Aor. of \nImifUj the ending -di is retained ; thus, <rr^-di ; also in the two Aorists Pass, \nof all verbs, e. g. ri^-di, \xc2\xbbeu8\xc2\xabu^Ti (insteiul of ircuSf v^Tj-di, \xc2\xa7 21, Rem. 3). la \ncompounds of rrij^i and firi^i, tlie tiidiiig -jjdi is often abbreviated into d, in \nthe poet, dialect, e. g. wapdtrrdy dirJo-Td, Tp6$d, Kocri^a. \n\n(f ) Tlie ending of the Pres. and second Aor. Inf. is -vtu. \nThis is appended in the Pres. to the short characteristic- vowel ; \nbut in the second Aor., to the lengthened vowel (a being \nlengthened into t;, c into ct, o into ov, ^ 170, 1) ; thus, \n\nPres. l-ariL-vai ri-^t-vtu 8i\'i6-yai itiK-yv-vtu \n\nSecond Aor. (tt^-koi ^tl-vai 8ov-van. \n\nRem. 6. The Inf. Pass. Aorista of all verbs arc like or^voi, c. g. rxmrj-yai, \nBov\\(v^-y<u. \n\n(g) Tlie endings of the Res. and second Aor. participle are \n-vTs, -vTo-o, -VT, which are joii ed to the characteristic-vowel \naccording to the common rules ; thus, \n\ni-crd-yrs = l-aris, \xc2\xab-oTo<ro, l-ffriv \nTi-d4-yTS =\xe2\x96\xa0\xe2\x96\xa0 Ti-^elsy \xe2\x80\xa2\xe2\x82\xaci<ra, -4y \n9i-S6-yrs = 5t-8oi5j, -ovaay -6v \nifiK-yv-yrs = Sfuc-ydst -vaUf -ty. \n\n18* \n\n\n\noris, OTaffaf artv \n^(is, 3\xe2\x82\xacr<ro, ^ey \n8oisy -ovaaf \xe2\x80\xa26v \n\n\n\n210 VERBS IN fXl. FORMATION OF THE TENSES. [f 173. \n\nRem. 7. The participles of the two Pass. Aorists of all verbs are like th\xc2\xab \nPart. Ti3-6ts, or ^ds, e. g. rtm-eis, -eTa-a, -eV, fiovXev^-eis. \n\n2. The personal-endings of the Mid. are like those of verbs \nin -0), except that uniformly, in the second Pers. Sing. Pres. and \nalmost always in the Impf Ind. and in the Imp., the personal- \nendings retain their full form, -arat and -a-o. Still, the following \npoints are to be noted : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) The second Pers. Pres. Ind. of verbs in -a (as To-ttj/u, Svvc^mi), is only -curcu \nin Attic prose ; the contracted form is found, from the earliest period, only \nin the poetic dialect, e. g. iiri<rra from ivlaTafmi in Aesch., Svyrj (from the Ionic \nending -eat) instead of Svi^a, in Soph, and Eurip. \xe2\x80\x94 In the second Pers. Imp. \nand in the Impf., \'/o-tcd seems to be only poetic ; but, iiri<rra}, ^wio-tcd, Suvw, \nijdvvco, are the regular fonns in good prose, and the uncontracted forms \nscarcely occur except in the poets and later writers. \n\n(b) In verbs in -e, the contract forms in the Imp. Pres. arc poetic and rare, and \nin the Indie. Impf. not at all in use; thus, Impf. iri^fcro, Imp. ri^ea-o {ri^ov} ; in \nthe second Aor., both of verbs in -e and -o, the contract are the regular forms, \ne. g. Indie, eiS-ov, Imp. ^ov; eSov, 5ov. In verbs in -o also, the uncontracted \nforms seem to be the usual ones in the Impf and Imp.: iSlSoao, 5tSo<ro. \n\n(c) The contracted fonns are uniformly employed throughout the Subj. ; in \nthe Opt., as in verbs in -co, the a is always omitted, yet the form remains \nuncontracted. \n\nRem. 8. The Sing. Impf. Act. of rlSn)fxi, is iri^v, 2 Pers. iri^eis, 3. iri^u \n(from TI0Eri), iri^eis and ^Tt.^6t being more frequent than irldrjSy irl^: on \n\'i-nfii, see \xc2\xa7 180; the Sing. Impf Act. of SiSo>/u is always iSlSovy (fr. AIAOfi), \nihiSovs, etc. (X. An. 5. 8, 4. is to be read iSlSovs instead of iSlSus, according to \nthe best MSS.) In verbs in -vfxi, the forms in -vco arc usual throughout the Pres. \nand Impf., especially in third Pers. PI. Indie. Act., e. g. ZfiKyvov<ri(y), and \nthe only forms in the Pres. Subj. and Impf, Opt., e. g. Sfucvvw, ofivvu, ovfifuy- \nvia, together with SdKWfjn, ofiw^i, cvfi^iyw^Li. \xe2\x80\x94 In Attic poetr}\\ there arc also \ncontracted forms of Ti^fii and \'l-nfii in the second and third Pers. Sing. Pres. \nInd. Act., e. g. Ti,^ers, U7s, ri^ei, Ui. \xe2\x80\x94 But the ^Middle admits the formation in \n-T^w only in the Subj. and Opt. \n\nFOKMATION OF THE TeNSES. \n\n\xc2\xa7 17o. I. First Class of Verbs ifi -hl, \n\n1. In forming the tenses of the Act, the short characteristic- \nvowel is lengthened, both in the Fut. and first Aor. IMid., \nnamely, a into rj, e into rj ; also in the Perf. Act. of riSrifu and \nhjfii, \xe2\x82\xac is lengthened into et, and o into o> ; but in the remaining \ntenses of the Mid., and throughout the Pass., the short charac- \nteristic-vowel is retained, with the exception of the Perf. and \nPlup. Mid. and Pass, of Tt^7//xt and ltj/xl, where the \xc2\xab of tho \nPerf. Act. (re^et/ca, Te-^ei/xat, ei/ca, ct/xai) is retained. \n\n2. The first Aor. Act and Mid. of ri^/xt, IrjfjUy and StSw/xi, haa \nK for the characteristic of the tense, not o- ; tlius, \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 174.] VERBS IN -/it. FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 2ll \n\nThe forms of the first Aor. Act e&rjKa, ^ko, and tSwKa, however, \n\nare usual only in the Ind., and generally only in the Sing. ; in \n\nthe other persons, the Attic writers commonly used the forms \n\nof the second Aor. ; in the other modes and the participials, \n\nthe forms of the second Aor. were always used. \n\nExamples of the first Aor. in the PI. Ind. are: i^Kofxey, X. C. 4. 2, 15, \nii^Kafify, X. Att. 3. 2, 5. 0. 9, 9. 10. ^SwKare, Antiph. 138, 77. cScdkco\', X. Cy. \n4. 6, 12. rdTjKOj/, H. 2. 3, 20. aiprJKov, Cy. 4. 5, 14. \n\nAlso the forms of the second Aor. Mid. of tC^ixl, Irj^i, and \nSiSwfUy are used by the Attic writers instead of the first Aor. ; \n\xe2\x80\xa2qKaL/xrjv from Irjfu occurs, though but seldom. On the contrary, \nthe forms of the second Aor. Ind. Act. of riSrjfxLj l-qy^i^ and 8i8u)/xt \n(IB-qv, Tjv, cBoji/), are not in use. \n\n3. The verb loTrjfiL forms the first Aor. Act. and Mid., like \nverbs in -a>, with the tense-characteristic o-, e. g. e-arrj-a-a, i-arrj- \n(T-dfxyjv. The second Aor. Mid. icrrdfXTjv is not used. Some \nother verbs, however, have a second Aor. Mid., e. g. iTrrdiJiTjv, \nCTrpta/xiyv. \n\nKemark I. The second Aor. and the second Fut. Pass, are wanting in these \nverbs, also the Fut. Perf., except in To-ttj/h, the Fut. Perf. of which is \xe2\x82\xac<rT\'^|a> \nand \xe2\x82\xac<rT^|o/nai, (j 154, 6. \n\nKkm. 2. On the meaning of the verb 1<rrtifii, the following things are to be \nnoted: the Pres., Impf., Fut., and first Aor. Act. have a Trans, meaning, to \npiace ; on the contrary, tlic second Aor., the Perf. and Plup., Act. and the Fut. \nPerf., have a reflexive or Intrans. meaning, to place one\'s self] to stand, namely, \nt<rrr\\v, I phiced mi/self, or / stood ; (ffrriKa (with present signification), / have \nplaced mifse/f, I stand, sto ; ((rriiKdy, staUiin ; ((Tttj^w, ia-rri^ofMau, stabo (4<^f(rT^|a>, \nI shnh xcithdraw). The Mid. denotes either to place for one s self] to erect^ to stand, \ny>nsistere, or to place one\'s self; Pass, to be placed. "EerrTj/ca and ((rrriKdy usually \ntake the place also of the forms cVto/uu and itrraifiriy, which occur but rarely. \n\n} 174. IL Second Class of Verbs in -pn. \n\nThere is no difficuhy in forming the tenses of verbs of the \nsecond class {k 169, 2). All the tenses are formed from the \nstem, after rejecting the ending -vrv/xi, or -vxpn. Verbs in -o, \nwliich in the Pres. liave lengthened the o into o>, retain the w \nthrough all the tenses, e. g. (rrpdi-wv-pny t^ui-wv-pn^ pdi-wv-pny Fut. \narpd)-(Tio, etc. But verbs, whose stem ends in a liquid, in form- \ning some of the tenses, assume a Theme ending in a vowel, \ne. g. 6p.-vv-p.L, Aor. w/i-o-o-a, from \'OMOO. The second Aor. and \nthe second Fut. Pass, occur only in a few verbs, e. g. ^\xe2\x82\xacvy-vv-/ic \nSee * 182 \n\n\n\n212 \n\n\n\nPARADIGMS OF VERBS IN -/Xt. \n\n\n\n[$ 175. \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 175. Paradigms of \n\n\n\nACTIVE. j \n\n\n\n\nCO \n\na \n\n\n\n\nimbers \n\nand \n\nrsons. \n\n\n2TA- to p/ace. \n\n\n0E- to put. \n\n\nAO- to give. \n\n\nAEIK- to show. \n\n\n\n\n\n\n^ \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n^^" \n\n\nS. 1. \n\n\n\'i-(TT7l-fJLl \n\n\nri-^-fit \n\n\ndi-Sa-fjii \n\n\nSfiK-yv-fit \' \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n2. \n\n\n\'l-a-TTj-s \n\n\nTl-^-S \n\n\nBi-Su-s \n\n\nSe\'iK-yv-s \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n3. \n\n\n\'l-<Tr\'f]-(n{v) \n\n\nTi-i^-(rt(y) \n\n\nSl-5u>-(ri{y) \n\n\nS\xe2\x82\xaciK-vv-iri{y) \n\n\n\n\n\n\niW \n\n\nD.l. \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\xe2\x96\xa0 \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\xe2\x96\xa0S \n\n\n2. \n\n\n\'[-<rra-Tov \n\n\nri-^\xe2\x82\xac-Tov \n\n\nSl-So^ov \n\n\nJeJK-VlJ-TOV \n\n\n\n\n\n\n.y \n\n\n3. \n\n\n\'i-ara-rov \n\n\nri-^i-rov \n\n\nSi-5o-Toy \n\n\nSc/lC-I\'V-TOJ\' \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\'\xc2\xab \n^ \n\n\nP. 1. \n\n\n\'l-(TTa-fjLev \n\n\nTi-^\xe2\x82\xac-/X\xe2\x82\xacV \n\n\nSi-So-/j.\xe2\x82\xacy \n\n\nSfiK-yv-fiey \n\n\n\n\n\n\n2. \n\n\n\'/-(TTd-Te \n\n\nTi-^c-Te \n\n\n5t-5o-T\xe2\x82\xac \n\n\nS(iK-yv-T\xe2\x82\xac \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n3. \n\n\nt-(rTa-ai{v) \n\n\nTi-^4-d<n{v) \n\n\nSL-S6-d(Ti{y) \n\n\n5(iK-yv-6uTi(y) \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n(from la-Td-affi) \n\n\nand ri-^e7ai{y) \n\n\nand bi-Zov<ri{v) \n\n\nand 86t*c-ia)<ri(F) \n\n\n\n\n\n\nS. 1. \n\n\ni (TTCO \n\n\nri-^u) \n\n\nSi-Su \n\n\nSeiK-yif-u \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n2. \n\n\nt-a-TTJ-s \n\n\nTl-^-S \n\n\nSi-St^-s \n\n\nSeiK-yv-r)S \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n3. \n\n\nl-arr^ \n\n\nTl-^ \n\n\n5t-5y \n\n\netc. \n\n\n\n\n\n\nD.l. \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n^ \n\ns \n\n\n2. \n\n\nl-ffTTJ-rOJ/ \n\n\nri-^-Tov \n\n\nSi-iu-Toy \n\n\n\n\n\n\nH \n\n\n\n\n3. \n\n\ni-crrrj-TOi/ \n\n\nTl-^-TOV \n\n\n5i-Sa>-Toy \n\n\n\n\n\n\nf^ \n\n\nP. 1. \n\n\ni-arw-fjLcv \n\n\nri-^w-fxev \n\n\nSi-Su-^ey \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n2. \n\n\ni-CTTTJ-TC \n\n\nTi-^-re \n\n\n5t-5a>-Te \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n3. \n\n\nl-(TTa>-(n{v) \n\n\nTi-^cc-(Ti{v) \n\n\nSi-Su-(n(y) \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nS. 2. \n\n\n\'i-crt] ^ \n\n\nTl-^6i* \n\n\n\xc2\xab(-5oy\xc2\xab \n\n\nSei/t-Ku * \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n(from \'IffTo^i) \n\n\n(from T^e^t) \n\n\n(from 5i5o,^\xc2\xbb) \n\n\n(from SfUyv^i) \n\n\n\n\n\n\n^ \n\n\n3. \n\n\ni-cra-ra \n\n\nTl-^4-TW \n\n\n5j-8d-Ta> \n\n\nSeiK-vv-^w \n\n\n\n\n\n\nc \n\n\nD.2. \n\n\n\'{-(TTOL-TOV \n\n\nTl-^\xe2\x82\xac-rov \n\n\n5i-5o-Toi\' \n\n\nSfiK-yii-roy \n\n\n\n\n\n\n1 \n\n\n3. \n\n\ni-CTTa-TWU \n\n\nTi-^e-Tuy \n\n\nSi-do-Tuy \n\n\nSfLK-yv-Twy \n\n\n\n\n\n\nP. 2. \n\n\n\'/-(TTd-Te \n\n\nTl-^e-re \n\n\n5i-5o-T\xe2\x82\xac \n\n\nS(iK-yv-T( \n\n\n\n\n\n\n3. \n\n\nl-ara-rwaav \n\n\nTl-^4-TQ}<TaV \n\n\nSi-Sd-Twtrcu\' \n\n\nSfiK-yv-Tonreo\' \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nand l-ffTduTwy \n\n\nand ri-b4vruy \n\n\nand Si-S6yTuy \n\n\nand BfiK-yvyretr \n\n\n\n\nIn/in. \n\n\nl-ffToi-uai \n\n\nri-^e-yai \n\n\nSi-Sd-vou \n\n\nSfiK-yv-ycu \n\n\n\n\nPart. \n\n\nl-ards, Sco, S>/ \n\n\nTi-3e(y, eTo-o, tV \n\n\n5i-5ous, ovira, 6y \n\n\nS(iK-yvs, vacL, tv \n\n\n\n\n\n\nG. dvTOS \n\n\nG. 4yro5 \n\n\nG. din-os \n\n\nG. VVTOS \n\ni^fU-yvy \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nS. 1. \n\n\n\'i-<TTTl-V \n\n\ni-ri-bTjy \n\n\ni-Si-Sovy \' \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n2. \n\n\n\'l-a-TTj-s \n\n\ni-ri-^eis^ \n\n\ne-Sf-Sous* \n\n\n4-^lK-trvs \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n3. \n\n\n\'i-(TTri \n\n\ni-rl-^ei^ \n\n\n^-5^5ou \' \n\n\ni-SfU-VV \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nD.l. \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n2. \n\n\n\'l-crrd-Tov \n\n\ni-ri-^e-rov \n\n\n\xe2\x82\xac-5/-5o-TOV \n\n\ni-iflK-yv-Toy \n\n\n\n\n\n\n1 \n\n\n3. \n\n\nl-cTTa-Trjv \n\n\ni-Ti-^e-n]v \n\n\n^-St-Sd-TTJf \n\n\ni-S(iK-yv-rriy \n\n\n\n\n\n\n^ \n\n\nP. 1. \n\n\n\'l-ara-fiev \n\n\ni-Tl-^e-fjL\xe2\x82\xacy \n\n\ne-5i-So-fi\xe2\x82\xacy \n\n\ni-^fltc-yv-fify \n\n\n\n\n"H \n\n\n\n\n2. \n\n\n\'i-ard-Ti \n\n\ne-T^^e-Te \n\n\ne-S/-5o-T6 \n\n\ni-ScU-vv-rf \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n3. \n\n\n\'l-a-Ta-aav \n\n\ni-rl-^e-aav \n\n\n\xe2\x82\xac-5i-So-(7\'av \n\n\ni-i(lK-yif-(rctP \n\n\n\n\n\n\nS. 1. \n\n\ni-aral-7]V \n\n\nTi-^el-r)y \n\n\n5t-5o/-7j;\' \n\n\nSfiK-yv-oifu \n\n\n\n\n\n\n2. \n\n\nl-arai-Tis \n\n\nTi-^ei-T]S \n\n\n5i-5ot-7;y \n\n\nSuK-l-V-OiS \n\n\n\n\n\n\nJ \n\n\n3. \n\n\nt-(TTal-7] \n\n\nTi-^eZ-Tj \n\n\nSi-Soi-t] \n\n\netc \n\n\n\n\n\n\nD.l. \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n1 \n\n\n2. \n\n\ni-(rra7-Tou * \n\n\nTl-^\xe2\x82\xac7-T0V * \n\n\nSi-5o7-roy * \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n^ \n\n\n3. \n\n\nt-aral-Triv \n\n\nri-^ei-Ti]y \n\n\n5i-Sol-rr]v \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nP. 1. \n\n\ni-ffTai-jxev \n\n\nTi-^e7-iJ.\xe2\x82\xacy \n\n\n5i-So7-n\xe2\x82\xacu \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n2. \n\n\nl-(TTcu-re \n\n\nTt-3-e?-Te \n\n\nSl-So7-T\xe2\x82\xac \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n3. \n\n\ni-(rTai-ev \n\n\nTi-S-er-ej\' \npeciallv SeiKyvov \n\n\nSj-Sot-ev \n(Tilv). Also Imi \n\n\n\n\n\n\n^Ad \n\n\nid SeiKp \n\n\nv-o), -eis, etc., es \n\n\n>f. cSeiKKuov, -ifSy \n\n\n-ve(v), \n\n\nand the Part, usually S \n\n\niiKvv-uv, -ovcra, - \n\n\nov (\xc2\xab 172. Rem. i \n\n\n5). M lT2.Rem. \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 175.] PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN -fll. \n\nVerbs in -fjn. \n\n\n\n213 \n\n\n\n\n\nMIDDLE. 1 \n\n\n\n\n-i\'l\'A- to place. \n\n\neE- to put. \n\n\nAO- to give. \n\n\nAEIK- to show. \n\n\n\n\n%-<na-fiai \n\n\nri-^f-ficu \n\n\nSi-So\'fiai \n\n\n5\xe2\x82\xaciK-yV-/MU \n\n\n\n\nl-ara-ffcu \n\n\nrl-^e-(rou \n\n\nSi\'So-crcu \n\n\nSfU-yv-crat \n\n\n\n\nl-ara-rcu \n\n\nrl-^f-rai \n\n\nSi-So-rai \n\n\ndeiK-yv-Tai \n\n\n\n\ni-ffTi-fie^ov \n\n\nri-^t-fie^ov \n\n\n5i-S6-/iebov \n\n\nSeiK-yi-fifbov \n\n\n\n\nX-ffTa-a^ov \n\n\nTi-^e-a^oy \n\n\nSl-So-aboy \n\n\nSfiK-yv-aboy \n\n\n\n\n%-<na-a^ov \n\n\ni^-^f-(T^oy \n\n\nSi-So-aboy \n\n\nBfLK-yv-aboy \n\n\n\n\nl-<rT&-fji.(^a \n\n\nTi-d4-fjLe^a \n\n\nSi-S6-iJ.cba \n\n\nSeiK-yv-fifba \n\n\n\n\n^-(rra-<r^\xe2\x82\xac \n\n\nri-^f-a^f \n\n\nSi-So-crbe \n\n\nS(lK-yv-<rb\xe2\x82\xac \n\n\n\n\nX-ffra-vreu \n\n\nrl-df-yrcu \n\n\ndi-So-yrcu \n\n\nSelK-yxf-yrou \n\n\n\n\nl-a-TM-ficu * \n\n\nri-^u-fiai \n\n\n5i-Su)-fuu \n\n\nSeiK-yv-uf/xai \n\n\n\n\ni-ari} \n\n\nti-3t7 \n\n\n5<-5y \n\n\nSeiK-yv-T) \n\n\n\n\n[-(TTrj-rai \n\n\nrt-^-rcu \n\n\n5i-5a>-Ta* \n\n\netc. \n\n\n\n\ni-<Tru)-^i^ov \n\n\n7i-^u>-fi(dor \n\n\nSi-Su-fK^oy \n\n\n\n\n\n\ni-arri-abov \n\n\nrt-^-adoy \n\n\n5t-5a>-(r3oj/ \n\n\n\n\n\n\ni-arri-abov \n\n\nTi-^-aboy \n\n\nSi-SQ-ffboy \n\n\n\n\n\n\ni-aru-fiiba \n\n\nri-^u-fif^a \n\n\nBi-Su-fifba \n\n\n\n\n\n\nl-arrj-abt \n\n\nri-drj-a^f \n\n\nSl-SuMT^t \n\n\n\n\n\n\nl-ffTU-VTCU \n\n\nri-dbf-yrau \n\n\nSiSit-yrcu \n\n\n\n\n\n\nT-o\'Td-(ro uuii \n\n\nr\'i-b (-<To and \n\n\n5i-5o-<ro and \n\n\nSfU-yv-<ro \n\n\n\n\nX-OTW \n\n\nri-bou \n\n\nii-Sou \n\n\n\n\n\n\nt-CTTa-o-r^ \n\n\nTl-bi-<T^ \n\n\nSi-S6-(rbw \n\n\nSfiK-yv-ab<ii \n\n\n\n\n7-iTTa-adoy \n\n\nri-^f-aboy \n\n\nii-So-ffboy \n\n\nSe\'iK-yifffboy \n\n\n\n\ni-<na (T^wv \n\n\nTi-b(-ffd(Dy \n\n\nSi-S6-0bu>y \n\n\niiiK-vv-aduy \n\n\n\n\nX fffa-a^e \n\n\nri-i^t-ffdf \n\n\nSl\'-So-flTi^f \n\n\nSf\'iK-yv-abf \n\n\n\n\ni-CT^-a^wffav and \n\n\nri-^( abuxray and \n\n\n5i-S6-<Tbcfaav and \n\n\nSeiK-yv-aboxrav \n\n\n\n\ni-(n(i-<Tdwv \n\n\nri-^t a^wy \n\n\nSt-i6-(Tb<ay \n\n\nand SfiK-yv-abuy \n\n\n\n\nX-ara-abau \n\n\nTi-d4-fi(yos, 1}, oy \n\n\nSi-So-abcu \nSi-66-/ieyoSf tj, oy \n\n\n5(iK-yv-<rbcu \n\n\n\n\n/-<rri-/i\xe2\x82\xac\xc2\xbb\'or, \xc2\xbbj, ov \n\n\nSfiK-yt-fifyos, 7], \noy \n\n\n\n\n1 ^ni.-fJL7\\V \n\n\n4-Ti-^4-firiy \n\n\n4-9t-S6-fir]y \n\n\n4-S\xe2\x82\xaciK-yv-fjLrfy \n\n\n\n\n1-<rro.-<ro and J-oTct \n\n\ni-rl-^e-ffo \n\n\n4-il-So-(ro \n\n\n4-SfiK-yv-<To \n\n\n\n\nt-ard-To \n\n\ni-ri-b(-ro \n\n\n4-S\'i-5o-ro \n\n\n4-S(lK-inj-T0 \n\n\n\n\nl-<ni.-a(bo0 \n\n\ni-ri-d(-^i(doy \n\n\n4-Si-S6-/ifboy \n\n\n4-SfiK-yv-pi,eboy \n\n\n\n\nX-(Tra-<T^ov \n\n\ni-ri-bf-aboy \n\n\n4-5l-So-(Tdoy \n\n\n4-SeiK-yv-<Tbov \n\n\n\n\nl-(Tr6.-<Tby\\v \n\n\ni ri-b(-aby\\v \n\n\n4-Si-S6-(rl^y \n\n\n4-S(tK-yv-cr^y \n\n\n\n\ni-(rT&-fi(^a \n\n\ni-Ti-bf-fiiba \n\n\n4-5i-S6-ij,(i^a \n\n\n4-B(iK-yv-fXfba \n\n\n\n\nl-ara-a-de \n\n\n4-Tl-b(-<rb( \n\n\n4-Si-So-<Tbc \n\n\n4-SfiK-yv-(rbf \n\n\n\n\nX-ara-vTo \n\n\n4-rl-bi-vro \n\n\n4-Si-So-yro \n\n\n4-SfiK-yv-vTO \n\n\n\n\ni-a-Tod-firiy\' \n\n\nTl-dol-fiT}y \' \n\n\nSi-boi\'uriy \' \n\n\nSetK-yv-oifivy \n\n\n\n\ni-(TTOU-0 \n\n\nri-bol-o \n\n\nSi-So7-o \n\n\nSfiK-yv-oio, \n\n\n\n\ni-trrai-TO \n\n\nTi-do7-ro \n\n\nSi-So7-ro \n\n\netc. \n\n\n\n\ni-<rTai-fif^ov \n\n\nTi-boi-fj.(boy \n\n\nti-iol-fifboy \n\n\n\n\n\n\ni-ffroL-a^ov \n\n\nTi-boT-adoy \n\n\nSi-So7-<rboy \n\n\n\n\n\n\nl-tnai-ffbnv \n\n\nTi-boi-abTiy \n\n\nSiSol-cbrfy \n\n\n\n\n\n\nl-tTTai-fif^a \n\n\nri-boi-/j.(ba \n\n\nSi-Soi-fi(!^a \n\n\n\n\n\n\ni-aTa7-(r^e \n\n\nTi-bo7-(Tbe \n\n\nSi-Bo7-(Tbe \n\n\n\n\n\n\nl-iTTCU-yTO \n\n\nri-bo1-vro \n\n\nSi-So7-yTo \n\n\n\n\n5. *(i 112, Rem. 8. \n\n\nM 172, Rem. 3. \n\n\n* On the irreg. ac \n\n\ncent of 4iri<napuu^ \n\n\netc., see 4 17G, 1. \xc2\xab \n\n\nOn the accent in 4 \n\n\nTTio-Toio, etc. see \xc2\xa7 1\' \n\n\n76,1. \'\xc2\xa7176,2 \n\n\n\n\n\n\n214 \n\n\n\nPARADIGMS OP VERBS IN -/it. \n\n\n\n[* 175. \n\n\n\nACTIVE. \n\n\n\n^ ri \n\na a \xc2\xb0 \n\nS c3 is \n\n\n\nS. 1. \n\n2. \n\n3. \nD.l. \n\n2. \n\n3. \nP. 1. \n\n2. \n\n3. \n\n\n\nS. 1. \n\n2. \n\n3. \nD.l. \n\n2. \n\n3. \nP. 1. \n\n2. \n\n3. \n\n\n\nS. 1. \n\n2. \n\n3. \nD.l. \n\n2. \n\n3. \nP. 1. \n\n2. \n\n3. \n\n\n\nS.2. \n\n3. \nD.2. \n\n3. \nP. 2. \n\n3. \n\n\n\nIn/in. \n\n\n\nPart. \n\n\n\nFuture. \n\n\n\nAorist I. \n\n\n\nPerfect. \n\n\n\nPluperfect. \n\n\n\nFut. Perf. \n\n\n\n2TA- to place. \n\n\n\ne-<TT7i-v, I stood, \n\n\xe2\x82\xac-ffTT]-S \n\ne-ffrri \n(E-<rr7)\'T0v \n\ni-ffT\'fj-TTIU \n\ne-ffTTj-fieu \n\ne-crrj-Te \n\ne-CTTi^-ffav \n\n\n\naTTJs \n(rrrj-rov \n\n(TTTJ-TOV \n\nCTToH-fxev \n\n\n\n<TTai-r]v \n\nffTcd-TJS \nCTOl-TJ \n\nffral-TfTov \' \n\nCTat-rjTTjy \n\narai-TJixev \n\n<Trou-\xe2\x82\xacV \n\n\n\nCTTJ-TCi) \n(T T ^ -TOV \n\n(Tri) -Tcav \n\n0" T 7j -Tcoaav \nand (TTovrajv \n\n\n\nCTTJ-J/ai \n\n\n\n(rrds, Scro, (Jj/ \nGen. (TTiivros \n\n\n\naTrj-trcD \n\n\n\ne-ffTTja-a, I \n\n[placed, \n\n\n\ne-a-TTj-Ka,^ sto, \n\n\n\nk-(rri)-Keiv and \nel-(rT7i-K\xe2\x82\xaciv \n\n\n\n0E- to jtjui. \n\n\n\n(r-^-j/) ^ A. I. \n(e-,dT?-sj > used \n(^-^) ) for it \n\n\xe2\x82\xac-^\xe2\x82\xac-rou \n\n\n\n\n\n\n5\xc2\xab\' \n\nSu-TOV \nSw-TOV \n\n\n\n\n\n\n^4-roo \n^4-ruv \nb4-Tu>cav and \n\n\n\n^i\'i-vai \n\n\n\n^cls, eTca, eV \nGen. ^fVTos \n\n\n\n^-(TtD \n\n\n\nAO- to ^rtre. \n\n\n\n(f-5\xc2\xab-y) ) A. I. \n(e-5a>-s) > used \n(\xe2\x82\xac-5co) ) for it \n\ni-ho-rov \n4-S6-rr)v \ne-5o-/iev \nc-So-T\xc2\xab \n\n\n\nSol-rjs \nSol-rj \n\n5o/-1JT01\' \' \n\nSoi-rin\xe2\x82\xacy \n\n5o^7/T\xe2\x82\xac \n\n\n\n80s (5d^0* \n\n5(J-T0I\' \n\nSt^rcixrav and \nS6tn-uy \n\n\n\nSov-you \n\n\n\nSows, ovacL, 6y \nGrcn. Sdyros \n\n\n\nSd>-<ru \n\n\n\n-Bw \n\n\n\nKa \n\n\n\nInstead of these forms, the 2d Aor. i\xc2\xab \nused in the Dual, PI. Ind. and In the \nother Modes and Participials, f 173, 2 \n\n\n\nTc-^ei-Ka \n\n\n\n5c\'- 5 \n\n\n\nat-Ka \n\n\n\ni-re-^ei-Keiy \\ i-Be-Sti-Keiy \n\n\n\nk-(TT-}]^a> old Att.j wanting. \n\n\n\nwantino:. \n\n\n\nAEIK- to show. \n\n\n\nwanting. \n\n\n\n$(/{\xc2\xbb \n\n\n\ni-ift^a \n\n\n\nSf\'-JfiXa \n\n\n\n^-^e-Jefx***\' \n\n\n\nwantinsr- \n\n\n\nPAS \n\n\n\nAor. L \n\n\n\ni-ara-^y \n\n\n\ni-T4-^y\' \n\n\n\ne-S6-bTjv \n\n\n\ni-9\xe2\x82\xaclx-^y \n\n\n\n\' The compounds, e. g. ctTrooTcD, iK^w, 5jo5<i, have the same accenruation as \nthe simples, e. g. aTroo-T&Jcri, iK^rov, SiaScofiey. \' See \xc2\xa7 172, Rem. 3. \' In \ncomposition, irapd(rTTi^i, Trapda-Ta ; aTr6crTri^i, aTr6(rrcL, ^ 1 72, Rem. 5. * In \ncomposition, irepi^es, ev^es; ctTTcJSos, \xe2\x82\xackSos\\ -jrepf^eTe, e\\-5<>T\xe2\x82\xac, ^118, Rem. 1. \n\'See ^ 176, 3. * ire^v and TebTjcrofjuu instead of e^tdijK and ^c^<rouai. \n\n\n\n* 175.] \n\n\n\nPARADIGMS OF VERBS IN -fJLl. \n\n\n\n215 \n\n\n\n\n\nMIDDLE. 1 \n\n\n\n\n2TA- to place. \n\n\neE- to puf . \n\n\nAO- to give. \n\n\nAEIK- to show. \n\n\n\n\n( i-crd-fjLt^y does \n\n\n^-id^e\'-yuTji\' \n\n\n\xe2\x82\xac-56-fir)y \n\n\n\n\n\n\nnot occur, but \n\n\n\xe2\x82\xac-^ou (from li^etro) \n\n\n6-5ou (from iioao) \n\n\n\n\n\n\ni-TTTa-fir^y \n\n\n\xc2\xab-^e-To \n\n\n\xe2\x82\xac-5o-TO \n\n\n\n\n\n\ni-vpid-firjy) \n\n\n^-^e-zie^o" \n\n\ni-S6-fiebov \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nc-^\xe2\x82\xac-(r,^ov \n\n\nf-So-<rboy \n\n\nwanting. \n\n\n\n\n\n\n^.^\xe2\x82\xac-<rdT7v \n\n\n4-S6-<TbTiy \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\ni-So-fifba \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n^-So-abf \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nt-bf-vro \n\n\ne-So-yro \n\n\n\n\n\n\n{(TT(i>\'fiat does not \n\n\nbw-fJUU^ \n\n\nOtt^UAi \n\n\n\n\n\n\noccur, but wplu- \n\n\n^ \n\n\nSep \n\n\n\n\n\n\nfuu, -p, irrax, \n\n\nJ&TJ-TOi \n\n\n5&>-TO* \n\n\n\n\n\n\netc) \n\n\nbd-fifboy \n\n^\xe2\x96\xa0<rboy \n\n^-aboy \n\nbdt-fjieba \n\nbrj-ab( \n\nbu-yrau \n\n\nS(i>-fieboy \n\nhw-ffboy \n\nSw-ffboy \n\nSu>-fi(ba \n\nSw-abe \n\niu-yrat \n\n\n\n\n\n\n{cyai-fxriy does not \n\n\nboi-fxr}y * \n\n\nSol-fxrjy ** \n\n\n\n\n\n\noccur, but xpial- \n\n\nbo7-o \n\n\nSo7-o \n\n\n\n\n\n\n/iTJf, -atO -(\xc2\xabT0, \n\n\nboiTO \n\n\n5or-TO \n\n\n\n\n\n\netc.) \n\n\nboi-fifbop \nboi-<Tboy \nbolabrjy \nbol-iJLfba \n\nbo7-<Tbf \n\n\nSol-/j.(boy \nSo7-<Tboy \nSol-ffb-rjy \niol-pifba \n\nSo7-<Tb\xe2\x82\xac \n\nSo7-yTO \n\n\n\n\n\n\n{ard-iTOf or <rr\xc2\xab \n\n\n_. , um bfffo)* \n\n\niov (from i6<ro) \' \n\n\n\n\n\n\ndoes not occur, \n\n\nbf-<rbw \n\n\nS6-ab(D \n\n\n\n\n\n\nbut TTpia-ao, or \n\n\nbf-abov \n\n\nS6-aboy \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\xe2\x96\xa0roia)) \n\n\nb(-<rbu)y \nbf-abe \n\nbf-trbaxray and \nbt\'ffbaty \n\n\nSo-ab\'uy \nh6-cbf \n\nS6-<rba)(Tay and \nS6-(rb<i}y \n\n\n\n\n\n\n{(rrd-trbcu) irpl<ur. \n{(Trd-fJifvos) irpla- \n\n\nb\xc2\xab-abai \n\n\nS6-erbau \n\n\n\n\n\n\nbt\'Htyoi, -71, -ov \n\n\nS6-fi\xe2\x82\xacyos, -7j, -oy \n\n\n\n\n\n\nfifyos \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n(rHi-ffofuu \n\n\nbii-ffofieu \n\n\nh<i>-aofiai \n\n\nSfi^OpLOl \n\n\n\n\ni\'<rrt)-<rdtir]v \n\n\n{4-bTj-Kd-firiy) \n\n\n(i-hw-Kd-irqv) \n\n\ni-Sfi^dfitfy \n\n\n\n\n\n\nInstead of these forms, the second Aor. Mid. is \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nused by the Attic writers, S 173, 2. \n\n\n\n\n\n\nf-crra-fiaiA T.\'J. R.2. \n\n\nT*\'- d^ \xe2\x82\xac < -fUU \n\n\nS4-6o-ucu \n\n\nSf-Sfiy-uat \ni-Se-Sely-firiy \n\n\n\n\ni-(rrd-iJLrjy, ^ 173, \n\n\ni-^f-bfi-firjy \n\n\ni-Sf\'SS-fjLTiy \n\n\n\n\nRem. 2. \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nwantinj;. \n\n\nwantint^. \n\n\nwanting. \n\n\nSIVE. 1 \n\n\n\n\nFut. 1. 1 crra-diitrofjuu | Te-^tro/jLau \' | So-^jo-o/jlcu 1 Seix-^o\'Ofiai 1 \n\n\n^ 21, 2. \' Also in composition, fv^wficu, -rj, -rircu, etc., kiro^ufxai, -^, -rjrcuj \n\n\netc., ^kSuimii, -(f, -wrat, etc., airoSufiaij -tp, -wrau, etc. " See ^ 176, 2. \'In \n\n\ncomposition. Kardbov, airSbov] ircplSou, a-rrSSov] Kardbca-^e, TreplSoa-^c] ^y^etr- \n\n\nd\xc2\xab, irp6So<Tbe : but iy^ov, dsdod ; irpoSov, 4ySov, ^ \\\\S, Rem. 1. \'" \xc2\xa7 154, 6, and \n\n\n^ 173, Kcm. 2. \n\n\n\n216 SUMMARY OF VERBS IN -fU. [H 176, 177. \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 176. Remarks on the Paradigms. \n\n1. The verbs St^voynot, tohe able; eTriVra^ot, to know, and xp^fiofuu, tohang^ \nhave a different accentuation from \'(a-rafiai, in the Pres. Subj. and Impf. Opt., \nnamely, Subj. Svycofiai, iiriaTcciiai, -rj, --qrai, -riabov, -Tja^e, -utrrai] Opt. Svycufir]y, \niiriaraifxr]}/, -aio, -airo, -aia^ovy -oua^e, -cuyro] so also oyal/xTiy, -ouo, -euro (\xc2\xa7 177, \n4), and iirpidfiiriu (\xc2\xa7 179, 6). \n\n2. The foi-ms of the Opt. Mid. Impf. and second Aor. in -oi, viz. tiJ^Z/it?*\', \nd-o/uTji y were preferred to those in -\xe2\x82\xact, viz. ribelfirjv, -^70, -tiTo, etc., biLfir\\v, -do^ \n\'\xe2\x82\xac7ro, etc. In compounds, the accent remains as in simples ; tlms. ivboiurtv \n{iv^eiu7]u), iy^o7o {iy^\xe2\x82\xac7o), etc.; 60 also in compounds of Soifirjv, e. g. SiaJoi\'uTjK, \ndiado7o, etc. \n\n3. On the abbreviated form of the Perf. and Plup. : e-o-Td-TOK, e-oro-uo\', \ne-o-Td-re, e-(rTd-(rt(j\'), see \xc2\xa7 193. \n\n4. Verbs in -v/xi, as has been seen, form the Subj. and Opt. like verbs in -w. \nStill, there are some examples where these modes follow the analogy of verbs \nin-/ii: Uttos fj-rj SiatTKeSavvvrai (instead of -utttoi), PI. Phaedon. 77, b. if^X^rrrf \nre Kal Treyvvro (from -viro, instead of -vojto), Ibid. 118, a. \n\n5. In the later ^vriters, e. g. Polybius, a Perf and Plup. are found with the \nTrans, meaning, Z Aaye p/acea, namely, etrrdKa, c(rrd[\xc2\xabc6iy. \n\nSUMMAET OF VeKBS IN -fil. \n\n1. Verbs in -fii which annex the Personal-endings immediately \n\nto the Stem-vowel. \n\n\xc2\xa7 177. (a) Verbs in -a (l-arrj-^i; 2TA-): \n\n1. Ki-)(p7]-ixi, to lend, to bcstoiv (XPA-), Inf. Kt)(paraiy Fut yprftruij \nAor. \xc2\xa3)(pyj(Ta. Mid. to borrow, Fut. )(pi^ofxai. (Aor. ixprjcrofirjv in \nthis sense is avoided by the Attic writers.) To the same stem \n\nbelong : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n2. XP\'h^ i^ ^s necessary, oportet (stem XPA- and XPE-), Subj. xfiV* I^- XPVi\'oi^ \nPart, (rb) XP\xc2\xab\'^\xc2\xbb\' (usually only Nom. and Ace); Impf. ixF^y, or xpV\' (with \nirregular accent), Opt. xp^^V (h*om XPE-) ; Fut. xp^trrcu in Soph, (but not \nXP^o-et), \n\nInf. XPVv, airoxprjv, in Eurip., by contraction from XP^^^*- \n\n3. arrSxpVi it suffices, sufficit; the following also arc formed regularly firom \nXPAn : a7roxpcD(rj(i/), Inf airoxpw] Part, avoxpus, -wca, -wy ; Impf awexpv ; Fut. \noTToxpTjo-ei ; Aor. airexpno\'^iy), etc. Mid. anoxpufjuu, to abuse, abutor, or amsumOy \nInf. onroxpTjo-i^ai, is inflected like xpo-opnu, \xc2\xa7 129, Rem. 2. \n\n4. ovLvrjfit (with Attic redupUcatiou instead of 6v6vr)fn), to ben- \n^fiy (\'ONA-) Inf. ovivavat; Lnpf Act. wanting, ci</\xc2\xbbe\\ow being \nused for it ; Fut. ovtJo-w ; Aor. wn^o-a, Lif \xc2\xab5n}o-<u (for it ovrjvai, like \no-njvat, in PL Rp. 600, d.). Mid. ovtVajucu, to get benefit, be beuf- \nfitted, Fut. ovYjcroixai; Aor. u)in]fjLt]v (^thvd^rjv later, but also in Eur. \nwvaa^e), --qao, -rp-o, etc., Lnp. 6\\n)ao, Part, onz/xcios (Hom.), Opt. \novaifxrjv, -ato, -airo (\xc2\xa7 176, 1), Inf ovao-^cu ; Aor. Pass. wv^Syp^ rarer \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 178.] \n\n\n\nSUMMARY OF VERBS IN -/Al. \n\n\n\n217 \n\n\n\ninstead of divqfirjv. The remaining forms are supplied by \n\n6. TrL-fx-7r\\.r)-fj.Ly tO Jill, (ELAA-) Inf. Trt/XTrXarat ; Impf. iTrL/XTrXrjv ; \n\nFut. TrAT/cro) ; Perf. iriirX-qKa ; Aor. iirX-qcra ; jNIid. to fiU for one\'s \n\nlelf TTLfiTrXafiat, Inf. 7rt/x7rXacr^(U ; Impf. eTnfXTrXdixrjv ] Aor. eTrXrja-a.- \n\n^jLTjv; Fut, TrXrjcroyiax; Perf. oVIid. or Pass. TrcVAiycr/Aat ; Aor. Pass. \n\n\xe2\x82\xacTrXrj(T^v (jt 131); Fut. Pass. TrXTja-S-qaofjuLL (^ 131); second Aor. \n\niTrXrjfirjVf Poet. Verb. Adj. ttXt^otcos. \n\nThe fi in the reduplication of this and the following verb is usually omitted \nin composition, when /* precedes the reduplication, e. g. ifiTrlirXjifiau, but iveirin- \nirKd^irjy. Contrary to this rule, however, forms with and without /x arc both \nused by the poets, according to the necessities of the verse. \n\n6. TTLfiTrprifiL, to burn, Trans,, in all respects like rrLinrXrjfXL : irp-j- \n<ra), i7rpr)(Ta, TriTrprqKO, 7rt7rprf(TfiaXf iTrpT^aSrjv, TrprjaSya-ofiaLf imrprp^opxu. \n\n7. TAH-MI, to endure, Pres. and Impf wanting (instead of \nthem vTrofievQ), av\xe2\x82\xac^OfxaL) ; Aor. izXtjVf (tXu),) rXairjv, tXtjSl, rXdis \n(rXflura) ; Fut rXi^o/xat ; Perf TcVXT^Ka. Verbal Adj. tXt/toV (Iu \nAttic prose this verb is rare.) \n\n8. 4>rj-fiCt to say (stem *A-), has the follo\\ving formation : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 178. \n\n\n\nPnsnit. A C T 1 V E . Imperfect. \\ \n\n\nIndi- S, I. \n\n\n^id\' \n\n\nIndi- ! S. 1. \n\n\nKifniy \n\n\ncativc i 2. \n\n\n\'h\' \n\n\ncative \n\n\n2. \n\n\nf<fnjs, usuallv ?<^T)(r3a \n\n\n\n\n3. \n\n\nipri<ri{y) \n\n\n\n\n3. \n\n\nHiprj [(\xc2\xa7116,2), \n\n\n\n\nD.2. \n\n\n(fk&Toy \n\n\n\n\nD.2. \n\n\ndtpOLTOV \n\n\n\n\n3. \n\n\n<pdT6y \n\n\n\n\n3. \n\n\ni<p6.Triy \n\n\n\n\nP. 1. \n\n\n<(>dfi\xc2\xaby \n\n\n\n\nP. 1. \n\n\n(4>dfjLty \n\n\n\n\n2. \n\n\ntp&Tt \n\n\n\n\n2, \n\n\n((pare \n\n\nSubj. \n\n\n3, \n\n\n<pCUTl{v) \n\n\n\n\n3. \n\n\nl<pdffav \n\n\n^f <^J\xc2\xbb <^P. tpTtroy, pwfjL\xc2\xaby, \n\n\nOpt. j tpcdrfy, <padr]i, <f>airi, ipalriroy \n\n\n\n\n^nrt, <pu<n(y) \n\n\nand <f>cuToy, ^ai^yxTji\' and \n\n\nImp. \n\n\n\xc2\xab^^ or <^t {<rvtii>o^i), <l>&Tw, \n\n\n\n\n^Kurriy, (pairj^ifv and <pa7- \n\n\n1 ^Tov, <p&T<t)Vy ^Tc, <;>4Ta>- \n\n\n\n\nHfv, <pairjT( and <(>curf, (pa7(y \n\n\n1 aav and ^Jjntiv \n\n\nFut. \n\n\n<p\'f}(TU \n\n\nInf. ipiivfu \n\n\nAor. \n\n\nl^<pr}aa. \n\n\nPart. (<^e(s, <^aa, <p<iy \n\n\n\n\nG, (pdin-os, ^({(TTjr) \n\n\n\n\n\n\nMIDDLE. \n\n\nPerf. Imp, ir*tK\xc2\xa3<r3cii (PI, Tim. 72, d.), let it be said. Impf. Ind. ttpcuno, Lvs. \n\n\nFr:iL,-m, 3, [X, Cv, 6, 1, 21, is a false reading] ; Inf. <f>aa^aiy Acsch, Pcrs. \n\n\n687, in chorus. l*art, <p<ifi(yoi (rare), ajjinniuy. \n\nVerbal adjective. ^arSs, tparfoT. \n\n\n\n\' In composition: iLyrlcpTj^i, <Tvfi<prifx.i, a.yri(pri<Tt(v). (rvfj.<p-ncri{y), Qtc, hut ayri\' \n^s (accent on ultimate), aufitprji, ami Subj. ayrKpu, ayri(pr}s, etc, \n\n19 \n\n\n\n218 DEPONENTS BELONGING TO VERBS IN -/Xt. [^ 179. \n\nKemark 1. In the second person (j>-^St both the accentuation and the Iota \nsubscript are contrary to all analogy. On the inclination of this verb in the \nPres. Ind. (except cp\'ps), see \xc2\xa7 33, a. \n\nEem. 2. This verb has two significations, (a) to sa^ in general, (h) to affirm^ \n(aio) to assert, to assure, etc. The Fut. ^/(ro, and Aor. c^tro, have only the \nlast signification. The Part. <pds is not used in Attic prose ; still, i^ PL Ale 2, \n139, c. fdvres. \n\nEem. 3. "With <f)7}iJ.i the verb ^/At, inqiuxm, may be compared, which, like \ninquam, is used in the spirited repetition of what had been said ; the imperfect \n^y^ ^ is used in the phrases ^y 5* iydo, said /, tJ 5* Ssy said he, to describe a con- \nversation. \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 179. The following Deponents also belong here. \n\n, 1 . aya/xat, to wonder, Impf. -^afXTrp/ ; Aor. rpfo^^rjv (^^yaa-dfirpf. \nEpic and Dem. 18, 204) ; Fut. dydaofjMi. Verbal Adj. dyourros. \n\n2. SvvafxaL, to be able, second Pers. 8vvao-ai [3i\'\xc2\xbbt; from the Ion. \n8weai, tragic and later, ^ 172, 2, (a)], Subj. Svvw/xot {k 176, 1), Imp. \nhvva(TO, Inf. hvvaa-^ai. Part. 8vva/xevos ; Impf. iSvvdfirjv and rjSwdfxrp^f \nsecond Pers. eSww (not ihvvaao, ^ 172, 2), Opt Swcu/it/v, Svvaio \n(^ 176, 1) ; Fut. Svvi^aojxaL \', Aor. i^vvrjSTp^, r^xnnq^rp/ and ihwaucrBTpf \n(not :78wao-^7;v), the last Ion. and in Xen. (Aug., k 120, Kem. \n1) ; Perf. ScSu\'viy/u-at. Verbal Adj. Swaros, aZ>/\xe2\x82\xac Jmd /?05\xc2\xabA/e. \n\n3. eTTto-ra/xat (like lora/u-ai), ?o knoio, (properly, to stand upon \nsomething, to be distinguished from i<f>CcrTafuu), second Pers. \n\n\'\xc2\xbb i-n-Lo-Taa-aL (cTrtora seldom and only Poet.), Subj. CTruTTWfjLOU (II 176, \n1), Imp. hriara) [seldom and only in the poets and later \\niters, \niTTLCTTaa-o, ^ 172, 2 (b)] ; Impf. rprurraLiJirjr, jpricrrto [seldom and \nonly in the poets and later writers, rpriaraa-o, k 172, 2 (b)]. Opt \nCTrto-rat/Aryv, iirLaraLO (^ 176, 1) ; Fut. cttuttt/o-o/xxu ; Aoi. rprumrj^\'. \n(Aug, \xc2\xa7 126, 3.) Verbal Adj. hrurrrrro^. \n\n4. \xe2\x82\xacpa/xat, to love (in the Pres. and Impf. only jwetic, in prose \nipdo) is used instead of it) ; Aor. rjpda^jv, I loved; Fut ipaaStf- \no-o/xai, I shall love. [Pass, cpw/xat (from Ipdu)), I sJiall be lot\'ed.] \nVerbal Adj. cpaoros. \n\nb. Kpe/xa/^at, to hang, be suspended, pendeo^ Subj. Kpifiwfuu \n(^ 176, 1), Part. Kpc/xa/xcvos ; Impf iKpcfidfjirp^, Ojit Kp\xe2\x82\xacfiaifirfVy -cuo, \n-aiTo Q 176, 1), (Arist. Vesp. 298, Kpe^to-^c, comp. fidpvofuu, \n$ 230, and ixefxvoLfxrjVy $ 154, 8); Aor. iKpcfida-Siiv ; Fut Piiss \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 180.] \n\n\n\nVERBS IN \'flU \n\n\n\n21^ \n\n\n\nKpefiacrSi^ofjuou, I shall be hung ; Fut. Mid. Kpefjuja-o/xcU) pendeho \nI slhoU hang. \n\n6. TrpuurSoL, to buy, iirpidfjLrjv, second Pers. cTrptiu) (an Aor, IVIid., \nand found only in this tense, which the Attic writers employ \ninstead of the Aor. of toveo/xot, viz. iiinnrjcrdfx.rjvy wliich is not used \nby them, ^ 122, 4), Subj. Trpiw/Aat (^ 176, 1); Opt /rpiaijxrjVy -cuo, \n-aiTo (^ 176, 1); Imp. Trpwo; Part. Trpta/xcvos. \n\n\n\n^ 180. (b) Verbs i?i -c (TC-Sr)-p.i, 0E-) \n\n*I-rj-p,L (stem *E-), to setid. INIany fonns of this vierb are foimd \nonly in composition. \n\n\n\nACTIVE. \n\n\n\nPres. \n\n\n\nImpf. \n\n\n\nPcrf. \nAor. II. \n\n\n\nInd. Trj^i, Ttjs, %r)<Ti{v) ; Icto*\'; Tc/ucv, Terc, la<Ti{v) \\i(i<Ti{v)\\f \n\nSubj. t\'ctf, l^Sy i^\\ irjroy] iufitv, IrfTf, iu<Ti[v) \\ oufnOl), iupi^s, &^(^, \n\netc. \nImp. T\xc2\xabj, ItrWf etc. \xe2\x80\x94 Inf. Uyat. \xe2\x80\x94 Part. Ids, U7ffa, Uv. \n\n\n\nInd. Xovy (from \'lEfl), iupiovy (rarer ii^lovy, rare Uiy, wpoUiy, i)<pUw), \nIf IS, 1(1, iuplfi (rarer i}<pi(i)] Xtroy, Ur-ny; T</xci\', trr*, Tt<ra*\', \ni/pUaay (rarer ri<pU(r(iy). \n\nOpt. Ulrjy (second Pers. PI. iupioirt, Plat.j third Pers. PI. iupiouy, \nX. H. 6. 4, 3). \n\n\n\n\xc2\xabr*fa. \xe2\x80\x94 Plup \xc2\xabTjcftv. \xe2\x80\x94 Fut. V\xc2\xab. \xe2\x80\x94 Aor. I. ^tra (^ 173, 2). \n\nInd. Sing, is supplied by Aor. I. (^ 173, 2); Dual (Troy, iuptTroy, \n\nuTT}y ; I\'lur. \xc2\xabtfi(y, Ka^tifify, flrf, iwiirt, taav, commonly \n\n(Iffav, iuptiaay. \nSubj. w, ^s, iuf>u>, a(p^s, etc. \nOpt. fXrfy, (Xrfs, drj ; (troy, iupdroy, tXrriv] (Tfjify, iupd/jifv, drf, a<p(7- \n\nrt, (Uy, it.tpfUy, \nImp. ts, &<p(s, (Tw ; (Toy, iptrov, (ruy\\ trt, &<p(rf, truaav and fvruiv. \nInf. tlyau, wipiiycu. \xe2\x80\x94 P. rff, (lea, a<f>(7<ra, \xc2\xaby, iupty. Gen. tyros, (\'l(rrii, \n\ninptyros. \n\n\n\nRemark 1. On the Aug. of iuplrifu, see ^ 126, 3. \n\nRem. 2. The form of the Impf Ttjv is very doubtful, and the forms tr}s, T?) \narc very rare. The form Tciv has the ending of the Plup., like the Impf of \xe2\x82\xac/^<, \nto go; it is Att. and lon^ a secondary form of tow. \n\n\n\n220 \n\n\n\nVERBS IN -flL. \n\n\n\n[M81 \n\n\n\nMIDDLE. \n\n\n\nPres. \n\n\n\nImpf. \n\n\n\nAor. n. \n\n\n\nInd. \'/e^ot, \'iecrai, \'ierai, etc.\xe2\x80\x94 Subj. tw^oi, a<piu^i(u, i^, &4pt^y etc. \nImp. \'le<ro, or \'lov. \xe2\x80\x94 Inf. iW^at. \xe2\x80\x94 Part. Ufievos, -77, -oy. \n\n\n\nUixfiv, Uffo, etc. \xe2\x80\x94 Opt. Ulfirjv, Att. iolfivv, loioy a/ptotoy etc. \n\n\n\nInd. \xe2\x82\xac[fi7iv \n\nefffOy acpelao \nttro, a<pe7T0 \nt\'ifie^a, etc. \n\n\n\nSubj. S>ficu, acpwfjuu, ^, cupf, ^tox, cuprirou \nOpt. trpooifjL-qVy -o7o, -oiTo, -oifjueda, -ola^f, \n\n-oivro {irpoelTO, irpofTa^f, irpofivTO \n\nare rarer forms) \nImp. oZ (cu/xjG, irpooD), second Pers. PI. \n\nfffbf {&(pf(r^\xe2\x82\xac, irp6ea^\xe2\x82\xac), fcrbw, etc.). \nInf. tVd^cu. -T" Part, f^tyos, -77, -ov. . \n\n\n\nPerf. efyttot, j\xc2\xab\xe2\x82\xac(^er/xot ; Inf ^Xff^ai, fif^\xe2\x82\xac7<T^at. \xe2\x80\x94 Plup. flfiriw, ftao, cu^cmto, etc, \n\xe2\x80\x94 Fut. Ifiaofiai. \xe2\x80\x94 Aor. I. rjKdfirjv (rare, \xc2\xa7 173, 2). \n\n\n\nPASSIVE \n\n\n\nA. I. e\'l^v, P. \xe2\x82\xac&f/j/at, etc. \xe2\x80\x94 Fut. k^aoym. \xe2\x80\x94 Verb. Adj. kr6st trios (iuiprros). \n\n\n\nKem. 3. Besides the two verbs tI^/jli and Ttj^, only the following dialectic \nverbs belong here, viz., \'AH-MI, AI-AH-MI (AE), (though SiS(aai{y), from the \nlast is found in X.) ; S/^Tj^ot and AIH-MI. \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 181. (c) Verbs in -i, onli/ cT/xi (\'!)\xc2\xbb ^o go. \n\nPreliminary Kemark. The verbs cT/xi, to ^, and tl/ii, to beware pre- \nsented together (though the last, on account of its stem \'E2, does not belong \nhere), in order to exhibit to the eye the agreement and disagreement of the two \nverbs in their formation. \n\n\n\n\n\nPRESENT. \n\n\n\n\nInd. S. 1. \n\n\nelfil, to be \n\n\nSubj. S \n\n\nInd.l. \n\n\ncT/iu, to go \n\n\nSubj. Xm \n\n\n2. \n\n\nel \n\n\nV \n\n\n2. \n\n\neT \n\n\nXvi \n\n\n3. \n\n\niarl{y) \n\n\nI \n\n\n3. \n\n\ner\xc2\xabn(v) \n\n\n^ \n\n\nD. 2. \n\n\niarSv \n\n\nrjTov \n\n\nD.2. \n\n\nXtov \n\n\nXrfTov \n\n\n3. \n\n\niarrSv \n\n\n^TOV \n\n\n3. \n\n\nirov \n\n\nXrfTov \n\n\nP. 1. \n\n\ni<Tfx4u \n\n\ndifxev \n\n\nP. 1. \n\n\ntfjify \n\n\nXttfify \n\n\n2. \n\n\neVre \n\n\n^T, \n\n\n2. \n\n\nXt\xe2\x82\xac \n\n\nttfTt \n\n\n3. \n\n\nei(Ti{v) \n\n\n\xc2\xa3<n(v) \n\n\n3. \nImp. \n\n\niaffi{y) \n\n\nI\xc2\xabMn(r) \n\n\nImp. S. 2. \n\n\nXtrSri \n\n\nInf. elj/ou \n\n\nC^(, irpSsi^i \n\n\nInf. I4ptu \n\n\n3. \n\n\n\xe2\x82\xac(TT(a \n\n\n\n\n\n\n(sold. irp6sfi) \n\n\n\n\nD. 2. \n\n\neffTov \n\n\nPart. &v, oZaa, \n\n\n3. \n\n\nfrotf \n\n\nPart. Wr, iov- \n\n\n3. \n\n\ne<TT(i)V \n\n\ntv \n\n\nD.2. \n\n\nIrovy irp6stTOv \n\n\n(roy liv \n\n\nP. 2. \n\n\nearre \n\n\nG. ovTos, o{i(rr]s \n\n\n3. \n\n\nXruv \n\n\nGen. l&tnosy \n\n\n3. \n\n\n^ffTccffav \n\n\n(irapwy, irapov- \n\n\nP. 2. \n\n\nTt\xe2\x82\xac, irpostTf \n\n\nloXHTt^S. \n\n\n\n\n(rare eo-Tooz/; \n\n\n(Ta, Trap6v, 3. \n\n\nXroiffay^ or \n\n\n(\xe2\x96\xa0rapuiiv, iropi- \n\n\n\n\n&vra)v, Plat. \n\n\nG. irapSyros) \n\n\nlovTotv {Xtoiv \n\n\novcoy irapiSy, \n\n\n\n\nLegg.879,b.) \n\n\n\n\nAesch.E.32.) \n\n\nG. TO^KTOS). \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 181.] \n\n\n\nVERBS IN \n\n\n\n-/At. \n\n\n\n221 \n\n\n\nIMPERFECT. \n\n\n\nInd. \n\n\n\nS. 1. \n\n\nV, Ivxis \n\n\n2. \n\n\n^<rS^a (^ 116, 2) \n\n\n3. \n\n\n^u (from ^e-v) \n\n\nD.2. \n\n\n^(TTOv (-fnov) \n\n\n3. \n\n\nfjffrrjv {ijrrjy) \n\n\nP. 1. \n\n\n9i<rfi\xe2\x82\xacy \n\n\n2. \n\n\n^T\xe2\x82\xac {^(TTC) \n\n\n3. \n\n\n\xe2\x80\xa2jjcoy \n\n\n\nOpt. \n\n\n\neTrji\' \n\n\n\nInd. \n\n\n\nS. 1. \n\n\n\n^eiy or po, / leent \n\xe2\x96\xa0ffeis and \xe2\x96\xa0^eia^a \n\n\n\n??6i \n\n\n\n\xe2\x96\xa0pfiTovy us\'ly ^To\xc2\xbb\' \npefnji\', " pTTji/ \nrjeiufy, *\' ^M^ \n77\xe2\x82\xaciT\xe2\x82\xac, pre \n\nfiiffav {^aav poci.l \n\n\n\nOpt. \n\n\n\nXoifii or \n\ntots \nXoi \n\nXOITOV \n\nlolr-qv \ntoiuev \ntone \n\n\n\nfivs 2. \n\ncfTj 3. \n\n(\xe2\x80\xa2irjToy D. 2. \n\neiirrrjy 3. \n\nefTj/ici/ (seldom cTjue;/) P. 1. \n\nefiTTc (seld. poet, eire) 2. \n\nfX-qtrav and e7ev 3. _ \n\nPut. ^(TOfuu, IshaUlm, fc-p, or ?<r\xe2\x82\xac<, loTaz, etc. \xe2\x80\x94 Opt. (ffoi/njy. \xe2\x80\x94 Inf. faeff^ai \n\xe2\x80\x94 Part. iaSixevos. \xe2\x80\x94 Verbal Adj. i(rr(oy, avyfarioy. \n\nMiddle Form : Pres. Ufiait 1\xc2\xabreu or trj, Urcu, etc., Imp. U<roj Inf. Uff^at, \nPart. Ufifyos: the Impf. Iffj-rfy, Uao, etc., sifrnifying to hasten, ou{j:lit \npnjhahly to be written with the rou<xh breathing, whicli is strongly \nconfirmed by the manuscripts, aad to be referred to Ttj/h. \xe2\x80\x94 Verbal Adj. \nIrSt, iTfoy, rarer Ir-nrfoy. \n\n\n\nRemark 1. On the inclination of the Ind. of e</i/\xc2\xbb \'o ^ (except the second \n\nPer-, tl). ^ci \'^^ .33 fa). Tt \' \' Mt is on the preposition, as far back \n\nas tho ^\'tii\xc2\xabral nilr> uf . \xe2\x96\xa0 . g. iropfj/Lii, irapd, irdpccrrily), etc. \n\nImp. frdpiadi, ^vyia^i] but iraf)7Jv on account of the temporal augment, xapftrrcu \non account of the omission of e (wapffffTcu), irapfTycu like infinitives with the \nending -yat, irapu^ -pi, -p, etc., iraptlrf^ irapftfy, on account of the contraction; \nthe a<<eiiti! \'" the Part, in compound words should he particularly noted, \n\ne. g. irapu^v, ~ , i, itap6yy Gcu. irap6y70i (so also irapiuv. Gen. \xe2\x96\xa0woLpioyros). \n\nRem. 2. The compounds of fT/u, to go, follow the same rules as those of \nf i\'/J, to be ; hence several fonns of these two verbs are the same in compounds, \nc. tr. iripufu, irdpfi, and irdpfiffi{y) (the last being third Pers. Sing, of eZ/ii and \nthird Pers. PI. of tlfd) ; but Inf. wapitycUy Part, -wapiwy.\' \n\nRem. 3. The form \xc2\xab?\xc2\xab v, esto, be it so! good! shortened from efp and strcngth- \neind by a !\xc2\xbb, must \' \' > \' \' om thr \' 1 form \xc2\xabhy instead of \n\ntt-rrap of the third 1 . \xe2\x80\x94 A si mi, yet critically to be \n\nted, of the third Pers. Juip. firw instead of co-tcu, is found once in PI. Rp. \n;;i.l. c, with the varking reading (a-ru. \xe2\x80\x94 The form of the fii\'st Pers. Impf. is \noften ^, among the Attic poets, and sometimes also in Plato ; the form ^/xtjv is \nT 7. 34, X. Cy. 6. 1, 9). \xe2\x80\x94 The form of the \' T^ rs. Impf ^s is \n\nuntly in the later writers, and rarely in 1\\ os of the Attic \n\nj>oets. \xe2\x80\x94 The Dual forms with <r are j)rcfcrred to those without <r; on the con- \ntrary, JfTf is preferred to ^m (Aristoph.). \n\nRem. 4. The form of the third Pers. ?^In" Tmpf. ^(ly instead of pti, from \n\xc2\xab7/Lu, sometimes occurs, even before coi -, Ar. Plut. 696. irporptiy (in \n\n^\' <) ; PI. Crit. p. 114. d. (in the best .>i^^.j ; ^uy, PI. Crit. 117, e.\' (in the \n\nSS.) ; irpoTjW, PI. Tim. 43, 6 ; ky^tiy, ib. 60, *c ; ixT^cij/, ib. 76, b. \n\nRem. 5. The Ind. Pres. of cTau, to go, has regularly in the Attic prose- \nwriters the meaning of the Fnt. I shall or trill go or come : hence the Pres. is \nsupplied by l^pxofuu (^ 167, 2) ; the Tjif. and Part, have likewise a Pres. and \nFat. meaning. \n\n\n\n19* \n\n\n\n222 \n\n\n\nVERBS IN -/U. \n\n\n\n\'i 182. \n\n\n\nII. Verbs in -fit which annex the Syllable yyv or yO to the \nStem-TOwel and append to this the Personal-endings. \n\n^ 182. Formation of the Tenses of Verbs whose Stem \nends with a, c, o, or with a Consonant. \n\nA. Verbs whose Stem ends with a, e, or o. \n\n\n\nVoice. \n\n\nTenses. \n\n\na. Stem in a. \n\n\nb. Stem in e. \n\n\nc. Stem in o (\xe2\x80\xa2). \n\n\nAct. \n\n\nPres. \n\n\n(TKeSd-yyv\'fu \' \n\n\nKop4-yyO-fii \' \n\n\n(rrpiifvvv-fii * \n\n\n\n\nImpf. \n\n\ni-CTKeSd-vvv-y \' \n\n\ni-Kop4-yvv-y \' \n\n\ni-arpd-yyv-y \' \n\n\n\n\nPerf. \n\n\n^-(T/ceSa-KO \n\n\nAt\xe2\x82\xac-KO/?e-*ca \n\n\nt-(rTp<D-Ka \n\n\n\n\nPlup. \n\n\ni-ffKeSa-Keiy \n\n\ni-K6-/iope-/c\xe2\x82\xacti\' \n\n\ni-<TTpU-KflV \n\n\n\n\nPut. \n\n\nAtt. or/ceSft), -OS, -a \n\n\nKope-ao), \n\nAtt. /fOpcD, -\xe2\x82\xaci$, -\xe2\x82\xact \n\n\ncrpdt-cu \n\n\n\n\nAor. \nPres. \n\n\ni-o-KeSd-cra \n\n\ni-K6pi-aa \n\n\n(t-arptc-aa \n\n\nMid. \n\n\n(TKeSd-yyv-fiai \n\n\nKop4-yyv-fuu \n\n\nCrpof-yyv-fUU \n\n\n\n\nImpf. \n\n\ni-CTKeSa-yyv-firjy \n\n\n6-Kopf-yyv-fj.Tjv \n\n\n4-<JTp<a-vyv-firjy \n\n\n\n\nPerf. \n\n\ni-ffKfSa-cr-fxai \n\n\nKe-K6pf-(T-fUU \n\n\ni-iTTpto-yiax \n\n\n\n\nPlup. \n\n\ni-(rKeSd-<T-/j.r]y \n\n\ni-Kt-Kopf-<r-fn]v \n\n\ni-iTTpw-nfjv \n\n\n\n\nPut. \n\n\n\n\nKope-ff-Ofiau \n\n\n\n\n\n\nAor. \n\n\n\n\ni-Kop\xe2\x82\xac-(r-dfir]y \n\n\n\n\n\n\nr. Pf. \n\nAor. \n\n\n\n\nKf-Hop(-<r-Ofiai \n\n\n\n\nPass. \n\n\ni-(rKiSd-(r-^y \n\n\ni-Kopi-a-^y \n\n\n4-<rrpdt-^v \n\n\n\n\nPut. \n\n\n(rKiia-(T-^-f}(roficu \n\n\nKopf-a-^orofjLcu \n\n\ntrrpet-^^oficu \n\n\nVerbal Adj. \n\n\n(T/ceSa-a-TfJs \n\n\nKopt-ff-rSs \n\n\nirrp\xc2\xabf-T6s \n\n\n\n\n(r/ceSa-c-Teos \n\n\nK0p(\'<T-T(05 \n\n- Kopf-yvvo), f-Kopt-yy \n\n\nvrpm^toi. \nvoy \xe2\x80\x94 <rrp\xc2\xabt-yv(mf i- \n\n\n* And (TKeSa \n\n\n\xe2\x80\xa2yyucOf iffK^hd-vvvov \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n\n(TTpw-vvvov (u a \n\n\nIways short). \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nB. Verbs whose Stem ends with a Consonant. \n\n\n\nPres. \n\n\n6\\-\\v-fj.i,^ perdo, \n\n\noK-\\v-fjLai, pcrco. \n\n\n6pi-yv-fii \' \n\n\nSfi-yv-fuu \n\n\nImpf. \n\n\n&X-\\v-y * \n\n\nwX-Xv-ixrjy \n\n\nHifi-yv-y \' \n\n\nwfi-yv-fiiiy \n\n\nPerf. I. \n\n\no\\-c6\\\xe2\x82\xac-Ka (\'OAEn), perdidi, \n\n\nOfjL\'UfjLO-Ka \n\n\ni/t-tifjLo-fuu \n\n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 124, 2. \n\n\n(\'OMOn) \n\n\n\n\nPerf, II. \n\n\nS\\-b)\\-a, perii, \n\n\n^ 124, 2. \n\n\n\n\nEJ\'^P-i \n\n\n6\\-Q}\\4-K\xe2\x82\xaciv, perdideram, \n\n\n0fl\'0fJL6-KCiy \n\n\nifi-tefti-fiiiv \n\n\nPlup. II. \n\n\n6\\-(!>\\-eiv, perieram, \n\n\n\n\n\n\nPut. \n\n\n6\\-S), -CIS, -it \n\n\no\\-ovfxai, -6* \n\n\nofi-ovfjueUt \xe2\x80\xa2** \n\n\n\n\nAor. I. \n\n\n&Xe-a-a \n\n\nA. II. u\\-6u.-nv \n\n\nSsfjM-ffa \n\n\nufu>-<rdfjiiiv \n\n\n\n\n\n\nA. I. P. icfii-ff-. \n\n\nbrfv (ct oeui^y) \n\n\n\n\n\n\nKv-ov \xe2\x80\x94 ofjivv-u, L \n\n\nF. I. P. OfUMT-Si \n\nL>^in\xc2\xbb-oy (always \n\n\n\n\n1 \n\n\nAnd oWv-co, &X \n\n\n\nRemark. "OWvfii comes by assimilation from 6\\-yvfju (\xc2\xa718, Rem.). For an \nexample of a stem-ending with a mute, see itlKyvfu above, under the para- \ndigms (\xc2\xa7 175). The Part. Perf. Mid. or Pass, of Sfxyvfu is ofutfuxTfifros. The \nremaining forms of the Perf. and Plup. commonly omit the a among the Attic \nwriters, e. g. 6fid>ixoTai, ofiwfioTo. \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 183.] SUMMARY OF SOME VERBS IN -/Xl. 223 \n\nSummary of the Verbs belonging here. \n\nThe Stem ends, \nA. In a Vowel and assumes -vvO, \n\n\xc2\xa7 183. (a) Verbs whose Stem ends m a. \n\n1. K\xe2\x82\xacpd-vvv-fiL (poetic secondary^ fonn Ktpvatu, KLpvrjixL] Epic and \npoet. Kcpcicj), to mix, Fut. Kcpao-w, Att Kcpoi; Aor. cK^oo-a; Perf. \nKCKpaKa ; IMid. to mix for one\'s self, Aor. iKepacrdfirjv ; Perf. Mid. \nor Pass. K\xe2\x82\xacKpafxcu ^KiKipaxTpJu^ Anacr. 29, 13 ; Illf". KeKepaxr^ai, Luc. \nDial. Meretr. 4, 4) ; Aor. Pass. iKpdSrjv, Att also iKepda-Srp^ \n(Metathesis, $ 156, Rem.). \n\n2. Kp\xe2\x82\xacfid-vvv-pLLy to iuingf Fut. Kpejxacroi, Att. KpefiCj ; Aor. cKpe/xa- \n<ra ; Mid. or Pass. Kpc/xcwaaJ/xcu, ?o /da;<j^ o?t\xe2\x82\xac\'5 ^e^ or ic /iw/i^" (but \nKpcfjMfuuj to hang, M79, 5) ; (Perf. Mid. or Pass. KiKpiixapuan iu \nlater writers;) Fut Pass, fcpc/xour^iycro/tai ; Aor. iKpe^da^TjVf I teas \nhung, or I hung. \n\n3. irerd-yvv-fxt, to spread out, to open, Fut 7reTacra>, Att. TTCToi; \nAor. cTTcrtura (Perf Act TrcTrcVaKo, Diod.) ; Perf Mid. or Pass. \nvcTrrdfjuu (^ 155, 2) (TrcTrcTcur/Aoi, nou- Attic and Luc.) ; Aor. Pass. \n\nCTTCTCUT\'^Tyr. \n\n4. o\'K\xe2\x82\xac8a-vrv-/i.t, to scatter, Fut o-Kc&to-tu, Att. o-icc&x) ; Aor. co-kc* \n8<(ra; Perf Mid. or Pass. iaKiSaafiai; Aor. Pass. co-KcSaa^v. \n\n^ 184. (1)) Verbs whose Stem ends in c. \n\nPsELiMiNART Kemark. Tlic vcrbs tyyvfitf fffityrvfu, and also (tl^yvv/u- \n(^ 186), do not properly belong here, since their stem oripinally ended in or, \'E2- \n(comp. ves-tire), 2BE2- (comp. Ii<r0\xc2\xabr-ros), Zn3-(comp. (oKr-r-fip, (uxr-rpov, ^6<t- \nT17J, (axr-rit) ; but by the omission of the <r, they become analogous to verbs in \n-t and -0. \n\n1. \xe2\x82\xac-vvv-fjLLy to clothe, in prose dfi<f>L\xe2\x82\xacwvixLy Impf dix<f>uwvv with- \nout Aug.; Fut a/ufHiaruiy Att dfx<f>iC}; Aor. ly/i^uo-a; Perf Act \nwanting ; Perf Mid. or Pass. rifji<f>U(Tfjuu, ^/x<^i\'co-at, rjfX(f>uaTaL, etc., \nInf r}fi(i>ua&aL ] Fut Mid afi<fiU(TOfxai. (Aug. ^^ 126, 3. and 230.) \nThe vowel of the Prep, is not elided in the Common language, \nhence also l-mlacuT^aL, X. Cy. 6. 4, 6. \n\n2. ^c-n^-/xt, to boil. Trans., Fut. ^cVw ; Aor. e^co-a ; Perf Mid. \nor Pass. \xe2\x82\xacli(rpxu; Aor. Pass. l^ta-Srjv. \xe2\x80\x94 (^eto, on the contrary, is \nusually intransitive). \n\n\n\n^524 SUMMARY OF SOME VERBS IN ^l. [H 185-187 \n\n3. Kopi-wv-iJii, to satiate, Fut. Kopecrw, Att. Kopoi; Aor. c/copeo-ai \nAor. Mid. eKopao-dixrjv; Perf. Mid. or Pass. KeKop^afiai; Aor. Pass \niKopiaS^rjv, \n\n4. o-^e-wv-fXL, to extinguish, Put. cr^eVw ; first Aor. l<T^wa^ I \nextinguished; second Aor. ta-prjv, I ceased to burn; Perf. (a-^rjKo, \nIhavs ceased to burn. \xe2\x80\x94 Mid. crj^iwvfxai, to cease to burn, intrans. \nPut. cr/S-^o-o/xai ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, ea/Sea-fixiL ; Aor. Pass. cVySc\'cr- \nSr]v; Fut. Pass. a-pea-^-^crofiaL. No other verb in -wfn has a \nsecond Aor. Act. (^ 191, 2). \n\n5. a-Topi-wv-p,L, to spread out (shortened form oTopn}//.t, Poet, \nand X. Cy. 8. 8, 16), Fut. ctto/dcW, Att. a-TopCj; Aor. corrdpccra; \nMid. to spread out for one\'s self. The other tenses are formed \nfrom o-TpwyyvfiL; ioTpwa-dixrjV ; earptofjiaL, la^puiSrjVy arporro^ (non- \nAtt. ia-Topeo-fJiaL, kcrropia-^rjVy and iarop-qS^rjv) . See \xc2\xa7 182. \n\n\xc2\xa7 185. (c) Verbs whose Stem ends in i. \n\nri-vpv-fii (TI-), to pay, to expiate, Mid. ri-wv-nm, to get pay, to punish, to avenge^ \nsecondary Epic form of tiVw and riuoficu. \xe2\x80\x94 In Attic poetry, the Mid. is often \n\nfound, and with one v, rfyvfiai. \n\n\xc2\xa7 186. (d) Verbs in o, with the o lengthened into ta. \n\n1. ^(o-wv-fiij to gird, Fut. ^u>croj ; Perf c^wko, Paus. ; Aor. e^axm ; \nMid. to gird one\'s self, Aor. Mid. c^oxra/xT/v ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. \ni.t,Qicrp.ai {k 131). \n\n2. p(a-vvv-p.ij to strengthen, Fut. pdxrw; Aor. cppuxra; Perf Mid. \nor Pass. eppoi[xaLy Imp. ^piocro, vale, fareiceU, Lif. Ippuxi^tu ; Aor. \nPass. ippwaSrjv (^ 131); Fut. Pass. fHjxrS-qaopxu. \n\n3. arpoi-wv-fjiL 182), to spread out, Fut. arpuxTO); Aor. ejTpii>- \na-a, etc. See aTopeyirv-jXL (^ 184, 5). \n\n4. \xe2\x96\xa0xpw-wv-p.L, to color, Fut. xp<^o"w ; Aor. txp<o(ra ; Perf Mid. of \nPass. Kexp(acrfjiai ; Aor. Pass. ixpwaSrjv. \n\nB. Verbs whose Stem 3nds in a Consonant and assumes -yv. \n\n1 187. (a) In a Mute. \n\n1. ay-vv- ixL, to break, Fut. diio; Aor. cola, Inf d^ai (Part. Lys. \n\n100, 5. Karea^avTcs with the Aug.) ; second Perf cdya, I am \n\nbroken; Mid. to break for one\'s self Aor. ia^apirjv; Aor. Pass. \niayrjv (Aug., ^ 122,4). \n\n\n\n( 187.] SUMMARY OF SOME VERBS IN -fU. 226 \n\n2. 8\xe2\x82\xacLK\'VV\' fiL, see \xc2\xa7 175. \n\n3. \xe2\x82\xacLpy-vv-fiL (or \xe2\x82\xacLpy(j}), to shut in, Fut. ctp^o); Aor. clp^a, In\xc2\xa3 \nctplat, Part. Ip^as (PI. Polit. 285, b.), v\xe2\x82\xacpUp$avT\xe2\x82\xac^ (Th. 5, 11), \n^vcp^avTos (PI. Rp. 5. 461, b), Siibj. Kcu9etp^9 (\\vith the variation \nKa^ep$rj<;), PL Gorg. 461, d; Aor. Pass. \xe2\x82\xacrp;(^v; Perf. elpy/xcu, \n( But \xe2\x82\xac(/>ya), \xe2\x82\xacLp$ui, cTp^o, \xe2\x82\xacLp)(&r]Vj to shut out, etc.) \n\n4. ^\xe2\x82\xacT^-n}-/>ti, to Join together, Fut. ^ev^; Aor. t^cv^a; Mid. ^o \nyom to Of for OTie\'s self, Fut. ^ev^ofxai ; Aor. i^cv^dp-rpf ; Perf. Mid. \nor Pass l^c/xy/xou ; Aor. Pass, c^cv^-^, and more frequently \n\n5. fjuy-vv\'fjLL, to mix (fxfayoi, secondary form), Fut. /w.ti^a); Aor. \nc/xl^a, /xt^at; Perf /xcV^X^ (Folyb.) ; Perf Mid. or Pass, /xc/xty/xat, \nfjL\xe2\x82\xacfU)(3aL; Aor. Pass. ifxi^Sriv, and c/uyj/v; Fut. Pass. p.Lx^i)(Tojxxu\\ \nFut. Perf p.ip.i^opM.1. \n\n6. oly-^a)-/A^ usually as a compound: (Tlie Attic use of the \nform olyvvpn. is not certain) avoiyvipny StxyiyvvfiL (but instead, \nai/oiyco, 8to4yu>, are more frequently used in the Pres. and dv\'eoryov \nalways in the Impf), to open, Fut. dvoL$w\', Aor. dvew^a, dvot^at (in \nX. Hell. T^voLyov, T^vot^a, signifying to jnit to sea, to iveigh anc/ior) ; \nfirst Perf aviutxch I have opened; second Perf aviiitya, I stand \nopen, instead of which Att. aviwy fim; Impf Mid. av\xe2\x82\xac(iry6fxrjv ] Aor. \nPass. av\xe2\x82\xactox;^r]v, droi;(^7/i\'at. (Aug. { 122, 6.) Verb. Adj. avoLKrios. \n\n7. oftopy-vv-jxi, to wipe 0^ Fut. d/xop^w; Aor. wfxop^a] Mid. to \nwipe off from one\'s self; Fut oixop^opxu ; Aor. wp.op$dp.rjv ; Aor. \n\nPass. o}fJMp)(Sr]V. \n\nI 8. irrjy-vv-ixiy to fix, fasten, freeze, Fut. tttJ^w; Aor. hr^ia.; first \nPerf TTCTT-rjxa, I have fastened ; second Perf irtrrrjya, I standfast, \nam frozen ; Mid. in^r/vx\'fiai, I stick fast ; Perf TriTnjyfxaL, I stand \nfast ; Aor. Pass, iirdyrjv (more seldom \xe2\x82\xacin^x.&Tjv) ; second Fut. \nPass. Trayiyo-o/xai. Verbal Adj. TrrjKTO^. \n\n9. prjy-vv\'fUf to Tend, Fut. prj^; Aor. tpprj^a; second Perf \ni^pujya, I am rent (^ 140, Rem. 3); Aor. Mid. ippTjidfxrjv ; Aor. \nPass, ippdyyjv {ipp\'^X\'^^ rare) ; second Fut. payT^cro/xai. \n\n10. <f>pdyvv-fXL (commonly <f>pd(Tau}, ^pdma, k 143, 1), to break, \nImpf t>pdyvC-v (Thuc. 7, 74. S. Ant. 241); Fut. </)pd^a;; Aor. \n\xe2\x82\xacff>pa$a\', Perf Mid. or Pass. Trt^pay/xat ; Aor. Pass. \xe2\x82\xac(f>pdx^rjf \n(i<t>pa.yrfv first used among the later writers). \n\n\n\n226 VERBS. \xe2\x80\x94 icet/Attt AxsD rjfUU, [\xc2\xa7H88, 189 \n\n5 188. (b) Verbs whose Stem ends in a Liquid. \n\n1. &p\'yv-fjLai (Epic and also in Plato), to take, obtain, secondary form of aipc \n(lai, and used only in particular phrases, to obtain, to acquire, namely, a reward, \nspoils, etc. Impf. ^pviJ/iTji/. The remaining forms come from a^pofuu. \n\n2. Krd-vv-^i, commonly written KTiwvfXL in the MSS., tojyr^ to \ndeath, Att. prose secondary form of KretVw, is used in the Pres. \nand Impf. The stem is KTEIN-, lengthened from KTEN-. \nThe V of the stem is omitted on account of the diphthong {k 169, \nRem. 1). \n\n3. oX-Xv-ixL (instead of oX-w/xt), to destroy. See k 182, B. In \nprose, only in compounds. \n\n4. ofx-vv-ixi, to sioear. See \xc2\xa7 182, B. \n\n5. op-i/v-fit (poet), to rouse {\xc2\xa7 230). \n\n6. (TTop-vv-fJii, to spread out. See oropma\'/u, J 184, 5. \n\n^ 189. Inflection of the two forms of the Perf. icei/xat \n\nand rjfxaL. \n\nPreliminary Remark. The two forms of the Perf. Ktlnai and ^/xoi, \nare so essentially different, in their formation, from the other verbs in -fu, that \nthey require to be treated by themselves. \n\na. Kct/xai, to lie. \n\nKctjMat, properly, I have laid myself down, hence I lie doicn; \nthen Pass. I have been laid down, I am hjiytg down (e. g. dvouca- \n/biai, I am laid up, i. e. consecrated, crvyKiLTOLL, it has been agreed \nupon, compositum est, constat, but oT;n-\xe2\x82\xac^ctTai viro to\'09, it lias \nbeen agreed by some one) ; tliis verb is a Perf ^Wthout reduplica- \ntion, from the stem KEI- (contracted from KEE-). \n\nPer/. Ind. KcTfmi, /ceTaai, Keirai, Kel/xe^a, Kua^c, Kfurrea ] \n\nSubj. KdcDfiai, Kej7, /ceTjTot, etc. \n\nImp. Kficro, Kela^Wy etc.; \xe2\x80\x94 Inf. Kuar^cu; \xe2\x80\x94 Part. KtlfKyos. \nImpf. Ind. iKelfiT]}/, \xe2\x82\xacK\xe2\x82\xacL<To, cKeiro, third Pers. PI. iKfuno. \n\nOpt. Keoljxriv, k4oio, KeoiTO, etc. \nFut, Keiffofxai. \n\nCompounds itydKeiy.ai, KaTaKfifiai, KardKeiffcut etc. ; \xe2\x80\x94 Inf Koreucua^tu J \xe2\x80\x94 Imp \n\n\n\nH 190, 191.] VERBS IN -0> WITH TENSES LIKE THOSE IN -/>Cl. 2\'?1 \n\n$ 190. b. \'S/Attt, to sit. \n\n1. *H/\xc2\xabxt, properly, I liave seated myself, I have been seated^ \nhence, / sil (Ion. and poetic, also used of inaiiimate objects, \ninstead of iSpu/Aat, / lixive been fixed^ established) ; tliis verb is \na Perf. of the poet. Aor. Act. euro, to set^ to estahlish. The stem \nis \'HA- (comp. rfr-rax instead of ^S-tcm, according to k 17, 5, and \nthe Lat. sed-eo). \n\nRemark 1. The active Aorist-forms of tXaa are dialectic (\xc2\xa7 230) and poet., \nbut the IVDd. signifying tu erect, to establish, belongs also to Attic prose, ciVo^Tji/; \nPart, uadfifyos (Th. 3, 58, iaadfievos) ; Imp. (<raiy (<racu {((peaa-cu) ] Fut. poetic \niaofjiou, eaffofjuu {i<pi<T(Tonai). The defective forms of this verb are supplied bj \n\n\n\nPerf. \n\n\n\nInd. ^/Mu, ^<Teu^ ^(TTcu, ^fiiba^ ^(TiS-f , i\\vTcu ; \n\nImp. ^iTo, ^(T^oiy etc. ; \xe2\x80\x94 Inf ^o-dtu ; \xe2\x80\x94 Part, fj/tevas. \n\n\n\nPlup. \n\n2. In prose, the compound Ka^/;/xat is commonly used instead \nof the simple. Tlie inflection of the compound differs from the \nsimple in never taking a in the tliird Pers. Sing., and in the \nPlup., only when it has the temporal Augment : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nPerf. xd^ijuii, KO^Tjtrtu, Ka.^7jToj, etc.; \xe2\x80\x94 Subj. ica^w/iaj, \xc2\xbbfa^7\xc2\xbb ko^- \n\nTou, etc. ; \xe2\x80\x94 Imp. Ki^ao^ etc. j \xe2\x80\x94 Inf Ka^ai^(u\\ \xe2\x80\x94 Part, ko^ \n\nflfVOS. \n\nPimp. iKcA^firiv and Ko^nrjv, itcd^ao and ^o^iro, (Ki^riro and \n\nKa^rjtrTOj etc.; \xe2\x80\x94 Opt. Ko^olfirjv, KodoTo, KeL^oiT\xc2\xa9, etc. \n\nRem. 2. The Opt. forms : Ko^firfv, -ijo^ -V\'^o, etc. are doubtful. \xe2\x80\x94 The \ndefective forms of ^fiau are supplied bv (((cr^au, or "((a^ai (prose Ka^((\xc2\xabT^cuy \n\nVerbs in -\xc2\xab, which follow the analogy of Verbs in -fit, in forming \n\nTHE SECOND AOR. ACT. AND MiD., THE PrES. AND PeKF. AcT. \n\n^ 191. L Second Aor. Act. and Mid. ^ \n\n1. Several verbs with the characteristic a, c, o, v, form a \nsecond Aor. Act. and (though rarely) a second Aor. Mid., ac- \ncording to the analogy of verbs in -/ai, \xe2\x80\x94 tliis tense being without \nthe mode-vowel, and appending the personal-endings to tlie \nstem. But all the remaining forms of these verbs are like \nverbs in -w. \n\n2. The formation of this second Aor. Act., through all the \nmodes and participials is like that of the second Aor. Act. of \n\n\n\n228 \n\n\n\nVERBS IN -CO WITH TENSES LIKE THOSE IN -fU. [$ 191. \n\n\n\nverbs in -/xc. The characteristic- vowel, with some exceptions, \nIS lengthened, as in eo-Trjv, viz. a and c into rj, o into w, t and v \ninto I and v. This lengthened vowel remains, as in taTrjVj \nthroughout the Ind., Imp., and Inf. The third Pers. PL in -rja-av \n(Char, a) and -vaav shortens the vowel, when the poets use tlie \nabridged form in -v, instead of -crav, e. g. e/3ttv, ISvv. Tlie Subj., \nOpt., and Part, with some exceptions, wliich will be noticed in \nthe following tables, are hke verbs in -/x,t, e. g. jSairp/ (arairp\'), \nor/Seirjv (S^Ci-qv), yvotrjv (^Sotrjv), yvovs (dor?). The Imp., like ottjSlj \nin the second Pers. Sing., takes the ending -^^ and the stem- \nvowel remains long through all the persons ; in compounds of \njSatvo), prjS^L is also shortened into /3d, e. g. Kara/Jo, Trpofia, cis/^d, \nefijSd, iTTi/Sd instead of KarajS-q^i, etc. \n\n\n\nModes \n\n\na. Characteris. a \n\n\nb. Characteris. e \n\n\nc. Characteris. o \n\n\nd. Character. 6 \n\n\nand \n\n\nBA-n, $aLV(a, \n\n\n2BE-n, afievuvui, \n\n\nTNO-n, yiyyda- \n\n\ne--\xc2\xab, \n\n\nPersons. \n\n\nlogo. \n\n\nto extint/uish. \n\n\nKw, to know. \n\n\n/o irra/) up. \n\n\nInd. S. 1. \n\n\nc-jStj-z/, / vseid^ \n\n\neafiriv, I ceased to \n\n\niyvwv, I knetff, \n\n\ncJi\'K, / If er\xc2\xab/ in \n\n\n2. \n\n\nUri-s \n\n\neafiijs [burn, \n\n\n(yuws \n\n\nI^Oj [or under, \n\n\n3. \n\n\nt-^-n \n\n\n^afi-n \n\n\ntyvQ} \n\n\nno \n\n\nD. 2. \n\n\ne-firi-TOV \n\n\n\xe2\x82\xac(Tfir]TOV \n\n\nc-yt/urrov \n\n\nIhinov \n\n\n3. \n\n\ne-^T)-Tr]v \n\n\nia$-i]Tr}v \n\n\niyvwTT)v \n\n\nihvTTjy \n\n\nP. 1. \n\n\n\xe2\x82\xac-l3r]-iJ.ev \n\n\ntafiri^iv \n\n\neyyufxfi\' \n\n\nnotify \n\n\n2. \n\n\nH-n-Tc \n\n\necr^TjTe \n\n\n\xe2\x82\xac7vaTe \n\n\nfSiTe \n\n\n3. \n\n\ni-^r}-(Tav \n\n\ni<rfi-q<rav \n\n\n(yywffoy \n\n\nfSviray \n\n\n\n\n(Poet, ^^av) \n\n\n\n\n(Poet, tyywy) \n\n\n(Poet. IXtr) \n\n\nSubj. S. \n\n\nfiS>, fifis, fifj ^ \n\n\na-pu, f)s, ij \' \n\n\nyi-u, yvffs, yv<f \' \n\n\n8v\xc2\xab, py, \xc2\xbbj * \n\n\nD. \n\n\ntSrJTOu \n\n\nafiriTov \n\n\nyvtHroy \n\n\nivrjroy \n\n\nP. \n\n\n/3&)uej/, TJTCy \n\n\ncfiwixfv, TJre, \n\n\nyvififv, uTfj \n\n\nivcofifyy \n\n\n\n\na>cn{v) \n\n\na)(Ti[v) \n\n\n<ii>0t(v) \n\n\n17T\xe2\x82\xac, \xe2\x80\xa2<n(\xc2\xbb\') \n\n\nOpt. S. 1. \n\n\nfiairjv \n\n\n(rfielT}u \n\n\nyvoir\\v * \n\n\n\n\n2. \n\n\n^ai-qs \n\n\nafie\'iT]! \n\n\nyvoir\\s \n\n\n\n\n3. \nD.2. \n\n\nficdrj \n\n\n(rfielr) \n\n\nyvolri \n\n\n\n\nfiaL7]T0v et oilTOV \n\n\nafid-qrov et i7rov \n\n\nyyoirjroy Ct curof. \n\n\n\n\n3. \n\nP. 1. \n\n2. \n\n\nl3aiT}Tr]v et aiTTjv \n\n\n(yfi(iT]Tr}u ct eiTTji/ \n\n\nyyoi-fjrrjy et ofnir \n\n\n\n\n^ai-nfiev et aijx^v \n\n\n(rfiilT]ixev et fliJifv \n\n\nyyolr}fi(y et oljuc*\' \n\n\n\n\nfiairjTe Ct aTre \n\n\nafiiirfTi et etre \n\n\nyyoirrrf ct oTtc \n\n\n\n\n3. \n\n\nfiaieu (seldom \n\n\nafieleu \n\n\n7^0461\' (rarely \n\n\n\n\nImp. S. \nD. 1. \nP. 2. \n\n\njSaiTjcraj/) \n\n\n\n\n7\xc2\xbb\'oiTj<rai\') \n\n\n\n\nfiri^i, \xe2\x96\xa0f)T(o^ \n\n\n(r$ri^i, -fiTOD^ \n\n\n7\xc2\xbb\'\xc2\xabi^t, c^\xc2\xab \' \n\n\n80^1, ^\xc2\xab\' \n\n\nPrJToi/, rjTCtiv \n\n\nO-ySjJTOf, ^TWV \n\n\n7i\'&>Toi\', dnwv \n\n\nSvTOV, wT\xc2\xbbr \n\n\nfitiTe \n\n\n(r/SrjTe \n\n\nyvcire \n\n\n5Dtc \n\n\n3. \n\n\n^\xe2\x96\xa0qrwcrav and \n\n\nfffirjTuxrau and \n\n\nyyunutrav and \n\n\nSuTOMTor et \n\n\nInf. \nPart. \n\n\n^avrwv \n\n\nafifVTwv \n\n\n7j/JKrwi\' \n\n\n8uKr\xc2\xabr \n\n\nfids, uffa, av \n\n\n(rfirjuai \n\n\n\xe2\x80\xa2yvwveu \n\n7^0 vs, oD<ra, 6y \n\n\nivyat \n\n8i^r, r><ra, i/r \n\n\n\n\nG. fidvros \n\n\n, avafifjs, etc.; otto \n\n\nG. 7\xc2\xbb\'rfvT0S \n\n(T/Sw : Sicryfw : ova \n\n\nG. Svyros. \n\n\n* Compo \n\n\nunds, 6. g. auafiS) \n\n\n2 Aeschyl. Snppl. 230 (21 \n\n\n5) crvyyvcpr] ] but i \n\n\nn the Mid. form <r \n\n\nVTTVorro. \n\n\n^ Compounds, e. g. avdfi-n\'r \n\n\nbi, dj/a)87]T\xe2\x82\xac ; aTo\'cry \n\n\n37j\'^t : Sidyyu>di ; dj \n\n\noSi\'^i. \n\n\n\n^ 192, 193.) VERBS IN -<Ji LIKE VERBS IN -/Xl. 229 \n\nSemark. The Opt. form Sirnv (instead of Svlriy) is not found in the Attic \ndialect, but in the Epic (^ 227). \n\n^ 192. Summary of Verbs with a second Aor . like \n\nVerbs in -/xi. \n\nBesides the verbs mentioned above, some others have this form : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n1. 8i5po<r/c\xc2\xab, to run aroay (^ 161, lOy Aor. (APA-) (Sp&y, -as, -d, -d/iiev, -drf, \n\xe2\x80\xa2dtray {tSpdv Poet.), Subj. 8pcS, Spas, Spa. Sparoy, Spw/xey, Spare, Spw(Ti{v), Opt. \nSpairji/, Imp. Spa^i, -oltw, Inf. Spavai, Part. Spks, -aaa, -ay, Gon. Spdyros. \n\n2. Wto/xou, tofi/ (\xc2\xa7 166. 29), Aor. (IITA-) firrrjy. Inf. Trrrjyai, Part. xtSs ; Aor. \nMid. ivTOfjiriy, irraabai. \n\n3. irplaabai, see ^ 179, 6. \n\n4. ffKfKKot or <TKf\\eVf to dry, second Aor. (2KAA-) ^tTKhriy, to wither, Intrans., \nInf. (rKXTJyai, Opt. (TKKairiv. \n\n5. ^a-Kci>, to come before, to anticipate {M58, 7), Aor. tip^v, <f>^]yat, \xc2\xab^dy, \n^a>, <f>dalrjy. \n\n6. Kalw, to bum, Trans. (\xc2\xa7 154, 2), Aor. (KAE-) ^jccCijv, / burned, Intrans. ; but \nfirst Aor. tKavaa, Trans. \n\n7. f>iu>, lujlow {\xc2\xa7 154, 2), Aor. (\'PTE-) i^fivny, I flowed. \n\n8. x\xc2\xab>^P\xc2\xab. \'o rejoice (\xc2\xa7 166, 32), Aor. (XAPE-) ix^v. \n\n9. aXicKOfiat, to be taken, Aor. (\'AAO-) f/Awv and IdAwv (^ 16\', 1), oAwvot, \noAw, -<fs, -y, etc., oXoItji\', oXovy (always a, except in the Ind.). \n\n10. /3<(>\xc2\xab, fo //er, Aor. ifilosy, Subj. /Siw, -^j, -^, etc.. Opt. fiitpy\\v (not fiioirjyy \nas yvoiriv, to distinguish it from the Opt. Impf /Sjo/tji\'), Inf fiiuyai. Part. /3jous \n[oD<ra, oCf] ; but the cases of fiiovs are supplied by the first Aor. Part, fiiaxras. \nThus: hyffiivy, I returned to life, from kya$id>(TKOtiM (\xc2\xa7 161, 3). The Pres. and \nImpf of $i6u> arc but little used by the Attic wTiters; for these tenses, they em- \nploy (w ; besides these tenses, only the Put. C^trtiy was in good use among Attic \nwriters ; the remaining tenses were borrowed from $i6a> ; thus, Pres. (w ; Impf. \n((wy (\xc2\xa7 137, 3) ; Put. fiiwaofuu, more rarely C^<r\xc2\xab; Aor. i$lwif (X. O. 4, 18, has \nalso ifiluKTfy) ; Perf. fiffiiwKa] Pcrf. ^lid. or Pass, fitfiiwrai, Part. /3\xe2\x82\xac/3<ci>fi\xc2\xabVoy. \n\n11. <pvu (0 or 0), to produce, second Aor. (<pvy, Intrans., to be produced, be bom, b\xc2\xab \nnaturally, ipvyai, ipts, Subj. ^<;\xc2\xab (Opt. w^anting in the Attic dialect) ; but the first \nAor. i<piiffa, TrtLus. I produced ; Fut. iptkrv, Trans./ will produce. The Perf. \nTf <pCKa, I am produced, also has an intransitive sense, so also the Pres. Mid. \n^{tofjLoi ; Fut. tptffofjLoi. \n\n\'Remauk. Here also belong the forms <rx\xc2\xaby and <rxo^vy of the second \nAor. I[ax(>\'^ from IVa*, to have (^ 166, 14), and irli^i of the second Aor. iirioy \nfrom x\xc2\xbbV\xc2\xab, to drink (\xc2\xa7 158, 5). \n\n$ 193. 11. Perfect and Pluperfect. \n\nTlie Attic dialect, in imitation of the Epic, forms a few Per- \nfects of pure verbs immediately from the stem, e. g. AI-O, to \n\n20 \n\n\n\n230 \n\n\n\nVERBS IN -O) LIKE VERBS IN -/At. \n\n\n\n[k 193 \n\n\n\n/ear, Se^St-a, then rejecting the mode-vowel, in the Dual and PL \nInd. Perf. and Plup., and to some extent in the Inf., e. g. 8c-St- \nfiev instead of 8e-St-a-/>t\xe2\x82\xacv. In this v^ay, these forms of the Perf \nand Plup. become wholly analogous to the Pres. and Impf of \nverbs in -fjn, e. g. t-oTa-fxev. The stem- vowel remains short, e. g. \n8e8i/x,cv, r\xe2\x82\xacTXa/jL\xe2\x82\xacUj rerXavai ; but in the third Pers. PI. Perf, the \nmode-vowel a is not rejected, e. g. Sc-St-dcn; with verbs in -cut), \nhowever, a is contracted with the stem- vowel, e. g. Tc-rXa-tJUn = \nTc-rA,a-o"t. \n\nRkmabk 1. Except the forms of Ain and TtrrTj/Ai, all the Perfects of this \nkind belong almost exclusively to poetry, particularly to the Epic. The Sing. \nBe\'Sto is not Attic. \n\nRem. 2. The Imp. of these Perfects is also in use, and, since it not only \nwants the mode-vowel, but takes the ending -^i in the second Pers. Sing., it is \nwholly analogous to the forms in -fit. So the Inf. Both append their termi- \nnations to the short stem-vowel; $e5i\xe2\x82\xact/au is an exception. The Subj. Perf. and \nthe Opt. Plup. of verbs whose stem-vowel is a, are formed like verbs in -/m, since \nthe Subj. Perf. admits the contraction of the stem-vowel with the termination, \nand the Opt. Plup. ends in -ai-nv, e. g. co-ref-w, earw, -^y, etc., r\xc2\xabTXjilriy. The \nPart, of verbs in -da contracts the stem-vowel a with the ending -ds and -^j, \ne. g. earaJis = caTcoy, i(TTa-6$ = kcT^s and k<rr6sy and also have a peculiar \nfeminine form in -wtro, e. g. kcTTSxra ; all the Cases retain the \xc2\xab\xc2\xbb, e. g. \xe2\x82\xac\xc2\xabrriToj, \nl<rTc6(rrjs, etc. \n\nRem. 3. The form resolved by c is retained in some participles, in the Ionic \ndialect, e. g. Ictcc^s, standing firm ; so from tc^vtiko^ rtbvfdis Cnever rtdvus) \ntogether with Te^j/rjKcis, is retained in the Attic dialect also. In these forms, \nCO remains in all the Cases, e. g. \n\nctrrec^y, kcrewaa., ecrrccis, Gen. loTe&n-oy, -d)<rt\\s. \nTe^yfdos, Tf^viuxraf Te^yfus, Gen. rt^yf&ros, -dxnis. \n\n\'B^firjKa and rerXTjKa never have this form of the participle. \n\n\n\n\n\nPerfect. \n\n\nPluperfect. \n\n\nPerfecL \n\n\nPluperfecL \n\n\nInd. S. 1. \n\n2. \n\n3. \nD.2. \n\n3. \nP.l. \n\n2. \n\n3. \n\n\nSe-SX-a \n\nde-St-as \n\nSe-5i-e(i/) \n\nSe-Sj-Toj/ \n\nS4-St-Toy \n\nSe-^^.-fiey \n\nS4-SX-T\xe2\x82\xac \n\nSe-Sf-da\'i{v) \n\n\niBe^eiy \n\niSfSXroy \niSe^rrjy \niScSXfisv \n\n4d4SXarav (^5e5/c<rai\') \n\n\n\'E-2TA-A . \n\xc2\xab-<rro-TOi\' \n\nl-OTO-TOV \n\ne-o~rd-T\xe2\x82\xac \n\xe2\x82\xac-<rra-<ri{y) \n\n\ncerroTor \n\n(orrirriP \n\nftrrofiey \n\nf<rraT\xe2\x82\xac \n\nfirraaar \n\n\nImp. \nSubj. \n\n\nSe-m-^i, SeStTw, etc. \nSc-Sl-o), -jiSj -J?, etc. \n\n\nf-<rra-di, etc., 3 Pers. PL \nfOTciTaHrou\' and -dyr^w \n\n\nInf. \nPart. \n\n\nSe-Si-eVoi \n\nSe-Si-cijy, -um, -65 ^ G*n. -^os \n\n\ne-OTa-vcu \n\nf\'trrus, -axTOy -6s (-<6s1) \nGen. -arros, -^xttis \n\n\nSubj. Pf. \nOpt.Plup. \n\n\neCTw, f}s, -i], etc. \n\neo\'To^Tjj\', Dual fOTalriTov and -oTtoj\', PL tcrairjfiry and \xe2\x80\xa2o^ucv, \netc., third Pers. PI. co-Talev. \n\n\n\nH 194, 195.] VERBS WITH A PERF. LIKE VERBS IN \'fXL. 231 \n\nBem. 4. The Opt. Plup. third Pers. Sing. SfSi^l-n, PI. Phaedr. 2.51, a. is re- \nstored according to traces in the MSS. The Plup. ofta-TTj/xi, in this form never \ntakes the strengthened augment \xe2\x82\xact. \xe2\x80\x94 The Imp. Perf. co-rd^i, etc., and the Opt. \nPlup. earaiTjr, etc., are poetic only. But the Inf. Io-toj/ou is in constant use ; \nyet fffTTjKfycu is very seldom 5 also the Part, cards, -axray is far more frequent \nthan eo-TTjjcc^y, -v7a ; the neuter f(m)K6s, on the contrary, is more frequent than \niaros. Instead of the Ind. Sing. Perf., Plup., and Part, of $e5jo, the forms \nof SeSoiKa are more frequent ; besides the Indie. Perf. and Plup., particularly \nin the Sing., the Inf. and Part, were used. \n\n\n\n^ 194. Summary of Verbs with a Perfect like Verbs \n\nin -fit. \n\nBesides the two verbs above, the following have this form of the Perfect : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n1. ylyvofjMi, to become, TErAA (stem TA) : Perf. (Sing, yfyoya, -as, -e), yeya \nH\xe2\x82\xacV, yfydre, yey6MTi{y), Inf. yeydfity (Epic), Part, yeyus, ycyucra, y(yus, Gen \nyeyunos. \n\n2. fiaiuea, to go, Perf. fi($rjKa, BEBAA : PI. $($a.fjify, -are, \'MTi(y), third Pcrs. \nPI. Subj. ^nfi(fiu(Xi(y) (PI. Phaedr. 225, e), Inf 0(fi&vu, Part. iSt/SoSs (X. Hell. \n7. 2, 3), $e$v7a {fiffiuaa, PI. Phaedr. 254, b), fiffius, Gcu. fitfiiiyTos ; Plup. ^^4- \nfidficy, -aT\xe2\x82\xac, -daay. These abridged forms are almost wholly poetic and dia- \nlectic (\xc2\xa7 230). \n\n3. ^yi]<TK<i}, to die, rt^yriKa, TE0NAA : PI. Tf^yafifv, Tf^are, rf^a<rt(y), Imp. \nTf ^ya^i. Part. re^vrjKiifS, Tf^vrjKvla, re^yrjKSs, or rc^ycws, rfbvtwora (Lys. and \nDera.), n^ytSs, Inf rct^dvoi (Aesch. rtbyaycu from rcdvoeVcu) ; Plup. eVe\'i^i/d- \naav. Opt. r(bvaii\\v. \n\n4. TAAfl, to bear, Perf. rtrX-nKa, TETAAA: Dual rirXarov, PI. Tfrkofifv, \nTrrAoTf, TCT\\a<Ti{y), Imp. T\xe2\x82\xacTXd3i, -irw, etc., Subj. wanting, Inf. r\xe2\x82\xacT\\&ycu, but \nPart. rerKriKus \\ Plup. ^Tt\'rXd/iCJ/, irirXdrf, irfTXaxrav, Dual irtTKaroy, ^TerXi* \nrify. Opt. r(rKadT)V. \n\n5. Here belong the two participles of, \n\nfiifipw<rK\xc2\xbb (\xc2\xa7 161, 6), to eat, Perf. fi($pwKa, poetic Pt^pws, Gen. -utos, \niriirru (^ 163, 3), to fall, irrirrwica, Att. Poet, irnrrws (comp. \xc2\xa7 230). \n\nKemabk. There are also found, in imitation of Homer, KfKpayfiey and \nthe Imp. KfKpax^i, from the Perf. KtKpdya (from Kpd(w, to cry otit) ; also the \nImp. irtiTda^i, from irtiroi^a, to trust (from irfi^w, to persuade), is found in \nAesch. Eum. 602. See ^ 230. The Perfects oVia and l^oiKa require a distinct \nconsideration. \n\n\n\n^ 195. OTSa and toLKa. \n\n1. 075(x, Perf from \'EIAii (second Aor. cTSov, / saw, Inf. iSeTy, videre) \nproperly / have seen, hence / know; for the syllable o7, see ^ 140, 4; for the \nchange of 8 into <r in Xaroy, etc., see ^ 1 7, 5 ; for the change of I into v in \niffiuvf see \xc2\xa7 19, 1. Its inflection is as follows: \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n\n\n232 \n\n\n\nOTSa AND couca. \n\n\n\n[\xe2\x99\xa6 196. \n\n\n\nPERFECT \n\n\n\nInd. S. 1. \n2. \n3. \n3. \n1. \n2. \n3. \n\n\n\nD.2 \nP \n\n\n\nolSa \n\n0?S\xe2\x82\xac(|\') \nXffTOPi XffTOV \n\ntcrre \nXffa.(n{v) \n\n\n\nSubj. \xe2\x82\xaci5w Imp. \n\nei^s tiT^t Inf. \n\n6t57jTO\xc2\xbb\', -riTov taroVf laruv \n\netdwixey Part. \n\netSai(rj(j\') Xaruicav \n\n\n\n-6s \n\n\n\nPLUPERFECT \n\n\n\nIml. S. 1. \n2. \n3. \n\n\n\nTJSeiv^ Dual PI. pJcificy (Poet. ^(T/ifv) \n\n^5ets and -eto-S^a ^ 775\xe2\x82\xacJToi\', Poet. T^o-Toi/ ^iciTf ( " poTt) \ni7Sei{i/) 7?5etTTji\', " rjarrjv rilicrav ( " pcco\') \n\n\n\nOpt. Sing. etSefTjj/, -tjs, -tj ; Dual elSfl-qTOv, -^W] PI. flSfi-qfify (seldom ctStx- \n\n;iiej/), eiSetTjre, etSeTci/ (seldom fi5ciTj(rcu/). \nPut. daofxai (Ion. \xe2\x82\xac<5V\'\xc2\xab\'j though Isocr. cvvit.i4)<r(is), I shall know or \n\nexperience ; sometimes also ctSeVeu, etSeS, \xe2\x82\xac(8\xe2\x82\xac^77k, haTC the same \n\nmeaning. \xe2\x80\x94 Verbal Adj. iffriov. \n\n\n\nSuj\'otSo, compounded of oT5o, Z am conscious, Inf. <n;vc(5(Vcu, Imp. avnabij \n\nSubj. cruvetSw, etc. \n\nM 116, 2, oWas scarcely occurs in Attic. \n\n\' First person fjdij, second rfSria-^a, third iJJh?, are considered as Attic \nforms ; yet rjSeiv, fi5\xe2\x82\xaci<r^a (also p5ets), pSci, are found in the best Attic wri- \nters. OtSafxev, olSore, oWa(Ti(y), instead of Xayifv^ etc., are rarely found in \nthe Attic writers. Comp. X. An. 2. 4, 6. Antiph. p. 115, 3. P\'l. Ale. 141, \ne. Eur. Suppl. 1047. A. 0. 20, 14. oTBas occurs in X. C 4. 6, 6. The \nshortening of the et into \xe2\x82\xac in the Dual and PI. of the Opt. pSc/ic*\', is poetic \nand rare. S. 0. T. 1232. \n\n\n\nRemark. The Perfect, I have knoicn^ is expressed by tyimKa^ and the Aoriflt, \n1 knew, by iyvav. \n\n2. "EoiKo, lam like, I seem, Perf. of \'EIKQ (of this the Impf. fUf, is used in \nHomer), poetic eT/ca instead of foiKu, ctVci^cu instead of ^ouccVox, and (instead \nof iolKa(Ti) the anomalous Att. third Pers. PI. \xe2\x82\xacr{a<ri, even in prose (Plat), Part. \n4oiKd!)5, in the Attic writers only in the sense of like ; Att. cucwr and tuctpm \n(instead of eozKcis, iotKevai) commonly in the dramatists, only in the sense of \nprobable, likely, right; hence especially in the neuter cutrfy, as \xc2\xabj tuiis, a* i$ \nnatural; Plup. ic^Keiv (\xc2\xa7 122, 5), Fut. et^tD {At.). \n\nHere belongs the abridged form toiyntvy among the Tragedians, instead of \niolKUfiei/; comp. fo-uei/. The poetic Md. forms fjl^au (Eur. Ale. 1065), second \nPers. Sing. Perf., and IjCkto, third Pers. Sing. Plup., are constructed according \nto the same analogy. \n\n\xc2\xa7 196. III. Present and Imperfect, \n\nThere are also some Present and Imperfect forms, mostly in the Epic dialect, \nwhich, according to the analogy of verbs in .^,. take the personal-ending* \nwithout the mode-vowel. See \xc2\xa7 230, under Slv^, raviw, ipvvy <rdJ\xc2\xab, I8\xc2\xbb, f^pm\' \n\xe2\x80\xa2Ittoi (\xc2\xa7 166, 24), of the Common language, belongs here. \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 197.] DEPONENT PASSIVES. 233 \n\n$ 197. Summary of the Deponent Passives \n\n102, 2, 3). \n\n"AyafjLou, to wonder^ Zvudfiai, to he able, Kp\xe2\x82\xacfia/xai, to hang, \n\nalSfofiai, to reverence, Svsapeo\'rfOfuu, to be dissat- Aot5op\xe2\x82\xac0/ucu, to revile, \n\na\\<iofiai, to wander, isjied, fmlyoncu, to be mad, \n\na/jLiWdoixcu, to contend, iyayriSofiai, to resist, (ifrafLfXafiai, to regret^ \n\nain-i6ofjiai (Poct.) adversor, iv^fi4o/xcUf to lag to heart, fjLvffarrofjuu, to loathe, \naTTovoiOfiai, to he distracted, iwvofOficUt to consider, pefiecdofiai (Poet.), to bi \n\ni.Trop(Ofiaiy to be perplexed, iirifif\\ofjLau and -io^iai, to justly indignant, \napiffTOKpaTfOfiou, to liave an take care, otofuu, to suppose, \n\naristocracy, iTriyofofiat, to rejiect upon, dXjyapx^ojiou, to have an \n\napvdofiai, to re/use iirl<rrafjLau, to know, oiigarchy, \n\n6.x^oiMu, to be displeased, tpofuu (Poet), to love, trfipdofxai, to try, \n\nfiovKoficu, to wish, (v^vfifOfjLcu, to be happy, Trpo^vfxioyLcu, to desire, \n\nfipvxdofxxu, to roar, \xe2\x82\xacv\\afi(Ofiai, to be cautious, trpoyofoficu, to foresee, \n\nifoncu, to want, fvvo^ioyuou, bonis legibus ffi^ofuu, to reverence (Aor. \n\nSfpKOfiai (Poet.), to see, utor, , icftp^y, PI. Phacdr. \n\nirjIxoKpaTfOfiai, to have a fifiropfoficu, to be opulent, 254, b). \n\ndttnorrury, ^Sofiat, to rejoice, KpiXorififo/xai, to be ambi\' \n\nStaXtyonai, to converse, d^pofuu (Poet.), to become tious, \nSiayofofjuu, to think, hot, inroroirtoixcu, to conjecture. \n\nRemark 1. The Aor. of several verbs have a Mid. as well as a Pass, form, \n\ne. p. av\\l(ofjMi, to h>> \xe2\x96\xa0 * \xe2\x80\xa2\' .n, to revile; bptyofjuau, to strive after; irpay/xa\' \n\nriitottai, to carry on rarer); <piXo<ppoviOfiau, to treat kindly. Also \n\nseveral of the above verbs iKloiifr here, yet they more seldom have a middle \nAorist, e. p. &y<miu, Aor. Mid. iij Dem. alSfOfuu, see ^ 166, 1, ofiiWtioncu, Aor. \nMid. in later writers, apyionat in Ilerod. Aescli. and in later writers, hia\\4yofuu \nin non- Attic writers, f-wiyofofxcu in later writers, XoiSoptofMai, Aor. Mid. in Isae. \n6, 59, iTfipdofiai often in Tim., Tpoyoto/iai, Kur. Hipp, (ji^\'.i. Pans. 4. 20, 1. <pi\\o- \nTifjifofiai in Isoc. and Aristid. \xe2\x80\x94 Several of the aliove list of verbs have a mid- \ndle as well as a Passive fonn in the Fut. : cuifoficu, fj 166, 1, ix^ofiai, ^ 166, 4. \nSicLKtyo/juu, to converse with, SiaXt^ofuu and rarer 5ta\\\xe2\x82\xacX\'^fo/iO"> Siavofofuu, to \nthink, 4irifx(Koficu, fj IGG, 21. irpv^ u, to desire. 7r po^fiT](TOfxai and rarer irpo^- \n\nfir]^(Tofiau. lioth JJSo^cu, to r^j 1 the poetic Upofuu, to love, have a passive \n\nform for their Fut.: ri<rd^<rofjuu, ipaa^aonat, ^ 179, 4. \n\nRem. 2. All the other Deponents arc Middle Deponents, or are used only \nin the Pres. and Impf. \n\nRkm. 3. Amonj.: th* ^ > lont Passives, are very many Active verbs, which \nin the Mid. express a n or intransitive action, but have a Passive form \n\nfor their Aorist ; on the contrary, a Middle form for their Future, e. g. <po$e(a, \ntcrreo, to terrify ; <(>o$rid^yai and <po&-i]<Tf<rbcu, timere, to fear. Here belong all \nverbs in -alyfiy and -vvfiy, derived fmm substantives and adjectives, almost \nall in -ovy, and most in -l^ay, e. g. fixppalyfiy, to gladden, fvtppay^yai, eu(ppa- \nyucr^ai, and fv<ppavbT)a(ebai, to be joyful, to be happy ; tmraiyny, to make ripe, \nirrKov^vau, irfTTaviitrbou, maturescere, to ripen; ouVx \xc2\xbb\'\xc2\xbb\'\xc2\xab<\xc2\xbb\'\xc2\xbb to shame, al<rxvv^\\yai, \nalcx^yfic^ai (rarer euVxuv^o\'ca\'.^cu), to feel shame ; ^\\arrovy, to make less, cAot- \nTCrt^voj, iWaTTwaetrbou, to be inferior, to be conquered ; xoAoCi/, to make angry, \nXoKco^jycu, xoAwtTfcrdai, succensere, to be angry; fxaXaKi^ay, to make effeminate, \n^laXoKKT^yfu (rarer /laXtucfo-ao-i^ou), fuiKaKiuobat, to make one\'s self effeminate, to \n\n20* \n\n\n\n?34 \n\n\n\nACTIVE VERBS WITH A MIDDLE FUTURE. \n\n\n\n[\xc2\xa7 19a \n\n\n\nbe effeminate ; opyiCeiPf to make angry, opyia^vai, oprfielabou^ and opyur^aea^tUf \nsuccensere, to be angry ; there are very many others also, of which only those \nmost in use will be mentioned here : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n"Ay^iv (from amyeiv, come, dmxS^^mt and avayayiffhai, signifying to he carried \nto sea, in mare provehi, but Put. ayd^eaStai), ayelpeiv, ayvvyai, a^poi(\xe2\x82\xaciy, alvx^v^iVy \nauiav, ttifpeiv, aWdrreiy {a\\Xay^(rofx.ai, often also aWd^ecr^cu) , apfw(civ, a<TXo\\uVj \nav^dveiu, a(paj/iCett/ ; \xe2\x80\x94 jSaAAetj/ ; \xe2\x80\x94 Sairavav, Sianav : \xe2\x80\x94 iyi(fiu, iirdyeiv {rjTretx- \n^u), ea-Tiay, \xe2\x82\xacu\xc2\xabx^"\' 5 \xe2\x80\x94 V\'^\'ray (F. -^Trrf^ijaroaai and rarer rrrTTjao/jLai) : \xe2\x80\x94 ISpieiy] \n\xe2\x80\x94 Kiveiv, K\\lyeiy, Koip.ay, KOfii^eiy {KOfiKT^yai, to travel, but KOjiiaaa^cu, sibi recu- \nperare, to recover for one^s self), Kplvfiy, KvXiySeiy; \xe2\x80\x94 Xeynv^ Aetireii\', Aveiv, \nKvTTety; \xe2\x80\x94 fjt.e^v<rK\xe2\x82\xaciy, fxtyyvyai, fii/ULyrjaKeiy ; \xe2\x80\x94 opeyeiy {opex^yoUf and rarer \nope^axr^ai), Spfiav, ox^^v ; \xe2\x80\x94 irei^eiy (Fut. irei<Top.ai, IxciU obey, but ircKT^aoficu, I \nwill be persuaded), Trriyvvvai, wXayay, irXcKciy, TrXrjTTeiy, iroAiTeveiv (also TroAixeu- \n(rarr^ai), iroyeveiy, \xe2\x80\x94 pryyyvyai, ^wyyvyai; \xe2\x80\x94 ffeieiy, aijirciy {(raTnjyau, ffox^o-etrd^cu), \n(TKcSayyvvai, cnray, ffireipay, airdpeiv, ffreXXeiv ((TToATji/at, <na}J}<T((r^cu). (np4(pit\xc2\xa5 \n{<TTpa(p?iyai, ffrpacpriffea^xai), ccpdWeiy {(T<pa\\riyai, <r<pa\\\'f}(r(abai, seldom (r<pa\\et<T- \n^ai), ado^eiy {(Tw^yai, to save one\'s self but adxraxTbau, to save for one\'s self, sibi \nservare) ; \xe2\x80\x94 rapdrreiy, repireiy, rpeireiy {TpaTrrjyai, to turn one\'s self to turn, rp^iaa- \n^ai,to put to flight), rpi(puv\\ \xe2\x80\x94 tpaiyeiy {(payTJycu, (pcu^a-fo-^cu and (pavdc^ai, to \nappear, but (pay^rjyai, to be shown), (payrd^eiy {(payTaa^aeerbai), tpepeiy (eyex^- \nvai, oXffitT^ai and iyex^(r\xe2\x82\xac<r^ai, rarer ola-^a-o/xaL). (pbtiptiy ((p^aprjyau. <f>^apii<rea- \n^ai [(p^epiTff^ai, Ion. and poet.J, (pofieiy {(pofirjata-^cu and <i>ofi7j^<Tfcrbcu) ; \xe2\x80\x94 if/cu- \nSeiy {^peva^rjyai, ^evcr^crofiaif to deceive one\'s self be deceived, but i//ev(rco-,^ou, il>\xe2\x82\xacv- \ncraff^aif to lie) ; \xe2\x80\x94 X^"\'\xc2\xab \n\n\n\n^ 198. Summary of the Active Verbs most in use with \na Middle Future, \xc2\xa7 154, 1. \n\n\n\n"Aidd) (dfSw), to sing, \ncLKOxxa, to hear, \naXaXd^o)^ to shout, \nafiaprdva>, to miss, \nairavTdwy to meet, \nairoXawi), to enjoy, \naptrd^Q}, to seize, \nfiaSl^co, to go, \nPalvcD, to go, \nBi6a)y to live, \njSAeVftj, to see, \nfiodaif to cry out, \nyeXdco, to laugh, \nyripdffKO), to grow old, \nyiyydxTKOJ, to know \nSdKyo), to bite, \ndap^dya, to sleep, \nSeiffai, to fear, \nSiairdu, to live, \nSidpdffKoa, to run away, \nSic^KO), to pursue, \neyKccfud^a^ to priise. \n\n\n\nflfii, to be, \niiraiyeo), to praise, \niff^lwy to eat, \n^avfid^o), to wonder, \nj^ew, to run, \n\nbr]pd(i), ^p\xe2\x82\xacv<i)f to hunt, \nbiyydvoa, to touch, \n^yf](TKWf to die, \n^pdcTKO}, to leapj \nKd/xvu, to labor J \nK\\aia, to weep, \n/cAeTTTw, to steal, \nKcofid^cD, to revel, \nXayxdyu, to obtain, \nXaiifidyu, to take, \nXiXJJ-dw, to lick, \nfiay^dya, to learn, \nvia, to swim, \nyevco, to nod, \noTSa, to know, \nolfKa^w, to lament, \n^AoAu^w, to hold. \n\n\n\niixwpLi, to svcear, \n\nhpdu, to see, \n\novp4tt)y urinam redere^ \n\n"Kcd^Wi to sport, \n\nirdax^t fo suffer \n\nirrjScLw, to leap, \n\nTlvWf to drink, \n\nvlirreet tofall^ \n\nxXfw, to sail, \n\nxvea>t to blow (but avfi \n\nvytvffce), \nirylycty to strangle, \niro^iw, to desire^ \nvposKvyfUj to reverence^ \n^e<i>, to flow, \nPo<pio), to gulp down, \nffiydtt), to be silent, \n(Tiuirdo}, to be silent, \nCKdnrrw, to mock, \ntnrovSdCo), to be zealous^ \navpiTTOi, to whistle, etc^ \ntUctw, to produce^ \n\n\n\ni 199.] PREPOSITIONS AND CONJLNCTIONS. 235 \n\nrp4x<io, to run, rwi^a^w, to rail at, xiaKO), to gape, \n\nrpdiyw, to gnaw, (pevyw, to flee, X^C^i to ease one\'s self, \n\nTvyx^v^j to obtain, <p^dvu, to come before, ;t&)pea>, to contain. \n\nRemark. Some have both the Active and Middle form for the Future ; the \nMiddle, however, is preferred, e. g. aSw (a<ra\xc2\xbb non-Attic), apiro^w, /3t(Jw, y-qpa- \n((r/c)a>, /SAcVw, Skokw, iyKwixid^u, iirau\'ea), ^av/jLoi^u), KXeinw, po<p4w^ aKwirrca, \nriKTw, x\'^pf \xc2\xab\xe2\x80\xa2 \xe2\x80\x94 077paaj, ^p^vta, KoXd^w are also used with the middle form. \nThe following compounds of x^P^f" have an Active and Middle form in the \nFut. : diro-, <Tvy- vposx^ifp^O] hut ava- and irpox<^p^<\xc2\xbb have only the Active form. \n\n\n\nCHAPTER Vn. \n\n$ 199. Prepositions and Conjunctions. \n\nBesides the Substantive, Adjective, Pronoun, Numeral, \nAdverb, and Verb, there are also the two following parts of \nspeech, viz. Prepositions and Conjunctions. On the forms of \nthese notliing need be said ; hence these parts of speech are \ntreated in the Syntax, so far as it is necessary. \n\n\n\nPECULIARITIES OF THE DIALECTS \n\n\n\nPARTICULARLY OF THE EPIC DIALECT. \n\n\n\nA. ORTHOGRAPHY. \n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 200. Digamma, or Labial Breathing F. \n\n1. The Greek lan^age had originally, in addition to the Spiritus Asper ( \') \nand the Lingual Breathing c, a Labial Breathing,* the sound of which corre- \nsponds nearly to the Eng./, or the Latin v. In accordance with its form {F)^ \nwhich is like one Gamma standing upon another, it is named Digamma (double \nGamma) ; and as the iEolians retained it longer than the other Grecian tribes, \nit is called the .\xc2\xa3olic Digamma. It has the sixth place in the alphabet, namely, \nbetween \xc2\xab and ^, and is named BaD. Comp. ^\xc2\xa7 26, 1 and 25, 2. \n\n2. This character disappeared very early ; but its sound was in some cases \nchanged, in some of the dialects, into the smooth Labial ;3, e. g. /3to, vis, Fls \n(later fj); in other instances, it was softened into the vowel u, and, after other \nvowels, coalesced with these, and formed the diphthongs au, \xc2\xaby, tjv, ov, uv^ e. g. \nyavs {vdFs), navis, x^\'^ (x*^**) \xe2\x96\xa0^ck)l., $ovs {$6Fs), Wis, bOs, Gen. Wn\'s; in \nothers still, it was changed into a mere gentle breathing, which at the beginning \nof a word is denoted by the Spiritus Lenis, but in the middle of a word and \nbefore p is not indicated, e. g. /Yi, t\'i*\xc2\xbb, is ; 6FiSt ovis^ 6is ; ciXew, volvo ; Fp6Sovy \np6Soy, etc. ; it was also changed, in the )>cginning of some words, into a sharp \nbreathing, which is denoted by the Spiritus Asper, e.g. l<nr\xe2\x82\xacpoj, vesperus; ivwfiiy \nir stio. \n\n3. In the Homeric poems, no character denoting the breathing F any longer \nexists ; but it is very clear that, in the time of Homer, many words were \nsounded with the Digumma, e. g. Ayvvfit, iya^, aviffffoi, w\'Scb/w, ^op, rer, the \n\n\' " The Vau, or Digamma, an important agent in early Greek orthography, \nloss, however, a principal than a subsidiary letter, retained much of its previous \ncharacter of vowel-consonant, or, in the* technical language of the Oriental \nschools, of quiescible letter. It was chiefly used as a liquid guttural, or aspirate, \nsomewhat akin to our English i/A, to impart emphasis to the initial vowel of \nwords, and possessed the power, with certain limitations, of creating metrical po- \nsition. But these vague and indefinite properties, were not such as to entitle it to \nR regular or liabitual place in the uritten texts of the popular Epic poems. It \nwas retained by the Boeotian states in monumental inscriptions till the 145 \nOlvmpiad."\' \xe2\x80\x94 Mure\'s Hist, of the Language and Literature of Greece, rol. i, p. 85; \nvol. iii, p. 513. \n\n\n\n238 DIALECTS. [^ 201 \n\nforms of \'EI An, video; eoiKa, ^Koai, viginti; ef/io, vestis; flxe7v (comp. vocare)^ \nfKn^os, \'dvvvfiif vestio ; k6s and Ss, sums ; ov, sui ; ot, sibi ; f<nr\xe2\x82\xacpos, vesperus ; oIkos, \nvicus; olvos, vinum, etc. ; this is obvious from the following facts : (a) words that \nhave the Digamma cause no Hiatus, e. g. irph e^eu (= -irph Fe^ev) ; \xe2\x80\x94 (b) hence \nalso a vowel capable of Elision, when placed before a diganunated word, cannot \nbe elided, e. g. \\iirey Se e {= 54 Fe), avh eo (= oTrb Feo) ; -^ (c) the paragogic p \n(\xc2\xa7 15) is wanting before words which have the Digamma, e. g. 5o?\xe2\x82\xac ol (= Scut \nj^oi) ; \xe2\x80\x94 (d) oif instead of ovk or ovx> is found before the Digamma, e. g. tVel \noij 13-eV iffTi x^P^\'^f^" {\xe2\x80\x94 off F\xe2\x82\xac^\xe2\x82\xac]/)\\ \xe2\x80\x94 (e) in compounds, neither Elision \nnor Crasis occurs, e. g. Siaeiire/xev {= SioFcnrefxtv), aayiis (= oFayfis); \xe2\x80\x94 (f ) a \ndigammated word with a preceding consonant, makes a vowel long by position, \ne. g. yap e^ey (where the p and the Digamma belonging to \xe2\x82\xac^fy make a long \nby position) ; \xe2\x80\x94 (g) long vowels are not shortened before words that have the \nDigamma, e. g. KdWet re rrix^av Kal etfuuri (= koI Fdfjuuri), XL 7, 392. \n\n\n\n^201. Interchange of Vowels. \n\nPeeliminaet Remark. The dialectic peculiarities in the change of vow- \nels, as well as of consonants, never extend to all the words of a dialect, but are \nuniformly limited to certain words and forms. \n\n1. The three vowels, e, 0, o, called (\xc2\xa7 140, 2 and 4) variable vowels (rp*^, \nTerpoc^a, iTpd(prjv) undergo various changes in the dialects : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\na is used instead of e (Ion.), e. g. rpanus, Ta/j-vw, fxeya^os instead of rpiiruy \nr4fivu, fi4ye^os ; so also Doric rptupca, (rKuip6s, "Apra/us instead of rp((p\xc2\xabe, \na-Kiepos, "ApTcfjiis ; and in several particles, e. g. 5\xc2\xaba, T<^\xc2\xbbea, ir<i\xc2\xaba instead of \nSre, rSre, ttStc. \n\n\xe2\x82\xac instead of o in the Ionic dialect, when followed by a Liquid, e. g. riaafpts^ \nepffrjv, rieXos, fiepe^pov (Ion.) instead of reo-o-opcy, Jour, ip<rriv,a male, vaXoSt \nglass, ^apaSfpov, gulf; also in many verbs in -cU, e. g. <poir4<t), 6p4u (Ion.), \ninstead of ^oiTi.a>, 6pd<a. \n\n\xe2\x82\xac instead of o (Doric), e. g. efiSfixriKoyra instead of \xe2\x82\xac$5ofi-f}KoyTa. \n\na instead of (Ion.), in a^^wSelv instead of opfxaSuy. \n\n2. The following cases are to be noted in addition: \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nThe long o is a special peculiarity of the Doric dialect, and causes, in par- \nticular, the so-called Plateiasm (i. e. the broad pronunciation) of the Dorians, \ne. g. afiepa, Kairos, a56s, Aafidr-np. The older and the later Ionic have softened \nthis grave d into tj. The Attic uses both the Doric a and the softened tj, (\xc2\xa7 16, \n7). Comp. Dor. afi^pa. Ion. rjfxepa, Att. 7)n4pa (with the Ion. n and Doric o) ; Ion. \nao<piTj, Dor. and Att. (ro(^(o ; Ion. ddprj^, Dor. and Att. ^tSpof. \xe2\x80\x94 So, also, in \nthe diphthong ou, among the Ionic writers a is changed into jj : vrivs, ypvvsy \ninstead of pads, ypavs] likewise in the diphthong cu in the Dat. PI. of the first \nDec, ris and 7?(rt (Ion.) instead of cus and aiai. \xe2\x80\x94 Still, in certain "\xe2\x80\xa2.,-,1^. the \nDorians retain the 17, as the lonians do the d. \n\nV instead of ei ( JEolic and Doric), e. g. ffafirjoy, ttjvos, h^rjcL, so the Infinitive. \ne. g. Xa^TJy, KaXTJy, instead of (rvfieTov, Kclyos, o|\xe2\x82\xac?o, Xo^SciV, KoXfTy. \n\nai instead of \xe2\x82\xact (Doric), e. g. (p^aipw instead of <p^\xc2\xablpo>. \n\n\n\n^ 202, 203.] CHANGES OF THE CONSONANTS. 239 \n\nV often instead of o (-ZEolic), e. g. a\'v<j>6si oyvfia instead of tro<p6sy oyofia, so in \nHomer &yvpis instead of ayopd ; and in the Common language, ^vwyvixosy iravif \nyvpis, etc. \n\nu instead of ov before a Liquid and <r, and at the end of a word in the termi- \nnations of the second Dec, and in the stem of several words; \xe2\x80\x94 oi instead of \nou before the breathing <r in the third Pers. PL ot<rt(v) instead of ov<ri{v), and in \nthe participle ending -oia-a instead of -ovtra, and in Molira and \'Ap4^oiaa instead \nof Moy<ra, and \'Pipibovtra ; the above use of w instead of ov is Dor., yet not in \nPindar ; the use of ot instead of ov is ^olic and Pindaric, e. g. \n\nTi i<pdfiw instead of rov 4<pi}Pov, &/ (also Ion. and Pindar.) instead of ovi/j \nSu\\os instead of SoOAos, wpaySs instead of ovpaj/6s, $u>s instead of jSoDs; \xe2\x80\x94 r{nr- \nroiai(v) instead oi rinrTovai{v), Tinrroiaa instead oi rvirrovaa, (pL\\ioi<Ti[v) instead \nof <pi\\QvaiVj i[xoiffa instead of fx\xc2\xb0^^\xc2\xb0- \n\nSome other instances will be considered below, in treating of the Declensions \nand Conjugations. \n\n\xc2\xa7 202. Interchange of Consonants. \n\nThe change of consonants in the diflferent dialects is according to the two \nfollowing laws : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nCoordinate consonants (\xc2\xa7 5, Rem. 4) interchange with each other; and cog- \nnate consonants (^ 5, Rem. 1) interchange with each other. \n\nk 203. L Interchange of coordinate Consonants. \n\nA. The Mutes : (a) The smooth Mutes x and k. The interrogative and \nindefinite pronouns, iris, ir<^\xe2\x82\xac, iro?oy, 6irotoy, etc., are in Ion. /c\xc2\xabs, Kt^re, etc. \n\nK instead of t : x<{t\xc2\xab, iroT\xc2\xab, |t\xe2\x82\xac, t<Jt\xe2\x82\xac, iirore, iAAore, are in Dor. irc^Ka, iro\xc2\xabc{, \nSka T6Ka, &Tr6Ka (Poet. biroKKo), &AAoKa ; so Sko (shortened from S/ccuca) instead \nof trav. On the contrary, t instead of k : Trjyos Dor. instead of KuyoSj iKilvos. \n\nIT instead of t (./Eol. and Dor.), e. g. irt/iirc instead of irtWe. \n\n(b) The Medials /3 and 7, e. g. /SA^x*" (-^^t.), penny-royal, is in Ion. yXrix<fyy \nfi\\(<papoyy eye-lash, is y\\i<papov. \n\n5 instead of 7 (Dor.), e. g. 8a instead of 7^ ; hence Arju-fjTrjp instead of \nTrjfi-firrtp. \n\nS instead of /B (Dor.), 65f\\6s instead of 6fifk6s. \n\n(c) The Aspirates 3^ and 0, e. g. I^p, beast, b\\av, bxlfifiy, ovbap, udder, are \nin Dor. <^p, <p\\av, <p\\lfi(iv, oZtpap (uber) ; (fyftp and <p\\ifiuv also in Homer. \n\nX instead of b: "tb/M is in Dor. txH^t ^^^ 6pyibos, etc. (from Upvis) is 6pyixos, \netc. \n\nB. The Liquids : (a) The Liquids interchange with one another : v instead \nof A before ;^ and t, often in the Dor. dialect, e. g. ^y^oy, fifyriaros (Dor.) \ninstead of ^A/^oi/, )3eAT\xc2\xabrToy; also (Ion. and Att. ) irAeu/iwi/, pulmo, instead of \nTyfVfiwy, Xlrpoy instead of virpoy. \n\np is rarely used instead of A, e. g. Kplfiavos^ oven, Att., instead of KXifiavos. \n\n\n\n240 DIALECTS. [\xe2\x99\xa6 204. \n\n(b) The Liquid p and the breathing <r in the later and often in the middle \nAttic : fip instead of the Ion. and old Attic p<r, e. g. &p<rT}v and i^pTjy, a nude / \nKSpffrj and k6^^t], back; but pp remains where the augment is used, and in com- \nposition. \n\n^204. II. Interchange of cognate Consonants. \n\n(a) The Palatals 7 and k, e. g. Kvatp^is^ fuller^ is preferred by the Att. writers \nto the other form, ypa^eis. \n\nK and X ill SeKOfiai (Ion.) instead of Sexofiau \n\n(b) The Linguals ^ and t, e. g. aZris (Ion. and Epic) instead of aSd^tr, again. \n\nEemark. In some words a change of the aspiration, from one syllable to \nthe other, occurs, e.g. Ki^<i>v (Ion.) instead of x\'TaJi/, ^ciSaOra, A/c, eV^eOrci\', hinc, \n(Ion.), instead of iurav^a, iyrev^ev; Kv^prj (Ion.) instead of x^P\xc2\xb0^P^- \n\n<r and t, e. g. noretSav, tir^rovy e^Kari, tu, r4 (Dor.) instead of Iloo\'eiSwi\', l\xc2\xbbe- \n(Tov, eXKotriy <rv, ae. The Attic forms tcDtA.oi\', beet ; rr\\\\iay sieve (from (r^w), \nrvp^f] (from ffvpu), turba ; T-rj/jLepoy, to-day, and TtJTes, this year (the two last only \nin the comedians, but in tragedians and in other Attic writers aiifupoy^ <rriT\xc2\xabs)j \nare in the Ion. and Common language o-eDrXoi\', (njXioy a-vpfirj. \n\n<r<r and tt. Instead of aff, employed in the older and the later Ionic, in old \nAttic and in most other dialects, \xe2\x80\x94 the new and often also the middle Attic \nin most words uses tt, e. g. rdffaw, yXuaaa; but Att. t<\xc2\xa3tt\xc2\xab, yKurra. (But \nwhen a-o" results from composition, it remains unchanged.) Yet the Ionic \nforms prevail, not only in the older Attic writers, but are also found in other \nauthors, some words always having aa, e. g. ir<itT<rot, to scatter; \xc2\xbb-Hj<r<r\xc2\xab#, to \ncrouch; fivff<ros, a deep; irTiaau, to husk; irruao-cu, to /old; fipdaactt to sJtaJce ; \nirr^a-ffu, to cower; ipeaau (ipeTTw is rejected), etc. \n\n<r and v in the Dor. verb-ending -fies, e. g. rvwrofits (instead of the common \nform TviTTOfiev, see \xc2\xa7 220, 6) ; also alfs Dor. instead of aicV. \n\n0-5 instead of ( (JEol., so also in Theoc.) but only in the middle of words, e. g. \nficXiffSerai, fxiaZav instead of pL^Xi^fToiy fif^wy or fid^wyy not at the beginning of \nwords, nor if Sr precedes, or <r follows, e. g. /iox>&iCo\xc2\xbb^\xc2\xab. i-ri<p^Co^<ra. \n\n^and tt, a-vplrreiVy app.6miy (Att.) instead of avpl^ttyy apfi6(\xe2\x82\xaciv. \nHere belong : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nI and or and acr, e. g. ^vv (Epic and old Attic) instead of avy ; St^ds and rpt^Ss \n(Ion.) instead of Stcro-Js, Tpiaa-Ss ; /c\\ci| Dor. instead of kXcus (jcAcIt) ; even in the \nPut. and Aorists, the Dorians, and also Homer, in several verbs use { instead \nof (T, see \xc2\xa7 223, 5. \n\n(c) The Labials ^ and tt, \xe2\x80\x94the first Att., the last Ion., \xe2\x80\x94 e. g. atr<p<ipayos Att., \naa-rrdpayos Ion. So -ffiol. and Dor. ir, instead of <p, e. g. ofiwl (-\xc2\xa3ol.) instead of \nafitpl ; hence in the Common language. a/iTre\'xetv, etc. \n\nfi and IT, e. g. ireSd (iEol. and Dor.) instead of fierd, \n\n(d) The double consonants | and \\p, and the two single consonants of which \nthey are formed, though transposed, in the ^ol. dialect, e. g. tricfVos, rrdXtt \ninstead of ^eVos, ypaXlsy yet only at the beginning of a word. So ff<^ and f , \ne. g. t|/\xe2\x82\xac Dor. instead of a-<pe. \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 205. j CONTRACTION AND DIAERESIS. \n\n\n\n24] \n\n\n\nChange op the Vowels. \n$ 205. Contraction. \xe2\x80\x94 Diaeresis. \n\n1. In the Dialects, the foUowing contractions, which differ from those men- \ntioned in \xc2\xa7 9, are to be noted: \xe2\x82\xaco and ^ov, sometimes also oo and oe are con- \ntracted into \xe2\x82\xaci; in Dor. and Ion. \xe2\x80\x94 not, as comraonlv, into ov; so oo, aov, and \noou (Ion.) are contracted into \xe2\x82\xacu \xe2\x80\x94 not, as usual, into a, and ov, e. g. ^^eCfrom \n<pi\\4ov = <f>i\\ov; TTAeCvey from TrAe\'o^/es ; irWpedmes from irk-npSoyres = n\\npo^ \nTfj; dSiKolev from iSiKoioe = iSiKaiov; elpcir.vy from ,lpJ>Taou = upcirco^ - y^. \n\\ev<Ta from yekdovca = yeX^aa; SiKcuivai from SiKaiooVai = SiKaioVai. But \ncommonly the Dorians contracted o\xe2\x82\xac into a; (instead of ov), e. g. rvpSem-a = \nTup<DvTo instead of rvpodtn-a, piyiHiv instead of {>iyovy. \n\n2. Ao, ooi/, and cuw are contracted in the Doric dialect into d (instead of <w), \nnamely, in verbs in -(\xc2\xa3\xc2\xab, in genitives in -oo and -a\xc2\xab,/, in substantives in -fL^v, \nGen. -(\xc2\xa3oi/or, and in proper names in -Aooy, e. g. <^v<ra^cs, xoAa^i,- 76Aav from* \n<pv(TdoyTfs, xa^dovai, y(\\dwy] \xe2\x80\x94 Tay Kopay from rdwy Kopdwy = rail/ Kopu>u;-~ \nnocruSa^, -avos, Att. HocrciJi./, -\xc2\xab./os ; \xe2\x80\x94 Mcvf\'Ady, \'ApK^frfAdy, Gen. -a, Tdt. -a. \n\n3. A\xe2\x82\xac and a\xc2\xabi are contracted in the Dor. (but not in Pindar) into t, and ri \ninstead of d and ^, in verbs, e. g. iipoiri^. <poirfi5 instead of ^<poira, dioiras. Seo \n4 222.111.(1). \' \n\n4. The AtUc dialect is the o of the other dialects, particularly of the \nlater Ionic; since, while the otU. ....:ccts often avoid contraction, and the later \nIonic commonly, the Attic almost always admits it The tendency of the later \nIonic towards uncontracted syllables is so great, that it even resolves the long \nsounds (which are never resolved in the other dialects) into their simple ele- \nments, e. g. <pi\\(fai instead of tpiXi}, which had been contracted from <pt\\(T}. \nEpic poetry often uses, indiscriminately, contracted and uncontracted form\'s, \naccording to the necessity of the verse, e. g. adKwy and luca>y. \n\n5. On the contrary, it is a special peculiarity of the Ionic dialect, that while \nit dcli<,\'hts to avoid contractions, it still, in particular cases, admits them, where \nthe Attic dialect docs not, e. g. ip6s (r), Iptis, iptiaaadai Ion., instead of UpSs, \netc., and especially the contraction of orj into u, particularly in the verbs fiouy \nand youy, c g. r^oxra, rvoxra (ayyuxrcurKty Hom. from iyi/otw), iyytvuKa instead \nof ifioTiaa, iv6T)<Ta, iyv(v67\\Ka ; so oyZ^Kovra ill Homer, instead of oy^oiiKoyra. \n\n6. The opposite of contraction is Diaeresis (5\xc2\xbba//>\xe2\x82\xaca<s), the separation of a \ndiphthong into its vowels. Diaeresis is specially used in the jY.oI. dialect. \nThe use of it in Homer, also, is not rare ; most frequently, in such words as \nseparate the two vowels by means of the Digamraa, namely, ai in -ndXs : av in \n4i>T^^, breath (from &/Vi); di)o-TaA\xc2\xabor, dirty; d in ^cr/cw, to make like, Hhto, \nfiler ou, ^KTrjy; cu very often in the adverb id (= cJ, weU), e. g. ib Kpiyas. IOktI- \nluyos ; when ^ v, p, or a follows id in compounds then they are doubled, e. g. \ndv^ifKiris, iiyyTjTos, it^^oos, i6<T<r\xe2\x82\xac\\fxos \', oi in 6is {6Fis, ovis], 6iofKu (comp. opi- \nnor), 6icrT6sy &i^a, \xc2\xa3ii^ay (fix)m oXyyvfu). \n\n21 \n\n\n\n245^ DIALECTS. [i 206. \n\n$ 206. Crasis, Synizesis, Elision, N Paragogic, \n\nHiatus. \n\n1. In particular instances the Dialects differ from the laws of Crasis stated in \n^\xc2\xa710 and 11 ; namely, in the Ionic dialect and in Pindar and Theoc, the o of \nthe Article coalesces with d and forms \xc2\xab, and with ot and forms \xc2\xab, e. g. rh &ya\\- \nua = r&ya\\fia ; so roihrj^es, twut-J, wvfjp, wvdpes, Zy^pamoL, cpir6\\oi, from rh 0^.77- \n&es rh avrS, 6 avfjp, ol &udpeSj ot &v^poeTroi, 01 anrSXoi. In Herodot. OCCUr, Sipiaros, \na}vr6s, SaAoz, with the smooth instead of the rough breathing (from 6 ipicrros, \n6 avrSs, ol &?J^oi) ; Homer uses Crasis seldom, namely, only in Hpurros, wvrSs, \nrdXKa, ov/xSs {instead of & iiJ.6s), roijueKUf oweKa (instead of ov tytKa) ; Kayd is \ndoubtful. \n\n2. Instances of Crasis in Doric are : r&\\yeos, t&vtqu instead of rod &\\ycos, \nr^ &UTpw ; so and e = w, at and c = 77, e. g. 6 c\\a<pos = &\\a(pos, 6 i^ = w|, koI \n4k = K7]Ky Koi elire = k^tc, koL idv or ijv = K^v, which last is also Ion. \n\n3. Ionic writers admit the common Crasis in ov, in the ]Masc. and Neut. of \nthe Art. and in eVepos, e. g. ovreposy rovrepov. \n\n4. The use of Synizesis (\xc2\xa7 12) is very frequent in the Homeric poems: \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) In the middle of words, it is oftenest found in the following combination of \nvowels (the vowels over which the line is placed being pronounced as one \n\nsyllable, whether consisting of two or more vowels) : ca, \xe2\x82\xaco, coi, tas] \xe2\x82\xac\xe2\x80\xa2, \n\n\xe2\x82\xac01, \xe2\x82\xacov ; \xe2\x82\xacw, \xe2\x82\xacCi> ; e.- g. CTTjiS^ea, ^/*eos, dreol, xp^f\'^o\'^^i Tcdveorre ; much rarer \n\nin a\xe2\x82\xac, m, tai, itj, iri, to, 6. g. ae^Xevav, Tr6\\ias, ir6\\ios] 00 only in \n\n[^ySooi/; vol only in BaKpvoi<ri] rji in $77(0(0, Srjiwv, ijiioKri, ffta ; \n\n(b) Between two words in the following combination of vowels : ij a, 1) c, ij if , \n\n7j 6J, rj ov, rj 01 ; ei ov; \xc2\xbb a, <u ov ; the first word is either ff, ^, 5^, fi-fj, and \niirei, or a word with the inflection-endings, tj, \xc2\xab, e. g. fj, ov, Sij cupveiiraros, \nu^ &W01, eiXaTrlvTj ije ydfios, ac^iarop ov^ \'vt6v. \n\n5. Elision (\xc2\xa7\xc2\xa713 and 14) is found very often in Homer, particularly as fol- \nlows : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) The o is elided in the PI. Neut. and the Ace. Sing, of the third Dec, \nrarely in the Aor. ending -aa, e. g. &Xcif ifii Od. /*, 200 ; commonly in \nthe particle &pa\\ \n\n(b) The \xe2\x82\xac in e/ie, /ne, (re, etc. ; in the Voc. of the second Dec, in the Dual of \nthe third Dec, in endings of the verb, and in particles, e. g. 5e, tc, t^c, \netc. (but never in iB4). \n\n(c) The I in the Dat. PL of the third Dec. ; much rarer in the Dat. Sing^ \nand only when it could not be mistaken for the Ace, e. g. xa*P\xc2\xab St ry \ntpviSir* \'OSuo-eus, H. /c, 277; in S^jut, (J;*^, and <r<^<; in adverbs of place in \n-^t, except those derived from substantives ^ in iUofft ; finally, in all end- \nings of the verb; \n\n(d) The in air6, vttS (but never in 7rp<J), in Svo, in the Neut. of pronounj \n(except r6), and in all endings of the verb ; \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 207.] LENGTHENING AND SHORTENING OP -V^OWELS. 243 \n\n(e) The oi in endings of the verb ficu, tcu, a^cu {<rat only in ^tr* 6KiyrrT\xe2\x82\xac\\4a>y, \nn. 0, 245, and at in the Norn, of the first Dec. in 6^u oSwot, D. A, 272) ; \n\n(f ) The 01 in fiot, to me, and in the particle, toi. \n\n6. The y paragogic (^ 15) is commonly rejected in Ion. prose, e. g. trav \neA\xe2\x82\xac|a. \n\n7. The Hiatus (\xc2\xa7 8) is admitted by Homer in the following cases : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) In long vowels or diphthongs either in the Arsis of the verse, e. g. \nain-t^e \\ a \'05u [ a^i ; or in the Thesis, in which case the long vowel or \ndiphthong is considered short, e. g. otKoi i \\ aay ; \n\n(b) When the vowel does not admit Elision, or but rarely, e. g. irouSl dfivvev ; \n\n(c) When two words are separated by a punctuation-mark, e. g. oAA\' &ya, fi \nfiffxovis y\xe2\x82\xac ; \n\n(d) In the Fem. Caesura (i. e. the caesura succeeding a short syllable) after \nthe first short syllable of the third foot ; \xe2\x80\x94 as this caesura here divides the \nline into two parts, it is opposed to the close connection which would \narise from eliding the final vowel, e. g. \n\nKfiy^ 1 5\xc2\xab rpv<pd \\ \\eia \\\\ &fi | etnrcTO \\ x^\'P^ Ta I X^h^ ^- 7> 376. \ntS>v 01 I ef iye | yoirro \\\\ i \\ v\\ fifyd \\ pouri ye \\ ve\'i^A.?;, II. \xc2\xab, 270 ; \n\n(e) In the metrical Diaeresis,\' after the first and fourth foot of the verse, e. g. \n\ntyx^^ I \'iSo^eK^oy ayavov AevKoXlSao, H. /i, 117. \n\nv4fj.rf/ou iir \'ArpflSjj ^Ayafiffivovt \\ oZKov "Oyeipoy, H. j9, 6. Comp. f, 422 J \n\n(f ) Where the first word has the apostrophe, e. g. ScVSpc* ei^oAAcv ; \n^) Sometimes in proper names ; \n\n(h) Words, which have the digarama occasion no Hiatus (^ 203, 3), e. g. \n\nov I 56 oftj 1 irouSas ^ I aCKfy (= ou5e Fovs). \n\n^ 207. Lengthening and Shortening of Vowels. \n\n1 . The follo\\N\'ing vowels are lengthened : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nA in Homer is sometimes lengthened into cu ; this occurs in cueros, aUi, ayai\' \no/tou, instead of atrSs, etc.; so also irapcd (also Karcu$aTal), in the tragedians \nSial, and analogous to these, vwcd, instead of irapd, Sid, {nr6. \n\n& into 7j in Homer, in i^fpf^oyrai, ityept^ovrat, i,yffji6fis in the Arsis, conse- \nquently on account of the metre. \n\nd into oM before \xc2\xabr (JEol.) in the Ace. PI. of the first Dec. ; also in fi4\\aus and \nrd\\aus instead of /xeXdr, rdXas, rats instead of ris, KaXa7s instead of koaCis ; in \nPindar, in the first Aor. Act. Part., e. g. r{np(us, -euco instead of -as, -d<ra; but \nalways iras. \n\nAv into (vv (Ion.) in rpavna, bavfxa and its derivatives : rpdvfia, ^rt\xc2\xab>^)/ia, \n^<nvfjLd(<u ; and in pronouns compounded with aiirSs into wv, e, g. ewvrov, <re\xc2\xabw- \nrov. ifjLfwvroy instead of tavrov, etc. ; so also r<avT6 instead of raurS. \n\nE into 6\xc2\xab in the Ion. writers before a Liq. in a number of words, e. g. elyeK^ \n(also in Attic prose), KeiySs, (elyos, (TTeiy6s, elpardu. Homer lengthens e int^ \n\n* Metrical Diaeresis, is where a word and a foot end togethei. \n\n\n\n244 . DIALECTS. [\xc2\xa7 207. \n\n\xe2\x82\xac( according to the necessities of the verse, in other words, also, which in Ionic \nprose have e, e. g. etv, inrelp, -n-upas, end, (ppeiara (from <ppeap, a well) ; also beforo \nvowels in adjectives in -eos, e. g. xp\'^o\'^\'oy \'\xe2\x96\xa0> i^i substantives and pronouns, e. g. \n(TTreroy, eVeto ; in verbs in -ea>, e. g. reXela, iruiiw, also in iXws instead of \xe2\x82\xac\xc2\xabj, \nunfiY; sometimes also in the Augment and Reduplication, e. g. ilhi)Kov^a, fioi- \nKv7ai, SetSio, SetSexaTcw. \n\nE into 7} (Hom. and Dor.), in the Dec. of substantives in -cur, e. g. ficuriXevs, \nGen. -Tjos, etc.; further {also Ion.), in adjectives in -etos, e. g. ficunXiiios, royal; \nlikewise in single words, e. g. KXrfis, K\\r)i5o5 (Ion.), etc., instead of K\\fis, and \nin very many substantives in a of Dec. I., e. g. oATj^tTj instead of aXri^eia. \n\nH sometimes into at ( JSol.), e. g. bvalaKU) instead of bvi)<rK(i). \n\nO into 01 (Ion. and Hom.) before a vowel in several words, e. g. irotTy, xoiTyetr, \nXpotT?, pot^, etc. ; in the Gen. of the second Dec. in Homer, e. g. bioio instead \nof i^eoG, and in (poiuios, xopoiTinrlr], 6Sonr6piov, ayKoiyT)<n{v), and rryyolTja-fiv). \n\nO is changed into ov (Ion. and Hom.) before a Liq. or Sigma, still only in \xe2\x80\xa2 \ncertain number of words ; and, in the Dor., before a Liq. into o>, e. g. \n\nKSpos Ion. Kovpos Dor. Kupos ii6vos Ion. fiovvos \n\nSvofia " oivofxa " Hvofia "OKvfnros " OCKvfiTos ; \n\nalso in the oblique cases of 56pv and yow. \xe2\x80\x94 But substantives, which have the \nvariable vowel o, cannot be thus lengthened, e. g. ir6vos from treyofuu, 56fios from \n\nO into ft) in Homer, on account of the verse, in Aid>w<rosy KrjTweis, rpctx^t \nwwTciofjLai (and also npoxo-oi^ vordoficu). \n\nT into ov often (Dor.), e. g. dovydrrjp instead of dvydrrip. In Homer, in \nflk-flXov^a. \n\n2. The Epic dialect can resolve contracted syllables, when necessary, \nnamely, d into aa, a into cm ; tj into e\xc2\xbbj, firi, rprf ; w into o<i>, \xc2\xabo, oxv ; parricularly \nin the inflection of verbs, e. g. dpdas instead of ipas, Kpimfop instead of Kp^vowy \n6p6a> instead of 5pw, yeXiaovres instead of y^Xuvres, ri^uxaca instead of rj^Aca \nalso <j>6(i}s instead of (pSis, light (from <pdos), and proper names in -<f>wy, e. g. \nArjfio^ocav. \n\n3. Another mode of lengthenitig a vowel in the Epic dialect is by resolving \nan original Digamma or a Spiritus Asper into a vowel, e. g. c^ktjXos and \xe2\x82\xacKr}\\os \n{FcKTjXos), odpos instead of \'dposy bound; ovXos instead of o\\os, ijiKios instead of \n^\\ios; eia-os instead of ?o-os ; elKlaa-a) instead of iXiaau (comp. volvo), rjws instead \nof cW. In the Ionic, and sometimes in the Epic dialect, the w (contracted \nfrom ao and ow), is resolved by c, e. g. (Ik4tw) i/crrcoj instead of btirouay xuAew \ninstead of TrvXdwv. \n\n4. The following vowels are shortened : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nAt into d before a vowel, often in the JEol. dialect, e. g. apxaost \'AXk&os \ninstead of apxaTos, ^A\\Ka7os ; in Homer, in erdpos, Irdlpij, erapiC^f^ai\' \n\nEl into e before liquids (Ion. and in Horn.), in the forms x^P^^f X^P^y ivorsx \nX^ip, hand, so also Att. x^po*""* X^P<^^] also (Ion. and Dor.) before a vowel, in \nProparoxytones in -eios, and in Properispomena in -cla ; in Homer, only in a \nfew Fern, adjectives in -wy, e. g. \n\n\n\n1207. 1 LENGTHENING AND SHORTENING OF VOWELS. 245 \n\nivirijSfoSf -\xe2\x82\xac77, \'^ov Ion. instead of -\xc2\xabor ixeo instead of wKe7a from ukvs \nTcAeoy, -en, -\xe2\x82\xacoy " " -uos /Sa^erj " fia^eTa ** $a^s \n\n\xe2\x82\xacvp4ri from, eu^u; " " -cTa Scwrerj \'" Socrera " Sotrvsj \n\n60 also in Horn. \'Epfiea instead of \'Epuda] also ei in Ion. is shortened into e, \nwhen two consonants ftllow which make the vowel long by position, e. g. \ninr65\xe2\x82\xac^is instead of dxoSet^ts, ixi^uv instead of fiuCtai/, Kpeaawy instead of KpelcF\' \n(Twy; finally (Doric) in forms of the verb, e. g. oet\'Ses instead of aeiScis. \n\nREitABK 1. In the ^ol. dialect, et before a liquid is very often shortened \ninto \xe2\x82\xac, and the Liq. is doubled, e. g. Krevvw, a-irepfxa, wreAAci, instead of KTflyw, \n\nH is changed into e in Horn, in apytri, apytTa, from apyfjs, -tjtos, shining, and \nin the Subj. ending -ere instead of -tjt\xe2\x82\xac ; also -ofiev instead of -a>/xe\xc2\xbb/, e. g. etSeTCf \ndoffp^\'l^ofify. \n\n0( into often in the Dor. and ^Eol. dialects, e. g. iro\xc2\xab instead of iroiu. \n\nOv into o in Horn, in the compounds of touj, e. g. aeWSiros, apri-Kos ; often \nin Theocritus in the Ace. PI. of the second Dec, e. g. rus \\lkos instead of tout \n\\6kovs\', also JEol. /3(JAA(z instead of fiovXii] so too in Horn. $6\\erauy fi6\\\xe2\x82\xaca^ \nfirom fiov\\oucu. \n\n5. On the Ionic-Attic interchange of the vowels, see \xc2\xa7 16, 5. \n\n6. The use of Syncope (\xc2\xa7 16, 8) is frequent in Uomcr, particularly in forms \nof the verb, as will be seen below ; he also has rfirre instead of r/xore, yKcucTo- \n<l>dyos instead of yaXcucTOipdyos. \n\n7. Apocope (airoK(rrfj) is the rejection of a short final vowel before a word \nbeginning with a consonant. It is employed by the Epic and Doric poets, \nsometimes also by the Ionic, and in a few single forms even by Attic prose \nwriters. It occurs with the prepositions, e. g. ayd, Kardy vapdy rarely with air6 \nand inrS, and with the (Epic) conjunction 6.pa. The accent is then thrown \nback; 6.y before /3, ir, <Py pi, is changed into 6.yL (^ 19, 3), e.g. &/i /3ajfior<ri, \nitfifioiiyfiy, tifi. TrdXayosy &/x <p6yoyy d/x/ic\'w; the t in kiit is always assimilated \nto the following consonant, except that the corresponding smooth mute stands \nbefore a rough mute (\xc2\xa7 17, 4), e. g. Ka8 Svyofuy, icoir <pa\\apa, kcuc Ke<pa\\T}Sy Kay \ny6yv] examples of air6 and inr6 are, ainrf/ijfej, u)3/3aAAeiv (Hom.); examples \nfrom Attic prose, afi^rrjSy afifiokdsy X. Cy. 4, 5, 46. 7. 5, 12, i/iTr&my, \n\nRem. 2. In the concurrence of three consonants, assimilation is omitted, and \nthe tinal consonant of the preposition is rejected, e. g. KOKTovf, Kdax^^^> afiyd- \nafiy instead of iceucirrcu\'e, Kdaax^^f, afifMydati. \n\nS. Prothcsis (^ 16, 10) occurs in Homer, in currfpoirfi {aTcpoirf)), e\'^eXw (i^eXeu), \ntKflyos {Kuyos), ^pvofiai {fivofuu)] Homer also often resolves the i^into the vowel \n\xc2\xab, namely, efpoTj, ecSfo, ic\'iKoari, tlaos. (eiiroy, ^cASo/uu, ifpfieyos. \n\n9. Sometimes, for the sake of the metre. Homer inserts \xe2\x82\xac, e. g. aS\xe2\x82\xac\\<pe6s, \nK(yf6s, instead of ahf\\<p6s, Kfvos; so also in the Gen. PI. Fem. aifTeuy, Trpuyritav. \nTo prevent the accumulation of short syllables, he inserts in several compound \nwords an \xc2\xbbj in place of the short vowel, e. g. Tayr]\\ey4os, eWj^SoAos, e7r7j\xe2\x82\xacTaj\'(^s, \noAiyijTcAcw, i?\\Miprj^6\\os, instead of rawX., eVi\'/S., ivier., 6\\tyov., i^xupofi6\\os, \n\n21* \n\n\n\n246 DIALECTS. [\xc2\xa7 208. \n\nAn I is inserted in Homer after oi in ofjLo\'uos instead of Bfwiosj and in the Dual \n\xe2\x80\xa2otiv instead of -oiu. \n\n10. The later Ionic, also, sometimes inserts t before a long vowel : (a) in \nsome genitives of substantives and Fem. pronouns before a, and in oZros, roi- \novTos, and avrSs before long inflection-endings, e. g. oj/Spfuy, xv^^ov, ^KeivtW, \nToureW, avriwu, avTew ; (b) in some forms of the verb before a long vowel, e. g. \nla-Teaai, Swew/iiai, Sweovrai, (c) some verbs in -\xc2\xab have forms as if from -4a>, \ne. g. fidWco <rvfjL^aX\\e6fi\xe2\x82\xacyos, vTrepjSoAAeeii\' ; irte\'^w irif^evfifvos (also in Hom. \nmeCevv instead of i-me^eov) ; also ei|/ee, eVei\'xee, dt^Aee, from ^to, cVcx\xc2\xbb, ^Xov ; \nfinally, the three following forms of the Perf. in -\xe2\x82\xac\xc2\xab instead of -e : oix^Kecy \n\n\xc2\xa7 208. Change of Consonants. \n\n1. In the Ion. dialect, the rough breathing has no effect on the preceding \nsmooth mute, e. g. ott\' ov, iTr-fj/xcpos, ovk Saius, etc. \n\n2. In the Hom., Ion., and Dor. dialects, a 5 or ^ remains before ;* in certain \nwords and phrases (contrary to ^ 19, 1), e. g. 65/*^ instead of otrfirj, tifity. opxv^ \nfiSs, iireiri^ijLev, KeKopv^aeyos ; also in the Hom. dialect, the v remains before <r \n(contrary to \xc2\xa7 20, 2) in avcrds, avax^^^^iVy irav<rviii) instead of itaffax^lTi \\ \nfinally % before /it (\xc2\xa7 19, Rem. 1) io kKaxM-fvos, acute. \n\n3. The Metathesis (^ 22) of p often occurs in Hon;^. and in other poets, e. g. \nKpaSiri instead of Kophia, heart, Kaprepos and KpdrtpoSf strong, tcdprurros, fidpSurros \n(from fipaSvs, slow) ; also in the second Aorists ixpa^ovy thpa^ovy ^Spcucoy (from \nTrep^a, to destroy, Sap^dvu, to sleep, StpKOficu, to see); here belongs also lififiporoy \ninstead of ^ixparov (= rifxapTov, according to \xc2\xa7 24, 2). \n\n4. Homer doubles a consonant (comp. ^ 23, Rem.) after a short voweL \naccording to the necessities of the verse in the follov>\'ing cases : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) The liquids and Sigma on the addition of the augment, mostly when \nthere are three successive short syllables, e, g. txXa$ov, ffi^ia^yy frreof, \neffffeva ; \n\n(b) In compounds also, the liquids and Sigma are doubled, e. g. vf6\\Xoxrros \n(from j/eos and \\ovw) ; aiifx.opos, ^iXo/njuefSTjs ; ayr4<p\xe2\x82\xac\\os, ivvyrp-os] ficM^ \npoos ; ivcraeXixos ; \n\n(c) In the inflection of the Dat. in -<rj, and of the Fut. and Aor., e. g. yficvaaiy \nddfiaffai ] KoX^aaa., 6fj.6crffat, ^pdaao/MU, i^eiyiaffa; \n\n(d) In the middle of several words, e. g. Sca-ovy T6<rffovy owlcau, \'rp6ar<r>\xc2\xbb, \nfieffaos, ve/teVcra, vefiea-arj^eis, ^vaa-ayScis. \n\nHomer doubles the mute ir in Interrogative pronouns which begin with Sir, e. g. \noTTTTus, etc.; \xe2\x80\x94 K in Tr4\\\xe2\x82\xacKKov, ireAeKKaw; \xe2\x80\x94 t in Stti, Sttco, Srrfv; \xe2\x80\x94 5 in (SScxre, \nTre piddelo\'aa\'a, aSSees, &5S7]v, \n\nRemark. The doubling of p, which always takes place in the Common \nlanguage when the augment is prefixed, and in compounds when a short vowel \nprecedes, may be omitted in the Epic dialect, according to the necessities of th6 \nverse, e. g. epeCov from p4C<o, xp^f^opvros. For the same reason, one of the \ntonsonants, which is elsewhere doubled, is omitted in the Epic dialect, though \n\n\n\n\n4 209.] QUANTITY. 247 \n\nrarely, e. g. *05u(reus, *Axi^evs, ipdpvyos, instead of \'OSycrtreys, AxtAAcus, \nipdpvyyos. \n\n5. Homer often places a consonant before a short syllable, to make it long \nby position, namely, a k in v^wfivos^ tLwoLXafivoSy ISpvy^, afiyvy^, vir\xe2\x82\xacfiyf}iJ.vKe ; \na T after x in irroXe/ioj, TrrtJAis, irrohU^pov ; a 3- after x ^ x^^\'-M\'^\'^s, Six^d^ \nrpix^o., rerpax^f^j and after A. or p in fiaXbcucos, iypTjy^p^curi\' 5 or he places a 7 \nbefore 5 in iplySomros, iySoirmjcre, and a <r before fi and k in <TyiiKp6s (also Att. \n^ 24, 4), aKcSJu\'yvfj.i (comp. KiSinj/jLi), Cfioyepus (comp. fxoycpus), <r/u.e/)SaAeos. \nHere belongs also the Epic prefix of ^ (= k, according to \xc2\xa7 24. 3), before /Spo- \nres in composition, so as to strengthen the long syllable and give fulness to the \nword, e. g. AfifiporoSt repi^lfifiporos, and in af^pourir] instead of a<pcuTlT}. \n\n$ 209. Quantity. \n\nFrelimixaby Remark. Only a few general rules will be given here ; the \nquantity of particular words, not embraced in these rules, may be learned from \nrules previously given, or by obsen\'ation. \n\n1 . A syllable which has the vowels e or 0, followed by another vowel or a \nsingle consonant, is short by nature, e. g. r^jcdy, d^eds, /3di?. \n\n2. A syllable which has the vowel tj or \xc2\xab, or a diphthong, is long by nature; \nso all contracted and circuraflexed syllables are long by nature, e. g. "ijpus, \novpav6s^ 6.KWV (instead of atKwv), irlfid (from ^rf/xdc), irar, crlros^ ^^xoSy vvv. \n\n3. A syllable wliich has a doubtful vorwel (a, \xc2\xbb, w), followed by another vowel \nor a single consonant, or at the end of a word, is short by position, e. g. *\xc2\xab/- \nBovTfs., Saifioyti], <^ii7, f^XVy <P^os, apytpfos. \n\n4. A syllable which has a sliort or doubtful vowel followed by two consonants \nor a double consonant, is long by position ; e. g. iidadcu, iKaro/xfivy Se^aa^cu, \n\nExceptions to No. 3. \n\n(a) a of nouns of the first Dec, which have the Gen. in -as, is long in all the \nCases in which it occurs, e. g. vntpd, <pi\\la, -as, -f , -d*\', etc. (Comp. \xc2\xa7 45.) \n\n(b) a in the Dual of all nouns of the first Dec, is long, e. g. Nom. Sing. \nkfaiyd, Dual Aca/vd. \n\n(c) a is long in the Gen. Sing, in -ao and Gen. PI. in -cLjv, e. g. \'Ar/je/Jdo, \nayopAuy. \n\n(d) the ending -as of the first Dec is long, both in the Nom. and Gen. Sing., \nand in the Ace. PL, e. g. Nom. rafilds, Gen. aKias, Ace. PI. S6^ds. \n\n(e) a of masculine and feminine participles in -as is long ; so also other words \nin -as where yr or y have been dropped, e. g. aKovads {dKowrayrs), d\xc2\xabcojJ- \n<rd<ra, \'ktt&s, $0.s^ ylyds {yiyayrs). fifKds {fifXtivs). \n\n(f ) a in the third Pers. PI. Perf. Ind. Act., e. g. mv<pd<Ti. \n\n(g) u is long in the Sing, of the Prcs. and Impf Ind. Act. of verbs in -u/a, \nalso in the masculine and feminine Sing, of the participle; e. g. Sct/cvO/u, \ni^fUyvy^ SciKyis, SeiKyvtra. \xe2\x80\x94 Other exceptions maj be learned by obser* \nvatiou. \n\n\n\n248 DIALECTS. \' [^ 209 \n\n5 In Epic poetry, a mute and a liquid (\xc2\xa7 27, Rem 2) commonly make a \nsyllable long by position ; the vowel is shortened, for the most part, only when \nthe form cannot otherwise be suited to the verse, e. g. reixe(r"nr\\^Ta. \n\n6. The final syllable of a word in verse, is uniformly long by position : (a) \nwhen it ends with a consonant, and the following word begins with a conso- \nnant, e. g. KaSn I (xou Tpw I as; also (b) when the final syllable ends with a \nshort vowel, but the following word begins with a double consonant, or with \ntwo single consonants, which arc not a mute and liquid, e. g. aSfirt | ttjv, %y | \novira V I TTo ^vyhu | fjyayeu | di/^p, II. K, 293. But a mute and a liquid in this \ncase, always make the syllable in the Arsis long ; on the contrary, the syllable \nin the Thesis, may be either long or short according to the necessities of the \nverse ; e. g. /JL-fi [xoi \\ Sup" ipa \\ to. Trp6(pe \\ pe XP" I f^^i}^ \'A<ppo \\ Sittjs, II. 7, 64 ; \non the contrai-y, in the Thesis, ahrap \'6 \\ irK-rjalov \\ karii \\ kci, II. 8, 329 ; but \n^v^pa. 1 Srvrirhv i \\ Sura, ira. \\ Xai ire \\ irpco^ievov \\ oUaj), II. ir, 441. \n\nRem. 2. In the names ^Kafxavlpos, Zukw^s. ZcAcjo, even <r\xc2\xab and ( do not \nmake a syllable long by position in Homer j so also eir \\ end <tk4 \\ irapvoy^ Od. \ne, 237, occurs. \n\n7. A long vowel or a diphthong at the end of a word, in Homer, commonly \nbecomes short before a word beginning with a vowel, when it is in the Thesis, \nbut it remains long when it is in the ^Vi\'sis, or when the follomng word has the \ndigamma, e. g. ^j/xeV/; ] iv fiev \\ ^fcrcriv, II. a, 358. vTfs, & \\ fiey Kreo | tov, 6 5* \n&p\' I EvpvTOV 1 ^AKTopi 1 uvos, II. fi, 621. avrap 6 | fyvv \\ ^viv 4 \\ yl <pp\xc2\xabal \\ <p^vri \n\\a4v T6 {^(Tiv = -Ftjo-jc). But sometimes a long vowel in the Thesis is not short- \nened before words which do not have the digamma, especially in the fourth foot \nof an Hexameter, e. g. t^ fii} \\ fj.oi irare \\ pas iro^* 6 | fioi^ | fy^eo | Ti/tp, H. 5, \n410, and before a punctuation-mark, c. g. Ke7abai, | a\\A\' iird \\ fiuyoy, II. \xc2\xab, 685. \n\n8. A long vowel or a diphthong in the middle of a word before another \nvowel is but seldom shortened by the poets, and for the most part, in certain \nwords and forms; thus, e. g. in Homer, ivar} (\'"\'"), ifjuraios ("""\'), oTos {"), fit- \nfiXTjai ("""); and often in the Iambuses of the Attic dramatists, e. g. oTos, toios, \nToiovTos, TotdsSe, oUi (from o^oiiai), iroiuy ] and always before the demonstrative \ni in pronouns, e. g. rovrovi, avrau. \n\n9. In Epic poetry, a short syllable in the Arsis is usually considered long, \nif it stands at the beginning of a word, e. g. iunriSos | \'oucd/ia | tov irvp, II. e, 4 ; \nor at the end, in which case it is followed either by a liquid (X, /i, f, p), or a o" \nor 5, the sound of which is easily doubled in pronunciation, or by a word with \nthe digamma, e. g. Kal TreSi j d Aw | reCrro, II. /t. 283. .^oTe | pd V (= ^V)\xc2\xbb \nH. X, 226. \n\nRem. 3. A syllable in itself short, may be used as long or short in the same \nword, according as it is or is not, in the Arsis, e. g.^Apcj^A | pes fiporo \\ ?<oty4; \n\xe2\x80\x94 &vSp5S "l I (Tacriv and trKuova \\ \'\'laaaiv, \n\n10. Kot unfrequently in Homer, from the mere necessities of the verse, \nn, short vowel is measured as long in the Thesis, when it stands between \n170 long sj\'llables. This occurs in the middle of a word, and oftenest with \nI. 3. g. eo-,^\' uTTo 1 Self | 7j, II. t, 73, peri irpo | Stvfxx \\ i)(ri. J\\. j8, 588 ; this is rarely \ntlio case at the end of a word, e. g. iri\xc2\xbb/\xc2\xab/d\' | payyoKe \\ tjv, Od. p, 198. rp 8* ^ | \nuhv Top I yo) B?^oav \\ puivls \\ iaTe<t>(i I vam 11. \\. 3\xc2\xbb> \n\n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6$210,211.] FIRST DECLENSION. 249 \n\n\n\nB. DIALECTIC FORMS. \n\n$210. Homeric Suffix <j>i. (<I>lv). \n\n1. In the Homeric dialect there is, besides the Case-inflections, a Suffix (pi{v), \nwhich propedy and originally denotes the indefinite u\'?tere, like the local Dat. \n(see the Syntax) ; it is also used to express other relations of the Dat., as the \nDat. of the instrument, and with prepositions (such as in Lat. govern the Abl.), \nit expresses those relations of the Gen. which in Latin would be denoted by \nthe Abl. \n\n2. The Suffix <pt is found with substantives of all the declensions, and is \nalways annexed to the unchanged stem of the word : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nI. Declension only in the Singular: (a) Dat. i.yf\\-n-<pi, i^Aofrj^ (in the \nherd), dvprjtpiy before or rcitfiont the door (in several ancient editions r)<pi is \nincorrectly written with an Iota Subs. r)<pi) ; (b) Gen. (Lat. Abl.) airh \nvfvpr}<piy IdWeii\' [to shoot an arrow from the string), 4^ fvvi}(pi b^op^Ty [to spring \nfrom bed), KparepT]<pi filv<ph H. <l>, 501 (with great force), &fi r]o7 (paivoixtyr]\' \n<piy, Od. 8, 407 {as soon as the morning dawned). \nII, Declension both Singular and Plural. All these forms, without respect to \nthe accent of the Nom., are paroxytone {-otpiv) : (a) Dat. SaKpv6<piv {with \ntears), /x-narup ardXavros df6<piu {an adviser equal to the gods) ; \xe2\x80\x94 (b) Geni- \ntive (Abl.) airh or ix \xe2\x96\xa0iraa<xaX6<piv {to take from the pin), in df6<l>ti/ {through \ntl \' ). an 6<TTf6<piy {from the bones). , \n\nIII. y "n almost exclusively in the PI. *iy is here used with not a largo \n\nnumber of neuter substantives in -oi (Gen. -coj), also with KorvKriSaiy and \nravsy c. g. wphs KOTv\\rfioy6<pi{y) (with the union-vowel o), to the anns, yav- \n(pi{y) {at the ships) ; in words in -or, the ending -or must always be restored \nto its original form -es, since <pi is always annexed to the pure stem ; thus, \nKx\xc2\xabo\'<^\xc2\xab(\xc2\xbb\')i trvy 6xf<T<Pi{y), kot^ op\xc2\xabr<pi{y), airh, 5ti, iK (rri]^e<r<pi{y). \n\n$211. First Declension. \n\n1. (a) The Epic and Ionic writers use tj instead of the original long a (which \nthe Dorians use) through all the Cases of the Sing., e. g. ti/*4, -oj, -qi, -av \n(Dor.) ; ao<pir}, -7?s, -rj, -rjy, ^vprj, -ijj, yfriylrjs, -t), -\xe2\x96\xa0i)v (Epic and Ion.) ; so Jlriv^- \nAoiretTjs, IlTji/eAoireiTj, from IlT/i\'tAoircta, <Pp^Tprj, BopcT}S, Bopdr), BoptTjv. \n\nExceptions in Homer are S^d, goddess, -as, -a, -iv, Nai/<rj/cad, \xe2\x99\xa6c/d, also Alyelds, \nAvydds, \'Epfiflas, and some other proper names in -as pure. The Voc. of yvfi<pri \nis vv^Kpa instead of yv^Kfrn, H- 7, 130. Od. 5, 743. \n\n(b) In substantives in -fia and -oia, derived from adjectives in -t/s and -ovs, as \nalso in some other feminines. the short a in Attic is also changed into ij in \nIonic, e. g. aXrj^flTi, ayoiScjTj, finrXoirj, Kulaar] instead of aX-fj^na, ivaiSfia, \nct^Aoia, Kyicad, \n\n(c) The -^ol. and some other dialects have -d instead of -17s, as the Masc. \nending in the Nom. Sing., like the Latin. The Epic also uses this form, accord- \n\n\n\n250 DIALECTS [i 212 \n\nIng to the necessities of the verse, in a great number of words, particularly in \n-rd, e. g. tTTTTi^Td, ot\'xM\'/Ta, Kvavoxaira, yecpfX-nyepera, linrr}\\(iTa^ nrrrlfri, cwptJord. \nThe Voc. retains the ending -a in all these words. \n\n2. The Gen. Sing, of masculines in -tjs and -as originally ended in -do , -a\xc2\xab \nwas then contracted into -a (Dor. into -d). In Hom. both the uncontracted \nand contracted form is found; he also resolves the -\xc2\xbb, originating from \n\xe2\x80\xa2oo, by means of e (comp \xc2\xa7 207, 3) ; it is further to be remarked, that the -\xe2\x80\xa2 \nin respect to accent is considered short {\xc2\xa7 29, Rem. 7) and the c is always pro- \nnounced with the Synizesis; -e<\xc2\xbb becomes -\xc2\xab when a vowel or p precedes (still \nAtVetew, II. \xe2\x82\xac, 534). Thus there occur in Homer, \'Epfiflas, Gen. \'Epfjulao and \n\'Epfieio)\', Bop4-ns, Gen. Bopedo and Boptw. \'ArpelS-ns, \'ArpefSdo, and \'ATp\xe2\x82\xact5\xc2\xabtf, \nlK4Tao and t/ceTea ; iv/jL/jLeXiw, \'Aaiw. In Homer, then, the Gen. endings of nouns \nin -as or -tjs, are -oo, -w, or -ea\xc2\xbb (not -ov). The Gen. ending -c\xc2\xbb, becomes, in \nthe Ion. writers, the usual ending, e. g. iroKlrew, *ArpeiSea>. \n\n3. The Ace. Sing, and PI. of masculines in -r}s is commonly formed in the \nIon. dialect like the third Dec, e. g. rhu 5e<nr<^eo, roiis Se<rK6rfas from 86<nr<(T7jj, \n-ov, MtATtaSea from MiKriddj^s, -ov. \n\n4. The Gen. PL of all the endings was originally in -doef ; -degr was after- \nwards contracted into -u>v (Dor. in -ay). Homer uses both the uncontracted and \ncontracted forms, e. g. ^tawv and ^eoiv, irapeiduy and rapfiuy. He can also, \nas in the Gen. Sing., again resolve, by means of e, the -\xc2\xa3iy originating from \n\'dcoy^ the ending thus becomes -cW, which is commonly pronounced with \nSynizesis, e. g. wKiwv, ^pewy, ayopfuv. The Gen. ending -tety becomes in the \nIon. writers, the common form, e. g. Movafcay, rififwy. \n\n5. The Dat. PI. originally ended in -cuai(y) ; this ending is foimd in the Dor. \nwriters, in the Att. poets, and even in the older Att. prose writers ; in the Ion. \nwriters, -at<rt was changed into \xe2\x80\xa2\xe2\x96\xa0p<n{y) and -py; and in the Att. and Common \nlanguage, -aiai was shortened in -cus. In Homer, the Dat. PI. ends in -pcri, -pi, \nand -ots, yet the last is found only in ^ecus and iucraus. \n\n6. The Ace. PI., in JEol., ends in -cus (as in the second Dec in -ws instead \nof -ovs)^ and in Dor. in -as (as in the second Dec. in -os instead of -ovs), e. g. \nTa7s Tt/ioty (^ol.) instead of rhs rinds (but Dat. PL rifiauri) ; vatras Kovoat \n(Dor.) instead of irdcrds Kovpds. \n\n$ 212. Second Declension. \n\n1. Nominative Sing. Proper names in -Xoor are changed in the Dor. dialect \ninto -\\a.5 (Gen. d, Dat. f ), e. g. McveAdy instead of MtvfXaos, \'Suc6\\d.s. \'AoKftri- \n\\as. \n\n2. Genitive Sing. Homer uses both the common form in -ov, and that in -oio ; \n^he tragedians, also, in the lyric passages, use the ending -oio. Theocritus haa \nthe Dor. ending -w and -oio. \n\n3. Genitive Sing, and PL Some genitives are formed according to the \nanalogy of the first Dec. (a) Herodotus has some Masc. proper names in -os \nwith the ending -ew in the Gen. Sing., e. g. Bdrrcu instead of B^irrov, Kpol<rfmy \nK\\eofifip6T\xe2\x82\xaca>, Me/iiSAwipeft), and some Masc common nouns with the ending \n\n\n\nI\xc2\xbb \n\n\n\nk 213.] THIRD DECLENSION. 251 \n\n-*W in the Gen. PL, e. g. ite<r<T4wv\\ (b) The ending -omv instead of tie Ion. \n-4wv belongs to the Dor. (comp. alyav instead of cuyao>v from al^, ^ 213, 5). \n\n4. The Gren. and Dat Dual in the Epic dialect ends in -ouy instead of -oim^ \ne. g. &fu>itv instead of &ijuhv (^ 207, 9). \n\n5. The Dat. PI. originally ended in-ot0-i(v). This forni,\xc2\xbbas well as the \nabridged form in -<hs is found in Homer and in all the poets, and in Ion. prose \n\n6. The Ace. PL ends, in the Dor. writers (except Pindar) in -as and in -os \n(like -aj in the first Dec, ^ 211, 6), e. g. rus t6fia)s, y6/xoSt so also rws \\ay6s, the \nGlares; JEoL in -ets, e, g. xaavaXois instead of -ouy. \n\n7. Attic Declension. The Gen. Sing, in the Epic dialect ends in -ao, instead \nof -\xc2\xab, in IVrivtKeito (II. (, 489 ; though most MSS. have riTjveXeoto) from IItji/c- \nXcws, and in Tlcrewo from ncrews. \xe2\x80\x94 In yakwsy sister-in-law^ "A^vs and K\xc2\xabs, the \nftf originating by contraction, is resolved; in the Epic dialect, by means of o; \nhence yoXt^y, \'A^rfwr, Kows, Gen. -<Ja>. On the words ytKus, ISpcis, efxes, see \n4 213, 7. \n\n8. Contracted forms of the second Dec. are rare in Homer, namely, yovs only \nOd. ic, 240 (elsewhere v6os), x^^t^P^vsy II. A., 493 (but f, 138. x^Wp/^ooy) and \nXfifJM^^oi, II. 5, 452. also ndy^ovs, Tldj\'bov, Tlav^^. Homer docs not contract \nother words; in words in -eor, -\xe2\x82\xacoi/, he either lengthens the c into \xc2\xab (\xc2\xa7 207, 1), \nor employs SjTmesis, as the measure requires. \n\n\n\nL \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 213. Third Declension, \n\n\n\n1. In the Dor. uialect the long a here also takes the place of 17, e. g. udy, \nfidySs instead of /x^k, /iriy^St ctc.,\'\'\xc2\xa3AAdi\', \'EAAdycy, irotfiiy instead of irM/t^t\', Gen. \n"tyos, yt6Tds, -droi instead of I\'trfnjr, -ifTor. \n\nAt^p, d^, ^fi^Sy and all names of persons in -rfip, are exceptions to this \nDor. usage. \n\n2. In the Epic and Ion. dialects, on the contrary, ij commonly takes the place \nof the long a, as also elsewhere, e. g. ^pi}{, ofv^, tpr)^ instead of bwpd^, *<P\xc2\xab{\xc2\xab \n\n3. The Dat. PI. in the Epic dialect, end*, according to the necessities of the \nmeasure, in -aiiv), -a\xc2\xabri(r), -\xe2\x82\xacflri(i\'), and -(vviiy). The ground-form is -\xe2\x82\xac<Ti(y) \nand the strengthene<l form is -\xc2\xab<r<ri(\xc2\xbb\'). This ending is always annexed, like \nthe other Case-endings, to the pure stem, e.g. Kvy-f<T(ri (from Kva>y, Gen. Kvy6s), \nv(Kv-\xc2\xabr<n (from ytKvs, -v-os). The ending -\xc2\xabor\xc2\xbb(i\') is found in Homer only in \nXvfaiv, oU<ri, x*\'P*<^\'\xc2\xbb ^^^ kvixr-fffiy (from fivof, 6,vaKT-os). In Neuters, which \nhave a radical <r in tlie Norn., the c is omitted when it stands between two \nvowels (^25, 1), c. g. ^e\'-wro-i (instead of i-wta-taai from rh Utros), Sfird-eiTviy \n(from rh Sfiras). In stems in -av^ -ev, -ou (\xc2\xabif, (F, oF), the u (F) must be \nomitted, according to ^ 25, 2 ; thus, ^6t<r<Tt instead of $6F-\xc2\xabT<Tt, linrf)-ea<ri \ninstead of iinrf)F-\xc2\xabTai. The ending -ctri is annexed almost exclusively to \nstems which end in a vowel, c. g. rtKv-aat from ytKvs -v-os ; but also tpi-aai \nfrom Ipis {-iSos) and commonly -roairl from wovs {iro5-6s). The Dat. form in \n-cuTi never admits the doubling of <r, \xe2\x80\x94 The ground-form -\xe2\x82\xac<r< is very common \nin the Dor. poets and prose-writers ; also the Ionic prose has this form fre \nqucntly in stems ending in -k, e. g. fi-f]y\'tai. \n\n\n\n252 DIALECTS. [i 213 \n\n4. The Gen. and Dat. Dual in the Epic dialect, ends in -oiiv (as in the \nsecond Dec, \xc2\xa7 212, 4), e. g. iroSoliu, -Zeip-f}uouv. \n\n5. The Gen. PI. in the Ion. dialect often ends in -eccv, e. g. Xnvf<^v, aySpevw \n(\xc2\xa7 207, 10). Theocritus has tuu alyav (instead of t\xc2\xabi/ alyuv) from ^ olj, a goat^ \nafter the analogy of the first Dec. \n\n6. The Epic dialect sometimes forms the Ace. Sing, of words in -vs (stem v) \nin a instead of y, e. g. evpea -kovtov, ix^vcl, v4a from vavs. \n\n7. The words yeXcas, laughter; I5p(as, stveat ; epws, foye. which properly belong \nto the third Dec, in Homer follow the Attic second Dec. in some of the Cases, \ne g. ISpw, ldp(p instead of ISpcora and ISpcori; yeKu and yiXwv^ 7cAa, instead of \nyiXwTa and yeAwrt, ip(a instead of ip(jaTt. \n\n8. Words in -is,\' Gen. -tSoy. The Ilom., Ion., and Dor. dialects often \ninflect these substantives, particularly proper names, in -ioj, e. g. fifiyios, Horn., \n\xc2\xae\xe2\x82\xacfj.ios, Herod., Qerios, Dat. \xc2\xa9eVf, Horn. Those ending in -tr, -iSos, in the Epic \ndialect have the Dat. only in -t instead of -Si. Substantives in -i?ts, -TjtJoi, \nare sometimes contracted in the inflection, by the poets, e. g. xaprits, irappios \n(instead of -n-aprjiSos), Nr)pr}is, Nrj/jpSes. See \xc2\xa7 54 (c). \n\n9. The Neut. ods, wtos, ear, is in Dor. is, wtoj, etc., and in Horn, odas. Gen \novaros, PI. ovara] the Neuters, ariap, fat; oZ^ap, udder, and icfipajt^ end, havo \n-aros in the Gen., namely, (rreaTos, oClbaroL, irctparo, utifafft. In the words \nrepoy, wepoy, Kpeas, the Epic writers reject t, e. g. ripcua.^ -auv, -JLfaat(9)\\ Ktptf. \nDat.; PL Kepa, Kcpdcov, -de<r<Ti{p), and -atri{v) ; PI. Kpta, Kpduy, Kpfwr, and Kp\xc2\xabtiy, \nKp4a(ri{v). Among the Ionic writers these words, like 0p4ras, etc. (^ 61, Rem. \n1), often change the o into e, e. g. Kfpfos, icfpfo, Ktpdocv, rk r^pteu, Kp4(a<n(r). \nSee \xc2\xa7 54 (c). \n\n10. In the words irarrjp, ixiirrip, etc., Homer either retains or rejects the c \nthrough alt the Cases, according to the necessities of the verse, e. g. iydpos and \navdp6s, auepi and avdpl, etc., but only aySpuy. avhpdci and -4<r<n; yturrfip, yar- \nrepos, -4pi, and yaarpos, yacTTpl, yaarfpa, yacrrfpfs:, Ay\\}i-Tj-rt\\p, -rtrtpoSy and -rrrpos, \nArifiTiTepa] ^vydrrip, -repos, and -rp6s. etc., <^u7aT^pc<r<ri(i\'). but bvyarptiy ; fi-frfiP \nand TTOTTjp, -Tepos, and -rp6s. etc. See ^ 55, 2. \n\n11. In Homer, the word lx<i>p, hlood of the gods, has in the Ace. <x\'*\' msicad of \nIx^po-i ^wd Kvicewu, 6, mixed drink, has in the Arc. kvk(u \xc2\xab)r \xc2\xabfi\'rf<<i. See (f 56, \nEem. 1. \n\n12. In -auy, -ews, -ous. Of ypavs, there are found in Homer only the Nom. \nyp7]vs and yprivs. Dat. YpTjf and the Voc. ypriv and yptft. In the Ion. dialect, \nalso, the long a is changed to rj ; thus. Gen. ypr)6s. PI. 7p^\xe2\x82\xacr ; this also appears \nin vavs,navis, see the Anomalies. \xe2\x80\x94 The word $ovs is regularly declined in \nHer., hence Nom. PI. )3o\'es, Ace. fiovs ; in the Ace. PI. Homer uses both $6as \nand pods. On the Epic Dat. $6\xe2\x82\xac<t(tu see No. 3. In Doric, the Nora, is /Wi, \nAce. fiwu, Ace. PL fiws. This form of the Ace. Sing., occurs also in the IL % \n238, in the sense of bidPs hide, a shield made of bulTs hide. See ^ 57- \n\n\n\n\' The student may consult the first part of the Grammar, where similar \nwords are declined ; references to the particular section ynll be given at the end \n\nof the paragraphs here. \n\n\n\n^ 213.] THIRD DECLENSION. 253 \n\n13. In common nonns in -euy, and in the proper name \'AxiAAeuy, 77 is used in \nthe Epic dialect, instead of \xe2\x82\xac, in all the forms which omit v {F) of the stem, \nthis is done to compensate by the length of the Towel for the Emitted v (F); \nthus, $(uri\\evSi Voc. -eC; Dat. PI. -svai (except apitrrrieffai{v) from apia-Tevs), but \n0a(Ti\\^os, -Tji, -TJd, -rifSf -rjuiy, -rjas. Yet the long a in the Ace. -cu, -fas of the \nAttic dialect, again becomes short. Among the proper names, the following \nare to be specially noted : \'OSv<r<rfvs, Gen. \'Odvaarios or \'OSvarrios and \'OSi/tro-coy, \nalso *05v<revs (Od. 0, 398), Dat. \'OSva-rjt and \'OSvarcT, Ace. \'OSvairrja and \'OSvc- \nof\'a, also \'OSvarj (Od. t, 136) ; TlriKevs, nrjKrjos and T1t}\\4os, nT;X7j\xc2\xbb and IlTjAer, \nIlTjA^a; the others, as \'Arpcus, TvSeuy, generally retain the -c and contract -eos \nin the Gen. by Synizesis, and sometimes -ta in the Ace, into -rj; thus, TvScor, \n-ft, -ea, and -ij. \xe2\x80\x94 In the Ion. of Herodotus, the inflection with rj in common \nnouns is very doubtful ; in proper names, the c is regular, e. g. Ilepo-eoy, AwpieeSf \n^wKfuif, AloKtai. \n\n14. In -Tjj and -\xe2\x82\xacj, Gen. -\xc2\xabor. In Homer, the Gen. Sing, remains uncon- \ntracted. In the Epic and Ion. dialects, both the uncontracted form -\xe2\x82\xacey, and \nthe contracted form -\xc2\xabis is used for the Nom. PI. The Gen. PI. remains uncon- \ntracted (except when a vowel precedes the ending -tuy, e. g. (axprji^*\' from \n^axprjtW) ; so also the Ace. PI. ending -(as. "Afnjs has in Homer "Aprjoj and \n"Apfosy "April or "A/jp, "Apci, "Aptj and "Apriv, II. \xe2\x82\xac, 909,\'*A/)ey and "Apts (^ 209, \nKern. 3). See ^ 59. \n\n15. In pro[>er names in -kAtjj, the Epic dialect contracts cc into \xc2\xbb?, e. g. \nHpoucAtTji, -k\\tios (insieatl of #cA\xc2\xabcoj), -jji, -rja, Voc. \'HpcUAtu; but in adjectives \n\nin -tTjj it varies between -ti and \xc2\xbbj, e. g. ayaxKrfis, Gen. d7cucA^os, but i\'vKKfTas \n(Ace. PI.) from ^D\xc2\xbbcA\xc2\xab^t, i\'v^{>ft\\Sy Gen. dofifitios. The Ion. and Dor. writers, and \nsometimes the poets for the sake of the verse, reject an \xc2\xab in these words, e. g. \nU(piK\\tos, -/T, etc.; so also in Homer, ivsK\\f&, II. /3, 115, and vwfpSf\'a, II. p, 330. \n\n16. In (a) -o\xc2\xbbr. Gen. -ctos. In Homer, the contracted forms, ^pw Dat., and \nMjVw Acc. occur. \xe2\x80\x94 (b) -\xc2\xabj and -\xc2\xab\xe2\x80\xa2, Gen. -4oy. Words of this kind even in the \nEpic and Ion. writers, as well as in the Attic, always have the contracted form, \nexcept xp\xc2\xab^J and its compounds, e. g. xpo^^y XP"^* XP^^ \xe2\x80\x94 The Ion. dialect fre- \nquently forms the Acc. Sing, in -ovv instead of -\xc2\xbb, e. g. \'I^, \'loO*\', ^wj, i]ouv. \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nThe .^Eol. Gen. Sing, ends in -o\xc2\xbbr, c. g.oISwr, 2aT^s instead of oiSoDy, 2oir<^oCT, \nthus, in Moschus, ras \'Ax^s. See ^ 60. \n\n17. In (a) -ar, Gen. -aos. In Homer, the Dat. Sing, is cither uncontracted \nor contracted, according to the necessities of the verse, e. g. yfipat and -y^/pa, \nSfV^, <r(Af . But the Nom. and Acc. PI. is always contracted, e. g. SeVa. \xe2\x80\x94 On \nthose in -as, Gen. -\xc2\xaboj, see \xc2\xa7 61 (a), and Rem. 1. \n\n(b) In -oy, Gen. -tos. The Epic dialect, according to the necessities of the \nverse, has sometimes the uncontracted and sometimes the contract forms, \nexcept in the Gen. PL, which is always uncontracted. The Gen. SiHg. is also \nuncontracted, except in some substantives which contract -toy, as in the Dor., \ninto -fvs ; thus, \'Eptfitvs, ^dpacvsy ytytus, ddfxfifvs, btpcvs ; Dat. Sing, dtpei and \nbtpii, KdWei and KoWfi. Nom. and Acc. Plurals in -co, commonly remain \nuncontracted, but they must be pronounced with Synizesis, i. e. as one syllable, \ne. g. vc/fcea, iSeAca, \xe2\x80\x94 The Ion. dialect is like the Epic. \xe2\x80\x94 In oTre\'oy, K\\eos, 5cos, \n\n22 \n\n\n\n254 DIALECTS. [$ 21\'!. \n\nXpeoj, the Epic dialect lengthens c, sometimes into ct, sometimes into ri ; thus. \nGen. (Tireiovs, Dat. o-Tr^i\', Ace. <r7reoj and <rire7os, Gen. PL (nre(\xc2\xabi\', Dat. aT4a(n{v) \nand o-7nfj60-(r((i\') ; XP^\'"^ ^^^ XP^^\xc2\xb0^> \'\'^^" ^^*^ wAcra. \n\n18. In -IS, Gen. -ioy; -vs, Gen. -Ooy. The Epic dialect contracts those in \n-US, in the Dat. Sing., e. g. oiCvi, ir\\\xe2\x82\xac^7, vckvij the Ace. PI. appears with tho \ncontracted or uncontracted forms, according to the necessities of the verse, \nthough more usually contracted, e. g. ix^vs instead of Ix^as, Spds ; ytKvas is \nRlways uncontracted ; the Nom. PI. never suffers contraction, but is pronounced \nwith Synizesis. The Dat. PI. ends in -vacri and -u\xe2\x82\xac<r<rt (dissyllable), e.g. ix^wr- \ntetv and lx^\'(>i<^o\'iv. See \xc2\xa7 62. \n\n19. In -Xs and -?, Gen. -toy, Att. -ews; -vs and -C, Gen. \'vos, Att. -\xc2\xab\xc2\xaby: \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) The words in -Is, Att. Gen, -e\xc2\xaby, in the Epic and Ionic dialect, retain i \nof the stem through all the Cases, and in the Dat. Sing. aZways suffer contrac- \ntion, and usually in the Ace. PL in the Ionic writers, and -sometimes also in \nHomer (-tt = -t, -las = -rs), e. g. ttSKis, ir6Kios, ir6\\T, ir6\\iv, Tr6?^\xe2\x82\xacS, iroXiwv, irSkuri, \nv6\\ias, and v6Kis. In the Dat. Sing, however, the ending -\xe2\x82\xact and -u is found \nin Homer, e. g. irScre\'i and irSffei from Tr6<ris ; in some words, the i of the stem is \nchanged into e in other Cases also, e. g. iTr<i?^\xe2\x82\xaci5 instead of iiraX^ias, iird\\ieai{y)y \nespecially in ir6\\i5, which, moreover, according to the necessities of the verse, \ncan lengthen 6 into t] ; thus, Gen. 7ro\'\\toy, TroXeos, and v6\\r)os, Dat. x6\\\xe2\x82\xaci, ir^Act, \nand irdXrji, Nom. PL 7r<JAeey and ttJatjcs, Gen. iro\\ioov, Dat. vo\\U<r<rL, Ace. ir6\\uay \nrr6\\eis, nrSKrias\', from ois, ovis, Dat. PL iU(r<ri{y), ot\xe2\x82\xac(ri{y), 6fari{v). See ^ 63. \n\n(b) The words in -vs, whose Gen. in the Attic ends in -6\xc2\xaby, in the Ionic \nmake the Gen. in -eos, e. g. wfix^os, except cyxcAus, Gen. -vos ; in the Dat. Sing^ \nboth the contracted and uncontracted forms are found in Homer, e. g. dpfl, \nrr-fjxei, irXareT. In the Nom. PL, the form can be either contracted or uncon- \ntracted ; in the Ace. PI., the uncontracted form in -cos is regular, which, when \nthe verse requires, can be pronounced as a monosyllable, e. g. ircAcKcor (tri- \nsyllable). \n\n^ 214:. Anomalous and Defective Words. \xe2\x80\x94 3Ietaplasts. \n\n1. T6vv {rh,Jcnee) and S6pv [rh, spear, \xc2\xa7 68, 1), are declined in Homer as \nfollows : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nSing. yoimros and yovv65 dovparos and 5ovp6s Bovpari and iovpl \n\n"PI. \'Nora, yovvara " yovua Soupora " 5oDpo \xe2\x80\x94 Dual 5ovp\xe2\x82\xac \n\nGen. yoivtov Sovpay \n\nDat. yo{>ya(ri{y) and yoiv\xe2\x82\xac<r(ri{y) 5ovpaai(y) and 5ovpear<ri{y). \nThe form yovyaa-a-i (II. t, 488, p, 451, 569) has critically little authority. \n\n2. The following forms of Kdpa (rb, head, \xc2\xa7 68, 6) are found in the Homeric \ndialect : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nSing. Nom. Kdpri Gen. Kdprjros KopTjaros Kpar6s mpdaeros \n\nDat. KdpTrri Kapriari Kparl Kpdceri \n\nAcc. Kdpn {Thv KpaTo, Od. ,^, 92, and ixl xdp, II. t, 392). \n\n\n\nyr,\'v \n\n\nDor. vavs \n\n\nyfos \n\n\nvai6s (also Trag.) \n\n\n\n\nvod \n\n\nyHi \n\n\nvavv and va,v \n\n\n\n\nFoe \n\n\n\n\nvaaiiv \n\n\nyces \n\n\nVMS \n\n\nViilV \n\n\nvaSiv \n\n\n\nk 215.] ADJECTIVES. 255 \n\nPI. Nom. KipSL Kofyfiara ; secondary form Kaprjva \nGren. Kp6.Twv " Kofyfjvwy \n\nDat. Kpa<ri{y) \nAce. Kpdara " Kapr^va \n\n3. Aaos (6, s<one, Horn., instead of ^Jas)^ Gen. aSos, Dat. Aai", Ace. Aoav, Gren. \nPI. Kdcou, Dat. A(\xc2\xa3e<r<rt(i\'). \n\n4. Meis {6, month) ^ Gen. firjuos, Ion., instead of /i\'<ji/, -(Jy, but also in Plato. \n\n5. NaCs [r], ship) is inflected in the Epic, Ionic, and Doric dialects as \nfollows : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nS. Nom. Ep. and Ion. vifvs \n\nGren. yrj6s (also Tragic) \n\nDat. yrii \n\nAce. yija \n\nD. Nom. Ace. Voc. tnjf \n\nGen. and Dat. veo7y \nP. Nom. inics \n\nGren. yTjuv {yavipi only Ep.) vdv \n\nDat. K7ji;a\'((i/au<^tonlyEp.) i^6(r<rt(i\'), i\'6\'\xe2\x82\xac<r<rt(i\') \xc2\xbb\'auo\'/(i\') \n\nAce. i^as yeas yaas. \n\n6. "Opvij (4 ^, iiVd), Gen. opyl^-os, Doric tJpvrx-os\xc2\xbb etc. (^ 203). \n\n7. Xttp {rj, hand), Ion. x^P^^^ X^P^i X^P^ Dual x*\'|P*i X^P<\'"\' (poet, also x<*P<\'\xc2\xbb*\')\xc2\xbb \nPI. x^P^^i X^P*") X*P<\'\'^(\'\') (x*^P*<\'\'\'(*\')) ^^^ -^^^^(v) in Homer), x^V**^* \n\nRemark 1. Metaplasm (^ 72) occurs in Homer in the following words: \nAA/cV/, ^, strength, Dat. dA#cf (from Nora. *AAE) ; \'AfSrjs, -ou, i, Gen. iii\'Soy, Dat. \nUliSi (*AI2); "\'AvTi0e(TT?y, -oo, i, Ace. "Ain-Kparria (\'ANTI+ATETS) ; luicf}, tj, pur- \nsuit, Ace. iw/ca (\'IflH) ; vafxtyri, jj, battle, Dat. ixTfuvi (vafxis) ; \xe2\x80\x94 narpoKAoy, Gen. \nnaTp<i/cAou and -kAtjos, Ace. -kAov and -KKrja, Voc. -icAfjs (nATPOKAH2) ; i-vSpd- \nvoSoy. rh, slave, Dat. PI. iiyipav6S(aai{y) ; \xe2\x80\xa2npSscoiroy, rh, face, PI. irposctfiroTo, \nirposuira<n ; vhi, d, son, has from \'TIET2 and \'TI2 the following forms : Gen. \nvifos and vTos, Dat. vl(7 and uTt, Ace. vUa and ufa ; Dual vU ; Nom. PI. wVes and \nv/frr and ufey, Dat. vidcri. Ace. wleaj and vtas ; \xe2\x80\x94 OlSiirovs, Gen. Ol5irr68ao \n(\xe2\x80\xa2OIAinOAH2). \n\nRem. 2. The following are defective in Homer : \\itI Dat. and tA aTto, /j>jen ; \nAly and \\7y = AcW and Acokto ; fidcm and f^dany = fidanyi and -a ; o"Ttx<^y\xc2\xbb \n(ttIx^s, arlxois, row ; 6<T(re, rw, Nom. and Ace. Dual, both eucs ; 6<p(\\os, advantage, \nand ijSoj, pleasure, in the Nom. only ; T^pa, something pleasing, and S(fias,fo}\'m, in \nthe Ace. only ; ^A\xe2\x82\xac<Js, infatuated, Voc. rjAe and fjAf e ; finallv, Sw, /cp?, iA<^i, aa \nNom. and Aec. Sing., from which come the forms Swfia, house, Kpi^, barley^ \n6x<piToy, dried barley. \n\n\xc2\xa7215. Adjectives. \n\n1. Some adjectives in -vs, -eta, -u, have sometimes in the Homeric dialect, \nthe feminine form -ca or -ctj ; viz. uKia (instead of wKela), fia^fa (instead of \npa^ua) ; Gen. jSou^eTjj (and /Bou^efrjs) , Ace. /3a<&eV ; so also in Herodotus, -ea, \nseldom -eio, e. g. fia^ea, -frj and -cTo, fiapfa, evpea, i^vs, -^o and -eTo, 3^A\xe2\x82\xaco (from \n^Aus), riixlaea. \n\nRemark. In Epic and Doric poetry, some adjectives of this kind, and also \nsome in -Jet J and -\xe2\x96\xa0^cis, are of the common gender, i. e. they have but one \n\n\n\n256 DIALECTS. [^ 21& \n\ntermination for tlie Masc. and Fern., e. g. "Hpr] ^ (vs iovtra, H. t, 97 ; so ^5wj \navrfi^i, Od. fi, 309, and the irregular iroXvs : voXi/v i<p\' xrypi]v, H. k, 27 ; so ^/xa- \n&({ets, dj/(^6/i(^6ts, hpyiySeis, Troi-fjeis, agreeing with feminine substantives. \xe2\x80\x94 The \nEpic ei\'v or ijvs, Neut. i}v (iif and e\xc2\xa7 only as an adverb), wants the feminine \nform ; in II. o>, 528, is found Sdipwv oTa diSwa-i KaKuv, erepos Se idwv (so. Sdopwv), \ntherefore idcau as the Gen, PL Neut., unless perhaps from Sdopuy the cognate \nSoVewj/ is to be supplied for idav to agree with, as in Swrripes idoov sc. Soaewv ; \nthe Gen. Sing, is irjos. \n\n2. Adjectives in -fjeis, -"^eaa-a, -rjeyf are often found in Homer in the contracted \nform -fis, -Tja-ffa, -rjv, e. g. rifi^s (and riix-fjeis), Tifirjyra\', those in -(^eis, \xe2\x80\xa26ea(raf \n\'6ev, contract -oe into -eu, e. g. ireSia Xcarevyra. \n\n3. In the Epic dialect, iroXvs is regularly inflected in the masculine and \nneuter, viz. Nom. iroXvs and ttovXvs, Neut. ttoAv, with the secondary forms \n\'froW6s, iroWSv, Gen. \xe2\x96\xa0TroA.eos, Acc. iroKvp and \xe2\x96\xa0jtouA.uj/, iroA.u and iroAA<Ji\' ; Nom. \nPI. 7roA.6\xe2\x82\xacS and TroA-Cts, Gen. iroXewv, Dat. iro\\eVt{i\'), \'7roA.eV(ri(v), and iro\\\xe2\x82\xace\xc2\xabr(rt(v), \nAcc. TToAeay and -iroK^ls. \xe2\x80\x94 The Ionic dialect inflects TfoXX6s, -^j, -<iy, regularly \nthroughout. \n\n4. Compound Adj. in -oy (comp. ^ 78, 1.) often have in Hom. a feminine ending, \nviz. -Tj, e. g. a^avdrr], acySeVrTj, iroXvcpSpfir), api(7)\\r) (but also api(ri\\oi ovyo/, XL \nX, 27), a,fj.(piPp6rr], ayxtdx-q, ^pyvpoire^ay a.fj,<pipvrr\\ ; on the contrary, KXvr6s as a \nfeminine is found in II. ^, 742. Od. e, 422, from the simple k\\vt6s, -ii, \xe2\x80\xa26v. Also \nthe ending -os of the superlative is sometimes found as feminine, c. g. oXo^totos \n65fi-fi, Od. S, 442. KUTh irp^ritrTov ottcctt^i/, H. Cer. 157. Comp. ^ 78, Rem. 1. \n\n5. Compound adjectives in -irovs, -ttouv, Gen. -rro^os, in the Epic dialect, can \nshorten -ttovs into -ttos, e. g.^Ipts deAAcJxoy, II. .^, 409. rpl-iros, II. %, 443. \n\n6. \'Eplrjpcs fi\'om ipiripos, ipucrdpfxares and -as from ipvcrdpfiaros, are examples \nof Metaplastic forms of adjectives in Homer. \n\n$216. Comparison. \n\n1. In the Epic dialect, the endings -(arepos and -dnaTos are used for the sake \nof the metre, even when the vowel of the preceding syllable is long, e. g. \n6i(vp(iT\xe2\x82\xacpos, oiCvpciraTos, KaKo^eivuTfpos, Xapcararos. \xe2\x80\x94 \'AytTjpc^y, frou6/esom\xc2\xab, has \nthe Comparative avn/jp^arepov, Od. ^8, 190, and 6.xapis, disagreeable, axapi<rrfpos, \nOd. V, 392. Comp. \xc2\xa7 82, Rem. 6. Adjectives in -vs and -pos, in the Homeric \ndialect; form the Comparative and Superlative in -Iwv, -tov, and -i<rros, -77, -ay, \nsometimes also regularly,- e. g. iXax^s, little, ixdxi<TTos, yXvKvs yXvKiav, )3a.&vj, \nfid^ia-Tos, KvSpSs, Kvdia-Tos, oiKrpSs oIktictos and olKTp6TaTos, iraxvs irdxi^rroSf \nvpifffivs irpicr^iffros, oukvs iaKiCTOs. \n\n2. Besides the anomalous forms of comparison mentioned under ^ 84, the \nfollowing Epic and dialectic forms require to be noticed : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nay a^ 6s., Comp. apeiwv, Xaftwv, Xwirepos (Ion. Kpeaawy^ Dor. Kd^fxtv), Sup. \n\nKapTlffTOS. \n\nKaK6s, KUKcirepos, x^^porepos, x^pe/wi/, x^pfC^Tepos (Dor. x^PV<^^f Io\xc2\xb0- \xc2\xabo"(r\xc2\xabv), \nSup. ^KLo-Tos (II. \\p, 531, A\\ith the variation tJKiaros, which Spitzner prefers). \n\noXiyos, Comp. 6xi(cav {oXlCoves ^aav, populi suberant statura minores, II. \xc2\xabr, \n519); niTjW, Bion, 5, 10. \n\np-nlihios, Ion., Comp. prfiT^pos (Ion. priiwv), Sup. p-ritraros and ^{jiaros. . \n\nfipaSvs, slow, Comp. ^pdcrcrav. Sup. fidpSKxros (by Metathesis). \n\njiaKp6st ^9-, fjuitra-cov] \xe2\x80\x94 irax^Sf thick, irdaawv. \n\n\n\ni 217.] \n\n\n\nPRONOUNS. \n\n\n\n257 \n\n\n\nKemark 1. The positive XEPH2 ix^PVh X^PV-y X^PV^^t X^PVa) found in \nHomer, and belonging to x\xc2\xabpf \'w* always has the signitication of the Compara* \ntive, less, baser, weaker. The PI. ir\\4es and (Ace.) 7r\\eas are found in Homer \nfrom the Comp. itAccoj/. \n\nRem. 2. In the Epic dialect, the forms of the Comparative and Superlative, \nin many instances, are derived from Substantives ; some of these forms have \nbeen transferred to the Common language: 6 fiaaiKevs fiaa-iXevrepos ; rh \nKepSos, fjain, KepSiou, more lucrative, K^pSicTTos; rh &,\\yos, pain, oKyiuv, more \npainful, iLKyiaios ; rh plyos, cold, plyiou, colder, more dreadful, plyicTos ; rh kt]\' \n5 OS, care, KrjSuTTos, most dear ; 6 t] kv(i)v, dog, Kvyrepos, more shaineless, Kvyraros. \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 217. Pbonouns. \n\n\n\nI.S.N. \n\n\niyu, and ( before a vow- \n\n\nav Epic; rv Dor. and \n\n\n\n\n\n\nel) iyciv Epic ; eyw \n\n\nJEol. ; rvvT] Epic \n\n\n\n\n\n\nand iywu yEolic \n\n\n\n\n\n\nG. \n\n\ne/ico, ifiev, /xeO (fiev) \n\n\nTcO Dor.; <t4o (creo), \n\n\nCO (eo), eu (eu) Epic \n\n\n\n\nEpic and Ion. \n\n\n<T\xe2\x82\xacv (creu), Ep. and Ion. \n\n\nand Ion. \n\n\n\n\n^fjL(7o Epic \n\n\na^lo and r^olo Epic \n\n\nfto Ep.; ee?\xc2\xa9 later Ep. \n\n\n\n\nififdcy Epic \n\n\n(Tf^ev Epic \n\n\nci^ej/ (e,^\xe2\x82\xacv) Epic \n\n\n\n\n^/ieCs, ifiovs Doric \n\n\nTeCs, TcoOy Dor. \n\n\neovs Dor. \n\n\nD. \n\n\nifioiffiol (fjLOi),ffx.oi ^61. \n\n\naoi Epic \n\n\n\n\n\n\nijiiv Doric \n\n\nTu/ Dor. ; Tell/ Dor. et \n\n\nJfi/ Dor. (usually or- \n\n\n\n\n\n\nEp. (usually Orthot.) \n\n\nthotone) \n\n\n\n\n\n\nToi {toi) Ep. and Ion. \n\n\ntoil, of (o/JEp. (Reflex.) \n\n\nA. \n\n\n^/te, 1x4 {fMf) Epic \n\n\na4 (<re) Ep. ; re Dor. \n\n\n\xe2\x82\xac6, \xe2\x82\xac (e) (as Neut.ll. \n\n\n\n\n\n\nTiJ (tu) Dor. \n\n\no, 236.) \n\n\n\n\n\n\nt/v in Theocritus \n\n\nviv (viv) Dor. (and Att. \n\npoet.) (him, her, it) \n{xiv (ixiv) Ion. (him, her, \n\nit; seldom PI.) \ncrcpf Dor. et Att. poet. \n\n\nD.N. \n\n\nvwX \n\n\n\n\nff<P<t>iv {(TtpOiiv) \n\n\n\n\n\n\nG.D. \n\n\nvCi)Xv \n\n\n\xe2\x80\xa2Epic \n\n\n(r</>b)i, (r<^a\xc2\xbb \n\n\n\xe2\x80\xa2Epic \n\n\nC<P<i}iu, <T<pii)lV ^ \n\n\nA. \n\n\nviu\'iy v(i> . \n\n\n\n\natpGii, a<p(i> \n\n\n\n\na<pu(, a(p(i}\xe2\x82\xac > Epic \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\na<pu), C(p(a ) \n\n\nP.N. \n\n\n^fiets Epic ; \xe2\x96\xa0^jLiees Ion. \n\n\nv/jLcls Ep. ; L\'/nees Ion. \n\n\n\n\n\n\na/ue\'s Dor. ; di/x/uey Epic \n\n\nufj.es Dor. ; f//x/xe$ Ep. \n\n\n\n\nG. \n\n\nT]fi4o}v Ion. and Epic \n\n\nvfifoii/ Ion. and Epic \n\n\n<r<p4wv (<r<p\xe2\x82\xac0)v) Ion. \n\n\n\n\nT]ixiluv Epic \n\n\nvfi.fl(ay Epic \n\n\nand Epic \n\n\n\n\nOLfxyiiuv 2Eolic ; o^tDv \n\n\nvfi/xduy 2Eo\\. \n\n\n<r(p(i}y Epic \n\n\n\n\nDoric \n\n\n\n\n(T<p\xe2\x82\xaciu>v Epic \n\n\nD. \n\n\nrifjilv, T]HiVf r]fiiv Epic \n\n\nvfiiy, vixiv, vfilv Epic \n\n\n\n\n\n\n6.fi.(xi{v) -lEol. and Ep. : \n\n\n(/yLi/xi(i\') Epic \n\n\n<r(^t (ct^O Ion.; <r(/)^ \n\n\n\n\no/xTv and afiiv Dor. \n\n\n\n\nfft(j/), [o-</)i(ri(f)].o-<^/j/, \n\n\n\n\nd/i)U.e\'(ri()\') ^ol. \n\n\n\n\n(<r4><j\'),(r<^^ ((T^O Ep.; \n&a<pi JEol. \n\n\nA \n\n\nT)ii4as Ion. and Epic \n\n\ny^ucoy Epic and Ion. \n\n\n(T<p\xe2\x82\xacas (<r<p\xe2\x82\xacas) Ion. \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nand Epic \n\n\n\n\n^/uay, ^/lAoy Epic \n\n\nvfxas, vfxds Epic \n\n\n(T<pas, (T<puas Epic \n\n\n\n\n&/i/ie Epic ; a/xe Dor. \n\n\n(jfifie Epic ; v/we Dor. \n\n\n((r</)e)Epic(Il.T,265.) \n&a<pe iEol. \n\nthose written without \n\n\nRemark. The forms susce \n\n\nptible of inclination are \n\n\nan accent. \n\n\n\n\n\n22* \n\n\n\n258 DIALECTS. [^ 218L \n\n2. The compound forms of the reflexive pronouns, i/rnvrov, creouTov, etc^ aro \nnever found in Homer; instead of them, he writes the personal pronouns and \nthe pronoun avros separate, e. g. l/t\' ainSy, ifiol ain^, t/ieO avr^s, I auT-fjyy <X \nahrri. When the pronoun avT6s stands first, it signifies himself, herself, itself \neven. But the Ion. writers use the compound forms ifieuvrovy a-ewmovy euvrovf \netc. Comp. \xc2\xa7 207, 1. \n\n3. Possessive pronouns : reSs, --fi, -6v Dor. and Epic, instead of (r6s ; kos. -it. \n-6v, and \'6s, % \'6v, suus, Epic ; afiSs, -^, -6v Dor. and Epic, &ixfios, afifierepos ..Sk>l^ \ninstead of 7}/xerepos ; vwirepos, of us both, Epic ; vfi6s, --fj, -6v Dor. and Epic, \nHufxos Mo\\., instead of vfierepos ; fffcatrepos, of you both, II. a, 216 ; (r<p6s, -^, \xe2\x80\xa26y \nJEol. and Epic, instead of <r(p4Tepos. \n\n4. Demonstrative pronouns : (a) 6 ri ro (Dor. o instead of r)) ; Gen. t\xc2\xab Dor., \nToTo and rev Epic, ras Dor. ; Dat. ra Dor. ; Ace. rdv Dor. ; PL rol and red Dor. \nand Epic ; Gen. rdwu Epic, rav Dor. ; Dat. ro7(n, raurij r^tri, and tjJs Epic ; \nAce. Tt6s, r6s Dor. \n\n(b) 356 : Epic Dat. PI. To7sd\xe2\x82\xac(ri and To7sSe(r<ri instead of roisSf] Epic Dat. \nroicrlSe instead of ro7sSe is found also in the Tragedians. \n\n(c) of/Tos and avT6s: an e stands before the long inflection-endings in the \nIon. dialect (\xc2\xa7 207, 10), e. g. rovreov, tovtctjs, Tovrew, roureovs, avrerj, avrfoty. \n\n(d) iKeivos is written in Ion. and also in Att. poetry Kelyos, -^ol. kjjvos, Dor. \nrrjvos. \n\n(e) On the Ion. forms winSs, rwvrS instead of 6 avr6s, rh avrS, see \xc2\xa7\xc2\xa7 206, 1, \nand 207, 1. \n\n5. Relative pronouns: 8 Dor. and Horn., instead of Ss; oTo Ion. and Epic; \nSou Epic seldom, ctjs II. tt, 208 ; \xc2\xa7<ri and ps instead of ofy. Besides 8s, t}, the \nother forms of the pronouns are supplied, in the Dor. dialect, by the forms of \nthe article, e. g. t6 instead of 8, rod instead of ov, rrjs instead of ris, etc. The \nEpic dialect uses both forms promiscuously, according to the necessities of the \nverse. In the Ion. dialect also, the forms of the article are frequently used \ninstead of the relative. \n\n6. Indefinite and interrogative pronouns: (a) r\\s,rl: Gen. reo {reo) Epic \nand Ion., reO (reu) Epic, Ion., and Dor., Dat. reo* {reu), rip {rtf) Epic and Ion. ; \nPI. tffffa. Neut., birTrot icrffa, Od. t, 218, Gen. Teuy (rewv) Epic and Ion., Dat. \nreoia-i Epic and Ion. (roTa-i, S. Trach. 984). \n\n(b) rls, tI : Gen. reo Epic and Ion., rev Epic, Ion., and Dor., rfa> Ion. \n\n\n\n(c) \'6sTis: Nom. STts,Neut.STt, Stti Ep. \nGen. cfreu Ep. and Ion.,oT\xe2\x82\xaco. \n\nSttco, 8tt\xe2\x82\xacv Epic. \nDat. Brecj), Stco Ep. and Ion. \nAce. \'Sriya Epic, Neut. grt. \n\nUrn Epic. \n\n\n\nNeut. PI. iriya Hiad. \nBreuy Epic and Ion. \n\nbrioicri Epic and Ion., &Teri<ri Her. \nSriyas Epic, Neut. Sinya and S<r<ro Epic. \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7818. The Numerals. \n\nThe .ffiol. and secondary form of /jiia is la, Hvs, fp, tav ; also iy, H. C 422, i9 \ninstead of ivl. Aio and Sua are indeclinable in Homer ; the secondary formt \n\n\n\nf 219.] AUGMENT AND REDUPLICATION. 259 \n\nare Soid (indecl.), Soioly Soicd, Soidy Dat. SotoTy, SoioTa^y Ace. Soidi (indecL), Soioisj \n\xe2\x80\xa2dsf -d. \xe2\x80\x94 Hiffvpfs, -a ^o\\. and Epic, instead of reVo-opes, -a. \xe2\x80\x94 AvwS^Ka and 5vo* \nKalSeKU Epic, also SuScKa. \xe2\x80\x94 \'Eet/cocrt Epic, instead of (Xkoci. \xe2\x80\x94 \'OyZuKoma and \niwfiKovra Epic, instead of oydo-qKoyra, ivetnjKoyTo. \'EyvedxiT^oi and SeKdxt\\oi \nEpic, instead of iyvcucisxi^^oi and fivpioi. The endings -aKovra and -cucSaioi in \ntlie Epic and Ion. become --fiKovra, -r]K6cnoi. The Epic forms of the ordinals \nare rpWaros, rerparos, efiSofiuTos, 6yS6aTos, tvarosy and iXvaros. \n\nThe Ve rb. \n\n$219. Augment. \xe2\x80\x94 Reduplication. \n\n1. All the poets, except the Attic, may reject the augment, according to the \nnecessities of the verse, c. g. ADae, (miKavro, biaav, dparo, cAe. The Ion. \nprose, as well as the Epic dialect, may omit the temporal augment ; it may also \nomit it in the Perf^ e. g. ififmiy (pyaa^iai, olK-nfxai, which is done by the Epic \nwriters only in 6.vwya and epxarai from eXpyco. \n\n2. On the omission of the Epic dialect to double the p when the augment is \nprefixed, e. g. (pf^as, and on the doubling the liquids, e. g. eo-trcua, see ^ 208, \n4, and Rem. \n\n3. a in the Dor. writers is changed into d by the augment, and ai suflfers no \nchange, e. g. iyov instead of ^yoy, cdpfov instead of ffptoy. \n\n4. Verbs which have the Digamma, in Homer take the syllabic augment, \naccording to the rule, e. g. aySdyaiy to please, Impf. tdySayov, Aor. eaSoy , \xe2\x80\x94 cfSo- \nfjuu, videor, iturd/xrjy, also in the participle itiadfifyos. On account of the verse, \nthe e seems to be lengthened in floiKvTa, cCoSe (tFaSf) from ayddya}. \n\n5. In Homer, the verbs olyoxofw and ay^dyu, take at the same time both the \nsyllabic and temporal augment, viz. duyoxoa, D. 5, 3, yet more frequently tpvo- \nx6(i ; ("fiy^ayf and ^yZaye. \n\n6. The reduplication of p is found in Homer, in ^epinru/jLfyos, from f>inr6o>f to \nmake dirty. On the contrary, the Epic and poetic Perfects, t/ifiopa from fxdpoficu \nand (ffa-vfjLai from (rewa\xc2\xbb, are formed according to the analogy of those beginning \nwith p, i. e. by Metathesis ; hence Hfifiopuy etc., instead of ixt/xopa. \xe2\x80\x94 The Epic \nand Ion. Pcrf. of Hrdofiai is Hkttiiicu. A strengthened reduplication is found in \nthe Horn, forms SeiSexarat and SftSttcro. \n\n7. In the Epic dialect, the second Aor. Act. and Mid. also often takes the \nreduplication, which remains through all the modes. In the Ind. the simple \naugment \xe2\x82\xac is commonly omitted; thus, e. g. Kctjufw, to grow weary, Subj. Aor. \nKfKdfiw; KfXofiai, to (xmmaiid, iKiKX6fxi\\y ; kXvw, to hear, Aor. Imp. KCK\\v^iy \nKfKkvre] \\ayxdvuy to obtain, \\4\\axoy ; Xa/JL^dyw, to receive, A.eAa)3eV3^ot ; \nKaybdvw, lat\xe2\x82\xac0,to escape notice, \\4\\a^oy ; ir t lb o), to persuade, irciriboy, imnb6- \nHW, ripTTO), to delight, TfTpairSfirjy ] rvyxdyw, to obtain. rervKeTy, rcTVKeo-^ai ; \n*ENn, to vntrder, firapyoy, \'n4<pvoy\\ <ppdC<>>y to say, to she-*\' . \xc2\xab-\xe2\x82\xac<ppaSoy, iirecppaSoy. \nAorists with the Att. reduplication (comj). \xc2\xa7 124, Rem. 2) commonly take the \naugment: \'APn, to Jit, ijp-apoy; \'AXflj to grieve, 1]K-axoy \', oAe\'loi, to ward offy \nijK-\xe2\x82\xaci\\Koyy oAoAjceij/ ; tpvvuiyto excite, &p-opov \\ iylirTWyto chide, iy-hLvov. Two \n\n\n\n260 DIALECTS. [\xc2\xa7 220. \n\nverbs in the Aor. take the reduplication in the middle of the word : viz. iyirrtt, \niiv-firairep, and epu/cw, to restrain, iipv-KUKoy, ipvKcuceeiy. Comp. the Presents, \ndviyr]fii, arirdWw, oirnrTeva. \n\n8. In the Dialects, there are still other forms of the Perf. and Plup. with the \nAtt. reduplication (\xc2\xa7 124) ; thus, e. g. aip4w, to take, Ion. ap-aiprjKa, ap-alprffuu; \naX do IX a I, to wander. Epic Perf. with a Pres. signification oA-cUtj/ioi ; *APO \n(apapla-Kw), to Jit, Poet. &p-dpa, I Jit, (Intrans.), Ion. ipvpa; \'AXQ (eucax\xc2\xbbC\xc2\xab), ^ \ngrieve, Epic and Ion. aK-\'f]X^f^^^i aK-dxnH^tj \'ENEKG {(pfpu), to carry, Ion. 4y- \n\'fji/eiyfiai ; ipelirwy to demolish, Poet, ip-^piira, Epic ip-4pi7rTo; ipl(wf to contend^ \nEpic ip-^pi(r/xai. \n\n\xc2\xa7220. Personal-endings and Mode-vowel s. \n\n1. Eirst Pers. Sing. Act. The original ending -fii of the first Pars. Sing^ is \nfound in the Epic dialect in several subjunctiTt*, e. g. tcreiyuixi, aydywfu, ti/x\xc2\xab\xc2\xbb/u, \n\'Iko)Ixi, i^iXwiJLi, iSwfjLi. Comp. ^ 116, 1. \n\n2. Second Pers. Sing. Act. In the Dor., and particularly in the JEol and Ep. \ndialect, the lengthened form -a^a is found (\xc2\xa7 116, 2). In the Ind., this \nbelongs almost exclusively to the conjugation in -/u, e. g. ri^<r^, <t>^a!^ \nSiSoia-^a, naprja-^a. In Homer, this ending is frequent in the Subj.. e. g. i^iXr/ff- \n^a, eXirr}(r^a, more seldom in the Opt., e. g. /cAo/oto-i^o, $d\\oi<T^a. \n\n3. Instead of the ending -eis, the Dor. frequently has the old form -ts, eg. \nTUTTTes instead of Tinrreis ; so in Theocritus avpiahts = avpl(eis. \n\n4. Third Pers. Sing. Act. In the Epic dialect, the Subj. sometimes has the \nending -at (arising from -ri) appended to the usual ending of lbs Subj., c g. \ne^e\\r)(Ti{v), &yri(n, aXd\\Kri<n; the Opt. only in irapa^)^alri0-i. \n\n5. Instead of the ending -et in the Pres. Ind. of the Dor. dialect, the form -ij \nis used, though seldom, e. g. 5i5eur/oj instead of 5t5<urit\xe2\x82\xact. In the second and \nthird Pers. Sing. Perf. Act., Theocritus uses the endings -ijj, -rj instead of -oi, \n-\xe2\x82\xac, e. g. TT\xe2\x82\xacir6v^s, oiruirr} instead of Trfirov^as, uxanr*. \n\n6. First Pers. PL Act. The Dor. dialect has retained the original ending \n-fies, e. g. TUTTTO/ies instead of Txnrrotnv (^ 204). \n\n7. The third Pers. PL Act. of the principal tenses, in the Dor. dialect, ends \nthroughout in -j/ti, e. g. rxnrrovri (instead of rvTrrowri), Tu+orT^ rvwrttrti \n(instead of rvmuxri), rerixpavTi, iTraiviovri, i^airaruyri. In the ./EoL and Dof., \nthis ending in the P^es. and Put. is -oia-i instead of -ovcij e. g. irtonry(Oi<Ti{p), \nyaloi<ri{v). \n\n8. Personal endings of the Plup. Act. In the Epic and Ion. dialects, the \nfollowing forms occur : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nFirst Pers. Sing., -ea the only Epic and Ion. form (-77 old Att.^ ni6, 6), e. g. \n^re^TjTTea, jfSeo, \xe2\x96\xa0n-eiroidea instead of frediTXfu\', etc. \nSecond " " -eas, e. g. eVe^Treas, Od. eo, 90, instead of ^feH\xc2\xbbciJ. \nThird " " -\xe2\x82\xac\xc2\xab(\xc2\xbb\'), e. g. iyey6v\xe2\x82\xac\xe2\x82\xac, KoraAeXoiVfe, ififfipwKffy (not Horn.). \nSecond \xc2\xbb PL -ian, e. g. <rvv7)SeaT\xe2\x82\xacy Her. 9, 58. \n\nRemark 1. The third Pers. Sing. Plup. Act. in -\xc2\xab\xc2\xbb, as well as the same \nPers. of the Impf. in -\xe2\x82\xac*, is foimd in Homer before a vowel with the r paragogic; \n\n\n\n220.] PERSONAL-ENDINGS AND MODE-VOWELS. 261 \n\nthus, e(rTr}K\xe2\x82\xaciy, II. \xc2\xab^, 691. ^ffiK-f]KiiVy B. e, 661. ^, 270. |, 412. SeSetiry^/cej*\', Od. \np, 359 ; \xe2\x80\x94 ^o-*c\xe2\x82\xactv, 11. 7, 388. \n\n9. The second and third Pers. Dual of th^e historical tenses are sometimes \nexchanged for each other. Thus in Homer, the forms -rov and -a^ov (second \nPers, Dual) stand instead of -rriv and -a^y (third Pers. Dual), e. g. Stwiceroi\', \n11. Kf 364. KojpvaiTfroVy II. c, 583, dwpvaaia^oy, H. y, 301. On this inter- \ncharge in Attic, see \xc2\xa7 116, Rem. \n\n10. The second Pers. Sing. Pres. Ind. and Subj., Impf. Ind. and Opt. Mid. or \nPass., the first Aor, Mid, Ind,, after dropping <r, remain uncontracted in the \nIon. and often in the Epic dialect, e. g. iirireWfai ; Homer ises either these \nforms, e.g. \\\xc2\xabivecu, AxAoucat, ouplKTjcu, ipvaaeaUy iiravprjcUy inre\'fiaao, iyeiyao, or \nthe contract forms, -p (from -tai), -eu (from -\xe2\x82\xaco), -a> (from -ao), e. g. 6>rA.cv, tpx^v^ \n<Pp<i((Vy ^Kpffun. When the characteristic of the verb is e, it is very frequently \nomitted in the Ion. dialect, before -\xc2\xabu and -\xc2\xabo, e. g. <f>i\\(cu instead of ^(Accch, \n<(>i\\(o instead of ^lAceo ; so in Homer, iK\\f\\ II. \xc2\xab, 202, yet with the variation \n^/cAe\' from K\\iofuu. Comp. \xc2\xa7 222, B (3). \xe2\x80\x94 The ending -eo in Homer is \nlengthened into -\xe2\x82\xacto, e. g. tptio, <nr(7o, and the ending -c\'eoi is contracted into \n-c\xc2\xabu, in verbs in -\xc2\xab&>, e. g. fiv^ucu, ydcu. Homer sometimes drops <r in the \nsecond Pers. Sing, Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass, also, viz. /i*\xe2\x82\xac/ivTjeu (and /xc\'/ivp), \nBffiKriai, tffffvo. \n\n11. The Dual endings -nji\', -<r;&Tjv, and first Pers. Sing, -/irji\', in the Doric \narc, -Tdv, -abavy -fidv (\xc2\xa7 201, 2), e. g. i^pcurdfidy. In the later Doric, the \nchange of ri into d is found, though seldom, even in the Aor. Pass., e, g. irinrdM \ninstead of ^twxtjv. \n\n12. Tlie personal-endings -^c^ov, -/ic^a, in Epic, as well as in Doric, Ionic, \nand Attic poetry, often have the original forms -fifffboy, -fifaba, e. g, rinrrofiftr\' \n&oy, Tinrr6fifaba. \n\n13. The third Pers, PI. Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass., in the Ionic and Epic \ndialect, ver}\' generally ends in -arat, -oto, instead of -yrcu, -yro, e. g. ircire/- \nderrai, ir\xc2\xabirovoTcu, i0(&ov\\(varo, i<Tra\\a.ro\\ ver}\' often also the third Pers. PI. \nOpt. Mid. or Pass, is -oiaruy -aiaro^ instead of -oivro, -atyro, e. g. Tinrroiaro \ninstead of rinrroiyroj apuffcdaro (Homeric), instead of apriaouyro. Also the \nending -oyro, in the Ion. dialect, has this change, though the o before y becomes \n\xc2\xab, e, g. ifiovXiaro instead of ifiovKoyro. In verbs in -du and -cw, the ri in the \nending of the Perf and Plup. -TjKreu, -tjvto, is shortened in the Ionic into \xc2\xab, e. g. \nOiKforcu instead of ^Kriyrcu from ot/cc\'w, irtrififaro instead of irerifiriyro from \nTi/iio;. Also instead of -ayrtuy the Ionic dialect has -taroi (instead of -oarai), \ne, g. xeirrt\'ttTcu instead of xiTrrayrau. \'AiriKaTcu, in Herodotus, from the Perf, \niupiyfiai (Pres. d<piKyfo^{u) is the only cxamjilc in which the rule stated \xc2\xa7 116, \n5, is not observed. \n\nRem. 2. Two Perf. and Plup. forms are found in Homer with the ending \n\xe2\x80\xa2Sarat, -Saro, from verbs whose characteristic is not 5, viz. iXavvu (e\'Aow) \n4\\ri\\a/jLai (Krj\\d.5aro, Od. tj. 86, and ixaxfC\'" oJtrfX^H^ eucrjxf\'SoTcu, 11. p, 637 ; the \n8 sceuis to he merely euphonic ; yet it is to be noted, that the reading is not \nwholly settled : the forms i^^aZaToi and (^(xxSaro (from ftalyw) must be derived \nfrom the stem PAZIl (comp. f>dcaar\xc2\xab, Od. v, 150). \n\n\n\n262 DIALECTS. [$ 220. \n\n14. The third Pers. PL Aor. Pass, -rjffav is abridged into -ev, in the Doric, \nand also frequently in the Epic and poetic dialect, e. g. rpdnpev instead of irpd- \n(Pncav. In the Opt. this abridged form is regular in the Common language \n(\xc2\xa7 116, 7), e. g. Tv<p^\xe2\x82\xac7ev instead of rvcp^eirjorav. \n\n15. The third Pers. PI. Imp. Act, in -raxrav, and Mid. or Pass, in (r^ua-ca/, is \nabridged in the Ionic and Doric dialect (always in Homer) into -tnut/ and -a^uv \n(\xc2\xa7 116, 12), e. g. TvirTovrwv instead of rinrTeraffaVy ireJroi^Svru)!/ instead of TrcTrot- \n^^Tuffav, rvTrTecr^wy instead of rxmria^caffav. \n\n16. The long mode-vowels of the Subj., viz. (a and ij, are very frequently \nshortened in the Epic dialect into o and e, according to the necessities of the \nverse, e. g. tofxev instead of jfw/ie;/; (p^iSfietr^a instead of -difie^a] arpecpercu \ninstead of -tjtoi (\xc2\xa7 207, 4). \n\n17. The first Aor. Opt. Act., in the ^olic dialect ends in -eia, -eias, -\xc2\xab\xe2\x82\xac, etc., \nthird Pers. PL -eiaVf instead of -ai/Mi, -ais, -ouy etc., third Pers. PL -cuey. See \n\xc2\xa7 116, 9. \n\n18. Infinitive. The original full form of the Inf Act. is -fxevat, and with \nthe mode-vowel, -efxevatf which is found in the Epic, Doric, and -Slolic dialects. \nThis form is sometimes shortened into -fxev {-enev) by dropping ax, sometimes \ninto -vaihj syncopating ^ue (e/ie). But in the Epic dialect, the ending -eiv also \nis found, formed from -e/^ej/, and in contract verbs, and in the second Aor., also \nthe endings -eeiv and -eiu. The Pres., Put., and second Aor. take the mode- \nvowel e and the ending -/tev, hence -ejuei/, e. g. rvTrr-i-jxiVy rml/efievy etireftev. \xe2\x80\x94 \xe2\x80\xa2 \nVerbs in - a \xc2\xab and - e \xc2\xab, as they contract the characteristic-vowel a and the \nmode-vowel e of the Inf. ending -e/jLivai, have the form --fj/xevai, e. g. y<yf)ij.\xe2\x82\xaci/cu \n(yodw), <pi\\^fji.\xe2\x82\xacvai (</)\xc2\xa3\\e&>), (pop^fievai {(popeco). \xe2\x80\x94 With the ending -^fievat corre- \nsponds that of the Aorists Pass., e. g. rvTrrifjLevou instead of Tvin}yau, aoXXiff \n^fj.evai ; so always in the Epic dialect ; but the Doric has the abridged form in \n-rjixevf e. g. Tvjrrjfieu. \xe2\x80\x94 In the Pres. of verbs in -fit, the ending -ficv and -iievtu is \nappended to the unchanged stem of the Pres., and in the second Aor. Act., to \nthe pure stem, e. g. ri^4-fjLep, ri^e-ixevai, iffrd-fievj lard-fxf:V0Uj Si56-n\xe2\x82\xacv, 5t5J-^evax, \nSeiKvi-fiev, deiKVV-fJievai] ^e-fiey, ^e-fieuai^ So-fiev, S6-fj.evcu] SO also in Perfects \nderived immediately from the stem of the verb, e. g. re^vdfiev, $\xe2\x82\xac$duev. The \nfollowing are exceptions, viz. ri^fievai, 11. <//, 83 (with which the forms of the \nPres. Part. Mid. Ti^/ievos, nixhiJ^^vos, correspond), StSoGvai, H. \xc2\xab, 425, also the \nInf second Aor. Act. of verbs in -o and -v, which also retain the long vowel \n(\xc2\xa7 191, 2), e. g. ffT-fj-fieyai, fi-ft-fievai, 5v-nevai, instead of (rrrjvai, Svvai. \n\n19. Besides the forms in -efjLevai and -efiev, the Doric dialect has one in -6i\xc2\xbb \nabridged from these, e. g. &y\xe2\x82\xac}/ instead of dyeiv; Put. apfx6<r\xe2\x82\xacv instead of apfx6- \na-eiv ; second Aor. tSeV instead of tSeTj/, Xafiev instead of \\afieiy, etc: In the \nDoric of Theocritus, the Mol. Inf. ending -rjy is foimd, e. g. x\xc2\xb0^PVv, second \nAor. Aa)8?>, instead of xa\'pefj AajSeTi/. \n\n20. The Inf ending of the Aor. Pass, -^/xeyai, -v/uLev, is abridged into -tjv in \nthe Doric writers, yet only after a preceding long syllable, e. g. fie^va^v instead \nof -^riuai. The Inf ending of the Perf. Act. varies between - 77 y and -eiv ia \nthe Doric and JEoUc writers, e. g. re^eup^K-nv, yfydyeiy instead of re^ewprjKfratt \n\n\n\n^ 221, 222.] CONTRACTION AND RESOLUTION IN VERBS 263 \n\n21. Participle. The JEolic dialect has the diphthong oi instead of ov before \nr in participles, and at instead of d, e. g. Timruv^ Tvirroiaa, rvtrTov^ ^jifioi<ra, \nXnro7<ra instead of -ovaa] rvrpais, -aicra, instead of tj^os, -dco {^ 201, 2. and \n207, 1). The Epic dialect can lengthen the accented o into u in the oblique \ncases, e. g. ftefjuMTos, ir^<pvSiras. \xe2\x80\x94 The Perf. Act. Part., in the Doric dialect, \nsometimes takes the ending of the Pres., e. g. TretppUovTes instead of ireippiKSr^s. \n\n\n\n$ 221. Epic and Ionic Iterative form. \n\n1. The Ionic and particularly the Epic dialect, and not unfrequently, in \nimitation of these, the Tragedians, have a special Impf and Aor. form with the \nendmg -tr/co*\', to denote an action often repeated, or continued. This is called \nthe Iterative form. It is regularly without the augment. \n\n2. It is generally found only in the Sing, and in the third Pei\xc2\xab. PI. Ind. of \nthe Impf and Aor., and is inflected like the Impf ; for in the Impf and \nsecond Aor. Act. and Mid., the endings -<tkov^ -CKis, (tk\xe2\x82\xac{v), -a-KSfirju, -<rKov{\xe2\x82\xaco, ew), \n-ffKeroj preceded by the union-vowel e, are used instead of -oi/, -ofirjv, and in the \nfirst Aor. Act. and Mid. the endings -aaKov^ -aarKSfx-qv are used instead of -a, \n-dfxriv, e. g. \n\n(a) Impf. Sivev-ecTKOv, deh-eaKes, \'4ir-e(rK\xe2\x82\xac(v), -jreX-eaKero, ^o<TK-4aKOVTO. In \nverbs in -euw, -aiffKov is abridged into -oo-kou, which, according to the necessities \nof the verse, can be again lengthened into -daxTKov, e. g. viKaarKofiev, vcucrdaff\' \nKov. Verbs in -ew have -eeffKou and -effKov, e. g. KoXe-ecKe, jSouKoXeetr/ce ; oXxv^^f- \nKov^ iT<D\\4<TKeroy KoAeV/fcTo ; when the verse requires, -eea-Kov can be lengthened \ninto -eUffKov, e. g. veiK^UffKov; verbs in -6q) do not have this Iterative form \namong the older authors ; verbs in -fn omit the mode-vowel here also, e. g. \nTi^e-ffKov, SiSo-(TKov, SeUyv-a-Kou ; in some verbs the ending -oxtkov has taken the \nplace of -eaKov, e. g. pinr-curKOU, Kpimr-aaKov^ from ^jttto), /cpuirroj. \n\n( ) Second Aor. \'4\\-((rKe, fid\\-e(rK\xe2\x82\xac, (pvy-arKe ; in verbs in -fit, without a mode- \nvowel, e.g. (TTd-(rK\xe2\x82\xac (= effTui), Trapefid<TK\xe2\x82\xac (^ \xe2\x80\xa27rape)37j), 56aK\xe2\x82\xac, Sixtkc; also an \nIterative form of the second Aor. Pass, is found, viz. (pdyea-Ke instead of i^dv-q^ \nII. X, 64. Od. /I, 241, 242. \n\n(c) First Aor. ihda-affKev, avd-fja-aa-Kev, Hxr-affKe, fivrjff-dffKeTO, ayvda-aVKe \n(instead of ayvorjaaaKi from ayvo4w). \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 222. Contraction and Resolution in Verbs. \n\nI. The Epic dialect. In the Epic dialect, verbs in -aa>, -ew, -Jo, are subject \nto contraction, but by no means so generally as in the Attic. The contraction \nis made according to the general rules, with a few exceptions, as will be seen in \nthe following remarks. \n\nA. Verbs in -c\xc2\xa3w. (1) In these verbs, the uncoptracted form occurs only in \ncertain words and forms, e. g. irepaou, KaTeaKiaop, vaierdova-i ; always in vAa\xc2\xab, and \nin verbs which have a long o for their characteristic, or whose stem is a. mono- \nsyllable, e. g. it\\f/&uv, ireiviutf, expae, ixp\'^^\'^^ (from xpau, to attack) \n\n\n\n264 DIALECTS. [$ 222. \n\n(2) In some words, a is changed into e, viz. jxevoiveov from fievoipoua, ijvrfo^ \nfrom dvTciw, SfiSKKeov from 6/io/cAow. Comp. \xc2\xa7 201, 1. \n\n(3) Instead of the uncontracted and contracted forms, the contracted syllable \nis resolved, as often as the measure requires it ; this is done by inserting a simi- \nlar vowel, commonly shorter, more seldom longer, before the vowel formed \nby contraction ; in this way, a is resolved into do or do, and \xc2\xab into o\xc2\xab or au \n(\xc2\xa7 207, 2). The short vowel is used here, when the syllable preceding the \ncontracted one is short, e. g. {6pw) 6p6(a ; but if this syllable is long, the long \nvowel must be used on account of the verse, e. g. rj^diaxra. The resolution does \nnot take place with the vowel d before a personal-ending beginning with t, \ne. g. opa-rai, 6pa-To. Thus : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(opdeis) Spas Spaces {Spdco) bpa 6p6a> \n\n(Spdecr^ai) opacr^ai opaaa^ai {dpdovffa) opwcra 6p6(o<ra \n\n(fjLsvoivdei) fievoiv^ fjt,evoivoL(f, {fiodovcn) fioSxri fioSaxri \n\n{iarjs) i^s iaq,s {6pdoi/xi) op^fMi dp6q>fii \n\n{fivdea^ai) fu/aar^at fivaa<r^ai (Sp&ovai) Spaa Spdoaxrt. \n\nEemark 1. In Od. ^, 343, the form Hprjai (from opdeai) occurs instead of the \ndprjai, which Eustath. cites. In the following Dual forms, oe is contracted into \n7] : Trposavd\'f)TT]v, (rvX-ffrrju, (rvvavr-fiTTju, (l>oiT7)Tr\\v instead of -ottji/ ; so also in the, \ntwo verbs in -ea>, d/xapTriTi^v, aTreihrjTTiv instead of -eirrju. \n\n4. When vr comes after a contracted vowel, a short vowel may be inserted \nbetween vr and such a contracted syllable, e. g. Tjfiwovra instead of ^)8aJi/To, \nyeXdovreSf (Mvciovro ; in the Opt. also, the protracted -aoi instead of -u is found \nin Tj^dooiiJLi (instead of rj^dpifMi = rj^cfifii). The following are anomalous forms : \nvaierdcaa-a (instead of -6a<Ta), (row, second Pers. Imp. Pres. Mid. and third Pers. \nSing, Impf Act. from ZSAH, to save. \n\nRem, 2. On the Inf in -i]ij.evai of verbs in -da and -ew, see \xc2\xa7 220, 18, and on \nthe Epic-Ionic contraction of o-q into a, see \xc2\xa7 205, 5. \n\nB. Verbsin-6ft>. To this conjugation belong also all Futures in -ea and \n-iofxai, all second Persons in -eo, -eot, and -iiaii second Aor. Inf. Act. in -eeiv, \nand the Aor. Pass. Subj. in -e\xc2\xab and -eiw. \n\n( 1 ) Contraction does not take place in all forms in which e is followed by the \nvowels tw, w, 7], ri, 01, and ov, e. g. ^iXeoofiev, (pi\\4oifii, etc. ; yet such uncontracted \nforms must commonly be read with Synizesis. In other instances, the contrac- \ntion is either omitted according to the necessities of the verse, e. g. (piXeei, epew \nPut., oTpvveovffa Put., PaXeeiv second Aor. Act., Trea-eea-^ai Put. IVIid., [ivy4w<ri \nsecond Aor. Subj. Pass. ; or contraction takes place, and then, when eo is con- \ntracted, it becomes eu (\xc2\xa7 205, 1), e. g. alp^ifi-qv, ourew, yivev ; except aveppiirrow \nand iTrSp^ovv. \n\n(2) Sometimes the open e is lengthened into ei (\xc2\xa7 207, 1), e. g. ereXeUro, \nereAetoj/, \'irXeieiv, OKveica ; \xe2\x80\x94 5a/ieiw instead of SafiS>, pny^iri instead of pny^ \n(second Aor. Subj. Pass.). \n\n(3) In the ending of the second Pers. Sing. Pres. Mid. or Pass., two Epsilons \ncoming together are either contracted, as in the third Pers., e. g. fiu^c-eai \n= jxv^eiai, like ^ui&^etToi, y\xc2\xabat, like yerrot, or one e is elided, e. g. fiv^eau, \n\n\n\n} 222.] CONTRACTION AND RESOLUTION IN VERBS. 265 \n\nvuKeai. This elision commonly occurs both among the Epic and Ionic writers, \nin the second Pers. Impf. and Imp. Pres. Mid. or Pass., e. g. (po^do, aKeo, oiVeo, \ni^Tjyeo, In such cases, the accent is on the penult, whether the word ends with \n-eai or -eo (\xc2\xa7 220, 10). \n\nRem. 3. On the irregular contraction in the Dual, see Rem. 1 ; on the Inf, \nin -^fieuaif see-\xc2\xa7 220, 18. \n\nC. Verbs in -6ci}. These verbs follow either the common mles of contrac- \ntion, e g. yovvovfiai, yovyova^ai, or they are not contracted, but lengthen o into \na>, and then the forms of verbs in -oca resemble those of verbs in -doj, e. g. \niSpdoi/ra, iSpdjovara, imvcaouras (comp. rjficaovTa, 4 above) ; or they become Avholly \nanalogous to verbs in -dou, since they resolve -ova-i (third Pers. PI. Pres.) into \n-6 (Off I, -ovvro into -6wvto, and -ol^v into -6u>ev, and consequently suppose a \ncontraction like that of verbs in -ooj : [a.p6ovffi) apodffi apocoffi (comp. dpScoffi), \n{Sr}i6ouTo) Srj\'iovuTO 5r]i6a}VTO (comp. opSwvTo), {Sri\'i6oiev) Sr^.w hrj\'iSwcv (comp. \ndp6cfi\xe2\x82\xacv). But this resolution into -6q} or -coo is confined to such forms as admit \nit in verbs in -dw ; hence, e. g. the Pres. apo7s, apo7, apovre, and the Inf. apovv, do \nnot admit this resolution. \n\nII. Ionic dialect. (1) In the Ionic dialect, only verbs in -dca and -6(t> suffer \ncontraction ; verbs in -ecu commonly omit it, except the contraction of -eo and \n-eov into -eu, which frequently occurs (^ 205, 1), e. g. (piKevfiev instead of (piXdo- \nfiet/ = (pi\\ovfj.cu, 4<pi\\\xe2\x82\xacvv instead of i<pi\\\xe2\x82\xacot/ = i^iXovv^ 9iAeG instead of cpiXiov \n= <piXov. \n\n(2) The uncontracted forms exhibited in the table (\xc2\xa7 135) of the second \nPers. Sing. Pres. and Impf. Mid. or Pass, in -e\'7;, -dri, -op, -e\'ov, -dov^ -6ov, e. g. \n(f>i\\eT)y rifidr), fiia^Sr}, (pi\\4ov, rifidov^ /xiff^6ov, etc., are found in no dialect, and \nare presented merely to explain the contraction. For even the Ionic writers \nuse here the contracted forms of verbs in -dco and -600, e. g. n/xa, fiiff^oT, TLfj-w, \nfxiff^ov, etc. ; but of verbs in -e\'&>, as also in barytone verbs, they do not use the \nendings -77, -on, but -eot, -eo, e. g. TuirT-eot, irinrT-eo, <pi\\4-eai, e^iA.e-eo. \xe2\x80\x94 On the \nelision of e in the ending -e\'eo, see above. No. 1, B (3). \n\n(3) Verbs in -dco follow the common rules of contraction; but in the uncon- \ntracted form, the o is changed into e, e. g. Speco, opeo/j-ev instead of opdco, XP"\'\'\'\xc2\xab*\xc2\xbb \nXpdotnai instead of xpt^erot, etc. Comp. \xc2\xa7 201, 1. \n\n(4) Ao in the uncontracted forms is frequently lengthened into ica (\xc2\xa7 207, 3), \ne. g. xP^t^vTOLii iKTiuyro, dpecovres, ireipecofievos instead of (xpdourai) xP^^\'^\xc2\xb0-\'^i \netc. \n\n(5) The change of the a into e, as in bpica, explains the usage among the Ion. \nwriters of sometimes contracting ao and aov, and also eo and eoi\' in verbs in \n-4a), into -eu (\xc2\xa7 205, 1), e. g. elpcorevu instead of elpcoraov, yehevaa instead of \nyeXdovaa, ayairevt/Tcs instead of ayairdovres. So also in the Doric dialect, e. g \nyeXevvTi instead of yeXdovffi. This contraction into eu instead of ov is often \nfound even in verbs in -oco, e. g. diKaievffi instead of {SikuiSovcti) diKaiovcri, \nSiKaievv instead of BiKaiovv, iSiKaiew, ffrecpavevvrai from arecpavoca. \n\n(6) In Ionic prose, the Epic resolution is found but seldom in verbs in -da^ \ne. g. Ko/xScoffi, T}yop6covTo, Her. \n\n23 \n\n\n\n266 DIALECTS. [$ 223 \n\nm, Doric dialect. (1) Contrary to the common usage of the Doric, ae and \nat I are contracted into v and -p (\xc2\xa7 205, 3), e. g. rifi^re instead of Tifui(:Te = \nTt/iSrc, (poLT-fjs instead of (poiras, opTJv instead of dpav. The Inf. is written \nwithout an i subscript, as the uncontracted fonn originally ended in -aw \nComp. also II. 5, also \xc2\xa7 134, 3. \n\n(2) The Inf. of verbs in -ea has a double form, either the abridged form in \n-4v iQStead of -\xe2\x82\xac7v, e. g. iroiev instead of Troieiv, or according to the analogy of \nverbs in -dw, a form in -7]u (from -ctjj\'), e. g. (piXrju instead of <pi\\4siv = <pi\\\xe2\x82\xaciv, \nKocTfiyy instead of Kotr^eTi/, (ppoyrjv instead of (ppove7y. \n\n(3) In the Doric and -S^olic dialects, -ao, -aov, and -aco are contracted .nto d \n(\xc2\xa7 205, 2), e. g. Treivaixes instead of Treiua/xev {ireiv6.oiJt.ei/), Treivavri instead of \nTtiv{d.-ov)5}-(Xi., yeKav instead of 76A{a-\xc2\xab^)&>i/, (jyvaavres instead of <pvff{d\'o)6i-vres. \n\nRem. 4. On the contraction into -ev instead of -ou, see \xc2\xa7 205, 1. \xe2\x80\x94 A striking \npeculiarity of the Doric dialect, especially of the later Doric as used by The- \nocritus, is, that it frequently has a long a even in the inflection of verbs in -ew. \ne. g. eirSyaffa instead of iiT6vri<Ta from vcoveu, e<pi\\a(ra instead of i(pi\\r)<Ta from \n<pi\\e(i}. \n\n^ 223. Formation of the Tenses. \n\n1. Besides the verbs mentioned (\xc2\xa7 130), the following also in the Homeric \ndialect retain the short characteristic- vowel in forming the tenses, viz. Korew, to \nhave a grudge ; vemeoo, to quarrel ; Tavvw, to stretch ; epvw, to draw. On the con- \ntrary, eiraivew, to approve, has eif^VTjffa. \n\n2. In the Eut. and first Aor. Act. and Mid. of pure verbs, which retain the \nshort characteristic- vowel in forming the tenses, and in the same tenses of verbs \nin -^w, -(Tffo) (-TT&j), the o- can be doubled in the ending, in Homer and other \nnon-Attic poets {\xc2\xa7 208, 4), e. g. eyeKacrae, KOTecrcajxevos, 6fi6(raai, irdwa-ffe, \ndiKdcrcrai, KSfxiCffe. \n\n3. The form of the Attic Fut. (\xc2\xa7 117) occurs in the Homeric dialect in verbs \nin -\'l(oi}, e. g. KTepioucri, ayXa\'ieia^ai, together with the common Futures dp/jLia-a-o- \nfiev, Koirpiffffoyres, Kovi(r(rov(ri{v). From verbs in -ew, -a\xc2\xab, -vco, Horn, forms \nFutures which are similar to the present of these words, viz. in verbs in -ew, he \noften uses the ending -ew instead of -effco, e. g. Kopeei, H. ^, 379. Kopeeis, II. v, \n831. fiax^ovrai, II. ^8, 366 ; \xe2\x80\x94 in verbs in - aw, after dropping <r, he places before \nthe vowel formed by contraction, a corresponding short vowel, e. g. avriSa, \ni\\6caai, Safjida] \xe2\x80\x94 in verbs in -ixa, epvovai and ravvovffi are found. \n\n4. In the Doric dialect, all verbs in - ^co take | instead of cr in those tenses \nwhose characteristic is c, i. e. in the Fut. and Aor., e. g. St/ca^oj, 5tKa|(\xc2\xa3, eS\'iKo^a, \ninstead of SiKdau, idiKaara. But the other tenses of verbs with the pure charac- \nteristic S, follow the regular formation, e. g. eBiKda-^v, not iSiKax^v.\' This \npeculiarity of the Doric appears even in certain verbs in -aw, which, in forming \nthe tenses, retain the short o, and in this respect \xe2\x96\xa0 are analogous to those in -^w, \nwhich likewise have a short vowel, e. g. yexdw, iyeXa^a instead of iy4\\aoa, yet \nnot viKdw, viKOL^w, but yiKda-M (Att. viKiiaca). In Doric poetry, the regular form \nof all these words can be used, according to the necessities of the metre. \n\nf . The following verbs in -^w have, in Homer and the Ionic dialect, | instead \n\n\n\n^ 223. J FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 267 \n\nof <r, through the whole formation, viz. afipordCw, to ivander ; a\\airdCu, to \nempty, Fut. aKaird^w, etc. (so also Xenoph. An. 1. 1, 29) ; Sj/o7roA.(^\xc2\xab, to shake; \n5 o t ^\xc2\xab, to divide, to put to death ; iyyvaXi^w^to give ; iuapi^a, to spoil a dead \nenemy ; ^ pvXXi ^w, to break in pieces ; fxepuripl ^a>, to reflect ; ireXe fii ^a\xc2\xbb, to \nsJiake ; iro\\ef^i ^a>, to contend; arv(pcXi ^w, to smite. % \n\n6. Liquid verbs in-aiw, which in the Attic dialect form the Aor. with the \nending -aua instead of -t^va (\xc2\xa7 149, Rem. 2), have d in the Doric, and rj in the \nEpic and Ionic. The following liquid verbs, in the Epic and poetic dialect of \nall periods, form the Eut. and first Aor. with the ending -ffw and -<ro, viz. \nK4\\Xa)y to land {K\xe2\x82\xac\\<rai, comp. Kevcrai from Kevrea, to goad) ; elXw, to crowd \ntogether (iXaai) ; Kvpa, to meet, to fall upon; apapicrKw (\'AP-fi), toflt (^pcra, dpaai) ; \nip-vv^i, to excite {opera}, S>p(ra) ; Siaep^elpco, to destroy (Siacp^epffai in Homer) 5 \nKelpo), to shave (cKepaa in Homer, but first Aor. IVIid. iKupajxriv) ; (pvpu, to mix, to \nknead {(pvpffo}, etpvpara, 7re<^vpcro/uai, Epic and old poetic; second Aor. Pass. \nitpvpTjv in Lucian, who also has the poetic Perf. irfcpvpfiai, while in prose, the \nverb <l>vpdw, icpvpaaa, ire^vpa/xai, etc., is used). The Opt. oepeWeieVf Od. j8, 334. \nH. IT, 651, is formed according to the usage of the .^Eolic. \n\n7. To verbs which form the Fut. without the tense-characteristic <r {\xc2\xa7 154, 4) \nbelong the following forms of the Epic dialect : fieofxai or fieiofiai, second Pers. \nPep, I shall live, perhaps from fiaivw, to go, to live, also from AAA, to know, to \nlearn, and KEIfl {Kclfiai, to lie down), S73&J, Srj^is, S-fjofiev, S-ficre {I shall view, find), \nand Kilo} or \xc2\xab\xe2\x82\xac\xc2\xab, Kcic/xeu, Keiwu, k^uv. \n\n8. To verbs which form the first Aor. without the tense-characteristic <r \n(\xc2\xa7 154, 7) belong the following forms of the Epic and poetic dialect: xc\'"? ^0 \npour out, \xe2\x82\xacx^"\xc2\xb0\' (Homer; Att. exea) ; crevu, to shake, cacreva and iaffevdij.\'nv \n(Homer), aXfo/xai and aAeuo/uat, to avoid, rjAeuaro, etc. (\xc2\xa7 230) ; Kaica, to burn, \n\xe2\x82\xacKr]a, (Kcia Epic, eKea Tragic (\xc2\xa7 230). \n\n9. To verbs which have an active form for the Fut. Perf. (\xc2\xa7 154, 6), belongs \nalso the Epic Kexapvo\'\'^ (with Kexaprja-o/jMi), I shall be joyful, from x^^\'^P^\' \n\n10. The exchange of the endings of the second Aor. with those of the first \nAor. (\xc2\xa7 154, 7) is somewhat frequent in the Epic dialect, e.g. fiaiuw, to go, \n4$-f}(r\xe2\x82\xacTo, Imp. p-fiaco ; Svofiai, to plunge, id v a era. Imp. Svaeo, Part. Suaofxei/os ] \n&yei), to lead, &^\xe2\x82\xacTf, alc/xev ; iKueoixai, to come, T^ov, i\\4yfxr]u, I laid myself down \nto sleep, Imp. Xe|o, A.e|eo ; opvvfii, excito, Imp. optreo, opccv; <p4po}, to bear, \nolffe {olae is also Att.), o\'iaeTe, olff^Tu, olffovrtov, olaeixev, ola-ffievai] aeiSu, to \nsing, Imp. aelffeo. \n\n11. Several s^ in Homer, are fonned by a Metathesis of the \nconsonant\'- make a dactyle, e. g. eSpcucou instead of eSapKov \n(fro- ir4p^co), ^Spa^oy (from Sap^dvw), fjfi^poToy \n\n). For the same reason Homer syncopates \n\nrom aye pea^ai (ayelpw, to collect) ; eypero, \n\n. (with the accent of the Pres.), iypo/xevos from \n\nu/ce) ; TrT6iA.r]v, iirT6fir]v, irricr^ai, irrouevos {ireTO/xai, to \n\n.KKiTo, KCKhSfievos {KeXofxai, to summon, excite) ; irecpvov, e-rretpvop \n\nul). \n\niS. the first Aor. Pass. Homer inserts a y, aceording to the necessities of \n\n\n\n268 ^ DIALECTS. [$ 223 \n\nthe verse, not only as other poets (\xc2\xa7 149, Rem. 4) in KpivcD and K\\ifw {Siokpiv- \ni^?jT6, Kpiv^els, iK\\iv^), but also in ISpvu, to establish^ and iryeoo, to blow {idpw^v \nand iSpu^j/, afiTTi/vt/^r]). \n\n13. Homer forms a first Perf. only from pure verbs, and such impure verbs \nas in the tewse-formation assume an \xe2\x82\xac (\xc2\xa7 166) or are subject to Metathesis \n(\xc2\xa7 156, 2), e. g. x\xc2\xab^P<\xc2\xbb KexdprjKa (from XAIPE-n), fidWw $4^\\r)Ka (from BAA). \nExcept these, he forms only second Perfects (which belong commonly to \nintransitive verbs, or have an intransitive signification) ; but even in pure verbs \nand in the impure verbs mentioned above, he rejects the k in certain persons \nand modes, and regularly in the Part. ; in this way, these forms become analo- \ngous to those of the second Perf. These participles either lengthen a and e into \n\xc2\xbb7, e. g. fiePaprjds^ burdened (from BAPEJl), KeKopr]ci>s, satisfied (from Kope-yyvfii), \n/ce/coTTjcos, enraged (from /coreo)), rernqcis, troubled (from TIEH), rerArjcis, enduring \n(from TAAXl), KeKacprjds, gasping for breath (from KA*En), KeK/nrjas, wearied (from \nKa/xyco), ireTTTjcis (from irT-f)<rff(a, to shrink through Jear), re^vrjcis, KeKTrjOTi, Kexa- \nDTjCiis (from xoipw) ; \xe2\x80\x94 or they retain, though more seldom, the stem-vowel without \nchange, e. g. fie^ados (from fiaiuw, BAH), eKy\xe2\x82\xacyav7a (from yiyvofxai, TAH), SeSdws \n(from 5t5a(r/cw, AAfl), ire<pvvia (from <|)uw), kvTacas (from \'i<TT7]fii, STAH), fj-e/iaws \n(with [i\xe2\x82\xacfia.d)s and fMefxaSres from MAii). The accented o of the oblique cases \ncan, in the first instance, according to the necessities of the verse, be lengthened \ninto oj, hence re^vrioros and -cDtos, re^yrjoTa and -wto, K6K/i7j<^Ta and -wto ; but \nwhen the Nom. has a short penult, u is always used (except in i<TTa6Tos), e. g. \nPefiauTos. The ending -c6^, formed by contraction, is resolved by e in TreTTTewTa \n(from ttiVtw), re^yewri, and according to the necessities of the verse, e can be \nlengthened into et, e. g. re^veiwros. The feminine form -co a a is found only in \n^e^caffa, Od. u, 14 ; in some feminine forms, the antepenult, which properly would \nbe long, is shortened on account of the verse, e. g. apapvia (Fem. of ap-qp^s from \napapla-Kw), ficfiaKvia (of fi\xe2\x82\xac/ji.7]K^s, from fji.r}Kdofj.ai), re^aXvia (of rei^Acus, from \n^dWca), Xe\\dKv7a (of AcAtj/cc^s, from KaffKu), \'ireirdS)v7a (from Trd(TX(o)- \n\nRemark 1. The form resolved by f, in the Ionic dialect, has become the \npermanent one with some participles, e. g. iaredos ; so re^vedos (never Tc^vcas) \nand Te^vr)Kdt)s from re^i/r^Ka, remains even in the Attic dialect. In these forms, \nthe a remains through all the cases, e. g. \n\necTTedos, kaT^axrd.^ earecis. Gen. k<TT\xe2\x82\xacUTOS^ -dlxnjs \nre^t/edos, re^veaca, re^j/edos, Gen. re? -vros, -dxT-qs. \n\nBefirjKa and reVATj/ca never have these forms. Co Rem. 3. \n\n14. Some verbs, which in the stem of th- "-^hthong fu, \n\nshorten it in the Epic and poetic dialect intr ^ and \n\nin the first Aor. Pass., e. g. \n\nTrei^ofiaii to asJc, it 4 ir v ff fx a i \'-, arevco, to shah.^^ \n/tot, first Aor. Pass, ifforv^rjv; revxo (poet.;, ^ \nir^x^V f^\'i (j>eiyci>, to Jlee, Yerf. irecpvyfi^vos. \n\nRem. 2. Xe\xc2\xab (formed from x^^^^ X^"5<\xc2\xbb)) to pour out, follows u \nthese verbs, in the forms k^x^ku, Ke\'xu/xot, ix^^f 5 these forms have o^ \nferred to the Common language also (\xc2\xa7 154, Rem. 1). Contrary to the an^ \n\n\n\n^ 224. CONJUGATION IN -fXt. 269 \n\njust stated, the v is long in the Homeric form irdirvvfiai from irvew {irycFo)), to \nblow. \n\nRem. 3. In Homer, Od. o-, 238, the third Pers. Opt. Plup. AeAGro instead of \n\\e\\viTo is found, according to the analogy of \xe2\x96\xa0jrrjyi\'vTo^ Saivvro. \n\nEem. 4. The Homeric Perfects aKaxh^-euos, aXaKrjfievos, ap-npe/xevos, i\\T}\\d/j.e- \nyos. aK6.xy\\(T^a.h o-KaKiria^aiy have the accentuation of the Pres. \n\nk 224. Conjugation in -fn. \n\n1. On the lengthened form of the second Pers. ri^-qcrba, didoKrl^a, see \xc2\xa7 220, \n2; on the Iterative forms in -(t/coj/, see \xc2\xa7 221 ; on the Inf forms in -[xevai, -/xev, \nsee \xc2\xa7 220, 18. \n\n2. In the Epic, Ion,, and Dor. writers, some verbs in -jul in the second and \nthird Pers. Sing. Pres. and Impf , frequently have the contracted forms of verbs \nin -eca and -6(o (\xc2\xa7 172, Rem. 8), e. g. n^us, n^e?, 5i5o7s, SiSoT, iriS^ei, iSiSovs, \niSiSov, \'Ui ; \xe2\x80\x94 contracted forms of tirrTj^t are very rare, e. g. lo-rq, instead of \n\'/(TTTjo-i, Her. 4, 103. In the second Aor. Opt. Mid. the Ionic writers have the \nresolved form bcoifx-qv, as if from \xc2\xa9Efl, e. g. irpos^eoiro, irpos^eoKx^e. \n\n3. In the Epic dialect, verbs in -vfjn form an Opt., not only in the Mid., as \nsometimes in Attic writers, e. g. daivvTo, II. w, 665. (comp. AeACro, \xc2\xa7 223, Rem. \n3), from Saiyvfiai, but also in the Act., e. g. e/fSO/iev (instead of iKSvi-n/xeu) from \ne/c5ua>, <pDr] (instead of (pvlrj) from ^vw] so (p^To, <P^2to Opt. of i^StiyL-qv from \n\n4. The third Pers. PI. Impf and second Aor. in -c-a-av, -Tf-aav, -o-aav, -w-ffav \n-v-cav, are abridged in the Epic and Dor. dialects into -ei/, -oj/, -oy, -vr, e. g. \nerti&ej/ instead of cTt^etroi\', ei^ej/, \xc2\xab^cV instead of ei^eo-a;/ ; ea-rau, <nav instead of \nicxT-qaav, <pbav instead of ^(p^aay, e)8oj/, fidy instead of e^rjaav] eSidoy, diSov \ninstead of iSiSoa-av. eSoj/, Soy instead of eSocrot\' ; ^(pvy instead of e(pvcray. \n\n5. The second Pers. Sing. Pres. Imp. Act. has in Hom. the common form \ntffTT}, but H. i, 202. Ko^icTa ; Trort^et in Theoc. instead of irori^es or 7rp6s^\xe2\x82\xacs \nfrom TIOEfl. \xe2\x80\x94 In the second Pers. Sing. Pres. and second Aor. Mid. Imp., \nHomer rejects the a and admits the uncontracted form even when it could be \ncontracted, e. g. Saiyvo, fxapyao, (pdo, avy^fo, ey^fo. \xe2\x80\x94 In the Ion. dialect, the fii-st \na of the ending -o<rot, second Pers. Mid. or Pass., is changed into e, after the \nrejection of the a, e. g. iirla-reai, Svyeai, instead of eTrio-Tao-at, dvyaaat] hence \nthe conti-acted forms itricrTr] in the Ion. poets, and also Svyri (\xc2\xa7 172, 2) in the \nTragedians. \n\n6. The short stem-vowel is sometimes lengthened before personal-endings \nbeginning with fi and y, according to the demand of the measure, e. g. ri^/xe- \nyos ; SiSovyai ; so also StSwS^i, \'lArj^i instead of "\\a^i. \n\n7. The third Pers. Sing. Subj. has often in the Epic dialect the ending -<rt \n(\xc2\xa7 220, 4), e. g. 8cf(ri and St^Tjo-t (instead of S^), fiiblriffi. \n\n8. The contracted Subj. of verbs with the characteristic a and \xe2\x82\xac, is sometimes \nresolved by \xe2\x82\xac in the second Aor., Epic dialect, and regularly in the Ion. \n\n(a) Verbs in -o (ta-TTj/ij) : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n{i(TTd-\\ \'iTToi Ion. tcre-w, la-re-rjs, IffTe-ufx-cy, -e\'-Tyre, -e-ojci \n(<rT(\xc2\xa3-) OTu " ari-u, are-ris, aTe-ufiey., etc. \n\n23*\' \n\n\n\n1 \n\n\n\n270 \n\n\n\nDIALECTS. \n\n\n\nH 224 \n\n\n\nRemark 1. So also in Herod.: irpo^armTe and eareacri, ia-redos, instead of \n\xe2\x80\xa2daai, -adis, Gen. effrewTos, Neut. earecis, Fern. kaTeuxra. So also in the Att \nTe3^vecis (with ri^vT}K(!}s)y re^vew(Ta, re^yews, Gen. Te^veuTos. \n\n(b) Verbs in e (riSTj/xt) : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nTii9-(S Ion. Tii^-e-co, Ti^4-T)s, Ti^i-oifxiv, -e-Tjre, -i-affi \nTi^UfMai " Ti^\xe2\x82\xac-(afiai, Ti^e-rjj etc. \n\ni&\xc2\xab " ^e-w, ^e-r)s, ^e-cofxeVy etc. \n^ciixai " ^e-ufiai, etc. \n\nRem. 2. Here also the two Aorists of the Pass, of all verbs are like the \nverb r/i^Tj/ii, e. g. \n\ntuttS, -rjs Ion. rvireca, -er7s, -4(a(j.ev, -eTjre \n\nSa/xoi, -fjs " dafiew, -erjs, -ew/xe;/, -eTjre \neujoe^-w, -7?s " eiipe^eoo, -e\'ps, etc. \n\n(c) Verbs in o (Si5a>/it) ; the contracted second Aor. Subj. is -esolved in \nHomer by means of w, e. g. Sc^wct instead of ScDeri. \n\n9. In the Subj. second Aor., Homer uses the following forms, according to \nthe nature of the verse : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n\n\n\n\nContracted, \n\n\nResolved and lengthened forms, \n\n\n\n\nSing. 1. \n\n\narw \n\n\nCTettf, (TTe/w, fieiofjLai \n\n\n\n\n2. \n\n\narfis \n\n\n(TT-firfS \n\n\n\n\n3. \n\n\nCrTT] \n\n\nCT7]r}, ifi^^T), <pi]rj, (p^i]ri \n\n\n\n\nDual. \n\n\ncrrrtTov \n\n\nTTap(TT7]eT0V \n\n\n\n\nPlur. 1. \n\n\n(rrw/xeu \n\n\narewfiev (dissyllable) ardofMeVy KaTafieiofiev | \n\n\n2. \n\n\nffriiTe \n\n\n(TTTjeTe \n\n\n\n\n3. \n\n\nctS><xl[u) \n\n\n(TTeaaiiv), TrepicTT-fiwcri, H. p, 95. \n\n\n\n\nSing. 1. \n\n\nSfS> \n\n\n&e&>, 3-eta>, dafxeico \n\n\n\n\n2. \n\n\nSri}S \n\n\nS-e??s, Sffijis, and ^eiris \n\n\n\n\n3. \n\n\nSf\'fi \n\n\n^erj, iS-T)?;, avi\'jri, and /xe^eir) \n\n\n\n\nDual. \n\n\n^rjrou \n\n\n^eierov \n\n\n\n\nPlur. 1. \n\n\n3-(i/iej/ \n\n\nS^eajjuej/, i^eio/xej/ \n\n\n\n\n2. \n\n\n^Vre \n\n\nda/j-eiere \n\n\n\n\n3. \n\n\nSrwat{v) \n\n\n^4(\xc2\xbb)ai{v), ^da}<n{u) \n\n\n\n\nSing. 1. \n\n\nSq} \n\n\n\n\n\n\n2. \n\n\nS(ps \n\n\n\n\n\n\n3. \n\n\nS^ \n\n\nSci>r)(n{v) and Scij? \n\n\n\n\nPlur. 1. \n\n\ndwfiev \n\n\nScio^ei\' \n\n\n\n\n2. \n\n\nSure \n\n\n\n\n\n\n3. \n\n\n$w(n{v) \n\n\n5c\xc2\xab;co(ri(\xc2\xbb/) \n\n\n\n\n\nRem. 3. The resolution by means of e is found in verbs with the stem- \nvowels a or e; the e is commonly lengthened, (a) into ei before an o sound; \n(b) into 7) before tj in verbs with the stem-vowel o; (c) sometimes into et, some- \ntimes into 7j before 7;, in verbs with the stem-vowel e. Verbs with the stem- \nvowel are resolved by a. \n\n10. The Imj^f iri^-nv, or commonly iTi^ovu, has in the Ion. the form irt^ea \n(like irerixpea lon. instead of irerixpeLu, \xc2\xa7 220, 8), eri^-ees, -ee, etc. \n\n11. In Homer, a shortened foi-m of the first Aor. icrriaav^ is found, namely, \nea-Taaav, they placed, II. /a, 56. Od. 7, 182, c, 307 ; also eo-TTjre (with the variation \necTTTjTe), 11. 5, 243, 246, instead of eVraTC (IcrT^/coTe). \n\n\n\nf^225, 226.3 CONJUGATION IN -/At. Et/U, TO BE. ^Et/Xl, TO GO. 271 \n\n12. In the third Pers. PL Mid, or Pass, the v before the personal-endings -to* \nand -TO is regularly changed, by the Ion. writers, into a (\xc2\xa7 220, 13), e. g. \n\nTi(3-eaTot, SiSJoToi, iSeiKvvaTo Ion., instead of TiiS-eyrot, etc. \n\nBut when an a precedes the v, the a is changed into e, and v into o, e. g. IcniaTai \nIon., instead of \'/cToj/Tat, lareaTo Ion., instead of \'icrravTo. \n\n13. The third Pers. Sing, in the Doric is -n, e. g. \'lo-totl, rl^n, SlSwri, Set/c- \nj/uTt, and the third Pers. PI. ends in -vri, e. g. la-TauTi, rt^ivri^ Sidouri^ Z^ikvvvti. \n\n14. The foi-ms of the first Aor. Mid. \xe2\x82\xac^7]Kdfir]u and iSco Kafir}!/ and the Part. \n^Kcifxeyos are found in the Ion. and Dor. writers ; on the contrary, the Att. \nwriters use here also, the forms of the second Aor. Mid. The remaining \nModes, as also the Part. ScoKa/jLci/os, are not found. \n\n1 5. From SiSufj-i^ Homer has a reduplicated Put. Sidiatrofiev and SiSuxreiy. \n\n\n\n$225- El/At CE:S-), to be. \n\n\n\nPEESENT \n\n\n\nS. 1. \n2. \n\n3. \nP. 1. \n\n2. \n3. \n\n\n\nIndicative, \nififil -^ol., instead of i<r-ij.i \niffai Epic, also Eur. Hel. 1250. \n\ne?s Ion. \nivTi Dor. \n\net/i\xe2\x82\xacF Epic and Ion. \neVre regular \nea.<TL{u) Epic and Ion., hrl Dor. \n\n\n\nInf. \xe2\x82\xacfj.euai, ifjLfxevai^ ^H-^^i ^fifi^y Epic \n^/xeu or "^/JieSj flfieu or eJfies Dor. \n\n\n\nSubjunctive. \n\n1. eco Ep. and Ion. fieTeiw Ep. \n\n2. cTjs Ion. \n\n3. e77, ci70-i(i\'), ^(Ti(j/), et^p Epic, erj \nEp. and Ion. \n\nPI. iojfx^v., cTjTe, ewo-f Ep. and Ion. \n\n\n\nImperative. \nS. 2. eco-o Mo\\. and Epic \nP. 3. i6i/rwu Ion. \n\n\n\nParticiple. \nidv, iova-a, lov Ep. and Ion. \n\n\n\nIMPERFECT. \n\n\n\nS. 1. \n\n2. \n\n3. \nD.3. \nP. 1. \n\n2. \n\n3. \n\n\n\nIndicative. \nia (comp. erii^ea), ^a, eo\xc2\xbb/, e<TKO\xc2\xbb\' Epic and Ion. \ni-r](yba Epic, eaj Ion. \n\n\xe2\x82\xac77*/ Ep. and Ion. \xe2\x80\xa2^tjj/, ^ej/, eo-/ce(i/), Ep., ^s Dor. \n\xc2\xa5i<Tr-r]v Epic \n\n^U6i/ or \xe2\x96\xa0^^es, eT/ie;/ or eZyites Dor. \neare Ion. \n\netrav (eTrecaf ) Epic and Ion. 5 eJf rro (instead of \n^vTo) Od. u, 106. \n\n\n\nOptative. \n\xe2\x82\xac01 Epic and Ion. \n\n\n\neots \n\n\n\neTre Epic \nehv Epic \n\n\n\nFu^ icroyMi and ea-aro/xai, etc. Epic, according to the necessities of the verse, \n2. iCTeai. 3. ecerai, icelrai. \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 226. ET/tt (\'I-), ^o ^0. \n\nPrgs. /\xc2\xab<?. S. 2. eTor3\xc2\xab Epic, \xe2\x82\xac?s Ion. a^hZj;- Sing. 2. Pers. r77o-,^a Epic \n\nInf. ^fievai, Xix^v Epic \n\niing/] Ind S. 1. \xe2\x96\xa0^ia (and ^^tv) Epic and Ion., ^iW Epic \n\n2. f;tes (and ^ets), Ifes Epic \n\n3. ^ie (and jf\xe2\x82\xaci) Epic and Ion., \xe2\x80\xa2^i-e(\xc2\xbb\'} Epic, ^e{v), U{v) Epic \n\n\n\n272 DIALECTS. [^ 227 \n\np. 1. \xe2\x96\xa0po/Jiey \n\nS. ^\'iov Epic, ^Xffav and ^aav Epic and Ion., laav Epic \nD. 3. \'ir-f]v Epic \nOpt. S. 3. 1.01 Epic, ie/y? II. T, 209. (eV and e5f7? H. o, 82. \xc2\xab, 139. Od. |, 496 \n\ncome from ei^tit). \nFut. and JLor. iliic?. eio-o/iot, eio-aro, third Pers. Dual ieiffda^v, II. o, 544. \n\n\n\nVerbs in -o), which in the Pees., Perf., and second Aoe. Act. and \nMid., follow the analogy of Verbs in -/it. \n\n\xc2\xa7 227. (1) Second Aor. Act. and Mid. \n\nIn addition, to the Aor. forms mentioned (\xc2\xa7^ 191, 192), the poetic and \nespecially the Epic dialect has the following : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nA. The Characteristic is a Vowel. \n\n(a) Stem- Vowel o (e/STjy, BA-) : \n\nfidWw, to throw, Epic second Aor. Act. (BAA-, %^Kt]v) ^vjxfiXTjTrjVy Od. ^, 15, \nluf ^v/xfiX-n/jLeuai (instead of -vvat), II. </), 578 ; Epic second Aor. Mid. (e)3A^- \nfirjv) i^K-qTo, ^vfxP^\\7}UTo, II. |, 27, Inf. fiXrja^cu, Part. fi\\T\\fievoSy Subj. ^vfi^X-rf \nrai, fi\\i}erai (instead of P\\r]7]Tai), Od. p, 472, Opt. /SAelo (from BAE-, comp. \nirLfj.iv\\riiJ.i), II. V, 288. Hence the Fut. ^X-iicroiiai. \n\nyrjpdw, or y-qpaaKoo, to grow old, second Aor. third Pers. Sing, iyfipd, H. p, 197, \nKaTcyrjpd, Herod. 6, 72, Inf. (Att.) yripavai, Part. (Epic) yrjpds. The d in \niyi]pa, etc. is used instead of ri on account of the preceding p. See St5/)(\xc2\xa3<rK\xc2\xab, \n\xc2\xa7 192, I. \n\nKrduca, to hill, Epic and poet, second Aor. Act. (KTA-) cktolu retains the short \nvowel ; thus, e/crd/ie;/, e/cTdre, third Pers. PI. also efcrav instead of e/cTdo-eu/, \nSubj. KTw (first Pers. PI. KTiUfj-ev Epic), Opt. KTai-qv, Inf Kravax, (Epic /cT(\xc2\xa3/i\xe2\x82\xaci/, \nKTa/^ei/ai), Part, /eras; Epic second Aor. JNIid. with Pass, sense, aTre/craTo, \nKTacrS-at, KaraKrajxevos. \n\noifTao}, to wound, Epic second Aor. Act. ovTa third Pers. Sing., Inf. ohrd/xevauy \novrd/xeu (the a remains short as in XsTdi/) ; Epic second Aor. Mid. ovrdfievos, \nwounded. \n\nireAa^o}, to approach, Epic second Aor. Mid. iirXinxriv, (Att. cVAo/iTji\'), ttA^to, \nTvXrivTa. \n\nTrXii^di {irifi\'KX\'qixi), to fill, Y^^io, second Aor. Mid. ^nX-qTO and ttAtJto, iirX-qi/rOf \nalso in Aiistoph., who uses the following forms also : Imp. xAtjco, Part. 4fnrXri- \n/xeuos, Opt. i/xirX-^iJii]!/ with the variation iixirXeifxTqi\'y as xp^\'^V from x/\'\'\'7(aa)) and \nySAeiO from ifiX^fi-nv (BAA-). \n\nTTTTjo-o-o), to shrink with fear, Epic second Aor. Act. (IITA-) (eTTTTji/) KararrrfiTriP \nthird Pers. Dual. \n\n(p^dvot), to come hefi)re, Epic second Aor. Mid. (p^dfievos. \n\nRemark. From efirju {fialuco) are found in Homer the forms /SarTjv (third \nPers. Dual) and vnep^dacw (third Pers. PI.) with tlie short stem-voweL \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 227.^ * VERBS IN -a> LIKE VERBS IN -fJLL. 273 \n\n(b) Stem- Vowel e {eafi-nu, 2BE-): \n\nAAn. Epic, stem of StScto-Kw, to teach, second Aor. Act. (AAE-) idd-rjUf I learned^ \nSubj. Sow, Epic Saeluf Inf. Sarjvai, Epic Saiifievai. \n\n(c) Stem-Vowel i: \n\nipZi-vw, to consume and to vanish, Epic second Aor. Mid. i(p^f/x7]u, <{>^i<r^ai, (p^l- \nfjt.\xe2\x82\xaci/os, (p^ia^ca, (pM^fxai^ Opt. (p^r/jLTjV) (p^Tro. \n\n(d) Stem-VoAvel o {iyvwv, TNO-) : \n\nfiifipwaKu, to eat, Epic second Aor. Act. ^fipuu. See \xc2\xa7 161, 6. \nir\\w(a (Epic and Ion. secondary form of TrAe\'w), to sail, Epic second Aor. Act. \niir\\(t3V, eirXwixepy Part. \'ir\\<as, Gen. ttAw^/tos. \n\n(e) Stem-VoAvel v {eSvv): \n\nK\\vu (poet.), to hear. Epic Imp. second Aor. Act. KAGi^t, /f\\Dre; and kckKv^i, \n\nKeK\\vTe (\xc2\xa7 219, 7). \nAvw, to loose, Epic secondAor. Mid. \\vro, Aiuro. \nirj/eetf, to breathe, Epic second Aor. Mid. (riNT-, from ttv4Fw, nue^ico) &fjLTrpvTo \n\ninstead of aueirvvro, to breathe again, \naevu, to shake. Epic second Aor. Mid. iaavfiriv, I strove, eaffvo, avro. \nX^o, to pour out. Epic second Aor. Mid. (XT-, from x^^"> X^\'^\'^) X^^^y x\'^M^*\'"^* \n\n\n\nB. The Characteristic is a Consonant. \n\nEWofj-ai, to leap. Epic and second Aor. Mid. a\\(ro, SAto, iird\\fjL\xe2\x82\xacV05, i\'irid\\/x\xe2\x82\xacvosj \n\nSubj. &\\7}Tai. \nhpapiffKu (\'AP-), to Jit, Epic 6.p^ivos^ fitted, \nyivTo, to take. Epic, from Fe\\To, the Digamma being changed into\' y and the \n\nradical \\ before t into v (^ 203, B). \nylyvoixai, to become, poet, eyeuro, y4mo. \nS^X^fiai, to take, Epic eSe/cro, Inf. Sex^ai, Imp. Se|o. The first Pers. Sing. \n\niSey/xr^v and the Part. S4yiJ.\xe2\x82\xacvos have, like the Perf. ScBeyixai, the meaning to \n\nexpect, await. \n4K\xe2\x82\xac\\i((i>, to whirl, Epic eAeAt/cro. \n\niKueofxai, to come. Epic Tkto, \'Ik/jlcvos and Ikji^vos, favorable. \nAEXn, to lie down, Epic 4\\4yixr}u, eAe/cro, to lay one\'s self down (same sense as \n\niKe^dfj-rfv), Imp. Ae|o. \xe2\x80\x94 Ae^a), to collect, to choose, to count, Od. <, 335. i\\4yix7iv, \n\nI counted myself, Od. S, 451. Ae/cro apiStix6v, he counted the number, \nuiaiyco, to soil, Epic fiidv^v (third Pers. Dual, instead of ipudv-abiiv). \nula-yo) {/iiiyvv/u), to mix. Epic ix\'ikto. \n\nbpvvo} (opyvfjLi), to excite. Epic Spro, Inf. op^ai, Imp. opo-o, ifpceo, Part. 6pfxeyo5, \nir<iAA\xc2\xab, to brandish. Epic irdXro, he sprang. \n\nirep^cDy to destroy, perdo. Homer uses irep^at instead of irep^-a^cu, \nIIHrXi {vfjywfu), to fiXf Epic ttijkto, KariTtTiKTO, \n\n\n\n274 DIALECTS. \' [i 228. \n\n\xc2\xa7 228. (2) Per/, and Plup. Act. {Comp, ^k 193, 194). \n\n(a) The Stem ends in a Vowel. \n\nyiyyofiai, to become; TEFAA, Stem FA: Perf. (Sing, yeyoya, -as, -f) Epic and \npoet, yeyufiev, -are, -ad.(n{v)^ Inf. Epic yiydfjL^v, Part. poet, yeyciis, yeyuaa, \nycydss. Gen. y^ywTos ; \xe2\x80\x94 Plup. Epic iKy^ydrriu. \n\nBaivco, to go^ Perf. ^4firjKa, BEBAA: Epic and poet. PI. ^SejSd/iej/, -are, -a(n[y), and \n/8e)3ad(rt(j/) ; third Pers. PI. Subj. ifjLfiefiwa-i (PI. Phaed. 252, e), Inf. fiefiduou. \nPart. Epic ^efiacis (also Attic prose fiefidis^ Xen. Hell. 7. 2, 3), -v7a\'(fiePa(ra, \nPI. Phaed. 254, b). Gen. fiefiauros (Att. y8e;8aiTos) ; \xe2\x80\x94 Plup. e\')3e;3d/t\xe2\x82\xacv, -are, \n-daaj\'. \n\nS\'eiSw, to fear; besides the forms mentioned (\xc2\xa7 193), the following Epic forms \nare to be noted : S^iSi/xev, SeldLTc ; Inf. Sei8i/iev instead of SeSteVat ; Imp. \nSeiSi3-t, Seldney \xe2\x80\x94 Plup. eSeiSt/uei/, eSeiSttraj/. \n\n\xc2\xa3pXoiJ.ai, to come, Perf Epic elK-fiKov^a instead of i\\7]\\v^a, PI. \xe2\x82\xacikij\\ov^u.\xe2\x82\xacv. \n\nbvT](TK(a, to die, Perf. r4^vi]Ka, TE0NAA : PL rehvajxcv, ri^vare, rebva(n{v), Imp. \nTi^vaSn, Part. re^vriKcjs, Ti^vr]Kv1a, Tebvi\\K6s or renews (T6i5^i/ea>(ra. Demosth. \n40, 24), rei^j/ecos (Epic re^frjus, -utos, -tjStos), Inf. rei^vavat (Aesch. tcSt/ovow \nfrom re^ua^vai, Epic Te^vdfxev, -d/xcvai) : Plup. ir^^vacrav, Opt. Ti^i/alrjU. \n\nTAAn, to endure (second Aor. ctAtji/), Perf. T\xe2\x82\xacT\\r]Ka, TETAAA: Dual TeVXaToy; \nPL TeTAct/Aej\', TeTAdre, TeTAa(rt(i\'), Imp. TerAcu^t, -otw, etc., Subj. wanting, \nInf TcrAavai (Epic TerAa/xej/), but Part. Epic tctAtjws ; Plup. Dual irerkuToy, \n^reTKa.T7}v, PL ir\xe2\x82\xacT\\a,fxey, eTeTAdre, iTeT\\a<ray, Opt. TerAa/Tji/. \n\nMAH, fo sfn\'ye, Perf. ficfjioya; MEMAA : Epic /ue/id/iei/, -utoj/, -are, -ad(ri(F), Imp. \nfxefxarce, Part, fie/xads. Gen. /le/xdcDTos and fiefidSros, third Pers. Pi. Plup. \n/U\xe2\x82\xac/Ad(rav. \n\nHere belong the two participles of \n\nBifipdxrKw, to eat (second Aor. efipwv), Perf. fiefipwKa, poet. Pe^pws, Gen. -drros; \nirfvrTO), to y\xc2\xab^^) 7r\xe2\x82\xac7rTa\xc2\xbb/ca, Epic TreTrrewy, Att. poet. TreirTws. \n\n(b) The Stem ends in a Consonant. \n\nIt is to be observed in respect to the formation, that when the consonant of \nthe stem comes before a personal-ending beginning with t, the t is changed \ninto ^, and thus these forms assume the appearance of a Mid. form, e. g. \n\nirei\'(d^cD, to persuade, irewoi^a, to trust, Epic Plup. eTreVj^^uey, Imp. in Aeschyl \nEum. 602, Treireia^i (instead of TreTriO-i^i). \n\nRemark. Thus the Epic form Treiroa-^e. stem TIEN\xc2\xa9 with the i-ariable o \n(nON0), instead of TreTroVi^are from Trdax^\'i fi\'Om TreTroV^are by dropping the \nconnecting vowel a, comes ireirou^e; and hence as a Tau-mute before another \nTau-mute is changed into o- (\xc2\xa7 17, 5, comp. \'id-re = "ia-re), TrrrovidTc becomes \ntreirai/a-^e, and as y is dropped before tr, ireTroa-Te ; finally, this form, as has been \nseen, assumed the appearance of the Mid. form {^e) and so became weroa^e. \n\n\n\nPer/. Tnd. S. \nD.2. \n\n\n\nKeKpdya, -as, -e{v) (/cpa^o), to bawl) Plup. iKeKp&yeiv, -eis, -a \nK\xe2\x82\xacKpd.yarov KeKpax^oy iKCKpdyetroy iKfKpax^oy \n\n\n\n3. KeKpSLyaroy KCKpax^oy iKfKpayfiTrjv iK\xe2\x82\xacKpdx^> \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 229.] VERBS IN -CO LIKE VERDS IN -fU. 275 \n\nP. 1* K\xe2\x82\xacKpd.yafi\xe2\x82\xacy KCKpayfiey \xe2\x82\xacK\xe2\x82\xacKp(iy\xe2\x82\xaciiJ.\xe2\x82\xacv iKSKpayfiey \n\n2. KCKpSLyare KCKpax^^ iKCKpayeire eKeKpax^e \n\n3. KeKpS.yd(Ti{v) \xe2\x82\xacKeKpdyei<TaVf -\xe2\x82\xac(Tav \nImp. K4Kpax^h -dx^ci}, \xe2\x80\xa2oi\'X^^i 6tc. Inf. K^Kpayivai. Part. KeKpayus, \n\nSo the Epic Perf. &u6iyya with the sense of the Pres. I command, ^vayas, S^uaye, \nPI. 6.vo}yiJi\xe2\x82\xacv: Imp. ^vorye and iyax^h di/ftryeTO) and avdox^of, audoyere and \ndvioX^f] Subj. avdayy^ Inf. avceyefiev ; Plup. T]vuyca, riytayei ; Opt. avwyois. \n\n4yeip(i}y to aivaken, Perf. iyp-f^yopa (stem \'EFEP with the variable e), I am aivake; \nfrom this, Homer has the forms: Imp. iyp-fjyop^e instead of iypi]y6paT\xe2\x82\xac, Inf \niyprjySp^ai (as if from iypriyopfiou) and iyp7rY6p^a<n(v) instead of iypiqySpa- \ntri(v) third Pers. PL \n\nol5o, I know, the regular forms oXBaney, oJfSare, o\'[5cutl{v) are found hut rarely in \nthe Ion. and Att. writers (^ 195, 1), second Pers. olZas in Horn, and lou \n(rarely Att. \xc2\xa7 195, 1). The form \'[B-/xev is Epic^ Ion., and Doric. Inf id/j-evcu \nand tSfieif Epic, Subj. i5c\xc2\xab Epic instead of elSu (Ion. eiSew), Part. iSi/ia Epic \nand elSvia, \n\nPlup. 1. Pers. Sing. ^5ea (hence the Att. fjSri) Epic instead of ^Seip \n\n2. " *\' 7}\xe2\x82\xaci5eis and rtflSr]s Epic instead of -pSets \n\n3. " " f?\xe2\x82\xac(5e< and rjdSr], j;5\xe2\x82\xace(i\'), Epic instead of fjSei] \xe2\x80\x94 ^etSe, \n\nHerod. \n3. " PI. la-av Epic instead of f}5e<rav, \nFut. cjSVjo-o) Epic and also eXao/jMi, \n\neoiKUy lam like. Epic, ^iktov (Dual), iticn]v (Plup. Dual); hence in Plup. Mid. \nor Pass. ei\'/cTo, \n\n\n\n$229. (3) Present and Imj^erfect. \n\nFinally, there are certain forms of the Pres. and Impf. mostly in the Epic \ndialect, which after the analogy of verbs in -jjli^ take the personal-endings with- \nout the Mode-vowel. Tims : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nctruw, to complete, in Theocritus: Impf 6.trv-(ifs (instead of fj^o/txev), &vv-ro (instead \n\nof rtvviTo). \nTavvoo, to stretch, to span, H. p, 393. rdyii-rou (instead of ravverou). \nepvco, to draw, (pmou, etpvro, tpvro^ tpvao, ^vc^ai (\xc2\xa7 230). \no-euoj, to shake, Epic Pres. ceCrcu and (by variation) o-oCtoj, Imp. cov(to and \n\nabridged aov, rrova^f, (toikt^u {to move one\'s self, to hasten). The Imp. has \n\npassed into the common colloquial language. \nfSo}^ commonly ia^lco, to eat, Epic, Inf eS/xeyau \n^cp\xc2\xbb, to carry, Epic Imp. <p4pTf instead of <p4peT\xe2\x82\xac, \n\n\n\n276 DIALECTS. [\xc2\xa7 23D \n\n\n\n4 230. Alphabetical List of Verbs in the Dialecta \nto be specially noted, \n\nkA.u> {aFda), to hurt, to deceive; Horn. 3-i?\xc2\xbb\'at; the Att. Tragedians use tha \nhas the following forms : Aor. aaaa following forms : aWw and ia-aw, \nand acra ; Pres. Mid. aarai, Aor. aaad- jJla, a^ai and ^|a, a^ai. \nfji-qv, Aor. Pass, ada-^riy. Verb. Adj. aico (Ep.), to hear, only Pres. and Impf \nuutSs (a-daros). ouou. Comp. iirdio). \n\nayalofxai, Epic and Ion. prose (\xc2\xa7 164) oKaxtX&j (Epic), to trouble, stem \'AXfl, \nand ay do fj-ai (Yjp.), to be anfjry at, &nd second Aor. fjKaxov, Fut. aKaxh<r(o, \nin the Pres. Epic also to. (grudge, to first Aor. rjKdxvo-a ; Mid aKaxKotuu^ \nenvy. Put. aydao/xat ; Aor. riyaadiuLrju. dxa/xou or dxwixai, to be sad, Aor. \n\naydpca, to collect, ILync second Aor. Mid. riKax6fJi.w (\xc2\xa7219, 7) ; Perf. aK-fixefmi \nayepovTo,\'PiXXt. aypofieuos (\xc2\xa722.3, 11); (\xc2\xa7 219, 8, comp. apripeixai, opwpefiai) \nPlup. aynyiparo ; Aor. Pass, ayepbr], and aKdxvH-at, third Pers. PI. oktjxc- \nthird Pers. PI. dyep^e;/; Epic Pres. Sarai (\xc2\xa7 220, Rem. 2) and a/cTjxcoTOi, \nTiyepi^ofiai (\xc2\xa7 162). Part. aKTJxefifvos and aKaxvt^^\'\'OS, Inf. \n\nayvoicti, to be ignorant, \'E\\). Aor. T]yvoii]<T\xe2\x82\xac uKaxv^^ai (\xc2\xa7 223, Rem. 4); Plup. \n(\xc2\xa7 207, I), dyudjaaa-KC (\xc2\xa7 205, 5). Epic dKaxfiaro. \n\ndyyvfii, to break, Aor. Epic \xe2\x96\xa0^la instead aKdxp-ei/os (Epic), sliarpened, ytointed, \nof ea|a ; third Pers. PI. Aor. Pass. from \'AKfi, acuo, instead of aKaypuvos \ndyev Epic instead of idyrjaav. (H 19, Rem. 1, and 208, 2). The x \n\n&yci}, to lead, Epic second Aor. Imp. comes from the Perf. Act. \n6|eT6, Inf dl4fj.\xe2\x82\xacvai, d|\xe2\x82\xacjufv (\xc2\xa7 223, aKTjSeai, to neglect, Aor. aKTjSecefv). \n10) ; first Aor. Mid. d^aa^e, d^avro. d\\doiJ.ai, to wander about, Ep. Perf. ahd- \n\noeiSco (prose aSw), to sing. Epic second Atj^uoi (^ 219, 8), aKahrjixiyos, a\\d\\r}<T- \nAor. Imp. aeia-fo (\xc2\xa7 223, 10). ^ &ot (\xc2\xa7 223, Rem. 4). \n\naeipca (prose atpco), to raise, Epic first oASaiVoj, ?o 7\xc2\xabai-e increase, Epic Aor. \nAor. Act. diipa, Mid. deipdiuLrjv, Pass. ^\'A.5a\xc2\xbb\'e(v). \n\na4p^r}v ; Epic second Aor. Mid. apc$- dXe^cc, to keep off, Epic second Aor. \n/ir;v from oLipw; Epic Plup. Sw/jto ^KoKkov (\xc2\xa7 219, 7), (from \'AAKXl), \ninstead of i\\pTO with the variable a\\a\\Ke7i/. d\\a\\K(t)u ; Tut. a\\aKKT}ara>. \nvowel, and transposition of the aug- d\\\xe2\x82\xacOfj.ai and aKevoficu (Epic), to shun, \nment ; Epic Pres. rjepe\'^o^at (\xc2\xa7 162). Aor. rjKevduTjv, Subj. aX^Tp-ai, Opt. \n\n\'AHMI, (\'AE-,) to blow; in Homer, are: ahiaiTo, Imp. oA-ea/r^rV, Inf aK^vaxrhcu \nPart, aeis, deVros ; third Pers. Sing. and dA-eW^ai (\xc2\xa7 223. 8). \nImpf dt), del, Sidei (\'AEH) ; in the dA^V\'f\'^, dAj^iV/cw (Ion. prose), to heal, \nother forms, the rj remains contrary Put. d\\^6|a>, etc. \nto the analogy of Ti,^,ut (\xc2\xa7 22-4, 6): dKiTaii\'w (Epic and poet.), to sin, Fut. \ndr\\Tov, drjuai, drj/xei/ai ; JMid. and Pass. dAirTjcw ; Aor. fjXiTov, aXtrSfi-qv, dAt- \ndrjfiai, to blow, v6jj.ei/os koL dri/xevos, TfV^ai ; Perf dAtTTjyuefos, s//j/h/ (\xc2\xa7 223, \ndrenched ivitli rain and beaten with the Rem. 4). \nxoind ; Impf INIid. dr}To. dxxojjiai, to spring. Epic second Aor. \n\noBofiaL and aldeofxai in Homer, to 6e Mid. oAo-o, etc."(\xc2\xa7 227, B). \n\nashamed, to respect. Epic aiS-fjaofjLai, aXuKTeai, to be in trouble, Epic Perf. dXec- \n\xe2\x96\xa0pSea^v and \xe2\x96\xa0pSeardju.riv. XvKTrj/xai (\xc2\xa7 219, 8). \n\naXuvfxi (Ep.), to take (instead of oipvu.uai, aKvaKca (Ep.), to escape, SlKv^u, ijXv^a. \n\xc2\xa7 169, Rem. 1), only Pros, and Impf dX(paiuw (Ep.), tojind, Sec. Aor. aX<pe7u. \n\nalp4co, to take. Ion. Perf dpaipr\\Ka, dpal- d/jLapTdvca, to miss. Epic Aor. ^jfifiporop \npv,uai (\xc2\xa7 219, 8); Epic second Aor. (^ 223. 11. and 208. 3). \nMid. yevTo instead of eXero (\xc2\xa7 227, dfiirXaKicTKco (Ep. and poet.), to err, Fut. \nB ) . duTrXaK7](Tci} ; Aor. \xc2\xa5ijxirXaKOV. \n\nkiacra}, Epic (d, but virat^ei, II. </), 126 ; duSduaj (Ep.. jioct.. and Ion.), to please., \ni) ivistead of dVcrco, to rwsA, Ep. forms : Impf idvdavov (Herod.). c-fjvS. and \n^i|a. Subj. dt^o), Part, at^as \xe2\x96\xa0. Aor. 5};/5. (Ep.); Aor. eaSov (Herod.), aSoir \nPuss, \xe2\x96\xa0^ix\'^\'\' (^1=^0 i\'^ ^^^^Oi Iiif- o^\'X- (Ep.); Inf. aSeTv] Perf. edSa; Fut \n\n\n\ni 230.J LIST OF DIALECTIC VERBS. 277 \n\noSV\xc2\xab. \xe2\x80\x94 Aug., \xc2\xa7 219, 4, 5. In The- Mid. Trans., to lead, e0-n<ra, ifirjffd- \n\nocritus edSe ; Ep. Aor. eijoSov (\xc2\xa7\xc2\xa7219, fiTjv ; second Aor. Mid. i^riaeTo, Imp. \n\n4, and 207, 3). iTri^-fjaeo (\xc2\xa7 223, 10). Ep. secondaiy \n\niLyfivo^e, to spring up, Ep. Perf. with form : fii^da^cou, to stalk, strength- \n\nAtt. Reduplication and the variable ened secondary form from ySoiVw ; \n\nm 219, a, and 140, 4), from also /SijSa, )3t;8wj/Ta, )8i)3co(ra and (from \n\n*ANE0a BIBHMI) jStiSas ; finally, Imp. /3a(r/ce, \n\niiindcc, to meet, Epic ^vreov [\xc2\xa7 222. A and Inf. i-mfiaaKefiev. \n\n(2)J ; <TvvavrT\\Tr]v (\xc2\xa7 222, Rem. 1). jSoAAw, to throw, Ep. second Aor. ejSATjj/, \navvw, to complete, Epic Impf. in Theoc. ifi\\r]/ji.7]v [\xc2\xa7 227, A (a)], Put. ^Xrjaro- \n\ndyiJ/jLES, dviiTo (\xc2\xa7 229). fiat] Ep. Perf. fi^fioXrjfiai (used of the \n\n&vu>ya (Ep. and poet. Perf.), to command, mind) ; but ^4^Kt]ixai (of the body). \n\n6.vMyfjLeu, Imp. &i/(ax^i, etc. (\xc2\xa7 228); fiapeco {Ep.), to be heart/, fiefiapnus {^ 223y \n\nPIup. T}v(vyea (\xc2\xa7 220, 8). In certain 13). \n\nforms this Perf. is changed into the fie^pcv^ois (Ep.), to eat, instead of j8t- \n\nin flection of the Pres., e. g. third PpuiaKois. \n\nPers. Sing, avdyei, Impf. ij^aryot/ and fieofiai and fieio/JLai, I icill go, icill live, \n\n6.v(t>yov; Put. dvw|a> ; Aor. ijvu^a. Ep. Put. jSe\'j;, fifSfj-^a^a (\xc2\xa7 ?23, 7). \n\ninravpau (Epic), to take away, Impf fiido/xai (Ep.) instead of ^ ti^ofxai, to \n\naTT-nvpuu, -as, -a ; first Aor. Act. Part. force, i^LTjaaro, ^f^i-rjKe. \n\nairovpas : first Aor. Mid. airrjiipaTo, PifipwaKU}, to eat, Ep. Aor. (Ppuy [\xc2\xa7 227, \n\nPart. aTroupa/xej/os. A (d)]; Perf Part, fie^pws, -wtos \n\nk-rra(pi(TK(o (Ep.), to deceive, Fut. arracpri- (\xc2\xa7 228). \n\n(TO), second Aor. Act. i]Tra<pov, Opt. fiXcUxxKci} (Ep. and poet.), to go, instead \n\nMid. airdcpoiTO. of ixXuxtkco (\xc2\xa7 18, 3), Aor. t^ioXoVy \n\ni.Tr\xe2\x82\xaci\\(ci} (Ep), to threaten, aTretA^TTji/ fioKeTy, /xoAciy (also X. An. 7. 1,33, \n\n(\xc2\xa7 222, Rem. 1). fidKua-if) ; Perf jLi6V;3Aw/fa( instead of \n\nav6(pff\xe2\x82\xac, an Ep. Aor., he hurried off, /xf/xeKuKa] ; Fnt. fioXov/jLat. \n\nSubj. airofptrrj. Opt. aTroepcreif. fiodu), to cry out, Ep. Aor. efiwaa instead \n\nfiiTTw, to join io, Ep. Aor. Pass, kdcp^, of i^6r]<Ta (\xc2\xa7 205, 5). \n\nfell on. ^QvXojxai, to will, Ep. ^6\\frai, $6\\c(r^\xc2\xab \n\nhpapia-KO) (Ep.), toft, stem APH, first (\xc2\xa7 207, 4), irpo^efiovXa, I prefer. \n\nAor. ^pa-a, apaai {^ 223, a) ; first Aor. fipvxdofiai, to roar, Ep, Perf. fiffipOxa^ \n\nPass, kpdfv instead of ijpShfiaav ; sec- with the sense of the Pres. \n\nond Aor. ijpapov (\xc2\xa7 219, 7; also In- TafifO), to many, Ep. Fut. yajueu; Ep. \n\ntrans, to be adapted, to please), more Fut. yafMeaa-erai, II. *, 394, ic ill give in \n\nusual than the first Aor. ; Perf. dpd- marriage. \n\npa (Ion. 6.pr\\pa) (\xc2\xa7 219. S),Iamftted, yduifiai (Ep.), to be glad, ydwrai] Fut. \n\nIntrans., Ep. apa.pv7a (\xc2\xa7 223, 13), Perf. yayvaaerai. \n\nMid. or Pass. api]peixai, apr}p(f.ifvos FACl, Ep. Perf., y4yafi\xe2\x82\xacv, to have become, \n\n(\xc2\xa7 223, Rem. 4) ; Aor. &p/x\xe2\x82\xacyos, adapted etc. (\xc2\xa7 228). \n\n{i 227, B). yiywva Ep and poet. Perf. with the \n\n*APAn, apdofiai, to pray. Epic second sense of the Pres. ^o cr^ oh?; in Ilom., \n\nAor. ap-fiixevai, Od. Xi 322. third Pel\'s. Sing, yeywye (also with \n\n&pvvfj.aL, to gain (\xc2\xa7 188, 1 ). the sense of the Aor.), Part, yeycavws, \n\n\'An, Ep., (a) to bloiv, see Stj/xj ; (b) to Jnf.yeyuyfjj.ey-jl\'lvip.dyeyuyfi. From \n\nsleep, Aor. &e(ra, &(raixev; (c) to satis- the Perf. a Pres. has been formed of \nfy (also Intrans. to be satisfed). Inf. which there are in Horn.: Inf. 7\'e7w- \n\n"d/iicvai instead of affifyai; Fut. ficw; Vf7v, Impf. iyey<louevy. \n\nAor. &{ra, &<xaa^ai. Verb. Adj. 6otos, yeiyofiai (Ep.), to be born, to be produced , \n\naros. Aor. Mid. to beget, to bear, Subj. yd- \n\nBaivo), to icalk. to go, Ep. fomis: Perf. yeai instead of yeiyrjai. \n\nfiffia/jLey, etc. (\xc2\xa7 228); second Aor. ycyro, to seize (\xc2\xa7 227, B). \n\nDual fidrr^v, third Pers. PI. (nrep^a- ynpdco, to grow old, second Aor. iyfipa, \n\naav (\xc2\xa7 227, Rem.), third Pers PI. etc. [\xc2\xa7 227, A (a)]. \n\nt^av, fidv (\xc2\xa7 224, 4), Inf. fi-n/xeyai, yoaw (poet.), to zfa\xc2\xab7, Ep. third Pers. PL \n\nSubj. besides fiai, etc. : fieiu, ^riri, j8ei- Aor. y6ov. \n\n\xc2\xab^6v (\xc2\xa7 224, 9) ; first Aor. Act. and AoiVu/xt (Ep.), to entertain, to feed (in \n\n24 \n\n\n\n278 DIALECTS. [^ 230. \n\nstead of Sair-wfii, \xc2\xa7 169, Eem. 1), ere, to await (e. g. an attack, a wild \nFut. daicrco ; Mid. halvvfjLai, to feast, to beast), in the following forms : Jexa- \nconsume, second Pers. Sing. Impf. Ind. rai instead of SexoVrat (\xc2\xa7 220, 13), \nBaiuv {Saiuvo instead of idaivvcro, II. /t, 147, Perf. dedey/xcu with the \n4 224, 5), third Pers. Sing. Opt. Sai- sense of the Pres., Put. 5e5e|o;uax, \npvTo instead of -vito, third Pers. PL excipiam, second Aor. Mid. th^KTo^ \nSam/aro ; Aor. 4Sai(rdfji.r]v. etc. (\xc2\xa7 227, B) ; Perf. Mid. SeSoKrjfic- \n\nBaio), Ep., (a) to divide (^ 164), Put. vos, awaiting, lurking, II. o, 730. \nSda-ofxaL; Aor. (also prose) 4Sa(rdfj.7iv ] Seiio) (instead of SeFto), Ep. instead of \nYerf. F&s8.54Sa(rfJLai,amdivided,broken, Sew, to rt-anf, from which come eSfvrj- \nSeSatora: ; (b) to 6ur\xc2\xab, to infiame, Perf. ce, Ae ic<inted, STtcev, he was in want \nSeSrje, he burnt; Mid. to burn, blaze, of; Mid. Sevofiai, to be wanting, Fut. \nIntrans., second Aor. Subj. SdrjTai. Seirncrofiai. \n\nSa/xudca and Sd/xurjixi, Ep. secondary AIAHMI (AE-), Ep. and older Ionic- \nform of Safxdw, to subdue, from Att. (Xen.), secondary form of Sew, \nwhich come third Pers. Sing. Pres. to bind, 5idea<n (Xen. An. 5. 8, 24) ; \nSa/jLva; third Pers. Sing. Impf. iSd/j-va Impf. S/Stj instead of iSidtf, II. A., 105. \nand Bdfjiva, Sa/xj/aa/ce ; second Pers. dlCrf/xai (Ep. and Ion.), to seek; it re- \nSing. Pres. Mid. Sa/xva; \xe2\x80\x94 ddfivrjai, tains the 77 (contrary to ^ 170, 1, \nddfiuafj-ai, etc. comp. \'AHMI): eSt\'^T/ro, ef\'^Tjrro, 5t- \n\n5opi3-aj/w, to s^gep, Epic Aor. eSpa^oy C-na-^cu, Si(-ffiJ.evos (in Herocl.) ; Si(ri<u \n(\xc2\xa7 223, 11). (Horn.), Si\'^ecu (Theoc) ; Fut. SiC^itro- \n\nSareo/xaij Ep. secondary form, used in ^ai : Aor. iSi^-qtrd^oiv. \n\nthe Pres. and Impf., from Saio/xaiy to AIHMI (AIE-), of the Act. only ivSUa-cuf \ndivide. (tliird Pers. PI. Impf), D. <r\', 584, they \n\nAAH (Ep. and poet.), (a) to teach (:= drove away ; Mid., to 7naX;e o\xc2\xbbje rwn, to \nStSda-Ku), {h) to learn {^ SiSdaKo/jLai) \', viake free, oftener to scare, to chase \nto (a) belong the Ep. second Aor. (specially with the Inf.), SUvrau, II. \nhiZae (Horn.), eSae (Theoc. and y\\>, 475, hUabai, H, /x, 304, Subj. \nApoll.); to (b) SeSacos (Hom.), SeSo- t\'L-qrai, lioDvrai, Opt. Zioiro (comp. \notri (in other authors) ; Ep. second TiboiTo). \n\nAor. Act. eSarjj/, / /earned [\xc2\xa7 227, A 5iw (Ep.), to ^ee, S^e, Seftte, 5/oj/, I fled. \n(b)], from which Ep. Sar)<rofj.ai, SeSarj- Sovrrew (Ep.), to sound, Perf. ScSoiwrcJros ; \nffo, SeSaTj/ieVos. From the Perf. a Aor. dSovinja-a and eySoujrTjtro (from \nnew Ep. Pres. has been formed, SeSd- TAOTn-, comp. tutttw and KTinrfw). \na<T^ai, Inf. Here belongs also the Svyafxai, to be able, second Pers. Ion. \nEp. Fut. S-f)u} {I shall find, meet with), Svueai ; Aor. Ep. iSwda^v and iSvvjf \ndrieis, Sr)Ofi\xe2\x82\xacv, Here (\xc2\xa7 223, 7). odnnv (^ 179, 2). \n\nBeuTo (Ep.), it seemed, Aor. Soda-ffaro, Svw, to go in, to irrap up, Ep. Sv/xevai in- \nthird Pers. Sing. Subj. Soda-aerai stead of SCj/a; from cSi/k ; Ep. second \n(instead of -ajrat). Aor. Mid. SvaeTo, Swrfo, Sv<r6nfvos \n\nSeiSw, to fear, the Pres. occurs only in (\xc2\xa7 223, 10). \n\nthe first Pers., Fut. Seiaofiai ; Aor. \'Eyeipw, to awake, Ep. Aor. fypero, he \neSeitra, Ep. eSdeia-a (as is probable aii-oAe, etc. (\xc2\xa7 223, 11) ; Ep. forms of \noriginally eSFcKTa), Perf. Ep. SeiSoi/ca Perf. iyprryopa are iypvyop^e, etc, \ninstead of SeSot/co, and BeiSia Ep. (^ 228). From the Perf. has been \ninstead of 545La (\xc2\xa7 228). formed the Pres. iyprryopoay, uxitch- \n\nSeiKyvfii, to show. Ion. (AEK) Se|w, eSe^a, ing, Od. v, 6, as if from iypTjyopdac. \netc.; Mid. 5et/f;/ii^at in the Ep. dialect cSw and eo-^oj (Ep.), to eat (= ia^iu), \nhas also the sense, to (/reef, to welcome, Inf. eB/j-evou (\xc2\xa7 229) ; Impf. eSov and \nto drink to; so also in the Perf. 8ei- edea-Koy; Perf eSTjSws; Perf. Mid. or \nSeyfjLai with the sense of the Pres., Pass. e\'STjSoTou. \n\nSeiSe\'xaTot third Pers. PI. ; Plup. M- \'E@n, from which come the Ep. g^v, \nSe/cTo, to icelcome, BeiSexaro, ivont, accustomed, and the Perf. cIm^ \n\nBfpKOfjLai, to see, Ep. second Aor. eSpducoy (\xc2\xa7 140, Rem. 3). \n\n(\xc2\xa7 223, 11). \'EIAn, \'lAn, Aor. elSor, /satr, Ep. rSoF, \n\n8exo/xot, to receit^e, Ion. Se/co^uat; in Hom. Inf. iSeciy, Subj. JSw/u; Ep. Prea \nthis rerb signifies also, to to^, er\xc2\xab/>- Mid. eJfSercu, if see;/is, \xe2\x82\xaci5d/i\xe2\x82\xacKar, op- \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 230.] LIST OF DIALECTIC VERBS. 279 \n\npearing, making like; Fut. ela-o/jLai ; iueira) or ivviiro} (Ep.), to say, to tell^ \n\nfirst Aor. fl<Tdfxr\\v and hiaafx-np, elad- Impf. with the sense of the Aor. \n\nfievos and ieitrd/jLet/os (\xc2\xa7 219, 4) ; sec- eyeirov, evveiroy, Aor. evia-jrov (comp. \n\nond Aor. ib6fjLr]v, I saw. eorTrd/XT]}/ from \'iiro/xai). Imp. evterTrey, \n\n.EIKH, third Pers. Sing. Impf. fl/fe, it Subj. ivlairu, Opt. iv\'^nroLfjn, Inf. eVtc- \n\nappeared^ II. tr, 520 ; Perf. eoi/co, Jam Trerj/, Fut. ^viy\\i<t} and evL<TiT7]<T(a. \n\nlike, Ep. third Fers. Dual cif/croj/ and eHjco^o, Ep. Perf". from \'ENGH or \'EN- \n\nPlup. itKT7)y (\xc2\xa7 228), Part. ioiKus and E0n with the sense of the Pres. and \n\nII. $, 254. elKus, dKvta and II. <r, 418. Impf, ineyrjyoSte, to sit on, II. j8, 219. \n\nejoi\xc2\xaby?at ; Ep. Plup. Mid. ^iVcro and. to lie on, H. Cer. 280. Comp. a.vi]vo- \n\n^iKTo, it tvas like. ^e above. \n\nflKvw (Ep.), to cover, envelop, elXvaco, iyiirTCD (Ep.), to chide, second Aor. eV \n\netKvfiai, third Pers. PI. (Ixtarai: from 4vIttov, riv-iirairiv (\xc2\xa7 219, 7). \n\n^Avftj comes Aor. Pass.- f\'A.i/tri^i\'. \'dvuvixi, to clothe, Ep. and Ion. e7j/UjUt; \n\ndfAo), to press, to drive, from which in Ep. Fut. kcraw ; Aor. eaaa and eVo, \n\nHom. only elxdfifvos ; in the same ktrad^iriv, k^craaro, eaaa-^ai ; Perf. \n\nauthor, \xe2\x82\xac<A.ea>, (c\'lKfov; the rest are fl/xai, eftroi (and eVo-at), efrat, etc., \n\nfrom \'EA, e. g. eAtraj\', Inf. fAo-at and d/xfyos: second Pers. Plup. eWo, \n\n4e\\crai, Part. cAcras (\xc2\xa7 223, 6) ; eeA/xat, third Pers \xc2\xab(rTo and eea-To, third Pers. \n\n^\xe2\x82\xacA/i\xe2\x82\xacj/os; second Aor. Pass. ^ciAtj;/ Dual eo-i^;, third Pers. PI. e\'/aro ; \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(from tAAw), third Pers. PI. &\\ey, on efVo-aro, eetrTo, cofnp. \xc2\xa7\'219, 4. \n\naXrjyai and aX-fjfjLfyai, aKels. eoiKa, I am like, \xc2\xa7 228. Comp. \'EIKfl. \n\nflfii, to be, \xc2\xa7 225. eVatco, to understand, Aor. (ir4]\'i<ra (I), \n\ne7/ii, fo <7o, \xc2\xa7 226. ^ Herod, and Apollon. (\xc2\xa7 130, Rem. 1) ; \n\n(tpyu, to shut out, Ep. Impf. epya^ov tlie poet, atw is found only in Pres. \n\n(\xc2\xa7 162). Comp. epyco. and Impf. \n\nfXpofxai. (J^p. and Ion.), to ask, Impf iTravpla-KOfiai (Ep. and poet.), /o receive \n\n(ipSfirjy ] Fut. ilp\'{](ToyLai ; second Aor. advantage or injury from a thing, Aor. \n\n^jpS/jL-qy, Sul)j. fpwfxc^a. Opt. fpoiro, JiT7}vp6fji.T]y, iiravpea^ai (ih\'St Aor. iir-qv \n\nInf iptabai in llom. witli the accent pdfirjy, in Aoschyl. and in the later \n\nof the Pres.; \xe2\x80\x94 Ep. secondary forms tfciters) ; Fut. iTravp-ficro/xou. Of the \n\nof the Pres. (a) iptofiai. ipffo-^at; Act. in the sense to touch, to injure, \n\nImpf. ipfoyro] (b) ipeu, Subj. ipeu- Homer uses, second Aor. Subj. ^7rai5- \n\nfifv, Opt. ipioifx^y, Part. 4p4<i>y. pr], Inf. iiravpuy, iwavpffiey. \n\n\'EIPTMI, see ipvu. iiriaTatuu, to know, second Pers. ivlarrf, \n\n(tpa>, Ep. and Ion., sero, to arrange in a Ion. poet. \n\nrow, to string, first Aor. i^dpas, exse- eirw, as a simple, in Act. only Ep. in \n\nrens, Herod. 3, 87 ; Ep. Perf. Mid. or the sense tractoaliquid, to take care of \n\nPass, iep^iai, iep/ifyos (in Herod, ^p (II. (, 321); generally used as a \n\nfx.4yos), Plup. fepTo. compound, e. p. irepi4irw, ZUttw, etc., \n\nffpo), to say, Pres. only Ep., Fut. ipw, second Aor. Act. (4<rtroy instead of \n\nEp. 4p4(t}. ((r-eiroy, in Homer 4n4ariroy, iirnnrfTu, \n\n(Tea, Ep. Aor., I placed, from the stem iirta-nuy ; Fut. \'4\\pu, Ep. i(p4^fts ; Mid. \n\n\'EA- (comp. sed-eo). Opt. &.v4<raifii, also as a simple, generally signifying \n\nImp. 4l<Toy, Part. \'4<Tas {av4^ayr\xe2\x82\xacs ; to follow ; Impf. Ep. kTT6jxy]y instead \n\nvTTiiaas, Her. 3, 126. 6, 103), Inf. 4<p4(T- of fM/jLrjy ; Fut. ^ofiai ; second Aor. \n\nvai: Aor. Mid. ecrdnrjy and i4<raaT0, Mid. k<nr6^T]v, (nr4a^ai, crirov {iirKT- \n\nTart. 4(p((rcrdiJ.(yos(ller. \\, G6. ficrdfie- xoD); Ep. forms: (nre7o, e(nr4(r^(v, \n\nyoi), Imp. i(pfcraai; \xc2\xa5ut. (<p4(T<rf(T^ai. Subj. ecnra^/xat, Opt. c(nroi/xr)v, Inf \n\ni\\avyu, to drive, Pres. e\'Aao*, Ep. 4\\6(i} ; 4<nr4<rbai arid (nrecrStai, Part. kaiT6jx\xe2\x82\xac- \n\nImpf. Ep. ihtav ; Put. Ep. 4\\6u<rt yos. Herodot. has from TrepUiro) also \n\ninstead of cXwat; Ep. Perf. ^ArjAa- \'7Tepie<p^ivai and irepieipea^ai instead \n\nfifyos (\xc2\xa7 223, Rem. 4). third Pers. of \xe2\x96\xa0>rfpie(p^(ri(r^ai. \n\nSing. Plup. (K-nXddaTo (\xc2\xa7 220, Rem. \xe2\x82\xac^70, commonly i4pya3, Ep., instead of \n\n2); Ion. Perf. iXi\'jKaafiai and Aor. (rpyu, to shut\' in and shut out, v-\'ith the \n\nPass. 7]Kd(T^y. . secondary forms iepyvvfxi, ipyd^w, \n\n4\\f\\iC<o, to whirl, Ep. second Aor.\'Mid. ifpyd^u, Aor. ep|o; Perf. Mid. or \n\nik4MKTo (\xc2\xa7 227, B). Pass. eepyiML, third Pers. PI. 4pxaTai^ \n\n\n\n280 DIALECTS. [{ 23^ \n\nthird Pers. PI. Plup. iepxaro and Attic Redup.) ; Ep. Plnp. ivt&xaro, \n\nipXo-To ; Aor. Pass, epx\'^ety- ^^^V ^^^ chsed, II. /i, 340. \n\n^/jSw and p4^<a (Ep.), to do, Fut. pe^a>, \'\'Hfiai, to sit, earai, earo (Ion.), and eta- \n\nAor. eppe^a and epe|a, or ep^w, ep^a ; rot, ci\'oto Ep., instead of ijvrcu, ^vro. \n\nPerf. eopya, Plup. iwpyeiu (^ 140, ^^^vo (Ep.), to sink, Perf. inr\xe2\x82\xacfj.yi}fivKf. to \n\nRem. 3), Perf. Mid. or Pass. iepy/i4- let the head sink, II. x\xc2\xbb 491. The \n\nuos, Aor. Pass, pex\'^^^^) hx^V^a^- above form has the Att. reduplication \n\nipeiSw, to prop, Ep. Perf. iorjpedaTai e/i-^/uu/ce (^ 219, 8), and is strength- \n\n(\xc2\xa7 219, 8). ened by v (\xc2\xa7 208, 5). \n\nipeiTTw (poet, and prose), to throw down, Qepofiai (Ep.), to warm one\'s self, Fut. \n\nEp. Plup. epepiTTTO (\xc2\xa7 219, 8). ^ep(rofxai (\xc2\xa7 223, 6); Aor. ^(^epTjy, \n\n4pi5aiua> (Ep.), tojifjht, Aor. Mid. ipiZi)- Subj. ^(peco. \n\n(TaaSiai. ^\\eu) (Ep. and poet.), to sprout, Fut. \n\nipiCco, to fight, Ep. ipiCofJUU, Perf. Mid. ^r]X-f]<rw, etc. ; Perf. re^Xa {rcStaXvia \n\nipripL(Tixai (^ 219, 8). Ep. \xc2\xa7 223, 13) ; second Aor. l^oAoi/. \n\nf ppu}, to wander about, ^]). Aor. epffat, to 0Hnn (Ep.), to stun, Perf. Te.*77Tro; \n\nhurry away (\xc2\xa7 223, 6). Plup. eVe^/Treo; second Aor. (from \n\nipv^aiuu) (poet.), to redden,\'F\\it. ipv^a-co. TA4>n) iTd<poy. \n\nipvKO), to keep off, Ep. second Aor. Act. ^v-fiaKco, to die, Perf. Ti^vt^Ko^ PI. rtdva\' \n\nTfpvKaKOV, ipvKaKceiv (\xc2\xa7 219, 7). fici/, etc. (\xc2\xa7 228). \n\ncpuco and elpvQ} (Ion. and Ep.), to draw, bpdixTKU) (Ep., Ion., and poet.), to spring, \n\nFut. ipvaru) {era) and Ep. ipvovai; Aor. tuopov \\ \xc2\xa5ut. ^opovfuu.\'Ep. ^op4- \n\nAor. epicro ((TO-) and f\'tpiJaa; Fut. o/iou : Perf. Tc,d^opa. See \xc2\xa7 161, 14. \n\n\'Mid. ipvao/jLai and Ep. epvea-^cu; Aor. \'I5p(^ft> (Ion.), to sw&it, iSp&<ri, iSpuyres, \n\nfpiiad/j-rfv (ccr) and elpv(rdij.r]v, Perf. IhpSxTa. lhp(fi]v (^ 137, Rem. 1). \n\nPass, third Pers. PI. clpvarai, II. |, TTy/xt, to send (Ep. and Ion.). Aor. eijico: \n\n7.5, and Plup. fXpwTo, II. tr, 69. etpti- Fut. t^o-w, but Od. c, 265, dvcVci ; in \n\noTo, II. 0, 654 (of ships drawn to the Ep. and Ion. dialects, there are \n\nland, V long in the Arsis); Plup. several forms from the theme \'in, \n\nMid. etpvro {(pdayauou, had draivn the e. g. avUi instead of i.yirj(rt Her., \n\nsword, V long in the Arsis), 0&. Xi ^vyiov instead of ^vyUtray Ilom., ^/ic- \n\n90. \xe2\x80\x94 Secondly, the Mid. in Horn. t/cto and ^e^ert^fVor Herod., instead \n\nand poet, takes the sense to save, to of ne^ifTo, fxf^dfifyos. \n\nshelter (from danger) ; in this sense iKyeo^iai, to cotKe, Ep. Pres. tcu and \n\nthere are the following forms : epOa-o, Impf iKoy; Ep. Aor. t^oy (^ 223, 10) \n\niipvro and epvro, which are to be and "ikto. etc. (\xc2\xa7 227, B). \n\nregarded as syncopated forms of the \'lAHMl (instead of \'lAA). to be merciful \n\nImpf \xe2\x80\x94 The two following Mid. Of the Act. only the Ep. Imp. tXrt^i, \n\nsecondary forms have also the sense be merciful (in addresses to the gods) \n\nof to c/uard: (a) Ep. \'El^TMI, Inf. instead\' of T\\ddt (^ 224, 6), as in \n\nelpvixevai, Hes. 0pp. 816, Mid. to Thcoc. 15, 143, Subj. Ep. iKritcTjat : \n\nguard, eXpvarai instead of ("ipwrai, Plup. Opt. Ep. i\\-f]Koi ; Mid. poet. \n\nInf. epvcr^at, clpva-^ai; \xe2\x80\x94 (b) Ep., "Kaficu, to appease. \n\npoet, and, though very rare, Attic laa/j-i (Dor.), to know, t<r7is,J<rdTi,i4rafuy., \n\nprose pvofxai. Inf. ^va^ai instead of Part, ttras. \n\npvea-^ai; Impf third Pers. Sing. Kaiyvfxai (Ep.) instead of koISwocu \n\nipvroy teas icatched, Hesiod. Th. 304, (\xc2\xa7 169, Rem. 1) from the stem KAA. \n\nthird Pers. PI. puar\' instead of cpwoi\'- to ejccel, Perf. KCKourfuu; Plup. (Kt- \n\nro {they protected) ; Aor. ippv<Ta.ixT)v Koia-firjy. \n\nand Ep. (ivaafxriv (but II. o, 29. pvaoi- koIco, to burn, Ep. Aor. cjoja (Trag. \n\nixr^y). e/c\xe2\x82\xaco), Subj. tcfjojxfy instead of -wucy, \n\ntpXojJLai^ to go, Ep. Perf. elK-ftKov^a, first Opt. third Pers. Sing, jr^tu, third \n\nPers. PI. \xe2\x82\xacl\\r]\\ov^iJ.fy ] Epic Aor. Pers. PI. /c^cuev, Inf. jc^at (in the \n\n^\\v^ov. Odyss. also kc7cu, Keiofiey. jcetarres) ; \n\n?X<\xc2\xbb> fo have, Ep. Aor. eo\'xei-^oi\', (rx^^ov Aor. Mid. itajd^rty, tcridfjifyos (in the \n\nand e(Txov {\\ 162); Ep. Perf. oxw^a Odyss. Kcia/xcvos, Kflamo); second \n\n(for ti/cwxo, K and x being trans- Aor. Act. iKar^y \\l bunied, Introns.), \n\nposed, and the word having the Inf. Karjfuyai, \n\n\n\n$ 230.] LIST OF DIALECTIC VERBS. 281 \n\nKaixv<D, to iceary one\'s self, Ep. KeKfiijcis, KXa^io, to sound, Ep. Perf. with the sense \n-wTos, -6tos {\xc2\xa7 223, 13), Ep. second of the Pres. K^KX-nya, KCKkrryus, PI. \nAor. Subj. /c\xe2\x82\xacKaft(y (\xc2\xa7 219, 7). K\xe2\x82\xacK\\r}yoin-es (as if from KeKK-nycc) ] \n\nKei/xaiy to lie, in Horn. Keovrai, as if from Aor. eKkdyou. \n\nKiOjxtu ; Ep. and Ion. Kferai, Keecrdai; /cAeia>, to shut, Ep. and Ion., KXnico, Aor. \nsecond Pers. Sing. Kclaai and /ce?oj, iKX-ifiaa (r), Khtficai ; Perf. Mid. or \nthird Pers. PI. KeTyrai and Ep. Kcia- Pass. K\xe2\x82\xacK\\r]i^cu (third Pers. Pi. /ce/cAe- \nTcu and (Ion.) Kcarai, Snhj. Keufiai, aroi instead of /ce/cA-Tjaraj) : Aor. Pass, \nthird Pers. Sing, /cf/rot ; Impf. Kfaro iK\\r}i(r^i/ ; from the Ion. kAtj/w come \nand Kciaro Ep. instead of eKdmo ; the forms often fonnd in the Att. \n\xc2\xab\xe2\x82\xacV#C\xe2\x82\xacTo ; Ep. Fut. Keiu), \xc2\xabcw, Kelaiv, writers, viz. kKvco, e/cAT^tro, K\xe2\x82\xacK\\riixai. \nKetav, Keif lieu. KAe\'co (Ep.), to celebrate, of which only \n\nKe\'ipcv, to shear off, cut off, Ep. Kepaca, /cAe\'o^at, Impf. iK\\eo instead of e/cAeeo \neKfpaa (^ 223. 6), hut eKeipd/jL-nv. (\xc2\xa7 220. 10). \n\nKeWu, to drive, Ep. eweAtra (\xc2\xa7 223, 6). /cAyoj (Ep.), ^o ?iear. Imp. /cAve. KKvere ; \n\nKeKofuu (Ep. and poet.), to wrj/^, Fut. second Aor. Imp. KAO^^t, kADtc; and \nKeKTjcroficu, first Aor. ^/ceArjca/xTji/ ; KfKXvbi, KeKXvre [\xc2\xa7227, A (e)] ; the \nsecond Aor. iKeK\\6fn]v, etc. (\xc2\xa7 223, Impf eKXvou is used instead of the \n11). Ind. Pres. \n\nKetneui (Ep.), to prirh. sflmnh, Aon Kdirro). to s^r/Xre, second Vevi. KeKOira in \nKfvaou (\xc2\xa7 223. 6). Horn., instead of KeKo<pa. \n\nKfpdvvvpLi. to mix, Ej). /ce/joa- (/cepoirras) Kopevvvfiu to satisfij, Ep. Fut. Kopeco and \nand KepaicM) (Imp. /ctpajt). KipvoM [Kip- Kopeau, Perf. KeK6pT)ficu, to wliich the \ni/oy, Impf. eKipva) and Kipinfj/j-i (Imi)f Part. KeKoprjus (\xc2\xa7 223, 13) in respect \niKipin], Kipyds) ; Ejj. Mid. Kepuvrai (us to its meanintr belongs. \nif from Kepa/xau) ; Impf Kep6wvro Ep. Koreu) and Koreofiai (Ep.), to 6e angry, \ninstead of iKepwvro from Kepdw. first Aor. Part. Koreaas ; Perf. Part. \n\nK6p5oiVa>. to //o/h, in Ion. and later wri- KeKor-qwi (\xc2\xa7 223, 13) ; Mid. Fut. Kore- \nters : 4K(p5r}(Ta; KfpSrjaeff^au and icep- a-ofiai (a-ff); Aor. iKoreffdixrjv (era), \ndcweofify in Herod. Kpd^co, to Unci, cry out, poet. I\'erf. KeKpd- \n\nKev^u (Ep.), to coucea/, Fut. icevau, AoT. ya, KiKpayfiev, etc. (\xc2\xa7 228) ; Fut. k6- \n^Kct/aa ; IVrf. KfKfuda ; second Aor. Kpd^ofxai, Aristoph. \ne/cCdof, <ct)3oj/, Subj. KfKvdo) (\xc2\xa7 219, Kpaifw ( Kp. and poet.), to complete, ac- \n7); Mid. only Pres. and Impf. cotn])lish, Ion. commonly Kpaiaivco, \n\nhiiBw, to make anxious, in the Act. only Impf. iKpcdcuvov; Ep. Fut. Kpaveu; \nEj). Fut. Ki/Si^o-a) ; Perf. /ce/crjSa, / <///\xc2\xab Aor. eKprjva and Ep. iKp4)r\\va, Imp. \nanxious ; Ep. Fut. Perf. KeKaS-fitrofiai, Kpnvov and Ep. Kpr}r}voy, Inf KpT\\vai \n11. ,^, 3.\')3. and Ep. /cpjfji\'at ; Ep. Perf. Pass. \n\nKihvafxai. Ep. SCOOndnry form of (r/cfSa*" K^Kpaavrai (Va\\x. KeKpatnai) ; Ep. Fut. \nyvfiai, to scatter, only Pres. and Impf. Mid. Kpayeofiai. \n\nKiyvfi-ai (Kp.) instead o( Kiveontu. to stir Kteiva}, to kill, Ep. Fut. tcrevew (Ep. \non^\'s self] to be niond. Pass. Kiyvfxeyos. Part, /cravt\'ovra, >faToucTa\xc2\xbb\'\xe2\x82\xacOi;(rj(j\') and \n\nKipydo) and Kipyrj/xi, Ep. secondary form Karaxrayeeabe with the variable a; \nof Kepcivi/O/it, to /\xc2\xab<>, from which comes Aor. Ep. and poet. I\'/ctqj/oj\'; Ep. \nthe Part. Kipyds, Impf. iKipva and second Aor. Act. cKray, etc. [\xc2\xa7 227, \nifjpjoj. A (a)]; first Aor. Pass, third Pers. \n\nicixiyu) and ictx^i^oM*" (^d^- ""^^ po^^); 1*1- ^fra^ey Ep., instead of e/cret^- \nto reach, meet with, Aor. e/cix"*\'! Put. (rov. \n\nKixvtTOfiai, other forms not found in Kupeu, rarely K^po) (Ep, and poet.), to \nthe Att. poets; but Ep. Impf iKlxa- ^fi\'id, to reach, Aor. eKvpaa (\xc2\xa7 223, 6), \nyoy, second Pers. iKixfis (from and more seldom ^jcvpTjrra, Fut. /cwp(r\xc2\xbb \nKIXE-) ; second Aor. Subj kix<^ and and more seldom Kvp-naco; Perf. KeKv- \nKiXf\'i<^- Opt. Kixdv^, Inf KlXV^o^^ pr]Ka. \n\nPart. Kix^is and Mid. /c<xV\xc2\xab\xc2\xbb\'oy> Aor. l^yxdyc}, to partake, Ion. Fut. xd^oixai; \nMid. 4Kix-h<raTo. Ep. Aor. Subj. AeAoxw (\xc2\xa7 219, 7), \n\nWw (Ep.), to (/o. only Pres. and Impf. Trans, to make paiiaker in the phrase \nThe Part. Kiwy is \'accented like lay ; ,&ai/oiTa in;p(is, to give the dead the \nAor. fiereKia^oy (\xc2\xa7 162). ^onor of Jire, i. 6. 7na^e Aim partaker \n\n24* \n\n\n\n282 DIALECTS. [^ 230 \n\nof; Perl Kihoyxa Ep., instead of MAXl (Ep.), to strive for, Perf. with the \n\neJ!X77xa [Od. A, 304. Xe\\6yxo.(Ti\\. sense of the Pres., in Sing, ficfiova \n\nAAZTMAI {= AaCofj-ai, to take), Epic (comp. yeyova with TEFAA), /ac/iotov, \n\ni\\dCvTO. [x4iia{x.eu, etc. (^ 228). \n\nKafi^auo), to receive, Ion. \\diJ.\\pofjLai, \\e\\d- fieipofiai (poet.), to obtain, Ep. enfiope \n\nfirjKa, AeAct/i/xoi, \\e\\dfx(p^ai, i\\dix(pSrr}v, third Pers. Sing. Perf. (and II. a, \n\nXafjLirrios] also Dor. AeAajSTj/ca, but 278), third Pers. Sing, second Aor. \n\nXeXaiifiai, XeXacp^ai] in Di\'amatists Act. (Augment, \xc2\xa7 219, 6): Perf. Pass. \n\nAeATjyUjuaiJ Ep. Aor. AeAaySeVd^ai (\xc2\xa7 219, el/xaprai. it is determined (\xc2\xa7 123, 4). \n\n7). ^eAw, commonly Impers. fieKei, it con- \n\nKav^dva, Ep. oftener \\^^co, to be hidden, cerns, Hay it to heart, Ep. Perf. /x\xe2\x82\xac/iTj- \n\nconcealed ; Ep. second Aor. Act. Ae, Part. /ixejUTjAcis: Ep. Perf. Mid. /xeV \n\nSubj. \\\xe2\x82\xac\\d^a) and Mid. AeAo^o\'/urj;\' )3AeTot and Plup. /ieu^SAero instead of \n\n(\xc2\xa7 219, 7); Perf. Mid. KeXda/JLui ; in iJ.efi-f)\\T)Tai, e/xe/iTjATjTo, conip. /8Awa- \n\nTheoc. \\a(r^riij.\xe2\x82\xacv {^^ ATjo-i^yjvoi) in- /cw; yet these forms were more \n\nstead of Ao^-eV^^at \xe2\x80\xa2, i-mK-n^co and properly considered as a Pres. and \n\niKX-fi^w, to cause to forget, Ep. Aor. Impf * \n\neTreATjcra; iK\\4\\a^oy. fievoivdw, fievoiueoy, ^ 222, I, A (2). \n\n\\dcrK(o (Ep. and poet.), Aor. eAdjcoj/; /u7j/cao/iai, to W^af, Ep. Perf /ue/tTj/ca with \n\nEp. Perf. AeATjKo (poet. AeAd/ca and the sense of the Pres., /ic^tcucwMi \n\n\xe2\x82\xac/cAeAoKa even in Demos.) with the (\xc2\xa7 223, 13); Aor. /icuc&Jr; itom the \n\nsense of the Pres. ; Ep. Part, AcAtj- ^^erf. the Impf. ifxefn^Kov is formed. \n\nKds, \\\xe2\x82\xac\\aKu7a (\xc2\xa7 223, 13) ; Fut. AaxT)- /itaiVoj, to sto/\xc2\xab, Ep. second Aor. fjudv- \n\n(TOfxai; first Aor. poet. eAaKrjco, Ep. bT)v (\xc2\xa7 227, B). \n\nAor. Mid. \\e\\dKovro (\xc2\xa7 219, 7). fiiyvv/jn, to 7nix, Ep. Aor. (iLkto (\xc2\xa7 227, \n\nAEXn (Ep.), to cause to lie down, eAe|a, B). \n\ni\\c^d/j.r}v, I laid myself doicn, I lai/, I /jLVKdoinai, to roar, Ep. fiffiVKo^ Aor. \n\nrested, Ep. Aor. iKey/x-nv, etc. ( \xc2\xa7 227, B ). ffivKoy. \n\nKovoD, to wash, Ep. Aoew, Aoue\'co, Impf. Na/w, Ep. and poet., to tftrc//. first Aor. \n\ni\\ov\xe2\x82\xacoy, eX6eov; Aor. Inf Kodcrcrou, cyaa-aa, I caused to dwell; Mid. with \n\nPart. Aoecrcras; second Aor. Act. Pass. Aor., to settle down: vdaaoficuy \n\nekoou, third Pers. Sing. A<^6 Od. k a-n-evacrcrdii-nv, ivd(rbT\\v. \n\n361, \\6ov; Mid. Pres. Inf Xov^abai v\xe2\x82\xacik4w (Ep.. poet., and Ion.), to quarrel^ \n\nand KovtT^ai; Fut. Mid. KoicraojjLai\'^ Fut. veiK^aw , Aor. iyeUcaa (\xc2\xa7 223, \n\nAor. Mid. Inf Koecraaa-^ai ; Part. 1). \n\nXoeaa-djjL^vos ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. vi(u>, to wash, Pres. and Impf : the other \n\nAeAoy/xot. tenses are formed from ylvTO), which \n\n\\vci), to loose, Ep. second Aor. Mid. among the later writers came to be \n\nAuto, Aui/To [\xc2\xa7 227, A (e)] ; Ep. Plup. used in the Pres. and Impf al-^o; \n\nOpt. AeAuTo (\xc2\xa7 224, 3). thus, Fut. yixf^u, Perf. Mid. or Pass. \n\nMaivofiai, to rave {iKfjLalvo), to make veyi/jL/jLai, poet.; Aor. Pass. ivip^Vf \n\nraving, also Aor. efj.r}va, Arist. ; doubt- Hippocr. \n\nful X. H. 3. 4, 8) ; second Perf inc/nj- vicroro^ai (Ep.), to go, Fut. vlaofuu (the \n\nj\'tt (Sojjh.), / am ravnig (Theoc. 10, form veiVcro/uu is rejected). \n\n31, ixejxdvriiiai) ; the Fut. is ixayovfiai \'0AT250MAI (Ep.), Aor. a>Sv<rdfir}y, to \n\nin Herod, {fiayfja-oixai in the later be angry. oSuadixfyos ; Perf. o5wSi;c/mu \n\nwriters). with tile sense of the Pres. (\xc2\xa7219. S). \n\nfiaiofxai (Ep.), to seek, Fut. (xdcroixcu olda, to know. 4 228. \n\n(eVi^atrtreTaj) ; Aor. ifiatTdixrjv. o^ofxai, to think; Ep. oXw, 6i<t>, otoiuu, \n\nfxay^dyw, to learn, Fut. in Theoc. /xa^\xe2\x82\xacv- uUixtiv, ototro ; Aor. !Mid. oto-a/xiji/ ; \n\n/ua\xc2\xa3 (like (jiaxovfxai). Aor. Pass. u3tabT\\v. oitr^els. \n\n(idpyafiai. (Ep.), to Jight, only Pres. and 6yofMai (Ep. and Ion.), to l>laine, 6yo<Tau, \n\nImpf, like Svya/iai, but Opt. fiapvol- tliird Pers. PI. oyoyrcu. Imp. Svotro ; \n\nfjLr}y, Od. A, 513. Impf. a)v6urfy. Opt. ovoifn)v, 6yQiT0\\ \n\nudxo,uaL, to contend. Epic fiax^ovrcuj Fut. ovoaofxcu : Aor. wyo<jdu.r]v and \n\n/iaxerrat, fiax^oiTo, fiax^oiuro, Part. avoa^y ; Ep. ouKco-id-e (comp. ouAiiu- \n\n;uaxej(^yuej/os and ixax^ovfj-eyos ; Ep. cyos), H. w, 241, instead of iy^tr^t \n\nFut. iJ.ax\'fio\'oixou and nax^cro/jLcu; Aor. and this instead of 5\xc2\xbb\'<w.^\xe2\x82\xac from \'ON-; \n\ninax^(Tdyi.iilv. Ep. Aor. Mid. d^varo. \n\n\n\n^ 230.] \n\n\n\nLIST OF DIALECTIC VERBS. 283 \n\n\n\nopditi, to see. Ion. 8p\xe2\x82\xaccoy Epic 6p6(a, Impf. first Aor. eirepa-a (\xc2\xa7 223, 6) ; second \n\niopeov] Ep. second Pcrs. Sing. Pres. Aor. ^Trpa^ou {^ 223,11); Ep. second \n\nMid. (JpTjat, third Pers. Sing. Impf. Aor. Mid. Inf. Trep^ot (\xc2\xa7 227, B). \n\n6priTo ; Ion. Perf. oirwira. v^To/xai^ to fly, second Aor. iirrSix-qu, etc. \n\n\xe2\x80\xa2OPEFNTMI, from Avhich Ep. opeyvvs, (\xc2\xa7 223, 11). \n\nstretcliinfj out ; opeyco, to stretch; Mid. irevkto/j.ai (poet, instead of irvv^duoi.Lai), \n\nto stretch one\'s self, to reach after, Ep. Ep. second Aor. Mid. Opt. imrvStoL- \n\nPerf. Mid. opup^yfjiaiy third Pers. PI. to; Perf. TreTrvafxai (\xc2\xa7 223, 14). \n\nopcopexarai (\xc2\xa7 219, 8), Plup. third iretpvov, eirecpt^oy, ^p. second Aor. Act. \n\nPers. PI. opccptxaro. of *ENn, to kill (\xc2\xa7 219, 7). ]*;irt. irecp- \n\nipvviii (poet.), to excite, Fut. opffv, Aor. vuv with iiTCgular accentuation; Ep. \n\n&p<Ta (^ 233, 6); Ep. Perf Intrans. Perf Pass. irecpaTai, irecpda^ai ; Fut. \n\nupapa (\xc2\xa7 219, 8), Suhj. opdoprj, Plup. Perf Trefriaoixai (comp. SeSTjcroMa* \n\nopwpei and wpupei] Ep. Aor. d/pope;\' ; from SeSe/xai). \n\ni\\Iid. opvO/xau, to rouse one\'s self, to stir, irf^yvvfiai, to flx, Ep. Aor. tt^kto, /care- \n\nEp. Fut. bpilrou, Aor. upSfxrin -^ Ep. tttikto (\xc2\xa7 227, B). \n\nAor. Mid. S}pTo, etc. (\xc2\xa7 227, E) ; Ep. 7rtA\xc2\xbb/a/iat, Eq. secondary\'\' fomi of TreAa^w, \n\nPerf opwpeTcu, Subj. opupTjrai {{. 219, to draw near, only Pres. and Impf. \n\n8). irlfiirX.TjfjLi, to flll^ Ep. Aor. Mid. ttAtjto, \n\nh(T(ppalvofjiai, to smell, Ion. Ao?. Mid. etc. [\xc2\xa7 227, A (a)]. \n\no(r(\\>pavro. iriirrci}, to Jail, Ep. ireTTTedis (\xc2\xa7 228). \n\nourdaj, to wound, Ep. Aor. o//../, etc. Trnvdca and Trirmfjixi, Ep. secondary form \n\n[^ 227, A (a)]. of irirdvvv^L, to spread out, from \n\n6<p\xe2\x82\xaci\\(a, to owe, be under ohligalni.. cur/ht, which come Impf. irirva instead of \n\ninust. Ion., poet, (except ir. t\\iti dra- iirlrva, and Part. Tnrvds. \n\nmatic dialogues of Att. \xe2\x80\xa2tniUit), and irX-fjcra-ct, to strike, Ep. second Aor. Act. \n\nin late prose u<pf\\ou, -\xe2\x82\xac,, -c, Ep. e7r\xe2\x82\xac7rA7j7oi/, 7re7r\\Tj7oi\' and 7re7rA7}7({;a7jv \n\ni!i<pc\\Xou, 6(pfWou, in io/i/ii which (\xc2\xa7 219, 7). \n\ne.\\pi-css a ivish. irKuw (Ion.), to sail, Ep. second Aor. \n\n6<(>(W<i> (Ep), to increast, only Pres., Act. (irXuv, etc. U 227, A (d)]. \n\nImpf. and Opt. Aor. o^/AAttej/, Od. irytw, to Imat/ie, in Hom. Perf. iriirvvixai \n\n/8, 334. (\xc2\xa7 223, Rem. 2). to be animated, intel- \n\nUdWu, to sihake, Y^p. scccAvl Aor. Act. liijent ; second Aor. Act. Imp. Sjutt- \n\na.nTmra\\(i)v (\xc2\xa7^ 207, 7. and 219. 7) and vv(, second Aor. Mid. 6.^iTv\\no [\\ 227, \n\nsoi-ond Aor. Mid. irdKro (^ 227, B). A (e)] ; Aor. Pass. apLirvvv^ instead \n\nirdax\'^j \'"^ SK.tf\'-r, Ep. Perf. Part, ireira- of auirvvbir) (\xc2\xa7 223, 12). \n\n^uiri, as if from Trerro^a ; Ep. Perf. trrT)<Taco, to crouch, shrink from fear, AoT. \n\nTTfTToo-^c (^ 228, Rem.). tvTij^a; second Aor. KaTa-maKoiv, \n\nnaTfo/jLai (Ion.), to taste, to cat, Aor. Aeschyl. Eum. 247; Perf. tTTTT/xa, \n\nfTTuo-a/iTji/ ; Perf. iTfvacrfxai. Part. Ep. ireirTTjciy, uros (\xc2\xa7 223, 13); \n\nirdbu), to persuiub\', second Aor. Act. Ep. second Aor. KaTaTrTi\\Ti\\v [\xc2\xa7 227, \n\neiTi^ou, Aor. Mid. iTTi^6(xt)p, only poet. A (a)]. \n\nin the Att. Avriters (-ki^ov is a false Paivw, to sprinkle, regular Aor. ippava\\ \n\nreading in Plat. Phaed. p. 117, a); Perf Mid. or Pass, tppaajxai. In \n\nEp second Aor. Act. irf-nihov, Sul)j. Hom. ip^dSarai (\xc2\xa7 220, Rem. 2). \n\n\xe2\x80\xa2Kerri^u), Opt. VfTfii^OLixi. Inf. nein^uu, {ff^oo, see epSw. \n\nPart. ireTTt^wv, Imp. irfTri^e (^ 219,7); f>iy(u} (Ep. and poet.), to shudder, Fut. \n\nsecond Aor. Mid. iiri^ofxriv, to trust, fnyrfaw ; Aor. ippiynaa ; Perf. Ep. \n\nOpt. Tr\xe2\x82\xac7rt,^oJTo ; from tlie second Aor. tpplya. \n\ncome TTi^a J), to be ohedieut.ireTTi^ffu, 2aoa), (ricco and troo) (Epic), to save \n\n$3 be con ci need, -m^j-ai, obedient: on (= aw^ta) ] from aaSu Fut. aacixra} , \n\n^TTfV^i^^ei/ and 7reVct<rr*t (see \xc2\xa7 228). Imp. Pres. Act. craw [\xc2\xa7 222, I, A \n\nw\'\\dC(u, to draw near (Trag. \xe2\x96\xa0n-cAci^a, (4)]; third Pers. Sing. Impf. Act. \n\nirAdda>),Fut.Tr\xe2\x82\xacA\'i(ra;. I\'oct. sometimes adov and adw instead of iadoe ; Aor. \n\n\xe2\x96\xa0KfKu; Ep. Aor. Pa-^s. eireKdTd-ni/, iTdwaa: Put. ISIid. aaw(Top.ai, Aor. \n\npoet. iS\'.t. *7r\\d>rji, Mid. Fp. eVATjiUT;*\', Pass. tVaw^*\' -, from ffaiaj Part, aw- \n\netc., Aft. jTTAd\'iTjK [\xc2\xab 227. A (a)); oi/Tes and Impf <T(a\xe2\x82\xac(rKov; from o-(^\xc2\xab \n\nEl>. I^srf. ir(TrATjMf\xc2\xbb"JS. Att. TreirAd/iioi. Suhj. Prcs. aSri, crcJps, fl-dwo-i. \n\ncepa^w (poet.), t\'y destioy, Fut. Trepaw. atvu (poct.), to put in violent motion, \n\n\n\n284 DIALECTS. P 230- \n\nMid. to haste, Ep. Aor. icff^va and (pelSofiai, to spare, Ep. second Aor. Mid. \n\nffeva, ia-a-evd/xTiu a.nd crevd/xTjv (\xc2\xa7 223, TretpiSoliuLT]\'^. 7re<^i5\xe2\x82\xacV^at (\xc2\xa7 219, 7), \n\n8); Perf. ea-a-vjULai (\xc2\xa7223, 14); Plup. from ^eioo/iat comes 7re<^t5Vo/\xc2\xab\xc2\xab. \n\ni(r(rv/j.7iu ; second Aor. Mid. icrcrifx-qv, <pepw, to carry, (pepre Ep. instead of \n\netc. [\xc2\xa7 227, A (e)]; Aor. Pass, eo-cru- (pepere (\xc2\xa7 229): Ion. and Ep. forms \n\n^7}y Soph., i^eavhrr]v Hom. \xe2\x80\x94 On the are : Aor. ^veiKa, ivelKai., etc., jjueiKd- \n\nEp. aevTUL, (TovTai, etc., see \xc2\xa7 229. firji/ ; Perf. eu-fiveiyfj.ai ; Aor. Pass. \n\njr/ciSj/a/iai, to scaler, Ep. secondary form 7]ueix^w\': \xe2\x80\x94 Ep. second Aor. Imp. \n\nof cr/ceSawy^at, only Pres. and Impf. olae, Inf ola-e/uLej/ (\xc2\xa7 223, 10); first \n\ncrrepeco, to rob, first Aor. Inf. aiepiaai Aor. avScrai, Herod. 1, 157 (comp. \n\nEp. instead of crepria-ai. 6, 66. avdi\'iaros instead of avoCaTos). \n\n(TTvyeQ}, to fear, to hate, Ep. second Aor. (pexryu, to flee, Ep. irecpxryfievos, escapttk \n\niarvyov; first Aor. ^arv^a, Trans., to (\xc2\xa7 223, 14). \n\nmake fearful. <f)^dv(o, to come before, anticipate, Epic \n\nTAm, Epic second Aor. reraydvf (p^d/xeuos [\xc2\xa7 227, A (a)]. \n\nseizing. (p^eipw, to destroy. Ion. Fut. Siaip^ap^oficu \n\nTAAAn, to endure, Ep. Aor. irdKaaa, instead of (pSraprja-ofxai ; Aor. Siacp^ep- \n\nSubj. TaXda-aa}; second Aor. ctAtjv cai (\xc2\xa7 223, 6). \n\n{\xc2\xa7 191, 4); Perf rerATj/ca, T^rXa/xeu (pbiuw, to vanish, and Ep. ^bfoo, to con- \n\n[\\ 228), ~Fnt.T\\T]<Top.ai. sume, and sometimes to vanish, perish \n\nravvoi (poet.), to stretch, Ep. rdvvTai (Ep. first Pers. long), Fut. <pbt<T(a; \n\n(\xc2\xa7229). Aor. ecpSrla-a; Mid. to perish, Fut- \n\nrapdaaw, to disturb, Ep. second Perf. ^^ia-ofiai ; Perf. \xe2\x82\xac(p^^ifj.ai ; Plup. e^t- \n\nTeTprixo-, I ciTn disturbed. fxrjv: Ep. Aor. i(pStifvi]v, etc. [\xc2\xa7227, \n\nTEMXl, to reach, overtake, Ep. Aor. ^tct- A (c)] ; Ep. Aor. Pass, third Pers. PL \n\n^oj/ (\xc2\xa7 219, 7). aTr4(pSft^cv. \n\nrepTTO}, to delight, Ep. irdp^^rju, iTdpir-qv, (piXtco, to love, Ep. Aor. ipixd/xrjy {<pl- \n\nirpdirrju, Subj. first Pers. PL rpaTreio- \\wuTaiy (p7\\ai). \n\nfiej/ ; second Aor. Mid. erpaTrJ^Tjj/ and cppd^co, to speak, Ep. Aor. irecppaSov \n\nreTapirSfxriP {^ 2\\9, 7). (\xc2\xa7219,7). \n\nrevxo} (poet.), to make ready, to obtain, (pipw, to /:neac?, in prose, forms its tenses \n\nFut. Tev|w ; Aoi". \xe2\x82\xacTev|o, Perf. Ep. from (pvpdcc, e. g. <pvpd(To}, etc., Aor. \n\nreTevx(t>s, having obtained; Fut. Mid. Pass. i<pvpd^y]v. Plat. Theaet. 147, c. \n\nTiv^ofiai; Aor. Mid. Tew|ao-,d^at ; Perf. (but icpvpb-rjv, Aesch. Ag. 714); yet \n\nrervyixai (\xc2\xa7 223, 14), third Pers. PL Perf. \'rr4<pvpiJ.aL, and in Aristoph. ire- \n\nEp. TeTcvxaTai, Inf. rervx^ai ; Plup. (pvpa/xac ; Fut. Perf. ireipvpaea^au \n\nirervyix-qv, third Pers. PL Ep. eVerei;- Pind., Epic and poet, (pvpaco, etc. \n\nXaro; Aor. Pass, irvx^v; Fut. Perf. (\xc2\xa7 223, 6). \n\nT6Teu|0(Uai ; \xe2\x80\x94 Ep. second Aor. Teru- (pvca, to produce, Perf. irec^D/ca, Ep. third \n\n/cetj/, TervKOZ/TD, TeTu/ceVid-ai (\xc2\xa7 219, 7). Pers. PL Trf^vatn, Part, xe^uwras, \n\nTIEn, Ep. Perf. Act. T6Tt77c6s, -Sros, Tre(pvv7a (\xc2\xa7 223, 13); Irapf Ep. eire- \n\nanxious, and Perf. Mid. I am anxious, <pvKov. \n\nsecond Pers. Dual mi-qaSyov, Part. Xa^o^uat (Ep.), to refrea<,yje/</, Aor. Mid. \n\nreriTjixeuos. k^koSovto (\xc2\xa7 219. 7); Aor. Act. K6Ka- \n\nTlvvv^ai, Ep. secondary form of rlvo/xat. Sou and Fut. KeKaS-ficrco, Trans., to de- \n\nto punish; in Att. poetry with one prive of rob. \n\nV, rtuvfiaL (\xc2\xa7185). X\xc2\xab^P\'^\xc2\xbb \'^ rejoice, Ep. Fut. /f6xap^<ra>, \n\nTixT)yw, Ep. secondary form of refivw, K^xapvo\'ofjiai ; first Aor. Mid. xvparo ; \n\nto cMf, first Aor, r/j.\'fi^as ; Aor. Pass. second Aor. Kex\xc2\xb0\'\'P<>^^\'^y Kex\'^poiaro \n\nthird Pers. PL T^ayej/. (\xc2\xa7 219, 7); Kexapv\'^s (\xc2\xa7 223, 13); \n\nrp\xe2\x82\xac<poi>, to nourish, Ep. second Aor. Perf. KexapH-^yos, Ear.; Verb. Adj. \n\neTpa<pov, I nourished, Perf. rerpocpa, x^-P"^^^\' \n\nIntrans.; Aor. Pass. irpd<pT]v, thii-d x\xc2\xab*\'5aj/co (Ep.), to hold, to contain, Aor \n\nPers. PL rpdcpev. exaSov : Perf with the sense of the \n\n^aiva, to show, iip. (paeiucov, enlightening ; Pres. /ce\'xaj/Sa; Fut. x^\'^^\'OA""* (comp \n\nEp. Aor. Pass, ecpadvb-qv; Perf. Mid. eTrad^oz/, Tre/cro/xou). \n\nor Pass. Trecpafffiai, thii\'d Pers. Sing. x^\'\'\xc2\xab\'> \'^ jdoh;- o\xc2\xbb^, Ep., Fut. x^"^\xc2\xae 5 Aor. \n\nv4<pavrai ; Fut. m^-hffopuu ; second ex^ "" 5 second Aor. Mid. x^^y X^h*\' \n\nAor. <t>dve(TKeu, 11. A, 64. vos [\xc2\xa7 227, A (e)]. \n\n\n\n* ?.3l.] FORMATION OF WORDS. 285 \n\nSECTION III. \n\nFORMATION OF WORDS. \n\n{ 231. Primitive words. \xe2\x80\x94 Stems. \xe2\x80\x94 Derivatives. \n\n1. Words are formed, (a) by derivation, and (b) by composition, in accord- \nance with certain laws. \n\n2. Those words, from which other words are derved, but which are them- \nselves underived, are called primitives (vocabula pnmitiva). Primitive words \nare either verbs (which constitute the greater part), substantives, adjectives, or \npronouns. A primitive has two parts, the root and the inflection-ending, e. g. \nT^e</)-ft>, yp<i<p-(i), <^ep-a), Xey-u, \\l^-os : Ka\\-6s ; e/i-e. \n\n3. The roots, i. e. the forms which remain, after the rejection of the inflection- \nendings, are all monosyllabic. Still, the roots do not always appear pure in \nthe primitives, but often with a strengthened form, e.g. SaK-v-w, iK-t^t-onai, \nav^-dv-(i), rv{y)x-f^\'^-<^f aK-laK-Ofiou, iri-Trpd-ffKcu. Comp. \xc2\xa7\xc2\xa7 139, and 157, 1 \nYet these strengthened forms extend only to the Pres. and Impf. \n\n4. Words which are derived (vocabula derivata) from primitive words, are : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) Either Stems, i. e. such words as are formed from primitives by merely \nassuming another inflection-ending, which is without any special signification. \nTo these indefinite endings belong several of the third Dec, e. g. the gender- \nsign s {6 ywi//, r] it>\\p, T] firi^, T] iTTuI, r] vau-Sy 6 tj fiov-s, 6 t] iroT-s, instead of irorS-s; \nin many words the ^ is omitted, see \xc2\xa7 52, 1) ; the endings -is {rj (nrdu-is, icant^ \n7] i\\ir-is), and -vs (6 (rrdx-vs, ?; jVx-i5s) ", also the endings of the first and sec- \nond declensions, e. g. -tj, -o, -os, -ov (Wk-tj, \\vit-t], piC-a, ttKovt-os, v6(t-os, (>6S-ov) ; \nfinally, several adjective-endings, e. g. -os, -tj, -ou {(plK-osy -??, -ov), -vs, -eTo, -</ \n{y\\vK-vs, -ela, -u), etc.; \n\n(b) or Derivatives, i. e. such words as are formed either from primitives, \nor itova. stems, by assuming a special derivation-syllable with a special \' sig- \nnification, e. g. xP^<\'\'\'0-<^, to make golden, to gild ; prj-rup, orator ; ypa(p-iK6s, skillect \ni\'n painting. \n\n5. The root is often lengthened in dcri^^tion (\xc2\xa7 16, 3), e. g. Arji^-rj (from \nha^-\xe2\x82\xac7v), x\'hv (from xa\xc2\xbb\'-\xe2\x82\xac"\') ; or it takes the variable vowel (\xc2\xa7 16, 6), e.g. rpitp- \noa, Tpo<p-4}, Tpo<p-6s, Tp6(p-iiios, Tpa(p-ep6s. A Strengthening consonant (\xc2\xa7\xc2\xa7 139, \n1, and 157, seq.) may also be added; or the final consonant A. be doubled, e. g. \nKdWos from koXSs ; some stems also take a reduplication, e. g. ott-wtt-\'^, eS-cuS-ij, \nay-ury-os, ^l-iTvcp-os (from 2E\xc2\xabi\xc2\xbb-n, comp. (ro<p-6s). Other changes also may be \nmade in the root, as has been shown in \xc2\xa7 16. \n\n6. The change of e into o (seldom into o) and of et into oi (\xc2\xa7 16, 6) requires \n\n\' By comparing the examples under (a) and (b), it will be seen that the \nterminations of the former are not significant, while those of the latter are. \n\n\n\n286 FORMATION OF WORDS. [\xc2\xa7 232 \n\nspecial attention. It occurs, (a) in Oxy tones of the first Dec, in ^ and d. of \nmore than one syllable, e. g. rpoip-ifj nourishment (from Tp4<p-u>) ; fwy-^, a remain\' \ning (from fieu-u) ; <pop-d, a carrying (from <p4p-o}) ; a.\\oi<p-{], salve (from aA.ei<^ \nft,) 5 \xe2\x80\x94 (1)) in dissyllabic Barytones of the second Dec, which denote what is \ndone, or the result of an action, e. g. \\6yo5, word (from \\4y-u}) ; (pov-os, murder \n(from *EN-n, comp. eirecppov) ; vofios, a law (from ve/x-o))] \xe2\x80\x94 (c) in dissyllabic \nOxytones of the second Dec. in -fiSs, and in dissyllabic oxytone adjectives of the \nsecond Dec. in -6s^ which, for the most part, denote an active object and often have \na substantive meaning, e. g. TrKox-fJ^os, plait of hair (from TrAe/c-cu) ; o-toA.-/io\'s, \ngarment (from o-reAA-cu) ; irofjLTr-Ss, attendant (from, ire/jiir-a)) ; <ro^oy, ir/se (from \n2E*-n, sopzo) ; Tpo<p-6s, nourishing, nourisher (from Tp4<p-a)\\ \xe2\x80\x94 (d) in monosyl- \nlabic substantives of the third Dec, e. g. 0Ao|, Jiame (from (p\\4y-o}) ; 8op|, \nantelope (from SepK-o/xai)] \xe2\x80\x94 (e) in oxytose substantives in -eus and adjectives \nin -cis, which, however, have sometimes a substantive sense, e. g. Tpo<p-\xe2\x82\xacvs, nour- \nisher (from rpe(p-to) ; <rirop-ds, scattered (from anrep-e7v) ; \\oy-ds, chosen (from \nKey-w) ; Spofi-ds, running (from APEM-n, comp. dpafi-eTv) : \xe2\x80\x94 (f ) in all derivatives \nof the forms mentioned, e. g. in substantives in -ofMos. adjectives in -ifios, verbs \nin -aw, -eft), -6(1}, -evw, -iC\'*\', e.g. irAc^/c-o/xos ; Tp6<p-i^os\\ (p^oy-ew (from <p^6y-os)y \ndwfi-dco (from SSfi-os, and this from 5efi-w), etc. \n\nRemark. The change of e into a (comp. \xc2\xa7 16, 6) is found only in a few old \npoetic derivatives, e. g. Tpa<p-ep6s. \n\nRem. 2. Words derived from verbs are called t;er6aZs; those derived from; \nsubstantives or adjectives, denominatives. \n\n\n\nA. Debivation. \n\n$ 232. I. Verbs. \n\n1. All derivative verbs end \\r\\ -<{\xc2\xab, -\xe2\x82\xac\xc2\xab, -1 03, -6 a), -vw, -euw, -e{^a>, -IC^t \n-6^0, -vC(^] -aivw, -vvu, -alpw, -elpo). All these verbs must be considered \nas denominatives ; for though the stem-substantive for several verbs of this \nkind is not in use. yet the analogy of the other verbs requires that a substan \ntive should be assumed as the stem of these also. Many of those derivative \nverbs, especially many in -ea> and -aw, supply the place of obsolete primitives, \ne. g. (pi\\4a}, Ti/xda. \xe2\x80\x94 On the formation and signification of derivative verbs the \nfollowing points are to be noted : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) Verbs in -dco and -d^w, which are mostly derived from substantives of \nthe first Dec, and those in -i(o) which are derived from substantives and \nadjectives of all declensions, are partly transitive, partly intransitive, since \nthey denote either a condition or the exercise of agency or activity, e. g. roAj^t*, \nto be bold, from r6\\iJia, boldness; xoXaw, to be angry, from x"^^* 9^> yoda, to \nweep, from y6os ; St/ca^w, to judge, from SI/ctj ; eATr/^w, to hope, from dXiris ; Spi^etf \nto limit, from Spos ; otV/^oj, to beg, from ai\'Trjs, beggar ; sometimes those in -dm \ndenote fulness, abundance, e. g. xo^\'i&\'j to ^e full of bile, have much bile. \xe2\x80\x94 Verbs \nin -c\xc2\xa3^w and -I Co formed from proper names, express the effort to resemble \nsingle individuals or whole nations, in custom, nature, language, sentiment \n\n\n\n^ 233.] DERIVATION OF VERBS AND SUBSTANTIVES. 287 \n\nSuch verbs are called Imitative verbs, e. g. 5a>pid(w, to be a Dorian, i. e. to speak \nor think as a Dorian, Aupievs ; eWrivi^w, to personate the custom or language of a \nGreek, to be a Greek in custom, etc. ; ij.r]di(w, to be a Mede in sentiment. \n\nRemark 1 . Verbs in -i((i) often signify to make something into that which \nthe root denotes. See (c). \n\nRem. 2. Verbs in -6(0) and -v(w are very rare, e. g. apudCoo, to Jit ; epTru^w, to \ncreep. \xe2\x80\x94 By the ending -0.^03 also, verbs are formed, which denote the repetition \nor strengthening of the idea expressed by the simple verb ; these are called \nFrequentative and Intensive verbs, e. g. fn-n-Ta^u}, to throw to and fro, jacto, from \npiinai.jacio ; anvd^uj, to sigh much and deeply, from o-reW, to sigh ; fiKci^Q), properly, \nto liken again and again, to compare on all sides ; hence to infer, conjecture. \n\n(b) Verbs in -6\xc2\xab and -iva are derived from substantives and adjectives of \nall declensions, and commonly express the intransitive idea of the primitive, for \nthe most part, the being in a condition, or the exercise of agency, the practising of \nthat which is signified by the primitive ; but they are sometimes transitive also. \nWhen the stem ends in -cy, which is the case, e. g. in adjectives in -rjs, -es, the \ncy is omitted, and when it ends in -fv, the \xe2\x82\xacv is omitted before the ending -evu, \ne. g. <pi\\f<i). to be a friend, to love, from <pl\\os, drvxew. to be unfortunate, from \narvx\'f}s (stem iirvx^s), evSaifiopfu, to be prosperous, from evSai/jLO}!/ (stem evdaiiiou), \nayopevQ), to speak in public, from ayopd, market, Koafieco, to adorn, from K6(rfioSi \nficuTiXevo), to be a king, from fia<ri\\\xe2\x82\xacvs. \n\n(c) Verbs in -<ici>, which are mostly derived from substantives and adjectives \nof the second Dec, those in -alvu>, which are commonly derived from adjec- \ntives, more rarely from substantives, and those in -vvo), from adjectives only, \ngenerally denote the making or transforming something into that which the primitive \nword signijies ; in like manner several in -l(w, see Rem. 1, e. g. xp^^^^^i \'^ \nmake golden, to gild, from XP"*^^^^ 5rjAda>, to make evident, from 5f/Xos, ayvl^w, to \nmake pure, from ayt/6s, nXoxni^o}, to make rich, to enrich, from irXovros, KoiKaivo), \nto make hollow, from KolAoy, \\evKadvo), to make white, from AeuK^y, fiapvvw, to \nburden, from $apvs. \n\nRem. 3. From the Fut. of several verbs, are formed verbs in -o-e/w, which \ndenote a desire for that which the primitive ux>rd signifies : these are called \nDcsiderative verbs, c. g. ycKcuTfio), to desire to laugh, from yeXdu, to laugh, ttoXc- \n/xriaeiu, to desire to engage in war, from iroX\xc2\xab/u/^a), TrapaBuxTflw, to be inclined to sur- \nrender. There are also other Desidcrativcs in -da> and -law, e. g. ^avarduj to \nwish to die, fia^rtda), to wish to Iteconie a disciple. \n\nRem. 4. Some verbs in -o-ko) have an incejitice sense (Iteginning to be), and are \ncalled Inceptive or Inchoative verbs, e. g. yjipdaKw, to begin to be old, to grow old; \nytvf idaKWy to begin to have a beard ; rjfidtTKw, pubesco. \n\nk 233. 11. Substantives. \n\nSubstantives are derived: \xe2\x80\x94 \n1 From verbs and substantives, and express \xe2\x80\x94 \n\na. A concrete idea, i. e. the idea of an active person (concrete nouns) : \nfa) With the endings -ivs (Gen. -\xe2\x82\xaco\xc2\xbbs) for the Masc, -ctd or -i<raa for the \nFem.; -ttjs [-e\'rTjy. -6tvs, -tr-ns, -wrris] (Gen. -ou) (mostly Paroxytones), -r-f]p \nand -ratp (Paroxytones) for the Ma*c., -rpid. (Proparoxytones), -rpis^ -rty, \n\n\n\n288 FORMATION OF WORDS. [$ 233. \n\nand -IS (Gen. -idos), -reipd (Proparoxytone) for the Fem. ; -wv for the Masc, \n-aiva for the Fern.; -<us for the Masc, -wis and -uiyr] for the Fem., e. g. \nUpevs, priest, Fem. Upeia, from Up6s ; ouAtjttjs and -f]p, Jlute-player, Fem- auA.^ \nrpia, av\\7)Tpis, from auAew ; crwr^p, deliverer, auTfipay from crw^w ; iroXirriSf \ncitizen, ttoXItis, from ttoXls ; pvTcap, orator, from \'PE-G ; ^epdvcow, servant, ^epd- \niraiva, from ^4pa\\\\/ ; olKerrjSf a slave, from o?kos ; 577/i<^7js, one o/" ^ people, from \nS^^os ; ottxIttis, a hoplite, from SirXov ; a-TpaTicarrjs, a soldier, from <rrpaTia. \n\n(3) With the ending -(^s (Gen. -oC), seldom, and only from verbs with the \nvariable vowel [\xc2\xa7 231, 6 (c)], e. g. TT0fjiir6s, attendant, from vefnro); 6 tj rpocpos, \nnourisher, nurse, from rpi^a ; apcDy6s, an ally, from aprryu. \n\nb. They express the abstract idea of action, i. e. action or energy apart from \nthe person who manifests it. These are abstract nouns : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) From verbs : \n\n(a) with the endings -a- is (Gen. -ffecos) and (more seldom) -aria, substantives \nwhich denote the transitive or active idea of the verb, e. g. irpa^is, actio, an acting \nfrom irpoLTTO} ; irolrjcris, a making, from iroiew ; hoKijicurla, a proving, from SoKtfid^u ; \n\n()3) with the ending -fi6s (Gen. -ov), such as denote the intransitive idea of \nthe verb, e. g. oSvp/jiSs, weeping, from hZvpojiai ; \n\n(7) with the ending -fia, such as denote the effect or result of the transitive \naction of the verb, e. g. irpayfjui, something done, nyrjfiay monumentum, xolri/jLOy^ the \nthing made or done ; \n\n(S) with the endings -/iTj, -rj, -a (all for the most part Oxytones), and (from \nverbs in -euw), -e(a, such as denote sometimes a transitive relation, and some- \ntimes the effect of that relation, e. g. TOfi-q, a cutting, from refiya ; ootS^, song, \nfrom aeiSco, (p^opd, destruction ; iraiSeia, education ; \n\n(e) with the endings -OS (Gen. -ov), -ros (Gen. -rov) and -os (Gen. -ous) \nsuch as denote, generally, an intransitive relation, also a transitive, and partly \nthe effect of the action of the verb, e. g. \\6yos, word, from Aryw ; ic\xc2\xab\xc2\xbbcur<Jj, \nlamentation ; rh ktiSos, care. \n\n(b) From adjectives (and substantives, which are sometimes used in an \nattributive sense) : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) with the endings -td, from adjectives in -as, and some in the third Dec, \ne. g. <ro(pla, wisdom (from <ro<p6s) ; ivSoufiovla, happiness (from (vlcdfioov. Gen. \n-ov-os) ; \n\n()3) -id. (Propai-oxy tones) from adjectives in -rjsand -ovs, whose stem ends in \n6 and 0, with which the i of the ending coalesces and forms \xe2\x82\xaci and 01 (rims -eia, \n\xe2\x80\xa2Old), e. g. aX-n^eia, truth (from dX-q^Sy Gcn. -e-os), eti/oia, benevolence (from \nevuo-oSy eijvovs) ; \n\n(7) -avvri mostly from adjectives in -wif (Gen. -ovos) and -os, e. g. <roKf>po- \na"uin], modesty (from adxppavy Gen. -ov-os) ; 5iKaio-<rvyri, justice (from BIkouos) ; \n\n(5) -Trjs, Gen. -TTjTos (commonly Paroxytones) from adjectives in -os and \n\n* Nouns derived from the first Pers. Perf. Pass, denote the result of the action \nof the verb, e. g. (evp-niiai). evpTj/xo, the thing found, the discovery : those from the \nsecond Pers., the abstract act, e.g. (euprjtrai). cvpeais, the act ofjiuding; tliose \nfrom the third Pers,, the agent or doer, e. g (evp-ffTou), eiiperfis, the discoverer. \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 233.] DERIVATION OF SUBSTANTIVES. 289 \n\n-us, e. g. iV^TT/y, Gen. -orrjTos, equality (from iaos) ; irax^TTis, tliickness (from \nvaxvs) ; \n\n(e) -\xc2\xabs, Grcn. -60S = -ovsj from adjectives in -vs and -tjs, and such as have \nthe forms of comparison in -iwv and -iaros, e. g. raxos, to, Gen. rdxovs, swift- \nness (from rax^s). i/zeGSos, r6. Gen. -ovSj falsehood (from \\^ev5ris), oUcrxos- rS^ \nbaseness (from alaxp^s., ajVx\'w) ; \n\n{Q -ds, -dSos (only in abstract numeral substantives) e. g. \xe2\x80\xa2^ f/.ovds, unity; \nSvds, duality ; rpids, a triad. \n\nRemark 1. In abstracts in -rla, wliich express both a transitive ard intran- \nsitive relation, from compounds in -ros and -ttjs (Gen. -ou), the t is commonly \nchanged into a, e. g. a^AoAerja and -aia (a^Ao,^eTTjs), a^avaaia (o^dvaTos), aKa- \n^apaia. 6^u^\\(\\pla. etc. So also with adjectives in -los, e. g. MiX-ijaios (MiA-tjtos), \niviav<Tios (iviavT6s). Comp. ^ 17, 6, and 234, Rem. 2. \n\nRem. 2. The older Attic poetry sometimes makes the o long in the endings \n-\xe2\x82\xacta and -Old, e. g. avaiSeid, irpovola. \n\n2. From substantives alone, the follovring "lasses denoting the names of \npersons and things, are derived : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) Gentile nouns, i. c. the names of persons derived from their country, in \n-\xe2\x82\xacus (Fem. -IS, -iSos), -frrjs (Fcm. -irts), -dxTjs (Fem. -Stjs), -j7T7js, -c^Ittjs, e. g. \nAupifvs {a Dorian, one from Dons), Awpls, \'S.vfiapiTrjs, -7ti5, ^TrapTi6.rr]s, \'Aiyiirfj- \nT7JS, \'HTTfipwTTjs. Comp. (j 234, 3 (g), etc. \n\n(li) Patronymics, Le. the names of persons derived from their ancestors, with \nthe endings -iSrjs (Fem. -is. Gen. -iSos) ; also -i&Sr^s^ ; but substantives of the \nfirst Dec. in -tjs and -as, and many of the second and third Dec. whose stem \nends in i, and some others, have -oStjs (Fem. -ds, Gen. -dSos) ; these endings are \nappended to the stem, and where the stem ends in \xe2\x82\xac, this \xe2\x82\xac and i of the ending \n-iSrjs combine and form a diphthong, as in nrjXe^STjs, e. g. npiafi-iSrjs, Fem. Upiafi-ls \nfrom Upia/x-os, UTjXiiSris from riijAfus, Gen. riTjXe-cos, KeKpoTriBrjs from KeKpoxp, \nGen. -oTT-os, Tlay^oiS-qs from Tldy^oos, -ovs ] Tf\\(ifiwi/-id5r]s from TeXafxwu, Alued- \nStjs from AiVt\'as, &\xc2\xabTTidSi}s, Fem. Qfan-ds from Qfanos. \n\n(c) Diminutives (frequently with the accompanying idea of contempt) with \nthe endings -ioi/ which is the most usual, -&pioy [-ouriot/] (seldom) and some \nfew with the endings -vWioy, -vKKls, -vbpiov, -xxpiov {-d<piov) (which \n\nbelong mostly to the language of the common people and to comedy) ; Is \n\n(Gen. -(80s and -T5os), -ihiov (formed from -is); \xe2\x80\x94 -i<rKos, -Ickti (-Io-kiov, \ni-^vT), -ixviov) ; \xe2\x80\x94 -tScus (but only of the young of animals), e. \\^. p-apaKiov. youth, \nfrom /tieTpol -ok-os, iraiS-iov, a little child, from iraTs, ircuB-6s ; \xe2\x80\x94 iraiS-dpiou ; -dcriov \ninstead of -dpiov only in Kopdaiov (from K6pa, young woman) on account of the \npreceding p \\ pLfipax-vXXiov, ajcav^-vWis from tSMov^a, thorn, yricr-vSpiov, islet ; \n^(i}v-<piov, little animal; xp^<^\'<^\'P^ov from xp^^^^^] \xe2\x80\x94 irivajc-is, little tablet, from \nfiva^; o^a|is, little ivarjon ; vrjff-tSiov, islet, from tnja-os ; KpeoLhiov (instead of \n-<fSioy) from Kpeas, olKiSiov (instead of otKi-iSiov) from olKia; \xe2\x80\x94 vtavi-aKos, u^avi- \n<r>oj from vicwias; -iaKiov seldom, e. g. KorvXicrKiov from kotuAtj ; -ix^ri, \n\n\' This form is used, when the syllable preceding the Patronymic ending is \nlong, otherwise the word would not be adapted to hexameter verse, since ono \nBtiort syllable would stand between two long syllables ; thus, ni]\\T}tdfi5. \n\n25 \n\n\n\n290 FORMATION OF WORDS. [i 234 \n\n-(xvtop only in vo\\lxvr}, "koSXx^iw from 7r({At5, /cuA^x*^) Kv?axvtop from kv\\i^^ \n\xe2\x80\x94 Xay-iSevs, young hare, from \\aydis ; cter-iSeuy, yowig eagle, from aero\'s. \n\n(d) Designations of place, with the endings -lov (in connection with the \npreceding vowels -aiov, -eiou, -^ov) and -\xe2\x82\xacioy, which denote the abode of the \nperson designated by the primitive word, or a place consecrated to a divinity \nor hero ; -(ou (Gen. -uyos), seldom -ecov, and -covid, which denote the residence \nof persons or a place filled with plants, e, g. ifyyaaTTjp-iov, workshop, from fpyaur- \nT-fip, and so others in -r-fipioy from -r-fip or -ttjs ; sometimes also this ending is \nused with reference to vessels, e. g. Tror-fjpiov, drinking vessel; KovpcTov, barber\'$ \nshop, from Kovpevs, -e-ccs (several in -lou [-eiov] have another signification, e. g. \nrpo((>e7ov, wages of a nurse, from rpo<p\xe2\x82\xacvs) ; &r](Teiov from Qrjaevs, -e\'-ovs, \'A^vcuoyf \nMovcelouj \xe2\x80\x94 avSpdi/ and yvvaiKcav, apartments for men and women; linrdv, stable \nfor horses ; po5<av and ^oSaivid^ bed of roses ; irepurrepedv and irepi<rTep<iif, dove- \ncote. \n\n(e) Substantives which denote an instrument or a means of accomplishing \nsome object, with the endings -rpov and -rpo, e. g. {uorpo, curry-comb ; TUkue- \nrpov, tuition-money ; Xovrpov, ivater for washing ; Kovrpov, bath ; also to designate \nplace, e. g. opxvo\'Tpo-i dancing-room, instead of the ending -ri^piov. \n\n\xc2\xa7 234. III. Adjectives. \n\n1. From verbs are derived adjectives with the following endings : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) With the ending -ost which is annexed to the stem of the verb. These \nadjectives express the transitive, intransitive, or passive idea of the verb from \nwhich they are derived, e. g. (i)av6s, brilliant, from <paipo) ; \\onr6s, the remainder; \nthe verb-stem of many is not in use, e. g. kokSs. \n\n(b) With the endings -ik6s, -"fi, -oV, and -i/xos, -ov, -ifios,-rj, -ov or \n-a-ifios, -ov, which denote ability, ftness, aptness. Of these, those in -ik6s have \na transitive signification, tliosc in -ifios both a transitive and passive, e. g. \nypa(p-iK6s, ft or able to paint ; Tp6(l>-ifios, nutritive; idi-<rifjLOSf cumble. \n\n(c) A few with the ending -v6s, -tj, -6v with an intransitive or passive \nsignification, e. g. Set-vJs, //-///^(/"h/ (AEin), <r\xe2\x82\xacfx-y6s, honored, honorable (o-e/So/iot), \naTvy-i/6s, hated, hateful (STTrn), -jro^iivSs (ttoi^cw), desired. \n\n(d) A few with the ending -\\(Js with a transitive signification, -wKSsy -\xe2\x96\xa0^, \n-<J*/ and (from verbs in -aw) -t]\\6s, -tj, -(^v with a transitive and intransitive \nsignification, e. g. 5ei-\\6s, timid; eKiray-\\os (instead of iKiF\\ay\\6s from \xe2\x82\xac\xc2\xbbnrX^- \n(Td), frightful ; (f)\xe2\x82\xacid-a}\\6s, sparing; (TLy\'n\\6s, silent; aTraTr)\\6s, deceitful. \n\n(e) With the ending -apds, -a, -6v (from verbs in -du and -alyu) with an \nintransitive signification, e. g. xa^apwi slack ; fudp6sy stained; also in ip^ovep6sy \neiivious ; vo<r\'np6s, diseased ; olicrpSs, pitiable. \n\n(f) With the ending -ficoy, -/xoy (Gen. -ovos) with an intransitive significa- \ntion, e. g. fjLyii-fjiwv, mindful, memor (MNAH), vo-qnuv, intelligent (yodu). \n\n(g) With the ending -?? s, -es (Gen. -eoy), e. g. v\\-f)pr)s, plenus. \n\n(h) With the ending -ds (Gen. -dSos) with a transitive, intransitive, or pas- \nsive signification, e. g. ^op-cls, bearing {<pepa) ; Spo/Lu(v, running (APEMfl) j Xoryds, \neho$en [\\4y<a). \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 234.] DERIVATION OP ADJECTIVES. 291 \n\n(i) With the endings \'r6s, -rrit -tov, and -r4os, -re a, - t eo v (verbal \nadjectives) ; those in -tJs denote either a completed action like the Perf. Pass. \nPart., e. g. Xck-tSs (from Xcyw), dictus; or the idea of possibility = English \ntermination -t/e, which is their usual signification, e. g. Spa-ros, capable of being \nseen, visible. In their formation, most of these follow either an existing or an \nassumed Perf. Pass., e. g. \n\nri/xd-U T\xe2\x82\xac-TJyH7J-Tat Tt/iTJ-T<Js \n\n<p(i}pa-(i> ^^-(pupd-rai (pwpd-reos \n\n<l>i\\(-(a tre-cpiK-q-Tai <pi\\r]-T6s \n\nirXeK-u ir\xe2\x82\xac-v\\\xe2\x82\xacK-rai nrXeK-rSsy -reos \n\nXey-w \\f-\\eK-Tcu Xck-tos \n\nariK-\\-o) (-(TTaX-rcu araX-Tios \n\nT6lV-\xc2\xab (TA-H) T6-Td-TCU Ta-TCOS \n\nSl-Su-fjLi (AO-fl) 5e-5o-Teu So-ros, -Tfos. \n\nRemark 1. Very many verbal adjectives, however, follow the analogy of \nother fonns of the verb, not according to any dctinite rule, but take precisely \nsuch a form as suited the ear of the Greeks. Thus, for example, a considerable \nnumlK\'r followed the form of the first Aor. Pass., e. g. cupt\'-w, TJpe-^T^v, alpf-rSs ; \nirav-io, 4-irav-(T-^i/, vav-(r-r6s, -tcos; xP^\'^H^^y ^\'XP^\'^\'^^i XPV-o"\'\'\'^5f -reos; \narpfip-o), i-(Trp(<p-^Vy <Trp(ir-T6s ; rpfTr-u, i-Tp4(p-^v, rpfv-reos ; Tpecp-u, i-^pe<p- \n3i7\xc2\xbb\'i bpfTT-^fOS ; X-(TTri-^Liy i(Tra-bT]v, <TTa-r6s, -rtos ; iiraivf-u), i-rrpi/f-^i/y eirajve- \nr6s ; \xe2\x80\x94 some the fonu of the second Aor. Act., e. g. tx\'*\'* c-trxc-Toj/, ax^-Tos ; \naipfoj\', (l\\f-rov, \xe2\x82\xac\\\xe2\x82\xac-T<is ; Ttj/ij, c-tov (commonly tTroy), a<p-f-T(os, iv-f-r6s] ri^ri- \nfii, i-^f-Tov, ^(-T6sy -Tfos] \xe2\x80\x94 some the form of the Pres. Act., e. g. ^eVw, /ieV- \nfTou, Hfvf-r6s, -Tfos] tlfjii,t-Tov, i-T\xe2\x82\xacos; so inr-dxe-ros from \'ETXE-TON (evxo \nput)] Svva-T6s {Swoficu)] ^rifii, <pa-T6vy ^\xe2\x96\xa0t6s. \n\n2. Adjectives are formed from substantives and adjectives : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nBy the ending -ioj (in connection with the preceding vowel of the stem \n-cuos, -fjos, -oios, -yor, -vios) and -ik6s (which, when v precedes, becomes -k6s \nand when \xc2\xab, often -0x6^). These adjectives have a very great variety of mean \nings. They frequently indicate the mode or manner of the adjective idea, \noften also in a very general manner, that Avhich proceeds from an object and is \nconnected with it or related to it, e. g. ovpdy-ios, heavenly, pertaimng to heaven ; \nKo^dp-ios, cleanly (but Ka^ap65, clean); iKevbtpioSf frank; liberal, liberalis (but \ni\\(v^fpos, liber) ; ayopcuos, belonging to the market-place {ayopd) ; biptios, summer- \nlike {^(pos, -e-o$), alSolos (aiSwy, -6-05), rjp^oi and rjpcoos ; Tpiwfjx^ios ] Sov\\ik6s\', \nbTiKvK6s, yMviax6$. \n\nRem. 2. In some words the ending -oTos also -loios occurs, e. g. x^P\'J\'a\'oy, \nCKoratos and aKOTiauos. In several words the ending -aios (^ 17, 6) is used in- \nstead of -r-Los, e. g. <piKor-()(no% {<piX6Tr)s, -ttros), kKovaios (Ikuv, -6vtos). \n\n3. Adjectives are formed from substantives alone : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) With the ending -\xe2\x82\xac jo s (mostly Paroxytones), which are formed from \nwords denoting persons, especially from proper names ; but in respect to their \nsignification they are like adjectives in -iK6sf e. g. avZpuoSy belonging to a man^ \nmatily, yvvouKelos, i.f^p(inrfios, \'Ofiiipfios. \n\n\n\n292 FORMATION OF WORDS. [\xc2\xa7 235. \n\n(b) With the endings -eos = -ovs and -Xvos, which denote the material \nof which anything is made, like the English ending -en, e. g. x/Jwo-\'foj = xp^ \naovSf golden; x\'^^\'^^^^ =^ x\xc2\xb0^\'^o^*> ^<^2:en; ^v\\-ivoSy ivooden; (Tkvtivos, made of \nleather, leMhern. \n\n(c) With the ending -Xv65 (seldom -lv6s), derived from substantives. These \nexpress certain relations of time ; sometimes, also, an abundance or fulness, \ne. g. k(nrep-iv6s, vespertinus ; xi^f<\'\'-"\'<^^> hesternus; optiuSsy mountainous {opoSf Gren. \n-e-os). \n\n(d) With the endings -6ts, Gen. -evros (always preceded by a vowel, tj, \nwhen the substantive from which the Adj. is formed, is of the first Dec, and o, \nwhen it is the first or second); -p6s, -\xe2\x82\xacp6s, --npos, -a\\eos, which denote \nfulness or abundance, e. g. v\\^-ei5, woody ; irvpo-eis, fiery ; cdax\'P^s, base ; vos- \n\xe2\x82\xacp6s, and vocr-rfpos, unhealthy ; fxafi-aXeos, strong. Exceptions to those in -tis, \nare SevSp-ffeis from SeuSpof, x\'^P^^\'s from x^P\'^* \n\n(e) With the ending --ftp los, which have the transitive sense of verbal sub- \nstantives in -r]p and -rjs, e. g. auT-qpios, preserving, that preserves. \n\n(f) With the ending -cUStj s, Neut. -wSes (formed from \xe2\x80\xa2o-\xe2\x82\xaciZ\'i)s from elSos, \nform, quality). These adjectives denote a quality or resemblance, but often \nalso a fulness or abundance, e. g. (pXoyuh-ris, resembling Jiame, fiery ; irotdiSriSt \nabounding in grass, grassy. \n\n(g) With the endings -los (Fem. -td), -kSs, -ik6s (Fem. -icn, -iK-fi). \xe2\x80\xa2riv6s \n(Fem. -7]v\'h)-> and when t or p precedes, -av6s (Fem. -avi\\), -7vos (Fem. -Ivri) \\ \nthese are Gentile adjectives, which are also frequently used as substantives, \nparticularly those in -7j\xc2\xab/(Js, -avSs^ -ti^os, which are formed only from names \nof cities and countries out of Greece, e. g. Koplvb-ios. -la. \'A^vcuos, -a/a, Xios \n(instead of -itos from Xios), \'Apye7os ({roTa\'\'Ap-yos, -\xe2\x82\xac-os) ; AoKcSaifioy-iKos] Kv^uc- \n7iv6s, -7}vri {Kv^iKos), \'2,ap5i-av6s, -ayr] {\'S.dpdeis, lon. Gen. -i-uy), \'AyKvpay6s \n{"AyKvpa), TapavT-7vos, -ivrj (Topas, -avr-os). \n\n\xc2\xa7 235. IV. Adverbs. \n\n1 . Adverbs are formed from verbs : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nWith the endings -St;*\' or, when the primitive has the variable o,-dBriy, \nwhich denote mode or manner, e. g. Kpv^h-nv, secretly {Kpinnw) ; ypdfi-Sriy, by \nwriting, scribendo [ypdcpu) ; o-irop-dSriv, scatteredly, sparsim. \n\n2. From verbs and substantives : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nWith the ending -d6u or -a56y, --qdov (mostly from substantives). These \nalso denote manner, or, when derived from substantives, the external form, e. g. \na.va<^avh6vy openly, aperte ; SiaKpiSov, distinctly: fiorpv56y, grape-like^ in clusters \n{p6Tpv5), l\\aB6v, in troops, catervatim ; ay e\\rid6y, in herds, gregatim ; KvyrfSoy^ \nlike a dog. \n\n3. From substantives, pronouns, and adverbs, adverbs are formed to denote the \nthree relations of place, viz., whence, whither, and ichere, by the endings -\xe2\x96\xa0^\xe2\x82\xac\xc2\xbb\', -Se \n(-<re), and -3-j, e. g. ovpav6-biy,from heaven; oifpav6y-Se, into or to heaven, ovpay6- \nS-i, in heaven; &Wo-^ev, from another place, aliunde, fiAAo-ce, to another place, alio, \n&Wo-^i, at another place, alibi. \xe2\x80\x94 Eules in respect to the accent of those in ^e9 \n\n\n\nJ 23G.] DERIVATION OF ADVERBS. 293 \n\nand -^i: (a) Dissyllables are either Paroxytones or Propeiispomena, e. g, \nTrp6a^\xe2\x82\xaci/y yrj^fVf ad^i; (b) polysyllables are Paroxytones, when the penult is \nshort by nature, e g. AeafiS^eu from AeV/Sos, Kvirpo^ev from Kvirpos, ovpavo^euy \novpai/6bi from ovpav6s; exceptions: oXko^cu, o\'(ko^i, evdo^fv, euSo^i, iroivTo^ev, \n&\\Xo^\xe2\x82\xacu, eKocTo^ey^ and some poetic Avords ; (c) polysyllables whose penult is \nlong by position, are without exception Proparoxytones, e. g. eyroa^ey^ oTria^ey ; \n(d) polysyllables whose penult is long by nature, are Proparoxytones, when the \nprimitive was a Barytone, e. g. e^u^ev (el\'"), kr^pw^^v {\'4Tcpos). ^ ASrr]vt\\^iv \n(\'Ai^i\'ot); but Properispomena, when the primitive was an Oxytone, e. g. \nnvb(ii)bfv (rivi^w), Qpiribiv [Qpia). On the accent of those in -5e (-ere), see \xc2\xa7 34, \nKem. S. \n\nRemark 1. "Words of the first Dec. retain their a or tj before -;^\xe2\x82\xac\xc2\xbb\'; those \nof the second, tlieir o ; and those of tlie third, the o of the Gen. ending, e. g. \n\'OAu^iTT^cu^ei\', 27rapT7j-i^6i/, oiKo-biVy 6.K\\o-dev ; but the vowels a, tj, and o are \noften exchanged with each other, e. g. I>i(6-^ev from f>iCa; M\xe2\x82\xacyap6^\xe2\x82\xacy from \nMeyapa, rd. \n\nRem. 2. Adverbs in -a>, and also others, append the endings to the un- \nchanged vowels, e. g. iuca-^ey, KOLTw^eVy \xe2\x82\xac|a>-3ev, ^Kel-^ev, iyyv-d^i, ev^o-^ey, \nfvSo-^i. Some forms of the comparative in -repos lengthen o into a>, e. g. \nifjLcpoTfpw-dfv. In some of the al)ove forms, u can be shortened into o in poetry, \nand then rejected entirely, e. g. t^o-bey, rrpoa-^ey (instead of t^co^fVy -rrpocw^ey), \nand in imitation of Doric usage, <r is often omitted before .^, e. g. oTrt^ej/, ckto- \n^ey (instead of ovia^ey, ttcroabiy). \n\nRem. 3. The ending -5e is commonly appended to substantives only, and to \nthe unchanged form of the Ace, e. g. aAaSe, to or into the sea (fiXs), riy.^wSe (from \nUv^w), oUSuSf only Epic, elsewhere oUaSe (from the stem \'OIH), as (pvyaSe (from \n\xe2\x99\xa6 YE) instead of (pvynySe which is not in use, \'EKtvalydSf). In jironouns and \nadverbs, -(re is appended instead of -Sc, e. g. iK(7-a(, iAAoce, eTep&?(re, ouSo^wJcre, \nTr}\\6a(; more seldom in substantives, e. g. o?/co(re. \xe2\x80\x94 In plural substantives in \n-OS, <t5( becomes ^f, c. g. \'Ai^vajfe, &7}$a^( ; but some substantives in the singu- \nlar, also, follow this analogy, e. g. \'OAi/jlittjo^** ; so the poetic adverbs, ^vpa^e, \nto the door,foras, foa^e, x^M^C^i \'^ the ground, httrnum (from the obsolete sub- \nstantives, cpo, XOM\xc2\xab\xc2\xbb f\'fth). \n\nRem. 4. Instead of -Sc or -o-c, the Epic dialect has -Sts also, e. g. xaM^^Stj \ninstead of xo/^^C^- ^AAi/5is instead of ^AAoo-c. and o]f/caSi$, domttm. \n\nRem. 5. Several pronominal forms with the usual suthx, have, between the \nstem and the suffix, the syllal)le ax, which is to be accounted for by the ending \n\xe2\x96\xa0cLKis coming before the aspirated relative, e. g. 7roAA-ox-<^\'^e\xc2\xbb\' (from iroWdKis \nand o^ev), irayT-ax-oae ; this occurs also in most pronominal adverbs of place \nin -T], -ov, -01, e. g. oAA-ox-oVj alibi, iroAA-ox-ov, vayr-ax-Vi toAA-ox-^j irayT-ax-o7. \n\n\xc2\xa7 236. B. CoMrouNDS. \n\n1. Every compound consists of two words, one of which explains 4hc other \nmore definitely. The explanatory word usually stands first, e. g. yav-fxaxia, \nsea-Jight, as is usual in English in composite words. The word which is explained \nby the other, shows to what class of words the compound belongs, i. e. whether \nit is a substantive or verb, etc. ; thus, e. g. yav-fiaxia is a substantive, yav-fiax^\'if \na verb, yav-fidxos an adjective. \n\nBjiMARK 1. The explanatory word takes the second place in the compound \nbut seldom, and mostly in poetic words, e. g. Seia-iSainuy, i. e. Seiaas robs Sae \n\n25* \n\n\n\n294 FORMATION OF WORDS. [^ 237 \n\n2. Both words stand either in an attributive relation to each other ( = a substan- \ntive qualified by an adjective or by another substantive in the Gen.), e. g. Kax\' \n\xe2\x82\xac^ia(= KttK^ e^is, bad condition) ; ffKiaypatpia (= (TKias ypa<pi}), painting in light and \nshade; \'nrir-ovpis (= \'linrov ovpd), horse-tailed; or in an objective relation (= a \nverb, adjective, or substantive with the Case of a substantive in the relation of \nan object, or with an adverb in the same relation), e. g. ImroTpotpelv (= Xinrovs \nrp4<p\xe2\x82\xaciu)^ \'nnroTp6((>os \'j vavfMax^^y (i- e. vaval fidx^o\'^cu), yav/ixixos, vavpMxio.\'^ \neuTvxerj\', cvTvx\'^s ; auKTrduai, avdcrraTos. avdffTcuTis. \n\n3. The verb can be compounded with prepositions only, e. g. oiro-, eV-, avri-^ \nir/io-, e/t-, ^lo--^ Kara-, irapa-, irpoff-fiaiveiu ; comp. \xc2\xa7 237, 5 ; the substantive and \nadjective, either with substantives and adjectives, or with prepositions, or with \nseparable and inseparable adverbs and prefixes, e. g. <ra)fjiaTo-<pv\\a^, rfiv-K6yos ; \nvepi-ffTacris, Sid-KevKos ; \xe2\x82\xacu-tvx^s, av-airios ; the adverb, with prepositions only, \ne. g. ir\xe2\x82\xacpi-<TTaS6y. \n\nRem. 2. All other compounds are formed by derivation from words pre- \nviously compounded, e. g. ev-rvx^^i^ and \xe2\x82\xacv-Tvx<tis from eu-rux^s. \n\nRem. 3. (a) Separable adverbs are suc?i as are used alone, as well as in \ncomposition, e. g. ed, well; ir\\i]v, except ; a/jLo, at the same time; &yx^, near; &pTi, \nnow. recently ; &yau (aya-), very; irdKiv, again; irdXai, long since; Sis from bvo, \nbis, or the same as Sixoi dis, separately ; iray, wholly ; fVTvxf^fi evrvx\'hs, prosperous ; \nirKriiJiixe\\-f]5 (ttAtjj\', /neXos), violating Jiartnony ; \xe2\x96\xa0jrATj/i/xeXeii/, ir\\ffifiiKr}(ris ; hfiarpo- \nXciw, to run together, a/xaTpox\'ta ; ayx^^are^y, to go near to ; ayxt^dXouraos, mari \npropinquus ; apTi^aA.V)S, now blooming ; ayaxri^fv^s, aydpf>oos, aydyyicpos. veiy snowy; \niroA.t/uiSXao\'Tos, that buds again ; TraXaicpvTos. planted long since ; Stsx^Aiot, two thou- \nsand ; Sicp^oyyos, having a double sound ; iTdvcro<pos, all-wise. \n\n(b) Inseparable adverbs are such as are used only in composition. They are \nas follows : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) ^/Lii-, half, semi, e. g. T}ixi<p\\\xe2\x82\xacKTos, half-burned, semiustus. \n\n(fi) Svs- expresses difficulty, adversity, or aversion, and is often the antith- \nesis of e5, e. g. dvsTvxf\'iy and evrvx^^y^ SvsSat/jLovia, misfortune ; \n\n(y) a Privative (usually au- before a vowel) has the force of the Latin in. and \nexpresses the negation of the idea contained in the simple word, e. g. \n&<TO(pos, tinwise ; arifiia, dishonor ; &irais, childless ; avairios, innocens. \n\n(S) a Collective and Intensive, like the Latin con in composition, expresses com- \nmunity, equality, or a collective idea, and hence also intensity, e. g. (commu- \nnity, especially in the names of kindred and companions) a5\xe2\x82\xacK<f>6s. brother^ \nfrom Se\\<pvs, wo7nb; (equality) aTd\\avros, of the same tceight ; innhos, even ; \n(in a collective sense) kSfp6os, collected {^peo}, ^peoncu. to cry aloud), doAAi^s, \ncollected (from oA^s or a.\\r}s). aydpo}, ayeKr} ; (intensity) areirfis, intent, in- \ntentus ; &<rKios, very sliady ; &fipofios, maJcing a loud noise. \n\nRem. 4. The Euphonic a (\xc2\xa7 16, 10) must be distinguished from the Collec- \ntive a, e. g. (TTdxvs and 6.(rTaxvs, an ear of grain; a-Tcpoir-q and aareporr}, lightning. \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 237. Formation of Coynpounds. \n\n1. "Wlien the first part of the compound is a verb (\xc2\xa7 236, Rem. 1), the pure \n(sometimes also the strengthened) stem of the verb remains unchanged, if the \nfollowing word begins >vith a vowel, e. g. tpfp-avy-ffs, trei^-apxfu\' ; or the final \nvowels \xe2\x82\xac, 0, 1, also the syllables ai, etr, eo-i. ao. are annexed to the stem of the \nverb, if the following word begins with a consonant ; a also is aimexed when \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 237.] FORMATION OF COMPOUNDS. 295 \n\nthe following word begins with a vowel, e. g. dcuc-i-^/xos^ \\t7r-o-To/cT7jy and Xcnr \no-T(\xc2\xa3/CT7jy, T\xe2\x82\xac(nr-i-Kepavvos^ iy\xe2\x82\xacp-(ri-y\xe2\x82\xac\\(i)S^ (pep-ea-fiios^ TafjL-e<rl-xp<>\'S., ^KK-eai-ireirXos^ \nfu^ofidpfiapos {= fJLvy-ao-fi.)^ fiiy^ounris (= piir-<r-aavis), TrXrj^nnros (== trXTjy-a- \ntmros). \n\n2. When the first part of the compound is a substantive or adjective, the \ndeclension-stem of the substantive generally remains unchanged, e. g. (first \nDec.) yiKr]-<p6pos, ayopa-vS/xos ] (second Dec.) \\oyo-ypd(pos, i<r--fiix\xe2\x82\xacpos (by Elision), \nKaKovpyos (by Crasis), Aixyco^SoAos {\\ay(t)s) ; (third Dec.) aorrv-yofios, 7)5v-x6yo5i \nfiov-(pop06si vav-fiaxia | irvp-<p6pos, fieXay-xo^ia, irav-qyvpis ; in some, the uniou- \nvowel is annexed to the stem, e. g. (ra)/aoT-o-^vAo|, <f>vat-o-\\6yos, Sabovxos ( by \nCrasis, instead of 5a5-<^exos) ; in neuters in -os. Gen. -e-qs, the e is elided before \no, e. g. |\xc2\xab^o-(^poy, or the declension-stem in -es [\xc2\xa7 31, (b)] is retained, e. g. \nT\xe2\x82\xac\\\xe2\x82\xacs-<p6pos ; so also in other neuters, e. g. K\xe2\x82\xacpas-fi6\\os, <p(t}s-<p6pos. \n\nRemark 1. In the first Dec, however, the union-vowel o is often found \ninstead of the declension-stem, e. g. 5i\xc2\xab-o-7po(|)oy (Siictj), \\oyx-o-<p6pos \\ so also \nthe ending 17 or -a is annexed even to words of the second and thh-d Dec, e. g. \n&ayoT7j-^(Jpoy, affiTibT]-<p6po5\\ neuters in -or (Gen. -tos, PI. -tj) frequently vary \nbetween the and 17, e. g. ^i(po<p6pos and ^i(pri(f>6pos, aKevocpSpos and crKcuTjcpopos. \n\nRem. 2. In some words of the tiiird Dec, more seldom of the tirst and \nsecond, t is annexed to the pure stem, as a union-vowel, e. g. irvpiiryovs, alyi- \nfiSrrjs\'j fiv(rTnr6\\os {fivcTT-i^s), fivplirvovs. In several words a euphonic o- {a-i) is \ninserted, e. g. fioyo-<T-T6Kos, ^co-cr-ex\'^/\'ia, together with the regular ^eoex^p\'^ay \nvav-ffl-Tropos, \n\n3. When the first part of the compound is an adverb, only those changes \ntake place, which arise from the general rules respecting the change of \nconsonant*. \n\n4. Respecting the second part of the compound, it is to be noted, that the \nwords beginning with d, 6, o, in composition regularly lengthen these vowels \n(if the last part of the compound is a simple) into tj and \xc2\xab, e. g. (o) ev\'ni/efjLos \nfrom iyfuoSy (rTpan\\y6s from 6,ywy \xe2\x82\xacv7]vwp from airffp] (c) Svst\'ipeTfxos from iper- \nfi6s, hvs-r\\\\aros from iKavvo) j (0) a.viM)<pfK-S]S from H^tkos, rcavuKi^pos from ^AAuyut, \nav(j}vvyiQS from tvofia. \n\n5. In relation to the end of the word, the follo>\\-ing points should be noted : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nA. In the Greek language, as has been seen (^ 236, 3), a verb can be com- \npounded only with prepositions ; but if it is necessary to compound a verb with \nanother part of speech, this is never done immediately, but by means of a \nderivation from a compound word either actually existing or assumed. Then \nthe derivative-ending, commonly -ea>, is regularly appended to this compound \nword : e. g. from Xinrovs rp4(p\xe2\x82\xaciv, to keep horses, the derivative is not liriroTpe^^iv, \nbut by means of the comj)ound substantive ltnroTp6<posj it is iinroTpo<p(w ; so \n&co(re)8\xe2\x82\xaca> from bfocefi-fis, vavfiax^^v from vavfiaxos, eurux*"\' from evrvxvs. \n\nB. The compound is an adjective or noun: \xe2\x80\x94 \n\na. The second part is derived from a verb, and has the following endings : \n(o) Most frequently -os, -ov^ e. g. ^porpScpos, nourishing wild beasts, ^Tjpdrpo- \n\n<^s, nourished by uild beasts. See ) 75, Rem. 4- \n(/3) -7JS (-TTjs) or -as (Gen. -ou), -rjp {-rrip), -Twp, commonly used as \n\nsubstantives with a transitive signification, e. g. evepyerrjs, benefactor; \n\nyojjJideTr]!, legislator; fxvpoTrwXrjs, opvt^oi^\'ipas, vaiSokeTwp , \n\n\n\n296 FORMATION OF WORDS. [$ 237 \n\n(7) -Tjy, -\xe2\x82\xacs, commonly with a passive or intransitive signification, c. g \n(S-eo^tA-^y, beloved of God; evfia^-fis, quick to ham, docilis ; einrp^TrijSy \nbecoming ; \n\n(5) -J (-|), e. g. \\l/evd6iJ.apTvs from MAPTTH, vofiocpvKa^. \n\nb. Or the second part is a substantive : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) An attributive relation exists between the two parts of the compound, the \nfirst containing a more definite explanation of the last. The substantive \nrernains unchanged. The first part is an adverb or preposition, sometimes also \na substantive or adjective, e. g. 6iJ.65ov\\os, a fellow-slave ; fiovKifios, excessive hun- \nger, bulimy ; aKpoiroXis, citadel. \n\n(b) An objective relation exists between the two parts of the compound, the \nlast denoting the object of the first. This division includes a large number of \nadjectives, the first part of which consists either of a verb, or, though more \nseldom, of an adjective, of a separable or inseparable adverb, or of a preposi- \ntion used as an adverb, e. g. Sei<ndalfj.a>i/ = 6 rovs Sa\'t^oyas delaas, iTrixcupfKcucos \n= 6 rols KaKois iirixa\'^pcov, KaKoSai/jLcov = 6 KaKbv Saifj-ova ex(^v, Svsfpws, one wlio \nhas an unhappy love, ey^eos = 6 rhv b^hv iv eavr^ exwv, &iroiKOS = 6 airh tov \noXkov &v, &irais = 6 ttcuSos ovk ex<wi\'. In all these examples the form of the sub- \nstantive remains unchanged,\' where the substantive has a form which is appro- \npriate for the JNIasc. or Fem. of the adjective, but where this is not the case, the \nsubstantive assumes a corresponding adjective-ending, viz. -05 (Gren. -ou), -cus \n(Gen, -00), -7)5 (Gen. -ovs), -is (Gen. -tdos), -up and (when it ends in -v) -s, e. g. \nCvvdeiTTvos {Seliryoy), a fellow-guest, ev^vSiKOS (5t/rjj), &Tifios {ti/jlti), SfX\'flf\'^pos \n{rjfj-epa), (piKoxp^fJ-o-\'^ os [xpriixa, xp\'^(^\xc2\xb0-\'\'\'\xc2\xb0-)i ^(^to/xos {arS/xa), evyews (71)), having a \nfertile soil; X^iirSyeus {vavs), one who deserts the ship ; avaxpeX-ns (rh 6(p\xe2\x82\xac\\os), 6.vaX- \nKis (oA-KT)), oxprj/iojj\', aSuKpvs, Gen. -vos {rh Soucpv). \n\nc. Or the second part is an adjective : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nThe adjective retains its foiTn, except that those in -vs commonly take the \nending -tjs ; the first part consists either of a substantive or an adverb, e. g. \nacrrvyiirwv, near the city, urbi vicinus ; irducro^os or ird{T<ro<f)os, -oy, very wise; ap6- \nfioios, -ov, unlike ; 7rp6dT}\\os, -op, otjStjs from 7}Sv5, iroSoJ/cTjy from ukvs. \n\n\xe2\x80\xa2 Eor example, Seia-iSaiixav is an adjective of two endings, the ending -oew \nbeing both Masc. and Fem., therefore the substantive Scu/xuv is not changed in \ncomposition ; but avvSenrpos takes a regular adjective termination, as the sub- \nstantive 5uiryop has neither a Masc. nor Fem. ending. \n\n\n\nSYNTAX. \n\n\n\nSECTION I. \n\nSYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE. \n\n\n\nCHAPTER I. \n\nParts of a Simple SentencCc \n\nJ 238. Nature of a Sentence. \xe2\x80\x94 Subject. \xe2\x80\x94 Predicate. \n\n1. Syntax treats of sentences. A sentence is the ex- \npression of a thought in words, e. g. To poBov ^aXkei] 6 \nav^pojiro^ ^vi]t6<; ianv. The conceptions of the mind are \nrelated both to each other and to the speaker. The con- \nceptions or ideas themselves are expressed by Essential \nwords (\xc2\xa7 38, 4) 5 their relations to each other, partly by \ninflection and partly by Forjnal words. \n\nThus, e. g. in the sentence Th KdKhv (>65ov ^dw-ei iv t^ tov Trarp-hs /f^ir-o>, \nthere are five essential words : /ca\\<Jy, ftSSov, .^aAActv, irariip^ ktjitos ] their rela- \ntions to each other are expressed partly by their inflection and partly by the \nFormal words t6, ivy ry, rod. \n\n2. Every sentence must necessarily have two parts, a sub- \nject and a predicate. The subject is that, of which some- \nthing is affirmed ; the predicate that, which is affirmed of the \nsubject, e. g. in the sentences, to poSov ^dWec \xe2\x80\x94 6 dv^pco7ro<i \n^lAi^To? ianv, to pohov and 6 dv^pco7ro<; are the subjects, ^d\\- \n\\\xe2\x82\xaci and ^mjTOf; ianv, the predicates. \n\n3. The predicate properly contains the substance of the \nsentence ; the subject is subordinate to it and can be \n\n\n\n298 SYNTAX. f$ 235 \n\nexpressed by a mere inflection-ending of the verb, e. g \nBlBay-fii, (/) g-ive. \n\n4. The subject is a substantive or a word used as a \n/ substantive, viz. a substantive pronoun or numeral; an \n\n% adjective or participle used as a substantive ; an adverb \n^ which becomes a substantive by prefixing the article ; a \nll preposition with its Case ; an infinitive ; finally, every word, \n^""letter, syllable, and every combination of words can be con- \nsidered as a substantive, and with the neuter article com- \nmonly agreeing with it, can be used as a subject. The \nsubject is in the Nom. \n\nTh ^6Soy ^dWei. \xe2\x80\x94 \'Eyii) yp(i<po>, ff h yp<L(J)eis. \xe2\x80\x94 Tpe\xc2\xabs ^?<bov, \xe2\x80\x94 \'O (ro<phs (if \nhaifioiv iarL-^ Ot <p^oj/ov j/res /^icoGrrai.\xe2\x80\x94 Oi irdKai dj/Speto* ijcoi\'.\xe2\x80\x94 Oi irepl \nMi\\T idSrf u KaXws ifiax^o\'avTo. \xe2\x80\x94 X. Cv. 8. 3, 42. Oirroi ovtws T]dv iari rh \n*X ^ **\' XP^A"*\'\'\'\'*\' *^* "\'\'\'"Z\'^\'\' "^^ avofidWe^v. \xe2\x80\x94 Th SiSdc k\xe2\x82\xac iv\'koXSu iaTiu. \n\' \xe2\x80\x94 X. R. L. 9, 2. eVeTot rp aper\'p ad^cff^ ai els rhv irhdw \xe2\x96\xa0xjp6vov (jmXXov, ^ \nT^ KUKia. \xe2\x80\x94 Th \xe2\x82\xact avi\'SffffiSs icTiv, \xe2\x80\x94 Tit ^ra fMucpSv iariv. \xe2\x80\x94 Th yvSibi crcow \nrhv KaX6v iffriv. \' . \n\nRemark 1. In the construction of the Accusative with the Infinitive, the \n.subject is in the Ace, as will be seen \xc2\xa7 307, 3. In indefinite and distributive \ndesignations of number, the subject is expressed by a preposition {els, iff pi, Kard) \n\' with its Case, e. g. Els rerrapas ^A^ov, as many as four came (with round num\xc2\xbb \nbers 6ty also signifies about, at most). X. Cy. 8. 3, 9. fcrraaav Trpanov fj.cv ruy \nBopv(p6pci}u els rerpuKisx\'^^^ovs {alx>nt four thousand stood), tuirpocbev Sc t\xc2\xabf \nTTuA.wj\' els reffffapas, 5iyx*^"" ^^ cKarepw^ey ray irv\\Qy. X- H. 6. 5, 10. \n(<pxryov els AaKeSaifioya Tu>y irepl ^Tdtrnriroy TeyeaTtiy ire pi oktukoct iov s. \nSo Ka3-\' eKdffTovs, each one singly, one by one, singuli ; Kara edyrjj singulae gentes. \n\n5. In the following cases the subject is not expressed by \nany special word : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) When the subject is a personal pronoun and is not particularly emphatic, \ne. g. Tpd<po}, ypa<pei5i ypd<pei ; \n\n(b) When the idea contained in the predicate is such, that it cannot appro- \npriately belong to every subject, but only to a particular one. the subject \nbeing, as it were, implied in the predicate. Thus, olvoxoevei in Hom. \nsc. 6 olvox6os, the cup-bearer pours out the mne ; ^iei in Her. sc. 6 dvr^ip. \nX. An. 3. 4, 36. eirel eyiyvcaiTKOV avrovs oi "EAAijves ^ovXofievovs awievai koI \nZiayyeWofievovs, eK-fipv^e (sc. 6 /o)pu|) ToTs^EWrja-nrapcuTKei^our^cu. So \ntrrifxaiyei rp ffd\\ir lyyt, 4(rd\\ir ly^e y, SC. 6 <raA.irocT7js (the signal is \n[uxis] given by the trumpet). So we must explain words which denote the \nstate of the weather or the phenomena of nature ; as S 6 1, it rains ; vl^ei^ \nit snows, fipoyr^, affrpdirr e i, sc. 6 Zevs. Th. 4, 52. I o* \xe2\x82\xac i (r 6, there was \nan earthquake. X. Cy. 4. 5, 5, ffvffKord^ei, it is dark; \n\n(c) The subject is easily supplied from the context ; thus, in designations of \ntime, e. g. ^y iyyvs fi\\iov Svafiwy (sci rj rjixepa). ^Hv afi<p\\ ayopatf irKif^owrea \nand the like ; irapex^i f^iy sc. Kaip6sy it is time^ it is allouxd, one can = licety \n\n\n\nh \n\n\n\nk \'onfA ^ SUBJECT. PREDICATE. COPULa 299 \n\n6i (^ Ser. 3, 73. rjfuv vape^ei avcuTwccuT^ai ttJv apxw- In i^^ way the \nW4JV i .^\xe2\x82\xac<Js is yery frequently omitted in certain phrases, e. g. Kpoar-:)\' \nfiai*\'% I, SC. 6 ^\xe2\x82\xac6s ; Trpoxf^p^^ H^oi (sc. ra irpdyixaTa), things prosper to ms, \nIsucceai, comp. Th. 1, 109. In such expressions as ^aai, A e 7 o u <r i, etc.. \nthe sutject ^v^pwiroi is regularly omitted, as it is readily apparent 5 \n\n(d) Sometimes the subject is supplied from some -word of the sentence. Her. \n9, 8. rhv ^Icr^fibv er elx^ov kcu (T<pi fiv irphs TeAei", SC rh relxo^t ^^^^ \nvxilled the Isthmits, and the [tcall] was, etc. X. Cy. 2. 4, 24. irop^vaoixcx \n\xe2\x82\xacv^vs Trpbs TO fia<ri\\\xe2\x82\xac la, koI ^v /iihv a.vSti(TrT]Tai, sc. 6 Pa<Tt\\evs. So also \nOther Cases as well as the Nom. are thus supplied, e. g. PI. L. 8C4, d. \niraiSia xP^\'h^^^^y ovd4y irot tuv to iovtwv (sc iraiSeav) oiacpepuv ; \n\n(e) With the third Pers. Sing, of the verb, in a subordinate clause containing \na general idea, and in definitions, the indefinite pronoun tIs is sometimes \nomitted. PI. Criton. 49, c. otjre dyraSt/feTj/ Se?, oijre KaKus iroiuy ovhiva \nay^pwTTcaVy ovS* tiv Stiovu it da xv vtv avrwv, not even if any one should \nsuffer from thein ; so often -with the Inf. ; but if a participle stands in \nconnection with the Inf, e. g. Eur. M. 1018. Koxxpus <p4p^iv xp^ ^vi]rhv \n6pra (TvfA.(popds, the participle must be considered as the subject. \n\nRem. 2. Such expressions as Se?, xpVt 5o/ce7, irpe-rei, 6|co-Ti{j/), ivSexerai {it is \npossible), KoAaJs, eS exft, exEt \\6yov {consentaneum est), K^yerai {it is said), etc., \nthe Greek language always aonsiders as personal, the following Inf. or substan- \ntive sentence being regarded as the subject of these verbs. \n\n6. The predicate is a verb, an adjective, participle, ad- \njective pronoun or numeral, or a substantive with the \nFormal word ehai ; ehac, in this relation, is usually called \nthe copula^ since it connects the adjective, substantive, etc. \nwith the subject, and forms one thought, e. g. \n\nTb fioSov (&-aA\\ei. \xe2\x80\x94 \'O Af^puiijs ^y tit 6s icrriv. \xe2\x80\x94 \'A^dvaroi elcny ot \ndfol. \xe2\x80\x94 \'H apfT^ KaXi] icTTiv. \xe2\x80\x94 \'Aya^r] Trapai<pa(ris itTTiu eraioou^^ \xe2\x80\x94 Kvpos - \' \' \' *" \n^v fiaa i\\cvs. \xe2\x80\x94 TovTo TO wpayfid iari rdSe. \xe2\x80\x94 Si* ^a^a irdyruu trpcoTos, \n\xe2\x80\x94 Ol &vdpes ^(Tay T pel s. \n\nRem. 3. The finite verb denotes both the thing affirmed (id quod pracdicatur) I \xe2\x80\xa2 \nand the relation of the affirmation to the subject and speaker ; the relation to \nthe subject, is denoted b}" the personal-endings of the verb ; the relation to the \nspeaker, bv its Modes and Tenses ; e. g. the ending of the verb A67a> sliows \nthat its subject is in the first person, and its being in the Ind. mode Pres. tense, \nindicates that the speaker asserts something directly, at the present time. But \nif the predicate is expressed by an adjective or substantive with elvai, the \naflirmation is denoted by the adjective or substantive, and its relation to the \nspeaker by eJyou, e. g. evhaipuav ilfj-i = (vSaifioye-Wf (uSaifiwy e? = evSatfiovc-eis, \ntvSal^ovfs (taovrai = cvSaiixoy^-aova-iy, though there is a difference between the \ntwo modes of expression. \n\nRem. 4. It is necessary to distinguish between the use of cTrot, as a Formal \nand as an Essential word ; in the former relation, it is merely a copula, con- \nnecting the sulyect with the substantive or adjective, etc. (\xc2\xa7 238, 6); in the \nlatter, it has the idea of being or existence, being in a certain condition, etc., e. g. \nftTTi ^eSs = ^\xe2\x82\xac6s eariy &y {there is a God, God exists), as in Her. 3, 108. tov \ndfiov 7] irpoyoiTj iarl iovtra cocpTj, ^< - Cf-^J \',t\' t^ * \n\n\n\n\\ \n\n\n\n300 SYNTAX. [\xc2\xab 239 \n\nRem. 5. In order to give greater emphasis to the predicate, the simple idea \nexpressed by the verb, is resolved into the participle and copula eluai. This \nmode of expression, hqwever, is more usual in poetiy, though it is found also \nin prose, particularly in Herodotus, comp. Hem. 3. Eur. C. 381. ir\xc2\xabs 5 toXoI- \nTTtop\', ^re irdarxo VT \xe2\x82\xacS rdSe] Id. H. 117. -^v (Tirevdufu. Her. 3, 99. airap- \nveo/xeuS s iari. Id. 9, 51. t) yrjcros iffri airh rod ^Affcairov 5e/co araSlovs \nair dxovcra. PL L. 860, e. e< ravTU ourus exoyrd iariv. Dem. 01. 3. \n(v. 1.) 11, 7. TOUT oLv iyvooKdres ^(Tau, they would f^uxve been convinced of these \nthings. \n\nRem. 6. The copula el vat is sometimes omitted, though commonly only in \nthe Ind. Pres. ; eluai is sometimes omitted, even when it is not a copula, but \nproperly a verb. This ellipsis is most frequent in the following cases : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) In general propositions, obsen^ations, and proverbs. Eur. 0. 330. 6 fieyas \n()\\lios ov [xiuijxos eV fiporois. X. Cy. 2. 4, 27. CTpaTLo. yap r) p:^(TTri (o5os) \nraxj\'O\'T\'n ; \n\n(b) Very often with verbal adjectives in \xe2\x80\xa2t4os, as also with other expres- \nsions denoting ??ecess\xc2\xabVy and r/^f?/, c. g. dvci 7 kt;, xP^^^i ^efiis, \xe2\x82\xacIk6s, \nalso with Kaipos, u>pa and the like. Dem. Ph. 3, 129, 70. rjfjLii/ y xmep Tfjy \niAev^epias ay wv icrr iov. Id. Cor. 296, 205. arifxias \xe2\x80\x94 iv dovXevovfrri rp \nTr6\\ei (pepeiv dvdyKT)\\ \n\n(c) Often with certain adjectives, e. g. %Toifios, irpS^vfios, oT6st\xe2\x82\xac, Svva- \nt6s, paSiou, xaAeTTOj/, STjXov, &^iov, etc. PI. Phaedr. 252, a. (tj \n\\pvxh) SouAeueij/ eroifxT). Dem. Ph. 1. 48, 29. iyu ird<TX\'^i-v briovv eroi\' \nfios. X. C. 1, 1, 5. StjAov odu, \'OTi ovK &\xc2\xbb\' {2a>\xc2\xab-/>aTrjs) irpoeKeyfy, ei fjirj \niiriarevev dATj^eucrcii/. Comp. ib- 2, 34. Here belong also the expressions \n^avfj-aarhv oaou, it is very iconderful {= mirum quantum)^ afii\\xavov o<tov, it \nis quite impossible^ inconceivable (= iinmane quantum), see ^ 332, Rem. 10. \nOn ovh(:\\s osris ov (== nemo non), see \xc2\xa7 332, Rem. 12. \n\nRem. 7. The Ind. Impf. is but seldom omitted, e. g. Aeschin. Ctes. \xc2\xa7 71, \xc2\xbb^f \niu ix4(Ta) (sc. ?iv) Koi irapriiJ.eu rfj ixTTepaia els r^v 4Kk\\r)(riav] the Ind. Prcs. also is \nnot very often omitted after conjunctions, e. g. oTrSre. iirei (comp. X. C. 1, 46) ; \non the contrary, very frequently after ori and us (that), e. g. X. C. 1. 2. 52. \nx4yo3v, COS ovZeu o<peXos. The subjunctive is but seldom omitted after the rela- \ntive hs &u, and especially after conjunctions, e. g. PI. Rp. 370, e. wy tiv airrols \nXp^ia (sc. 77). The ellipsis of the Opt. when &u belongs to it is more frequent, \ne. g. X. Cy. 1. 4, 12. rls yap 6.y, ecpaaav, cod ye iKovuTepos ireTaai (sc. erij) ; Ib. 2. \n3, 2. ^v fjLev TjixeTs uiKcofiey, d?j\\ou, on o\'l re TroXefxioi av Tjixerepoi (sc. eXrftTav). The \nellipsis of the Imp. is very rare, e. g. S. O. C. 1480. "Kaos, S> SaliuLwv. X. An. 3. \n3, 14. rdis odt/ ^eo7s X"/"^ (^C eVrw), on ov trhv ttoAAj? p<^H-V^ cL\\Ad <tw oKiyois \n^A/9-oj/. The participle is very often omitted, especially after verba intelligendi \nand declarandi, e. g. X. S. 3, 7. 5rj\\6y ye, on (pav\\os (sc. Hv) (pavod/Mu, but else- \nwhere also, e. g. X. C 2. 3, 15. dro-rra \\eyeis Kal ovda/xuis -rrphs aov (sc. 6vTa). et \nmdlo modo tibi conrenientia ; even in such cases as Th. 4. 135. x^^f^^^os reXemiav- \nros Kal irphs cap ijSri (sc. 6i/tos). The Inf. is often omitted after SoKely^ rjyeia-- \n3^at, vofii(eiv and the like, e. g. Th. 7, 60. $ov\\evTea eS6Kei. X. Cy. 1. 6, 14. \nainSj/Ta fie iKe\\ev<ras ro7s ffTpariiyiKo\'is (sc. eivai) vofju^ojxeyois avSpdcri diaXeyear- \n\n^239. Comparison. \xe2\x80\x94 Attribute and Object. \n\n1. ^Iien the predicate belongs to the subject in a liigher or \nlower degree than to another object, this relation is denoted by \nihe Comparative, e. g. *0 ira-nip jxeCluiv ia-riv, -^ 6 vlos. \xe2\x80\x94 *0 \n\n\n\n$239.] COMPARISON. ATTRIBUTE AI^D OBJECT. 301 \n\naofftos fiaWov \\aLp\xe2\x82\xacL rrj ap^Trj, \xe2\x80\xa2^ rots ;j(/07;/xacrtv. And when the \npredicate belongs to the subject in the liighest or lowest \ndegree, as respects all other objects compared, the Superlative \nis used, and commonly takes mth it a partitive Genitive, e. g. \n^cj/cpa-n;? Trarrwv \'EAA-^vojv cro^wraTOS ^v. \xe2\x80\x94 O o"o<j!>os Travrwv \n\nEemark 1. The Comparative is strengthened or more definitely stated in \nthe following ways ; (3,) by erz, still, even, etiam, e. g. fiei^wu en, still greater ; \n(b) by jxaKp^, 0X1761?, iroXA^, erf iroAA&j, otro), tocouto); ixeya, \noKlyov, iroKv, oaov, t (ro C t 0, which show ho^y inuch more or less of the\' \nquality expressed by the adjective is intended, e. g. iroWc^ f^^\'^C^^, multo major,t \nfar greater, IT \\\\ (p en ixei^oves, multo majores etiam ; (c) sometimes by^aA- \nKov. Her. 1, 32. fxaWov oA^iwrepos iari {far). \n\nRem. 2. The Superlative is strengthened or more definitely stated in the \nfollowing ways : (a) hy Kal, vel, even, e. g. \xc2\xabat fxAxicrra^ vel maxime, very greatly \nindeed; (b) by words denoting measure or the degree of difference, viz. iroWcp, \nfxaKptfy iroKv, tt a p a iroXv, oaw, r ocr ovt oj, e. g, ttoW^ &pi(XT0S, multo \nmaestatttissimus, tJie best by far ; fiaKp^ &pL<rros, huge praestantissimus ; (c) even \nby the Superlative: fidxiarra {ir\\e7(TTov and fiay larov j oet.), e. g. S. \nO. C. 743. irKflffToy av^pcitTruv KOLKiaros. Th, 7, 42. iid\\i<r "a tuvoTaros\'., \n(d) by the relative: a>s\' [oirus). oti and ^, olos (\xc2\xa7 343, Rem. 2), e. g. ws I \nTax\'^To, quam celerrime^ on fxdKiaray p dpiarov, e. g. JPl. Apol. 23, a. iroWal \nfiev ctTrc\'x\'S^e\'ai /xoi yeySuouri Kal olai xoAeTrwroTow KoX fiapvTarai. X. An. 4. 8, \n2. x^^P^oj/ oJov x\'^^^^\'^TOToi\' ; (e) by els, unus, e. g. Her. 6, 127. \xe2\x96\xa0^A.d^e 2/lhi/- \' \nSvpiSris \'2,vfiapiTi]i, ts irrl TrXelar oy 5^ xXi^iis els av^ip a-rrlKeTo, X. An. 1. \n9, 22. Sujpa trXelara cfs 76 dv^p Siv ixdfifiavf, he received the inost gifts, at least \nconsidering the fact that he uxis but a single individual (C. Tusc. 2. 26, 64. amplitu- \ndinem animi unam esse omnium rem pulcherrimam) ; (f ) a peculiar mode of\' \nstrengthening the Superlative, is by joining iu to Is with it, in which case the \nSuperlative must be repeated, e. g. \'O "Epcas iv rols trpe<r ^vraT6s ian \n(i. e. iv To7s irpeff^xnaTois olffi). the oldest among those iclio are very old. Her. 7, \n137. Toimi fxoi iv rolai ^ e i6t ar ov (paiferou yevfabai. PI. Svmp. 173, b. \n"XuiKpaTovs epaar^s 2)u iy rols fidKiara rwv t6t\xe2\x82\xac. The construction with the \nFern, is found only in Thuc, e. g. 3. 81. {(rTdais) iu to7s TrpwTTj iyfuero. lb. \n17. iu To7s 7r\\e7aTai vrjes. In such instances, to7s must be considered \nas Neut. In like manner, the expression o/j-oLa (oyuoTa Ion.) to7s Avas used \nwith the Superlative. Her. 3, 8. ae^ovrai Se \'kpd^ioi iriaTis dvbpwiroiu dfio7a \nT o7(T I /xd \\ I (TT a (sc. cffiofjLevois), like those tvho respect very inuch, lit qui maxime. \nTh. 1, 25. xP^JAto\'\'\'\'""\' Su^\'a^fi otnes kot iK^ivov rhv \xe2\x96\xa0)(^p6vov OfMOia r o7s \'EWrjvwv \nirKovfT lurdrois. The Superlative is also intensified by joining a positive \nwith, it, e. g. \'Aya^wv linrfwy KpdrKrros, the best among the good horsemen = the \nvery best. \n\nRem. 3. The Superlative relation is often expressed more emphatically by \nnegative adjectives or adverbs in the Superlative, preceded by ov {Litdtes)^ \ninstead of positive adjectives or adverbs in the Superlative, e. g. ovx riKiara, \nnot the kast^ especially, ov ndKitrros, ovk ixdx\'^f^\'^os, stronger than fxd- \nXiara, ^(Ktkttos, jxiyicTTos. Sometimes, also, it is expressed antithetically, e. g. \noiix ^\'cio\'Ta, dWa /xaAtCTa. \n\n\' \'Cis, Zti are not in themselves intensive particles, but merely connect some \npart of SuvaiJ.ai understood, and in that way may be said to give intensity to \nthe Superlative. Sometimes Svyafj.ai is expressed, e. g. e,eyo(pa>v dviaraTM. \niaToAfjieyos itrl -rrSXefiOv us iSvyaro KahXio\'ra. \n\n26 \n\n\n\n302 6YNTAX. \'^ 240 \n\n2, A sentence consisting of a subject and pieoicate may be \n\nextended by defining the subject and predicate more exactly. \n\n/ The word or words which define the subject more fuilyj is \n\n^ called an attribitte, or attributive. The subject is more exactly \n\n/described, therefore, (a) by the addition of an adjective (attrib- \n\ni4itivei adjective), e. g. ro KaXov poSov, (b) by the Gen. of a \n\nsubstantive (attributive Gen.), e. g. o tov ySao-tXcws lajTros, \n\n^ regis hortus (=regius hortus) ; (c) by a substantive in the same \n\nCase as the word which is more definitely described, e. g. \n\nKvpo?, 6 ^ao-tXcus. The explanatory word is here said to be in \n\napposition with the word explained, and may be called an \n\nappositive of that word. The predicate (wliich is termed the \n\n/ object), is more exactly described, (a) by a Case of a substan- \n\n"l- tive; (b) by a preposition with a substantive; (c) \'ry the Inf., \n\n*^(d) by an adverb, e. g. \'O o-o^os T-qv aperrjv do-Kci. IlepI t^s \n\nTrarpCSo\'; //.a^^o/AcJa. \'A7rt\xe2\x82\xacvat cTrt^v/xai. KaXu>$ ypacjiwi, \n\n^ 240. Agreement. \n\xe2\x80\xa2 \n1. The finite verb agrees with the subject in Person and \n\nNumber; the adjective, participle, pronoun, and numeral, in \n\nGender, Number, and Case. The substantive, as a predicate, \n\nagrees with the subject only in Case ; in Gender, Number, and \n\nCase, only when it denotes a person, and hence either has a \n\nparticular form for the Masc. and Fern., or is of common gender. \n\nThe same principle applies to substantives in apposition {k 266, \n\n1). But when the substantive denotes a thing, it agrees with \n\nthe subject only in Case, e. g. \n\n\'E-yw ypd<f>(\xc2\xbby <rv ypdpeis, ovros ypdtpei. \xe2\x80\x94 \'O Hv^ponros d^yrfros i<my. \xe2\x80\x94 \'H aperii \nKoX\'^ i<niv. \xe2\x80\x94 T^ irpayfjLa aX<r^6v icrriv. \xe2\x80\x94 Ot "EAATjvey iroXfp.iKunaToi ^ffay. \xe2\x80\x94 \n*0 KoXhs irats, tj (ro(p)) ywi]y rh fiiKphv t4kvov. \xe2\x80\x94 \'E7\xe2\x82\xacveVi^\xc2\xbb\' rw &vSp\xe2\x82\xac tovtco \n{Kpnias KoL \'AXKifiiddTjs) <pv<rei <piXoTi]xoTa.TU) Trdirruv ^ A^yaluv, X. C. 1. 2, 14. \n\xe2\x96\xa0 \xe2\x80\x94 Kvpos \xe2\x96\xa0^y fiafft\\cvs. \xe2\x80\x94 To/j-vpts ^y fia(rl\\fia. \xe2\x80\x94 Kvpos, 6 /ScwiXeuy, \'r6fxvpis, i] fiaal \nKeia. On the contrary, Ti}v dvyaT4pa, Sfiv6y ri KdWos koI /acye- \n^os, i^dyay wSe elvey {his daughter a vxmder in beauty and size), X. Cy. 5. 2, 7. \n\n* When the adjective merely ascribes some quality to the substantive with \nwhich it agrees, it is called an attributive adjective, but when it belongs to the \npredicate and is used in describing what is said of the subject, it is called a \npredicative adjective, e. g. in the expi-ession 6 aya^hs av7)p {the good man), aycf \n^6s is attributive, but in 6 ay^p iam aya^6s (the man is good), it is predicative. \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 240.] AGREEMENT. 303 \n\n2. The predicative adjective or substantive agrees with the \nsubject as above stated, when the following and other similar \nverbs, which do not of themselves express a complete predicate \nsense, have chiefly the force of the copula : ^ \n\n(a) The verb \xe2\x80\xa2v-rrdpx^Lv, to be the cause of, to he, to exist ; \n\n(b) Verbs signifying to become, to increase, to groiv, e. g. yiyvo- \nfxat, e(f)w, av$dvofJiai ; \n\n(c) The verbs /xcVw, to remain, and Karctmyv, to be established, \nappointed, to stand; \n\n(d) Verbs signifying to seem, appea^ shoiv one^s self, e. g. \neoLKa, <^aiVo/u.at, BrjXovfjiat ] \n\n(e) Verbs signifying to be named, e. g. KoAoO/xat, ovo/xa^o/w-ai, \nXeyofjLaLf d/<ovu), to be called (like audire) ; \n\n(f) Verbs signifying to be appointed to something, to be chosen^ \nto be named, e. g. alpovfxaL, dTroSiLKvufiat ; \n\n(g) Verbs signif}ang to be regarded as something, to be recog- \nnized as so77iething, to be sujyposed, e. g. vo/nt^o/xat, Kplvo- \nfxai, vTroXafjL/SdvofxaL ; \n\n(h) Verbs signifying to be given as somethi?ig, to be received as \nsomething, to be abandoned, cast off, and the like, e. g. \n\nKvpo; ^yivfTo $a(Ti\\fVs ruu Tlfpcrwv. \xe2\x80\x94 Toinois 6 ^i\\i-mros fiiyas rjv^-fj^rj \n(Dcm.). \xe2\x80\x94 \'AXKt^idbrfi TJpt^T] (TJpaTrjyos. \xe2\x80\x94 *AktI <pi\\uy koI ^evuv vvv kSAok^s \nKai ^(o7s ix^P^^ aKovov<r ly {audiunt), they hear themselves called Jiatterers, etc. ^ \nDem. Cor. 241. \n\nEemark 1. When the verbs mentioned under (e), (f ), (g), (h), have the \nactive form, they take two accusatives (^ 280, 4). \n\nRem. 2. Several of the verbs above named, are also joined with adverbs, \nbut they then express a complete predicate sense ; e.g. "Xwk partes -^v {lived) del \n<rbv Tois yfots. KaKus, kukus iffriy (it is well, etc.). Advus fcray iv \n<pv\\aKfj<n oi BafivKcavioi (diligenter versabantur in custodia)^ Her. 3, 152. \nMdrrji/ uuai, to be in vain. Elvai, as well as the verbs yiy ye ar^ai and irfcpv \nKfyai, is very often connected with adverbs of place and degree, of which \nthe corresponding adjective-forms are not in use, as 5/x\xc2\xab> X^P^^t eKds, fiuK- \npdy, \'rr6^p<i>y 4yy{>s, ir\\7jo"(ov, ifiov, a\\is, /xaWoy, fidXiara, e g. \nlolat^Pi^vaiuv (rrpaTrjyo7ai iylyoyro Si\'^a al yycofxai (sententiae iw rftVersaa \npaHes discedebant), Her. 6, 109. \n\n3. Wlien a Demonstrative, Relative, or Interrogative pronoun, \neither as a subject or predicate, is connected with a substantive \nby the copula cTvat, or one of the verbs mentioned in No. 2, \nthe Greek commonly, as the Latin regularly, put the pronoun \nby means of attraction, in the same gender and number with \n\n\n\n\n\n\n304 SYNTAX. [^ 241 \n\nthe substantive to which it belongs. So too, when the pronoun \nis in the Ace. and depends on a verb of naming, e. g. \n\nOvt65 iarriv 6 ayfjp. \xe2\x80\x94 ASttj iarl iri]\'/)] koX apx^ vdurwv rwv Koucuy. \xe2\x80\x94 \nOijToi Si] ^A^7]vaiol ye SiK7]y avr^v KaXovcriv, aWa ypa<piiv, PL Eutjrphr. \nprinc. \xe2\x80\x94 Hapa rwv trpoyeyevrifiivwv uav^ducTe \xe2\x80\xa2 avrr] yap apiffTt] SiSacKa- \nA. I a, X. Cy. 8. 7, 24. \xe2\x80\x94 T t s eVrt ir 77 7 ^ ttjs apexes ; \xe2\x80\x94 Tldvr es ovroi v6fioi \nflcriu, ovs rh ttAtjS\'OS <rvi/e?iL^hy Koi SoKifidcrav ^ypaipe, X. C. 1. 2, 42. \xe2\x80\x94 \'Eciy m \n(pi\\os fioi yeuS/xeuos eS Trotetj\' i^iK\'p, ovtos /xoi filos icrl (this is my means of \nlife, hie mihi est victus) 3. 11, 4. \n\nRem. 3. Yet the Greeks not unfrequcntly put *he pronoun in the Neut. \nSing., e. g. "Eari de rovro Tvpapvis, F\\. Kp. 344, a, where in Lat. it -would \nbe. Est autem /lacc tyrannis. Tovr6 ianv t] 5 txai o(ruv 77, ib. 432, b. Tovto \nTTTjyi] Kal apxv Kiv-fja-eus, Phacdr. 245, c. The Neut. PI. is sometimes used \ninstead of the Neut. Sing. "Eyiuye (p7)ij.l ravra juev <p\\vapia5 eluai, X. An. \n1. 3, 18. See \xc2\xa7 241, Rem. 3. The neuter pronoun denotes the nature of an o!\xc2\xbbject ; \non the contrary, the pronoun that agiees with a noun, denotes the quality of the \nobject. Hence there are cases where the two forms of expression cannot be \ninterchanged, e. g. Ti eVrt <pb6vos: quid est invidia? {what is its nature f) \nand T t s ia-Ti (p^Suos ,- quae est invidia ? {what is envy ?) The neuter demon- \nstrative is also always used, when it is more fully explained by a word in appo- \nsition, e.g. Oil rovT Tjv evSaifwyia, ws toiK^, kukov airaWayi}, PI. Gorg. 47b, C \n\n^241. Exceptions to the general rules oj Agreement. \n\n1. The form of the predicate in many cases does not agree \nwith the subject grammatically, but in sense only (Coustnictio \nKara <jvv\xe2\x82\xac(tlv). Hence, after a collective noun in the Singular, \nwhen it is used of persons, as well as after the names of cities \nand countries, used for the itiJiabitants, and also with abstracts \nwhich stand for concretes, the Plural is used, and such a gender \nas belongs to the persons denoted by these words. \n\nHer. 9, 23. rb irXri^os iirefioribriarav. Th. 4, 32. 6 &Wos trrparhs \nair 4 fiaivov. 5, 60. rh &t p ar 6ire5ov h.viX^P\xc2\xb0^^\' 2, 21. vayrl rp6ret \naurfpe^KTTO 7] Tr6\\is kcu rbf TlepiKXea ev opyfi flxor. With attributive adjec- \ntives, this constniction is rare and only poetic, e. g. H. x> ^\xe2\x96\xa0^- </>^^\xc2\xab rtKvov (Hec- \ntor) ; but it is very common in prose with a Part, which stands in a remoter \nattributive relation, e. g. Th. 3, 79. hr\\ r)]v \xe2\x80\xa2ir6Kiv iir4ir\\eoy iv xoAAi? rapaxV \nKal (l)6fi(f) 6 yras. X. Cy. 7. 3, 8. S> aya^] Kcd ttio-ttJ ypvx\'hi oXxV ^^ o x o A t - \n\xe2\x80\xa2K(t3V n]fias. X. H. 1. 4, 13. 6 iK rov dareos ox^os i]bpolabr) irphs ras vavSy \n^avfid^ovTes Kal I5e7y fiov\\6 fiivoi rhv \'AXKi^idSriv. It is very frequent \nwith the pronouns, Th. 1, 136. <pevyei is KepKvpav ws avruv (sc. KepKvpcJ, \nuv) \xe2\x82\xacvepycTT}s. 4, 15. es r^v ^irdpr-nv us riyyfX^ to yry(yrifi4ya xepl IlvAoy, \n(So^ey avTo7s (sc. to7s ^TrapridTais). X. Cy. 3. 3, 14. cvyKoXicas ttov rh trrpa- \nri(i>T iKhy \xe2\x82\xac\\e|e irphs avrovs roidSe. Also with the relative pronoun ,\xe2\x80\xa2 see on \nadjective-sentences, \xc2\xa7 332, 5. \n\n\n\n$241.] EXCEPTIONS TO THE RULES OF AGREEMENT. 305 \n\nRemakk 1. When the subject is expressed by the Neut. article t6 or t j{ in \' \nconnection with a substantive in the Gen. PI., the predicate is commonly in the \nPL, being conformed to the attributive genitive ; the predicative adjective or par- \nticiple takes the gender of the attributive genitive. S. Ph. 497. to t&u SiukS- \nvoav rhu o\'^kuS\' ^irciyov arSXoy {iJTreiyoi/ ^yhich. has the Neut. PI. rd for its \nsubject would regularly have been in the Sing, according to No. 4, but is con- \nformed to the plurality in SiaKSuwv). PI. Rp. 8. 563, c. rh tuu ^-npiwp \niKiv^epdrepd iarw (the Sing, eo-rfj/ is used on account of the Neut. PI. \ni\\\xe2\x82\xacv^\xe2\x82\xacpwT\xe2\x82\xacpa, according to No. 4, while iKev^epuyrepa is conformed to the idea \nof ^pia contained in ^piwu). \n\nRem. 2. Closely related to the construction just stated, is the following : \nWhen a substantive subject with an attributive substantive in the Gen. PI. \nexpresses periplirastically a substantive idea, as \\f/vx^ Tetpeo-mo, the Participle \nwhich stands in a remoter attributive relation to the subject, agrees in Case \nwith the subject, but in Gender and Number with the substantive in the Gen., \nwhich expresses the principal idea of the periphrasis. Od. \\, 90. ^?^e S\' cttI \n1^/vx.V \xc2\xa9TjiSoiou T (ipeaiao XP^\'^^^^ aKrimpov ex^wj/, the shade of the Tlieban \nTeiresias came, havirifj a golden sceptre (here Ixw agrees in number with ^vxh^ \nbut in gender witli Tfipfo-iao). 11. /8, 459, opvi^wv \xe2\x80\xa2mm^vSiv \xe2\x82\xac^vea ttoA-Ao, \ntv^a. KoL fy^a iroTuyrai ayaWd/xeuai irTepvyioraiv. \n\n2. "Wlien the subject is expressed, not as a special and defi- \nnite object, but as a general idea, the predicative adjective is \nput in the Neut. Sing. A\\athout reference to the gender and \nnumber of the subject. \n\n(The English sometimes uses the words thing, or something. Sometimes the \npronoun t1, or the substantives xp^M<^> irpoTAtOj are connected with the \nadjective. When the adjective is in the Superlative, the English uses the \narticle tJie). \n\n11.^, 204. oifK ayabhy ToKvKoipavif} (a multiplicity of rulers is not a gooa \nthing): fts Koipavos taroj. Eur. 0.760. hnvhv oi iroWoi., KUKOvpyovs orav \n^X*\'0\'t irpoffTOLTas. Id. M. 329. vK^v yhp reKvcov (pLOiye (plKrarov irt^Ais. Id. H. \nF. 1295. Oi /ii6To^oXal Kvir-rip6v. Her. 3, 82. ^ fMOvvapxiv KpariCTov [a \nmonarchy is the best thing, or viost desirable). PI. Rp. 2. 364, a. Ka\\hv uhu t] \n<r (D <f> p a vv If re koX S iKaioffivrjy xaA.ex^i/ fiivroi koI inliroyov. Also \nin abbreviated adjective sentences, e. g. Her. 3, 108. -f] \\4aiva, ihv lax^p<^ \nrarov kolL ^paavraroVf 07ra| fV tQ filco Tlicrei eV. PI. Rp. 4, 420, c. oi \n6<p^a\\fi.oif KdWio-T ov 6v, ovk oarpdo) ivcxX-nXifififvoi elaiv. Her. 3, 53. \nrvpayvls XP^t*-^ c^aXip6v. PI. Th. 122, b. avfj.fiov\\T} iephv XP^^"\' D^m. \n01. 1. 21, 12. iiras nfv \\iyos, &*/ avf to irpdyfjLaTa, fidraiSy ri (paiyerai koI \nK ty6y. \n\n3. When the subject is an Inf. or an entire sentence, the \xe2\x96\xa0 \nGreeks usually put the predicative adjective in the Neut. PL \ninstead of the Sing., where the EngHsh uses the pronoun it, \ne. g. it is pleasant to see the sun. Tliis occurs most frequently \nwith verbal adjectives in -t6^ and -tc\'o?; with those in reos \nand many in -tos, the Inf. is implied in the word itself, e- g. \n\n26* \n\n\n\nv^ \n\n\n\n306 SYNTAX, [\xc2\xa7 241 \n\nd/xwTca icTTL TLviy some one is to be helped; irixna. cart rots <f>LXx>is, \nfriends are to be trusted. \n\nHer. 1, 91. t))v Tmrpufiiw^v noipav aSvvard icrri [it is impossible) airo<pvy4\xe2\x82\xaciy \nKoL ^e^. 3, 83. 5^A.o, \'6ti Set \xe2\x82\xacva ye riua rj/xeav ficuriAea yevecr^ai. Th. 1, 86. \notis oil trapaSoT e a rots \'A^valois iarlv, ovSh koH Xoyois SiaKptrea, aAAa \nT iiiwprJT ea iv rdxei. 4, 1. a86vara ^y iv r(p irapovri. rohs AoKpovs a/xih- \n\nRem. 3. In like manner, the Greek very often uses the PL ravra, rtfSe \n(sometimes also e/c6?^o), to express an idea in its whole extent or in the most \ngeneral manner, the plural bringing before the mind all the particulars involved \nin the idea. Th. 6, 77. ovk "laves rdde elaiv, ou5\' \'EWris-n-SyTioi, oAAo AwpiTJSf \nit (this) is not lonians, etc. Aeschin. Ctes. p. 55. ovk ecm r avra apx\'f) {this is \nnot an office). Id. Leg, p. 50. toCt\' co-tij/ d irpoSoTTjs, this is the traitor. PI. \nPhaedon. 62, d. 6 avSriros &y^pay7ros tcCx\' "hy olrj^eirj t avra, (pevKTeoy eJyou avh \nTov S\xe2\x82\xac<nr6rov. In the English these plurals are generally translated by the \nsingular, as this, that ,^ , , \n\n4. The subject in the Neut. PL is connected with a verb in \nthe Sing., inasmuch as a plurality of objects in the neuter, was \nregarded by the Greeks as one connected whole, the individual- \nity being lost sight of. \n\nTot ^wa Tpix^*-\' \xe2\x80\x94 \'^\xc2\xb0- \'"\'pdyfiard iari KoXd. X. Ven. 12, 11 a-vy r^ \nirJ\\\xe2\x82\xaci (rJJ^eToi koI awSxXvTai ra oiK\xe2\x82\xacta kKaxrrov. Eur. M. 618. icaicou 70^ \nf.r\'ayZphs Sup\' oyrioriy ovk exe*. \n\nRem. 4. Also in adverbial participial phrases, a neuter plural is joined with \na participle in the singular, e. g.Z6^av ravra, quum haec visa, decreta essent. \nX. An. 4. 1, 13. S6^ay Se toGto, iK\'f}pv^ay ovtco iroieiy, when these things had \nbeen agreed upon, orders were given, etc. Yet, X. H. 3. 2, 19. So^ayra 5e rav- \nT a Kot irepay^eyra, ra jxey aTpaTevjxara airTJK^ey. \n\nRem. 5. There are some exceptions, however, to the rule just stated ; most \nof them may be referred to the following cases : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) When the subject in the Neut. PI. denotes persons or living creatures, \nthe verb is very often put in the PI. in accordance with the Constnictio \nKara ffvyeffiy. Th. 4, 88. to re A. 77 {the magistrates) rS>v AoKeStfioylwy \nofj,6<r ayr a BpaaiSay i^eTre fj.\\pay. 7, 57. roadSe fierk \'Adriyalay \ne^y-q iffrpdrevoy. PLIjSLch.. 180, e. ra fjieipdKia Sia\\\xe2\x82\xacy6fi\xe2\x82\xacy 01 \n\n^^,. , \'-iirifiefiyr] yr ai 2w/fpoTous Kol a<p6Spa iiraiyovciy. \n\n(b) When the objects contained in the plural are to be represented individih \nally rather than collectively, or when the idea of plurality composed of \nseveral parts (which may also have relation to diiferent times and places) \nis to be made prominent,\' e. g. X. An. 1. 7, 17. ravrri rfj rip-epa ovk inax^- \nffaro Pa<Ti\\\xe2\x82\xacvs, aAA\' inroxci\'povvTcav (payepa "ficray /col Xinrav koX ay^pcitnu\'v \niX^V "ToWd {many tracks here and there). Cy. 5. 1, 14. to fi.ox^vpii \nay^pd>Tria iraxruv, oTfiai, rwy iiri^fnuv oKpaTrj e<rri, K&Treira epwra o t t \xc2\xab - \n\n* It will often, therefore, depend upon the view in the speaker\'s mind, whether \nthe Sing, or PL is to be used- \n\n\n\n\n\n\nf241.] EXCEPTIONS TO THE RULES OF AGREEMENT. 307 \n\n& VI a I, the singvlar ia-ri is used here because mankind is referred to as a \nclass, but the plural cuViaJin-at, to denote tliat each individual blames love, the \ncharge being made too, in a different manner and at different times. Th. 5, \n26. e|w (praeter) roxnuv irphs rhv MavriviKhv Koi \'ETridavpiou ttoAc/jlov koI 4s \n&Wa afKpoTepois afiapTT] fiar a iyeyoyro, mistakes of each of the two, at \nvarious points and times. X. An. 1. 4, 4. ^ffav 5e ravra 5vo Tcixv- \n\n^c) The non-Attic poets from Homer down, very often use the PI. simply on \naccount of the metre. \n\nRem. 6. The plural subject, masculine or feminine, is connected in the poets, \nthough rarely, jvith a verb in the Sing. Find. 01. 11. (10.) princ. /xeKi\'ya.pv^s \nvfjLvo. wrrepwy apxau \\6yuv t4\\\\\xe2\x82\xact ai. This construction is very limited in \nprose-writers ; it occurs with eerr j and ^v, but only at the beginning of a sen- \ntence (comp. il est cent usages), which then assume the character of impersonal \nexpressions. Her. 1, 26. ean koI fieTo^v ttjs re TroAotTjs \'jr6\\ios Kol tov vtjou eirrh \nj\'ToiSioi. PI. Rp. 5, 462, e. eari koI iv reus 6XKais \xe2\x96\xa0noX^aiu 6.pxovT4s re koX Srifxas. \nIn like manner the Greeks regularly say eo-rtj/, o\'l, sunt, qui. See \xc2\xa7 331, Rem. \n4. The construction mentioned \xc2\xa7 242, Rem. 2, is very dilFerent from this. \n\n5. A subject in the Dual, as well as two subjects in the Sin- \ngular, very often have a predicate in the PL, e. g. Avw arparu. \nav \xe2\x82\xac)(<!) pr](Tav. Tiov avTOJV Scovrat kol rj yvvrj kol 6 avrjp. The \nrule seems to be, that when the affirmation is made of each of \nthe two separately, the Dual is used, but when of both together, \nthe Plural, e. g. Mtvws kuI AvKovpyo\'; vd/x,ovs t^^r-qv {each \ngave laws) ; rihovq o-ol koI kvirr} iv rg ttoAci ^acriX^vcr^TOV. \n\nRem. 7. The Dual is not used in all cases where two objects are spoken of, \nbut only where two similar objects are mentioned, either naturally connected, \ne. g. tt6Z(, x^^P^y ^^> o^ ^"^\'^ ^\'^ ^^\'^ conceive to stand in a close and reciprocal \nrelation, e. g. two combatants, two friends, etc. \n\nRem. 8. The Dual very often interchanges with the PI., especially in par- \nticiples, e.g. II. A., 621. toI S\' ISpu a TT e \\|/ u X \xc2\xbb\' T o x\'Ttii\'wv ardyr \xe2\x82\xac Trorliryoiriv. \nPI. Euthyd. 273, d. ^YcAa (TOT 7j J/ 6,fji<f>u> fi\\4\\\\/avr es els aWiiXco. \n\nRem. 9. A subject in the PI. sometimes has a verb in the Dual, when two \nobjects mutually connected, or two pairs, are spoken of, e. g. II. 5, 432, sqq. ws \n6\' \'6t\xe2\x82\xac x.f\'M*^^\'" TTOTa/uoi, kot\' opf <T(pi p 4oyT \xe2\x82\xac s, is /xiayayKctay cvfifiaK- \n\\\xe2\x82\xacToy ofipifjioy vSup, . . &s ruy fi\\ffyofx4v(t>y ydyero\'iaxv ^e <p6^os re (two streams \nrunning on opposite sides are compared with two hostile parties). II. d, 185, \nsqq. "Edv^e re koI <rv n65apy\xe2\x82\xacy /col AI^wj/ Aa/xirc re S7e, yvy /jloi ri)y KO/xiS^y airo- \nriyeroy, \xe2\x80\x94 191. oAA\' 4<po ^lapr elr oy koX (TirevSeToy (two pairs). \n\nRem. 10. The following points also are to be noted in respect to the \nDual: \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) A substantive in the PI. is very often connected with the Duals Svca, \nSvo, but seldom with Svo7y. 11. e, 10. Svu vUes. II. i, 4. ^ye/xoi \nSvo. Aesch. Ag. 1395. 5vo7y olfiuyixaaiy. PI. Soph. 244, b. Trpos- \nXP<>>ti^voL hvo7y oySfiaa ly. PI. Rep. 614, c. Svo X\'^o\'/uaTO e\'xo/we- \nvu a\\\\rj\\ IV ] \n\n(b) The Duals rdi, roly, TdtiSe, ToTvSe, toi/tw, tovtolv, avTU, avToTv, &, oTv, in \nprose are used both as masculine and feminine (i. e. they are of common \ngender), e. g. &fi<pw tw TroAee \xe2\x80\x94 Tca yvvaiKc \xe2\x80\x94 6,ix<p(\xc2\xbb rovTW rib T]fi4pa \xe2\x80\x94 ro7p \nytvfaeoiv \xe2\x80\x94 tovtu rii} r^xva \xe2\x80\x94 tovtoiv ro7v kivi](x4oiv \xe2\x80\x94 to; 6hw. The Pem, \n\n\n\n^ \n\n\n\n308 SYNTAX. [\xc2\xa7241 \n\nform of the article t <\xc2\xa3, is extKemely rare, e. g. rit 8* odv KSpa^ S. Ant, \n769 ; oftener the form ralv, X. H. 6, 4. 17. PI. Tim. 79, d; so e/c Toij/Se \n5* ovffaiv TTap^ivoLv, S. O. C. 445, Tout a occurs Av. Pac. 847, but \nTavTaivis more frequent, Q.g.ravTaiv ix6vaiv, S. 0. C 859 ; e\'/c t a v - \nrat J/, 1149: rairaiv Se Tar^/ hia^i]Kaiv, Isae. 5, 15. Awto, S. Ant. \n570. Besides the pronouns mentioned, sometimes other attributives also \nin the Dual are used as of common gender ; the participle but seldom. \nPI. Phaedr. 237, d. r}fji.S}v iu e/cacrTO) Svo tiv4 itnov IS 4 a &pxovT\xe2\x82\xac /col \n, &youre, oTv kirofxe^a \xe2\x80\x94 \xe2\x80\xa2 rovrco 5e k. t. \\. \n\n4^ \n\n6. When the predicate is a substantive connected to the \nsubject by ctvat or any other verb having the character of a \ncopula (\xc2\xa7 240, 2), the verb often agrees by means of attraction, \nas commonly in Latin, with the nearest predicative substantive. \n\nHer. 3, 60. t^ firiKos rov opvyfiaros Ittto araZioi eicri. 2, 15. at &rjficu \nAXyvirr OS e/caAeero. Th. 3, 112. icrrhv Svco \\6<p(o if \'iSofi^irrj ur^Xd. \n4, 102. rh X\'^P\'-^^ rovTO, (iirep vpST^pou \'Evyea oSol iKaXovvTO. Isocr. \nPaneg. 51, h. iari apxtK^\'^To.ra ruu i^vuiy koI p.syio\'ras Swcurreias exovra \n:$,Kv^ai Kal QpaKes Koi Uepcrai. So also in the participial construction, e. g. Th. \n5,4. KaTaKaixfiavovcn Ka\\ fipiKiyuias, hv epvfia iv t^ Aeovrivr}. PI. L. 735, 6. \nTovs /M^yiffTa 4^r]ixapTt]K6Tas, auidrous 5e ovras, fxeylaTrjv Se ovtrav fi\\d0r}y \nirSXews, airaWoLTTeiv e^co^cu (instead of ovras). So also Her. 3, 108. 7] \\4aiva, \nihv Iffx^poTUTOu Kal ^pacTvrarov, aira^ iv t&3 )3tw tlktu eV, instead of \n4ov<Ta. Comp. No. 2. A similar attraction occurs sometimes in sentences \ndenoting comparison, e. g. tu>v koivwv ti &pa Sievoov/xTju, wv ovZ\\v cv fiS.Woy, 1j \nris &\\Aos ex^h ^^\' Theaet. 209. a. (exet here agreeing Avith tis instead of (tv). \nIn Latin this is much more frequent. \n\n7. A superlative connected with a partitive Gen. commonly \ntakes the gender of the subject, more rarely that of the partitive \nGen. \n\nII. <p, 253. {alcTov) \'6s^\' oifxa KapriarSs re /col ^kicttos TTerrqvuiv. x> \n139. KlpKOS, i\\a<pp6raros ireTer}ywy. Her. 4, 85. 6 IISvtos ireAayeW \nairdvTwv tt4(j)vk\xe2\x82\xac ^(avfiaffKoTaros. Menandr. p. 193. (Mein.) yocay x\xc2\xab^\xc2\xab" \nTTciraTOS (p^6yos. X. C. 4. 7, 7. 6 l^Kios rhy Tvdyra xp<^voy iravruy Xa^i.\'irp6\' \nraros tov SLafj.4y\xe2\x82\xaci. PI. Tim. 29, a. 6 KSafxos KaWiffTOS ray yeyoyorcoy, \nPlutarch. Consol. 102. c. rj Autttj x"^^\'\'\'"\'^\'\'\'"\'^\'? ira^wy. On the contrary, \nIsocr. ad Nicocl. extr. ffvfifiovXos aya^hs xP\'?<\'\'*/*\'^\'\'"aTo\xc2\xbb\' kolL rvpayyiK<i\' \nraroy airdyrwy Krr] /xdr wy ecrrl (the Superlative here taking the gender \nof the partitive Gen. Krrjfxdruy). \n\nRem. 11. When the idea of personality in general is to be expressed, the \nMas c. form may be used, referring to words denoting females; (in this and \nother similar irregularities, less regard is had to strict grammatical principles \nthan to the general idea to be expressed,) e. g. \'S,vveX7]\\v^a<TLy ws i/xe KaraXeXei/x- \nIJt,4yai a5e\\(pal re Kal dSeAc^tSot koX averpial roaavrai, wsr\' clyai 4v rp olKia reaaa\' \npesKaiSeKu r ovs 4\\ev^4povs {free 7ne7i), X. C. 2. 7, 2. \'H (rreipos ovaa fw(rx<*5 \nOVK aye^erai rlKr ovras &K\\ovSf ovk exovcr\' avri] r4Kya^ she cannot endure \n\n\n\n^ 242.] AGREEMENT WITH SEVERAL SUBJECTS. 309 \n\nthat other persons (Masc.) should bring forth young. Eur. Andr. 711. So also the \ntragic poets use the Masc, when a woman speaks of herself in the PL, e. g. \nS. El. 391 (Electra says of herself) rrea-ov/ie,^\', et xPVj trarpl rifitapovfievoi. \n\nRem. 12. Sometimes the first Pers. PL, or the Pers. pronoun first Pers. PI \nis used, for the sake of modesty, instead of the Sing., the speaker representing \nhis own views and actions as common to others. This usage, which is very \nfrequent in Latin, is rarely found among the Greeks in the Coramcfn language. \n*n \'AA.Ktj8ta5i7, Kol rjneTs T7]\\iKovroi ovt^s Zeivoi to roiaina ^/uev (I also ivas at \nthat age sharp in these matters). X. C. 1. 2, 46. "\'E.vvoia. tto^\' iiixlv iyeveTo {the \nthought once occurred to me), Cy. 1. 1, 1. Uepl fieu oZy ruv irpax^^vT<^v eV t^ \njrap6irn ravr\' efx"/***\' \xc2\xab"\xe2\x96\xa0\xc2\xab\xc2\xbb\'\xe2\x80\xa2 Among the poets, particularly the Tragedians, \nthis use of the PL is more frequent, and a transition from the Sing, to the PL \noften occurs, e. g. Eur. H. F. 858. "HKiov fiaprvpSfifo-^a Spwa\', t Spav ov \n/SovAo/xoi. Hipp. 244. alSov fjLc^a yap to \\f\\eyn4va fioi. \n\nRem. 13. In an address directed to several persons, the Greek kas several \npeculiar idioms : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) The Imp. Sing, ctire and some others, which denote an exhortation or \nanimating call, e. g. ^76, <p t\'pe, tSe, is frequently connected in the Attic \nwriters with a Voc. PL, or with several vocatives, e. g. PL Euthyd. 283, \nb. eiVe fioi, S) \'S.wKparis re KaX vfxiis ol SaAoj. Dem. Chers. 108, 74. ciVe \n\n(b) In an address directed to several persons, the predicate in the PL often \nrefers to a Voc. which denotes only one of the persons addressed; this is \ndone for the purpose of making the principal person prominent. Od. ^9, \n310. \'Ai/t(i/o\', oCttus tffTiv vTr(p<pid\\oi(Ti ^lf^\' vpilv haivvabai. jx, 82. vi\\a \nIbvvfTf, (paiSifi \'OSuffo-cO. X. II. 4. 1, 11. fr, \xe2\x82\xac<^tj, vfie7s, S \n\'H piirniia, Kod S iSda Kfre ainhy fiovK-q^yai airfp rjfjLfTs \' 01 piv 5^ avaa- \nrivres ihiZa/TKov. An interchange of the Sing, and PL often occurs \namong the Tragedians, when the chorus is either addressed by others, or \nspeaks of itself the poet having in mind, at one moment, the whole \nchorus, at anotlier their leader, e. g. S. O. C. 167. ^ilvoi, ftTj 5t)t\' aZiK-tt- \nbu) (TO I iriardaas. \n\n(c) The second Pers. Imp. instead of the third, is sometimes connected with \nthe indefinite pronoun tij or iras tis, or even with a substantive and \ntIs; this idiom, which is not common, occurs mostly in the Attic dia- \nlogue, e. g. Ar. Av. 1186. x^P^* (instead of x^^pf^TOj) hcvpo iras inrr^pe- \nrrjs {every servant come hither): T6^eve (instead of to^(v(T(d) iras ris \n{every one use his bow). Hence, also, the transition from the third Pers. to \nthe second, e. g. Eur. Bacch. 327. (34.5.) ffTdx^T co tis ws to-xos, f\\bwv \n$\xe2\x82\xac bdKOvs TOvsS\', Xv oluyooKOTTfT, pLOX^ols rpiaivov Kavdr pf<^ ov tixiraKiv, \nKol \xe2\x80\x94 nib \xe2\x82\xac s. Comp. Larger Grammar, \xc2\xa7 430, 2 (7). \n\n\n\n^242. Agreement when there are several subjects. \n\n1. Wlien there are two or more subjects connected together, \nthere is a double relation to be distinguished : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) The subjects are regarded as expressing multitude, and \nthe predicate is referred to all the subjects equally; then \nthe predicate is in the Plural, and when there are but two \nsubjects, in the Dual or even in the Plural (comp. ^241, \n\n\n\n310 SYNTAX. [\xc2\xa7 242 \n\n5) ; the gender of the predicative adjective is determined \naccording to the following rules : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) With words of hke gender denoting persons, the \nadjective has the same gender; with words of dif- \nferent gender denoting persons, the gender of the \nadjective is conformed to the mascuhne subject, \nrather than to the feminine or neuter, and to the \nfeminine rather than the neuter; in both cases the \nadjective and verb are plural. \n\n()8) With words of like gender denoting things, the \nadjective is either in the same gender and in the \nplural, or is in the neuter plural; with words of \ndifferent gender denoting things, the adjective is in \nthe neuter plural. \n\n(y) When words denoting persons and things stand in \nconnection, the adjective is plural and takes the \ngender of the words denoting persons, when the \npersons are to be considered as the more prominent \nidea, or the things are to be viewed personally ; but \nwhen both are to be viewed merely as things, the \nadjective is in the neuter plural. \n\nKal X^i^y] 5e Kal a^v {xia /cal ^vsKoXia KoiX fiavia itoXKolkis ttoXKoIs Zih \nri]V Tov crdixaros Kax^^^^o-v els r^v Zidvoiau i fjLiriirTov<rtVf X. C. 3. 12, 6. ^coKpd- \nT\xe2\x82\xact 6fxi\\r}Th yevofjLcva) Kpirlas re kcu \'AXKifiidStj s irXeTcna Kcuca t^v \n\xe2\x80\xa2!r6Xiv eirotT/trc^Tijj\', ib. 1. 2, 12. \'YipaKXr^s koL Qr^aevs fi6voi tuv irpoye- \nyevr}fievuv iiirhp rod filov tov tuv av^pdiiruv a^Xjjral Kar e(Tri](Tav, Isocr. \nPan. 212. Kal ri yvv)} /col 5 av^p aya^oi elaiVy PL Men. 73. Ai 54 irov \nrjfier epai r\' &Xo xo i Kal vfjiria rcKva etar ivl fieydpois ttot iS eyfjLevaif \nII. )8, 137. \'D.S \xe2\x82\xac?Se irarepa re koI fj.r]repa Koi aS eX<povs Kal tt]u eavTov \nyvvalKa otXM\'*^*^\'\'"*"\'^ yeyevi\\fievovs, iSdKpvcey, X. Cy. 3. 1, 7. \'H \nopy^ Ka\\ 7} acrvveffia el<rl KUKai. \xe2\x80\x94 SaS/ioros KdxXos Kol tax"^ SeiX^ koI \nKaK^ ^vpoiKovvr a ir peirovra <^af j/erot, PL Menex. 246, e. "Evyeveiai re \nKal Svvd/xe IS koI r i/xal SrjXd eariv ay aha otna, PL \'\'^H;\' t] ay op a Kal rh \nIT pvravfj\'iov Tlaplai Xihtii i) a kt] /xeva, Her. 3, 57. Alhot re Kal irXivhoi \nKol |vAa Kal Kepa/xos ardKrcos e pp ififieva ovSev xp\'h\'^^f\'-d iOTiv^ X. C. \n3. 1, 7. *H Ti5x\'? fo^ ^IXiw OS ?^crav rwv epyau Kvpioi, Aesch. \'H koA.- \nXiarr] -jroXirela re Koi 6 KdXXiffros ayi) p Xo nra hv Tffuv etr] SteA^erp, \nrvpavvis re Kal rvpavvos, PL Rp. 562, a. \n\n(b) Each subject is considered separately and by itself; then \nthe predicate is confined to one of the subjects and \n\n\n\n4 242.] AGREEMENT WITH SEVERAL SUBJECTS. 311 \n\nagrees with it. This construction is also used when one \nof the subjects is to be represented as more prominent \nthan the others. There are here three positions of the \npredicate: (a) before all the subjects; (b) after all the \nsubjects ; (c) after the first subject. \n\nPI. Lys. 207, d. <pi\\\xe2\x82\xac7 ae 6 irar^p koI rj fiiir-qp. Her. 5, 21. ctircro a<pi \nKoi ;t 1^ yii o T a Kol ^epdiToyres Kol t) vacra ttoKK)] irapcurKev^. X. R. Ath. 1 , 2. \n01 treuTiTes Kol 6 SijfjLOS irXiov exe*. PI- Symp. 109, C. at Tt/xol axnoiis /coi Ta \nie pa TO TTopa. tuv av^punruv T]<pavi^\xe2\x82\xacro. Th. 8, 63. ot iv ry MtA.^T6\xc2\xbb /col 6 \n\'AffTvoxos . . . 4^oip(rr]<r\xe2\x82\xac. Th. 3, 5. MeAeos^ AaKwy a<p iKVc7rtLi koI \n\'EpneiwvSas Qrjficuos. X. An. 2. 2, 1. \xe2\x99\xa6oA.Ti\'OS ^ x ^ \'\'" o \'^ <** Oi (ri/v ouT(p. \n\nRemark 1. Sometimes the verb, though it follows different subjects, agrees \nwith the first subject, the remaining subjects being then represented as subor- \ndinate, e. g. X. An. 1. 10, \\. fiaa- i\\\xe2\x82\xacv s Se /col oi avu avT(f S lu kuv elsTrlir- \nT6t. So also with the attributive adjective, e. g. X. An. 1. 5, 6. lirTo o/8o- \nXovs Kol T]iJ.io^6\\Lov \'Attikovs (the adjective here agreeing with 6fio\\ovs \nrather than T]iJiio$6\\iov). Th. 8, 63. \'AcTTyoxos iiri^fro rhv "^.t pofi^ixi^V \n\' Kal r as uav s air \xe2\x82\xac\\r}\\v^6r a. \n\nRem. 2. The verb sometimes stands in the Sing., if several nouns in the \nPI. denoting things precede, when it is intended to represent those nouns as \nmaking up one whole, as a condition, state, etc., e. g. PI. S. 188, b. koI iraxvai \nKttl x^^^\'Co\'\'^ f^^^ i pvtri fiai iK irXeoye^ias Kal OKoafxlas irepl ^AA7]A.a Twy roioi*- \nTcav ylyuerai ipwTiKuy. \n\nRem. 3. When the subjects are connected by ^ \xe2\x80\x94 ij, aut \xe2\x80\x94 atit,Kai \xe2\x80\x94 *co/, \net \xe2\x80\x94 et, oijTf \xe2\x80\x94 otfTf, ueque \xe2\x80\x94 ncqite, the predicate agrees with the subject \nstanding nearest to it, if each subject is to be regarded separately and by itself, \ne. g. ^ ovTos, f) ^Kfivos oAtj^t) \\ 4 y \xe2\x82\xac I, aut hie, aut ille vera dicit ; but when the \nsubjects arc not considered separately or as independent of each other, but as \nexpressing plurality, the predicate is in the PL, e.g. Dem. Aph. 817, 12. & \nArtfjuxpuy fi Q7]pnriri5T)S exo"""** \n\nRem. 4. The attributive adjective commonly agrees with the substantive \nnearest to it, e. g. \'A/xipoTepois oi avrol UpKoi koI ^v fxfjLaxia- KareVrTj, Th. \nBut wlicre perspicuity or emphasis requires it, the adjective is repeated with \neach substantive, e.g. irdyrcs ivSpes koI iraaai yvyalKcs; or the con- \nstructions stated under No. 1 are observed, e.g. \'H p a k A tj s koI Qrj<revs n6voi. \n\nrioT^p KoX /LlTJTTjp KoX a^i\\(po\\ Ol\'xMO^\'i\'TOt 7 \xe2\x82\xac 7 \xe2\x82\xac VTJ /i \xe2\x82\xac V \xc2\xbb, CtC. ScB \n\nexamples under No. 1. \n\n2. When several subjects of difierent persons have a com- \nmon predicate, the verb (which is commonly plural) is in the \nfirst person rather than the second or third, and in the second \nrather than the third. \n\n*E7cl> Ka\\ (TV ypdcpo/xeyy ego et tu scribhnus. \xe2\x80\x94 \'E7\xc2\xabi; koi iKe7yos ypd<pofj.\xe2\x82\xacy, ego et ille \nscribimus \xe2\x80\x94 \'\xc2\xa370) koI <tv kcu iKe7vos ypdcpOfjLcv, ego et tu et ille scribimus. \xe2\x80\x94 Si* Kal \n4Ke7yo5 ypa<f>\xe2\x82\xacT\xe2\x82\xac, tu et ille scribitis. \xe2\x80\x94 \'\xc2\xa3761; Koi iKf7yoi ypdcpofiey. \xe2\x80\x94 2u /col iK\xe2\x82\xac7yot \nypdfpere. \xe2\x80\x94 \'HiJ.f7s Kcd iKciyoi ypdipofjuv. \xe2\x80\x94 \'T/iiets Kot iKiivos ypdcpsre. \n\nRem. 5. Sometimes also for the sake of a more forcible contrast, the person \nof the verb agrees with the subject nearest to it, e. g. X. C. 4. 4, 7. irepi roi \n\n\n\n312 SYNTAX. [$243. \n\nSiKalov Trduu olfiai vvv ex^\'*\' f tTeu\', trphs & ovtc av ovt hv &Wos ovSels Si- \nvaiT auTenre7y. PI. Phaedon. 77, d. Sficus Se fioi SoKeis av re Kai \'Sififjiias \nTjSecos hu /cat rovroy SiairpayixaTevcracr^ai (pertractare) rhv Xo\'^ov. X. An. 2. 1, \n1 8. (T u T6 yap "EAAtjj/ el Koi rjixels.- Comp. Rem. 4. \n\n\n\n} 243. Hemarks on certain Peculiarities in the use- \n\nof Number. \n\n1 . The Sing, has sometimes a collectiye sense and takes the place of the \nPi.; thus in the poets: SdKpvov, uktIs, (rraydv, (rrdx^s, harvest, etc. ; \nin prose: Kvfia, itr^\'fis (like vestis), \\l^os, irAit/^oSf ^fiireXos, t} tV- \nw s, cavalry , rj a a iris, a body of troops, etc. \n\n2. Entire nations, that live under a monarchical government, are sometimes \ndesignated in prose, by the Sing., e. g. 6 lie pa-Tjs, the Persians, 6 ^Apdfiios, \n6 AvS6s, 6 \'Affo-vpios, etc. This rarely occurs in respect to nations that \nhave a free government, e.g. Thy "EXXTjva <piKov irpos^ea^ai, Her. 1, 69. Also \nthe words <TTpaTi<i)T7]s, TroKe/xios and the like, are sometimes used in the Sing, \ninstead of the PI. \n\n3. The PI. properly belongs only to common nouns, not to proper names, nor \nto the names of materials, nor to abstracts ; still, even such nouns in certain rela- \ntions take the PI., namely, when they express the idea of a common noun : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(1) Proper names: (a) to denote several individuals of the same name, e. g. \n8t5o KoTuAoi ; (b) to denote persons that possess the nature or the qualities \nof the individual named, e. g. PL Theaet. 169, b. oi \'Hpa/cAees re koL \xc2\xa9t;- \naee s, men like Hercules and Theseus. \n\n(2) Names of materials occur not seldom in the PL, since either the single \nparts, which make up the material, or the different kinds of a given material, \nare contemplated, e. g. aA.es, salt; t\\i d fx a^ o i, sand; irvpol /col Kpi^ai; &ve- \n{JLOS Kol vSara, olvoi ttoAvt e\\eis, olyoi iraKaiol; |uAo kcu aI^os, \netc. \n\n(3) Abstracts in the plural have a concrete signification, since the plural is \nused when the separate kinds or circumstances or relations of the abstract idea, \nare denoted, or the manifestation of the abstract action, as repeated in different \nplaces or times ; hence also when the abstract idea relates to several persons, \ne.g. Herod. 7, 158. v/uu fieyaAai a)<pe\\iai re koI itravpeffeis yey6vcuTi. 3, \n40. efxoX at (Tal fxeydXai \xe2\x82\xacUTi;%iat ovk apecrKovai. So ex^Vi inimicitiae ; ard- \n<reis, seditiones ; (pixiai, raXaLirwpiai, aerumnae ; ^dvaroi, mortes ; r^/vxv \nKol ^dXiTT), ^vfiol, animi; <f>6fioiy (ppoviiaeiSy reflections; airex^ctat, \navSpiai, brave deeds; vyieiai /cc: eve^iai rwv (rtofidrav, like valetudines, \netc. ; TricrreiSf testimonia ; evvoias Sovvai, to show ads of kindness ; x \xc2\xab P \' t e s, \npresents; in many cases, the PL denotes a plurality of parts, e. g. \'ttAoOto/, \ntreasures, divitiae {ir\\ovros, riches, abstract) ; yd/xoi, nuptiae; vvKres, the hours \nor watches of the night, horae nocturnae ; ra<pal, funera, etc. So, e. g. in Eng- \nlish, How long these nights are ? when one night is meant. \n\n\xc2\xbby^/ Remark. The Greeks commonly use the PL of Abstracts as well as Con- \ncretes, when they refer to a PL Adj.," the idea contained in the abstract term \n\n\n\n^ 244.] THE ARTICLE. 313 \n\nbeing then applicable to several persons, e. g. kokoI ras rpvxas; koXoI rh \nau (xaT a\\ ^.picnoi ras (pvaeis] koX rais yvdo/xais koX to Is acofiaai \na<paW6iJL^voi, X. Cy. 1. 3, 10. \n\n4. When neuter adjectives, pronouns, and numerals are used as substantives, \nthe Greek, like the Latin, always employs the PL, when several individual \nthings, individual relations or circumstances, a whole which is represented as \nconsisting of single parts, are to be understood by these words : the English often \nuses the singular here, as this, that (ToCra, eKelva). Comp. \xc2\xa7 241, Eem. 3. The \nSing, of adjectives used substantively is put in the Neut., when an abstract idea, \n\xe2\x96\xa0 a whole as such, is to be expressed, e. g. rb kuXov, the beautiful in the abstract, \nrh KaKov, the had. The PI., on the contraiy, denotes a concrete idea, i. e. the \ndifferent parts, classes or conditions which are implied in the abstract, e. g. rk \nKoXd, res pulchrae ; to kokc^, ma/a, the evil deeds, things, etc. \n\n\xc2\xa7244. The Article. \n\nl.lThe subject as well as every substantive, takes the \n\narticle, when the speaker wishes to represent an object as \n\na definite one, and to distinguish it from other objects of the \n\nsame kind. 1 { The substantive without the article denotes \n\neither an indefinite individual, or it represents an abstract \n\nidea in the most general manner, without any limitation.) \n\nyXv^patros: (a) a man, as an individual, i. e. some one of the race of men; \n(b) man, a man, as a species; 6 dv^puiros: (a.) the man, as an individual, the \nman whom I have in view and consider as an individual distinguished from \nother men ; (b) the man, as a class or species, as I think of him as something \ndefinite and limited in respect to his entire nature or constitution ; ^70 Ao, \nmilk, Th ya\\a, the milk (as a particular substance) ; <ro^la, wisdom, rj (to^/a, \nthe wisdom {viewed as a definite property or particular kind oficisdom) ; <pi\\o(TO(piaf \nphilosophy i7i general, t] <pi\\o(To<pia, as a ].Ktrticular science or a particular branch of \nphilosophy. (When the Inf. is to be considered as an abstract substantive, it has ; \nthe article, e. g. rh ypd<p\xe2\x82\xaciy. But the abstract noun takes the article whenj \nit expresses a concrete idea,) e. g. rj ardcis, the (particular) sedition; rh \nirpay/xa, the (particular) deed; hence also the PI. at a-rda-eis, ra irpdy- \nfiara. \n\nRemark 1. From what has been said, it follows: (a) That the substantive, \nas the subject of a sentence, may stand with or without the article, according \nas it is intended to be represented, either as a definite or an indefinite object ;J \nMb) on the contrary, that the substantive, as a predicate, must be generally wiHi- \nout the article, since the pi-cdicate does not denote a definite individual, but only \nthe abstract idea of a quality in general. ^ Her. 1, 103. vv^ ri 7]ix4pa iyeuero, the \nday became night. Isocr. Nicocl. 28, a. \\6yos a\\T}^r]s Koi uSfiifx-os Kot SiKaios ^vxvt \naya^ris Koi niffTTis \xe2\x82\xactdw\\6u ecTTi. (But when the predicate denotes a def.iiiic, \na before-mentioned, or a well-known object (No. 6), it of course takrs the \narticle. } Her. 1. 68. awe^dWero rhv "Opear-nv tovtov ehai, he concluded that \nthis was the Orestes, namely, the one before-mentioned. 5,77. ol S\' lTnro^6Tai \niKoXiovTo ol Trax^fS, the nch bore the name of (before-mentioned) iirito^drai. lu \n\n27 \n\n\n\n3 14 SYNTAX. [\xe2\x99\xa6 244 \n\npassages like X. Cy. 3. 3, 4. 6 fihv ravra dxwv irapfi\\\\ajirev \xe2\x80\xa2 6 Si ^Apfuvtos avft,- \nvoot/TTffjLTre Koi 01 &Woi irdyres iv^parKOi, avaxa\\ovin-(s rhy fvepyfTTjVj rhp \n&vSpa Toy ayaii^ov. An. 6. 6, 7. oi St liWoi ol \xe2\x96\xa0trap6vT(s ruv arpimtt^vw \niiri^dpoiiffi i3aAA\xe2\x82\xac\xc2\xbb/ rhv Af^iinrov, aya \'rs rhv tt poZirtiy^ tl. !o \n\ndenotes, that the ideas expressed hy r, honest man. traitor, i. i \n\ndefinite action either before named, or well-known.\xe2\x80\x94 (When the \\ \nBuperhitive or a substantive with a superlative, the article is not u\xc2\xbbi<i , , , \n\nthe Enpjlish, Iiowever, uses it here. Ot 4>euri;AjTai cto-t \'woyr\\p6raTOi i. -V^ \n\n\xe2\x99\xa6col ah LKur ar o I (tlic I \'. Dcm. 25, 2. \'Ai^pl iroXy jcoto^^ 4pya- \n\n<ria KparlffTi] i<nl y 6,8. Comp. ^ 241, 7. \n\n2/ Hence the article is used to denote the whole compas.- ^ . \nthe idea, everything wliich can be included under the term \nused ; one object is here considered as a representative of the \nwhole class. \n\n*0 tivbpwiroi bvrrrds icriy men (i. e. all men) u mortaL Xf^\'i mnh ^^*y- \nyfffbau rhy f>r\\ropa koX rhv ififioyt Aesch. Ctes. 16. \'H iy^ptla koX^ \niariy, i. c. everything which is understood bj the idea <^ iu^ptla. Tk 7^Aa \n\nr]Sv iffTiy. \n\nI^F.M. 2. \' ^\'"\' denotinjf \n\nmerely a el;. :igai.shed \n\nfrom the othtrs, a- it nut d what man, the Greek \n\nomits the article ; h .. , \xe2\x80\x94 ^_tos in U; \n\nRem. 3. Common nouns somctini\'^\': nmn tht-* .nrtirlo. where, nrrnrdinir tn th-^ \nstatement in No. 1, it wouhl In \ndenotinL\' ^ \'\xe2\x96\xa0 -\' \xe2\x80\xa2" \' Oie like. \xe2\x96\xa0 \nor is sui from tl \n\n\n\nI staniives arc unite*!, i\' \n\n\xc2\xbb\'\xe2\x80\xa2/\'\xe2\x96\xa0\xe2\x96\xa0 and child, hor^ae aui. . \n\n> > i-n common nonns arc. \nI doiinite from tlu \' \n\n\xe2\x96\xa0} ~ . of\' a jnirtimuu i \n\nJ \'\xe2\x96\xa0 / >/(i, etc. ; other i \n\' often omitted also with w\xc2\xbb. \n\nonly in connection with p\' \n\nTTfpl r)Klov SvfffiaT, ucra \'lAi \n/natund when a \ntaction, or the ni \nI sitions, e. g. ^crtr^eu dtovi, to (<\xc2\xbb/\xc2\xab\xc2\xab jr in poiis. *t- .y, to c o me \n\nsupfter, to a Jiost, X. C 1. 3, 6. \'E^\' Xttov iVnu, h .- ,. ,. . ^ = . ^iftpor f^itra. \n\n(i. e. nd frnandutH). X. Cy. 1. 2. 9. Tl6r\xc2\xabpoy fwiarofifyoy rjrtoxf^ M fev"> o j \n"roy, I) ju^ iwiordfieyoy {ad veJtatdvm), X. C. 1. I, 9. *Evl Simp Itm \n). Her. 3. U \n\nEM. 4. (The names of the arts and sciences, of the rirtues and rices, oftra \n\nomit th- " " - ^\xc2\xbb\'ll- \n\nknown -; . . " \xe2\x96\xa0\'^- s^ \n\nTldyra fity o6y tftoiyt ioKfi rck \xc2\xabcaAa ncai rci a\'^a^a ko-^ o^, ovx ^v*\'\'\'^ ^ \n\nffu\'<ppo(rvyrf. X. C. 1. 2, 23. \'Ewd ovy to. r* SiKoia k^ :u AXXa nKi rt r\xc2\xab} \n^70^^ irdfTa apfTTJ xpolrrrrai, STfAoy clreu, Sti koI StKa^ovvy^ Ktu n &AAi) vafm. \niiptr^ aoipia irri, \'i. 9, 5. \'E\xe2\x96\xa0rtffT^|n1^ &pa ffwpla irrlr^ 4. 6, 7. MiU.irr\xc2\xab 7^ \n\n\n\n\nf 244.J THE ARTICLE. 315 \n\n\xe2\x82\xacfiffir)\\i]K\xe2\x82\xaci airrcp iiririKriSy Cy. 8. 3, 25. (The omission of the article is natural \nalso, when an abstract is to be rcpresentea active])/, ^.g.\'Eu (piXoaotpla (w<riy^ \nin philosophizing (in philosophando) , PI. Phaed. GSi\'c. ^ut where a paVticular \nart or science, etc. is to be distinguished from another, the article is used,)e. g. \ni] pfliopLKT], T) api^fjLirriKT]. The substantives fi4yf^os, irXTj^os, vypos, \xe2\x82\xac?- \npos, jSa^oy, yct/os and the like, are very often found in the Ace. or Dat. \nwithout the article, as they are to be received as a kind of adverbial expression, ) \n\n\xe2\x96\xa0 ^. iroTafihs KvSyos tvofia, eipos Svo itKibpoiv, tico plethra wide, X.. An. 1. \n2, 23. \n\n3. The article is very often used with common nouns to \ndenote what belongs to an object or is requisite for it, what is \ndue to it. \n\nX. Cy. 3. 3, 6. \'Eyofil(f ydp, d fKcurros rh fiipos h^ifirauvov iro(j^<\xe2\x82\xac, t^ ZKov \nauT(f KoXus ^x*\'" (jxirtem, cui praeest ; centuriam suam). 8. 3, 3. vflfias St tovtuv \n{ruv (TToXuiv) rh fifpos (Kdaro} rStv jjy\xc2\xabfi6ywy, iKfKfvaty ainovs roinois Koafxilv \nrovs avranf <plKovs {partem debitam). An. 7. 6, 23. iXkd, (pal-rrre Sv, ISfj rii \n4y4xvpa r6re \\a$(7v, us /liTjSc d i^ovXtro iZvvarro tiv ravra i^aTraray (t?ie meas- \nures requisite to rjuard against deception). 5. 6, 34. ol <npariurrai r}V(l\\ovy avrtf \ntl \\-f]^oyrai atroSiSpdiTKoyTa, 2ti rijy SIktjv iiri^aoify {the due, deserved pun- \niihment). \n\n4. Hence the article very often takes the place of the posses- \nsive pronoun, when it is connected "with such substantives as \nnaturally belong to a particular person, mentioned in the sen- \ntence. In such cases, the English uses the possessive pronoun. \n\nOiyoyils Tck rtKya artpyovaiy {parents love TIIEIR children). \'O a-Tparrjyhs \nrovs ar par iwras M robs iroKtfjilovs 6,yft {leads llis soldiers). Kvp6s re \nKarairqi-ff(ras iiirh r ov apfiar o s rhy ^u puKa 4y4Sv koI hyafihs iirl rhv \nlirirov ra vaXrh, fis rhs x**P*5 fXafif, X. An. 1. 8, 3. \n\n5. As the article may make one object prominent, by indi- \nvidualizing it and presenting it apart from others, it is often \nused, when an object is to be represented in a distnbutivc rela- \ntion to the predicate of the sentence. \n\nTlposaurovfTi 5e }iiahhv b Kvpos xnriax^dTai Sdceiy ayrl SapfiKov rpla fjfiiSapeiKii \nrov fir]yhs r^ vrpar idirri {singulis mensibus singulis militihus, three half- \nDarics a month to each soldier, comp. English so much the jwund), X. An. 1. 3, 21. \n(comp. 5. 6, 23.) AapfiKhy tKoaros otffd rov firjyhs vfiuy {each of you sJiall \nhave a Dane each month), 7. 6, 7. \'O 8e avyf^iabds rhv iva T^ujxhv kv\\ oy\\iu \nrpovffiireiy, Sre n^} irapflrj voWd, Svyaur tiy iAutrws t^* evl XP^^^\xc2\xb0^ {singula pani3 \nfntstra, to dip each morsel into the different sauces), Id. C 3. 14, 6. \n\n6. The article is properly and originally a demonstrative \npronoun, and is still often used in a demonstrative sense. Tliis \n\n\n\n316 SYNTAX. [\xe2\x99\xa6 244. \n\nis particularly the case in Homer, where the article almost uui- \nformly has a pronominal relation. Comp. $ 247. \n\ni The simplest use of the article as a demonstrative, is as follows : An object \nnot before described or referred to, when it is first mentioned as an indefinite \nindividual, does not take the article ; but when it is repeated, it takes the article, \nbecause it has been already referred to and is knownJ e. g. Elhov &ySpa \xe2\x80\xa2 6 Sk \napi)p jxoi. iKi^ev. Hence the article is also used when the speaker points to an \nobject, e. g. ^4pe fioi, & irai, rh ^ ifixioy (tlte book = this or that hook). , In this \nrelation, the article may be used with material nouns/e. g. Ao\'y ftoi t^ yaKa {the \nmilk, which liad been pointed out) ; (and even when a part only of the material is \nreferred to, the article is employed, though material nouns elsewhere are always \nwithout tlM|. article, as they contain no idea of individuality) e. g. Uivu> rov \nolvov (of this wine). The article is often used in speaking of persons or things \nknown and celebrated, where the Latin uses the pronoun i//c,^e. f^. & KoXhs roT;, \nthat beautiful boij ; tliis is very frequent with proper names. See No. 7. "Ore \ne,4p^r}S aytipas rrjv ayapl ^firiroy (T t par thv ^X^iv i-wX r^y \'LWaZa {that \nnumberless host), X. An. 3. 2, 13. \n\n7. Personal proper names as such, i. e. so far as they in them- \nselves denote merely indi\\\'iduals, do not take the article. But \nthey take it, when they have been already mentioned, and \nare afterwards referred to (No. 6) ; or even when they have not \nbeen before named, if it is intended to designate them as Well- \nknown and distinguished (No. 6). Plural names of nations, \nand also the names of countries, districts, aivl 0^\xc2\xabti\\-als, are \nboth with and ^vithout the article. \n\n2\xc2\xab/cpaTT7s \xe2\x82\xac</>77. So also where an adjective is joined with a proper name, \ne.g. iro<phs \'StDKpdTTiSy the wise Socrates. ^Eyl$cri(ray Brt^aloi AaKfSatfio- \nvlovs. \'A$po K6iJ.a5 oh rovr iirolr]<T(Vy iX\\\' ^ircl ificovf Kvpoy Iv KiXikIo. \ntvra, avaaTp(\\pas 4k ^oivlK-qs irapa fioffiXta ain^Aai/vei\', X. An. 1.4, 5. Ku- \npoy 5e fieTaiTfixireTai {Aape7os) .. ava^alyti ovy 6 KvpoSy X. An. 1. 1. 2. \'Axk \nrov ^IXiffaov Xtyerat 6 Bopeas rijy ^flpd^vtay accural, 1*1. Phaedr. 229, b \nY^as well-known names). \n\nU-^ Rkm. 5. (When a noim in apposition, accompanied by the article, follows \nir a personal proper name, the proper -name does not take the article, e. g. \n\nACr KpoTtros, 6 rwy AvStHu fiaciX^vs. But yet when the article is used, e. g. \n\n"\' 6 Kpo7(Tos, 6 Tuy AvScoy ^curiXevs, it has a demonstrati^ . aiid design \n\nnates the proper name as one already mentioned or k ^he noun \n\nin apposition is accompanied by the article, when it ser>-es to distin- \nguish the person or thing mentioned from others of the same kiyd. or \nwhen the person or thing named is to be pointed out as one known) e. g. \nSoj/fpaTTjs, 6 <pi\\o<ro<pos \\ 2a\'fcpoT7)y, 6 ^Ab7)ya7os, Socnttes. \nAt/itiiian : X^ipiaotpos, 6 AaK^SaiaSi\'ios ; on tlie contrary. : \ntion does not take the article, when it expivsses meri\'ly an ;i > \n\nlive, e. g. Her. 1, 1. \'UpoSoros \'AAiKopvoao-eus, Herodotus ofHi... .,...., \n1, 1. QovKvSiBrii \'A^yaios, Thucydides an Athenian, or o/* Athens. KXt . \n\'Opxofiiytost Cleanor of Orchomenus, X. An. 3. 2, 4. \\The names of rivers are \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 244.] THE ARTICLE. 317 \n\ncommonly placed as n\' - between the article and the word irorofiosj e. g \n\nd\'AXvi TroTOfjAs {the m . i. .,,>). Her. 1, 72. o \'AxcAyos iroTafi6s, Th. 2. 102 \n^irl rhv \'iapov irorafLoy, ^tI rhv Ilvpafiov Trorafi6yy X. An. 1.4. 1. c\'lrl rhu Ev<ppd\' \nrrjy T 11. irpbs rhy ^Apd^r]y xorafioy, 19. Examples like the following \n\narc ): Ulom : ivl t^ troTOfxif Kcucinrdpei, Th. 7, 80. ^irl rhu iroTOfiJ)*- tJ>i\xc2\xbb \n\n^Epiy(6yy ih. 82. Sometimes the article is wantin^r \xe2\x80\xa2\xe2\x80\xa2 eirl "^apov troTCLfioy (accord- \ninj;^ to the best MSfS.), X. An. 1.4, 1 ; ^irl "ApTrcuroy irorafx6y (according to tho \nb<-t MSS.) ib. 4. 7. 18: toto/x^t IfXiyovs, 5. 3, 8. rPhe names of mountains, \ni- also phiced between the article and the noun, wlien \n\nli: ^ r or, at least, of the same declension as the nouns to \n\nwIjIc h they belonp, viz. 7^, lurpof, vpos, k^coj, etc., e. g. M tV 2o\\iry\xe2\x82\xacicu\' Kdifir^v^ \nTh. 4. 4.3 ; rh lovviov txpoy, i\\ \xc2\xa9ctnrpanrlj 7^, r] A^Aos vr,<ros] tov \'2.K6pi^pov opovs, \nTh. li, \'.Mi; TOV ATmou 6povi, Th. 2. 96 (6 Af/xos) ; 7) B6\\0r} AZ/xvtj, Th. 1, 58. 4, \n!(\xc2\xbb.\xe2\x96\xa0]; i) M<V8tj irdAr<j, T\' 1. ^ But if the \xc2\xabrender (or declension) is not tlio \n\n\xc2\xbbiume, they mu>i Ik- rc;_ .is in apposition with the nouns to which they \n\n\xe2\x96\xa0 long, and arc placed U-forc or after them)e. g. ry 6pti rf rfpay(i<f, Th. 4, 7o\'; \nT~ \' :.\' rh Kvyhs <r-^A"\xc2\xbb. ^- 105: ttJi"!???! toD ipovSt 108; i] A-fiKvhos rh <ppov\' \np. 13 ; T^ X\xc2\xabfpioy al \'Eyyta iSot, 1, 100 ; tjjv ir6Kty roits Tapaovs, X. An. 1. \n\n\'2, 2h. 1 he article is seldom omitted, e. g. awh \'A^-npaiy w6\\ew5, Th. 2, 97. \n\n8. When adjectives or participles are used as substantives, \nthey regularly (according to No. 2) take the article. The Eng- \nlish here either employs an adjective used substantively, as t/ie \nL\'ooil; or a substantive, as die sj)eaker (= tJte one speaking) ; or \nrt\'sulves the participle by he who, they who, that which (= to the \nImX. it, fpii). This usage is very frequent in Greek with all the \nparticiples. \n\n\'O ffo^s, t/i\' wts\xe2\x82\xac {mart), a tnsc [matt), oi ayaboi, ol xaxoi, ol StKa^oi-rts {those \nwho JHfitjr), the jttdge$ ; ol Xtyerrcf, the oraton; rh kya^iy, rh KaX6y, rh KoXd, 6 \nfiov\\6fxtiof, ijuifis ; 6 rvx<^*\'t whoefrr happen*. \'O vAciirra w^*\\wv rh Koivhv \nufy\'i<rrw\xc2\xbb rm\xc2\xa3t\xc2\xa5 Utovrat. \'O vA\xc2\xabr<rra cv^c A^trar rh k. fi. r. h^iovrat. \'O irAct- \nara w^cA^trwy r. K. fi. r. aliwdrjatrat. \xe2\x80\x94 \'O kptriiy fx*^*\' vKourti fity tinvp \n^IKwv toAAwk, vAoirrcr 8i iral iXKwv fiovKofiiytty ytyttrdau koI fi fi*y wpdrruy fx<* \nrovs <Tuyy\\<r^i\\<ro^iyovs, ihy 8\xc2\xab ti cr^taAp, ov artav\'i^ti rwy $or}!^r) <r6y- \nrmv, X. An. 7. 7. 42. IJut when the ailjectivcs and participles are designed to \n\\press only a part of a whole, the article id omitted, c. g. i^oda/, (jood men ; \n;>tKoco^vyr*s, lu^itrrts ; KtMxk xai alffxp^ f-wpa^tr. \n\n9. Participles also t^ke the article, when definite individuals \n^re sp(\xc2\xbbken of, in the sense of tJiose, who; a participle with the \n\nirticlc is very often appended to a preceding substantive, in the \nI\'orm of apposition, in order to give prominence to the attribu- \ntive meaning, somewhat in the sense of eurji, cam, id dico, qui, \n^uae, <juo<l, or et is quiilem, f/ui. \n\n" Her. 9. 70. wp^ot hriXdoy Ttytrirat is rh t\xc2\xab7xo$, \xc2\xbbcal tV <r\xc2\xbbnji^i\' rov MapSoylou \nowToi fcoM oi h lapirdcayrfs { ami these are tht y tluit rubUd, etc. ). X. C. 2. 6, 1 8. \n\xe2\x80\xa2u fjL6yoy ol iiiuncu rovro iroiovaiy, oAAa icoi ir6\\fis ai rwy re KoXwy fidXitna \niwtfitkovfityai, Kol to auffxpo. ^Kiara wposiffifvai -roKXtUis xoXefiiKUi \n\n27\xc2\xbb \n\n\n\n318 SYNTAX. [i 24-7. \n\n^X^vo\'t irphs aW-ffXas. 3. 5, 4. BoiojtoI fiey, ot irp6(T^(v oh^ V rp eavrwK toX \n/jLuvres \'A^rjualoLS &ucv AaKedai/j-oviwu re \xc2\xaboi ruu &Wwy TleKanrovvTitriwv ayriTArt \nT\xe2\x82\xac<r^ai, vvv aiTiiKovcnv ahroX ko^\' cavrovs efj-fiaXuv els rT]v \'ArriK-fiy. \n\n10. The Greek may convert adverbs of place and time, more \nseldom of quality, into adjectives or substantives by prefixincr \nthe article. In like manner a preposition with its Case may be \nmade to express an adjective or substantive meaning. \n\n\'H &UCA) irSXis, the upper city. \'O /ueTa|i/ rtJiros, tfie intervening place. Ot iy^dS \n&vbpuTTOL or ot ivbdZe. \'O vvv ficuriXfvs. Ol TrdKcu ao<po\\ &vSp\xe2\x82\xacS. Oi t<Jt\xe2\x82\xac, tJi* \nmen of that time. \'H avpiou (sc. ijfxfpa). \'H ^^aKpjjjs yardcTTacns. \'O dei, an im- \nmortal. So T^ and to. vvv^ now, i. c. at the present time; rh irdXcu, formerly, in tlt^ \nformer time ; rh irpiv, rh avTiKa, immediately. Ol irdvu rSav crrpaTicoTwVf the best ot \nthe soldiers. Th Kapra y\\ivx(JS. \'H 6.yav afieKfia. \'O bfioXoyovfiivois iovKos. Th \n6, 80. TT]v aKiuZvvus ZovK^lav. So also rh irdixirav and rh irapdiray, ormiino, r} \nKdpra, rh TrapoKoXv used adverbially. Even : \'H ruv yetpvpav o it SidXiMTts, tlu \nnot destroying of the bridges. \'O -Kphs rovs nepcas ir6Kffxos. Oi irtpl ^HXoco^iat^^ \n\\the philosophers. Oi iv &(rr(i. \'H ^v Xtpfiov^atp rvpawls. \n\n11. The neuter article to, may be placed before every word \nor part of speech, ^vhen the word is not considered in relation \nto its meaning, but is used only as a form of speech, or when \na preceding word is repeated, \\Wthout regard to the stnictnre \nof the sentence in which it is repeated. The Greek, by prefix- \ning the article, may give even to whole plurases the form and \nmeaning of an adjective or substantive. \n\nTh TUTTTO), rh rirrrras. Dem. Cor. 255, 4. Vfie7s, 2> tivZpts \'A^vcuoi \xe2\x80\xa2 rb 8* \nvfxfls orav fliru, t?;^ Tr6\\iv Ae\'^w. PI. Rp. 352, d. oi/ irfpl rod i-rtrux^vros (de ft \nlevi) 6 K6yos [i(Triv),hXKhTrip\\ rov ivriva Tp6irov xph Cv*\'- \n\nL<^ ^ 245. Position of the Article. \n\n\n\nW \n\n\n\n1. The article is sometimes separated from its substantive by \nintervening particles, e. g. /xcV, Se, yc, tc, yap, 8tJ ; by the indefinite \npronoun rts (in Herodotus very often), and by aiTos caiTov. \n\nIhv ixev &vdpa, r}jv 8e yvva7Ka. TThen a prcposirion stands before the article, \nthe prose-writers say either : -n-phs Se rhv &vSpa, or irphs rhv &vSpa Sc, but not wp6j \nrhv Sc &vipa. \xe2\x80\x94 Tuv ris Tlepffecov, Her. 1, S5. Tols currhs avrov irtjfuun ^apvyfrtu^ \nAeschyl. Ag. 845. \n\n2. Wlicn several substantives are connected by kou or tc \xe2\x80\x94 \nKut, there are two Cases: (1) the article is repeated with, each; \nthen tlie separate ideas expressed by the substantives ore con- \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 245.] POSITION OF THE ARTICLE. 31t^ \n\nsidered independent of each other, or they stand in contrast \xe2\x80\xa2 \nor (2) the article is ivot repeated; then tlie sepaiate ideas aid \nconsidered as forming one single conception. \n\nJLuKparris irayra rfyctro bcovs 6i5cV(u, rd re \\\xe2\x82\xacy6fjit:va Kol irpan6n(va Kat rh \nriyfj fiovK\xe2\x82\xacv6fjL(ya (the first two memlx?rs form a whole, hut tlie last is contrasted \nwith them), X. C. 1. 1, 19. A/ PaZtovpylat koI ^*c tov irapaxpVH^ r^Soyai^ 2. 1, 20. \nAl ^\xe2\x96\xa0wififXfiat rwy KoXwy t\xe2\x82\xac Kaya^wy (pyuy, ib. Ta t\xe2\x82\xac av^x(p4(>otrra Kol /ccxof *<^\' \nficVa, 2. 2, 5. Oi trrparrtyoi fol Xoxnyoi., An. 7. 3, 21. Th iieyaXoirfKeires n koI \niKfvdfptoy Kot rh ravtiySv t\xc2\xab tctd ai^Kfi^fpoy (here the first t\\^o and also the \nlast two form one sin^\'le conception). X. C. 3. 10, 5. Toys aypoi/s roi/s iavrov koX \noiKiUi, Th. 2. l."3. O/ ToUt\'s Tf Kcu \xe2\x80\xa2)\'vvaiKfs f\xc2\xabo manv MSS.). PI. Ivp. 557. c. \n\n3. V\\ acii a huiijiiunuvu iiavuig uic arucie luis aiiriuuuve j \n\nf^xplctivcs joined with it, viz., an adjective, partici}\xc2\xbble, adjec- \n\nive pronoun or numeral, a sub.stantive in the Gen., an adverb \n\n\xe2\x80\xa2r pre|X)sitiou with itii Case {$ 244, 10), then tJie article has a \n\nliil\'ercnt position according to the idea to be oxnrp5;.\xc2\xab;pd. a.s will \n\n; \xc2\xbbe seen from the two following cases : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) Tin\' attributive is joined with its substantive to express \na single idea, as t/ic inse man \xe2\x80\x94 tJte sage, and is designed to \ncontrast tlic object denoted by its substantive with other objects ^ \n)f the same kind. In this case, the attributive stands either\' \nIm ; ween the article and the substantive, or after tlie substantive \' \nwith the article rei>eated ; or the substantive stands first without \' \nUe article, and the attributive Ibllows * with the article. \n\nO kya^hs ayiip or 6 i^p 6 aTOi^^f or hfiip 6 ctToJ^os (in contrast with the bad \n\n-iian). ^ i. 1. Ol wKovaiot iro\\tTm or ol woXirai oi ir\\o6ffiot {in contT&&t xvith \n\noor citiii II-; O ifihs war-fip or 6 weer^p 6 4ti6t. 0\xc2\xbb rp^lx ii^pts or ol &vSpn ol rpus. \n\nI ) ruy \'AJ^yaitt/y St\'/ioi or 6 irjfios 6 rvv *A^nyalw (the Athenians in contrast with \n\nanother people). Ol yvy iydpttwoi or \xe2\x80\xa2/ ijfdpttwot ol vvv. \'O v^% rovs Tlfpcras \n\n\'6\\*tios or 6 w6\\tfios 6 wp6s rovs Tltpffos (literally the aijuinst tJu; Persiam uxir, i. c. \n\n\xe2\x96\xa0\'.rf the Peniatu, in contrast ^^-iih other wars). *Awh IbaXouTcrjs rr]s \n\n.w^.\'u.r. . ^yurrls ri ht Xtpporffff^ \'H iy taXafuyt wfSbs rhv Uipariv yavfiaxicLt the in \n\n\n\n\' Wlum* the attrihntive expletive con\xc2\xbbi\xc2\xabt\xc2\xab of several words, or where the \n<-^ \xe2\x96\xa0\xe2\x96\xa0 \xe2\x96\xa0 \' <1 after its \n\nK the article \n\nand i\\-< substantive; Bueh expl ivolved the idea of some such phrase as. / \n\nf " \xe2\x96\xa0., e. p- \xe2\x96\xa0\xc2\xbb \' \' "^ \' "" \'~ \' TOW jreSlov rov irapa *r^y \n\nh J worai ,] those above, ctc). IIei\xc2\xab \n\nmiAifxou^ 1 V intip wtiiov. . -t Ktj/TptTTjK, etc., X. An. 4. .3, J \n\nT^jToj ;i.\xe2\x80\x9e_ . .. .... ./^K, . . . <J inrip - ., _ ,.i KaraXr]<i>bf:i<Tr\\s (pvKoKVS rris \n\npvttrhi vKh rwy ibtUyroty^ here 6 inrtp and what follows qualifies the word /uur- \nris, X. An. 4. 2, 14. \n\n\n\nw \n\n\n\n320 SYNTAX. [^ 245 \n\nSalamis against the Persian sea-fight^ i, e. the searfigJd in Salamis against, etc. Tbess \nlast examples show that a substantive with its Case has an adjcetiTe force. \n\nRemark 1. In the first position {6 aya^\'bs av-np), the emphasis is on the \nattributive, e. g. Ae? TrotSetas koivwuuv rh ^rjKv yevos t]^iiv rtf roov ap^dywy \n{yevei), PI, L. 805, (1. But in the second position {6 ayjjp 6 a.ya^6s), the idea \nexpressed by the substantive is represented as a definite one or one already \nmentioned, or is contrasted with tliat of another substantive ; in the third posi- \ntion (aurjp 6 aya^6s), the idea expressed by the substantive is represented as in- \ndefinite, but in contrast with another. Ti dicupepfi iu^panros oKparrfs btiplov \nTOv d/cpoTecrT({Tou, X. C. 4. 5, 11. \'H apiTTj crvviaTi pikv hfo7sy ffvvfO\'Tt ^t \nav^ pcloTT IS 7o7s aya^o7s,2.\\,32. Th 6.pi<TTov ou tovs v6/jlovs icrrlv lax^ \n\xe2\x82\xaciu, 6.K\\\' \'avZpa rhu fjura (ppou-fjcTfcos fiaa iKikov, PI. P. 294. a. AioiKovtnau cd \nfieu TvpauviSes koI oXiyapx\'-o-t Tots Tpdirr\'5 tujv i<pe<rrr]K6TcoVyalSf \nirdXeis [republics) al drj fio ic par ov fie vat moit v6yLOis ro7s Kfififvois, \nAeschin. 3,6. Th \'nnriKhv rh iKeivcai/ (sc. rwv ^Ku^wy) ovtw fmxf\'\'\'cuj Th \n5e dTrXir iichu t6 ye tuv \'E\\Kr]vuu,us iyw K4yo}, PI. Lach. 191. b. \'Eyw \nixkv oiiv iictivovs tovs avdpas (pTjfil ou fjopov Tuiy cr w fidr uv rwy rififTtptty \niraTepas eluai, aWa Koi ttjs i\\(vi^cpias rrjs t( ijfieT ( pas koI ^vfiwdyruy, \nTuy eV TTjSe t?7 rjTreipct\', Pi. Mcnex. 240, e. Aif^tpxoyrcu rds re trv fjopopas rat \niK rod TToKefxov r ov irphs aWriKov s i)fjuy y eyf yr{ fit yas Kod ras oKf>f- \n\\fiasTasiKrrisaTparfiasrTis iir iKf7vov ^co/ic ko J, Isocr. Pan _ \n43, 15. Sometimes the position varies in the same sentence, e. j:. Tar /i\xc2\xab-; a - \n\\as TjBovas koI to. aya^a to /xeyaAa?; irfi^u Kcd tj Koprtpla kcu oi iy \nTy Kaip^ \'ir6uoi KOiL KivSuyoi irapexovTou {great jtlcasuns and adcuntaqcs), X. Cy. 3\xc2\xab \n3, 8. riws 7roT6 7; 6. K par OS S iKaio avyrj irphs aSiKlay r^y iKparoy \n^ ix^i ; PL Kp. 555, a. Then the second position docs not differ from the first. \n\n^y Rem. 2. With a verbal substantive, the attributive \' \' \n\ntion and its Case, is often phu-ed after its substantive wi \n\ntlie article. So also, when an attributive exphuiation conic* Inriwceu the arii .\xe2\x80\xa2 \nand tlie substantive : \'H <TvyK0fj.iS^ ck ru>y aypuy is rh i<m/, Th. 2, 52. \'H i-vy \nvjULfrtpa opy^ is MirvXrivaiovs^ 3. 44. Trjs rwy yvyaiKwy <pi\\ias vphs roi/s 6*S(>as, \nX. Ilicr. 3, 4. Also the more definite cxi)kiivcs of an Inf. Part, or a\'\' \nfrequently are not phiced between tlie article and these wonls: Tijy c \nTOVS apyvplov r<^ fiovKo/jLivw iranKovyras (rocpKrras aTOKa\\oi>aiy, X. C. 1. b. 13 \n(instead of rovs rV co(piay . . . iruKovyras, in mi.I. r to make prominfi\' \'1"^ idea \nin T7JI/ ao<piay). \n\n(b) The attributive is joined with its substantive not to \nexpress a single idea, but is to be regarded as the predicate of \nan abridged subordinate clause ; then the attributive is not con- \ntrasted with another object of the same khid, but witli itself; it \nbeing designed to show that the object to wliich tlie attributive \nbelongs, is to be considered, in respect to a certain property, by \nitself, \\vithout reference to another. In this case the adjective \nwithout the article is placed either after the article and the \nsubstantive, or before the article and substantive. \n\n\'O ay^p d.ya^6s or aya^hs 6 ay^py a good man (= aya^hs \xc2\xa3v, the man m&o \nis good, inasmuch as, becatise, if fie is good). Oi iy^panroi f\xc2\xa3i<Tov<ri rhy irSpa jco- \nK6y or KaKhy rhy &v5pa, tJiey hate the bad man, i. c. thejf hate the bkui, inasmuch \nas, because, if he is Imd. (On the contrary, rhy Koichy &ySpa or rhy &v5pa rh\xc2\xbb \nKoxSyt tlie bad man^ in distinction from the good ; hence, robs n^y aya^ci>s ay- \n\n\n\n\xe2\x80\xa2^ \n\n\n\n\n\n\n^\'-\xc2\xab:^ \n\n\n\nI \n\n\n\nI \n\n\n\n\n5 245.] POSITION OF THE ARTICLE. 321 \n\n^p^ovs ayawifMfUj robs S( kokovs futrovfiey.) \'O /ScuriAfuy \xe2\x96\xa0fjSfws xop\'Cf**" \'\'\'o^f \nwoXirous ay abo IS, pood citizenSy i. e. if or because they are good (on the contrary, \nrois aya^o7s -koKItcus or rois xoAiTcus rois aya^oTSf good citizetis, in distinction \n\n*|jrom bad citizens). \'O ^\xc2\xabhs ttjk ^vxh^ npar ia ri^v t^J iv^pwiry \xc2\xabyf<pvatv (a \n$oul, <u it is the most exceUent), X. C. 1. 4, 13. Oi vKh rov r]\\lov Kara\\a^v6fieyoi \nTO xp*^/**"^" ficXdyrtpa ^x*"^*" (^ biacker sh\'n ; the blackness of the skin is \nthe consequence of the KaraXdfjiTrfa-dcu inrh rod r]\\lov), 4. 7, 7. *Ey4irpTj(rdy tc ras \nffKTjyas 4 piifiovs #foi ra XPVH^\'^"\' SiTjpirao\'cu\' (yujti deseria erant), Th. 1, 49. \'A^icS \n\nll(po\xc2\xabfu/oj robs bfpd-woyras ifioX ftkv &.<pboya rit iirtrifSfta TrapaCKevd^eiy, ainovs 5h \nH7}ityhs rovrcey ixrfabai (= firre aina iSup^oya cikcu), X. C. 2. 1, 9. \n\nRem. 3. (if a sub-itantive havinp the article has a Gen. or a preposition and \n\nCase coir \xe2\x80\xa2 ! with it, the pf\' \xe2\x80\xa2 under (a) occurs, only when the sub- \n\nitive wi: n. etr. f<inn\xc2\xab m \xe2\x80\xa2 with another object of the same kind, \\ \n\np. 6 riy \'. ^/wk (the Atheiiians in contrast \n\nVithanotlu: , , ..,. ....,-- . . . . .... Ut:\\i.,c. ^.OifK aXKorpiov rtyfTrat \n\ntJycu 6 \'Ad riyaltty iri nos rhi^ Siffiaitty St/ pi or, kyapu^iy4]CK(raj. 5( kcu rh.s \nr w y ir i \' " \' ob s &r\\ fiaiovs n pay 6y ovs (VfpyfciaSf \n\nJ)\xc2\xab !i: \'17 i\'^h rity iy r ij iwdprr^ tcAwv, X. \n\nAii the article, is placed either before \n\n<" antive denotes only a part of that \n\nive; the en en on the jroveniinp substantive, ; \n\nt _ .. r \'A^Ko-ui\' Lt d:,fj.os, t\' \' rhe nobles. \n\nI! I |\xc2\xbb:\xc2\xbbrt!Tiv.- nvd not a; vc is used; \n\n1 in contnist with another people, but \n. .vd with another part of the same, viz., ) \nTotn 0i\\o<To^la or t; ^i\\o<ro^la rj ^uKpdrous^ \n\nJ , . . - , ^ or \n\nJ^Kpdrovs T] if)t\\t*<To<fia^ i. e. the riiiLOSoriiT of\' i>ocmtrs and not something \nv\\-t\' of hi>. e. j;. hi)\xc2\xbb life. *ftnr\xc2\xabp o Ik las r it Kdr atdt y (dotnus ittjimas jtartes) \nicr x\'jp^rrara tlyat Su, o^w koI rwy w pd^ t vy riit i.px^f ""^ rhs vTod^^- \n(Tcir dAi7dt?f Kol iiKcdas tlycu wporffH\' \n\ni*o<Tty, us 5o\xc2\xabt\xc2\xabr \'Abr}yaltityr^w\\\\\', , \n\nI\'i M \'ion. 90, h. Th clBor rov wati6s (contrasted with roOyoua rov irat\' \niojj, i 1. Lysid. 204, e. \n\nHi M 1 When tlic genitive of the substantive pronouns is ti\'^\'"\' \'\'"^tead of \nt\'; : \xe2\x80\xa2 the n*flcxives iutunov, <r\xc2\xabowToC, etc. are placed a- : to (a),, \n\n"iial \n\n-nb- \n\nstantive with the articUv p. ^. 6 wariip ftov or ^ov 6 warifp, 6 varijp cou or <rov 6 \n\nwoT^p, 6 var^p avrov (aio-^t) or abrov (awriji) 6 \xc2\xbbcrr^p, my, t/iy. his (ejus) father^ \n\n6 froT^p r\\uiy, vyMv^ \xc2\xbb\'V\xc2\xbb\'i avrvy^ \xc2\xab\xc2\xbbr r\\uwy, vuity^ \xc2\xbb^\xc2\xbb\'\xc2\xbb tu\'ruy S war4)p, our, your^ \n\nBut when ll; ve has tivc- joined \n\nMu:. :. , \'iins can stand \xc2\xab\xe2\x96\xa0 sabsta .ittributivc,) \n\ne. ff. \'H rcUoi i\\iiiiy ^ixTis. \\l\\\\ the Sin;:, and Dual, the enclitic forms are always \n\nr \xe2\x80\xa2 liese nev - \' \xe2\x80\xa2 -\' \' *\xe2\x96\xa0 - -ntcncc; but in connected dis- \n\nhev rni h has the article. (The Gen. \n\nhave the poition of (a), e.g. \n\nt, :\xe2\x80\x9e.;_. ,. , :_ .,^ . - _ .,^ _ - _. ,.. Aov). T^ aXXi\\Ku)v (bvoia. Thai \n\ndemonstratives are sometimes aUo found without the article after the sul)stan- \ntivi- with the article, e. p. O* kyayKoloi Udyov, Isae. 9. 10. Ti Upa iKtlyov, ih. \n36. Toil war pits rovrwy, IC 3. Tp yby C/3p\xc2\xabi rovrov, Dem. 4, 3. \n\nRem. 5. The difference between the two cases mentioned is very manifest \nwith the adjectives ^Kpos^ tiitros, taxaros. When the position mentioned \n\n\n\n322 SYNTAX. [^ 24\'5. \n\nunder (a) occurs, the substantive with its attributive forms a contrast with \nother objects of the same kind, e. g. r) fiear] it6kis or troKis t] fiear], the. middle a/y, \nin contrast with other cities ; t) ecrx^TV u^aost the most remote island, in contrast \nwith other islands. \'Es rh icxaTov epu/xa rrjs vi)<Tov (in contrast with other ipv- \njucMTi), Th. 4, 35. When, on the contrary, the position mentioned under (b) \noccurs, the substantive is contrasted with itself, the attributive then only defin- \ning it more fully. In this last case, we usually translate these adjectives into \nEnglish by sul)stantives, and the substantives with which they agree as though \nthey were in the genitive, e. g. iirX rep opei &Kpa) or en 6.Kp<a r<p opei, on the top \nof the mountain (properly on tlie mountain where it is the highest) : iy fifori rfj \nn6\\ei (seldom ev Tp iroAfi /jLeo-ri), in the middle of the city; iv iax^\'Hi "^V y^^^V \nor iv vi\\(TU) rfj iaxdry, on the border of the island. \'Ei/ fxeaois rols troKe^juoa \naire^ave, X. H. 5. 4, 33. Kari fiiaov rhv kvkKov, Cy. 2. 2, 3. Oi Ufpaai wepl \n^Kpais Tois X^P^^ X*^P\'\'5"5 baaeias cxovcrty, 8. 8, 17. \n\nRem. 6. In like manner, the word /xSvos has the position mentioned under \n(a), when it expresses an actual attributive explanation of its sub<tantive, e. g. \n6 fiSuos TTttis, the OXLY son; on the contrary, the position mentioned under (b), \nwhen it is a more definite explanation of the predicate, e. g. \'O roTj fiSvos or \nfxSuos 6 Trots irai^eif the boy plays alone {without coniftany). Vlomiv ra/y aydfxiTuv \n{yXwTTai/) ivoiri<Tav (ol deal) olav apbpovv ttjc (pwy^y, i. e. ij ruy avbp. yKa>Tra \nfx6ur] iariv^ %v i-Kol-qaav olav k. t. A., they made tlie human tongue only^ capable of \narticulating sounds, X. C. 1 . 4, 1 2. \n\nRem. 7. | When a substantive has two or more ati *. one of which \n\nlimits the other (\xc2\xa7 2G4, 2). one position may be as an Ei,^ g. Oi AAAoi 470- \n\n^ol 6.v^pwnoi, the ot Iter good men ; or the linnting attributive with the article tit: \' r \nstands first, and the second follows with the article and substantive, or ;!ic \nlimited attwibutive with the article stands first, and the limiting attributive fol- \nlows with the article and substantive. \'O vavTixhs 6 rS\xc2\xbby B " \' owy trr i \nr 6 s. Al &K\\ai al Kara rh (rufia i]5 oyal, the other IxKi ires. V]. 1. \n\n565, d. \'Ej/ TOis &\\\\ois To7s ipiois x\'^P^<"\'\xc2\xbb Lys- 281. ( VVlien 6 &\\Xor is \njoined with an adjective used substantively, the article is commonly repe:\'.\'- -^ \ne. g. rSAAa rh iroKiTiKd, X. Ilicr. 9, 5. Ol 6x\\oi ol traparvyx^oyrfs, X. ^\\ \n11.) \'H ovx riKKTTa fiKd^paaa 7} \\ i/JLuSr} s ySffos, Th. 1, 23. \'Er rp tov \nAths T\'p fxeyicmj eoprfj, Th. 1, 126. \'Es airrhv rhy 4ir\\ t^J ardfiart rov Kififvos \nThv erepov Trvpyoy, 8, 90. \'Ej/ rfj apxada rfj 7] fi,(T 4 pa ^ctyp, PI. Cratyl. \n398, b. Th iy \'ApKadla rh rov Aihs \'tfp6y, Rp. 565, d. (The limiting \nattributive can also stand between the substantive and the limited attributive j \nin this case the article is used before each of the t\' \xe2\x80\xa2-. g. ri tc^xI \n\nTO (avTuy ret /uoKp^ OTreTeXfo-oy, Th. 1. 108. (Bu: is omitted with \n\na limiting demonstrative standing between the substantive and the limited \nJ attributive, e. g. Tijy tovtov rairr-qyl r^y i&ou/luuttJjk K6<^aA\'^i\', PI. S}Tnp. 213. e.) \nI Finally, if the limiting attributive with the article is placed first, the limited \n* substantive and its attributive follow, both without the article, e. g. Tlphs rh.s \nndpoi^e (TV iJLCpopas evSai/xoyas, Eur. Ilel. 476. Ta\\os iyw ttjs iv f*axv \n^vfifio\\ris fiapflaSy Ar. Acharn. 1210. \'Atrh rwy iy rfj EvpiltTTi ir6\\fvp \n\'EA.A7J v/5aj\xc2\xbb\', X. H. 4. 3, 15. Tks xnrh Trj Qp^icp olxovaas iroXfij \'EAXi}y(- \n80s, 4. 8, 26. \n\n\n\n4 \n\n\n\nRem. 8. When an attributive participle has a more definite expletive belong- \ning to it, their relative position is as follows : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) \'O Trphs rhv ir6\\eiJ.oy alpf^els <tt partly 6s. \n\n(b) \'O (rTpoTTJ7bs 6 irphs rhy x6K(fioy aipt^els. \n\nWhen there are two of these more definite expletives, one stands either \n\xc2\xbbfter the substantive or after the participle, e. g. TV irpj>s EH^vKoy yfyofitytiy \nwiariv vfiTy, Aeschin. 3, 25. Twk ko^\' u.oas irnrpaypieyoiy koXmv tj^ ir6\\ft, \nDem. 18, 95. Tf^s yvv xmapxov<n\\s avr^ Swet^ews, 4, 4. T^s vop\' iSftwy thn^ \nXa{)aas avrtp rifuis, 20, 83. \n\n\n\ni 246.) ARTICLE WITH PRONOUNS AND NUMERALS. 323 \n\n\n\ni \n\n\n\n(c) \'O aipeatij irphs rhy \'ir6\\efjLoy (T t p ar -qy 6 s. T)]v vvdpxovaav ttj \n\xe2\x96\xa0r6\\\xe2\x82\xaci Svyatiiu, Dcni. 8, 10. \n\n(d) \'O alpf^fls arparriyhs trpin rhy iroKcfiov. T7)r TTposovcav aho^- \niav T<f xpaypLOTif Dem. 6, 8. \n\n(e) \'O irphs rhy \xc2\xbbr (Trparriyhs a I p \xe2\x82\xac ^ \xe2\x82\xac i s (this position is most fi-e- \nquent, when ti ciple has two more detiuite expletives). Tos inrh \nrovTou 0Ka<r<prj fiias e I pij (x 4 y as, IS, 126. Al irph rod (TTOfiaros yrjes \nV av fiaxod \'y^h Th. 7, 23. T^ itphs \\i^vr\\v fiepo s r \xe2\x82\xact pafJLfify o y, 58. \nWhen there are two or more explanatory words belonging to the partici- \nple, th "1 between the artirle and the substantive, e. g. \nT i) y T\' \xe2\x96\xa0 . V*\' f *" So^ay wxapx<"\'^*"\'> l^em. IS, 9S ; or \nthey are so b .that one is placed either before the participle or \nafter it, e. jr. <^. m*^ rovrov kSyoi r6rf ^ifbeyrfs, Dem. 18, 35. \nTavTTjv r^jy airh roii T6irov a<T<piK\xe2\x82\xac lay virapxouaay rfj ircJAet, 19, 84. \n\nRjM. 9. When a participle n^ed substantively has predicative expletives \nioin* it, these are placed u the article and the participle. Thus, \n\nfor c. ,..c, \xc2\xbb/>dT\xc2\xabpoj, \xc2\xbbp\xc2\xabToi, ._ . 1.^-i, CoToTos {lie came Jir^t, etc.), Inicomes : \n\n6 wp6rfpos (vpwTor, ucrrcpor, vtrraros) i.<piK6fi\xe2\x82\xacyos (he who came \njir\\t}] ijitcy afiofiriyfi liecfjiues : 6 iKo>y anaprdyuy] a*\'0 " Wrox: 6 \n\naySptiot yofjil(6fi(yos\\ airrits aSiK(7: 6 avrhs aSiKwy (\' uinj of \n\nhis OU71 accord); roioirds iariy: i r oiovros &y\', fi6yos icriy: 6 fioyos &y. \n\n\xe2\x96\xa0\\Vi . t, ti... ,....,i;. .\xc2\xbb;v.. .vi.i.i.v >\'-;^ts of an adjective and substantive, the a \n\ns Iter the j)arlieiple, e.g. irpalToy Teray- \xc2\xbb \\ \n\nfityos ra^iapx.*\' {^ *\'^^ ^*^ ^^\'\'*^ P^^^\'^^\'^^^J^^^^\'^\'*^*\'\'^^*\'*)\' ^ \n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 2Jr). Use of the Article with Pronouns and Numer- \nals , icith and trithout a Substantive. \n\n1. Tiic article i.> .>unn lum > n>c\'d witii ^.v tsonal substantive \n|}ronouns in the Ace, either when the j)ersonali/tf is to be made \nprominent instead of the person merely, or, what is more fre- \nquent, wlien a person previouslv mentioned is referred to. On \n\ni I iroto9, see \\ 344, KeuL 3. \n\nTiv iavrhv 8^1 xiy^y iA\\a vtfiy^s Kol iyKmfitJi(\xc2\xabnf {his important person), Fl. \nPhaedr. . Atvpo 8^, ^ 8* 8t, fvdit iifiin^. Tlol^ f^V iyw, \\4yus, koI wapk \n\nrlyas roits Vfkas\'{i. C. iicci2 Wr\xc2\xabf tlelv \xc2\xab&roi, ots K4y*it Vf^\')y !*\'\xe2\x80\xa2 L}\'*- 203, b. \n\n2. The article is used with a substantive which has a pos- \nsessive pronoun belonj^ing to it, or tlie Gen, of a personal or \n\neriexive pronoun (\xe2\x99\xa6 245, Rem. 4), when the object is considered \nas a definite one or as relating cxchmcchj to possession; the \njKissessive is placed between the article and the substantive \n[\xe2\x99\xa6 245. 3 (a)|. \n\n\'O itkhs rccT-hp, 6 (rhs Kiyos^ fAy word (a definite or particular one), 6 (fihs TraTr, \ntiiy son (a definite one of .\xc2\xabicveral, or even the only one) ; also 6 \\6yos (tov; rh\xc2\xbb \nVfavTov itcertpa. or rly wartpa rhy fftaurov ;(on the contrary, the article is omitted \nwhen it is to be denoted, tliat the object named belongs to the possessor in \n\n\xe2\x80\xa2mmon with others of the same kind, or when the substantive with the posses- \n\n\n\n324 SYNTAX. [\xc2\xa7 246 \n\ngive is a predicate or in apposition \'. i/xhs a5f\\(p6s or a5i\\<p6s fiov^ a brot/ier of \nwine (it not beinj^ determined which): i^Jibs trais or jtoTs hov. oVtos i<TTL(v) \na.5e\\(phs (t6s or ade\\(p6s uov \\ oZtos, aSeXcphs (/jl6s or a5e\\:p6s fwu. \n\n3. A substantive to which one of the demonstrative pronouns \novTo?, oSc, eKcti/os, and even avros, ipse, is joined, regularly \nhas the article. As these pronouns are not considered as at- \ntributives, but either as substantives (he, iJie nian), or are taken \nin a predicative sense {the man, wJio is Icerc), they stand either \nbefore the article and the substantive, wliich is tlicn in apjx)si- \ntion with the pronoun, or after the article and substantive [corap. \n\xe2\x99\xa6 245, 3 (1j)]; thus: \xe2\x80\x94 \n\novros 6 ay-fip or 6 at/yp ovtos (not 6 olrros ayijp), \n^JSe 7] ypiofxr) or tj yvun-T) tjSc (not t) ^Se yvwixr)), \niKilvos & avrip or <5 aur^p (Kf7vos (not 6 int^yos ayi)p), \n\n(avrhs 6 ^axriXivs or 6 $cun\\\xc2\xabhs ainos (but 6 ainhs fieurtXtvs [seldom (6) fiafff \n\\cvs 6 avrSs] signifies idem rex, the same king). ) \n\nRemark 1. The substantive docs not take the article : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) When the pronoun is used as the snl \' \' *\' i- me \npredicate (!) 244, livm. 1), c. g. avrri i(n. \'\xe2\x80\xa2"- of \na vum), 1*1. ^Ii-n. 71, e. Avrrj tffru iVoki) aitoKu \'is \nauTtj nfyl(rTrt d^ Tols"EWriaiy iyeyfro (tJiis tras i.. -. . i !i. \n\nI, 1 ; hence a distinction must l>e made between rovr^ rf iiHacKaXm \nXpci\xc2\xbb/Tat (/\' \' \xe2\x96\xa0 this teacher), and To\' \'* \'\' \xe2\x96\xa0 \'.- "\' \' \'*<i$ \nman Join \'. TfKfiripiw tovtu < -ri \nreKfiypioy, if ixpyro), X. C. 1. 2, 49. TavT-qy yt - \n\nauTTj fCTii/ ri yywfxr}, 5jv ^X*)* \xe2\x80\xa2\'^\'^\' 2. 2, 12. (If. :.. , . ...^ \n\nsubstantive is to be represented as a definite object or one before-men- \ntioned, it takes the artirle.^e. j;. \'Orore {l^Kodrjis) n ri k6yv iit^ioi, 8Ji \nTwy ij.d\\i(rTa SixoKoyovfxfywv iirnpfvfro, voulivr raiTriy rify oa^xiAtiaM \ntlvai \\6yov (banc esse firman. viz. such a mode \n\nas had been clearly shown by , .\\. . . .\xe2\x80\x9e. ...... ,. ,.. . . 4. 6, 15. \n\n(b) When the substantive is a proper name, e. p^. ovros, ^Ktiyos, axrrhs ^imtpd- \nTTjs. Ev^vSrjixos ovroal, X. C. 4. 2, 3. Hucupirou roinov, Svmp. 2, 3. \nXapixldTjs ouToal, 2, 19. Abrhy Mtywya, An. 1. 5. l."3 ;(or when a common \nname is used instead of a proper name) e. jr. Avrov fi<KriKt^%, An. 1. 7, \n\nII. ^T.itX yr\\v T\'l]vhf t]X^ofxfy (with the \\ i M t Th. 2, \n74. ^The article occurs but seldom, and ; th a den. force. \nTi ZriT iKfiyoy Thy QaKyy davfjuiCofity ] Ar. Nub. 181. T^rSf rir \n\'Iirir^Tji\' /x6Teire)ui^<\xc2\xa3|ue,^a, Her. 5, 91. Corap. 8, 27. \n\n(c) ^^lien the idea of an object is to be expressed absnfutely, the sahstantiro \nwitliout the article is joined with the pronoun avT6s. Comp. 4 244, 1. \nA I\' T ^ S((nroT(ia avrys iovKdas, PI. Parn ^. d. Awt^j hrurrff\' \nfir}s ov fifTfxofjify, 134, b. Ovk avrov S\xc2\xabtz /"^ov, S i<rrt SctfT^nys, \niKciyov SovK6s 4<mv, 133, d. \n\n(d) AVhen ovros di/^p is used to denote emotion, c-:- -n or con- \ntempt, instead of the pronoun <rv. Ovr o<t\\ ayifp ... \xe2\x96\xa0^V i \'cycir; \nEjVe fj.01, S> 2a>KpaTey, ovk euo"x\xc2\xbb\'\'\xc2\xbbTJ oy6,uara ^pfvvy ; ( = \' v (kml \nyou cmsc f) PI. Gorj;. 4S9. b. Ovk ol^ firra A \'^ "I rs, a,\\.\\ &X\\mt \nriyh iptLroL, 2. Ovros av^p ovx inrouiya . ^ jf(Ht,ok \neon you tiot bear to be bentjitedf lb. 505, c \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 246.] ARTICLE WITH PRONOUNS AND NUMERALS. 32d \n\n(e) In passages like Ovroi, ots Sparf, fidpPapoi iroXtfiidnepoi rjfuv l^ffovrcu, X. \nAn. 1.6. 16, the relative clause supplies the place of the article. But \nthere are few passaj^es like: \xe2\x99\xa6\xc2\xab\'p\xe2\x82\xac Xafiuiy x*\'\'\'"*\'*^ M^** Tovrovai and the \nfollowinjr Toc j5\xc2\xab xiTwyas, X. Cy. 8. 3, 6, where the demonstrative is \nused like a ihirtic {that v nts out) adverb {here, there). The poets \n\nvery often omit the artitk ....^ic the prose-\\%Titers must use it.,- \n\nTir.yx. 2. When t\' \xe2\x80\x94 noun ovroi or iKuvoi belonj^ to a substantive having \nthe ;i: ; le and an ;\' e, then these pronouns are often placed between the \n\nattributive and \' uuitive, c. p. Ai ruw T\\(\\oirowJi<Tiw avrai it)\xe2\x82\xacJ, Th. 8. \n\n80. \'H OTfinn ai : ., -ju5, X. An. 4. 2, 6. \'O Aifivs iKfiwos AeW, Ad. H. A. \n7, 48. So S\'twrhs ovros ir4A\xc2\xab/ioj, Luc. de hist, conscr. c. 14. So also with tho \n;.\' \' \' " (^ 24.\'i. T ;i; likewise with iras, SAo^ , C. g. 4 \n\na \xe2\x96\xa0 oiwv iru\' w6Xts. \n\n4. A substantive with which toioCtos, toiosSc, roa-ovi qs, \nTiyXiKovTos, are joined, takes the article placed according to \n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 245, 3 (a), when the quality or quantity designated by these, \nis to be considered as belonging to a definite object, one before \nmentioned or known, or as belonging to a whole class of objects \npreviously named. \n\n*Ap* oSr Sv^uio rhf rotovror ifitftrrop ^Aor yofJ(fw ; (i. C. talem, tpialis antea \nde\xc2\xbbcrif)tuM ai), X. Cj. 5. 5, 3S. TUt hp efo A toioStos iufiip Sicup^ftpot robs \nwiout (i. e. talin rir, qmtdrm deacn\'jmimHM SocnUem)^ C. 1.2, 8. Twr ro<rovrc\xc2\xbbp \nKol roiourmp ieymbMi\' hpMf Ktl VM iXAott \'AJ^ro/oit fxo*^<\' X<^\xc2\xbb\' (>" relation \nto ^N hat precedes), Dcm. Cor. 327, 305. \'Opmf rov$ rriKtKovrovs \xc2\xabpv\\dT- \nroyrat fid\\irra rkf yw^Mas (rrUltnf; to the preceding yfpoi^, but at the same \ntime dcii.\'Tiatinj; the whole class of the ytpmtol), X. R L. 1, 7. So also when \nt 6 Totoirroj, rk roiavra. On the contrary, the article must \n\nI. .1 ;. I ;. ;M.i,.r...:f,\xc2\xbb \xe2\x80\xa2 anyone of those who an- of ^m 1i a \n\nII. a oi/K ky iiraiyoiris. \n\n6. U hi li ird\xc2\xab, raiT*?, oko^ belong to a sub*;tantivp. tho \nfollowing cases must be distinguished: \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) When the idea expressed by the substantive is considered \nas altogether a general one, the article is not used. \n\nI - n\xc2\xab\' \'-^f\'afwof (seldom i^bprnwos \xc2\xbb\xc2\xabf ), evay man (i e. every one to whom \nI llho i :e man licloDgs ; wirr^t Ar.&pw\xc2\xbb<M, all men. So also SKri ir6\\is, a \n\nI KrBOL\xc2\xa3 city, *iKiS \xc2\xabXn, a \xc2\xbbr*ofc ClTT. Then vat in the Rinpular sij^nifies each^ \nI flwy. Ilaj may often be translated by mere, or utter, e. g. \'O \'Epws iv irdtrr) kvap- \n\xe2\x96\xa0 yl^ \xc2\xabal kycitltf C\xc2\xab\'. I\'l- Kp- S\'*. \xc2\xbb\xe2\x80\xa2 nabn-o 470^ Kol KoXa enrfpydCoyrai, Polit. \n\n284, a. \n\n(p) When the substantive to which irS?, Trdn-c? belong, is to \n\nbe considered as a whole in distinction from its parts, it takes \nI *the article, which is placed according to * 245, 3 (a). Here ttSs, \n\nrcuTc? are emphatic. \n\ni \nI \n\ni \n\n\n\n\xe2\x80\xa2 \n\n\n\n326 SYNTAX. [\\ 246 \n\n\'H tiao\'a 7^, the WHOLE earth ; ol irdmes iroXirax, aU citisens without exception. \nThis usage is more seldom than that under (a). This construction occurs also \nwith 8 A. s, but it is still rarer than with irSr, e. g. ri 6\\7i ir6\\is, ir6\\is t] SA.77, the \nWHOLE city. Here the singular ttSs always has the sense of whole. Utipwrbai, \n(xp^) Koivrj <r<i>^iiv ttjv it a tray 2(/ceA(aF, Th- 4, 61. "ESofcv oarroHs ov rovs \nvap6vTas fiSyoy aTroKTf7vou, aXXa K(d rovs Siirayras M it v\\Tiyalovs, 3, 36. Ti \n^\\ov audyKT} ra trdyTa /i ep?; e/ycu, PI. Thcaet. 204, a. ^Ay^pdiroKTi yap ro7t \nTruer I Koivhv TOv^afiapTdueiyy S. Ant. 1023. \'EKfiyws ^i <paiy(rcu, Sirircp rh rov \nrrposdirov fjt.6pia ex^t "trphs rh i\\oy irp6sa)iroy, PL Prot. 329, e. Hence it \nsignifies, m all. Hep-irovcri x\'^^ouy rovs irdvras SirKiras, a Otousand hop- \nlites IN ALL. 2vv\xc2\xab7rA7jpc6i&T7<raj/ vti^s ai Tatrai 6fKa fjui\\i<rra koX cxaroi/, Th. 3, 66. \n\n(y) When the words ttu?, Tratn-c?, intended merely a\xc2\xa3 a more \ndefinite explanation, without any .special emphasis, belong to a \nword denoting a definite object and hence having the article, they \nare then placed according to ^ 245, 3 (b). Tliis is by far the \nmost frequent use of Tras, irdvTc<;. The word 0X09 also is usually \nconstructed in the same manner, in connection wath a substan- \ntive and the article. \n\nol (TTpariurai flKov rh trr par 6"^ (hov Sixar or iray rh ar par 6v\xc2\xab9or, \n01 err par lurai irdvrts or irdvrts ol <rrpariwrai Ka\\ats inax^irarro, \nAicb r}]y ir6Kiv i\\iiy or hik iKr\\y rijy r6Kiy I simply tJtrmigh the whgk \ncity, whorcas 5\xc2\xbbet tV SAtjk irdKiy, throiofh the whoLK city), ^lafimirovci tdyrts \nfis rh Bu^aKTiov oi ar par lurai, X. An. 7. 1, 7. Li inrh r^s \'EAActSor \nwdffrfs i^tots ^ir\' iffrp ^vnd^ta^ai^ r^y \'LXXdHa wtiparioy *l wifly^ X. C 2. \n1,28. \n\n6. Wlien cKooTos, caclu, every, belongs to a substantive, the \narticle is omitted, as ^vith Tras in the sense of each, every, when \nthe idea expressed by the substantive is considered as a general \none ; but when the idea contained in the substantive is to be \nmade prominent, it takes the article which is always placed \naccording to k 245, 3 (b). \n\nKarh r^y rifi4pay \xe2\x82\xacKd(Trr}y, Dem. Cor. 310, 249, or \xc2\xabra&* i Kdariiy riir \n^H^paVy every singie day, but ovk 6\\lya (OtI ko^\' iKdarriy ti fit pay {quotidte^ \neach day, every day, general) roiavra ipay re koI OKovftv, X. C. 4. 2, 12. *A \niKdorrr) tjKikI^ xposreroKrai irouiv, Sirjyrjf\'^SfjLe^tL, X. Ct. 1. 2, 5. Tiipcwowr\' \nrai inrh SfVa avSpoey, ots Aixrayhpos KaT4<m}<r(y iv fKd<rrri ir^A ci, H. 3. 5. 13} \nbut "O ri h-y iy r \xe2\x96\xa0p yfj \xe2\x82\xac Kda-rrj Kokhy fj aya^hv jf , nfur^jaorrat, in eirry simgU \nlatid, Cy. 8. 6, 6. Kal ijyffioiy n^v ^y i S^nriJnjs tKdarTjs ryjs \xe2\x80\xa2ixlaSt An. \n7. 4, 14. \n\n7. AMicii cKttTtpo?, each of tiro, a/x(^ and o/x^orcpo^, bofh^ \nbelong to a substantive, the article is always used, since here \n\n\n\nIf \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 246.] ARTICLE WITH PRONOUNS AND NUMERALS. 327 \n\nonly two krunan, therefore definite objects can be spoken o2. \nThe article is here placed according to k 245, 3 (b). \n\n*E\xc2\xbbl rSt\xc2\xa5 wXtvpAy c ir arc\'pwv, X. An. 3.2, 36, or iirl tKar 4p<itv rur \nrKfvpuy. Ta 2/Ta ikn<p6r \xc2\xab pa or afi(p6T t pa rb. ira. \'Afi<poiy rolv \nX*po\'tp or ro7v x^P""^^ kfk^olv. K<l&* ixar tpoy rhy isir\\oiiy Th. \n4,14 T<f wtI \xe2\x82\xacjeaT\xc2\xab>y, X- Ven. 5, 32. \n\n6. In respect to the pronoun avros and the indefinite pronouns \nor numerals aXXo?) cTcpos, iroXv?, 7rXct\'o>v, 7rX\xe2\x82\xacto"T09, the \nfollowing points are to be observed : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nfa) \'O auT^f gi^itic-^ the same, idem^ e. g. 6 airrhs iy^pontoSf idem homo; rab \nT 6, tJi- same; but 4 iifdpmwps avT6t or tunht 6 iybpvTos, homo ipse. \n\n(ij; \'AAX\xc2\xabt ao/iiu, anotker, ia contrast will {)>$\xc2\xab {ain6s) ; d JtAAof = reliquu^ \nOte other ; oi iWoi = rtliqui, certeri, the rwt, C g. i^ iAAn "EAXor, rdiijua Graeciu \nthe reat of Greece, in contrast with some part before namcil ; oi &xXoi iybpanroi \nthe other men or the othert, in relation to definite individuals. \'\'A \'ApioTe koI o. \n\niWot $voi ^f jUffav ^IXoi, ^\' \' cuui the rest. But \'O VKovs iitf<phn\\ fur \n\niKKmy, Gius a p ptond with \xe2\x80\xa2 \\ contrast with himself; \xe2\x80\x94 Ircpor = one \n\nof two (it not beings determined which), or it forms a contrast with 6 ainis and \notes differmea or camtraM; \xe2\x80\x94 i lr\xc2\xabpof \xc2\xbb the other, i. e. the definite one of \n\no, e. g. ^ fr/^ X\xc2\xab^ ^ *^*V\xc2\xbbf XPi^a* > \xe2\x80\xa2 ^ \' ^ * /\xc2\xbb \xc2\xab \xe2\x80\xa2 io rtf> \xe2\x96\xa0.\xc2\xab. \n\n1\'-^ The following ca\xc2\xabec of voAvi, woXKol are to . , i (a) \n\n\\\\% . roAuf, voAAdl belong to a suMtantive without the article, as voAvs irdi^or, \ntroAA^ mtov^, veX^f A^f, voAAol L^prnwoL, an object is denoted as au indefi* \n!iit\xc2\xab* one, e.g. IloAirr ixovcm wiyow AtfAfif t^i tow f\xc2\xbbTor J^/ai irtpx^i^o* \n[Kj\'-infiwmchtoH).V^ "PI,,..-?.- \xe2\x80\xa2>4l, b. rioAAo) Ardpovroi roi; irAoirroi; 6pi\' \n7fKTai (many hmh, . ut if the object is represented as dennite, or \n\none preriouslr mentioned or known, the article is used with the substantive, \nand woKvt is then placed : (I) as an attributive between the article and the sub* \nr e, \xe2\x80\xa2. g. f voA A^ rvoi/8^ rh kk^f^^ma Vb*1* \xc2\xabr<8/oy (magnwn^ illud, de quo \n\nu ddium, thai grmt maL, of which I Aom jpofan), PI- Thaedr. 248, b. \'tiy vtpi \n\nrhy voxbw K6yoy iwot\xc2\xab7To\'\\raicrr6pas {mtdtum ilium aermimem, e tcnpris ejus \naatis axinitum), 270, a. *Zy rmtt voAAaif yty^ffivi {among the man^f genera- \ntiont mattiomedU Phacdon. 88, a; \xe2\x80\xa2/ voAAol iydpttwoi signifies either the \n^....^ \xc2\xab^ ^...w/ \xc2\xabr a midtitmde of men belonging togethrr in i.nposition to the parts \nalso ol veAAo(, the manjf, the i , the populace, plebs, \n\nor even the moet, tha imajority (in contrast with the separate indivianals), e. g. \n\xe2\x80\xa20\xc2\xabro \xe2\x80\xa2/ ixiyoi robs woKkobt n^i wflomrrts, kkXh Kparovrrts yp^viri {what th\xc2\xab \nfew prexribe to the wtany [the majority] not by permasion but byfurct), X. C.l . 2, 45 , \nrh woXC^ the greaUr part, c. g. Tir woKtfilmy rh n*y woKv (ntyfyy fitpos 5* ow- \nriy irhtrra roU Korit rk Sicpa {mo$t of the enemy remained), X An. 4. 0, 24. What \nIs true of the Positive, is true also of the Comparative and Sui>crlative. \'Eav \nf/Aowi I) iriXiy i^ptKuy 8/tj, wortptft r, -rKtlwy ffxof^h rovrwy fir\xc2\xab/i(A\xe2\x82\xac?(r^a<, \nr^ i,s 4yi> yOp, l> t<^ ij <rw fMKapi(*is \xc2\xab.cut\xc2\xab/x\xc2\xabkv (the ;:rcater leisure, considered \nas a ddiaiic ihmg, or as a definite whole), X. C. I. 6, 9. Ei iiiiov, iirl rointf \n\n\n\nOJ I \n\n\n\n228 SYNTAX. [\xe2\x99\xa6 246. \n\nhyiSiSov, Svcas ifw) iovs fi^tov fi^ iLiroholri vfiiv rh ir\\\xe2\x82\xac7ov. An. 7. 6, 16. "E-rerui \nrp aperfi (TM^ea^ai els rhv irKtiw XP\xc2\xb0^\xc2\xb0^ fj^XKov, ^ t^ Kcuct^, R. L. 9, 2: of \nirKiiovs or Th trxiov signifies the majority in opposition to the minority ( ol ixda- \ntfous), therefore a definite whole; o/ irAfTtrToi, the most, rh xKfiaroffthegreaUM \npart, also to be considered as a definite whole. \xe2\x80\x94 Or, (2) toAuj is joined with \nthe substantive having the article, and is placed according to \xc2\xa7 245, 3 (b) ; \n\'iro\\vs is then to be taken in a predicative sense, e. g. \'Evfl ku>pa iroAAa rk \nKpea (when he saw the flesh tfiat it was much, the flesh in great abundance), X Cy \n1.3,6. :\xc2\xa3,(f>i(ri TO Wb. r a &irop a ^v/jLfiffirtKSra (SC. ipu>yrfs),Th. 1^52. 11 oA- \n\\^v r^v alrlav dxov (they had censure in great abundance, L e. voere very \nseverely censured), 6, 46. \n^ ((l)\'O\\i\'Y0i,few,(i.g.h\\iyoi 6.vbpunroi\\ ol ixlyot^ the fl!W, i. e. cither tho \nfew mentioned, or to be considered as a definite whole, viz., emphatically tha \nOli(/archy, considered as a whole, in opposition to ol iroAAof, e.g. TlpHrfifis \nol M-f]\\ioi irphs fify rh irXrj^os ovk f/yayoy, iy ie raus hpxous Kol toTj oXiyois \nKfyeiy ^KtKfvoy, Th. 5, 84 ; but when only an indefinite idea is expressed by the \nword 6\\iyos, the article is omitted, e. g. TlpoSo^rcu r^y wokiy in^ ixiymr {Inf \noligarclis, not by the Oligarchs). \n\n9. When a cardinal number belongs to a substantive, the \narticle is omitted, if the idea expressed by the substantive is \nindefmite, e. g. rpets ai\'8p\xe2\x82\xac9 rjXBov ; but the substantive takes the \narticle wliich is placed : (a) according to ^ 245, 3 (a), when U|^ \nsubstantive with which the numeral agrees, contains the idea \nof a united ichole ; hence also, when the number of objects is to \nbe represented as a sum-total, after the prepositions <Sfi^ \xc2\xbb^>4 \nCIS, virip ; but the article is here used most frequently, when a \npreceding substantive with a cardinal number agreeing iiith it, \nand without the article, is referred to. \n\nOi rSiv fiaffiXtwy olyox^oi SiS6<uri rois rpiffl SaKTvXois 6xovrT\xc2\xab$ r^ \n; <pid\\riy ^irith the three flngers, i. e. the three generally used), X. Cy. I. 3, 8. ""Hr, \n8tc ^t\'^^uto, atx<p\\ ra v 4 yt-ff Koy^a irri {he had reached abottt the mam of \nfifty years), ^. An. 2. 6, 15. \'Iinr\xc2\xabry \xe2\x82\xac<s Toi>j f er pa.KisxiXiovs ovrcA^ \nyovTo aifT(f, kcu to^Stui els rovs fivpiovs, Cy. 3. 2. 3. To7s Ktpmiftdwu rm9 \netnoffi veSiv ov vapovauv (referring to the preceding words of ILtptcypatM \neXKOffi vavffXv avrovs Tpey^dfieyoiy Th. 1, 49). \n\n(13) But the article is placed according to ^ 245, 3 (b), when \ntlie numeral without any emphasis, is joined with the definite \nobject, merely to define it more definitely, and when the nu- \nmeral had not been previously mentioned, e. g. *Efiaxf<rayro \nol /xcra ricpucXcovs oirXirai ;)(tXtoi or ;(tXiot ol fiera U. ojrXiTOi, tht \n}ioj)liics with Pericles, a tJiousand in number, fougtU, \n\n\n\nI \n\n\n\nft \n\n\n\n\n^ 247. 1 ARTICLE AS A PRONOUN. 329 \n\nRem. 3. The article is frequently omitted with substantives which have an \nordinal numljer joined with them, as the ordinal in a measure supplies the place \n\'<-\xe2\x96\xa0. Tplroy iros rf xoKcfiof irf kfvra (he died the third year)^ Th. \n;up. 3. 25, 88. \n\nThe Article as a Demonstrative and Relative \nK- Pronoun. \n\nI \xe2\x96\xa0 1 . The article 6 r^ r6 had originallj the sense both of a demonstrative and \n\xe2\x96\xa0 ^lativc \n\n\xc2\xbb 2. In : . imeric po\xc2\xabms, the pronoun & if r6 has almost wholly the sense \nboth of a -;i tantive and adjective demonstrative pronoun, which refers to an \nIbject, and represents it as kno^-n or already ppokci Lnf. or brin]p> it bgibfejiie \nl lind of jhfl\xc2\xabJ>C*gri e. g. 11. a, \\2. 6 (he) yip ^A^c boiis ivl y^as \'Axcuwy. 29. \nwh" (^) ^ \'T^ ^^ Kv0t0. Od. \xc2\xabr, 74. ov ydp yuoi btyus iarl KOfit(ffjL(v ov^ airoxifi\' \n\xc2\xab<(y irZpa r6p (that man), Si k\xc2\xab dcoTaiy a-rix^^ox fiojcdptaaiy. Ilcnce, in \nmer, the substantive is found in very manj paggages without the article, \nere later writers, particularly the Attic, would use it, Comp. II. a, 12 seq. \n\nth PI. Kp. 393, e. Yet there are, in V evident traces of an approxima- \n\n>n or agreement of this ftpparent an !i the real article, which was not \n\nlly developed before the time of the Attic writers. Thus in Homer, as in \nthe Attic writers, it gives the force of substantives to adjectives and paniciples, \ne \'J. 6 ipur-r <^\xc2\xbbs, 6 yipaiis; f^o also, rh wply^ rh wp6ab*y (prius) \\ it is \n\nfiuu\'l if! \xe2\x96\xa0\xe2\x80\xa2 ^^\'\'\'\' \xe2\x96\xa0\'\xe2\x96\xa0 -"\' >\xe2\x80\xa2 \'utivc and an attributive adjective or adverb, \n\nll,. ai;: ^cu the article and 6ut>i>tantive, e. g. Twy vpo- \n\nI hdpmv 4rimy, 11. A\xc2\xab 691. T&r 8\xc2\xab^&r 7n\xc2\xabr f , S36. Ol fy*pdt b*ol {. 274. Th ahy y*pas \na, 185. Tk ffhv lUyot \xc2\xab, 207 ; so it b used in case of apposition, e. g. Od. A, 298. \n*al A^r \xc2\xabrbr r^y Tvyiapdov vnpdMotruf. Od. (, 61. iytutrts ol y4oi\\ further, \n^Krrvyts ai wtfi M^^r, 11. X, S35. \'Apipiy riy rArt i, 55*J. TitU ol AoKtoio, Od. w, \n497 ; also with the demonstrative, oi mvytt a2B\xc2\xab r, 372 ; it also lakes the ph\\ce \n>{ the posaessive pronoun, e. g. IL \\, 142. yvy ftiy 8^ row rarp^f iuucta riatrt \naJ.it : /urAcr), and denotes what belongs to an object, e. g. Od. o, 218. \n\ni-fK\'j-j^t.zx. rz rtvx\xc2\xab\'t iratpot^ r^ ^Xaiwf (the rc^ta belonging to the ship). \n\n3. The use of the article as a demonstrative adjective, is not unfrequent in all \ntlie post-Homeric writers (^ 244,6); but as a demonstrative substantive pronoun, * \nit was p uses, throogh every per \' the language; thus: \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) T ... ^ tke amtrary), ^trf fn , ;.v at the beginning of af \n\nS( 1 h iiiy (is qmUtem), 6 8< (U autem), ol S4 (ii autem) very fre- \n\nBquently at the beginning of a sentence; wph rov (v p or ov), formerly ; \noften iral rrfr, Tijr, rf mm, et mm, at the beginning of a sentence, e. g. \nX. Cy. 1. 3, 9. Ka\\ rhy Ktktvveu Sowmu. In connection with Koi, the \nGreek says in the Xom. : iroi \xc2\xabf, md f, ml oT (4 334), but in the Ace. koI, \nT^r, iroi rfiy ] seldom r6 7 \xc2\xab, u/ quidem, r ^, ideo, and the like. . \n\n(b) In such phrases as, r&y jral T6y, rh ical r6,this man andthat man, this | \ntJiimj ami \'\' \xe2\x96\xa0 \' ra Kal ri, vorio^bona et mala. \n\nI (c) It is used ... iy lK?fore a sentence introduced by 8 J, 8<roy or ofoj, \n\nwhich sentence expresses periphrastically the force of an adjective, of \n\n28\xc2\xab \n\n\n\n330 \xc2\xab;yntax. p 24\xc2\xab \n\nespecially, an abstract idea. This usage is confined mostly to Plato. \nPI. Phaedon. 75, b. opeyerai rovH i<TTiv 1<tov ( = tov Xtrov ovtoj), he reaches \nafter thai which is equal. Prot. 320, d. c\'k yns koI irvphs fju^cunts Kai tup \n\'6<ra irvpl Kot 777 Kipduvvrai. Soph. 241, e. cTre fUfirtfiATcoyf etre ^xtyTcuTfjui- \nrap aitTwu fj Kcd irepl nx*\'^^ ruv, iff at irepl ravrd clfft. \n(d) In such phrases as, 6 /ieV \xe2\x80\x94 6 b4, ol fieu \xe2\x80\x94 ol Se^ the one \xe2\x80\x94 tJie other, \ngome, the others. Isocr. Paneg. 41. els fifv rovs vfipi^oyres, to7j St iovKevov- \nT\xe2\x82\xacs, treating some with contempt, and being slaves to other$. Very frequently \nT^ fi4v \xe2\x80\x94 ri 5e, TO fifv \xe2\x80\x94 Ttt 5e, partly \xe2\x80\x94 partly, rfj /i4y \xe2\x80\x94 rp 8c, \non one side \xe2\x80\x94 on the other side. \n4. In the Homeric language, the demonstrative 6 rj to, is frequently used in \nplace of the relative. II. a, 125. aAAa ra fitv iro\\iwv i^(irp<Lbofi(Vf rk itSaartu \n(qiuie ex urbibus pracdati suraus, ea sunt distributa). The relative use was \ntransferred from Homer to the Ionic and Doric writers abo; so the Tragel \ntake this liberty, though very rarely. Her. 3, 81. Ti fiiy \'Oroi^jr \xc2\xab\xc2\xbb\xc2\xbb\xe2\x80\xa2\xc2\xab, X\xc2\xabXfx\xc2\xaby\xc2\xab\xc2\xbb \nKOL/xol Toura * to 5\' is rh irX^-^os &yufy( <p(p(iv rh KpaioSy yvw firfs ttjj kplaryit \nruiipTTiKi. Comp. Larger Grammar, Part IL ^ 482. \n\n\n\n^248. Classes of Verbs. \n\nIn relation to the subject, the predicate can be expressed\' \nin different ways. Hence arise different classes of verbs, \nwhich are indicated by different forms : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(1) The subject appears as active^ e. g. \'O ttcm? ypd<f>\xe2\x82\xaci, \nTO dv^o(; ^dWet. \xe2\x80\x94 But the active form has a two-fold \nsignification : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) Transitive, when the object to which the action is \ndirected, is in the Ace, and therefore apj^ears ^s pas- \nsive or as receiving- the action, e. g. Tutttcd tov ttcuBcl, \nrypd(f)o) rrjv eTnaToXi^v, \xe2\x80\x94 Transitive verb. \n\n(y3) Intransitive, when the action is either confined to the \nsubject, as To dv^o<; ^dWec, or when the verb has an \n"object in the Gren. or Dat, or is constructed with a \npreposition, e. g. ^ETrt^vpo) r?}^ dp\xe2\x82\xacTyj<;, xat\'po) ry ao \n^aEi^o) \xe2\x82\xac69 T7]v TToXiv, \xe2\x80\x94 lutransitive verb. \n\n(2) Or the subject performs an action which is confined \nto, or is reflected upon itself, e. g. TinrrofjLaij I strike my- \nself ; ^ovXevofMai, I advise myself, or I deliberate ; tvttto- \n(xac T7)v K\xe2\x82\xac(f>a\\}]Vy I strike my own head ; KaTcurrf>\xe2\x82\xac(f>ofjuu rijv \n771/, I subjugate the land far myself ; dfivvofuu tois TroXefU\' \n\n\n\n4 249.] CLASSES OF VERBS. ACTIVE FORM. 33i \n\now, I keep off the enemy from myself, \xe2\x80\x94 INIidcUe or Reflex- \nive verb. \n\nr " \' " \xe2\x96\xa0 \\ " \xe2\x96\xa0 \xe2\x96\xa0 b_v two or T- \'\xe2\x96\xa0 ts \n\nOil . . . tAfi\'oi^ai, tit\' . ch \n\nOther, ii is called a reciprocal action, and the verb, \xe2\x80\x94 Keciprocal verb. \n\n(3) Or the subject appears as receiving the action, i. e. \nthe action is performed upon the subject, e. g. 01 o-TpaTicorai \n\\rrro rcov TroKe/iicop iSiw^ijaav, were pursued, \xe2\x80\x94 Passi^e verb. \n\nIRkm. 2. The Act. and Mid. have complete forms. For the Pass., the \nG: - only ; >es: the Fut. and Aor. All the other passive forms \n\narc .i.vii^ated by li.v^ ..*..., since the passive action was considered as a reflexive \none. \n\nRemarks oh the Classes of Vi:i:ns. \n\xe2\x99\xa6 249. A. Active Form. \n\n1. Many active verbs, especially such as express motion^ \nbesides a tran.sitive siirnilicalion, have an intransitive or reflex- \nive sense. (So in 1" !i, as he lemls, the birds move, Vie car- \nriage breaks, Uie snotc melts, wliich have also a transitive sense ; , \n80 the Lat. vertere, mutare, dechnare, etc.) \n\n\'Ax^pcy voTo^t itfiiKKnt is riip Xlfi^Vf Th. 1,46. \'H B6K0ri Klfuni m ri - \n9i\xc2\xa5 i% ddXaaeay, 4. I<>:J. \'tyybs ^yf ol \'ZXXif^ts (comp. to draw near), X. \nAn. 4. 2, 15. So aUo ik^dytip, to go back, to withdraw; iiiyttw, perstare, to \noon/iNM^, are found in proM.*. \xe2\x80\x94 \'EAavrtiv or ikavvtiv Twtry (X. An. 1.8, 1), \nto ride ; \xc2\xab-pojtXavr\xc2\xabir, adetfuiiatt, to ride vp to. \xe2\x80\x94 Many compounds of fidWtty, \n\n\xe2\x80\xa2^. infiAkKti\xc2\xa5 And tl$fidKK9ir, to fall into, to emptt/ (of A Ti\\er); infiiK- \nA* ly, to spring forih, to ptU forth (of plants, etc.) ; fitrafidkKtty (like mutare), \niia$dKKtty,tocro$$ocer; wpes$dKKtty ripi, to male an attticLupon; avfi- \n(iiKXfiw ruf{,mamu eomterert, to engage in combat with; iwt$dKKttp, to fall \nupon; iwipfiaKkttv, to exceed, to be prominent. \xe2\x80\x94 Kkiytty and it\xc2\xab com- \npounds, e. ^. i-rucklyttp, to incline to nmeUkiag ; krottkit^etp, declinare. \xe2\x80\x94 Tptwt i v, \nlike vtrtrrr ; i-wiry"" ^ permittere, to entrdU one\'s self to. \xe2\x80\x94 Irpt^tiy (like \nmtUart) and its ci U. \xe2\x80\x94 n r a / ti r, to strike against, to stumble ; wporrraifiu, \n\nas ftrydkms wposi-rranray, thry suffired a tottd shiptcreck (Her. 6, 95). \'AiraA- \nkdiTTfiy, togetoff, escape. \xe2\x80\x94 C< \xe2\x80\xa2 ! s of 8 1 8 rf r a i, as Mi^Syai, to dischanje \n\nittetf (o( % stream); iwiiiMyeu, ;\xe2\x96\xa0/- nrr. fo incretisr, adinnce. \xe2\x80\x94 Compounds of \nI4yat, e. p. kyttyat, to rrlax, U rrmias: i<ptivat (<c. iavrhv) 1<tx*^PV 7\xc2\xbb^<^"\'\'* (*^^dul- \ngereY V\\. Rp. 388. e. Com|K>unds of iiicyiy^ ynyyvvai, as aufifilayfiv, \ncommisctri ; wposfityyvyai, to fvjht with, als** \xc2\xab/ e.g. wpostpii^ay ry \n\nT\xc2\xab(x\xc2\xab\'i \'^\'*>- 3. 22. Alptty, to get under irt/y, \xc2\xbb\xe2\x99\xa6/ ""i i"i -uijjs, to Wi\'ujh anchor), \nalso compounds, e. p. oi $dp$apoi iir^por ^ic r^s Ai}kov (to set sail), Her. 6, 99 ; \niyraiptiy (sc. x\xc2\xabV") \'^"\'^ \'<> 7\'!/\'\'\' \xe2\x80\xa2\'\xe2\x80\xa2*\'^> ^ uitlistand. \xe2\x80\x94 ivyd-miy, manus aw \n\n\n\n332 SYNTAX. ^ [^249. \n\nserere. \xe2\x80\x94 "Exetv, to land; ex^^v tiv6s {desistere), Th. 1, 112; ^x^iv with adverbs, \nas eS, Ka\\S)s, KaKus, like bene, male fiabere ; cxc" ati<pi ri, in cdiqua re occupatum \nesse; Trposex^iv (sc. vovv), attendere, to give one^s attention to, or appellare, to land; \nirpoex^ii/, praestare ; iTrex^iv, se sustinere, or expectare, in mente fiabere, e. g. hrti- \nXov arpaTeiea-^ai. ; Korexeiv, se retinere, also to land; irapf\'xeti\', e. g. rp fwvanc^f \nmusicae se dare ; aTre\'xeti\', to be distant from ; avrex^iv, resistere. \xe2\x80\x94 Tlpirr \xe2\x82\xaciy with \nadverbs, e. g. eS, KanSis, or with the Ace. of adjectives, e. g. icaAet, Koxd, to fare \nwell or ill. \xe2\x80\x94 Aiarpifieiv (consumere), versari, to employ one\'s self \xe2\x80\x94 Compoands \nof <p4peiu, as hia<p4pfiVy to be different, differre; inrep<p(p\xe2\x82\xaciv (eminere) irKovrcc. \xe2\x80\x94 \n\'AvaXaix^dveiv, refici, recreari. \xe2\x80\x94 O t k c T v, administrari, e. g. ir6\\is oIk(7 {the \nstate is managed), Plat. \xe2\x80\x94 TeXfvrav, to end, to die. \xe2\x80\x94 Karop^o vy, to succeed. \xe2\x80\x94 \nNiKciv, to prevail, e. g. iviKu t] x^\'P\'^*\' \'"\'\'\xc2\xab\'\'\' yvoofi^wv (like vincit sententia), Her. \n6, 109. \'EWeiir eiy, officio suo decsse ; aTroAefiret*\', to remain behind, *tc. \n\n2. Several active verbs "with a transitive signification, which \n\nform both Aorists, have in the first Aor. a transitive, but in the \n\nsecond Aor. an intransitive sense : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n8ua>, to wrap up, first Aor. fBOtruy I urrapped up, second Aor. Owr, I vent m, \nXffTrjfjLt, to plac( (aTr]<Ta, I placedy " (rrriv, I stood, \n\n<pv(i), to produce, " (<pv<Ta, I produced, " i<pvi>. I was produced, \n\nff/ceWcD, to make dry, " {taKr\\\\aj poet. / make dry), " ^<rKAify, / withered. \n\nSo several active verbs with a transitive signification, which \nform both Perfects, have in the first Perf a transitive, but in the \nsecond an intransitive sense : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\niydpo), to unke, first Pf iyfiytpKa, I have awakened, sec\'d Pf. f/p^yopo, lam awabt, \niWvfjLi, perdo, " oKwKeKa, perdidi, " tKttXoj perii, \n\nirei^a, to persuade, " ireveiKa, I have persuaded, \'\' wirot^aj I trust., \niivolyw, to open, " &i/ea\'xa, / have opened, " kyft^ya, I stand open \n\n(f, 187.6), \nvpdTTO}, to do, " TTivpaxo-i J ^(ive done^ \'\xe2\x80\xa2 -riwpaya (8C. eJ), / \n\nfart wed. \n\nMoreover some second Perfects of transitive verbs, which do \n\nnot form a first Perf, have an intransitive sense : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n6.yvviii, to break, second Pf feya, lam broken., \np-nyvvij.1, to tear, \'\xe2\x80\xa2 ip^xaya, I am torn, \n\nT-f^KQ}, to smelt (iron), " Tenjuro, lam smelted, \n\nirfiyyvfjn, to fasten, " iriirrtya^ I am fastened^ \n\nff^u, to make rotten, " ffe<nrra, I am rotten^ \n\n<f>alvo), to show, " Tfipifrat I appear. \n\nRemark 1. The Vnss. a \\ la KOfx a i, to U- taken, h&s an : form in the \n\nPerf and Aor., viz., (d\\wKa, I have been taken, edKwy, I u . ( ^ 161, 1 ). \n\n3. Intransitive active verbs are sometimes used in the p}ace \nof the passive. \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 250.] CLASSES OF VERBS. MIDDLE FORM. 333 \n\nThis is particularly the case with ir(\xc2\xa3(rx\xe2\x82\xac*>\', Iff ITT 6 tv, </>\xe2\x82\xacV76i J/, \xe2\x82\xac 5, Ko- \nKws cLKovfiy, bvqiTKfiVf more seldom rfXivrav. These active verbs \nwith inrh and the Gen. are very commonly used instead of the passive of such \nverbs as aZiKiiv^ pi-wmv or ^oAAeti\', StwKeiv, /erfiVeij/ ; ^vrivKftv in certain forms \nis always so used (\xc2\xa7 161, 13). Me7aAa ireertfvTa [eversa. were destroyed by) \nVfyffYfiaTa vvh rjffaoi/uy. Her. 7, 1 8. Afiv6T\xe2\x82\xacpoy 4v6fii^oy elycu kokws inrh Twy \nwokiTcoy itKovftv {audire, they thought it worse to be evil spoken of by the citizens)^ \nff KaXusvwfprrjs ir6\\fois aiTobyijaKeiyf Jsocr.\'P&TieQ. 56,77. So 4 KiriirT fiy vx6 \nrivos., expelli ab aliquo ; very often <p(vy(iy vir6 Tiyos,fugari ab aliquo, to be put \ntojlifjht by some one, or in a judicial sense, accusatum esse ab aliquo, e. g. atrePeias \n^evytty vwS Ttvos, to be accused by some one of impiety. Ev, koxws tt a r x \xc2\xab \nvir6 (Tov, I am benejited, injured by you. \'EtcXcwttjo-ov v \'Abrjyalwy \nlinter/ecti sunt), Her. 6, 92. \n\nRem. 2. It will be seen (^ 279, Rem. 5) that intransitive active /erbs are \nf\'^quently used in poetrj\' in a transitive sense, e. g. iLarpdirrtiy <r(\\as, ^aivny \nirdSa. \n\nRem. 3. The transitive active is not unfrequently used, when the subject \ndoes not itself perform an action, but causes it to be performed by another; \nyet this usage is admissible, only when it is evident from the context or from \nthe nature of \' \xe2\x96\xa0 = \xe2\x80\xa2 \xe2\x96\xa0 ;,.pj ^qq% not itself perform the action. X. \n\nAn.l.4.1<>.K \' Ko^f KaX^a. ^oaiKfia Ka.T i Kav a tv, caused \n\nto be \' So Irequently arroKTfiyfiy, ^dirrny, oiKoSo^ifTy and similar exam- \n\nples ; o;. w. ulso iiicuTKfty, -rouStvfty (comp. Tl. Trot. 320, a. 324, d. Meuon. 94, b). \n\n{250. B. MirJfUr Form. \n\n1. Tlie Mid. denotes an ;u uuji, wiueu is performed by the \nsubject, and is ngn^in reflected upon it or is confined to it. Two \ncases are here to be distinguished : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) The Mid. denotes, first and most frequently, an action \nwhich the subject performs upon an object witliin its own \nphere, i. e. upon an object belon^ng to the subject, connected \nwith it, or standing m any near relation to it. In Englisli, this \nrelation of the Middle voice is expressed by a possessive pro- \nnoun, or by the preposition to or for with a personal pronoun. \n\nTvwTofULi, iTv\\i><iur)y t^jk KftpaXTiy^ I strilx, I struck my own head {rvwrfiy \xc2\xab., to \nstrike the head of anotfier) ; kovacurdat robs irttSar, to wash one\'s own feet {\\oveiu t. \nw., to uxisli the feet of another) ; oTroKpin^atrdcu rk iavrov, to conceal one\'s own \naffairs; ir(pip^]^aabtu x\'TcDvo, suam vestem, to nnd one\'s own garment {-irfpi^ftrj^ai, \nalius, that of anothtr) ; \xc2\xbbapa<rx<Vd<u ti, to give someUdng from one\'s own means, to \nfurnish of one\'s self, as yavst hence also to sliow, e. g. tCyoiay "Koptx^obai (on tlio \ncontrary xapix^iy riy\\ irpayfiaTa, <t>6$oyy etc., to cause trouble, fear, etc., to some \none) ; \xe2\x80\x94 axo5<i{curdaI ti, e. g. tpyov, - \' : . Ivvafj-iv, to show one\'s own work; etc. ; \niirarYytiKac2>cu ti, to promise; in a n ^ ^1 relation : yflfiaa-^al ti, ahquid inter \nse partiri, to divide something teith each other, so fitplaaa^ai ; \xe2\x80\x94 iroi-naac^ai ti, to do \n\n\n\n334 SYNTAX. [^ 250. \n\nor make something for one^s self, e. g. elfyfivrjy, (Tirovdds (irote\xc2\xab\', to do or accomplish), \nvoirjcraa^ai irSAe/MOV, to carry on war ; errt/teAetov, to use care ; &,yecr^cu yvvcuKa, to \ntake a wife for one\'s self, to marry ; kXetr^ai ri, sibi sumere, hence to choose, prefer; \ndpaa-^ai ri, to take up for one^s self, to lay on one^s self {aXp^iv ri, to take up something \nin order to lay it upon another) ; alr-fjoraff^al ri^ to ask for one\'s self {ahelv, to ask) ; \nirpd^cur^ai xp^A^aTci riva, sibi ab aliquo pecuniam exigere ; /xia^oxraa-^ai, conducere, to \nhire for one^s seif (hnt fjuc^axrai, locare, to let out) ; fieTaireiJAl/acr^ai, to cause to come \nto one\'s self, to send for ; KaracTpii^aa^ai, KarahovKdicraxTbai yrju, sibi subjicere ter- \nram ; avapriicracr^ai riua, sibi devincire, to make dependent on one\'s selfi avoKvcraa-^al \nrivat to free for one^sself to ransom; iropiaao\'^ai n, sibi aliquid comparare {Tropi(eiv \nri Tivi, alii aliquid comparare), KOfx.la\'ao\'^ai, 6 g. UhaTaieis iraTdas Kai yvua7Kas \niKKiKOfjkiff (xepot ^<rav is ras \'A^vas, Th. 2, 78; KTrjcraabai, TrapaarK\xe2\x82\xacvd<ra<r- \n^al ri, sibi comparare ; ^ea^ai and ypatpaa-^ai vSfxovs are used of one who makes \nlaws for himself, or of a law-giver, who is himself, also, subject to the laws \nwhich he has made for others ; on the contraiy, ^^Ivai and ypdy\\iat v6fiov are used \nof one who is not subject to the law which he has made, or generally of one \nwho gives laws to others, without expressing any further relation, e. g. "Exots \n%v elire?}/, Sri oi ^.v^ptairoi rovs aypdcpovs vS/xovs e^evro] \'Eyu fiev ^eovs olfuu \n-Tohs vSftovs Toirovs to7s av^puirois ^eTvai, X. C. 4. 4, 19; \xe2\x80\x94 afivycur^ai robs xoAe- \nfilovs, propulsare a se hostes, hence to defend one\'s self against any one {aixvveiVy \nproperly to ward off, then to help) ; Ti/xwpria-aa-^ai n, to revenge one\'s self on some \none, to punish him {Tifxwpeiv rivi, to help one) : rp^i^aa^ai, to put to flight; aTrciaour- \nJ^at KUKd, a se propulsare mala ; airoirefjApaa-^al riva, a se dimittere ; airoffilaaxTbai \nri, a se depellere ; irapaiT-iiaaa^ai, deprecari; Sia^ea-^ai, aTrod6a^ai, to sell; airo- \nrp4\\\\/a(r^ai, arrofiaXecr^ai, airoKpovaaa^ai. Several Deponent IMiddle verbs also \nbelong here (\xc2\xa7 102, 3). \n\n(b) The Middle denotes, second, but much more seldom, an \naction which the subject performs immediately on itself, so that \nthe subject is at the same time, also, the object of the action. \nThe English here uses the active verb ^vith the Ace. of the \nreflexive pronoun, e. g. rvTrro/xat, I strike myself; irvij/aiJi-qv, I \nstruck myself. Here belong particularly the following verbs: \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n^Airdy^ai rivd, to strangle some one; air dy^aa^ai, to strangle one^s self; \nri^a<T^ai, KSypacr^ai, to strike one\'s self; Kv\\pa<T^ai, to bend one\'s self \ndown; o\'lKlcraa-^ai, migrare; eTrijSoAecrS-ot, to apply or devote one\'s self to \nsomething ; irapaffKevdcraa\'^ai, se parare ; rd^aa^ai, to place one\'s self in \norder of battle, e. g. ovTa fx\\v KepKvpcuoi ird^avr a, Th. 1, 48 : [but also tofr or \nestablish for one\'s self according to No. (a), e. g. rd^aa-^ai <p6po>, to agree to pay \ntribute;] rrpos^4<r^ai, se adjungere, to agree with; \'la-raa^ai (crr^vcu, iirrdvcu) \nand its compounds, to place one\'s self [but also according to No. (a), sibi potiere, \nto place for one\'s self, e. g. TpSiraiov] ; dpfilaraa-^ai, Ku^op /xia-aa-^ai, to lana \n(comp. Th. 4, 15): KVKXacraa-^ai, to encircle (comp. Th. 5, 72), but kvkXu^^- \nvai, to form a circle or place one\'s self in a circle; rpatrea-^ai [not TpSpcur^cut \n\xe2\x96\xa0ee No. (a)], to turn one\'s sdf[Th.. 5. 29, 73) ; iyyviiaacr^ai^ topiedgeones self. \n\n\n\n^250.] CLASSES OF VERBS. MIDDLE FORM. 336 \n\n7rai<ra<r^ai, to cease (from rrava), to cause to cease) ; del^acr^at, to show one\'s \nself; particularly verbs which express an action performed by the subject upon \nhi^ own body, e. g. Kova aa^ai, viypaa^ai, a\\ei\\pa(r^ai, xP\'o\'ao\'i^aj, \n(wffaff^ai, yv/Mvaaacr^ai, Ka\\v\\l/aff^ai, ko fffji^ffaff^at, ajU^teVoa- \n^ai, iySvffaa^ai, iKSvaaa^aiy Keipacr^ai, air ofjt.6p^a(T^ai, se abster \ngere; airofiv^aa-^ai, se emungere ; airoyprjo-aa^aii se ahstergere; are<pa- \nydxraa^ai; (TTeiXaa^ai, to get ready, to Jit one\'s self out; also some few \nverbs which in the Mid. express internal, mental action, e.g. <pv\\d^a<T^ai, to \nbe on one\'s guard, to be cautious (but (pvKaTTeiv rivd, to guard some one) ] rj/rjtpl- \n(Taa^aijto determine or decree by vote (but rprj(plCeiv, to put the vote) ; fiovKev- \neaabai, to deliberate, to advise one\'s self {hnt )8ou\\euetj/ rivi, to advise some one) ; \nyfixraa^aif to taste (yeveiVj to cause to tast-e, to give a taste of) ; t ificop^car\'- \n^ai, to avenge; the reciprocals ^taKaraXvaaa^ai iTp6s riva, to be reconciled \nto any one ; <Tvv^4a-^ai, to bind one\'s self to agree with any one ; aTreiaraa^ai, \nto make a treaty, peace with; airoo\'x^o\'^a.iy to restrain one\'s self, to abstain \nfrom; several compounds of 7riiJ.i, e.g. i<pic<T^ai, to strive; ixplea^ai, to \nyield, be remiss ; fxe^iea-^aiy to neglect, be remiss ; aurnr oi-qaaa-^ai rivosy to \nstrive for something; avr iXafiea^ai riv6s, to lay hold of something. Here \nbelong, also, most Deponent j\\Dddle verbs (\xc2\xa7 197, Rem. 2). \n\nRemark 1. This immediate reflexive relation is expressed also: (&) by middle \nverbs with a Pass. Aor.. e. g. ZiaXv^iv, to separate, hidkv^rivai, Sia^vtrea^ai, to \nseparate one\'s self discedere (see \xc2\xa7 197, Rem. 3); (b) by the active form, e.g. \nfierafiaWfiv, to cliange one\'s self {see \xc2\xa7 249. 1) ; (c) by the active form with the \nAce. of the reflexive pronoun, e. g. iiraipeli/ kavrSu, avaprav eavrSu, to attach one\'s \nself to, to make one\'s self depend on any one ; airoKpinmiv ka\\n6v, ^hiC^iv kavT6v, \nirapiX^Lv (ia\\rr6v, airoKveiv eavrov, to free one\'s self, airoacpaTTeiy kairrou, aTroKTei- \nvfiv kavT6v ; the Mid. then has the signification of the Pass. ; thus, ^-naiveiffbai, \nk-JTOKTiiviahai, airoa-cpaTTfaf^ai, laudari. interfici, jugular i ab alio, and has for its \nAor. and Put. a Pass. form. / Sometimes the active form with the reflexive \npronoun is used, even wlien tfV verb has a middle form. This mode of expres- \nsion is very natural in antithesis or contrast! e. g. \'E^pevev airh Imrov, dirSre \nyvixvatrai kavt 6v re KviX revs tirirov s, IS.. All. 1. 2, 7. \n\nRem. 2. The Mid. in the same manner as the Act. (\xc2\xa7 249, Rem. 3), can be \nused, when the subject does not itself perform an action, but causes it to be \ndone by another. There is this difference, however, in the two cases, that in \nthe ^lid. the action always refers, in some way, to the subject.] \'O irarrjp tous \nira?Sas eS<5a|aT0 (e7roi5eu<raTo), which signifies either, the father Educated the chil- \ndren for himself, or, if it is dear from the context, he caused them to be educated \n(as X.C. 1. 6,\'^2 ; on the contrar}-, SiSda-Keiy, TraiSevny are used without referring \nback to the subject. \xc2\xa7 249, Rem. 3) ; Kelpaa-^ai, to shave one\'s self or to get shaved. \n\'Apyc7oi (r<peci}y flK6uas TToir](rdfj.evoi (haviiig caused to be made) avc^eaau is \nAe\\(povs, Her. I, 31. Uau(ravlas rpdweCap nep<TiKr]v irapeTiSreTO {caused to be \'set \nbefore him), Th. 1, 130. Oi AaKeSaifioyLOi K-npvKa ir^^v^^avT^s tovs v^Kpovs Zi^KO- \nfilffavT {caused to be removed), 4, 38. \n\nRem. 3. The reflexive relation of the middle to the subject, is often so \nslight, that in our mode of considering it, it almost disappears, and sometimes \nconsists only in a very gentle intimation, that the action will be completed to \nthe advantage or disadvantage of the subject, e. g. II. o, 409. ovre irore Tpwes \nAcLvauv ihvvain-o <pd\\ayyas ^rf^dfievoi {in suum commodum) KXiairitTi jxiyitfx^uai. \n^ence the reflexive pronoun is not seldom used with the middle, particularly \nin antitheses, in order to bring out emphatically the reflexive sense which \nexists in the middle only in a general and indefinite manner,)e. g. Heyo^wF \n\n\n\n/ \n\n\n\n336 SYNTAX. [i 251. \n\n/3ouA.6i5eTot eavT(^ ovofia Kcd. Zvvafiiv Trepnroi\'f}<raa\'^ai (to gain a name and \npower for himself ) X. An. 5. 6, 17. \'ETredei^avro ras avrwv aperds, Isocr. \nPaneg. 58, 85. \'Va^vfiov avro7s kut e(rT-f]<xavT o tov fiioi/, 6-3, 108. Tr}y \nifiavTov yvdfxriy utt ocpaiv 6 fxe yos. Id. ^ermut. 309, 22. \n\nE.EM. 4. In many verbs, the active and Mid. appear to have a similar sig- \nnification ; but on a closer investigation, the difference in the meaning is \nobvious ; the active expresses the action absolutely, or objectively, without any \naccessary idea ; the middle, on the other hand, expresses the same action in \nrelation to the subject, or subjectively. Hence, the middle is employed when \nthe literal meaning is changed into the figurative, e. g. 5lolk\xe2\x82\xac7i/ of an outward \narrangement, dLoiKeicr^at. of mental ; Spi^eiy literally, 6pi(\xe2\x82\xac(r^ai figuratively ; \nffra^fiau only in a literal sense, to measure, but ara^fxaffbai also in a figurative \nsignification, to weigh or measure in one\'s mind, aliquid secum perpendere ; aKoiriiv\\ \nto look at something, aKoir^Tcr^ai, to look mentally, to consider ; so in derivative/ \nverbs in -ewoj and -evo/xai, the active form is used absolutely, to be in a certain \nstate ; the middle, on the other hand, signifies, to act the part of that which is \nindicated by the root, to show one\'s self as such, to have the tendency or habit, to act \nas such, e. g. irovnp^vu}, to be bad, irovr^pevo/iai, to demean one\'s self badly ; iroXt- \nrevco, to be a citizen, iroXiTtvofxai, to live and act as a citizen ; Tafxidu, to be a \nmanager, rafiievofMai, to conduct busi)iess, to arrange, especially in a metaphorical \nsense, e. g. tovs vd/xovs : a-rpaTevco, to undertake an expedition, used of a general or \na state, crTpaTevofiai, to engage in an expedition, used of the soldiers. ^Derivatives \nin -i^ofjiai correspond in sense to those in -tvoiuu, e. g. aaTet^ofiai, to demean my- \nself as a citizen ; x\xc2\xabP\'f\xc2\xbb\'\'\'\'\'C<\'/^\xc2\xab*> \'<\' o^i *" ^\'^ agreeable manner. Still, derivatives \nin -i^w, from names of nations, reject the middle, e. g. Supi^w, to demean myself or \nto speak like a Dorian. \n\nKem. 5. Several verbs which in the active have a catisative sense, in the \nmiddle have a simple intransitive sense, though some of them are constructed \nwith an Ace, e. g. cpo^qcrai, to cause to fear, (po^rjcraa^at, to fear ; alax^vau, to \nmake ashamed, alaxwelaSrai, to be ashamed, to feel shame ; Tropevaau, to cause to \ngo, to convey, irop^vaaabai, to go; Trepaiaxrai, to cause to pass over, irepcudoaeer^auy \nto pass over ; Koifxrjaai, to cause to sleep, lull to sleep, KoifjiT^aaar^ai, to sleep ; vavacu., \nto cause to cease, iravaaa^ai, to cease; ir\\dy^ai, to cause to wander, ir\\dy^\xe2\x82\xaca-^cu, \nto wander, etc. \n\nRem. 6. The middle fonn, as already stated (\xc2\xa7 248, Rem. 1 ), is often used \n\nto express reciprocal actions. This is particularly the case with verbs signify- \ning to contend, vie with, converse icith. embrace, salute, to make an agreement or com- \npact, e. g. fidx^o-^ai, to fight with ; a/iLWacr^cu, to contend with ; aywvi^etr^cu., to \nstrive; dia\\4y\xe2\x82\xac(T^ai, to converse ivith : cKTird^^cTbai, to salute; ravra (rvvrL^er\' \nmutually to agree on these points ; (rnovSas a-rreySsa^M or iroKla^ai, to make a : \n{airovdas iroieiv signifying to make a libation). So also, where the action is not \nstrictly reciprocal, but where the idea expressed by the verb necessarily sup- \nposes two persons or two parties, as in questions and answers, e. g. trwbiLveabaj. \nand epea^ai, to inquire; airoKpiu\xe2\x82\xac(r^ai and aTrafiei^sa-^cu, to answer; (rvfj.^ov\\ev- \nfor^ai, to consult with one, ask his advice, and ayaKoivov(T^ai, to consult one (aycucoivovv \nbeing especially used of consulting oracles). \n\n\xc2\xa7 251. C. The Passive. \n\n1. From the reflexive signification of the jNIiddle, the Passive \nis derived. Here the subject receives the action from another \nupon itself, \xe2\x80\x94 permits the action to be performed upon itself \nHence the subject always appears as a passive or suffemi^ \nobject. \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 251.] CLASSES OF VERBS. THE PASSIVE. 337 \n\nMauTTiyovfiaif (tiixiov/jlcu (inrS rivos), I receive bloivs, punishment, I let myseJf be \nstruck, punished = I am struck, punished (by some one) ; $KdirTOfj.ai, adiKovfiai, \nI suffer injury, injustice; diSda-KOfiai, I let myself he instructed, I receive instruction, \nI learn, hence xm6 nvosyfrom some one = doceor ah aliquo; -n-d^o/xai, I persuade \nmyself, or / permit myself to he persuaded, inr6 tivos, by some one = / am per- \nsuaded. \n\n2. Yet, there are but two tenses, the Fut. and the Aor., which \nhave special forms to express the passive sense of an action ; \nthe remaining tenses are expressed by the Mid. \n\n3. Hence the following rule : The Fut. and Aor. Mid. have \na reflexive (or intransitive) sense only; but all the other tenses \nof the Mid. serve at the same time for the Passive also. \n\nRemark 1 . Still, the Fut. Mid. has sometimes a Pass, sense also. The reason \nof this may be foimd in a great measure in the shorter form of this Fut. compared \nwith that of the Fut. Pass. This passive use of the Fut. Mid. is found most \nfrequently with Pure verbs ; much more seldom with Mute verbs, and very sel- \ndom witli Liquid verbs (probably not at all in Attic prose), j MacmycixreTai, \n<rr pe fikdcr tT ai, SfSTjcerai, iKKav^cnrai Twcp^aXjJLW, reXevToiy irdvra kuk^ \nva^ojv OLi\'curKtvSvKfv^afTai, PI. K)). 361, C. Tt; twu xPVf^o^\'\'\'^^^ (nrdvei K(a\\v- \n(Tovrai, Tb. 1. 142. "Hj^ tij ^ov\\ri^ KaKhs yevea^ai, KoXaa^TiaeraL tt} Trpeirovar] \n^riixia\' oi 5t ayai^ol r i ixr] a ovt ai rols nposriKov(Tiv &^\\ois ttjs apeTrjs (hut the \nbrave shall be honond with the bejittimj rewards of valor), 2, 87. Ilept tuv (rcpere- \npceu (ppovpiuv, us iTTifiovXevaofievuv, troWaKis vpay/jLaTa elxoy, X. C. 6, 1, \n10. El p^6fie^a {includemur). X. 2\\.n. 6. 6AG. "H yi] ev <pv\\d^ erai inrh ruv \n^povpovvruv, OvK ay voovyrcs, Sri eveSpevaoivTO vnh twv iro\\\xe2\x82\xac/j.ici}v, H. 7 . 2, \n18. Very commonly d 5<k7J o- o /.tat, ip^o/xai (from fipx\'\xc2\xab\'> ""/^^\'"o), )SAa\xc2\xbb/\'o- \n/xai, ^ p(\\i/oiJLai. So always a.\\wao/j.ai. Some verbs have both forms \nof the future, as, e. g. b}<f>\xe2\x82\xac\\(7i/, (rmiovu, arepuy, <po^ui/, dyeiv ; then the Mid. \nform seems to denote a condition, the Pass, an action received. But in very \nmany instanrc.\xc2\xab, the Pass, sense is only apparent, e. g. \'H ttJAjs ^pax^a ria^^lcra \nfifydXa Crjfi ucTfTai, shall sitjftr great loss therefor, in contrast with ^pax^a \n7)ir^., Th. 3. 40. 2oD ^wyros, fie\\Tiov bpi^ovT at KoX waid eixr oyrai (they \nshall grow up better and educate t/ieinselves), PI. Crito. 54, a. \n\nT?e:m. 2. The use of the Mid. Aor. instead of the Pass, is, in all instances, \nonly apparent; so Od. ^, 35. Kovpw 5e Sixa koI irevrriKOUTa Kpivdcr^cou Kara \nSt]ixov, meaps, let them select for themselves (on the contrary, 48. Kovpco Sh Kptv- \n^fyre Svu k. trevr., the selected). lies. Sc. 173. Kdirpoi doioi air ov pdjxcuoi \\j/v- \nxds, they had deprived each other of life. PI. Phaedr. 244, e. tcS op^us fxaueuri koI \nic ar o (T X ^ e 1/ a>, " i;j Jine frenzy " and in ecstasy. \n\nRem. 3. It has been shown, \xc2\xa7 197, and Rem. 3 (comp. \xc2\xa7 250, Rem. I), that \nthe Aor. Pass, of very many verbs is employed by the Greeks to denote a \nreflexive and intransitive action, e. g. ^ovKofiai, I will, e^ov\\i]Sr-nv, I willed; \n(ixppaiuca, T gladden, cheer, fiicppalvoixai, I am glad, eh <p pdvStT)v, I was glad. In \na few verbs, the Pass. Fut. is used in the same way, e. g. ^5o/iat, / rejoice, \nliahr^v, I rejoiced, Tjabrjo-o/jLai, I shall rejoice. See \xc2\xa7 197, Rem. 1. \n\nRem. 4. The author or cause of the passive condition or state is generally \nexpressed by the Prep. vn6 with the Gen., e. g. 0/ (rrpaTicoTai virh twv iroK- \ns^iwy iSia>xSh](rav. Instead of inro, irpSs with the Gen. is used, when at the \nsame time a strong and direct influence of a person, or of a thing viewed as a \nperson, is to be expressed, e. g. \'ArifxdCecr^ai, aSiKe7cr^ai Trp6s rivos. Bavav * \n\n29 \n\n\n\n\n\'A \n\n\n\n338 SYNTAX. (} 251. \n\nn ] (TiKal rexvai cIkStojs aSo^ovvrai irphs tS}V TrJAewv, X. O. 4, 2; also vapd \nJ with the Gen. is used, when the author is at the same time to be represented as \nthe person from near whom, or from whose vicinity, or through whose means \ninternal or outward, the action has proceeded : hence used specially with xf/n- \nirecr^ai, dido(r^ai, uxpeXela^ou, avWdyecr^ai, \\4ye(T^aiy buLoKoyeiabai, crr]iJiadv((Tbau, \niiriSeiKuvcrSfai (demonstrari), e.g. \'O ayyeXos iir 4 fi<p^7) Trap a ^acr iKfcas (sent \nboth by and from near the king). \'H {x^yiaTT) eiirvxia tovtw r^ avSpl rapa \n^eay S ed or ai, IToAAa xp^^/uara Kvpco irapa rSi>v (piXcou trvveiXeyfifua \n?IV. Ta hwpa ir e /jltt erai ir apa rod ^ acr i\\ev ovt o s. Her. 7. 1 06. To. irapa \nrS)V ^ewu a"r] fxaiv 6 /xev a, ^. Cy. I. i\').^. Tlapa iravrosv Sao \\oye7r ai^ \nAn. 1. 9, 1. OJ/uot yap fie irapa aov aocplas irKrjpcoi&\'fjaeal^ai, PL Symp. \n\' 175, e. ^\'Ek is still stronger than 7ropo,used especially with verbs of giving; yet \nit is seldom used by the Attic writers,^, g. \'E/ceiVa> outtj tj x^P\xc2\xb0- ^\'\xc2\xab Pa<ri\\4u3s \n4 561^71, X. H. 3. 1, 6: in Her., however, ck is very often used instead of vvo \nrf simply. (The use of vir6v,\'ith the Dat. is almost wholly poetic^, g. Sa^^voi \n-^\xe2\x96\xa0vir6 T tvi; in Attic prose only in certain connections, e.g.vlhs viro ry itarpl \nTe^pafi/xewos, PI. Rp- 558, d. Tiry^avet virh iraiSor pl$ri aya^^ \xe2\x80\xa2jreireuSei/- \nfi4vos, Lach. 184, e. When the passive condition is not caused by pereons, but \nby things, the Dat. is commonly used {^ Lat. Ablative), e. g. \'H ir6\\is roWals \n(rvu(popa7s inie^eTO, the city was distressed by \' \xe2\x80\x94 "" \n\nusage corresponds with that of the Latin, the . \n\nverb being put in the Abl. with the preposition a or a6, the involuntary agent \nin the Abl. without a preposition. \n\nRem. 5. The Dat. of persons, however, is very often used, particularly with \nthe Pcrf. tense, and regularly with verbal adjectives. The Pass, has in such \n\ninstances an intransitive or reflexive sense, and the Dat. \'\xe2\x80\xa2\xe2\x96\xa0 \'\xe2\x96\xa0 *\' - r-on by \n\nwhom the action was performed, or for whom it wjis p . le ixo \n\nwith the Gen. denotes merely the author of the \' .utiun, the Dat., at the \n\nsame time, denotes that this action stands in i i lo the author, e. g. "Hs \n\nfi 1 iTp6Tepov 5e5r}\\uTai, i. c. as the thing has been be/ore pointed out 6y me, and for \nme now stands as pointed out, Her. 6, 123. \n\n4. It is a peculiarity of the Greek, that the Act, not merely \n>( of tiansitive verbs with the Ace, may be changed into the per- \nsonal Pass., Hke the Latin, but also the Act. of intransitive \ni verbs with the Gen. and Dat. \n\n^^ovoviiai \\nr6 rivos (from <p^oveiv rivt^ inridere alicrii), i. c. I tr- \xe2\x80\x94 \xe2\x96\xa0 \xe2\x96\xa0-- \nenvy from some one, am envied (in Latin, on the contrary, invidetur \naliquo). X. Conv. 4, 29. Kpc7rr6v 4<m iria-r ev ea-^ai inrh ttjs irarpiSos fuiWor, f; \nair i(rT\xe2\x82\xac7(T^iti (from iriaTevciv and airi<rTe7v rivt), I am trusted, lam d \nTh. 1, 82. -^^ters vw ^A^ualccu 4ir i^ovXe v6 fie^a (iiri$ov\\ev\xe2\x82\xaciy rivi). ii :. \n\n3. 417, b. Kol iirifiouXcvowTes, /cat iiri$ov\\\xe2\x82\xacv6fj.\xe2\x82\xacvoi Sid^ovffi Trayra t^v p.;. \n8. 551, a. aaKeirai S?/ rh del rifiufievov, atie\\e7T ai Se rh aTifxa^6fjLeyo\xc2\xa5. X. S. \n\n4, 31. oi\'K6Tt air \xe2\x82\xac i\\ ov fia I, aW^ ij^T) aireiKu &Wois. So apx^V>"^\'i tparii\' \nbijvai, Tiycfiovev^Tivai, Karacppovif^rivai xnr6 tivos (from ipx^i*, tcpa- \nTiiv, rjy^uoyeveiv, Kara(ppov\xe2\x82\xac7v rivos), iir ix^ ipV^V*\'<^^ (from i-x-ixeiocTy riyi). \nOn KSiTTOi-iai tV Ke(paX-i]v, iiriTpeirofiai rijv (pvXaicfjyy see \xc2\xa7 281, 3. \n\n\' RE>r. 6. The Greek may form a Pass, from other iutransitives also, yet, for \n\nthe most part, only when the subject is a thing, particularly a Xeut. p \nor a Part, used as a Xeut. substantive.Ve. g. Kol uiKph aaaoTii^eyra {r i \n\npeccata), K. An. 5. 8, 20. \'Atv x^\'lS^euTw^l (nrum injiiiciter gestarum), Dun. \nCor. 298, 212. \'EttI tovtois iyw a\\r]^\xe2\x82\xacvofi\xe2\x82\xacvois Si\'Sayti/ <rot t)ji\' ifxvv S^ti\'a* \n\n\n\n\'\' ^ \n\n\n\n\'1 \n\n\n\n^ 252, 253.] TENSES and modes. 339 \n\n(ea conditioner ut haec vere dicantur), X. Cy. 4. 6, 10. \'Ev h\\ av^pi iroWwj/ hpe- \nrks KiySvu\xe2\x82\xacV\xe2\x82\xac(T^ai (in periculum vocari), Th. 2, 35. Ov ^c^Biov rh virh iroAAw;^ \nKivZvv\xe2\x82\xacv^4vra u^\' euhs firi^ivau, Lys. 5, 112, \n\n\n\n$252. Reinarks 07i the JDepo7ients. \n\nIt has been seen above {\xc2\xa7 102, 3) that Deponents are simply verbs which \noccur either in the Mid. only, or in the Mid. with a Pass. Aor.. and have a \nreflexive or intransitive signification ; and, also, that they are divided into Mid. \nor Pass. Deponents, according as their Aor. has a Mid. or Pass. form. The \nreflexive sense of many Deponents is so slight, that they seem to be, in our i \nmode of regarding them, merely transitive verbs, e. g. Sexofiai n, I take (namely, \nto myself) something, iprya^oyLcd ri, fiid^ofiai tjvo, etc. Such Deponents are often \nused in a Pass, sense, particularly in the Pcrf and in the Pass. Aor Examples \nof the Prcs., Impf , and Fut. in a Pass, sense are very rare, and are found only \nin such Deponents as have in single examples an active form, e. g. jSto^eo-^a*, \nwyda^cu. \' \n\nTV6.vra. inrdpyaffTai t<^ dec?, PI. L. 710, d. Mfixifirtfifvos (ad imitatio* \nnem expressus, made like), Her. 2, 78. E5 ivre^vfiTifieyov (well-considered), PI. \nCrat. 404, a. N^ej ovk ixp\'hcr^\'n<r<^*\' (adhibitae sunt), Her. 7, 144. \n\nHemaAk. Several Deponents have both a Mid. and Pass. Aor.; the Pass, \nform has then a Pass, sense, e. g. iic^dfirivy ejccepi, iSex^V^t exceptus sum; \nifiiaaan-qy, coSqi, i ^itkabriv., coactus sum; i KTr}(rdnr}v, mihi comparavi, \nIkt ^)bri y, CO\' III (I u\\is (juiued) ; 6\\o<pv pa^^ai, to lament, 6\\o- \n\n^vpbTJyatf t< d; olk ta aa bai, to heal, aK^a^riyat, to be healed; \n\nkroKpiyaff^aiy to reply. inroKpibrjyat, to be separated. In a few verbs only \nare both Aorists used without distinction of meaning (\xc2\xa7 197, Rem. 1). \n\n\n\n$253. Tenses arid Modes of the Verb. \n\n(a) Tenses denote the relation of time expressed by the \npredicate, this being designated either as Present, Future, or \nPast, e. g. the rose bloojns, will bloom, bloomed; \n\n(b) Modes denote the relation of what is affirmed in the predi- \ncatc to the subject; this relation being denoted either as an \' \nactual fact,\\s a conception or representation, or as a direct \n\n3 expression of the \\vill. The mode which expresses a fact, as \nthe rose blooms, is called the Indicative ; that wliich denotes a \nconception, as the rose may bloom, the Subjunctive ; that which \ndenotes the direct expression of the will, the Imperative, as \ngive. \n\n\n\n\n\n\n340 SYNTAX. [H 254, 255 \n\n$ 254. A. More Particular View of the Tenses. \n\n1. The tenses are divided, according to their form and mean- \ning, into two classes : (a) into Principal tenses, which, both in \nthe Ind. and Subj., always denote something present or future; \n\nI (b) into Historical tenses, which in Ihe Ind. always denote \n\'\xc2\xab something past, in the Optative, sometliing present or future. \n\n2. The Principal tenses are : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) The Present: (a) Indicative, e.g. yp<i<poftfVy scribimus ; {$) Subjunctive, \ne. g. \'Ypd<pufi(v, scrilximns ; \n\n(b) The Perfect: (o) Indicative, e.g. yeypdtpanevy acn\'psimus ; {$) Subjunc- \ntive, e. g. yeypdcpu^KVy scripserimus ; \n\n{e\\ The Future Indicative, e. g. ypdx^tofievj scribemus, ire shall tcrite; Subjunc- \ntive wanting ; \n\n(d) The Future Perfect Indicative, e. g. $($ov\\(v<TOfuUf I shall have advi$ed \nmyself , or I shall have been advised; Subjunctive wanting. \n\nThe Subj. Aor. also belongs here, e. g. ypd^ot^ scripserim or taibam. See \nS 257, 1 (a). \n\n3. The Historical tenses are : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) The Aorist : (a) Indicative, e.g. typ<v^>a^ I urote; (fi) Optative, e.g. \nypdipai/jLi, I might write, or I might have written; \n\n(b) The Imperfect : (o) Indicative, e. g. Hypatftoy, scribebam ; {$) Optative, \ne. g. ypdipoi/JLi, scriberem ; \n\n(c) The Pluperfect: (o) Indicative, e. g. fyeyfKu^civ, scn/jfcrajii ; (3) Optative, \ne. g. yeypd<f>oifxi, scripsissem ; \n\n(d) Tlic Optative of the simple Future, e. g. ypdi^^oiui^ J tcould tr \' " \nthe Fut. Perf., e. g. fiffiovKfvaoifjLijy, I uvuJd have deliberated, or I -v...^ ..... c \nbeen advised, when in narration (and consequently in reference to the \npast), the representation of a future action, or of one to be completed at \na future time, is to be expressed, e. g. 6 &yy(\\os I^Xfyty, trt ol woktfuoi \nviKTjaoifv, the viessetifjer said, that the enemy would conquer ; {Xryey, Sri \nirdm-a inrh rov OTparrjyov cu )3e/3ovA.\xe2\x82\xaciy(roiro, he said that everfthint) \nWOULD be well planned by die general. \n\n^255. (a) Principal Tenses: Presefit, Perfect^ Future, \n\n1. The Present Indicative represents the action as taking \nplace in time present to the speaker. Tlie Present is often \nused, in the narration of past events, for the purpose of a more \nvi\\dd and grapliic representation ; past time is then viewed as \npresent. Tliis is called the Historical Present \n\n\n\nJ \n\n\n\nj \n\n\n\n? 255 I PRINCIPAL TENSES. 34] \n\nTaunjv rijy ritppov /3<wt\\euy fxiyas iroi\xe2\x82\xac7 avrl, ipvfiaTos, eVetS)? irvvSrdvera. \nKvpov vp(Kf\\avyotnaj X. An. 1. 7, 16. ^Hi/ ris UpiafiiSwv ved^aros UoXvSoopos, \n*E/f a/3\xc2\xbbji Tcus, 5v ^\xc2\xbbc Tpolas ifiol irarjjp Sidwai Upiaixos iv SSfiois rpecpeiy, Eur. \nHec. 1116. ^ The Hist. Pres. is sometimes used even in passages which in them- \nselves, aside from adverbs like ir ore, ird\\ai (poet. Trdpos), are considered as \ninvolving past time,|e. g. Zuvr\' clsoKovaas iroTSa, hv iKaw^ei ttotc, Eur. El. \n419. \n\nT\\! >tvr{K 1. An action is often viewed by the language as present, which \n).. l<in-~, indeed, to the past, but at the same time extends to the present, or in \nits results reaches to the present. In this manner, the following verbs particu- \nlarly are used: (a) verbs of perceiving, e. g. a\xc2\xabo uw, 7ri;v,^a\xc2\xbb/o/ioi, ala-^d-) \nyofxai, yiyywtTKw, ^avd dyw j(\\ikc Lat. (j\xc2\xbbt//o. r/V/eo. etc., and Kng. fo hear, \nto see, to J when the object of these verbs is to be represented \n\nas still c , resent; (b) <p\xe2\x82\xacvyw, I have piven mi/sclf to jiiyht, and^ \n\nI am now a . hence to live in exile; vikv and Kparw (I am a victor, \n\nhence /w \xe2\x80\xa2 \' rr tUfxai {lam vanquishtJ, have been vanquished), aSiKw \n\n{lam ill done tironf/), ylyp ofiai (I am descendt d ), i^lc] (c) in \n\npoetry: <povt vw (I am a miirdi nr^have murdered, e. g. S. Ant. 1174), hvi]<TKa) \n{lam detid, have diid, S. El. 113), t(kt\xc2\xab, ytyyw {I am a father or mother, Eur. \nIon. .356. Her. 209), etc. This usage extends to all the Modes and Participials j \nof the I\'res. as \\\\ " to the Im|if. QifiiaroKXta ovk aKoveis &v5pa aya^hy \nytyoy^ia; PI. ti\' ., c. Tldyn\'a ir v y^ ay 6 ^( yo s 6 Kpo7aos \xe2\x82\xac7re^7re e\'s \'S.ndp- \n\nrr\\v a\'f^fKovi, Ilrr. 1, tiy. Tj 8*\': ai/ inuyo aKr,Koas, on Mvaol Kol UialSai iv t^ \n/3<uriA(a\'S X\'^Pf tcarixoy^*^ ipvfiva. wdw X\'^P^^ Svyayrai (iiv i\\\xe2\x82\xacv^(poi ; \xe2\x80\x94 Kai tovto \xe2\x96\xa0 \ny*, (<p7f, i.Kovw, hast thou hnird? clkovu, i/fs, J have kiiown of it. X. C. 3. 5, 26. \nAwayyt\\(7f \'Apiaiv, 5ti i}fit7s yt ytKwfify $auTi\\fa, Kai, us 6paTf, ovSels rifiiv \ntri ixax^Ttu, An. 2. 1.4. Twk y iKwyr wv (<ttI koI ra eavruy aw^nv koi la 7u>y \nflTTwfjL* ytty Ao/i/Sdyftr, 3. 2, 39. Aaplov koI UapvadriSos iraTbts ylyvovrai \nIvo, 1. 1, 1. \n\nRem. 2. OfxoMa* a" J ^\xc2\xab\xc2\xab\xc2\xbb. with Prcs. forms, are often translated in Eng. \nby Perfects, namely, otx^l^^h I ^<Jt\'\xc2\xab dt parted, and t^kw, I have come; yet \noVx<>Ma<< prujiirly means, / am tn>in\\ and ^ku, I am here {adsum), e.g. M^ \nXvTrot\\ oTi \'Apdciras of x \xc2\xab\'\'<\xc2\xbb\xc2\xbb <\xc2\xab\'* "f^^^^ iroKfu\'tovs, that Arasjias is gone, has \n.\' (= trunsfu(jit) to the rmmtf, X. Cy. 6. 1, 4.\'). "Hkw ytKpwy Kev^/J.cl)i>a \n\nx~ o >u wvKas Knrwy, Fmi- TT.-. 1 \'Tfiui fi6Kis a<piKi\'(-7(r^f, ottoi ^/ue?s xaAot \n\nffKo n\xc2\xab y, X. Cy. 1 . 3, 4. \n\nRem. 3. But the language often considers an action as present, which is not \nyet a -- \'\xe2\x96\xa0 \' \' \'nt is citlier artuallt/ begun, or is begun in our mind, or pur- , \nj^s4\' : 1 i<j virtuiillv fntiin"\'. though considered as present. Com- j /. O *- \n\n|, ; \xe2\x80\xa2 \' (/(,, I intend to rjo, and the like. This \' \n\nIi- .ii ^ : .... I .irtici]\xc2\xbbials of the Pres. and the Impf. y^^ \n\n1 . fiallv holds"of the Pres. of e f^ i, which, in the Ind. has regularly the mean- i \' -/^ \n\nif the\' Fut., / shall qo : the Subj. includes a Fut. meaning in itseU" {\xc2\xa7 257, \ni; w. 4) ; but the Inf aiid Part, have l)Oth a Pres. and Fut. meaning. "Ett eiro \ntd T\xe2\x82\xac vi^y tvra iy r<f ira^aStiVy ^pla SlSufil aoi, Koi &\\\\a nayrodaTra (rv\\- \nKt^u,, X. Cy. 1. 3, 14 {iiSwfii,! odW). "E/caffWr ris InfiSt^y ^(vocpwvra \nvwoar^yat i^y apxvy (persuaderc studelxtt), X. An. 6. 1, 19. m-rvKr^vaLOi eirl \nM-iidufiyay its itpo^iZofiiyr)y iarpdrfvcav (putantcs parari ibi proditionem), \nTh. 3. 18. h\\ like manner oficn the Pres. Part, after verbs of motion, e. g. H \n\n/({to (for ike purpose \n\n\n\n\nKfvdCfTo i,s iiwiodffa ndXiy irphs rhy HySpa, i5e7TO ainTJs 6 \'AffTvayns KaraXvizuy \nxhy KDpoK, X. Cy. 1. 3, 13. \n\n29* \n\n\n\n342 SYNTAX. [^ 255. \n\nRem. 4. ( But also actions or events wholly future are sometimes indir-ated \nas present, by the use of the Pres. tense, when in the view of the speaker \nthe action or event yet future is vividly apprehended, or when be is so firmly \nconvinced of its occurrence, tbat it appears alread}\' present, e. g. \'Ev fui fiaxjf \nrifuSe T7fu x^P"\'-^ ir po s KTcia^ e kou iKclurjv fiuWov i Kfvbe poire {you gain, \nvjill gain, and free), Th. 4, 95. *Hi/ ^ainjs cv, iraus \'65\' i K<pfvyf i fwpoy \' aov 3* \nov ^\xe2\x82\xac\\ov<Tris Kar^avitt\', rouSe kt^vu, Eur. Audr. 381. \n\n\n\n^ \n\n\n\n2. The Perfect (Indicative) represents a past action in time \npresent to the speaker ; the action appears as already accom- \npUshed at the present time. Hence the Perf. represents not \nonly a past action, but its present effects or results. \n\nr4ypa(pa r^v iiricno\\i]v, I HAVE WRiTTEjf the letter, the letter is NOW WBiT- \nTEN, whether written now, or some time ago ; the writing is the past act, the \nletter is the result still present. \'H iroKis J^Kriffrai, thecilifWAS built (in past \ntime), is now built, and there it now stands built. ^Acrrvdyrji ruy iv M\'^Jou irijrrtgt \nSc(nr6Tr}v favrhy tt eiroir] k( y, X. Cv. 1. 3, HB. Otiity i<m Kfp^aXfdtrepov rot \nviKav 6 yap Kparuiy afj-a irovra (TvyiipiraKfy Kol tow iySpas, Kcd ras yvreutcaSf \n4. 2, 26. \n\nRem. 5. Since the Perf. brings past time into clo\xc2\xabe connecrinn with the \n\npresent, the Grceks in many Perfects r< \ncompletion, than its result as exhibited at ^ \n\nused the Pcif., in order to indicate a present condition or stale that v \nsioncd by the completion of the action. As such a use of the Perf-^^ * \nbelong to the English, we translate many Greek Perfects by our Pn \nthe present condition is more prominent than the jMist act ; the Plujtl". of \xc2\xbbuch \nverbs is then translated by our Imi)f., e. f:. rt^yriKa (I have died), lam dead \n(Eur. Ale. 557. rebvaa- ly oi davoyra, those who died, are dead)] itfirrtifuu (I \nhave acquired), I jmsscss; rf^av/xcuca (1 have been wondi "\xe2\x80\xa2\xe2\x96\xa0 -\' ,\' \xe2\x80\xa2 \xe2\x80\xa2; astonisfir^ : \nfie^ovKfvfiai (I have taken counsel with mvsclf ), / a\xc2\xbb/i ; iri^va 1 \n\nhave shown myself), I appear ; olda, novi (I have sec \'jXo (I f: \n\nblossomed), / bloom; irfiroiba (I have convinced n ; $t$riKa I \n\nhave taken steps), / am q:>ing; /xe/xyrifuu, memini (I have called to mind), / \nmindful, or remember; KfkXrtucu (I have been named), / am called, etc, Tlie \nPres. and Impf of many verbs, especially such as express the idoa of to mund. \nto call, are not used at all, or but very seldom, so that the Perf. \nto take entirely the place of the l*res. and Impf., e. g. KtKpaya, \nI am a crier ; /xc/uwko, / roar. \n\nRem. 6. The transition from the completed action to the condition or state \nproduced by it, is more obvious in the Pass, than in the active. Comp. ^ di .^a \nKeK\\\xe2\x82\xaci<rrai, the door has been shut, and it is now shut. So particularjv t\' e \nthird Pers. Sing. Perf Imp. Pass, is often used, when one would \' \n\nemphasis, that the thing spoken of should remain tixod and pi \ncondition, i. e. not only that the action should be pertormed. \n\nthat the result should continue, e. g. rh ayKvpiov au\'\xc2\xabnrda^(\xc2\xbb, i ,. \n\ndrawn un and remain so ; KeKelcf^co, reliiptum esto. It-t it remain }wr .- rrrci- \n\npdcr^w, let it Iw tried ; pvv he roino reTo\\u.i\\<Tb(a elireiv. Si \' \' \' \' itio \n\nobliqua, X. II. 5. 4, 7. ^^lovre^ 5e elirov, t)]v bvpav KeK\\e\'. .md \n\nremain shut. \n\nRem. 7. The Perf is used with special emphasis. :\' future \n\noccurrence of these being athrmed Nnth the same d\' > ss and \n\nas if they had already taken place. II. o, l2S.Bi4(p^opas! ifou art ^osf, wiU be \n\n\n\n4 255.] PRINCIPAL TENSES. 343 \n\nlost. So i{\\\xc2\xabAo, like perii, interii, actum est de me, it\'s all over with me^ will 6e, \netc. PI. Phaed. 80, d. ^7 ^xh o.-KaXKanofi4v7] rod awnaros, ev^hs d tair\xe2\x82\xac(pv(rr}- \nrat Kol air6\\(M>\\ey. \n\nr \' 3. The Future ( Judicative) denotes an action as future in re- \nlation to the present time of the speaker. The Greeks veiy \noften use the Fut. Ind. in subordinate clauses, even after an \nHist, tense, to express that uiiich shall^ should, must, or caii he, \nwliere the Latin employs the Subj. ; the other forms of the \nFut., particularly the Part., are also so used. \n\nfi6fiovs vvof^au Sfi TOiovrevs, hi wv ro7s fiev aya^o7s evrlfios koI iXev^epos 6 Pios \nwapa<rK(vacrd-l}<rfrai (should be obtained), to7s Se kokoTs raneiyds t\xe2\x82\xac koL a.\\- \ny\xe2\x82\xacty6s Kol iifiiunos & aiwv iir avaKfiatr ai (should be iiu])osc<l upon them), X. Cy. \n3. 3, 52. O* fis rijv $curi\\iKT)y rtxt^y Teu5\xe2\x82\xaci;<i/i\xe2\x82\xaci\'ot ri Zia<p4pov(Ti rSiu i^ afdyKr)5 \nKoxoira^ovinuy, rf yt Wfiy^aovfft Kal 8it|/);0-o vo\'t koI ^lywaovcr i koI 07- \npviryt\'iffovai {i/ they m< r, etc.), C. 2. 1, 17. "ESo^c t(^ Stj/z^ TpiaKOura \n\n6.y^:\xe2\x80\x94- \' \' \'\'T^cu, oi rovs tot aovs ^vyypd^povai, ko^\' ots ttoXit fixrovai \n\n(u I draw uj> l>tus. j to iihich they should live), 11. 3. 2, 3. A^ \n\n4. Tlie second person of the Fut Ind. is often used to express \ncoil inlands, exhortations, admonitions, entreaties, and, in con- \nnection with the n\xc2\xbb\'irative ov, prohibitions; here tlie accomplish- \nment of what is allirmed is not demanded, as is the case in the \nImp., but is led to the choice of the person addressed, and is \noiilv (xpccte^l. Thi.s cUllers cliielly from the Imp. only in being \na 1 1 form of expression. On the contrary, the Fut. is used \n\nwith the negative ov, interrop^ativcly, when, in a strong and \nindi^\'^nant tone, the accomplishment of the action is expected \nnecessarili/. \n\n"Op a oZv KoL iTTi-^\'MtoO Kar<8\xc2\xabry, i6v tws irp6T(pos i/xov "iS-ps, Kal fioi (p pa- \nct is (you tciil cv ite it to tne =\xe2\x96\xa0 communicate), PI. Rp. 432, c. "Hs oZv \nwoi-fiatre \xc2\xabca2 irtld\xe2\x82\xacad4 fiot {you will do thus, etc. = do tJius), Prot. 338, a. \nOv Spdfffis toiJto, \' \' not do this, as I hope =^ do it not ; butou Spdcreis \n\nrovTo : iri\'\' \'\' \' c w.,,.\' = do tL Ou iravffri \\4ywv ; non desines diccref \n\ninstoa.i ..( ,. PI. Synip. in. ov Trfpififvus; in\'lt tfiou not wait? Dem. \n\nPhil. 2, 72. ov <pv\\d^\xc2\xabad\\ ?4\xc2\xbbjv, Situs fih B((nr6Tr}i> evprjTe ; But when in this \nmanner, a negative command is to be expressed, the negative fi-f) is to be used \nwith ow ; and when tn " nccs of this kind, one with an iiifirmativc meaniug \n\nand the other with a h _ j. follow each other, ov stands in the first sentence, \n\nii^ in the last. Ov ^t/ <pKvapi]<T(is ; Ov fi^ XaX-h^eis, oAA\' i.Ko\\ovSrv <t e is \nipLol, Ar. Kub. 505 (instead of /it; <t>\\vdpei, fih AoAfi, oAA\' o/coAou^et!. PL Sjmp. \n175, a. VIC oZy KaKeis ainhy koI fi^ aip-f]<reis. \n\n\n\n344 SYNTAX. [^ 256 \n\n5. The Future Perfect (Indicative) represents 2. future action \nas jpast (completed) in relation tp another future action ; hence \na future prior to another future. Such an action is future "with \nreference to the present, past with reference to another future. \n\nKat rolai fie /jli^ct ai ia^\\k KaKolaiv [the good shall have been mixed with evU), \nHes. Op. 177. \'H iroXiTela reKews k\xe2\x82\xac KOtr fi-fja er ai, ihv d roiovros avTrjy hrur- \nKOTTTJ (pvXa^ 6 rovTwv iirKTT-ffiMQy, PL Rp. 506, a. As the Greek Perf. frequently \ndenotes the present condition or result of a completed action, so the Put. Perf. \nfrequently denotes the future condition or result of a completed action. Hence \nthe Put. Perf. of those verbs whose perfects are translated by the present tense \nof other verbs (see Rem. 5), must be translated by the simple Put., e. g. fiffiyv- \n(Tofxai, meminero {I shall have reminded myself), I shall he mindful, shall remember \n(but fjiVT](rojxaiy I shall remind mi/self) ; K\xe2\x82\xacKTr)<TOfiai [I shall have acquired), I shaU \npossess (but KTr](rofj.ai, I shall acquire), etc. \n\nRem. 8. The Put. Perf, like the Peif. (Rem. 7), is used instead of the sim- \nple Put., to expi-ess a tiling emphatically. Here as in the Perf. used for tho \nPut., the speaker looks upon the action as already accomplished ; hence the \nPut. Perf. often denotes the rapidity and certaintif of the action, the process \nor progress being left wholly out of view, e. g. *pd^\xe2\x82\xac, koI ircxpo^frat (and it \nshall be [certainly, immediately] done), Ar. Plut. 1127; <pi\\os rjixiy oitSfls \n\\e\\\xe2\x82\xacl\\p\xe2\x82\xacrai (no friend will [certainly] be left us), X. An. 2. 4, 5. So also in \nthe Inf. Avoiv 1) Tpiwu T^fitpuiv ravra irfTrpd^effbat, Dcm. 19, 74. In the Act. \nthe periphrasis fiefiovKivKoos ta-ofiai is found. \n\nRem. 9. The Put. Perf. is used in Greek only in principal clauses, and in \n\nsubordinate clauses introduced by 8ti and us (that), by c < " \' \' " "-i, \n\nand by fisT6 (so Mfl/). all with the liid. In all other sul" c \n\nAor. Subj. (more seldom the Perf) is used instead of it, in connection with a \nconjunction compounded of &y, as idy, indy, iirfiSdv, &ray, xply ir, (sr\' iy, ts \n&v, etc., e. g. \'Eay rovTO \\4 ^tj s (si hoc dixeris), a^iapTi^arf. \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7256. (h) Historical Tenses: Aorist, Imperfect ^ and \n\nPluperfect. \n\n1. The Aorist (Ind.) e:^presses past tinie, in a wholly indefi- \nnite manner, with no other relation, e. g. cypai/^o. Iterate, Krpos \niroXXoL ^^VT] evLKr]cr\xe2\x82\xacv. It thus stands in contrast with the other \ntenses which express past time ; still, so far as it indicates past \ntime indefinitely, it mav be used instead of either of these \ntenses. \n\n2. Both the Impf and Plup. (Ind.) represent an action as \npast, but always as having relation to anotlier past action. But \nthe Iinpf expresses the action as contcmpoi\'aiy \\vitli tliis other \npast action ; the Plup. expresses tlie action as already past \nbefore tliis other past action. \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 256. J HISTORICAL TENSES. 345 \n\n\'Ey ^ (TV firaiCfs, eyu typatpov, while you were playing, I icas itriting. *Ot\xc2\xab \niYY^i ?l<rav ol ^dp^i^oi, orEAATjves ifidxoyro. "Ore ol ^dp^apoi eTreATjAiJ. \n3 \xe2\x82\xac(ra I/, ot^EAATj/zer indxovro. Tc^tc (or eV ravrri rfj fiaxv) ol "EW-nves \n&a^pa\\funara ifidxovro. \'EiraSi) ol \'^EAATj.\'cy ive\\-n\\vSfe(rav, ol TroAeVjot \niireirfcpfvyftray. "Ore ol avfj-uaxoi iTrXrfff la^oy, ol \'A^j/a?ot rovs Uepa-as \n(VfviKi]Ki(Tav. \'Y.yiypdcpiiv r))v iiritTToXw, I had written the letter [before \nthe friend came). \n\nRemark 1. It is to be noted that the Greeks freely use the Aor. instead of \n\n\n\n\ncrav. The Aor. is often employed even instead of the Peif., when the relation \nof the past time to the present need not be expressed emphatically. \n\n3. Heuce the Aorist (Ind.) is used in liistorical narrations, in \norder to indicate the principal events, wliile the Liipf. (Ind.) is \nused to denote the accomi)anying circumstances. The Aor. \nnarrates, the Impf. describes. Hence in the narration of past \nevents, the Aor., which introduces the principal facts, is very \noften interchanged with the linpf , wliich describes and paints ; \noften, also, with the Ilist. Pres., which, like the Aor., relates the \nprincipal* events, and places them vividly in the present ; not \nseldom, also, with tlie Plup., sometimes with the Perf By this \ninterchange of the tenses, the narration has the greatest hveli\' \nueas of representation, and the finest shades of expression. \n\n*H^M)J 5* \'EcBi^fwr eTtrt \'^Jajy iptuv iir\\ ycuay^ ttJ/xos irupKai^ i napalveroj \nTavaaro 8c ^k6^ {the f re ujx>n the funeral pile began to uUite, and the flame \nCfascd), II. \xc2\xbb^, 228. Tovs wtKrcurrai iS f ^avro ol ^dp^apoi Kol 4 yidx^vTO\' \niirtX 8* iyyvs Tjcray ol AirA?Teu, ir pdirorr o \xe2\x80\xa2 koX ol ireAToOTol fv^vs (Xirovro \n(the barbarians withstood the peltasts and continued to fight with them; but when the \nlioplites drew near, they /led, and immediately the peltitsts set out i\'l pursuit), X. An. \n\xe2\x80\xa2">. 4, 24. Evy(0r} ry aiotcfirw Kol 4^airiyrfS 6.ix<poT4po}bfv rovs \'A^valovs bopv^t]\' \n\xe2\x96\xa0Sfyvoi \xe2\x80\xa2 Kol rh fikv tifwyvfioy Ktpas avrwy, Sir\xc2\xabp 5}j kcu ir poK^X\'^P\'^\'^^h ^v^vs \nCLirop^ayiy f^vyt \xe2\x80\xa2 koL & Bpa<r/5ar, inrox<\'\'povyros ijSrj airrov, 4irnrapiwy t^ Sf^ia, \nT IT p u<T K\xc2\xabr ai\' KCU TitaSvra avrhv ol fxty \'A^va7oi ovk ala^dvovTai, ol Se \nirkrfcioy ipayrfi air-qy ty k ay \' koI 6 fiiu K\\(uv, ws rh irpuroy oif 8 leuocTro \nfityfiy, ti^vs (pfvywy, Kol Kara\\rj(pd(\\s inrh yivpKiylovTTfXTCurrov, avo^y^crKef ol \nih airrov Ivtrrpatpfyrfs (SrATrai i\\iivyoyro k. t. A., Th. 5, 10. \'O jxky TrSXifj-os \nkirdyruy rfftas Twy dprffifytay air * <r r fpi] Kf \xe2\x80\xa2 koX ydp roi irfVfaTfpovs TreirotTjAce, \nKa\\ woAAous KiySivovi irofifyfiy ifydyKaat, Kol irphs robs "EAArjvas Sia^e fi\\7j- \nKf Kol irdyra rp6iroy TfraKaiiTQtprfKfv fifias, Isocr. Pac. 163, a. (The \nPerfects denote the result, the Aorist the event.) \n\nKem. 2. Inasmuch as the Aor. Ind. represents a past action independently \nand fthsclutcly. uncon lectcd with any other past time, while the Impf. Ind. \nrepresents a past action as always connected with another past action, beings \n\n\n\n346 SYNTAX. f^ 256. \n\nconsequently, employed in exhibiting an action in its duration and progress^ and \nhence used in description ; accordingly the Aor. expresses a jnoment or point of \ntime, while the Impf., denotes duration or continuance. The Aor, therefore \ndescribes a momentary action or a single action ; the action, however, described \nby the Aor. may be a continued or protracted one, but the writer in using the \nAor. presents no such view of it, communicating merely the fact of the occur- \nrence. The Impf., on the other hand, describes an action in its continuance \nand progress, \xe2\x80\x94 not merely a single act, but a series of acts. It often depends on \nthe choice of the writer whether the Impf. or Aor. is used. An action graphi- \ncally presented in its duration and progress by the Impf., can be stated histor- \nically as a mere past act, by the Aor. And so, many actions stated in the Aor. \nmight be more vividly described by the Impf., if the writer wished it. \n\n4, On the use of the Impf. and Aor. Ind., the folloAving things \nare to be noted : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n! (a)(The Impf. appears sometimes to stand instead of the Pres, since an \n\nI action which continues into the present time, is referred to a past time in which \n\nMt occurred, or was known to the speaker.^ Kvpos i^fXauuti \xe2\x80\x94 4irl rhy XdXor \n\niroTaiJ.6i/, ovra rh eZpos ir\\4^pov, Tr\\iipri 5\' Ix^vwu fifydXcoy koI irpofoav^ ots oi ivpoi \n\n^eoits iyofit^ov koI a^iKfTy ouk etwy [which the Syrians CONSIDER as gods^ \n\nnamely, as I then saw), X. An. 1. 4, 9. ^Atp\'iKovro trphs rh MTjSt\'ar KoXovfjuvop \n\nruxos \' \xe2\x80\x94 iTrelxe S^ BafivKiiiyos oh ttoAu, 2. 4, 12. Tp he nrpwrri rifj-tpa iupiKoyro \n\niir\\ rhy iroTaix6v, 8s upi^c Tf)V t\xc2\xab ruy MaKpwyuy [xo!>pav] koI rijy Tuy \'S.KXf^ivSiyy \n\n4. 8, 1. \'Arap, S> eralpefS.p\' qv rSif ^y rh ScVSpor, itp\' Sxtp ^\xc2\xaby Vfias ; PI. Phaedr. \n\n230, a. OvK Ap\' ayabhs to ttoXitiko. TltpiKKris ^ y ^k tovtov tov \\6yov (namely, \n\nwhen he so appeared to us, consequently = ovk iip aya^Ss iany, \xc2\xaby itpaiytro^ \n\nhe is not therefore distinguished, as he then seemed to be), Gorg. 516, d.-^Frora the \n\nidea of duration or continuance contained in the Impf. several other relations orig* \n\n\\inate: (o) The beginning of an action, e. g. ivd iyyvs iytyoyro, i^awlyris ol fih \n\n\\avTC6y iro^fvoy, some of them began to shoot their aiTOWS ; \xe2\x80\x94 ()8) habit or custom^ \n\nle. g. avrhv o\'lirep npSs^ey irposeKvyovy^ Koi t<Jt\xe2\x82\xac irposfKvyri<ray, tJiose vcho xcere \n\n^before accustomed to do obeisance to him, did it tlien also; \xe2\x80\x94 (y) wish, endeavor or \n\n\\attempt, C. g. irpSnos KXeapxos rovs airrov (TTpaTiwras i fiid^fro Ifyau^ Clearchxu \n\n\\endeavored to compel his soldiers to advance. J \n\n(b)(The Aor. is often used in genei-al propositions which express a fact bor- \nrowed from experience, and hence what is customary ; here a single fact which \nhas been observed to be true in many instances, but not established as universal, \nis stated to be generally true, \xe2\x80\x94 the truth frequently observed in regard to a \nsingle event, is considered as holding in the case of other similar events. ^ In \nsuch cases the Aor. is usually translated into English by the present, or by the \nverb is loont, is accustomed, with the Inf. H. p, 177. aXtl re Aths $cpfl<r<reey v6os \nalyioxoto, Ssre koI &XKiiJ.oy &ySpa <po^f7, koX acpflXero yliofy ^tSi\'wj (icho \ninspires the brave 7}ian with fear, and bears off the victory). X. Cy. 1. 2, 2. at fiiy \nyhp irXeicrTai ir6\\\xe2\x82\xacis irposrdTrov<ri to7s roXlrcus fx^ K\\4irr\xe2\x82\xaciv, /i^ apirdCeiy, Koi ToAAa \nT^ roiavra wsavrus\' ijy S4 ris rovreny ri vapa^alyr), ^rf/jdas avrois iv4^f<ra9 \n{tcere accustotned to impose a penalty upo7i them). Dem. 01. 1(2). 20, 9. Srar i$t \nir\\\xe2\x82\xacoyf^las Kol Troyrjplas riSy &S\'K(p ovtos (4\xc2\xbb{At7nros), t(rxv<rT7, i} irpwTti vpi^xurn \n\n\n\nI 256.] HISTORICAL TENSES. 347 \n\nRem. 3. (When the idea of being wont to do, as found in the Aor., is to be \nmade prominent, or when a native habit is to be expressed, the Greek uses the \nverbs <pi\\eiv and id4\\fiv^ Her. 7. 10, 5. (piheei yap 6 behs ra virepexouTa irdi/ra \nKO\\oveiy. 157.T^ ev ^ov\\ev^ein-i 7rpijyfj.aTi reAeuT^ ws rh iiriirau XPW\'^II e^-eAet \niiriyivia^ai. \n\n(c)/Hence in poetry, the Aor. is often used in comparisons, instead of the \nPres., since comparisons contain facts that are known and founded on often \nrepeated experience. \\ E. 7, 33 \xe2\x80\x94 36. us 8* gre tIs re SpaKopra iSwu iroKlvopcros \nAirco-TTj otjpeos iv ^\xe2\x96\xa0t)a<TriS^ inr6 re rpSfios eA.\\a)3e yv7a, 6.\\p r dj/ex wpTjcev, \n2)-XJ>6s T6 fiiv fl\\e irapfids \xe2\x80\xa2 &s aims ko^\' o/xikou eSv Tpcowu aycpwx\'^v (sc. Hdpis). \nU. IT, 482. \xc2\xa5ipnr( 5\', if 5t\xe2\x82\xac tu Zpvs ^piirej/. \n\n(d)(The Tragedians often use the Aor. in dialogue as an impassioned or \nemphatic expression of a decision or determination, \xe2\x96\xa0which has respect, indeed, \nto the present time, but which the speaker wishes to represent as having been \npreviously established and settled in his own mind. The English often trans- \nlates sudi Aorists, in a vcrj\' imperfect manner, by the Pres. Here belong \nespecially verbs expressing strong feeling or passion,\\j. g. aireirTva-a {I do \nabhor), iyf\\aaa(l cannot help laughiwj), iir\'pt/ecraf ^fjLco^a, i^avfiacra, \nuxufMoauy ^a^rjy, S. Phil. 1434. & 5\' h.u Kafi-ps av aKv\\a TovSe rod arparov, \n76^U3V ifuiv fiyrjfjida, irpihs irvpcw ifirjy KSfiiC^ \' Koi <To\\ ravr\\ \'AxjAXews t4kvov, tto- \np^yecroy this I counsel tliee, (his I have counselled thee. Eur. Med. 223. XPV 5e \n^yoy fi.(y K(Lprti xpoiX\'^P^^" (*^ accommodarc) ir6\\\xe2\x82\xaci ovS" atrrhy Tjyecr\', Hsris \naif^ddrjs 7t7a\xc2\xbbr iriKphs iroAtTcuj iffrly apLO^ias viro [ncc lando, nee nnqiiani laudaoi). \nHec. 1276. Polym. : koI <ri\\y y kydyiai irouBa Kacrdvlpay Stavilv. Hecuba: oTreTr- \nT i;<ro, this thought I do abhor = a t/iottght which I have abhorred. \n\n(ejUVith like cflect the Aor. is often used by Attic writers, apparently instead \nof the Pres. in urgent appeal* or commands, expressed in the form of a question \nintroduced by t/ oly oh or rl ov. The speaker wishes, as it were, to see the \ndesired action already accomplished.^ X. Cy. 2. 1, 4. t( ovy, i<pr] 6 Kvpos, ov /coi \n<ri>>\xc2\xbb Hyapuy l^\\\xe2\x82\xac^is fioi (qnin igitur inihi recenscs ? why hast thou not yet told me of \n0ie fonts? in^*nid of tell me forthwith !) 5. 4, 37. rl odv, ^(pr], & TaSara, \noux^ "^o Mf" "\'Xl <^fAeuf^ ^X^po- iirolriaat (why therefore have you not made \nthe walls strong In/ a guard f = at once make tliem, etc.) ; PI. Phaedon. 86, d. el ovy \nris vfiuy finropunfpos ifiov, ri oifK aireKpivaro; {is quani celerrime respondeat, \nkt him answer at once). (The Pres. is also so used; yet the expression is then \nfar weaker, )e. g. T( o^Vy ij 5\' hs, ovk ipwT^s; (stronger than ipura, but \nweaker than Ti oly ovk ijpur-nffas or ijpov;) PI. Lysid. 211, d. Tt ody ov \naKoiroO/if V, X. C. 3. 1, 10. \n\n(f )^he Aor., like the Perf. (^ 255, Rem. 7) is used, when the speaker confi- \ndently considers a future event as already taken placed 11.5, 160 \xe2\x80\x94 162. e^Trep \nyep Tf Kol uvtIk \'OKvixirios ovk iTiKeaaey, 6k t\xe2\x82\xac koI o^e Te\\e7, ow re ^e7aA^ \niiirfTKray <rvy <T<pfj<Tiy Ke(pa\\Tiai yvyai^i re ml rcKeco-ffiP {then have they paid a \nheavy penalty, then shall thnj pay). Eur. Med. 78. 0.^(^x6 fie cb" &p, et KUKhv \nirposoi(roiJL\xe2\x82\xacv ytoy va\\ai<p [then we shall perish, if etc.). \n\n(g) /i\'he Aorist is very often used in all its foiTOS to denote the coming into a \ncondition ; this the Ind. alwjys represents naturally in the past. ) Boo-iAciJw, / \n\n\n\n\xe2\x96\xa0) \n\n\n\n348 SYNTAX. [^257. \n\nam a king, ifiaa-lKevaa (not I was a king, but) I came to be a king, was made a \nking, fiaa- i\\ev(raSf having been made king, rex f actus. BovXivu, I am a senaiot \n(X. C. 1. 2, 35), PovXevaaSf liaving been \xe2\x96\xa0made a senator^ senator f actus (ib. 1. 1, \n18). Sou arTparrjyfjaayTos, te duce facto (ib. 3. 5, 1). \'Io-x^\xc2\xab\xc2\xbb, lam strong, \nIcxuiras, having become or been made strong, potens /actus (Th. 1, 3). Avyr)- \n^\xe2\x82\xac is, potentiam nactus. ^Aa-bevTJffaif to have become sick, in rnorbum incidisse, \nKvpos 7iyd<T^7} avrdu (KAeapxo\'\')> ^ \xe2\x96\xa0^^\' !\xe2\x80\xa2 1> 9\' Cf/rus came to admire him, ejus \nadmiratione captus est. \n\n\n\n$257. Subordinate Modes. \n\n1. As the Aorist Indicative expresses a past action as inde- \npendent and completed, having no relation to another past ac- \ntion ; while the Imperfect, always representing a past action in \nrelation to another past, and being used in describing and paint- \ning, presents the action in its duratio7i and ^>/-oore&y, so the \nsame distinction holds in regard to the subordinate modes of \nthe Aorist and Present : ^ Tlie subordinate modes of the Aor. \n(Subj. Opt. and Lnpr.) together with the Infinitive and Partici- \nple, are used, when the speaker wishes to represent the action \nby itself, as completed ; the subordinate modes of the Present \ntogether with the Lifinitive and Participle, and also the Imper- \nfect Opt. are used, when the speaker, considering the perform- \nance of the action, wishes to represent it xiescriptiirli/ in iXs dura- \ntion and 2^f\'ogress. In this way the following modes stand in \ncontrast with each other ; \n\n(a) The Subjunctive and Optative Aorist with the Subjunctive Present and the \nOptative Imperfect, e. g. ^vywfifv and (pfvyuf/xfy, let us JUa. "With \n^ (pvyajxiv , the idea of fleeing itseU" is urged and is had in mind; with \n^^ ^\xe2\x82\xacu\'7a)/i\xe2\x82\xac J/, I rather have reference to the performance and progress of \n\n>^ the action ; the Aor. expresses the action with more energy, as it denotes \n\nan instantaneous, momentary act. The same distinction exists in all \nthe following examples. )Ti. iroi-nawfi.fy and irouifify ,\xe2\x80\xa2 what shall we dof \nAe\'yto, lya fid^ris and lya fiav^dyris , tit discos; ^Keyov, um ftd^ois \nand tj/a /xay^dyoiSy ut disceres. The Greek Subj. always refers to the \nfuture, and hence is never used, as in Latin, of the present and past, e. g. \nLaudat puerum, quod diligens sit or fucrit, because he is or has been. In \nsubordinate clauses with hs ^, tav, STav, etc. [\xc2\xa7260. (a)],lthe Su!\xc2\xbbj. Aor. \ncorresponds with Latin Fut. Perf. (\xc2\xa7255, Rem. 9)^ \'Ecky toDto Xe^py, \najj-apT-tiari {si hoc dices or quotiescuuque hoc diets, errabis). \'Eoj\' toTt- \n\n\n\n* The subordinate modes of the Imperf. are supplied by those of the Pref \n\n\n\n( 257.] SUBOEDINATE MODES. 349 \n\nAc ^ p s , afioprija-p {si hoc dixeris, if you shall have said). Comp. the exam* \npies under ^\xc2\xa7 333, 3. 337, 6. 339, 2, U. (b). The Impf. and Aor. Opt. has \nthe sense of the present or future in clauses which express a supposi- \ntion, conjecture, or undetermined possibility, in prose commonly^mth ^j/, \nin hypothetical clauses with el; the Opt. in this sense is found in clauses \ndenoting a wish, in final clauses, and in direct interrogative clauses, \nparticidarly in deliberative questions. N ToGto ^otSiwy ti,y yiyvono or \nytvoiroy this might easily be done. See ^ 259, 3 and 6, and 260, 4. El \nrovTo \\fyois or Xe^fias, afxapTavo is or aiidprois dy, if you \nghould say this, you would err. See \xc2\xa7 339, II, (a). Et^e tovto ylyvoiro \nor yfvoiTOf titat this might be! See ^ 259, 3. (b). "EXeyov, 7m \nfiay^dyois or fxd^otSf ut disceres. See\xc2\xa7 330,2. Tis roiavra viro\\afi- \nfidyoi or vwo\\d$oi; tcho would sup]x>se such things ? See \xc2\xa7 259, 3, (e). \nOi/K e?X\'\'*\'\xc2\xbb ^\'\'\'<" TpfirolfiT^ y or Tpavolfiriy^I knew not what I should \ndo. Sec ^ 259, 2. i The following case also belongs here : When the \n8ul>ordinatc clauses in \xc2\xa7\xc2\xa7 333, 3. 337, 6. and 339, II, (b), arc made to \ndepend on an historical tense, and the Opt. without &v takes the place of \nthe Subj. with ts Hj/^ drav^ iwf tSdy, iaa^, etc, the Opt. has a future sense. \nOhs iuf Xhu! rk KoXh. iirnr\\h(voyras., rifirjaw (quos videro). "Etpijy otis \nXSotfii rii KoXdi iwirrjifvoyras, rtfiiitrfiy (quos mMrtw essem). \'EireiShy \n<rv 0ov\\ri SuiXtyfabaif ffol SiaXf^o/juu {si or quotiescunque yj\'s). *E</)t;i\', \niiTfiSri av /SouAoio iiaXfy f (t^cu, aol Sia\\f^((Tbai {si or quotiescunque \nvtlhs, of the future). In other kinds of clauses, the Opt. of the Impf and \nAor. has ajxjst sense, so that it corresponds with the Ind. of each of these \ntenses. jTiaaatpdpyris Sif&aXf rhy Kvpoy, ics iirifiovKtvoi oury {that he \nteas plotting against him). "EAe^eu\', 5ti Kvpos atro^dyoi {that C. was \ndead). \'Oirrfrc ot "EAArjKfj toIj Tokffilots i-trlony or iTTiXboifv, airi- \nipfvyoy, quotiescunque impetum faciebant). *Ayafiiovs (\\\xe2\x82\xacyfy, a iKcl \ntSoi {what he had there aeen^ a dependent question). Comp. No. 2, (b). \n\n(b) The Imperative Aorist with the Imperative Presentee, g. ^vye and \n^ < C \xe2\x80\xa2) \xe2\x80\xa2 Jiee. a6s and Sliov fioi -rh Bi0\\ioy, give. Mr) bopv$e7T\xe2\x82\xac, S> &u5p\xe2\x82\xacS \n\'A^V^\'oioi, dAA\' ^nfxfiyare fioty oJs iSfi)^y v/iuy, p.^ bopvfiuw i(p\' oh hy \n\\4ya) (tiie principal fact is here ippelyarf. the more deliiiite explanation \ndopv$t7T\xc2\xab) VI. A\\K>1. 30, c. "EirtiSay arayia aKOvavTe, KplyaTe, p^ Trp6- \nrtpoy irpo\\au$dy\xc2\xabr\xe2\x82\xac. Dem. Ph. 1. 44, 14. \'AAA\', 2> Sw/cparer, eTi Kol \nyvy ^po\\ irtidov koI au^-nri PI. CritO 44, b (= ipol ireibSpeyos (rii^Tt, \ni. e. by a process of persuasion, save yourself). In precepts respecting \nthe rules of life, etc. the Pres. is the natural and usual tense. Tabs pev \ndfovs (pofiovyTovs Sk yoyfls rlpa, robs Se (pl\\ovs alffxvyou, ro7s \n8i y6pois ird^ov, Isocr. Demon. 16. Comp. \xc2\xa7 259, 4. \n\n(c) The Infinitive Aorist with the Infinitive Prosent,\'\' e. g. \'E^eAw cp vye7y \nand ipfvyay, I icish to Jiee. :iKay6s elpi ttoi tj (rot and iroLelyru \n(\'H y\xc2\xabapyla) pa^fTy re pdari) i^Kfi elyai koI tjSjVtt? ipyd^eff^ai, X. \nGee. 6, 9. A\'tprrwT\xe2\x82\xacp6y i<m koKus ano^ayely,^ Cvy alffXP^s, Isocr. \nPan. 93. Ob rh pi] A a /3 e Iv ri aya^k oStu, ye xoAcTriJj\', Ssirep rh Kafi6vra \n\n30 \n\n\n\nS5U SYNTAX. [* -257. \n\nf repij^TJvai kvTrrjpSv,^. Cj.7. 5, 82. KeXeva <T\xe2\x82\xac Soupai and Siidvat \nfxoi rh fii^Xlov. KaX4(Tas 6 Kvpos * Apda-irrju MriSov, rovroy iKeKfvae Siacpv- \nKd^ai cwT(f riiv re yvvalKa koX ttju <TKr]vf]y, X. Cy. 5. 1, 2, with which \ncompare in 3. following: ravrrjv oZv iKcKfvaey 6 Kvpos 5ia(^vA<irre(r \nrhv \'Apda-mjy, ews hy ai/rhs xdfir) {to continue to guardy the subordinate \nclause necessarily implying duration in ZiwpvXdmiy). (In the oratio obliqna \nafter verbs of saying and thinking, the Inf. Aor. and Pres. is frequently \nused to denote what is past; then the Inf Aor^ like the Ind. Aor., is used to \ndenote the principal events, the Inf. Pres., like the Ind. Impf , to denote the \naccompanying subordinate circumstancesT\'ie. g. \'A^ycuoi \\4yov<n, iiKaius \n4 ^eXdaai (tous TlfXatryovs)\' KaroiKTffieyovs ykp rovs HeXatryovs inrh rif \n^Tfiriaa(p iv^ivny Spfiewfjieyous, i.S iKeety riSt\' tpoiray yap aufl rks \n<r(f)erepas Sfvyartpas re kcu robs sroISas i-r\' vBwp \' ov ykp eJycu rovroy rhy \nXP^vov ffcpitri KM olKfras \' Skcos 5e eX^otey avrcu, rovs TlfXMryovs irwh Sfipios \nfiiaa^ai crcptas k. r. \\. {Oratio recta: 4 ^ri\\daafi.ty\' oi yiip IlcXxuryx)) \nTjSiKovy rdSe- i<poira)yj etc.) Her. 6, 137. The Inf. Aor. has a \npast relation only after verbs of saying or thinking, and in the construction \nof the Ace. with the Infinitive with the article^ *Eyrav^ Xfyerai \n\'AirSWwy iK^eTp ai Mapavay Kol rh Stpfxa Kpt fidvai 4y r^ &yrp<ff 2L. \nAn. 1. 2, 8 {cutem detraxisse \xe2\x80\x94 susjtendiisi, to liave Jiayed, and hung up). \nComp. No. 2, (c). Qavnaarhy <paiyfrau. fiot rh "rfur^riyal riyaSt ^* \n\'ZwKpdrrfs rovs yfovs Sif^tipey., X. C. 1. 2, 1 (fjersuasum esse quibtudamj \nthat certain individuals had been persuaded). Th ficSffiiay rSav \xe2\x96\xa0w6\\*\xc2\xaby \naXuyai TroKiopKia, fiiyi<rr6y iari (njixetoy rov iik rovrovs ir fta-^4 yras \nroifs *\xc2\xabK\xe2\x82\xacos ravra TrodtTr, Dem. 19,61. (But when by the Ace \nwith the Inf. with the article, a purpose is expressed, the Inf. Aor. has \nnaturally something of a future relation^ c. g. \'Eir(^xV>^r rod iiidc- \nKaK6y fxol riva. yey 4<r^ai y I took care that I might have some one as a \nteacher, X. C. 4. 2, 4.) In all other cases the Inf. Aor. has the relation of \npresent time. \n\n(d) The Participle of the Aorist with the Participle of the Present; comp. \nAa^e tpvyuff vitli Xdv^ave <pfvywy. HtpierKatoy Soi/ftov, fiovK6/jL(yot ^n^nu \nair iK6fj.fvoi 4s rh &,(rrv {wishing to come into the \'\'\xe2\x96\xa0\'" <^-"ier) Her. 6, 115. \nTovs ay^pwTTovs \\r](Toixiy ^iriire<r<^>\'T\xe2\x82\xac$( trill secreti, . , X. An. 7. 3. 43. \n\nIn all such examples the Aor. does not express the relation of past time, \nbut merely the action of the verb taken by itself; the time is denoted by \nthe finite verb with which the Part, is connected ; the Aor. Part^ there- \nfore, denotes only that the subordinate action (expressed by the Part.) is \ncontemporaneous with the principal action (expressed by the verb). Yet \nit is to be observed, that the Aor. Part, is commonlv used to desijmate \npast time, e. g. TaDr\' dirwy airt\'jSTj = ravr dxt kou aw($ri. \xe2\x80\x94 It may be \nadded here as a general principle, that while the Aor. Part, generally \ndenotes past time, the subordinate modes of the Aor. and Present, of \nthemselves denote no relation of time, the Aor^ however, desi^ating a \nmomeiitari/, the Pres. a cotitinued action. \n\n\n\n/^ \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 257.] SUBORDINATE MODES. \n\n\n\n361 \n\n\n\n2. The subordinate modes and participials of the Aonst, form \na contrast also with the subordinate modes and participials of \nthe Perfect and Pluperfect ; the former denote an action abso^ \nlutehj, as past or completed ; the latter, on the contrary, in rela- \ntion to the subject of the finite verb ; by this relation the sub- \nordinate idea of the duraXion of the residt of what is denoted by \nthe verb, is naturally derived. In tliis way the following forms \nsumd in contrast with each other : \n\n(a) The Subjunctive Aorist with the Subjunctive Perfect, e. g. \'E^*\' a-Ko>laX \ny\xc2\xabyot prat, iiovaiy (iK\xc2\xab7<Tt), Ky^\xc2\xaby \xc2\xabfoi/<n rii imr-ffSeia {if a treaty shall \nhave been made), X. A. 2. 3, 6. "Or iv yviispifxov {kvuv Ur,), oo-Trci^eTat, kUv \nfirfitr wdlrroTf irr\' cu/rov aya^hy vfir6y^^ (whonisoeier he rcco\'jnizcs, he \nyr\xc2\xabt\xc2\xab, even if he shall have received no favor from him), PI. Rp. 376, a. \n\nA\xc2\xbb\'cx\xc2\xab0\'3\xc2\xab rwy aWorplwy, ly axnpaXftntpoy robs o\'(kcvs tous vn^Ttpovs ai/rup \nKfKTrjadt, Uoc. Nic. 49. ( Comp. ^ 255, Rem. 5.) It has already been \nstated No. 1. (a) that the Greek Subj. always refers to the future. \n\n(b) The Optative Aorist with the Optative Pluperfect, e. g. Ol \'Ij/5oI eAe^oi/, \n5ti vt^}^tit <r\xc2\xabpas 6 \'lySwy /ScurtAcvr {had sent), X. Cy. 2. 4, 6. "ESe^rac, \nfi^ \\{rrra ris &rwfp Kv<r\\y rinuy i fiircirTwKoi {that some madness had \nfallen ujM>n us, the effects still continuing), X. An. 5. 7, 26. \'AynalAaos \n\n4Scf)-^ rris wSKfwi iuf>*7vau ainhy tovttjs t^j ffTparrfyias, \\(yuy, on rw irarpl \naOrov woWii vwripfTrjtcoi i) riiy Mayriy^vy ir6Kis iy rols vphs Mtaai^yTiy \nToKffiots, II. 5. 2, 3. In what instances the Opt. Aor. is used of the \npresent or future, and in what of the past, has been stated in No. 1, (a). \n\n^c) The Infinitive Aorist with the Infinitive Perfect ; comp. ano^ayiTy with \nTtbyifKfyai. Tlarrpbs Kvpos Kiytrau yfyfff^ai KafjL$va(u, Ilf pauy fia(Ti\' \nX^ws X. Cy. 1. 2, 1. AtytTou 6,yipa riyh rwy Mr]Swy i KtreirKT] x^<tt \nwoKi/y 8^ riya xp^^^*\' ^""t ^V niWn rod Kvpov {stood or continued amazed), \nib. 1.4, 27. Comp. ^ 255, Rem. 6. \n\n(d) The Aorist Participle with the Perfect Participle ; comp. airobauwy with \nTfbyytKwSy Plut. Aom. Paul c 36. extr. Utpfffhs fiiy tx^i koI viviKt)- \nfi4yos (even tltough vatn/uislicd, in the condition of one vanquished) robs \nwauBas, Alfil\\ios Ji rovs turrov (sc. wcuSas) ytK-(f<ras airffiaXey = y\xe2\x82\xacylKT]TM \nlt.iy \xe2\x80\x94 ixti 8\xe2\x82\xac \xe2\x80\x94 , iv\'iK7\\<Tf fity \xe2\x80\x94 dirf\'/SoAc 8\xc2\xab. Perseus even though conquered \nstili has his childrAi ; Aemilius in his otherwise successful uxir, lost his. 4M \n\nRemark 1. From the above explanation, it is evident why the Aor., though \nan Historical tense, has besides an Opt. a Subj. also; the Aor. Subj. stands in \ncontrast, on the one hand, with the Subj. Pres. ; on the other, with the Subj. \nPcrf. The Greek Put. bivs no Subj. as in Latin (e. p:. Gaudet, quod pater vew \nUirux sit), Inrcausc the Greek Subj. of itself denotes future time. But the Aor. \nhas an Opt., which stands in dependent sentences after an historical tense, and \n\n\n\n\n352 SYNTAX. [^ 258. \n\nkoti aya^h X-ii^oivro [where they would receive). X. Cy. 8. i, 43. hrifif\\(iv \n\'6-Koai jxiire iffiroi, ft^re ^.ttoto\'i irore ta o ivt o . (But eVi/ieAcTTai, ottus . . ... itroP\' \nTot). X. An. 4. 1, 25. e(^7j elvot &Kpoi/, h el fjL-f] tis tt p OKaTaKi]\\\\i o n o , aivvarop \n\n/^irea^aL TrapeA^cT*\'. ( Oratio recta : ei \xe2\x96\xa0jrpoKaToX\'fj^eTai, aSvyaroy tcreu irapi?^{iy.\\ \nRem. 2. Verbs of willing, refusing, delaying, entreating, persuading, com- \nmanding, forbidding, hindering, of being able, and unable, expecting (-rpos- \nJioKw, iiriSo^Ss eljxi, \xe2\x82\xacik6s (any, it is likely, to he expected), when tli \' :e to a \n\nfuture object, are sometimes sConnected with the Fut. Inf., some:. uh the \n\nPres., sometimes with the Aor. The Put. Inf. is used, when the idea oi futurity is \nto be made specially prominent, e. g. a condition continuing in the future ; the \nInf. Pres., to denote a continuing or permanent condition, the idea of futurity, \nevident of itself, .being left out of sight; this Inf. is also used to denote the \nimmediate occurrence of the action ; the Inf. Aor., when the idea of the action \nitself is made prominent. In English all three forms of the Inf., when the subject \nof the Inf. is the same as that of the governing verb, are translated bv the Pres. \nInf.: MeAAw ypd\\pe iv,\'Ypd<(>\xe2\x82\xac lu , ypd\\^fat (I am nou; about to icnte, intending \nto write). \'ASvy ar ol eltriv ^TTijueXeTr e a \xe2\x82\xac a^ai { unable to become and continue \ncareful), X. Oec. 12, 12. \'A.hvvaroi flcriy us iirifiiKfiay rwy kot\' ayphv tprfxtv \nnaioeiic (T^ai, ib. 12, 15. \'ASuvaroi rffjuy ^ (Toy rat Tairnjj/ ttji\' ^-rifjUKfuw \nS iSax^V\'^O\'^y ib. 12, 13. \'Aj/o/3ciA.A6Toi iroyfjat ly to SfoiTa, Dera.31, 9. \n\'A^yaioi ave fidWovr o rh irav /H7jx\xc2\xab\xc2\xbb\'\'^0\'\xc2\xab<\'\'^\xc2\xab\'\xc2\xbb Hcr. 6, 58. *EAx(^ei \npaSlws vuas i ^air arij <Te ly, Dcm. 860, 54 (he hopes to deceive you). *EXir (Say \n7rap6;teTat rjfjLus fvdai^ovas iro iTi<r ai, PI. Symp. 193. d. (he qives hope that he \nwill make us happy). With verbs of willing or bci- :. Inf. is more \n\nseldom than the Aor. or Pres. After verbs of - . _, , .. ing, swearing, \nthinking, the above threefold construction (Inf. Fut., Pres., Aor.) is used, but the \nInf. Aor. regularly expresses something /xi^/ (see No. 1). seldom what is future, \ne. g. Oi l\\\\aTair\\s i y6 /juaay 4iri^(nfyoi }>tfSiws k paTrjffai, Th. 2, 3, (se victore\xc2\xbb \nfore). \'AirSKpiyai, & ^Ay6paT\xe2\x82\xac \' ov yhp olfial ce t^apyoy ytytffdai, i ^KUKTior \n\'A^yalwy airdyrwy itroirjaas, Lys. Agor. \xc2\xa7 32 (credo te uegaturum). After verba \n\\ of saying, thinking, hoping, the Inf. Aor. and Pres. with iv, is often used in \n\\ nearly the same sense as the Inf. Put. without 6.v. See ^ 260, (5), (a). \n\nf 258. B. A more particular View of the Modes. \n\nThe Indicative, the Subjunctive (Optative) and the Im- \nperative Modes [\\ 253, (b)], are distinguished as lb]lo^\\\'s: \n\n(a) The Indicative expresses a direct assertion, an actual fact \n\nTh ^65ov ^d\\\\\xe2\x82\xac I. \'O irarijp yfypa<pf rijy iTriaTo\\i\\v. Oi woXifuoi \niT\xe2\x82\xac(f>vy oy. Ol ttoKTtcu tovs TroXf/xiovs yiK-fjaovtrir. \n\n(b) The Subjunctive denotes a supposition, conception, or \nrepresentation. The Subj. of the Hist, tenses is called the \n\n* <<3ptative. \n\n"Iwfiey ! eamxis! \xe2\x80\x94 T/ iroieDfiev ,- quid faciamus f tchat shall ux do? Ovk fx*\xc2\xbb \nSttoi r pdirwfiaiy nescio, quo me vertam. Owk e7x<\'\xc2\xbb\'\xc2\xbb ^<" r pawolfiiiPy nesde\' \nbam, quo me verterem. A67aj, Xv (iSfjs, dico, ut scias, in order that you may knom \nit. "EXe^a, 1y elSelt]!, dixi, ut scires, in order that you might know it \n\n(c) The Imperative denotes the immediate expression of the \nwill, being used in commands," entreaties, etc \n\n\n\n? 259.] SUBJUNCTIVE, OPTATIVE AND IMPERATIVE. 353 \n\nTfxi^ov and ypd^e^ rente. BpaSewy fiev (piXos ylyvov, yev6fj.evo5 Se ireipS) SiajLie* \nyfiy, Is. Dem. 7. rpa^dro) and ypa<peT(i}, let him write {\xc2\xa7 257, 1. b). The com- \nmand expressed by the Imp. is not always to be understood as a strong com- \nmand, entreaties, exhortations, and counsels, being also expressed by the Imp. \n\nRemark. The Modes exhibit the relation of an expressed thought to \nthe mind of the speaker. Hence they denote nothing objective, i.e. theynever \nshow the actual condition of an action; the Ind., in itself, does not denote \nsomething actual ; nor the Subj., in itself, something possible ; nor the Imp., \n-onu\'thing necessary; the language represents these ideas by special expres- \nH"\'i-s. e. g. aXri^us, Ji/vacr^ou, Se?, xp^u <^tc. The modes express subjective rela- \ntions solely, i. e. the relations to the mind of the speaker, showing how he \nconceives of an action. A mental operation is either an act of perception, an | \n\nact of supposition or coni \xe2\x96\xa0 ", or an act of desire. The Ind. expresses \n\nan artti.nl ]torfoption ; it i\' what the speaker conceiA\'Cs and represents \n\nas a \'t, or a conception; even the future, \n\nwhit: . \xe2\x80\x9e ^Micd, can be conceived by the speaker \n\nas a reality, and hence is expressed by the Fut. Ind. The Subj. expresses \na ption ; it indicates what the speaker conceives and represents as a \n\n. \'/. whothfr it ha-j nn actual oljcctive existence, or is a mere mental \n\n( \'\xe2\x80\xa2 ; it denotes what the speaker conceives \n\na;. . . , hLthcr it he an actual objective necessity \n\nor not. \n\n\\ 259. Use of the Subjunctive, Optative and Im- \nperative. \n\n1. Tlie Subj. of the Principal tenses, the Pres. and Perf., as \nwell as the Sub. Aor.alway relates io future XixQ.e [k 257, 1, (a)], \nand is used in Principal clauses : \n\n(a) In the first Pers. Sing, and PI. in exhortations\' and warn- \nings, where the Eiig. uses let, let us, with the infinitive ; the \nnegative is here /xt}. \n\n(b) In the first Pers. Sing, and PL in deliberative 2 questions, \nwhen the speaker deliberates with himself what he is to do, \nwhat it is best to do ; here also the negative is yxv/. \n\n"luHfv, eamus! let us go, suppose we go! Mrj tw^Kv. *\'A7\xe2\x82\xac ((ptpe, ta) Xwfiev. \n*(p( XStD {come noir, let me see), Her. 7, 103. *\xc2\xab\'p\xc2\xab 817, ^ 5\' os, ireipaStu Trphs \nvp.as airoXoyijaaa^at, VI Thacdon. G3, b. Such an exhortation is very often ex- \npressed in the form of a question preceded by fiov\\\xe2\x82\xaci; yet in this case, the \nsubjunctive is a subordinate clause dependent on &ov\\\xe2\x82\xaci, e. g. BouAet oZv, 5vo \nfTSjj dwfj.(v wft^ovs : (do you then wish tJutt we propose two kinds of persuasions =\xe2\x96\xa0 \nUt Its projiose), VI Gorg. 454, e. Tt iroiufiew; quid faciamus? what shall we \ndo? Eixwn\xe2\x82\xacv, ^ ffiyufify; Eur. Ion. 771. In no7 t is (ppoyridos \xe2\x82\xac\\!^ri; &, \n\n\n\n> This use of the Subj. is called Conjunctivas adhortativus. \n\xe2\x80\xa2 Conjunctivus deliherativus. \n\n\n\n30* \n\n\n\n354 SYNTAX. [\xc2\xab 259 \n\n0. C. 170, tIs is used instead of the first Pers., where shall one go? {= iroi e\\^ot \nor eX^wfiey, like iroi (ppeySiy eA^w; 310). Mt; epwfjiai; sJudl 1 not ask? X. C 1. \n2, 36. "0<Ta 01 oXiyoi rovs iroAAous fi^ ireicravres, aAAa Kparovyres ypd<pov<ri, x(^- \nepov fiiav (ptafievy fj fi^ (pSiyL^v ilyai; 45. So also in indirect discourse^ \nand in all persons. Ovx ex<w, ^irot rpdirw/jL^t/ (I know not, whither I shall turn \nmyself, what I shall do). Ovk e^ovaiu iKuvoi, (hroi <pvyu<ri, X. An. 2.4, 20. Ovk \n\n>* ol5\' \xe2\x82\xact Sa (rb eKTrafxa), Ida not know whether I shall give the cup, Cj. \xc2\xa7 8. 4, 16. \n\nRemark 1. In the second and third Pers. the exhortation takes the form \nof a command or wish, and hence is expressed by the Imp. or Opt. Od. Xt "7. \neX^CDfieyd^ aua &ctv, fiorj 5\' StKiaTa yeyoiro. Yet there are also passages \nin which the second Pers. Subj. stands in connection with &y\xe2\x82\xac and <pepe instead \nof the Imp., e. g. *ep\', & t4kvop, vvv koI t)> tt^s vi]<rov fid^r) s, S. Ph. 300. \n\nRem. 2. On the use of the second Pers. Subj. with /x^ to express a prohibi- \ntion, e. g. fii} yp(i\\pT)s, ne scripseris, do not write, see No. 5. \n\nRem. 3. A wish is very seldom expressed by ef^e with the Subj. instead of \nthe Opt. Ei\'(d-\' al^epos &va irTWKaSes o^urSyov 5ia irveu/xaros eKwal fi {o si \naves me sursum in aefherem per auras strident>:S capiard), S. Ph. 1094 (without varia- \ntion). Comp. EJfid^e Tiv\\s (vyaX SiKcuuy vfifyaiuy iy "Apyei <pay&<ri TtKyoitTiy \nEur. Suppl. 1028. Et^" \xe2\x80\x94 aXax^oy \xe2\x82\xac?5os ayrl tov koXoG \\dfiw (in some MSS. \nT^fieiy), Hel. 262. \n\nRem. 4. In the third place, the Subjunctive is somewhat frequently u-cu ni \nprincipal clauses, in the Epic language, instead of the Fut. Ind., tliough with a \nslight difference of meaning. Both exi)ress a present conception of \naction; but the Fut. Ind. represents what is still in the future as ^/ \ncertain in the view of the speaker, while the Subj. represents what is future as \nmerely a concession or admission of something expected. 11. Ct 459. - \niroTe Tis eliirricriy (and one MAY say, it may be expected or concedfd that nw \nsay). II. 7j, 197. ou yap ris fie fiirj ye fKuy aeKoyra BirfTai (o\xc2\xab< e \n\naway = I will not udinit that one will, etc.). o, 262. ov yap irw ti t^ai. \n\noitSe 1dci3fiai(nai do I expect that I sli^l see such men, tutr am 1 to see; oOSf \n6^oixai, would mean, I certainly sJiall not see). Od. ^, 201. ovk ttrb* o&ros euTjp \nticphs fiporSs, ovSk y\xe2\x82\xacyi]Tai. ir, 437. ovk tab\' ovtos cunjp. ovS\' (atTfrau onSt \nyeyr]Tai (nor is it to be expected that he will be). T\' \nwith ovde fx-i) in the Attic ^vl\xe2\x80\xa2iters, is wholly anaii_, \nstated. See under \xc2\xa7 318, 6. \n\n2. The Opt. Liipf. and Aor. is also used iu principal sen- \ntences, to denote deliberative qitestio?is (i. e. such as express \ndoubt and propriety), but differs from the Subj. in such ques- \ntions in referring to past time. \n\nTheocr. 27, 24. iroWoi ft ijxvwovTO, y6ov 5* i^ibv oihis taSe \' \xe2\x80\x94 kqI rf, tpiXos, \n(> e^aifii; ydfioi ir\\Tf^ov<nv avias, i. e. quid FACEREH ? sc. turn, quum miiiti hm/v \ntias 7neas ambiebant, sed eorum nullns mihi placebat, what could I then do ? The \ndeliberative Opt. is very frequently used in indirect questions, in relation to an \nhistorical tense in the principal clause. \'Eir^pero 6 Seu^Tjs rhy iroISa, ct ircuafiey \nm.vr6v, X. An. 7. 4, 10 {whether he shou^ put him to death). Oi \'EiriSdfirtoi \xc2\xbbc/i- \ni^aiTcs 4s Ae\\<povs rhy ^ehy iir-qpovTo, ei TrapaSoTey Kopiy^iois rj)*\' x<Uiy, TIl \n\n1, 25 {whether they should surrender the city). \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 259.] SUBJUNCTIVE, OPTATIVE AND IMPERATIVE. 355 \n\nRem. 5, In the principle given in No. 2, the act of supposition or conception \nbelongs to the past, and this is the common use of the Opt. (the Subj. of the \nhistorical tenses), in subordinate clauses. But the Opt. is also used, where the \nact of supposition or conception is a present one. When a present conception is \nexpressed by the subjunctive, e. g. tuficv, eamm, ri eXnufMev .- quid dicamiis ? \nthen the realization of the conception may be assumed or expected from the 4 \npresent point of time. But when a present conception is expressed by the | \nOpt. (Subj. of the historical tenses), the speaker places himself back, as it \nwere, out of the present and the vivid connection, which exists between the \npresent and the actual accomplishment, and represents the conception as one \nseparate from his present point of time. Hence a present conception expressed \nin this way, very- naturally suggests the subordinate idea of uncertainty. Thence \narises the following use : \n\n3. The Opt. Aor. and Impf. (Subj. of the historical tenses), f^*^\'\' \nis used, in principal clauses, of present or future time in the \nfollowing cases : \n\n(a) To express, in a general manner, a supposition, a present \nor future uncertainty, an undetermined possibility, presumption \nor admission. The prose -writers here commonly use the modal \nadverb dv with the Opt., ^ 260, 2, (4), (a), but the poets very \nfrequently use the Opt. without dv. A negation is here ex- \npressed by ov (ovk). \n\n*0 5\xc2\xab ainh ovry ai\'6fioioy (Jt} Kol Zia<popov, <rxo\\^ yt ttov rtf 6XKu) Zfioiov ^ <pl\\op \nytyoiTO {that would saircily be like or friendly to another., as one would readily \nadmit), PI. Lysid. 214, d. \' Kiro\\o^tvr\\% 5\xc2\xab t^s ^^xn^ t^t ^Stj t^v <pv(nv t^s \niuabfvdai iv lif iKyvoi rh awna koI raxv trairey Sioixoiro {animo exstincto \nturn vera corpus imbecillitatem suam ostendat et intercidat, it is natural to suppose or \nauume, tJuit the body uxtuld give signs of weakness), Phaed. 87, e. ^ \n\n(b) To express a wish. A negation is here expressed by/xr?. \n\n11. Xi 304. fiTj fiay aavovSl yt Kol oicAetws iLiroKoifi-nv, may 1 not perish! S. \nAj. 550. S> ircu, yfvoio Trarphs \xc2\xab uti/x eVrtpoy, ra 5\' 6X\\\' OfiOios ! kou y4voi av ov \nKaK6iy may you be more fortunate than your father, but in other things like him! then \nyou would not be wicked. X. Cy. 6. 3, 11. *A\\A\', & Zev fieytCTe, Xafieii/ fioi \nyivoiro axn6v^ its 4yu /Soi/Xo/icu, may I be able to take him. The wish is com- \nmonly introduced by ef^e, d yap (in the poets also by ei alone). Od. y, 205. \nc< ykp i/jLol rofftr-fiySf ^(ol hiiyaixiv irapabflt y! X. Cy. 6. 1,38. et yap \nyfyoiTo! (In ])OCtry is is used like Lat. utinam. Eur. Hipp. 407. us \nair6\\o IT TTayKOKus ! ) \n\nRem. 6. When a wish is expressed, which the speaker knows cannot be \nrealized, the Ind. of the histurical tenses is used, e. g. Er^f rodro iyiyueTo ! \ne\xc2\xbb\xe2\x82\xac TovTo 4yfy(T0 ! utinam hue factum esset ! that this were done, or had been \ndone I So & <p \xe2\x82\xac A \xe2\x82\xac 5 yp^ai ! that you laid written ! ( but I know that you have \nnot). X. An. 2. 1, 4. oAA\' &<pfK\xe2\x82\xac fi^y Kdpos Cv" ! that Cyrus were still alive I \n(bat I know that he is not). Also d^f, e* yap, us d}<pe\\ov, es, e{y) with \n\n\n\n\n356 SYNTAX-. [} 259. \n\nthe Inf., particularly in poetry. On the wish expressed by -rus &y with the Opt, \nsee \xc2\xa7 260, 2, (4), (d). On the infrequent use of the Subj. to denote a wish, see \nEem. 3. \n\n(c) A command is also expressed in a milder way, in the_j \nform of a wish. \xe2\x84\xa2 \n\nOd. I, 408. rdxiCTTd fxoi eySoy ^raipoi flev, let my companions come within. IL \n/c^pul Tis ol \'^TToiTo yepaLTepos, let some herald follow. Arist. Vesp. 1431. \nepSoi Tis V \'^Kaarros eldelrj rix^v. X. An. 3. 2, 37. \xe2\x82\xact /lev oZv &AAoY ti5 \nfi4\\Tiou dps, &K\\oos e X e T w \xe2\x80\xa2 ct 5e firj, Xfipl<ro<po5 fiku Tiyo7ro. \n\n(d) The Optative is used to express a desire, wish, and \ninchnation, in a general manner, without expecting the realiza- \ntion. A negation is here expressed by /atJ. \n\nTheocr. 8, 20. ravrav (tV (rvpiyya) Kar^einv {1 uxndd he willing OX desire \xe2\x80\xa2 \nto place)\' TO Serai Trarphs ov KaTo^aw. Her. 7, 11. ti)i yap ftrir iK Aaptiov \nyeyos^dos, fx^ rifx(i}pf](Ta.^ivos \'AStjvcu\'oi/s, / should not be descended Jrom Darius, i \nunless, etc. \n\n(e) In direct questions the Opt. is used, when a mere admis- \nsion or supposition is expressed. \' \n\n(a) In Homer the interrogative clause then forms, in a measure, the protasis \\ \nto the conditioned clause, i. e. to the clause depending on the condition ex- \npressed by the question. II. 5, 93, seq. ?) (>d vv fioi n t/>^oio, AvkiLopos vl* \nSai<ppoy ; T\\al7]S Kev MfveXdu) iiriwpoffiep raxvy lOf, xa<rt Se Kf Tptitaci X\'V\'^ \nKol KvSos &poio, will you now listen to me, i. e. if you will, you would dare, etc (the \nsame as ef li /xoi irl^oio, tAoitjs Key, etc.). Here -wldoio, etc. is the in- \nterrogative clause containing the condition, and tAo/tji, etc. the conditioned \nclause depending on the preceding. When the question has two members, the \nfii-st, expressed by the Opt. >vithout &v, contains the condition, the last, ex- \npressed by the Opt. with &v, contains the conditioned clause. H. f , 191. tj ^ \nyv fioi T rl^oio, (plKov tckos, otti /cev cfrw, r}4 kcv itpy^traio Kor\xe2\x82\xac<r<rafi\xe2\x82\xacyrf r6yt \n^vjjL^ ; will you be persuaded by me, \xe2\x80\x94 or will you refuse 9 (/3) In the Attic writers, \nthe Opt. is also used in a question without reference to a conditioned clause. \nThese questions, however, always imply a negative. Aesch. Choeph. iXX\' \nvirepToXfiov av^phs <pp6in)fia ris \\4yoi; icho could describe? \xe2\x80\x94 no one, i. c. \xe2\x96\xa0\' " \ncan you supjwse could desci\'ibe f S. Ant. 604. rcdy, Zeu, Svvourty tIs cb^pwr i , \nfiaala Kar dax^i; u\'ho could restrain? i.e. who can be supposed to restrain? \nArist. Phit. 438. &va^ "AvoWoy koI ^eoi, iro7 ris <f>vyotf where could one fly f \nDem. Phorm. 921, 1. koX Zcra ^i\\v cJirc ^cra rfjy aXr)^\xe2\x82\xaclas. /i)) xj"}*^^ Te\xc2\xabf/*iypr\xc2\xab\xc2\xbb * & \nS\' e\\//6U(raT0 rh varepov, 7ri(rT6Tfpa toO^\' vwoXd^oir f eJycu ; haec f<os tTfiora \neristimaturos quis putet ! PI. Ep. 437, b. ap o5v \xe2\x80\x94 irdyra ra rotavra rwv iycurrlmf \naKKT\\\\ois ^elris; can you co)isider all such things to be opposite to eocA other f i. e. \ncan I assume that you, etc. \n\n\n\n^ 259.] SUBJUNCTIVE, OPTATIVE AND IMPERATIVE. 357 \n\n\n\nRem. 7. The deliberative Opt. (No. 2) differs from this. \n\nEem. 8. All the cases mentioned under (a) (b) (c) (d) (e), are to be regarded \nas elliptical sentences, which ha^-e originated from a conditional sentence like \n\xc2\xabf Tt ?x<"^> Jo^Tjy &y [^ 339, n, (a)], if you had, you ivould give. \n\n(4) The following points in addition are to be observed \nrespecting the Imp., [$ 258, 1, (c)] : Though the Imp. always \nrefers to time present to the speaker, yet the Greek has several \nImp. forms, viz., a Pres., Perf , and Aor. Tliese forms, how- \never, do not express a different relation of time, but only the \ndifferent condition or circumstances of the predicate. The dif- \nference between the Imp. Aor. ypd\\f/ov and the Pres. ypa^c, has \nbeen explained, \xc2\xa7 257, 1, (1j). The Liip. Perf has always the \nsense of the Pres., u-ith the accompanying idea of the perma- \nnence or continuance of the result, e. g. fiefivqa-o, memento, be \nmirulful, remember ; rj ^>pa Kc/cXcto-^w, let the door be shut \n(and remain shut).- See ^ 255, Rem. 5. \n\n5. In negative or prohibitive expressions with /xtJ (ne), the \nGreek commonly uses only the Pres. Imp., not the Aor. Imp. ; \nbut instead of the Aor. Imp., the Aor. Subjunctive is used. \n\nMh ypd<p( or /*)) ypdyl/jis (but neither firj y pdcprjs, nor fi^ yp<i\\pov). M)j \nypatptrw or fiij \xe2\x80\xa2ypcf^\'p, n* scribito (but neither fi^ ypd<pT], nor fxi] ypa\\l/dTci)). \nMif fioi i-yriKfyf or fiii fioi ayriKf^T) s, do not speak against me (but \nneither /i)) ij^iA^T^r nor /i)j oi/T^Ae^oi\'). Isoc. Dem. 24. MTjSeVa (pl\\ou iroiov \nirp\\y tiy i({Tdtrpt, irws $e\xc2\xabxpV^(u To7y irp6T(pov <pl\\ois. 36, 29. firjSevl aviKpopas \nhvtihiarjs\' Koiy^ yap ri rvxv koI rh ntWou aSparoy. Th. 3, 39. Ko\\a(TbT]TW(Tav \n8i KcH vvy a^iui ttjj ahiKias, koI fxi) ro7s fifv 6\\lyois tj aWia irposrc^^, rhu Si \nSrin.ov air o\\v<rrfT f. \n\nRem. 9. Ye; sometimes in the Epic poets, though very seldom in other \npoets, fi-fj is found with the second Ters. of the Aor. Imp., e. g. II. 5, 410. rcfj \nH^ HOI learfpas -ko^\' bfioir, tyStfo bvfiv- The third Pers. is frequently found \ncvrn in the Attic prose writers. X. Cy. 8. 7, 26. /urjStls tSe\'rw. \n\nG. The third Pers. Imp. is very often used (the second more \nseldom), to denote that the speaker admits or grants sometliiug, \nthe correctness or incorrectness of which depends upon himself. \nThis is called the cnncmsive Imp. \n\nOi5t\xc2\xab9 ^x\xc2\xabt<w, ws av KiyiLS {admit that it is as you say), P. Syrap. 201, c \n\'EoiKfTw Sv(v ^I\'l\'X^) ^vixcpvrcf Svydfifi inroirr4pov (evyovs re koI r)vi6xov (grxnt \nOiat the soul is like, etc.), Phaedr. 246, a. Aeyerw irepl^ainov, &s HKtuTTOS \nytyydxTKti {admit that each one speaks of it), Th. 2, 48. \n\n\n\n358 SYNTAX. [$ 260 \n\nRem. 10. In the interrogative formula of the Attic poets: ola^ % Zpatroy, \n\xe2\x80\x94\'ola^\' d)s TToiriffov ; {do you know what you are to do ?), the Imperative is to be \nexplained as a transition, easy to the Greeks, from the indirect to the direct \nform of speech. It is also explained by considering it the same as Zpwrovy \notcSf o ; do, \xe2\x80\x94 do you know wfiat? The formula is a softer mode of expression \nthan the Imp. dpaaov or ttoitjo-oi/. The use of the third Pers. Imp., not only \nin dependent questions, but also in other subordinate sentences, is according to \nthe same analogy. Her. 1, 89. vvu Siv \xe2\x96\xa0jrotTjtroi/ \xc2\xab5e, fX roi apfffKfi. to iyio \\4yw \nKdriaov TCtiV 5opv(p6pwv iirl Trdcrriai rrjci irvKriai <pvKa.KOvs o* \\ey6vTut> \xe2\x80\x94 , fis \n<r(()\xe2\x82\xaca (sc. XP\'^M\'*\'\'\'\'*) OLvayKaiojs \xe2\x82\xacX^* Se/corei/i^i/ai ry At\'/ [oi \\fy6vruv = icai \novroi \\ey6vT(av, who sfiould say, or and let them say). Th. 4, 92. ScZ^eu, \n\'6ri \xe2\x80\x94 KaTdc^waav, they might obtain ! \n\nRem. 11. On the transition of the third Pers. Imp. to the second, see k 241, \nRem. 13, (c) ; on the use of the Fut. instead of the Imp., see \xc2\xa7 255, 4, and on \nthe Opt. with &v in the sense of the Imp., \xc2\xa7 260, 2, (4) (b). \n\n\n\n$260. The Modes in connection with the Modal \n\nAdverb av (kc, kIv). \n\n1. The Modal adverb av (Epic Ke(v), Doric *ca, Kav), denotes the \nrelation of a conditioning expression or sentence to a condi- \ntioned one ; indicating that the predicate of the sentence to \nwhich it belongs, is conditioned by anotlier thought either ex- \npressed or to be supplied. By the particle av, the realization \nof the predicate is made to depend upon the realization of \nanother predicate. Therefore, where a predicate is accom- \npanied by av, the predicate is represented as cofuiilioned by \nanother thought ; av always refers to a condition. \n\n2. A complete view of the use of av cannot be presented \nexcept in connection with conditional sentences. Yet, as it \nis used in all kinds of sentences, it is necessary to explain \nits construction here. It is connected : \n\n(1) With the Fut. Ind. The predicate expressed by the \nFut. Ind., seems to the speaker, at the time then present, \nalways to depend on conditiotis and circutnstances. ^Tienever \nthis idea of dependence is to be made specially prominent, av \n(Epic Ke) can be joined \\vith the Fut ; yet this construction is \nrare in the Attic dialect. \n\nOd. p, 540. \xe2\x82\xaci S\' \'OSvaevs e\\^oi \xe2\x80\x94 , aJ^pd Ke avy ^ irouS) $ias aworltrtrat \noi/Spw;/, he icouJd punish. H. |, 267. oAA* tdr\\ 4yat pc k4 toi Xapireov filop \n6ir\\oT\xe2\x82\xacpd(cy dtoffo) 6irvi4fi\xe2\x82\xacvai,dabo,scil.sitihilubuerit. X. Cy. 6. 1,45. w/3pi<rr})ro8r \nvo/xl^wv avT6v, cZ olS* Stj Jifffievos tiv irphs &vSpay otos trv eJ, araWayfiatrai \n(so the MSS.). 7. 5, 91. Stoj\' Se kou aicr^ccyrcu Tjfias ^ySov ivras, iroA.i\xc2\xbb iy ^ti fioAAor^ \n% vOv, dLxpfMi ^<rovr at vrh tov itcireir\\TJx^eu (&v is wanting in only two MSS.). \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 260.] MODAL ADVERB av. 359 \n\nHemare: 1. "With the Pres. and Perf. Ind., &u is not used. For that which \nthe speaker expresses as a present object, cannot at the same time be expressed \nas somethinjT, the realization of which is dependent on another thought. In \ntl \'-S where 6.y is found with the Pres. or Perf. Ind., either the*\'reading \n\ni- , le. or 6.1/ must be referred to another verb of the sentence, e. g. Ovk \n\n0/5\' hv ft TTfiaaifjii (instead of \xe2\x82\xac* irfiacufii &v). Eur. Med. 937 ; so often pofxiCco &u, \nolfuu &y and the like followed by an Inf , where &v belongs to the Inf ; or it is \nto be considered as an elliptical mode of expression, as in X. S. 4, 37. iyu Sh \novTw TToAAa ex^, ^s fx6\\is aina koI \xe2\x82\xac70) & v ai/rhs eiipiaKU), I have so many things \nthat I uith dilficulty find them, indeed if I should seek for them myself I should not \nJind thrill. Nor is ii^ used with the Imp. For what the speaker expresses as \n\nhis ii; \xe2\x80\xa2 ^\'ste will, cannot be considered as dependent on a condition. The \n\nfew I referred to in proof of the use of &y with the Imp., are all, criti- \n\n:illy couaidcred^ questionable and prove nothing. \n\n(2) "Av is used with the Ind. of the historical tenses: the \nAor., Impf. and Plup. : \n\n(a) To denote tliat sometliing might take place under a cer- \ntain condition, but did not take place, because the condi- \ntion was not fulfilled. The condition is then expressed \n]jy ei with the Ind. of the historical tenses. \n\nEi toOto f\\tyts {t\\\xc2\xab^as)t ri fidprave s (IJfxoprej) Av, i. e. if you said this, \nyou rvere wrong, or if yon had said this, you u-oidd have been tcrong, but now I know \n\xe2\x80\xa2\' \xe2\x96\xa0 \xc2\xbb you did not say it, consequently you are not wrong; \'Lat. si hoc dixisses, \n^es (at non dixisii ; ergo non erra.\xc2\xabti). Ef ri ftxofi^>\'y iSiSofj.ey \n{KSofify) iy^ if wv had anything, we would give it to you, or if we had had any- \n. we would have given it to you ; si quid habuissemus, dedissemus. Also with- \nout an antecedent clause, c. g. ix^P^^ ^y Uietatus fuisses (scil. si hoc vidisses). \n\nRem. 2. Here iH-long also the t^ \' -ns, (f6yL7\\v &v, tyvo) ns iv, \n\n\xe2\x96\xa0ffrrbfTo Tjj&K, <P(t6 Tii iv, and tin- in L.auu. piitares,crederes,diceres, \n\nres, you (out) uxfuJd thiuL; or you (one) uoidd have thought. Here ci \n\n, \xc2\xbb. KAtytv. \xc2\xabi (U(y. fl iSvyaro, and the like, as conditioning antecedent \n\nes. are to be supjdicd. "Evda 5tj tyvw tis ttv roiis dfiorlfjLOvs TrerraiSevfie- \n\n\xc2\xbb . \' * Ml Tcri ridire.t, f\' might sir. were he present). X. Cy. 3.3, \n\n7\'. h c; - . t yv<i> *is iv, 0(T ,_ : t^Tj rh <pi\\(7a^ai &pxouTa imh rwv apxc/Jie- \n\nictv, 7, 1, 38. L^vs ffiiy rovrots finrqi-fierayrfs (Is rhy inf\\hv darroy, ^ S>s tis fer \n\n<p(To, nfTtupovs i^\xe2\x82\xacK6fit(rcLy Tov aud^as (celerius. quam quis crederet), An. 1. 5, 8. \n\n"Ewf fipdxrbri 5\' &y ris K0j<(7ya iSuiy (one might be encouraged if he saw those \n\nthings), Ag. 1, 27 \n\nKkm. .1. With the Tnd. of the historical tenses, &y is often omitted. Then \nthi- >iir.iker has no rclVrcnce, in his representation, to the condition contained \nin the protasis or antecedent, on account of which the action expressed in the \napodosis or conclusion could not be completed, but he emphatically represents \n\n\n\n\nMTjv yvyif vfuy kclXw tovs avyfiS6Tas. The ellipsis of &y is most frequent m \nexpressions which denote the idea of necessitv. dutv, reasonableness, possibili- \ntv, libertv. and inclination, c. g. xpvy,^Sfi. \'&4>f\\oy] with verbal adjectives \nia r4os] \'with irposvKf, Kaiphs ^ v, eUhs ^v, Ka\\hy ^v, aiffxpov iiv^ \n\n\n\n360 SYNTAX. f^ 260. \n\n&^iov ^v, KaKws elxc, \xe2\x82\xac|f/j/, vvy^px^v, efieWev, l^ovXonrjv. Lvs. \n123,3. XP^*\' ^^ <^^> etTrep ^a^a XRV^ToSy iroKv fia?0^ui/ fj.r]vuTT]y ye^ea^cu \' yvv 54 \naov TO ^pya ^avepa yey ei/r]Tai k. t. \\., yoa ouglit or ^ci\'/ o^^z/Af to have been \n{oportebatj. X. C 2. 7, 10. et /xeu toIvvv ala-xpof ri ^fieXXov ipydaour^cu, ^dva\' \nTOP auT avTov irpoai per 4 ov ?iv\' vvv 8\' & fikv SoKei KoWicTTa kcu vpeiruSearfpa \nyvuai^ly eluai. eTTiVrai\'Tot, ojs eoiKe k. r. A., mors praeferenda erat. So also with \nthe Inf, X. C. 1. 3, 3. ovre yap ^\xe2\x82\xaco7s e<f>r} KaKias ex ft", \xe2\x82\xac\xc2\xbb toTs ti\xe2\x82\xacyd\\(ut \n^ucriais fiaTO^ov ^ rats aynKpals txo-i\'pov y for he said it would not be proper for the \ngods ^ if etc. Very often without an antecedent sentence, e. g. alaxp^v ^v \nravra iroiilv, turpe erat, it would be base, icould have been; i^rjy rain a irotfip \nlicebat, it would be lawful ; KaXws \xe2\x82\xac?x*\' Comp. with the above the use of the \nInd. in Latin, where the Subj. mifrht have been expected, in such ex\' ns as \n\naequum, justum, rectum est, it would be proper, longum est, it would be and \n\nthe participle in das in the conclusion of a conditional clause, as Si Romae \nCn. Pompeius privatus esset, tamen is erat deligexdus. \n\n^ Rem. 4. In all the above expressions, however, iv can be used ; so also in \nLatin, the Subj. is sometimes found instead of the Ind. Dem. Phil. 1. 40, 1. \n\xe2\x82\xact yap 6K Tov irpo\xe2\x82\xac\\-q\\vb6TOS XP^\'\'^^ \'\'\'^ Scovra ovroi <Tvv(fiov\\fv(ray, ovScy & y \nvfjias vvv 6 Set fiovK^vea^ai. So also in Lat. the Subj. is used instead of the \nInd. \n\nRem. 5. The Pres. tense of xp^\xc2\xbb Se?, irposriKei, koXus ex"\xc2\xbb etc., is used of \nthings which can yet take place. Comp. jtossum commemorare, which implies \nthat I still can do the act, and poteram commemorare, which implies that I \ncannot do it. \n\nRem. 6. "Av is very naturally omitted, if in the apodosis there is an Ind. \nof an historical tense of the verb KivSuvvftv, to be in dangtr, to seem, - \nthe verb by itself implies that the action expressed by the Inf. connected win, ,,, \ndid not take place ; for what is only in danger of occurring, actuaUif does not \noccur. Th. 3, 74. t) Tr6\\is i k iv5vy\xe2\x82\xacv<r e vaaa Sia<p\'J \' " " - \'-.(to \n\nT^ (pKoyl iiriipopos is avrriv, the w/iole citiJ was or ,.j^r \n\nojf destruction, if Acschin. c. Ctcs. 515, R. ei /xij Spofitp fi6\\is (^\xc2\xabpuyoufy fis \nA\xe2\x82\xac\\(povs, iKivSvyevaafJiev aTro\\4(r^ou. So if in the apodosis, 6\\iyoyy \nfiiKpov, rdxct, nearly, almost, arc joined with the Ind. of a historical tense \nin the concluding clause ; for what only nearly takes place, actually docs \nnot take place, hence the Ind. without dv is appropriate in both these* cases. \nPlat. Synip. p. 198, C e7a>7e ivbvfxovfieyos, on airrhs ovx oI6s t\' (ffo^uu ou5\' ^yyvs \nrovTcov ovSfV KoXbu flTTcTv, vTT^ oj.ax\'^t^s oXlyov air o5 pas V X * M *? \xc2\xbb\'> f\'^ \'"7 **X<"\'\xc2\xbb \nI had almost fled for sluime, if Without a protasis, e. g. X, Cy. 1. 4, 8. ireu rtts \nSiaTrr}5wv auTuy 6 \'linros irlirTd eh yovara, Kol fitKpov KOKfTyoy 4^fT pax\'h ^ ^\' \n(Tf y. Comp. the Lat. prope {jxiene) cecidi, 1 came near fallinrj. \n\n(p) To denote that an action takes place (i> ixj\xc2\xbbeuicd), in \ncertain cases, and under certain circumstances. The his- \ntorical tense in the principal clause is then commonly the \nImpf. The condition under wliich the action is repeated, \nis expressed by a subordinate clause with et, ore, etc. and \nthe Opt. ; the condition, however, is often omitted. \n\nETir^y &y, he icas accustomed to say, he tcould say as often as this or that happened, \nas often as it was necessary, and the like. X. C. 4. 6, 13. e i S4 ris eurr^ w(pi rou \nayTi\\4yoi, iiri Ti]y vir6^eaiv iirayTjyey tiv irdyra rhy \\iy0yy as o/ien as \none conti-adicted hinu he taouM {he icas accustomed to) carry back the whole armmtefd \nto the original pwposition. 1.3, 4. ci S4ri SJ|ei\xe2\x82\xacv airrf (^enKpdrei) <rriujurt<r- \n\n\n\n-^ 2G0.] MODAL ADVERB av. \n\n\n\n361 \n\n\n\nS^anrap^rQv ^cQv, iirrov &;/ iirela^Tj iraph. rh arifjiaivSjJL^va iroirifrai, ?, err:. \nauihv evei^ey 65ov Aa^eli/ rjyc/iSi\'a Tu(p\\hv \xe2\x80\x94 avrl ^K^ttovtos. An. 2. 3, 11. ^X th \navTcp SoKolv r&y irphs toVto rerayfievwy fiXuKeveiy, iiraieu &v, he xvould beat \nhim. 1. 5, 2. oi uev ouoi, eVei ti$ ^kLkoi, trpoSpa^uSuTes av eaTacrav, as often as \nany one pursued t/iem, they xcould stop (tlie Plup. having- the sense of tlie Impf. \n4 255, Rem. 3). 3. 4, 22., dir6Te Se bidaxoL^v at ir\\evpal tov ir\\ai(riov, rh fiiffov \n\n3. With the Subjunctive, to represent the future conception, \nwliich the Greek expresses by the Sub. [J 2o7, 1, (a)], as co7i- \nditiomU, and depending on circumstances. The following cases \nare to be distinguished : \n\n(a) The dcliheralive Subj. [^ 159, 1, (b)], takes av, though but \nseldom in direct, more frequently in indhect questions, when \na condition is to be referred to. \n\nTt itot\' &K oZv Kiyw^fv; {icfiat shall tee therefore soy, if the thing is sol) \netc, n. L. 653, c. ^7u> Tap rovro, 2) IlpoTaySpa, ouk wfirjy SiSuKrhy eJyai, aol Se \n\\4yoyri oifK ^X" 8ira>j &k airiaru (i. c. fl (ru \\(y\xe2\x82\xacis), I knoiv not howl could \ndisbelieve it, if you say so^ Prot. 319, b. *Ay S" av i]/xe7s viKUfxey, \\\xe2\x82\xac\\v/ieyr]s tt/s \nyc^n\'/pas ovx \'iiovaiv iitfiyoi, Sirov tiy (^uyoxrt v, X. An. 2. 4, 20. El de aoi fx.^ \nSoKti, (rK(if(u, 4ky (i. O. ct h.y) t6S\xe2\x82\xac <toi fjuiWoy apfCK\'p. C 4. 4, 12. \n\n(b) Tlic Subj., whicli is \xe2\x80\xa2 \'\'\xe2\x96\xa0 -ed in the Homeric languaf2:e instead of the \nFut. Ind. (^ \'2\')\'J, liem. 4), i- , utly foun<l with ay, wliich is to be explained \niu the same manner &a with the Fut. Ind. [No. 2, (1 )]. El 5e kc fi}} Swcoaiy, iyilf \nS\xc2\xab K(y axrrhs cXw/iat 11. o, 137, then I myself will {icithout doubt) talce it, less \ndirect than the Fut. Ovk &y roi xp\xc2\xab^o\'MP tcl^apis, II. 7, 54. \n\n(c) In subordinate clauses. In tliis case, av usually stands \nwith the conjunction of the subordinate clause, or combines \n\nwith tlic conjunction and forms one word. \n\nt \n\nIn this way originate idy (from el &y), irrdy (from ind 6.y), orav (from ore i.y), \nivSray (from &w6Te Ay), irply liy, Ky^^ &y, S^i &y, ov &y, ottov &y, oT 6.v, oiroi &y, \xc2\xa7 \n\n&y, Sttjj 6.y, S^ty 6.y, 6v6^\xe2\x82\xacy &,- Ctc , ts &y (v \xe2\x96\xa0 \'^ or si quis),olo5 &y, Sirolos &y, \n\n5<ros h>, dnoaos &y, ctc. In all these cxji -^, a possible assumption is de- \n\nnoted ; it is assumed that something: is possible in the future ; the future occur- \nrence of it depends upon the assumption of the speaker, i. e. the speaker \na.<ssumcs and expects that it will be, e. g. iay tovto \\iyris, if you say, shall say \nthis (viz. according to my assumption, or as I expect you will), afiapTiio-r], you \n>rill he wrong. \n\n(4) With the Opt., but not Avith the Opt Fut. \n(a) The Opt. with tkv must always be considered as the principal clause of a \ncouditional sentence, even if the condition is omitted, e. g. el n exois, Sotrjs ^j/, \n\n31 \n\n\n\n\'M\\2 SYNTAX. \\S 260, \n\nif you had anything, you would give it (you may perhaps have something, and \nthm you may give it to me). The Attic writers in particular, use this mode \nof expression, to denote firmly established and definite opinions and views of \nanything, and even to denote actual facts with a degree of reserve, moderation \nand modesty. A negation is here expressed by ov{k). Her, 3, 82. kvtpibs kvhs, \nrod apicTOv (i. e. \xe2\x82\xact Hpurros etr]) oi/dev ifieivov hv (pay^lii, nothing vmvdd seem \nbetter than. 7, 184. &v5pes tuv elev iv avrolcri reaaepfs fxvpidSfs koI ftKoai^ thf.re \n11.\' ly have been two hundred and forty thousand men. 5, 9. yevo iro S\' hu irai/ iv \nT<S fiaKptp xP^^Vi ^^^ might happen. X. Cy. 1, 2, 11. hripuvns ovk h.v apiar^i- \naaieu, while hunting they tvould not breakfast = tfiey do not breakfast. 13. \ncVctSai/ TO TrefTe koI (Xko<tiv cttj StaTeAeVaxTtc, fXriaav )U\xe2\x82\xacV tiv ovroi Tr\\e76y t\xc2\xab \nyeyovdres rj Tr\xe2\x82\xacUTr)KovTa err) airh yeveas. PI. Gorg. 502, d. Arfjxriyopla iLpa rls \nicrriy T] TTOLTjTiK\'f). Call, ^aiyercu. Socr. Ovkovv rj ^rfTopiKT} Sr]firiyopla hv tiff. \nBy the Opt. with tiv, Homer [\xc2\xa7 339, 3, (a) (/3)] and Herodotus often denote a \nsupposition respecting something that is past. Her. 9, 71. toDto fity koI <p^6ya> \ntiu \xe2\x82\xac tiro ley, they might havp said these things from envy. 1, 2. eiritray S" h* \noZroi KprjTes, these might have been Cretans. \n\nRem. 7. If the Opt. is used without 6.V, as \xc2\xa7 259, 3, (a), the action is ex- \npressed with greater emphasis and definiteness, since the s[>eaker has no refer- \nence to the conditioning circumstances, which mi_\' \')f \nthe thing conceived. Comp. ^eta ^^6$ y 4^f\\wi ^ \xc2\xab, \nthe propitious deity, I think, can save, Od. 7, 231, and aauxrat iy^ COCLD, \nMIGHT save, if he wished. Hence the omission of &y in the freer 1::" \xe2\x96\xa0" \xe2\x96\xa0 \' \xe2\x96\xa0 of \npoetry, is far more frequent than in prose, which has more regard to ..A \nrelation of the things described. \n\nQi) So also the Opt. is used with av, as a more modest and \nmild expression of a command or request, since the thing de- \nsired is represented as dependent on the will of the person \naddressed and is thereby made conditional. Here also a nega- \ntion is expressed by ov{k). \n\nPI. Phaedr. 227, c. \\(yois &y instead of \\(ye (properly, you may speaL, ifym \nchoose). Tim. 19, o. clkovoit i?v IjSr) to ficrh ravra irtpl rris ToXtTtlaSy you \nmight hear then, instead of hear then. S. El. 1491. x^po\'^ ^\xc2\xbb yo" might go. IL \nj8, 250. with a degree of irony, Qfpclr\' \xe2\x80\x94 Jfcxfo \xe2\x80\x94 .\' ov ykp iyu ado ^/xl x^P**^ \nrepoy fiporhy &Woy e/xfifyai \xe2\x80\x94 * T(j5 ovk hy fiouriXrjas aya ar6fi tx\xc2\xbb^ iyopfv- \nois, Kai (reply oyelSed re it po<p e poiSy ydcrroy re <f>v\\d<r(ro is! instead of ^^J \nay6peve, etc., you should not harangue, nor be heaping up reproaches, etc. In the form \nof a question, X. Hier. 1, 1. ap" &y fioi 4^\xe2\x82\xac\\-fi(raiSy 2 \'Upctp^ 5iirr6<rcurdeu, h \nuKhs fldevou (re fi4\\Tioy i/xov ; icould you be inclined, viz., if I should ask yow. With \noy in the form of a question, H. e, 456. ov k hy 5)j tovS* &v5pa fidxris ipinrai* \nIJ.eT\xe2\x82\xac\\^(ay ; might you not, could you not restrain the man, instead of, restrain him. \nIn a sharper and more urgent tone as an exclamation, J\\. w, 263. ovk 4* 8^ \nfioi a/j-a^av i(f>oir\\l(r(T aire rdxi<rTa, ravrd r\xe2\x82\xac trdyr drt^fiTf^ tra xp^fftt- \n/16V 6So7o ; uH)uId you not get ready the chariot, if I commanded it ? \n\n\n\n^ 260.] MODAL ADVERB av. \n\n\n\n363 \n\n\n\n(c) The Optative with av has the same force in interrogative \nas in other sentences, and may commonly be translated by the \nauxiliaries can, could, icould. \n\nn. \xc2\xab, 367. ef Ti\'r <re iSoito . . , riy %.v 5^ rot v6os ctrj; how xvould you then feelJ \nII. T, 90. oAAa tI k\xe2\x82\xacv ^ e | o t ^ i ; what could I do? S. Ph. 1393. ri Srjr hy Tj/xeTs \nSpwfify; Dem. Phil. 1, p. 43, 10. XcyeTai ti Kaiv6v\\ yevoiTO yhp&vri Kaivd- \nrtpoy, fi MeoceSwj/ ayjjp \'A^vadovs KaTairoXe^iuv ,- can there be any siranger news \nthan \xe2\x80\x94 ? \n\nRem. 8. Comp. iroT ns <p(vy\xe2\x82\xaci ,- whither does one flee ? Arist. Plut. 438. tto? \nTis <^iryoj ; whither mai/ one flee ? (more definite than with &u). Eur. Or. 598. \niro7 Tis 6.V <pvyoi; whither would one flee ? whither could one flee? where in the. \nworld could lie flee ? S. Aj. 403. xo? ris olv (pvyri ; whither shall one flee or is one \nto flee f \n\n(d) The Dramatists, particularly, often express a wish, in the \nform of a question, by Trois and the Optative with av, it being \nasked how something 7?iight, could, icould take place under a \ngiven condition. \n\nSoph. Aj. 338. jD Zfil, \xe2\x80\x94 irtDj hy rhv cufivKuTarov . . oXeacras T\xe2\x82\xac\\os ^dyoifxi \nKa\\n6s: how might, cmdJ, would I die? instead of, tliat I might die! Eur. Ale. \n8G7. irws hy 6\\oifiriy; PI. Eutliyd. 275, c. irus h.y koXws aoi Sirjyna-al\' \nfi-qy ; how can I appropriatdy describe to you f that I could ! \n\nRkm. 9. But tl " \'f, as the expression of a wish, does not take \n\nthe runditionin^\' :i _ .3,(b)]. U. (, 281 . Sis k4 oi ai^i yala x\'^\'^oi \n\nis not properly ex as a wish, but as a doubtful condition, thus (&s = \n\novTws) the earth shomi, iw ,i open fl)r him. \n\n(5) The Inf and Part, take av (kc), when the finite verb, which \nstands instead of the Lif and Part., would take it : \n\n(n) The Inf. with &y after verba sentiendi and declarandi, consequently tlie Inf. \nPres. and Aor. witli Sw, instead of the Ind. Prcs. and Aor. with &y, or instead of \nthe Opt. Impf. and Aor. with Hlv in direct discourse; the same principle holds \nwhen the Inf is used as a substantive. The Inf. Per/, with &y instead of the \nInd. and Opt. Plup. with &.y, is more seldom. The Inf. Fut. with fiv is rare in \nAttic; instead of it the Inf Aor. or even the Pres. with 6.v is commonly used. \n\nE? Tl \xc2\xabTxei\', tipn^, 8o Oy at 6.y ( Oratio recta : d ri elxov, eSwKa &v), he said^that \nif he had anything, he would have given it, dixit, se, si quid habuisset, daturumfuisse. \nEf ri ^xot, t(p7), hovyou 6.y {Or. recta : tin cx<"i"\'> ^oo/j/ i.y), dixit, se, si quid haberet, \ndaturum, esse. \'\xc2\xa370; loKu^fKaKistiv Kara riis yris KaraSuvai r\'lSioy, ^ 6(p^^- \nyai ovru TatrfiySs, X. Cy. 5. 5, 9 (Or. recta: SeKaKis ty airo^Avoiixi 7]^iov, ij \n6<p^fl-ny), methinks I would rather sink ten times beneath the ewth, than to be seen in \nthis humble condition. \'Hyoufxai . . ouk hv aKpirovs avrovs aiT(a\\o\\4vai, aKXh \nr^y trpos-i\\KOV(Tay Slia]y SeS w k eyai, JjVS. 27. 8 {Or. recta : ovk tiv airoXciXe- \n<ray \xe2\x80\x94 4i(Sw Keaay &y). Ol/xat ykp oifK tiy axapi(TTws fJLOi e^eiy, I think you \nwould not be untlianJcful to me, if I entreated the king, etc., ( Or. recta : ovk hv dx\xc2\xab- \n\n\n\n364 SYNTAX. [* 261 \n\npiaroos fxoi exoire or (rxolff\'^i 1*1* not cjotre, see No. 4). "Oau ykp neiCm \nSivafjLiv ex" 7) apx\'hi Toaovra fxaXKov h.v riy{](TaTo avrrjv /col Karair\\-f)^\xe2\x82\xaciif roi/s \niroX/ras, R, L. 8, 3. Uois exets \xe2\x96\xa0Jrpbs t^ i^4\\fiv tiv Uvai &K\\rjros iirl SeTxvov; \n(the same as TTois ex^is vphs rovro Sn i^eKois tiy Uvai 6.k\\tjtos iirl Sf7vyoy\',) \nPi. Symp. 174, b. Et ovu \\eyoi.fjLi, eZ ol5\', \'6ti 5T)^i7]y op fTy &v /xe <pcu7jSj PI \nR. 350, e. \n\nRem. 10. In Latin the conditioned Inf. is expressed as follows : \n\nypdcjieiv &y = scriptitrum esse, yeypaxpevai &v = scriptiirum /uisse, \nypdxpai dv = (a) scripturum fuisse, or (b) as Pres., scripturum esse, \nypaxpeiu &v = scripturum fore. \n\n(b) The Participle with &u after verba sentiendi, or when the Participle takes \nthe place of an adverbial subordinate clause. The same principles hold here \nfts with the Inf. The Fiit. Part, with 6.y is rare in Attic Greek (the reading is \ncommonly doubtful when it occurs) : instead of the Fut. Part., the Aor. or \neven the Pres. with &y, is generally used. \n\nHer. 7, 15. evpia-Kw 5c uSe ii,y yiv6fifya ravra, d \\d0ois t)jv ifi}]v aKfirfiw \n(reperio, sic haec futura esse, si swnas vestes irieas). X. C 2. 2, 3. at voActs \n^Tri To7s fxiyiffTois aSiK-fifiaat ^T)piiay ^dyarov trfTroiriKoariy, ws ovk h.y fifl^oyos kcucov \n^6$cp T^y a^iKiay nav a oyr \xe2\x82\xac s (existimantes se non gravioris mali metu injuriam \nCOERCITUROS FORE, thinking that they could deter from crime by the fear of no \ngreater evil). Th. 6,38. ovre Syra, oCrf h.y yfy6ficva Xoyoiroiovira _i. e. & \no{jT\xe2\x82\xac icTiy, oirr &i/ y 4 y o n Oy they fabricate what neither is nor tcill be). Isocr. \nPhil. 133. "Ev "(ff^i fiTiSfy &y ^\xe2\x82\xac rovruy iirix^tp\'h\'J\' o-vr d ere xd^eiy^ el SvyaOT\' \nrelay ix6voy koL irKouroy ku>puv e^ ainwy yeyr]a6p.fyoy (= Sri iir ex^\'^PV^ "\'\xe2\x96\xa0 i\xc2\xbb\')> \nPI. Phil. 52, C. StajceKpifie^a X^P^^ \'\'^^\xe2\x96\xa0^ \'\'\'^ Ko^apas T}hoyas fco] r^r ax^^^" ojta&dp\' \nTovs op^cos hy A6X\'^<^o"\xc2\xaby(= Kol ai (rxf5i>v ajcddofnoi op^ois hy A\xc2\xabX\'^\xc2\xab***\')\xc2\xab \nSo, also, with the case absolute : X. An. 5. 2, 8. 4<rKoirf7To, T6r\xc2\xabpoy efTj Kpitrrov \n^irdyeiy Kol robs Sia$e&r)K6Ta5y ^ Kal tovs 6ir\\iTas iiafii^d^ay, us k\\6yTos kw \n70V xf^p^ov (= vofil^uyy Sti rh x^P^oy aKoir} 6,y). \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 261. Position ajid Repetition of av. "Av without a \n\nVerb. \n\n1. With the combination mentioned in 260. (3). c, as %s iv, icpiv iy, small \nparticles like 5e\', re, fieV, ydp, sometimes come between, e. g. ts 5" iy. \n\n2. As 6.y represents the predicate as conditional, it ought properly to be joined \nwith the predicate, e. g. \\4yoifii Hy, e\\eyoy &y ; yet it commonly follows that \nmember of a sentence which is to be made emphatic, e. g. PI. Crito. 53, c. \nKcd OVK otei &(T XV 1^0*\' &\'\' <pave7(Tbcu rh tov \'S.cDKpdrovs trpaypuOL. Hcncc it IS \nregularly joined to such words also as change the idea of the sentence, viz., to \nnegative adverbs and interrogatives, e. g. ovk &y, ov^ iv, ofVor* S*-, ov^iwvr ir, \netc. \xe2\x80\x94 rls dv, ri &y, rl 5* &v, ri StJt\' &y, xcDs &y, vcis yap if, op\' Aj\', etc.; \xe2\x80\x94 also \nto adverbs of place, time, manner, and other adverbs, which, in various ways \nmodify the expression contained in the predicate and define it more exactly, \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 262.] ATTRIBUTIVE CONSTRUCTION. 365 \n\ne. g. iyrad^a 6v, t6t Si/, \xe2\x82\xaciK6Tu>s &v, \'Caws &v, ri^ &v, fidXiar &v, ^Kiar\' &v, fi6\\is \n&y, axo^V ^"j ^<f5\xc2\xaba>y &v, {)a<TT &y, toxio-t\' &u, <r<p6Sp &y, 7j54ws &v, k&v (instead \nof Kcd 6.y, etiam, vd), etc. \n\nRemark 1. In certain constructions, the Sv belonging to the Opt. is re- \nmoved from the dependent clause, and joined with the principal clause \xe2\x80\xa2 this \nis particularly the case in the phrase, ovk oJS\' &;/ cl. PI, Tim. 26, b. 4y^ ydp, \nft fify x^*^ iJKOuaa, ovk h.u o/5a el ^vvaifi-qv arravra eV fiyT]iJLr} ird\\ii/ Aoj8\xe2\x82\xac?j\'. \n\nRe3I. 2. In certain parenthetic sentences, the &y belonging to the Opt. is \nplaced first: thus particularly, &y tis eXiroi, (pairj. PL Phaed. 87, a. ri oiu {,) htf \n<j>alri 6 \\6yos ( , ) tri airi<rT(7s ; \n\n3. "Av is very often repeated in the same sentence {k4 very seldom). The \nreason of this is two-fold : \n\n(a) It is used o\xc2\xbbce at the beginning of the sentence, in order to show, in \nthe outlet, that the predicate is conditional. This is particularly the case, \nwhen the principal sentence is divided by intervening subordinate clauses, or \nwhen several words precede the conditioned verb to which &if belongs. &st* \nlipf \xe2\x82\xac1 ffbfyos Xdfioifu SijXw tratfi* &v of* a\\rro7s tppovSi, S. El. 333. \n\n(b) The second reason is a rhetorical one. "hv is joined with the word \nwhich requires to be made emphatic. If the rhetorical emphasis belongs to \nseveral words in one sentence, iv can be repeated with each. Byt besides this, \nAv can be again placed after the conditioned verb to which it properly belongs. \nPI. Apol. 35, d. ffa^ijiis y^p iy, ci trtl^oifit v/jms, ^fovs tiy SiSacr/cot/ti fi^ \nffyfla^au vnas tlycu. Eur. T road. 1244. iL.<f>aye7s &v ovres ovk h-y vfiyrj^eTfiep \nfty Movcats. \n\nRem. 3. Homer sometimes joins the weaker k\xe2\x82\xac with &v, in order to make \nthe conditionality or contingcnt-y still more prominent. II. v, 127, sq. iVrovro \n^dXxryyts . . , fts oCt\' &y k<v "Aprfs ov6aanro fi(T(\\^a)y, othe k \'A^yairj. \n\n4. "Ay is ver}\' frequently found with a conjunction or a relative without a \nTcrb, when the verb can be easily supplied from the context ; thus especially \nits iy, S)sir\xc2\xabp iy \xc2\xab\xc2\xbb, xis yap &.y, vus 5* ovk &y, Ssirep 6.V and the \nlike. ^o0ovfx\xe2\x82\xacyos, Stsirfp h.y d vols (i. e. wjirtp ty (pofioiTO, d TTa7s elfTj), PL \nGorg. 479, a. \n\n\n\nCHAPTER n. \n\xc2\xa7262. The Attributive Construction. \n\nAttributives sen^e to explain more definitely the idea \ncontained in the substantive to which they belong, e. g. \nTO Ka\\6v pohov, 6 fjLeya<; iral^. The attributive may be; \n\na. An adjective or participle, e. g. to Ka\\ov poSov, to \n\n^ dWov dv^o<i ; \n\n31* \n\n\n\n366 SYNTAX. [\xc2\xa7 263 \n\nb. A substantive in the genitive, e. g. ol rod BivSpov \nKapiTOi ; \n\nc. A substantive with a preposition, e. g. rj tt po<: rrjp \nTToXcv o3o9 ; \n\nd. An adverb, e. g. ol vvv av^pwiroi ; \n\ne. A substantive in apposition, e. g. Kpo^o?, 6 ySacrtXeu?. \n\n\n\nk 263. Ellipsis of the Substantive to which the \nAttributive belongs. \n\nWhen the substantive which is to be mow fully explained by the attribntiTe, \ncontains a general idea, or one which can be easily supplied from the context, \nor is indicated by some word of the sentence, or, by frequent usage in a particu- \nlar connection, may be supposed to be known, then the substantive, as the \nless important member in the attributive relation, is often omitted, and the \nadjective or participle becomes a substantive. Substantives which are often \nomitted with attributive adjectives, are : if^ponrosy Hv^pwirot, ayiip, iyBp^s, *yw^, \nyvya7K\xe2\x82\xacS, xpVI^O\'i XP^P-\'\'-\'^\xc2\xb0-> \'"\'P\'^yfJUi, irpdyfiara, VfifpoL, yrj, X\'^P<*i f^^P<h i3<Jj, X^^P* \nyvd/xT], \\pti(pos, rix^\'Hi irSKe^ios, etc. ; those omitted with the attributive genitive are : \nirariipy firjTrip, vlos, ira7s, bvyoLTfjp, adf\\<p6s, airfjp (husfxtnd), yvtrfi (wife), oikio, \noIkos, x\'^poj yv (/\xc2\xab\xc2\xabt/)- The substantive is omitted with the following classes \nof words : \n\na. The attributive adjective, adjective pronoun, and participle. \n\n(a) Such as denote persons : ol ^yr}Tol, mortahs; ol ao<poly ol yfiydfiefoi (instead \nof youeTs) : ol exoi^es, the ricJi ; ol (pvKaTTovres {(pvKoKes) ; ol Swca^\'oKTes, judjes : \nol Keyoi^Tfs, orators, etc. \n\n{)8) Such as denote namesof things : (a) appellatives : rh ijfi4repa (,xM/\'"W\xc2\xab)\xc2\xab **\xe2\x80\xa2 \nnostrae; to. ijxa., res meae, evenjthing tchich relates to me ; ra KoXd, res puJchrae ; rk \nKaKd, mala (\xc2\xa7 243, 4), t) varepaia, f] iiriovaa, r] irpdrrr), Sfvrepa, etc. {r}fjifpa) : ij \niroXcfila {x(*>pa), the enemy^s country ; rj <pi\\ia, a friendly country; ^ oiKovfxfvri (y^), \nthe inhabited earth ; rj AvvSpos {yv)i o. desert ; tj fv^fTa {6S6s) ; r^y raxl<rrj]r, qwim \ncelerrime; r^v\'(<r7]v (noTpav) airoSiSovou ] -f] ireirpconfini {fio7pa); rj Se^to, ^ apurrfpd \nix^^p)\'i V viKuxra {yvwur}) : t^v eVarr/oJ/ (\\l/ri(pov) rl^fcr^ou] t) ^rjTopiicrt (rfx*^)- \n\n(b) Abstracts: rh KaX6v, rh aya^6v, or Taya^6v, the htautiful, Oie good; rh \ncvTvx^Si good fortune ; rh avaia^rovy want of feeling ; rh Kow6y^jhe commoi- \ntcealth (e. g. ra>v \'S.afiluv) ; rb ^apcovv, confidence. \n\n(c) Collective nouns denoting persons: tJ> ivavrioy, th(: twinj : to i-ittjvooj\', \nthe subjects. Adjectives in - ik6v especially belong here, e. g. rh iroKtrtKovy tht \ncitizens: rh 6irKiTiK6y, the heavy armed; rh oiKfriKSy^ the servants; rh \'LXXriyixSy, \nrh ^ap^apiK6v, rh lTnriK6vy etc. The plural of adjectives of this ending is often \nused to denote a number, collection, or scries of single events, e. g. ra Tpviud.^ \nthe Trojanioar ; ra \'EAAtji/z/co, the Grecian history: rk vavriKa. uand n\\jr. but iil?o \nnaval ajfairs. \n\n\n\nk 264..] ATTRIBUTIVE ADJECTIVE. 357 \n\nb. The attributive genitive also is used without the governing substantive, \ne. g. \'AAe|av5pos, 6 *i\\iTnrov {vl6s), Mo7a rj "ArXavTos {^vydTrjp) ; then with the \nprepositions eV, ets and e\'/c with the Gen. of a person to denote his abode, e. o- \n4v qfSou {oUa) elvai; ets aSou (oIkov) eA^eTj/ ; ejs SiSao-JcaAwv (poirav, to go to the \nVacher\'s ; els nxdravos (ponau, ireinretu, to go or send to Plato\'s ; ck Si5aaKd?.cov \n6.iraXXdTTicbau^ PI. Protag. 326, c. to leave school; fh rjjy Kvpov (yriv) eA,^eu\'; \nrk rris Tvxvs, the events offoiiune; ra ttjs Tr6\\\xe2\x82\xacus, the affairs of state ; to. rod \nvoKffiov^ the wfiole extent of the war ; to. \'A^vaitav <ppoveiv, ah Athenitnsium par- \ntibus stare; rk t^j offyrjs, rii rris ifnreiplas, rh twv im^v/uLiuy (that which pertains \nto anger, the nature or essence of anger, etc.) ; rh ruv Trai5(oy,the custom ofboijs; \nrh Twu aXieuv, \n\nc. The attributive adverb is used without a substantive, e.g. ol vvv, ol totc. oi \nndXcu, oi ivbdSf (iybpunroi), ra oHkoi [irpdyixaTa), res domesticae, t] e^rjs, {rj/xepa), \nthe following day, etc. \n\nd. The attributive substantive or substantive pronoun with the preposition \njy which it is governed, e. g. ol ko^\' vfmi, ol i<p\'ijuwy, our contemporaries ; \xe2\x80\x94 ol \ni.fi(pi or irepi riva^ c. g. TlKaruya, signifies (a) a person with his companions, \nfollowers, or scholars ; ol a/xtpl TleKTiaTparov., Pisistratus and his t\'oops ; ol afi<pl \n\xc2\xa9oA^v, Tholes and other philosophers of his school ; \'^Apa Key f is r^v rS>v biav \nKpicrtv, V ol irepl Ke k porra Si\' apfrrjv iKpivav, which Cecrops and his tribunal \non account of their excdUnrf, dtcidul, X. C 3. 5, 10. \xe2\x80\x94 (b) more seldom the com- \npanions, followers, or scholars alone, without the person named. \xe2\x80\x94 Further, ot \ncvv Tjvi, ol furd rivost \'^\xc2\xab followers, etc. of any one ; ol inrS rii/i, the subjects of \nany one ; ol airo riyos, asseclae, or disceiuiants of one ; ol eV iiiTTei ; ot TrepX (piXoao- \n<plav ; ol Xfpl T^i> drtpay; ol a.fi<pl rhy v6\\efioVf etc.; \xe2\x80\x94 to vapd tivos, intelligence \nresjyecting any une, or commands of any one ; \xe2\x80\x94 rh kot* ipLe, rh eV e\'/ie, as far as in \nmy jxiwer, as far as in me lies. \n\nk 264. a. Attnbutive Adjective. \n\n1. The attribiitiv*e adjective (participle, adjective pronoun \nand numeral), expresses a quality wliich belongs to an object, \nas the beautiful and blooming rose On the agreement of the \nadjective with the word which it defines, see k 240. \n\nKemark 1. The participles A\xe2\x82\xac7(Jjuevor and KcLKovfievos SlTQ used, where the \nLatin ! / dicitur dicunt, vacant, etc., and the^ English the \n\nphrax /. as it i> d, etc., e. g. AaxeSaifiSyioi rhv iephv KaKov- \n\nfifvot\' TToKffiov iarpdrevaav ( tlit Sacred urn; as it is colled, or the so-called Sacred \nwar), Th. 1, 11 i>. S/coTTwv, Hirws 6 KaKovfievos vrrh ruv (ro(pi(TTWv K6afios ecj^v \n{the Koa fLos as it is ctdlcd by the sophists), X. C. 1. 1, 11. \n\nRi;.M. 2. It has already been stated (\xc2\xa7 245, Rem. 5), that the adjectiv >s \n&Kpos, fifo-os, iaxaros, must in certain cases be translated into English })y \nsubstanti>-es. \n\nRem. 3. Maty personal nouns which denote an emplojTnent, station or \n\xc2\xabge, are treated as adjectives, and tlie word aui\\p is joined with them, it tJ.e \nman is to be considered in relation to his employment, station or age ; bat \n\n\n\n< \n\n\n\nitrr, \n\n\n\n.juo SYNTAX. [^ 261. \n\nthe word av^p is omitted, if the man is considered as merely performing \nthe duties of a pai\'ticular office or employment. Thus avrjp fidm-is signifies a \nman who is by profession a prophet, and fxavris without iyrip, a man who, for \nthe time being, acts as a prophet ; thus av/jp 0a<Ti\\evs, av7)p rvpawos, ayrjp iroi- \np.^u, avrjp pr]T(ap, avr)p Trpeafivrrjs, av\'op veav\'ias, ypavs yuuri, etc. ; also in the \nrespectful form of address among the Attic orators and historians, e. g. i^Spfs \nSi/coo-rai, &udpes arpaTiarai. So likewise with national names, e. g. avrip \'Adrj- \nva7os, \'AfiSrjpLTrjs. Tliis usage is still more extensive in poetry. See Larger \nGrammar, Part II. \xc2\xa7 477. \n\n2. When two or more attributive adjectives belong to a sub- \nstantive, the relation is two-fold. The relation is : (a) coordhiate, \nwhen each adjective is equally a more full explanation of the \nsubstantive ; then the adjectives are commonly connected by \nKttt, re \xe2\x80\x94 Kttt; where there are several adjectives, the con- \nnective is used only before the last ; (b) subordinate , when a \nsubstantive with one of the adjectives forms, as it were, a \nsingle idea, and is more defhiitely defined by another adjective. \nLi this case there is no connective between the two adjec- \ntives. The su])ordinate relation occurs particularly when pro- \nnouns, uumerals, adjectives of time, place, and material are \njoined with other adjectives. \n\n2a)K;f-\xc2\xabT77S o.ya^})s KoiX aocphs ai/i]p ^u. HoWol aya^ol iifSpes or iroWol \naya^o\\ Koi (Totpol &ySpes. lloWa KoKa tpya. \'O 4 fihs krcupos co^s. \nOvTc: 6 ai>T]p ayab6s. TpeTy a7ad^ot 6.v5pfs. Th 7tpa>rov koX^v irpayfuu \nOd. I, 322, sq. Icrrhs vr)hs ieiKoaSpoio /xe \\aiyT}s. \n\niEEM. 4. The numeral iroWol is used in Greek, like multi in \ngenerally in the coordinate relation, and in this way the idea of plu:.. ... \nmade emphatic, while the Erf^lish commonly uses the sul)Oi-dinate. e. g. woWk \nKoi Ka\\a fpya, nitilta et praeclura facinora. The Greek and Latin is many and \nnoble deeds, the English commonly many noble deeds. \n\nRem. 5. In the Greek, the attributive adjective ven\' frequently takes the \n\nforce of a substantive, and the suhv;tantivc to which the adjective properlv \nbelongs, is put in the attributive genitive. Here the followiug ca:ses are to \n" be distinguished : \n\na. The substantive stands with the plm-al adjective which takes \' lei \n\n**^ of the substantive, e. g. oi xP\'n<TTo\\ rSiv ai/bpwwwi/ : to. crvovSaua ruif ir. , \n\n* b. The adjective which becomes a substantive is sometimes in the Neut, \nSing., sometimes also in the Xcut. PI. Th. 1. 118, oi \'A^valot M /itya \nix^pfiffo-v Svi/dfiecos (= eVl jx^yaK-qv hvvapnv)^ had attained a hiqk deqref. of \npoicer. Thus many phrases with Trav, e. g. fls iray kukov {in \nailamitntis) a<piKU\xe2\x82\xac7a-^ai\\ iv ivavrX KaKov clvai; exs vav irpofK-fiKv^e u \nJMoreover, tlie Neut. pronoun is very frequently joined with the -c- \n\ncially in prose. Th. 1, 49. ^wfTrcarov es toOto aydyK-qSy tu ... ur\' \n\nnecessity. X. An. 1. 7, 5. eV toiovtu} tov kivSvvqv. Uem. Ph. 1,51. tls \nTov^\' i/jSpecos i\\.-(]\\v^\xe2\x82\xacy. \n\ne. The substantive is made to depend upon the adjective in the Sing, which \ntakes the gender of the substantive which it governs, instead of being in the \n\n\n\n/ \n\n\n\nf 264.] ATTRIBUTIVE ADJECTIVE. 369 \n\nNeut., e. g. ri xoWri r^s IleAoirovj/^o-ou instead of rh iroAu rrjs IT. The word \nl^UKTvs is most frequently used in this manner, often also woXvs, vK^luv \nirKeiaros and other superlatives, e. g. 6 ^/xiavs tov xp6vov;iTrl ry 7,ixi(reici \nTrjs yrjs. X. Cy. 4. 5, 1. irf/iirere tov ffhov rhv ^fiicvv, ruv \'&pT(ou tovs \nrifiiafis. Th. 7, 3. rrjy irKelarrtiv rris (TTparias ira/)eTo|e : so -rroW^ t^j \nXu>paSy Thy irKeTcrrov tov xP^vov. Th. 1, 2. ttis yns t} ap I ^tti oei rhs fi-CTa- \nfioKas Twy oliajTSpuv elx**\'* \n\n3. The Greek, like the Latin, frequently uses the attributive \'2^ \nadjective to define the subject or object, not by itself, but only \nin reference to the predicate. In this way the designations \nof place, time, number, also a reason, condition, and manner \ncan be expressed by adjjectives, which agree with a substan- \ntive in gender, number, and case. \n\na. Adjectives of place and order. Od. 0, 146. f^e nvxoiTaTos aUl in- \nstead of iy nvxoiTdT(f>. Also, irpwros^ irpdTfpos (of two), vototoj, vcrTepos (of \ntwo), fifffos, TfKfirrtuos, w\\dyios, ^fTfupos, &KpoSy ^vpa7os, ^a\\d(Tarios, etc. S \nAnt. 785. <poiTas vir(pir6yT los instead of wircp Thy irSyToy. Th. 1, 134 tve \nfi^ viraidpios ToKaiirwpolrjj that he might not suffer in the open air. Here belong \nalso wor, fKaffToSf iKdrtpos, &iJ.<f>w, in<p6T\xe2\x82\xacpoSf etc. ^ 246, 5, 6 and 7. \n\nb. Adjectives of time, e. g. o\\^ios, tp^pios^ fco^iy6s^ kairtpios^ yvx^os, fifffoyvKTtos, \n^(piy6s, X\'^\'C^y* ^ap^y^s^ X*\'/**?\'"*^** ctc, especially those in -a? o s, e. g. SeuTepoTos, \nrpiToios, etc., xp^*\'^of {({ft^\'\' o, long time), etc. II. a, 497. ijeplti 5\' aye^Tj fxeyay \novpav6y instead of ^pi, she icent early. X. An. 4. 1, 5. itkot lalovs SieX^^ly \nrh -KfSloy, to pass through the }>Iain in the dark. TtTapTalos, irffxirTaTos a(pl- \nK\xc2\xabTo, he came on the fourtJi, Jiflh day ; xp^vtos -ffT^iy, after a long time. \n\nc. Adjectives of manner and other relations, e. g. o^vs, Tax^s, at<pviSios, \nPpaSvs, inr6(nroyios, iairoyioSy SpKios ; iKuy, id\xe2\x82\xac\\ovffio5f &k(dv, 6.okvos, i^eXoyT-fis \nfl<rvxos] trvxy^^t xoAuj, i^p6oSt trvKySs, ardyios, n6yoSj e. g. 6ir6<Tiroy5o i aTrps- \naay = tnrh airoyScus, they wend away wider a truce. Th. 1, 63. Tohs yeKpovs \nviro<rir6y?iovs dirt\'Socrcu\' to7s TloTiSaudTais, they gave up the dead under the truce. \n\n\\> \n\nRem. 6. But when the qualifying words cannot at the same time express \n\na quality of the subject or object, but belong solely to the predicate, the \nadverb must be u- \' Ka\\ws dfSety, you sing beautifully {not Kohhs Aieis, \n\nfor the person who - autifuUy, is not necessarily beautiful). When the \n\nGreeks expressed such designations of place and time, as properly belong to the \npredicate, by adjectives, it is to be explained as resulting from their vivid mode \nof conception. For example, kairfpios ijA^e, vespertinus venit, he came (as it \nwere) enveloped by the evening. \n\nRem. 7. The distinction between irpu>Tos {irp6T\xe2\x82\xacpos, va-Tepos, ixxTa- \nToy), irpdiT-qy (irporepav, vtrrfpav, uo" t<\xc2\xa3t7J v), and irpwroy {irp6Te- \npoy. voTTfpoy, vffTaToy or SffTora), ti6vo5, jx^yvv and fiSvovT^y \n^xjo-toAV ^7P\xc2\xabii\'\xc2\xab5 appears when the sentence is analyzed; irpwTos, fj.6vos \nmean, / am the Jirst, the last, the only one of all who has written this letter, like \nPRI M us scripsi ; ir p do Trjy, vaTdTrjy, fi6yt\\v Tijy iiruTToK^y eypaypa, this letter \nUYijs the jirst, the last, the only one I have uritten; the adverbs irpwTov, irpoT^pov^ \netc., on the contrary, are used in stating several actions of the same subject, in \ntiie order in which they occurred, e. g. \'O iroTs irpwToy fih T^y imaToK\'^f \n\n\n\n/ \n\n\n\n370 SYNTAX. [H 2G5, 266 \n\nl^ypa^ev^ eTTeffo eirottre*\', vCTara Sh a-rr-pei] or irpwrov, Saratov, for the \nfirst, last time; so the adverb ^lovov places the predicate in opposition to \nanother predicate, ii6vov eypa^l/a rrjv t-Ki<TroKi]v, I liave only imtten the UtUXt \n(not sent it). \n\n\n\n\\ 265. Attributive Genitive. \n\nThe attributive genitive will be considered in treating the \ngenitive, k 275, Rem. 5. \n\nk 266, c. Apposition. \n\n\xe2\x80\xa2 \n\n1. A substantive is said to be in apposition, when it is put \nin the same Case with another substantive or with a substan- \ntive personal pronoun, and even ^vith a personal pronoun impUed \nin a verb, for the sake of defining these words more fully ; if \nthe appositive denotes a person, it is also put in the same gen- \nder and number, as the word wliich it defines, comp. ^240, 1. \nAn appositive referring to two or more substantives is put in \nthe phiral, when it is a common noun. \n\nKvpos, 6 $acri\\(vs. T6/j.vpis, ri fia<Ti\\fia. \'tiKflvos, & $aa i\\fv s. X. Cy \n5.2, 7. T^u ^vyardpa, Seiuov ri kclKKos kcu fify (bo s, 4^dywy wSf clxtv. Th. \n1, 1.37. Q\xe2\x82\xaciJ.i<TTOK\\rjs ifiKw irapa ae, I, Tliemistodes, have come. Luc D. D. \n24,2. 6 Se Maias r^s ^PltXcu/tos Siuk ov ovfiai airrols (instead of iyit 6 \nMalas so. vi6s). \n\n2. When a substantive is in apposition with a possessive \npronoun, it is put in the Gen., since the possessive pronouns \ntake the place of the Gen. of the personal pronouns. \n\n\'E/Ltbs (= iixov) rod ab\\lov ^ios, the life of me, icrctched, eu^Aiou being here in \nopposition with iiji6s. Ta/xa (= to ifj.d) rov Sv<rrrtyov Kojcdy the evils of ww-, xm- \nhappy one! 2)/ rr^s KaWia-rrjs fvfioptpla, thy gracefulness, most beavttftd one! \nIn English, as the examples show, such a Gen. with the possessive may be \noften expressed by an exclamation, e. g. \'EAea/pcu rhy chy rov abxlov $loPj 1 \npity thy life, wretched one ! or by an accessary clause, e. g. I pity thy life, thou who \nart so miserable. So too the Gen. is put in apposition with adjectives which stand \nin the place of the attributive Gen. PI. Ap. 29, d. *Ab-nwaios iip w6X(ts \nryjs ficyiffrrjs (instead of \'A^yuv, iroXews), \xe2\x96\xa0v6\\(qis being here in apposi- \ntion with \'A^va7os which is equivalent to \'AbTjvuv. On the expressions 6 \n77/LieT6pos, vfi^Tcpos, c<p4r\xe2\x82\xacpos aiirwy vari]p, see the remarks on the pronoaiu. \n\nRemark 1. On the ellipsis of the words vlos, xoTy, bvydrripj yvvi}, etc. in \napposition, see \xc2\xa7 263 ; on the use of the article in apposition, see \xc2\xa7 244. Rem. 6. \nIn the phrases 6voiJui iarl fioi, iyo/ia ri^fd {rlbeficd) rivi and the Uke, the name \n\n\n\nV ^00. J APPOSITION. 372 \n\nitself, as an appositive, is put in the same Case, e. g.\'\'Ovofxd iari fioi \'Ayd^ap \niii>i name is Ayathon. \'O ircus ekeyeu ovq^lu ^hcu iavrcf \'Ayd^eva. \'Eyrav^a ^i \nTTOAis fifyoKrjj uvofia 5\' avr^ Kopawrv, X. An. 1. 5,4. ib. 2. 4, 13 and 25. Tou-n? \nTV ^vpotKlcf idefie^a v6\\iv bvofia, PI. Rp. 369, c. (to this community ice gavc \nthe name city, called it a city). "Appirhris koL 57]fjL0TiKhs iKT^,(raTo tV ^affiKiKwrd \nrrjy koI ^lOTarnp v post]y o piav, rhu AiKaiov, Pint. Ar. 2. {received thi \nsurname, the Just). (The Gen. also is used in the same phrase : ^wkIwv e/cT?VoTo \nri}v rov Xpri<rrov Trposrryopiay, Plut. Ph. 10. The Nom. also occurs. \n\'Aj/r/p yevSfifvos irposel\\-n(pe t^v tuv irovripuv Koiv^v iwuvvalav <rvKod>di/TV s \nAesch. f. 1. ^ 27.) See 269, Rem. 3. \n\nRem. 2. A substantive in the Nom. or Ace. sometimes stands in appositioi \nwith the whole sentence ; in the Nom., when the appositive expresses a judo^- \nniriu on the w! \' itence ; in the Ace, when the appositive denotes a tliinj \na. ronipli>]ied. .. . a purpose, or oltjcct, e. o;. Eur. Or. 496. eVei yap i^ewvcv \n\n<Tfu \'Aya/xffiywv /3toj/, irKtiyds ^iryarphs rrjs f/xris (caesus a filia mea) vir\'kp Kapa. \n\xe2\x80\x94 afo-xiCTOv ipyovl II. \xc2\xab, 735. ^ -ris \'Axaiwj/ (avrhv) ^i\\^ei xf\'P^s eAco)- \niiirh irvpyov, Kvyphv uKe^pop. Eur. Or. 11U5. "EKiiniv KTovoj/icv, Mei/eAee \n}ixnTi]v iriKpoLV (i. e. 5rr\xe2\x82\xac (Ivai Xvitriv -niKpiv). Aesch. Ag. 225. ctAtj ^vriju \nyin<T-jai i^iryaTp6s, iroXfuuy apcoydv (wjt\xe2\x82\xac flvcu apwydu). In like manner !\'. \nPart, or adjective is sometimes added as a clause in apposition to a whole sen- \ntence, c. g. rie^ci {\'Aw6Wwv) \'Opi<nr\\v firrrtp, ^ a<p\' 4ydvaT0, KTe7vai, irphi \n9VX iiravras (C K\\f lav ^4pov (a deed that briiii/s no Jlime)^ Eur. Or. 3C. \nKal 5^ \xe2\x96\xa0wap(7T(u (solutum est) coffxaf <toI fifp ou <pi\\oy !Suppl. 1070. \n\nRkm. 3. The Inf. also \' ics used as a clause in apposition with nf \n\nword, especially with dt; and relative pronouns, so as to definrf \n\nmore exactly an idea heturu exprt\'ssed in a general manner. Ou yap eV; \nrovT(f) KO^TOi 6 SiKo/TT\'fiSt irl Tfp /car axap^ Cc\'\'^<z\' Ta SUaia PI. Apol. \n35, c, tite judf/e docs not sit /or this, viz., for the purjHjse of compromising justice for \nfai-or. *A 8)j itporrfraxreu rij fiayTucpy iir la kott flv rovs ^Epwras Kal iar- \nptvfiy, Symp. 1 88, c. \n\n>. With a substantive, expressing the idea of ^/wra/zYy, one \nsubstantive or even several substances denoting the parts of \nthat phiraUty or whole, are ofltcn put in apposition, instead ol \nbeing in the Gen. according to the natural construction. This \nmay be called distributive or partitive apposition. Here belong \nespecially the words cKacrro?, kKortpo^y Tra? {every one), ol jx^v \xe2\x80\x94 \nOl Bi, ttAAos oAAov {alius aliu?n, one this, anotJier that, one another, \nor mutually), oAXos oAAo^cv {alius aliunde, one frorti one place, \nanother from another, or one on one side, another on another). The \nsubject, wliich denotes the plurality or whole, may be implied in \nthe verb. This kind of apposition is used when the whole is to \nbe expressed with the greater emphasis, while with the Gen \nthe parts are to be made more prominent. \n\nOd. a, 424. 59j rSrt KaxKiiotms i^av oU6vhe eKaffros {in suam quisque \n\ndomum sese coiUulerwit, they went each one to his own house). Her. 3, 158. efiepoi \n\niv -rp fwvTou Ttt^t eKaaros {in suo quisque ordine manserunt). Th. 1, 89. olKiai \n\n\' fitv TToWal (= rwu oikiwv voWal) iTrfWTwKeaav, oXiyai Se inpirjffav. X. \n\n6, 1. iv rah ^LKKats ir6\\fffi twv kavrod tKaffros Kal -rraiSuy Kol oUiTwy kcA \n\n\n\n372 SYNTAX. [\xc2\xa7 267. \n\nXP^j/Uarwz/ &pxov(r IV {sids quisque liberis imperant). Cy.3.1,3. SieSiSpatr/coii \n^577 iKacTTOS iirl to, eavTov, fiovKofx^voL ra outu eKirodwy iroii^abai. C. 2. 7, 1. \nrhs air pi as ye toov (piXwv rhs jxhv di oryvoiav iimpaTO {XiaKpan^s) yvtjofiri \nOLKela^ai, ras Se 5i\' ej/Seiov SiddaKuu Kara hvvaixiv aWiiXots i-rrapKelv. PL \nCharm. 153, 6. fcai Aie as eJSou elsiSyTa e| aTrpos5oKr]Tov, ev^us ir6ppot)^ev t] aird- \nCovTo &Wos &Wo^\xe2\x82\xacv {they welcomed me one from one place, another from \nanother). Still, in this case the verb sometimes agrees, not with the appropri- \nate subject, but with the Avords \'iKacrros, iras. X. An. 1.8, 9. Ttaures ovtoi Karh \n\xe2\x82\xac^yr] iu Tr\\ai<riQ} wXTjpei avbpuiTwu eKaffrov %bvos iiropev ero. The parti- \ntive appositive is often accompanied by a participle. X. Cy. 3. 1,25. eyiot \nipofiovfievoi, fx}} \\7](p^eyTes airo^ducocriv , virh rod <p6^ov irpoaTro^urjcrKovo\'iy, ol juey \np nrrovvT e s eavrovs, 01 5e anayxo /J-^p 01, 01 5e airoffipaTr 6 ^lev i. \nHer. 3, 82. ahrhs eicaa\'ros 13 ov\\6 ixevo s Kopucpa7os eluat yvufxricri re piKcii/y \nis ex^ea jxeydXa aWiiXoiai aviKv eourai. Here belong those passages, in \nwhich, after the principal subject, there is another subject in the Nom. with a \nPart, connected with it ; the latter subject, however, making a part of the prin- \ncipal subject. Th. 4, 73. {ol \'A^7]va7oi) riavxo-Cov, Xoyi^ofievoi kou ot \niKeiucou (Tt parrjyol (jl^ avriiraXov eluai (rcpicri rhv Kivhvvov, the Athenians kept \ntilence, since even their generals, namely, of the Athenians, supposed that, etc. \n\nKem. 4. In the same manner in poetiy, especially in Epic, but very seldom \nin prose, two objects (commonly in the Ace.) are joined to one verb ; the first \nof these denotes the entire thing, the other, that part of it to which the action \nof the verb is particularly directed, both being in the same Case. This figure \nmay be called cxvi^"- ku^\' oKov Ka\\ /iepos, i. e. a construction by which \nthe part is put in apposition with the whole, instead of the word denoting the \nwhole being in the Gen. and governed by the word denoting the part. If the \nwhole expresses a plurality, a distributive apposition may take place. HolSv \n(T\xe2\x82\xac eTTos (pvyev epKos o^6vrwv, Od. a, 64, xvJiat a word escaped thee ^ thy lips! \nwhere ep/cos the part is in apposition with o-c, the whole. Tpwoy 5c rpofios \nalvhs vTTTjXv^e yv7a e /coct v, II. u, 44. \'Axai^oTcriv 5e /xeya cr^eyos ejj.^aX\'\' \niKaara} KapSlr] &W7]ktou TroKefxi^eiv ijde fidx^o\'^ai, II. |, 152, sq. \n\n\n\n^ \n\n\n\nCHAPTER in. \n\n\xc2\xa7 267. The Objective Construction. \n\nAs the attributive construction (\xc2\xa7 262) serves to define \nthe subject, or in general, a substantive idea, more fully, so \nthe objective construction serves to complete the predicate, or \ndefine it more fully. By object, is to be understood here \neverything which, as it were, stands over against {objectum \nest) the predicate, i. e. everything which stands as the com- \nplement of the predicate and defines it more fully: \n\n\n\n^ 268.] THE CASES. \n\n\n\n373 \n\n\n\nthe Cases, (b) Prepositions with their Cases, (c) the Infini- \ntive, (d) the Participle, and (e) the Adverb. \n\nRemark. The object completes the idea of the predicate, when the predicate \nnecessarily requires an object, e. g. \'ETr^^y^w ttjj operTjs. Boixofxai ypdcbew. \nThe object dejines the idea of the predicate, when the object is not necessarily \nrequired, e. g. Th f>6Sou au^u ev t^ K-fjiro}. The predicate is thus defined by \nthe specifications of time, place, degree, means, manner, and instrument. \n\n\xc2\xa7268. I. The Cases, \n\n1. All the relations, which the Greek denotes by the \nGenitive, Dative, and Accusative, were originally consid- \nered relations of space. \n\n2. The action of a verb, with which the substantive \nobject is connected, is contemplated under the idea of \nmotion. In this manner the object of the verb appears in \na three-fold cispect : first, as that from which the action \nof the verb proceeds ; secondly, as that towards which \nthe action of the verb tends ; thirdly, as that bi/ or with \nwhich the action of the verb takes place. In this way \nthree Cases originate : the Genitive, denoting the motion \nor direction whence^ the Accusative, whither, and the Da- \ntive, where. \n\n3. The relations of time were viewed in the same man- \nner as those of space. Thus the Gen. (the whence-case) \ndenotes the time from which an action is conceived as \nproceeding ; the Ace (the whither-case), the time to which, \nor over which the action is conceived as moving ; and the \nDat. (the where-case) the time in which an action is con- \nceived as existing. \n\n4. The relations of causality, also, were regarded as \nrelations of space. The cause (the ground, the origin, the \nauthor), was conceived as a local outgoing of an action \nfrom an object (Genitive) ; the effect (the result, the con- \nsequence), as a motion toivards an object (Accusative) ; \nthe means (the instrument), as the resting of an action \nwith or in an object (Dative). \n\n32 \n\n\n\n374 SYNTAX. [^ 269, 270 \n\n\n\n$ 269 Remarks on the Nominative and Vocative \n\n1. The Nom. and Voc, so far as they do not express objective relations \ncannot be considered as Cases ; the Nom. is the form for the subject, and the \nVoc. is the form which is used in calling to or in a direct address to a person \nor a thing. But also the predicative adjective or substantive, which is joined \nto the subject by the copula eTyat, is expressed, as in other languages, accord \ning to the laws of agreement, by the nominative 5 and even the objective rela \ntion of an effect or result with the verbs mentioned in \xc2\xa7 240, 2, is viewed in the \nGreek and Latin as a relation of agreement, and is expressed by the nominatire. \n\nRemark 1. "With the verbs oyofid^eiv, ovond^cabou and the like, the Inf. elyot \nis often added to the Nom. or Ace, and thus in some degree the relation of \nthe effect or result is indicated. Her. 4, 33. tos oi/o/xd^ova-i ArjKioi fJyai \n\'Tircpoxv^ Te nal AaoSiKrif. 5, 99. arparriyohs &Wovs air45i^i (instead of aTre- \n6ei|6) MihTjaicoi/ eluai. \n\nEem. 2. On elyai, and ylyve<r^ai with an abstract word, see ^ 284, 3 (9). \n\nRem. 3. Since the Nom., as the Case of the subject, denotes an c" \' \nindependent, the Greeks use it not only in the case mentioned in ^ 2tr \n1, but even with verbs of naming in the active. Her. 1, 199. VLvXirra &k \nKa\\4ovcri tV \' A.<ppodirijv ^Aaavpioi, the Assi/rians call Aphrodite, Mylitta. \n\n2. Sometimes the Nom. seems to stand instead of the Yoc. in a direc t sum- \nmons or call ; but in all instances of this kind, the Nom. contains an explana- \ntory exclamation, which takes the place of a sentence. Here belong particu- \nlarly the following instances : \n\n(a) OvTos either alone, or in connection with the Nom. of a proper name, \nis oftel used when one calls out to another, in the sense, ho there ! heus tu : PL \nSymp. 172, a. & ^a\\Tj pevs, c<^, ovros \'AiroA.A<J5\xc2\xbbpoy, ov rtpififyfiSy \nwhich means, see I this is that Apollodorus, the Phalerean, who comes there ! \n\n(b) Very often in this way, the Nom. with the article, is joined as an apposi- \ntive to a call or direct address. \n\nPL Symp. 218, b. oi Se olKeraiy Kcd ft ris &AAos iffrl 0($r]\\6s re ko} aypo7- \nKos, Trv\\as irduv fieyaKas rois uxrlv iiri^eff^f (the same as, vfieis Se, oiKrrcu ivT(s). \nX. Cy. 4. 5, 17. X^i fikv oZv (Tu, \xe2\x82\xac^, 6 -trpefffivTaros (instead of \xc2\xabru, hs tl \xc2\xbb/>\xe2\x80\xa2)\xe2\x80\xa2 \n\n\n\n^ 270. (1) Genitive. \n\nTlie Gen. is the Whence-case, and hence denotes : (a) in a \nlocal relation, the object or the point from wliich the action of \nthe verb proceeds, e. g. ct/cciv oSov, cedere via, to withdraw from \nthe way ; (b) in a causal relation, the gi-ound, origin, or author, \nin general, the object, which calls forth, produces, excites, occa- \nsions the action of the verb, e. g. hridvfuo tt/s opcr^ (* 268); \nap\xe2\x82\xacTrj<s is here the object wliich call^ /ort/t, etc. the desire ex \npressed by cttu^/aw. \n\n\n\n^ 271. J LOCAL RELATION OF THE GENITIVE. 375 \n\n^271. A. Local Relation. \n\n1. The use of the Gen. expressing purely heal motion is \nrare and only poetic, e. g. Et /a^ rovSe Trcto-avres Xoyw ayoivro \nvrj(Tov {ab insula ahducerent) S. Ph. 613; this relation is com- \nmonly indicated by prepositions with the Gen., e. g. airo, from, \n\xe2\x82\xacK, out of, trap df from near aii object, etc. \n\n2. But the Gen. very often expresses the relation of separa- \ntion, namely, with verbs denoting removal, separation, loosing, \nabstaining, desisti?ig, ceasing, freeing, depriving, differing from, \nmissing, deviating from. Genitive of separation. \n\nProse words of this kind are : \xe2\x96\xa0trapax<\xc2\xbbp\xe2\x82\xac\'iv, vTrox^peTi/, eXKeiv gnd inreiK^iv, \nviravlarofr^cu and i^i<na<rbai, vo<T<pl^fiif, ;^a)p/^etj/, SLopi^eiu] acpieyai, a<pU(r^ai, \nhLTr(x.^iv, d7r\xe2\x82\xac\';i^\xe2\x82\xac<r3ow, iravfiv, iravia^au, kwXvuv, ip-qrveii\', fXpyeiv, \\vetv, e\\\xe2\x82\xacv^epovv, \nCLiraWaTTfiy, (TTtpdy, ai rog-T fpfly artpetrbai, ;(TjpoDi/, ipr)/jiovv, Biacpfpeiv, afxapra\' \nyfty, e<pa.?\\X\xc2\xabr^ai, i|/\xc2\xabv5\xe2\x82\xac(r3a(, etc. ; Sie\'xed\' and oTrexeiv, to be distant, etc. \n\nHer. 2, 80. oi yt^fpoi ainiuv Tolffi vpfafiirrepoKTi arvin-vyxdvovres etKOvffi \nrrjs Siov {withdraw from the way). X. Cy. 2. 4, 24. viroxo^p^\'iv toG ttc \n8\xc2\xbbou {to retire from the jtlain). Hier. 7, 2. iropaxwyf\'^\'\' oSov. Symp. 4, 31. \nviraviarayrai S4 fioi ^Stj koI ^aKwy koI 65uy i^icTayTai ol Tr\\ov(Tiot \n{rise up from their seats and turn aside from the road). Vectig. 4, 46. oTrtx** \nTuy iipyvp eluty rj iyyvrara ir6Kis M4yapa iro\\v Tr\\e7ov twv irfvraKocricify era- \nilwy {is distant from the silver mines). PI. Menex. 246, e. iirierTiifiri x^P^Co\' \nfieyrj d iKaio avyrfs {knowledge apart from justice). Uavoixai x^^\xc2\xb0^ (^ \ncease from anger). Au&>, diroWaTTcu riva. Kan civ {I free one from evils). \nHer.3, 81. yy<afir}s Trjs apl(rrr]s r] fid p t r} k c {he has mistaken the best view) . \n5,62. Tvpdwwy ^\\ei;^cp\xc2\xab^jj<rai/. X. Hier. 7, 3. Soke? fioi tovtw Zia<p4- \nofiy ay^p rwy &\\\\uv C\xc2\xab\xc2\xab\xc2\xbb\'\xc2\xbb t(j; ti^tjs op^yea^ai {to differ from other ani- \nmals).\xe2\x80\x94 r}, tvSofMai, <T<pci\\\\ofiai iXirlho\'s, Sc^tTjs, tvxvs {to be cheated, \nto be deprived of hope, etc.). \'A<^(7j/x/ Tiva Trjs air i as. \'AirotTTepw Tiya \nTuy ayabuy. Trjs fia<ri\\flas i<rT c pri fxai. Comp. ^ 280, Kem. 3. \n\nRemark 1. Many of these verbs are often constructed also with the prcpo- \nsition airS, e. g. ^Aei/^epoDj/, airaWaTTeiy anS (of persons, as iKev^epovy rriv \n\'EWdia airh Tuy MV/Swv), \\veiy, (tpyny, andpyeiy, 4pr]TV\xe2\x82\xaciy. \n\n3. In like manner, the Gen. of separation is joined with ad- \njectives, adverbs, and substantives wliich express the same idea as \nthe above verbs, e. g. iXevScpo^, /oioVo?, Ka^apo?, kcvos, tp^os, yvfivo^, \n6p<fxiv6^, ,/.iXo9 \xe2\x80\x94 8ta</>opo9, (LUorpio9 (with the D^t, disificlined), \naAXoro9, crepos; with many adjectives compounded of a priva- \ntive ; with dv\xe2\x82\xacV, X<^P^^> 7rX.i]V, \xe2\x82\xac^0), \xe2\x82\xacKas, Slxo-, TTcpav, etc. \n\n\n\nS76 SYNTAX. [H 272, 273. \n\nS. El. 387. at 8\xe2\x82\xac crdpKCS at Ktval <pp\xe2\x82\xacvwv hr/aKyMT kyopas wriv (bodies without \nminds). Her. 3, 147. aira^ijs kokwv (without suffering evils, I e. free from). \nTh. 1, 28. <pl\\ovs TToiela-^ai trepovs rSbv vvv ovrwv (to make friends other \nthan, different from the present ones). X. C. 4. 4, 25. \xe2\x80\xa2jrorepoi\' rovs dfohs rryv t^ \nSiKaia vofio^eTelv, ^ &\\\\a ray SiKaiuv. Cy. 3. 3, 55. airaiSfvTos fiov \n(TiKTis (uneducated in music). So &rifio5 ixalvuy. A6ffis, iXtv^tpia \nKaKwv. Her. 6, 103. TTcpTjj\' r^y bZov (on the other aide of the way). Dem \nPhil. 1 . 49, 34. rov Trctcrx*\'\'\' ahroX kokws e | \xc2\xbb yeyfiffeabe. \n\n4. Here belong verbs of beginning and originating, e. g \ni ftft \xc2\xbb KpX^o-\'^a.t, apxeiv, xnrdpx^tv, Karapx^f-y, c|ap;)(\xe2\x82\xaciv. \n\n"Apx^fT ^al Tiuosy e.g. rod tto Ac /now, means simplj to 6c^m something, \nwithout any other relation: Suy toTs ^eolj ipx^ <^^ftt Xph \'\'atrrhs Hpyov (to \nbegin every work with the gods) ; but tpx^^v, virapx^n\', Kar ipx^^v have a \nrelation to ofhers beside the subject, i. e. they signify not merely to begin abso- \nlutely, but to begin before others, to do something first or before ethers, to begin first^ \nhence to be the cause or author: Tovs 4^(\\oyras <pvyris Apx^^y iroAu Kptirroy \nffvv ro7s rroXffilois rarTo/uLfvovs, fj iv rfj rjfifrdpa rd^fi, bpav (it is better to see those \ndisposed to begin the fiiglu [set the example offiigld] in tlie enemies^ ranks than in \nours), X. An. 3. 2, 17. \'H rjl^fpa rots "EXAtjci fifyiXuv KaKwv ip{\xc2\xab\xc2\xab (\xc2\xabri3 \nbegin, be the cause of great calamities), Th. 2, 12. \'Tircfpx***\' a5iit\xc2\xab\xc2\xbb\' tpyttVj \n* thipy^ffias. \n\nRem. 2. "Apx^tr^ai ^ttJ nvos (or vob4v) means, to proceed from a thing \nand to begin with it, e. g. 6.px^<r^a4. ouri rwv crroix^lwv, to begin with the first prin- \nciples. \n\nk212. B. Causal Relation. \n\nThe Gen. in the causal relation signifies, also, an outgoings \nbut not, as in the local relation, a mere outward relation, but an \ninward and actii** one, since it expresses the object by whose \ninward power the action of the subject is called forth Eind \nproduced. \n\n4 273. (a) The active Genitive , or the Genitive as thi \ngeneral expression of Cause. \n\n1. Tlie active Genitive stands in the first place, as the Gen. \nof origin or author, and is connected with verbs denoting to \noriginate from, spring front, produce from, he produced from^ \ne. g. ytyvcor^at, ^veiv, <f>vvaL, cii/at. Genitive of origin or author. \n\nHer. 3, 81. kplarotv avZpwv oiKhs &.pi(rTa fiovXevnaru ytyrtv^at (it is \nrtasonaJble that the best designs should originate with, from the be$t Men, the hfipm* \n\n\n\nI \n\n\n\n^ :^/u.J CAUSAL GENITIVE. 377 \n\nbeing active in, o; the cause of the result). X. Cy. 1. 2, 1. irarphs fj.h SJ| \nXtyercu 6 Kvpos yeveff^ai Kafifivtrov, Utpawt/ fiaaiXius (to he the son of \nC\'ainhijs(s)\' 6 Se Kafi0var]s oinos rov TlepaeiSuv y^vovs f)v [sprung from the raci \nof Pcraidae)\' /xTjrpbs 5e dfioAoyelrai MavSdvrjs yevea^ai. PL Menex. \n239, a. fxias fir)Tphs irdyres aScXipol (pvvT e s. Attributive Gen. : \'O rov \nfiaffiXfus vios, i. e. 6 (^k) tov fiaaiXews y^yvrt^eh vl6s. To rwy av^pdcircoy \nTTpdyyuaTCL. \n\nEemark 1. Commonly the preposition ^\xc2\xbbc, more seldom otto, is connected \nwith the genitive. \n\n2. Tlie active Genitive stands,, in the second place, as that \nobject which has gained another, made its own and possesses \nit; the Gen. therefore denotes the owner or possessor. Tliis \nGen. stands : (a) with the verbs ctmt, yevco-^at (to belong to), \nTTouiaSai, to ?72ohc one\'s oxen; (b) with the adjectives iSios (also \nwith Dat.), oocttos (with Dat., inclined), Upo\'s, KvpLo<i. Possessive \nGenitive. \n\nAntiph. 5. 140. 92. rh fitv aKovaiov h.fia.pri)^a ttjs tvxvs 4<rr(, rh Se \niKovaiov rrfs yywfxris (an invoiuntary fault belongs to fortune, a voluntary one \nto our own will). Lys. Agor. 135, 64. iytviro 6 Evfidprfs oZtos U ikokXcovs \n(belonged to i\\7coc7e\xc2\xab, was his slat^). Th. 5, 5. iyiyeTo Mcaa-nm] AoKpwy riva \nXp6vov i\' \' \' to tfte Locrians). Trjs avrrjs yvufnjs elyai (ejusdem seiite/Uiae esse). \n\'EavTou u.._ ,\'\'j be ones own master). Dem. Phil. 142, 7. ^y vfjiwy aitruy \nidf\\r)trriTf yfwfff^ai {to be your own masters), non ex aliis pendere. Also elyai \nTij/oj, alicujus esse, alicui addictissimum esse, to belong to some one, to be earnestly \ndevoted to something, e. g. (7vai \xe2\x99\xa6iXimroy ; fJyai tov fifXrlarov (studere rebus optimis). \nX. Ages. 1, 33. r^y \'A<riay iavrwy iroiovyrat (they bring A. under their \njfower). Isocr. Paneg. 46, 29. t) if6\\is ^juiv Kvpia yivop.eyr\\ roiovruy aya- \nduy ovK 4<pd6yri<Te ro7s &\\\\ois (having become the possessor of such advantages). X. \nAn. 4. 5, 35. i}Kovir\xc2\xaby avrhy (rhy Imroy) Uphy fhai rov \'HXlov (sacred to \ntJiaun). 5.3, 13. 6 Uphs x^^pos t^j \'AprefiiSos. Dem. 01.1. 26,28. oi \nKii\'Qvyoi ruiv i <f>fffr riK6 Tu>y (ducum) tSioi, fiia^hs S\' ovk tariv, 2.32,16. \nToi\'TTjs Kvptos TTis x^^po^ yf yijtTfTou. In th\xc2\xa3 attributive relation: \'O \nrov fiaffiKfws Kiriros. \'H :Swk par ovs aper-f}. Uarrjp ^ eoirroXefiov. \n\nRem. 2. The Gen. is connected with Xfy^y, <pdvai, vo^iCeiv, rjyela^ai, Kpiuety, \niyiroXoM/3<{v\xe2\x82\xacj\xc2\xbb\'. as it is with (hai. Dem. 01. 2. 34, 21. 5i/coi oy ttoA/to v Kpiyu \nrr,v rwv irpayndruy awTrjpiay ayrl rris iy r<f Xtydy xap\'TOS alpeTa^ai. \n\n(c) Hence the Gen. with cTi/at denotes also: (a) the charac- \ntcristic, peculiarity, habit, etc. of a person or thing, the charac- \nteristic, peculiarity, etc., being commonly expressed by an Inf. ; \n{(i) a property or quality, viz., price, measure, number, time, space, \netc., also what is requisite for a tiling. Genitive of quahty. \n\n32* \n\n\n\ni \n\n\n\n378 SYNTAX. [^ 273. \n\n*ApB p6s iarivaya^oveZ iroieti/ rohs (piXovs. In English this Gen. is \ntranslated in various ways, e. g. it is the business, rnanner, custom, peculiarity, duty^ \nmark of a brave man ; it becomes a brave man ; it bespeaks a brave man ; a brave \nman is wont, and the like. Dem. Phil. 1, 54. KaKovpyov iffrl Kpi^ivr a-ro- \n^aveiu, (T T parriy ov 5e fxax^iJ-^vov rols TroKefiiois {it is the characteristic of a \ncriminal to die being sentenced, but of a general to die figlding, etc.). 01. 1. 18. 2. \neffTi rav aiff xp^^ (Neut.), /u.aAAoi\' Se tuv a ( c x * o\'t a? j/, \'jr6\\cu}y, wv ^fifv \nTTOTC Kvpioi, (paiviffStai Trpoie/ieuovs. Chers. 102, 48. 5oKe7 ravra kcu Sairdi\'ris \nfjLeydXr] s Kal tc 6v cav tc o\\X(t)U koX irpay fian i as el yai ( this seems to be \nthe mark of great expense, much labor). Ai^hob. 1. 814, 4. e/ie %trr iTwv ov-ra \n(of seven years, i. e. seven years old). X. An. 7. 4, 16. "^.tXavhs MoKea-nos, iruv \nOKrw KalSeKU &v, trrjixalveL r-p aaKiriyyi. 1. 4, 11. & Y.v<ppan)S irorafibs rh \n(ip6s ioTTi rerrdpcov (Trad lav (of four stadia in width = four stadia wide). \nAttributive Gen.: SeKa ^xpuv x^P\'^^\'^t I\'*^*^- 2, 35 (a place of [costing] ten \nminae). The Gen. is but seldom used to denote other qualitie?, e. g. t^s airr^s \nyud!>fM7}s elvai, ejusdem sententiae esse, to be of the same opinion. ( AXKifiidSris) &\\- \n\\oT\xe2\x82\xac dWcou carl x6y<au, PI. Gorg. 482, a {is of different words at different times, \nuses different words, etc). \n\nRem. 3. Here belong also the expressions r^ycia^ai, iroieTtr^cu, l^etvou xo\\- \n\\ov, irKelaTov, 6\\lyov, i Kax^o-\'\'\' ov, etc. {to consider of great importance, \netc.), the worth of a thing being considered as a property Usually, however, \nthe preposition Trept is joined with the Gen. \n\n3. The active Genitive stands, in the third place, as that ob- \nject which embraces one or more other objects as parts belong- \ning to it; the Gen. represents the whole in relation to its \nparts. Genitive of the whole, or the partitive GoTiitive. Tliis \nGen. stands : \n\n(a) With the verbs, etvai and yiyvea-Bai (to belong to, to be \nof the number of, to be numbered amwig) ; Ti^cVai, rt^co-^^ai, \n7rot\xe2\x82\xacto-^at, rjyelcrSaL {to reckon or number atiwng), and with \nmany others. \n\nTjw. ,65. KoX avjhs \xc2\xa5i^eKs tS>v (x^v^vtwv ^1 v a i, to he one of those remain-\' \ning. X. An. 1. 2, 3. ^v kclL 6 ^wKparr}! ri^y ajx(pl MiKrjroy <rr parevofifvur \n{was among tJiose ivho carried on tear around Miletus, orpaTevoueywy here denoting \nthe whole, of which Socrates is a part). Cy. 1.2. 15. ot tiy aZ iv rdls reKeiois \n{audpoicri) Siaycyuyrai aveTrl\\7)irToi, ovroi ruy y( pairepuy ylyyoyrai {are \nreckoned among the elders). Dem. Phil. 3. 122, 43. tj ZeKeid iart rrjs *A<r/ay \n{belongs to Asia, is a part of). Plat. Phaed. 68. d. rhv ^dvarov frYOvyrau Trdyrcs ol \nttAA.ox Twy fX\xe2\x82\xacyi(rT(i}y KUKciv eJvai {among the greatest evih). Pl.Rp.3"6,e. \nuo ucr iKT^ s S\\ fJiroy, rl^7]s \\6yovs ; ad musicam refersne sermonesf Phileb. \n60, d. (pp6vr}(iiy koI uXtji^ Z6^ay t^s outtjs (Seas r id^efiai { I consider prudenci \nand true glory as of the same nature, ad eandem ideam refero). Ep. 8. 567. e. iro\xc2\xbb- \neTff^ai Tiva rS>v dopv<p6p(i>y. Her. 7, 6. KaTe\\\xe2\x82\xacyf ruv XPV^ H-^" (\'\xe2\x80\xa2\xe2\x96\xa0 \n\n\n\nf 273.] PARTITIVE GENITIVE. 375 \n\ncitabat vaticinwrum sc. partem). So Tcfiveiv yrjs {devastare terrae, sc. partem) \niviBalviiv TTis T^s, to set foot upon. \n\nEem. 4. With the partitive and attributive Gen., two cases are to be distin- \nguished : the Gen. denotes the whole either as a plurality in relation to the indi- \nvi\'^ual parts, as TloXXoX tSsv avStpumwu : or as a unity in relation to a certain \nqrantity, c. g. neVre Tokavra apyvplov. This last partitive Gen. may be called \nti". Gen. of quantity. Both these genitives occur very frequently : \n\n\'a) With substantives, e. g, ^rayoves vdaros (vSaros expressing tho whole, \nand <TTay6v\xe2\x82\xacs the parts); au^iaros fJ-^pos \xe2\x96\xa0, if with the name of a place, \nthe country where it is situated is mentioned, the name of the country \nas denoting the whole, stands in the Gen., and usually before the name \nof the place denoting the part, e. g. \'O a-Tparhs acpUero ttjs \'At tiktjs \n(s Oly6r}i/ (into Oenoe, a part or city of Attica)^ Th. 2, 18 (never is ttjs \n"ATTJKTjy Olv6r\\v). \n\n(b) With substantive atljectivcs, in the positive, comparative, and superlative, \nwhen it expresses the highest degree ; with substantive pronouns and \nnumerals : oi xpri<rTo\\ tuv af^puiruv, ol e5 (ppovovures tuv av^pwiruv [the \nuse/itl, well <JisiMj<eJ ]Kirt of men) : \xe2\x80\x94 iroWoi, 6\\iyoi, Ttves, Tr\\eloves, TrKelaroi \nrwv au^pdinav (tiiany, feu\\ some, etc. among or of men). In addition comp. \nabove, \\ 264, Kern. 5. On the contrary, oi ^i/tjtoI au^puiroi, since the \nproperty of mortality belongs to the race ; iroWol or oKiya dv^ponroi ex- \npresses a whole consisting of many or few (a great or small number of \nmen ) ; iroAAol or 6\\iyoi av^pwtrwy denotes the many or few as a part of \nthe whole ; so rptTs T]fi(7s ij/iei/, i. e. we were three in all. there icere three of \xe2\x96\xa0 \nus ; rpf7s ijfiuy 9i<roLU, i. c. there were three of us {three out of our whole num- \nber) there ; \n\n(c) With adverbs : (a) of place, e. g. iroC, ttow, tttj, v6^iv, oZ, ii, ovSafiov, nav- \nTOXJ?, \'\'\xe2\x96\xa0\'^pA\'*\'; *"i<^l Trpoffu {further), etc. Her. 2, 43. ouSo/utj AlyvTT ov \nI \xe2\x96\xa0 in Fyyp\')- PI. Hp. 3. 40.3, e. eiSeVoj, \'6itov yi\\$ eVxi {where \nI,, hi). \'EvToOdo TTJS r]\\iKias {at this age) ; ivravda tov \\6yov \n{to this ftoint in the discourse or argument). \'OpuTf, otirpoeK-riXv^ev aacXyelas \n(what a degree of ins(jience he has reached, quo iiitemperaniiae progressus sit), \nl)eni. Tlavraxov Trj 5 7fjs, ubivis terra rum. ndp^w <To<pias i\\av- \nviiv ur r]Kiiv {to advance farther in wisdom). \xe2\x80\x94 {)8) of time, e.g. oi|/\xe2\x82\xac \nT^s T]Hf pas, rov xp^*">^f "^ V s r]\\iKias {late in the day, late in life). \nTpls TTis vfifpas. TloWaKis Tfjs r]fj.4pas. \n\nRem. 5. Bv means of an al\xc2\xbbl)reviation of the expression (comp. \xc2\xa7 323, Eeni. \n6), the i)artitive Gen. stands also with a superlative which belongs Jo the predi- \ncate. Her. 7, 70. oi ^k rns Aj/Sutjs Albioires ov\\6raTOV Tplx(aH-a \xe2\x82\xacXov(ri wdv- \nrwv avbpwTT(av (properly instead of ovK6TaTOV twv rpix^tiaroiu & irivr^s \niiv^pwiroi ^xovo\'\'*\')- 5^- C\'y.3.1,25. ir avr uv^t wv Zf:ivu3V 6 (pofios fxaKia-Ta. \nKaTawA.TjTTci Tas y^ux^s- \n\n(b) With words which signify: (a) to take part in, partici- \npate in, share i?l, e. g. /u-crexciv, /Acrccrrt ftot, StSoVat, /xera8t8oi/at, \nTrposStdoi\'at, 8ta8i8ovai, KOivoiv^lv, KOLVodcT&at, eTrapKUV (to give a share \nof), o^Vcpyo?, a/xoipo9, etc.; Kotvo? and to-o?, which commonly, \nhowever, govern the Dat. ; \xe2\x80\x94 ((3)to touch (both physically and \ninteUectually), to lay hold of, to he in connection ivith, to border on \nC. g. ^lyyavcu\', i/^aucii/, a7rrco-^ai, 8paTT\xe2\x82\xac<r^at ; XafifSdvea^at, nera-, \n<rvXXap.l3dv\xe2\x82\xacLv, i-n-cavTiXafxfidi\'ea^ai; avvatpea^ai; exeo-^at (to ad- \n\n\n\n\xc2\xab\xc2\xbb \n\n\n\ni- \n\n\n\n380 SYNTAX. \\^^ 273, \n\nhere to, he next to, to border on), avr-, TrepiexecrScUf "yA/j^co-^cu; \nk-rnxoipLos, dSeXc^os (seldom with Dat.), SiaSo^os (often also with \nDat.), e^s, i(f>\xe2\x82\xac$rj<; (more rarely with Dat.), Trpocr^ev, c/ATrpoo-^cv, \noTTLo-^eu, iJL\xe2\x82\xacTaiv, and many other adverbs ; \xe2\x80\x94 (y) to acquire an*? \nattain, e. g. Tvy^aveti/ (to acquire and hit), Aay;)(av\xe2\x82\xactv, c|^-, i<f)LKV\xe2\x82\xacl\' \ncr^ai, KXr]povofjL\xe2\x82\xacLv (with Gen. of the thing, ^o inherit; with Gen. \nof the person, ifo 6e the heir of some one ; with Ace. of the \nthing and Gen. of the person, to inherit something from one), \n7rpo\'5rJK\xe2\x82\xacL (ixoL Tivos, I havc to do vAth sojnething, have part in) ; \n\xe2\x80\x94 (S) to strive to acquire something, e. g. opeyea-SaL, i<f>Ua^(u, \navTiiroLucr^ai, ivrpeirecrSaL (to turn one\'s self to something, to give \nheed to, to respect); aroxo-^^o-\'^oLL (to aim at sometJiing). Most \nof the words included under this rule have a partitive idea. \nBesides the Gen. several of the above verbs take also a Dat \n\nDem. 24, 49. ro7s inovaiu afxapTdvovcn fifTeari ffvyyvufn)! {those who err \nunwillingly obtain pardon ) . PI. Pol. 322, a. ^ 6,v^pw7ros ^elas ^cTfVx* fxolpas \n{participated in divine destiny). X.R. L. 1,9. tov fiey y4vovs kcu r^s ivvd- \nueus Ko ivwvova, rS>v Se XP\'OH-\'^\'^ \'^^ ou/c avr iir o lovvr ai (who share \nin the same origin and power, but do not lay claim to their property). Cyr. 7. 5, 78 \nsq. ^dXirov s fiev Koi \\f/v xov s Kal air cav kclL iror Cov koI virvov aydypcTf \nKoi To7s dov\\ois ficraS iS6vai, iroXe fiiKri s 5* 4 ir la t -fi fx ri s icaJ fi(\\4rr}s \noh ixeraSoreov {to share heat, cold, etc.). C. 1. 2, 60. lonKpanis waciv atp^ovus \niirr]pKii. ruu ^avrou {shared his effects tcith). Cy. 1.3, 7. rwy Kpiwv Zia- \nSiS6vai To7s ^eparrevTois {to distribute the flesh among the servants). PI. Phaedr. \n238, b. TO T air (DP aSe\\id {honim similia). Hel. 4. 4, 6. {6^i6y i<m) rtev \nye KaWi <TT av Kal fi eyl /r uv ayab^tov 6 pey ofi4 vov s oficxaiKora- \nTrjs TeAeuTTjs tvx^7v {that they, desiring to obtain the most noble and i-al- \nuable acquisition, should meet a most honorable death). 4. 8, 18. ^y 6 QepcaySpos \nov fjL6vov av\\T}T^s aya^6s, aWa koL oXktJs avrfiroii\'iTO {ad Jbrtitudinem eni- \ntebatar). Th. 1, 8. i(piefxeyoi tS)v KepSuy ol i/o-trovs inrf/xfyoy r^y rStP \nKpeicraSywy SovXeiay {the inferiors deMrous of gain, etc.). Cy. 1.2,3. iroyrfpov \nTiuos ^ otcrxpou epyov icpiea^ai. 3.3, 10. iTrcuyov<ri Kcd acnrd^oyTcu oi \nroiovToi {avfiixaxoi) tovs dfiolovs, vofii^ovrcs <rvy e pyovs ainovs fJyxu tov koi- \nvov ay a^ov {thinking that they are coadjutors in the common interest). PI. Symp. \n181,c. u)8pea>s ^./xoipos {tcithout sharing in insolence). Menex. 241, c. ^pyor \nKotyhv AaKeSaifioylcDy re Kcd \'A^Tjyaiwv {common to the Laced., etc., like \ncommuiiis alicujus rei). "Attt o/xai rris x^^P<^^\' Her. 1, 93. Xifjuni cxeTai \nrod <Ti]ixaTos ixeyd\\ii {borders on). 3, 72. %pyov ^x<^M^\'^<* (opus aggredia- \nmur). Hcpi^xofJ-al tivos {cupide aliquidamplector). Th. 1,140. rrjs yywfx.r\\s \nT7)s auT/js ^xofiai {I hold to the same opinion). 4, 10. &ySp\xe2\x82\xacS oi ^vyapdfieyoi \nTovSe TOV KivZvvov {who have taken part in tJiis danger). PI. Rp. 2,362. a. \nkh^^fias ixiifJi-eyoy {cum veritate conjunctum). Dem. 01. 1 , \xc2\xa7 20, tws 4<rrl rm- \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 273.] GENITIVE CASE. 381 \n\np6s, arri\\dP\xe2\x82\xac(r^\xe2\x82\xac tS>v irpayfidruv (capessere). Isocr. Nicocl. 22, b, C iireiSh \nbv-nrov atafiaros ervx^s, abavdrov 5e ^vxvs, ireipS) ttjs y^vxvs aStd- \nvarou /nrfiniqv KaToXiircTt/ {since you obtained a mortal body, but an immortal soul), \nTuyxdvfiu, Xayxdyeiy xpVf-druy, evrvxias \xe2\x80\x94 rvx(7v reAeuTTjs, ovSfxaTos, etc. X \nC. 2. 1, 20. ai Sia Kapreplas eVt/ieAeiat [studia assidua) r wv KaXuv re Kaya- \ndciv ipyuv i^iKVilffbai iroiovaiy ( make them attain noble and illustrious deeds ) . \nIsocr. Paneg. 80, 187. ovk i<piKvoviiai rov ficyebovs ruv irpayfidTotv \n(nan assequor). P. Crit. 52, c. oUt iKciuovs rovs \\6yovs alcrx^vr,, ovrs rj/nSiv, \n\xe2\x96\xa0ruvv6ij.uvj ivrpevT) {neither do you respect us, the laivs). X. C. 4. 5, 11. \nSoK6(y fioi \\eyeiu, a>s aySpl ^ttovi tuv 5ta toZ crdfxaTos i]Sovuu irdfiirav ovSefiias \niper^s TTposi^K^i {that no virtue belongs to a man who is a slave to bodily pleas- \nures). Dera. in Aristocr. 690, 14. oSrot KXTjpovofiovffi ttjs vficrepas \n96^715 Kol Twy v{i\xe2\x82\xacT4p(i)y ayabuy. PI. Gcorg. 465, a. rod r]S4os aro- \nxd^erai &y\xe2\x82\xacv tov fiekriaTov. \n\nRem. 6. With verbs expressing participation; sometimes the word denoting \na part stands in the Ace, e. g. X. Hier. 2, 6. ol rvpawoi tuv fxeyla-ruy ayoubav \nvKf\'iffTa ^\xe2\x82\xacTexoi/<ri. An. 7. 8, 11. Iva /nrj ficTadoley rh fiepos xpVf^d- \nrcty. According to the analogy of verbs of touching, verbs of entreating and \nsupplicating, are connected with the Gen., which denotes the person or thing, by \nwhom or by which one entreats or supplicates, e. g. Xiaaea-^ai, iKereveiy, iKuela-- \nboL, since the suppliant, touching the knee or the image of the divinity, utters \nhis prayer. Od. /3, 68. Kiaaofiai rj/nfj/ Zrjvhs \'OKv/jLiriov rjSe Qefxia-ros {I supplicate \nZeus). So Xlaaeabcu waTpits, roK-nuy. Comp. 11. k, 454 sq. 6 fiey fiiy efieWt \nytyciov x^^P^ \'"\'c^X^^V o-i^id/xfyos \\iaa\xe2\x82\xac<r^ai. \n\nRem. 7. The poets connect many other verbs with the Gen., among which \nare those mentioned under (b) ; so any verb may govern the Gen., when it? \naction refers not to the whole of an object, but to a part only. II. rj, 56. /xea-- \nffov Sovphs f\\uy {having seized the middle of the spear). Od. 7, 439. Modus\' \nayfrrjy Kfpdwy {took by the horns). II. a, 197. ^ay^rjs Se Ko/xris cXe \nllriKduya. In phrases, like \\a0(7y yovyuy, airrea^al riva yeyelov, etc., the knee \nand beard are conceived as the objects, on which the person who touches and \nlays hold, hangs, and, as it were, depends. Here belong, also, in poetry : \n\n(a) Verbs denoting both physical and intellectual tasting, grasping, reaching \nto, and hence of striving after an object, e. g. iirifiai ecr^ at (TKOTreKov, \n5up<nyy y6<rrov {to seek the rock, gijls^ a return). \n\n(b) Several verbs, which properly express the idea of a hasty motion towards \nan object, and then metaphorically are used to express an intellectual \neffort, and longing, e. g. ^ireiyea^ai, 6pfj.?i<r^ai, eTn^SaAAeo-f^at, dird\'ia-a-eiu \n{rushing upon something, etc.). II. r, 142. i-rre iy6 fi\xe2\x82\xacy6s Trep "Aprjos \n{hastening to, desiring the contest). 11.^, 488. wpfirj^t] 5\' \'AKafxayros \n{he rushed ujxm Acamas). II. ^, 68. fi\'i)ris yvv iydpuy iTri0a\\\\6 u^yos \nIJifT6iriab\xe2\x82\xacy fiifiyerw. \n\n(c) Verbs signifying to take aim, e. g. roleieiy, aKoyriCeiy (in prose with els, \nand with the meaning, to hit, to wound, with the Ace). II. p, 304. "Ektup \n5* aSr\' Afoi\'Tos aKSyriffe Sovpl (paeiyep {aimed at Ajax). II. ^, 855. \n^ s 6.p ayuyyei To^tve ly. \n\nRem. 8. According to the analogv of the above-named verbs of aiming and \nstriving, so we find koto x^oyhs ofifxara irriiai {to fasten the eyes upon the ground); \nir\\(7y eVi 2a/xoi;, to sail towards Samos, as if setting out for it (on the contrary, \nM 2dfjioy, to Samos). \xe2\x80\x94 The Gen. of aim accurs in the attributive relation, e. g. \nwith iS6s, y6<rros r6irov tiv6s {way, return to a place). \n\n\n\n382 * SYNTAX. [^ 273 \n\nEem. 9. There also being here : (a) the adverbs ev^ (Ion. l^), straight \nforward to something, ixexph to, up to; \xe2\x80\x94 (b) verbs of meeting and approaching, \nwhich, however, in prose, are commonly connected with the Dat. ; \xe2\x80\x94 (c) also \nadjectives and adverbs of meeting, approaching, nearness, e. g. avrios, ewamios \n(though in Attic, only with the meaning contrarins, opposed to), irapairKri<rioSy \nwhich, hoAvever, are oftener joined* with the Dat. ; avriov, ivavriov (before, in \n\' the presence of) ; eyyvs and irArjcriov with the Gen. of local nearness, but in a \nI metaphorical sense with the Dat. Her. 6, 95. exov (dirigebant) ras veas l^v \nI rod \'EWt] sir 6 vTov Ka\\ ttjs &pr]tKT]5 {directly to the Hellespont). 2, 34. \n7] AtyviTTOS TTjs 6 pe ivrj s KiXiKias ixaXicrrd ktj aurlt) Keercu {lies opposite to \nCilicia). Dem. Ph.3. 117, 27. TrK-qcriov Qrfficav Kcd \'XStrivav {near TJiebes).\' \n\n^ 4. In the fourth place, the active Genitive denotes the place \nwhere, and the time when, an action nappens. The action or \neven* belongs, as it were, to the place and the time, proceeds in \na measure from them, and is produced by them ; hence the time \nand place are considered as causing or producing the action, or \nat least as the necessary condition of it. \n\n(a) The Gen. of place is almost exclusively poetic. \n\nII. p, 372. vi<^os S* oh (paivero irdcrri s yair} s, ovS\' opiojv {not a cloud appeared \non the plain, nor on the mountains). H. j, 219. avrhs 5\' avriov r^ev \'O5v(ro"^oy \n^eioio rolxov rod erepoio {by the other wall). Hence, especially, in Epic \npoetry, with verbs of going and motion, the space or way upon which the going \nor the motion takes place, and to which, as it were, this action belongs, stands \nin the Gen., e. g. II. )8, 801. epxovrai ireSloio {go through the plain). x> 23. \n^eeii/ ire Si 10. v, 64. TreSfoto SiuKeiv opveov {to pursue over the plain). So \nthe prose, Uvai rod TrpSaou {to go over the forward way, to go forward). \n\nRem. 10. In this way are to be explained the adverbs of place, ov,Trov, ovov, \naifTov, ovSafxov, aAAaxoD, etc. ; and on the same principle also it is to be ex- \nplained that adverbs of place with the suffix ^ev stand apparently instead of \nadverbs of place with the suffix ,^t, e. g. euSo^ev, 677^1^6^, rr)\\6d\xe2\x82\xacyy e*cTO(r,^\xe2\x82\xacv, \ne. g. II. p, 582. "EKTopa S" iyyv^ev larraix^vos iarpuveu \'AttoAAwv. \n\n(b) The Gen. of time often occurs both in poetry and prose. \nAlso the space of time ivithiv, ivhich sometliing happens, as pro- \nducing the action, or the condition of it, may be expressed by \nthe Gen. The Gen. expresses time indefinitehj , denoting merely \nthe period luithin which or in the course of which the action takes \nplace, while the Dat. expresses definite time, a point of time. \n\n"kv^ ^dWei rov eapos, the spring is conceived as producing the flowers, and \nhence as the cause of them. Thus ^^povs, in the smnmer time ; x^^f^^^os, in the trm- \nter ; rjiiepas, in the daytime, in the course of the day, by day ; vvKr6s, by night : SelKriSf \norrcipas] as Eng. of a morning, he did it of a fine morning ; also fiwos, i^^r month, \nmontldy : iuiavrov, yearly, etc.; with attributives, e. g. rod ain-od, rod irporcpod, ckJuT\' \nrov, erous, the same, the former year, etc. ; -tjs outtjs rjjiepas, on the sajne day ; tt/t \n4iriov<rris vvKr6s : "^ou iiriyiyvofievov ^epovt " avrrjs rrjs rjfitpaSf in the course of this dan \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 273.] GENITIVE CASE. 383 \n\n(but Dat. rairr] rfj 7)(x.4pa, in that day). Hence the adverbial expressions apxns, at \nthe beginning, and tov Xonrov, for the future. Her. 4, 48. "icnpos Xtros ael avrhs kiav-fS \npUi KotX ^epovs Koi x^\'M^^\'os {always flows equal to itself in summer and \nwinter). 6, 12. rov \\onrov fxr} ireiSfw/xe^a avrov. PI. Phaed. ^9, d. i^7]\\^ofxev \nrod Setr/jLUTTjpiov k(nr4pas [at evening). Oh fxaKpov x9^vov, avxvov, noWov, \nirAeiVrou, 6\\iyov xP^^ov {in, within a short, long time) ; iroWuu ri/xepwu, iroov \n{within many days, years), etc, Her. 3, 134. ravra oXiyov xpovov earai \nTcAeu/xej/o. X. An. 1. 7, 18. jSowiXeus ov /xax^\'iTai Se/ca Tjfifpuu. PI. Symp, \n172, C. -TToWaJy iruv \'Ayd^uu iy^dSe ovk eVtSeSTj/irjKev. \n\nEe3i. 11. By the Gen. of time, the Gen. absolute may be explained, e. g. f \nTOV Kvpov fiaff i\\\xe2\x82\xac V ovT a 5 TroAAa re zeal /caAa ^pya inrh rSiv Tlcpaup iirpoix^- ( \n\nRem. 12. Prepositions are often used to define the relation of time more \nexactly, e. g. e/c ttoAAoO xp<^\'"\'u, a<p\' eairfpas, eVi Kvpov, Cyri aetate, Sta -ttoWov \nXp6vov, iyrSs or ecw iroWov xpovov, Comp. the remarks on the prepositions. \n\nRem. 13. The Gen. as well as the Acc. denotes continued or -protracted time, \nbut with this difference, that the Gen. denotes the time within any part of which \nthe action may take place *, whereas the Acc. of time implies that the action is \nin proprress during the whole of the time mentioned, e. g. ravrtju r^v ^/xe- \npav avTov r)v\\i(iTO, he encamped there during the whole of that day ; but with the \nGen. the meaning: would be, that, in the course of that day, sometime in that \nday, he encamped there. \' Comp. \xc2\xa7 279, 6, in regard to ,the diflferencp between \nthe Gen. and Acc. of time and place. iiC-Tt^ XoU^^ i>, i*-\\" - \xe2\x80\x9e_._ -"^ \'\'"\xe2\x96\xa0\'\xe2\x96\xa0\'- \n\n\xe2\x96\xa03. The active Genitive, finally, denotes the material of which \nanything is made, formed, and, as it were, produced, or the \nsource from wliich something is drawn; the material being \nviewed to some extent as the cause of the result. This Gen. \nstands : \n\n(a) With verbs of making, forming, and the like. \n\nHer. 5, 82. xa^\xc2\xaboD iroieovrai to ayaX/iaro {are made of bronze). 2, 138. \niarpaixivT] iffrl 6Shs Xl^ov {is paved with stone). Th. 4, 31. epvfxa avrS^i ^v \nXl^wu XoydSrjv Tre-rroi-nfievov. In the attributive relation : cKirwfia ^v\\ov \n{a drinking cup \\jnade\\ of wood) ; Tpdir^^a apyvpiov, arecpavos vaKiv^av. \n\nRem. 14. This relation is very often expressed by the Dat. also, and more \ndefinitely by the prepositions ef and airS, also 5ta with the Gen. \n\n(b) With words o? fulness and want, e. g. -n-XySeiv, irXypovv, \nwt/ATrXavat, yc/xctv, ySpt^etv ; vdaacLV, aaTT\xe2\x82\xactv, iVTropeiv, etc. ; aTropeiv, \nirevea^ai, Setcr^at, Sci, airavL^iLV, XPV^ ^^^- 5 \'^^^o<s, TrXr)prj<i, p,\xe2\x82\xac(TTO<;f \nirXovaios, 8acrv9, etc. ; 7revr]<;, tvSoys; aXt? (satis). \n\nX. Symp. 4, 64. aeaayficvos irXovrov t)]V ^vxt)v \xe2\x82\xac<rofxaL {shall be satisfied \nwith riches). PI. Apol, 26, d. to. "Ava^aySpov /3i/3Aio yefj-ei rovrwv rcov \\6- \nyuv {are full of these sayings). EvTrope7t/, caropelv, TrhecrSrai, (nraviC^iu Twt> \nXpVt^o-Tov {to abound in, to be destitute of means). X. Cy. 3. 1, 3. SLa^edfTuy \nKol ihavy6vTwy rh ireSioy fi\xe2\x82\xac(rT6v {full of persons running about). An. 2. 4, \n\n\n\n384 SYNTAX. [^ 273. \n\n14. Saffvs SevSpuv {thickly set with trees). An. 1. 2, 7. wapdSeuros neyctSj \nay pi (DV ^r}piuv irX-fjprjs \'{full of wild animals). 1. 4, 19. ivravba ^aatf \nKUfj-ai TToWal fi\xe2\x82\xac<rral <riTov Koi oXvov. In the attributive relation, e. g. \n^4iras oXvov (a goblet of [filled with] wine). \n\n(c) With verbs signifying to eat, to drink, to taste, to cause to \ntaste, to enjoy, to satisfy one\'s self, and in the figiurative sense to \nhave the enjoyment, use, and advantage of something; icrSUiv, \nKJiayciv, evoixeia-^ai, TrcveLv, yevctv, yevecr-^at, KopiaaxrSai ; ajroXavuv ; \nea-TLOLv (to entertain), etc. \n\n\'TSiCr^iiiu Kpeuv {to eat of flesh) ; Kopiaaabai (popfiTJs {to satisfy one\'s \nsdf with food) , iriveiv oXvov {to drink of wine). X. Cy. 1. 3, 4. kviryKti aroi \nav oyevear^ai r ovrwy rcov vavr oZair dv PpcDfidrwv {to taste the various \nkinds of food). 1. 3, 10. koI ri Si), & Kvpe, raWa fjufJiovfJLevos rhv\'!ZdKav, ovk aire^^ 6- \n<pT](Tas Tov 0^ V ov J {ivhy did younot gulp downthewim?). C.4. 3, ll.airoKavf ly \nirdvTwv T wv aya^wv {to enjoy all good things) ; but airo\\avf ly t lySs Tt, e.g. \nayct^d or kuku, to receive good or evil from some one. K. C. 4, 3, 10. Ti &AAo ^wok , \nalyuv T\xe2\x82\xac Koi oiwv koi t S> v 6.\\\\o3V ^ucop t oaavTa aya^h airoXavet, \nHffa &v^p(i}Troi ; {what other animal receives so many advantages from goats, etc., as \nman?). Tevea-^ai rifiTJs {to taste, enjoy honor)] yeveiy riyi, rifi^s {to \ncause one to taste or enjoy honor). \n\nRem. 15. The Ace. stands with verbs of eating and drinking: (a) when the \nsubstance is represented as consumed wholly or in a great quantity; or fb) \nwhen the common means of nutriment is indicated, that which everyone tak. -. \nOd. i, 347. KvkKu^, T7), Trie olvou, imX (pdyes ai/S po^iea Kpea {drink wi.w:, \nsince you eat human Jlesh). X. Cy. 1. 3, 9. ovk Skit lo/xai airrhs rhv oXvoy. \n1.3, 6. Kp4a ye cvcoxov {enjoy your meat). 6. 2, 28. i;5otx fiifuynivr^v af\\ \nr)]v fid^ap ia^lei {always eats maizf). Ibid, /icra Sf rhv &7tov iha> otvoy \n^TT nrlvuifjLCU, oiiSev fie\'ioF exovcra rj ^pvxv avairavcTfrai (spoken of a habit). So \n\n\\i<r^leiv /cpe\'o and Kpeoij/, -rriueiv ofj/of and otuov. Hence ir/vci*\' oTvoi/ is said \nof those whose usual drink is wine, but iriveiv oXvov, is to take a drink of icim. to \n\n\\dri)7k some of the wine. Hence th\xc2\xab Gen. with verbs of eating and drinking has \n\nla partitive sense, like the English expressions, to eat or driok of sotneUung. PL \n\njSymp. 176, c. iroXvv irlveiv oJvov. \n\n(d) With verbs signifying to s?n\xe2\x82\xacll, emit an odor of somethings \netc. ; Trvcti/, o^ctv, TTpo^^dXXeLV. \n\n"O^eiv iwv {to smell violets); fivpov vueTv {to emit the smell of myrrh)] \nvpos fidWe tp fjLvpov, iruelu rpdyov, o(fiv Kpo fxvtav. Ar. Han. 341 . \n&s TjSv fxoi vposeiryevcre x^ipei uv Kpeuv {so sweet uxis the smeU of swine\'s \nflesh to me). \n\nRem. 16. In poetry many other verbs are constructed with the Gen. of the \nmaterial, e. g. airoaTiKfie iv oXe\'KpaTOS, {vckvos) irvphs fi( i\\t<ra ( ae r. \nXovetr^ai ivp^elos iroTafioTo. See Larger Grammar, II. \xc2\xa7 527, Rem. \n\n(e) With expressions of reme})ibe?ing andforgetling: fiifivija-\' \nKojaai, to remember, jxifjorqcrKoi (rtva tlvo<s}, to remind one of some\' \n\n\n\n$ 273.] GENITIVE CASE. 385 \n\nthing, fivTjfjuiiVy d/xn^/xwv, c7rt\\av^avo/xai, to forget ; hence also with \nXa^pa, \\a&pLu}<;, and Kpv<f>a ; also with expressions of being ac- \nquainted and unacquainted with, of experience and inexperienc e, \nof ability, dexterity or skill in anything, e. g. eixTrcLpos, ctTreipo?, \niTnoTrjfJuiiVy iTna-TOifievo\';, dveTrto-r^/x-cov, Tpt)3(uv, cnryyvw/xwv, dSai^?, d-Trat- \nScT/ro?, 18lu)ttj<; ; aTrctpoj?, ^evco? ej((o ; with adj ectives in - 1 k o s (derived \nfrom transitiye verbs) which denote skill, aptness, etc.; also with \n-iTiipojfULL, to make trial of something. \n\nX. C. 2. 1, 33. Ol yepodrfpoi 7)5 f us rwv IT a\\ a I wu irpd^eav fji.4fx.i/7]urat \n{remember the past achievements). Antiph. II. o, 7. \'H iiri^vfiia rrjs rijxap\'ias \nifivflfiova Tuv Kivhvvwv Ka^larrj avT6v {rendered him forgetful of dangers). \nX. 0. 16, 8. Tl6^\xe2\x82\xacU oiy $ov\\fi ip^wfial ae rrjs y e w pylas vtrofxiixvricrKeiv \n{to remind you of husbandry). Cy. 8. 3, 3. Tou <pd6yov iireXeKrtffTo {had \nforgotten envy). Attributive: fivriH-Vi f<V^ rtou kukcov. {M 4 fx y t] fi a I ri, to \nkeep something in mind.) "E/nreipoi or iw i ar-f] fiu y elfA rTJs rexvvs {I \nam acquainted with the art). \'AvalSevros operfjs, fiovaiKT} s {ignorant of \nvirtue, music). Her. 2, 49. rrjs ^vcrias ravT7}s ovk ctSoi^S\', aAA\' e fiir e i pos \n{not ignorant of tfuit sacrifice, but acquainted ivith it). X. Cy. 6. I, 37. crvyyyca- \nfiwy rS)v ayb puitrlvwy ir pay jxar wy {^xirdoning, 7iot knowing, human errors). \n\xe2\x80\x94 \'Aire i pa>s ix^ ^^ touttjj t^j t ( x" V s {to be unacquainted with this art). \n\' At ir eipu fia I yyd)fii)s (/ make trial of an opinion). With the poets this \nuse of the Gen. is still more extensive. II. 0. 411. rixToyos, ts pd re trdarjs e3 \n\xc2\xabi8p <ro<pirjs {who is well acquainted ivith all skill). X. 3. 1, 6. Tropacr/ceua- \ntrr iKh V T uy fls rhy TroKffioy rhy ffrparTfyhy elvai XPV ko-^ ir opitrriKhv rwv \nitrirn^elojy rois arpariwrcus {skilful in preparing what is necessary for war, and \ncapable of providing provisions). PI. Euthyphr. 3, c. 5 iSaCKaXiKhs rrjs avrov \nffo<pias {able to teach his own learning). PI. L. 643, a. reXeios rrjs rod rrpAyfia- \nToy ip\xe2\x82\xacT^s (as it were, showing one^s seJf perfect in a thing). Attributive: ejttTret- \npia TTJy yewfierplaSy etc. \n\n(f) With the words of sensation and perception : dKovetv, \nOLKp oacr^ai, aia^dv ccr-^ai, 6(r(f)paLve(T ^at. \n\n*Akovw rwv \\6yu}y, ^opvfiov {I hear the words, the tumult). X. H. 4. 4, \n4 rrjs Kpavyrjs fjaboyro {they perceived the cry). An. 1. 1, 8. fiaaiXevs \nyns irphs iavrhy imPovXrjs ovk r}<r^dyero {did not perceive the plot). C. 2. \n1,24. rlywv 6(r(p pivofievos rja^eiris ; {what things would you desire to smell?). \nAKoveiy SUtji {to hear a case at law); alcr ^dy ecrSfai rjSoyuy, oaiirjsy \nbopv $ov, fiorf^e las. \n\nRem. 17. The attributive Gen. has a much wider signification, e. g. ayeWia \nrrjs Xlov, de Ohio {tidings of or concerning Chios) ; ip(orri(ris riuos (a question about \nsomething), like the Latin quaestio alicujus rei instead of de aliqua re. \n\nRem. 18. \'AKoieiy, iiir aKoieiy, k or a/co u e <\xc2\xbb/ often take the Gen. also \nin the sense of to obey, and according to this analogy it eiSrecSrai (seldom m \nAttic) and kmibe^v; so also kot^kooj, irriiKoos, take the Gen., more \n\n33 \n\n\n\n386 SYNTAX. [$ 273. \n\nBeldom the Dat. Her, 3, 62. irpoayopevei rjfiiv 2/iep5tos 0a(ri\\ijos a.Ko6- \neiv (commands us to obey king Smerdis). 101. Aapeiov fiaaiXrjos oviofui \ni IT -ff K over a V (they obeyed king Darius nowhere). 1.126. vvy 2>v ifieo im^ofi^ \nvol yiyecr^c i\\evSrepoi (now therefore obeying me, he free). So Th. 7, 73. \n\nRem. 19. The above verbs have the following constmctions : (a) Gen. of \nthe thing, as in the examples given. The Gen. denotes the material as a xchole^ \nof which one perceives, as it were, single parts, or the sense, the purport of which \none perceives mentally. AlabdvoyLai Kpavyris (I perceive, as a were, the single \ntones of the cry) ; X. H. 4. 8, 19. alabea^ai ttjs fiori^fias [I observe something \nof the help); \xe2\x80\x94 (b) u:lcc. of the thing; then it is denoted that one perceives \nthe whole thing with his seases, or the thing in its totality. Th. 2, 94. \'Q.s \nfa^ovTo T7]v fioTj^eiau (when they observed the help apjyroaching = saw tcith \ntheir eyes = edipcov). The Ace. of the person seldom stands with alc^dyea^ai ; \nwhen it does, the verb has the sense of etSeVcu (to know). X. Svmp. 4, 36. \nAlcr^duofxai rvpavvov s t ivds, ol ovrw ireiuuxri XPVI^"\'\'\'^^ (^ know some kings). \xe2\x80\x94 \n/ (c) Gen. of the person, which represents the person, as it were, as the swirce, from \n( which the perception is derived. \'"Akovw \'S.oiKpirovs (I hear Socrates, i. e. the \nwords of Socrates). X. Cy. 1. 3, 10. Ovk aKpoufxevoL rov ^Sovtos wfiyvfrt \n^deiu &pi(TTa (not hearing the voice of the singer). Her. 1, 80. is oa ^pavro rd- \nX^fra Tuv KafiyXuv ol "nriroi koX eldoy ainas orrlcu av4<rrpf(pov (as soon as the \nhorses got scent of the camels ). So ff vvltjfjii (to undersix^id), with the Gen. of a \nperson, e. g. Her. 1, 47. koI Koxpov cvviripj. \xc2\xaba2 ov <pwvfvvTos ajcova (I under\' \nstand a mute) ; but \\vith the Ace. of the thing, e. g. X. Cv. 1. 6, 2. 5t* kppLUP^tav \n7QLS Tchv biuv o" V /J. ^ V \\l a s avyiiifxi (I undcr>\' \xe2\x96\xa0 of the gods). The \n\nverb at (Ti^cii/e (Ti^at is not constructed with i , /i. of the pergon. \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n/ (d) Gen. of the person and Ace. of the thing: "HKOvaa Swxparoi;; rovrof rhp \n\' koyou (audivi e Socrate hunc sermonem, I heard Oiis conversation from Socrates). \nSo also tI xc^f\'""^\'\' fja^aou Tov/xoi) filov ; (what have you perceived disa- \ngreeable in my manner of life?) X. C. 1. 6, 4. \'Svvlyjfii <rov Thy \\6yoy. \xe2\x80\x94 (e) \nI Gen. of the person with a participle in the Gen., or with a subordinate clause \nwhich takes the place of the Ace. of the thing. \'Akovu l^uKpdrovs 5ia\\e- \nyofx.4vov (I hear Socrates reasoning, nearly the same as okovo) \'S^Kpdrovs tiaJ<\xc2\xbb- \nyov). X. H. 4. 2, 19. AaKi^aiii6vioi ovk \xe2\x96\xa0pcr^dvoyro vpo s i6vr u y ruy -roKe- \njxioiv (did not perceive the enemy approaching, no Av\\\\ iho. ^: -crdoyoKTo riLy \n\niroKefjilwv ttjv trpSsoSoy). The person is sometimes also c* d in the parti- \n\nciple, e.g. Th. 5, 73. rjabouTo Teix*C<^ *\'\'\'\'<\xc2\xab"\' (ff^^y perceived them building the \nivall, instead of \xe2\x96\xa0^abovro avrwy TeiX\'C^ >\'\'\'\'\'**\' 0^ 8tj TCix^C"\'*\'\')- X- An. \n1. 10, 4. fia(Ti\\evs ^Kovae Ti(r(Ta<pfpyovs, Sri ol "EWrjyfs viK^ev (heard \nfrom Tissaphernes that the Greeks were conquering, like IjKovfff Tiaacuptpyovs r^y \nruv \'EKK\'qvujy viKrfv). C. 4. 4,13. ovk cdcbdyofiai aov^ dvoioy y6fupuoy ^ iroioy \nSIkuiou \\eyei5 (I do 7iot compreliend you, wfiat you call according to law or according \nto justice). \n\nKem. 20. Likewise the Gen. of the person and Ace. of the thing, or the Gen. of \nthe person with a participle in the Gen. or with a subordinate clause standing in \nthe place of the Ace. [Comp. (d) and (e) Rem. 19j, is used with verbs of seeing, \nhearing, experiencing, learning, considering, knowing ; of judging, examining, atid say- \ning; of admiring, praising, blaming : Spay, d^eao-j^ai, (r\xc2\xabcoT67y, usroroeTr, 4y- \ntO\xe2\x82\xacty,yiyyu>aKeiyt 67rf(rTa<r3oj, ciSevoi, iy^vfitla^ait etc.; rvy^d- \nyca^ai, fiay^dye ly, Kplveiy, elcrei^etv, \\4y\xe2\x82\xaciyy StjX oGi\', etc. : a\xc2\xab"\xc2\xbb- \nSe\'xeo-^ai (to receive the opinion of one. to agree in opinion with one); 6.ya*rbai^ \n^avfxdC^iy, eirotveTv, /x4fx<l>\xe2\x82\xac<r^ai, \\l/4y\xe2\x82\xaciv. The Gen. denotes the ob- \nject (commonly a person) in respeet to which one perceives, sees, obserres, \nknows, judges something, some action, external indication, or some single cii^ \n\n\n\n4 274.] GENITIVE CASE. 387 \n\ncumstance, etc. ; or of whom one learns, hears, aflanns something ; or in whom \none admires, praises, or censures something. \n\nX. C. 1. 1, 12. Upwrov fieu ai/ruv (2&J/c/?aTT)s) eV/ct^Trei, \xe2\x96\xa07r6T\xe2\x82\xacpd irort \nvofiiaavr\xe2\x82\xacS Uavus 1)Sti Taubputriva cl54vai tpxovrai iirl rh nepl tolovtuu (ppou \nri((iy, ^ Ttt p.y avbpuyima irapeWes, to hal^l6v^a Se (TKOirovvTes, Tjyovurai rk \nirpos^Koin-a Tpamiv [he first considered in respect to them whether, etc.). An. 3. 1, \n19. hiabiwpavos avruy, oa-rjv x^9\xc2\xb0-v Ka\\ olau exoieu {attentively con- \nsidering with respect to them, what a country they hclB). Cy. 7. 2, 18. eyvw koI \nfid\\a ii.Tona c fiou iroiovvros (he perceived in respect to me, that I was doing an \nabsurd thing, or e7\xc2\xbb/u) ifiovy \'on &TOTra iToioir}u). PL Gorg. 463, d. Sp\' oZv hu \nfid^ois airoKpivafifvov ; (instead of 5p odi/ &.v [jlov nd^ois, & airoKpivofxai , \nwill you then understand my answer, i. e. learn from me what I answer ?). 465, e. A e- \nyovr6s fiov fipaxfi ovk ifidy^avfs (you did not understand me when I spoke \nbriefly). The Gen. of the person alone. Ph. Phil. 51, c. cjf juou fiav^dveis \ninstead of d fwv fjuw^duas, h Xeyu (if you comprehend me, understand what 1 \nsay). Th. 4. 6. itrvbovr o rr\\s TlvXov kot\xe2\x82\xac tXTj/u/uei\'rjs, instead of eiruS-. \nT^s TlvKov, Zri KaT(iKr)fxyi(vr\\ ^v (when they learned that Pylus was captured). 5, 83. \nfjff^oyTO T\xe2\x82\xac < X \' C^*\'\'\'\' \'*\'*\'\xc2\xbb instead of \xe2\x96\xa0p<r^. avrHv, 2tj reixiCoi^y (learned re- \nspecting them that they were building the icalls, i. e. learned that they were building, \netc.). X. C. 3. 6, 16. ivbvyiov ruv &AAwi/, irt^Tepo aoi ZoKOv<nv iirX toIs \nroioOrois iitadvov fjuaXXov if \\\\f6yov Tiryxdvfiv (observe respecting the others, whether). \n(\'EyH^vpLf 7<r^a i with the CJen. of the thinu, for example rris wpas, X. Ven. 8, 6., \nrwy rSwuv, ib. 9, 4, signifies to have a regard for something, and belongs to \xc2\xa7 174, 1 \n(b) ; 4y^vfi(7a^ai with the Ace. of the tiling signifies to reflect upon, consider \nsomething, aliquid secum reputare.) Pi. Protag. 324, c. oTroSe\'xox\'Tat ot <ro2 \niroAiTai Kol x <> ^ *"\' ^ \' **\'^ <T Kvr or 6p.ov ffv fifiovKtvoyr os ra iroXiriKd \n{receive the ojnnion of the brazier and shoemaker). Her. 6, 76. &ya<r^ai rod \n\'Epatrlyov ov Tcpo^ihovr os rovs iroXirrras (to admire Erasinus because he did \nnot betray the citizens). Th. 1, 84. t^ ^paSv kcu /xeAAov, h p.4fX(povT at (idXiara \nrinwy, fii] eu<rx\xc2\xabi\xc2\xbb\'\xc2\xab<^^< (f^\'\' u\'hich they chiefly complain of us). X. Cy. 3. 1, 15. et \ntiyaff at r ov trar p6s, fi S<ra fie fio vKfvrat, 1^ 8aa nr 4ir pax^t irdyv aoi \navfi$ou\\(v<M> rovroy ij.i^f7abau (if you admire my father either for the measures he \nhas dtristd. etc.). Ages. 2, 7. rdB\' avrov 6.yaf^ai, tri irapecKevdaaTO (1 ad- \nmire this in him). 8. 4. iyu Kcd tovto itraivo} \'Ayrta iXdov, rh nphs rh \nitpttrKfiy To7s *EAAi7<rtv uir\xc2\xabpii(7v ti^v fiaaiXfos ^fuiay { I praise Agcsilaus for this \nalso). PI. Men. 95, c. Fopylov fidXiara ravra iyaixai (I particularly ad- \nmire this in (lorgias. or Gorgias for this). Thcaet. 161, b. \'6 Sou/ua^w tow \nkraipov, rile ia-riy (what I admire in a companion is this). Criton 43, h. crov \nird\\ai bav fjid(w, al<r^ay6fJi\xe2\x82\xacyoi, ws r)S(us Ka^\xe2\x82\xacvSeis. Rp. 383, a. ir6x\\a \n\'O/x^pou iiraiyovvr f s &\\Ka tovto ovk iTTcuv(a6nc^a ( though we praise \nmany other things in Homer). \n\nRem. 21. In themselves, the above verbs take the Ace, e. g. &pu Tiva or ti, \nOKffwS) Tiya or TI, iircuyiiy ^tyu), tif/jxpofiai, Ayafial Tiva or Tt. \n\n\n\n\xe2\x80\xa2 \n\n\n\nk 274. (b) Causal Genitive. \n\nThe second division of the causal genitive includes the geni- \ntive, wliich expresses the cause or occasion, i. e. the object, \nwhich calls forth or occasions the action of the subject. This \ngenitive stands : \n\n1. With many verbs which denote a state or affection of the \n\nmind {verba affectuum), viz. : \n\n\n\n\n388 SYNTAX. [\xc2\xa7 274 \n\n.-^vjla\' I \xe2\x96\xa0 \' \xe2\x96\xa0 \' (a) Desire and longing for : eTrL^v/xeiv, ipav, ipomKii-q \xe2\x82\xacX\xe2\x82\xaclv oi \nSittKeto-^at ; BlxI/^Vj TreLvrjv ; \n\n(b) Care for, concern for, and the contrary : iinfifXeuTSau, \n\xe2\x82\xacf>povTL^\xe2\x82\xacLV, KT^SccT-^ai, TTepLopaaS^ai, irpoopav, vTrepopav {^to despise) ^ \nirpovoeiv, fieXei, /xcra/xcAet, afxiXitv, oAtycopcti/, ^ctiSccr^ai, ev-^/xcur^cu \n(^0 ^ave a regard for, k 273, Rem. 20) ; \n\n(c) Pain, grief pity : oXo^upecr^cu, ttcvSlkios ^x^^*\' > ^^^Ii/ \nand oiKreLpcLv (with the Ace. of the person and Gen. of the \nthing); \n\n(d) Anger and indignation: 6pyl^\xe2\x82\xaca&aL (with the Dat. of the \nperson and the Gen. of the thing), xoXeTrCjs <f>ipiLv\\ \n\n(e) Envy : <I>%v\xe2\x82\xaclv (with the Dat. of the person and the GeiL \nof the thing), C7ri</)^wa>9 3taKCto-.^at ; \n\n(f) Admiration, praise, hlame ; SavpA^iLv and ayaxrSai (with \nthe Ace. of the person and the Gen. of the thing, sometimes \nalso with the Gen. of the tiling and the Gen. of the person, \nwhich is governed by that thing, see Rem. 2) (rjXovvy evSaifw- \nvLt,\xe2\x82\xaciv, liraLveLv, fxefxtftecrSaL (all with the Acc. of tlie person and \nthe Gen. of the thing). \n\nPI. Rp. 403, a. 6 op^hs ipus Tr4<pvKe kochIov t\xe2\x82\xac koI kuKov <r(6^p6ws rt \nKol fxovcriKus ipav (to love ichat is well ordered and beatitiful). 438, a. oiHtis \nTTOTOV iir i^ufie?, aWa XP\'O^^\'^ ov ttotov, koX oh airov^ oKXh XP^^\'\'\' ^^ \nfflrov rrdtnfs yap &pa ru>v ayabdv iir ibv fiov<r tv {no one desires drinh, \nhut wholesome drink, etc.). S}Tnp. 181, b. oi <pav\\oi rww avbpwrrwy ruv or w fid- \nTwv jxaWov, ^ tS)v y\\/vx^v ipucriv {love their bodies more than their soub). \n186, b. rh av6^oiQV avo (xoiuv iir ibvfiit koI 4p^ {desires and loves ioAa< is \nunlike). 216, d. 2a>/cpaTTjs ipwr ikus Stc^Kctrat ruy KaXStv {is very Jbtid \nof the beautiful). X. Cy. 3. 3, 12. (KCpoy) KOKilvovs 4irolri<rev ipotriKois ?X<*\xc2\xbb \nrov ijSrj \xe2\x80\xa2jroteTv ri {made them desirous of doing something). X- O. 13, 9 \nireivuei tov ixmlvov ovx ^rrov tviai ruy (pvataiv, f) &\\Xeu rur airvp rt \nKoi TTOTcDv {thirst for praise not lesf tJuin others for food and drink). Attribu- \ntive, e. g. epwy, iiri^v/jiia apfTrjs {amor, cupiditas virtutis, love^ desire for virhte). \nTh. 6. 14. /fjjSecTi^^at rr^s iro \\e w s {to be anxious about the cittf). Her. 3, 151. \niTro\\i6pK\xe2\x82\xac\xe2\x82\xac {BaSv\\u}viovs) <p p ovt i ^o vt as ovScy t\xc2\xbbjs woXiopKlrjs {having \nno concern about the sieg^). 3, 159. tov cItov ir poo pay {to have a care for^ \nto pi\'ovide food). X. Symp. 8, 33. oi y^6yov a<ppoyr ktt fly ibtCifi-fyoi ouk \naWxvvovrai alaxp^v ri iroieiy {those accustomed to be indifferent to censure). \nX. Cy. 1. 2, 2. Tlepauy yS/xoi {&pxovrai) rod Koiyov aya^ov iwtfit\' \nKovfifyoi {having a regard for the public good). M4\\fi not nyos {1 \nhave a care for something, some one). PI. Crito, 44, c. ri rifuy rris tAv rokXm* \nS6^r]5 n4\\ei; iwhi/ do tve care for the opinion of the multitude f). 5. 1,21. \n\n\n\n\n5 274.] GENITIVE CASE. \n\n\n\n389 \n\n\n\nTufipva irdpdffofiau noiuu fi-fproTe fxer afif Xtj <rai Tr]5 irphs ifih 65oG {that \nGobryas shall not repent of his journey to me). Id. C. 1 . 2, 9. i tt 6 p o p a v eVofe* \nTuv Ka^eardrav v6fiwy tovs <xvv6irras (made his associates despise the ex- \nisting laws). Th. 4, 124. BpaaiSas tt}s McvSris w e p lopdo fxe vos {solicitous \nabout Mende). X. H. 5. 4, 1. ^toi oihe twv aaefiovvrui/, ovre rS>v h.v6(na \niroiovvrcoy o/i\xe2\x82\xac\\oy<ri {are regardless neither of the wicked nor the profane). \nCy. 8. 7, 15. favTou Kr}5erai 6 irpouowi/ oSeA<^oy {he who takes thought \nfor a brother is anxious for himself). X. Ag. 7, 1. \'Arn<rl\\aos, ^irou 4^ro r^/v \nvaTpiSa ri ix^iXiiCiiv^ ov XRVI^o-ruv 4<p\xe2\x82\xaci5eTo {did not spare his wealth). \nAttributive, e. g. <ppoyTh twv iralZuv {cura liberorum, care for children). So \niinfi(\\i}s Tivos {caring for something). X. Cy. 5. 4, 32. 6 Kvpos aKovaas rod \nfify ird^ovs dpKTfipfv avr6v {pitied him on account of his suffering). 5. 2, 7. \ntV ^vyaTfpa, irtf^iKus cxoucroj/ rov a.Sc\\<pov Te^vTjKOTOSfi^dyoip \nHSf fliTfy {grieving for her dead brother). Symp. 4, 37. rovrovs otKrefpcw r^s \niyav x\xc2\xab^**"^* y6(rov {I pity them on account of the disease). Attributive, e. gr\\ \niJiyos (TodptDy {de amicis, for, on account of friends) ; moreover with adjectives \' \nalso (though only in poetr}-), and especially with exclamations with or without \ninterjections. Eur. Or. 413. otfioi Siwy fxuy, oh eKawo/xai rdXas! {alas the -^^^\'^\'^ \nvexations !). X. Cy. 3, 1,39. 0<G rod aySpSs {Oh what a man!)\'. PI. Ep. \n509, C. "AxoAAoy, Satfioylas virf p fi o\\ri s! X. Cy. 2. 2, 3. t ^ s rixv^, rh^ \nifi^ yyy K\\T\\^4yra Sfvpo rvxf\'iy - ( ill fortune, that lam called hither at this time !)l \nLys. c. Pinion. 187, 11. KO-ifo-TriKf ri t^os SiKaiov iraaiv av^pdnrois., twv avrwy \niiS iKfi /xdrwy ftdXtirra o pyl^tabai ro7s ftdXia-ra Swanfuois, ^rj aSiKfTy, to7s \nie \xe2\x80\xa2K(vr)<Tiy ^ a^vvdrois T<f awfiari (rifyyywurjy ^X*\'*\'\xc2\xbb ^** \'\'\'^ Tjyela^ai 6.Koyra5 avrovs \nafjLopTdvfiv {to be angry on account of the same wivngs). ( In poetry, the Gen. is much \nmore frequent with verbs expressing anger, e. g. II. |, 266. \'HpaKXTJos ircp ixu- \n(raro, jratihs (o7o { uns angry on account of Hercules, his son). Od. a, 69. {UoafiSdccy) \nKvKKanros \xc2\xbbf\xc2\xabx<^^**\'\'\'\'\xc2\xab\'\xc2\xbb^*\' o<pda\\fjLov a\\du<rfy {is angry on account of the Cyclops). \nS. Antig. 1177. irorpl firfylaas (powou (having been angry with the father on \naccount of the murder). Eur, Or. 749. t<rw5 <roi. dvyarcpos dv /Movfieyos). At- \ntritiutive, e. g. x^^os riy6s (ira alicujus instead of de aliquo, anger on account of \nsome jxrson or Oiing) *doyf7y riyi rrjs <To<pias {to envy one on account of his \nwisdom). Th. 1, 75. Hl^ioI ifffify apxvs ye h^ ^x^fiiv toTs "EXAtjo-j {x^ orSas dyav \niirt<pb6y(iis SiaK(7adai {it is not Just that we should be so much envied by the \nGreeks on account of our sovereignty). So also in poetry, fieyaipu, e. g. Aesch. \nProm. 627. ov nfy alpto toC5\xc2\xab\' aoi 5a>p7;/\xc2\xabiTos {I do not envy you because of \nthis gift). Attributive, e. g. <p^6yos riy6s {envy on account of something). X. Cy. \n2. 3, 21. Tovroy oZv h Kvpos aya<rb(\\s t^ s re tr pa6r\'nT0S koL ttjs SiSatr- \nKaXlas Koi rris iirifjifKdas, indXfffe Kal ravrw t V rd^iu eVl rh S(7Truou avv \nTV raiidpxtf {having admired him on account of his gentleness, education, etc.). \nSymp. 4, 45. C^jAcS \xc2\xab rov ir \\ a 6rov {I envy you on account of your wealth). \npi. Symp. 194, e. Jo/coCcn Trdvns robs avStpd^-novs eblaiiiouiC^iv rS>v aya- \nday,\' S>y 6 ^(hs avro7s aXrtos {to consider men happy on account of the good things, \nwhich, etc.). Ion. 530, b. iro?^dKis ye 4C\'h^^<ra v/J-as rols ^a^|/a,So^s t t) s \nr\xc2\xabx\xc2\xbb\'i?*. Dem. Cor. 296, 204. Ws oi/c &i/ aydaairo ruv avBpav iKeivu* \n\n33* \n\n\n\n( \n\n\n\n390 SYNTAX. \\k 274 \n\nT^y h.perT]s; (who would not admire the valor oj" those men ?). Lys. Simon. 1 00^ \n44. ^av/xd (^(1) (idhiffra tovtov rris Z lavoias {I admire his purpose). Id. \nEratosth. 124,41. i^avfiacra ttjs T6\\/jiT]s tS>v XiySvTwv. So with ad- \njectives, e. g. PI. Phaedon. 58, e.. evhaiymv fxoi 6 air^p i<paivero koI toS \nTp6irov Koi Tuv K6y(i)y, tbs oSecDs /cal yevvaius ireKevra (the man seemed to \nbe happy on account of his habits and remarks). \n\nKemakk 1. The Gen. with the above verbs is often governed by preposi- \ntions, especially ire pi, e.g. iinfxe\\f7(T^ai, (ppovri^uv vepl tivos. Some vei\'bs \nwhich denote a state or an aflFection of the mind, do not govern the Gren.; thus \niro^e7v (to long for, to feel the want of), always governs the Ace, and so\' \n(pi\\e7v, ayuTTuv, ct 4 pyeiy (to love) ; the last two also in the sense of to 6c \ncontented with, take the Dat, ( = Lat. Abl.). Several of the above verbs have also \ndifferent constructions ; then they commoi ly express different ideas, e. g. \n(ppoyrri(eiv riv 6s or TrepI t ivos, X. C 1.1, 11. 4. 7, 6. to be anxious for \nsomething, but (ppovri^eiv t i, scrutari, investigare ; \xe2\x80\x94 irpovoetc, ir poo paw \nri (to perceive beforehand, to consider beforehand); vir e po pav rt and rtvosy \ndespicere, in the same sense. In poetry, /xtAej sometimes takes for its subject \na noun denoting a thing, in the Nom. ; but in prose, it takes only a Neut. \npronoun in the Nom. The verb is then used personally: MeA^o-ovo-tv 8* \ndfjLol iTTTTOi, II. AC, 481. TouTo fifif oZv ^ \xe2\x82\xac <p /i e A ^ (T 6 1, PI. Phacdr. 238, d- \n\nRem. 2.* The verbs bavfjid(( iv and &ya<r^ai have the following con- \nstructions: (a) the Ace. of the person or the Ace. of the thing alone, when the \nwonder or admiration extends to the whole person or thing, or to the whole \nnature of a person or thing, e. g. ^avfid^ui rhv aTparnySy (I ad ral) ; \n\n^av/Ma^o) T^y aocplay (I admire the wisdom) ; \xe2\x80\x94 (1\xc2\xbb) the Gen.of ti ^ .id the \n\nAce. of the thing, when one admires something in a person ( Rem. 20), e. g. \n^avfid^u \'SdJKpdrovs r^y aocplay (I admire the trisdom in S crates, or the wisdom of \nSocrates) ; \xe2\x80\x94 (c) the Ace. oftlie person and (fte (Jen. of the thing, when one admires \n\'\xe2\x80\xa2y^a person on account of some quality, e. g. id^aufux^.\'iu ^.taKparr] rrjs coc \' \' Vr- \n\n/Socrates on account of his wisdom), see 1, (f) ; \xe2\x80\x94 (d) seldom Gen. oj ud \n\n\\the Gen. of the person depending upon it, when I wonder at the quality of a per- \nson, or admire the quality of a person, e. g. ^avfidCu :Z(i)KpdTovs r^s awf>las {I \n^ admire the wisdom of Socrates), see 1, (f ) ; \xe2\x80\x94 (e) the Ace. of the person, and in- \nstead of the Gen of the thing, a preposition, commonly i-wi with \'" \' . e. g. \nbav(xd^<i} \'Zumpdri] iirl rrj cro(pi(j. (1 admire Socrates for, on account of ijm). \n\n2. With verbs signifying to requite, to revenge, to accuse and \ncondemn. The Gen. represents the guilt or crime as the cause \nof the requital, revenge, etc. Thus \\vith ripxapCvu^ax (with tJie \nAce. of the \'person and the Gen. of the tiling), also with judicial \nverbs of accusing and coiuletnnwg, e. g. atrtao-^ou, hrairvajcrBaiy 8uo- \nK\xe2\x82\xacLV, clsaycLVi irrrdycLV, ypa^ccr^at, irpo^KoXiiaSaL (all tcitJi the Acc. of \nthe person dnd the Gen. of the thijlg), hre^Uvaty eyKaXelVf (Truricrpr\' \nTco-^at (all three zcith the Dat. of the person and t/ie Gen. of the \ntiling) ; ffiivyuv {to be accused) ; Sixa^civ, Kplviiv, alptlvy to convict \n( all three ivith the Acc. of the person and the Gen. of the thing)^ \nand oAwvat, to be coiivicted. \n\nHer. 3, 145. tovs iiriKovpovs TifKap-fiao /lai t^s iy^dSe airl^ios (wiU pun- \nish the allies on account of the invasion of this latid). (Seldom TifUBpcTr riri \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 274.] GENITIVE CASE. 39j \n\nTiyos, as X. Cy. 4. 6, 8. r i/xupiiffeiv troi rod iraiShs inria-xvovuai, I avenge \nyou for [the murder of] your son.) ^EiratTia<T^ai nva (p6vov[to accuse one of \nmurder). Her.. 6, 104. (M/XTioSeo) ol e\'x^poi e^iw^av rvpavvldos ttjs ip \nXepaoyriffoo (prosecuted Miltiades for tyranny ). \'Eire^iivai tivI (povov [to pros- \necute one for murder). Tpd<pea^ai nva irapav6n(fiv [to indict one for illegal \nmeasures). *ei;76ii\' KKovris^ <\\) 6 vov, acn^ il as {to he accused of Iheft., etc.). \nKplv\xe2\x82\xac(T^ai a<re0elas. X. Cy. 1. 2, 7. Uep<Tai SiKaCovcri Kal iyKXTj/xa- \nTos, ov evfKa ^.v^pamoi pnoovtn fxkv aWr}\\ovs ixdhiara, SiKaCovTat, 5e f//ci(7Ta, \naxa^io-Tta J {condemn as a crime, ingratitude). C. 1. 2, 49. Kara. vSjxov (elecTTt) \njrapavolas f\\6yrt koI rhi/ irorepa Sfjaai {it is lauful for one convicting his \nfather of madness). Dem. Apbob. 846. 4Trt(TKT)Trre(r^al rivi tS>v ^evSo- \nfj.apTvpii>y {to prosecute one for false icitness). 861, 58. (pevyeiv i^evSo- \nfxaprvp tuv vr6 riyos. \'Akuwai kKotttis {to be convicted of thejl). \n\nRem. 3. Also the punishment for guilt is put in the Gen., but this Gen. is to \nbe considered as the Gren. of price (^ 275, 3), e. g. ^avdrov Kpiveiu, Kpiuecr^ai^ \nZidtiKeiv {to sentence, be sentenced to death). Sometimes the prepositions Tr^pi and \n<v\xe2\x82\xac/ca are joined with the verb, e. g. SiwKfiy Tivk irepl (p6vov : and avri with \nTi^uuptiffbai. \'EyKa\\t7y besides the above, has the following constructions : (a) \nthe Dat. of jicrsou and Ace. of thing, ^o charge something upon somq one; \xe2\x80\x94 \n(b) the Dat. of person followed by a clause with Sn or by the Inf. ; \xe2\x80\x94 (c) the \nDat. of person alone, to accuse [ff 284, 3. (6)] ; \xe2\x80\x94 (d) the Ace. of thing alone, \nto bring o.t a rhnrge. Karrfyop(7y, to accuse, is construed : (a) with Gen. of per- \nson, s< \xe2\x96\xa0 )th Hard and Gen. ; \xe2\x80\x94 (b) with Gen. of person, and Ace. of \nthing,\' ^ tig to one\'s cJuirge ; \xe2\x80\x94 (c) with Gen. both of person and of thing, \nsometimes with rfpl and Gen. of thing ; \xe2\x80\x94 (d) with Ace. of thing alone. \n\n3. Finally the Gen. of cause is also used in the following \ninstances : \n\n.(a) With Tov fiii and the infinitive. See ^ 308, 2, (b). \n(b) With the adverbs eS, KaKus, fierplws, and the like, also with &Sf \nrut, 5x\xc2\xaby, ^, iirvt ouras, wSt, usavrus, connected with the verbs \n^X*\'*\' a"<l ?\xc2\xbbef ly, sometimes also with ehai and other intransitive verbs, the \nobject by which a condition is caused or occasioned, is put in the Gen. KaXws \nix<\xc2\xbb "ToSuy {1 am well in respect to my feel). Her. 6, 116. \'A^va7oi, ws tto- \nti>y tlxoy, Tdxurra ifiori^foy 4s rh iaru {as they were able with respect to tJieir \nfeet, Leas quickly as their feet ux>uld carry them). 5, 62. xp^M"\'\'"^\'\' ^^ r)K0V\' \nT\xe2\x82\xacS {well off for, to have a plenty of, means). So e5, koXws, nerpiws ex^iv ^iov^ \n<pptywy, yiyovsy Svydfifots {to be well off as to the means of living). Oi "EW-ni/es \novTvs flxoy dfjLoyolas irphs oW-qKovs. X. Cy. 7. 5, 56. oiiTw TpSirox, \n^X * * 5 (you are thus in respect to circumstances, you are in such circumstances). H. \n4.5, 15. us rdxovs (Ka<rTos elxf {<^s ^^^^ was able in respect to swiftness, oi \nquickly as each was able). \n\n\n\n^ \n\n\n\n392 SYNTAX. [^275. \n\n\xc2\xa7 275. (c) Genitive denoting certain Mutual \n\nRelations. \n\nThe third division of the causal Gen., includes the Gen. by \nwhich certain mutual relations are expressed, e. g. the relation \nof the ruler to the subject. As a ruler necessarily supposes a \nsubject, and a subject a ruler, an inferior, a superior, etc., the \none may, in a measure, be considered the cause or occasion of \nthe other. Hence the Gen. is used : \n\n1. With verbs of ruling, superiority, excelling, surpassing, sub- \njection, inferiority : ap)(\xe2\x82\xacLv, Kparelv, SeaTro^uv, Tvpawilv, Tvpawev^w, \nOTpaTrjyclv, cTrtTpoTrcuctv, CTrurraTCtv, ^aaiXcvetv, Tyye/xovcveiv, rfyiurSax, \netc.; with the adjectives cyKparrJ?, uKpaT?;? ; \xe2\x80\x94 also with Trpoc^ctv, \nav\xe2\x82\xac)((.LV, Trepulvai, TrepiyLyvcaSai, TrpocrraTCtv, VTrtp^oAXcti/, vrrcpc^cptiK, \nTrpcoreuctv, Trpea-fSeveLV, TrpOKpivew, TrpoTLfiav, 7r\\\xe2\x82\xacov\xe2\x82\xacKTtlVf etc. ; \xe2\x80\x94 rp-ra- \naSai, vb-repetv, voTipi^ctv, iXarrovaSaL, fieiova^ai, /Li\xc2\xabov\xe2\x82\xac*cTct\xc2\xbb/, vcnepov \ncTvat, TfTOva \xe2\x82\xacti/at, etc. \n\nHer. 7, 97. rov vavriKov 4<rrpaT-f}yeoy dtSe {these had the command of \nthe naval forces). 3,15. 4ir it p oirtve ly AlyviTTov (to be the governor of \nE(]ypt). Th. 1, 69. & \\6yos rod tpyov iKpairfi {the report exceeded the \nthing itself). X. Cy. 1. 1,2. ipxovr f s /x4v diri Kcd ol ^ovk6\\oi riev fioiPt \nKoX ol iiriTocpop^ol Tuv Jvrrcov, koI trdtnres 5c ol KoXovfievoi vofif7s, wv tuf iiri9- \nraTu<ri ^a> at v \xe2\x82\xacIk6tus tiy 6.p xovr e s r ovt ccy voixi^oivro {all those called \nherdsmen might properly be considered the commanders of tliose animals of which they \nhave the rule). 1. 2, 8. {ol Ilfpocu robs ircuBas) SiSdoKovatv iyKparels eh\'tu \nyao\'Tphs Kol tr or ov {teach them to be iruisters of their belly, etc^ temperate in \neating and drinking). 4.1, 14. i/jLol Se SokcI rrjs fieylart} s rjiovrjs voXb \nfidMora ffvfjLcpfpfiy iyKparrj clvcu (to be master of able to control the greatest pleaS\' \nure). 5. 1, 14. ra ixox^pa av^pu>iria iraouy, oiyMiy rS>v iiribvfJuSi y aKpar^ \niari (depi\'aved men are subject to, not able to control aU their passions). Her. 6, 61. \nKoA.\\tcrT6U(r\xe2\x82\xaci rh iraiBloy waffewy r S>y iy \'Sirdprr) yvvaiKwy { will surpass \nall the Spartan women in beauty). Th. 1, 81. rois SirXois avrwy Kcd ry wX\'ff^u \niirepipe poficv (are superior to them in arms, etc.). X. Ag. 5,2. \'AyricrL^jios \nr]ye7ro &pxovri irposrjKciv ov ixaX-cucla, oAA^ Koprtplif ruy iBiwTwy -repifiyai \n(that the commander ought to excel the privates, etc.). X. Cy. 3. 1, 19. relx** \xc2\xab\xe2\x96\xa0\xc2\xab" \noieycvov abrov (you excelled him in despatch). PI. Gorg. 475, b. aK\xe2\x82\xac\\l>wfif^a, \ndipa Kvirri vire p ^dWf i rh aSiKcly rov a S t k e 7 Ci^a t. xal aXyovai fioWoy oi \naSiKOvyres, tj ol aSiKov/ievoi (the Acc. is more usual with inr\xe2\x82\xacp$ai\\\\\xe2\x82\xaciy). L. 752, \ne. irpecfieve ly r&y iroWuy voXtwy (to take the preceaence of many \ncities). So also aycx^o\'^al riyos usually with a participle.ro endu7e., per- \nmit, properly to hold one\'s self up over one). PI. Apol. 31, b. ay4xf<r^i^i rd* \notK^luy afif\\ovn4ywy {to permit domestic ajfairs to be ne^ected) . tk< ^^4- a \n\n\n\n^ 275.] GENITIVE CASE. \n\n\n\n393 \n\n\n\noi/K avex^rai rov iiAAo X^yovros. \'HrTciar^ai tS>v iiriSn/fiiwu {to be sub- \nject to one\'s desires). Dem. Cor. 308, 244. oiSafiov ^tt7j,^6U airriK^ou t\xc2\xabv \nrapa *i\\iinrov irpc\'tr^ecwj/ {being overcome by or yielding to the envoys). X. C. \n1. 3, 3. 2a>KpaTr?s Sfvffias ^vuu fUKpas aTrh /jLiKpwv ovSh TiyeTro neiod(rSrai rSiv \nd TT 6 -KoKKSiv Kol fi^yaXuv iroT^Ka /col /te^oAa ^vovtuv {did not think that he tms \ninferior to those making many great sacrifices, etc.). Hier. 4, 1. ix^ydhov aya- \nbod IX \xe2\x82\xac 10 yfKT \xe2\x82\xac7 {comes short of a great good). \'To-repe?*/ Trjs fidxvs {to come \nafter the battle), \'rtrrfpi^eiy ruv KaipHv {to be behind opportunities, to fail \ntousethem). "tar (piC^iv twv %pyo)v. X. Hier. 1 , 1 8. tout*? t^ 6U(^po<ruv77 t^s \niXirihos iJ.fioi/( KTova I rvpavvoi tuv ISiutwv. 2, 1. /JLciove KTOvvras \nKoi. airwy koI ttotuv koX o^^wv {comir<^ short of food^ etc.). \n\nRemark 1. \'Hyenoveveiv and rjydcr^ai in the sense of to go before, \nto show the way, with 6S6y expressed or understood, govern the Dat. ; k par e^v in \nthe sense of to conquer, regularly governs the Ace., but in the sense of to be \nvu^ter of pUiri, to rule, have the command of the Gen., e. g. KpareTu tovs tto- \nf^ilovs (vincere) ; Kpariiv rf/s x<^po-^i t^s it J Aew s, Twy ivavriwv^ rSav \niir tdv/iiuyy r ov 6povs (all in Xen.). \n\nRem. 2. That in which one excels another, in prose, is usually put in the \nDat., but is often expressed by prepositions, e. g. Iv rivi, eh n, Kara, ri, 4irl \nrivi. \xe2\x80\x94 With iirraadcu vir6 is often joined with the Gen., e.g. Th. 1, 62. ri \narparSireSoy tj a a ar o virh r uy \'A^r^vaiuy. \n\n2. The Comparative aud adjectives in the positive with the \nforce of the Comparative, e. g. numerals in -ao-tos and -ttXovs; \nScvrepo^, TTtpLTToSi etc., take the object by which the comparison \nis expressed in the Gen. Genitive of Comparison. \n\nX. An. 7. 7, 41. ovTify yonl^u) avZpX KaWlov elycu KTri/xa ouSe KafiirpoT epov \nkptrris >fal Z iKaioffvvris /col yfvvai6T-t]Tos {I do not think that man has \nany possession more beautiful than virtue, etc.). X. Cy. 7. 5, 83. ov Srfirov rhy \n&f>X<"^* Twi/ i,pxofifvcty T ovr\\p6r epoy vposrjKei eiuai {it does not become a \ncommander to he more base than his subjects). Eur. Med. 965. XP^^^^ ^^ Kpeicr- \navv fivplwv \\6yuy 0poro7s {is better than a myriad of words). Her. 7, 48. \nrh \'Z)^r]yiKhy (rrpdTfVfJM <paiy\xe2\x82\xacrai iro\\Kav\\T](T lov taeabai rov rifierepov \n{that the army will l>\xe2\x82\xac much more numerous than ours). 8. 137. SnrKricrios iyeyero \nainhs iwvrov {he was twice as great as before). 6,120. va-repoi aTriKOfxeyot \nT^j crvfjLfioXrjs IfiflpovTo Znws bcfiaaor^ai tovs M-nSovs {though they came later \nthan the battle, after the battle). Ov^evhs hevTepos {second to, inferior to no one). \nOvhfvhs Sarepos. Ta>y apKovvTwv irepirrh. KTT\\aa<T^ai {to acquire more \nthan enough). \n\nRem. 3. Sometimes the object of comparison is denoted, like a space-rela- \ntion, by irpd and iivri with the Gen., or by vapd and irp6s with the Ace. See \nprepositions. \n\n3. With verbs of buying and selling, e. g. ^vcla-^ai, ayopd^ici/, \nirplaarSaj^ KraaSaL, 7rapa\\ap/3dv\xe2\x82\xacLV ; TrwA-eiv, aTroStSoor^at, 7repi8i8oo--^at, \nfitSoVai ; \xe2\x80\x94 also with verbs of exclmnging and bartering, e. g. \n\n\n\n394 SYNTAX. [J 274 \n\naXX.dTT\xe2\x82\xactv, aXXoLTTea-^aiy 8ux/x\xe2\x82\xact^c<T^at, Xveiv, etc. ; \xe2\x80\x94 with, verbs of \nvaluing, e. g. rL/xav, rt/xacr^at, Troieta^at, a^tovj/, d^toCcr-^ot, and with \nthe adjective a|tos. Genitive of price. \n\nHer. 5, 6. {ol Qp\'fiiKes) atviovTai ras yvvtuKas irctpk rSiv yov4uy xpVh^\'\'\'^* \nft.\xe2\x82\xacyd\\wu (buy their wives at a great price). X. C- 2. 1,20. ruy ir 6yt\xc2\xbby iruKov \na IV T]fxiv irdvTa raydd^ oi ^eoi (sell all good things to us for toils). Cy. 3. 1, 36 \n<rv be, Sj TiypdfT}, Ki^ov jxoi, ir6<rov tiy irpiaio, wsre rijy yvycuKa a-roXafieTw \n{what would you pay to regain your wife). \'Eya* fiey, c<^, S> Kvpe, nhy rrjt ^vxvi \nV piaifiTiv, &ST\xe2\x82\xac /f/j7roT\xe2\x82\xac Aarpevaai ravTTiy (/ u>ould buy her at the expense of my \nlife). II. Cf 236. Tei^xf\' li/xe ifi ey, x/\'i\'O\'fo X*^\'\'*\'\'^\'\'? fKarS^i^oi ivvfafioioay (uxw \nexchanging arms, golden for brazen, etc.). X. Cy. 3. 1, 37. kou av 5e, 2) \'Apfityify \nairdyov Trjy T\xe2\x82\xac yvyalKa Kou avrovs TToiSas jxriSey avruy Karad fi s {nulla re pre \nlis deposita^ having paid nothing for them). Oi aya^ol olSfyhs iw KfpSovs r^y \nrf/s irarpidos iKev^cplau ay raWd^aivTo {the good would exchange the freedom \nof their country for no gain). 11. A, 514. Irjrphs yap ayrjp ToKKwy avr d^ios \n&\\\\(ay {is worth as much as many others). Her. 3, 53. 6 AvK6<ppwy ovSi ay a- \nKpifftos \'Jj{/w(r\xe2\x82\xac rhy <p^povTa rriy ayyfXlr^y {thought the one who brought the \nmessage not worthy of an examination). 6, 112. ifuLxoyro k^ltes \\6yov {worthy \nof praise). \'A^iovv nva t i/jirjs {to cortsider worthy of honor). X- Cy. 2. 2, 17. \n^7\xc2\xbb\'y\xe2\x82\xac ovSev kvKTUTipov yofil^o) ru>y iy avbptinrois (Jyai rov rUty Xfftay T6y Tf \nKaKhy RoL ayd^hy a^iovtr^ai. TifjMy riyi riyos and riyd riyos, e. g. 5 c \xc2\xab o t o - \nhdyrwy, rov baydrov {to fine one ten talents, to sentence one to death, to con- \neider one worthy of punishment). So the Mid., used of the accuser: riuaa^al \nriyi apyvplov, ^aydr ov, to impose a fine, or penalty of death upon one ; com- \nmonly, however, d\'lKT^v is here supplied. \n\nHem. 4. With verbs denoting to barter, to exchange, the relation is usaallj \nconsidered like a relation of space, and is denoted by avrl with the Gen. \n\nRem. 5. The Gen. with substantives (attributive Gen. ^ 262, b.) expresses a \n\nmuch greater variety of relations, than the Gen. with\' verbs. For where two \n\nobjects are immediately connected with each other, there is always a mutoal \n\nrelation between the ideas they express ; the one depends upon the other, seems \n\nunited with it, to proceed from it or in some way to belong to it. Hence the \n\nI rule : When two substantives are connected with each other, the > e which \n\ni completes the idea of the other and defines it more fully, is put in th As ad- \n\n* jectives or participles are, in their nature, nearly related to the substantive, \n\nmany adjectives also govern the Gen., when the verbs from which they are \n\nderived, take the Ace, e. g. Kparlarov irarphs \'EW-qywy Tpa<peis {sprung from, \n\nlike natus alicujus), S. Ph. 3. \n\nRem. 6. The attributive genitive is called the Subjective, the Objective, \nor Passive genitive, according to the mode in which it originates in the sen- \ntence : \n\n(a) It is called the Subjective Gen., when it originates from the subject of \nthe sentence or from a Gen. depending on cTkoi and ylyyeab^at. It always de- \nnotes something active (instead of passive), the cause, author, hence also the \npossessor, the whole in relation to its parts, e. g. ol rod S4ySpov Kofnroi (arising \nfrom rh SeySpoy <pfp(i Kapirovs), the frtiits of the tree, the fruits which the tree \nproduces. Th ttjs <ro<f>las KdWos (arising from ^ <ro<pla rapfx^^ itdXXos or \nt} ao<pia Ka\\\'ii iariy or KdWos iffrl t^s <ro<f>las)t the beauty of wisdom^ tk\xc2\xbb \n\n\n\n^\\ 276, 277.\'^ ACcuflATivE case. 395 \n\nbeaut ij which icisdom causes. Ta rod \'Ofiripov irotrifiaTa. .\'0 rod Paai\\4us \nvl6s. \'H Tov aubphs cperf}. \n\n{h) It is called the Objective or Causative Gen., when it originates from tha \nobject of the sentence, i. e. when it takes the place of the object of an intransi- \ntive verb, e. g. \xe2\x96\xa0^ ttjs a- (pi as 4-iri^vfiia, the desire for wisdom (eViiS^u/xw rrjs \n<ro<pias, the <ro(pias being the cause of the iTn^vfiu)] 6 ttjs operas epojs, vir- \ntutis amor, the loce of or for virtue {ipw rris aper^s) \', eiji/oid tij/os-, good-will \ntoioards one {efjvovs etfjl rivi) ] iTrifj.4\\iia rSiv ir t\\e fiiKwv epyav, cura rerum \nbellicarum {iirifieXovfiai tuu voKf/jLiKuu ipywu). \'H tcou n\\aT aie cov iiria-rpa- \nTela instead of irphs tovs n., the expedition against the Plataeans. Th. 1, 108. \niu avo^dafi rijs yrjs instead of iirl rrjs yris, in disembarking on the land. \n\n(c) It is called the Passive Gen., when it originates from the passive object \nof transitive verbs in the Ace, i. e. when it takes the place of the object of a \ntransitive verb, and so denotes the thing atfected or caused by the ti-ansitive \naction, e. g. \xe2\x96\xa0^ r ijs iroXfws ktIctis (from Kri^ei TT]yir6\\iv), thecity being that which \n<s jx)sstssrd. \'O T^s i iricTT o\\ri s ypa<pfvs (from ypd<p\xe2\x82\xacL 4TrL(TToK7]v), the e7rt<r- \nro\\-f) being the object acted upon. \'H rwv KaKu>v 4pywv irpa^is. \n\nm \n\nRem. 7. Sometimes one substantive governs two genitives expressing dif- \nferent relations. Her. 6, 2. \'IffTioToy uire\'Si/ce rSiv \'Iwvtoy r^v r]y\xe2\x82\xac/xoulT]v tov \nwphs Aapuoy ir9\\4fiov the command of the lonians in the war against Darius. \n\n4 276. (2) Accusative. \n\nThe Ace. is the WJtitJier-case, and hence denotes: (a) in the \nlocal relation, the goal, hniit, or point to which the action of the \nverb is directed, e. g. ucttu /xoXetv, to go to the city ; \xe2\x80\x94 (b) in the \ncausal relation, the effect, consequence, object produced; also \nthe object put by the action in o-jjo^sive condition, i. e. tlie object \non which the action is performed, \n\n\xc2\xa7 277. A. Local Relation. \n\nThe Ace. in its local relation (Ace. of local termination), denotes the local \nlimit, place, or object towards which the subject moves. Hence this Ace. is \nused with wrbs of motion, going, coming, etc ^ yet this usage is found only in \nthe poets, especially in Homer. Od. 7, 162. oi fief a-Ko<TTp4^aines efiav v4as \niifi<pi(Kl<rtTas (they vcent to Uie ships). II. o, 317. Kvl<r(n\\ 5" evpavhv f/ce {arose to \nheaven). Od. a, 1 76. iroXKoX Xaav av4pes w^repoy Sw (came to our house). S. 0. T, \n35. &<rrv KaSfxehy /loXuy. Eur. Med. 7. Vlr]5eM irvpyovs yvs eirKewr\' \'IwA/cfos. \n\nRkmakk. In prose, and usuallv also in poetry, a preposition is joined with \nthe Ace, which defines still more definitely the relation mdicated by the Ace, \ne. g. els, in, into. &>s, to, Kari, downwards, kyd, uvwards, iirep, over, 4ir. upon, irepl \nand au<pl, around, roundabout, fierd, into the midst, after, rrp6s,Jp, into the presence \nof rood, near to, {nr6, under, e. g. Uuai 4s t^ ^6\\iy, irpoeX^e^v ^s^ rhv ^^acriXea, \niepl7rif.<plThy^6Kiy^aiyeiy-4nl rhy ^p6yoy aya^aiueiy-- eXSfe^y /.era Tpwas \n\xe2\x80\x94 ttiai irapa fiaai\\4a \xe2\x80\x94 i4yai ityits "OKvfuroy \xe2\x80\x94 leyai inrh yaiau. \n\n\n\n396 SYNTAX. [\xe2\x99\xa6 276 \n\nB. Causal Relation. \n\xc2\xa7 278. (a) Accusative denoting Effect, \nl.The Accusative denoting effect is used as in other lan- \nguages, e. g. ypd<f>o} iTTunoX-qv. The original and simplest form \nof the Ace. of eifect (of the object produced), is where a verb, \nIt .^^ S"<^^- either transitive or Hrt\xc2\xbbBBwre, takes the Ace. of an abstract \nsubstantive, which is either from the same stem as the verb, or \nhas a kindred signification. An attributive adjective or pro- \nnoun or an attributive clause commonly belongs to the Ace. \nThis is often called the Cognate Accusative. \n\nPL Symp. 181, b. ovrJs icTiv (6 \xe2\x82\xac pa s), tv oi <pav?^i Jbv aySfpanrcev ipwa ip \n(which had men love). PI. L. 680, e. fiac iKiiav trcu wy iiKcuoTdrrjy /Sacrt- \n\\\xe2\x82\xacv 6 fi\xe2\x82\xac vol {ruling a kingdom). Prot. 325, c. iirtp,(\\ovyrai trdtrav ivi/xe- \nAetoj\' [they care for im\'th all care, bestow all care upon). Dem. Aph. 845.4 \nSeofiai v/xwu SiKalav Se-qaiv. X. An. 1. 3, 15. crrpaTrjy^jaoyTa ifii \nravTrjy riju err parr] yiau (to be general of this command, army). 6. 3, 6. c u t <J - \nXTjo\'oi\' TovTo rh euTux\'?M\xc2\xab (xcere fortunate in this good fortune, obtained this \nadvantage). Id. H. 7^ 1,5. \xe2\x96\xa0jrA.cto-Toi/y koL ficyla-rovs &ya>vas ^yuvivfitvoi \nKara baKarrau cAax\'O\'Ta ixkv arrornvxi^Kare, irXflffra St KaTcop^uKctre (having \ncontended in the greatest contests ) . Andoc. M yst. 5.31. apa ad/u. fy oi rhs ficyia- \nras apas v/xly. So KoXas irpd^cis irpdrreiv ; (pya^fobai tpyov Ka\\6v ; JStpx^^ Suceday \napxvv, otVxpo\'\' dov\\elay 5ov\\evfiy ] fityav irSKffwyiroXffxfiv] x^^^*\' *^^\'** ^^***^*^- \n\'EKSrifious cTTpareias i^-peaay (like t^oSoy i^ityai). Th. 1, 112. Acucfitufi^ \nyioi rhv Uphv KaXovfxfvov ir 6K(fxoy i <n par ev cr ay (like <rrpaT(iay arftatrivtip). \nSo \'6pK0vs ojjLvvyaiy aabeufly y6(T0v, ^v ^ioy. X. Hier. 6, 7. xo7oy 8t rtya Zvyov \niKoinu. If the idea of the verb permits, the passive construction also can \nbe used, e. g. \'O oiKeTos ijfiiv trSKf/xos ovrus iiroKf firi^ri (our intestine tear \nwas so warred, so managed), Pi. Menex. 243, e. KaXcu vpd^fis "rpdrrowTau \nSo also with adjectives, e. g. KaKoi iraaav KaKiav, PI. Kp. 490, d. In certain \nphrases, such as (pvXaK^s (pvKdrrfiv, excubias agere^ <p6pov (<p6povs) (pfpeiy^ tribu- \nturn solvei-e, iro/jLtr^v irofiireiy, pompam ducere, the substantive can stand without \nan adjective, because here the substantive is used in a special and pregnant \nsense. \n\n2. In place of the substantive from the same stem as the \nverb, or of a similar signification "vvith it, an attribute of such \ncognate substantive, can also be used ; in this case, the verb \nfrequently has a pregiiant sense, since it contains, at tlie same \ntime, an additional idea. - \xe2\x80\xa2> \n\nNi/ca>\' fidxv*\' = vIktiv fidxvs (to conquer a battle, i. e. to vrin a battle) ; so \nO \\vfnr la ( = \'0\\vfnriujy yltcqy) y iKay (to conquer in the Olympic games), Th. 1, \n126. Nik ay y av fiax^tis = yiKrjv yavfiaxiuy (to gain a naval victary)^ 7, 66, \n\n\n\nM \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 278.] ACCUSATIVE CASE. 39-7 \n\nviKav yvditiTiv, sententiam vincere, viKav hiK-nv (to carry one\'s opinion, one\'s \nsuit, triumphantly); like Si/ia ^cjv is: rit iwiylKia (Upd or ^ifuiTa)^ eiayy4\' \n\\ia, Siafiariipia, yev4^\\ia, to AvKuia, ydfiovs ^veiv (to offer a \nsacrijice on account 0/ victory, a festive offering, etc., i. e. to celebrate the victory, etc. \nhy a sacrijice)] rh UtpaiKhv wpxelro (danced the Persian dance), X. An. \n6. 1, 10;TaCTo (avv^-fffxaTa) avy^efitvoi (having made these agreements) -y \nravra (= SpKovs Tovruy) 6n6<rai/T\xe2\x82\xacs (having taken these oaths) ] rapdrreiu \n\xc2\xbboA.\xe2\x82\xac/toi/ = rdpayfia iroXffxov (to stir up war, turhando bellum concitare, as it is \nsaid, bellum miscere), PI. Rp. 567. a. Passively, ir6\\f/ji.os irphs tous \'Afi<pi<rae7s \nirapdx^V, Dem. Cor. 277, 151. \n\n3. The following constructions, likewise, mostly confined to \npoetry, deserve special notice ; in these, also, instead of the \nsubstantive from the same stem as the verb or with a kindied \nsignification, the attributive of such kindred substantive is put \nin the Accusative : \n\n(a) Verbs signifying to shine, to bum, to flow, to pour, to shoot or spring forth, \ne. g. iiffr pdirr f ly yopyarnhy a4\\as = aa-TpaTrT)v yop. aeXaos (to lighten a \nfearfully bright ligfu, i. e. casting a briglu and terriflc liglU), Aesch. Pr. 356 ; \nddKK\xc2\xab ly $loy (germinating, producing the means of life), Pcrs. 61 7. \'Epf/x- \nyhy alfx (Stvaa (I jjourtd out black blood), S. Aj. 376. Sro^e iv SaKpva, \noT/Aa, KdfxTTf I V fffXas, (>\xc2\xab1v yd\\a (all confiued to poetry). \n\n(b) Verbs which express sound, laughter, panting, and smelling ; here, instead of \nthe substantive, commonly an adjective merely, or even a pronoun is used, \ne.g. <pb tyytabai atr^tyts, ra\'K(iy6y = <^o77bi\' aa^ey^, etc. (to sound \nfeeUe, etc.); ^8u (= rjivy ytKura) yf\\ay (to laugh heartily) ; ijSv irveTv (to \nbreathe swtetly) ; (itvfa irydoyrfs \'Axcuol breathing spirit); "Apeo Trytiy \n(Maitem spirare) ; 6(fiy r)iv: dfpivdy re koI \\iyvphy uittjx** (^ roiros) \nT^ rwy rtrrlywy x^PV (resounds summer, etc., with a summer-like and shrill \nsound, comp. Lat. aestivum sonat, vox hominem [= sonum hominis] sonat), \nPI. Phacdr. 230, c. *A v \xe2\x82\xac k (i 7 x \xc2\xab o" < tc aaoAo ffap56viov (burst into a sardonic \nlaugfi), Kp. 337, a. \n\n(c) Verbs signifying to see, to look. Od. t, 446. avs vvp (= Upyixa irvpSs) 6<p\' \nda\\fio7ai SfSopKtits ( looking flre, flashing flre ) . So fi\\\xe2\x82\xaciriiy, 5 epKe- \nffdai "Aprjy = j8A\xc2\xabV/xo "Aptos (to look war, terror); Spay aKK-hv (to look \ncourage or boldness) ; StpK^tr^ai Stiyoy, ofifpSaKfoy, rcucfpa (to look terri- \nbly, etc.); ip6fioy /BAe\'irciK (to look fury). II. o, 105. kok 6<r<r6fieyo5 \n(looking evil, with a threatening look, comp. Eng. looking daggers), fi, 269. \nixpf\'^oy iJeii., looking foolish. PI. Ion. 535, e. K\\aioyrds re koX Seiyhy \ni tifi\\ fir yras. \n\n\n\nRemark 1. Bv this use of the Ace. numerous adverbial expressions can be \nexplained, the place of the Ace. with its accompanying adjective bemg sup- \nplit-\'d either bv a pronoun alone (rodro, T<^5e, TaOro, To5e, t2, ti, ovSev, ^Tjdev, \nI, a, etc.), or by a neuter adjective, e. g. Taura Wir^lff^ai koI tout a xa\'P\xc2\xab\xc2\xbb\' \n\n34 \n\n\n\n398 SYNTAX. [^ 279. \n\nTois iroWots {to grieve at the same things, and to rejoice at the same), Dem, Cot\' \n323, 292. Qavfiaffra cWA^TTovrat {are vxmderfuUy astonished), PL Symp. \n192, c. To Kp6.ri<rra 1]v^r)(Tai/ {were most flourishing), Th. 1,19. So fiaKphw \nK\\aiciv ] rrdvTa evSaifJ-oyelv; uxpeKcly, fiKoLTrreiy, (7]fiiovy U\xe2\x82\xacyd\\cL, fiiKpd \n\xe2\x82\xacV\xe2\x82\xacpy\xe2\x82\xacTuy rh fieyiffra, 7]Sv yeXay, fieya or fieydKa ippoyeiy, afiaprdyeifi, \nScTa^ai, Siaipepeiy Ti, etc. \n\nRem. 2. Here also belong such adverbial expressions as : x^^" (^<^^i fof \nthe sake of), X\'^P^*\' ^M^\'\'? <^^\'\' ("iea, tua, gratia), Su>pfd.y (gratis), dotriyrjy, rpolKOy \nudrTfy {incassum). So also tovto, ravra {therefore), rl {why), 5 {therefore). Eur \nHec. 13. vediruTos 5\' iiy TIpLafiiSuy h Kai fj.e yns vjre^fVffjL^ay. PL Prot. 310, C \ndA,A\' auTck ravra yvv fj/cw iruph <r4 {on this very account). \n\n4. The Ace. denotes also the effect merely ai*ned at, the de- \nsign of the action ; yet almost always with neuter pronouns or \nadjectives merely, whereas with substantives a preposition, as \nCIS, TTpo\'^i cTTt, is commonly used. The following verbs, in partic- \nular, belong here : \n\n\'Kpri<rbai rivl rt (originating from xpv<\'\'^<*i "rtri xP^lay), to use something \nfor something; ird^cty (originating from xel^fiy rtyh. iretffiy), iiraiptiy^ \niiror pvyf ly, irpoKaKels\'^ai, ayayKd^fiy riyd r i, etc. Ovk Ix"> ^ f^ \nXP^\'COftat \xc2\xab\xc2\xbbTy. Ti Sij xPV<\'^H\'f^<t rovru; {for what purpose shall we use \nhim, what use shall toe make of him?). Tfj Kpi}yp rk irKfla-rov i^ia ixp^yf* \n{ad res maximi momenii), Th, 2, 15. Ileio-.^Tji\'ai r^y iiyaxt^pv*^ t^t to be \npersuaded to a retreat (instead of the usual construction ctj r. a\xc2\xbb\'ox\xc2\xabp.), ib. 21. \nTavrd ffe irorpvyu {I excite you to this). \'Atrfpxofuu, irply inrh (rod ti /*<\xc2\xab- \nfoe ayayKaa-^TJyai {before I am compelled by you to anything more severe), TL \nPhaedr. 242, a. Tovro ovk ^irei^t rovs ^uKoicas {did not persuade the Pk\xc2\xbb- \ncaeans of this). Her. 1, 163 ; but iTorpvyciy ds fxaxw- \n\nRem. 3. The Ace. of design or purpose, is transferred to the manner accordina \nto or in ichich something takes place. Here the fundamental idea is that of \nstriving for an object. Thus rpSwoy, rovrov rhv rp6irov {hunc in modum, in this \nmanner), irdyra Tp6irov, riya rpoiroy, Siicqv {in morem, according to the manner of, \nlike), o/xoia {in like manner). i-KirriSfs {consiilto). rdxos and Korh rdxos {ceUriter), \nCommonly, however, prepositions are used A^-ith such adverbial expressions. \n\n\n\n$279. (b) Accusative of the suffering Object, i. e. the \nObject upon which the Action is performed. \n\nOnly those verbs will be mentioned here, which, in Latin, \ntake some other Case than the Ace, or are constructed with \nprepositions. \n\n1. The verbs w^cXctv, ovLvdvat, 6vLvacr&cu, /SXaTrreLV, d8ix\xe2\x82\xacU\', cvox" \nXctv (commonly with Dat.), v^pt^cu\', Xv/juuVco-^^ai, Xcu^ao-.9ou, <rt- \nveaSai, XoiSo/actv (to chide) ; evcrefSelv, acre/SiLV ; Xo^^av, cvtSpevctv ; n- \nfiuipeicr^cu \', SepaTrevuv, 8opv<f>op\xe2\x82\xaclVf CTrirpoTrci^tv (to provide urith /I \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 279.] ACCUSATIVE CASE. \n\n\n\n399 \n\n\n\nTTCl \n\n\n\nguardian); koXokcvciv, ^co-evW (^wtttciv Poet.), irposKwelv ; \n&\xe2\x82\xacLv; afj.ii[ii(TSax (Poet, respondere), remunerari; <^vAaTTeo-^cu, \n(vXajSilcrScu ; yuti/xctcr^Jat, ^77X0 Dv (io emulate). \n\nX. C. 1.2, 64. (2\xc2\xabKp<{T77y) <^\xc2\xbb/6pi.s ^I\'^epoTrevw^\'Touy^cous {evidently \nworshipped the gods). Aesch. Ctes. 618. rls &j/ efTj S^fiayuryhs toiovtos, Sstis rhp \nHh Srifioy ^UTTfdffat Uyatro, robs 5e Kaipois, iu oTs ?iu adoC^a^ai r^v ir6Xiv, \niWSoiTo ; (as would be able to flatter the people). UilSmv rh irXriSfos {to persuade \nthe multitude ) . X. Hier. 4, 3. oi iroXlrox Sopv<popov(ri fxey a\\\\T}\\ovs &v\xe2\x82\xacv fiia^ou \n{keep guard over each other). R. L. 12, o-neTaa-rpaTOTr^Sevoin-ai yc {01 AoKcSaifjioyioi) \nmV irvKya koL tov trlyta^ai rovs iro\\tfiltis Ij/e/ca, koL tov ucpeA^ty tovs \ntplKovs {for the sake 0/ injuring their enemies, aud assisting their friends). C. 4. 3, \n1 5. 4Keiyo Se a^v/jM, 2ti ^01 Soku rhs twk dewv evepycfflas ovS\' ttv efs iroTe dv- \nbpuTKojy k^ious xc^o\'ik afifififabai. Rer.6,l38.4\\6xv<r otv rks rwv \'A^7]vaiwv \nyvyaiKas. Th. 1,32, IlKf Iff t apxoy, rhy AfuviSov, ovra ^acriKea Kcd \nytoy Iti, ixfrpSwfvty {6 Tlavaayias). X. H. 5. 1, 17. ri i^Sioy, ^ fi-qSeua \niydpcoTruy KoKaKtvtiy /ix//t( \'E A A. rj \xc2\xbb\' o, fi-ffTe fidpfiapoy, eHycKa /itiTi^oD; \xe2\x80\x94 \nTlposKvytiy fiaffiKea. PI. Kp. 334, b. ox^cAelj/ fxlv robs <pi\\ovs {5ok(7) \nri SiKcuoavnj, fiKdirr tiy 8\xc2\xab robs ix^povs. \'ASiKcly robs <pl\\ovSy \nifipi^eiv robs wa7has. TloXXdKis koX SovKot r ifiwpovyrai robs aSl- \nKovs StffrSras {take vengeance on their unjust masters). X. Cy. 1. 4, 8. ol \n(pvKoKfs 4\\oii6povy avr6y {hut the Depontnt XoiSopeladal riyi, to reproach) . \n\nRemark 1. Some of the above verbs take a Dative or a preposition with \nits Case: (o) ct^eKtiy riyi but vcr}\' seldom, and then in the poets; (^8) \niiSiKf7y (Is, "wpist ^ii^l fp^ riya\'i (7) afff^f\'tv ds and irtpl riya\\ evtre- \n^fTi/ fU riva^ "ftpi, ^P^i rtya; (5) Kvnaiyeabai tivi frequently; (e) AwySS- \n<ri&o/ Tin sometimes ; {Q b fipi^t ly eJfr nvo often ; {r\\) iirirpoTrfvuy tiv6s \nsomewhat frequently (\xc2\xa7 275, 1). \'A.p\xc2\xab<rKfty takes the Ace. only in the sense \nof to satisfy, but the Dat. in the sense of to please. \n\nRem. 2. Aup(7abai tivI ti {donare alicui aliquid, to present something to \nsome one), is the construction in Attic prose, not Swpela^cd nvd tivi {donare \naliquem aliqua re, to present one with something). \n\n2. Verbs signifying to do good or evil to any one, by word or \ndeed, e. g. (vepytTilv, KaKovpyelv, KaKorroLilv \', ivXoyilv, KaKoXoyelv] \ncv, KaXu)<i, KOKioi XeyetVf ^ittciv, airay opivcLV. \n\nS. Aj. 1154. iv^pwiTfj fi^ Spa Tobs t c^vtjkJtos k a k & s {do not injure the \ndead). X. Cy. 1. 6, 29. KaKovpytlv robs (piXovs {to harm one\'s friends). \nZvtpyfTtly r^y ir ar piSa {to do good to one\'s country). X. C. 2. 3, 8. irus S\' \nhy 4yu ayfTirr-fj^iuy (tr}y aS(\\<p^ XP^<^\'^\xc2\xab\'\xc2\xbb 4iri(TTa.p.fv6s yeKalcdXeyeivrhved \n\\4yoyTa, Koi cS irotcTv rhy d iroiovvra; rhy (xivroi koX \\6ya> Koi epyw \nTfiptififyoy 4fji( ayiay ovk tiy Svyaifi^v o&r\' el> \\4y\xe2\x82\xaciy, oik\' e5 Troie7y {know- \ning how to speak well of one who speaks well of me, and to do good to one who does well \nto me ; but I should not be able to speak well of or to do good to one who, etc.) In- \nstead of the adverbs tl and kokus with irou7y, etc., the Greek uses also the cor- \n\n\n\n400 SYNTAX. [$ 279. \n\nresponding adjectives ; hence Ka\\a, KaKh. iroie7vy \\iy\xe2\x82\xaciv nvi (to do goM \nor evil to one, to say good or evil of one). See \xc2\xa7 280. \n\n3. Verbs signifying to persevere, to await, to wait for, and tkt \ncontrary, e. g. fxiveLv (like manere), Trepiftei/eiv, S^app^cv, Kaprepeiv:. \n<f>evy\xe2\x82\xacLv, a7ro<f>\xe2\x82\xacvy\xe2\x82\xacLVj aTroStS/oacrKetv, SpaTrerevctv. \n\nM\')] ^\xe2\x82\xacvye rhu kIvSvvov [do not flee from danger). Qa^^eTre ^dvarov {fidentt \nanimo expectate mortem). X. An. 3. 2, 20. rhs fiev fidxots ^apfieTre {bravely \nstand or\' endure the battles). Cy. 5. 5, 42. ejf riv4s ere TijjiSxnv, avTcurirdCov /col evdx^t \navTois, \'iva ere koX ^appiiffwa iv {that they may confide in you, ut fiducia te \ncomplectantur). \'O Sovhos aireS pa rhv Secirorrjv {ran away from his master). \nPI. Symp. 216, b. dpairereia) oZv avrhv ko^ (pevyw {I run away from him, \netc.). Dem. I. Phil. 50, 37. oirwv irpay/xdrcov Kaipol ov fjLevovffi rijv r}fnr^\' \npav fipadvTTJTa {do not wait for your slothfulness). \n\nRem. 3. After the analogy of <^ e u 7 e t y, other verbs also, which contain \nthe idea of fleeing, e. g. those signifying to turn back from, to retreat from, to \nabhor, are constructed with the Ace, though but seldom, e. g. v tt x \xc2\xab p ^ 1 1/ rhv \nox^ov (to retire from the crowd) ; eKtrrrivai kIuSwov (to shrink from, shun fear) ; \n4 KT p 4ir eff^ a I, vir e kt p eir e c^ai, utt \xe2\x82\xac|epxe<r3-ot, aTrocTT pitpetr^ai. \n\xc2\xaea^f>\xe2\x82\xac7v Tivi signifies to have confidence in something (fidere aliqua re). \n\n4. Verbs of concealing and being concealed: Xav-^avciv, KpvTv \nTciv {celare), Kpvima^ai; \xe2\x80\x94 also the verbs <j)&dv\xe2\x82\xacLv (antevertere), \nXetTTctv, cTrtXctTTctv (defcere) ; \xe2\x80\x94 verbs or particles of 5z^;eanw^, \nthe person or tiling by which one swears being in the Ace. \n\nPL Rp. 365, d. ^eovs oihe Kav^dveiv, otfre Pid<ra<r^ai 5vuaT6v {to escape \nthe notice of , be concealed from the gods). Kpiirreiv rivd ri (to conceal any- \nthing from any one), see \xc2\xa7 280. Her. 6, 115. irepUirKwov ^ovyiov fiovxSfieyot \n(p^TJyai Tohs ^A^Tjvaiovs a.TnK6fievoi is rh 6.cnv (wishing to anticipate the \nAthenians). \'ETriXelirei /xe 6 xP\'^^o^y V r)P-4pa (fails me). X. An. 1. 5, 6. rh \nffTpdrevfia 6 (tTtos i-TT 4\\iv e. \'\'Ofj.vvfii irdpras ^eov 5 (I swear by all the \ngods). Hence fid, ov fid, vaL fid, v^ Aia. \n\nRem. 4. Also the two impersonal verbs Se? and xPVy i^ the sense of to \nneed, are constructed with the Ace. of the person and the Gen. of the thing or person, \nof which or whom one is in need ; this construction, however, belongs only to \npoetry, e. g. Od. a, 124. /xv^a-eai, \'6TTe6 <r e XP\'h (yo^ w^jYZ tell of ivhat you are \nin need). Aesch. Pr. 86. avrhv ydp ere Set Ilpo fXTf^eus (you yourself need \nPrometheus). Aet with the Dat. of the person belongs to prose and poetry, e. g. \nPI. Menon. 79, b. Set ovv ffoi rr)s avrrjs ipwr-fiaews {you need the same inquiry). \nIn the sense of necesse est, opus est, with an infinitive, the Ace. of the person is \ncommon with both verbs, e. g. Se? (xp\'h) o\'e ravra iroieTy : the Dat. is much more \nrare, and with xp\'h seldom even in poetry. X. C 3.3, 10. el ff 01 Sea i SiSda-Keiv. \nComp. X. 0. 7, 20. S. Ant. 736. iWcp yhp ^ \'fiol xp\'h 7^ tv^S\' ^PX^^" \nX^ou6s. \n\n5. Many verbs denoting a feeling or an affection of tJie mind, \ne. g. ff>o^\xe2\x82\xacL(T\'^at, Betorai, rpetv\', aio^vecr-^at (reve?\'e?\'i), aiSeLoSai\', Svs- \n-)(paCv\xe2\x82\xacLv ; eK7r\\?y7T\xe2\x82\xac(r^at, KaTaTrXi^rrecr^at ; oXo^vpea-S^ai (miserari). \n\n\n\n^ 279.] ACCTTSATIVE CASE. \n\n\n\n401 \n\n\n\nX. Cy. 8.1,28. imXKov tovs ai8ovfx4vovs alSovvTairoij/ amiBuv oi \n&u^puiroi {respect the respectful). An. 1. 9, 6. Kvpos &pktov ttotc e\'7rt<|)epo- \nfidvvf ovK irp^aev {was not afraid of a hear). Cy. 3.\xc2\xbb3, 18. {ol iroXefiioi) \nIxaWov Tin as (pofiii(rovTai, Urai/ a.Kov<rw(riu, on ovx ws (po$ovfjLej/oi Trr-qaao- \nfi\xe2\x82\xacu avTovs oXkol Ko^rj/xeyoi {will fear us, hearing that we shall not crouch with \nfear on account of them). Alffxvvofiai tIv ^e6v {I feel ashamed before the \ngod). R. L. 2, 11. alSela-^ai rovs &pxovTa5. Cy. 1. 3, 5. Kal (re, S \niroTTTre, fxva art 6fievov ravra ra fipd!>(ji.aTa dpa> {I see that yon are dis- \ngusted with, loathe this food). PI. Symp. 1 73, c. rovs eralpovs e A. e \xc2\xab. Dem. \nCor. 290, 185. KaravXayrivat rhy ^Ixnrirov {to he panic-stricken by \nPhilip). In poetry this use of the Ace. is much more extensive. \n\nRem. 5. Verbs which express the idea of motion, sometimes take (as transi- \ntive verbs) the Ace. of the thing put in motion by them, as a passive object ; \nthis construction is used in poetry, seldom in prose. The following \nverbs especially belong here, fiaiveiv, ataa-eiv, nepau, ttXcTu peireiy, \n(TireuScty, etc. S. Ant. 1158. tvxV kut appeirei rhv evrvxov vra \n{fortune sinks the fortunate man). \'EK^alveiv, iiraiaa-ciy iroSa {to put out \nthe foot, move the foot quickly); aiaa-eiy X^P\xc2\xb0- {furiously to set or move the \nhand to); ^aaiv, irSSa irepau, all poetic. Th. 6, 39. Ko/ca (nrevSeiv {ac- \ncelerare). In this way, verbs expressing sound, in the pregnant sense of putting \nan object in motion and causing it to sou7id, are sometimes constructed with the \nAce. II. A., 160. Xinroi kcIv^ ^x^o. KpoT dXi^ov ava irToXe/xoio ye(pvpas {rattle \nthe chariots, hurry off the chariots with a rattling sound). Her. 6, 58. \\4fir}Ta \nKpoT eovff I {rattle the kettle, strike it again a)id again). So also in a pregnant \nsense, the poets say, ^ehv xofeveiv, eXlcraiv {deum chords, saltando cele- \nbrare). Comp. Larger Grammar, Part II. \xc2\xa7 552. \n\n6. With verbs of motion, the space or way passed over is put \nin the Ace, these being the objects on which the action of the \nverb is performed; so also the time during which an action \ntakes place (in answer to the question, How long?), is put in \nthe Ace, as being the object measured by the action; so too \nmeasure and weight (in answer to the question, How much?), \nare put in the Ace, these also being the objects on which the \naction of the verb is performed. \n\nBoij/eiv, irepav, \'4p7r\xe2\x82\xac IV, ir o pev effdrai 656 v {to go the way, etc., comp. \nitque reditque viam). Eur. Med. 1067. a\\A\' efjUt yap 5^ rXriH-opea-Tdrrjif \n65 6 V {will go the way). X. Cy. 2. 4, 27. /x^rt ra Svsfiara Tropevov, dAA^ \nk4\\(v4 aoi rovs rjye/xSuas r^v f>a(Tr\'t]v {6Uv) Tiyela^ai {do not march over \nthe difficult places, but command your guides to lead over the easiest road). An. 4. 4, \n1. 4irop\xe2\x82\xacv^i)ffav Zia rris \'Ap/xcvias Tredlov airav Koi Keiovs y7]K6(^ovs \n(marched over a plain, etc.). R. Equ, 8, 10. ^v & fikv (pevyr) iirlrov \'Ittttov irav \nroTa xwpta {per varia loca). Cy. 1.6, 43. &y\xe2\x82\xaciy {arpaTiav) ^ (rrevas fj \nvXarelas SBovs. Dem. I. Phil. 49, 34. &y(ay Kal <pepoou rovs iv\\4ovras 8rd- \nKarrav {sailing through thesea). yipovov, rhv xP^^\xc2\xb0^^fi^ " ^*"*^\' (different \nfrom XP^\'^V) <^^vv XP^^Vi ^^^ % time, gradually), vvKra, T]fi4pav {during the night, day)* \nHer. 6, 127. ii ^ifiapis ^K^ia^i rovrov rhv xp^vov fidXurra {was flourishing \n\n34* )^^ \n\n\n\n\n402 SYNTAX. [$ 279. \n\nduring this time). X. An. 4. 5, 24. KoraXafiPdvei r^v ^vyarepa rod Kwfidpxo* \nivvdrriv Tjfiepav yeyafirjfieinfju {who had been married nine days). Cy. 6. 3, 1 L \nKal X^^^ ^^ \'f*^ rpiTrjv rjfiepav rh avrh tovto ewpaTTOv. Dem. Phil. 3. 1 16, 23L \nX<rxv<rav S4 ri Kol &r}$aioi rohs T\xe2\x82\xac\\evraiovs rovrovarl xp^fovs /teret t^\xc2\xbb \niy AevKTpois fidxw [during these last times). Her. 1, 31. trra^lovs -TrivT^ koI \nrearffepdKoyra SiaKO/JLlffavTes airiKovro is rh lp6v {having passed over forty -five \nstades). 6, 119. airix^iv SsKa /cot 5ir]Koalov5 (rraSiovs {to be distant tuxf \nhundred and ten stades). 6, 135. MiAxtaSTjs atreirAee Ildpoi/ iroXiopK-iiffas re l| \nK(ti eiKOort 7]fi4pas. \'\'E<p\xe2\x82\xac(roy airex^i^ airh "SidpSeuu rpiav TjfjLepwv oSov. X. C. \n3. 6, 1. ouSeTTw ^iKoffiv erij yeyovdos (like viginti annos natus, twenty years old). \nHere belongs the Ace. with Svvaa^aiy tobe worth. Her. 3, 89. rh Bafiv\\6vi.ov \nrdXavrov Sivarai Evfioidas efiSo fx^ kovtu uveas {the Babylonian talent \nis worth [weighs as much as, amounts to] seventy Euboean minae). \n\nRem. 6. In poetry, the Ace. of the local object is sometimes used eren with \nverbs denoting rest, e. g. Kela-^ai, arrival, ^crSfai, bdaaeiv, Ka^i^^iv, etc. (instead \nof iv with the Dat., as in prose). Here also the Ace. represents the space as \nthe object acted upon, or taken possession of, e. g. S. Phil. 145. {T6irov irposiSeiv \ni^4\\eis) Uvriva K\xe2\x82\xac7rai {quemjacens occupatum tenet). Comp. Larger Gram. \nPart n. \xc2\xa7 554, Rem. 3. \n\nRem. 7. The following prepositions are joined with the Ace. to define more \n\nfully the extension in space and time, viz., avd,from a lower to a higher place, \n\ne. g. oca TTOTttfjibv irXeiv, ava vvKra ; \xe2\x80\x94 Kard, from a higher to a lower place, e. g. \n\n1 Kara iroTafxhv irKeiv, Kara rhv ^iov ; \xe2\x80\x94 afjLcpi and Trepi, round about, e. g. fiaiveiv \n\nI afx(pl (or irepl) rijv Tr6\\i.v, aficpl rhv x^\'-l^^^^^ ir^pX to. MTySt/cd ; \xe2\x80\x94 vTr6, under, {xj)* \n\n\', ^\\iov, virh vvKTa, sub noctem ; \xe2\x80\x94 imep, over ; \xe2\x80\x94 irapd, near by, along, by the side of, \n\n\\ e. g. Ttapa rhv Ttoraphv iropeve(r^ai, Trap\' oXov rhv fiiov ; \xe2\x80\x94 eTr:, upon, e. g. iirl vara \n\n\\ hdKd<T(X7]S irXiiv, iirl iroKvv XP^^^^ \'i \xe2\x80\x94 ^"*5 through, e. g. Sjo hwixara fiulveiv^ Siii \n\nviKra ; \xe2\x80\x94 fierh. ravra, postea ; \xe2\x80\x94 ivphs eawepav, towards evening. \n\nRem. 8. Prom this use of the Ace. to denote space, time, and quantity, \nvery many adverbial expressions have originated: (a) rrjv raxianiv (dSoV), \ncelerrime; ri]v Trpdorrfv, primum ; r)}v ev^^lav , recte, straight forward ; /xaKpdv, far ; \n\\&\\Xr]v Kal &K\\r}v, sometimes here, sometimes there, etc. II. \xc2\xbb|/, 116. iroWa S\' 6,vav- \nra, Kdravra, irdpavrd re, 86xM-^d r \xe2\x96\xa0^?^ov {they passed over inany up hills, \ndown hills, straight and cross ways ; \xe2\x80\x94 (b) a-finepov, to-day ; avpiov, to-morrow ; apxh^t \nT^v apxhv, properly, at first, omnino ; riXos, rh reXevra7ov, finally ; viov, lately ; \nrrpSrepov, irpwrovy rh irparov, rh irpiv, rh avr\'iKa, ravvv, rh Trdhai, rh iraKatov, rh \n\\onr6vf etc. 5 \xe2\x80\x94 (c) TToWd, saepe; ra iroWd, plerumque ; iroXv, fieya, /xeyd\\a, fie- \nyiara, oXiyov, fUKpov, fiiKpd, ffvxvd, fxaKpd, "icov, roaovro, irdvra, etc. So also \n\nfiriKOSy V^TJ^OS, \n\n7. Finally the Ace. is used with intransitive or passive verbs \n*-< \' and intransitive adjectives of every kind, to explain and define \n\ntheir meaning more fully. Here, also, the Ace. represents the \nobject as acted upon or suffering, since it denotes the object to \nwhich the intransitive action of the verb or adjective, refers \nor is directed. This Ace. is used most frequently in specifica- \ntions relating to the body and the mind. This is called the Ace. \nof more definite limitation^ sometimes the Ace. of synecdoche. \n\n\n\n? 280.] DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE. 403 \n\nHer. 2, 111. Kd^vav rovs 6(p^a\\(ji.o^ s (to be pained in or in respect, to the \neye$). 3, 33. t^s <pp4vas vyiaivew [to be sound in mind). X. C. 1. 6, 6. dAyelv \nTohs ir65as (to have pain in the feet). 4. 1, 2. ipavephs ^v Sw/cparTjs ov rSiv rii \n<rd)fiara vphs S>pav, aWa twv ras i//ux^^ "^P^^ operV fS \'ir\xe2\x82\xac(pvK6Twv i^iefjLcvos \n(that he vxis not desirous of those well-constituted in body for beauty, but of those well- \nadapted in mind, etc.). PI. Rp. 453, b. $ia(p4pet yvy}) avSphs t^v (pixriu {woman \ndiffers from man in respect to her nature). 462, d. 6 ^v^pwiros rhv d6.KTv\\ov \naXyu {is pained as to, has a pain in, his finger). Ka\\6s iarri ra ofifiara {is \nbeautiful as to his eyes, has beautiful eyes). KokJs iari r^jv ^pvx\'hf- So aya^6s, \nffO(f)6s, <pp6vifx.os, xP\'hc^l^os, xP\'no"r^s, diKaios, etc., with the Ace. \'Aya^hs rex^nv \nTivd. Her. 3, 4. ^dvrfs koX yua>fj.r}P iKav6s, koI to TroX^fiia &\\Kifios ^j/. X. \nCy 2. 3, 7.av4<TTTi ^epavXas rh ffSifia ovic acpvfjSf koI r))v i^vx^v ovk ayevvci \navSpl ioiKws. 8.4, 18. Seivhs ravrriv t)]v Texvriv. So bavp.affr\'bs rb )it\xe2\x82\xac- \n76(^0 5, rh k6.\\Kos {wonderful for his size and beauty, of wonderful size and \nbeauty). The English commonly uses prepositions to express the force of this \nAce, viz. in, in respect to, of; or when it stands with an adjective, the English \nsometimes changes the Ace. of the thing into a personal substantive, and \nmakes the adjective as an attributive agree with it, e. g. aya^hs r4xvWi <^ good \nartist, comp. Eng. he is a good shot, i. e. marksman ; or the prepositions of or witk \nare placed before the substantive denoting the thing, and the attributive ad- \njective is made to agree with that substantive, e. g. yeavias Ka\\hs tV ^vx\'fji\', of \nor rvith a lovely spirit. \n\nRem. 9. Sometimes the prepositions els, irfiSs, Kard are joined with the Ace, \nin which case the relation is analogous to an Ace. of space, denoting direction, \nas 5ia<f>4p\xe2\x82\xaciv eXs Ti, e. g. els aperiiv. X. C. 3. 5, 1. ivSo^orepa rj ttSMs els rk \niro\\efjLiKa earai. \'Xoephs irpos ti. \xe2\x80\x94 On the Dat. see \xc2\xa7 285, (3), (b). \n\nRem. 10. From this use of the Ace, many adverbial expressions have orig- \ninated. Thus the expressions of measure : edpos, vypos, /xeye^os, ^d^os, firJKos, \nttXtj^os, api^fM6y ; also yeyos, wofxa, fj.epos, rb ahu fiepos, Trp6<pa(Tiv, under pretence, \n-rh kKT^bes, yuJiix-qv efiTjv. Her. 6, 83. KXeavSpos yevos ecbv ^lyaXevs ott\' \'Ap- \nKaStTjr {being a Phigalian by birth). 7, 109. XifivT] iovcra Tvyxdvei wsel Tpi^Kovra \nffraSicau t^u ireploSov (in circumference). X. An. 2. 5, 1. /tera ravra a<pl- \nKovro eirl rhu Zdfiarou iroTafihu rh eZpo s Terrdpwv irXebpav {four plethra in \nwidth). 4. 2, 2. ol fiev iiropevouTO rh rrXri^os ws Sisx^^^oi {two thousand in \nnumber). \xe2\x80\x94 Moreover rovvavTiov, Tavavria, on the contrary ; raXXa, in respect to \nother things ; rh oXov, omnino ; ap.(p6repa, tovto {ravra) /xeu \xe2\x80\x94 rovro {ravra) Se ; \noifSev, in no respect; r\\, in some respect ; TroAAa, irdura, etc. \xe2\x80\x94 Th eV e\'^e, rovv* \ncVe, roviri ae, rh els ifie, quantum ad me (te), as far as it relates to me, etc. \n\n\n\nf 280. Double Accusative. \n\nIn the following instances the Greek puts two objects in the \nAce. with one verb : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n1. When, in the construction given under ^ 278, 1, the verb \nhas a transitive sense, as <^tA.iW cjuXelu, then the idea of activity \nconsisting of the verb and a cognate substantive (with which \n\n\n\n404 SYNTAX. [$ 280. \\ \n\nan adjective usually agrees), being blended into one, may at \xe2\x80\xa2 \nthe same time be extended to a personal object, e. g. ^tX<ii \nliiyaXrjv kJuXlov (== cfuXwi) tov Tratoa. j \n\nHer. 3, 88. y dixov s r ov s ir pdr ovs iydfxee 6 Aape7o5 Kvpov di>o ^vya\' \nrepas, "ATotradu re /coi \'ApTvffr (t)VT]v [contracted very honorable marriages \nvnth the two daughters of Cyrus). 154. iwvrhy Kufiarai Xdofiriv avr\\Ki(r- \nr ov {maims himself vnth an incurable maiming, maims himself incurably). Th. 8, \n75. &pK(o(ray rohs ar par idras revs fi^yioTTovs o pKovs [made the sol- \ndiers take the most solemn oaths). X. Cy. 8. 3, 37. ifih 6 irar^p rriv tuv iraiSwv \niraiSelav iiraiSeuev (educated me in the education of boys). PI. Apol. 19, a. ; \nMeATjTos fie iypdiparo t^v ypa<p^v ravT-riv. 36, c. eKacTTOv evepye\' \nre7y T^v fjL\xe2\x82\xacyi(Trr]v ev epyearlau. Her. 1, 129. SeTTrj/ov t6 (= o) fiiu ^ \ni^oiyiffe. Th. 1, 32. T7)u vav/xaxio-\'\' av eoxr dfie^ a Kopiv^lovs (like ^ \nylKTju viKciu), we repelled the Corintliaiis in the naval battle. PL Gorg. 522, 1 \na. iroWa Kot TjSea koL iravToSaira eixtixovu v/ias. Especially with | \nverbs of naming, after the analogy of ovofxa ovofidCeiy nvd\'. X. O. 7, 3. /caAow- \\ \na fie rovTO rh ivojxa {they called me this name, by this name). PI. Rp. 471, I \ndi. av aKaKovvr es r avr a Th, ov 6 fiar a kavrov s. \' \\ \n\nRemark 1. Instead of the substantive denoting the thing effected, the Ace. , \nof a pronoun is frequently used. X. >Cy. 1. 3, 10. tSaXo fiifiovnevos rhp \\ \nSa/cov. An. 5. 7, 6. tovto vfias i^airaTTJaai. This is especially the case mth = \nverbs of praise and blame, of benefit and injury, after the analogy of iyKwfiiov \niyKWfiidC^iv nvd and the like. Fl. Symp. 221, c. tt o A A o fikv ovv 6.v tis kcu &AAa \nexoi ^(aKpdT7]v iiraiveffai {one could praise Socrates for many other things). J \nRp. 363, d. T avra S^ koI &Wa Toiavra iyKccfiid^ov a i SiKouotrvvT}v. \nMeyaAa, fiiKpd, TrAeiw, fj-el^u w^cAety, /3 Aoirr ei v, dStKetv Tiva. \n\n2. Expressions of saying or doing good or evil (which generally ; \ncontain an Ace, or its equivalent in an adverb, of the thing said \nor done), take the object to wliich the good or evil is done, in \nthe Ace, e. g. dyaS d, KaXd, /caKo, Trotctv, Trpdrrciv, epya^c- \n(rS^ai, Acyctv, \xe2\x82\xact7retv, etc. nvd (to do good, etc., to some one). | \n\nX. O. 5, 12. 7} yrj rohs &pi(rTa b epaireiovr as avr^v TrXelara ayabh J \nd J/ T t TT 1 6 t {returns the greatest advantages to those who cultivate it best). Her. 8, | \n61. t6t\xe2\x82\xac di] 6 @efii(TTOKXir\\s Ke7v6v re kolI tovs Kopiv^iovs iroWd \nre Kal /ca/cd e Ae7e {saidmuch evil of him and the Corinthians). X. Cy. 3. 2, 15. \novSeTTcoTTOTe iiravovro TroAAd /ca/cd Tjfxas voiovvr es {never ceased to do much \ninjury to us). \n\nRem. 2. Instead of the Ace. of the object acted upon or suffering, the Dat. \nis sometimes used, which is considered as the Dat. of advantage or disadvan- \ntage {Dativus commodi or incommodi). Dem. Aphob. 855, 37. ri aot Troir](ru><ri\\ \n01 fidprvpes ; {quid tui tibi prosint testes\'?) X. Cy. 1. 6, 42. irpovKSirei, ri ao \nTToiriaovcriv ol apx^vevoi {consider what your subjects will do for you) ; on the coil\' \ntrary with a4 {what they will do to you). An. 4. 2, 23. vdvra hroir](rav to is \navo^avova-iv {showed all honors to the dead). Cy. 7. 2, 27. fjv raind fioi \nTToirja-ps d \\eyeis {if you perform for me what you promise). So also in the sense \nof, to do something with some one, as PI. Charm. 157, c. ovk h,v ex^^l^"} 3 rt irotot- \n\xe2\x80\xa2 \n\n\n\nI \n\n\n\n^ 280.] DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE. 405 \n\nfih or 01. But the Dat. often depends upon the adjective, e. g. Dem. Cor. 243 \n5. 5<oTeA.e? irpdrruv koI \\4yuv tu fi4\\T itrra Tcp Z-f} n(f {continue to do and \n\n\n\nsay what is best for the people). \n\n3. With verbs : (a) of entreating, beseeching, desiring, inquir- \ning, asking: atrcii/, dTratreti/, Trparretv {to demand), el<^pa.TruVy \nvpaTTearSaL ; cpcorav, ipia^ai, e^cra^ctv, to-ropetv, avLaropetv ; \xe2\x80\x94 (b) of \nteaching and reminding: SiBda-KeLv, TratSsvcw/, amuijuvT^o-zcetv, vtto- \nIxifxirqa-Kuv (with both of these the Gen. of the thing is more \nusual) ; \xe2\x80\x94 (c) of dividing and cutting into parts : Sateo-^at, 8iai- \np\xe2\x82\xaci\xc2\xbb\', T\xe2\x82\xacfj.v\xe2\x82\xacLv, Stave/xeiv, Karavip-uv ; \xe2\x80\x94 (d) of depriving and taking \naway : crrcpcLV, dTroo-Tepctv ; o-TepLO-KeLv, a-uXav, a<fiaLpei(TSaL ; \xe2\x80\x94 ( e) of \nconcealing or hiding from : KpvTrruv (k\xe2\x82\xacv^\xe2\x82\xaclv Poet.) ; \xe2\x80\x94 (f ) of put- \nting on and off, clothing and unclothing, s-urrounding with : kv- \nhv\xe2\x82\xacLVi iKSveiv, dp.<fiL\xe2\x82\xacvvvvaL, TTcptySoAAeo-^at. \n\nHer. 3, 1. ire/xipas KafifivffTjs is AXyxmrov K-fjpvKa atr ee "Afidcih l^vyarepa \n{asked Amasis for his daughter). 58. avrovs (Karhu rdXavra eirp-rj^av \n{demanded of them a hundred talents). X. C. 1. 2, 60. ovSeva TrdoTrore /Mia^hv \nrrjs avvovffias iir pd^ar o "XuKparris {never demanded a reward of any one for \nhis instruction). H. 4.1,21. \'HpnrtrlBas aire? rhv \'Ayr}<rl\\al}v bvX\'iTas \nre is Sisx^Xlovs koI ireXracrT as &Wovs r oao\'uT ov s {asks of Agesilaus \nabout two thousand hoplites, etc.). Cy. 6. 2, 35. to, els Tpo(pr]v Seovra i^erd- \n(ere rohs v<p\' vfuv { inquire of those under you respecting the things necessary for \nfood). Eur. Hipp. 254. ttoAAo SiBda-Kei yap fi 6 noXhs floras {teaches me \nmuch). Antiph. 5. 131, 14. 6 XP^^*^^ \'^"^ ^ ifiircipia rh fi^ Ka\\as ^xovra \n4kBiS d<TK\xe2\x82\xaci Tohs avbp<j}-irQvs {teach men what is not proper). Her, 1. 136. \nTTaiSeuovo-t tovs 7ra?Sas rpia fxavva {they teach boys three things only). 6, \n138. y\\wcr<rdv re t})v ^Att ik^v kuI TpSrrovs r5>v \'A^valcov iS iSaCKOV \nrobs TralSas. X. An. 3. 2, \\l. avafivqa-o) vfias Kol r ohs Kiv5vvovs{l will \nremind you of the dangers). Hier. 1,3. vire ij.ur}<rds /xe rk iu t^ 15i(i)tik(^ fiitp. \nHer. 7, 121. r peTs no i pas 6 EeplTjs Saa-d/xevos irdvra rhv ire^hv (Xr pa- \nt6v {having divided all the land army into three divisions). Tefipeiv, S laipeTv ri \nnepVi fioipas {to cut, to divide something into parts). X. Cy. 7. 5, 13. 6 Kvpos t b \n(TT pdrevfjLa KaTeveifie 5wSe/ca /Lteprj {divided the army into twelve parts). \nPI. Polit.283, d. 5ie\\a)iX\xe2\x82\xacV aiir^y {r^v fier p-nr iK7]y) 5vo fieprj. X. Cy.4. \n6,4. rhv fiSuov fxoi koI <pi\\ov iratSo acpelXero rrju ^^wx^" {deprived my \nonly child of life). Eur. Hec. 285. rhv rrdvra 5\' oKfiop ^fiap iv fi acpel- \nA\xe2\x82\xacTO. Dem. Aphob. 839, 13. t); \xc2\xbb/ TX)it7V oir 0- rep eT ;[ie {robs me of honor). \nPhil. 54, 50. TO rinerepa Tifias aw oa-re pe7 {6 ^IXlttitos). Kpvirra} are rh \narvxvi^a {I conceal the misfortune from you). Eur. Hipp. 912. oh n^y <pi\\ovs \nye, K&Ti fiaWov ti <l>i\\ovs, Kpv-KTeiv Ukoiov ffaSyirdrep, SvsTTpa^las. X. \nCy. 1. 3, 17. irals fieyas fiiKphu ex^v X\'^wva^ erepov iraUa fiiK p 6v, fj.4y av \nixovra xtTwm, iKSvcras avr6v, rhv fxlv eavTOv eKe^vov i] fx <p i e <r e, rh\' Sk \niKflyov avrhs iv4hv{a large boy stripped another small boy of his large timia and put \n\n\n\n406 SYNTAX. [\xe2\x99\xa6 280. \n\nhis own tunic on him). Her. 1, 163. relxos irepiffaXeff^ai r^v v6\\iv {to \n\nsurround the city with a wall). \n\nRem. 3. Several of the above verbs are sometimes otherwise constructed, \ncommonly, however, with some diflFerence in the sense expressed; thus, aireip \nr I Trap a r ivos \\ epwrau t iv a tt epi r lyos; with verbs of dividing and cut- \nting into parts, not unfrequently the preposition els, sometimes also Kard, \nis joined with the Ace, e. g. tovs TroXiTas els e^ /xoipas dieTKov ; or the word fjcepos, \netc., is governed directly by the verb, and the object to be divided is put in the \nGen., depending on fxepos, etc., e. g. Svo /xoipas AvSmu irdmwv Sie7\\ev {he divided all \nthe Lydians into two parts) ^ Her. 1, 94; passively, ^ujheKa Hepcrwv <pv\\a\\ Si-pprii/Tai \n{the Persians are divided into twelve tribes), X. Cy. 1. 2, 5. Verbs of depriving \nand taking away, have the following constructions : \n\n{dJ) o.iro<rrepf7v and a^aipela-^ai with the Aqc. of the thing alone, e, g \nJTws ti.v ovTQS ebeXoi r a aKX6r pia atroaTepeTu ; {how could he be willing to \ntake away the things of others ?), X. Ag. 4, 1. XdXa^ai rh koXus eyvuxr- \nixeva {provisa) koI tt eTToir) fiey a acpa ipovvrai (take away, destroy \nthe provisions), 0. 5, 18 ; the Ace. of the person alone is but rarely found; \nthus with a<paipe7(T^ai {to rob, take from), e. g. Andoc. 4. 32, 27. rots \niroXiTais ovK e| llaov xp^"\'\'*\'? o.X\\a tovs fxev a<paipovfJi\xe2\x82\xacVoSf rohs 5i \nT{>7rra>y oiiSevhs a^iay t^v Srj/iOKpaTiav a.iro<paivei. \n\n(b) (TTepeij\', aiTocrrepelv^ arepiaKeiVf a<j>aip\xe2\x82\xac\'i<r^ai rivd rt very \n\noften. \n\nm \n\n(c) (nepeTv, aTroare pe7v rivd rivos, like spoliare aliquant aliqua re, to \ndeprive one of something, sgq ^ 271,2; but a.<paLpe\'icr^aL very seldom \nhas this construction, and indeed only in the sense of -to restrain, to pre- \nvent. Ol oi^i^ofxevoi cKpaipovvrai ras {xev Kvuas rov evpetv rhy Kayu, \naiiTovs Se t^s wxpeXeias, X. Ven. 6, 4. \n\n(d) a<l>aip\xe2\x82\xac7ar^ai, airoffTe pe7v with the Gen. of the person and the Ace. \nof the thing ; thej\' then signify to take something from some one, to withdraw \nsomething from some one. This is a more rare construction. Ot vXeoveKTcu \nrcov dWuv a.<paipovyLev 1 XPV H-c-\'^C\' ^olvtovs SoKOvai vXovriCfiy \n{taking their property from others, seem to enrich themselves), X. C. 1. 5, 3. \n"Svixfiax\'^as a(paipov fieyov rrjs 7r6\\eu}S {= ruy itoMtuv) Dem. \nCor. 232, 22. Ei ri fiovKoyrat eTriT-qdeieiy KoXwy, ovSeyhs oiroorepet \n(to /cyj\'rjyeo\'ia), X. Ven. 12, 8. "Orrts, /xt; &\\\\u}y eavrhv airocrr epSiv, \naa<pa\\eias Se7Tai (properly, aliis se subducens, i. e. ab aliis desciscens ; kavrhv \nis here to be considered as the Ace. of the thing), Th. 1, 40. \n\nRem. 4. On the double Accusative with the verbs irei^eiy, ivorpvyeivj iiral- \npeiy^ irpoKa\\e7(T^ai, avoy/co^etr, see \xc2\xa7 278, 4. \n\n4. An Accusative of the object acted upon, and an Accusa- \ntive of the predicate (which is often an adjective), is used with \nthe verbs mentioned under \xc2\xa7 240, 2, when they are changed \nfrom the passive to the active ; hence two Accusatives stand \nwith verbs signifying to make, to constitute, e. g. ttoiciv, tlScvol, \nreddere; to choose, to appoint, e. g. aipcto-^at, create, etc.; to consider, \nrepresent, and regard as something, to declare, to know, e. g. vo/u- \n^\xe2\x82\xactv, -^eto-^ai, etc. ; to say, to name, to praise, to chide, e. g. Xcyetv, \novo/xa^ctv, KoXuv ; to give, to take, to receive, e. g. TrapaXa^eLv Si- \n^co-^ai, etc. ; to produce, to increase, to form, to teach, to educate. \n\n\n\ni 281.] ACCUSATIVE CASE. 407 \n\nKvpos rovs (pi\\ovs iirol7]<r\xe2\x82\xac ir\\ov<riov5 {made Ms friends rich). Uai\' \nSeieiv Tiva aoipov (to educate one wise, i. e. make wise by education), liofil- \n(fiy.Tiyila^ai riva &vSpa ay a^ 6 v {to think, regard, consider one a goodman). \nDem. Cor. 5,43. ot eerraXol Kcd @7]$a7oi <pl\\ov, eve pyfT-rjVy (Turripa rhy \n*i\\nrvov 7]yovvTO. \'OvofidCeiv r iva oro(f>ia-r\'f)v {to coil one a sophist), \nAtpeltr^al Tiva <Trpar\'i)y6v {to choose one a commander). X. Cy. 5. 2, 14. \nrhv Tw^pvau cvySenrvov TrapeXafiev. Dem. Chers. 106, 66.7r({Ae\xc2\xabs eywy* \nrXovroy rjyovfiai ffv fifxdxovs, iriariv, evvoiav. Andoc. 3. 24, 7. rj \nelfyfjvr] rhv Z^ fxou TU>v*ASn]vai(av vy^-qKhv ^pe /col KariaTqaev Itrx^P^^\' \n\nRem. 5. On the use of the Inf. eJvai with the Ace, see \xc2\xa7 269, Rem. 1. \n\nk 281. Remarks on the use of the Accusative with the \n\nPassive. \n\nI As the Greek considers the passive as a reflexive {\xc2\xa7 251, 1), it follows that, \non the change of the Act. to the Pass., the Ace. may remain with every transitive \nverb which in the Act. takes an Ace. of a thing as the object acted upon, e. g. \n(Kj7rTou<rt TO, fxeruyira), kSttt ourai to jxerwira, which may mean, either <Aaf \nthey strike themselves on the forehead, they strike their forehead, or they let their forehead \nhe struck, they are struck on the forehead ; Her. 7, 69. \'Apoi$ioi (eipas iiire^uar\' \nfi4u 1 i (TaVy Al^loires Sc irapSaXeas re /col Aeovreos iva/x fie Poi {the Arabians \nwere girt with the zeira, but the Ethiopians were clothed with leopard and lion-skins). \n\n2. Hence, when the verbs mentioned under \xc2\xa7 280, 1 and 3, which in the Act. \ngovern two accusatives, are changed into the Pass., the Ace. of the person or of \nthe object acted upon, is changed into the Nom., but the Ace. of the thing, or tha \nefl^ect remains, (a) Ovros fieyroi d eiraiuSs etm kclK6s, % v av vvv eiraivel vtt \n6.v5pwv a^ioov iria-revea^ai {this is honorable praise by which you are now praised), \nPI. Lach. 181,b. Tpav nana-^els TroWd {sc. rpavnara), {wounded with many \nivou7ids), Th. 4, 12. "Ovofia rh /xeu irpurov ZdyKKt] ^v inrh twv St/ceAwv K\\ri- \n^e\'iaa (^ 2t/c\xe2\x82\xacA./o), 6, 4 {ivas called by its flrst name). \'H Kpicris, ^v eKpi^ii \n{to which he was condemned), Lys. Agor. 134, 50. To /xeyiffra rt/t tj&tjvoi, \nS. O. R. 1203. Aea-nhv Svse^T^uvffTov eXKerai Se^eis, Eur. Hipp. 1237. \nSo u(p\xe2\x82\xac\\e7a^ai, (riixiova^ai fxeydXa, fiKdirrea-^ai ttoAAcC. \xe2\x80\x94 (b) MouCt/c^/J\' inrh \nAdfiTrpov iraiS ev^els, pT)T op ikt]V Se utt\' AvTKpwyros {having been educated \nin music and rhetoric), PI. Menex. 236, a; so SLSax^Vvairex^\'n\'\' ^^ t^\'"\'* \n{to be taught an art by someone); ipQ>Tr]drjvai r^v yv^in]v inr6 twos {to be \nasked an opinion). Trj /col oiKriaeis to outo fJ-epr] B layefirj^-fiTu {be di- \nvided into the same parts), PL L. 737, e. \'Tirh fiacriKeas ireirp ay p-evos tovs \n<f>6povs {having demanded the tribute), Th. 8, 5. \'A<^oi/76,^7Jj\'at, oTroo-Teprj- \n^rjvai T^y oLyX^y inr6 riuos. Kpv^^rjyai r i {celari aliquid). Ileia-^rjyai \nT^v ayaxu>pv<riy{^ 278, 4). \'AfKpieyyvaStai xiroiya occurs only with the mean- \ning to put a garment on one\'s self but not//e< myself be clothed by another, the garment \nwas put on me by another; but iySvSnjyai x^\'rc^ya {to be clothed with a tunic) is in use. \n\n3 As the Greek may form a personal Pass. (\xc2\xa7251, 4), of every intransitive \nverb; whicD has its object in the Gen. or Dat., e. g. o/ie\\oGjuoi, ^neX-^^Vy (pSfov \n\n\n\n408 SYNTAX. [H 282, 283. \n\novfjLai, icp^Qvfi^v ; so may it also with such transitive verbs as have, together \nwith the Ace. of the thing, a Dat. of the person, the Dat. of the person being \nchanged into the Nom., but the Ace. of the thing remaining. Th. 1. 1, 26. oi \nTwv ^A^rfvaiwv iv it er pafieyoi rrjv <pv\\aK-fiv {quibus custodia demandaia \nerat, those of the Athenians who had been entrxisted with the guard, from iirirpeirco tivX \nT^u (pyKuK-f^u). 5, 37. ol Kopiv^ioi ravra irre <rra\\fie yot aytx^povy \n(having been commanded these things) ; 1, 140. fi ^vyxiop\'fi<rcr\xe2\x82\xacy koI &\\\\o ti fiel- \n^ov evSrvs iirtrax^\'fio\'^o-^^ (you v)ill be commanded something greater). X. \nAn. 2. 6, 1. 01 crrparriyol avoTfi7i^4yres rcfcy /ce^aAcbs ireXevrriffav. \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 282. (3) Dative. \n\n1. The Dat. is the WTiere-case, and hence denotes : (a) in a \nlocal relation, the place at or in which the action of the subject \noccurs; \xe2\x80\x94 (b) in a causal relation, the object upon which the \naction of the subject shows itself or becomes visible \xe2\x80\x94 the ob- \nject which shares in or is concerned in an action. \xe2\x80\x94 This object \nis : (a) a person, or a tiling considered as a person, e. g. fiorjSC} \nTOLs TToAtrats or TTJ TTo\'Xei; (13) a thing, or an object considered as \na thing, e. g. dyaXkofjiaL ry vlktj. In this way the Dat. may be \ntreated under three divisions. In the first, the Dat. is regarded \nas a local object, in the second, as a personal object; in the \nthird, the object is a thing, and is called the Dat. of the thing or \ninstrumental Dat. \n\n\xc2\xa7283. A. Local Dative. \n\n1. The Dat., as a local object, designates the place in {by, \nnear, at) ivhich an action occurs. This use of the Dat. is al- \nmost exclusively poetical ; in prose, prepositions are commonly \njoined with the Dative. \n\nII. I, 663. ahrap \'Ax\'^Aeir eSSe fivxv K\\i(Tir]s finrr^icrov (slept tn the comer oj" \nthe tent), it, 595. \'EWaSt ot/cio vaiwu (dwelling in houses in Helios), fi, 210. \nKvfia TToXvcpXoiff^oio baXa(T<n]s alyiaX^ fxeyaKw fipefifrau (roars upon the \nshore). S. Trach. 171. (ecprj) t^v TraXaiau (prjyhv avSrjaad irore A ocSwyi (that t?ie \nbeech tree once uttered an oracle at Dodona). Here belong the Locative forms very \ncommon in prose, viz., Mapo^wvi, \'EXeuo-Tvi, Xlu^o?, \'lo-i^/io?, oXkoi, \'A^kjjo-i, \nITAaTatSo-i, etc. (at Marathon, etc.) ; also, ravrri, rpSe, here, ^, where. So also, \nOd. 0, 227. Hv\\loi(T I /ae\'y e^oxa Swfiara vosiuv. \n\n2. Hence the Dat. is used also with the attributive pronoun \nauT0 9, to express the idea of together wUJi. \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 284.J DATIVE CASE. 409 \n\nHer. 6, 32. ras ir6\\ias iveTri/jLirpaarau avT oTor i rola i ipotffi {they burned \nthe cities together with the temples \xe2\x80\x94 cities, temples and all). X. H. 6. 2, 3.5. ai \nkirh \'S.vpaKovaSiV vfjes airaaat kaKuaau avrots avZpdff iv (the ships were taken \ntogether with the men). \n\n3. The local relation is transferred to the time in which some- \nthing happens, and then from the time to the circumstances \nunder which something happens. Hence the Dat. denotes the \ntime (definite) and circumstances of an action. \n\nIn prose with vufpa, vvkt\'i, ixrfvl, eret, eVtauroJ, wpa and the like, in connection \nwith attributive demonstratives, ordinals, and adjectives, as irpSrepos, va-Teposy \n4vi(i)y, -KaptX^uv and tlic like. The Dat, therefore usually expresses definite \ntime. TpSt t^ i/vktI, ravrri tt} T](ji4pa, iKcivri rp rj/xepa, rtj avr^ \nyvKri, TToWoTs tncri, Tpirco /jltju\'l, rij avrfj &pa, toJ iiri6uTi eret, \niKfivui TCfJ erej, ry varcpu erei, rovrtfi r (f iviavro}, etc. X. An. \ni. 8, 1, rfj irpcuTT] r] fie pa a(p\'t.KovTo iwl rhi/ iroTa/iJi/ (the first day or on the first \nday). Also S>pa x*\'M\'i\'*\'os (\'" time of winter), i/ovfirjuia {at the time of new moon) ; \nlikewise, Uava^vaiois, AioyvaioiSt rpaywSoTs Kaiyois, at the time of the Panathenaea, \netc. The preposition iu is joined with the Dat.: (a) when the substantive \nstands without an attributive, e. g. iv rifiepa, eV vvktI, eV ^(pei : often also when \na demonstrative stands with it, e. g. eV toutw t^ iviavrcf ; (b) usually, when a \nBpace of time is to be indicated ; hence with substantives in connection with \ncardinals and the adjectives 6\\iyos, fipax^s, fxiKpSs, iroA-uy, etc, e. g. Sirjyayov \niv rpiaXv rjfxfpais (in three days, in the space of three days), Ji.. An. 4. 8, S \nOd, I, 253. hrKfOfify Boperj ai/ffjLw aKpaei K0A.9J (with a good ivind). II. a, \n418. T<f ae KaKf} atar) TtKov iv fieydpoKTiu (under an evil destiny). Her. 6, 139. \nfireau fiof4ri avefitp aimj/jifphv yr^vs i^at/vffr] 4k rr}S v/JLerepTjs 4s r^v rjfiereprjv, \nr6Tf irapaiuaonfu (when a ship shall come with a north wind). \n\n\n\n^ 284. B. The Dative as a Personal Object. \n\n1. Both the Dat. of the person and of the thing denote an \nobject, upon or in which the action of the snbject shows itself \nor becomes visible ; both denote an object which participates \nin, or is concerned in, the action of the subject; accordingly, \nthe language regards the Dat. of the person and of the thing \nas the same. The distinction is merely this, that the former is \na persmial object, or is considered as such, and consequently \nhas the power of will ; the latter is a mere thing, or is consid- \nered as such, and of course without will. As the idea denoted \nby the term where, is intermediate to that denoted by ivhence \nand whifJier, so the Dat. (the Where-case), when it is a person, \n\n35 \n\n\n\n410 SYNTAX. [$284 \n\nstands in contrast with the Ace. {the Whither -case) ; when it \nis a thing, in contrast with the Gen. {the Whence-case). \n\n2. The Ace. denotes an object effected, accomplished by the \naction of the subject, or the object acted upon; the Dat. of the \nperson, on the contrary, denotes an object merely aimed at by \nthe action of the subject and sliaring in it; the action of the \nsubject is indeed employed on the object and becomes mani- \nfest in it, yet it does not make it a passive object, but the ob- \nject itself appears in distinction from the subject as active ; \nbetween the subject and the object a reciprocal action takes \nplace. The Gen. denotes the immediate cause ; the Dat. of the \nthing, on the contrary, a mediate, indirect cause (the ground, \nthe means, the instrument) ; the Gen. denotes an object as \ncalling forth and producing the action of the subject; the Dat \nof the thing, only such an object as exhibits in or upon itself \nthe action of the subject. \n\nRemark 1. In poetry a local limit or oft/\xc2\xabrf is very often considered as a \nperson, and is indicated by the Dat. ; this sometimes occurs, though but seldom, \nin prose. II. o, 369. TrSo-t hfiO\\<Ti.v Xf*P<\xc2\xbbs avro-xojo-cs {raisiny up the hands to \nall tlie gods). So aXp^a^ai, iiraip^ffbai, Sopv rivi. II. e, 709. Xlfiyp K(K\\iti4- \nyos Kr}<pi<ri5i {dwelling at the Cephisian lake), tj, 218. irpoKdKicraaTo x^Pt*-V (^ \nchallenged to the contest). Th. 1, 13. \'A/xciyoKA^s 2o/xf ois ijX^fv. 3,5. avrois \nMe\\eas ha.Ku>v acpiKvelrou. \n\nRem. 2. From this use of the Dat., the fact may be explained, why many \nverbs of motion compounded with the prepositions els, rp6s, M, etc, take \ntheir object in the Dat. ; also why most adverbs with the Dat. (or Locative) in- \nflection [\xc2\xa7 101, 2. (b)], may express both the relation of rest (local Dat.) and \nthe direction whither (personal Dat.), e. g. x\xc2\xb0-f^\xc2\xb0^y humi, humum; so, likewise, the \nadverbs in -n, e. g. &\\\\t} those in -a>, e. g. &vu, koltw, etc. ; those in -o *, e. g. \nTreSot, humi, humum ; iyrav^oi, hue and hie (but ol, 5irot, to?, always denote the \ndirection whither). \n\n3. Most verbs, wliich take the personal Dat., as the object \nsharing or participating in the action, express the idea of associa- \ntion and union, e. g. StSovat, Trap\xe2\x82\xac)(\xe2\x82\xaciv, vTrur^^vcur^tu, opTTci^ctv r\xc2\xbb Ttvi. \nThe following classes of words, therefore, govern the Dative : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(1) Verbs expressing mutual iyitercourse, associating wiOi, mix- \ni7ig with, participation. \xe2\x80\x94 Dative of communion, e. g. o/xtXcrr, \nutyviVai, fxCywaSai, kolvovv, KOLvovaSaXy Koivoivctv, 8t-, KaraAAciTTCO\' \n(to reconcile), 8t-, KaToXXarrccr^ai (to reconcile one\'s self to), ^cvov- \n(T^aiy cnrivSea^aL or (rrrovBas Trotetcr^at, irpamiv (agere CUm oliquo)\', \n\xe2\x82\xaci7r\xe2\x82\xactv, Acyetv, SioAeyccr^ai, vo)(\xe2\x82\xacaBaiy KaTopaaSai, etc. ; also adjec- \ntives and adverbs, sometimes even substantives which express \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 284.] DATIVE CASE. \n\n\n\n411 \n\n\n\na similar idea, e. g. koivo^, (rvWpo<^os, avfJLcfioivos, <rvyya/^s, /Acramos; \n.many other words of a similar signification, compounded with \navv and /xcra, also with cv, Trpos, and Trapd. \n\n\'Onl\\fi ro7s aya&o7s av^pdvois (associate with good men). Her. 3 \n131. 6 Ae/xoicf}Sris noXvKpdrd ufiiXtiaf. 6,21. WAicy aZrai nd\\i<rTa aX- \nX^XT7<rt i^\xe2\x82\xaciyu^r}(ray (cultivated hospitality u^\'th each other). \xe2\x80\x94 EUxofiai \nToTs ^eo7s (I pray to the gods). X.H.2.2, 19. (rire;/5eo-,&o \xc2\xab \'AS^v^aiois (to \nmakeatreaty with the Athenians). 3.2,20. aW-fiXois trirovSas ivoiriaav- \nTO (they made treaties with each other). Isocr. Paneg. 42. 9. oi irpa^^is aiirpoye- \nyftnjfieucu Koiyal ir aaiv vix7y Kar(\\(i<t>^ffav (common to us all). On the \nGen. with Koiy6s, see ^ 273, 3, (b). \n\n(2) Verbs of contending, litigating, vying with, e. g. cpt^eiv, \nudxi(T^cu, TToXc/xeti\', ayuiVL^icrSaL (usually Trpos riva), 8tKa^\xe2\x82\xaco-^ai, ap,- \n<f>isPrjT(iVf crraaui^iLv, etc. ; also of going against, encountering \nmeeting and approaching, and the contrary, as those of yield- \ning y e. g. vwodrrivai and v^toroo-^ai ; dLiravraVy {rrravrav, vTravria^civ, \nTrXTyo-to^civ, TrtXA^eLV, iyyt^tLV, etc. ; cucctv, vTrctKctv, ;(w/)\xc2\xa3rj/, Trapa^oipiiv, \netc. ; the adjectives and adverbs -n-X-qaCos, cmn-tos, 7reA.as, etc. \n(seldom cT^yvs). \n\nOfEKXriyfs aySpdus to7s Utpffais i fxaxfo\'ayr o (fought hravdy with ilie \nPersians). Mij \xc2\xabfic\xe2\x82\xacTc toTj xoKefilois (do not yidd to the enemy). Xp^ \nTo7s ix^po7s rris TjfMfTfpas (x(*>p<\'-s) ir apax<\xc2\xbbpT)0^o-h Isocr. Archid. 118, 13. On \nthe Gen., see \xc2\xa7 271,2. "ttroarrivai avro7s (Hipaais) \'A^ycuoi roXfi-fj- \n(rayreSf ^yimjeray alrrovs (having dared to encounter them), X. An. 3. 2,11. \'T^/a- \nratrbai lvfi<popa7sy Th. 2, 61. "Ofioioy dfioicp act 7reAa^\xe2\x82\xac{ (like always \ndraws to like), VI. Symp. 195, b. \'l^ovro ayr loi ro7<ri AaKtSai/xoyloiai (encamped \nop}x>site the Lacedaemonians), Her. 6, 77. Tvpavvos &iras ix^P^^ iKev^epiq, koH \ny 6 not 5 iy ayrlos. On the Gen., see \xc2\xa7 273, Rem. 9. \n\n(3) Verbs of commanding, eyttreating, counselling, inciting, en- \ncouraging ; oi following, accompanying, serving, obeying and diso- \nbeying, trusting and distrusting, e. g. Trpo^raTrciv, hriTdmiv, izapai- \nmv, TrapttKcXcvco-^at, etc. (but KcXcv\'ctv with Acc. and Inf ) ; eTreo-^at, \naKoXov^ctv, 8taSc;j(co-^ai {to succeed to, take the place of) ; ireCSea-- \n^ai; xmaKOviWy dTTtLB^ivy Tricrreveiv, 7r\xe2\x82\xac7rot5evat, etc.; the adjectives \nand adverbs dxoXov^os, (IkoXov^ws, tTro/xcvo)?, StaSo;(OS, e^S, e<f}\xe2\x82\xac^<s. \n\nX. Cy. 8. 6, 13. TouTwv ay (instead of t) yvy v(x7v irapaKeXeiofiai ovdey \nro7s BovXoLS irposrdrrw (I enjoin upon the slaves none of these things which \nI now command you). Her. 3, 88. \'Apd^ioi ovSa/ia Kar-fjKovtray iir\\ SovXoavyi^ \nTlepario-i (never obeyed, were never subject to the Persians). 6,14. ivavfidxeou \niyVKovariitrayTfs rotffi <rTpaT\'nyo7(ri (they fought in disobedience to their \n\n\n\n! . % i\' \n\n\n\n^ \n\n\n\n412 SYNTAX. [* 284 \n\ncommanders). X. Cy. 1. 1, 2. ras aye\\as raxnas iSoKovney 6pay fiaXXov 4^f?ij)6ffai \nirfi^nr^ai rots vofi^va iv, ^ rovs av^pciirovs ro7s &pxovffi (more willing \nto obey their shepherds, than men their rulers). 8. 6, 18. r^ Tjfifpty^ ayytKiv \n((l>cur\\) rhv vvKTipivhv StoSe\'xfO\'i^a\' [that the night messenger succeeds the one for \nthe day). PI. Rp. 400, d. elXoyia 6,pa kcu evapfiotrTia koI fvffX\'nyMavvTi koL ivpv\'d- \n{Lia fvr}^\xe2\x82\xacl(f aKo\\ov^\xe2\x82\xac7. Eur. Andr. 803. Kcuchu KaK<p hiahoxof. PI. \nPhaed. 100, c. <rK6irei 5r) to ef^r ^Keiyois [consider the things next in order \nto those). \n\n(4) Expressions of similarity and dissimilarity, of likeness \nand unlikeness, of agreement and disagreement, e. g. ioucevoj^ \nofXOLovv, oixoLovcrS^aL, 6imolo<s, 6/xotw9, tcro9, tcr(u?, \xe2\x82\xacfx<f>\xe2\x82\xacpT^ and 7rpos<^\xe2\x82\xacp\xc2\xbb^ \n(jdmilar), -jrapaTrXrjcrLO\'i, TrapaTrXrycruus, 6 avros (idem), afxa] Bui<f>opo^ \n(discordant, hostile), hiOL^xuvo^; and very many words compounded \n\nwith 6fX.0V, (TVV, fXeTOL, e. g. 6flOVO\xe2\x82\xacLV, 6/XOyA.Ci/JTOS, OfKsiWfUi^f <TVfX.<fHl)V\xe2\x82\xacLVf \n\ncr6fJi<fKi)vo<s, trwwSos. \n\nHer. 1, 123. ray \xe2\x96\xa0n-cLd-oi t^s Kupov rija-i cuvtov Sfioiov/ifyos {likening, com- \nparing the sufferings of Cyrus with his own). 6, 23. 6 \'Prtylov rvpayyos Sid(popos \n(^v) To7<Ti ZayK\\aioi(Ti {was hostile to the Zancleans). X. Cy. 7. 1,2. inr- \nXifffiivoi irdyres ?iaav oi irepi rhu Kvpoy toTj aitrols t <f Kvptp SrKois {were \nfurnished with the same arms as Cyrus). 5. 1,4. Sfioiay ra7s SovKais cT^* \nr^y i<rb^ra {Tldy^eia). 7. 5, 65. 6 fflSijpos ayiaol tovs off^fyels rois icx^\' \npo7s iy rep TroXf/jLO) {makes the weak equal to the strong). Isocr. Paneg. 43, 13 \nXot^fJroy iariv taovs tovs \\6yovs r^ iJ.fy4^\xe2\x82\xaci rwy tpyuy i^^vpuv. Th. 1, 49. \ni) yavfjiax^o- ir f^o fiaxi\'\'i \'"\' P o a <(> f p r} s (^v). \n\nHem. 3. On the Comparatio compendiaria with expressions of likeness and \nsimilarity, see \xc2\xa7 323, Rem. 6. On the Gen. with iyyvs, \xe2\x96\xa0wKi)alov, \\ 273, Rem. 9. \nThe coordinate copulative particle Kai, is not seldom employed with adjectives \nof likeness and similarity instead of the Dative. Her. 1, 94. AuSol y6ixouri flip \nirapaTr\\Ti(rloi<ri x/\'^\'*"\'\'\'"** f<*^ "EAATjves { = \'\'E\\Xr}<Tt or tois \'EW-fjytDy). the \nLydians and Greeks have similar laws, instead of (he Lydiuns have laws similar to \nthe Greeks. So 4y Iftroj, fcra, d/xolois, usavrws, Kara rainh Koi, etc. PI. Ion. 500, \nd. ovx i> 1X0 1 us TrfiroiT)Ka(Ti Kal "Ofirjpos. Comj>. similis ac, atque. There also \noccur, particularly in Attic prose, the particles of comparison, air, S>sir(p with \nXffos, 6 outJs. Dem. Phil. 3. 119, 33. rhy avrhy rp6Troy, Ststrtp, k. t. X. \n\n(5) Expressions signifying to be becoming, suitable, fitting, \nto please, and the contrary, e. g. irpemLVy op/xdrrciv, Trpo^Kiw (with \nan Inf. following), tt/dcttoktw?, dTrpcTroi?, cuco\'s ccrnv, cucotcds, apiorKicr \n(avBav\xe2\x82\xacLV Ion.). \n\nPL Apol. 36, d. tI oZv xpeirei avSp\\ ircyrjri; {what then is becoming a poor \nmanf). Her. 6, 129. eccvr^ apea-rus opx^ero {he danced pleasing himself ), \nX. Cy. 3. 3, 39. ap 4<r kc ly vfxTy Treipwyrai {they endeavor to please you). \n\nf \n\n(6) Verbs signifying to agree with, to assent to, to reproach, to \' \nbe angry, to envy, e. g. ofiokoyelv, etc. ; ju-jyxc^eo-^ai (to reproach , \n\nf \n\n\n\ni \n\n\n\nI \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 284.] DATIVE CASE. \n\n\n\n413 \n\n\n\nfi\xe2\x82\xacfi(f>\xe2\x82\xac(rS(u TLva means to blame), XoiSopiiaSai (to reproach), cttiti- \nfiav, eyKoXeiv (tlvl tl), CTriKoAerv (tlvl rt), eVtTrXifrretv, oveiSi^ctv, cvoxXeiv \n(more seldom with the Ace), etc. ; SvfxodaSai, jSpifxovaSaiy xoXe- \nTToiveLVy etc.; <f>%v\xe2\x82\xaci:v (tlvl tivos, ^ 274, 1, more seldom nvt tl), \nPaxTKaLV\xe2\x82\xacLv (to envy ; f^aaKaivuv rtvo, to slander). The Ace. of \nthe thing very often stands with the Dat. of the person. \n\nHer. 3, 142. iyit t^ (= h) r^viKas 4iriir\\-f)<r(ru, avrhs Karh Uva^uv oh \niroiiaw [what I rebuke in my neighbor I will not do myself). Th. 4, 61. oh to7s \n&pX(ty fiovXofieyois fiffi<pofiai,a?0^aTo7s inroKoveiv kT o ifxor 4po is ov<riv \n{I do not rejJToach those wishing to rule, but, etc.). Dem. 01. 2. 30, 5. i^vdx^fi \nfifilv 6 ^iKnnros (gave trouble to us). X. An. 2. 5, 13. Alyimriovs, oTs nakiara \nvjiiMS vvv yifutTKu TfbvfiCDfifyovs, Ko\\dar\xe2\x82\xaca^e {with whom I know you are angry). \nCy. 1. 4, 9. 6 df7os ahrt^ 4\\oidope7ro, tV bpaavT-qra 6pwv [reproached him). \n4. 5, 9. Kva^ipr]s i^pi/xovT o Ty Kvp^p koI to7s MtjSojj t^J KaTa\\nr6vra5 \nahrhy tpriixov o\'(x^adai (was wroth with Cyrus, etc.). \n\n(7) Verbs of helping, averting, and being lu^eful, e. g. dpTjyav, \n\naL\\LVVf.LV, oAt\'^CtV, TLfiUtpiLV, l3o7}3\xe2\x82\xacLV, iTTLKOVpfXV, aTToKoryiLCr^aL, \\v(TLTt\' \n\nkilv, iTrapKilv, )(paL(TfX\xe2\x82\xacLV and the Uke (but ovtvavat and ox^cActv \nwith Ace. i 279, 1.) ; also several verbs compounded with \n<rvv, e. g. (rvp.<f>\xe2\x82\xacp\xe2\x82\xacLV (^conduce re), crvfXTrpamLv, awepyelv, etc., and \nmany adjectives of the same and similar significations, and \nthe contrary, e. g. ^(pi^orifxo^, ySXa/Jcpo? (but pkaimLv with Ace. \n{ 279, 1.), <^lXo^, i\\Bp6<;, TToXip.LO\'s, etc. \n\nX. K. L. 4, 5. kpi\\^ovai rfj iroKei iraml ff^tvet (they assist the city with all \ntheir strength). Cy. 3. 3, 67. (au yvvouKfs) iKerevovtri iravras fi^ (pevyew KaTa\\nr6v \nTar, a\\A* apivvai koL auToTs, koX tckvois, koI <r<pl<riv auToIs (to de- \nfend them, their children and themselves). 4.3,2. tovtois yap <paaiv aydyKTju \nfhai irpo^nus aKt^fiy (they say it is necessary to defend these). Eur. Or. 922. \n(\'Opto-TTjj) ifdfKrja\'e t ifiwpc7y iraTpi, KOK^y yvyauKa K&beou KaraKravuv \n(wished to help his father). PI. Ap. 28, c. el t ifxcaprja e is UaTp6KXcf> t$ \n(Taipei) Thy <p6yoy (if yon shall avenge the murder of your friend Patroclus, i. e. \nif you shall avenge for him). \n\nKem. 4. The words tpiXos, ix^P^^f iroAcVtoy are also nsed as sub- \nstantives, and povem the Gen. X. An. 3. 2, 5. tovs iKelyov e\'x\'^^to\'Touj \n(his bitterest enemies). Hence the Dative stands, in general, with verbs and ad- j \niectives of all kinds, when the action takes place for the advantage, favor, honor, f \nharm, disadvantage of a person, or an object considered as a person (Dativus \ncommodi et incommodi), where the English uses the prepositions to or for. Here \nbelong particularly the rites performed in honor of a divinity, e. g. 6pxe7<rSKx.i \nTo7s ^eo7s (to dance\' in honor of the gods) ; aT((payov(r^ai ^fcS (to crown one\'s self in \nhonor of the gods). Her. 6, 138. \'ApTCfiiSi Spr^y Hyfiv (to keep a feast in honor \nof Diana). The Dative with KKveiy (Poet., especially Epic), is also to be re* \ngarded in the same way : k\\v^I fioi, listen to me favorably. Here belongs, also, \n\n35* \n\n\n\n1 \n\n\n\n414 SYNTAX. [\xc2\xa7 284. \n\nthe phrase, mostly poetic, Sexea-^ai n rivl, to receive something from some one^ \nsince it involves the additional idea that the reception of the thing will be re- \ngarded as a relief, as agreeable, etc. to the person. Od. tt, 40. &s ipa <p<atr{}(ras o I \nISe^aro x<^^it^ov (yx^s {received from him [as a favor to him] the brazen spear). \nSee Larger Graram. Part. II. \xc2\xa7 597, Rem. 3. \n\n(8) Verbs of observing, finding, meeting with something in a \nperson. \n\n"Tir o?.afiPdv\xe2\x82\xaciu Se^ r^ toiovt<j), Brt evrj^s ris 6,vbp<DTros (sciL ccrrfv), PL \nRp. 598. d. \'\'ETe/)a S\'ij, a>s coi\xc2\xabe, ro7s ^vXa^iv evpi) Kafify^ 421, e. Qaip<rovirt \nliA,\\i(rra iroXcfiioi, \'6rap TOty ivavrio is irpdyfiaTa Kol a<rxoA.ios irvy^dvayrai \n{when they perceive troubles and hindrances in those opposed to them), X. Hipp. 5. 8. \n\n(9) The Dative stands with \xe2\x82\xac(ttC{v) and cio-t(v), to denote \nthe person, or tiling considered as a person, tJiat Jias or possesses \nsomething. The thing possessed stands as the subject in the \nNom., but the verb is translated by the EngUsh have, etc., and \nthe Dat. as the Nom. So also Avith ytyveaSou and vTrdpxtiv (to \nbe, exist), also with iSios and oAAorpios. \n\nKvpw ^v fxcyaK-q $a<ri\\cla ( Ct/rus had a great kingdom ). \xe2\x80\x94 To?r ir\\ov<rlois \niroWd vapafxvbid (paaiu eJyai, PI. Rp. 329, e. "^Hffav Kpoitr^ 5uo toTScs, \nHer. 1, 44. When the above verbs are connected with a predicative abstract \nsubstantive, they may be translated to prove, to serve. Xaipi<pwy 4fiol (rifiia \nfxaWoy, ^ uxpeKe id iariu, X. C. 2. 3, 6. (Ch. mihi detrimento potius est, quam ^ \nemolumento, is an injury, proves an injury rather than a benefit). \n\nRem. 5. The possessive Dat., or the Dat. of the possessor, is to be distin- \nguished from the Gen. of the possessor (\xc2\xa7 273, 2). The Dative is used, wlun \nit is asked, what the possession is (what has one ?). and the possession dc-iu\'- \nnatcd is contrasted with other possessions, e. g. Kvpw ijy ncydXn $aai\\iia, \nCyrus had (amoug other things also) a great kingdom ; the Gen. is used, when it j \nis asked who the possessor is (whose is tliis 1), and the possessor is contrasted \nwith other possessors, e. g. K up ou itv nfydxrj ^curiKfia, to Cyrus {and not to \nanother) belonged a great kingdom. The Dative describes the person as one to - \nwhom the posso;?ion has been imparted, divided, given, and under whose con- \ntrol it now is ; the Genitive, as one who has gained possession, fhjm whom the \npossession has proceeded. \n\n(10) The Dat. is usod universally when an action takes place \nin reference to a person, or a thing considered as a person, so that \nthe person in some way shares or participates in it. Here be- \nlong the following instances : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) In certain formulas, the Dative designates the person to whose judgment, \nconsider-ation, or estimate, an idea is referred, and thus it first gains a dctinitc \nauthority or value ; i. e. the assertion is made in view of the judgment, etc. of \nthe person to whom the matter had been submitted. This Dat, therefore show* \nvhen and under ivhat circumstances the assertion is true, e. g. Her. 1, 14. aXiydcT 14 \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 284.] \n\n\n\nDATIVE CASE. \n\n\n\n415 \n\n\n\nh6ryu xp^fot^-^vep ov KopivS^iuv tov Srjfioaiov i(rrlv 6 ^aavpds {recte aestimanti hit \nthesaurus non est Corinihiacus, in the judgment of one estimating the matter correctly, \nit is not the Corinthian treasury). Th. 2, 49. rh ^u^ey i tt t o ^ eV w awf^a oijK dyal \ndfpfihu iiv [the external pan of the body, when one touched it, in the view of one touching \nit, was not very hot). Here belong especially the Datives ds^dun, i^iSuri, auafidun, \nvwfpfidyri and the like, with local specifications. Her. 6, 33. anh \'luvlris airdKXa(T(r6- \nHeyos 6 vavriKhs (rrparhs ra iv apia-repk i sir\\eovT i tov \'EW-qsirSyrov alpee irdura \n{the naval force subjugated all parts of the Hellespont, upon the left as one soils into it, \nor with respect to one saiUng into it). X. Cy. 8. 6, 20. ( Kvpos) \\4y\xe2\x82\xacTai KaToffTp^xxxrSKu \nwdma tA e^io;, gao SupiW elsfiavri oIk^i ^ex/)i ipv^pas ^aXd(r<r-ns (which dwell as \none enters Syria [from the entrance of S.] to tlie Red Sea) Also the expression us \n<rvy\xe2\x82\xacK6wTt ciVerv, to speak briefly, to say in a word, properly to say it when one \nhas brought the whole together into a small compass, has comprehended the ivhole, e. g. \n"Avfv iLpx6yTwy ovi^y h,y ot/Tc Ka\\6y, oUre aya^hy yivoiro, ws (xey <rvve\\6yrt \ntliTfiy, oifSauQVy X. An. 3. 1, 38. \n\n(b) So also the Dat of the person often stands in connection with ws, in \norder to show that the thought which is expressed, is not a general one, but \nhas its value only according to the opinion of the person named. X. C. 4. 6, 4. \n6 riL wf pi roi/s dfovs yifiifia flSus op^us &v Vt^^*\' eixrefi^s wpiffiiiyos etri (nos- \ntra judicio, in our opinion). S. 0. C. 20. ficutphy ydp, us yfpoyri, irpovcrToK-qs \nSB6y (you went forward a great iray, for an old man, as an old man would vieiu it). \nAnt. 1161. Kpftty yap ^y ^if\\uT6s, us ifioi., irore (in my opinion). PI. Soph. \n226, C. raxfioy, &5 i fioi, VKf^iy iirndrrds. Her. 3, 88. ydfiovs tovs Tpcarovs \niydfxif Ilf p<r J) c I 6 Aapuos {matrimonia ex Persarum judicio nobilissima, con- \ntracted very konoraUe marriages, in the judgment of the Persiaiis). Altogether \nusual in the phrase i^i6s ft fit rty6s rtr., or even without the Gen., &^i6s \nft fit Tiyi (I am of value in the estimation of some one). X. C. 1. 2, 62. i/iol fiey \n8^ ^uKpdrris roiovTos tay ih6Kft ri/i^t &|io$ ilvcu rp \xe2\x96\xa0ir6K\xe2\x82\xaci fia?>.Xoy, fj Sfavdrou \n{rather merits honor than death, in the estimation, in the view of the city). PI. Symp. \n185, b. ovt6s 4<my b rr\\s Ovpavias beov (pus Kcd ovpdvios Kol iroWou &^ios Kcd \nw6Kfi Kcd tSiurais. \n\n(c) Here belongs the use of the Dat. of a person with $ov\\ofi4ya), ^So^evw, \nhryJytf, 4\\irofi(y<p, i^\'^j^fKw, Trposifx^ufvu and the like, in connection with \nverbs, most frequently with tJyan and yiyveirbai. Such a participle gives \ndefiniteness to an otherwise indefinite assertion. lAravrd <roi fiou\\ofi\xe2\x82\xacvu \niariy (if this is to you wishing it, if this is your wish). OwtJj /jloi rjSofieyu \naTHjmjarev (he met me to my joy). Her. 9, 16. T}5ofieyo ktiv Jifxty at \\6yoi ye- \nySyauri. Th. 6, 46. ry "Nik la irpo sBexopL^ yu ^y ra irepl ruv \'Eyea-raiuy \n[were as \\icias exfiected). PI. Rp. 358. d. oAA\' opOy et <r oi fiov Kofieyu (sc \n^errlt), S. Kfyu, whether what I say pleases you). \n\n(d) The Dat. of the personal pronouns, first atid second persons, is often \nused, not because they are really necessary for the general sense, but to show \nthat the statement is made in a familiar, humorous, and pleasant manner. This \nis called the Ethical Dat. (Dutivus ethicus). X. Cy. 1. 3, 2. opuy 5^ rhu Kifffiov \\ \nroD xdvTOVy iufiKevwM avr^, (l\\ey\xe2\x82\xacy (d Kdpos)\' \'\'n fiTJTep, ws koXos fioi 6 vdir \n\n\n\n416 SYNTAX. [^ 284. \n\niros (0 mother, how beautiful grandfather is, in mt eyes). 15. fjv Se/ic KaraKiirpr \nij/^dde, Ka\\ fj.d^a} iinreveiv, \'6Tav (ikv eV Hcpaais 8), olfiai a oi eKeifovs robs aya^obt \nra Tre^t/co paZioos viK-ficreiu (to gbatift YOU, / think I shall easily surpass those \nskilled in foot exercises). \n\n(11) The Dative often stands with the Perf. Pass, (rarely \nwith other tenses of the Pass.), to denote the active person or \nag(Mt. The Pass., in this case, expresses a state or condition, \nand the Dat. represents the author of this condition at the same \ntime as the person for whom this condition exists, while by vtto \nwith the Gen., the author merely is expressed. \n\nHer 6, 123. jis [xoi irp6T\xe2\x82\xacpou 5\xe2\x82\xac5-f]\\(ar ai {as has been before shown by me). \nDem. Aphob. 844, 1. Set SnqyTiffaa-^ai rh rovrq> ir eirpayfifva vepl rjuofv [it i\xc2\xbb \nnecessary to describe what has been done by him). 01. 1. 26, 27. ri ir firpuKr ai \nTo7s \'a Wo IS ; {what has been done by others ?). In this way a Perf. Act., which \nis wanting, may be supplied, e. g. ravrd fwi AtAe/crai {I have said this). \n\n(12) So also the active person or agent stands regularly in \nthe Dative with verbal adjectives in -t6<s and -tcos, [^234, 1, (i)], \nboth when they are used, like the Latin verbal in -dum, im- \npersonally in the Neut. Sing. : -t6v, -reov, or PI. -to, -rca (^ 24 1, \n3.), or when they are used personally, hke the Latin participle \nin -dus ; those derived from transitive verbs, i. e. such as govern \nthe Ace, admit both the Impers. and the Pers. construction ; \nbut those deri\'v sd from intransitive verbs, admit only the im- \npersonal. The impersonal verbal Adj., in addition to the Dat \nof the agent, governs the same Case as the verb from which \nit is derived. \n\nTh aTpdrevfia eiifir l^er ov ^v itrrav^a to7s tt oXffiio is {could be easily \nattacked by the enemy), ^. An. 3. 4,20. \'Ac/c^jTeoi/ (or -Tf\'a) iarl <roi tV \nap\xe2\x82\xacTT)v {you 7mist practise virtue or virtue must be practised by you). ^Eiri^vfiri\' \nt4ov iarl ro7s av^pwirois Trjs aperrjs {there 7nust be a desiring by m\xc2\xabi, men \n7nust desire virtue). \'E-rr ix^ ipvr^ oy ia-rl aoi toJ epyai {you must attempt the \nwork). *72/ui 5^ fioTi^vre ov elycu tojs irpdyixounv vfxlv {I say that you must \nrender assistance), Dem. 01. 1. 14, 17. KoAao-reov cotI <roi r\'bv iybponrop \n{you must punish the man). \'AcKTjrea itrri a-oi ^ af>m^. \'il^cXTjre\'o aoiri \n^7r6Kis cVtjV, X. C. 3. 6, 3. So the Deponents (\xc2\xa7 197), e. g. fiifxrireoy forly \nOfxTv Tovs aya^ovs (from fiifxela^ai Tiya) or /jiifn}reoi ciVlv T)fJi7y ol ayo^i \n{you must imitate the good). \n\nEem. 6. The verbal adjectives of those verbs whose middle form has a Pa5s. \nas well as a reflexive or intransitive sense, have, likewise, in the impersonal \nNeut. form with iarl, a two-fold signification ; and when an object is joined \nwith them, a two-fold construction, e. g.Tei(TT4oy iarhf fifuy aur6v {we must \n\n\n\n^ 285.] DATIVE CASE. 417 \n\nconvince htm) from ^.t^ccnud; and ir,i<rr4oy iarh if/Mu to7s y6f.oi5 [we must \nobey the^ laws, obiemperandum est a nobis legibus) from 7r,ibo,.ai tlvi, obtempero \nalicui ; aira\\\\aKTeoy icriv Jifuu avrhv rov kukov (we must rid him of the evil) \nfrom a7ra\\AorT\xe2\x82\xaciv Tiv^ rov KUKoi; &nd iiraWaKT 4 oy icrly i,fx7y rov ^y^pfirrol \n(we must get rid of the man) from a7raAAc{TTe(r.^at\' nyos (to get rid of something). \n\nRem. 7. Not unfrequently, however, the verbal adjectives in -re 65, among \nthe Attic wnters, take the active person or agent in the Ace. also, as these ver- \nbals have the force of the impersonal verb Se? with the Inf., e. g. PI. Gorg. \n507. d. rhy ^ovXoixevov fvSaifioya ehai (rw<ppo(TvVTfy SiuKreoy Kal a<TKri\'\' \nreoy (whoever wishes to be happy must seek and practise sobriety). Often, also, \nthe construction of verbal adjectives is changed into the Inf ; in this case the \nagent must necessarily stand in the Ace. X. C. 1. 5, 5. ifxol fiky So/ce?. . . c\'Aeu- \ntfpcfi aySpl fi/KThy eJyai f^rj rvx^^y Sov\\ov roiovrov Sov\\t^oyra Sc . . . \niKtT \xe2\x82\xacVfty robs deovs k. t. A. \n\ni 285. C. The Dative of the thing {Instrumental \n\nDative). \n\n1. The Dative of the thing expresses relations which in \nLatin are denoted by the Ablative. The relations expressed \nby this Dat. are : \n\n(1) The ground, reaso7i, or cause, e. g. (^oySw aTrrik^ov^ ivvou^ \nd^wcto, <^o/?a), vftpu TTouXv rt ; especially with verbs denoting the \nstate of the feelings, e. g. ;(atp\xe2\x82\xactv, ^Sccr^ai, dyaXAco^^at, cTraipco-- \n^at, XvTTfxcrSaiLy avuxcrSai, aXyelv, ck-, KaTa7rXi^TT\xe2\x82\xac(rSaL ; <^av/xd^eiv J \nikTrL^\xe2\x82\xaci.v ; arrepycw and dyaTraj\', opicrKia^aLy apKila^ai (all four : tO \nbe content, to he pleased with something); d-yavuKTctv, 8vs;)(cpatV\xe2\x82\xactj/, \n;(aA.r7ra>9, (icLpiuyi t^iptiVy a^Sia^cu ; alcr)(vvi(T^ai, etc. \n\nX. C. 1.3, 1. 01 btoX ra7s irapii ruv (vaififardrcey rifials fidXiffTa x\xc2\xab^f ow- \nir IV (are especially pleased with the honors from the 7nost devout). Her. 478. S lal\' \nT p oitia/xws i] p\xc2\xab <r K(T Hkv^ik\'p (ttus by no means pleased with the Scythian \nmode of life). Th. 4, 85. davfid^u r^ airoK\\el(rei fiov rwy itv\\S>v (1 am \nsurprised at the shutting of the gates against me). 3, 97. i\\iri^fiy r -p rvxv \n(to hope in fortune). Uripyw rols irapovaiy (I am content with the present \nthings). *Ayairii ro7s iiir dpxov<T ly aya^o7s. Xa\\eirws <p\xe2\x82\xaco<t> rois \nirapovffi irpdyfia<ri (I am troubled by the present state of affairs), X. An. 1.3, 3. \nhlffxvvofuu rols iTfirpayfifyois (lam ashamed 071 account of what has been done), \nC. 2. 1,31. PI. IIipp.maj.285. e. (Ik6tu)s aoi x<^^oov(Tiv ol AaKcSainSyioi, &t\xe2\x82\xac \niroKXa flS6ri. \'AydWofiai rfj ylKT). TIoWol ayavaKrovat r^ ^a- \nvdro). Avsxfpetift^ ro7s \\6yois. Dem. 01. 3. 13, 14. ay avfi a as ro7s \n\nircirpayfifyoisria\'vxlaycx\'hfft\' \'I trx "^ \xc2\xab*\xc2\xbb\'\'\'\xe2\x96\xa0\'\' \'^^ \'\'"\'^ /**""\'> -^^ ^*^* \'^\' ^* \nalso witli adjectives, e. g. Icx^p^s x^pc^^y rax^s iroaiv, etc. \n\nRemark 1. The preposition i-nl, on account of at, is very often joined with \nthe Dat. ; thus commonly, xcl^c^ws (ptpnv iiri rm, ^at^udCeiv eVt rivi ; Svsx^- \npaiyv usually with the\' Ace, \xc2\xa7 279, 5; we also find ayairu, arepyw, fia^ews, \nXoAci (Us <p4pt\xc2\xbb Ti. \n\n\n\n418 SYNTAX. [^285 \n\n(2) The means and instrument, by which an action is accom- \nplished. Hence the Dat. also stands with xp^o-"^at (uti) and \nits compounds, and with voixl^eiv (to be accicstom^d to). \n\n\'BdWeiy Kl^ois {to throw with stones = to throw stones). ^AjcoyriCeiv aixMaTx \n(to hurl with spears = to hurl spears). X. Cy. 4. 3, 21. 6 fifv Inroiceyravpos \nSvoTv d<})^a\\fio7v irpoeupaTo Kcd Svoty Utroiv fJKovev iyw Se r irrapffi \n(ifv 6<t>^a\\fio7s TeKfxapovixai, r \xe2\x82\xacTt apffi 5\xc2\xab wa\\ irpoa.i<T^<TOfiai\' iroAAi \n\xe2\x80\xa2yip (paai Kol \'lirirov av^pdnrois to7s 6<pd a\\no7s vpoopuvra SriKovv, iroAAa 84 \nro7s uxtI irpooucovovra (n)ixaivfiv {the centaur saw with two eyes, and heard with \ntwo ears; but I shall see with four eyes, etc.). 18. Trpoyof7v /icV 7* c|\xc2\xab irdyra \nri] ay^poiirlvT) yv<i>fir], Ta7s Se x^P^^\'^ Sir\\o<pop^(ru), Siw^ofiai 5e ra Tir- \nircu, rhu 5* ivavriov h-varpiy^w rfj rod Tttttou Pwfxrj. X. C. 4. 2, 9. cu rtir \n<ro<p(i>v &,vSpwv yyufiai kptr^ nKovri^ovai tous Ke/cTTj^teVouj {enrich with virtue \nthose who possess them). Her. 3, 117. oZroi 2iy, olvep tfi-K^poabty iwh^rav \nXpaff^ai rif vSarj, ovk ?x<\'*\'T\xe2\x82\xacS avrif XP"<^\'^**\'> <rvix<pop^ fityiXri hi\' \naxp^^vrai {those who before were accustomed to use the water ^ not being able to \nuse it, experienced a great inconvenience). Dem. Cor. 277, 150. Keyp irpo<pdafi \nrair\'p KaTaxp<^- ^^^ fcar axp^ c^\'^at and Staxpvo\'^\xc2\xbbi in the sense of \nconsumere, to kill, as transitive, govern the Ace. Comp. Her. 6, 135 5 Antiph. 1. \n113, 23. With XP\'?*\'"\'^"* 3, a^ond Dat. often stands, by means of attraction, \nor \xe2\x82\xacjs with the Ace. or the Ace. of a pronoun or neuter adjective (\xc2\xa7 278, 4), \nto express the design or purpose, e. g. xp*/***^ \'^"t iri<rT<p <pi\\oa, as in the \nLat. utor te Jido amico, I have thee for a true friend). X An. 1. 4, 15. vfiip \niriffTOT drois x P "h <^ ^ "f" <\'^ f^ f\xc2\xabi <\'^ <f>povpia Kal (Is Xoxoy^a* {u-ill employ \nyou as the most faithful both for guards and commanders). Her. 4, 117. <p\xc2\xabey^ ol \nTiavpofiiTat yopii^ovffi \'SKv^iicp {are accustomed to use the Scythian language). \nTh. 2, 38. d7al<ri koI ^vfflais Sitrriffiois v ofii^ovff i. \n\nKem. 2. The Dat. is very often used without <r{)v in military expressions, \nwith reference to a retinue or force, in order to represent this as the means bv \nwhich something takes place ; this usage is found particularly with verbs of \ngoing and coming. Such Datives are arpar^, <rr6\\tf, -wKiibtiy yamTi{w)^ Tinroij, \naTpariwTais, etc. (In Latin the Abl. without cum., as magno exercitu venire, to \ncome with a large army). Her. 5, 99. ol \'A^vaioi airiKfaro cffcocri yriverl {came \nwith twenty ships). Th. 1, 102. \'A^ycuoi fjK^oy v\\r}^\xe2\x82\xaci ovk dKlytf {with not \na small nianber). 4. 39. ol lie Kovoyvrjir 10 1 a.vix^P^<^\xc2\xb0^ "^ V fTpoTqU in t^s TlvKov. \nX. Cy. 1. 4, 17. avrhs to7s Ttttois irposfXdaas trphs to ruy M-qhwy <ppoupia KatT4- \nfifiy^y {having rode up with the cavalry). An. 7. 6, 29. ^ap^a\\(vs r}fuy i^ti-rorr* \n\n01 VoKefJLlOl Koi IVKIK^ KoX IT 6 A T aCT T ( K ^. \n\n(3) The following relations also maybe considered as the \nm,eans, and are expressed by the Dat. : (a) the material of \nwhich (= toith which) anytliing is made ; \xe2\x80\x94 (b) the rule or \nstandard, accorditig to which anytliing is measured, judged of, \nor done; hence the Dat. stands particularly with verbs of \nmeasuring^ judging ^ inferring, e. g. aradpMjcr^ai, yiyvoio-Kcu\', cuca- \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 285.] DATIVE Ci.SE. \n\n\n\n419 \n\n\n\niew, Kpiv\xe2\x82\xacivy TCKpxt|Oco-^at ; also in general, to express a more deji \nnite limitcUion, to denote in what respect a word is to be taken \xe2\x80\xa2 \nthus, for example, with verbs signifying to be distinguished, to \nexcel, to be strong and powerful, and the contrary ; also with very \nmany adjectives (instead of the Ace. of more definite limita- \ntion, k 279, 7); \xe2\x80\x94 (c) the measure, by, according to which an \naction is defined or limited, especially wnth comparatives and \nsuperlatives, as well as with other expressions, which include \nthe idea of comparison, in order to denote the degree of \ndifference between the objects compared; \xe2\x80\x94 finally, (d) the \nway and manner in which anything is done {How ?). \n\nHer. 3, 57. ^ ayoprj \xc2\xbbca2 rh vpvrajrf)\'ioy Tlapio} Kl^:^ 7}(riajix4va {^v) [were decora- \nted with Parian marble). On the Gen. of the material, see \xc2\xa7 273, 5. Her. 2, 2. \nToiovrxp (rra^firfo-ifxfy 01 vp-fiyfiari {ex tali re judicantes, having judged \nJrom or 6y sttch a circumstance), 7, 16. rfj <r^ ior^rjn r eKfxaipSfxeyo y (ex \ntua veste judicium faciens). X. Cy. 1. 3,5. rivi 5^ <ru t e K/xaip6fi\xe2\x82\xacyos, & \nwdi, raxna. \\eyeis; {judging by what rule, do you say this?). 3. 3, 19. at fidxat \nKplvayrai fuiWoy rais rpvxc^^s, fj raus Tuy (TcefidTwy puf^iais {are decided \nmore by courage^ than strength of body). H. 7. 3, 6. ovroi irdyras au^pdoTrovs \nvtr (p$f fiK-fiKatri Ti^A/up re koI fiiapia {have surpassed all men in daring \nand brutality). C. 2. 7, 7. t<rx\'^\xc2\xabi\xc2\xbb\' to is ou jxaa i [to be strong in body). Cy. \n2. 3, 6. iyii) oirrf xooiv upu rax^Sy \xc2\xbb(jre xfp<^**\' lirx^P^s. Hence t^ \niyrif rp iXrjdfia., ry Aifyqs, ry \'lpy<p {according to the nature of, etc.) ^ also yvdo/xr) \n(r<f>a\\Tiyau, i^cwr^^vat {to be deceived in opinion), Th. 4, 18, Her. 7, 9. Her. 1, 184. \n^ffxipa/xis y\xe2\x82\xacy(f}<Ti ircj/Tf irp6T(poy iyeyero ttjs HiTWKpios {was before \nNitocris by five generations). So iroAAy, oAtyw, fiiKp(^, tocovtci), Hcrcf fjiei^wy \n{greater by muck, by little, by so much = much greater, a little greater, so rtmch greater, \netc.). Her. 6, 89. 6<rr4piaray rjfjifpr) fiff} rrjs (rvyKeifi4yr]s {a day later than \nuns fxed upon, later by a day, etc,). lOG. v6Ki Koyifiri f] \'EWas yeyove aff- \nbtyarr ( pr\\ {has become weaker by [the loss of] a distinguished city). So with \nTrp6 with the Gen., and fxerd {ajler) with the Ace, e.g. Ae/ca ercai irph rrjs iy \nHaXofuyi ravfjLaxias {before the battle of Salamis by ten years, i. e. ten years before, \netc.). \'Efij worry ?t\xe2\x82\xaci fifTo. \'l\\lov aKwcriv {sixtieth year after the sack of \nTroy). Here belong, also, (vf^^ovy nya x^^^\xc2\xb0-^^ ^pO\'Xf^\'^^^\'^"\'^"-\'\'\'^ i^\'^ \nfine one [with] a thousand drachmas, etc.), and the like. Her. 6, 136. 6 Srjfios iCv \nfucoa-f (rhy MiKridSta) kotA tV a5ut(Tj>\' veyT-qKoyTa raKdyroiai {Jmed \nkirn fifty talents). Th. 4, 73. t y /8 e A t / tr t w toD SirKiTiKod ^\\a<p^rivai {jactu- \nram facere, to suffer defeat by [the loss of] the best portion of the heavy armed force). \nH. 7, 2. T/xicj fiey KK\'ayy^ t iyov^ t iaay, 6pvi^\xe2\x82\xacS S>s {advanced with a noise and \na cry), X. Cy. 1. 2, 2. {oi y6fj.oi) Trpoordrrouffi fih fiia els oMav TrapUyai {forbid \nto enter a house by force). So bopifiu, Kpavy^, fiorj <ny^ iroieiv ri {to do something \nwith a noise, etc.) ; Siio), iinfx.(\\fla, S-nnooia (sc. <5Sy), iSia {6S(f), v4(r) {6S^), Koivn \n(<i8^), in common, rip rpSircp roicpSe; Ko^iSp, properly with care, hence, entirely, \n\n\n\n420 SYNTAX. [^ 286 \n\nquite; (TirovSfi, with pains, aegre, scarcely, hardly ; iiAAp, ra{n-py Sixp, duplici modo^ \ne\'lK^, frustra. Comp. \xc2\xa7 101, 2, (b). \n\n\n\nt 286. II. Substantive Object with Prepositions, or \nthe Construction o/ Prepositions. \n\n1. As the Cases denote the local relations whence, whith- \ner, where, and the causal relations, which were originally \nconsidered as local relations, so the prepositions express \nanother local relation, viz., the extension or position of \nthings in space, \xe2\x80\x94 the juxtaposition of things (by the side \nof, over, around, ivith), or the local opposites above and \nbelow, within and without, before and behind. Prepositions \ntherefore denote the relative position of the things described \nby the substantives which they connect ; and the relation \nexpressed by them may be called the relation of position. \n\n2. The Cases connected with the prepositiops, show in \nwhich of the local relations, whence, whither, where, the \npreposition is to be understood. \n\nRemark 1. Thus, for example, the preposition irapd denotes merely the \nlocal relation of near, by the side of, by ; but in connection with the Gen., e. g. \n^A3-e IT a pa tov /Sao-iAe\'ws, in addition to tlie idea of nearness, it denotes, \nat the same time, the direction whence {he came from near tfie kinrj, de chej: le \nroi)\\ in connection with the Ace, e. g. 77 6 1 IT op ^ rhv /Sao-tXeo, at the same \ntime, the direction whither {he went ixto the vicinity or presence 0/ the \nking) ; and in connection with the Dat. e. g-., Ictttj iraph T<p dao-iAct, it de- \nnotes simply the place where {he stood sear the king). \n\n3. Prepositions are divided according to their construction : \n\n(a) into prepositions which govern the Gen.: ayrl, be/ore {ante), hit 6^ from \n{ab, a), e K, out of (ex), irpo, before {pro) \\ \n\n(b) into those which govern the Dat.: iv, in (in with abl.) and vlv, with \n\n{cum). \n\n(c) into those which govern the Ace: a yd, up, els, into {in with ace), \xc2\xaby, \nto ; \n\n(d) into those which govern the Gen. and Ace: Sid, through, Kurd, down \nfrom {de), virep, over {super), fifrd, tcith ; \n\n(e) into those which govern the Gen., Dat., and Ace: afi.<pl, about, ivt, \nupon, irapd, by, irepl, arouixd {circa), irp6s, before, and vic6, under \n{sub). \n\n4. Prepositions are divided according to the relations of posif \nHon which they denote : \n\n\n\ni 287.] \n\n\n\nPREPOSITIONS. *AvTt, irpo. \n\n\n\n421 \n\n\n\n(a) into such as indicate a juxtaposition: vapd and aficpi, near, iirt, at \nand upoTiy (TV u and fierd, with; \n\n(b) into such as express local opposites : iirl, upon, h.v<i, up, iT4p, over, \nand vir6, under, Kara, doum {under), irp6, \xe2\x96\xa0np6s and kvri, before, in \n\nfront o/and the improper prepositions oiric^^v, after, behind ; eV and \ncij, in, within, and iK, 6|, from, out of; ^id, through, and Trep I, around, \noutside ; u s, to, up to, and air 6, from, away from. i \n\n5. The relation of position expressed by prepositions is trans- \nferred to the relations of time and causality, e. g. Ot TroXifuot \ndiro t^s TToXews airi<fivyov. \'A^ro vvktos aTr^X^ov (from \nnight, immediatehj after the beginning of night). \'Atto ^v/a- \n/xa;(ia9 avrovojjioi (Icnv (from, by virtue of tlie alliance). \n\n6. Each preposition has a fundamental meaning, which it \neverywhere retains, even when it is connected with two or \nthree Cases ; but it receives various modifications according to \nthe different Cases with which it is connected, because the \nlocal relation varies with each Case. Comp. Rem. 1. The \nfundamental meaning of prepositions is most evident, when \nthey express local relations ; it is generally quite evident in those \nof time also ; but in the causal relations, it is often very obscure. \n\nRem. 2. Originally all the prepositions were merely adverbs of place. See \nS 300, 1. The prepositions enumerated in No. 3, may be called Proper prepo-;- \nBitions, inasmuch as during the cultivated period of the language, they either \' \nwere not used at all, or but very seldom, as adverbs of place, without a sub- \nstantive ; accordingly, they have the regular functions of prepositions : they \ndifl\'er from the Improper " prepositions : of these latter, the following classes : \nmay be named : (a) both adverbs of place and other adverbs, which, though i \nthev regularly have the functions of adverbs, are sometimes, in connection! \nwith a substantive, used as prepositions, e. g. anSwpo^eu, &vev, Sixa, a/xa; \xe2\x80\x94 (b) \' \nsubstantives in connection with the Gen., e. g. SUriv, instar, x<\xc2\xbbP*\'\'\xc2\xbb gratia, cVexa, \non account of. \n\n\n\nL PREPOSITlbNS WITH THE GeNITIVE ONLY. \n\n$ 287. (1) \'AvTt and irpo, before. \n\n1. \'AvTt (Lat. ante, before, in the face of, opposite, etc.), orig- \ninal signification: in the face of (before, over against) (1) in \na local sense (in prose seldom); (2) in a causal or figurative \nsense : (a) in adjurations, instead of the common word Trpos \nwith the Gen.; \xe2\x80\x94 (b) with expressions denoting comparison \n(e. g. with the comparative), valuing, weighing, requital; hence \nwith words of buying, selling, bartering, value, worth, likeness oi \n\n36 \n\n\n\nt^-6 \n\n\n\n^\' \n\n\n\n422 SYNTAX. [^ 287 \n\nunlikeness, preference ; \xe2\x80\x94 (c) of the cause or ground, when i\xc2\xbb \nexpresses the idea of making compensation, as in av3i^ ov, dv^\' wv, \nfor what ? wherefore ? \xe2\x80\x94 (d) of substitution, giving an equiva \nlent, etc. \n\n(1) (T^ x*\'P\'<"\' ^\'^\'\'\'^) 5a(ri> irirvffi ZiaXenroiffaui fxeyiXaiSy kvb* ^v (.<mfK6rt% \nlivSpfS Tt tiv irdffxoicv ^ inrh rwv <pepofi4yet)V Xl^cav, fj inrh rwv KvXxyZovfiivuv \\ (6<- \nhind which, since the trees stood before the soldiers), X. An. 4. 7, 6. (2) (a) \n\'Ai\'Ti vaiBotv T w V S e . . . iKerfvofievj SO. o-e {for the sake of as it vcere standing \nte/brc), S. O. C. 1326. (b) {tivKovpyos KaTfipydxraro) iy T\'p ir6\\ei alptrdtT epov \ntlvai rhv KoXhv ^dyarov ayrl alaxpo^ fiiov (is better than, is preferable to a \ndisgraceful life), ^.^.1j. 9, 1. Trji\' TcAeurrji/ ayrl ttjs ruy ^uyrwy ffaTtjplas \nilKKi^ayro (exchanged death for the safety of the living), PI. Menex. 237, a. Uarrip \nviby hLvrX vdyrwy rwy HWay XP\'H 1^\'^\'^ ^v irpoTifjui. So auputr^ad ri ayrl \nriyos, instead of the common nySs. Trjv iKfvbepiay kKoifxriy tiy ayrl wy fx\xc2\xbb \nwdyroty {in place of all which I have), "K. An. 1. 7, 3. (d) Aovkos ayrl Sta- \nw6tov {a slave instead of a despot). *Ayrl r}fi4pas ia\xc2\xbb| iytyrro, Her. 7, 37. \n*Ayr\\ rod fidx^o\'^oit xe^etr^at i^iku, X. Cy. 3. 1, 18. \'Arrf is never used \nof time. \n\n2. lip o, original signification: on the foreside {pro, pra\xc2\xa3, be- \nfore, figuratively, in belialf of), (1) local; \xe2\x80\x94 (2) of time; (3) \ncausal and figurative : (a) in belialf of (for the good, for the \nweal) ; with expressions denoting comparison (hence with the \nCom. degree), valuing, estimation, like djTt, but always with the \naccompanying idea of standiiig before, preference ; hence it is \nused to express preference in general; \xe2\x80\x94 (b) of an inward^ \nmental cause, occasion, inducement (only Poet.) : on account of \nprae, e. g. II. p, 667. Trpo Kfto/Boto (prae metu, for fear, on account \nof fear). \n\n{\\) Vliy^a Ti vr^ffos Kiirai "K ph Me7({po0i/, Th. 3, 51. {2) Tlph iin-tpas krriK- \n^oy. (3) ndyres a^i^troval ore vph ainSiy $ov\\fV(a-bau {desire you to consult for \nthem), X. Cy. 1. 6, 42. Mdx^O\'^au, airor^avctv irph Trj s irar plSo s, 5<cuco^w- \nyeveiy ir jh fia<ri\\4w5 (fir, in behalf of , one^s country), X. Cy. 8. 8, 4. Aucaio- \nrepay ^(itiy Ked KdWioy etyai Tph rod <l>evy\xe2\x82\xaciy re koI awoS iSpda Kfiy vw4- \nX^iv rf irrfXet SIktjv iriyriy hy Torn? {I thought it more just in preference to fleeing, etc.), \nPI. Phaed. 99, a. Tlph troWov Troi-fjaratrl^al n {to esteem before or above muck^ \ni. e. very highly). Tlph voWciy XRVH^\'^\'^\'^^v rin.-^<raxTbaL ti (to value before muck \nwealth). {TovTov) irph vdyroiv xPVf\'-\'^\'^f^\'\' \xc2\xab\xc2\xabi ir 6vety irpiaifiriy tty ^iXok \nuoi ftyaty X. C. 2. 5, 3. Uph rovrov rf^ydvau hy /ioXAov e\\orro {for him), PL \nSymp. 179, a. *Eiraiv\xe2\x82\xaciy r ph SiKaioavyris aBiKiav {to praise injustice befljre, \nrather than, in preference to justice), Ep. 361, e. \n\nKemark. The reason that the prepositions ayri and irp6 are not con- \nnected with the Dat, like prepositions of the same meaning in other langaagea, \n\n\n\nf 288.] \n\n\n\nPREPOSITIONS. \'Atto, ^/c. \n\n\n\n423 \n\n\n\nbnt with the genitive, is owing to the fact, that the Greek language regards the \nrelation denoted by he/ore^ in front of, not merely as local, but implying action \na relation of dependence. The like holds of the prepositions u^ep, TrprfsJ \n8i\xc2\xab{, aiA<pi, Iff pi, fvi, vTr6 with the Gen., since the Gen. represents the \nplace as the cause or occasion of the action, and hence likewise, a relation of \ndependence. See S 273, 4. \n\n\n\n$288. (2) \'ATro\', from, and i$, ^k, out of. \n\nPreliminary Remark. These two prepositions denote an outgoing, a rar \nmoval, departure, but d w rf denotes a removal from the exterior of an object, while \niK {\xc2\xab I), always implies a going out from within a place or object ; and in the \ncausal relation, the former denotes a remoter cause, the latter, one more direct. \n\n1. \'Airo {ab), from, denotes: (1) in a local relation: (a) re- \nmoval from a place or object \\vith verbs of motion, also of free- \ning, and the like, e. g. \\v\xe2\x82\xaclv, eXevScpovv, also of missing (^ 271, 2), \nhence, utto (tkottov ; then it is transferred to mental failures, as \nin air cAttiSwv, oltto yv(i)/xr]<;, aliter ac sperabam, putabam (as if \naherrans ah exspectatione, ab opi7iione) ; (b) distance from a \nplace or object with verbs of rest; \xe2\x80\x94 (2) of time, going out \nfrom a point of time : from, after ; \xe2\x80\x94 (3) causal or figurative : \n(a) of origin, as with cTvai, yCyvea-Sai ; (b) of the whole in rela- \ntion to its parts, or in relation to what belongs to it ; (c) of the \natdkor wnth Pass, verbs instead of vtto (^ 251, Rem. 4), but al- \nways with the accompanying idea of on the part of; (d) of the \noccasion or cause; (e) of the material; (f) of the means and \ninstrument; (g) of conformity. \n\n(1) (a) *Airb T^j ic6\\ws airf<(>vyoy ol iroKeixioi. (b) \'O \\6yos ovk arrh \nrov CK otrov IfSo^fv flprier^ju,^. S.2,\\0. {Ai TraXaial noKcis) airh ^a\\d(rari5 \n^oAAov tpKlff^ffow (at a distance from the sea), Th. 1, 7. (2) *Airh Tot/rrjs rris \ni} 1x4 pas, iirb wkt6s, k<p\' katrtpas; airh ruv airtav {ajler the meal), \'K.\'R \nL. 5, 8. (3) {si)\'Airh\'A\\Knaiuyos Kol aZris McyaK\\4o5 eyeyouro Ka\\ Ktipra \nKafi-irpol (very distinguished men spruf^ from), Her. 6, 125. (b) T^s rpiripeis, \nouTTfp 9iacu/ airr^ iiirh rwv KaraKfi<p^fi(rwv (which he had of those that were \nleft), Th. 4, 9. Tiiir^T^jSeipTji (ornaments for the neck, necklaces), Her. \n1, 51. So oi dirb /BowATJy (qui sunt a consiliis, those who belong to the council) ; \nol kxl n\\<{T<wvoj (the pupils of Plato, the Platonics) ; oi airh ttjs \'AkoStj- \nfifar, etc. (c) \'Eirpdx^V \xc2\xbb*\' aifrwv ovBtu tpyov a^ioKoyov (uxis done by \nthem^on the part of ), Th. 1, 17. (d) *Airh hiKcuoffivvs (by, on account of), \nHer. 7,1 64. T^ arrh rwy woXtnluv ip6pic (metu ab hostibus, fear of from the \nenemy), X. Cy. 3. 3, 53. \xe2\x80\xa2A<^* Uvtov (from his own impulse), (e) Tpe>\xe2\x82\xac\xc2\xabv rh \nyavTiKhy awh irpos6Swy (by revenues), Th. 1, 81. (f) \'Airb rS>y ifier^pw, \nifuy ToKtfu: (*Uuincos) avtifiix\'^*\' (sociorum vestrorum ope), Dem.Ph. 1.49. \n\n\n\n424 SYNTAX. [^ 288. \n\n34 ; hence many adverbial phrases, e. g. avh a-rSfjMTos, avh yXdnrifs dictiv {by \nhearty hy word of mouth) \\ avh airovSrjs (zealously), (g) \'Air\' OvA.i utov oCpt- \nos Ka\\4ouTai Ov\\v/xTrn]uoi (are called from, derive their name from mount Olympus)^ \nHer. 7, 74. \'Awb |u;tt/iox t\xc2\xabs avrSpo/xoi (by virtue of), Th. 7, 57. \n\n2. \'E^, \xe2\x82\xacK (eo;), owi (j/* (opposite of ev, m), denotes (1) in a \nlocal relation : (a) removal either from within a place or object, \nor from immediate participation or connection with a place or \nobject, with verbs of motion; hence an immediate succession \nof one object after another; (b) distance with verbs of rest: \nwithout, beyond (Epic), e. g. ex /JcXeW, extra tehrum factum; \xe2\x80\x94 \n(2) of time, immediate outgoing from a point of time; then \nespecially the immediate development of one thing from anoth- \ner, an immediate succession of two actions ; \xe2\x80\x94 (3) in a causal \nand figurative sense : (a) oi origin; (b) of the whole in relation \nto its parts, or in relation to what belongs to it, often with the \naccompanying idea of choice and distinction ; (c) of the author \nwith passive or intransitive verbs, instead of vtto, almost ex- \nclusively Ionic, used particularly by Herodotus, seldom in Attic \nprose ; (d) to denote the occasion or cause ; (e) of the malerial ; \n(f ) of the means and instrument ; (g) of conformity : according \nto, in consequence of, by virtue of after. \n\n(1) \'E/c T^y -K6\\f(i3S airri\\^0Vy iK ttjs fiaxv^ t<pvyov [out from the city, \nout from the 6a\xc2\xabZe, while otTrd would merely signify away from); iK yrjs iyaw \nlji.6.xn<rav {out from the land). PL Polit. 289, e. ol St ir6Kiv ix x6\\fces oAX^t- \nrovTfs Karh ^dXaTrav /fol irc(fj {changing from city to city). Apol. 37, d. KoXhs i^ \nfjLot 6 )8ios cIt; &Wr)v i| fi\\A.7js ir6\\(0}s aij.ei0ofj.fyci) (comp. ex alio loco in alium \nmigranti). (2)\'E^ juiepas {ex quo dies iUiixit, as soon as it was day) ; ix tov- \nrov (so. xpt^^ow) immediately after this; 4k yvKr6s or ^\xc2\xbbc rvKrur; ix \xc2\xbbat- \nSay {from very childhood) ;^| bar 4p ov {subsequently) ; ix rod Xotrov. \nHer. 9, 8. i^ 7jfj.4pris is fj/jifprfy ava^aWofieyoi {ex die in diem, delaying from \nday to day, day after day). 1,87. iK 5e aibpli)s re Kcd yrjyefilris avrfipa- \nnev i^airlyrjs vecpea {immediately after fair weather, etc.). Th. 1, 120. ix fi^ \nelp\'f}vns iro\\\xe2\x82\xacij.e7y, iK Se voXefiov viXiv {u/ijSTjveu {to go to war after peace^ \netc.). X. Cy.3. 1, 17. 6 ahs irar^ip iy rpSe ttj /luo ^juc\'pa i^ &<ppoyos a^^pmm \nyryivrirai. (3) (a) Elvoi, yiyvecbai e/c rivos {to he descended from some oiw, \niK indicating more direct descent, while avo may be used of one more remote), \n(b) \'E| *A^r] vaiwv oi Hpurroi {the best of), (c) Her. 3, 62. rh. iyreraXfUpa im \nrov Mdyov {the things commanded by Magus). lb. irpoBeSoa-^cu iK nprj^d<rvfos{to \nbe betrayed by), (d) 6, 67. e<peirye A7)ixdpr]Tos iK SiropTTjs iK roiovSe ov</- \nifos {on account of). So iK irayrhs rov yov {icith all the heart) ; ^ic films \nand the like. Her. 2, 152. iK r^s 6^^/105 rov oveipov (m oonaeqitence of), (g) \n\n\n\n^289.] PREPOSITIONS. \xe2\x80\x94 "Ev, (TvV. 425 \n\nPL Criton. 48, b. iK rwv 6ixo\\oyov^4v<ov tovto ffK^irriov {in accordance \nwith what has been admitted). So ouondCea^ai ^k riyos {to be named after or for \nsome one, like virtus ex viro appellata est, is called or takes its name from vir). \n\'Ek tov ; why ? \n\nRemark. The adverbs which, in the character of improper prepositions, take \nthe Gen., have been already considered, in treating of the Gen. Besides these \nadverbs, the following substantives, as improper prepositions, take the Gen \xe2\x80\xa2 \nii.SiKvy ( 5 6> o s, Poet.), instar ,- \xe2\x80\x94 b. x a p t ;/, gratia, for the sake of commonly \nplaced after jhe Gen., seldom before it. Instead of the Gen. of the personal \npronouns 4nov, (rod, etc., the possessive pronoun, as an attributive adjective, is \nregularly used with xap\'", e. g. ifi-f,u, o-V xap\'*\', mea,tua gratia; \xe2\x80\x94 c. \'4 ye Ka \n(fVf/cey even before consonants, as (UfKa even before vowels in the Attic Avriters, \neiVfKo and f\'/vewci/, Ionic, but not wholly foreign to the Attic dialect, oweKa in \npoetry), causa, gratia. The Gen. more frequently stands before than after eVe/ca. \nIt very frequently signifies, with respect to, concerning, in regard to. Her. 3, 85. \nbA.p(Tfe Tovrov \xe2\x82\xac7i/e\xc2\xbbce, with respect to this, be of good courage. It often denotes \na remote reason, e. g. bi/ virtue of by reason of PI. Rp. 329, b. et yap i)v rovr\' \naXrioVy kh-u iyio ra aina ravra (ircirdy^jj fveKoiyeynpuSji.e. by reason of old \nage; \xe2\x80\x94 d. \xc2\xab \xc2\xab tj t t (poetic only), by or according to the will of (a god), Aihs e/cTjrt, \nHomer and Hesiod. In other poets it has the signification of eveKa. \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 289. 2. Prepositions with the Dative only. "Ev \n\nAND (TVV (^$vv). \n\n1. *Ev (iVL Poet., \xe2\x82\xactV and ctVi Epic) denotes that one thing is \nin, upon, by or near another. In general, it indicates an actual \nunion or contact with an object, and hence is the opposite of \nIk. It denotes ( 1 ) in a local relation : (a) the being in, inclosed \nin, encircled, surrounded by ; used with reference to place, cloth- \ning, persons : in,amongf in the midst o/^and with verbs of speak- \ning, before, in the presence of {coram) ; then it is transferred to \nthe external and internal state or condition in which one is taken, \nor is found, by which he is, as it were, surrounded ; \xe2\x80\x94 also to the \nbusiness in which he is engaged, to persons, in whose hands or \npower something is placed; it also denotes (b) the being upon \nsomething, and (c) the being near a thing, particularly of cities, \nnear which (in the territory of which) something took place, \nespecially a battle ; \xe2\x80\x94 (2) of time (^ 283, 3) ; \xe2\x80\x94 (3) in a causal \nand figurative relation: (a) of the meajis wad. instrument ; (b) \nof the maimer ; (c) to denote conformity : according to, in con- \nformity with. \n\n(1) (a) \'Ei/ Tp 7r<{A6j, iv T^ i/^o-w, Iv \'Sirdprr) tovto iy4v\xe2\x82\xacTo. PI. L. \n625, b. ayaTravXai iv to7s v}p7]\\o7s SdvSpeaiv elffi ffKiapai. \'Eu ^7r\\oi5, \niy t6^ois SiayuviC^a^ai\', iy ^(r^TjTt, iy (TTfipdvois {crowned)] iv rols \n\n36* \n\n\n\n426 SYNTAX. l\\ 289 \n\nkvbp<&Trois (inter). Dem. Chers. 108, 74. Tifi6be6s vot" iKetvos iv vfiTy i^ \nuriy6pri<rev {in our presence). \'Ey iro\\c/tc<>, iy tpyv, ev Sairi, iv t^ofitc^ ip \n6pyp thai. PI. Crito. 43, C. koI &Woi 4y roiavrais ^v/Kpopais oXiV- \nKouTai (are taken in, involved in such calamities). Phileb. 45, c. iv roiovrois \nvoff-fifiaa-iy ix^f^^t/oi. Gorg. 523, b. iv iroo-t? fvSaifiovla oiKeiv (to live m \nthe enjoyment of all prosperity). Her. 2, 82. ot iv ir o i -ft or ti yev6fjifvoi (those who \nhave been in poetry = poets). Th. 3, 38. ol iv irpdy na<ri (those engaged in \nstate affairs \xe2\x80\x94 the ministers). X. Cy. 4. 3, 23. ol fiev St] iv rovrois to7s \\6- \nyois ^ffav (were engaged in these discourses). PI. Phaed. 59, a. iv ^i\\o<ro(plf \nflvai. Ol iv yewpyiais, iv rix^V \xc2\xab\'*\'\xc2\xab*\xe2\x80\xa2 Hence various adverbial ex- \npressions have originated, e. g. ^ v Jfca ilvcu (to be equal) \\ iv rjSov^ fioi i<Triv(it \nia pleasing to me) ; so also with ex^"\' ^^<1 TroieTa^cu, e.g.iv Sfiolcc, iv i\\a<pp^ \niroteuTi^at (to esteem equally, to esteem lightly). \'Ej/ ifiol, tv aoi itrri ti (penes rm^ \nte, it is in my power, etc.) ; hence the phrase iv kavrtf cTveu (to be in one^s senses^ \nsui compotem esse) ; (b) iv 6pe<riv, ivXirirois, iv ^p6vots] (c) \'H i v M av- \nrivelc^ fidxv (^^6 battle near). \xe2\x80\x94 {2)\'Ej\' rovrep ry XP*^*\'?)^" 4 (^il^ \nduring); iv ir4vT\xe2\x82\xac rj/jLfpais (during, in the space of). \xe2\x80\x94 (3) \'OpaVj 8pa<r^euj \niv 6<pda\\nois, Poet, (to see, be seen with the eyes) ; then in other connections \namong the poets, iv wpl Koifiv, iv Zftrfitf Stjo-cu, iv x^p^^ \\a$fiv, Horn, \n(to bum with fire, etc.). In prose, especially in Xenophon, iv is used to denote \nthe means, in the expressions S-q\\ovv, SriXov dvcu, <rrjfialv\xe2\x82\xactv iv rivi. X. Cy. 1. \n6, 2. Zti fi\xe2\x82\xacv, S> Tra7, ot ^(oi. ac TXcoj re Kod fvfji(ve7s xeuirov<riy koI iv iepo7s Srj- \nX.OV KOi iv ovpavlo IS (rrjtifiois (is evident both by the sacrifices and the signs \nfrom heaven). 8. 7, 3. iarf fi-fi vare fioi koI iv itpols koI iv ovpaviois \narjfielo IS koI iv ol<i>vo7s koI iv <p-f] fiais. Si r ixpV" \'\'oi(7v kcu L ouk ixp^*\'- \n*\xc2\xa3\xc2\xbb\' 5/ktj, iv aiuiT\'p. Th. 1, 77. iv ro7s S^iolois vofiois rks Kpiaeis \niroieTv (according to the same laws). So iv fifptt (according to his part, in txtm). \n*Ev ifioi, iv aoi, iv iKeivto (Poet.), ex (according to) meo, tuo, illius judido. \n\n2. Xvv (^v mostly old Attic) corresponds almost entirely with the \nLatin cum, and the English tcith ; it always expresses the idea of \nunion, participation and accompam7?ie?it : (1) in a local relation \noften of an accompaimnent wliich implies help or assistance ; \xe2\x80\x94 \n(2) in a causal sense to denote : (a) the means and instrument ; \n(b) the manner ; (c) the measure or rule, by which the action \nof the verb is measured, as it were, or defined ; (d) conformity. \n\n(1) \'O OTpaTTjybs avv to7s <tt pariurais avex<^pri<Tiv. \xe2\x80\x94 3wi\' bf^ (with \nthe help of God). 2 u v t t v t ilvai or ylyv^rbai (to be on the side of one^ of one\'s \nparty). 2 w v r iv i ju.oxeo\'^ou, to fight in company icith one. to aid one in fighting \n(2) (a) X. Cy. 8. 7, 13. tj KTrjcis avrwv (sc. ttiotuv ^iXttiv) i<m\xc2\xbb ov^ofims vi\'t \nT p iS / a, oAAck ^aXKov crvv r^ \xe2\x82\xacV\xe2\x82\xacpy\xe2\x82\xac<ri<f (not by violence^ but rather kindness). \n(b) Tloo\'Uvai ahv Kpavyf^ ahv y4\\wTi iXbt!^ (with a shout, etc.). X Ct \n8. 1, 15. vdrepa 5\' ^7^, \xc2\xa3 Kvp\xe2\x82\xac, Afieivov flvai, avv r^ <r^ aya^^ rda rtfutpiat \nroi\xe2\x82\xac7a-baif ti a by rjj try (r]fi.lt}\\ (with, for your advantage^ or for your injwry) \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6290.] PREPOSITIONS. \'Ava, \xe2\x82\xac19, 0)9. 427 \n\nto vote with, in accordance with the law). {d):^vv r^ vSfiu rijv i/^^c^oj/ rl^ia^t. \nSvy T^ SiKaicp. \n\nRemark. Of the adverbs used as improper prepositions, there belong here \nifia {una cum), and several which are constructed also with the Gen., as has \nbeen seen, in treating of the Gen. and Dat. \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 290. 3. Prepositions with the Acc. only: \'Ava, ets \n\nAND (1)9. \n\n1. *Ava {on, up, upon) signifies from a lower to a higher place, \nand is directly opposite to Kara, with the Acc, which signifies \nfrom a higher to a lower place ; the use of avd is mor^ frequent \nin poetry than in prose. It is used (1) in a local relation : (a) \nto denote a directioji towards a higher object; (b) to denote the \nextension from a lower to a higher point, from bottom to top : \nthrougJiout, tJirough, both with verbs of motion and rest; \xe2\x80\x94 (2) \nin a temporal relation, to denote continuance or 2i period of time : \nper (seldom) ; \xe2\x80\x94 (3) in a causal sense to denote manner ; then \nparticularly in a distnbutive sense with numerals. \n\n(1) (a) Od. x\xc2\xbb 132. ^ ^IXoi, ovK tiw 8^ ns 6lv optro^vpriv ava&airt (up to \nthe lofiy gate). This use is rare and only poetic ; in prose only in the phrases \nkvh. rhv irorafJi6y, ivo ^60 v xA\xc2\xab?i/, up the stream (the opposite of Kara \nwoTOfiSy, down the stream); (b) II. i/, 547. {<p\\(\\p) avk vSna ^fovca Siafnrepes \n{ab infima dorsi parte usque ad cervicem) ; so aya Sufia, aya <TTpaT6v, avb, fxdxWt \niiva ifuXoy, kvk 6.arv, avh bvfutv (through the house, through the army, etc.), \nall in Homer; Her. 6, 131. koI oStw \'AA/c/ioiwWSai ifiwabTjaav avh r i] v \'E\\- \n\\diSa (throughout Greece). X. Vect. 5, 10. aya iracrav yriv Kai baXarT av \n(ipi\\yT] ivrai. Hier. 7, 9. i.vk trT6fia tx^iv (to have continually in the mouth). \n(2) Her. 8, 123. ayk rhy \'r6\\(fioy rovrov (throughout). So ava iraaay \nr^y 1] fit pay, per totum diem (the substantive must here have the article; \nwithout the article owa iraaay v/xtpay, signifies daily, day by day, ayk irav eros, \nevery year, yearly, see No. (3) and \xc2\xa7 246, 6), ayk vvktu (per noctem, all night \nthrough). 7, 10. Avtk XP*^"**" ^^fvpoi rts Hy (in the time). (3) \'Aya Kpdros (with \nall one\'s might) ; ayh fitpos (by turns) \\aya -rray eros (quotannis). X. An. 4, 6, \n^."LKXrivfs iiropvbT\\<Tay kTT a ara^novs aya Trej/re irapaffdyyas t^s 7]fi4pas \n(Jive parasangs daily). \n\nRemark 1. In the Epic and Lyric languages, aud is constructed with the \nDat. also ; instead of it eV is elsewhere used, e. g. ava tr/d^Trrpw, &ixef, Tafrydpcp \niiKpw in Homer. So eS5ej 5\' aya OKdirru Ai^s aUrSs, Find. \n\n2. Ei9 (\xe2\x82\xac9 Ionic, Doric, and old Attic) is only a modified form \nof \xc2\xab/, and denotes the same relations of position as are ex- \n\n\n\n428 SYNTAX. [\\ 290 \n\npressed by cv, but always m the direction whither; hence it is \nused of motion into the interior of an object, up to, into the im- \nmediate presence of; in general to denote the reaching a definite \nlimit. (1) in a local relation : (a) to denote a heal limit; (b) a \nlimit in quantity : about, up to; (c) extension; (d) in the sense \nof before, in the presence of coram, but with the idea of the di- \nrection whither; \xe2\x80\x94 (2) of time, to denote a temporal limit: till, \ntowards; (3) in a causal sense : (a) of a mental aim, object or \npurpose ; (b) of the manner ; with numerals either in the sense \nof about or in a distributive sense ; (c) in general to express a \nreference to something : in respect to. \n\n(1) (a) \'leW ets r^v ir6Kiv; so also of persons with the accompanying \nidea of their habitation or country. PI. Apol. 17, c. ds vfias usUvm, i.e. \n\xe2\x82\xacty rh SiKuffT\'fjpiov eisi4vai. X. An. 4. 7, 1. iirop\xe2\x82\xac6^<ray tis TaSxovs (went \ninto the country of the Taochoi). Among the Attic writers, also in a hostile \nsense: contra, in. Th. 3, 1. ia-rpdrevaay is rijv \'At t iK-fiy {into, against At- \ntica). With the verbs a-vWeyeiv, avvayeipuv, a\\l(fiy and the like, the Greeks \nuse els, where we say, to assemble at or in a place. Comp. ^ 300, 3. (b). Th. \n2, 13, Tuu Ilehoirovinf)(rl(i}y ^u\\Kfyofx4yo)u tc is rhv \'Itr^fihv Kcd iv SSifi ivruv. \nComp. 4, 91. 8, 93. So the Latins say: congregari, convenire, etc., in urbem. \n(b) Th.1,74. vav s is tos rer paKoalas. (c) \'E/c da\\dtr<rris ds dai\\a<r<ray. \nPI. Gorg. 526, b. els Kcd rrdw i?^6yifios ydyovfy els rovs &,Wovs\'\'EKXr}yas, \n^ApiarelSijs {among), (d) Aoyovs iroifla^cu etr rhv S^fiov {to speak before, in \nthe presence of the people). PI. Menex. 239, a. ol irccr4p(s iroXAo J?) kou KoKii ?pya \naTreip-fivavTo fls irdvras avbpwtrovs {before aU, men). (2)\'Es ii4\\ioy Ka- \nr aSvyra {till sunset), Homer ; hence els kair epav {tcvoards, till evening, proper- \nly to evening as a boundary) ; so in prose, els ttjv utrrepalay {till the folloaing \nday, on the following day) ; els r plrriy 7} fie pay {till, on). (3 ) (a) \'Expricaro rots \nXpy\\fJ^a(Tiv els r^v ttSKiv {for the city). Ets ri; {for what?); els KepSosT\\ \nSpav {to do something for gain), (b) Els Ka\\hy ?iKeis {opportune); els rdx^* \n{quickly ) ; els Svyafiiy, according to one\'s ability ; els e KarSy {about a hundred \nor by hundreds, centeni), especially in the arrangement of soldiers, e. g. \xe2\x82\xacjy Sdo \n{two deep, two by two), (c) QavfjA^eiv," iTraiye7y riva eXs r t {to admire, praise one \nwith respect to, on account of something) ; so Sia<pepeiv nyos els aper^jy, tppiyifios, \nevd6Ki/xos ets r t, els irdyra, in every respect; fi\\eTreiy, airo0\\eireiy els rh \nirpdy fxar a, like vp6s. \n\n3. *fi? (ad), to, does not like the other prepositions, denote the \nrelation of position, but only the direction whiUier ; it is used \nonly of persons or of the names of cities, when they stand for \nthe inhabitants. \n\nTh. 4, 79. B/Mur/Seu cupUero &5 UepSlKKav koL tts r^y Xa/jciBucfiP (came U \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 291.J PREPOSITIONS. Ala. \n\n\n\n429 \n\n\n\nPerdiccas). Dem. Phil. 1. 54, 48. irp4<rP\xe2\x82\xaci5 irivoiix^ev &>$ j8o<rtA.eo. Th. 8, \n36. f^Kovros is t^v MtXTjTov (ad Milesios). \n\nRem. 2. This i>s is to be distinguished from that which stands with els, eVf, \nand irp6s with the Ace. (iy e/s, is e\'-n-/, is irpJs Tim). This latter is is not a \npreposition, but it expresses a supposition, just as when it is joined with tht par- \nticiple, and docs not denote an actual direction to a place, but only one sup- \nposed, and hence intended. X. An. 1. 2, 1. i:^polC^i is ^ir\\ roirovs rb \nffrpdrfvfia (quasi hs helium illaturus, he collects as if against these). Hence this \nis also stands with the prepositions*goveming other Cases, e. g. Th. 3, 4. \nimcXovv (iroiT\\<ravro rwv v(uv is ^irl vavfiaxia [as if for the purpose of fight- \ning a naval battle). 1, 134. ol Se iroirjadixevoi xoAjfoOs avSpidvras Svo us awrl \nTlaya-avlov avtbcaay {quasi essent Pausaniae loco, as if in the place of Pau- \nsanias). \n\n\n\n4. Prepositions with the Genitive and Accusa- \ntive: Sio, Kara, viripy fxerd. \n\n\xc2\xa7 291. (1) Aia, through, \n\n1. With the Gen. (1) in a local relation: (2) to denote a mo- \ntion extending through a space or object and again coming out : \nthrough and out again, out of (Homer expresses this relation \nstill more distinctly, by uniting the preposition ck or Trpo with \nSuiy e. g. Od. p, 460. SuK /xcyapoto ava^o)p\xe2\x82\xacLv) ; (b) to denote ex- \ntension through something, but without the accompanying rela- \ntion stated under (a) of coming out of the object; on the Gen., \nsee k 287, Rem.; \xe2\x80\x94 (2) of time, to denote the expiration or \nlapse of a period: after, properly to the end of a period, through \nand out; \xe2\x80\x94 (3) in a causal sense, to denote ongin (rare) and the \nauthor (very frequent) ; (b) to denote quality (possessive Gen.) \nin connection with ctmt and yiyviaSaL ; (c) the means, both of \npersons and things; (d) mamier ; (e) worth (rare); (f) com- \nparison (rare). \n\n(1) (a) Her. 7, 8. fxiXXut ihav arpaTlv Siot rris Evpdirijs cVl rijv\'EP^dSa. \n2, 26. Sie^cX^iK Sik irdavs Eupciirnr. 7, 105. i^-fiXawe rlu arparhv \n8(& TTis Qp-niK-ns M tV \'EXXtiSa. 3, U5. SioK^as 5ia Trjs yopyipvs \n(having crept out through the prison), (b) Od. n, 335. 5.^: fi\'i^ov Idy, dih Tre- \ntlov (per campum). X. Hier. 2, 8. Sti iro\\\xe2\x82\xac/tUs -Kop^iteixSrai (to march through \nthe enemy\'s country). Figuratively in the phrases, Sih SiKaioaiyy Uvai [to \ngo in the way of justice, to go through justice, i. e. to be just) ; Sik tov SikuIov \nirop,i.a^cu; iih <p6$ov ipx^cbai (<o /ear), Eur. Or. 747. Ai^ <pi\\ias ihai \nrtvi [to be friendly to one), X. An. 3. 2, 8. (2) \xc2\xa3,C trovs [through, for a year) i \nSA iroKXov, t^aKpov, hxiyov xp^^ov (through, for a long, a short time^ \nalso 8i* 0^(701;, hih -KoWov without xP^vov, or St^ x/"^\xc2\xbb\'ow ^x^\xc2\xab (ha \n\n\n\n430 SYNTAX. P 292. \n\ncame after a long time) ] 5tcb iravrhs rod xp^^ov routdra ovk iytytro {during \nthe whole time); Sih, tinipo-s, Bik vvkt6s {through, throughout the day, etc.). \nSo also of an action repeated at stated intervals, e.g. Sik rpirov Urovt \naruvpeo\'ay {every third year, tertio quoque anno, alvcays after three years, through \nand out again); 5xo irifxirrov erovs, 5ia Trdyre iruv {every fifth year, \netc., quinto quoque anno) : Sia rpirris 7ifi4pas. (3) (a) Ata fiauriXfwv irf<pvKios \n{descending from a continued line of kings, owing one^s birth to kings), X- Cy. 7. 2, \n24. ndyra 5t\' eavrwy irpdrreabai (<\xc2\xbb accomplish everything by themselves) ; \nbi eavTov KTT}<ra<r^ai Ti. (b) Aia <f>6fiov (Ivai, ZC tx^P"^\' yiyvfabal tivl, \nSi* ipiZoSy opy^s, aatpaXeias fhat or yiyvfabai {to be in fear, to be Iiostile, \nto be angry with, to be safe), (c) A** tup^aXfiuv bpay {to see with the eyes) \nPL Theaet. 184, C. \'S,K6irfi, airSKpicris vorfpa op^ortpa, ^ dpwfiev, rovro eJyai 6<p^a\\* \nfiovs, fi 5 1 ov Spufiey, koI ^ aKSvofiey, 2>Ta, ^ 5 1\' oZ ojcovofiiv. (The Dat. denotes \nthe means used, hid with the Gen. the active means.) "Exttv nva ii opyris {to \nbe angry with) ; Si a x^^P^^ ^X^\'*\' {^ work upon, to be engaged in, to handle) ; \nalso of persons, e. g. \'"Eirpa^ay ravra Si Evpvfidxo v, Th. 2, 2. (d) Aik \nffTrovSrjs, S ih rdxovs voiflu ri (with earnestness, earnestly, etc.). (e) S. O. C. \n584. 5t\' ovSfvhs iroif7(T^ai {to consider of no value), (f) Her. 1,25. ^(tjs i^ior \nSiii irdvrwv rStv aya^-nfidrcav {in comparison wilh, among). \n\nII. With the Ace. (1) in a local relation to denote extension \nthrough a place or object : through, t/iroughout (only poetic) ; \xe2\x80\x94 \n(2) of time to denote extension through a period of time, \nthroughout ; \xe2\x80\x94 (3) in a causal sense : (a) to denote the reasott, \nmediation : on account of, ob, propter, by ; (b) of the person by \nwhose means something is effected. \n\n(1) (a) Eur. Hipp. 762. Sik irSyTioy KVfia 4ir6pfvcas ifiay (waffffav \n{through the waveofthe sea). (2) Aih, vvktu. (3) X. An. 1. 7, 6. ?\xc2\xabm fiky \n7]fjL\\y rj apxh V ifaTpcpa irphs fj.fv fi\xe2\x82\xacair]ijSplay fifXP^^ "^ ^^^ tcavfia ov Svvairrtu \nolKcly iy^puvoi {on account of the heat). 4. 5, 15. Sik rks r o i airas oZp \nikvdyKas vire\\flirovr6 tm^s rwy (rrpaTianwy. (b) An. 7. 7, 7. 5i\' fj/xas <rv\xc2\xbb \n^iots ^X^"^^ r-fiySe r^y X\'^P*" i^!/ your means, mediation). Kaucol SoKov/uy flyeu \nSih TOUT 2 y {hujus culpd). \n\n\n\n$292. (2) Kardj from above, down. \n\nI. With the Gen. (1) in a local relation: (a) of motion from \na higher to a Imver place (desuper, deorsum) ; (b) of a direction \ntowards a place or object situated below : doicn to, down upon, \ndown under (on the Gen., see k 287, Rem.) ; (c) seldom of rest \nin, upoTj. or at a place or object Q 287, Rem.) ; \xe2\x80\x94 (2) in a causal \nand figurative sense, to denote the cause or occasion. \n\n\n\nr \n\n\n\nf \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 292.] PREPOSITIONS. \xe2\x80\x94 Kara. \n\n\n\n431 \n\n\n\n(1) (a) H. o, 44. firj 8c KttT Ov\\{,fiiroio Kap-fivav {doum from the heights). \nHer. 8, 53. ippiirrfov kvvrovs Karh tow r^ix^os Kdrw. (b) Her. 7, 6. atpa- \nylC\xc2\xabrbai Kurh rrjs baXda-a-jis {to disappear doum under the sea). 235. Kara- \nSfSvKfyai Kara rrjs ^aXdaffTis. X. An. 7. l/ 30. ei^xofiai fivpias ifie ye \nKark yrjs opyvias yeviffbai {to he sunk under the earth). So figuratively of a \ndirection to a lower object, as ro^eucii/ Kard riyos, ircdftv Kara rivos, to \nshoot at something, to strike at something (the preposition denoting the direction \ntowards the mark, viz., down) -^ Tinmiv Kara K6^f>t]s, on the head (\xc2\xa7 273, \nRem. 8); (c) Her. 1, 9. Karh. vdrov ycveaStai {to come behind, to be behind). \nTh. 4, 32. Kark vtirov ehai {in the rear). 33. Kark vdrov KoSnaTtiKivai. \n(2) AfV*" f oT(\xc2\xa3 Tivos{dicere de aliqua re) ; in this connection, the idea of hos- \ntility especially is expressed by the preposition, e. g. \\eyeiv, \\6yos Kard rivos \n{against one). X. Apol. 13. xl^cvSfo-^ai KaTaTov^\xe2\x82\xacov{to say anything falsely \nof or against the God) ; but also in an opposite relation, Dem. Phil., 2. 68, 9. h kcH \nIi(yiarr6v itrri Kab\' vfiuy ^yKu^uoy {in honor of you). Aeschin. Ctes. 60. \nol Kark At} fioir b f yovs lliraivoi. SKOireTj/ Kard rivos {secundum, in respect \nto). Plat. Phaed. 70, d. ^tj kot* av^ puiruy aK6ir\xe2\x82\xaci fi6vov rovro, oAAa Kod \nleark (6wy xdyrety koI <pvruy. So also in Attic adjurations and oaths, \ne. g. fix^abai, ifiyvycu Kard t iv o j, for example, / c p \xc2\xab v reXeiwy {Th.5,47), \nto swear by unblemished victims (as it were holding the hands over them) ; so i\'^w crv \nalso (6xf<f^ai Ko^\' iKar6/ji0r}Sf Kara $o6s. \n\nII. In a local and temporal relation, Kara with the Ace. is \ndirectly opposite to ava, in respect to the point from whence \nthe motion of the action begins ; but it agrees with avd in de- \nnoting the direction to an object and the extension over it. \nThe use of dm is more confined to poetry, but Kara, has no such \nlimitation. (1) In a local relation : (a) to denote the direction \nof the action to a lower object; (b) to denote extension from \nabove to below, from a higher to a lower object : throughout, \nHirough, over ; (c) in the historians in the sense of e regione, \nover agaijist, opposite to ; \xe2\x80\x94 (2) of time, to denote its extension \nor duration ; \xe2\x80\x94 (3) in a causal sense : (a) to denote purpose and \ndesign ; (b) conformity, and the respect in which anything is con- \nsidered, and hence also a reason: on account of; (c) an indefinite \nmeasure (about) ; (d) the manner; hence also with the distribu- \ntive specifications of number. \n\n(1) (a) ^dWeiv Kara yaffripa {to Strike on the abdomen), and the like in \nHomer. Her. 3, 14. Tropj/eo-cu\' al irapSrfyoi Kara rovs var 4pas {to the fathers \nsitting) ; then of the course of a stream, Kara p6ov, down the stream (see avd). \nHer. 4, 44. (Scylax cum suis) tirXiov Kark ir or a fihy irphs t}w re Ka\\ v\\lov ava^ \nToXks is ^d\\a<r<rav. (b) Her. 3, 109. al ex\'Svai Karanraffay r^y yvv utrt. \nKark yriv, Kara ^d\\a<r<Tay iroptvea^ai {through, over,by). (c) Th. 2,3a \n\n\n\n432 SYNTAX. [\xc2\xa7 293. \n\nKeirai 7j K\xe2\x82\xac<f>aWrjpia Karh *A.Kapvavlav [opposite to). (2) Kar^ rhv av- \nrhv xpiJvoj/, Kara, rhv rr pSr epov ir6\\efioy {during the same time, etc.) ] \n01 Kurd Tiva (contemporaries of any one). (3) (a) Her. 2, 152. Korek Kriiriv \niKirXdlxrauTas {having set sail for the purpose of plunder). Th. Karh biav ^k(ip \n{spectatum venisse). Kara r i ; why? wherefore? (b) Kara ySfiov, Kark \n\\6yov {ad rationem, pro ratione,in conformity with, according to) ] Karh yy^- \nPLfiV t)iv ifii\\v. Her. 2, 3. Karh, rrfv rpo<pT)v ruv iraiScoy rocavra eKeyov \n{in respect to nourishing the boys). Her. 1, 85. Kara rhy Kprfrrjpa ovrws ftrx^- \nKurd r I {in some respect^ quodammodo ) ; k a t\' ovZ 4v, Karatriyr\'a {in no, \nevery respect) ; Kara rovro {hoc respectu, hence propter hoc) ; Th. 1, 60. Kark \n<pi\\lay ainod I \xe2\x96\xa0rr\\e7(rroi iK Kopiv^ov (rrpariwrat i^ekovrod ^vveairoyro {on ac- \ncount of his friendship). Dem. Chers. 90, 2. ots Kara rohs y6fiovs i<p\' vfup \nicriy, \'Srau Pov\\r}(rb\xe2\x82\xac, KoXd^dv {to punish according to the laws). Kark ^6aiy \n(secundum naturam) ; Kara Svvafiiy (according to one\'s ability, to the best ofone^s \nability); Kara Kpdros (with all one\'s might), (c) Kark e^-fiKoyra irrj \n(about sixty years); Kark niKp6y (gradually); Kar* 6\\lyoyf icark roKv. \nKark iroWd (by far), (d) Kadr\' Tjavxiat\' (7"\'^%) I Kark rdxos (quickly) \n<Tvvrvx^o-v (casu, by chance); Kara rh Iffx^poy (per vim, violently) \nKark fie pas (in order, in turn). Her. 6, 79. HiroLvd iari Zvo fiyeai Kar\' &yipa \n(viritim, for each man ); Kark K<afias ( vicatim, by villages) ; Kark firjya (sin- \ngulis mensibus, every months monthly); Kab* r]fi4pay, iy ko^ ey (one after the \nother, one by one, i. e. singly) ; Ka^^ k ir r d, septenu \n\nRemark. Very many verbs compounded with Kard, are constracted with the \nGen. to denote the person who caused the action, and towards whom it is directed, \ne. g. KaraZiKdC^oy, KarayiyyuxTKU), KaraKpiyb), Karay\\rrj<pl^ofiai rivos, to give judgment, \nbring a charge, pass a vote against any one ; Karay\\i(vhoixai rivos, to lie against any \none ; Karay^Ku rivos, to laugh at, to deride one ; Karauppovw rivos., despicio aliquem. \nAn Ace. very frequently stands with these, e. g. Karrryopdy ri rivos, to accuse \none of something, KarayiyvuCKeiv ri (as 6voiay, Kkoirfjy) riyos, Karaxpiyfty riy^s \n^dvaroy, KaradiKd^fiy riyhs ^dvaroy, Karar^-qcpl^ea^^al riyos SfiXlay. \n\n\n\nf 293. (3) *Y7rcp, super ^ over. \n\nI. With the Gen. (1) in a local relation, to denote resting^ \nabiding over or above a place or object (^ 267, Rem.) ; \xe2\x80\x94 (2) in \na causal sense : (a) for, for tlie good of; (b) to denote an inter- \nnal, mental cause, instead of the more usual vtto with the Gen ; \n(c) with verbs of entreating, imploring : for tlve sake of some \none ; (d) to denote cause; in connection with rov and the Inf. \nto denote purpose, wliich by the language is considered as the \ncause; (e) in general to denote in respect to, instead of the \nmore usual -rrept with the Gen. \n\nII. With the Ace. : over, above and beyond, used in relation \nto space and time, and also to measure and number. \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 294.] PREPOSITIONS. McTCt. 435 \n\nL./1) X. C. 3.8,9. 6 ri\\iosrov d4povs vnep 7]fiuv Ka\\ rwv areyuy xopev \nififvoi CKiav avruy Traptx^i {passing over us and the houses). Her. 7. 69. \'Apafiiap \nKcu AlSnoTTwy Tuu vxep Alyvirrov oIkti^^vwv ^px^ \'Ap(TdfM7]s {who dwell above \n^\'jypO- "f\'rfp 3aAa<ro-rjs oIkuu {properly to dwell beyond the sea, i. e. on, Inj \nthe sea). (2) (a) Mox\xe2\x82\xaco-^ai virep t^s varpi^os {to fight in defence of some- \nthing, as if standing over it)\\ 6 virep T^s \'EWdSos bavaTos {death in behalf \nof , for Greece) -J -KoKinvfahai, (rrpaT-nyuy vvip tivos {in aliciijus gratiam) \\ \nv-Ktp rwy irpayfidTuy ffvovhaCfiVySeSoiKeyai vv4p t i v a s {timere alicui) . (b) \nIxkp xfybovs {for, because of grief ). (c) H. w, 466. Kai fiiv iirep irarphs \nAoi firiTtpos i)vK6fioio \\laaeo koI t4k\xe2\x82\xacos {entreat him for the sake of his \nfather, etc. (d) PI. Symp. 208, d. virep apcrrjs aStaudrov Kot Toiavrrjs \n96^715 (if K\\eovs tdvTfs -Kovra -Koiovaiv {on account of , for the sake of imper- \nishable distinction, etc.). Dem. Phil. 1. 52,43. vir\\p rov /it] \'7rabe7v kukus \ntnrh \xe2\x99\xa6lA/nrou {for the purpose of not suffering evil, etc.). \xe2\x80\x94 II. Her. 4, 188. piirre- \noxMTi v-Ktp rhv S6fioy {over the house). Seldom of mere extension, as toTs \nSpa^l rots vvep \'EW-ffsirovToy oiKovtri {the Tliracians dwelling beyond the \nHtllesj)ont, i. e. on the Htllesjtont) ; vrep r^y rjKiKiay {beyond one\'s years, \nage)] vwfp Siyafny {beyond one\'s power); vircp ^ybptairoy {beyond man, \ni. e. beyond what could be expected of him). Her. 5, 64. virep ra reffcrepd \nKovra Ifrrj {beyond, more than, forty years). \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 291. (1) Mcra, icith. \n\nI. McTo, allied to /xcVps {in the middle, betiveen) denotes the \nbeing in the midst of, being among persons or things. With the \nGen., /xcra denotes an intimate connection, a participation, a \nsharing in (comp. /xcrc^ai/) ; the Gen. denotes the ivhole, of \nwliich the subject of the sentence constitutes a j^c^r^; it conse- \nquently diflers from <tvv with the Dat., wliich merely denotes \nthe connection (association) of one object with another, with- \nout the one being considered a part of the other (comp. avvix^iv). \nIt is used (1) in a local relation: in the midst, among ; then to \ndenote an active participation in aid of some one: ivith; \xe2\x80\x94 (2) \nin a causal and figurative sense : (a) to denote the means or^ \nmanner; (b) conformity. \n\n(1) Eur. Ilec. 209. fierik viKpSay Ktitroixai {to lie among the dead, and one\'s \nself to be dead). r\\. Rp. 359, e. Ko^trbai fit rh t a y &\\\\o) v. Merd tivos \nfidxftrbau {to figid in active particijxition with one). Dem. Phil. 3. 117, 24. /i era \nT\xc2\xabv ifSiKtjfjifyuy troKf/jLtTy {to jxirtin\'pate in carrying on war with those who had \nbeen injured). Zhou, arriviu fierd nvos {tobeon the side of one) PL Ep. 467. \ne. aoo^ffoyrou, nerk irpf a $vt 4 pay 7)y\xe2\x82\xacfi6va)y eTrSfievoi (they follow the \nolder leaders, and as it were, hold fast to them ; wholly different from cTreo-^oi \nuerd riya and avy rivi). (2) (a) Th. 1, 18. furii k lySvvuy ras fieX^raa \n\n37 \n\n\n\n434 SYNTAX. [\xc2\xa7 294. \n\nvoioifievoi (i. e. surrounded by, in the midst of dangers). X. C. 3. 5, 8. ^cr\' \nap \xe2\x82\xac T^ s -irpayreveiv (as it were in an intimate connection with virtue). Dem. PhiL \n3. 130, 74- v/J-^i^ 01 Trpoyovoi tovto rh yepas iKT-iftxavTO ko^ KareXmov fierh iro A- \n\\wv Kcd ixeydXcov kivSvvwv. (b) Isocr. Archid. 129, 66. tovs p6fiovs, fi^d\'^ \nu V oiKovvr^s evdaifjLouecrTaToi ruv \'EAA^ywi\' ^<roi\' {agreeably to which, ruu vo/mop \n4x<ifJ-efoi, legihus quasi adhaerentes). PI. Ap, 32, c. /neTa rod t/6fiov koI rov \n5ai Kai ov ^/xrju fiaWov /xe Selt\' SiaKivSweveiv, ^ fie^\' vfiuv y^vitrbcu fjJtf Z\'lKOua \nfiov\\cvo^4v<t}v {in conformity with law and justice). \n\nII. With the Ace. (1) in a local relation : (a) (Poet.) to de- \nnote a direction or motion into the midst of something, a striv- \ning to be united with a person or thing, in a friendly or hostile \nrelation, and generally to denote a succession in space ; (b) to \ndenote a local extension between two objects, in the prose \nphrase ixera x^^po-^ ex^Lv TL, to have something in hand; \xe2\x80\x94 (2) \n(prose and Poet.) to denote succession in time and in order: \nafter, next to, next in order ; \xe2\x80\x94 (3) in a causal sense (only Poet.), \nto denote purpose and conformity. \n\n(1) \'I/ceV^oi fie TO. Tpwas Koi ^hx^iovs {to come into the midst of the Tr \nand Gr.). II. p, 460. aiaacov S>st cuyinrihs /uero xv^\'f-s {among the geese). \nSeldom used of things. II. fi, 37 6. \'6s fxe fie r a.irpr]KTovs cpiSas KoXviiKea \n$d\\K\xe2\x82\xaci {into the midst of contention). Brjvai fiera \'Nearopa {to go to Nestor, \nproperly into a connection with him ) 5 j8^ Se fier\' \'iSofievrja, {to goto Idomen. \nto follow after him, properly to go into the engagement or battle with him ), IL \nV, 297. II. V, 492. KaoX \xe2\x82\xacTrov^\\ wsel re yuera ktiXov ecnrero /xriXa {behind the \nram). (2) Me ret rhv rod iraidhs ^dvaTov, X. {after the death). Merck \nravra {after) ; the Ace. often lias a participle agreeing with it, e. g. Her. 1, 34. \n/U6T& lZ6\\b)va olx^ fi\xe2\x82\xacvov {after the departure of Solon). MeS-\' Tjfiepav \n{interdiu, in the day time, properly after the break of day), X. An. 4. 6, 12. \nKaKe7yo5 ekafie fier" e/xe Sevrepos {second after me), Cy. 2. 2, 4. U6Xiv (e?xov) \nr^v ir\\ov<riaTdT7)v iv t^ \'Atrlif, fie to, Ba^vKuua {the richest next to Babylon), 7. 2, \n11. (3) Od. a, 184. TrXeiv fieTh x^-^*^^^ (<^<^ ^^^ petendum). Eur. Ale. 67. \n\'Eupva\'^ews ireix^avros \'linreiov ixerh oxtjjuo {for, after a chariot). H. o, 52. \nT(p /ce Hoaeiddccv ye . . . al^a p.era(TTpey^eie p6ov fierh, ffhv Kol i/xhy KTJPf \n{agreeably to, according to, your desire and mine). \n\nRemark. Mera is constructed with the Dat. only in poetry, particularly in \nthe Epic, to denote merely local union or association in place ; in prose, eV and \navr are used instead of it. It commonly stands with the plural, or with tho \nsingular of collective nouns ; the words with which it stands may denote per- \nsons, or things considered as such, and the parts or members of animate things, \ne. g. fier\' a^audrois, with, among ; /ierct (rrparS ; fiera X^P""\') "\'<"\'\xe2\x96\xa0 > y^^\'^o\'h T^iM^\'T* \nXaTs {in the midst of), between, /xerk (ppeaiv, in the mind, uera vnvffi, KVfuuri] /lerA \nwyoiys aueuoiQ, Homer. \n\n\n\n*295.] PREPOSITIONS. \xe2\x80\x94 \'A^</)^, Trept\'. \n\n\n\n433 \n\n\n\n5. Prepositions with the Genitive, Dative, and \nAccusative: <1/i<^4 Trept, i-n-i, vapd, -n-pos, vt^\'. \n\n^295. (1) \'Aya</>r and ir^pL \n\n1. The prepositions d/x<^t and ir^pC express nearly the same \nrelations of position: around, about; afji<fii, on both sides, Trcpt, \non all sides; they also agree in their use, though the use of \nafj,<f>L is rarer, and is more Ionic and poetic than -rrepi, which ex- \npresses a far greater variety of relations and has a more gen- \neral application. \n\n2. "Ajx<j>C denotes in general the surrounding of something \n(on both sides), the being near and close to something. \n\nI With the Gen. (1) in a local relation : (a) to denote re- \nmoval from that wliich surrounds (Poet.) ; (b) to denote dwell- \ning or rest around something ($ 287, Rem.), though but seldom; \n\xe2\x80\x94 (2) in a causal sense, to denote the occasion or cause : about, \nfor, on account of, though but seldom in prose, Trcpt with the \nGen. being generally used instead of it. \n\nII. With the Dat. (1) in a local relation (Poet, only), to de- \nnote rest around, at, near, among ; \xe2\x80\x94 (2) in a causal sense (very \nseldom in prose, indeed not at all in Attic prose) : (a) to denote \nthe cause or occasion, as with the Gen., with this difference, \nhowever, that with the Dat., the relation of causality is con- \nsidered as wholly local; (b) to denote an internal and mental \nreason (Poet.). \n\nIII. With the Ace. (1) in a local relation, to denote local \nextension : about, around, on; \xe2\x80\x94 (2) to denote time and number \napproximately or indefinitely ; \xe2\x80\x94 (3) in a causal and figurative \nsense, to denote a mental dwelling upon an object, taking pains, \nand being employed about it. \n\n1.(1) (a) Eur. Or. 1460. a /i<^ 2 \'irop(pvp4wv ir eTr\\ a v ^i(pv<rird<rauTes{ from the \ngarments which were around the sword), (b) Her. 8, 104. a/xcpl TavTTjs oiKcouai \nrrjs ir6\\ios {dwell around this city). (2) Maxea-^ai a^cpl tivos (for, on account \nof some one, or something). X. Cy. 3. 1, 8. fls Kaipbv tiksis, ottws rr^s Siktis o-kov- \na-r)5 irapuv t^s a/i</)i rod nr arpSs (about, relating to your father). 11. (1) Te- \n\\aaoov an (pi ffTn^^traiv (around the breast), II. ^8, 388. \'Ajxcpl KXdSots eCea^at \n(to be surrounded by branches, to sit among). (2) (a) II. tt, 565. a/i<^i vUvi \nKarareStv-n^ri frnx^tr^aL (about, on account of a dead body). II. 7, 157. afi<pl \nyvyaiKl &\\y\xe2\x82\xaca irdax^iy. Her. 6,129. 01 fiVV<Trrip\xe2\x82\xacS epiv elxov afi(pl fiova-iKf). \n\n\n\n436 SYNTAX. [^ 295 \n\n62. <poPr]^\xe2\x82\xac\\s afitpl rf) yvvaiKl {respecting). 3. 32. af^pl t^ davdra \navT^s Si(bs Xiy^rai \\6yos. (bj \'A/i^l (pSficp (prae metu, for, on account of)\\ \nafi<pl ^^fi$ (prae ira). Ill, (1) X. Cj. 6. 2, 11. ((TuAAeycToi) t^ a-Tpdrevfia \nafi(p\\ rhv HaKTwXhv ttot afji6v. 2. 4, 16. re^paxa afi<f>l ri Bpia \n{around, on the borders). Hence also of the persons around any one, as in ol \nafjL<pl Tiva, see \xc2\xa7 263, d. (2) \'A^(^i rhv x^\'M\'i\'\'\'" {about mnter) ] afi<pl \nSei\\r)V {sub vesperam, about twilight); afx<pl rovs fxvplovs (circiter). (3) \n"Ex^iv a,fj.<pi Tt {to be employed about something), e. g. afi<pl Se7iryoy, afitp^ inrouy, \napjxaTa. \n\n3. Ilc/at signifies all round, round, in a circle. \n\nI. With the Gen. (1) in a local relation, to denote dwelling or \nrest around an object. This use of it is confined to poetry, and \neven here is very rare ; comp. k 287, Rem. \xe2\x80\x94 (2) in a causal and \nfigurative sense : (a) to denote the cause or occasion, a respect, \nin a great variety of connections : about, concerning, for, on ac- \ncount of, in respect to; \xe2\x80\x94 (b) to denote a mental cause : for, from, \non account of, prae, though but seldom; (c) to denote the rela- \ntion of a person or thing to that wliich belongs to them, which, \nas it were, surrounds them and refers to them (Gen. of the \npossessor) ; (d) to denote worth and superiority. \n\n(1) Od. e, 68. avrov T\xe2\x82\xacTdvv<TTO irepi (Tireiovs y\\a<pvpo7o vfiepis {there \nthe vine was stretched around the cave). 130. rhv fiev iywv itrdwaa irtp I Tp6irios \nfiefiawTa. (2) (a) Maxefi^a\', d\'jroc^ai\'cri\' irepl T^y irar plSos {for, on account \nof) ; with verbs denoting a physical or mental perception, aKovav, elSfyau, etc., \nwith verbs of saying and asking, e. g. \\4yeiv Trepi rivos, \\6yos irept nvos, with verbs \nof anxiety, fear, and such as express all other affections, e. g. <po$e7(r^ai r^pl \nirarpiSos, imfieMlcr^ai, ^7r<)ue\\6to veplrivos {to /ear for one\'s country). Dem. Phil. \n1,52,43. 7} apxh tov iroX^fxav ycy \xe2\x82\xaci>-qrai irepl rod r ifiup-ffffaffdai ^IXiinroy \n{with respect to talcing vengeance on Philip), (b) Ucpl opyjjs {prae itxi. on ac- \ncount of, because of anger), Th. 4, 130. (c) Ta ire pi t ivos {the affairs, fortune, \ncircumstances of any one, etc.) ; ol ire pi nvos {those belonging to any one, asso- \nciated with him, and as it were surrounding him). Dem. Phil. 1. 50. 36. 4v ro7s \nvepl rod iro\\e /xov koI rrf rovrov irapaffKevi} 6.raKra atravra (sc. itrrly) {in \nmatters piertaining to the war), (d) In the Common language, irepX iroWov, irepl \nv\\ielovos, ircpl 7r\\el(TTov, irepl 6\\lyov, irepl ixdrrovos, irepl eXox^<rroi/, irepl ovSfyhs \niroi\xe2\x82\xaci(T^ai or ijyc7(r^al ri {to value high, higher, etc.) ; so also xcpl iroWov iaruf \nijiuy {of great value). \n\nII. With the Dat. (1) in a local relation, to denote dwelling \nor rest around or near something, Avith the idea of surrounding \nor encircling it (seldom in Attic prose) ; (2) in a causal sense : \n(a) like d/x.^t with the Dat., but much more frequently ; (b) tc \ndenote an exter?ial or interned reason or cause (Poet). \n\n\n\n^ 296.J PREPOSITIONS. \xe2\x80\x94 \'Etti. \n\n\n\n437 \n\n\n\n(1) Her. 7, 61. irepi r^ai /ccc^aAptrt slxov ridpas. PI. Rp. 359, d. irepl \nrv X\xc2\xab\'P* XP^<rovy 5aKT{\'\\iou tpip^iv. (2) (a) Hldx^c^at irepi rivt (for some- \nthing, some one), (Poet.), in prose especially with verbs of fearing: Th. 1, 60. \nlihi6Tis Trepl T(f x<^piv {fearing for the town). 4, 70. SeiVos wepl nJxo- \nwoyvrialois. 6,9. vepl t^ ijxavrov <r<t)fiart oppudu. PI. Phaed. 114. d. \nbappfTiv irept nvi (to he of good courage about something), (b) (Poet.) Ucp\\ \nX^pf^aTi, <p6fia}, ff^eviiy oSvyri (prae, for joy, fear, etc., as it were surrounded by \ntJiem). \n\nIll With the Ace. (1) in a local relation: around, (a) to de- \nnote motion round about something, into tJte circle or vicinity of \nan object (Poet.) ; (b) extension around, in or at, through some- \nthing, with verbs of rest ; \xe2\x80\x94 (2) of time and nmnber stated in- \ndefinitely oi approximately ; \xe2\x80\x94 (3) in a causal or figurative sense, \nto denote a 7?ie7ital dAvelling about an object, taking pains with \nit, being employed about it ; also in respect to. \n\n(1) (a) II. K, 139. iTfpl <pp4vas ij\\v^\' luyfj, the clamor came round his mind; \n(b) Pier. 3, 61. Kafi$v(rp xpo\xc2\xbb"\'C<\'*\'\'\'\'t Trepl AXyv-jTrov iiravi<Tr4arai &v5pe5 Mo- \n704 (round in Egyjit). 7,131. 6 fikv irtpX Uiepl-qv Sierpifie rifiepas ffvxvds. \nTh. 6, 2. tpKOvv ^oii/iKfS ITfpl -Kaaav rrju ^iKcXiav 6.Kpas re iirl rfj ^a\\d(r(rr) \nairo\\afi6yT\xe2\x82\xacs Kod ra iiriKflfieya yrjaiSia (in Sicily around on all the coasts). \nHence ol xcpi riva (those around any one, connected or associated with him) ; at \nirepl n\\dTwva (\xc2\xa7 263, d). Comp. afKpi. (2) Th. 3, 89. Trepi tovtovs \nTovs xp<^*\'oi\'y (about). Tlepl /xvpiovs (about). (3) Oi irepl fiovcriK^p \nHvTfS, ol ircpl T7ji/ yeufjifTpiav SiaTpl^oyTts, ffirovSd^dv irepi ri (those oc- \ncupied about, with music, etc.). ^A/x\xe2\x82\xac\\us ex*"\' \'"\'fp^ riva. X. An. S. 2, 20. \ni^afiaprdyfiu irfpi riva (with respect to). 1. 6, 8. &5ikos irepi riva. C. 1. 1, \n20. (Tu<ppovfiv ITfpl roi/sdfovs. Atirepi Th <rwfj.a r]8oyal] to ire pi t^p \n&per-f]i/ (the essence of virtue, what pertains to it). \n\nV \n\n\xc2\xa7 296. (2) "Etti, upon. \n\nWith the Gen. (1) in a local relation : (a) to denote rest upon \na place or object, bordering on a place, the place being regarded \nas the point of support, that on which the action leans, hence : \nupon, at, 7iear to {k 287, Rem.) ; (b) a direction to a place (^ 273, \nRem. 8) ; \xe2\x80\x94 (2) in a temporal relation to denote the time in or \nduring icJiich something takes place {^ 273, Rem. 12) ; \xe2\x80\x94 (3) in \na causal and figurative sense : (a) with verbs of saying, sivear- \ning and affirming before any one (as it were leaning or resting \non some one) ; (b) to denote the occasion or author, especially \nin the phrase, to he named after some one or some thing; (c) \n\n37* \n\n\n\n438 SYNTAX. [\xc2\xa7 29a \n\nconformity, with verbs signifying to examine, to judge, to con- \nsider, to say, and to show; (d) dependence or resting on some- \nthing, a steadfast abiding by {on) something; (e) the manner ; \n(f ) the purpose, which is then considered by the language, as \nthe cause, with the verb ra^^rjvai, and the hke, to be set over \nsomething, and in certain plirases. \n\n(1) (a) PI. Menex. 246, d. oir\' iirl yris, oij^ inrh yrjs. Her. 7, 111. rh \n(iavT-fjiou TovTO icTTi iirl Twv ov pewv t uu v\\pT]\\oTdTuv, 6. 129. 4tI \nrrjs TpaTre(ris opx\'ho\'aTO (danced upon the table). 2, 35. ra &x^fa ol fiey \ndudpes eirt tuv KecpaKeoju (popeovai, ai 5e yvvaiKiS iirl rwv Hfiuy. X. \nAn. 4. 3, 28. aevocpwu irffii^as iryy^Xov Ke\\evfi (avrovs) avTov fjulvau eiri tov \nTTorafiov (at, near the river), (b) Th. 1, 116. irKeTv iirl ^dfiov {to sail /or \nSamos). X. Cy. 7. 2, 1. iirl-^dpdeui^ (pevjfiv. Dera. Phil. 3. 123, 48. ara- \nXapeTj/ iir\' oXkov [to return homewards). (2) Her. 6,98. iirl Aapciov 4y4f- \n\xe2\x82\xacTo ir\\4(a KaKCL Tp \'EAAaSi (in the time of, during the reign of Darius). X- Cy. 1. \n6, 31. iirl tS)V f) /xer e puv it poy 6vu)V. So ^ir\' ifiov, 4<p>^ rifiuUf e<p\' \nV [jiwv (mea, nostra, vestra memoi-ia, in, within my memory, etc.). The Gen. often \nstands in connection with a participle, but ahvays with the present ; hence M \noften denotes the duration of time, e. g. ^ttI Kvpov $a(ri\\fvovros (during \nthe reign of Cyrus). (3) (a.) A4yeiu iirl diKacrr uv, iirl fiaprvpoty {be/ore, \nin the presence o/^ properly, resting or leaning upon). Dem. Cor. ^w^tJo-oKro \niirl Tuv ar paTTfyu V (took an oath in the presence of the generals). Similar to \nthe preceding is, Her 9, 11, elirav in opKov (said on oaih^ quasi substralo vel \nsupposito jurejurando xining or resting on the oath), (b) KaXilabau iiri r ivos \n(to he called after one). Her. 7, 40. HicraLoi KoXiovrai tinroi iirl to OSc (for this \nreason). 74. iwl AuSoO rod "At vo s eaxov r^y iirwyvfilr}v. Trjy iiruyvfjuay \niroieltr^ai iirl riyos (to be called, to take a surname from one). \'Etp\' tavrov (of \ncne^s own accord, sua sponte) ; ^Tri irpotpdffeajs (simulatione, under pretext). Aiyeiw \niiri Tiyos (dicere de aliqua re). PI. Charm. 155, d. iirl rod KaKov Ktyup \niraiSSs. (c) ZrjTeTy ri iirl tivos, Kpiynv\'Ti iirl rivos, aKoirely ri cri Tt- \nyos, Keyeiy Tt iiri riv as, \xe2\x82\xacVtSeI|a/ rt iiri t lyos, etc. (to judge something accord\' \ning to a thing or person, as it were resting upon). PI. Rp. 597, b. fiovXei ody, tipTjv, \niir\' avruy rovrwy rhy ynfitfr^y rovroy ^vTTjaw/ifi\', ris vor\' itrriy ; (visne,ad \nhaec ipsa imitatorem istum exigamus?) (d)\'l.</)\' eavTov^ kavrSiyy iifiwy ah- \nT civ, \xe2\x82\xac avTTJs (by one^s self, separately, of one^s own accord, properly, resting or \ndepending on one\'s self, independent of others). X. An. 2. 4. 10. oj^EAAtji\'m \nvcpopwyres Tovs $ap^dpovs avTol i (p" kavruy ix^P*^"" vy^M-^*\'o-5 ^X^*^^^ i\'^^^^\'^^ \nby thetnselves). Her. 5, 98. oiKeoyras tTis ^pvyiris x^pov Tf kcu Kafxijy iv eau- \nT(cy (by themselves). 4, 114. olKiwuev in tjufioy aifruy. Here seems to \nbelong the phrase so frequently found in the Attic historians: \'E^\' evrfs, \niirl Tpi&y, TCTrdpay rerdx^cu, arrival, one, two, three men deep or in file, \nproperly to be placed or stand on one, the row resting or leaning on one \netc.). Dem. Phil. 1.42, 7. h-v koL ifxels iirl rrjs rotavrris i^\\-fi<ntr\xe2\x82\xac ytv \n4tr^cu yv^ixi]s (firmiter adhaerere huic ratio7ii). 9. (^iXiirros) ovx ot6s r itrrivf \n\n\n\n\\ 296.] PREPOSITIONS. \xe2\x80\x94 Etti. 439 \n\n^Xc" ^ KOTto-TpoTTToi, n4v\xe2\x82\xaciv iirl T V T CO V {caunot remain with, satisfied with \nthose things which he lias conquered). Phil. 2. 66, 3. KwXixrair Uv iKehov Trpdr- \nr^iv toCto, e<^\' wv e<TTi vvv {quibus nunc studet). So fiei/eiu 4irl avoias. (e) \nDem. Cor. 230, 17. ovt\xe2\x82\xac BiKaius, ovt ex* aK-nS^ das ovSenias elp-nfieva \n{stated neither with justice nor in adherence to the truth, as it were, resting on \ntruth), (f) Her. 5, 109. iir" ov irdx^ficu (cui rei praefecti sumus) . Dem. Cor. \n266, 118. ivl rov ^ ewpiKov KaTaa-ToSfeis (placed over the theatre-money). \nHence ad iirl ruv irpay fidr wy [those placed over business, those at the head of \naffairs). \n\nII. With the Dat., (1) in a local relation: (a) to denote the \ntarrying or resting upon, or (b) more frequently, at, hy or near a \nplace or object ; \xe2\x80\x94 (2) of time (mostly only poetic) ; \xe2\x80\x94 (3) in a \ncausal and figurative sense : (a) to denote dependence : penes, \nin the power of; \xe2\x80\x94 (b) a condition under which something takes \nplace ; (c) the purpose, design, or determination ; (d) the goal or \nlimit ; (c) the reason, \\vith verbs expressing an affection of the \nmind (^ 285, Rem. 1)., \n\n(1) (a) Th. 1, 56. [TioriZaiarai) oiKOvaiy iir\\ rip \'Icr^/i^ ttjs UaXX\'fjvrjs. X. \nAn. 7. 4, 4. Oi Sp^KfS rir aAa>7re\xc2\xbb((5os itrl rois k \xe2\x82\xac<p aXals (popovffi Kal to7s \nctffi, Kol C^ipas fifXP^ \'^\'^^ voBu)v hr\\ tcov Xinroov exovffiv, wear fox-skin caps on \ntheir heads and ears, and have cloaks reaching to their feet when upon their horses \n{ivi with the Dat. purely local, but iir\\ rwv linrwv, inasmuch as the horses are \nconsidered as active), (b) Her. 7,89. ol *oiyiK\xe2\x82\xacs rh waXaihv oXk^op cTrt rp \n*Epvdpf} ^a\\d<r<rr) (u}x>n, by). So also where one thing is said to be along \nwith another, or in addition to it, e. g. ia-yieiu eiri tw a-lrw 6\\pov [to eat the \ntn^ov with bread) ; ittX r<^ airtp Tciveiu {to drink icith one\'s food) ; iirl t fj kv- \n\\iKt ifhfiv {to sing over one\'s cups). Hence, iir\\ tovtois (upon, in addition \nto this, i. e. besides) ; finally it is also used to denote a succession of things in \ntime and space. Od. \xc2\xbbj, 120. iJyx*^ ^""^ oyxf\'V yvp<^<^K^\'\' (pear on pear). X. \nCy. 2. 3, 7. ii/eo-TTj ^ir\' avrtp *(pav\\as (after him). ^6vos iirl <p6va (murder \nupon muraar), Eur. (2) \'Exi wktX (II. b, 529), in, during the night, comp. \n4 283, 3, (b). (3) (a) Dem. Chers, 90, 2. \xe2\x82\xac<^\' u/ilv eVrt (tovtovs) KoKaC^iv \n{penes vos, it is in your power, tic), (b) \'EttI rovrai, i-rr\' ovSeyl (hac, nulla \nconditione, nullo pacto, on this condition, etc.). Her. 3, 83. eTrl tovtco inre^i<XTa- \n(xcu rris apxvs, ir yre vt ovSeyhs v/xeajv ip^o/xai. Hence of price, e. g. iirl \nfinr!^^ {on condition of for, a reivard) ; iirl /xeydKois toko is SaueiCear^ai \n{to borrow mt hi(/h interest); iirl irocta (at what price), (c) Her. 1,68. eTri KaK(^ \nkv^pdnrov <rlSr}pos apfvpriTou (in perniciem hominis). So iirl tovtS (hoc con- \nsilio. for this jnajyose^ with this design). X. S. 1,5. Upwrayopa ttoXv apyvpioy \nBfSuKai iirl <ro<pi<f (ad discendam sapientiam). PI. Ap. 20, e. j/zeuSerat re \nKtd ewi Sia$o\\^ rp ifi^ Xtyei. Hence oi iirl rals p.r]xava7s (those \nplaced over the machines) ; ol iirl to7s irpdy fj. a cri (those intrusted with business); \nirl ry ^etapiK^ &y {charged with the money for the public sJiows). Dem. Cor. \n\n\n\n440 SYNTAX. [^ 297. \n\n264, 113. (d) A.ey\xe2\x82\xaciv iirl rtvi {to pronounce a eulogy on one); vS/mvs ^ecr^a, \n4 IT I rivi (for). And so ovofidCeiv or koX^Iv ri eiri Ttvi {nomen cdicui impo- \nnere, to call a person or thing something). PL Ep. 470, b. iirl fiev rp rod oiK^iov \n\xe2\x82\xacX3^po crrdcTis KeKATjrat, iirl 5e ttj tov aWorpiov \'ir6\\\xe2\x82\xacfjU)S {to hostility at home^ \nthe name insurrection was given, i. e. hostility at home was called insurrection^ that \naI)road, war). Also, against, in a hostile sense. Her. 6, 88. t^ irav nrjxo-viiiTa- \nff^ai iir Alyiy-fjT-pai {against the Aeginetans). Th. 1, 102. rrjv yeyofieyriv \niirl r (f M-fidca ^v^ifxaxio-V- (e) TeKav, fiiya (ppouuu, fxalviabau^ ayovcucTeii\', etc. \niiri T ipi {to laugh at, he greatly elated at, etc.). \n\nIII. With the Ace, (1) in a local relation: (a) to denote the \nlocal limit, the direction or motion to or upon a place or object; \n(b) extension over an object: over, upon; \xe2\x80\x94 (2) of time : (a) to \ndenote the temporal limit (up to, till), also the limit of quantity \n(about) ; (b) extension over a period of time (during) ; \xe2\x80\x94 (3) in \na causal and figurative sense : (a) to denote purpose, design ; \n(b) conformity, m,anner ; (c) in respect to. \n\n(1) (a) ^Avafiaiveiv ^<^\' lirirov, inl ^p6vov. Fl. Crit.112, e. {ol \'ASri]va2oi) \niirl IT a a a V E v p d ir rj v Kol \'Aa lau Hard re (TUfidTocy KdWrj koI Karh rriv rSey \n^vx^iv iravTOiav apiT))v i\\x6yifioi ?i(rau {over all Europe, etc.). \'Eirl Se^id, ii^ \napiffrcpd {upon the right, left, to the right, left). (2) (a) *E^\' fcrirepav {until \nevening)] (b) eiri voWas rj/jiepas, icp* f]fjiepav. Th. 4, 1. rh \'Priyioy 4irl \nrroKvv xpt^i/ov ia-Tcuria^e {for a long time). 94. ol 6w\\7Tai iirl oktw irav rh \neiparSTre\'Sor ird^avro {by eights, eight in Jile). \'EttI fifya, iroXh, irXfoy, fui^w^ \n/xaWov, ixaxp6v, eVl r6(xov, i(p^ Zaov (greatly, especially, muck rather, etc.). Terdx- \nSfai iirl iroWovs {many in Jile). (3) (a) Her. 1.37. iirl b-f]pav Uvcu {venatum \nire). 3, 14. iirl vSwp Uvat {aquatum ire). Hence iirl ri; wherefore? In a \nhostile sense, e. g. arparev^trbai iirl AvSovs {u^wn, against the Lydians) ; iXai- \nV\xe2\x82\xaciv iirl Ilepcros; (b) iir Xaa {equally, in the same tcay). Her. 3, 71. tV \niTTtx^ipV^^^^ Tavr-qu fj.^ ovro) ffvvrdxwe a^ovXws, aW* ivl rh (roxppovftrrepoy \noutV xdfiPave {more according to reflection, more considerately), (c) PI. Rp. 370, \nh. 5ta(lr\xe2\x82\xacpa>y iirl "trpa^iy. Thin i fie {quod ad me attinet). \n\n\n\n$297. (3) Uapd, hy,near.\\ \n\nIlapa denotes nearness to sometliing: hy tJie sule of, by, near. \n\nI. With the Gen. (1) in a local relation ^vith verbs of going \nand coming, to denote a removal from near a person (Poet, \nalso from near a tlimg) ; \xe2\x80\x94 (2) in a causal sense, to denote the \nauthor. \n\n\n\n(1) \'EA.^67j/ trap a r ivosy like the French de chez quelqu\'un {from near \none, from some one). (2) (a) yet almost purely local: Her. 8. 140. 077CA/17 ^(e\xc2\xab \n\n\n\n\n\n\n1297.] PROPOSITIONS.\xe2\x80\x94 rtapa. 441 \n\nnap a fia<ri\\rios {comes from the king, with the accompanying idea that it was \ndone by his direction). So wapd is regularly used of ambassadors, e. g. &yy\xe2\x82\xac\\oi, \nirpeafiets trap a. rivos, h.yy4XKeiv irapd Tiuos,rh nap 6. tivos {the commis- \nsion, command, etc., from any one) ; (b) with passive verbs (see \xc2\xa7 251, Eem. 4) ; \n(c) with verbs of learning and hearing, e. g. fiauStdu^iv irapd nvos, aKovuu irapd \nTiuos] (d) nap\' eavTov, eavTuv {sua sponte, of one^s oion accord); (e) -w-ith \nverbs of giving and the like, e.g.irap eavrov SiSomi {from himself, i. e. from \nhis own resources). \n\nII. With the Dat. (1) in a local relation, to denote chvelling \nor rest near a person (Poet, also near a thing) ; \xe2\x80\x94 (2) in a causal \nor figurative sense, to denote the possessor; then also in relation \nto the judgment or opinion of a person. \n\n(1) "EoTTj irapk rep Pa<Ti\\e7. (2) UoWh xP^Moto irapa rtp ^a(ri\\ti \n^v. Her. 3, 160. irapa. Aapfiw KpjTp {judice Dario, in the opinion of). 1, \n32. Trap\' ifioi (meo judicio, in my opinion). 86. rovs irapa (T(pi(Ti avToTai \nioKfoyras oK^iovs. Dem, 01. 1. 18, 3. roaovrw ^avixaffrSrepos iraph, iraai vo- \nfii^erai {6 4\xc2\xbb/Atinroj). \n\nIII. With the Ace. (1) in a local relation : (a) to denote a \ndirection or motion to a person so as to come beside or near \n(Poet., also of a thing) ; (b) a direction or motion near a place \nand by or beyond it: along, along by, by, beyond; (c) extension \nnear a place or object (along, per), generally to denote indefi- \nnite nearness (by) \\ \xe2\x80\x94 (2) of time, to denote its extension \n(during) ; \xe2\x80\x94 (3) in a causal and figurative sense : (a) to denote \ndependence, the possessor (penes) ; (b) a comparison and estima- \ntion ; hence (c) conformity, with verbs of considering, showing, \nand the like ; (d) a reckon or cause (wholly X^^propter, by vir- \ntue of, on account of) \n\n(1) (a) Her. 1, 36. ^6Kuiv is Alywrrov Mkcto irapk\'\'Afia<riu Koi dr] Koi es \n2ap5ij irapa Kpolffoy. (b) Hapek r^y Ba^vKuva irapUvai {along, near, \nby Babylon). From this have originated various ethical expressions, e. g. iraph \nfioTpav {near fate and by it, i. e. against, contrary to fate) ; Trapa 5oV {praeter opin- \nionem, contrary to expectation) ; vap\' i\\irlSa, irapct (piaiv, iraph. rh S\'lKaioy, irapk rohs \nZpKOvs, irapa Uvafiiv. (It is the opposite of Kard, e. g. Karh. fiolpav, Uvafxiv, ac-^ \ncording to.) Hence it has also the signification of besides, praeter, e.g. irapk \nravra {praeter haec) ; (c) Her. 9, 15. irapk rhv \'A<r<.ir6u {along th^ Asopus). \nDem. 01. 1. 24, 22. ^ r{>xn ^apk irdvr icrX -rk rwv h.v^p<!>^^u irpdyfiara \n(l^er omnes res dominatur). Her. 4, 87. olros KareXdcpSrn -rrapk rhu vi\\6v \n(near), ^ri^va^ irapd rxra (and ,rap\xc2\xab\xc2\xa3 nui). (2) Uap ^ f.4pay, irapk \nrhy ir6\\,tioy {during); irapk r^y ir6<Tiy {inter potandum, while drinking), \n80 also of single points of time, during which something takes place, e. g. \n\n\n\n442 SYNTAX. [^ 298 \n\njrau\' avrhv rhv Kivdwov {in ipso discriminis tempore, in the very moment qf \ndanger). (3) (a) Isocr, Archid. 126. wfioKoyelTo traph. tovtov yevtar^ai t^w \ntrayrrfpiau avrols {constabat, in hoc its positam esse salutem, tfiat their safety depended \non him). Her. 8, 140. irvy^duea-^e ttjv vvi/ irap" e/xe iovaav Svyajjuy (is in my \npower, with me), (b) Her. 7, 20. Sisn H-\'^tc rhv A(tpiiov ((rT6\\ov) rhv iirX \'S.kv^o.s \nTrap a rovrov (sc. rhi^ <rT6\\oy) fi-qSey (paivea^ou {in comparison with this). So \ntrap\' oKlyov iroie7(r^ai ri {to make of little account). IIop\' oXlyov., xapa \nfji.iKp.6v, fipax^i nearly, almost, irapa iroKv, by far, vap\' ouSej/ ri^iabau^ \n[to make no account of) ; after comparatives and expressions implying compari- \nson, as &Wos, erepos, Zid<popos. Th. 1, 23. riXiov iKKii^ns wkv 6r e pai iraph. \nrh 4k rov irpXv xp^^ov fjLur]fiovev6[i\xe2\x82\xacva {more frequent in comparison with those men- \ntioned in former times). PL Phaed. 93, a. oi/Ze fiTjif ttokIv n, ovSe ri vaax^i\'V SA. Ao \nirap h Uv eKeiva ^ iroifj ^ itdaxV\' Hence of alternations: VH-tpa trap\' rnxtpap \n{one day in distinction from another, day by day, every other day, altemis diehus, also \n\xe2\x80\xa2nap\' 7)fj.\xe2\x82\xacpav alone). Often with the accompanying idea of preference, prae, \npraeter. X. C. 1.4, 14. iraph r h &\\\\a C\'i\'\'** wsirep ^eoi, ol iy^ponroi 0iorf6- \nov<rt {in comparison with, beyond, other animals), (c) \'Opu, aKoiru n rap 6.\\Ko \nri {to consider something in conformity with another thing, in comparison with it, \nproperly, holding it near to something). Dem. Aph. 1. 824,34. vapa rhv \\6- \nyov, hv aTTocpepovcriu, eViSei\'lw {in conformity icith, properly, holding an object near \nto another.) (d) Dem. 1.43, 14. ov5( ^iKiinros vapa r^y aurou ^ a> fii] y tocov- \nrou iircv^riTai, o (T y irapa r^y ij/xfr 4 pay ifXfKf tay {on account of his oxen \nstrength). So iraph tout a, propterea, irap" 8, quapropter. \n\n\n\n$ 298. (4) Hpos, before. \n\nUp OS (formed from Trpo\'), denotes before, in the presence oj. \n\nI. With the Gen. (1) in a local relation, to denote a direction \nor motion from the presence of an object, especially from the \nsituation of a place ; \xe2\x80\x94 (2) in a causal relation, to denote an \nactive person, as it were an outgoing from the presence of a \nperson exercising power, or of an object considered as a person, \n(a) of derivation ; (b) of a person or thing to whom or wliich \nsomething belongs {qualiiy, peculiarity) [k 273, 2, (c) (a)] ; (c) \nof til t author or cause* \n\n(1) Her. 3, 101. oIkIoviti irphs y6rov ayefiov {toward the south, properly \nfrom the south). Comp. a meridie instead of ad meridiem. 107. -rphs ixcvTifi.- \nfipivs ^Apafiiij iarl {lies towards the south). X. An. 2. 2, 4. hrar^ rf rryovfU- \nvtp, rh fihy viro(vyia ^x***^^^ irphs rod rorafiov {towards, on). (2) (a) vphs \nirar pos, irphs ixr\\T p6s {on the father\'s or mother\'s side). {\\>) Tlphs yvvaixit \n4(TTi {it is the manner of tvomen) ; vphs SiKijs iarlv {it is conformable to justice). \nX. An. 1. 2, 11. ovK ^y irphs rov Kvpov rp6irov, ^xoyra /itJj axoSiSSytu {uxu \nnot in accordance with the custom of Cyrus). Antiph. 2. 121, 2. ij fity ^a riv \n\n\n\nk 298 1 PREPOSITIONS. \xe2\x80\x94 IIpos. 443 \n\nirpox^eWo)!/ irphs rwv \\\xe2\x82\xacy\xe2\x82\xaciv Svvafieyup iariu, tj Se o\\^;^\xe2\x82\xacta irphs tup \nSlKoia Kol 8<rto v pn<rcr6vra}v. Also, thai irp6s tiuos {to stand or be on the \nside of one). Th. 4. 92. xpn TrtfTTcixrauTas rtf St^cf irphs vH-oiv eceo-^at, dfiScre \nXwpJja-oi Tois iToKcfjiiots {trustinfj in God that he will be on our side). Hence PI. \nHipp. 1, 285, b. SoKus fioi rhv \\6yov irphs 6>ou \\eyeiv {for my advantage). \n(c) to receive, to have something from some one, then with passive verbs (\xc2\xa7251, \nRem. 4), intransitive {\xc2\xa7 249, 3), and in phrases of a passive sense. Her. 2, 139. \nKCUtSv Ti irphs ^eeov f} irphs av^pdirwy XafJL^dveiv. X. An. 7. C, 33. ex^v \nimnvou TToKvv irphs vyLwv a.ir(iropeu6fj.7}u [having much praise from you). Her, \n1. 61. OLTifJid^ea-^ai irphs Tie i(r ktt par ov. X. An. 1. 9, 20. <pl\\ovs d/xoXoyeiTai \nKvpos irphs irduTuv Kparia-ros Stj yeveaSiai ^epaireveiv {is admitted by all). Oec. \n\n4, 2. ou ficwavaiKod Kakovixfucu aSo^ovvTai wphs t S>v ir6\\eu)v {are held in no esteem \nby the cities). Her. l,73.TaOTa irphs Kva^dpew ira^6vTes {from Cyaxeres). 7, \n\n5. aTpoTTjXaTcc ^irt ray \'A^i/as, Iva \\6yos are exv irphs av^ pciir oov aya^os \n(ut laudcris ab hominibus, as it were, iVi the presence of men). With forms of swear- \ning and protestatioa, e. g. irphs ^ewy {per deos, properly, bef)re the gods). \n\n11. With the Dat., to denote dwelling or rest near or b\'t/ an \nobject; also of being busily engaged in or tvith a thing; finally, \nin the sense of besides, in addition to (praeter). \n\nTh. 2, 79. is fidxv^ Ka^l(rrayrai ot \'A^vatoj irphs aurfj rf} irSXei. \xc2\xa3?va(, \nyiyvfor^cu irphs vpdy fiaff i Tiphs rovro), irphs tovtols {praeter ea). \n\nIIL With the Ace, (1) in a local relation: (a) of the situation \nof a place : towards [where the Gen. also may be used, see No. I, \n(1)]; (b) of the direction to persons, or things considered as \npersons, sometimes also to places, both in a friendly and in \nhostile relation; (c) of extetision; \xe2\x80\x94 (2) to denote time indefi- \nnitely ; \xe2\x80\x94 (3) causal and figurative : (a) to denote the purpose \nor object ; (b) conformity ; hence (c) the reason or cause (prop- \nter) ; (d) a comparison, for the most part with the accompanying \nidea of^ sujjeriority or preference (prae, praeter); (e) in respect to. \n\n{l){a) Tlphs fxf(n)fi.fiplav, wphs e<rirepa\xc2\xab {towards). Th. 2, 55. {v yv) \nirphs neKoir6yyii(roy 6p^ (b) X. An. 5. 7, 20. epxoyrai irphs v^ias {to \nus, properly, come before us). 7. 6, 6. u/iels irpwl H^oixev irphs avr ovs. 5. 4, 5. \nSuuru^yai &ov\\6fxfda irphs r^y \'E\\Aa5o(i.e. irphs robs "EAATji/oy, to go in safety \nto Greece). Aeyeiy, ayopeveiv, i^eTd^eiv ti irpos Tiva [to speak before, to one) \\ \nrroydds, av/maxiav iroif^a^ai irp6s Tiya {with one); fMdxf<y^o.h iroKffxeTy irp6s \nriva {against one). These phrases everj\'where imply the meaning to come \ninto the presence of, before the fac6 of any one ; also, \\oyiCf<r^ah (TKe^\\>a<TSrai, a-Ko- \nv\xc2\xab7y, iydvfi.e7aS>cu -rphs ^avT6y {secum reputare) ; likewise, {:ZwKpdTr]s^y) \nvphs x\xc2\xab*M\xc2\xab\xc2\xbb\'\xc2\xab foJ \xe2\x96\xa0^f\'pos Ka\\ irdvTas ithvovs KapTepLKWTaros {against), \nX. C. 1. 2, 1. (c) ^wKpdTvs ye Kal irphs rohs &\\\\ovs ay^p<S>irovs K6aao* \n\n\n\n444 SYNTAX. [$ 299 \n\nTp ir6\\ei irapeix^ (aviong other men, etc. the preposition here extending the idea) \nibid. 61. (2) Jlphs riix4pav (towards daybreak). (3) (a) Dem. Phil. 2. 71, \n23. TravToSoTTo evprifxei/a Tois \'ir6\\\xe2\x82\xac(n irphs <pv\\a ktiv Kcd auTT^piav (for a guard, \netc.); (b) Her. 1, 38. irphs r)]V 6\\piv ravTrjv rhv ydfiov Tovroy ea-irevaa (in \naccordance unth this view). So Kpiv^iv n irpos t\xc2\xbb, Ae-yeij/ irphs xapip, irphs \nrh rjSv, irphs rh aya^Sy. Also, irphs filav (violently, against the will), \nirphs cvdyK7}y, irphs T)hov4\\v, irphs aKpi^f lav (accurately, in conformity \nwith accuracy, etc.). (c) Tlphs ravra (properly, in accordance with this, hence \nfor this reason, therefore), (d) X. 3. 5, 4. ^ Tuy \'A^yaicoy 56^a (reraireiywTcu) \nirphs Tovs Boiur ov s (in comparison with the renown of the Boeotians). So \nalso to denote an exchange, e. g. PI. Phaed. 69, a. 7}Soyas irphs rtSovhs koI \n\\viras irphs \\viras Kal <p6^oy irphs <f>6Poy KaToXKarTiff^ai, kolL fifl^u irphs \nixdrru, iSisirep uo/xicrfxaTa {to exchanye pleasures for pleasures, etc.). (e) 2ko- \nTreTj/, fi\\4ireiy irp6s ti (to consider with respect to something); Sicupfptiy irphs \naperiiy, Kokhs irphs SpSfxoy, irphs ird\\i]y, TeKeos irphs apiri^v. \n\n\n\n, k 299. (5) *Y7ro, suh, under. \n\nI. With the Gen. (1) in a local relation : (a) to denote a mo- \ntion out from a lower j)lace : forth from under, away from under \n(more obvious in the Horn, vttck with Gen.) ; (b) to denote a \nquiet rest under an object ($ 287, Rem.) ; \xe2\x80\x94 (2) in a causal and \nfigurative sense : (a) to denote the autlior with passive and in- \ntransitive verbs (^ 254, Rem. 4) ; (b) an outward or inward \n{mental) occasion, influence; (c) a mere instrumental cause, \nmeans, manner. \n\n(1) (a) Od. 1, 140. avTh.0 M. Kparhs Xififvos f>(ii kyXoubv vScep, Kp4\\ni uiri \ncirclovs (from under the grotto). 17, 5. virh air-fiyijs \\vfiy \'mrovs (from under \nthe chariot). X. An. 6.4,25. (Hevo^cDc) AojSwv 0ovy virh a/xd^rji tripayuurdfi- \neyos ifio-fj^ei. (b) II. i^-, 13. e\\wy fxiy plif/u is Tdprapov . . . fixi ^d^urrov virh \nX^oy6s ia-Ti fiepebpov (under the earth). \'Tirh yris olKf7y. (2) (a) Kxtiycff- \n^ai vir6 Tivo:, airo^avflv viro riyos (to be slain by one), (b) X. An. 5. 1, \n15. Ae\'liTTTTos aire^av^y virh N iKdySpov. 7. 7,23. fieya fioi SoKfi e5 OKOVfiy \nvirh av^puiirwy (to hear himself well spoken of by men). 3. 4, 11. airu>\\\xc2\xabray \nr^jy apxhv virh Uep<rS>v MtjSoi (lost the government by the Persians = spoliati \nsunt imperio a P.). 7. 2, 22. ouTiay cx" "\'t*^ riyos (= accusor ab aliguo). Her. \n3, 104. virh Tov Kavfiaros oi /uupjUTj/ces d^aye\'es ylvovrai irrh yijy (under the in- \nf Hence of the heat, on account of the heat). Th. 2, 85. virh aviixvv #foi uri \nairKoias iySierpi^ev ovk 6\\iyoy xP^^\'ov (on account of the winds, etc.). \'Tt* \naydyKifs (from necessity). "Tirh fxe^rfs fialyeff^cu, PI. Tirh plyovs. Her. \n1, 85. virh heovs Koi kukov (pcuv^v ^^h^^ (spoke from fear and grief ). So \nvirh xapns, <p^ovov, bpyrjs, aireipias, troKpp o(rv vijs, a<ppo<Tvyi]S, etc \nIc) Her. 7, 21. Upvaaov virh fiaffrlywy (dug under the /asA, that being the \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 300.] PREPOSITIONS. \xe2\x80\xa2Ytto. \n\n\n\n445 \n\n\n\nmeans) ; also of persons : 9, 98. utt b K-hpvKos irporiySpeve {under the help of the \nherald, i. e. praeconis voce) ; particularly of the accompaniment of musical in- \nstruments, e. g. Her. 1, 17. iarpaT^i^ro hrh a aKvify wv. So uir\' ahXov \njcopevuvj vvh (pop/xiyyuv, vnh rv/iirdvuvy etc. \n\nII. With the Dat. (1) in a local relation, to denote a quiet \nrest under an object ;\xe2\x80\x94 (2) causal and figurative : (a) to denote \nthe author (almost exclusively poetic, see k 251, Rem. 4) ; (b) \nto denote the means, as with the Gen., but only Poet. ; (c) to \ndenote subjection. \n\n(1) \'Tiri 7^ cTvoi; with mountains, at the foot of e.g. virh Tix(l>\\co {at the \nfoot of Tmolus). \'Tirh Tip \'T/ir7<r<ry. (2) (a) AaiJ.r>uai vTr6 ri v i, Trlirreiv \nvv6 rivt {to he conquered by one, etc.), Hom. (b) \'Ttt^ ^ap^lrw xopeuetj/, \nvtr\' avA^, etc. (to dance to or by the music of the lyre), (c) Uoieii/ ri vtt6 rivi \n{to subject something to one), and voie7<T^ai ri v<p\' loury (to subject something to \none\'s self sibi suhjicerc). Her. 7, 157. tV \'EAAoSa vir euvrcp iroiriaraabai. Th. \n1,110. Myxnrros vvh fia(ri\\e7 iyiviro {icas under the power of the king). "Si. \nCy. 8. 8, 1. Kvpos Tovs v<p\' eavrtf &sirfp eavrov iraTSas irifxa {those subject to \nhim). \n\nIII. With the Ace. (1) in a local relation : (a) to denote the \naim, direction or motion towards and under ; (b) extension under \nan object; \xe2\x80\x94 (2) of time: (a) in an indefinite specification of \ntime (approach to a point of time) ; (b) extension in time \n(during) ; \xe2\x80\x94 (3) causal, to denote subjection. \n\n(1) (ia) *I(W. iiirh yrjy {to go under). X. An. 1. 10, 14. virh aiirhu {rhy \n\\6<poy) <rT4;aQj rh arpdr^vfiairffji\'irfi Avkiov. (b) Her. 2, 127. v-ir^cri diK-fifiara \niwh yrjy {are under the earth). 5. 10. ret virh r^v &pKTov aoiKvra So/ce\xc2\xab \nthou {the parts beneath the north pole). X. An. 7. 4, 5. ii/ Ta7s inrh rh opos k(Io- \nfiats. (2) (a) \'Tir^ yvKxa {sub noctem, towards)] virh t^v irpdr-qv eireX- \nbovaay yvtcTa; so also vk6 ti {aliquatenus, in some measure), (b) Her. 9, 51. \nvirh T^v yvKra {during). (3) X. Cy. 1. 5, 3. {6 "Atra-vplwy fia(n\\eus) Biairf/x- \nffi irpos re robs v<p* iavrhv irdyras, Koi irphs Kpoiaov. 6.2. 11. b avAXoyos \nTwy irrh fiaa i\\ea fiap^dpuy. \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 300. Remarks on Peculiarities in the use of the \n\nPrepositions. \n\n1. The proper prepositions were originally (except ws, to) adverbs of place \n(\xc2\xa7 286, Rem. 2), i. e. they denote the local relation of an action ; in this way \nnearly all are very often used in the Homeric language. This use is also fre- \nquent in Herodotus, but in good Attic prose, only irphs 5e, /col \xe2\x96\xa0irp6si praeterea \n\n38 \n\n\n\n446 SYNTAX. [^ 300 \n\nOd. ^, 40. iroWhy yap airh irKvvol flat v6Kt)os, i, 116 \xe2\x80\x94 118. vricros \xe2\x80\x94 reri- \nyvarai u\\\'f)\xe2\x82\xac<ro\'\', iv 5\' alyes aTreipeariau yeydauriy &ypiai. Also in Her., e. g. 3, 39 \n4v 5e 5^ Kot AixT^iovs elAe (among them, i. e. in Us). II. <r, 562. fieKavfs S\' aui \nfi6Tpves ?t(Tav [grapes were thereon). Od. i, 184. xepi 5" av\\T\\ inprfhrt SeSfnjro ku- \nrupvx^ecrari \\i^oi(Tiu. a, 66. hs ire pi fikv v6ov iarX ^poruv {he is beyond, i. e. eminent \nabove). ^, 44. t<^ yAp ^a ^ehs vepl Swkcv aoiSrii/ {in a special manner, especially). \nB. <r, 529. KT^Ivov 5\' ^7ri firfXo^orrfpas (in addition, besides). Also not rare in \nHer., ivl S4 {thereupon, turn); fierh, 54 {postea), Her.; vp6s 76, wphs 5e \nvery common from Homer downward, also in Attic poetry and prose. \n\nRemark 1. Sometimes two prepositions stand together in poetry, most fre- \nquently in Epio, the first of which always has an adverbial meaning, but the sec- \nond may be connected as a preposition with the Case of a substantive. Aih irp6 \n{through and out) : II. p, 393. rdwrai 5e re vaora ()3o6i7j) hik irp6. \'Afi<pl ttc pi \n(round about). Od. A, 608. afKpl irepl (rTri^f(r<riu. 11. <p, 10. ox^cu ^ afiipl \nTT e pi fieydK\' iaxou. /3, 305. afKpl ircpl Kp^vrjv. Ilap\xe2\x82\xacK (with the Gen. near \nto, with the Ace. near by, along by), e. g. Od. i, 116. irapex Kinevos. fi, 276. \ndW^ IT ope I tV vviToy 4\\avyeT\xe2\x82\xac vrja fieKaivav. Udpe^ (as a Paroxytone) often \nin Her. with the meaning 6e5ic?es, e. g. 3, 91. irdpe^ tov apyvpiov. "tirtK \n{from under, out from under), in Homer; also Her. 3, 116. \\4yfrat v-reK rut \nypviruv apird^eiy \'Apifiaairovs (sc. rhv XP^\'^^")- ^Air ov ph <p4pfiv, H. ir, 669, 679. \nriepl TTph. II. A, 180. ircpl ir ph yhp eyx^i ^fv {around &ui before) . \n\nRem. 2. Also the improper prepositions (y^Ka and x \xc2\xab^ P *" f t^^O\'igh ^cry \nseldom, are connected with the proper prepositions, as in Eng. on account of for \nthe sake of, atrh fioris eycKu {for the cry^s sake). Lys. Evandr. 793. ire pi rS>9 \n4v oKiyapx^f} cLp^dm-w tveKiv. \n\n2. Since prepositions in composition retain their original meaning as ad- \nverbs of place, and as the older language habitually uses the prepositions as \nadverbs of place, it follows of course, that the ancient language often employs \nthe simples, and separates the preposition as an adverb from the verb, where \nthe Attic writers regularly use the compounds, ^he two following instances \nmust be distinguished : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) Those instances where the preposition is separated from the verb. H. 7, 34. \niir6 T\xe2\x82\xac rpSfios ^Wafie yv7a. 7, 135. irapii 5* ^7X*" fuucpk wexijyfy. 5, \n63. 4vl y \xe2\x82\xacy\\/ovrai ^col &\\Xoi. 5, 161. ?>t re koI 64>e reXti. ^j 108. oSs \n{Xirirovs) iroT* air\' Alyelay e\\6^iiy (cAeVdttx rird ti, H. ir, 56). \n\nRem. 3. Here belongs, especially, an abridged mode of expression, where \nseveral sentences follow each other, which constats in using the compound, \nwhich should stand in each sentence, only in the first, while in the others \nthe preposition merely is repeated, e. g. II. y^/, 799. kut a /xev SoXix^kiov fyX"\' \n^rJK is aya>ya (p4ptDV, Karh 8* acnriSa koI Tpv<pd\\\xe2\x82\xaciay. Often also in Her., \ne. g. 8,33. Kara fiey tKavcr ay Apvfxhy ir6\\iVj Kark 5e X.apd5pTjv (where, how- \never, the first may be taken as Tmesis. See Rem. 4). \n\nRem. 4. In the later periods of the language, and particularly in the Attic \nwriters, the prepositions are so closely connected with the verbs, that both \nmingle and form one whole. It is only from this time that there is what may \nbe properly called Tmesis, i. e. the separation of a verb, by means of one or \nmore intervening words, fix)m the preposition in connection with which it forms \none whole or one idea. The Tmesis of compound verbs is found somewhat \noften in Her. ; also in Pindar, and in other poets, seldom in the Attic poet5 in \nthe UtIc choral songs, and still more seldom in the di.ilogue ; but when it does \noccur, only a particle comes between the two parts of a word, so that the unity \n\n\n\ny^ 300.] PECULIARITIES IN THE USE OP PREPOS TIONS. 447 \n\nof the idea is not destroyed. Her. 7, 15. E.>|7,s kud. re fSpaue iK rvs Kolrn. \n.al Wm.. dryeAo.. 8S9kji,^^..^^a..6arpar,y6.. Lr^ph. Aul S \n5 1 &p oXuKaf^ey. The Attic prose remains free from this license, with a few \nspecial exceptions, e. g. Th. 3, 13^ ^J? I i\' ^ kuku,, noi.7u aWohs ^er\' \'Adv.aiZ \ndAAa ^vpe\\\xe2\x82\xacvSf^povu (so as to make the contrast emphatic). PI Gorcj 520 e \n\nPI. Phaedr. 23/, a. ^v^ fioi \\a$e<r^\xe2\x82\xac rov fii^ov {take part). \n\n(b) Those instances where the preposition is separated from the Case of its sub- \nstantive. Here also, throughout Homer, the preposition exhibits its original \nadverbial meaning, and belongs to the verb ; the verb and the adverbial prepo- \nsition together, form one verbal idea, and this, not the preposition alone, gov- \nerns the Case. II. e, 292. toC 5\' air}, ^h yXSxrffav rd/xe (Gen. of separation). \nI, 382. irKfloTTa Sofiois iv KT-fifiara Kflrai {lies within the house), o, 266. afi<pl \n5e X\'WToi &fA.ois aiaaovrai, on the shoulders about {local Dative), tt, 291. iu \nyap ndrpoKKos <p6^ov y]Kfv aTraaty, he cast fear into all (Dat. of limit or am, \nfj 284, Rem. 1). So the Ace. denoting local aim or object (^ 277). II. S-, 115, \nTw 5* \xe2\x82\xac15 afjL<poT(pw Atofi-nSfos ipfiara ^Tirrfv {entered the chariot). Ace. of the \nobject receiving an action (^ 279): II. /3, 156. \'A^tjj/oitjv "Hp?; irphs /xv^ov \nUiirfv {addressed f spoke to Athene). \n\nRem. 5. In the second case (b). a Tmesis is admitted only when mere par \nI tides, like ix-f^v, St, t\xe2\x82\xac, fid, yap, Up\', 5\' &pa, come between the preposition and the \nCase of the substantive, \xe2\x80\x94 a very frequent usage of the post-Homeric period, \nand even in the Attic writers. Comp. Rem. 4. \n\n3. It is a peculiarity of the Greek, particularly of the Homeric language,] \nthat it often connects prepositions followed by the Dat., with verbs which ex-/ \n, press the direction whither ; and, on the other hand, prepositions followed by \nthe Ace, with verbs whose signification presupposes a quiet resting in a place \nor object. This construction arises from a blending of two ideas, since the \nspeaker cither conceives and expresses, along with the moment of motion, the \nmoment of the rest which succeeds ; or along \\\\\\\\h. the moment of rest, the moment \nof motion which precedes. Hence this may be called the pregnant Construction. \n\n(a) The Jtrb of motion involves the idea of the rest which succeeds, when preposi- \ntions with the Dat. stand instead of prepositions with the Ace. The moment of \nrest (the relation to the continuing result of the action) must then be regarded \nas the predominant one. The principle above stated holds with the following \nprepositions : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n"With iy, particularly in the Enic language. L. e, 370. ^5* iy yoivaa-i \nwiwre AiuyTfs ST \'A<ppoSiTri (she fell on her knees, and then lay on her knees). Od. \na, 200. iyu) fiayreixrofiai, u)s iy\\ dvfi^ a^dvaroi ^dWovffi. II. A, 743. \niipiTf S" 4y KovirKTiv {fell into the dust and lay there). In prose, riStevai \niy x^po\'^f like tli\'e Latin, ponere et collocare in manibus. X. H. 4. 5, 5. first : \n^s 5* TJ)"Hpo\xc2\xaboi\' \xc2\xbbfOTf</)U70j\', and then o/ 5\' 4y tw \'Upalco KarairetpevySres \niiriftray (those who had fed and were then in the Heraeum). PL Euthyd. 292, e. \niy Tairri rij kiroplt^ iyiir eirr<i,K\xe2\x82\xaciy. (Caes. B. G. 5, 10. naves in httore \nejertas esse. Sail. Jug! 5. in amicitia receptus). \xe2\x80\x94 A\\so v^ith afi<pi and rr^P^ \nwith tlie Dat. instead of the Ace. II. \\, 17. Kvvf^TSas fxev irpwra irep] Kyfjun- \n\n\n\nOd \n\n\n\nly ^S^rjKfy (he put the greaves around his legs, so that then they set fast to them). \nd.;&, 434. &fi(pl Tvpl arriaai rpliroSa. With iiri: II. a, 55. t^ yio \n\n\n\n448 SYNTAX. [k 300 \n\niwl <pp\xe2\x82\xac<r] ;^^/f \xe2\x82\xac ^eo \\\xe2\x82\xacvk(&\\\xe2\x82\xacVos "HpTj (like iu <t>pe<r\\ ^uucu). With \'wpds\' \nOd. t, 284. vea fiey fioi Karea^e HoadSdwv ivofflx^f^y, irphs VfTpycri fia\\^v, \n289. (Tvu Se Svu) fji,dp\\\\/as, wsre CKvXaKas, ttotI yaiji K6vr\xe2\x82\xac. So fidWfit \nirorl ya\'iT}. \xe2\x80\x94 With yxo\', in prose, in the phrases, vtto nvi yiyyetr^ai {to \ncome under the power of any one, and continue under his power) ; Troie7y t\xc2\xbb vwo \nrivi {alicui aliquid subjicere)] iroida^ai ixp" kavrcp \\sibi subjicere, \xc2\xa7299,11, \n(2) (C)]. \n\nRem. 6. In the following and like examples from Homer, the Dat., without \ndoubt, expresses the relation of aim or objext: Xf\'P<*5 idWeiv iirl airw, ^kcu $4\\os \neiri rivi, ir^fji^ai ov^ipou iiri rivi, i\\avy\xe2\x82\xaciv Ittttovs iir\\ yTjvaiu, riTouueff^ai r6^a iirl \nTivi, aWea-^ai iirl tivi, /xdxfcr^ai. iirl rivt, Ttina^oi cV 6,v^i<Tiv. See \xc2\xa7 284, \nKem. 1. \n\n(b) The verb expressing rest involves the idea of the motion which precedes, when \nthe preposition e I s stands with the Ace, instead of the preposition 4 v with the Dat, \nThe moment of the preceding motion must then be regarded as predominant. \n\nII. 0, 275. i<pdvTi \\7s els 6S6y {came into the 7ond and appeared). Her. 4, \n14. ipavrjvai is Tipo K6vpr}(T ov. Eur. Iph. T. 620. oAA* its hydyKTiv Kel\' \nfjLe^a {to come into and to be in). Her. 3, 62. \'jrpo777<ipeue (Trks is fi4aor rh \nivTiToKfxeva (placing himself in the midst and there standing). Very frequent in \nprose is irapeTyai cis rdiroy riyd {to have come to a place, and to be present \nthere) ; comp. " he is in church, in town, or on the land," in which the idea of \nprevious motion is necessarily supposed. X. An. 1.2, 2. iraprf<Tay els 2<\xc2\xa3p- \n5eis {came to Sardis and were there). Her. 8, 60. is r^y \'ZaKafilya vxeK- \nKenai vfuy reKva re koI yvvaiKes {to carry to Salamis and leave there in safety). \nPI. Rp. 468, a. rhy ^uvtol els rovs iro\\\xe2\x82\xac filovs oA<^vto, i. 6. els roi/s \niroXefxiovs ireaSyra a\\wyai. \n\n(c) Verbs signifying to hang, to attach to, to suspend, etc., as Kpeyuwyvyai, avap- \nray, ^k-, Kara-, i.yaSe7y, audirTeiy, oua)pe7<r^ai, are connected with the prepositions \ndTTo and e/c (as in Lat. with ab and ex), in order to express, together with \nthe idea of suspending anything to a place, the idea of hanging down from or \ndepending from a place. \n\nOd. 3^, 67. Kad ^ i H IT a<r(ra\\6<pi k p e fiaa e y ip6pfiiyya \\lyetay {he hung the \nlyre on the peg, so tha^ it then hung down from it). X. H. 4. 4, 10. ncurlfiaxos \nKar a^Tjffas airh SevSpwy robs tmrovs fiera rwy i^eKoyruy fei ivayrloy rails \n\'Apyelois {having fastened the horses to the trees). X. C. 3. 10, 13. dupcutes fK \nroov &ixwy k pe fxdfjie yo i {hanging ujwn the shoxdders and depending from th \'\xe2\x96\xa0 y \nSo ayapray ri ^k rivos. Her. 4. 10. iK rwy ^uffr^) puy <pope7y <pia\\as (c \ngirdles, so that the bowls hung down). In poetry, this usage is very w;,>... \nextended. See Larger Gi^ammar, 11. \xc2\xa7 622, (c). \' \n\nRem. 7. Adverbs of place, as well as prepositions, are sometimes used in a \npregnant sense : (a) adverbs denoting rest instead of those denoting the direc- \ntion whither. S. Trach. 40. Kelvos S" Sirov (instead of\xc2\xb08irot, quo) /Sc/S^kcv, \novSeU oi5e {no one knows where [irhither] he has gone). X. H. 7. 1, 25. 5irow \n^ouKtj^eTey i^e\\^e7y. \xe2\x80\x94 (b) adverbs expressing the direction irAj/^^r, instead \nof adverbs expressing the relation where. Eur. H F. 74. to? irar^p &ire<rri \nyrjs ; 1157. v o7 KaKuv ipriniav evpw ; {quo me vertam, ui requiem inveniamf). \nArist. Av. 9. oiroi y^s icr/xey ; {whither [where] are we?). Dem. Chers. 102. 50. \niTo7 ay aSvo /jLc^a; {quo nos I\'ertamus. itt perniciem vitemusf). Phil. 1. 51. 40 \n& ir\\T]ye\\s ael ttJs irXrjyqs ex^Tcu, nhy erepwce irard^ji Tts, ck 6(0*6 elffw al Xf*/P\xc2\xabJ- \n\n(4) A second peculiarity in the construction of prepositions is, when the \nwticle (alone or with a substantive) in connection with a preposition and M \n\n\n\n$ 300.] PECULIARITIES IN THE USE OP PREPOSITIONS. 44^ \n\nCase, has a substantive idea, and when the preposition eV, which expresses tha \nrelation where only in the most general manner, should be used, this preposition \nis changed either intc i.ir6 and 4k or into els, attracted, as it were, by the \nverb, expressed or understood, which denotes either the direction whence or \nwhither. This construction may be called the attraction of prepositions : \n\n(a) \'AirS and iK instead of iu, or irapd with the Gen. instead of irapd \nwi^th the pat. Ol 4k rris ayopas iv^pamoi a-n-ecpvyov (instead of ot iv \nrjj o 7 p 9 iv^punroi airjipxryov 4k ttjs ayopas {those IN the agora Jled from it). \nX. II. 4. 6, 4. irdm-fs ot 4k ruu aypwv ^AKapyaves e(pvyoy 4s ra &(mi (in- \nstead of vdvTis oi 4v To7s ay po7s \xe2\x82\xac(pvyov 4k ruv ay pa>v 4s Tct Sctttj). Th. \n1, 18. ol 4k rris SXAt/s \'EAAaSos {rvpavvoi) virh AaKcSaLfioyicov KoreAu- \nd-naav. 3.22. ^tr^ovro ol 4k tuiv irvpyuv <pv\\aK\xe2\x82\xacs (the guards VFOiii the \ntowers perceived it from the towers). 7, 70. ol airh tS>v KaraaTpajxaTOip \nrols aKoyrlois 4)(fi<!l)vro {those upoy the decks used their darts from the decks). \nPi. Apol. 32, b. vfJLfTs robs Sexa arpaTrjyovs robs oiiK ape\\ofi4vovs rovs 4k \nrrjs yaufiax\'ias 4$ov\\e<rd\xe2\x82\xac dL^p6ous Kplvnv {you wished to condemn all at once \nthe ten comnuinders ix the naval battle, ivho did not carry off the dead from it). \nrhaed. 109, e. ol 4k rris ^aKdrr-qs Ix^ves ayaKvirroyres {the fish IN \nthe sea coming up out of it). Dcm. Phil. 3. 114, 15. rovs 4k ^e^^iov rei- \nXovs arpariuTas 4 ^4 fia\\fv. X. An. 1 . 1 , 5. Ustls 5\' &.<piKVo7TO rwv iraph \nfiatriKfus irphs oyro\'v (instead of twv Trapa jSafftAe? oyrwv TrapSi ^a(n\\4as \ni.(piKyo7To). \n\nRem. 8. The same principle of attraction holds, also, with adverbs of \nplace, e. g. 4K(7b(y and KySobtv instead of 4k(7 and eySou. Dem. 01. 3. 13, 15. \niyyo(7rhy 4Kf7b\xe2\x82\xacy rrSXt/jLoy Sfvpo ^^oyra. X. Cy. 1. 3, 4. \'iya ^<T<TOV ra oif/coS\xc2\xab \nTroboij). See Larger Grammar, II. \xc2\xa7 622, Rem. 2. \n\n(b) Eir instead of 4v (far more seldom). Her. 2, \\bO. ix^yov ol 4irix<l^pioiy \nus 4s r^y "Xvpriy rifv 4 s Ai/3u7jv 4 kS iSo7 r} hifxyr] ovrrj xmh y^y {empties into \nthe Syrtis which is in Lybia). X. H. 1. 7, 29. \'Epa<TiyiSr}s {4Kf\\(V\xe2\x82\xacy) eVl rovs 4s \nM ir vX-ffytfy iroKf/jiiovs rijp raxi^<rrr]y irAeiv airayras {against the enemies in \nMitylen^). \n\n5. On the repetition and omission of prepositions, the following things are \nto be noted: \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) In a series of coordinate substantives, the preposition is either repeated \nbefore each single substantive, when each single idea is to be considered sep- -\' \narately and is to be made emphatic, or when the contrast or difference between 3 \nthe ideas is to be denoted, e. g. PI. Tim. 18, c. Kard re TrShe/xoy kuI Karh. r^v \ntiXXt]v Siatray ; or the preposition is placed only before the first substantive, and \nomitted with the others, when the ideas are meant to express one whole, \nwhether they are of the same kind or different, e. g. X. C. 1. 4, 17. we pi rar \n4y^dSe Kol irepl rwv 4v Alyvirrw Kal 4v \'XiKeXia (ppoyriCeiy (instead of \nKol irepl ray 4v "XiKeXia). 2. I, 6. ayvfivdarus (X^iu rrpSs re ^vxv Kal \n^dKirrj. X. H. 1. 1, 3. aTr6 re ruv vewy Ka\\ tt/s yris. PI. Phaed. 99, \n\na. ^ wep\\ Meyapa fj Bo lurov s. \n\n(b) When a substantive connected with a preposition, is followed by a rela- \native pronoun standing in the same relation with the substantive, the preposition \nin prose is often repeated before the relative, but more frequently omitted : \nPL Symp. 213, c. ott* 4Kelvov rod xP^^\xc2\xb0^i a<p\' ov rovrov rjpda^v. X. Hier. 1, \n\n38* \n\n\n\n450 SYNTAX. [\xc2\xa7 300. \n\n11. 01 iSiWTOi (cives) ipxovrai els \xe2\x80\xa2jrJAets, fey &i/ fiovKwirrw., beofjuirwy ZveKo. X \nS. 4, I. e J/ T(p xP^^Vi V ^H-^" oKouo), (Comp. in Latin Cic. Fin. 4, 20. Zeno negat \nPlatouem, si sapiens non sit, eadem esse in catisa, qua tyrannum Dionysiumj. \n\n(c) The preposition is very often omitted in questions and answers^ e. g. PL \nSoph, 243, d. TTfpl 5e rod yayitxrov re koX apxTfOv trp^rov vvv (TKnrriov. \nTheaet. livo% 877 A^yeis ; X. S. 5, 5. olcr^a olv^ e<fyr}, o<^aX/x\xc2\xbby TtVos fV\xe2\x82\xacKa \nSe6fxe^a ; ArjXou, e<f>r], Zti tov dpav. \n\n(d) The preposition is commonly omitted with a word in apposition. X. \nAn. 5. 5, 3. 01 "E\\\\r]V\xe2\x82\xacs cupUoin-o els Kojvcopa, trSXiv \'EWrivlScu Comp. 4. \n8, 22. 5. 3, 2. 6. 2, 1, But when a greater emphasis rests upon the word in ap- \nposition, as is particularly the case, when it is used to explain a preceding \npronoun, then the preposition is regularly repeated. X. Cy. 3. 1, 28. (<piKiaM \n\\d$ot5 tLv) trap i Kelywv, olfiai, f(pVy fraph rStv firiSerore xoXffiitcy yeyeyrifie- \nvwv {you might acquire friendship from those who have never been enemies). Pi. \nProt. 358, b. at iwl roirov irpd^eis avcurcu, ^irl rod aXinrws ^r icol jjSeceSf \nS,p* ov KctKal ; (all the actions pertaining to tJiis, viz., the living without grief, are they \nnot praiseworthy ?) ; also in clauses expressing comparison, subjoined by ii, \n(hsTTep, the preposition may be either omitted or repeated. PL Rp. 330, c. \nirep\\ rh xp\'^ H- <"\xe2\x96\xa0\'\'\' <"\xe2\x96\xa0 <ytrovSd(ov<Tty, us tpyov iavrwy. PL \xe2\x96\xa0rap* 77/xa( tpoir^Sf \nUS Tfapi (piKovs. But when the member expressing the comparison pre- \ncedes the other, the preposition stands with the first member only, if the parti- \ncle of comparison is us; but the preposition is repeated, if it is Hsvep. PL \nRp. 1.4, 14, e. Sei us vepl fir^rphs Kol rpo<pov rrjs x^P"\'-^ afivyeir (i. e, wepi \nrrjs x<^P"5)\' \xe2\x96\xa0^\' Cy. 1. 6, 4. us irphs <pl\\ovs 6yras fioi rovs beohs o5t* \nhioLKeiiiai. \xe2\x80\x94 PL Phaed. 82, e. (^ ^^xh o.vayK(i^erax) &sirep Si elpynov Si it \nrod aufxaros (TKOTreicbai rh. 6vra. \n\n6. The natural position for prepositions is directly before their suhstauuve, \nor before the attributive belonging to a substantive, e. g. irphs rhr iySpa, vpbs \nrhv <ro(phv &yBpa. But this position is often changed in the following instances : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) When a particle follows the substantive, as 7*, fiey^ ydp^ /icr ydp^ 8\xc2\xab, oh, \nalso fjifv ovy, a5, ko/, etiam, rolyvy^ Itrus, also oT/xoi used as an adverb ; these \nsmall words often come between the preposition and the substantive, e. g. t\'\xc2\xbb \nfx^y elp^yp, iy fiey yap elpr^inj. \n\n(b) The preposition Tp6s in oaths tcai exclamations is separated from its \nsubstantive. Soph, O. C. 1333. 7rp6s vvv ae Kpi\\vvv^ Tobr beiv Sfioyvlat^ \ncuTu TTibeffbou. So in Latin, per te deos ore. \' \n\n(c) The preposition sometimes follows its substantive, though it then is sub- \nject to anastrophe ; in Attic prose, this takes place only with irepl when con \nnccted with the Gen., but here it is very frequent. PL Rp. 469, b. vpwror fut \navS pairoSia-fiov irepi] it is alsO separated by other words. Her. 6, 101 \nrovTov crept efxf\\\xe2\x82\xac -Kept. PL ApoL 19, c. uy iyu ovSikv o6re /ieya oOrt 9um \nffhv vept iiraiu. See \xc2\xa7 31, IV. \n\n\n\n301. 302.] PRONOUNS. \n\n\n\n45J \n\n\n\nCHAPTER IV. \n\n\xc2\xa7301. The Pronoun as Subject, Predicate, At- \ntribute, and Object. \n\nThe subject, predicate, attribute, and object are expressed \nby pronouns, when these members of a sentence are not \ndesigned to represent objects or qualities themselves, but \n; when it is to be denoted merely, that an object refers either \nto the speaker himself, or to the person addressed, or to \nanother person or thing. \n\n2. All the rules which have been given on the substan- \ntive and adjective, apply also to substantive and adjective \npronouns ; still, some remarks are here subjoined on the \nuse of the pronouns. \n\n^ 302. I. Personal Pronouns. \n\nThe substantive personal pronouns, as the subject (in the \nJS\'om.): cyu), crv, rfiiihy etc., and also the adjective (posses- \nsive) pronouns, as attributives, e. g. \xe2\x82\xacfto9 iranqp, are used in \nGreek, as in Latin, only when they are specially emphatic ; \nhence particularly in antitheses, but also, for the sake of per- \nspicuity, e. g. Koi crv TttiTa cTrpo^a?. Kat 6 cos Trarrjp ciTre-^avcv. \n*Ey<i> fi\xe2\x82\xacv arriL^L, <ru 8< /xcVc. But where this is not the case \nthey are omitted, and the substantive pronouns are expressed \nby the endings of the verb, and the adjective (possessive) pro- \nnouns, by the article prefixed to the substantive, e. g. Vpa(j>w, \nypd(f)\xe2\x82\xaci^. \'H fi-qrrjp cTttc /xol {my mother). Ot yoms arepyovai \nra TtKva (their children). \n\nRemark 1. The distinction between the accented and the enclitic forms of \nim\' personal pronouns, e. g. ifioZ and ^ov, etc. (^ 87), lies in the greater or less \nemphasis with which thev are pronounced in discourse. Thus, the accented \nforms are alwavs emplovVd, for example, in antitheses, e. g. ifiov fxfv /coreye- \nAcurt, ffe if iynjytafy. \xe2\x80\x94 the personal jjronouns are often used mstead of the \nreflexive (No. 2). On the use of the Gen. of the substantive instead of the \nadjective (possessive) pronouns, see Rem. 4. On an appositive in the Gen. \njoined with a possessive pronoun, e. g. T^fifrepos avrwu war-np, see \xc2\xa7 266, 2. \n\nRem. 2. The ad jective personal pronouns more commonly have a subjective or \nactive sense, e.g.^/*^ fiovki) (my coutisel, i.e. one which I originate, not one whicH \n\n\n\n452 SYNTAX. [J 302. \n\nrelates to me) but sometimes they take the place of the ohjective Gen. and then \nhave an objective or passive sense. Od. \\, 201. crhs ttS^os, a desire for the* \n(like Ter. Heaut. II. 3, 66. desiderio xuo instead of tui). X. Cv. 3. 1, 28. * \ntvyoia Koi (pt\\i(x rp ffiij {benevolentia et amore mei, from good will and love to me) \n\n2. The reflexive pronouns always refer to something ab-eady \\ \nnamed, to the Subject or Object, since the person or tiling to \nwhich the reflexive refers, stands in contrast with itself as an \nobject or attribute : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) In relation to the subject : \'O (To<f)hs lauroC Kparru. 2i/ <rcoi;T^ o^/t- \nKeis. \'O TTois eavrhy iiraiue7. Oi yoyds ayatrwat robs iavruy vcuSas. \nFyu^i ff i avT 6 V. Ovros & ay^p triyra 5i\' kavrov fiffid^Kfy. \'O (TTpamiyhs \ninrh rwy k avr ov aTpaTiuyruy i.irfbayfy. \n\n(b) In relation to an object of the sentence : X. Cy. 1. 1, 4. Kvpos Si^rrytcc \nTuv &\\\\u}y fiacT i\\e uy, rwy iipx^\'i \'>\' kavr oiy icrriaafi^ytty. Ar. Nub. 384. \n\nanh (Tavrov iyu a% SiSd^w ( ix^r tr ti>snm). \n\n(3) Tlie reflexive pronouns miiy also be used in Greek, as in \nLatin, in the constniction of the Accusative \\\\\'ith the Infinitive \nand of the Participle ; also in such subordinate clauses as stand \nin a close relation to the principal clause, particularly in clauses \nexpressing design, and in dependent interrogative clauses, as \nwell as in all other subordinate clauses which do not contain \nthe sentiment of the speaker, but the sentiment of the subject \nof the principal sentence. Also in this case the reflexivo \nrefers cither to the subject or to an object. When the subject \nof the principal clause and the subject of the subordinate \nclause (or of the Inf), are dificrent, the reflexive may refer \neither to the former or to the latter, its particular relerence \nbeing determined only from the context. In the cases men- \ntioned under this rule, the English often uses the perso/ml \npronouns hitn, Iter, it, etc. instead of the reflexive. \n\n\'O r vpayy OS yofii^fi rovs iroXlras irrriprrfiy iavr^. X. Cy. 1. 1, 5. Tir \ni^wy rovrtay ^p|ev {Kvpos) ofi&* kavr^ inoyXwrrw Srrmf, o(ht &AA4a.m5. \nC. 1. 2, 8. iirlarfvf {"XtuKpdrrjs) riev {vi^rrwr iavr^ robs avoi*^afUpmH, \niirtp avrhs iSoKlfia^fy, fls rhy irdyra fiioy I a vry re ir\xc2\xabd ^AA^^XoiT flXovs ief^t^s \nl^aetr^cu. 52. 6 Kor-ijyopos (<(nj rhy ^mk pdrrfy cuwre\xc2\xa3dt>rra tow rMvt, &s adrrhs \ncfq aoipdnaros re iral &XA01;; iKavwraTos iroi^<rau ao^vs, oSra* Surrti^\'rai rc^ \n\xc2\xabouTy (Tuv^KTas, &sre /xnSofJLOv Tap\' avrols rovs iWovs ttpsu rp^s iavrir [tn \ncotMpiirison irith him). Th. 2, 92. rck yavdyia, 5<Ta wpi>s rp kauriy {y\xc2\xa7) ^, iftt- \n\\ovro (= Tck yavdyia ra wpits rp kavru y 717 Syra). Her. 8, 24. Sow 9oi rrfmni \nrod iavrov fja-ay vticpol lir^aifc. Comp. the examples in Rem. 3. \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 302,] PRONOUNS. 4r53 \n\n4. On the contrary, the oblique Cases of the pronoun avro?, \n-y, -6: viz., avTOV, -rjsi avT<a, -y, avTOV, 17V, -o, avrwv, OX even \nthose of a demonstrative pronoun, are universally employed, \nwhen an object does not stand in contrast with itself, but \nwith another object, e. g. o Trarrjp avTw (to him, the son) eSwKe \nTO ^LJSkLov, ^rcpyw avrov (Jiini). \'A7rej(o/xat avrov {from him). \nThe pronoun avrov, etc. is merely the personal pronoun of the \nthird person, but is much weaker than the demonstrative \ndvTo<: ; wherefore, it does not, like ovTo<ij usually stand first in a \nsentence. \n\nRem. 3. The personal pronoun S, of, etc. has commonly a reflexive sense \nin the Attic writers (but, in the Ion. writers and in the poets, also the meaning \nof the personal pronoun). But it is regularly employed, only when the reflex- \nive relation has respect, not to the nearest subject, but to the remoter one. It \nis in general much more freely used than the compound reflexive, since it is \nalso employed where the connection with the principal clause is much looser, e. g. \n*0 ripauvos vojxiCei robs iroXlras inrr)p\xe2\x82\xacT\xe2\x82\xac7v 1 (-but not 6 rvpavvos x^-P\'^C^\'^"-^ O\')* \nX. An. 7. 5, 9. \'Hpa/cAe/Sris fhayayuv rovs &,Wovs e-rpaTTjyovs irphs ^k^v^v \\4yeip \niKf\\\xe2\x82\xacV\xe2\x82\xaci/ avrovs, Hti ovShu h,v ^rrov <r<pe7s aydyoiev riju (TTpaTidv, ^ aevocpcov \n(SE ducturos esse). Th. 5, 73. ol \'A^ijyaToi w? i^^KXiv^v {6 "kyis) a-nh <r(pwp \nrh arpdrev/ia, ko^\' \'f](Tvx(au icrwbTjcrav. 6, 32. ^vyeirevxovTO koI 6 &.\\\\os, 8/xrA.oy, \nTuv T6 7roA.(TcDj/ Kol (Y Tis &Wos ((ji/ovs Traprjy ffcpiai. Even after yap, e. g. X. H. \n1. 7, 5. ot arparriyol $paxfo. eKacTOS aireXoyrja\'aTO \xe2\x80\xa2 ov yap npovTe^ri (T^\'kt i x6yos \nKara rhv vS/jlov. But Thucydides and some later writers use it, also, in relation \nto the nearest subject, e. g. Th, 7, 5. d ruXiinros ireixiC^ rols Xi^ois xp^l^^^\'^^t \nots ot \'A^riva7oi irpoirapefidKoyTo ffipiaiv. The forms ol, <r<pi<Ti and a<pas \nhave sometimes also the meaning of personal pronouns : oX, him, her (e. g. X. \nCy. 3. 2, 26) ; (rtpitri, to them (e. g. X. H. 6..5,35) ; <r0as, them, e.g. Th..\'>,49), \nwhen the object to which they refer, is more important in respect to the sense, \nthan the subject of the sentence. Still, it is to be remarked in relation to the \nuse of this pronoun, that in place of it with a reflexive sense, the compound \nreflexive kavTou, -rts, etc. is commonly employed; and in place of it with \nthe sense of ihe Pers. pronoun third person, the corresponding forms of awTjJs \nare used by the Attic writers. The form ov [ov) is used in prose only in PI. \nSymp. 174, d. Rp. 617, b. 617, e,; e (e) 327, b. 617, e. Symp. 175, a. c. 233, \nb. ; ol occurs far oftener (seldom accented of), ando-^eTy, <T(pa>y, crcpio\'iy \na^as, somewhat often. \n\n5. In the instances mentioned under No. 3, the con-espond- \ning forms of avros are very freqitently used instead of the \nreflexive pronoun ; this is always the case where a member of a \nsentence or a suborinate clause is not the expression or senti- \nment of the person to whom the pronoun refers, but the senti- \nnent of the speaker (writer). \n\nX. Cy. 1. 4, 19. (or iroXefiioi) ev^s aip-qaovai t))V \\eiav, iireiUv tZcacri rivas eV \nahrovs i\\a6vovras {contra Se). C. 4. 7, 1. TV kavrov yudfiw airecpaiu^ro :S,coK\' \nodr-qs irphs robs b^JLiKovuTas out<?. Apol. 33. (Sw/cpaTTjs) eyi/co rov en (w rh \nre^ydvai avrf Kpiirrov iivax. \n\n\n\nV%. \n\n\n\n454 SYNTAX. f$ 302. \n\n6. In compound reflexive pronouns, the pronoun avros eithef \nretains its exclusive force, or loses it, i. e. it is sometimes em- \nphatic, and sometimes not. \n\n(a) Isocr. Panath. 16, 242. BiKaiSv itrri (()i\\ovs fiep \'iroi\xe2\x82\xac7<r^ai tovs Sfxoicos av- \nro7- re (or (T(^i(Ti re avrols) Kal to7s &W015 xP^M^^\'ous, <pofiei(r^ai Se koI \nSeSjeVai rovs irphs cripas fiev avTohs (or eavrovs) olKeiSrara SiaKeifieuov:, \nirphs Se TOVS &\\\\ovs aWorplcos {se ipsis and se ipsos). Th. 4, 102. iTroiKo->s \n<T<pS)V re avTuv Kal tuv &\\\\ot)v Thu $ov\\6fjt,evou irefvpavres. 1, 60. ire/xTrovaiv \nkavTwv T\xe2\x82\xac iSieXovrhs koX rav 5tA.\\\xc2\xabi/ IleAoiroyprjaiav /xiff^^ veiffavres. 8, 8. e^\' \neavT&u SieuoovvTo &\\\\cp arSka irXeiv {soli perse). The l^om. avr6s is some- \ntimes added to strengthen this exclusive or emphatic force (comp. in Lat. Cato \nSE IPSE interemit), e. g. PI. Phaed. 94, e. otre yhp tltf \'Op.\'fipo) 6fio\\oyo7pi.ev, oVre \naiiTol 71 1x2 V avTols. \xe2\x80\x94 (b) Oi ffTpariwrai irapelxov eavrovs (or a (pa 5 \naifToh 5) avdpeioToijovs {se). Th. 7 , 82. irapeBoaav 01 irdvTes <r<l>as avrois (or \neavTois) {se). \n\nEem. 4. The reflexive possessives are either used alone, e. g. Dem. c. Nicostr. \n4, 1250. T&y xpTj/UctTCtfj/ (Tol tS>v ifxav kIxpvH-\'^\' C- Nausim. 11, 993. SiKaiSrepoy \nSiiTTOv rh 7] fx ire pa r](xas icriu exet*\', ^ tovtovs. c. Boeot. 2, 1010. vfieTs airav- \nres TOVS v/iCT 4 povs -TraTSas ayairaTe. Ot iroKiTui to, cr(p4r\xe2\x82\xac pa (xd^eiv iireipwu- \nTo; or with the addition of the Gen. of avT6s according to \xc2\xa7 266, 2; or in- \nstead of the possessives, the Gen. of the compound substantive-reflexive is \nused ; indeed in Prose, this is uniformly the case with the Sing, {mine, thine, his, \nthus 6 i/xavT ov, ffeavrov, eavrov iraTt\'ip, and not 6 ifihs avTov, 6 ahs avrov \nirarrip, which last mode of expression is found only in poetry), and with the \nthird Pers. PI., it is more frequent than the possessive : but the possessives are \ncommonly used when the pronoun is plural {our, your), except in the third \nPerson. Hence as follows : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nS.Thv i/xavTov {aeavTOVy eavrov) TTttTepa not rhv ifxhv {crhv) avrov v. \n\nr^v i/xavrov {ffeavrov, eavrov) firjrepa not r^v efx^v {(TT]v) avrov (x. \n\nrois ifxavrov {(Teavrovj eavrov) \\6yois not ro7s efxoTs {(ToTs) avrov A. \n\nP. rhu rjfxerepov avrwv irareoa very rare rhv efiui/ avrcov v. \n\nt)]v v/xerepav avrau firfrepa very rare r^v vfx&u avroiu fi. \n\nToi Tjfxerepa avrwv a/xapr\'fiixaTa very rare to; 7)ix&v avruv a. \n\nrhv <T(perepov avrSf/ irarepa more frequent rhv eavrwy narepa, but never \n\nrhv tr<puv avrwv v. \n\nHere also the Pronoun avr6s either retains its exclusive or emphatic force, or \nloses it: (a) \'O ttois v^piC^i rhy eavrov irarepa (strUM IPSITJS patrem). \'tfxels \nv$pi(ere rovs vfxerepovs avrwv irarepas-fVESTROS IPSORUM patres). Oi \n7ra7Ses vBpi^ovffi rovs e avrwv irarepas (suos ipsorum p). X. Hier. 3, 8. iroWovs \nhe Kal vm yvvaiKwv rwv e avrwv rvpdvvovs Siecp^apfxevovs {evp-{}creis) {a SUIS IP- \nSORUM conjugibus). X. An. 6. 1, 29. {vofxi^w) \'6sris ev iroKe/xw &v araa-id^ei nphs \n&pX0VTa, rovroV trphs r^v eavrov ffwrripiav (rracnd^^eiv {contra SUAM IPSltrs \nsalutem). In order to strengthen the exclusive or emphatic force, the Pronoun \navrSs is frequently added : avrhs rhv ifxavrov, etc. ; avT6s is also sometimes \nplaced between the article and the reflexive of the third Pers., e. g. Aeschin. \nCtes. 85, 87. KaTa\\e\\vKe r)]v avrhs avrov hvvaareiav. \xe2\x80\x94 (b) Th. 2, 101. \n\'2,TparoviKT]v, r^v eavrov dSe\\(p-fiv, Sidwcri 2eU(^ (sUAM sororem). Aeschin. \nfals. leg. 30, 40. irphs rrjv fiovX^v rhv adeX<phv rhv e fxavr ov Kal rhv a8eX<piSovr \nKoi rhv larphv e-jrefxipa. Th. 6, 21. iroXv airh rrjs 7} (xerep as avrwv /xeXXc/xep \nw\\e7v (a nostra patria). Lysias. riyovvrai ovKeri ro7s ff^trepois avrwv afiop\' \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 302.] \n\n\n\nPRONOUNS. \n\n\n\n456 \n\n\n\n\xe2\x80\xa2rit^i rhv vovv ftias irapi^uv. Her. 5, 87. [xiyovtrty) ^ipcrau iKdffrvy alri^f \n(tuv yvvaiKuv), okt) en] 6 euvTrjs avrip {ubi suus vir esset). X. H. 4. 4 17. oi \nAaK\xe2\x82\xac5aifi6vioi Tuv kavrSiv crvfiiiaxuiv Kari<pp6vovv. \' \' \n\nEem. 5. It is very rare in good classical authors, that the Gen. of Pers Pro- \nnouns refers to the nearest subject, e. g. PI. Lach. 179, c. atridifie^a robs irare- \npas 7]/xwv, \'6riT)fxas fiev elwv rpv<}>av (instead of robs vn^ripovs irartpas or \nTobs r,[XiTipovs abTuuTT.). Antiph. 1, 114. iyoi S\' ifias {m\\p rovnarpSsiiov \nTf^yeuTos aiTOVfuti (instead of vwep tov ifiavrov Trarpos). Th. 4,8. ^Tri tos \neV Tji K\xe2\x82\xacpKvp(f. vavs (T^uy eTre^ut/^ov (instead of 4ir\\ ras iv t. K <r<peT4pai \nauTwy y. or ras eavrwy v,). \n\nRem. 6. The pronoun alnhs with a reflexive meaning, regularly stands after \nboth the substantive and adjective (possessive) personal pronouns, whether its \nexclusive power be retained or lost, c. g. {jfiuy avruy, ipTw avTo7s, aipas avrois, S \nv/xdrepos avrwy irariip, etc. In the Attic writers the exceptions to this position \nare extremely few, e. g. X. Cy.^ 6. 2, 25. vdy tA imr-fideia (^/xas) Sc? ets tV \nSShv avaKevd(fa^ai avroTs re r}fi7y, koI 6ir6(rois T^Tpdirocn xp^lJ-f^a. But in \nother writers, also, such exceptions are quite rare, e. g. Her. 5, 91. o-vyYivdoffKo- \nfiey avTo7<Ti fifi.\'iv oh iToiT]aa<Ti op^ws. This position is never found with the \nthird Pers. PI., consequently never avrobs a (pas instead of a^as ahrovs. \nBut when the Pers. pronouns are used without their reflexive force, then a\\n6s \nin its exclusive or emphatic sense, may either precede or follow the personal pro- \n\'\xe2\x80\xa2 nm: (a) outoO ip.ov {fJ.ov), avrep i/xol (fioi), avrhy ifie (fie), ai/robs- Tj/aas, etc., \n\xe2\x96\xa0 PL Phaed. 91, a. ouTcp ifxol \'6ti fidXiara S6^\xe2\x82\xaci ovtods exeiy. Symp. 220, \nly^ieaaae Kol Tck \'6ir\\a koI avrhy i fi4. X. C. 2. 9, 2. ijdews y &y (sc. ^p4- \ni\'-i rhy &y5pa), e<pr], ei fxi} (l)o^oiiJi.r]y, \'6irws jtiTj \xc2\xabr\' avroy fie rpajroiTo.\xe2\x80\x94 (b) \n;\'\xe2\x96\xa0 avTOVy ifiol avrcf, ce axn6v, Tj/xwy avruy, etc., e. g. Dem. 01. 3, 36. iri^ev \n\n\n\n7. The reflexive pronoun is very often used instead of the \nreciprocal pronoun, in all the persons. \'" \xe2\x80\xa2\xe2\x96\xa0 - - V\\x \n\nDem. C. Olympiod. 116a r6^\' 7)1x7 v avroTs 5taA.e|J/U6,\xc2\xbbo. PI. Rp. 621, e. \nStKaLO(Tvyrjv ficra (ppoyriaeus Trdyrl rp6ir(a iirirrjSeva\'Ofj.ey, \'lya Kol rjixly avroTs \n(pi\\oi difxey, Kal ro7s ^\xe2\x82\xaco7s. Lys. 114. hreiShv ifi7y iyu) fvqyiaoi, vphs vfias au- \nrobs rpexpea-^e K&ireira ko^\' \'4ya eKUffroy vp.7v ahro7s airex^o\'eo\'^e. X. C. \n3. 5, 16. (p^oyovffiy \xe2\x82\xacavro75 fxaWoy, ^ to7s &Wois ay^pdirois. \n\nRem. 7. Both the reciprocal and refleocive pronoun is used when the action \nrefers to an object that has been named. Both consequently express a reflexive \nidea, and are related like the species and genus ; since now the genus includes \nthe species, so the reflexive may take the place of the reciprocal, in cases \nwhere it is readily perceived that several persons so perform anything together \nthat the action appears as reciprocal. But when the reciprocal is antithetic to \nkavrhv eKaffros, but the reflexive used for the reciprocal, to &\\\\ovs, it is \nclear that the reciprocal must then necessarily stand, where the antithesis \neaurhy eKaaros is either expressed or implied, e. g. Isocr. Paneg. j^aAAoj/ \nXa\'tpoviriy 4irl to7s aW^Xuy KaKo75, ^ ro75 avruy ISiois ayaSro7s (i- e. ^ etrl \nro7s aiiTov cKacrros aya^o7s), they rather rejoice in each otker\'\'s evils, than in their \nown good, i. e. than each one in his own. PI. Phaedr. 263, a. aix(pis^v\'rovfi(y a\\- \n\\7\'i\\ois re Koi 7iH-7y avro7s. On the contrary, it is natural that the reflex- \nive should be regularly used, where other persons (aWovs), either expressly or \nby implication, are contrasted with the reflexive, e. g. Isocr. Aegin. 387. xtfi \n\n\n\n1 \n\n\n\n456 SYNTAX. [$ 303. \n\nirXfovos Tj/Jtas abrovs riyoifie^a,^ rohs adeKtpoisiwethinkmoreofoursdoes \nthan of [others] our brothers), de Pac. oi fxev ( QerraXol ) a(pi<r ip avrols TroXefiov- \nffiv {inter se, non contra exteros hostes). With the Nom. avroi added, e. g. X. H. \ni. 5, 9. (Set) ffKOTTeiy Sttus twv \'EW-fjfcav firjdeves Icx^pol Siaiv, oAAa iravres aahi- \nvilsi avrol 4y kavTols <TTa<rid^oyTes. So 6fj.o\\oye7(T^cUj afJupis^TiTiiabau, 5<- \nivex^V^o-h ^vavriov ilvai and irpdrTeiv atplcriy aitroTs or eavToZy. Bat \nwhen neither the one nor the other antithesis exists, then the reflexive and the \nreciprocal are used without distinction, often in the same sentence, merely for \nthe sake of variety, e. g. X. C. 2. 6, 20. ((>^oi/ovyres e avrov s fuaovaiv a\\A^- \n\\ovs. 7, 12. avrl ixpopw/jLcyup eavTas -rjSius dW\'^Aas kupuv. \n\n8. The reflexive pronoun of the third Pers. often takes the \nplace of the reflexive of the first and second Person. Tlie re- \nflexive then denotes not a definite person, but only confines the \n\xe2\x80\xa2reflexive force to the subject ; hence it has often merely the \nmeaning of iSio? ; the particular person, to whom it refers, must \nbe clearly denoted by the construction of the sentence. \n\nX. C. 1.4, 9. ovhi yap ttjv eavr ov [= aeavrov] <tv ye i^ux^\'\' ^P9^ (^\'"* otm sotil ; \n(reauTov is\xc2\xab, false reading). 2. 1, 31. rov 5e irayruy r)Si<rrov oKOvfffJueros iiralvou \nkavr^s [= aavTris] , aHjKoos cT {self praise). Andoc. do myst. cdnhs^ fi \naiTwWvpu (instead of i^iavT6v). PI. Prot. 312, a. ah 8\xc2\xab ovk iv cuVxwo \n"EKXrivas avi hu (To<pi(Tr)]V irapix^v ; Isocr. Paneg. ii\xe2\x82\xacre\\((rafi(v atrraxru \na (pus aiiTovs. X. H. 1. 7, 19. ^vprjaere a<pas ai/rovs 7}fiapTr{K6ri \nyiara is ^\xe2\x82\xaco!\'S. \n\nEem. 8. In the Epic language, this usage occurs also with <r<pl<r \n{suits). II. Kj 39S. <tu|iv fiov\\\xe2\x82\xacvoiT\xe2\x82\xac fA\xe2\x82\xacrk e<pi<riv (instead of ;i\xe2\x82\xac\xc2\xbbr vfuy). \nOd. (, 28. otrroi %y t.^\'v e iis yair}s Bvvafiat y\\vKep<^fpoy &Wo iifa^cu. \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 303. n. The remaining Pronouns. \n\n1. OvTO?, OVTOJ?, TOlbVTOS, TOOrOVTOS, aud oSc, oiSc, TOl- \n\n098c, TotrdsSe, are commonly used with tliis distinction, that \nthe first four refer to what immediately precedes, the others, to \nwhat immediately follows. \n\nHer. 6, 53. toCto (the foregoing) /lev AoKeicundvioi \\4yown \xe2\x80\x94 t\xc2\xab(8\xe2\x82\xac (the \nfollowing) Se \xe2\x80\x94 fyw ypd<pca. Th. 1, 53. ot /nev 5^ {Koplv^ioi) roiavra iiirw \n\xe2\x80\x94 oi Se \'Ai^vatot t \xc2\xbb o S \xe2\x82\xac aireKplyayro. \n\nRemark 1. Still, not seldom ovtos, toiovtos, roirovros, ovto\xc2\xbbs \nrefer to what follows ; far more seldom 85 6, to 16 she, To<rdy5\xc2\xab, 55c refer \nto what goes before. X. C. 1. 2, 61. Alxas ovoficurrhs frl tovtii^ ytyovt {b\xc2\xa7 \nwhat follows). Th. 2, 34. 55e fifw ^dirTovai (in refei-ence to what prece" V \nBut often SSt, wSc, etc., are so used that they represent an object as prest \nit were before our eyes, e. g. X. Cy. 3. 3. 35. iytc Se vyuv fifv irofNuyiwr, woiovs \nTiviis xph ^^\'\'cit 4v Ty T i y 5 \xe2\x82\xac, alffxvvoiiJLrjv iv ( = in praesexti rertim statu). \nRegularly, however, out as precedes the relative clause, e. g. air 6 s Arrar, \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 303.] PRONOUNS. 45\'; \n\nhv eldes &vSpa. \xe2\x80\x94 When ovtos and iKe7vos are used in opposition to each other \' \nthe latter refers to what is more remote, the former, to what is nearer, though 1 \nthe reverse is sometimes the case, as with the Latin hie and ille. \n\n# \n\n2. Tlie adjective demonstratives are often used in poetry, \nespecially in Epic, and sometimes in prose, instead of the \nadverbs here, there, according to \xc2\xa7 264, 3. \n\nOd. a, 76. a^X Ayeb\', ^^\xe2\x82\xac?s oTSe rrepicppaCwfie^a iravres [let us HERE deliher- \niie). 185. irqvs 5e ^oi ^ 5\' fCTTj/cev tV aypov v6(T<pi ttSXtJos {stood there in the field). \nOd. (T, 239. ws yvi/\'^lpos ^/cetvos i-n-\' avXcirjori^vpTiffw riarai {there). Th. I, 53. rj/jLas \nrou rSe irpdrrovs Xa^omes x/\'T)(ra(r,^e ws iroKefiiois {nos, qui HIC sumus). PI, Rp. \n327, b. i]p6fi-ny, tirov fXi}. Ovtos, t<pt], vvia^ev irposepx^Tai (here he comes be- \nhind thee). Hence in the Attic poets dv^jp \'65 e instead of iy<i, e. g. S. 0. T. \n1464, and oZtos in prose instead of av, e. g. PI. Gorg. 489, b. ovrocrl av^p \nov Travffertu tpKvaptuu ; instead of <tv ov iravcrr) j \n\nRem. 2. In the Epic language, where two sentences, whose subject is not \ndoubtful, follow each other, the subject is often repeated in the second by 6\' ye \nwith a certain emphasis, in order to bring out prominently the identity of the \nsubject for both sentences, o. g. 11. /3, 664. ad^a 5e vr\\as e7r7j|e, ttoXvv S\' 076 \n(idemque) Xahv ay flpas /Stj <p(vyu}v (irl Tr6irTov. II. 0, 586. \'\'AuriXoxos S\' ov fiuve, \n^o6s trtp iwv iroXtntarrjs, oAA\' y 6.p (rptae. So also in the Epic language and \n\nf)ariicularly in llcr., far rarer in the Attic writers, when a series of actions fol- \now each other, 6 St is u-?cd with reference to the same subject, where we may \ntranslate 6 5f by, on the contrary, then, etc. Her. 6, 3. tV M^\xc2\xbb\' yevofiiwrju avrolai \neuTlrjv ov ^dxa (^((pcuvf, & 5* ixtyt a<pi {on the contrary). X. An. 4. 2, 6. ol 8e \n. . . ivravba t^itpov, ws KorfxcvTej t^ iLKpow oi S" Karelxov {iidemque). This \nusage very often occurs in Horn, and Her. in disjunctive clauses:^ \xe2\x80\x94 ^ \'6ye. \nOd. 3.327. \xc2\xa51 rivas in TlvXov 6.^(1 d^uvropas . . . , ^ liye koI ^TrdpTTj^ev. Her. \n2, 173. XcL^oi iu\' ^ TOi fiaytis, f; Sye aTr6rrX7]KT0S yfySixei/os. \n\n3. The use of the pronoun avro\'s is as follows : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(1) A^To? properly means av t6<s, again he, and then self, ipse, \ne. g. o vIo5 auros OF auros 6 vlo\'9, the son himself. It can also \nrefer to the person impHed in the predicate, e. g. avros a7re(3r). \nSo airro tovto or tovt avro, hoc ijjsuni, this itself {not another) \nWlien used with cKao-ro?, avro\'s always precedes. Her. 7, \n19. SikuiV auTOS CKao-TO^ to. vpoKCLjxeva Stopa Xapelv. \n\n(2) In the oblique Cases, it is used for the third person of \nthe personal pronouns (^ 302, 4). \n\n(3) In connection \\\\\'ith the article (6 avros), it means the \nsame, idem ($ 246, 3). On the position of the article with \nauTo\'9 in connection with a substantive, see \xc2\xa7 246, 3. \n\nRem. 3. Horn, and Her. often use a ^ t J s in the place of the reflexive pro- \nnouns of the three persons. Od. 5, 247. &XXv S" alrhv (mstead ot eaurd^J \n\n39 \n\n\n\n458 SYNTAX. [<i 303. \n\n(pari KaTaKpvTTTcoi/ ^\'i(rK\xe2\x82\xacU. ^, 27. trol Se ydfios ax^^^v iarriv, %ia xph KoXh nh> \navT^u (instead of craurriv) euvvcrSrai. Her. 7. 10, 1. rh Si uvrolei iviari \n5stv6y, i/xe aoi diKatSu iari (ppd(eiu {quid autem in XOBIS timendum insit). \n\nRem. 4. From the exclusive or emphatic force of this pronoun, the following \nspecific significations arise : (a) self in coritrast with another, hence alone, solus \n{ipse, non alius) : jxSpqs, on the contrary, in contrast with several. X. An. 4. 7, 11. \n&Wop ovSeva {TrapaKaXecras) X<^pf* avr 6 s {ffoes alone)\\ (b) even and self. like ipse, e. g. \nAuT^s \'2,o}Kp6.Tris iSaKpvaeu {even Socrates, Socrates himself ) ; so kuI auT<Jy, \no u S\' avTos, vel ipse, ne ipse qxiidem ; (c) self in contrast with foreign aid, of himself, \netc., sponte, like ipse ; (d) in Homer especially, avr 6 s often forms a contrast with \nanother object, expressed or understood, tbis object being different from that de- \nnoted by avT6s, as the soul in distinction from the body, or the body in distinction \nfrom the soul, e. g. 11. a, 4. aurov s Se kkupia rcCxe Kvve<T<nv (made them \\Uieir \nbodies, not their souh\\ a prey), or a man in distinction from his affairs, or asso- \nciates, etc. Hence ahros is sometimes used of a lord, ma.tter, e. g. ai/rhs f<pri; \nso also avr 6, id ipsum, often in connection with a following adjective-clause; \n(e) it is used with a proper name and an ordinal from rplros upwards, to de- \nnote the number of official associates with the person named, wlio is generally \nthe principal one, e.g. Th. 1, 46. Kopiu^iwi/ aTpar-nyhs ^y a^yoKKeiSris -rffiTros \novTos {Xeiioclides was the commander of the Corinthians widi four associates). \n\n4. Tlie indefinite pronoun tU when joined with adjectives^ \nindefijiite numerals, and adverbs, is used like the Latin qiddam^ \nto bring out distinctly the idea expressed by these words, some- \ntimes making them more, sometimes less emphatic, ^cording \nto the meaning of the word or the connection of the discourse; \nbut with pronouns and cardinal numbers, it corresponds to the \nLatin fere {almost, about, sojiiewhat). \n\nMeyas tis avfjp {some great 7nan),fiiKp6s tjs, was tjs, eKacxTos rts, ovods ris, oAiyoi \nrives, iro76s ris, Tr6(Tos ris, Ppaxv ri, iyyvs ti, axeSSy rt, Trdw ri^vayrdiraiTi Ti, xo\\6 \nTt, ovSey ri, -ndXai tj, Siaxf)ep6yrus ri. Afiyriyriva Aryeis Svyofiw r^s aperTjs \nelvai {incredibilein quandam vim, a kind of incredible power). X. C. 1. 1, 1. ^ \nypa(p^ Kar avrov {^uKparovs) roidSe ris ^y {haec fere, was nearlt/. was for \nsubstance this). 3. 6, 5. \\e^oy, ir6a\'ai rives elai (sc. ai irpdsoSoi rfj ir6\\ei)f tell \nme about how much the revenues are. So ovrw t i, or oStm, wSe rets {sic, fere, \nnearly thus) ; rpels rives {about three, some three or so). \n\nKem. 5. The regular position of the pronoun t I y, as an enclitic, is after the \nword to which it belongs, e. g. avvp ns, Ka\\6s ris ayrip. But sometimes, in con- \nnected discourse, it precedes, e. g. ean rolwv r i s exn^brjs \\6yQs. On the rela- \ntive and interrogative pronouns, see under adjective and interrogative sentences. \n\nRem. 6. The indefinite pronoun oh\xc2\xab\', a\xc2\xabi/ ohc, is usu \n\n(a) by r\\s, e. g. Ovk &v tis evpoi &vSpa (TO<pwrepov [ \n\n(b) by the second Pcrs. Sing. Opt. \\\\\\t\\\\ dv, and the Ind. of a historiciii tense \nwith dv, when it is intended to represent the subject as indefinite, e. g. tpaitis \n&v {dicas, one may, can say); vofil(ois &y {credas. one mipht supfwsf). flSfs \n&v {rideres, one might have seen); rjy-fjcrtD dv { patares. etc.). The Ei" \'"-" \nhowever, frequently translates the second Pers. by you, e. g. you may, can ,- \n\n\n\nM 304 305.] PRONOUNS. 4;5,} \n\n$304. Prospective and Retrospective Use of the \n\nPronoun. \n\n1. The personal pronoun o5, of, %,filv, and the demonstrative 6, ^, r6, are fre- \nquently used in Homer to direct the attention to a following substantive and \nas it were to prepare for it. II. v, 321. airiKa r^ ^h, eVe.ra kut\' 6cp^aKf,&j, \nX\xc2\xab\xc2\xbb\' ax\\vy, Uv^^iSr, \'Ax^KvL II. cp, 249. ha niv iraiaeie TrSuoio, S7op . \n*A X 1 ^ A 7) o. \n\n2. In the same way, the Neut. of a demonstrative is used to prepare for a \nfollowing substantive, or a following Inf or entire sentence. PI. Apol. 37, a. \nrovTov Tifi^nai, iy Trpvrcu/d^ ff iTi](T ews [lam deemed worthy of this, yiz., a \nmaintenance in the Pnjtaneum). X. Cy. 8. 7, 25. W tovtou fiaKapiiirepov, rov \nyV /J-tx^V^a^; (u^hat can be more blessed than this, to mix with the earth ?) ; PI, \nGorg. 515, e. oAAo rSif /jmi etVe M rointf, ei Xiyovrai \'Kb-qvaloi hih \nUepiK\\4a ficXrlovs yeyoyfuai. Dem. Phil. 1. 41, 5. olSey . . . toCto \nKoXus iKiivoSy 3t\xc2\xbb ravra fi4v iffriv airavra rh. xti\'pia Si^Ao tov tto- \nXffiov Kflfieva iv /xfcrtp. Comp. \xc2\xa7 266, Ecm. 3. \n\n3. On the contrary\', a demonstrative pronoun, particularly avrSs, is fre- \nquently put in the same sentence after a preceding substantive or pronoun, \npartly for the sake of perspicuity, e. g. when between the Case and the verb \nwhich gox-tms it, there is an unusually long intermediate clause, and partly for \nthe sake of rhetorical em]>ha.<tin. Such a pronoun again resumes the preceding \nsubstantive or pronoun, and either recalls it to the memory, or fixes the atten- \ntion particularly upon it. Her. 3, 63. 6 Z4 not Mdyos, rhv (= hu) Kafifiva-qs \ndirirpoirov ruy oIkiwv oirt\'Stlf, ovros ravra iverdXaro {Magos, whom Cambyses \nappointed steward of his domestic affairs, he gave me these commands). Th. 6, 69, \na I oIkIui rod irpoaxrrfiov iiraX^fis XafiPdvovaai, avrai iiirrjpxoy epvfia. So \nalso witli the personal pronouns, in which case the pronoun which resumes a \npreceding one, is regularly an enclitic form. Eur. Phoen. 507. ifMol fxiv, el Koi fxi] \njfo^\' \'LW-fjuuv x^^^\'\'^ rf^pafi^ifb\' [educati sumus), oAA\' odu ^vyerd fi o i Bokus \\4yfiv. \n\n\n\nCHAPTER V. \n\nThe Infinitive and the Participle as an Object \n\xe2\x80\xa2 and Attribute. \n\n$ 305. A. The Infinitive. \n\nThe Infinitive represents the idea of the verb as an abstract \nsubstantive idea, but differs from the substantive in the fol- \nlowing respects : \n\n(1) The Inf without the article can be used only as a Nom. \n\n\n\n460 SYNTAX. f^ 306 \n\n(either as a subject, or in connection with lariiv) as 2i predicate), \nand as an object in the Accusative ; \n\nSubject : "EireTot t^ a/)eT^ O\'^C^ a^a i els rhv irXelca xpovov yuaXKov, ^ rp Koxlq \n{to be preserved for a longer time results rather from bravery than cowardice), X. R. \nL. 9, 1. Predicate: T^ Siktjj\' ^iZ6vai irdrepov ir({<rx*"\' Tt iariv, ^ iroiCiw \nPI. Gorg. 464, d. Object: BouXo/\xc2\xabw ypdcpeiv. See \xc2\xa7 306. \n\n(2) Yet it so far retains the nature of the verb, as \n\n(a) It denotes, by different forms, the different circumstances \nof the action : duration, completion, futurity, and has active, \nmiddle, and passive forms. \n\nTpai(p\xe2\x82\xaciu, scribere, yfypcupfvcu, scripsisse, ypd>pai, scripsisse or scribere (^ 257), \nypd\\peiy, scripturum esse ; ^ovXdicrdai, to deliberate or be advised, fif$ovKevebcu, \nto have deliberated or have been advised, fiovKftxroff^ai, to have deliberated or to de- \nliberate, $ov\\evbrji/ai, to have been advised or to be advised, etc \n\n(b) It retains the government of the verb, i. e. it governs the \nsame Case as its verb, e. g. Tpa.(f>\xe2\x82\xacLv (.Triarok-qv, liri^pi^lv t^s \na/3\xe2\x82\xacT^9, ixd)(\xc2\xa3cr&aL rots TroXc/xtoi?; \n\n(c) It has an adverb for its attributive expletive, and not, as \nin the case of an actual substantive, an adjective, e. g. KoAtu? \naTToSaveiv (on the contrary, koXos -^avaro?). \n\nThe Inf will first be considered without the article, and then \nwith it. \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 306. 1. The Infinitive, as an Object, without the \n\nArticle. \n\n1. The Inf is used, as the complementary ^ object in the \nAce, to express something-a/wi^fZ a/ or effected: \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) With verbs oi willing and the contrary (verba voluniatis)^ \ne. g. PoyXofiai, i&e\\o), jxiXXio, iTrcSvpui), d^iu>, Sixatul, ^i/rw, TTpoSvfJLOi" \nfxaL, Trpo-^/AOS \xe2\x82\xac6^1, \xe2\x82\xacTn\\\xe2\x82\xacLpQ), \xe2\x80\x94apu)fjiai, /3ovXa\'o/uiat, Tropocr/ceuoi^o/xat, \nIXT])(avli)ixaL, ToXfJiu), V7ro/xevo>, eciaSa, etc. \xe2\x80\x94 Seo/iai {tO entreat), uccrci\'xu, \nTrapatvu), cttitcAAo), Trapoivvoi, ttclSo), or/xySorXo.\'tu, vovSeroiy kcXcixh, \n7rpo?rarTa), etc. \xe2\x80\x94 coi, a-vy)((DpC}, d/xcXto, etc. \xe2\x80\x94 BeBoiKa, tfyo^ovfjuu, \n\n\' The verb\'? which take an Infinitive after them, nre usually such as do not \nexpress a complete idea of themselves, but require an Inf. or some other con \nstruction. to complete the idea. The Inf.. therefore, is the cotn^ement of the \nverb on which it depends. Other verbs take a Participle for their complement \nBee ^ 309. \n\n\n\nk 306.] INFINITIVE WITHOUT THE ARTICLE. 461 \n\n<f>\xe2\x82\xacvy(o, dvapaXKofxaL, okvw, etc. \xe2\x80\x94 (XTrayopevw, KaTe^w, kwXvo), etc. ; \xe2\x80\x94 . \nrjavxuLV, irpay^iara, dcrxoXtav, 6)(Xov irap^xoi tlvC, l^ovdlav SiSoVai, and \nthe like. \n\nBouAo/ioi ypd<peiv. \'Eiri^vfiw iropeiea^ai. ToXfxw virofx4v\xe2\x82\xaciv \nrhuKiv^vvov. UapaivSi <roi ypdcpeiv. \'Aj/a/3aAAo^ot ffoL airo Kplvecr^ ai. \nPI. Gorg. 457, e. <po0ovfiai SjeA\xe2\x82\xac7xe\xc2\xab*\' <re. Phaed. 98, d. a/teAto t^j d)s \naXv^us alrias \\eyfiy. Dem. 01. 3. 16, 25. rts &\xc2\xbb/ auxb;/ hi KuXvaei SeOpo \n^aSiCf"; X. Ag. 1, 7. \'AyrjcriKaos uTreVrTj do-xo\\tov aurdJ (ry fia<ri\\e7) \nirap4^fiy arpartveiv eVl roi/s "EAAtjvos. Dem. Chers. 102, 53. riffvxUv \nroiovffiy ^Keivt^ vpdrr \xe2\x82\xac ii/, on fiov\\eTai. \n\nRemark 1. On the difterence between the Inf. and the Part, with alaxv- \nveabai, aiSf7adcu, -wtpiopav^ &pxf(T^ai, iravuv, -KavToiov yiyveabai, irapaffK^vd^ea- \nbui, TTfipaTdai, see <j 311. Verbs of prcj^endng and hindering, and the like, liave \nthe following constructions: (a) (not veiT frequent) Etpy\'co ae airiivai. Ov \nKwKvw <T( a-Kievai. (b) (usually) Etpyw ae fxy anievai according to \xc2\xa7 318, \n7: and after a preceding negation: \'Aa-rvdyris, on Stono avrov 6 Kvpos, ovShu \niSvvaro a\xc2\xbb\'Tf\'x\xc2\xab\xc2\xbb\xc2\xbb\' f^-V oif x"P^C\xc2\xabo\'\'^a\'> X. Cy. 1. 4, 2. according to ^ 318, 9. \n(c) Tov ipaiTfTfVfiy lol SftTiroTat rohs oiK^ras) Sea/xoTs aweipyovo-i, X. C. \n2. 1, 16. (d) Has aaKhs Svo 6.ydpas ( ^ fi tov /x^ KaraS vyaiy X. An. 3. 5, 11. \n(e) (seldom) M(?0^onfy roinovs (tpy f iv, & st e p.}) ovyaa^ai ^Adirreiu rj/ias, \nib. 3. 3, 16. (f) Thy \'ir\\(7(TToy o/jliKov tuv ^iKwv elpyoy to p.^ to iyyvs rrjs \n\xe2\x80\xa2w6K((ds KfLKovpyfiy, Th. 3, 1. according to \xc2\xa7 308, Rem. 1. (g) very fre- \nquently after a preceding negation : Ovk aw elxovro ou5\' airh twv (pi\\uv rh \nfiij oifx^ ir\\foyficr\xc2\xab7y -nap aviuv irfipaabai, X. Cy. 1. 6,32. according to \n\\ 318, 9. \n\nRem. 2. The verb irfld(iy,to persuade, regularly takes for its object a sub- \nKtantive-sentencc. expressed by the conjunction ws and a finite verb ; it takes \nthe Inf. (Ace. with the Inf.) more seldom. X. C 1. 1, 1. rroWdKis i^avfiaaa, \nrial TOT* \\6yois ^A^vcdovs tirfuray ol ypa\\f/dp.\xe2\x82\xacvoi 2w/cpaT7jv, ws d^ios etrj \ndaydrov rp ir6\\(i. \n\nRem. 3. In order to express more definitely the idea of something which \nis to l>e done, efiected, etc., the Greeks sometimes join the conjunction &sTe \nwith the Inf governed by verbs of tliis class. Her. 7, 6. aveTr\xe2\x82\xaci<re Eep^eo, \n&sTf woif (ly ravra (to do t/iis). Sometimes, also, in order to make the pur- \npose or ol>ject more emphatic, Sir\xc2\xabs, us with the Subj., Opt. or Put. Ind., is \nused. So in At\'.ic prose, the verbs irpo^vp.f7abai, 5iauoe7ff^ai, fjLTjxayaa-^ai, irapa\' \nK(\\(v\xc2\xabTdai, SioKfKfvta^ai, Trapa(TKfvd((a^ai, are connected with bnws and the \nPut. Ind. \n\n(li) With verbs of thinJcing, supposing, saying, and the con- \ntra ly (verba cogitandi, putancli, et dicendi), e. g. Aoyi^ecr^at, \nrjydarSat, vofit^cLV, l\\TrLt,iiv, cvx^cr^atj ^ok^v, Kwhwivnv, etc. \xe2\x80\x94 Aeyeiv, \n<fidvai, etc. \xe2\x80\x94 apviiaSai (to deiiy), aTnarcLV, etc. \n\nIJofiiCw anapr(7y (I think [to have erred] that I have erred). \'E\\7r/C\xc2\xab \n\xe2\x82\xacVTvx-h<rfiy {I hope to be happy). Auttj v S6^a Ka\\a>s 5 o k e? e x e "\'\xe2\x80\xa2 Th. 3 \n74. 7, ir6\\is iKiv5vv(v<re irfio-a S ia<p^apriyai. Aeyw eldivai radra (1 \ngay [to hiow] that 1 know this). \n\nRem. 4. On the difference between the Inf. and Part, after the verba \n\n39* \n\n\n\n462 SYNTAX. [^ 306. \n\nii.Kov\xe2\x82\xaciv, elSct/ai, eTtlaTaar^ai, fx-av^dyeiu, yiyvdxTKeiv, yiifivi](TKi(Tbai, irvvd^dyecT^cu, \nala^dv^a^ai ] SeiKuvyai, cnro(paip\xe2\x82\xaciv, StjAow, ayye^Xew, (paiveabau, ioiKeyaif 866 \n\xc2\xa7 311. \n\nRem. 5. It will be seen (\xc2\xa7 329), that, after the verbs above mentioned, the \nobject may be expressed also by a complete substantive-sentence with us or 5ti. \n\n(c) After expressions denoting ahility, cause, power, capacity ^ \nox fitness (verba facultatis), e. g. StVa/Aai, Swaros, 6hvva.To%, otos t \nei/xt, t^, (^possum) \xe2\x80\x94 \xe2\x82\xac<ttlv, Trapco-rtv, e^coTtv, eveariv (Jicet) \xe2\x80\x94 ttouo, \ndta-rrpaTTo/jLaL Karepya^oytxat, KarflurKCva^w, etc. \xe2\x80\x94 Sctvo? (^powerful., \ncapable, fit^i t/cavo?, CTrtr^Sctos, KaK09, ^tt(dv, airios ei/xi, etc.; \xe2\x80\x94 after \nverbs of choosing^ appointing, naming, educating, teaching. \n\nAvuafiai iroieTu ravra. Her. 2, 20. ot ^ttjc/ou 6.yeuoi \xe2\x82\xaci<ri a\'lrioi itXtj- \n^veiu rhu TTOTafiSu. 7. 129. avwuv/xous tous &\\\\ovs el.\' at iroiffi. 5, 97. \n(TTpaTrjyhi/ airoS e ^avr e s avTwv elvai MeKoiv^ioy. OT6s r* elfil iroifly \nravra. X. Cy. 1. 4, 12. rls &j/ aov yf iKavure pos TTilaai ; 3, 18. Znv6- \nrepos 5 idd(T Ke LP. Ilojw ce ^cAaj/. Ai5a(r\xc2\xabc\xc2\xbb Cf ypd<pfiy. \n\nKem. 6. On TToieiv with the Part., see ^ 310, 4 (b). \n\nRem. 7. The relation of the r<\'5?//^ the thinp: fo \' " \' \xe2\x96\xa0 hich i\xc2\xab > \xe2\x96\xa0-\xe2\x96\xa0\xe2\x96\xa0d \n\nby the Inf. with these verbs, is sometimes stated 111 oly by a le \n\nconjunction wstc. PI. Prot. 34S, c. aSv yar oy vfuy, fisre npwTay6pov \nrovSe <ro<purfp6y nya i \\4 <rb ai. So often in Plat. iKayhs usrt. X. Ag. 1, \n37. iir olfia iv (sc. Agcsihius), Sisr &yev <pvyT}s Kcd ^aydru-y rks x6\\fis iia- \nTe Ae(ro I. \n\n(d) The Inf is also used after the verb Trc^v/ctVai, after the \nimpersonal verbs and phrases 7rpo97;Kct, TrpeVct, crt\'/A/Scui\'ct, Set, xpVy \navayKOLov, St\'/catov, ux^iXtixov icmv and the like ; after verbs of \ngiving, taking, goi?ig, scjiding, and many others ; after adjectives \nof various significations, e. g. a^to?, StKaios (worthy, tcortJt), rjSik, \npaStos, x\'^^^\'^\'^\'* ^^^ many others ; after abstract substantives, es- \npecially in connection ^vith ilvai and yiyv^a-Bax, as dvay/07, cXtti\'s, \no-xoXtJ, wpa eoTtv, to express a purpose or determination, a result \nor r^^cf. \n\nTh. 4, 61. iri<pvKf rb o\xc2\xbb\'(&^p\xc2\xa3c7r\xe2\x82\xacio\xc2\xbb\' 5to iroinrbs iipx^**\' M^** *\'"<\'\'\' eficoi^oy, ^w- \nAatTcecri^ai Serb eTrtJi/ (;\xc2\xab<?\xc2\xab are 50 coihttitiited as aluxti/s to ride thos- \' \\f, \n\nhilt to guard against those u\'ho assail). "HKOfify /xav^dvf ty {ad o.. , ;.). \n\nTh. 2, 27. TO?s AlyivT]rais oi AoKeSaifiSi\'ioi eSotray Qvptay oiKfTy #fo2 r^y y^y \nyefxea-^ai. PI. Apol. 33, b. duoiws koI frXovalco koI ir4yrtri trap 4%^ tfuarrhp \nipwrav. X. An. ^. 2, 1. rh vjjujcru rov (rrparfi\'^iaros utaTcXiirc s-eytxpciy \nfpvXdrreiy rh CTpaTOTreSov. "A | \xc2\xbb o s f(rri ^avfidCf<f^cf^^ Her. 4. 53. \nBopva^evvs irlyeff^ai i)di<rr6s iari {duk\'issiinus ad bibendum). 6, 112. T\xe2\x82\xaco\xc2\xbbt \n\'^v ro7<ri "EAAr/cri Koi rh oHyofia rh MriScov <p6 ^o s aKovaai (a terror to hear). \n\nRflM. 8. Homer makes the Inf. depend on adjectives also, to express the \nsame relation as is denoted by the Ace. o/tnore dejxnite limitation {\xc2\xa7 279, 7). II. *i \n\n\n\nJ 306.] INFIxXITIVE WITHOUT THE ARTICLE. \n\n\n\n463 \n\n\n\n437, ^\xe2\x82\xacUiv y avenoKTii/ o/jloIoi (T-mroi) (equal to the winds in speed), lu a \nsimilar manner, the Inf. eTrcu in the phrase e/cwj/ elvai, must probably be \nexplained (in\'/h\'iu/ so fur as it depends on my being or nature, as far as depends on \nme, i. c. actually willing). Her. 7, 104. Uuv re eli/ot ovS\' hv fiovi^ofiaxeo.fii \n{could I liave my own choice, or so far as concerns me, I would not fight even in \nsingle comfjat). PI. Phaedr. 252, a. o^ej/ 5^ e Kovtra elvai ovk kiroKeiTreTai. ri \n^vx-ff. This phrase is used but seldom in affinnative sentences. \n\nRem. 9. As the poets say ^oC/xa iSeV^ai (a iconder to see), so also in prose, \nthe complementary Infinirivc 6pav, elsopau and lSe7v, are sometimes \njoined with verbs of apjttaring and showing one\'s self. X. Cy. 5, 4, 11. ce iirava- \nd(aar6fi(vos pa, diroi6s tis (palyrj iSeiv 6 Toiaimjv if^xV ex^y (/ carne to see \nwhat sort of a looking person you are, you, who have such a soul). \n\nKem. 10. It is a peculiarity of the Greek, .hat, iastead of the Pass. Inf., it \ncommonly uses the Inf. Act. or Mid., with the adjectives mentioned under (c) \nand (d), c. {?. ivvar6s, i^ios, etc., and with substantives e. g. ^av/xa, (pS^os, and \nwith verbs of gicing. etc. Such Infinitives, the English translates both actively \nand passively, c. g. TaDro ^aSid (an fia^fTv (these things are easy to learn or be \nlearned). KaX6s i<niv iSe7y ( pulchcr est visu, he is beautiful to see or to be seen). \nTh. 1, 38. i^ios ^av ixdcrai. Pi. Phaed. A070S Svi/arhs KaTavorjffai (capable \nof being understood). The active subject of the Inf. is easily supplied, in all \n\' les of this kind, c. g. he is Iteautifnl for us to see. A Dat. is often ex- \n\n1 with .such an Inf.. e. g. PI. Rp. 599, a. ^a[5<o TroteTi/ ;uV dbori r^v \na\\4)ii(iaiM. So 2a>/fpaTTjs ir a <ri iropfTx^^ eaurhv ipwrau (he yielded himself to \nall to question, i. e. he iKnnitttd all to question him). \n\nRkm. 11. From the use of the Inf. after A\'crbs of tcilUng, ivishing, entreati-ig, \nand imploring and the like, the following ]>eculiarities in the use of the Inf. Lre \nto l>c explains 1 \n\na. The Inf i- \\try miinently usimI m uio Epic writers instead of the second \nperson Imperativi, snmctimcs also instead of the third pirson; instead of the \ns<ri)iid ]\xc2\xbbrson, not .\xc2\xabicld(Mii also in other j>octs, and even likewise in Herodotus \xe2\x80\xa2\xe2\x99\xa6 \nand ill the Attic jjiosc-writcrs. The Inf. must then be considered as the object * \ndepending on the Imp. of a verb of willing, which is to be supplied, e. g. eld^eAe. \nIlttnce wlien ; \' \' \' \xe2\x96\xa0\' < are joined with the Inf., these, inasmuch as \nthey rcfi-r to tl ,ncd in the omitted Imp., are put in the iSTom. \nThe Imp. is ul?u olicii iiitvnliaiigcd with the Inf. Od. a, 290, sqq. voar-f]- \naas 5^ ^ireiTo (plKrji/ 4s trarpiSa ya7av (Xrind re 01 x^ I\'C\'j fat iirl Krepea ktc- \npd^ai . . .Kol avfpi iMTjTtpa Souvai (and then having returned to your dear father- \ntuiu\' \' \'/> a mound. vtc). 1\\. $,75. vix(7s S\' &X\\o^fv HWos e pT}TV\xe2\x82\xac lu iTreea-ffiv. \n11. ^ -. if 5f . . ot^affa kXtjTSi dvpas l(po7o 56iJ.oio, ireirXou . . ^eTvot \'Ai^tj- \n\xe2\x99\xa6\'fltiTjr \xc2\xabiri \xe2\x96\xa0yavvaaiv T]vK6yLOiO. Hor. G, 80. ah Stj fioi Koi to xPVI^o.Ta Se\'^aj, Koi raSe \nTa avfifioKa au^e \\a$<Lv ts 8\' &!/ ex\'^*\' toDto avaiTej], tovtw airoSovfai (ei \nredde). Th. 5, 9. av Se, KAtapiSo, ou(pviS\'iu>i ras Trv\\as avoi^as iircK^eij/ \nKol iirdyfa^ai ws TaxiCTa ^v/xfJil^ou. \n\nb. When the Inf. refers to the third Pers., its subject as well as the accom- \npanving expletives of the predicate, are commonly in the Ace. This Ace. \nwith the Inf. is to be considcre<l as the object of a verb of icil/ing, which is to \nbe supplied, e. g. f^xofiou, S6s, iroiej, or of a verl) denoting ivhat ought to fee, must \n^f\'y <\xe2\x80\xa2\xe2\x80\xa2 P- XPV, 8\xc2\xab\xc2\xab"; so with wishe.<<, entreaties, precepts and comytacts. II. 17, 179, sq. \n<j8e li TI5 iXirfOKtv, Ihccv els oupavhu evpvw Zev Trctrep, ?i A\'lavra Xax^^^^V \nTuB4os vi6y, tf avihu $aaL\\va iroKvxpvaoio MvK-fiur,s ! fprant or cause that \nflther Ajax may obtain it bi/ lot. etc.). Aesch. !Siilil)l. ^eol iroK7TaL, p.ri fxe SouXeias \nTUX*\'". ^- "^\'tm. 6, 11. rhv Se Kw-nysr-qv ^x^vra i^ievai iAacppav \nia^rira 4vi rh Kvirqyeaioy, rhv 5e apKVWphi/ eirea^ai. \n\nc. Hence the Inf. is sometimes used in reference to the first and second Pers., \nin questions denoting indignation. Her. 1, 88. S> $aai\\ei), Kdrepoy Keyeiv irphs \n\n\n\n^i> \n\n\n\n464 SYNTAX. [^ 307 \n\n(re Ta voioov Tvyx<i-vOi ^ (fiyav iv n^ irapeSyri XP^^V : (sliall I speak or be si- \nlent?). Od. \xc2\xab\xe2\x80\xa2, 431. d SetAoi Tr6&\' Xjxeu; ri kokuv t/ietpcTC tovtuv ; (whither to \n^0, i. e. whither are you to yo ?). \n\nd. Finally, the Inf. is used instead of the Opt., with of ydfj, el^e, as the ex- \npression of a wish. Od. w, 375, sq. ot yap, ZeD re irdrep . . ^ rolos idy toi \nX^iQiS eu T]ix\xe2\x82\xacTepoi(ri SS/jlokti, revxe ex^f Sifxoiaiv, icpeardfjie vai Kol afivvtiv \n&vdpas fJt.y7)(TTripas. (instead of e^etTTcuTjj/ k. a^vyoifii). \n\n\n\n^ 307. JSfom., Gen., Dat., and Ace. with the Infinitive. \n\n1. Most verbs which take the Inf. have, in addition to this \nobject, also a personal object, which is pat in the Case that the \nverb requires, e. g. Aco/mat a-ov ISJ^iiv. ]Sv/x)8ovXeva) <roi \n(TO)cf}pov\xe2\x82\xacLv. \'ETrorpvvto (T\xe2\x82\xac fJLd)(\xe2\x82\xaca3aL. \n\nRemark 1. So also weAeueii\', which sijjnifies to impel, fa wpe^ hence to \ncommand (jubere), in Attic prose, is always constructed with the Ace. and the \nInf., e. g. Ke\\\xe2\x82\xacvw ffe ypd(f>fiu [jubeo te scribere). \n\n2. When predicative expletives, consisting of adjectives or sub- \nstantives, and referring to the personal object of the govern- \ning verb, are joined with the Infinitive, they are either put by \nattraction in the same case as the personal object, or in the \nAccusative without attraction. \n\n(a) Gen. with In/. Aeofial aov vpo^vfiov eJvai (I beg you to he xeahus), \n\nAfOfiai <rov ir pSbvyiOv elyai. X. IL 1. 5, 2. Kvpov \nibeoyro ws ir pobv ^lordr ov irphs rhy ir6\\(fioy yfvdo\'^tu \n(befjged C. to be as zealotis as }x>ssible in the war). Her. 6, \n1 00. ^A^riyaio) y ibcr^dTjcray (r<plai fiori^ohs ytveobcu \n[requested tlie Athenians to aid them). If the Gen. is fol- \nlowed by the Inf accompanied by a more definite ex- \npletive, this expletive is always put in the Ace., e. g. \nLys. 118. Se\'o/iox vfiwy KaTai^rj<pi<Taur^ai QfOfiy^OTOVy i>- \n^viJ.ovfi\xe2\x82\xacvovs, 8<Toi fxoi 6 ayuy i<mv (/ pray you te \ncondemn Th., considering}, etc.). Th. \\, \\20. aySpuy ay a \n^wy i<TTiy, ad iKovfieyovs 4^ \xe2\x82\xacipi)yris iro\\\xe2\x82\xacfi*iy {it is tht \ncharacteristic of brave men, when injured, to exchange peaa \nfor war). \n\n(b) Dat. with Inf. \'2,vfifiov\\eva> trot irpo^vfiof flyvu {I advise you to be zeal- \n\nous). liVfi^ovKivw (Toi irpo^vnov iJycu. X. An. 2. 1,2. \n^ ^o^\xe2\x82\xac ToTs Twv \'ExX-qptcy ar parrjy o7s ffviTKfvaaafL\' \nfyois h elxoy koI i^oir\\i(rafi.4yots wpoUycu. X. \nHipparch. 7, l.*\xc2\xbbrai\'Tt irpos^Kti ipx^rri t^poylfitf \nelvai {it becomes even/ rider to be prudent). X. An. 1. 2. 1 \nEcyl^ Vetv irapTiyyei\\e \\a$6yTa robs Hippos {com \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 307.] NOM., GEN., DAT., AND ACC. WITH INFINITIVE. 465 \n\nmanded Xenias to come^ having taken men). 7. \\, 21. vvv \ntro: \xe2\x82\xac|\xe2\x82\xac<rTj*\' ayZpl yei/ea^ai (you can show yourself a man). \nX. Cy. 2. 1, 15. e|eo-T\xc2\xa3i/ Vfx7y et )SouAe(r,^e, \\a^6vrai \noirAo fls KivSwou 4fifiaii/\xe2\x82\xaciv. \n\n{c) Acc. with Inf. \'EiroTpvvw tre ir pd^vfiov ehai. KeXeiw a e TpdS^v \nfiov flvai, \n\nHem. 2. The Ace. in the examples under (a) and (b), may be explained by \nconsidering the object of the governing verb, e. g. deofxai u^uwj/, as being at the \nsame time tlic suhject of the Inf., i. e. this object stands in a two-fold relation, \nf.ring l)0th the object of the governing verb, and the subject of the Inf. (see \nRem. 3), e. g. Afo/uu vfiaiy [v fias] fior}^ov s yey^a^ai (I beg you that you will aid). \n\nRem. 3. Verbs which take the simple substantive object, in the Ge?i. or \nA/f.. sometimes take, in the construction with the Inf., this object in the Ace, \nthe object of the governing verb and the subject of the Inf. being united in \none. This construction is used when the whole action of a person and not the \njiprson himself, is made specially prominent. Lys. Fragm. S. 3, p. 144. Seo- \njuaj oiy vfias (rvyyyu.<ij.rjv ^X*\'*\' (^ ^*\'.7 therefore that you would pardon). Th. 4, \n97. IT po ayo p\xe2\x82\xacva) avrovs iK rov lepov ct.ir tSvras airocpepeff^ai rd acperepa \navTwi/ (instead of a^roTy aviovaiv airo<f>.), I give orders that they, going out of the teni\' \nj\xc2\xbble. should carry their fjf\'ecfs irith them. So irapayyeWu, a.irayy4\\ka, TrposTdTra, \niiaKfKfvofial (re airtfyat. X. C. 4. 7, I. ^WKpdrrjs avr dpK i is eV rals irposTjKov\' \ntrais trpd^tatv avrovs {tovs 6 fiiXovvr as avrw) elfai i-rre /xeXclr o. So also \nthe verbs \xc2\xabiirf7v, \\4y\xe2\x82\xac t y, <p pd^f ly, (pwyfTv in the sense of jubere, are con- \nstructed with the Ace. and the Inf., in the Attic poets. S.Fh. 101. Keyw o-\' iyi) \n5 <{ A o) \xe2\x99\xa6iAo>fT^T7ji/ \\a$f7y. Also ir p o s \xe2\x80\xa2{) k e t, -rr p ewei, e^ea-r t, <TVfx$alv\xe2\x82\xaci, \n^v/xtpopoy iffri wiih lAit. ov Ace. tcith Inf. 5 (7, xpv (\xc2\xa7 279, Rem. 4). The \nArr. is necessark\'. when the statement in the sentence does not refer to a \ndefinite person, but is altogether general in its nature. PI. Ion. 539, e. ovk &v \n\xe2\x96\xa0Kpf-rroi y( iir i\\tj a ^loy a flvai pay^/tffShy &y5pa {it tcould notbe fitting that \na i/:\'ij\'>odist should be furg(tful). \n\n3. Besides the case already mentioned, the Ace. ivith the L \nI/if. is used in Greek, as in Latin, in the following case also. \nWhen a subject with its predicate, as \'O dya^os avrjp cvSai/x-ovet, \n\nis made the object of our thought or will, the subject is put in \nthe Ace. {rov dyaSiv aiSpa) and the predicate in the Inf. (evSat- \nfioveiv, e. g. No/xi^(D Tov aya&6v avSpa \xe2\x82\xacvSaLixove2v [Ihdieve \nthat the good man is happy). If the predicate is an adjective, \nparticiple, or substantive with cTmt yCyveaSai, etc. (\xc2\xa7 240, 2), as \n\'O dycu9os avrjp evSai/xayv iarCv, then these words also are put in \nthe Ace., e. g. No/At^tu t6v dya^ov avSpa evhalixova. cti/at. \n\n4. But when the subject of the governing verb is at the same 2,. \ntime the subject of the Inf also, the subject of the Inf is not \nexpressed in Greek, as it is in Latin, by the Ace. of a personal \npronoun, but is wholly omitted ; and when adjectives or sub- \nstantives stand with the Inf as expletives of the predicate, \nthey are put, by attraction, in the Nom. \n\n\n\n4G6 SYNTAX. [k 307 \n\nQXoixai afx-apreiv {I believe I have erred, or that I have erred, credo me errasse) \nOUi afiapTclu {you think that you have erred). Oterot ajxapTilv. OUiuba afiaprfTp \nOXofiai evSaifiwv ihai (I think lam happy, or that lam happy, credo me beatum \nesse). OKei evSalfAUv etvai. Oterai evSaifiooj/ eluai. OlSfii^a tvSaifioyei \nfluai. \'O (rTparrjyhs ecpr] irp6bv fios eluai iTri^QT\\^iiv. \n\nE.EM. 4. If, however, where the subject of the governing verb and of the Inf. \nis the same, the subject of the Inf. is to be made emphatic, which is particularly \nthe case in antitheses, then the Ace. with the Inf. is used, as in Latin, e. g. Her. \n2. 2. 01 AlyvTTTioi ivS/JLi^ou e (o vt ov s Trpdrovs yivfffbai iraurwv apbpwiruv (se, non \nalios homines). 1, 34. Kportros iy6/xi^\xe2\x82\xac eavrhu dvou iravruv oK^iuTaTov. But \ninstead of eavrSv, where there is a contrast between persons, avr6s (=se \nipsum) is likewise used, by attraction. Her. 7. 1.3fi. He/)^7js ovk epr} bfutlos errea-bau \nAaKeSaifiovioiai\' kcIvovs fxku yap avyx^ou ra TrdvTCJV av^punrwy v6^i}jia, b.iroK- \nreivavTas KTipiiKas, avrhs (//>su\xc2\xbbi instead of se ipsnni) 5e ravra ob voiiicrfiv. \nTh. 4, 28. K\\eW OVK etprf ai/Tos, oAV iKilvov (Nj/cjav) aTpaTrjyelv. So also by \nmeans of attraction the personal pronouns iydo, av, thjhIs, v/ifts, <r4>cij, are \njoined with the Inf. \'EnofjLuvw <toi . . i? /xijy iyu fiovKeabcu ay /uera aov (airo- \nhave7i/)f I swear to yon that I would rather, etc., X. Cy. 6. 4, 6. Et oUtr^e Xa\\Kt5- \n4as rT]v \'EWdSa arwcreiy, vfifls 5^ airoSpdcTfa^ai to, npay/xaTa, ovk opdws oif<rd(. \nDem. Ph. 3, \xc2\xa7 74 {if you think that the L\'halcidians will save Greece, and tliat \nyou will escape the trouble of it, etc.). (Oi iv ^dpLca ttpaaav) ir6\\iv apiciy vrdpxay \n\'Zdfxou OVK acr^euri . . /col Suva\'^ dr epoi flvai a<pe7s . . iropi^eadai to. tViTTjStja \nTuu iv TTJ ttSKci, Til. 8. 76. \xe2\x80\x94 Sometimes the enclitic pronouns are used tntl-.^t \nany special emphasis. PI. Rp. 400. 1). o7^ai ^e aKtiKoevai. \xe2\x80\x94 When th\' \nverb has an object, and this olycct is at the same time the subject oft:.- ^ - . , \nthen the Inf. merely (without the Ace.) is used, but the predicative expletives \nare put in the same case as this object. OuS" hy tovtois iirlarevoy 4 /i- \nu6yois ececTid^ot, X. Cy. 3. 3, 55 (/ ux>uld not even trust these tint thnj will be \nsttadfast). OvhivX av^pdiruiy v<p e i fXTjy tty otjT\xe2\x82\xac ^(Krioy odd\' \' --ov /3 6 - \n\nP iw K 4 yai, X. C. 4. 8, 6 {to no one would I grant that he had li- r, etc.). \n\nWhen the object of the governing verb is also the object of the Inf., this also is \nused only in the first place, but is omitted in the second. 2a>Kpc(T7js, 6<^ 6 \nKaT-f]yopos, Tovs irarepas TrpoirriKaKi^eiv iSiSatTKf, Treldwy fxfy rovs avv6yTas \navTU} ao(pMTepovs w oi\xe2\x82\xac7v rCiiv irarfpajy, X. C. 1. 2, 49 ( persuodens diacipulis suis, se \nEOS sapientiores reddcre patribus). \n\n5. "Wnicii the governing word is an oblique Case of a parti- \nciple, the predicative expletives which are connected iWth the \nInf., are put, by attraction, in the same Case as that participle. \n\nPI. Apol. 21, b. ^\\^ov iiri riva tuv SoKovyr uy <To<pS>v dyat {veni^nm ad \naliquem eorwn, qui se sapientes esse opinalHintur). Her. 1. 176. riy yvy Avkimp \n<pafi4yuy a ay di coy fhai ot troWoi \xe2\x82\xaciai iirqKvSes {eorum Lydorum, gui SB \nXanthios esse dicebant). X. Cy. 6. 1, 34. (KCpos awfytXaaiv) hr\\ rH Kpdro- \nVI Tov cpuTos <pd(TKoyri dvai {at the one affirming that he was above the I\'li/lu- \nence of love. \n\n6. The Ace. icith tJie Inf., like the Lif alone, is used after the \nfoUoAving classes of verbs and expressions : (a) of icUling and \nthe contrary [k 306, 1, (a)] ; (b) of thinking, hclkving, scupng \np 306, 1, (b)] ; (c) of causing, c/ioosing, ajypointing, naming \n\n\n\n$ 307.] NOM., GEN., DAT., AND ACC. WITH INFINITIVE. 467 \n\n[^ 306, 1, (c)] ; (d) after impersonal verbs and expressions sig-l \nnifying must, ought, slwuld, it hajypens, e. g. M, TrposrjK\xe2\x82\xacL, TrpcVeti \ne^toTtv, CTTieiKcs, KaXov, /caKov (etc.) eortv, crv/xj8atVet. \n\n\'AiTTvdyrjS fiov\\6 fX\xe2\x82\xacVOs rhv ttoTSo ws ^Siara d\xe2\x82\xacLTrve7v irpos-fiyayev avrcS \nvamoBaTra ^pujxara, X. Cy. 1. 3, 4. No/x^^\xc2\xab vfxas ifjLol elyai Kal iraTpida Kol \n<pl\\ovs Kol a-vfjLu.<ixovs, X. An. 1.3,6. \'E Kir I (a eKeivovs i\\^e7v -n-phs ah \nficiWov, ^ irp\xc2\xabs ifj-f, X. Cv. 2. 4, 15. Thv fiia^hv inr icrxv tiT o avrols oKl- \n^uv r)pi(pwv iKvXivv irap\xe2\x82\xacaf<T^ai, X. An. 7, ^,9. Thv jxkv KaXhu kol- \nya^hv 6.vhpa fvSalfiova eluai (prjixt rhu Koi irovr}phv &^\\iov, PL \nGorg. 407, e. Kpeirrov ( sc. eVri) avi/ iroXXocs oiKovvra aacpaXias apKovvra \nix^iv, ^ (xovov h lan (i> fifvov to. twu ttoXltosv iiriKivdwus Trdvra Ke kttj a"- \n\xc2\xbbai,X. C. 2. 3. 2. \n\nRem. 5. With the impersonal verbs and expressions above mentioned, the \nAce. xcitli the Itif\'. is not to be rcfrardcd as the grammatical object, but as the \nyrummatkal stibjtct of the sentence ; but logically., i. e. in respect to the sense, \nthe Ace. with the Inf. must even here be regarded as the object, and the im- \npersonal expressions as transitive verbs, e.g. Ao/ceT/iot (= yo^/^w) Kvpov \naofuTUToy yeyfffdai. Thus it can also be explained why the Greeks and Lat- \nins in quoting a j)hrase, e. g. tvSaifxoya ehai, felicetn esse, fiaaiXea ehm, regem \nesse, use this construction. \n\nRem. 6. The Greeks are fond of changing the impersonal construction into \nthe personal, by elevating the object into a subject, making the impersonal \nexpression personal, and referring it to the person of the subject. By this \nconstruction, the subject is rendered prominent ; while in the construction of \nthis Ace. witli tlic Inf. the whole idea of tiie sentence is made the principal \nthing. This is the case: (a) with X e7\xc2\xabT ai, a yyeWerat, 6 fioXoyelTat \nand the like; (b) with SokcT, it seems; (c) with a-vfifialyn, accidit ; where \nthis last verb is used personally, the subject stands before it. while with the \nAce. and the Inf., it Ibllows the verb; (d) in the phrases SiKaiov, a^iov, \n4irl6o(ov, Svvaruy, afivxavoy, xa^e^\'^\'\' e<rTtf, etc.; (e) in the phrase \nroaovrov 5ea> with the Inf. followed by wyre with the Inf. or Ind. {tantum \nobtst, ut \xe2\x80\x94 ut) so Jar is it from, and voWov Sea> with the Inf. \n\nA4y era I rhy $a<Ti\\(a a.Tro<piry\xe2\x82\xac7y and \\ e y \xe2\x82\xac t a i 6 fiaaiXevs airocpvye^y. \nX. Cy. 5. 3, 30. 6 \'Atravptos ds Tqy X\'^P"-^ ip-fiaXXciv ayyeXXerai. Hcr. \n3, 124. iioKfi oi rby tr ar (pa Xou<TdaL /xhy viro tov Aios, xp\'^ea^ai 5e vnh \n\n\n\nrov \n\n\n\nat 6 s (I fit (lyai iXtv^tpos. Her. 0, 12. iiriSo^oi ruvrh tovto \xe2\x96\xa0n-eiascrSrai elan. \nI. Cy. b. 4, \\9. &^iol y4 iffficy rov yfy^v-nfj-eyov irpayixaTOS tovtov airoXavaai ti \n\xe2\x96\xa0ya&lV. I.^ocr. Taneg. 76, 168. roaovrov Seovaiy eAeeTj/, lisre Koi fxaXXoy \n\n\n\n\'HXlov. X.An..\'V l,\'2\\.\\e\\vadai fioi Sok(7 kcu t] i-Keivcoy li^pis koI t? 7]fX\xe2\x82\xacr4pa \nvirox^ia. PI. Phaed. 74, a. op\' oiy ov Kara iravra. ravra avjj.fiaiv\xe2\x82\xaci ry]v avd- \nfiy-q a IV dvcu fj.(y a<p\' d^oiwy ktX. 67, c. Ka^apais ehai ov rovro ^vfifiaiyei. \n~-Ai Kai6s (i fii rovTO irpdmiy instead of hiKaiov iari fie rovro irpaTreiy. A i - \n\niLya^i,. _._,.. _ ^. . _, . . . _ _ - \n\nXaipovoiy M toTs aXJ^iiXwy KaKo7s (so far are they from pitying, that they rather \nrejoice even, etc.). \n\nRem. 7. The personal construction with the verbs Zokc7v, ioiKivai, Xtyea^at \nand the like, extends also to clauses with ws, expressing companson, as is the \ncase in Latin with ut videor, ut videris. etc., instead of iit videtur. PI. Rp. 426, b. \noIk 4TraLyir-ns d, ^<pr,y iy(Ji. Sos toiKas, rS>y roioirw\'y aySpwy {yoii do not praise, as \nit seems [instead of as you seem] such men). X. An. 1. 10, 18. -^aau 8 avrai, ^s \nihiyovro, rerpaK6aiaL Utia^ai {the.\'ie chariots ivere four hundred, as it was said). \n6. 3, 25. ol iroXft^toi Sf, Sis y r]iJ.7y i56Kovy, rodro SetVorres aTr^A^ov. \n\n\n\n468 SYNTAX. [\xc2\xa7 30a \n\nRem. 8. On the Ace. with the Inf. in exclamations, see ^ 308, Hem. 2, 0\xc2\xab \nSrt and as after verba sentiendi and dicendi, see \xc2\xa7 329. \n\n\xc2\xa7 308. II. Infinitive with the Article. \n\n1. The Inf. with the article is treated in all respects like a \nsubstantive, and, indeed, is such, since, by means of the article, \nit can be declined through all the Cases, and is capable of ex- \npressing all the relations, which are indicated by the Cases of \nthe substantive with and without prepositions. On the contrary, \nit here also, as in the Inf without the article [k 305, (2)], re- \ntains the nature of a verb. \n\n(a) Th ypdtpeiv, rh ypdrpai, rh yeypatpeuai, tJ) ypd^etv. (b) Ti iiritTro- \n\\^p ypd(peiu, Th Tris aperris iTri^vfj.\xe2\x82\xac7v, rh rols iroKe filo i s fuLxftr^cu. \n(c) T^ Ka\\u>s ypdcpeiy, rh Ka\\us airobayeiy {honorable deatli). Yet pronouns \nin the Ncut. Sing., as attributive adjectives, are joined with the Inf., e. g. PlaL \navTh rh airo^vrjaKfiu. By prefi.xing the article, whole sentences can be \nrepresented as one extended substantive-idex \n\n\xe2\x80\xa2 \n\n2. Wlien the Inf .whether as a subject or object, has a sub- \nject of its own and predicative expletives, both the subject and \nexpletives, as in the case of the Inf without the article, are put \nin the Ace, because the Lif , even as a subject, is considered \ndependent {^ 307, Rem. 5). When, however, the subject of the \nInf is not different from the principal subject of the sentence, \nit is not expressed, and the predicative expletives are put, by \nattraction, in the same Case as the principal subject of the \nsentence, i. e. in the Nom. \n\n(a) Nominative (subject). X. Cy. 5. 4, 19. rh afiaprdyciv ay<rpuTrovs \nivras ov54u, ol^ai, ^av/xacrrov {that men constituted as they are should err, is nd \nstrange) ; here rh afxaprdyeiv which is the subject of itrrl, has av^panrovs for its \nown subject, and oyras as its predicative expletive. 7. 5, 82. ou rh /* i> A o - \njSeTi\'Toi aya^h ovrca ye x^^^^^i usirep rh \\a& 6vr a. <tt fprj^^yai \\v- \n\nTTTipSy. \n\n(b) Genitive : (o) as the object of verbs and adjectives or as an attributive \nof a substantive. X. An. 1. 3, 2. KXfapxos fiiKphv i^(<t>vy\xe2\x82\xac rod fi^ Karawfr- \npai^rivat {just escaped being stojjed to death). Cy. 1. 4, 4. \xc2\xab$\xe2\x96\xa0 Se TpoTfyer 6 \nXP^vos avrhy {rhy Kvpoy) avy rep fnyebei eh upav rov irposTi 0oy yeyeff^ai \n{as time advanced him to the period of [becoming a man] manhood) ; here the Inf \nyeyea^ai, which is used as an object in the Gen., has its predicative expletive \n*ff>6$rifiov in the Ace. 1. 5, 13. ri oZv itrriv i^ rod a\\4^aa-dai Sucaiorepov^ % \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 308.] INFINITIVE WITH THE AETlCLE. \n\n\n\n469 \n\n\n\nrov To7s iplXois kp-hy^iu KdWcov; C. 1. 2, 55. 2a,\xc2\xabp<\xc2\xa3T77s 7rap6KaA\xc2\xab J^./xeA- \n\xc2\xab\xc2\xabr^oi Tov ws <ppovifi(i>TaTov cJvai Ka\\ u, <p\xe2\x82\xacXifi(i;>TaT ov. Very fre- \nquently ToO, TOV 1x4) IS used to denote a purpose, object: in order that, in order \nthat not [S 274, 3, (a)], since by the language, as is frequently the case, that \n\xe2\x96\xa0which calls forth the action, is substituted for that which is to be done, or for \nthe result. Th. 1, 4. TAivws rh \\r,aTiKhu Ko^p^i i^ ttjs Sta\\d(T(rr,s rov rhs \nirpos6Sovs fiaWoi^ Uvai aurcf {in order that his revenues might come in bet- \nter). X. Cy. 1. 3, 9. ol ruy ^acriKewv olyoxooi ets tV apiarfpav {o\'lvov) iyxed/xe- \nvol KaTapl>o<poda-i, rov Sri, d <pdpfiaKa iyxfoieu, fi^ \\va-iTe\\e7v avTo7s (in \norder that it may not be well for them, if they mingle poison with it). 6, 40. to C /i^ \nSia(p\xe2\x82\xacvy\xe2\x82\xaciv rhy Xdyojv 4k tuv Ziktvuv (tkottovs Ka^iaTr)s. (j8) With prepo- \nsitions, e.g. avri, instead of, or in the sense of the Latin tantum abest, ut \xe2\x80\x94 ut, \niKyfrom, in consequence of, fitrd, in connection with, -irpS, for, ire pi, in order that, \nespecially tviKa and virep in connection with fi-fi, in order that not, in order \nnot; also Jkutv and x\xc2\xab^P^J> without, fjLexpi{s), until. Th. 1, 69. avrl rod \niiTfKdfiv (invadere) avroX a^ivveabai $ou\\e(r^e /xa?^6u iin6vras. X. H. 3. \n4, 12. & \'AyriaiKaos dvTt rov iir\\ Kapiav I4vai, ev^vs ravavria aTTO(Trpei\\ias \nirrl ^pvyias iiroptvero. Hier. 4, 3. 5opv<popov<riu 4irl rovs KaKOvpyovs virep rod \nfirjS e va tu>i/ woXiruy $iai(f> havdrui air o^vrjff kc ly. \n\n(c) Dative : (a) As the object of single verbs and adjectives, e. g. hTi(rru>, \nr\xc2\xabTT\xe2\x82\xacua>, toiKa, Bfioios, ayayrlos, very often as the instrumental Dat. X. Ap. 14. \nkKiaroiKTi Ty 4fif r (t ifi^ff ^ai vnh SaifiSycoy [do not believe in my having been \nhonored, that I have been honored). PI. Phaed. 7\\,c.r(p f tj v iarl ri ivavriov, Sisirep \nrtf iypriyopiyai rh Ko^fvSnv ; (is tliere something opposite to living, as sleeping \nIS to waking). X. Ilicr. 7, 3. 5oKe7 rovrto 5La<p4p\xe2\x82\xaciy ay^p rwv &\\\\wy (dwu, rw \nTi/i^j 6p4yf<T^ai {seems to differ from other animals in this, that). {$) With \nprepositions: 4y^ in, 4irl, on the condition that, in order that, because, irpSs, \nbesides. PI. Gorg. 456, e. iraptSoffoy iirlr^SiKalas XPV^^"^^ rovrois \n{ro7s SirAoij) irpin rovs iroKffiiovK {they put them [arms] into their hands in order \nthat they might use them aright). S. Aj. 554. 4y rip (ppove7v \xe2\x80\x94 TjStaTos ^los. \n\n(d) Accusative : (a) Sometimes as the object of transitive verbs, PI. Gorg. \n522, e. avrh rh kir obvi]<T Ki iv ovhels (po^eirai {no one fears death itself). \n()3) AVith prepositions: ^ir/, eis, Trp6s, in order that, in order to, in relation to, \nKardfin relation to, vapd, in comparison, especiaWy Sid, on account oj] because \nthat. X. C. 1. 2, 1. :S,a}KpdTrjs irphs rh fierplwy de7(r^ai ireiraiSevfieyos {^y) \n{uxis trained to have moderate desires). Cy. 8. 1,3. fiiyiarov aya^hv rh irei^apx^7y \n<paly(Tai els rh Kar air pdrr e ly rk aya^d. With attraction : X. Ven. 12, \n21. 7} dperr) iravraxov irdpecrri Sia rh elyai aStdvaros {on account of its \nbeing immortal, because it is immortal) ; here a^dvaros is attracted into the \ncase of aper-i], instead of being in the Ace. Cy. 1. 4, 3. o Kvpos Sia rh <pi\\o- \nuab})s elyai voWa rovs irapSyras ayi^pwra, Kal offa avrhs iiir &\\\\a>y (sc. d//??- \noonaTo), Sia rh ayx^yovs elyai raxv aireKpivero {because he was fond of \nlearning). \n\nRemark 1. Many verbs and verbal expressions, which are commonly con- \n\xe2\x80\xa2tructed with an Inf.* merely, sometimes take also the Inf. with the article rd, \n\n40 \n\n\n\n5 \n\n\n\n470 SYNTAX. [^ 309. \n\neven when they would have their object, if a substantive, in the Gen. The \naddition of the article gives greater emphasis to what is expressed bv the Inf. \nX. C. 3. 6, 6. rh TrAovcriwTepav Tr)v Tr6\\iv iroieiu ava$a\\ov /xeba. Th. 3, 1. \nrhv ttXcIo\'tov H/xiXou tuu \\\\/i\\a)v elpyou rh /xt] to, eyyvs rrjs \'7r6\\ews KaKovp- \nyclv [dpyeiv nvd tivos). But when a preposition precedes an Inf, the article \ncan never be omitted, because then the Inf. becomes an actual verbal substan- \ntive. \n\nRem. 2. As the Ace. of a substantive, so also the Lif. tenth the Ace. of the \nwticle, is used in exclamations and questions implying indignation. In poetrv. \nhowever, the article is sometimes omitted with the Inf. X. Cv. 2. 2, 3. iKtlvos \nvavv ayia^ds elire irphs kaxnSv \' T^J rvxns^ rh ifie vvv K\\T)bfVTa Sevpa \nrvx^\'^y^- (tfiat I have just now been called hither !). Without the article : Aesch. \nEum. 835. i/xh ira^eii\' Tc\xc2\xa35e, (pev^ ifie iraXalotppoua Kara yav oiK\xe2\x82\xaciy, arU- \nrovy <|)6i), fxvaos ! \n\nRem. 3. There are many phrases, used as adverbial expressions, in which \nthe article t6 is placed before the Inf. (hcu which stands in connection with an \nadverb or a preposition and its Case. These must be regarded as adverbial \nAccusatives. Sec \xc2\xa7 279, Rem. 10. The Inf elyai denotes a state or condition^ \nc. g. rh vvv elvai, the present state, condition, and as an adverbial expression, \nwith respect to, or according to the present state of affairs, pro praesenti tempcr\'is \nconditione ; rh r-fi/xepov efvai, pro hodiemi diei conditione. X. An. 1. 6. 9. \nT^ KOTck rovTov flu at (so far as he is concerned). H.d. 5, 9 rh fity iir \niKclvois elvai ayroKuXare {so far as it depends on them). \n\n\n\n$309B. The Participle. \n\n1. The Participle represents the idea of the verb as an adjective \nidea, and is like the adjective, both in its form and in its attrib- \nutive use ; for it has tluree genders, and the same declension as \nthe adjective, and cannot, more than the adjective, be used in- \ndependently, but must always depend upon a substantive,, and \nhence agrees with it in Gender, Number, and Case. The Par- \nticiple denotes either an active or passive condition, but the \nadjective, a quality. \n\n2. On the contrary, the participle differs from the adjective, \nin retaining, like the Inf, the following properties of the verb : \n\n(a) The participle has different forms to denote the different \ncircut7ista?ices of the action : duration, completion, and futunlyt \ne. g. ypd<fi(Dv, lariting, yeypa^cu?, ypanj/a^y one wJio kos icritten, 7/xu/r- \ncov, one icho icill u^rite ($ 257, Rem. 3) ; \n\n(b) The participle has Act., Mid., and Pass, forms, e. g. ypcu^ \na?, ypaxf/dp,a\'0<i, ypa<^\xe2\x82\xact?. \n\n(c) The active and middle (deponent) participle governs the \nsame Case as its verb, e. g. ypd<f>u}v cTrto-ToXi^v, hriSx\'puliv t^\xc2\xab \napeTrj^y pia)(6p.\xe2\x82\xacvos TOis TroXe/xiots. \n\n\n\n^ ^10-] 1HE PARTICIPLE. 47 j \n\n3. The participle is used as follows : \n\n(a) Either as an immediate attributive qualification of a sub- \nstantive, e. g. o ypd<f>ayv Tracs or 6 7ra?5 6 ypc{<^a>v, the writing \nboy; or m connection with etmi, as a predicate (^ 238, Rem. sj, \ne. g. TO poSov dv^oCv co-Ttv (^/xe ro^e w blooming). \n\n(b) As the complement of the verb, e. g. \'Opw rhv rralha \nTpixovra. \n\n(c) To denote such an attributive qualification of the sub- \nstantive as is expressed in English dv placing the participle \nafter the substantive, or by the relative who, tvhich, and the \nverb, e. g. Twyj rts opviv cT^t ko^\' iKdarrjv rj^iipav uibv avTQ tUtov \naav (a hen laying, or which laid an egg daily). \n\n(d) To denote, adverbially, subordinate qualifications of the \nprincipal action, e. g. KC-pos yeAJii/ d-K^ {said laughing, or \nlaughingly). \n\nRemark. As the use of the participle, mentioned under 3, (a), is explained \nin \xc2\xa7\xc2\xa7 264, 1. and 238, Rem. 7, and as No. (c) has no further difficulty, only the \nusage mentioned under 3, (b) and (d) now remains to be considered. \n\n{310. 1, r/te Participle as the complement of the verb. \n\n1. As the participle is an attributive, and consequently ex- \npresses an action as already attached or belonging to an object, \nonly those verbs can take a participle for their complement \nwhich require, as a complement, an action, in the character of \nan attribute, so attached or belonging to an object, that this \nobject appears in some action or state. The action or state de- \nnoted by the ])articiple is, therefore, usually prior to that denoted \nby the verb with which it is connected, sometimes coincident \n\n2. The construction is here evident. The Participle agrees \nin Case with the substantive-object of the principal verb, \nthis object being in the Case wliich the principal verb re- \nquires. \'Akovoj 2<i>KpaT0vs and rjKOva-d ttctc "^(OKparovs Trepl \nxI>lXo)V SiaXiyojxivov. Xaipo) croL and x^^tpoj o-ot iX&ovri,. \nOpu) dv^poyirov and optu dvS pwirov t pe^ovra. \n\n3. But when the subject of the principal verb is at the same \ntime its object also, as Ot8a {ey^) c/xavrov !^vy)Tov ovra, then the per- \nsonal pronoun, which would denote the object, is omitted, and \nthe participle is put, by means of attraction, in the same Case \n\n\n\n472 SYNTAX. \\i 310. \n\nas the subject of the principal verb, i. e. in the Nora. (Comp. \n$ 307, 4), e. g. oTSa ^vrjTos wv. For more examples, see No. 4. \n\nRemark 1. Yet the Ace. of the personal pronoun and participle, as the \nobject of the principal verb, is expressed, when the subject as an object is to be \nmade emphatic. Comp. ^ 307, Rem. 4. X. Cy. 1. 4, 4. oi/x, & KpeiTTuy pSet Ht\', \nravra irpovKaAeTro rovs avvSuraSy ciAA\' avep eZ fjSei eavrhy ^Tova ovr a^ ravra \nHvpX^\' ^1 10. TTepieTdov avrovs y^pa aSvydrovs y \xe2\x82\xacvo fi4 vovs {ttiey permittea \nthemselves to become enfeebled by old age). \n\nRem. 2. (With avvoida, <rvyyiyu<ii<rKu> ifiavr^, the participle can \neither refer to the subject contained in the verb, or to the reflexive pronoun \nwhich stands with the verb ; if the participle refers to the subject, it is put in \nthe Nom., if to the pronoun, in the Dat.) e. g. avyoiSa {(rvyyiyvaxTKw) inamcf fZ \nnoffiaas or avvoida ifxauTc^ eS iroi-fi<ravri (I am conscious tliat I have done voell). PL \nApol. 21 , b. tyw ^v V oiha 4 fiavr^ <r o <ph s &v (I am conscious that I am wise). \n22, d. ifxavTCf} ^vvp St iv ovSey iir lar a/j.4v ip. yBnt when the subject is \nnot at the same time the object, but is dirterent from the object, then the object \nwith its participle is either put in the Dat.j e. g. avyoiid aot tZ iroi^<rajn-i, \xe2\x80\x94 \nX. S. 4, 62. ri pi 1 a vy oKT^a toiovtov etpyaafieyoi; (quid me tale commisisse \nscis ?)Ior (though more seldom) the substantive is put in the Dat., but the partici- \nple in Hhe Acc^ e. g. iyw or o i a-vyoiSa eZwoiriffayTa. X. 0. 3, 7. iy(a cot <r u - \nvoiha \xe2\x82\xac7ri fxkv KwixeaSuy ^eay Kol irdvu irpwt aytindpLfvoy^ kolL vdyv puKpay b^hv \nfiaSi^oyr a Koi ific ayairel^oyTa irpo^vfxa> s (rvy^eaT^ou. Also Aoj ddyoo \ni/xavrhy iroiuv r i [I conceal myself doing something^ i. e. / do something secretlu). \nX. An. 6. 3, 22 (ot tTnrcts) e A ad^o V avrovs iir\\ r^ \\6<fKp yev6p.(yot (reacned \nthe height unobserved). \xe2\x80\x94 \\\\Vith ioiKfyai, to appear, to seem, to be like, and \nh/xoioy eJvai, the participle in relation to the subject, sometimes stands in \nthe Nom., though more frequently in the Dat., and with ofioioy tlycu, in the Dat. \nalmost without an exception^ X. H. 6. 3, 8. ioiKure Tvpayylai piaWoy fi iro- \nkireiais TjdSfifyoi. An. 3. Sf 13. ipLoioi ^aav ^av fxd^ovr ts. PI. Mcnon. \n97, a. ofxoiol i(Tp.iv ovk ophwi u pio\\oyrjK6(ri. Rp. 414, c. coiicar, \xe2\x82\xac^, \noKyovvTi Xiyfiv. See ^ 311, 9. \n\n4. The verbs and expressions, with which the participle is \nused as a complement, are the following : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) Verba sentiendi, i. e. such as denote a perception by the \nsenses or by the mind, e. g. opavy aKovcti/, flhcvat {to know), cttut* \nTttcr^at {to know), fxavSaveLv {to perceive), ytyvioa-Ktcv {to k?iow), cv- \n^u/xeio-^at {to coiisidcr), Trvv^dvea-SaL {to perceive), aurSdv\xe2\x82\xac(r&ai, \npLLfxvi^(rK(a^a.L, iTTLkavS^dveaS^aLy etc. \n\nTh. 1, 32. TjfifTs adv yaroi Spcofiev 6vt\xe2\x82\xacs ireptyeveVd^cu (ire see that we \nare unable, etc.). \'Opw ere Tpe\'xoi\'Ta. \'AKoveiy with the Gen. when one \nhears with his own senses, or with the Ace. when one learns bv hearsav. \nX. C. 2. 4, 1. \xc2\xa5)KQv<Ta \'SwKpdrovs irepl <piXuv S ia\\\xe2\x82\xacyoficyov (I heard \nSocrates discoursing concerning friends). H. 4. 8, 29. ijKovfft rhy Qpatrv- \nfiov\\oy irpos lovra (he heard that TTirasybulus was coming). Cy. 1.4,25. \nKaix$v(Tr)S ij KoviX ey avSphs ^Stj epya Siax^tp^C^f^^*\'*\'*\' rhy Kvpor, \nOlSa ^y-ijThs &v (I know that I am mortal). OlSa &ybpvroy ^y-nrhh \novra. Her. 3, 1. S /SaCiAeO, S lafie $\\rifieyos inrh \'Afidaios ov fiay^dye is \n{do you not see that you have been deceived?). 40. rjSh -rvy^drfff^ai irSpa \n\n\n\nf 310.] THE PARTICIPLE AS A COMPLEMENT OP THE VERB. 473 \n\n4>i\\oyKa\\$f7voy eS ir p-,\',cr a our a, ^. Cy.l. I, 2.&pStpo}Troi iir\' oh^4ms ,ua\\\\o, \nevvifframai, t] tm rovrovs, ots ttv aXabuvTai &pxeiv avruv iTixe ipovvras \n(w/iotn theij knoiv are endecivonnrj to rule them). With the Gen. [\xc2\xa7 273, 5, (e)]. \n4. 4, 11. po-^Tjff-ai oSj/ irwTTOTe /xov ^evSofxa pTv povvros ^ avKocpav- \nrovvT OS. \n\n(b) Verba dcclarandi, i. e. verbs v^liich signify to declare, to \nshoiu, to make clear, and the like, e. g. SeLKvvvai (to shoiv, to ex- \nhibit), StjXovv, BrjXov TTOLCLV, <fiaLV\xe2\x82\xacLV (to show), (fiaLveaSat (to show \none\'s self, apparere), hrjXov and <f)avep6v ehat, iXiy^^tv, iieX^yx^Lv, \n(to prove, to convict), oAto-Kco-^at (to be convicted), ttouIv (to rep- \nresent), \xe2\x82\xacvpL(TK\xe2\x82\xaciv (to Jind), etc. \n\nPL Phaed. 101, c. ^ ^^xh a^dvaros Waiver ai oltra {the soul appears to be \nimmortal). Her. 6, 21. \'A^vaToi StjXov eiroiria-av vircpax^^or^evres rrj \nMikt\'iTov aXuxTfi (made it evident that they were exceedingly grieved on account of the \ncapture of Miletus). Isocr. Evag. 190, d. to7s iroirjTois robs ^eoiis oT6u r eVri \nirojf/o-ai kaX h laXiyo^iivovs kcu <Tvvay(avi^oix4vovs, oTs hy fiov\\r]^w- \naiv (the poets can represent the gods both conveising, etc.). Dem. Aph. 1. 819, 20, \nPaUus i\\f-YX^V<^ fTut \xc2\xbb//\xe2\x82\xacuS({/Liei\'os( will easily be convicted [that he falsifies] \nof falsehood, or if he falsijies). \n\nRem. 3. ^[nstcad of the impersonal phrases Sri\\6u eVrt, (pauepou ia-ri, (^aiVerot, \napiKtret, the Greek uses the personal consti-uction (conip. \xc2\xa7 307, Eem. 6)^e. g. \niTJ\\6s d" I, <pavf p6 s f I fit, <paivo ij.ai t)]V irarpiSa eS ttoit) aas (I dm evi- \ndent having dune well, i. e. it is evident that I have done ivell for my country). X. \nAtT 2. 6, 23. (TT i pyoiv <pav f phs fitv ?) i/ ov5(va, orw Se (pairj <pi\\os eTfot, Tovrta \nl[ySri\\ s 4y iy 1/ fT o i ir ifiovXevcuy {he ivas evident loving no one, i. e. it was \nevident that he loved, etc.). PI. Apol. 23, d. kotoStjAo* yiyvovrai irpos- \nvoiov fifvot fify (iSfvai, flS6Tes Se ovSeu. \n\n(c) Verlm affectmun, i. e. verbs which denote an affection or \nstate of the mind, e. g. xaipeiv, ^SiaSai, aydXXea-Sat, ayairav (to be \nC07ltenf), ax^^a-SaL, dyavaKTUV, alSeiaSaL and aicrxyveaSat (to be \nashamed), /AcrajmcXctcr-^ai, /xcra/AeXtt, 6pyL^\xe2\x82\xac(rSai, ^apvvea-^at, pahios, \nj(aXc7rtijs <f>\xe2\x82\xacp\xe2\x82\xacLVy etc. \n\nX. II. 6. 4, 23. 6 ^(hs iroWaKis X\xc2\xab*Pf \' "^^^^ M^" fiiKpovs /xeyaXovs iroi&v, \nrovs 5e fxfyaXovs yuKpovs {rejoices to make the small great). Hier.8,4. Sia\\ey6fX\' \ntvoi re ayaK\\6ficda to7s irporeTifi-nfievois fioXXov, ^ to7s iic rod tcrou r)/x7v \novai {we are proud to converse with those preferred in honor, etc.). Th. 1, 77. adi- \nKovfjifyoi ol &y;bpwwoi fiaWoy opylCoyrai, fj fiiaC^fieyoi {men are more \nindignant when they are injured than when they suffer violence). 4, 27 {ol "AStrivam) \nMtT\xe2\x82\xac/if\\oi/To ray airovhas ov Sc^dfieyoi. 5.35. robs e/c rris yf}(rov Seff- \nHiiras fi(rcfx4\\oyro SLiroSe 5<oK6r e s. Eur. Hipp. 8. rific&fievoi x^^\' \npovaiy {ol deol) aySfpuirwu inr6 {rejoice to be honored). Xaipu ffoi iX^Syri \n(I rejoice that you have come). PI. Rp. 475, b. birh fffiiKpoTepwy koL <pav\\or4pu>f \nr tfiii) fifyoi ay air u a ly. \n\n40* \n\n\n\n474 SYNTAX. [^ 3l0t \n\n(d) Verbs signifying to he satisfied with, to he pleased with, to \nenjoy, to he full of, e. g. ripTrea^ai, c/XTrtTrXacT\'^ai, fxearov eivcu, and \nthe like. \n\nOd. a, 369. yvv fikv 5aiv{>fX\xe2\x82\xacvoi repTrcS/ied^o {let us delight ourselves in \nfeasting). II. \xc2\xbb, 633. eirel rdpirTjaav is a\\\\r}\\ovs 6p6u)VT\xe2\x82\xacs (when they tfere \nsatisfied at looking at each other). S.JO. C. 768. fxeffrhs ^v ^vfiovfievos. \nEur. Ion. 924. ov roi ahv fiXeiriav ifjLirlirXafjLou it p6suiTov. Her. 7, 146. \neV eai/ TouTo ^jjev fievo i eoxri TrArjpees. \n\n(e) Verbs signifying to overlook, to 2^ermit, to endure, to per- \nsevere, to continue, also to he weary, to he exhausted, e. g. -^t- \nK(x^- \xc2\xa3tg- i(f)opav, TrpoUaS^at {to neglect, tO permit\'), avi^a^ax Kopre- \npetv, vTrofxiv\xe2\x82\xaciv, Xnrapilv (perseverare), KafxvcLV, aTrctTretv, etc. \n\nHer, 7, 1 68. ov irep i ottt 4ri iari tj \'EWas airoWv fievri ( Hellas is not to be \npermitted to he destroyed). 101. e^\'EAArji/es uTro/icvcouct x**iP<*^ ^A"*^ avTatt- \np6fjievoi (will venture to withstand 7ne). 9.45. \\nrap4fTf fitv ovrts [con- \ntinue to remain). 3, 65 (u/xiv iina-KriirTw) fiii ire piXSf7v r^v riyf fiowliiif \nadris is Mijiovs ir \xe2\x82\xac p le \\^ ovcray {not to permit the hegemony to return again to \nthe Medes). Isocr. Archid. 125, 47. aireliroifiey tiv aKOvovris re kcU \nXiyovns, et irdffas ras roiavras irpd^eis i^erd^oifify {ice should be weary \nof hearing and speaking). An. 5. 1, 2. aireipriKa ijS-n (rv<TK\xe2\x82\xacva(6 /ifvos \nKOi fiaSi^av /coi rp^xuv kou ra SirAo <p4ptav kcX iy rd^et iwv kcu <pv\\oucSt.s \n<pv\\6.T7 U3V KoX fiaxo p-evos {I am iceary of jxicking up, walking, running, etc.)^ \nTh. 1, 86. Tovs ^v /xixaxovs oh rr t p io\\p Ofif^a aS iKOVfif yov s {will not \npermit the allies to be injured). 2. 73. \'A^yaioi (pcuriyy iy ovityX inias rpotff- \n3-ot ad iKovfi4yovs. PI. Gorg. 470, c. /fJj K(Lnris <piKoy ivipa fVfpyfrS\xc2\xbby \n{do not be weary of doing good to a friend). For av\xe2\x82\xacX\xe2\x82\xac(ri^at with the Gen., \nsee \xc2\xa7 275, 1. \n\n(f) Verbs signifying to hcgin and cease, cause to cemse,to omit, \nto he remiss, e. g. ap\\\xe2\x82\xaca&aLy v7r<xp)(\xe2\x82\xaciv ; vavnv, TravcaSai, Xiyycti\', \nStoAAarretv, dTraXA.aTTCCT\'^at ; fxiSUaSaty XciVca^ai, cKAetVco\', CTrtAct- \nTTCcv, etc. \n\nHer. 6, 75. K\\\xe2\x82\xacOfx4v7}S irapaXa^oov rhv crlSripoy, Hpx^TO (k tuv Ki^ufwr \neavrhy Xu ficoiievos {began to mutilate himself). Ilauoj (re aSiKOvyra {I \ncause you to cease doing wrong). II avofjial at aSiKuiy {I cease to do wrong tc \nyou). X. O. 1, 23. {at iTTi^vfilai) aiKi^ofi^yai rck erw/uaro ray ay^pwiroty icak \nrhs \\^vx^s Kol TOVS otKOvs oijirore Xriyovtr iv, tsr &v ^px*^\'*\'"\'*\' o^hrwv {never cease to \ntorment). Kal 6.\\\\a ye Sr) fivpia iir iXeiiru \\eyccy {to omit in speaking). \'O \naya^hs ovk iWelirerai ed iroiiov tovs evepyerovyras kavr6y {does not fail to \ndo good to his l^enefactors). PI. Phileb. 26, b. 186, b. Ap^ofiai arh Trjs larpuciis \n\\ 670)1/. Menex. 249, b. tovs TeXevrfitrcurras Tifioi<ra ovSerore ^\xc2\xbbtXef\xc2\xbb\xc2\xabi \n\\t) irSXis). \n\n\n\n^ 3 10. J I HE PARTICIPLE AS A COMPLEMENT OF THE VERB. 475 \n\n(g) Verbs signifying to he fortunate, to distinguish one\'s self, \nto excel, to be inferior, to do well, to err, e. g. evrv^etv, vik^v, Kpa- \nrCiVy Tp-raa-Satj ev Trotctv, a/xa/jraveiv, uBlkuv, etc. \n\nHer. 5, 24. cSeiroiTjo-os air iK6fieyos {you did well in coming, tJiat you \ncame). Th. 1, 53. a54\xc2\xabe?Te iroXf/jLOv &pxovT \xe2\x82\xacs koI airovSas KvovTes {you do \nurong in beginning uar, etc.). 2, 71. o u 5 ik o i a -n- o x e Tt e is yrjv t^iv UXaraiiuv \ncrpanvovrts. \'Afiaprdveis ravra tt o i cj v {you are in fault in doing this). \nPL Pliaed. 60, c. cS y iiroirjffas avayLv^ff as fxe {you did well in reminding \nme). X. Hicr. 11. 14 \xc2\xabq. irarras {rovs <pi\\ovs) ireipw vikuv eu iroiwv ihu \nykp Tovs <pi\\ovs Kpar^s (Z iroiuiv, ov fxr] <roi Uvumai avrcxeiv ol -KoXefjuoi {to \nendeavor to excel all in doing good). An. 2. 3, 23. o&x 7iTTr](r6 fic^a ev \n\xe2\x96\xa0rroiov vr f s {we will not l>c infei\'ior in acts of kindness). \n\n(h) The verbs Trcipao-^at (especially in Herodotus), to try \nor attempt someth ing, Trapao-Kcva^ccr-^at (usually with w s and \nthe Fut. Part.), and the Ionic phrases ttoXXos ei/xi, lyKct/xat, \nyiyvofjiaij to be urgent about, to laij it to heart, to consider im- \nporta?it. \n\nIlcr. 7, 9. i-K f ip-f]b\'t\\v iir fXavv uv eVi tovs &vSpas tovtovs {I attempted to \nmarch against). V\\. Vhilcb. 21, a. iv aol ve ipufie^ a fiaaavi^ovTes raOra \n{let us try to examine titese). Th. 2, 7. oi \'A^vaioi tr ape (rKevd(ovTo ws \nvo\\\xc2\xabfiri<royrfs {were ftreparing to wage war). AVithoiit ws: 18 {oi UeXoirov- \ntrfjaioi) irposfioKas irapfff Ktvd^ovr o ironia6iJ.(Voi. X. H. 4. 1, 41. irapeff- \nKfvd^fTO ir opeva 6iJLev OS. Her. 7, 158. & Te\\<av voWhs iveKeiro \nXeywy {sjtoke urgently). 9,91. iroWhs tJv Xiaeo /xevos 6 ^eTpos {entreated \nearnestly, was all entreaties). 1, 98. ATjio\'/o/s ^v iroWhs xmh iravrhs audphs \natv(6tifyos {uns much praised). 7. 10, 3. irauToToi iyeuovro :S,Kv^ai \n9(6 fie vol \'luywv Kvcai rhy v6poy {earnestly entreated the lonians to break down \nthe bridge). \n\n(i) Certain expressions, mostly impersonal, e. g. it is fit, use- \nful, prof table, good, agreeable, shameful, it is to mij mind, and \nthe hke. \n\nTipi-Kii fjioi aya^(fi tyri and 070^^ elvai {it. is proper for me to he good). \nTh. 1, 118. iir-npunwy rhy d(6y, fl (sc. avToh) tt oXefiova iv &fieivov earai \n{whether it will be better for them to engage in war). PL Alcib. 1, 113, d. (TkottoS- \n<riy, brrorepa avyolaei irpdiaffiy. After these expressions, howeven the \nInf. is more frequent, since the at .ion of the dependent verb is not considered \nas already attached or hclon-ring to the person, but as first resulting from the \naction implied in the above impersonal expressions. \n\n(k) Tlie verb e x ^ \' ^> "^ the sense of to be in a condition or state, \nhas an active, middle, or deponent participle joined with it, ir \n\n\n\n476 SYNTAX. 310 \n\norder to express the continued condition of the action (similar \nto the Latin aliquid periractatuni habere). \n\nHer. 3, 65. Sc^Aoj ^x\'^^^\'- "^\'\'\'V (t^\'\' vy^H-oJ^\'^V^) KTrja-dfievoi (properly, \nthey have themselves as those who have acquired the hegemony, i. e. they have acquirea \nand still possess, comp. principatum partum habent). X. An. 1. 3, 14. iroWk \nXP\'fiy-ara exofJ-ey aj/T] piraKSr es {we have plundered much property and still \nhave it). 4. 7, 1. x^p\'\'-\xc2\xb0\' <^fouf Icrxvpa ol Taoxoi, ev oh Koi to iirnrideia irdyra \nelxoy avaK^KOfiiaixivoi {into ivhich having conveyed all their provisions they \nhad them there, or, as this idiom is more commonly expressed in English, into \nwhich they had conveyed their provisions). Dem. Phil. 3. 113, 12. Kcd ^epas irpcpriu \nus (pikos els &eTTa\\iaj/ i\\^^v ^X^* KaraXafid)v. (On the contrary, ex\xc2\xab \nKeyeiv, I can say). \n\n(1) Finally, the participle is nsed as a complement with the \nfollowing verbs : (a) Tvyx^av{ii, to happen; (/?) A.av-9^ava), to he \nconcealed; (y) StarcXo), Staytyvoyaat, Siayco, to continue; \n(8) <f>S^dvo), to come before, to anticipate; (e) olxofiaLy to go \naway, to depart. In English, most of these verbs are often ren- \ndered by an adverb, and the participle connected with them, \ninasmuch as it contains the principal thought, by a finite verb. \n\nHer. 1, 44. 5 Kpolcos _<povea rod ttoiS^s i\\dy^av\xe2\x82\xac fi6<TKav {Croesus nour- \nished the murderer of his son unwittingly, without knowing it). A toyw, \nSiareAw, Ziayiyv ojxai KaXa ttoiuv (I ALWAYS, CONTINUALLY do what is \nhonorable). 1, 157. e^x^\'^\xc2\xb0 ^evy(iiv {he fled away). 6. o^xo/Mai Ipc piov {1 \ncarry away). Th. 4, 113. ervxov 6ir\\7Tai iv rij ayop^ Ka^evSovre s ws \nirevTTjKouTa {about flfty hoplites were then, just then sleeping in the agora, hap- \npened to be, were by chance, sleeping). Tvyxd.v<^ is always used, where an event \nhas not taken place by our intention or design, but by the accidental coopera- \ntion of external circumstances, or by the natural course of things. In English \nit can sometimes be translated by just, just now, just then, by chance; often it \ncannot be translated at all. X. Cy. 1. 3, 12. xa>^-cTi\xc2\xbbj/ ^v &Wov <p^d<rai touto \nIT oiri<TavTa {it was difficult for another to do this before him, or to anticipate him \nin doing it). Her. 4, 136. e<p^7)crav ttoAA^ ol \'Skv^ui rovs Tlepffas ivi t^v y4- \n(pvpav iir ik6 fievoi {anticipated the Persians much in coming to the bridge, cayne \nto the bridge long before the Persians). Also the conjunction irplu ^ (or ^ alone) \nwith the Inf. can follow (p^dueiu, e. g. Her, 6, 116. \xe2\x82\xac<p^r](rav airiK6fievoiy \nirplv fj Tovs fiapfidpovs t^k\xe2\x82\xaciv {they arrived before the barbarians came). Ob \nip^dveiv followed by nai, koX eh^is, may be translated by scarcely \xe2\x80\x94 when, nc \nsooner \xe2\x80\x94 than, e. g. Isocr. Paneg. 58, 86 {ol Aa/ceSoi/iJwoi) ovk e<p^7iaav irv- \n^6 uevoi rov irepl t^jv ^A.ttik^v TroAe^uov, Kal -KdvTuv Tuy iWcav aixe\\7]<rayTcs \nflKov 7]fuv ajxvvovvres {the Lacedaemonians no sooner heard of the war in Attica, than \nthey left everything to come to our defence, or they scarcely heard when, etc.). So in \nthe phrase, ovk Uv (p^dvois iroiwv ti {you should do nothing quicker,!, e. \nyoM cannot do it too quickly, or do it quickly). X. C 2. 3, 11. ovk to/ <p^dvois \n\n\n\n^311.] INTERCHANGE OF THE PARTICIPLE AND INFINITIVE. 477 \n\n\\4ywv; (you could not be too quick in speaking = speak quickly). 3. H, i. oU \n&i/ <f>^duoir\\ e<pr), aKoXoStovvr e s ; {will you not follow immediately? = \nfolbw immediately). ovkUv (pSfdvois irepalvwv ; [= statim reliqua conclude). \n\nRem. 4. With XavSfdveiv and <pSrdve,y the relation is sometimes re- \nversed, the participles of these verbs being used as the complement of the \ngoveraing verb. ^. Cj. 3. 3, 18. <p^di^oj^T es ^Sy Sjjodfi^v t^,u 4k^Ipcov yfju \n{we ravage their country, anticipating them = we anticipate them in ravaging their \ncountry). 6. 4, 10. ^ Se A. o 3- o S cr a avrhv arvvecpeiireT o {she followed unknown \nto him). \n\nRem. 5. The Part, of the verb eluai, connected with adjectives or sub- \nstantives, with several of the above named verbs, is sometimes omitted, even \nwhen ehai is an essential word ; thus after Verba sentiendi and declarandi, e. g. \nDem. Ph. 1. 45, 18. 6 tSws cvrpenus vfjiiis {knowing that you are ready). 54, 41. \niav iv X\xe2\x82\xac^povr\\(T(a irv^rjcr^^ ^iKiinrov (sc. ovra, if you should learn that Philip \nis in, etc.); very often with (paiuoixai, not seldom also with Tvyxdvw, \n5 1 a T e A a>, S J o 7 1 7 v o ift a 1, e. g. X. C. 1 . 6, 2. a;/u7r<^STjTos re Koi a^nuv SiaT\xe2\x82\xac\\e7s, \n\n\n\n^ 311. Remarks on the interchange of the Participle \n\nand Infinitive. \n\nSome verbs of the classes above mentioned are also constructed with the \nInf., yet with a different meaning. \n\n1. \'A K V e i J/ with a Part., implies both a direct perception by one\'s own senses, \nand an indirect one, though ceiiain and well-grounded ; with the Inf , it im- \nplies only an 2Hrf<rert perception obtained by hearsay, e.g. \'Akouw ahrov \nSia\\eyo^\xe2\x82\xacUov (i. e. ejus sermones auribus meis percipio). Kay.^vff7]s \niJKOVffe rhy Kvpov auSphs ^St; eypa diax^^pi^C^f^^^\'^\'\'\' ^^^ \xc2\xa7310, \n4, (a). But X. Cy. 1. 3, 1. ISelv iire^vixei 6 \'AcrTvdyr}S rhv Kvpov, on ijKOve \n{ex aliis audiverat) KoXhu Kaya^hu avrhu eJvai. \n\n2.ElS4vai and 4Tr ia-Taa-Srai with the Part., to know; with the Inf. tc \nknow how to do something, to be able. OlSa {iTTiarafxai) ^eous a-e^o/j.- \neuos {I know that I honor the gods); but Eur. Hipp. 1009. tiriffrafxai \nSnovs (Tffieiu {I know how to honor the gods, I can honor the gods). S. Aj. \n666. ei(r(5/ieo-3o /lev St\xe2\x82\xaco7s i\'lKuv. \xe2\x80\x94 Also vofxiCeiv in the sense of \nto be assured, to know (e/SeVat), has a participle connected with it; still this \noccurs very rarely. X. An. 6. 6, 24. u6fx.i(\xe2\x82\xac 5\', iav e^e vw aTroKTcivris . . \nitvSpa Lya!bhi/ aTro kt eiuuv {be assured that, if you slay me, you slay a good \nman). \n\n3.Mav^dveiv with the Part., to perceive ; with the Inf. to learn. MauStd- \nvo} <ro<phs &!/ {I perceive that I am wise); aocphs elvai {I learn to be \nwise). X. Cy. 4. 1, 18. /xa^-^crovTai ivavr lovir^ai {tols ivoKefiiois). \n\nA.Ttyvw(TK\xe2\x82\xaciv with the Part, to know, to perceive; with the Inf^to learn, to \njudge, to determine. TiyuwaKu ayaStovs out as rots CTpariwrais rovs \nayd>i/as{I know. I perceive that the prize-fights are useful, but ^070^0 us \nelvai, I judge that, etc.). X. Apol. 33 (5w\xc2\xab:paT7?s) \xe2\x82\xac7^^ rov eri (w rh \nre^vdvai aina Kpelffffov elvai {judged that it ivas better for him to die \nthan to live longer). Isocr. Trap. 361, d. kyvw trav Uaaiwva ifxol -jrapaSovyai \nrhy TToiSa {they concluded to give up, etc.). \n\nb.AliT^dyea^ai. with a Part, to perceive, to observe, to understand, to learn; \nwith the Inf. to think, to imagine {opinari). AlffSrdyofial ae fxeya irap^ \n^(MiXii Svydfieyoy {I perceive that you have great injiuence with the fang) \n\n\n\n478 SYNTAX. [^311 \n\nTh. G, 59. at<rbav6fJi\xe2\x82\xacV0S avrovs /xeya irapa $cun\\e7 Aapeia Svvaff^ai \n5, 4. ovKeri eiri tovs 6.\\Xovs epx^Tai, aiffbSfievos ovk hv irei^eiv ainovi \n(OPINANS, se lis non esse persuasurum). \n\n&.Ilvj/^du\xe2\x82\xac<r^aL with a Part, to hear, to perceive; with an Inf. it is used \nwith the same difference of meaning as in the case of aKoveiv. Uvv^d- \nvo/xai (re Xeyoura {I hear you saying). Lys. Nicora. 184, 17. irvvbd- \nvofiai re avrhu Xeye iv, ws aae^w KoraXvctiv ras ^vaias (ex ALUS \naudivi). X. H. 1. 4, 11. aviix^i) c\'Ti Karaa-KOTrrj tS>v rpiijpuv, &s iirvv^dve- \nTO Ao/ce5ai/iioj/fous avrd^i TrapaffKeva^eiu. Th. 5, 55. nv^ofxe- \nvol rovs AaK eSaifJLOviov s i^effrpareva^ai. \n\n7. McfiuTJa^ai with a Part, to be mindful, to remember ; with the Inf. to con- \ntemplate doing something, to intend, to endeavor. Meixi/rjfiou e5 iroi-ffo-as \nToi/s TToAiTtts {I remember to have done good) ; ed voirtcrai (I strive, u-iah, to \ndo good). X. An. 3. 2, 39. fi e fi vi) <r ^ co avrjp aya^hs eJvai (remember, \nstrive, to be a man). Cy. 8. 6, 6 {ol crarpdiTai) \'6 tl hv iy t^ y^ exdcTTT] KoXhv \n9} aya^hu ^, fj.eixv\'fjcrovTai Kol Sevpo airoir dfiire ly, S. 4, 20. fi e /j. yf) a \xe2\x96\xa0p \nStaKpi^Tiyai irepl tov KaWovs {thou wilt prepare to contend with me). \n\n8. ^ aivetr^ai with a Part, to appear, apparere, to show orxe^s self; with an Inf. \nto seem, vidkri. \'E<paiy ero KXaiuv {it was evident that he wept, or in \nEnglish we often use the adverb, evidently : he evidently wept ; icpaivero \nK\\aieiy {he seemed to weep). X. S. 1, 15. koI afxa \\\xe2\x82\xacyu>v ravra airenvTTfTS \nre {6 yeXaiTOTToihs) koI rfj <pwy^ acupus K\\aiiiv i<paiy\xe2\x82\xacTo [he seemed to \niveep, but did not weep). \n\n), \'E 1 K 6 // a t with a Part, in the Nom. to appear ; with a Part, in the Dat. to \nbe like (\xc2\xa7 310, Rem. 2) ; with the Inf to seem ; \'Eol Kare rvpavviffi fmWoy, \nfj TToXiTeiais rjSS/xevoi {you appear to enjoy, you evidently enjoy, etc.) (comp. \nNo. 8). PI. Rp. 444 J c. ioiKas okvovvti \\eyeiy {you are like one in doiit^ \nin speaking = you seem to speak like one in doubt). X. Hier. 7. 1. eoiKcp \ne(pr}, fi4ya ri elvai ^ ri/jL-f} {honor seems to be something important). Cy. 1. 4, \n9. TToiet, Sttojs /SouAet \xe2\x80\xa2 <tv yap vvv ye rjfiwy eoiKas fiaa i\\eifs elyau \n\n10 \'A77\xe2\x82\xacAA\xc2\xabtj\' Avith a Part, is used of the annunciation of acfj/a/ events ; \nwith an Inf. of the annunciation of things still uncertain, merely assumed. \nDem. 01. 2. (3). 29, 4. airriyy eX^-q ^iXiinros vfuy ev Qpaicp rpiroy ^ re- \nraprov eras tovtX \'Hpa7oy reTxos TroXiopKuy (a settled fact). X. Cy. I. \no, 30. 6 \'Acavpios els tV X^P\xc2\xb0-^ e fi^dWe ly ayyeWerai (whether he \nhad made an actual irruption or not, is uncertain). \n\n11. AeiKuvyai and air o<p ai y e ly with a Part, to shoic, to point out ; with an \nInf to teach. "ESe i^d ere aZ ikt]<t ayr a {1 should that you had done wrong). \nX. An. 2. 3, 14. atplKQVTO els Ku/ias, o^ey air e5 e i^ay at rjyefi6yes \\afjifid- \nveiy TO e-Kirii^eia {where they pointed out to them that they might obtain pro- \nvisions). Dcm. Cor. 271, 135. (^ fiov\\ii Al<rx\'^\'^^) f*^ irp oS6Tr)y elyai \nKal KaK6vovy vfuy air e(f>aiy ey {docuit). But the Inf is like\\A-ise used \nwith SeiKvyai, when the object of this verb is not to be represented as \nsomething perceived, but onlv as something possil>le. e. g. X. C. 2. 3, 17. \nKiySuyevaeis e7ri8e?|ai, ah /xev xpVf^\'^\'^s re koI <(>i\\dSe\\<pos elyai, eKeTyos \nSe (pavKos Te Kou ovk a^ios evepyeaias. \n\n12. Ar}\\ovy with a Part, to make evident, to show ; with an Inf. to say, to an- \nnounce, to command. A77AW tre ad iKovyra {I make it evident or shots that \nyou do icrong). X. Ag. 1,33. KT]pvyjj.aTi eSrjAoi;, robs fiey eKev^epias \n5 e [Jieyov 5 ws irphs avfi^axov avrhy tt ap e7yat {edicit, ut adessent). \n\n13. noielj/ with a Part, to represent [\xc2\xa7 310, 4, (b)] ; with an Inf (a) to - \n(b) to suppose, to assume. flotcS ere yeXwyra {I represent you lati<r. \nTloiS) <re yeXay {I cause you to laugh). PI. Symp. 174, c. &K\\-nTop \niir oiT}<r ey COfiripos) e\\^6yTa rhv M e y e \\ e w y hrl rijy boiyrjy {representi \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 311.] INTERCHANGE OF THE PAS.TICIPLE AND INFINITIVE. 479 \n\n\n\n\ncovie to Phasis). \n\n14. A i <r X y " f <r ^ a t and alSeTa^ai with a Part, to be ashamed on account of \nsomething which one does ; with an Inf. to he ashamed or afraid to do something \nto abstain from doing something through fear or shame, to be prevented from doing \nsomething by shame. Al(rxvv o fxai KaKo. ir pdrr ut^ rhy (piXov {lam ashamed \n\n\n\n\n. , ^ \xe2\x96\xa0 - hvyp(S ynpa irpo- \n\nXciiroiv. ^X. S. 8, 33. tovtovs yap tiv ecpT] oUaSfai fidXiara al5e7(r^at. \naW-fjKovs airoXeitreiv. 35. aldovvrai roiis Trap6i/Tas OTroAe^Tretj/. \n\'R.Ij.9, 4.iras &u Tis alaxvv^e\'n] rhv KaKhv avaK-qvov irapaXa^elv. \n\nl5.U\xe2\x82\xacpiopav [\xc2\xa7 310, 4, (e)] is sometimes, though seldom, constructed with \nan Inf. also, without any marked diflercnce, as avyxcope7u, iai/, e. g. Th. 4, 48. \nou5\' els lev ai t<pa(Ta.v Kara Svva/iiv ir e pi6\\p\xe2\x82\xac a^ai ovdeua {they said they \nwould not pennit any one to enter). \'Eir it peire ly, to permit, is commonly \nconnected with an Inf, rarely with a Part. X. An. 1. 2, 19. ravrriu r^v \nXcipav iirdrpe^pe Siapird(rai rols "EWrjacv { permitted the Greeks to plun- \nder). Isocr. Pac. t] ir6\\is avTo7s ovk iir it pe\\j/\xe2\x82\xaci tt apa^aiv ov a i Thv \nv6fiov. The verbs ofe\'xeo\'i^at and invofxeve lu with the meaning of \nauc/ere, are constructed with the Inf. Her. 7, 139. KaTafxeivavTes aveff- \nXovro Thv iiri6vTa jirl ttjj/ X(*>PVf Se^aa^ai {dared to withstand the enemy \nmaking an incursion into their country). \n\n16. "Apx**^"^"* "^\'i^^ ^ Part., when it has the meaning to be in the beginning of \nan action (in contrast with the middle or end of an action), or also when \nthe way and manner, in irhich the beginning of an action takes place, is to be \nstated ; with an Inf, to begin to do something, to commence {something intended^ \naimed at), \'Kp^avT ra relxv o\'lKoSo/jLovvTes and olKoSo/xeTv. Th. \n\n1, 107. i^p^avTO Kal to. fxaKpa Teixv \'A^r)va7oi oi Ko5ofi\xe2\x82\xac7v. X. Cy. 8. 8, \n\n2. &p^ofxai S iSdff Kwv (k twv beiwv. C. 3. 1, 5. Tr6^ev ^ p^aT 6 (re 5t- \nSacr/ceii/ ttiv (TTpar-q-yiav. 5, 22. 6ir6Te iraXaieiv ^p^CD fxav^dv eiv. 6, 3. \nfiirov 7]iJ.7v, \xe2\x82\xac\xc2\xab Tivos fip^J? T7JJ/ ir6\\Lv eve py eT e7v. 5, 15. \'A^vcuoi atrh \nra)V Trarepuv 6,pxovT ai KaT a(ppove7v twv yepanepwv. \n\n17. Uaveiv with the meaning to hinder, is constructed with an Inf., e. g. PI. \nUp. 416, C. Tos olicf)(reis koI Ti]v &\\\\r]v ovaiav Toiavrirjv avTo7s TrapeaKevdff^ai \n(Se?), ^Tis iJLr\\Te tovs <pv\\aKas us apiarovs elvai iraixroi avrovs kt\\. \n\n18. Ueipaa^ai "with a Part., to make trial of anything, to practise [^ 310, 4, \n(h)] ; still this consti-uction is rare; with the Inf. to attempt to do something ; \nirapaaKevdC^abat is very often also connected with the Inf. The \nIonic phrase iTavTo7ov ylyv ea^ai, is constnicted with the Ace. and \nInf. Her. 3, 124. iravToir} eyeveTO fxr] cnr o8T]fXTJ(rai rhv UoXuKpd- \nTea {she used every expedient, etc.). \n\nRemark. Bv comparing ^ 306 with \xc2\xa7 310, it will be seen that the Inf., as a \ncomplement of "the verb, denotes something aimed at, intended, something ef- \nfected, while the participle, inasmuch as the idea expressed by it is prior to, or \ncoincident ^\\lth that of the verb with which it is connected, implies the actual \nexistence of the idea designated by it. The participle, therefore, implies that \nthe action denoted by it actually takes place, while the Inf. does not. \n\n\n\n480 SYNTAX. [i 312. \n\n\xc2\xa7 312. The Participle used to express Adverbial cr \n\\Cir cumstantial Relations. \n\n1. In the s\\Scond place, the Part, is used to denote such an \nattributive qualification of a substantive, as "will, at the same \ntime, define the predicate of the sentence more exactly. In \nthis case, the Part, expresses the adverbial relations of time, \ncause, motive or purpose, condition and concession, manner. \n\nThe English often uses a Part, in this case, e. g. lie said laughing (yeXuv)] \nthe city, besieged by the enemy, suffered much distress (ttSXis inrh ruv iroXefiluv iro - \nXiopKovfiepTj). Instead of the Part, the English often uses either a subor \ndinate clause with the conjunctions when, after, while, since, because, as, inasmuch \nas, in order to, if, although, or a substantive with a preposition, e. g. Kvpos rijy \ntt6kiv k\\<t)v avriX^ev {after Cyrus had taken the city, he returned, or ajler taking \nthe city, etc.). \n\n2. In Enghsh we often translate the participle by a verb, \nconnecting it with its own clause by one of the above-named \nconjunctions, using as a subject either the word with which the \nparticiple agrees, or a pronoun referring to it. \n\nOt iroXefiioi (pvyoures vTrh rwv woXefiluv 4Sia>x^(Tay (wHEX the enemy FLED, \nTHEY were pursued by the enemy, or the enemy fled and were pursued). To?? \nHep (Tais els r^v yrjv elsfiaXovaiv ol "EWrjves i]vavTiu>dT]<Tav (wHEN the \nPersians made an irruption into the country, the Greeks loent out against them). \n\n3. In the examples given under No. 2, the participle always \nagrees with a substantive or pronoun wliich is comiected \\\\\'ith \nthe principal verb, either as subject or in some other relation, and \nmay then be called the dependent participle. But very often the \nsubstantive with ^vhich the participle agrees has no connection \nwith any verb, but stands alone in the Genitive. This is called \nthe Genitive absolute or indepe^ident, because it has no gram- \nmatical connection with any other word in the sentence. \n\nX. 0. 4, 2. tS>v (T (o fidruv bi]\\vvofji,e(ov, koI eu ^^X*" \xe2\x96\xa0""oAu apf>u>(rr6Tep(u \nylyyovrai {when the bodies are exhausted, the animal spirits becomi xceaJcer). \n\nRemark 1. The Genitive absolute can never be used when the action refers \nto the subject ; in this case the participle must always be made to agree with \nthe subject. It is otherwise in Latin, on account of there being no active par \nticiples in the past tense ; the Latin must, therefore, use the Abl. Absolute, \neven when the action refers to the subject, e. g. oi aTpaTiwrcu t^v ttoXiv Ka^e- \n\\6vTes els rh (rTpaT6TreSov avexf^pW^v (milites, URBE DIRCTA, in castra se re- \nceperunt, after the soldiers had taken the city, they returned to the camp). In this \n\n\n\ni 312.] THE DEPENDENT AND ABSOLUTE PARTICIPLE. 481 \n\nexample, the actions denoted by the participle and the verb, both refer to \nffTpariwTai, and therefore the Gen. Absol. could not be used. \n\nRem. 2. The reason why the Greeks chose the Gen. absolute, has been \nseen in treating of the Gen., \xc2\xa7 273, Rem. 11. Subordinate clausee also may bo \nused instead of the participial construction, either for the sake of greater em- \nphasis, or for perspicuity. \n\n4. The Participle as described under 2 and 3, is used to \ndenote : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) A specification of time, where the English uses subordi- \nnate clauses, with the conjunctions lolien, while, during, aftei\\ \nsince, or a substantive with a preposition. \n\nX. C. 1. 2, 22. TToAAoi Ttt xpVH-^-TC- aya\\a>aav t es, wv Trpoa^e]/ a-jreixovTO \nKcpSwv, al<rxP\xc2\xb0- vofil^ovrcs eJfai, tovtwv ovk arrexovTai {after wasting their money, \nafter, when they had icasted). An. \'A /c o y <r o <r t ravTa rols arrpaTTfydis rh iv^vfn]p.a \nXap^ev iSoK\xe2\x82\xac7 (when tfie generals heard this, on hearing this, after hearing this, they \nthought the device ingenious). So the frequent circumlocution with Troi^cras \nin the sense of thereuporu Her. 6, 96. ive-rrpricrav koI to. Ipa Kal ttju ttSXiu \xe2\x80\xa2 ravra \n5e TTO lit ffavr \xe2\x82\xac s M ras &\\Xas yfjaovs aydyoyTO (tuerbutoix they set sail for \nthe oUier islands) ; or with the repetition of the Part, of the preceding word. \nHer. 7, 60. Trij/Tas TouTo; Ty Tpoiru) i ^r] pi^ /mti (T av apib y.-{]cr avT \xe2\x82\xacS Se /cara \ntbvea SifTaaaov [in this way they numbered all; thereupon they arranged the \narmy by nations). Gen. absolute, X. H. 5. 1, 9. vav fxax\'-o-s nphs t)]v a^KT]V7]v \n\xe2\x80\xa2jj\xe2\x82\xac V fjLiVT] s, TfTTopas Tpffipds Xafi^dvei Toipyunras {a naval battle having been \nfought by moonliglU^. 4.58. viro<paivoyros rod ^pos, \'AyTjaiXaos kXlvott^- \n\xe2\x80\xa2r)]s ?iv {when the spring appeared). II. o, 88. o6tis i/xev ^uvros koL eVt Xi3-o;/2 \niipKopiiv 010 aoX KoiKrjs irapa irqval ^apeias x^^P"-^ eVotcrei (ivhile I live, as long \nas Hive and look ujion the earth). \n\nRl.v. 3. The following participles, which may be sometimes translated in \nEnglish l)y adverbs, also belong here : (a) apx^^^^t\'os, in the beginning, origi- \nnally. Th. 4, 64. air ip Kal apxofievos eJirou. (This is to be distinguished \nfrom op|a^6vos air 6 tip as, which may be translated, especially, before all. \nThe Part, ap^ajx^vos agrees, for the most part, in Number, Gender, Case, with \nthe substantive which is more exactly defined, e. g. PI. Rp. 600, e. ovkovv ti^w- \nfiev airh \'Op.T] pov dp^ajiivovs Tvavras rovs iro it] t ikov s fj.i/j.r]Tas eiSa>- \n\\wv apfTTis ihai {that all the poets, jiarticularly Ilomer, etc.). Sometimes, ]iow- \ncvcr, tlie Part, ap^aixevos agrees with the subject of the sentence. PI. Symp. \n173, d. 5oK\xe2\x82\xacrs /xoi aT6x\xc2\xbb\'<is iravTas av^piowovs ct^\\iovs riyeicr^ai ttAV ^w/cparous, \ntiTrb (Tov ap^aixevos, you seem to me to think all men unhappy except Socrates, \nparticularly yourself). \xe2\x80\x94 ($) TeXevruu, properly ending, finally, at last. PI. \nRp. 362, a. rcKivrSiv izavra Kara ira^wu ai/c(TKLvBv\\ev^r}(TeTai. X. An. 6. 3, 8. \nreKevTwvTfs Kal airh rod vSaros eJpyou (rovs "EWw^s) ol GpuKes {at last the \nThracians kept the Greeks from the icatcr). \xe2\x80\x94 (7) Aiakiirwu^ xp^^y^ ^fif \nsome time, after a while, subsequently, or SioA. ttoXvv, oXiyov xp-i eTr^to-xwi/ ttoXvv \nXpivov, pLiKp6u. PI. Phacd. 59, e. oh iroXvv olv xpoi\'ov iiriffx^^ W^- \n\nRem. 4. The Part, in the Gen. sometimes stands without a subject, when \nthe subject can be readily supplied from what goes before, or when the subject \nis indetinite, where a demonstrative pronoun, or the words irpdyfxaTa xP\'hfJ-^\'^a, \niv^puTToi, etc., used in a general sense, may be understood. Th. 1, 116. Uepi- \n\n41 \n\n\n\n482 SYNTAX. [^ 312. \n\n\xc2\xbb \n\nkXtjs wxero Kuril, rdxos iirl Kavvov /col Kapias, isayyeX^ ivrcov, Zri^oivKracu \nvries in avTovs TrXeovariu (it having been announce^that Phoenician ships were sailing \nagainst them). X. Cy. 1.4, 18. ar-^ /nav^eyruv Se t^j \'Aarvdyei, on \xe2\x96\xa0jroXffiioi \nelffiv eV rij x<^P? i^efior]^et, Kal ahrhs rrphs to opia {it having been signified to \nAstyages). 3. 1, 38. hiaCKrjvovvrav 5e (sc. ahrwv) fJHTo. rh Seiiruoi\'f iTr-fjpeTo \n6 Kvpos. Also in the Sing. Th. 1, 74. (ra(pa}S dT]\\w^4pT o s, on iu reus vaval \nruv \'EW-fjvcov ra irpd-yiiara iy^vero {it having been made very evident that). Ck)rn.p. \nthe Latin cognito, edicto, petito, etc., instead of postquam cognitum est, etc. \n\nRem. 5. In order to define the time more exactly, the preposition iiri is \nfrequently connected with the Gen., yet only when the Part, is in the Pres. \ntense, e. g. \'EttI Kvpov fiaa iXevopros {while Cyrus washing). See ^ 296, \n\n1, (2). The relation of past time is sometimes made more definite by the prep- \nosition IX era, after, with the Ace. e. g. Her. 6. 132. fiera Se ev TAapa^Sovt \nrpufxa yevS/xevov iSliXndSris av^ero {after the slaughter made at Marathon). \nSee \xc2\xa7 294, II, (2). The relation of indefinite time expressed by about, nearly, \nis indicated by 1)176 witli the Ace, e. g. virh rrjv Trpurrju iire \\^ov trap \nvvKra [\xc2\xa7 299, III, (2)], the coincidence or contanporaneousness of one thing with \nanother, is expressed bj d/xa with the Dat., e. g. d/x fj/xepa d lacpwc Kova-rj \n{as soon as daybreak); d/xa r^ cirai oLKfxd^ovr i {sirnulac frumentum adul- \nturn est). \n\nRem. 6. In order to determine more exactly the relation of time, temporal \nadverbs are often used with the dependent participle and the Gen. absolute : \navr i Ka, ev^vs, i^ai<pviq s, fxera^v, d/xa. PL Rp. 328, C. ei/^iis ovv fxe \nlb 03V 6 KecpoKos \'n(nrd^er6 re Koi elirev {simul ut me conspexit). Lys. 207, a. 6 \nMevei^evos eK rris avKrii fxera^v irai^cou elsepx^rai {while he played). Phaed. \n77, b. Uttcos 1X7) d/xa a-K 0^ vt](T ko vr s rod dy^pwirov Siao\'Keddi\'vvrai t} \nrpvxv {as soon as man dies). Her. 9, 57. /cal dfxa Kara\\a$6vr e s irposeKearo \na(pL {as soon as they had come up with the enemy, they pursued them closely). Th. \n\n2, 91. eiraidiviC^v re d/xa irXeovr es {inter navigandum, while sailing). \n\n\xe2\x80\xa2 \xe2\x80\xa2 \n\nRem. 7. In order to denote more clearly and emphatically the succession of \n\ntime and a consequence or result, the following adverbs are very often appended \n\nto the predicate of a sentence: evrav^a, oi;t\xc2\xab(s), ovrw Sii, wSe. X. C. \n\n3, 10, 2. iic TToAAwi/ (Tvudy ur e s to e| eKaarrov KdWicrra, our us o\\a rek \nffcafxara koAo iroLelre (paiuea^ai {collecting from many the most beautiful features of \neach, IN THIS way you make the entire foinis appear beautiful). \n\n(b) A cause or reason, ^vhere the English often uses subor- \ndinate clauses with since, because, as, inasmuch as, or a substan- \ntive with a preposition. \n\nX. C. 1. 2, 22. tro\'SXoX rh. xP^JMOto dvaXuffavres, S>v irpSar^ev aireixovro Kephcev, \naltrxpo. V fxl^ovr es etvai, rovrav ovk air exovrau {many having squandered their \nestates, did not abstain from those gains from which they before abstained, because \nthey accounted them base). To emr-qdeia exoiev e/c rrjs X^P\xc2\xb0-^i iroKKris Koi dya^s \noij(Tr]s {they might obtain supplies from the place, since, because, inasmuch as, it was \nextensive and fertile). \n\n(c) A motive, pwpose, or object, where the EngUsh uses the \nInf. with to, in order to, or a finite verb with that, in order tJiat^ \nso that. Generally, only the Fut. Act. Part, is used to denote \nthis relation; sometimes also the Fres. Act., {^266, Rem 3). \n\n\n\n$ 312.] THE DEPENDENT AND ABSOLUTE PARTICIPLE. 482 \n\nThis usage occurs most frequently with verbs of going, coming \nsending. \n\nHer. 3, 6. rovro epxofiaL (ppdauy {I have come to say this). 6, 70. es Ae\\ \n(povs xpV(r6fj.euos t(^ xpV<rTVpiv Topeuerat {he goes to Delphi to consult tht \noracle, in order to, that he may consult, etc.). X. C. 3. 7, 5. ci ye Sidd^wp \nwpurjfiai. Uf/xiru ae xi^ovra [I send you that you may, to, in order to, say). \n\n(d) A condition, where the English often uses a subordinate \nclause with if; or a concession, where the Enghsh uses a sub- \nordinate clause with although, though. \n\nX. Cy. 8, 7, 28. rohs tpiKovs ev epyer ovvt es /tai roiis ix^po^s Svvijcrea-^e ko- \nkdCeiv {if you confer benefits on friends, etc.). Isocr. Paneg. 41, 2. tS>v a^Xr}- \nrwu Sis roaavTr)u f>d)fMr]v \\a$6vTci)v, ovSev hv TrAeov yevoLTO to7s &\\\\ois, kvo s \nSe auhphs e6 (p povfj cravTos, oTravres &\xc2\xab/ airoXaiKTeiav oi fiouX6fievoi koivwvuu t7}s \niKiivov hiavoias. X. Cy. 3. 2, 1 5. ws oXiya 5v i/dfifvo i irpoopav ^v^pcoirot nepl \nTov fifWovros TToAAa iirixfipovfiei/ irpdrreiv {although men can foresee little, yet, \netc.). \n\nRem. 8. When the Part, expresses a concession, the particles Kai (neg. ovBe, \nfiriSf), Ka\'nrep, Ka\\ ToCra, are commonly joined with it. X. An. 1. 6, 10. \nTrpos\xe2\x82\xacKvyr}(Tau (^OpSyTtfv) k aiwe p elS 6t\xe2\x82\xac s, on 4ni ^avdrco &yoiTo {although they \nsaiv, tJtat), Eur. Ph. 1618. ouk ftv Trpodoirjv ovSeirep tt pdacwv KaKws. PI. \nRp. 404, b. "Ofx.rjpos iv rati tuv rjpaiwu karidaeffiv ovre Ix^^criv avrovs e<TTi^, k a I \nTavra iirl ^oXdrrT) eV \'EX\\r]STr6i/TU} ot/ras {andthat too, thoughthey were, etc.). Tavra \nin such connections, may often be governed by the verb Troiew : and he did this, \nalthough they were, etc. The words \'6ixu>5, e?To, Kara, eTretra, k&tt e ir a, \nare often added to the predicate of the sentence. Her. 6, 120. vcTepoi Se dTri- \nK6fi\xe2\x82\xacV0i T7J5 (TvixfioXris l/xeipovTO o/jlcos ^eija-aa-^ai rovs Mt\']5ovs {although they \ncame after the battle, still they desired to see the Medes). PI. Charmid. 163, a. v-n o- \n^cfifvos (rw(ppo(Tvt/rju eli/ai rh to, eavTOv irpdrreiv, eTretra ovSey <p7](ri KuXveiu \nKal reus T^ Tuv 6,\\\\a}v trpaTTovTas aacppoyeTu. "Ofxas is often in poetry \njoined to a Part., e. g. Aesch. S. 712. Trei^ov yvyai^l Kaiirep ov at^pywv op.ws, \nor (what also sometimes occurs in prose) is placed before the Part., e. g. PI. \nPhaed. 91, c. Sj^u/iias <po^etrai, fJ.^ f) ^puxh Sjuws Kal ^et6Tepoi/ Kal KaXXiou ou \nTOV (TufiaTos iTpoaiToXX{rnrai {that the soul, though more god-like and beautiful than \nthe body, will neverthekss perish). \n\n(e) The manner and means, where the English sometimes \nuses a participial noun with a preposition. \n\nVeXuv elirev {he spoke laughing). X. Cy. 3. 2, 25. XT]~iC6iJ.evoi C<^(np \n{raptu vivunt, they live by plundering). C. 3. 5, 16. irpoaipovvTai fiaXXou outu> \nKepSalpeiu an aXXriXwv, fj cvvaxpeXovvT es ainovs { prefer to gain some advan- \ntage from each other, rather than by assisting themselves). Isocr. Panath. 241, d \nToi;s\'\'EAA7jvos eSi5o|ai/, hv rpSirov SioiKovvres ras aurwv irarpiSas Kal irphs ovs \niroXefjLOvvTes fieydXrju t V \'EXXdSa iroL-fja-eiav. So often xp^f^^^\'os with the \nDat, where the English may use the preposition with, e.g. TroXXfj rix^V \nXpuixevos rovs iroXe/xiovs evUriaiv {conquered the enemy with great tact). \n\nRem. 8. Here belongs the phrase Xrjpels ex^v, or in a question, rl \n\n\n\n484 SYNTAX. [$ 312. \n\nA rj p e7s e X &> J/ ; i. c. you Jceep trifling so, or why do you keep trifling so ?, excu here \nexpressing the idea of duration. PI. Gorg. 490, e. TroTa vTrod-f^fj-aTa (pXv-apeis \n\xe2\x82\xac X \xc2\xab \xc2\xbb\' ; { what shoes are you always prating so much about ? ) . Here belong also the \nPart, ^e p6 fjievos, and (p\xe2\x82\xacpa>v used intransitively, summo studio, raaximo impetu, \ndedita opera, with verbs of motion. Her. 8, 91. \'oKas Se nves Toys \' ASrnvaiovs \nSiacpvyoieu, (pepS/JLevo i (cum impetu delati) is^-nnrrov is tovs Atyiurjras (as often \nas they escaped the Athenians, rushing on violently they fell into the hands of the \nAeginetae). 8,87. (i/avs) SLWKO/xeur] virh rrjs \'Attiktjs <p4pov(ra iuefiaXe vrjicpiXiri \n(cum impetu aggressa est amicam navem, being pursued by the Attic ship, made a \nviolent attack on a friendly ship). Aeschin. Ctes. 82. es tovto <p4puiv irepiecTTrja-e \nTO. irpdy/mTa (he designedly brought things to this state). Comp, ib. 90 and 146. \n\nRem. 10. In like manner the Greek employs the participles ex\'^^\'j &yuv, \n(pepwu, \\a^u>v, where the English may use the preposition with; ex\xc2\xabJ\' is \nused both of animate and inanimate objects, which may be in the possession of \nany one, dyccu of animate objects, (pepwv of inanimate, Xa^wv of both. e. g. X. \nCy. 1. 3, 1. ^px^TO-i- r] MavSavT] irphs rhp irarepa koI rhv Kvpov rhv vlhu exovca \n(loith her son Cyrus, etc.). So 6 Kvpos ^i<pos (pcpcav irpos^Xcurei\', \'i-mrov dyuv \n^A^ej/, iTTTreas Ka^ibv rovs TroAe/xious KaT^biw^eu. The Homeric and Poetic \nlanguage often connects the participles ex\'^*\'> (p^pt^v, Xa&wv. and ayav with verbs \nof giving, placing, etc., in order to present the idea of the action that preceded \nthe giving and placing, graphically, as it were, before the eyes of the hearer. \n11.97, 305. SoJKe |i<^os a.pyvp6r]Xov avv KoXe^ re <pepu>u kcH iv^iaTcp reXafiuvt \n(bringing he gave, he brought and gave a sword studded with silver). \n\n5. Instead of the Gen. absolute, the Accusative is also used, \nbut for the most part only when the Part, has no definite sub- \nject, consequently where the verb from which the participle \ncomes, is impersonal, e. g. i^ov (from e$ea-TL, licet), quiiin liceat, \nliceret, tvJiile, when, since it is or was alloived; or with impersonal \nphrases, e. g. ala-xpov ov {quwn turpe sit, esset, ivhi/e, because, \nsince it is or was shameful^ The idea of extension in time, which \nis expressed by the Ace. (^ 279, 6), is, in this construction, trans- \nferred to the 5i:\xc2\xab^e or condition of an object; the conjunctions \nivhile, when, express tliis corresponding relation. \n\n(a) Accusative absolute. PI. Menex. 246, d. t]iuv i^hy Cn^ l^h KoXas, koXus \naipovfxe^a /jLciXXov TcXevrav (since it is not in our poicer to live honorably). Protag. \n358, d. OTav avayKaa^ Zvolv kukoIv rh erepov aipf7cr^ai, oi/Sels t5 fi^l^ov aip^ffe- \nTot, i^hv rh iXarrov (alp^laStai), no one will cJioose the greater, when it is in his \npower to choose the less. Her. 1, 129.\'\'Ap7ra70J, irapehy avrcp fiatriXda yeyea^cu, \n&XXq} Trepie\'iS-Tj/ce rh Kparos (when it teas in his power to become a king). 5, 49 \nirapexov (quum liceat) Trjs A<ri7}s irda7]s Spx\xc2\xab\xc2\xbb\' eHTrereajs, &XXo ri cup-qa-eo-^f \'^ \nTh. 5. 14. (01 \'A^-TjvaToi (Uere/xeAovTO, on fieTa to. iv UvXa (yevoiJieya)^ koXus iro \nJ o (Tx <^ \xc2\xbb\'> ov ^vve$r)(rav (when a favorable opportunity presented itself). So virip- \nXov, quum liceat, liceret; heov, quum opus (necess-^) sit,esset; S6^av airroTs (quum \nlis visum sit or esset, when it pleased them, when they had decreed) ; So k avv (quum \nvideatur, videi\'etur)\\ ir po srjKov (qman deceat, deceret). Passive participles: \nTh. 1 125 SeSoyfxivov Se avrols, ev^vs fxey aSvvara ^v iirixeipeTv arapcur- \ntceiot > od(rip (and though they had determined, it vxts not possible for them, etc.). Elov \n\n\n\nI \n\n\n\n9 312.] THE PARTICIPLE. \n\n\n\n485 \n\n\n\nfieuou {quum dictum sit, esset). Adjectives with 6v, e.g. SriXov 6v {quum \nappareat, apjKireret) ] &SnKoy 6v, Swarhv ov, advuarov 6u. Also some- \ntimes without 6v,e.g. Sri\\ov, avayKa7oy. \n\n(b) Accusatives absolute. Though the participles of impersonal verbs usu- \nally have no subject joined with them in the Ace. AbsoL, yet a neuter pronoun, \nnot a substantive, may be joined with them as their subject. Her. 2, 66. \nTudra yivSfieva, irev^ea fxeyd\\a rohs Alyvirriovs KaTa\\a,ul3dvei. [lohen this \nis done, the Egyptians are filled with great grief). Th. 4, 125. \xc2\xa5,^ a/xcporepois \nfi\\v ZoKovv a.vax<^p^\'tv, Kvpablv Se ov^ev {sed quum nihil decretum esset), ix^- \npovv 4k oIkov. X. H. 3. 2, 19. So^avra Se ravra koL irepauSi ivra, to. (m^u \noTTparevfiaTa airriXbeu {when these things had been agreed upon and accomplished). \n\nRf:M. 1 1 . The Genitives ahsohite, however, are more frequent than the Acc.,when \na neuter pronoun is joined with the impersonal verb. X. H. 1, 1, 36. S (J | a i/tos \nr oiiT ov wx^To [hac re decreta, this having been agreed to, ichen this had been, etc.). \n7, 30 and 5. 2. 24. So^dur cav tovtu v. Cy. 4. 5, 53. t ovtov cvp^okovv- \nros (ace. to the best MSS.). 4.5,53. tovtov outcos \xe2\x82\xacXovtos. Also 5o|- \nav ravra (from eSo^e ravra) occurs. X. An. 4. 1, 13. So^au ravra, iKT}\' \npv^av ovru iroidy {when this was approved, they gave orders by the herald to do ac- \ncordingly). With such impersonal verbs as contain the subject in a measure \nin themselves, the Gen. is used, e. g. vouros, aaXiri^ovros [\xc2\xa7 238, 5. (b)]. \nElsewhere the Gen. but very seldom occurs with impersonal verbs and phrases, \ne. g. X. Hipp. 4, 2. aS ii] A. ou ovros, ei ktA. .\'\'\' \n\n6. The particle of comparison w s, is connected both with the \ndependent Part. (^ 312, 3), and also with the Gen. and Ace \nabsolute, when the idea expressed by the Part, is to be in- \ndicated as a representation, as a subjective vieiv, opinion, oi \npurpose of the actor or speaker. This w? has the same signifi- \ncation as a Part, of a verb of thinking or saijivig, followed by \nan Inf , or Ace. with an Inf The Enghsh can express this ws \nby the expressions thinking, intending, ivith the intentiofi of, \nsaijing, or by as though, as if under the pretence that, because. \n\n(a) Simple Participle. X. Cy. 1. 1, 1. olrvpavve7v i-mx^ip-fia-avres, kUv otto- \ncovovv xp^vov &pxoyres Siayeuwvrai, ^av/xdCovrai, us <ro^oi re kuI evrvx^\'is ye- \nyiVT}fjLevoi (properly, as those are admired, who are wise men = voixiC^lJ-^vot \nffo<poi re Ka\\ evrvx^\'ts yeytvija^ai, thought or reputed to be wise). PI. Rp- 329, a. \nayavaKrovffiu, d: 5 fxeydXav rivwv air effr e pri fievo i (i.e. rjyovfj-evot fiey. r. \niiwearepTia^ai {as if they had been deprived, thinking they had been deprived). X. \nAn. 1. 1, 11. \'EKe\\ei/o-e {Up6^evov) \\afi6vra avZpas on TrXeicrrovs Trapayeuia^ai, \nis isUei<riZas fiovK6ixevos ar pareiecrbai {pretending that, under the pretence \nthat, saying that, he wished to march against the Pisidians). \'ns is very often \nconnected with the Put. Act. Part., when a purpose in the mind gf another \nis expressed. X. An. 1. 1, S.\'Apra^^p^vs (rvWafi^dpei Kdpop &s dTroKreyuu \n{an-ests Cyrus for the purpose of putting him to death). The writer here states the \nview or purpose as it existed in the mind of Artaxerxes, and not his own vie^ \nof the matter. So also very often with trapaffKevdC^ff^ah \xc2\xa7 310, 4, (h). \n\n41# \n\n\n\n486 SYNTAX. [$ 312 \n\n(b) Genitives absolute. X. H. 7. 5, 20. irafrfiyyeiKev avrois irapaxTK^vi^effbcu, \na)s fidxHS i(rofji.4j/7js (i. e. \\eywv /xtixrj;; e(recr<&-at) {he commanded them \'to pre- \npare themselves, because, as he said, or saying that, there was to be a battle). 5. 4, 9. \niK-fipvTTov i^idvai \'Trduras Qrifialovs, ws tuv rvpavvav r e^yedr oov {quia iyranni \nmortui essent, because, as he said, the tyrants were dead). Th. I, 2. is \'luviav va-re- \npov, us ovx iKauris ovffTis Trjs\'ATTiKrjs, awoiKias i^eirefjLipav (i. e. yo fjLi^ovre s \novx lKavr\\u elvai) {afterward sent colonies to Ionia, thinking that Attica was not large \nenough). \n\n(c) Accusative absolute. X. An. 5. 2, 12. 6 5e ro7s ireXracrra?! ttckti -rrap-fjy- \n76\\A6 ZL7}\'YKvKo}fj.evovs Uvai, o) s, 6ir6Tav (TTjiM-fjinj, aKovri^eiv SeTi(rov {he com- \nmanded all the peltasts to advance, ready to shoot, saying, that it would be necessary \nfor them to hurl their javelins, etc.). PL Rp. 425, a. rdls Tj/xeTepois Traialv iv\' \nvofjiUTepov ev^vs TraiStSy fie^eKreov, & s, irapavS/jLOV yiyvofi\xe2\x82\xacV7}s avTTJSy ivvofiovs re \nHal ffTTOv^lovs &vdpas av^dvecr^ai adivarov ov. Sowy e|oy, a>s irapov, etc. \n\n(d) Accusatives absolute. X. C. 1. 2, 20. hih koI tovs vleis oi irarepes airh \nruv TTOUTipoiiv av^pdoircau e\'ipyovaiv, w s t^ v fi\xe2\x82\xacV rav xpy](TTwv 6 ^iKiav 6.(TK7](Tiv \noZcrav Tjjs ap^rris, t^v 5e t\xc2\xabj/ iroyrjpSJv KaTaXvcriv {assured that, knowing that, \nthe intercourse with good men leads them to practise virtue). 3, 2. eijx^To 2\xc2\xabk- \npdTTjs TTphs TOVS ^eous airKus raya^h, di^ovai, w s tovs ^eov s KdWicrra \n\xe2\x82\xacld6Tas {thinking that, convinced that, the gods knew what was best). This con- \nstruction is very common, and is not limited to a pronominal subject, like the \none mentioned in No. 5, (b). Perhaps this construction is not absolute, but \ndepends upon a verb of perception to be supplied, indicated by ws. \n\nRem. 12. A peculiar use of the Gen. absolute, in connection with ws, oc- \ncurs with the verbs dSevai, iTrla-Ta<r^ai, yoe7t/, ex^"\' yvwyLtiv, Sia- \nKeia-^ai Tr\\v yycafxrjp, ^poi\'Ti^etj\', also sometimes with Xe^eij/, and the \nlike verbs, with which, instead of the Gen. absolute, the Ace. of the substan- \ntive with a Part, or tlie Ace. with an Inf., would stand as the object. The \nconsequence resulting from the action of the Gen. is commonly denoted by \novTa}{s) joined to the predicate. X. An. 1. 3, 6. as ifiov oZv Iovtos, ottt} tn\' \nKal viJ.e7s, 1/ TO) ttjj\' yy(t}V7)v ex ere {as if then I shall go. etc., seeing then that \nI shall go, so form your opinion, i. e. be assured that I shall go wherever you go, me \niturum esse, quocunque etiam vos, statuite). Cy. 2. 3, 15. ws ovv ifiov ye koI \nayuviov/j-euov Kal, oirolos &v tis S), Kara t^v a^iav jue Ti/xav a^ i cixrovr o s, \novTus, e(pr], S> Kvpe, ylyva^cTKe. PI. Cratyl. 439, c. h lavorib evT es is \nl6uT wv re airdvT (av del Kal peSyrav { reputantes, omnia semper ire et Jiuere ) . \n\nRem. 13. Instead of ws, SsTrep {quasi) is sometimes joined with the Part \nIn order to bring out emphatically an d>jective {actually existing) ground or \nreason, the particles aTe (are Stj), seldom oTa, oTov (in the Ionic -nTiters. \nalso, &sTf), in the sense of inasmuch as, because, quippe, are connected with the \nparticiple. Her. 6, 59. are itvkuov i6vTOs tov iXcreos, ovk. wpav oi iurhs \nTous ckt6s {because the grove was thick). X. An. 4.8, 27. are ^ewfiet up \nT civ kraipuiv, ttoW^ (piXovsiKia iyiyvsTo {because the hetaerae were lookinq on, \nthere icas much rivalry). 5. 2, 1. ol KoXx^\'j "\xe2\x96\xa0\'\'\'^ 4 KTreirrcoKSTes [^k] tojj \noIkiwv, ttqAAoi ^(rav a^pooi /cat virepeKdb^rjvTo im roov &Kpwv {inas}nuch as they had \nbeen driven out of their houses, etc.). Tli. 2. 5. i)aav kcu \'dvSfpccTroi Kara tovs aypovs, \noTa dirposhoKTiTov kukov iu eip-fjUT) yeuofjLevov. PI. Charm. 153, a. olov Sti \nXpovov acpiypLey s a(r(jt.eyw5 ya etii rds ^vyrj^eis Biarpifids. \n\n\n\n$ 313.] PECULIARITIES IN THE USE OF THE PARTICIPLE. \n\n\n\n487 \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 313. Special \'peculiarities in the Participiao con- \nstruction. \n\n1. The Nom. of a Part, often refers to a preceding substantive in the Dat, \nAce, or Gen., when the Dat., Ace, or Gen. in the preceding clause denotes the \nobject in a grammatical point of view, but the subject in a logical respect, e. g. \nin SoKet tioi = iyci} riyovfiai, I think. This is a species of Anacoluthon \n(^ 347, 5). \n\n(a) Dative.^ Th. .3, 36.^ e5o|ei/ avTo7s (i. e. i\\pT](f)i(TauTo, voted) ov tous ira- \np6vTas tx6vov airoKT\xe2\x82\xacii/ai, aWa Kal robs airavras MirvAvvaiovs, iir iKaAovvre s \ntV ^AAtji/ aTToa-raait k. t. A. (as Sallust.Jng. 102. popido JRomano melius visum = \nrati). 6, 24. epws eVeTrecre iraa-iv (= iire^viuiovi/ irdvres) o/xoicos eKirXeva-ai- \nTo7s iJ.kv TT pea ^vT 4pois ws . . KaTa(TTpe\\l/op.4voLS i(p\' & eirXeou, ..to7s S\' ii/ \n7}\\iKia. . . eveAiTiBes oj/res (rcv^aeaSrai. \xe2\x80\x94 (b) Accusative. Eur. Hec. 970. \nalSus fj.\' ex^* (= alSovfiai) 4u ToUSe ir67ixca rvyxaj/oua-\' tV elfii vvv. \xe2\x80\x94 (c) Geni- \ntive. Her. 4. 132, Aapeiov rj yvu/xr) e-rju (= iyiypcoaKcv) eiKd^oov. Th. 4, \n23. Ttt Treol HvXov inr aficpor e po}}/ Kara Kparos inoKe aeTro (= ra irepl IT. \nafM(p6Tepoi 4Tro\\e/j.ovy), *A^7]ua7oi /xkv . . ti]i/ vricrov 7re/)*7r A. eovTes .. , IleA- \nOTTowTja- loi 5e iv rfj \'Hireipw (Tt paTOTr ed evSfMeuot (comp. \xc2\xa7 266, 3). \xe2\x80\x94 \nSometimes also the Ace. and Dat. of the Part, is constnicted according to the \nse7ise of the preceding phrase or clause, and not according to its grammatical \nform, e. g. S. El. 479, sq. vireaTl fioi ^pdaos advirvouv KKvovcav apricos \noveipdrwv (instead of ^pdaos jx exei KKvovaav). Th. 1, 62, ^v yuufiri \nTov ^Apicrreus (= e5o ^e t^ \'A p t (T t e 7) rb fjieu fxe^\' eavTov CTpaT JttfSoj/ \nexovT I iv Tcp \'Ic^fif iiriTrjpeTy tovs \'A^vaiovs. \n\nRemark 1. On the Nom. of the participle in the partitive apposition, seo \n\xc2\xa7 266, 3. \xe2\x80\x94 The Nom. of the Part, sometimes stands in a sentence alone, with- \nout a finite verl), so that the Part, apjxirentli/, but only apparently, takes the \nplace of the finite verb. The finite verb must then be supplied from the pre- \nceding or following sentence. Her. 1, 82. AaKeSai/iioyioL ra ivavTia tovtuiv \nedeufo V 6 flow ov yap ko fitovTfs Trph tovtou airh tovtov KOfiav (sc. v6[j.ov \nf^evro). So also conjunctions stand without a finite verb, e. g. \xe2\x82\xact, idu, oTau, \netc. X, C, 2. 1, 2.3. 6p(i> <re airopovvTa, TToiav 6\'5hv eVt rhv fiiou r pdinj \' iau ovv \nipX <t>i\\r]V Tronja-d/xcvo s (scil. ttji/ iTrl rhu ^iov b^hv rpdirri). In very many \npassages, however, the Part, may be explained by inserting elpii. \n\n2 The genitives absolute sometimes occur where the subject of the participle \nis not different from the subject of the predicate or an object of the predicate ; here \nit is to be noted, that the "subject of the participle is often wanting, since it can \nbe easily supplied (\xc2\xa7 312, Rem. 4). The reason of this peculiar construction \nis commonly found in the efl:brt to express the member of the sentence with \ngreater emphasis. \n\nInstead of the Nominative. Th. 3, 13. fio-nSfnffdvrwv vfiwu irpo^v/xas \nv6Kiv Trpos\\r}\\pe(T^\xe2\x82\xac {you aiding, you will more readily, etc.). 70. Kal is Xoyovs \nKaraffTavTuv (KepKvpaiwv) ixp-ncpiffavTO KepKvpaToi {the Corcyraeans having^ \nhad a coiwersation, determined). X. C}\'. 1.4, 20. ravra etirovTos avrov eSo|6 \nTi (sc. avTos) \\4yeiu ru \'Aa-rvdyei. Instead of the Accusative. Her. 9, 99. ot \n:S.d/xioL, a-KiKOixiwuv \'ASr-q i^ aiwv aixi^aXcorasu . . tovtovs Xva-dfievoi irdu- \nras a-noTri^nrovai . . is ras \'A^vvas {ichen the Athenian captives had come, the Sami- \nans having ransomed them, send all back to Athens). Instead of the Dative. ^Th^ \n1, 114. Kal is avT^v S la $\xe2\x82\xac $7} k or os f/Sr? He piKAeovs . .jiyyeX^rri avr^ \n{n\xe2\x82\xacpiK\\f7) {ivhen Pericles had aossed over into it, it ivas announced to him). \n\nRem. 2. These examples must be distinguished from those in Homer, where \nthe Gen. of a Part, follows a Dat. of a pronoun, or the Dat. of a Part, follows \na Gen. ; then instead of the possessive Gen., Homer sometimes uses the Dat \n\n\n\nM \n\n\n\n48a SYNTAX. [\xc2\xa7\xc2\xa7 314, 3l5 \n\nOd. i, 257. 7) flip S\' avre Kar\xe2\x82\xacK\\d(r^ <piKov ^rop S e Krayrcov (p^6yyor re ^apvt \navTov re TreKcopov {^^ rjfxajv ^rop). 458, sq. t^ k4 ol iyK4(pa\\6s ye dia (nreos \n&Wvdis aKXri ^eivo jxev ov paioiro -rrphs ovS^\'i. II. |, 140.\' At pelSr], vvv dr] irov \n\'A X i A A^ s oKohu Krjp yf}^ei ivl aTij^eacn (p6vov koX <pv^av \'Axcuwv SepKO fievco. \n\n\n\nCHAPTEE VI. \n\n$314. The Adverbial Objective. \n\nThe objective construction, finally, is expressed by adverbs. \nAdverbs ^denote the relation of place, time, manner, the quantity \nof a predicate or attribute, or of another adverb, e. g. k-^^v^f-v \n^X^ev, X*^^^ OLTre/Sr], KaXws aTriS^avev, TroXXctKts TJX^ev\', adverbs \nare to be viewed in a measure as resembling the Cases of sub- \nstantives, since by these also, as has been seen, the relations \njust mentioned are expressed. Hence it is evident why most \nadverbs have a definite Case-inflexion, e. g. ov, where, dvo), koltw, \n61, OLKOi, TTrjy OTT-q, etc. (k 101, 2). \n\nRemark. In addition to the above adverbs, the language has other adverbs, \nwhich do not, like those mentioned, define the predicate more exactly, but ex- \npress the relation of the predicate to the subject. These are called Modal \nAdverbs. They denote the certainty or uncertainty, the extension or limita- \ntion, the affirmation or negation of the proposition ; or they exhibit the propo- \nsition interrogatively. Several of them have been changed from adverbs to \nmere suffixes, and hence always depend on a particular word, which by them \nis made emphatic. The interrogative adverbs will be treated under the sub- \nject of is errogative sentences. Of the other adverbs aUuded to, the following \ndeserve a more particular consideration. \n\n$ 315. A. Ar^, 8^a, \xe2\x80\xa2^T^v, S^^ev, 8r/7rov^\xe2\x82\xacv, 8ai. ; \n\n1, A 7} is the abridged form of ^Stj, being conformed to it in usage; but it \ncan never, like ^Stj, stand as the first word in a sentence (except in the Epic \n8\')j T(^T\xe2\x82\xac, turn vero, S^ yap, jam en?m), but is used only as a mere suffix (\xc2\xa7 314, \nRem.). It denotes in general that which is certain, sure^ settled, a reference to \nsomething known [already, now, even, precisely, exactly) ; it is not used of a par- \nticular time exclusively, but may refer to any time. It is very often employed, \nin order to denote a consequence which follows of itself, nothing further being \ntaken into the account. TaCra, & vvv S)j Keyeis {just noic,atthis very time) : & \nvvv d^ i\\eyes (just noic, just then). X. Cy. 4. 1, 23. vvv S^ <tv SrjKuxTeis, el \noAtjSt? eXeyes [now certainly). OvSev S)j KaKhv \'ireir6v^aixev (nihil jam or nihil \ndu7n, thus fa7\\ as yet, up to this time). Ovdev Si] Kcuihv ireia-ofjie^a (nihil jam == \nfurther). "With an Imp. or hortative Suhj., it signifies, now, then, now then, I pray. \nX. C. 1. 2, 41. Sida^ov 8^ irphs ruv ^ewv (now then teach, teach then, I pray). \n\n\n\n4 315.] AtJ, S^a, Sifjv, SPev, S^TTovSev, Sat. 489 \n\n\'Iwfifu S-fl {now then let us go, come now). After relatives, it often denotes a ref. \nerence to a thing which is known. X. Hier. 11, 8. \xc2\xabai ^pS>Tou fiku ,hS^hs Karetp. \nyaafieuos ^u e^vs rh (piMlc^ai virh rwu apxo/xeua>y, o5 5^ <ri; iiriSfvfxwu rvyxdveis \n(quod, uti satis constat, expetis). Hence e\' tt e 1 5 7\'/ (since now, quomarn, i. e. quum \njam), because now, puisque, in respect to something conceded, known ; 6}s Stj, \nseeing that, quandoquidem, el Srj, si jam, if now. In a series of sentences con- \nnected by /cot, S17 is placed after the word which is to be made emphatic. PL \nMen. 87, e. vyieia., (pafxeu, koI Iffxvs Koi KaWos KOt ttAoG to s St/. So k al rh \n\n5 v fxtyicTTov ; further, 6\\Aos re \xe2\x80\x94 Kal St? /cat. Her. 1, 30. els KXyvirTov aTrtKero \n-napa "Aixacriv, kuI 5)? k a\\ is :S,dpSLS irapa Kpolaou {and even also, and moreover \nalso to Sardis). \xe2\x80\x94 Ti oZv Stj; (why therefore, I pray ^) Uas oZv d-q, (how now \nthen, how, I pray ?). \n\n2. In general, 8^ is very often used in order to render emphatic and define \nmore exactly, the word after which it stands : precisely, exactly, even (in English \no\'ftcn indicated only by the tone of voice). X. Cy. 2. 3, 13. fieya <f)poyov<Tiv, \nSrt TTCTToiSeui/Tai 5 7] Koi irphs Xifxhv Kal irphs di\\pai\' Kal irphs p7yos KapTepe7u (just \nbecause they have been taught, because they have been taught, forsooth). PI. Prot. \n320, a. SeSiws irepl avrov, /jlt] Sia<l>^ap^ S t^ vir \'A\\KifitdSov (lest he should be cor- \nrupted, forsooth). With adjectives and numerals, it has either a limiting or en- \nlarging sense, according to the nature of the adjective or numeral, e. g. fiSvos \nS-f) (quite alone), ev Ppax^l S^ (in a vei-y short time), aa^ev^s S-fj (very weak), \niroAAot 5t], iroWaKis 5 tj, Kpdricnoi 5^ (the very best, confessedly the best). With \na pronoun, it expresses the distinction, importance, prominence of a person 01 \nthing as kno^vn, e.g. iKe7vos Stj, that (well-known) man, (rv Si] ravra irSKfirfffas ; \n(did you especially, you of all others dare this ?) ; ovto} 5^, ivrav^a S^ ; so with other \ninterrogative pronouns, X. C. 4. 4, 10 koI ttoTos Stj aoi, ecprj, ovros 6 \\6yos eariv ; \n(what kind of reasoning, I ask, I pray ?). Eur. Med. 1012. t/ St) KaTr]<peis ofifia \nKol haKpvp^oels ; So Ti iij Trore; (what then in all the world?). Tls Si} oZy; \n(who then now, who I pray ?). With an indefinite pronoun, it increases the in- \ndefiniteness, e. g. &W01 5^ (others, whoever they may be), baos S-f], dTr6(ros Sifj, bsris \n5/; (some one or other, any one whatever, nescio quis), (tjv 6ir6oov St; xpJvo;/ (I know \nnot how long). With conjunctions and other particles, it signifies : (a) even, \nprecisely, e. g. us S-fi, \'Iva S-fj, indeed, just exactly, just even ; (b) truly, assuredly, \nwhen a thought is to be expressed with assurance and decision, e. g. ^ S-f], ^ \nIxdKa St], Kal S-f], Si] trov, certainly indeed, assuredly, oh S-f] ttov, yet surely \nnot at all, certainly not, yap S-f], for surely. \n\n3. ArjTa, which is formed from S-f], serves like S-f], only in a higher degree, \nto render prominent, and more.exactly define the word, which stands before it. \nIt may be joined with all the parts of speech, in order to define them, whether \nit be to extend or restrict them. It is very often used after inter rogatives, e. g. ri \nS 9] T, ineiSa,^ rovro yevnrai ; (quid turn demum dicetis, quum hoc factum eritf). It \nis also quite frequently employed in answers (even so, precisely so, certainly so). \nAlso. ^ Srira, yes, forsooth, oh Srjra (minime vero, no, by no means), ^^^ St}to \n\'^ay,donot),e.g.,li] Si]Ta Spdcrys ravra; Kal Srjra (and forsooth, and truly). \n\n4. The enclitic ^t^v is a Doric particle, but it also appears in the Epic Ian- \n\n\n\n490 SYNTAX. [k 316 \n\nguage. In Homer, bijv has always an ironical sense, like the Attic S^-n-oy, \nwithout doubt, certainly. II. ^8, 276, ov d^-fjy /xiy irdXiv aims b.vi)crei ^vfios ayiivwp \nveiKeUiy ficurihrjas oueiSeiois eTreeao\'t*\'. \n\n5. Arj^eif (from S^ and 3^;/) almost always expresses scoim, irony [scilicet, \ntruly, indeed) ; it is very seldom used as a mere explanatory particle. X. Cy. 4. \n6, 3. aTreirefiypdfX\'qv (rhv vl6u), fi^ya (ppovoou, \'6ti drj^ev rrjs fiaaiXecos d-vyarphi \nd^oi/xr}y rhy ifihy vlhy ya/ierriy [because, forsooth, I should see my son the husband of \nthe king\'s daughter). \n\n6. A7]Trovbiy (from S\'^ittou and ^v), I hope so indeed, I suppose, certainly \n(nempe, ironically). X. Cy. 4. 3, 20. iyw 5\\ ^v \'nnrfueiy [id^o), orav fiey inl rov \n\'liTTvov y^vwixai., lb. rov linroKeyTavpov S-fjnov^ey Siairpd^ofxcu [I shall, as I hope^ \nact the part of a centaur). \n\n7. Aot is a lengthened form of 5^ (as yed of yri). It is nsed only in the \nphrases rl Sal; nws Bal; it expresses the idea of surprise, wonder [what then f \nhow so ? ain^ tu ? itane 7 itane vera f). \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7316. B. Confirmative Adv erbs. \n\n1. Mi^j\' (Dor. and Ep. /icii/) expresses, like vero, confirmation, assurance, as- \nseveration, truly ; often also, like vero, it is used adversatively : still, but. Bat it \ncannot stand as the first word in a sentence, as it commonly depends on another \nword, and that the most important in the sentence, particularly on particles. \nIts use with particles is as follows: (a) "^H /h^j\', surely, certainly, hence used \nparticularly with oaths, asseverations, or solemn promises. X. Cy. 4. 2, 8. rh \nTrtcTa SiBuKTiy avTo7s, ^ jx^jy u)s <pi\\oLs kolL iti(tto7s XPV<^^<^^<\'^ avTo7s [that he as- \nsuredly would treat them as friends). \xe2\x80\x94 (b) Ob fj-vy, fii] f^-iiv, truly, assuredly \nnot. \xe2\x80\x94 (c) Kol iJLT\\y,and indeed, yea surely, nay more. PI. Phaed. 58, e. Ka\\ \nin^y iyoiye ^av/xdaia eira^ov napayeySfifvos. Ka\\ fiTjy is often used, when a \nnew assertion is adduced to strengthen or corroborate the meaning. Od. A, \n582. Kal n^y TdvToKov elseldoy; so, often in the dramatic writers when atten- \ntion is to be directed to the entrance of a new person : and see ! and lo ! Also \nKa\\ fJL^v /cot, et vero etiam, and indeed too ; Kal ix)}v o u 5 e, and indeed not even. \n\xe2\x80\x94 (d) \'AWa /X7JJ/, at, sed vero, but indeed, but assuredly. In a question, Tt \nfx\'fiv ; IT cos iJ.T]v ; quid vero ? quid quaeso ? what indeed ? what I ask f \n\nRemark. Instead of /i-fjv, the Ionic writers employ the shorter form fi 4 v, \nwhich, as well as /lc^j/ and fj-dv, is found in Hom. also. Even in the Attic dia- \nlect, fi4v is sometimes used instead of juV? 6. g. in an answer. X. C. 1. 4, 4. \nir6r\xe2\x82\xacpa yyei/xTjs epya Kplveis ; Upeirei fxe y to, iir\' oxpcXcla yiyyofieva yvwfir^s fpya \ncJuai. This confirmative /j. 4 v, instead of fi-qy, occurs in the following con- \nnections : (a) MevTot expresses confirmation, surely ; very often in antitheses, \nlike vero, to denote a limitation; thus, Kal }i4vroiy ov fi4yToi, dAAa fiep- \nroi. \xe2\x80\x94 (b) Mevovv or /ief ovy, sane quidem, quite certainly, yea indeed, is \nused, for the most part, only in replies, e. g. irdyv fiey oZy; very often when \nsome correction is made. X. C. 2. 7, 5. ol irapa <xol rovrtay ovS\\v ^xioTovToi \nTTOLiiv ; TlduTa fj.ky ovy [but do those ivith you know nothing of these things f \nyes, everything, immo vero omnia). So ou or ju.^ neyovv, immo non. \xe2\x80\x94 (o) \nMeyd\'^ or fxky Si], quite certainly, yea indeed; always in the phrases ij pity Sir \n\n\n\nM17.J EMPHATIC SUFFIXES Trip, yi, roL 49l \n\nov M\xe2\x82\xacvS^, a\\xh fieuS-f, Kal fxevS-f], yh (a.4u \xe2\x80\x94 8-{} instead of ^ uV S^ \netc. On the concessive /jlcv, see \xc2\xa7 322, 3. \'* \n\n2.^H expresses confirmation (profecto). In order to strengthen it, fi-fiy is \noften joined with it. ""H irov, surely indeed, often ironically. The Epic ^tol \nlike ^, expresses assurance : surely, certainly. \n\n3. N u in Epic, expresses also an asseveration, but generally in an ironical or \nscornful manner (like the Attic Stjttou), indeed, forsooth, ceitainly, nemm. \n\n4. N ^, the Lat. nae, expresses an assevei-ation, but only in affirmative sen- \ntences, e. g. v^ rhu Ato, in truth, surely. \xe2\x80\x94 From v-f) is formed the lengthened vai \n(as 5oi from Stj), which has the same meaning, and is often used with ^a. \xe2\x80\x94 \nMd likewise denotes an asseveration; in affirmative sentences: yal /a a rhv \nAia ; in negative : ov f/.a Thv Aia. But where /xa Aia stands without a nega- \ntion, then a negative clause precedes or follows, or it is clear from the context \nand from an accompanying adversative particle, that the sentence is to be un- \nderstood as negative, like X. C. 3. 13, 3, \n\n\xc2\xa7 317. C. Emphatic suffixes Trip, ye, rot. \n\n1. Ilcp is the enclitic, and hence the abridged form of the adverb irepi, \nthrough and through (Lat. per). The radical meaning of -nrep is through and \nthrough {throughout). Uep agrees with ye in that, like the latter, it gives empha- \nsis to the word with which it is joined, but it differs from 76, in making the \nemphasis extensive (consequently denoting the measure, size, the extent of the \nidea) ; ye, on the contrary, makes the emphasis intensive (consequently de- \nnoting degree, the inward strength or force of the idea). In the Common \nLanguage, ir4p is not used alone, but in relation to another thought. Hence it \nis often connected with conjunctions and relatives, e. g. osirep, throughout, en- \ntirely, the very samg who, Scronrcp, altogether as great as, precisely as great, oT6s ire/?, \nentirely, exactly of such a character as^ etc., orrov irep, just ivhere, wherever, \'6^ep \nvep, just ichence, whence soever, ecus irep, up to the very time, as far as, until, iireiTrep, \nsince, infiSTf irep, forasmuch, seeing that, ichereas, eiirep, if indeed, if even. In Eng. \nthe meaning of both particles is often given by merely emphasizing the word \nto which they belong. \n\n2. r e\' denotes intension, an inward force, certainty, assurance, and thus ren- \nders an idea emphatic and distinguishes it from others ; it may be used either Xo \naugment or restrict the force of a word, e. g. iyu ye (7 indeed, I for my part, \nhowever it may be with others), ev ye, ovt6s ye, iroKkd ye, oKiya ye, etc. It \ndepends, like the enclitics, on the word whose meaning it renders emphatic. \nIn connection with relatives and conjunctions, it serves to confirm or complete \nthe preceding statement. Thus, osye, who or which indeed, who certainly, qui \nquidem; & strep ye, just as indeed ; etye, if indeed, if however, siquidem ; after \nadversative conjunctions: Kalroi ye, aK\\6. ye, etc., and yet indeed^ (like \nquamquam quidem, verum quidem), ye makes an antithesis prominent, smce it \ndefines more exactly, limits or corrects what precedes. X. C. 1. 2, 3. ko(toi \n\n\n\n492 SYNTAX. [\xc2\xa7 318 \n\nye ovbeTTciTTOTe mreax^To StSa<r/caA.os elvai tovtov (certaixlt Socrates made his \npupils useful men, although, etc.). Te is very often used in replies and answers, \nin order to indicate that they either confirm, augment, complete, limit, or \ncorrect, the thought contained in the preceding question. \n\n3. Toi (enclitic) means surely, certainly, certe, and serves also to render an \nobject marked and prominent. It is often connected with pronouns, e. g. iyd \nTOL, eycoye rot, I surely, I most certainly, rjimis toi, ravToi toi. It is particularly \nemployed in quoting general propositions and proverbs, since by it an assertion \nis referred to a general truth and thereby confirmed. Theogn, 74. vavpoi toi \niroXKoiiv TTicTTOu exovai v6ov. With adversative particles, e. g. Ka\'noi, tamen, \nquamquam (properly and surely), ^levToi, tamen (\xc2\xa7 316, Rem.), aTdp toi, \naXkd TO I, but certainly. Also, ovtoi (/HTjroi), certainly not, ydp t o i, for \nindeed, for certainly, iJT o i \xe2\x80\x94 ^, still stronger ijT oi ye \xe2\x80\x94 ^, either indeed \xe2\x80\x94 or. \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 318. D. Negative Particles ovk and fxi^. \n\n1. Oxf (like its compounds, e. g. ovSe, oijTe, ouSety, etc.) is an objective \nnegative; /x-fi subjective, i. e. ov is used when something is denied absolutely, \nindependently, by itself (objectively) ; fi-fj (and its compounds), on the contary, \nwhen something is denied in reference to the conception, view, or uill of the \nspeaker or of some other person (subjectively). Both are commonly placed before \nthe words to which the negation is to be applied. On the position after the \nword to be negatived, see \xc2\xa7 15, 4. \n\n2. Hence ovk stands : (a) in all sentences containing a direct assertion, wheth- \ner these are expressed by the Indicative or Optative ; hence also (b) in subor- \ndinate clauses with (in and us (that); (c) in simple interrogative clauses, \nboth direct and indirect ; (d) in subordinate clauses denoting i/me, with Stc, \niireid-f}, etc.; (e) the ground or reason, with oti, Sioti, iirel, etc.; (f.) the \nco7}sequence, yvith. &sTe either Avith the Ind. or Opt. ; (g) in adjective clauses, \nwith \'6 s, \'6 ST IS, etc., Avhich denote a concrete, objective attributive explanation; \n(h) when an absolute negative meaning is to be given to a single word in a \nsentence, e. g. oh k aya^os, o v kukus ; in this case ov sometimes changes the \nidea of the word to an opposite sense. \n\n(a) Tovro oil yiyveTai, ovk iyeveTO, ov yeyfjcreTai. TavTa ovk tw y\'lyvoiTO, \n\xe2\x80\x94 (b) OTSa, OTi TavTa ovk eyeVero. ""EKeyev, oti tovto ovx ovtws cT^e*\'. \xe2\x80\x94 \n(c) Tts OVK alaxvveTai. (or ovk^lv alax^voiTo) Kouch \\eyav Thv aya^hv ay^pa: \n\xe2\x80\x94 \'^Ap^ ov ^avfid^eis Thv \'SiOOKpaTT] ; \xe2\x80\x94 Ov Spdaeis toDto ; \xe2\x80\x94 Ov wepifievels (\xc2\xa7255, \n4). \xe2\x80\x94 *J?s, ?) ov ; or <p\'^s, 5) ov (p^^s^, \xe2\x80\x94 Ae|oi/, el (whether) ovx Vfjutpres Toxna \nAe\'las. On the dependent double question, see No. 3. \xe2\x80\x94 (d) "Ore ovk ?i\\^qv \n01 troKeixioi, ol "EWrjves rjavxaCov. \xe2\x80\x94 (e) "Oti ol ^dp$apoi ovx r]\'^T7)bT}<rav, oi \n^EWrjves ra opt) ov KaTe\\nrov. \xe2\x80\x94 (f ) X. Cy. 1. 4, 5. Taxv toi brjpla amrjKuKei \n(Kvpos), wsTe 6 \'AcTuoyjjs ovKer eTxc avr^ cruAAe\'veij/ i^p/a. \xe2\x80\x94 (g) \'Ayiip, \ntv ov K elSes. \'A.vf]p, t)V ovk hv ^avixd^ois. \n\n3. M:^ on the contrary, stands : (a) with commands, learnings ; hence with the \n\n\n\n4 318.] NEGATIVE PARTICLES OVK AND /xyf. 493 \n\nImp. and with the imperative Suhj.; (b) with wishes and exhortations; (c) in \ndeliberative questions [\xc2\xa7 259, 1. (b)] ; (d) in clauses denoting purpose, with Xva^ \netc. (also with owws and the Indie. Put.) ; (e) in conditional clauses, with el with \nthe Indie, or Opt., idv,orav, iTr<iu,ews &u with the Subj., gre ye = si^^m- \ndew ; so also in subordinate clauses which denote a repetition, whether they are \nintroduced by a temporal conjunction, or by el, idv, or by the relative, etc. \xe2\x96\xa0 \n(f) in clauses denoting consequence or result, ^vith \'disre and an Inf.; (g) in \nadjective clauses with os, Bstis, etc., which imply a condition or purpose, in \ngeneral when a subordinate clause contains an idea which is expressed only as a \nconception, supposition ; hence when the idea of a class or species as such is more \nprecisely defined, and the sentence may be resolved by is, qui with the subjunctive \n(= ita comparatus, ut); (h) in the second member of a dependent disjunctive \nquestion {whether \xe2\x80\x94 or not), oh as well as /x^ is used. PI. Phaed. 70, d. (TKe\\\\i(i- \nfieba, eXr apa iv aSov el<T\\v al xpvxal Te\\evT7](TdvTwv twv av^pwiroov, elre Kal ov. \nCrit. 48, b. aKe-meou, Trorepov h\'lKaiov ejxe ev^eySe Treipaa^ai i^ievai, (Jt.^ acpievTwv \n*A^r}vaiwy, fi ov SiKaioi/. PL Ep. 339, a. el a\\r]^es (t Aeyeis), ^ /x^, ireipda-o/jLai \nfia^elv. Phil. 21, b. tout\' auW, \xe2\x82\xact ^ X\xc2\xab\xc2\xbbpe\'^> ^ H-h X^^P^\'^\'j avdyKt) Stjttoi; ce \niyvoeTu, Kev6v ye 6vra iraerTjs tppov^aews. Isae. 5, 14. ov Set viias t/c t5)v tov ku- \nr7]y6pov \\6yuif rovs \\6yovs KorayLav^dveiy, el koXws vjXiv Kelvrai, ^ fi-fj, aW\' e/e \nTcau v6ixwv rovs rov KaTrjySpov \\6yovs, el op^us vfxas Zidd^ovcn rh irpayixa, ^ ov. \nBut in those dependent questions, in which there is merely a distinction between what \nis, and what is not, fir) is used, when the predicate of the first member is not repeated, \nbut must be supplied ; but o u as well as fj. tj, when it is repeated. Dem. Cept. \xc2\xa7 142. \n\\oyi<ra<T^e vphs v/xas avrovs, ri re (xvfx^rtcrerai. Kare^r\\(picrixevois vfuv rov uS/xov Kal ri \nfi i]. X. C. 3. 6, 10. ol<r^a, 6ir6(rai re (pvKaKol eiriKaipoi elai Koi OTrSaai fiif, Koi oirScrai \nre (ppovpol iKavol elffi Kal SttSctoi jx-I] elffi. Aesch. 1, 27. 6 vofio^errfs hiappT]hr]v \nkiredei^eVf otis xph ^Tlfir^yopelv koX otis ov Se7 \\eyeiu ev rip S-fifxcp. \xe2\x80\x94 Mij is also used \nin direct and indirect interrogative sentences, which express fear, anxiety on the \npart of the inquirer, and hence require a negative answer; (i) in forms of \nsvoearing, and not seldom when one swears that something shall not happen, but \nsometimes also, when one swears that something has not happened; in the latter \ncase, the feeling by which the denial or abhorrence is expressed, is denoted \nby u \xe2\x80\xa2>, \n\n(a) M^ ypd<pe, fi^ ypdrprjs (\xc2\xa7 259, 5). \xe2\x80\x94 (b) E^e jx)} ypd<l>oisl \xe2\x80\x94Mi] rovro \nyeuoiro ! \xe2\x80\x94 M ^/ tutixev ! \xe2\x80\x94 M)? ypd<puixeu ! \xe2\x80\x94 (c) PI. Symp. 213, a. aWd /xoi \\e- \n7eT\xe2\x82\xac, elslw, fj fx\'fl\\ (Tv/xiriea-Sfe, fj oH ; Rp. 337, h. irus Keyeis ; fx^ avoKpivwfiai ; \n(shall I not answer thee?). \xe2\x80\x94 (d) Ae^w, \'ha fxj) Troifjs. \xe2\x80\x94 (e) El fx^ \\eyeis. \xe2\x80\x94 \n\'Eaj/ fxi) Keyris. \xe2\x80\x94"Orav ravra fXT] yevT]rai. PI. Prot. 345, e. f>s Uv fx)] Kanh \nKotrj eKdv, rovrwv <pr]c\\v eiraiverrjs ehai {as often as one does not willingly do evd, \netc.). X. Cy. 2. 3, 20. et (^Te) fx)) &XXo ri airovZaiSrepov Trpdrroifu, ravrri rfj \nTaiSiS. expuvro {as often as, tchenever, they icere not engaged in more important busi- \nness).\xe2\x80\x94 (f ) PI. Phaed. 66, d. r)) aufxa rj/xas eK-rrX\'iirrei &sre fxr) Svuacr^ai vir avrov \nKa^opay ra\\r]bes.\xe2\x80\x94 (g) PI. Ap. 21 . & ytt ^ oJda, ovde oXop-ai elheyai { = el riva fx^ \noT5o). Hence \'6rnx-i], unless, nisi (properly ouoej/ \'6ti fx-f), then generally instead of \nti 1X7]}, \'6(Toi fx-f), except those who not. Her. 1, 32. iy r^ fxaKp^ XP^\'^V T^oWa fxey iart \n\n42 \n\n\n\n:\xc2\xbb \n\n\n\n494 SYNTAX. [$ 318. \n\niBeeiv, TO ( = &) iM-fj ris i^e\\\xe2\x82\xaci {multa, quae ita sunt comparata, ut, one can see many \nthings of such a nature that he would not mshto see). Andoc. 3, 41. i^ricpiacur^* \nr lavra, c| Sy fiirjd eirore v/mv fieTafieK\'fiarei. \xe2\x80\x94 (h) Mt; re^yrjKcy 6 \'KaTi]p ; \n[my father is not dead, is he? = is it not to be feared that my father is dead f) \n\'^ofiovfiaif fi^ 6 iraT^p ribvi^Kev ; [I fear that my father is dead, I am anxious to \nknow whether my father is dead). M77 Spa/reis tovto j {you will not do this, will \nyou?). Mt] SeiXol iarSfic^a; {we shall not he cowards, shall we? shall we he coW\' \nards?). Mt? votrus ;\'^hpa /jlt] vocreTs ; {you are not sick, are you?). \xe2\x80\x94 (i) Ar. \nEccl. 999. fih. TTjy ^A(ppo5lTr]v . . /j.^ *7ct> 0^ d^ccw (/ will not let you go, the thing \nsluxll not be). Aor. 194. fik y^ v . , /xr] \'yd) ySrjua KopApdrepoy ^Kovaa \xe2\x80\xa2jtw, Beware ! \n1 have not listened. M-fi is not unusual with the Inf. X. An. 7. 6, 18. ofivvm \nvfjuy ^fovs 8,Trayras Kol irdtras fiTjSe t ifiol ISia uTreVxero Seui^s cxet\xc2\xbb\'. \n\nRemark 1. In all the instances above given, except (a) (b) (g), ov is used \nwhen a single word in the sentence is to be made negative, e. g. O y tpufiey ; \nnegemus? Isocr. Paneg. 71, 6. \\aP6vTes i^aKisx^^^ovs twv \'EW^vwy, 0? iv reus \navTwy ovx oloi r ^(rav (^y {nequirenf) ; hence in the combinations ovBels \nUsTis ov; ovSevhs Stow ov, etc. (^ 332, Rem. 12); so also in ovk la^\' \n8 IT 00 5 ov: for these expressions are, as it were, blended in a single word, like \nHullus non. Et ov Sdoei {recusabit). Dem. Cor. 320, 283, &st\' ov fiefiyrja- \n^ai {= oblivisci). Moreover c* can stand with ov, when the clause takes the \nplace of a causal sentence. \n\nRem. 2. On ovk tiv \\4yois ravra, instead of /u^ AeV, see \xc2\xa7 260, 2. (4) (b) ; \non oil Spdtreis rovro (instead of fii] Spdurrjs) and ov Spaaeis rovro; {= do this \nindeed), see ^ 255, 4. \n\n4. Mr] is regularly used with the Inf. But after verbs of thinking: otofiai. vo- \nuiCo), yiroAojujSafw, Sokw, as well as after (prjixl and olkovu, ov is \'commonly used, \nsince the Infinitive (Ace. with Inf.) in this case has the force of an affirma- \ntion ; much more seldom after other verba putandi et dicendi. When, however, \nthese verbs are in the imperative, or in the imperative Subj., or in another con- \nstruction which requires /*^, then fxS] follows. \n\nPI. Theat. 152, b. elKhs cocphy &yBpa fj.^ Xijpuy. X. C. 2. 1, 3. t6 fi^ <p(vyeiw \nrovs irdyovs. 1. 1, 20 ^avud^u}. Situs Tore iv e ic^rjaay \'A^vcuoi ^ccKpdrriw \nwept Toiis Sfeovs fi^ \xc2\xbbio<ppoye7y. An. 7. 6, 18. o/xvvo) vfuy, fir}S\' it. ifxol iSi^ \nwire\'sxeTO 2cv3i7S exef. X. C. 1. 1, 19. (oi iroXAoi) otovrai Toi/s beovs rh fifp \nciSeVat, T^ S\' oiK elSeyai. 2. 4. ravTTjy r^y e^iy {vivendi rationem) rrjy ttjs t^o/x^J \n^irt/teActoj/ ovk ifiiroBi^eiy t<pf). 1. \\^. Trumvwy ^\xe2\x82\xaco7s vus ovk flycu ^eovs \niyoni^ev; X. C. 4. 8. 2. 6 fioKoyeiTat ovS4ya trca Tuy fiyrjfjLoyevofJLeyuv av- \n^pdiruy KaWioy ^dyaroy iyeyKuy. More frequently /i^, as: Isocr. Phil. 109. \n&lxo\\6yovy firjSeyhs ir^iroTe roo\'ovrov irpdyfiaros SiofiapTeiy. Id. Dem. 22. \nVO/xi^f iJL7]Sey eiyai Tuy ay^pwTriyuy ^e$aioy. \n\nRem. 3. When an abstract substantive or substantive adjective stands in- \nstead of the Inf, then either ovk or /xr) may be used, according to the nature \nof the clause into which the substantive or the substantive adjective may bo \nresolved, e. g. Ai*. Eccl. 115. Seivhy S\' ier\\y ri fiij ifnrtipia (= \xe2\x82\xact fi\'ij ris ^<r- \nriy \xe2\x82\xacfJiir\xe2\x82\xacipos). Th. 1, 137. ypd^pas r\'ijy rwy yetpvpwy ov Sid\\v<riy (= Sti Of \n&S [ihal] ai y4(pvpai ov SieXv^rjaav), \n\n\n\n^^^^\xe2\x80\xa2] NEGATIVE PARTICLES OVK AND fjiij. 49^ \n\nRem 4. With some verbs, eg. <i>d.ai, oUcr^a^, k^^ovv, 67r..rx velcr. \n?"\xe2\x80\xa2 \'\' t^\\"\\g^t^^\'^; ^^hich properly refers to the Inf, is usually joined with the \nfinite verb, thus ot<t>r,f.i, like nego, I deny, refuse. X. An. 1. 3, 1. ol a-rpanl \nTai OVK ecpaa-au nvai tov irpdarw (iiegaverunt se ituros esse). Th 2 89 ^i/j-e/caA. \n6(ra {6m\xc2\xa3s), ohK 6.Jiiy Tk f,^ deiA 4v bpf,wU^ ^x^^" {desiring that you should \nnot fear what is not to he feared). j j \n\n5. With the participle or adjective, fi^ is used only when these can be re- \nsolved by a conditional clause, or when they stand in a connection which \nrequires f^-ff ; in all other cases, oi is used. Ob Svpd/x^uos, one who cannot, or is \nunable, ov $ov\\6fi\xe2\x82\xacuos, nolens, ovk ava-yKotov, unnecessary, ra ov Ka\\h j8ouAej5- \nuara, turpia consilia ; & ov maTevuv {one ivho does not believe, is qui non credit, or \nquum (since) non credit, or quia non credit) -,6(1 <pi\\o(ro<pwu {is qui non philoso- \nphatur) ; 6 fii] iriarevuv {if one does not believe, si quis non credit). X. An. 4. 4, \n15. ovTOs yap fS6Kfi koI wpdrepov TroWh ^S-q a\\7}^evaai roiavra, to, ovra re us \ntvra, Kol TO /XT? oma ws ovk ovra {if amjthing was not, he represented it as not \nbeing). So \'H co<pia rSiv ZeivSiv koL fij] Seifuv avSpda iariv, PI. OlSci ce Tavra \nov iroi-f^aavra. *\'H77etA\xe2\x82\xac rrfv ir6\\iv ov iroKiopK-n^eTaav, Protag. 360, d. used \nin philosophical definitions of an ideal assumption ; on the contrary ra ov Beiud \nobjective, used of actual dangers. X. Cy. 1. 2, 7. hu hi^ yvwcri Svj/dfj.\xe2\x82\xacuov /aeu xap\'*\' \nairoSiSSvcu, fi^ airodiBSyraShy KoXd^ovari rovrov larxvpSis {= idv rivaKrX.) [whoever \nthey knew capable of repaying a kindness, if he did not repay it^ they, etc.). 3. 1, 16. \nri yhp h.1/ . . xpV\'^f^\'^\' ^ Tty lax^PV ^ a.vZpfia> fxr] cdtppovi {= el /j.^ ffd^pwv elfrj). \n\n6. When a negative sentence contains indefinite pronouns or adverbs, e. g. any \none, any how, any where, at any time, ever, etc., these are all expressed negatively \nThese negative expressions neither destroy nor strengthen each other, as they \ndo not stand in an opposite relation, but each of them is to be considered inde- \npendent. The negatives must be of the same kind, i. e. either compounded \nof OVK or fii). Double negatives in Latin, English, and the modern languages, \ndestroy each other, but not in Greek. <| \n\nPI. Rp. 495, b. (T/it/cpA (pvffis ovSey fiiya ovdeirore ovBeva oUre lSi(i>Triif \noCt\xe2\x82\xac Tr6\\iv Spa (a mean nature never does anything noble either for ant private \nindividual or for the State). Hipp. Maj. 291, d. (rb KaK6u) t firtSeiroTe alff- \nXphv /t7j5a/xou /iTjSej\'l <pave7Tai {which never anywhere seews to ANY ONE \ndispleasing). Lysid. 214, d. 6 Kouchs oUr aya^w, ovre KaKw ovdeiroTe els \ndArj^^ <^tA(oj\' cpx^TM. In like manner the simple negative {ov, fxi})^ which in \nthis case must always precede the other negatives, is so connected with its \ncomjwunds that neither lose their force ; hence ovk ea-riy ovSiv {there is not \nanything, there is nothing) ; so also the negative parts are joined with the nega- \ntive whole, e. g. Ov Uvarai oijr\' c5 Xeyeiv oUt\' ed voieiv rohs <pi\\ovs, he can \nneither^ nor; in like manner also ovSe, /^lt^S e, not even, ne \xe2\x80\x94 quidem, are used \nin a negative sentence, e.g. ov Svuarai oiiSe yvv e5 -rroietv rovs (pi\\ovs {he is not \nable, not even now, to benefit his friends). \n\nRem. 5. If the finite verb is connected with a participle, the negative, when \nit refers to both, is usuallv placed with the Part., though only when the Part, \nprecedes the verb. Th. l\', 12. fierk rb. TpwiKa rj \'EAAas 6T( tieraULaraTo \'<\xc2\xab"f\xc2\xabT- \nyxrC^To, Srre /i)j 7]<rvxd<ra<ra av^ri^rjuai (i.e. S>sre fih Tjo-vxaaat Kal fiii \n\n\n\n496 SYNTAX. [^ 318 \n\nav^r)^pai). Where the negative is so placed, it must be considered as belong- \ning to the whole sentence, and not to a single word. \n\n7. Ou fi-fi with the Subj. or Fut. Indicative, is elliptical, since with ovk a \nverb denoting anxiety or fear, which is sometimes also expressed, must be sup- \nplied, and fi-f] must be referred to this verb. Hence ov jxi} is used, when the \nidea to be expressed is, it is not (o h) to he feared that {fi-fi) something will happen, \ne. g. ov {(pofiov/xai) fi^ yeuTjTai tovto (non vereor, ne hoc fat, Ms certaixlt \nwill not happen). PI. Crit. 46, c. eS ia^i, \'6ti oif jxi) <roi ^vyxcop^ao} {be assured, \nthat I do not fear that I shall make concessions, i. e. be assured, that I certainly shall \nnot make concessions to you). In a question with the second Pers. of the Fut. \nIndicative. Ar. Jtfub. S05. ov /j.7] \\a\\-f}(reis, a\\X\' aKo\\ovb^<reis e/jLoi; I shall not \nexpect that you will talk = do not talk (\xc2\xa7 255, 4). \n\n8. After verbs and expressions of fear, anxiety, uncertainty, doubt, distrust, \xe2\x80\x94 \ndenying, hindering, abstaining, \xe2\x80\x94 preventing, forbidding, contradicting, the Inf. \nwith the negative /^^ commonly follows instead of the Inf. without fi-f), the \nGreek repeating with the Inf the negative idea implied in these words, for the \npurpose of strengthening the negative view of the sentence. This use of fi^ \nis sometimes regarded as pleonastic ; but it is entirely in accordance with the \nfrequent usage of the language in employing two negatives for the purpose of \nincreasing the negative force of the sentence ; hence, when a negative was \ncontained in a preceding word, it was not unnatural to join a negative with \nthe Inf. that followed, v v^ 2 (>^^ ^\'7 \n\nKcoXva) (Te fj.^ toDto ttoiuv (I prevent you from doing this). Her. 3, 128. \nAapiTos aTrayop ev \xe2\x82\xac1 vfiiv (x^ Sopvcpopeeiy \'Opoirea {Darius forbids you to act as \na body guard to Oroetes). 66. 6 Up-n^daTn]s t^apvos -fiv nij airoKTe7vat "ifiepSip \n{denied that he killed Smerdis). Th. 3, 6. rrjs fiiv baAdcra-ris elpyov /i^ xPV\'^^c^\'\' \nrovs MiTvXrjualovs. 5,25. awe cr xovr a /x^ iirl r}]v eKarepau yqv (rrpaTevirou \n{they abstained from marching into the country of each other). (But ojVxvvo/uot \nfii] Trojetc Tt signifies, lam ashamed not to do something, X. An. 6. 5, 4.) \n\nRem. 6. "When expressions of fear, anxiety, doubt and the like, are followed \nby firi with he Ind. or Subj. (Opt.), fi-f] must be considered as an interrogative, \nnumne, whether not, and may often be translated by that;^ e. g. SeSoiKa, fi^ airo- \n^dvp {metuo, ke moriatur, 1 fear whether he icill not die = that he icill die) ; eSe- \nSoLKeiv, fiT] aTTo^dvoi {metuebam, ne moreretur) ; ScSoixa, fii] rebvuKev (ne mor- \ntuus sit, I fear whether he has not died, is not dead = I fear that he has died, is \ndead). On the contrary, fj.^ oii with the Ind. and Subj. (Opt.), is used after \nthe above expressions, when it is to be indicated that the thing feared will not \ntake place, or has not taken place ; e. g. SeSoiKa, fx^ ovk avo^dyT) (xe non mo- \nriatur, I fear that he will not die) ; iSeSoiKeiv, /x^ ovk airobdyoi (ne non morere- \ntur, I feared that he icould not die) ; SedoiKa, fxi) ov re^yrjKev (ne non mortutts \nsit, that he is not dead). \n\n* In expressions of fear, there is always a double idea in the mind, the fear, \n\nthat something will take place, and the hope that it vnW not. This double\'idea \nboth the Greek and Latin seem to indicate bv using: a negative after verbs of \nfear, the negative being referred to a verb of hoping understood ; but as the idea \nof fear only is expressed in English, the negative is rendered that. Hence Ae\'Sot- \n\xc2\xab\xe2\x80\xa2, /i^ aiTo^dvu {metuo, ne moriatur, I fear that he will die, but hope that he will not) \n\n\n\n^ 318.] NEGATIVE PARTICLES OVK AND ixrj. 497 \n\n9. Even when, instead of the Inf., the conjunctions \'6ti, &5 with the finita \nverb follow expressions of doubt and denial, the negation is sometimes repeated \nm the dependent subordinate clause by ov. \n\nX. R. Ath. 2, 17 apv^laSrai ro7s &\\\\ois, \'6ri ov iraprju {to deny to others that \nhe was present). PI. Meno. 89, d. oVt S* ou/c eariu iTriar-fifj-ri, CK^ai, idu aoi \nSoKw eUSTws aviffTelv {but consider whether I seem to you justly to doubt that \nthis is knowledge). Dem. Onet. 871, 14. ws y ovk iK^7vos iyedipyei rr^v yrju, ovk \ni)BvvaT apvTj^rjvai {he could not deny that he cultivated the land). Isoc Archid. \n\xc2\xa7 48. ovSels h.v To\\n-f]creiev avTcnrelv, ws ov tV eiiireipiav p.a.KKov twu &\\\\<av \n\nRem. 7. So even after ov fiaWov (or when the clause in which fxaWov \nstands, has a negative sense), ov is sometimes used, which in English is pleo- \nnastic. Comp. the French, where after a Comparative que ne is regularly \nused, c. g. II donne plus que vous n\' avez donne, for the purpose of giving em- \nphasis to the idea of diversity (consequently a negative idea), which is contained \nin the Comparative (the gift of one is different from, not like that of the other). \nHer. 4, 118. 7}/fet 6 Ufparis ov54v n /xaWov eV rifxeas, ^ ov Koi iirl vjxeas \n{does not come against us more than against you). X.H. 6.3, 15. Tt odi/ Set (= ov Set) \niKuvov rhv xpovov avajxeyeiv, ews tiv vnh \'irK-f}^ovs kukwu aveiirajfiep, fiaWov, ^ ovx \nus T(ixi<T\'\'\'o, Trju clp-fiprjv Troiriffaa^ai ] in Th. 3, 36. the negation is contained in juera- \nvoid Tis ^v avTols {they repented = they no longer approved). \'n.\\r)v ov is some- \ntimes used in a similar manner. X. R.L. 15, 6. \'^Spas Travres inravla-TavTai ^aaiAeis, \nV \\^v oifK ^(popoi {all the kings rise from their seat, except the ephori). \n\n10. Mtj ov with t\\\\t Infinitive is used instead of the Infinitive without nega- \ntion, with the expressions mentioned in No. 8., when the negative ou or \nanother word which may be considered a negative, precedes /jl^ oh. M)j oh is \nhere merely equivalent to the simple ^u^, and hence is not expressed in English \nwhere tii] would not be (comp. No. 8, above). \n\nOhhiv KwKvei ffe /xt) ovk a-rrobat/eTu {nothing hinders you to die, from \ndying). X. An.3. 1,13. el ycinicr6iJ.\xe2\x82\xac^a iirl fia(TiXe7, ri ifiirodcat/ {\xe2\x80\x94 ovShv ifi- \nvoiwu) fii] ovxi (^M\xc2\xabs) v&piCofJievovs aTrobaveiv {what hinders us from dying after \nbeing treated with insult); Vect. 3, 7. ov Sv5e\\Trls elfii nh y.^ ovxl Trpo^v- \nfiws &!/ Tovs TToXiras els to roiavra els<pepeiv {lam not without hope that the citizens \nwould contribute for such purposes). Cy. 2. 2, 20. atVxp^v {= oh KaXhv) Iv \navTiKeyeiv, f/.^ o " X \' "^^^ nKeiara KoX irovovma Kal w^eXovvra rh Kotvhp, tovtov \nKcd fj.eyi(TTuy a^iova^ai. ^ \n\nRem. 8. It is seldom in this case that fiij is used instead of fi^ oh with Ae \nInf. With the real negative expressions, u Shvafiai, aSvyaros, ovx ot6s \nr eiixl, ohSefila fiVXayV i(rri (=oi\xc2\xbb SvuarSv eai iv), oh ireiSfw,ohx \n\'6<Ti6v icTTiv, ohK elK6s iariu {it is not prd>able), o i^ </) 77 ^ \', and ihe hke, \nand also such as &uoLa, ay6vT6u ian, the following Inf is actually made \nneoa^/rc by the accompanying fii] oh (sometimes also by ^tj alone), since the \nabove expressions, when separated from the negative connected with them (or \nthe o privative), have no negative force. Ou 8vmfj.aL fi^ ov joieiv {non pos- \nsum non facere, L cannot not do, i. e. / must do). X. Apol. 34. oure /. rj fiefiurja^ai \nUvaixai ahrov, oUre ,.e,..vf^4uos (.^ oh>c iira^uelu (/ must think oj him, and^ if 1 \nthink of him I 7nust praise him). PL Rp- 427, e. ohShu Aeyeis- av yap v^recrxov \nCtjtW, ^s ohx \'SaiSu a-oitu fiii oh fiov^elu diKaioavur, eis dvuafuwiraurl \nrpdira, {since it ivould not be right for you kot to render assistance). Her. 7, 5. u \xc2\xab \n\n42* \n\n\n\n498 SYNTAX. [\xc2\xa7 319. \n\ncIkSs iffTi \'A^uaiovs ipyaaafievovs iroWci, ^Utj /cafci Tlipffas, fir] ov 5ovi/cu Si \nKas, rS)v {= wv) iirolrjaav {it is not right that the Athenians should KOT atone for \ntheir injustice). PL Symp. 218, c. ttcij/u av6r]Tov i]yovfj.aL eivai aoi fxr) ov /col \nrovTo \'/api^ea^ai {non sanum judico tibi hoc \'SO\'S gratijicari). Ov (pT]iii. tovto fj-i] \novTws exeij/ (nego id sic se non habere, I deny that this is not so). \xe2\x80\x94 Also after the \nexpressions Seiyhu elvai, alcxP^^^ alcr x^vrjv elvai, alax\'^^ ^\'^^"\xe2\x80\xa2h \nwhich contain a negative idea, the Inf. follows with /jlti ov, when it is to be \nmade negative. X. An. 2. 3, 11. S^sre tracnv alo\'x^\'^VV eluai, /xt] ovx^ \n(rvcTTrovSd^iiv {so that all were ashamed [= none were willing^ kot to be busy). \xe2\x80\x94 \nSometimes fi}] oif occurs after negative sentences with participles also, in the \nsense of if not, except, instead of the usual /xij. PI. Sys. 212, d. ovk can (pi\\op \nto) (j)i\\ovvTi ovdev /J.}] OVK avTKpiKovv {nothing is lovely in the eyes of the lover^ \nexcept that which returns love). \n\n\n\nSECTION II. \nSYNTAX OF THE COMPOUND SENTENCE. \n\n\n\nCHAPTER VII. \n\nI JUx^^^ \xc2\xa7 319. A. Coordination. \n\n\'\' *" When two or more sentences stand in a close connection \n\nwith each other, there is a two-fold relation to be distin- \nguished. They are either so related to one another as to \nexhibit a unity of thought, though each is, in a measure, \nindependent of the other, e. g. Socrates was very wise,, \n\nI Plato also was very ivise ; or so, that they are wholly uni- \n\n\xe2\x96\xa0\' ted, the one defining and explaining the other, the one \n\nbeing the dependent member of the other, e. g. when the \nspring comes the roses hloom. The first kind of connection \n\n\'I is called Coordination^ the last Subordination, and the sen- \n\ntences Coordinate and Subordinate. Li coordinate sen- \ntences, therefore, the members are independent of each \nother, but in subordinate sentences, one member is de* \n\nI pendent on the other. \n\n! I came, I saw, I conquered, \xe2\x80\x94 Coordinate. \n\nWlien I came, I conquered. \xe2\x80\x94 Subordinate. \n\n\n\n^ 320, 321.] COPULATIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES. 499 \n\nRemark 1. The coordinate as well as the subordinate conjunctions are \nproperly used only to connect whole sentences ; but when several sentences \nhave single members in common, these common members are usually expressed \nbut once. In this way the sentences are either contracted into one sentence, the \nsubject or predicate common to the sentences being expressed but once ; or \nthere is at least an abbreviation of the sentences, each sentence having its own \nseparate subject, but the predicate common to the sentences being expressed \nonly with the subject of one sentence. Ot "EXX-ques to7s \xe2\x96\xa0jroXefxlois i-rre^eu- \nTO Kol KaXcos i/j.ax^o\'avT 0. Sco/cpdTrjs Koi UXdruu ffo<pol ^aav. Oi uhy"EX- \nK7]U\xe2\x82\xacS irapa rhv iroTajxSu, ol Se Ilepcrai iv opeaiv iar paT OTreSev crai^T o. \n\nReji. 2. In respect to the grammatical form of connection, all coordinate \nsentences are alike ; they are all treated gravimatically as principal sentences ; \nbut in respect to their meaning and logical relations, they may be different. \nFor every thought which forms a complementary member of another thought, \ncan be expressed in a coordinate sentence, as was always the case, in the ear- \nliest use of language, e. g. Th eap ^XSre, kuI ra p6da av^eT, instead of ore rh \neap ^ A ^ e, to, p. a. (the spring came and the 7vses bloom, instead of when the spring \nhas come the roses bloom). \n\n\n\n$320. Different forms of Coordination. \n\nCoordination consists either in expanding, contrasting, or ex- \ncluding a thought. The first is called copulative coordination, \nthe second adversative, the third disjunctive. Sentences also \nwhich stand in a causal relation to each other, may be coordi- \nnate, and are called causal coordinate sentences. \n\n\xc2\xa7 321. I. Copulative Coordination, \n\n1. A copulative coordinate sentence is one in which two or more thoughts \nwhich are considered independent, are so united together, that the thought ex- \npressed in the coordinate sentence, gives a greater extent to the thought of the \npreceding sentence. A copulative coordinate sentence is either annexive or \nenhansive ; in the former, a second thought or clause is merely joined to a pre- \nceding one ; in the latter, the statement made in the sentence applies with more \nforce to the second member than to the first. An annexive coordinate sentence \nis made : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n{a) By Kal, et, and, more seldom in prose by the enclitic re, que, and; \nKai and tc have, in general, the same difference of meaning as^ et and que. \nK a I connects members of a sentence equalli/ important, or those in which the \none following is stronger than the one preceding; hence it often strengthens or \nenhances the idea of the preceding member or is a more full explanation of it \n{ac,atque,et quidem) ; t f\' appends some addition whicli belongs to the preceding \nvirmher ; in prose, words are seldom connected by a simple ti, but sentences \nmuchoftener. \xe2\x80\x94 (b)in a more emphatic and definite manner by k a /\xe2\x80\x94/cat, \n"i \xe2\x80\x94 et, both \xe2\x80\x94 and, not only \xe2\x80\x94 but also, more seldom by t e\' \xe2\x80\x94 re\' ; the difference \nbetween the two in tliis case is, that with the former (/ca^ \xe2\x80\x94 KaO the singe \nmembers appear more independent and forcible, than with the latter (tc-t^) j \n\n\n\n500 SYNTAX. [\xc2\xa7 321. \n\nhence the fonner is used, when the members are of different kinds or are anti- \nthetic ; \xe2\x80\x94 ( c) by T 6 \xe2\x80\x94 Kal, both \xe2\x80\x94 and, not only \xe2\x80\x94 but also, when it is to be indi- \ncated that the connected members stand in an intimate connection with each \nother; by the stronger Kai, the second laemher is emphatically joined to the \nfirst ; they often correspond with the Lat. quum \xe2\x80\x94 turn, when the discourse pro- \nceeds from the general to the particular and more important. \n\n\'2,0}KpdT7]s K a I HXdTwv (Tocpol ?i(rav. PI. Apol. 23, a. t] av^pumim] (TO(pia oKiyov \nTiyhs a^la ecri Kal ovSey6s, So TroAAa k a I iroyrjpd, TroAAck Kal iJ.eyd\\a ; hence \nKal ravra, and that too. X. An. 3. 2, 16. &irfipoi outcs rwv iroXeyiicav to re irX^^oj \n&IJ.\xe2\x82\xacTpou bpojvres., \'6p.ws eTo\\ixi](TaT\xe2\x82\xac livai eis avrovs. PL Phaedr. 267, Si.Ticriai/ 5e \nTopyiav T\xe2\x82\xac edaofx^v euSetj/; \xe2\x80\x94 "Av^puiroL Kal aya^ol Kal kojcoi (but not Kal kokoI \nKal TTovrjpol). K al irevrjTes K al TrAovaioi. Kal xpTj/uara/col &vSpe5. Kal pvv \nKal aei. Kal irpoora Kal varara. X. C. 1. 2, 4. (Sw/cpaTTjs) rov adofjLaros \nauTos T6 ovK T]iJ.4\\\xe2\x82\xacL, Tovs T afj.\xe2\x82\xac\\ovvTas ovK iir\'puei. KaXos re Kal aya^os. In \nantitheses: \'Aya^d re Kal KaKd (the good as well as the ci?//), xp7?\xc2\xab\'\'Toi re ko* \nTTOvripoi, rd T e epya dfioius Kal ol \\6yoi. IloWd t \xe2\x82\xac kj.1 Ka\\a epya airedfi^aTo. \nHer. 6, 114. iroWoi re Kal iwofiaxTToL "^XXoi re Kal \'S.uKpdrrjs {quum alii, \nturn, S.). Her. 6, 136. MiXnadea ecxov iv ar6^JiaTi ol re 6.KK01 Kal fidXuTTa \nadv^iinros. Hence &\\\\us re Kal {quum aliter, turn, 7iot only in other respects, \nbut also), especially (but 6.XKWS re without Kal signifies praetereaque, adde \nquod, i, e. and especially). The connection is expressed still more strongly by \nre \xe2\x80\x94 Kal S^ Kal (quum \xe2\x80\x94 turn vero etiam). PI. Rp. 357, a. 6 TKavKuv a^l re \navdpeioraros &v rvyxdvei irphs airavTa, Kal 5^ Kal r6r\xe2\x82\xac rov Qpacrvfxdxov r^v \navSpp-qaiv {desperationem) ouk a7re5e|aTo. \xe2\x80\x94 It is to be observed that, after a/ia, \n^8rj, oviro), oh cpbdvu and the like, a coordinate clause with Kal or re \xe2\x80\x94 koI often \nfollows, instead of a subordinate clause with ore. X. An, 7. 4, 16. ^5tj re Zih \nrov 6p6<pov icpalvero irvp, Kal SiAavbs (r7)fialvei rfj cdhiriyyi {the fire already began \nto appear through the roof, akd [?fAe?j] Silanus gives notice with his trumpet). Isocr. \nPaneg. 119 aixa ridels re rr]s apxvs aTrearepovixe^a, Kal ro7s "EWTjaiy apxh tcuv \nKaKbbv eylyvero. \n\nRemark 1. Kal has this strengthening, intensive force also, when it stands \nat the beginning of a question, where the interrogavc/ takes up, with surprise, \nthe remark of another, and from it draws a conclusion, which shows the nul- \nlity or absurdity of the other\'s statement. X. Cy. 4. 3, 11. oAA\' eXnot rts ii\xc2\xbb, \nOTi TTOiSes 6yres i/xdv^avov ; \xe2\x80\x94 Kal irSrepa iraTSes elai (ppovifiurepoi, a<rre namely ra \n(^pa^Sfxeva Kal heiKvvixeva, ^ &vhp\xe2\x82\xacs ; = ac multo minus prudentes sunt. So espe- \ncially Kal IT us; PI. Ale. 1, 134, c. SwaiTo hf ris fieraSiSdyai, h jx^ ^xfj; \xe2\x80\x94 Kal \nirws : = ac minime quidem. \n\nRem. 2. If more than two numbers succeed each other, they are connected \nin the following manner: (a) with the first member the connective is omitted, \nand the other members are annexed hj Kal repeated; (b) /cai \xe2\x80\x94 Kal \xe2\x80\x94 *cot, \netc.; (c) re \xe2\x80\x94 re \xe2\x80\x94 re, etc.; (d) re \xe2\x80\x94 Kal \xe2\x80\x94 Kal, etc. X. Cy. 1.4. 7. &pKToi \nre TToWovs i^df} Tr\\T](Tid(ravras Sie(p^eipau Kal Xeoyres Kal Kairpoi k al irapSdXeis \xe2\x80\xa2 \nat Se eXacpoi Kal SopKdSes Kal ol dypioi oies Kal ol ovoi ol iypioi actveTs eiaiv: (e) \nre \xe2\x80\x94 re, etc., Kal (Epic.) Od. y, 413. \'Exe(ppwv re SxpaTtoy re Ylepa-evs r\' \n^ApT}r6s re Kal ayrl^eos &pa(rvix-f)Sr)s. (f) re \xe2\x80\x94 re Kal \xe2\x80\x94 Kal, etc. (seldom) X. \nC.2.2, 5.7u\xc2\xbb\')) virode^afxevr] re (pepei rh (poprlov rovro, ^apvvo/xeyr] re Kal KiySvyev- \novffo, . . Kal . . Kal Kr\\. After Kal two members, considered, as it were, one \n\n\n\n^ 321.J COPULATIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES. 501 \n\nWhole, can follow with r ^ \xc2\xab a L Her. 7. 1. (eVeVa^ kKi^ro.<n] Ka\\ vias re \nKa^ aiTou Ka\\ irXoia X. An. 4 4, 2. (^ci/^r,) ^eyc{A\xe2\x80\x9e re ^u Kal /Sacr.\'Xe.oV re \n\xe2\x82\xacixf Tw aaTpairr), Kal em rais TrX^icTTais olKiais Tipaeis iirrjaav. \xe2\x80\x94Bnt kuI \xe2\x80\x94 t^ \nare never used as corresponding particles, in Attic Greek: where they are \nfound in this position, the member introduced byre\', is subjoined only as a mere \naddition to the preceding one. Th. 1, 54. Kopiu^ioi fihu Kpar-hcravr^s . . Ka\\ &u- \nSpas ^xovTfS aixfiaXiirovs ovK i\\d(T(rovs xi^iw,^, uads re { praetereaque) KaraU- \naavres irepl e^SouvKoura eaj-qaav Tpotraiov. As infrequently, likewise, is /c al \xe2\x80\x94 \nT 6 used in the sense of etiamque. \n\nRem. 3. As an enclitic, t 4 must always rest upon a preceding word, and indeed \non that word, to which re specially belongs in the member to be connected. But \n\n\n\n\nsentence, it is usually joined to the first word of the sentence. Her. 6, 12.3. \noLrivis \xe2\x82\xac(p\xe2\x82\xacvy6v t e rhv iravra xP^vov robs rvpavvovs, e\xc2\xab ixrjxavris t e Tr)s tovtcou \ni^ehiTTov 01 UeiaiaTpaTiBai r))v TvpavviBa. It is, also, often joined to the predi- \ncate of the sentence, if that precedes, although it would stand after another \nword. X. C. 3. 5, 3. <^ [qua re) iroWol iiraipSfievoi irpoTpiirovrai re dperijs \n^Tri^\xe2\x82\xacA.ero-,^oi Kou iKKifioi yiyyea^ai (instead of aperris re err.). \n\nRem. 4. In the Epic writers (and in imitation of these in the Lyric writers \nalso, though more seldom in the latter, and in the Attic writers in only a few \nfragments), re is very frequently joined with conjunctions and relative pro- \nnouns, in order to represent, in a more definite manner, the mutual relation \nand intimate connection between the corresponding members {as well \xe2\x80\x94 as^ \nas \xe2\x80\x94 so). This t\xe2\x82\xac either stands in both of the members, in which case the first \nT\xe2\x82\xac refers to the following member, anticipating it, as it Avere, and the second \nrefers back to the preceding ; or more frequently it stands in only one of the \ncorresponding members ; thus often ctirep re \xe2\x80\x94 t\xe2\x82\xac, or eivep \xe2\x80\x94 re; ixev re \n\xe2\x80\x94 5e Te or aWd r e, as on this side, so on that, or /xeu \xe2\x80\x94 Se re {aWd re); \nlj_ff/ Tf \xe2\x80\x94 5c (dWo); also the whole of the first member can be omitted, and \nbe supplied by the mind, from what precedes; thus Se re, dAAo re, also \noften without the corresponding fieu: 5e \xe2\x80\x94 re; re \xe2\x80\x94 5e; re \xe2\x80\x94 aurdp; then \n/cot T \xe2\x82\xac, atque, yet moreover, when the corresponding member is contained in \nwhat precedes (not only \xe2\x80\x94 but also). 11. i, 509. rhv Se fxey &vr}(Tav, Kai r skKvou \nfv^ajxevoio. Also gyre, he\\ who (not only in the poets, but also sometimes in \nHerodotus), ostls t6, oX6s re, \'oaos re {= ro7os, ofos ; rocros, oaos, of such \na nature, so great, as much as), &s re, so as, so that, us el re, ar e, ijvr e, o w us \nre, ore r\'e, then, ichen. o^ i r e, "ua r e, there, where. In Attic prose, the fol- \nlowing combinations still remain, viz., oUs re elfii with the Inf., signifying \nI am in the condition, Sisre {so that), wseire and esre {\\. Q. es o re), quoad. \nMoreover, ^ ire /re, postquam, as used by Herodotus, should also be mentioned. \n\nRem. 5. Kal is originally an adverb, also, even, etiam. But the idea of \nemphasis wliich is expressed^bv Kai, also, even, necessarily supposes a reference \nto another clause, e. g. Kal 6 \':^wKpdTVS ravra tKe^ev (sc. oh ^lovov oi S.\\\\oi, or \nfijirep Kol oi &\\\\oi). According to the nature of the correspondmg member to \nbe supplied, the emphatic ko/ may have either a strengthening {even, yet, entirely, \netc.) or a weakening force [even only, only even), e.g. Kal KarayeXas p.ov {you \neven laugh at me). Kal crh radra lAe|as {even you said this) ; \xe2\x80\x94 Kai p-aXXov [yet \nrather). Kal rpis, Kal Kdpra, {very much), Kal -rrduv, Kal noXvs {not much) \nKal Lyou, Kal\\^Kp6v{but little), Kal ^as-Kal nrdxac {even long ago Kal \nX^e\'s, Jal abrUa, Kal udu or e^rt Kal \'\'i^"- \xc2\xab\xc2\xab1^^ ^.^ ovr.s vel sic),-- \nKal ].6uos, Kal eh. With questions, e. g. Dem FhiL 1, 53. -\' XP^yj^J -po - \nSoKa.; {what isonlytohe expected even?) {=mhil plane Jll^^^^^^\'^J\'\') \nIn Homer, after a temporal protasis, this Kai often introduces ^ ^P^^^ \nand may then be translated by immediately. B. o, 4/8, iip.os S -npiy^veia \n\n\n\n505: SYNTAX. [\xc2\xa7 32. \n\nipdvr] ^odoSdKTvXos ^HcCs, Ka\\ t6t\' eneiT avdyovTO fiera ffrparhv ihpvv Axcuuy. \nThe use of \xc2\xabai in such concluding clauses, shows that the two clauses are co- \nordinate, and Kai may be said to have its usual connective force, though that \nforce cannot well be expressed in English, \n\n2. If the annexive coordinate sentences are negative, they are connected : \xe2\x80\x94 \n(a) By u 5 \xe2\x82\xac {/xrjSe), not \xe2\x80\x94 nor, when a negative member precedes ; (b) by \n\nKal ol (Ka\\ fi-f}), and not, when an afl&rmative member precedes; this is the \nregular form in Attic prose ; but in the Ionic and poetic writers ovSe or utjSc \ncan also be used here ; (c) in a more emphatic and definite manner by oGt\xe2\x82\xac \n\xe2\x80\x94 otjTi ()tt^T6 \xe2\x80\x94 fi-ffre), neque \xe2\x80\x94 neque {neve \xe2\x80\x94 neve), neither \xe2\x80\x94 nor; (d) by \noUre \xe2\x80\x94 re (seldom Kai), neque \xe2\x80\x94 et, \xe2\x80\x94 on the one hand not \xe2\x80\x94 and on the other ; \nas not \xe2\x80\x94 so also. \n\nX An. 1. 4, 8. ovK ty(t)yc avrovs Sid^cD, ovS\' ipei ovSeis, us iyu ainovs kokws \nTTOiSo. C. 3. 7, 9. Ziareluov fxaWov wphs rh awrrt^ Trpose\'xet*\', Ka\\ fir) o/ieXet tup \nTrjS \'Tr6\\\xe2\x82\xac(DS. Dcm. Cor. 254, 85. (paivo/iai iyw x^P\'^os Tcri/XTJKwy t<^t\xe2\x82\xac Ka\\ ov \n/xefji^^ews u 5 \xe2\x82\xac rifiaipias. Th. 3, 14. iirajxiiuaTe ..Kal fJLT] Trp6r](Th( rjfMS. PI. \nLysid. 207, e. iuciv &pa (xe a ^ovKei woieTy Kal ovSev i-wiwK\'qTTOvtriy, ouSi \nSiaK(i}\\6ou(ri iroulv S>v hv iirL^vfifis. \xe2\x80\x94 OCre ^e ol, oUre ^.v^ponroi. \xe2\x80\x94 X- An. 2. \n2, 8. H/xoaau . . ixr^re Trpo^uxruv aX\\r]\\ovs avyLfxaxoi t\xe2\x82\xac ((reabai. 5. 1, 6. oCrf \nayopd ear IV iKavj], ^ re X^P^ TroAc^/a. Th. 1, 118. o/ AaKeSaifi6yioi alabofi- \n(voi otjT\xe2\x82\xac tKcaXvov, et fx)] iirl fipaxv, 7}(Tvxa^6v t e rh ir\\4oy rov xp^i^ov. \n\nRem. 6. The following connective forms are more rare, and belong mostly \nto poetry, viz., oUre \xe2\x80\x94 ov, ov \xe2\x80\x94 oUre; re ov \xe2\x80\x94 re; oCrf \xe2\x80\x94 t\xe2\x82\xac oi/] in the \ntwo last forms ov combines with the verb and forms, as it were, one thought. \nTh. 2, 22. \'EKKKr^aiau re ovk iiroiei.., r-i)v re ir6Kiv 4<pv\\aare {he called no \nissembly and guarded the city)-. 1, 126. otire iKelvos en Karev6r}(Te, t6 re \naaurelov ovk iSr^Kov j ovre \xe2\x80\x94 ovde, neither \xe2\x80\x94 and not. which is found often in \nprose also. \n\nKem. 7. OvSe expresses either an antithesis {but not), or it serves to con- \nnect a new clause {and not, not even). When ovSe \xe2\x80\x94 ovSe follow one anu \' \nthey are not to be considered correlative particles and translated neither \xe2\x80\x94 \nbut are to be translated 7Wt even \xe2\x80\x94 and not. X. C. 3. 12. 5. eC yap Xabi, biz \novSe ev d\\\\(a oh^evl ayupi, oiiSe iy irpd^ei ovSefjiia fielov e^eis 5ia rh 0e\\rioy \nrh crw/xa Trapea-Kevdcr^ai. OvSe as a connective in negative sentences, corre- \nsponds to Kal in positive sentences, mentioned in remark 5, and signifies not \neven, ne \xe2\x80\x94 quidcni, c. g. ovS\' d Kpn^iaros iroKfi-qaey avr^ fidx^o^ai \xe2\x80\x94 ovSe els \n{ne unus qnidevi), ovS\' &s {ne sic quidem), etc. \n\n3, An enhansive or emphatic coordinate sentence, as has been seen (Rem. \n5), is expresssed by the simple Kai, but more definitely by: \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) ov 1x6 yov or ov (lovov tr i (also ovx Srt pi6vov) OT fi^ Sr t \xe2\x80\x94 \naWh Kal, not only \xe2\x80\x94 but also. {Ovk Bri originates from oif Atyai, Srt, as \n/JL-^ Sri from /xi] Keye, Sri.) 2\xc2\xab/cpoTTjs ov fx6voy aocphs ?iv, oAAo Kal aya- \n^6s. PI, Symp. 179, h. virepairo^yn)(rKeiy i^eKovariy oi epuyres, ov fx6vov Zri \n&vSpes, a A A ^ Kal yvvaiKes. X. C. 2. 9, 8. o u x ^ "J" * fxovos & Kplrwy iy fiavxia \n^y, aWh Kal ol <pi\\oi avrov. Cy. 8. 1, 28. fxi] yiip 2t: S/)xoi^o, oAAek Kal \nOVS ov (pofiovyrai, [xaWoy rovs aiSovjxeyovs alSovyrat rwy ayaiSuy oi tiy^panroi. \n\n\n\n$ 321.] COPULATIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES. \n\n\n\n503 \n\n\n\n\nRem 8. Ob fxSvou \xe2\x80\x94 ^wd without Kai is used, when the second mem- \nber includes the hrst, whether the second is stronger than the first in extenf or \ndegree. ^ r,^-\xe2\x96\xa0^^\xe2\x96\xa0..^ . / \n\nM \n\nX. C. L 6, 2. IfiaTioi/ 7in<{>U(rai. ov fi6vov (pav\\oy, a\\}ia Th avrh ^Ipovs\'re \n\n(b) Ovx ^irus \xe2\x80\x94 dAAo Kal, not onlynot \xe2\x80\x94 hut even, or ovx Sttws or fx^ \ntvws \xe2\x80\x94 d A \\\' o u 5 e, noi only not \xe2\x80\x94 hut not even. I^O-irm = how, I say not or ( Imp.) \nsay not how, which involves the idea, /say not or say not, that not.) Also fi))\'6rt \n(followed by dAA\' ovU) is used in the sense of not only not, when both clauses \nhave a common predicate, and this stands in the last clause. Dem. Coi^ 271, 1. o ux \nSitus X\xc2\xbbP"\' a-brols (to7s \'A^valois) exeis oAAd fiia^c^ffas (Teavrhu Karh tovtcovI \n\xe2\x96\xa0KoKiTfvri {non modo non \xe2\x80\x94 sed etiam). Dem. Phil. 2, 67. [tovs @r}^aiovs rj-yeTro) \novx iirus avTiTTpd^fiv Kcd 5iaKUi\\vcreiv, dA\\d Kal crvaTparfvo\'eiv. Isocr. \nPlataic. 586. ovx \'6iros ttJj Koiyrjs i\\ev^epias HfTexo/x^u, dAA\' ovSe dovXelas \nfUTplas ^^lu^ixfj rvx^lv (non modo 7wn \xe2\x80\x94 sed ne \xe2\x80\x94 quidem). X. Cy. 1. 3, 10. \n/i^ \'onus opx^^o^^ox iy ^u,^/i.<^, dAA* ouS\' op^ova^ai idvvaa^e (non modo non \nsaltare poteratis, serf ne rectis quidem pedibus stare). Isae. 10,*1. eyi ju-); Sn \ninrip iAAow, dAA* ovSf inrtp ifiavrov irwirore S\'iktiv Idiau etp\'qKa (as in Latin: \nnon modo de alio, sed ne de me quidem unquam causam dixi, instead of non \nmodo non, the Latin using non modo \xe2\x80\x94 sed ne \xe2\x80\x94 quidem, instead of now modo \nnon \xe2\x80\x94 sed ne \xe2\x80\x94 quidem, when both the clauses are negative, and the common \npredicate of both is in the latter clause). \n\nRem. 9. When ovx 2ti \xe2\x80\x94 dAA\' ovSe has the sense of not only \xe2\x80\x94 but not \neven, the predicate of the first member contains a negation, or at least has a \nnegative sense. Th. 2, 97. Tavrj] (rfj ^kv^uv laxvi) aSivara (sc. ia-riv) 6|- \nKToiiabai ovx ^Tt to. iv ttj Y.vpwirrj, a\\\\\' o v S\' iu rfj \'Aaia \xe2\x82\xac^uos. (Scytharum \npotentine non modo Europiie irapcria exaequari non possunt, sed ne Asiae quidem \ngens). Dem. 702. oi/x Stj ruv 6vro3v aTrea-r epiiix-qp &u, aW\' ov5\' fev \n((vv. (In dTTco-TfpTj/xTjv is contained the idea: non haberem.) Also /x^ \'on \nfollowed by dAA\' ouSe is used in a similar manner, since a negative precedes fi^ \nSti. X. C\' 1. 6, 11. TTji/ oiKiav fi &K\\o ti wy KeKTrjirai, voiJ.i(wv apyvpiov &^Loy ehai, \novSfvl hy fi^ Srt irpolKa Sol-qs, dAA\' ou5\' eAarro*/ t^s d|ias Aa^cov (you \nwould not only not gice your house to any one gratuitously, but not even for a less price, \ntJian it ts worth ; properly you would give to no one, not to say, gratuitously, nay not \neven for a less price, etc.). \n\n(c) Oi(K) \xe2\x80\x94 dAAd KaL, not \xe2\x80\x94 hut even; ou(/c)\xe2\x80\x94 dAA\' ouSf, not \xe2\x80\x94 nay \nnot even. Dem. Mid. 24. ou irovT]p6s, dAAd Kal -n-dw xpV<rT6s. X. C. 2. 3, 8. \nrhy KOJL \\6yef} Kal tpycp irfipcifiMfvoy i/xe aviav ovk tv Swaifiw ovt ed \\eyety out* \neZ iroiilv, dAA\' ovh\\ irupdffofiai. An. 1. 3, 2. (SapeiKohs) \\afiii>y ovk fls rh \n\nI Kioy Kare^f^rfu ifioi, dAA\' oifSh Kci^duird^(ra, dAA\' els vfias iSairdyuy. \ni (d) Ovde\xe2\x80\x94fii) Sti, not even \xe2\x80\x94 not to say, much less (ne-quidem \xe2\x80\x94 nedum). \n\nI X. SjTnp. 2, 26. Kol ou5\xe2\x82\xac d\xc2\xbb/a7rv6?v, fih ^ri xdyeiy ri hw^icr\'Sixe^a (we shall be \nable not even to breathe, to say nothing of speaking, or much lees to speak). \n\n\n\n\n504 SYNTAX. [\xe2\x99\xa6 322. \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 322. II. Adversative Coordinate Sentences. \n\n1. An adversative coordinate sentence is one in which the clauses that stand \nin opposition to each other, are united and form one thought. \n\n^o) The opposition is of such a nature, that the thought expressed in the \ncoordinate clause either wholly abrogates the thought of the preceding clause, \nsince another thought is substituted for it ; this is done : (a) by placing the \nconjunction oAAa (but) in opposition to a preceding negative; (b) by placing \nthe conjunction awd together with the negative ou in opposition to a pre- \nceding affirmative ; in the last case, oAAa may be translated and, or be wholly \nomitted: (a) ovx ot ir\\ou<noi eu5ai/xo\xc2\xbb\'es elcriv, aW\' ol aya^ol. (b) \'E/ceZ^cv, \noA.A\' ov k ev&eV5e Tjpirda-^T} (he was seized there, and not here, or not here). \n\n(/8) Or the opposition is of such a nature that the thought in the coordinate \nclause merely limits or restricts that in the preceding clause. The limitation is \nexpressed by Se,.dA.A.(\xc2\xa3 (but), arap fouT<\xc2\xa3p, Epic), icatroi, ftevroi, Sfius. \n\n\'2. Ae most generally has an adversative force, and hence can Express ever}- \nkind of contrast or opposition. In respect to its signification, it ranks, like \nthe Lat. autem, between the copulative connectives (re, kou) and the adversa- \ntive (aWd, etc.), since it contains both a copulative and adversative force, and \nhence either opposes one thought to another (adversative), or merely contrasts \nit (copulative). Hence it is very frequently used in Greek, where the English \nuses a7id. The new thought being diflferent from the preceding, is placed in \ncontrast with it. \n\n3. The mutual relation between the concessive and adversative clauses, is \ncommonly expressed by the concessive fi 4 v, which, as it denotes concession \nand admission, points forward to the limitation expressed in the second member \nby 5 4. As Se can denote both a strong and slight contrast, so the signification \nof ijl4v is sometimes stronger and sometime? weaker. \ny^J i.i:J<ki.^ <i^ li; \xc2\xbbrhe original signification of /teV (arising from ^V, ? 316; Rem.) is tr \\. \nin truth ; yet its signification is not always so strong as this ; indeed, in innu- \nmerable places its force is so slight, that it cannot be translated at all into \nEnglish. Th fxev w(p4Xi}jL0v Ka\\6v, rh h\\ ^\\a$(phv al<rxp6v. Th. 3, 68. Si4<p^fi- \npav Il\\aTai4wv fxev avruv ouk i\\daaovs Siouco(ria)v, \'A^youwv S e 7r4vT\xe2\x82\xac koI \neiKoaiv. \n\n5. M e 1/ \xe2\x80\x94 5 6 are especially used in the following cases : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) With divisions of place, time, number, order, and persons, e. g. ^\'Lvravba \njxeu \xe2\x80\x94 e/cel Se, ev^a ijl4v \xe2\x80\x94 4v^a 8 4, Tore iJ.4v \xe2\x80\x94 Tore S4, xore fjL4v \xe2\x80\x94 \nTTOTe S 4, at one time, \xe2\x80\x94 at another, sometimes \xe2\x80\x94 sometimes, HWore fi4v \xe2\x80\x94 iA. \nAoTe 5 \xe2\x82\xac, afxa ij.4v \xe2\x80\x94 a/ia S 4, sometimes \xe2\x80\x94 sometimes, vpurov ^ev \xe2\x80\x94 cxetro \nZ 4, rh iJ.4v \xe2\x80\x94 T^ Se, TO ij.4p \xe2\x80\x94 to, S 4 and tovto ii4v \xe2\x80\x94 tovto 5e, partly. \xe2\x80\x94 \npartly, on the one side \xe2\x80\x94 on the other, both \xe2\x80\x94 and, 7iot only \xe2\x80\x94 but also, 6 /le\'v \xe2\x80\x94 i \nd4f hie \xe2\x80\x94 ille. \n\n(b) When several predicates belong to the same object, and also, when ser- \n\n\n\n505 \n\n\n\n^ 322.] ADVERSATIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES. \n\neral actions refer to the same object. S. Ph. 239. iy^ ydvos fi4u eiVt ri)s ir^p- \ni^^vTOv ^Kvpov, ir\\4w 5\' 4s oIkov, avdwfiai Se irah \'AxiKeccs NeoTTTo\'Aeyuos, So \nalso in a principal and subordinate clause. Her. 1, 103. ot is4l3a\\ou ixhu is tV \n\'A<r/77\xc2\xbb/, Kifif^^piovs iK^a\\6vr^s iK rrjs Evpc^irrjs, roiToicri d\'e imanSneyoi (peiyovai \novTO) is TT)y M.riSiKr)y X\'^P\'^^ airiKovTo, \n\nc. Where the same or an equivalent word is repeated in two different clauses. \nX. C. 2. 1, 32. iyiii (Tvv\xe2\x82\xacifii fxhv ^eo7s, (rii^cLfxi S^ au^pdnois to7s aya^oh. \n1. 1, 2. luKpaT-ns Srvoiv (pavephs ^ woWdKis fihv oXkoi, ivoXXaKis Se iirX \nruv KoivS>v Ti]s iroXcws ^u^iuv. Yet this principle is not always observed. \nMev is regularly omitted, when 5e Kai follow, e. g 2. 8, 5. xaAeTriiz/ ovrta \nTJ iroiriaai, Sisn firjBev afxapriluy xa^e^i;/ 5e Kal ayafiapT-fjTus re iroiyaavra \nfi^ ayyufjLoyi Kpirf vfpiTvx^^v. \n\n_ Remark 1. When n4v stands in an adjective or adverbial clause, it is some- \ntimes repeated, for the sake of emphasis, in iie corresponding demonstrative \nor concluding clause.^ Her. 2. 121. koI rhv (l e.hv) fiev KaXeovat. Sfepos, \nrovTov fieu irposKvyfova-\'i re Kal eZ irotovai- rhi/ Se x^^l^^^\xc2\xb0^ \'f- "^^ ^- So also, \nwhen, instead of the adjective clause, the Part, with the article is used. Isocr. \nPaneg. 52, 60. t^ juej/ imepeveyK6vTi r^u a.vSrp(amvT]v ^vaiv (\'Hpa/cAe?), . . rovra \nfiev {Eupvabevs) iTriTOLTTuv . . SifxeAeo-ej/. So also sometimes two preceding \n/tfV\'s correspond with two following Se\'s ; this always implies a strong emphasis. \nPI. Apol. 28, e. 670? o5y Seiva hv eir) elpyacrfxevos, S> duSpes \'A^r]va7oi, el, ore \nfxfv fie 01 6.pxovTes erarroy, ovs v/xeTs e\'iXeor^e 6.pxeiy /aov, Kal iv IloTiSaia Kal iv \n^Afj.(pnr6\\ei Kal iirl Ar\\Kicf), rore fie y ov iKelyoi erarroy e/xeuoy \xe2\x80\x94 Kal iKLvhvvevov \nOLTTo^aye^y, r ov he beov tolttovtos, ws iyu uiT]bT]v re Kal viveKa^oy, (piKoaotpovvri \nfie Se7y ^y Kal i^era^oyra i/xaurhy Kal rovs &Wovs, iyrav^a Se (l>o^r]^els ^ \n^dvaToy f) 6X\\o driovy irpayfxa Xiiroijii rrji/ Ta^iy. Yet this parallelism is but \nseldom found so regularly carried out. \n\nRem. 2. On the position of fie y \xe2\x80\x94 St, the following points are to be no- \nticed : They are commonly placed after the words, which are opposed to each \nother ; yet they are often to be referred to the predicate or to the whole clause. \nX. C. 1. 1, 10. Kal eKeye fxey (Sw/cpciTTjs) ws rh ttoXv, to7s Se ^ovXofxeyois i^ijv \nOLK ove ly. An. 3. 4, 2. eirabe fiey ovSey, ttoXXol Se KaKo. iv6fii(Te iroiTJcrai. \nWhen a substantive or adjective is connected with the article or a preposition, \nfxey and Se are commonly placed between the article and the preposition, and \nbetween the preposition and substantive or adjective, e. g. wphs fiey rovs Mi- \naous \xe2\x80\x94 irphs S\' ix^povs; yet this conformity is by no means observed in cor- \nresponding members, e. g. X. C. 1. 1, 12. to. fxev av^pdiireia irapeyres, rk \nSai ^6 y la Se (TKOTrovyres r^yovyrai r a irposriKOVTa irpdrreiy. 2, 24. Sia fxey \nKaKXos \xe2\x80\x94 SiaSvya/jLiySe. Or inversely, Isocr. Paneg. 64, 114. iy Ta7s ttoX- \nir eiais fie y \xe2\x80\x94 4 y Be ra7s <Tvy^r)Kais. \n\nRem. 3. It is evident that an v other adversative connective instead of 5 e, \ncan follow fiey, e. g. oAAa, orctp, etc. But in place of the adversative connec- \ntives, sometimes also the copulatives re, Kai, are used, by a kind of anacoluthon, \nOT iie construction is entirely changed, no reference being had to the preceding \n\nRem. 4. The adversative connective which would be expected to follow \nfiey, is sometimes omitted, although there is a corresponding adversative mem- \nber. This is the case, when the word expressing the contrast is such, as of \nitself without Se, to make this contrast sufficiently manifest, as e^g. with \n^I\'ToO^a fiey \xe2\x80\x94 iKe7, and almost always with trpuToy jxey \xe2\x80\x94 eTre ira. \nSecondly, even the clause expressing the contrast, can be wholly omitted, in \nwhich case, it must be supplied by the mind {fxev soUtarium). Her. 3, 3. My \n\n43 \n\n\n\n\xe2\x80\xa2VOwvX * \n\n\n\n506 SYNTAX. [\xc2\xa7 322 \n\n\xe2\x82\xacTot ode 6 \\6yos, i fiol /x^v oh irihavos (to 3ie improbable, perhaps probable to \nothers). \'Eyw ii\\v ovk ol5o: ws jLtev Keyovaiv \'\xe2\x96\xa0) ravTa fiev rjfjuv ^yyeiXi \nTis; olfxai fxev, riyov\'/j-ai fx4u, Sokw (J.ev, ovk olZa fiey and the like. I \nINDEED, CERTAINLY, t?dnk. \n\nKem. 5. On account of its general signification, St, like autem, frequently \nconnects sentences even, which stand in a causal relation to each other : then \nthe hearer or reader can gather from the context the i)articular mode of con- \nnection. Thus 5e very often expresses the reason, and is used instead of yap. \n\nRem. 6. In questions, 5e has either an adversative force, when the interro \ngator gives vivacity, by omitting the concessive member, e. g. X. C. 2. 9, 2. kcu \n6 5. EiVe fjLoi, \xe2\x82\xac<pr], S> Kpiruiu, Kvvas 8 e rpecpfis, Xva aoi roi/s \\vkovs avh rCev irpo- \n3a.Twv airepvKwffi ; (you are unAvilling to support a man who could protect you \nfrom your enemies, and yet do you keep dogs ?). Or, hi has a copulative force \nand continues the question which had been interrupted by the answer of the \nother, e. g. X. C. 3. .5. 2. o^kow olff^a, ^<pVi 3ti irK-q^ei /lev ovScv fitiovs fiVl*- \n\'AidijvaTot BoiajTwi/; \xe2\x80\x94 OlSa ydpy t<pr}. "Swfiara 5c aya^a koI KoXa Tr6T(poy ix \nBoioiTuv oUi irAetw &\xc2\xbb/ e/cAex\'^J\'cu, ^ ^| *A^yu>r. The same principle holds in \nanswers. \n\nRem. 7. Kal \xe2\x80\x94 5 e (in the Epic writers Kal S4 not separated), and, though \nmore seldom, the negative ou5e \xe2\x80\x94 Se, in which connection 8e has an adver- \nbial force, can be translated by and on the other hand, and also ; and on the other \nhand not. X, H. 5. 2. 37. o\'l re 6.XX01 irpobvfius rtf TfAeirria vrnipfrovvy Kal ^ \nrS)!/ Qrj^alcvv Se tt6\\is \xe2\x96\xa0trpobvf.LOis ^vvfirefnre Kal STrXiras Kol linrfas. An. 1. 8, 20. \nKal ovSeu oi/Sf tovtop va^eTy ((paaav, oiiS\' liWos 5 \xe2\x82\xac rciy \'EWijywy iv raxrrp t^ \nluLOLXll ("TO^ey ovSels oviey. \n\nRem. 8. In the apodosis, as in principal clauses, 94 has a double force, either \nadversative, or merely contrasting (copulative). Sometimes fUv stands in the \nfirst member. \n\na. The adversative S4 in the apodosis, denotes the contrast between that and \nthe protasis. It is used : (o) after hypothetical antecedent clauses, though \ndAAa also is often found instead of Se ; (/3) after relative antecedent clauses, \nand such as denote comparison, (a) X. Cy. 5. .5, 21. oAA* d urfSt toDt\', ?^, \nfiovKfi atroKpiyacr^at, av Se rovyrfv^fy \\(ye {tiay on the r (/8) 8. 5, 12. \n\niisTTfp 01 6ir\\7Tai, ovTOj 5 6 K-al 01 ireATouTToi Kal 01 ro^6rai (- other hand). \n\n(h) After a temporal protasis, 5e commonly has a contrastinff or merely copu- \nlative force, though sometimes adversative also (very often in the Homeric lan- \nguage, also in Herodotus, but seldom in the Attic writers) : this Sf may often \nbe loosely translated by then. Od. X, 387. airrap cVei ^vxas fity antTKiiair &A.- \nAi\xc2\xbb5is 6.Wri ayv)) T\\fp(Te(p6viia yvvaiKccy ^f\\vTf pduy, ^\\de 5\' ^xl ypvxh \'Ayofxcfu^yos \n\'Arpe/Sao. So 6<ppa \xe2\x80\x94 T6(ppa 5 e, irrc^Te \xe2\x80\x94 5 6, ews \xe2\x80\x94 5 f . X. An. 4. 1, 2. iirfi \n\xc2\xa76 atpiKovTO, ev^a 6 juev Tiyprjs iroTa,a6s irayrdiraffiy iwopos ^v Bik rh $a^s tral ftt- \nye^os, irctpoSoy (transttus) Se ovk ijv. ., eSofcet 5f Toii tTTparicinais htk tw 6p4mw \nTTopfvTfoy flvai (then, or on th\' contrary). As 5c is used after the protasis, so also \nin like manner after }>articiples. which supply the place of a protasis. PL \nSymp. 220, b. Ka( TTOTc ovros irayov oiov SeivordroVy koI irdyrw . . iv ttXiy\' \njii c I\' w 1/ Tovs 7r6Sa5 (Is viXovs Kal apyaaiSas, ovtos 5\' iy tovtois ^^j?cj fx**\' Ipukriop \n. . olSmrep Kal npSrepoy fid!>^ei (popetv. X. C. 3. 7, 8. ^vymk^v aov, ci (Ktlyovi ^- \nSicoy x^\'poujuet\'os, tovtois 5 c /xtjScVo Tp6iroy oUi 5u\xc2\xbbT^<rc<r^eu irposc\xc2\xbb^x^*\'*"\xc2\xab \n\nG. \'A XXd (Neut. PI. of 6.XXos)y but (sed, at), yet, hoirei\'rr, generally expresse* \ndifference and separation. It always stands at the beginning of the senf^nod. \nAccording to the nature of the preceding meml>er, it either abrogates what is \naffirmed in that member (see No. 1), or it r\xc2\xab^r/cte and /i mite it (yet, houxmr) \n\n\n\nf 322.] ADVERSATIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES, \n\n\n\n507 \n\n\n\nEe is indeed poor, but brave \xe2\x80\x94 he is not brave, but cowardly ; (here the clause hux \nbrave restricts the one preceding, and but cowardly whoUy denies or abroo-ates \nthe idea of brave). ToGto rh irpay^m wtpeKifiov fiev iariv, ^ A V oh KaK6v. *\'The \nuse of o A\\t\xc2\xa3 is very frequent in objections (= at), also in questions, when the \nquestion expresses a contrast, or when an objection is introduced in the form \nof a question. Dem. Cor. ri yap kou fiov\\6ficvoi fiereTre/xirecrS)-\' &*/ avrovs, iirl \n-TTfV (lpT]y7)y\\ a\\\\\' viriipxfv airaaiv. \'AW iiri rhu iroK^iiov ] aXK\' avrol ircpl \ntlpriyrjs (^ov\\fv\xc2\xabT^e. Eur. ^Med. 325. \\6yovs ava\\o7s \xe2\x80\xa2 oh yap Uv Trdcrais Trore. \n\'\xe2\x96\xa0\'A\\A\' f\'^eX^s /if, Kohdev alB4<Tcu Atros ; " verj\' frequently aW ?]-*,. but \nretdli/ \xe2\x80\x94 ? X. An. 7. 6, 4. koI ot dirov \'AW ^ Srjfxayuyu 6 avrip tovs avSpas ; \n\nRem. 9. \'AAXa is used in negative, non-concessive clauses, when by it the gen- \neral si;rnifioation of the preceding negative clause is to be restricted by an excep- \ntion. Here aXXd is the same as irX^v or el jutj, nisi, and can be translated into \nEnglish by except, tfuni. In the first member, &\\Aos (erepos) is commonly \nplaced, c. g. ohids &Wos, aWd, and this &K\\os points fonvard to the following \niiWd, corresponding with it. X. An. 6. 4, 2. eV rc^i nea-oi iW-q fiev iroAis ovSe- \nfiia oSjTf <pi\\iay oCre \'EWrjvlsj aWa \xc2\xa9pot/fes Kal Bibvuoi {between there is no other \nfriendly or Grecian city \\there are none] except Thracians and Bithynians). \n\nRem. 10. In the frequent combination of o \\\\\' ^ after a preceding nega- \ntive, or after a question implying a negative, or even after the addition of \n&AAo9, %Ttpo% to the nc;.\'ative, consequently, ouk, ouSev aAA\' ^; oh^lv 6.K- \nAo, dW\' <i; ovhiv \xe2\x82\xacT\xe2\x82\xacpoy, oA A* ^; ri &AAo, ciAA\'^; 6aAo t i (with a pre- \nceding interrogative pronoun), aAA* ^, \xe2\x80\x94 d A A\' seems to be merely Saao, but \non account of its close connection with ^, it appears to have changed its ac- \ncent (dAAi\xc2\xbb fi) and to have lost it (dAA* ^). X. An. 7. 7, 53. apyvpiav ^Iv ovk \nfX\'*\'i d A a\' ^ pLiKp6v Ti. (). 2. 13. ovre iAAos irurroTf fioi irapicrx^ \'^^ kavrov 5iOi- \nKflv, dAA* r) (TV vvvi ib(\\fii irope\'xfiv. PI. Phaed. 97, d. ohSev &Wo ffKOir^lr \nTposr^Kfiy ay^ptinriff dAA\' >; tJ> IkpKnov /col rh fifKriffTOU. \n\nRem. 11. Also the following elliptical expressions are to be mentioned: \nob fi^v aWd or oi/fityroi aWd, yet, veruntamen, oh yap aWd, then \n\'xrtninh/, certainly. These must be completed by joining with the \xc2\xbbegative the \nverb ot the preceding clause, or in place of it, such expressions as rovr iyjue- \nTO, tout\' icTTlv. X. Cy. 1. 4, 8. i linros TrlwTei ds ySvara, Kal fuKpov KaK^vov \ni^fT paxv^ifftv ov fji^\'v (scil. ^|\xe2\x82\xacTpox^Ai<rev) dAA\' iiriyL^iViv b YJvpos p.6\\is irws, \nKoL 6 Tiriroj i^avftTTt}. \n\nRem. 12. \'AAAci is, moreover, used to denote a transition to a different or an \nopiHisitt\' thouqht ; this is the case in exhortations and exclamations, in general, \nwhen the discourse is suddenly interrupted, and sometliing new is quickly m- \ntroiluced, e. g. dAA\' tinvxoi-ns \xe2\x80\xa2 {well then !) \xe2\x80\x94 dAA\' &pa {ivell now) \xe2\x80\x94 dAA\' da\\ \xe2\x80\x94 \nalso when one answers or replies quickly and decidedly, e. g. oAAo fiovKofiai, \nloell, 1 will. \n\n7. From the adverb oS, on the contrary, again, rursus, and &pa, igitur, h&ye \noriginated the Epic ahrdp and the prose aT dp. They always stand at the \nbeginning of the sentence, and have the signification of Se or dAAc^, but; yet, as \nit seems, with this difference, that, on account of their composition with &pa \n(igitur), thev are more closelv and intimately connected with what precedes^ \n-Me\'vTo.\'ha-s been already treated (\xc2\xa7 316, Rem.). Kalro^, yet, verum, sed \ntamen.at(pu{^ 317, 3), \\s used especially, when the speaker wishes to correct \nsometliing he had said ;*the Latins use guamquam in the same way e. g. \n^alTOi rl ipvfu; {quamquamquidloguor?, and yet ivhy do I speak?). 0/t\xc2\xab\xc2\xbb \n\n\n\n508 SYNTAX. [^ 323 \n\n(from 6fi6s, equal, like), nevertheless, yet, however, places the second clause as au \nunexpected one, in opposition to the first. Th. 6, 50. Adfmxos fitw ravra tlwup \n^fi<os irposi^iTO KoX avrhs tt? \'AXxifiidSov yvdfir). \'AAA\' Ofxus is Still Stronger. \n\n\n\n^ 323. III. Disjunctive Coordination. \n\n1. A disjunctive coordinate sentence is one in which the clauses composing \nthe entire sentence, are united into one whole, one of which excludes the other; \nhenc? the one can be considered to exist only when the other does not. This \ndisjunctive relation is denoted by : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n"H, (XT, out, vel, or more emphatically and definitely by ^ \xe2\x80\x94 ^, and when the \nfirst member is to be made emphatic, fiToi \xe2\x80\x94 ^, aut \xe2\x80\x94 aut, vel \xe2\x80\x94 vel, eitlier \xe2\x80\x94 or ; \neJfrc \xe2\x80\x94 cfre (with the Ind.) or iivTt \xe2\x80\x94 idyre or ivrf \xe2\x80\x94 Hyrf (with the \nSubj. ), siye \xe2\x80\x94 sive, whether \xe2\x80\x94 or, when the speaker wishes to indicate, that he \ndoes not know whether he should decide for the one or the other ; on the mode \nused in these hypothetical disjunctive clauses, see \xc2\xa7 339. \n\n\'O iraTTjp, ^ 6 vihs auTov atrf^ayfu. \xe2\x80\x94 *H 6 war^p, fj 6 vihs airrou aitfbajxv. Th. \n4, 118. \xe2\x82\xact Se Tt vfjAV ftre koXKiov, ftrt SiKcuoTtpoy rovruy &oie(7 flvcu, Urns 4s \nAaKfZal^LOva SiSdd/ceTf. PI. Rp. 493, d. efr\' 4y ypa^itcfi, fJr\' iv yuovcir^^ ttrt \n5?? iy iroXiTiKfi. Apol. 27, C. tXr oZy Kaiyd^ tXrt waXaid. 34, e. tXr oZp \ni,\\-n^fs, etT oZy \\//et/5ej- Rp. 453, i..Ji,vr( m us KoXvfifirfi^pay fUKpiuf ^/iWoTj, \nAi\' T e ils tJ) fxiyiarov irf Kayos fiftrov, Zfiws yt vil oi/ity firroy. \n\nRemark 1. The following forms, also, are sometimes used: ci \xe2\x80\x94 cfrt \n{si \xe2\x80\x94 sive); etre \xe2\x80\x94 et 8 c\' {sive \xe2\x80\x94 si fcro), when the second member contains \n6omcthin<; opposite to the first; fXvf \xe2\x80\x94 f); fj \xe2\x80\x94 cfre (seldom and only Poet.); \nelfre but once (poetic). \n\nRem. 2. The disjunctive connectives 1} \xe2\x80\x94 <J, in the Epic writers, verr seldom \nin the Tra<:edians, are united with /litVandSc: T)u4y \xe2\x80\x94 ifhi. In this case, \nthey do not liavc a disjunctive, but like kcu \xe2\x80\x94 kcu, tc \xe2\x80\x94 tc, a copulative force. \nInstead of -^Se, Iht is also used according to the necessities of the verse. II. c, \n128. 6<pp eS yiyvu(TKTps ij/xfy df6y, ^8^ Kol Siyipa^ both \xe2\x80\x94 cuid, not only \xe2\x80\x94 hui \nalso. \n\n2. The particle ^ is not only used to denote the disjunctive relation, bat also \nin expressing comparison, in which it does not exclude, or express the opposite \nof the preceding member, but only expresses separation or difftrenct. As in it3 \ndisjunctive relation, one \xc2\xa5i corresponds with another, so here <J stands in rela- \ntion to a word, which expresses a difference, e. g. &AAos, ovh^is &AAor, aXXoios^ \niyaanlos, ?5ioy, ha<f>fp(i), etc. ; also in relation to comparatives, as well as to all \nwoi-ds which have the force of a comparative, e. g. StrAcurior, \xc2\xbbp(r, ^ddpm, etc \nPL Phaed. 64, a. oi/Sey SAAo ainol 4irtTriS\xe2\x82\xacvov<riy, ^ a-ro^Kfi<rK\xe2\x82\xaci9 re kcI \nTc^ydyai. \n\nRem. 3. The comparative ^ is sometimes used after the omitted fiaWoy or after \na positive. This is the case after expressions of wiilinp, choosin(f. and the like, \nbecause these contain the idea of preference ; thus after 3 o v A c a d a <, e .^ \xc2\xab\' A f i v. \nalpeicr^ai, aXpeaiy hovvai, iv i^vfxely, 56\'xco".^oi, ^rjTf ly, Ai/<riT\xe2\x82\xacA- \ncTv {= potius esse). H. o, 117. fiov\\o/x iyc\xc2\xbb kahy aooy Hfi/itytu, Ij awo\\4<rbam \n\n\n\n* 323.] DISJUNCTIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES. \n\n\n\n\xe2\x80\xa2509 \n\n\n\nLysias de aff. tvr. x. Cvrovat Kcp^aheiv, ^ ^fxas ird^au. X. Ag 4 5 (\'a-v-tj \n(rlKaos) ^prtTO KoL ahv to? y^vvai^ fiuoueKr.lu, ^ alu t^ aS//c\xc2\xab ir\\4ou Vyezv \nAndoc. Myst. 62. rf^yayai vofjuQovaa \\vaiT\xe2\x82\xac\\e7i/, ^) ^^v. \' \n\n3. The other member of the comparison is joined to the Comparative by ^, in \nthe same Case as the comparative, and without a verb, when both members have the \nsame verb in common. When this is not the case, the second member must stand \nas a complete sentence with its subject and predicate ; commonly, however, merely \nthe subject is expressed, but the predicate omitted ; often also after the omitted \ncopula, by attraction the same Case is used as in the first member. Instead of ^ \nthe GVh. also can be used (\xc2\xa7 275, 2), most frequently for the AW. and\' ^cc, \noften also for the Dat. But the Gen. is avoided, when the use of it would occa- \nsion ambiguity ; it must l\xc2\xbbe avoided when the time of the two clauses is different. \n\nEur. Or. 1148. oi/K tarty oWfc Kptltraov, ^ <p\'i\\os (ra<j)-fis, ov irXovros, ov tv- \npavvls. \'O 4>iK6(ro<f>os fxaXKov ^irt^u/xe? rris (Tocpias ^ tuv xPVI^oltcov. Xapi(6iJ.iSra \nftaWoy raits aya^ois I; rots koko^s. \'^iKoviteu nuWou rohs aya^ovs -^ tovs KaKovs. \nIsocr. Pac. CXtr. ro7s vtwripois koL fiaKKov aKiid^ovaiv, ^ iy(a{sc.aKfxi- \n(w) , irapatyu. Th. 7, 77. ijSn riyfs Kcd iK 5( lyorf pwy ^ rotcouSe iau^-qaav \n(from a more davrjerous situation, than the present is). II. a, 260. ijS-rj yap ttot iyi) \nKol apfloaiy iitirep vfi7y avh patr ly w/xjAt/co [ivith braver men than you \nare). Her. 7, 10. <tv fitKXm iir\' iyBpas arpanvia^ai ttoXv afieivoyas, fj \n\'iKvdas. Kur. Or. 715. wurrhs iy kokoIs ay^p Kpfiaawy ya\\-l]vr]s vav- \nrlXotaiv (Isopay (instead of ^ 70X^*07). Th. 6, 16. TrposTjfcet ^lol ixaWov ere- \npwy . . lipxfiy (instead off) tTc\'pojj). 7,63. ravra ro7s dnkirais ovx y](T<Tov \nTuy yavrwy napoKtKfvonat (instead of ^ raits vavrais). Od. i, 27. ovtoi eywye \n^j ya\'tr]S Si/fOfuu yKvKtpur t pov 2iAAo l54<rbai. X. Cy. 2. J, 12. i[jLol SoKel \nKvpoj, ovsriyas iv 6pi aya^ovs, <pi\\(7y oviey rirroy eawTo\' (instead of i^ cav\' \nr6y). Her. 2, 134. yivKtp7yos irvpafiiSa awfAjVfTo iroWhy e * J-affu rod irarpSs \n(in>Irail (if i) ,\' ira-rrn. or nnnicily instead of tTjs tov TT<Ztp6s). \n\nl:iM. 4. Willi TrAtiu)!\', i\\irro)v, ir\\( ov, tharrov, ti^7ov,\\\\\\itn they \nmiihI in connection with a numeral. ^ is commonly omitted, without change \nof constniciion, i. e. the Case is the same as if there was no comparative in the \nsentenec (comp. Jtctnt phis or amplius homines). PI. Apol. 17, d. yvu iyw irpw- \nroy iir\\ htKacrriptoy a.ya^(^r)Ka, (rr\\ yryovws TrXfio) eUSo/x-fjKOUTa {annas plus \n> itus). X. An. 6. 4, 24. oltimts airoKTeiyov(ri ruiu aySpwy ov fX\xe2\x82\xac7ov \n\n\xe2\x96\xa0n, Th. 6, 9.\'). i] \\fia iirpa.^i) raXdvrwv ovk tXarrov ireyre Kal eiKO- \n\naiy. X. ( y. 2. 1, 5. tmrfas /xtv &^(i ov fi(7oy hiaixvpiuiv. With the Nom. and \nArc. irK\xc2\xaboy\\ (Xarroy, the numeral specification can also stand in the Gen., e. g. \n\'Exw ov irKfoy (fKarroy) S(Ka ra\\dvTu>y. The Greek can consequently say: (a) \n- r\'XttTTOuj, fi(iovs) }} StKa i]fifpat ; (1>) wKiiovs SfKa T]fiipwv] (c) TrAeov ^ \n\n?. .ai; (d) irAf\'oi/ hUa vfxfpat. It will he observed froni several of the \n\nabove examples that irAcW, fji(7oy, etc. stanc\' as mere adverbs in the Ace, with \nsubstantives of a diftcrcnt gender and number. \n\nEem. 5. Sometimes, also, the particle ij is found with the Gen. Such exam- \nples are to be explained in a two-fold manner. The Gen. either expresses its \nown appropriate relation, being whollv independent of the comparative, e. g \nPI. L. 765, a. /i^ rAoTToi/ f, r pt6.Kovr a\' y^y ovibs Irwv [just as the Greek say8 \nyiyy^a^at rptlKovra IrHy ^ 273, 2. (c)] ; or the Gen. is a preparative demonstra- \ntive pronoun, with which the clause introduced by ^ may be regarded as an \n\n43* \n\n\n\n\n\n\n510 SYNTAX. [$ 323 \n\nappositive or explanatory clause. Od. ^, 182. ou fiev yap mvyt: ipela-aop \nKoi &p e lou, ^ 0^\' 6fio(f>pou\xe2\x82\xacOUTe vorf/juuriv oIkou t^Wov a.vT]p \xe2\x96\xa0^Se yvvi] ( = toD 8tc \n\n"Rem. 6. (Comparatio compendiaria). In comparisons, instead of comparing ^ \nthe attribute of one object with that of another, the Greeks often compare the \xc2\xbb \nattributive of one o1)ject with the other object itself to which the attribute | \nwould belong. In this case the Gen. is regularly used. X. Cy. 3. 3, 41. x^P^ \nexeTe ou5ei/ t]ttou T]fJL(i>y (instead of rris rjfierepas) tmlyMv. Moreover, in er- \nery other comparison, this mode of expression is often employed, e. g. II. p, 51 \nai/xaTL ol SevovTO K6fJLai Xapirea-criy byLolai (instead of TaTy t\xc2\xabv Xaf)(T\xc2\xbbk). \nComp. the examples under f 284, 4. This mode of comparison, though not \nstrictly correct, is frequent in English, e. g. he Jtas an expression like his father^ \ninstead of like his father^s. \n\n4. When two attributes or predicates (adjectives or adverb.-;, ne; to \n\nthe same object^ are compared with each other, then both are put in th ^ .r- \n\native, and the last is annexed by \xc2\xa5i. \n\n\n\nQdrrwv, 1) (TO(pd)T e po s, celerior, quam japientior (more stoft thi^n tcise^ or \nnot so wise as swift). PI. Rp. 409, d. irXeoi/eUij irovrjpois, ^ xPV^\'f\'O\'f iyrvyx^"^ \n(TO(p(*>T cpo 5, fj OLfia^ 4 (TT e po s SoK(7 elvau airr^ rt koI &AAois. Her. 3, 65 \ni7rolr]<ra rax^repa, ft aocpurepa (celerius^ quam prudentius). \n\n5. The subject is compared with itself, i. e. the subject exhibits at some time \na quality in a hitjher difjrec than usual. In this case, the Gen. of the reflexive \npronouns ifxavrov^ afavrov^ iavrov, is used with the comparative, and the pro \nnoun aifrSs with the pronoun of the third person. The other mode of ex- \npression by 1) is not admitted here. \n\nB 6 \\ T t a> f fl/A i ^lav T ov. B^Kr i w y ti a f avr o v. BcXTia-*\' t*. \nrhs (avTov. Th. 3, W. SuyaTUTtpoi avrol avruy iyiyyovro. In i . \nler, the superlative is used in connection with avr65 and the Gen. of the r\xc2\xab^- \nflexive pronouns, when the subject is to be represented, as, at a given time^ \nexhibiting the quality belonging to it, in the highest degree (in a higher degree \nthan at any other time). "Ap laros aitrhs iavrov. \'Apiarri awrij iav- \nTTjs. X. C. 1.2, 46. iX^e <roi, 2> Tlf piKKfts, r6ri avvfyty6fir)\xc2\xbby 8t\xc2\xab itiy6raros \naavTov ravra -^aba ( when you surpassed yourself in these things^ what you had the \nhighest disti7}ction in these things, higher than at any other time). \n\n6. The following is a peculiar mode of comparison : When an object in re- \nlation to some quality is compared, not with another object, but uri*^ \xe2\x80\xa2 \xe2\x80\xa2 \' - \nthought (sentence), this thought is compressed into one substantive . J \nthis substantive is put in the Gren. depending on the comparative. Here, aL^o \nthe other mode of expression by ^, does not occur. \n\nHer. 2, 148. ^(Tav al irupajuiSes \\6yov fif^o*\'^^ {orobone majcres, i. e. i\xc2\xbbn- \njores. quam ui oratione erplicori jXK\'isit). Th. 2, 50. yty6fifyor KptTtrvoif A^7\xc2\xab\xc2\xbb \nT^ elSos tPjs y6<rov {the nature of the disctise being too seiYi\'v to be described, seeere \nbci/ond description). Tlpayijxi i\\iri5a>v Kp^Tr top {too great to be hoped fur, \nbeifond hope). Insteail of substantives, participles are also used, e. g. 8\xc2\xab>j^oj. \nn. Rp. 410, d. oi yvfjivatmK^ oKpaTtf xpV^^^^\'oi ay ptetTt poi rov Seoi\'TOi \nkirofiaiyovaiy. \n\n\n\nI \n\n\n\n$ 324.] CAUSA.L COORDINATE SENTENCES. \n\n\n\n5U \n\n\n\n7. When it is to be indicated, that a predicate or an attribute is in a higher \nor lower degree than could be expected, in proportion to another object, then \nthe comparative is constructed with ^ Kara, or (though seldom) fi irpos \nwith the Ace. (= quam pro). \n\nTh. 7, 75. fifiCb) fi Kara So/cpua ireToy^a {I have suffered too muck for \ntears ) . PI. Rp. 359, d. yenphs /jl^I^uv fj kut ^v^puiroy {a dead body greater \nf\' I in accordance u-ith a human being, greater thayi could be expected for a human \nU.nj, too great for tfiat of a human being). X. H. 3. 3, 1. {"Ayis) iVuxe (Tefivo- \nrtpasii Kmra &ybp<aToy to^^s, Comp. Liv. 21, 29. proelium atrocius, \nquam pro numero pugnantium, editur {more bloody than could have been expected \nconsidering the number). \n\n8. If the predicate or attribute is represented as being in so high or low a \ndecree, that another cannot coexist with it, then the comparative is used with \n^ \'isT\xe2\x82\xac and the Inf., e. g. Koxa ^ef^w ^v, ^ Ssre KKaieiv, evils greater \nth\'iii one could weep for). X. An. 1. 2, 4. irrr](TaL}iivos Hvoli ^ us eVi IletatSas t)]v \nwapatTKfvfiy {having thought that the armament uxis too great to be [greater, than to \n}h ] <ii!>iutst the 7\' \' <). 3. 3, "i . $paxvTfpa tik6v%i^ou fj cos i^ixvi7<r^ai tuv a<pcv- \n^uinnruiv {threw r_ : a distance to reach dtc stingers). See \xc2\xa7 \xc2\xa341. 3, (a). \n\nRrM. 7. The comparative is frequently used without the second member of the \ncoiiip.uison, and can iht-ii 1k\xc2\xbb translated by giving a strong emphasis to the \nji\'.-iti , \\\' joining the adverbs too, pretty, somewhat, a little, \n\nri\'/iJ. t" , _ English, too sweet, pretty, somewhat, a little icarm.) \n\nThis usage is found when the second member is evident from the connection ; \n\nbut very fn- -v \'\xe2\x96\xa0\xe2\x80\xa2 \xe2\x96\xa0\xe2\x96\xa0\' \xe2\x96\xa0\xe2\x96\xa0 \xe2\x96\xa0\xe2\x96\xa0 \' \xe2\x96\xa0;ch thoughts a.s, than it was before, than was \n\n\' \xe2\x96\xa0 rf. than brooming, were more or less distinctly before \n\ntill 1 40. Maxeu\'Spiw Se rtf Tvpavva ijv a.heK(pi))s viroix- \n\nap\'/ , , . \'. rtry dull of perception, a little crazy). 6,108. \n\n7iuMj iKavTt pu oiKtoftty [we aicell too far, very far from you). So particu- \nlarly the neuti - \xe2\x96\xa0\' ..a*\', fifKnoy {Utter than is right). KaWiov, ^aAAor, xeipoy^ \naSaxtoy, Kd.Ktoy : - rtpoy, intuv .seldom Kaiv6T(poy,{i^\'niv(i Kaiv6s is used synony- \n\nmously with j\'to\'Tt^wj, and the like, especially with a negative, e. g. ov KaXXiov, \noi\'K ftMCivof, OV KOUduy, oi> Kpilrrov, ov xe\'fo\xc2\xbb\'\xc2\xbb ov paov {not so easy, as it seems), etc. \nlb r. 3, 71. woiff ly cuniKa noi ioKfti Kcd fi); inrfpfiaXeabai- ov yap &/j.\xe2\x82\xaciyoy {for \n\' \' of ^\xe2\x96\xa0 brttu; than if u^ did it immediately). PI. Phaed. 105, a. irdXiv \nTKov OV yap x^^poy iroWaKis aKoveiy. Finally, also, when antith- \n\xe2\x80\xa2 - uic euiupa: \'i each other, e. g. Ta xc^P*""* itoXXoh irX^ia} iffrl rav \n\nafj.(iy6ywy { r., \xe2\x80\x9e . . . \xc2\xbb-< tnari m nniu^n r than the bcUer) . \n\n\n\n^ 321. IV. Causal Coordinate Sentences. \n\n1. Finally, those sentences are coordinate, the last of which denotes either the \nground, cause, or consefjuence of the preceding sentence, or the conclusion from it \n\n2. The fireeks denote the ground or reason by yap, which is never the first \nword in a sentence, but is commonly placed immediately after the first word. \nrap is compounded of 7^\' and Up a, and hence denotes proof confirmation, \n(7^, yes, certainly), and at the same time, an inference, or conclusion {apa, igitur, \nuow, tlierefore). Hence, according a.s the one or the other meaning prevails, \n\n\n\n^1 \' \n\n\n\n1 2 SYNTAX. [^ 324 \n\nysip may express : (a) a ground or reason, (b) an explanation, (c) a conjirmiition \nor assurance; and hence it may be translated* (a) hy for, (b) iAof is, for ex- \nample, (c) indeed, certainly. \n\nPL Phaedr. 230, b. ^/r; ttjj/ "Hpav, KoXi] ye 7] KaTorytoyfj \xe2\x80\xa2 ^ re 7 \xc2\xabt p irA({Toj\xc2\xbboj \naiJTr] [idx\' afxcpiXaipTis re Koi vi/ztjAt} {yes, certainly =for). Fdp has its explanO\' \ntory sense, especially after demonstratives and the phrases TeKfirjpiov 5e, naprxy \npiov Se, <rriiJ.e7ou Se, 5ri\\ov Se scil. iari, Se\'iKuvfu 54, eSiijAftxre 5e, <rK4\\^>a<r^f Sc, and \nthe like. It expresses confirmation or assurance, particularly in rejoinders and \nreplies. X. C. 3. 5, 10. apa Aeyets tt/v twj/ .^^eaJi\' Kpiaiv %v ol vepl KcKpoira 8t\' af>\xe2\x82\xac- \ntV ^Kpivav ; \xe2\x80\x94 Aeyw yap, ^es, certainly. 10, 2. e/c ttoWwu crvydyovres to. e| ckoo*- \nTou KaKkKTra, ovtus o\\a to, awpuxfa KoXa irotilre <f>alye{r^cu; \xe2\x80\x94 noiovfxfv ydpt \ne(p7}, ouTus [certainly, we do so). \xe2\x80\x94 In addresses, wishes, commands, and ques- \ntions, the meaning of 7 op, as denoting inference or conclusion, clearly \nappears. Arist. Han. 251. tovtI nap vpJav \\afj.^dyw ; Aeiya yap \xe2\x80\xa2K\xe2\x82\xacuj6tii- \n^a ! (a7n I so treated by you ? well ! then tve shall have hard things to bear I) Ka- \nKMs 7ctp \xe2\x82\xac^6koio\\ may you perish then! So, fl ydp^ ct^f ydo. X. C. 1. 7, \n2. oTi S\' a\\7ji^7) eKfyev, uSe i5l5fi<rKfv tv^vfid/xeiba ydp, e<pri, tX ris fi^ tev aya- \nhhs auXrjTTjs So/ceij/ fiov\\oiTo, Tt h.v auT<f iroir)T(ou t^rj ; (now then let us consider). 1. \n4, 14. ov yap irduv <roi KaTdor]\\ov, on irapa to. &AXa ^wa wsircp iieol iv^pntroi \n6ioT\xe2\x82\xacvova-i ,- is it not then clear to you f (nonne igitur \xe2\x80\x94 ?). II. <r, 182. \'\'Ipi dfd, rls \nyap (re ^ewv ^fiol &yy(koy rjKfv ; [therefore who Oien has sent you t). X. C. 2. 3, \n17. Ka\\ 6 XaipeKpdrrjs elirev *Eav ovv, t/jiov ravra iroiowros, iKfivos njfiev $e\\rloeif \nyiyvi)Tai ; Ti yoLp &k\\o, e(prj 6 "XojKpdTiis, ^ KivSvvevafis, k. t. A.; [what else \nthen will happen except that you will run the risk, etc. ^) Dem. Ph. 1. 43, 10. \ny4voiTO yap &v ti Kaiudrfpov, ^ McuceSoji/ ay}}p \'A^valovs KarawoXffiMy ; (whjf^ \ncan there he a greater nocfJty ?). So, T^ 7 op; 7\'"V/ ergo? KaL rl ydp ,- and how \nthen? Uios ydp; and ir6l^ev ydp; as an emphatic negative answer = by no \nmea7is. 11 ws 7ap oH; (instead of il, -K6^fy Si 06 is used with an antithesis) \nas an emphatic affirmative answer. X. C. 4. 4, 13. ovkovv 6 fiey rh S\'lKoia rpdr- \nTU3V ZiKaios, b Z\\ TO 65t/ca oBikos ; Tlus yap oC; (is he, therefore, who does what \nis just, just, but he who does ichat is unjust, unjust f to be sure, how not ?). \n\nRemark 1. The explanatory sentence with 7<fp very often precedes the \nsentence to be explained, particularly in Herodotus, e. g. Her. 6. 102. iro/, ^r \nyhp 6 Mapa^tiiv iiriTjjdeuiTaTov x\'^P\'\'"\' \'\'\'V^ \'Attikt}s iyimrewrai, is rouro <ripi Karii- \nyfero \'Ittttitjs [tind, for Marathon h\\is the 7nost suitalJe place in Attica for the cav- \naln/. Ilippias led them to this place). So\' especially with oAAo ydp, at enim. but \ncertainly, really, indeed. oAA\' ov ydp. PI. Apol. 20, c. r}$pvy6fi-ny &*>, ci \xe2\x96\xa0^itio-to/xii* \ntoOto\' oAA\' ov yap iirlaTafuu [I should be proud, if I knew this, but certainly I do \nnot know). \n\nRem. 2. The two sentences, the preceding explanatory one with ydp^ and \nthe following one whose meaning is to be continued, are often so closely con- \nnected with each other, that the* subject of the last is transferred to the first, \nand its government made to depend on it. Th. 8. 30. rois iv -rp "SJ^uf \'Arri- \nval is ir(fosa<piyin\xe2\x82\xacyat yap -^(ray Kal o\'lKo^fy &.\\\\ai yt)\xe2\x82\xacS Kol orpaTttyoi, koI rhs \na-rrh X\'lov irdaas koI ras &\\\\as ^vyayaySuTes i^ovkoyro, etc., instead of oi \xe2\x80\x94 \n\'A^r}ya7oi \xe2\x80\x94 ifiovkoyTO, aino7s ydp^ k. r. A. \n\nRem. 3. Ko\' 7 op commonly means /or also. rai*ely rfeniw, but sometime! \nthe Kai con-esponds to a following /coi, thus nam et \xe2\x80\x94 el. \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 324.] CAUSAL COORDINATE SENTENCES. . 513 \n\n3. The consequence or inference is denoted : \n\n(a) By Jkpa (hence, then), which never stands as the first word in a sentence, \nthough commonly near the beginning, also sometimes emphatically at the end \nIt expresses a consequence which comes as a matter of course, which is wholly nat- \nural. In many passages, it hardly admits of translation into English, since it \noften implies only a very slight consequence, and merely refers to something \nmentioned, to something existing in the context, or only in the conception of \nthe speaker, in conformity with which the thing is in the state in which it is \naffirmed to be. Hence it is very often used like the English indeed, as it seems, \nin such explanatory causes as more exactly define, or distinguish, something \nbefore said, or pointed out. \n\nLuc. Jup. trag. 51. tl elal $ufioi, ual koL S^eoi- hwh fx.^v eW ^wfxol flah &pa \nKol dfoi {then there are, consequently there are gods also). X. Cy. 7. 3, 6. ravra aKoiaas \nJ Kvpos ivaicraTO &pa rhy fi-npov (ichen he had heard of the duath of his friend, \nriiEX he smote on his thitjh, as was natural). It is often connected Avith an \nIrapf, when, in consequence of a better view of the subject at present, one is \nundeceived in regard to a former opinion, e. g. 1. 4, 11. & iraTSes, ws &pa \niipXvapovfxtv, Sxf TO iy tw irapai(l<ru> ^pla ibjipufiew ofioiov e/xoiye So/cel \n(hai, oToinrfp ft tis BfSta^fya (u>a ^pcfr] (now how childish ice were then, as I now \nindeed see). 1.3, 8. \'Xolko. 5f, <payai rhu \'AtrTvayriy, t^ oluox^w, t>y e^cb p.a\\i(TTa. \nrifiu, ovify iiS(DS ; \'O it Sawa; 6.pa Ka\\6s T\xe2\x82\xac &y irvyxaye, Kal rifi^v ex(>}V ivposir \nyfiy Toi/s itofifyovs \'Acrrvdyovs {now the Sacian happened to be beautiful, the Sacian \nwas beautiful, as it seems). 9. 2> 2aKo, dWAcoAas \xe2\x80\xa2 e/f/3aAw tre e/c rfjs rifjLTJs\' rd re \nyiip &AAa, (pdyai, aov /coAAiof olyoxoriffw, koI ouk (KTrio/xai avrhs rhv olvov \xe2\x80\xa2 at S\' \nipa ruy 0a(ri\\(wy oiyox^oi \xe2\x80\x94 KaTap^o<pov<Ti. Dem. Cor. 232, 22. iT6\\f.ia heyeiy, \nits 6. pa iyw \xe2\x80\x94 kcitwAi/kws (trjy r^y ir6\\iy {ri]y eip-fimjy) Troi-fjaaa^ai {that I indeed, \nthat I, as it seems). Hence the use of 70/) and the strengthened form 7^/ \nipa. \xe2\x80\x94 E\xc2\xbb &pa and \xc2\xabt fiit ipa correspond to the Latin si forte, nisi forte, if \nperchance, unless perchance, the inferential force of apa being reduced to a men \nconjecture, and arc often used ironically. X. C. 1. 2, 8. irus tiy oZy toiovtoj \n&,v^p Siaxp^fipoi rous yfovs : fl firj ipa t] rrjs apexTjs cTrt^eAeta Siacp^opd icrip \n(properly, that if such an excellent man can corrupt the young, then we must draw \nthe conclusion that, etc.). So also, et apa, num forte, whether then, whether per- \nchance. X. C. 4. 3, 9. (TKOirw, (I ipa ri iari to?s (&eo7s epyov, ^ ay^pdoirovs ^e- \npairdfiy {whether jterchance, forsooth, the gods have any other employment than, etc.). \n"Apa stands very often in interrogative sentences. Aesch. S. 91. tIs ipa \nbixTfTat; rts S\' i p iiraptLiffd bfuy ; {quis igitur defeniet 1 quis igitur SLTcehit 1). \n\nKkm. 4., "a pa seems to be derived from the verb \'APn, i. e. to be adapted, \nsuitable, and hence to express the inward relation, the immediate connection \nof two thoughts, and in such a niiinner that one seems, as it were, to be en- \ntirely fitted to the other, \xe2\x80\x94 the one perfectly corresponding to the other \n(=r precisely, exactly, just). In this sense it is used in Homer, e. g. II. v, 182. \n4k 5" $S>op( Kkvpos Kvvf-ns hy ip IjSreKoy ahroL precisely the one which, just the one^ \nwhich, T 11,1 OS ipa, just then, 5 T ipa, just when, tot i p a, precisely then, e < \nfih ipa, if not precisely, us ipa, exactly so; ovk \xe2\x80\x94 , a A A\' ipa, not\xe2\x80\x94 -but \njust; iiTf\'l f>a, since just, ydp ^a, for just. Homer uses ipa, m general, m \n\n\n\n514 SYNTAX. [^ 325 \n\norder to connect thoughts together, which are intimately related, and are do- \nveloped from each other. \n\nRem. 5. The lyric, tragic, and comic writers also employ the lengthened \nform Spa instead of Up a. Thus el S,pa, eir dip a, instead of fi &pa, c?-^ \nUpa. On the interrogative 5 p o and on &pa in a question, see ^ 344. \n\n(b) Ody (Ion. Sv), which commonly has the second or third place in a sen- \ntence, means, consequently, hence, therefore {ergo, igitur) ; it appropriately points \nout the effect of a cause, the necessary consequence of what precedes, and is ac- \ncordingly far stronger than fipa, but is also used in a more general sense. \n\nRem. 6. O S y is used as a suflBx to pronouns and conjunctions, and in this case \nalso, retains its conclusive sense : Zens oZv, omp oZv, oaot oif, fiky oZv, yovv, S" oZy^ \ndA\\\' oZy, fW oZy, yap oZv. It expresses a conclusion, a setting aside of every- \nthing else, and a persisting in that which is athnned \\ hence it may e.\\ Uo \nconfirmation and assurance. So oVrts oZv^ osTrep oZ y, wfioever he lu^^ _...un, \nHaoL oZyy how many so ever then, fihy oZy^ yes indeed (\xc2\xa7 316, Rem.), yovVf cer- \n.tainly, surely, oHkovv, truly, certainly not, 5\' oZy, aAX* oZy^ arkp oZy^bvi \nsurely, clfre oZv, he it this or that, yap oZy, for surely, et 5* oZy, if Oien. \n\nRem. 7. Oi/Koui\', asa Paroxytone, means: (a) non ergo, without interro- \ngation (consequently ouk in connection with the - " \' ^^^) j still in \nthis sense it is also written ovk oZy; (l>) mh/Zo - i, by no means, \nwithout interrogation (consequently ovk in connection with the emphatic suffix \noZy) most frequently in answers, e. g. X. O. 1, 9. oCkow tfioiyt SoKti. \xe2\x80\x94 Ow- \nKovy, as a Perispomenon : (a) in a question : nonne igitur f nonne ergo f X. C \n2. 2, 12. ovKovy, (<prt 6 2., kou rtf ytiToyi fiovKci av apf<rK(iy\\ \xe2\x80\x94 \'E- "-\xe2\x96\xa0tj. \nAlso in this case it is written ovk o&i\', as well as oCKovy; the lattt: en \nadopted in modern times, yet it is to be limited to such questions as involve a \nspecial empliasis in the negative, and so ot/Kovv is equivalent to nomiefcerte ; \nlike S. Aj. 79. oHkovv ytKws i^Siaros fis ix^povs ytKay ; (b) without interrogation, \nergo, igitur. X. C. 3. 6, 6. ov kov v, tcprj, rh fify irKownoarfpay r^jy ir6\\iy Toiclr \nava^aKov/xfba. This last arises from its use as an interrogative, and ovKovy is \nin this case properly nonne igitur ? The frequent use of this interrogative form \nhas caused a gradual weakening in the interrogative tone, and thus its sense \nhas become obscure, e. g. ts it not true tJierifore we shall put off? (= conse- \nquently we shall put off). \n\n(c) Tolyvy, which never stands as the first word in a sentence, is derived \nfrom the Epic t^, therefore, and the slightly inferential or deductive yvy, noir, \nwhich is derived from the temporal adverb yvy ; it is used : (a) to make \na transition; thus especially, Ka\\ Toivvy, and now, ^t* rolyvy, moreover \nthen; (b) to mark a conclusion, therefore now, so then. Toiyap (from the Epic t^, \ntherefore, and yap) corresponds to the Latin ergo, therefore, but is poetic ; still \nstronger is roiydproi, just on this account, precisely so, and roiyapovyt on this \naccount then. They commonly stand as the first word in a sentence. \n\n\n\nk 325. Asy7idcton. * \n\n1. In certain cases sentences are connected without any conjunction (eurwr- \nJeVots). Only some of the more prominent instances will be mentioned : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) In pathetic and impassioned discourse, e. g. II. x\xc2\xbb 295. (of Hector) <rrii \nS^ KaTa(pi]<Tas, ovS" oAA\' ex^ fiii\\iyoy cyxos\' Ar]t<po&oy 5" iK<L\\(t KfVK<i(nriBcL, fuuc- \nphy aitaoi p t e e (uy S6pv fuxKp6y. \xe2\x80\x94 (b) Asyndeton is very common in explana- \n\n\n\nJ 326.] PRINCIPAL AND SUBORDINATE SENIENCES. 515 \n\ntory clauses, which are elsewhere connected by &pa {therefore, then, that is) and \nydp. The second clause gives a more exact explanation of what was stated \nonly in a general, indefinite, indistinct manner in the first. So particularly \nwhen there stands in the first clause a preparative demonstrative, e.g. tovto, ro\'Se \novrus, w5e, etc. X. An. .3. 2,19. evl fj^yco irpoexovaiy rifias ol lTrire7s- (pcuycLu avroTs \niuT(pa\\4<}-T(p6y i(mvy ^ rjfuy. \xe2\x80\x94 (c) Related to the above is the asyndeton\' in the \nbeginning of a discourse or new paragraph, which is intended to strengthen a pre- \nceding thought. PI. Phaed. 91, c. \'AA\\\' tVeov, ecpr}. Upurou ue viro/xvfia-aTe \nh i\\\xe2\x82\xacyerfy iav /xi) (paiuufiai ti(fxvT]ix4vos. \xe2\x80\x94 (d) The connecting particle is often \nwanting, but is, in a measure, involved in another word. This is the case es- \npecially with demonstratives, e. g. out\xc2\xabs, r6<Tos, toTos^ etc., as in Latin with sic, \ntalis, tantus, etc. \xe2\x80\x94 (e) Before to roiavra. cetera, &\\\\a, at &\\\\oi in the \nenumeration of several objects, Kal is very ccmmonly omitted, as et before ce- \nteri, alii, reliqai, in Latin, when these words have a collective sense, i. e. when \none would include in these expressions all which is still to be named in addi- \ntion to what has been already mentioned. PL Gorg. 503, e. ohu el ^ovXei ideiy \nrovs C(MrYpd.(povs, robs olKoh6fjiovSj rovs vawTjyovs, robs &K\\ovs iravras hr)jxiovp\' \nyovi. \xe2\x80\x94 (f ) In atUithcsfs, which are to be represented as taking place equally, \nand without distinction, the conjunctions are omitted. PI. Prot. 319, d. o-y/z- \n/Soi/Xcuct wepl TovTuv 6fi.oltes fiey t(kt<dv, Sfiolws Se x^f^^^^ (rKVTor6ixos e/xiropas \nyavK\\7}pos, ifKovffios \xc2\xbb<\xc2\xbb^y, yeyvaios ayeyviis. In poetry, particularly in Epic, \ntwo or four adjectives, belonging to one substantive (of which each two \nform a whole), or even three, arc often placed together, without a connec- \ntive, if they are merely ornate epithets which, as it were, paint and vividly \ndescribe the object. H. ir, 140 and 802. liyxos fipi^v, fiiya, (TTifiap6y, K^Kopv\' \n^fjLtyoy. Od. a, 96. KoXh. ircSiAa, a/xfipScria, XP^^^^^"^ \n\n\n\nCHAPTER Vin. \n\nB. Subordination. \n\n\xc2\xa7326. Privripal and Subordinate Sentences. \n\n1. When ciuiiscs, which together present one united thought, \nare so related, as to their import, that the one is a dependent \nand merely complementary^ or limiting member of the other, \nthen their connection may be expressed either by coordinate \nconjunctions, as Kai, hi, yap, apa, etc., e. g. ro tap rjU\xe2\x82\xac, ra Be poSa \ndvSil (the spring camcy and the roses bloom) ; or in such a man- \nner, that the clause, which merely completes or limits the \nother, is manifestly in its outward form, a dependent, or a sim- \nply completing or limiting member of the other, e. g. ot\xe2\x82\xac to \n\n\n\n\n\n\n516 SYNTAX. [$ 326 \n\ntap ^XS^e, TO, poSa avS^eu. Tliis mode of connection is called \nSubordination, and the clauses or sentences Subordinate, \n\n2. The clause to which the other as a complementary or \nlimiting member belongs, is called the principal clause ; the \ncomplementary or limiting clause, the subordinate clause, and \nthe two together, a compound sentence. Thus, for example, in \nthe compound sentence, "Ore to top ^X^e, to. p6Sa av&eZ, the clause \noT\xe2\x82\xac TO tap ^\\&\xe2\x82\xac, is the subordinate clause, the other the principal \nclause. \n\n3. Subordinate clauses stand in the place of a substantive \n(substantive subject or object), or of an attributive adjective, \nor of an adverb, and hence must be regarded as substantives, \nadjectives, or adverbs, expanded into a sentence; accord- \ningly, there are three classes of subordinate clauses: sub- \nstantive, adjective, and adverbial clauses. \n\nThus, for example, in the sentence, " The victory of Cyrus orer the enemy \nwas announced," the subject may be expanded into a subordinate clause, \nviz., " That Cyrus had conquered the enemy, was announced ; " further, in tha \nsentence, " Sing to me, Muse, the far-wandering man," the attributive fiW\' \nwaiukTi\'tHj, may be expanded into a subordinate clause, \'\xe2\x80\xa2 HvSpa fwi (yyer\xe2\x82\xacf \nMoOcra, iroKvTpoirov, ts ixd\\a TcAXi irxdyx^v" {fho hag wandered Jar). \nComp., " He announced the victory of Cvrus over the enemy," with " He an- \nnounced, that Cyrus had conquered the enrmy ; " " In the Spring the roses bloom," \nwith, " when the Spring is come, the roses bloom." \n\nRemark 1. The use of subordinate clauses in Greek is not so common \nas in English, since the Greek makes a much more frequent use of Participles \nthan the English. Comp. " when the enemy had come." with raur iroXffuW \niX^oyTODv ; " wlien he had done thi-. he went away." with ravra wpd^as aw(0rf ; \n" Cyrus, who had conquered the enemy, came back to the camp," with Ki\'pos \nTovs iro\\ejj.iovs yiKrj<Tas els rh aiparoirfSoy ojfTjKi^cy. \n\nRf.m. 2. To substantive clauses belong also dependent or indirect inter- \nrogative clauses ; for these form the object of the <jr<iven)ing verb. e. g. " He \nasked me whether my father had nturned, i. e. ct>\' or in rerjord to, the return \n\nof\' mi/ father ; \'\' He showed, who had plotted th -^ icy. i. e. he showed the \nauthor of the conspiracy : " " He wrote me, when he shou/d depart, i. e. the time \nof his departure," etc. Still, as the laws relating to dependent and to direct \ninterrogative clauses, are often blended together, both will be treated m a \nspecial section in the sequel. \n\nEkm. 3. The subordinate relation of the dependent to the principal clause, \nis indicated in Greek by conjunctions, and also by the rehititY pronoun. Avhich in \nan adjective clause has the meaning of an adjective. The conjunctions are \ncorrelatives, i. e. relatives which stand in a reciprocal relation to demonstra \nlives in principal clauses, e. g. Ovt 6s i<TTiv 6 ay^p, h y elSts. T h ^6Soy, h eu\xc2\xbbdtr ip \nred KTjTTcc, KdWicrrSy iariv. "\'EAf^e rovro, hri 6 6.vbpoiTos a^iLyaris iirrtp, \n^a7os \xe2\x80\x94 ofos; Say \xe2\x80\x94 t oaovr (f. \'ds tKe^a, ovrws iytytro. OSrtt ica- \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 327.] SEQUENCE OF TENSES. \n\n\n\n517 \n\n\n\n\\S,s irdura (Trpa^fv, &sr(^ Haivov fi^yiarov &^ios i^v. "Ore 6 Kdpos ijx^e \nrSre yai/Tfj ti^yaXws \xe2\x82\xac\'xapr,(rav. \'Efieiue f^^xpi roiiov, oZ 6 ^aaiXehs iirvC \ndf,/. A substantive may also stand instead of a demonstrative correlative \ne. jr. \xe2\x82\xac\'v ToiTo, rcpxpjuw, \'6t\xe2\x82\xac (mstead of roVe, Sre). Still, when the reciprocal \nrelation is not to be brought out emphaticallv, the demonstrative is commonly \nnot expressed, e. g. ^EAe^ei/, Bn 6 &u^pciros a^dpaT6s itnii^. KaAis Trdura \nUnpa^cw, &STf KT\\. "On 6 Kvpos fiK^e, irdvTes /xeyaKccs ixdpvcrav. "Efxcive \nfifXpt ov 6 $aai\\fvs tV^X^cj/, etc. Even both pronouns may, in certain cases\' \nbe omitted, e. g. "E/ifive, /ic\'xpt ^ ^aaiKivs iirriX^eu. \' \n\nRem. 4. The form of the demonstrative, in the principal clause, either \nactually expressed or undei-stood. determines the nature of the subordinate \nclause. The substantive demonstrative denotes a substantive clause ; the ad- \njective, an adjective clause; the adverbial, an adverbial clause. But the \nBubcrdinatc clauses themselves have special characteristics by which they \nmay be distinguished from each other, viz., the introductory conjunctions and \nthe constructiuns connected with these. \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 327\xc2\xbb. Sequence of the Subjunctive Tenset in Sub- \nordinate Senteyices. \n\n1. For the use of tenses in subjunctive subordinate ..Iauses,t]ie \nfollowing general rule apj)lies in Greek, as in Latin: \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nThe tenses of the subjunctive subordinate clause correspond \nto those of the principal clause; i. e. 2i principal tense (Present, \nPerfect, Future, and Future Perfect) in the principal clause, is fol- \nlowed by the subjufictive in the subordinate clause, and an his" \ntorical tense (Imperfict, Pluperfect, and Aorist) in the principal \nclause is followed in the subordinate clause, by the Optative, \ni, e. the Subjunctive of the historical tenses. \n\nTovro \\4yVf rovrS fioi \\4\\tKrai, tovto \\4^tD, Xva yiyvdxTKris {yv^s)f \nhoc dicx>, dixi ( Perfect um praesens), dtcain, ut cognoscas. Tovto tXeyov, tovtS \nfioi 4\\t\\tKro, rovTo f \\( ^a, Ua yiyyaxr ko is (y voir) s), hoc dicebam, dix- \neram, dirt (Perfect. Hisior.), ut cognosceres. Ovk ex\xc2\xab\xc2\xbb ovoi Tpevafiai [rpd \nTot n a i), non habeo, quo me vertam. Ouk elxov, ottoj r pirro\'univ (rpairol- \n^Tjv), non fiabebam, quo me verterem. Oi iro\\(fj.ioi irduras, oto) hv ivrvxo\'O\'h \nKTdyovtrif. Ol iroK^fiioi irdyras, iT(f) ivTvxoi\xe2\x82\xacy, \xe2\x82\xacKT\xe2\x82\xacIU0V, \n\n2. But it is to be observed that the Greek confines itself less \nregularly to the above rule, than the Latin, but has much \ngreater freedom. Very often in lively naiTation, the Greeks \nrefer the predicate of a subordinate clause directly to the \npresent time of the speaker, without any regard to the principal \nclause, so that, therefore, an historical tense in the principal clause \nis foUowed by the same mode ( Subj.) and the same tenses which \n\n44 \n\n\n\n518 SYNTAX. [i 327. \n\naccompany the principal tenses. The dependent clause or dis- \ncourse then assumes the character of independent or direct dis- \ncourse (an objective mode of expression) ; the speaker, in his \nlively conceptions, brings the past into present View ; the past \nbecomes present to him. See ^ 345, 5. \n\n\n\n$327^ Use of Modes in Subordinate Clauses. \n\nThe use of modes in the different kinds of subordinate \nclauses, will be considered in treating these clauses each by \nitself Here, only those characteristics will be noticed which \nare common to several kinds of subordinate clauses. \n\n1. There is very often an attraction of the mode, a subordi- \nnate clause which forms an intermediate member of another \nclause, taking the mode of this clause. \n\n(a) This occurs with the Indie, of the historical tenses in those subordinate \nclauses, which form an intermediate or accessory member of a hypothetical \nproposition with ct and a preterite Indie in the Protasis, and a preterite Indie \nwith &v in the Apodosis [^ 339, 2, I. (b)]. X. C. 1. 4, 14. {&y^fwwos) othf fiohs \nttu ^xwj/ awfia., av^pwtrov Se yywfiriUj iSvyar hv TrpdrruVy & i fiovKero (as in \nLat. efficere posset, quae vellet). 3. 5, 8. el ifiov\\6fie^a xpVI^\'\'\'f^*\' *\'" o/ &Woi \nflxov awTiTToiua-^ai {si vellemus cxpetere opes, qtias alii haberatt). Isocr. Paneg. \n19. ^XP^*\' {"^ovs fi-r^Topas) fii} irpoTfpovirepl rwy dfioKoyovfifywy <rvfjt.fiov\\fvtift vplr \niTfpl rwv a.^(pis^r]Tovp.iV(i}v r]/j.as 45 ISa^ay (oportebut . . priusquam . . docuissent). \nPL Gorg. 506, 6. r]S4a>s fev KoAAiKAe? tovt^ ?ti 5i\xe2\x82\xac\\fy6fifiyf ftes avr^ . . \naTreSwKa (usque dum reddidisscm). From this may be explained the use of \nthe Indie. Imperfect or Aorist in final clauses after an Indie of an historical \ntense with or without &y. See \xc2\xa7 330, 5. \n\n(b) Very often with those subordinate clauses which are intermediate or ac- \ncessory members of optative clauses, i. e. clauses expressing a wish ; hence with \nadjective, adverbial, or jinal clauses, as members of a clause expf urisk, \n\nor as intermediate members of an o/j/afjVe proposition expressed ^naUy. \n\nn. p, 640. 6^17 5\' Ssris eraipos airayyelXeit Tdxi<rra nrjXiiSri {0 that then \nwere a friend to announce as quick as possible). Ar, Vesp. 1431. f pSoi ns, ^ \xe2\x96\xba \ntKaa-Tos clSelri rextnf}y. PI. Phaedr. 279, c. t^ xP^\'^\'*^ trXribos ftri fioiy taov \nfxiire <p4pfiv, ixi\\7^ i-yny Zvvair iXAos, ^ 6 auxppccy. II. <r, 464, sqq. a\'t ydp \nfJLiv bavdroio SusTjx^oy wSe Svyaifxrjy v6ff<piy airoKpv^cu, Sre fuv fi6pos cu*^. \nI K (\xc2\xa3 V (. \xe2\x80\x94 X. S. 8, 17. rls fuffeiy Svyair &,y, wp" ov flSfiri Ka\\6s re kou iya- \ndhs yofii(6fjifyos. C. 4.6, 7. irws yap &.y ris, a ye fi^ ^irfffToi to, ravra iro^s \ne^Tj; PI. Phaed. 72, c. el airo^yr]<rKoi fiey wdirra, Saa rod ^y ficra AcT/Soi, \niireiS^ Se airo^ dvo i, fievoi 4y tovto} t^ axVfJMTi ra re^ye&ra koI fi^ wdXiP \nkyafitdffKoiTO, dip ou iroAAi) aydyicT reKetnceyTa wdyra re^rdoftu Kol Mf^*\' C^*\' * \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 327.] MODES IN SUBORDINATE CLAUSES. 519 \n\nX. O. 1, 13. crrts XPV\'To T\'^ apyvpla, Sisre kolkiov rb cruixa exoi, irws hu en \nrh apyvpiou aury u(pe\\ifxou \xe2\x82\xac?7j ; S. Ph. 325. ^ufx.ou yivoiro xetpi TrX-qpaxral \nwoT\xe2\x82\xac, \\v ai MvKTivou yuo7\xe2\x82\xacv . ., OTixv :2,Kvpos avdpwv aKKifji.wv pL-i]T-np ecpv. Eur. \nTroad. 698. TiorSo rSySe irai^hs iK^p4\\l>ais &v, Tpoias fxeyiaTou u<p4Krin\\ \'i-v ol \niroT\xe2\x82\xac 4k <rou y(v6(j.\xe2\x82\xacvoi iroTSes "iKiov irdXiu kuto iKicre lau Kal irjAty yevoiT ^ti. \nX. An. 2. 4, 3. ovk iiri(rTdfj.\xe2\x82\xac^a, grt ^a(Ti\\fus rjfias awoXeaai irepl Travrhs &y \nIT oil] era no, tva Kcd to7s &XXoLs\'\'E\\\\T]<Tnb6^os eJfTj itrl ^aaiAea /xeyav (TToaTev \nfiv (according to the best MSS.). Comp. 3, 1, 18. X. Cy. 2. 4. 17. e? S^ Tret\'- \n7ats i-iraivuv tre voWovs, 8vus So^av \\dfiois, ipri e\'lTjTroTTj/ccos eX-ns &u. Comp. \n2. 4, 17. But since the Optative in a clause expressing a ivish as well as the \nOptative in hypothetical propositions, has a present signification (\xc2\xa7 259, 3), ac- \ncording to \xc2\xa7 330, 2 the ."iubj. must properly follow after the Jinal conjunctions, \nas is frequently the case. PI. Apoi 28, d. avTUa reStval-nv, \'Iva /x^ eV- \ndaSc fieyw KaraydKauTTos. X. An. 3. 1, 38, olfo/ioi &j/ vfias fieya ovrjarai rh ffrpd- \nTfVfui, fl iir ifif\\r]^(ir]T f, Sirws ayrl tS>v airoXwhSTccy ws rdx^rra (TTpaT-qyol \navTiKaTaoTa^waiy. Cy. 3. 2, 28. xPVH-\'^tO\' "Tposyevec hai ert tlv ^ovKol- \nfitfy vfuy, birujs ^x* M*<^\'^^\'\' o,(p^6y(t)s BiSoyai. Also with fx-fj (whether not = \nUiat). An. 1.3, 17. iyot OKyoi-nv /icv h/ els to v\\o7a ififiaiyeiy, h rjfuy doiri, /x^ \nrjnas aifTcus reus rpii^pfcrt k ar aivvr), tpo^olfi-qv 5\' h.v rep Tiye/xSyi ep SoIt] eTreo*- \nbcu, fii) Tjfias ay ay rj, S^ey oux oT6y re itxrai i^cX^eiy. \n\n^\' i:K. But in su\' \xe2\x96\xa0 \xe2\x96\xa0 e-clauscs with 8t\xc2\xbb or ws, that (^ 329), and in \nd\' t intcrro^\'ativr -. after a conditioning or conditioned Ind. of \n\nthe liistorital tenses, the lud. of the principal tenses remains; also after an \noptative principal clause, since these clauses have but a loose connection with \nthe principal chufc, and hence they readily assume the form of direct discourse. \nX. An. 5. 1, 10. et fify i]ir ttrr dfif^a aaepws, Bri 7j|\xe2\x82\xaci Xfiplcro<pos, ovSev hy \nthfi uv n(K\\<D Xiyfiy. {So in the best and most of the MSS. instead of ^^oi.) \nDem. 19,40. ty pa<poy h.y hia^f>-)]5r]v, \xc2\xa5i\\iKa v/xas ei ir o i-qcr oj, e/ ev fjSeiy kcH \nrrjy avfj-naxicw M<" yfyrjcropLfyy^y. \xe2\x80\x94 Dem. 16, 4. ovS\' tiy efs ayreiTroi, us ov \na V fi<pf pf I Ti) ir6Kfi, Kai AaxfSaifjLoylous aur^eyels eJyai koX &r]^aiovs. X. An. 3. \n2. 36. \xe2\x82\xac( yijy kir oS t ix^ f iv, rlya XP^ r]y\xe2\x82\xac7a-^ai (ducere) rod Tr\\ai<riov, . . ovk \ntiy . . fiovKfvfcrdai i)fias ifoi. \n\n2. Tlie Siibj. and Opt. are used in subordinate clauses to de- \nnote indefinite frequency or repetition ; the Subj., when the prin- \ncipal clause contains a principal tense (Pres. or Fut), the Opt., \nwhen the principal clause contains an liistorical tense (usually \nthe Lnpf.). This relation in Greek is regarded as a conception, \ninasmuch as the idea of repetition arises from bringing single \nactions together in conception. The conjunction or relative of \nthe subordinate clause is translated by as often as. \n\nD. /3, 391. %y 5e k 4ywy airdyevbe fidxvs (SteKovra yo^ao) fiifiydC^iv iraph \nvrivffi Kopwylaiy, o6 ot eirfira &pKiov iaaelrai <pvyUiv Kwas vd\' olwvois {as often as \nI shall observe). X. Cy. 3. 3, 26. &TT6rav {ol pdp$apoL fiaai\\e7s) (TTpaToy \nSevwyrai, rd(ppoy irfpifidWoyrai evireTws Sia rT]v T^okvx^ipiav. C.3. 1, Lot* \n^v (2a>Kpe(T7js) .ainhs dSeivy irdvrwy irpo^v^Srara idlSaffKeit \'6rov Se airhs \n\n\n\n520 . SYNTAX. - [H 328, 329. \n\n^TreipSrepos elf 77, irphs robs iiriffTafjievovs ^yev auTovs. An. 6. 1, 7. Sirore o. \n"EWrjves ro7s 7ro\\\xe2\x82\xac/j.iois erri oiev, paZlas iirecpevyov. 4. 5, 30. ottov s.fyocp&p \nirapio I K(iiixr]v, iTpfvero irphs rovs if raTs K(i}[xais. 1. 9. 18. elf t^s y4 ri Kvpai vpos- \nrd^avTi KaAcis vTrrj per-^cr eievy ovSeyl irdirore ax(ipi<rrov ^aire r^v Trpo^filav. \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7328. I. Substantive-Clauses. \n\nSubstantive-clauses are substantives or infinitives expand- \ned into a sentence, i. e. they have the force of a substantive, \nand stand as the subject, as well as the attribute or object of \na sentence. Comp. \xc2\xa7 326, 3. \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 329. A. Substantive-Clauses introductd by 6tl o? \n\n0)5, that. \n\n1. Substantive-clauses introduced by otl and ws, that, \n\nexpress the object of verba sentiendi and declarandi, e. g. 6pav, \n\ncIkovciv, voCiv, /xav\'^avctv, yiyvioarKiiVy etc. ; Xcyctv, SrjXovv, ScifaaVai, \n\ndyyeAActv, etc., [\'J 306, 1, (b)] ; in the second place, subordinate \n\nclauses introduced by otl, express the object of verba affectuum, \n\ne. g. Savfid^eLV, ap(^ccr\xc2\xab^at, ayavaKT\xe2\x82\xactv, ala)(yv\xe2\x82\xaca&ai, fjLtfji<f>\xe2\x82\xacaS(Uy etc. J \n\nOTL is also used to introduce a subordinate clause, which con \n\ntains an explanation of the principal clause, or of a single word \n\nin it. \n\nRemark 1. \'fls, properly, how, differs from Sti, in expressinjr the thonfrht \nmore indefinitely and undecidedly, than Sn \\ hence us is used particularly after \nverbs of believing, thinking, and after negative verba sentiendi and declarandi. \n\xe2\x80\x94 After verbs of believing, thinl-in(j, judginrj, hopinq. promising, swearing, denying, \nthe Lif. or the Ace. icith the Inf. usually follows, very seldom or i or us: after \nverbs of saying, mentioning, and the like, both constructions occur with equal \nfrequency; after verbs of knoicing, showing, and the like, either Sti or us \nfollows, or a jxiiiiciple, or, under certain conditions, the Ace. with the Inf. See \n\xc2\xa7311. Sometimes, also, OTT cos and the Poet, o u v e k o, also 6,^ouve\xc2\xbbco in the \nTragedians, are used nearly in the same sense with on, that. \n\nRem. 2. When a subordinate clause refers to a Pass, verb or to an imper- \nsonal phrase with icniv, e, g. SrjXoy, Scivou, cuaxp^" ioTiv, and the like, it stands \n\nas the grammatical subject. \n\n2. The predicate of this substantive -clause may be ex- \npressed : (a) by the Ind., (b) by the Opt., (c) by the Opt. with \nav, (d) by the Ind. of Hist, tenses with av. \n\n3. The Ind. of all the tenses is used, when the statement is \nto be represented as a fact, sometliing certain or actual. Par- \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 329.] SUBSTANTIVE CLAUSES. \xe2\x80\xa2 521 \n\nticularly is the Ind. used regularly, when the verb of the prin- \ncipal clause is a principal tense (Pres., Perf., or Fut.). \n\n4. The Opt., on the contrary, is used, when the statement is \nto be represented as a conception or supposition, therefore, par- \nticularly, when what is stated as the opinion of another is to be \nindicated as such {) 345, 4). When the Ind. interchanges with \nthe Opt., then one thought is represented as a fact, the other, \nas a mere thought or conception, something uncertain. \n\nX. Cy. 1. 4, 7. oi S\' tXeyov, on &pKToi ttoWovs ^Stj irATjencio\'aj\'Tos Sie^^ei- \npay. Th, 1, 114. fj77eAi^, on Meyapa a<p4aT7]Ke, koX UeXoirovu-fiaioi /xeA.- \n\\ov<T IV is&dWeiv is ttji/ \'ATTiK-f)v. Her. 3, 140. TrvySniveTai (Hist. Pres.) d 2u- \n\\o(rwy, 0} s 7) fia(Ti\\rji\'r) ir e p le \\r}Xv^o i is tovtov rhv &udpa. X. An, 1. 1, 3, \nTiaaa<ptpin}s SiafidWei (Hist. Pres.) rhv Kvpou irphs rhu ad\xe2\x82\xac\\(p6v, ws iirifiov- \n\\evoi avr(p. Cy. 1. 1, 3. otc /xev Sr) Tavra ive^v/xovfie^a, ovtus iyiyvcoCKOfi^v \nnfpl avTwu, us avhptiirca irf(f>vK6Ti irdvTwu twu ^AA.cdi\' paou etri C^cou, fj av^pca- \niruv &pxfif\' An. 2. 1,3. ovTOi eXeyov, \'6n Kvpos [x^v r 4^yr] Kev, \'ApiaTos Se \nIT e<{>e vy w s eXi] kou Key o i, on Tavrrju t^u rj/xepap Tepifxelvei^u h,v ai/rovs. \n\nRem. 3. When the Lid. Imp/, instead of the Opt. follows an historical tense \nin the ])rincipal clause, the mode of expression resembles the form of direct \ndiscourse, since the Ind. of direct discourse remains, e. g. s,evocpoiv ^Key^v, \'6n \n6p^u)S ]^T iwuT o Kol avrh rh epyou auTo7s fxapTupo\'iT], X. A. 3. 3, 11. (oratio recta: \nopbws alnuvrai). See \xc2\xa7 345, Rem. 5. But when the Ind. of the principal \ntenses follows an historical tense in the principal clause, then the subordinate \nclause assumes wholly the coloring of direct discourse (\xc2\xa7 345, 5). Hence it \nsometimes happens, that the form of the oblique discourse is either partially \nor wholly changed into that of the direct. X. Cy. 1. 4, 28. iurav^a S)] rhv \nKvpov yfKaffai re iK rwv vp6<T^fV SaKpuwv kuI flireTv avrw a.iri6vTa ^appetu, on \nV apt (TT ai avTols o\\iyov XP^\'^^^\' Sisre dpau ff o i i^ecrai \xc2\xab&;/ fiovXri affKap- \nSafivKTfi. Hence qti may be used, when the exact words of another are quoted \nin the same form in which they were spoken by him, when in Eng., a colon or \nmarks of quotation are used,\'e. g. X. Cy. 3. 1, 8. e?7r\xe2\x82\xac 5\\ on- Els Kaiphv i/jKeis \n^<t>ri, he said: \'\'you have come at the right time." An. 2. 4, 16. Upo^ems \nflv\xe2\x82\xacu, 8 T : \xe2\x80\xa2 AvTos\'flfjii, tv CvTfh. It is used even before the Imp., e.g. PI. Criton. \n50, c. taws tLV eUoiev {ol y6fj.oi), ori-\'^n \'S.wKpares, fi)] ^avfxaCe to. XeySfxeva. \n\n5. The Opt. with av is used, when the statement is to be \nrepresented as a conditional supposition, assumption, conjecture, \nor as an undetermined possibility [^ 260, 2, 4, (a)]. \n\nX. An. 1. 6, 2. KaraWayih Se ovtos Kvpco, elirev, el auTif dolv l-mreas X\'^t \novs, St I rovs TrpoKaraKaiovTas iirireas f) KaraKavoi hv iueSpeicras, ^ (uvras \nTToWovs avTwu \'iXoi, koX KcoKvaeie rod Koneiv iiriSyras. Cy. 1. 6, 3. ne/iurinai \nCLKOvaas ttotc <rou, 3 t i elKoras & v /cat -rrapa ^ea>y TrpaKTiKci>Tepos e tv, i^sirep kcu \nirapa avSfpdnvwu, \'osris /utj, ^JTrJre eV arc6pois dr), roVe KoXaKeioi, ahX\' gre t^ 6,pi<Tra \nnpdTTOi, tJt6 fxdKiara rwu ^ewu fiefxpwro {\'6sns (i-h ktK. instead of e3f rty /*< \nictA..). Dem.Aphob. 851,22. oI5a, oTi Trai/TM ^y 6/ioAo7^(ro iT 6. \n\n44* \n\n\n\nf)22 SYNTAX. [$ 329. \n\n6. The Ind. of the Hist, tenses with av is used, when the \naffirmation is to be represented as a condition, whose actual \nexistence or possibility is denied [^ 260, 2, (2) (a)]. \n\nDem. Aphob. 830, 55. el fieu 6 irar^p i}irl(rT\xe2\x82\xaci tovtols, SriXov, Sri oUr\' a 9 \nrSWa irr \xe2\x82\xacT peTT ev, oUt tiv rav^^ outcd KaToXnrojv avrois \xe2\x82\xac<p pa^ev. L.ys. c. \nAgor. 137, 75. ovSeirore Treiceis ovdeua avbpdiirwv, w j ^pvvixov airoKTiivas aipei- \n(&^7js &v, el fi^ jxeydXa rhv Srjjxov ruu ^A^vaiwv koX avftKeara Kcuca elpjdaa. PL \nRp. 1. 330. \xc2\xa9e/iiCTO/cA.^s airiKpivaro, Zri otiT "hv ahrhs 1fpi(pws ttv ovofKurrhs \niy ever Of otr eK(7yo5 \'A^va7oT (&\xc2\xbb\'). \n\nKem. 4. Impersonal forms of expressions are often changed into those which \nare personal, the subject of the substantive-clause being transferred to the \nprincipal clause and the impersonal expression becoming its predicate. \nComp. ^\xc2\xa7 307, Rem. 6, and 310, Rem. 3. Th. 1, 93. koX S^Atj v oUoSoula \nin KaX vvv iCTTiv, Ht I Kara (TttovS^v iyevero, X. C. 4. 2. 21. (SoKfi 6 roiovros) \n5ri\\os VT] Ai\' ilvai, or i & <^eTo etScVcu ovk olicy. X. 0. 1, 19. 2Tt iroin}p6r- \naroi etVi, ovdh (Te Xavbdv ovaiv. \n\nRem. 5. In the place of a substantive-clause introduced by 5tx or us, the \nInf. (Ace. with the Inf.) or the Part, may stand after verba declarandi and sen- \ntiendi. That there is a difference of meaning between the construction with \nthe Inf. and that with the Part., has been seen in \xc2\xa7 311 ; but the difference be- \ntween the construction with a Part, and that with 3ti or is, is only in form. \nThe difference between the construction with 5ti and us with the iiuite verb \nand that of the Inf. (Ace. with Inf ) is, that in the former, the affirmation is \nmore objective and dcjinite (as a fact) ; in the latter, on the contrary-, subjective \nand indefinite (as an assunijition). Hence verbs which express a merely sub- \njective meaning, as, otfa^at, SoKfiy, iKirl(fiy, and also <pdyai (i.e. \nvei-bs which denote such a subjective view), are constructed almost exclu>ivcly \nwith the Inf. (xVcc. with the Inf.), very seldom with 8ti or ws. That the distinc- \ntion between the three modes of construction is very often unessential, is clearly \nseen from the fact, that examples are found in wliich the same :\' \' t is ex- \npress\'^d by the same writer in different places in each of the thi .-, e. g. \n\nHer. D, 63. f^ayyfWei, ws ol vaTs ytyoye. 65. Stc ol ^^\xe2\x80\xa2iTyyeiXc 6 oucenjs \niraTSo yeyoyeyai. 69. ore avT(f <rv rfyyi\\^s yfyfyrjfiiyos. \n\nRem. 6. The verbs ixdfj vrjfiai, olSa, olkovu and others of similar mean- \ning, are not unfrequcntly followed by an adverbial clause, introduced by Sre, \ninstead of a substantive-clause introduced by Srt or us. This construction \nseems to have arisen from an ellipsis, as rod xpoyov, e. g.fiffirrjfjLcu (rov xp^*vv), \n2t\xe2\x82\xac ravra eA.e|os, as in Eng. / nmtinber veri/ wtll when the war broke out. X \nCy. 1- 6, 8. fie nvr] fjiai Kol rovro, 8t\xe2\x82\xac, aov \\4yoyros, avyeSoKfi Kcd ifiol inrfofiey- \n\xe2\x82\xac(^6s etyai ^pyoy rh koXus &pxei\'V- Dem. 01. 2(3), 29, 4. /i\xe2\x82\xac/iii\'\xc2\xbbj(r3\xe2\x82\xac, Sr arrfy- \nye\\^ ^i\\nnros ircpiopKuy. Comp. memini, quum darem ; vidi, quum prodirei , \naudivi eum, quum diceret. \n\nRem. 7. Verbs expressing emotion (No. 1 ), instead of being followed by a sub- \nBtantive-clause introduced by 8ri or us, are often followed by a subordinate clause \nintroduced by a conditional or interrogative et, if whither, when the object of \nadmiration, etc., is not to be represented as actually existing, but as merely pos- \nsible, or as still a matter in question, e. g. davud^^u, on raOra yiyyereu and u \nravra ylyyerai. Attic politeness, which often blends in its lansruage a coloring \nof doubt and a certain indeterminate manner of expression, frequently employs \nthis form even in settled and undoubted facts ; in this case el has the force of \nStj. Aeschin. Ctcs. ox/k ay air a, el /j.^ Sitcnv eSuKey (he is not - \' \xe2\x80\xa2). \n\nFl. Lach. 194, a. ay ay aKru el ovTual h you /j.)} oios r elfJtX tint. l.^ -tS, \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 330.] FINAL SUBSTANTIVE CLAUSES. \n\n\n\n523 \n\n\n\n/ca<oo-u;a?i/ eV toTs eVairtois. Dem. Mid. 30, 548. ovk v^X^^v^t), et toiovto \nKoxhi/ iwdyn rca {tJiat he brings such a calamity upon one). \n\nRem. 8. Instead of^Srt oD\'tws, the relative u)s,that, is often used, and \ninstead of 8tj tojoCtos or Srt t Jo- os, the relatives oTos, oaos. PL \nPhaed. 58, e. cu5a//xa>v /lot 6 avrip icpaiuero, ws aSews Kal yevvaiws ereAevra {that \nhe died so fearless! i/. etc.). Her. 1, 31. ai \'Apy^Tai i/xaKapiCoy tV f^vrepa, o\'iuv \nrfKvoiv iKVfrqtre {that she is possessed of such children). \n\n\n\n^330. B. Final Substantive -Clauses, de7ioti7ig pur- \npose and result, introduced hij ws, tva, etc.^ \n\ni.. The second class of substantive-clauses are those which \ndenote a purpose, object, or a residt. These clauses are intro- \nduced by the conjunctions ii/a, ws, ottws (o<^pa. Poet), Iva. \n\n/!>/, (1)9 \\X.\'l]y OTTO)? /i.7;. \n\n2. The mode in final clauses is commonly the subjunctive \nor optative, since the purpose or object is something merely \nimagined or conceived. When the verb of the principal clause \nis a principal tense : Pres., Perf , Fut., or an Aorist with the sig- \nnification of the present \\S 257, 1, (a) and (b)], then the final \nconjunction, i. e. the conjunction expressing the purpose, etc., \nis followed by the Suhj. ; but when the veil3 of the principal \nclause is an historical tense : Impf , Plup., Aor., then the final \nconjunction is followed by the optative (but never by an Opt. \nFut.). \n\nTaDro ypdipu, yey pacpa, ypd\\\\/a),\'iv eX^rjs {id venias, that you may \ncome). Ai^ov (with the sense of the Pres.), tv eiSi (die, ut sciam.that 1 \nmay know). TaDro eypa<poy, iyeypatpeiv, iypa^a, \'iv e\\^ois (ut ve- \nnires, tliatuou might come). II. X, 289, sq. oAA\' l^hs iXavuere ficivvxas \'iirirovs \nItpdlfiwy Aayao:,v,Xp" inrfprtpou (?>xos &pv<r^^ (ut gloriam vobis paretis) ] but, \nII. \xe2\x82\xac, 1\xe2\x80\x943. r^y aZ Tu5et5r7 Ato/uTjSer UaWas\'A^vv Sw/ce fxeyos Kal ^dpaos, %v \nKkStiKos fifTa naffiy \'Apydoiffi yevouo, I5\'e k\\\xe2\x82\xacos iffSrXhv apoiro (ut clarus \nferet et gloriam sibi pararet). t, 347. Jupiter said to Minerva, aW i^i otueKrap \nre Kal d/x/Spoo-fr,!/ ipaniv^v (rrd^ou (with the sense of the Pres.) iul o-TT^^ecrcr\', \nlya (xi] tiiv Kifihs UvTai (ut ne fames eum occupet) ; but, 352, ^ 5\' \'Ax\xc2\xab^^i>eV \nrap iy] <rri)bi<r<Ti koL i^fipoairjv ipaT(iu>ny crrd^\', Ua fi-f] fitu Mi^hs ^.repTr^s yo6- \nyaSf\' Xkoito (ut nc occuparet). Dem. Cor. 239, 39. y4ypa(pa ifuu, \'iva m^ \nM irXuoy ^./oxA^o-^f ir,p\\ roirwv. X. Cv. 2. 1, 4. r/ olv, ^v o KOpos, oh \nKoL rhu UyofXLy ^Ke^ds ^oi [^K^ov fxoi, \xc2\xa7 256,4, (e)], g^cos \xe2\x80\x94 /3 oi; Aei;^ \n\n\' For practical reasons both kinds of subordinate clauses are brought together \nhere although they properly belong to adverbial clauses denoting purpose. \n\n\n\n524 SYNTAX. [\xc2\xa7 330 \n\nue ^a, Hiras tt,v &pi(rra a-ycovi^oific^a] 1. 2. 3. (e/c rris ruv Tleprcof iKev^ipas ayo- \npas Ka\\ovfjLef7}s) ra /xhu Hiuia Kal ol ayopatoi air f\\-f} \\avTai els 6,\\Xov r6iroVf ws \nfiT] fiiyyvrirat 7) rovrwy rvp07] r^ tuu weTraiSevfieucou evKOfffiia. 15. 7va 5J \nffacpicTTepou $r)\\ci>^f} iracra r) nepawu iroKiTiia, /xiKphu eirafei/ii (paucis repe- \niam). 4, 25. Kaix^varjs rhu Kvpou air e Kd\\f t, oirus to iv Tlfpacus iwixoopM \neiT iTeKoiT). PI. Apol. 28, d. avTiKa rebvairiv (with the sense of the Pres.), \n\'Lva fir] eVi^aSe fxevoo KaTayeKcuTTOs. \n\nRemark 1. The Subj. often follows an historical tense : (a) in vivid nar \nration, where past actions are regarded as present {objectii\'e manner of repre- \nsentation, \xc2\xa7 327, Rem. 2) ; (b) when the purpose or effect is to be repre- \nsented as continuinf? in the present time of the speaker, (a) Her. 1, 29. :i6\\a>v \naTT (St) fjLTi cr e erea Se/ca, Vvo Stj /x-f] riva ruy v6fiuv av ay Kaff^fj \\v<rai tujv \n(= S}v) t^\xe2\x82\xacTo (Solo7i was absent ten years, in order that he mifjht not be compflleJ, \netc.). 7, 8. \xc2\xa3ruXAo70j/ Tlepaeuu tuv aplffTcov iiro lefro, Xva yvufxas re "rvbr)- \nrai (Tcpewu Kal avrhs Iv iraai elirr) to. ^4\\ei. Th. 4, \\. koI i s ( fif fiX\'tj k \xe2\x82\xac ff ay \na/jLa is rr)y \'P7}yiyccy ol AaKeSat/xovioi, "ya fii) {ol Priylyoi) iir ifior) ^ u ir i to7s \nMicariviois. \xe2\x80\x94 (b) Od. X, 93. rlTrr\' aOr\', & SuaTTjye, Xiiruy <fnios rifKioio IJKvdfS, \no(ppa iSrj y^Kvas koI arfpirfa x\'^poi/. Her. 7. 8. Sih vfitas vvv iyia avfcXc^o, \n\'lya rh ( = &) yoem irp-fjcraeiv vir e pbfwfiai vfjiiv. Dem. Phil. 3, 117.26. toj \nir6\\\xe2\x82\xacis avTuy irapT^pr]rai Kal Ttrpapxlcis Kar e a rrjo\' ey, lya fi^ n6voy Kara t6- \nAeis, hXKa koL Kara ibvt] h o vKevwa ly. PI. Crit. 43, b. \xe2\x82\xaciriTi}i(S ae ovk llyei- \npoy, \'Iva ws t^Sjotto Sidyps. \n\nRem. 2. On the contrary, a preceding principal tense, or an Aor. with Pres. \nsense, is sometimes followctl by an Opt. : (a) when the present of the principal \nclailse is an historical present, or when, in the use of the Pres\xe2\x80\x9e the speaker has \nut tlie same time contemplated a past action : Eur. Hec. 10. troKvy Se <rvy ifioi \nXpvffhy i K IT e fxTT f t \\d^pa iraTrjp, Xy\\ cfTror\' \'iKiov Tflxv Triaoi, to7s ^cixriy ftri \niraial fx^ (nrdvis fiiov. X. An. 4. 6, 1. rovroy 5\' \'F.iri<TbfVfi . .irapaSiiuai ^u- \nXdrreiy, tin us, fi /foAwy i)yi]<Tairo, ex*^" *^\xc2\xb0^ rovroy airloi. Ar. Kan. 24. avrhs \n^aSi^ci) Ka\\ TToyu), rovroy 5\' 6x\'\'>f Xya fiT) raXairai\'wwpoiTO, ftrjS\' &x^os \n(p 4 p I {I let this one ride on an ass = / placed / \n\n7ni(/ht not sujfer hardship), (b) when the speaker;. ^ ,r- \n\npose which a person entertains, not as coming from his own, i. e. the speaker\'s \nmind, but from that of the person himself, so that the intention is indicated as \none that had a ]nevious existence; PI. Rp. 410. h. Sp oZy, ^y 5\' iyv, & VKov- \nKwv, KoL ol Ko^icnaPrfs jxavtriKfj Koi yvfiyatrritcji iraiBfVfiy oi/x oZ (VfKa riyfs oloy \nrai Ka^ icrraa- IV, Iva rfj fxev rh trwfxa ^ epair (v o ivr o, rfi 5c rijy !^i;xi7\xc2\xbb\' \', \n(the A\'icw of the lawgiver, i. e. his puipose). X. An. 2. 4, 4. Jaets S4 tov (0a- \n(Tikfvs) i) airocKaimi ri 1) .airoreixlC^i, on s &iropos fttj if 656s (the view of the \nking), (c) Avhen in the prinoij)al clause, the Opt. stands with or without &y \n[\xc2\xa7\xc2\xa7 259, 3, (a)and 2G0. 2. (4), (a)], tlien an Opt. comnv \xe2\x96\xa0 \xe2\x96\xa0\xe2\x96\xa0 .,. \n\nceptions in the principal and subordinate clause are ^ d \n\ntrom the present time of the speaker (^ 259, 3) ; still, a Suhj. mav follow by \nattraction of the mode, since the present sense of the Opt. is assumed. See \n\xc2\xa7 327l\\ 1. (b). Theogn. 881. elpjivr) koI irKovros \xe2\x82\xacxo\xc2\xab ir6Kiyy 6<Ppa ficr iXXwp \nKC^Trd{^oifxi. Soph. Aj. 1217, sq. yevolfiav, tv vKaev ^-rfart royrov irp60- \n\\r}fx aXiKKvaroy \xe2\x80\x94 , rhs Upas Siruis it poseiTroifJiey \'A^vas. \n\n3. ^Mieii two or more final clauses follow each other, the \nSubj. sometimes interchanges Avith the Opt. The two clauses \nare then placed in a kind of antithesis to each other, tlie former \nrepresenting the result of the purpose or aim as certain. \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 330.] FINAL SUBSTANTIVE CLAUSES. \n\n\n\n526 \n\n\n\nthe latter, \\^thout this accessory idea, and consequently as \nuncertain, undetermined, or only derived from what precedes. \n\nII. 0, 597, sq.^E/CTopt y6.p ol Stvfihs i$oi\\\xe2\x82\xacTO Kddos op4^ai UpiafiiSr,, Ua vnvai \nKopuiuiai ^co-TTiSaes irZp ififidXy aKd^arop, Q4tlSos 5\' i^aiaiou ap^u iraaau i-jri- \nKpi]vm. Her. 9, 51. ^s rovrov S}) rhu x<^pov i^ovX^Uavro ^leraarrimi, \'ivoL \nKou eSoTt tx^<ri. XpStr^a* a.<p^6v(f, koL ol linrees acp^as fih (Tivoiaro, 8,76 \nT^i/5\xe2\x82\xac 5\xe2\x82\xac dvfKiv kvriyov {ol ntpaai) rhs v9ias, \'iva S^ TO?(ri "EAAtjo": ytiTyS^ <piryi^iv \nf\'lp oAA\' a.TroKatJ.(p^fin\xe2\x82\xacs iv rfj ^aKa/juyi 5o7cv riffiy rwu eV \'Apre/jLioia}. \n\n4. The modal adverb av, referring to a conditioning clause \n(generally not expressed), is sometunes joined with the final \nconjunctions <I)s and ottws (more seldom Iva). \n\nOd. e, 167, sq. irfVil\'w 5c rot olpov uTTiabev, 3>s Kf fid\\\' aaK-n^s ff})v naTpidv \nya^av T\xc2\xbbc7joi, at k e ^toi y 4^f\\wa-i. ,^, 20, sq. Kal /iiv ixaKp6T^pou /cal Traff- \n<Tova ^i\\Kf ihtabai, Sis Kt v ^curiKeaffi (pikos irdm-ecra-i yeyoiro (sc. et irphs Toiis \n*air)Kas a<piKoiTo). Her. 3, 44. iSe-rj^, Skws tiv koI trap kuinhv Tre/xypas is 2d- \nfioy SfoiTo arparov (u/, si opus esset, exercitxim a se peteret). X. Cy. 5. 2, 21. \nSik rrjs aris x<^P"^ &|\xc2\xab\xc2\xaby nM\xc2\xabr> Bttus tiv clSufiev, ore Se? <^iAto Kol iroXf/jLia \nyofii^du {in ordtr that, when tve set our foot on the land, we may know, etc.). H. 4. \n8, 16. thuKf xP\'hy^\'^o^ \' htnoLkKlha. iirws iv, irKrjpu)^ e vto s vavr ikov virh \nAaKfSaifjioy lav, 61 rt \'A^vaioi \xc2\xabca2 ol cvfifjuixoi aifruu /jluWov ttjs elp^v7]s \nirpo s 8(011/ TO. \n\n5. Tlic final conjunctions Iva and ws (more seldom ottojs), \nare connected witli tlie Ind. of the liistorical tenses, when it is \nto be indicated that the intended purpose is not accomplished, \nor is not to be accomplished. In tliis case, in the principal \nclause, the Ind. of an liistorical tense stands both with and \nwithout av. See ^ 227^ 1. (a). \n\nAr. Pac, 135. ovkovi/ ixpy^v o"e Tlriydaov ^fv^ai vnpSv, \'6tto>s icpaluov rots \nbfols TpayiKwTipos. PI. Criton. 44, d. cj 70^ HxpiXov oTol re ehai ol ttoWoI rk \n/jLtyia-ra koko, f^(pyd^\xe2\x82\xac<T^au, Iva oTol re 9i<Tav av Ka\\ aya^a to. fxeyiara, Kai \nKoXwi h^ (Ixf- Lys. Siinon.\xc2\xab98, 21. i0ov\\6/j.r}v 5\' &v \'Zlfiava r^v ahr^v \nyvufir}Vy ifioX ^x^^^\'y\'^*\'^ afi<poT(puv Tjfjuov oKOvaavres tolKt]^ paSiws eyvare ra \nSiKoia, \n\n6. Verbs which express care, anxiety, considering, endeavor- \ning or striving, effecting, and inciting, e. g. eTrifieXeLo-Sat, cfypovn- \n^\xe2\x82\xacLV, ScSievat <f}v\\dTT\xe2\x82\xacLv, a-KOTTCLV, aKexf/aa-^at, ^ovXcvea-^at, bpav, ttou\'lv, \n7rpdTT\xe2\x82\xacLV (curare), fx-qxavaa-^ai, irapaKaXeiv, TrapayyiWetv, TrpocLiriiV, \naiTilaSai. a^tow, aye (up then), and the like, are followed by the \nconjunctions oVw? (ottco? /ztJ), sometimes also by o)?, either \n\n\n\nf \n\n\n\n526 SYNTAX. [^ 331. \n\n(according to No. 2) with the Subj. and Opt., or with the Fut \nInd., when the accomphshment of the purpose is to be repre* \nsented as something definitely occurring and cmitinuing. \n\nX. Cy. 1. 2, 3; oi TlipaiKoi v6fioi iir i/xeX ourai, Sir coy T^jr apxh" f^h TotoO- \nrot %<Tovrai ol iroXTrai, oloi {= fisre) trov-qpov ^ cuaxpf^^ epyou i<pU<r^ai. 3. 2, \n13. w y 06 KaAws \xe2\x82\xac|et rh v/xeTepa, ^u <pi\\oi yetmja^e, i/xol fieXijO\'ei. Dem. 01. \n1. 21, 12. a K oirela^e rovro, 2> ivSpes \'A^yaloi, Sirws fi}} \\6yovs ipovfft \np.6vov oi Trap\' v/xwy rrpeaPeis, oAXa koI fpyov ri SeiKUveiv e^ovaiv. PL Ion. 530, \nb. ii7\xe2\x82\xac St], Uttus Kal ra Ylava^vaia v LKi](r o n^v. The Fut. Ind. also stands \nvery often after an historical tense, according to \xc2\xa7 327, Rem. 2 : far more rare \nin this case is the use of the Fut. Opt. X. Cy. 8. 1, 43. ^we/ieXcTTo 5" iirus \nfi-ffre &(riroi, fii\\T\xe2\x82\xac &Troroi irore taoivro. \n\nRem. 3. Sometimes 8 tt w s 6.v is connected witr the Fnt. Ind.. and is then \nto be referred to an implied condition. Her. 3, l.>4. ol \'IvSol Tp6ira) roiovrcp \nKoi C^v^ei pfpewjU6\xc2\xbb\'ot iXavvovfft eVi rhv xpvtrhv \\i\\oyi<Tp.(vwSy Zkus h,u Kavfiarup \nrS)v ^epiioTaTcou iSvruy eaovr ai 4^ rfj apTrayfj (i. e. Srav Koufiara ^fpfiSrara ri). \n\nRem. 4. "Ottcds or \'Sttods fi-f) with the Fut. Ind.. sometimes refers to a \nword to be supplied, viz. Spa, dparf, rule, videte. X. An. 1. 7, 3. 5iroi>y oJJv \n^(rea^e 6,v5pes &^ioi TTJy 4\\(vdfpla5, (see) then that ye are men worthy of liberty. \nPI. Menon. 77, a. dAA* Sirwy fi^ oux otos t* taoiiai xoAAo roiavra Keyfiy. A \nsimilar ellipsis occurs in the phrase, St? a (sc. (TKoir(7y) Ztus in the Attic poets. \nSoph. Aj. 556. 5e?(r* Uttus irarphs 5 e 1 1 e i y iy ^X\'^poiy, oios i^ ou)v Wpdifnis. \n\nRem. 5. Verbs expressing care, anxiety, arc very often followed by Bwus \n(sometimes also by iy) 6.y with the Opt., in order to express the idea of anx- \niety, solicitude how somethinff migJit happen [\xc2\xa7 260, 2, (4), (a)]. In this case, \nSTTcoy and iy are clearly adverbs (noiv). X. Cy. 2. 1.4. )3 ouXci/o-J/tc^o, \n{)7r\xc2\xaby h.v &pi(TTa ay uy i ^olfie ^ a. \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7331. 11. AdJective\'Clauses. \n\nAdjective-clauses are adjectives or participles expanded into \n1 sentence, and, hke adjectives, serve to define a substantive \nor substantive pronoun more definitely. They are intro- \nduccu by the relative pronouns os^ ^, o, osns, ^rts, o ti, \noto9, etc. \n\nOi TToXefiiot, ot avfcpvyov {=^ ol airo<pvy6yTfS iroXffuoi). Tk xpdyfucr<L, ft \n\'AXc\'lavSpoy errpa^fy (to vTrh \'AAe|ov5pou irpax^^yra irpdyfuera or to rov \'AAf^- \nJiuSpov Trpdyfjiara). \'H iroXis, 4y ^ 6 netcrlcrrpoToy rvpayvos ^y (= \'h v^i> tov \nTie KTicrTpdrov rvpavvev^eTa\'a ir6\\is). \n\nRemark 1. Homer often uses the pronoun oy in a demonstrative sense, \nn. <p, 198. ctWo Kol ts Se/SoiKe Aihs ixeydXoio Kfpavv6y. So also. oT \xe2\x80\x94 oT, /Arte, \n{hose, the one, the other. In the Attic writers, as well iis in Ionic prose, this usage \nis confined to the following instances: (a) koI 8 y. \xc2\xabcol ^, instead of koI \noSroy, Kcu avrr]. X. Cy. 5. 4, 4. Ka\\ ts i^airaTrt^cls Si^KU ori itpiros. 4. 5, \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 331.] ADJECTIVE CLAUSES. \n\n\n\n527 \n\n\n\n52. Kol ot y\xe2\x82\xac\\a<rapr,s ,iirou Antiph. 1. 113, 16. kuI ^ ii^icrx^ro. In the ob- \nhque Cases the article (\xc2\xa7247, 3) is used instead of it, e. g. ia\\ -rdu, et ewn.^ \n{h)t>5 ^\xe2\x82\xacy \xe2\x80\x94 hs 5 6 in Demosthenes, yet very seldom, often in later writers \nand earlier in Doric writers, as well as in Hippocrates ; and it occurs not only \nin the >om.. but also in all the Cases of the Sing, and Plural. Dem Cor \n24S.ir6\\\xe2\x82\xaci5 \'EAAWSas tis fiky avaipHv, els &s 5e rovs (pfiydSas Kardywu. \xe2\x80\x94 (c) \nU Kal OS, this and that, n not being determined who, a\xc2\xaby o\xc2\xabe that you please \n(very seldom). Her. 4, 68. ris ^acriK-nlas larias iniSpKW^ ts Kal is exclu- \nsively in the Nom. (in the Ace. rhv kcH t6u, rh koI t6, see \xc2\xa7 247, 3) \xe2\x80\x94 (d^ in the \nphrase ij 5\' 6 y, t? 5\' \xc2\xa5i, said he, she. ^ \' \n\n_ Rem. 2. The reciprocal relation in which the substantive stands to an ad- \njective-clause, and an adjective-clause to a substantive, is expressed thus : a \ndemonstrative adjective pronoun or the article 6 ri r6 standing in a principal \nclause, refers to a relative adjective pronoun standing in a subordinate clause, \nand the latter, on the other hand, refers back to the former, e. g. ovtos 6 \navvp, hu flSfs, rh f)6Sov, h aub(7. So also, toiovtos, oTos, toctovtos. \nSo- OS (\xc2\xa7 326, Kern. 3). But when the object, to which the relative refers, is to \nbe represented as a general one, then the article is omitted, and the relative \nrefers immediately to the substantive, e. g. on7p, &y koXSs iariv {= aur)p Ka- \nX6s). When the relative refers to a personal pronoun, then the relative takes the \nplace of the dem. iyd, \'6s \xe2\x80\x94 (tv, os, etc. When the personal pro- \n\nnouns have no . . -is, they are omitted, and the relative refers to \n\nthe person indicated by the intlection of the verb, e. g. koXus itroiijaas, %s tovto \niirpoL^as. \n\nRem. 3. The demonstrative, to which the relative refers, is often omitted^ \nand not only when the Cases are the same, but when they are unlike, if tha \npronoun has no special \xe2\x80\xa2 i \' i- ; hence especially when the omitted demon- \nstrative denotes some n ;e object, and is equivalent to tIs, some one, or \nwhen the relative 2s, 8stis, may be resolved into siquis. Eur. Or. 591, 3. ydfioi \nS" Sffois fiey fZ wlirroutrii/ ^porwv, (rovrois sc.) /xaKapios aldov ails Se //^ TriirTov- \nffiv \xc2\xab3, (ovToi sc.) Tti t\' tviov flffX rd re bvpa^e Sustvx^^s. Th. 2, 41. ouSej/ \nrposStoiMfyoi otrrt \'Onrjpov itrcuvfrovy o&re [r ivhs SC.) \'6sris eireai /xku rh avriKot- \nTtP^fi icrK. \n\nRem. 4. When the relative is used substantiveli/, i. e. when it refers to a sub- \nstantive pronoun, either expressed or understood, then the adjective-clause, \nlike the adjective standing without a substantive, has the meaning of a sub- \nstaniive, e. g. \'*H\\bou oi &.pi(rroi -ficrav = fi7\\^ov oi &.pi(rT0i (sc. &i/5pes), \xe2\x80\x94 \nHere belongs also, the formula f<TTiu, o\'l, wvy olsy oiis, a. This formula has be- \ncome so fixed, that commonly neither the number of the relative has any \neffect on the verb ^o-n, nor does the tense undergo any change, when the dis- \ncourse relates to pjust or future time : thus it has assumed entirely the charac- \nter of a substantive-pronoun {tt^ioi), and also, since ecrriv may be connected \nwith every Case of the relative, has a full inflexion, e. g. \n\nNora. tarivoX (=tvioi) air4(pvyov \nGen. tar IV wv {= eviwv) airecrx^TO \nDat. tarivots {=4viois) ovx ovtws edo^ey \nAce. tffriy ovs {=^iulovs) aircKreiveu. \n\nThe Nom. ttrriv oT is rare.for example,X.Cy.2.3,18; in place of it, commonly \nel<r\\v oX. Th. 2. 26. KAeJiro/xTros ttjs irapaAaXaffaiov earLvd iSywae. So in the \nquestion. eo-Td/ oTtjj/6s; X.C.I. 4. 2. eo-TJi/ ovsnvas avSrpwTrwvre^av/xaKas \niirX (To<pia : in Xcnophon ^u also occurs. An. 1. 5, 7. "^H v Se tovtuv rwu (Tto^- \nHuy ovs irdvv /xaKpovs tjKavvev {and some of these inarches which he^made, were \nvery long, or he made some of these marches very long). H. 7. 5, 17. rwv iro\\e/xiwi/ \n^y oSs viro<Tir6ySous airtSoiray (there was some of the enemy which they restored by \nIntee^ or they restored some of the enemy by truce). \n\n\n\n1 \n\n\n\n528 SYNTAX. [$ 332. \n\nEem. 6. In like manner, the following phrases, formed with ta-riVy z^m \nUBed wholly as adverbs with reference to all relations of time. 1 \n\nicrrtv \'6 re = eviSre, est quando, i. e. interdum, e. g. co-Ttv ore eXe^ev] \n\near IV \'iva or ottou, est ubi, i. e. aliquando ; \n\neffriv ov or \xe2\x82\xac f ^ a, est ubi, somewhere, in many places ; \n\novK e(r^\' Sttov, nunquam ; \n\niar IV ^ or Sttt;, quodammodo, in many places ; \n\nOVK ear IV ottus, nulla modo, ovk eariv oirus oiij certainly. \n\near IV \'Sir (i)s; in the question, Is it possible, that? \n\n\n\na^ \n\n\n\n$332. Agreement of tfie Relative Pronoun. \n\n1. The relative agrees in Gender and Number with the sub- \nstantive or substantive pronoun (in the principal clause) to \nwhich it refers ; the Case of the relative, however, depends on \nthe construction of the subordinate clause, and hence is deter- \nmined either by the predicate, Cx by some, other word in the \nsubordinate clause, or it stands as the subjecc m the Nom. \n\n*0 av^p, tv elSes, (pi\\os fiov iariv. \'H kperri, ^y iruvres oi ayabol iiri^fiou- \nffiv, neya aya^6v iariv. Ol arpariurai oTs ^/oaxeo\'a/uei^o, avSp\xe2\x82\xaci6TaTot ^aay. \n&avfxa.^ofjLfv Sw^parTj, ov 7] ao(pia neyiarr] t)j/. ^Eiri^viMOvfjiev rrjs aperies, % \n\xe2\x96\xa0nrjyf] iari irdvruv rStv koKwv. \n\n2. The person of the verb in the adjective-clause is deter- \nmined by the substantive or substantive pronoun (expressed or \nimplied) to which the relative refers. AVlien the relative is \nconnected with the first or second person, then the Enghsh uses \nthe form, I am the mie who, Iicho, Thoic uho, etc. \n\n^\'E.ydi}, t) s ypd<pUf av, t s ypd(peis, 6 avfjp or eKelvos, hs ypa<pei. Th. 2, 60. \nifxol roiovrca avSpl opyl^ea^e, ts ovSevhs oXofiai ^aauv elvai. Isocr. Paneg. \nirws OVK ^Sr) MKai6v eariv rj/xas iircuve7v, olrives r^v apxh^ Karcurx^^y \nijd vvTj^T] /lev, X. Cv. 5. 2, 15. koI oiKia ye Tro\\v fieii^cuv r] i/fierepa rijs e^u^T, \noXyeoiKia xpvo\'^^ yfj re Koi ovpav\xc2\xa3. Hence after the Voc, the second per- \nson is regularly used, e. g. iv^puiref ts rj/jLois roiavra Kcuca eiroirfaas. \n\n3. Wlien the relative refers to two or more objects, it is in \nthe plural, and agrees m Gender with the substantives, when \nthey are of the same Gender ; often, however, it is in the neu- \nter, when the substantives denote inajiiniaie objects. Comp \n\xc2\xa7 242, 1, (a), (^). \n\nTh. 3, 97. T] fid-xVi 5iw|ety T\xe2\x82\xac koL xrrayasyai, ev oXs a/Kporepois Tljaaovs ^aav ol^k \n*A^vaioi. X. Cv. 1. 3, 2. (Kvpos) Spuv {rhv ird-mrov) KeKoa/jLTjixevov Kcd o<i>^aA/M\xc2\xbbr ^^ \nt>iroypa<P\'p, kcu xp(*>H-o.ros evrplxpei Kol Koficus irpos^erois, & Sii vofufia ^v ev MytSotu \n\n\n\n1> \n\ni \n\n1 \n\n\n\n^ 332.] AGREEMENT OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUN. 529 \n\nIsocr. Panath. 278, b. ravra eUov, oh tt^s tV ela4$eLau, ohSh irphs tV ^iKatoai- \nvnv^ ou5e TTphs rr]v (pp6yriaiy a.Tro^\\e^\\/as, h. av hiriT^es. \n\n4. If the substantives are of different gender, then the rela- \ntive, when persons are spoken of, agrees in gender with the \nMasc. rather than the Fern., etc. (^ 242, 1) ; but when things \nare spoken of, it is usually in the neuter. \n\nOd. ^, 284. Siauarov Ka\\ Kripa ixfXaiuav, h s Sy (r(pi (Tx^56u 4<rTi. Isocr.de \nPac. 159, a. ^KOfiev iKK\\r)(ndCovres irepi re TroXe/iou Ka\\ dp-qvqs, & neyi<TT7}v ex^t \nUvafiiv eV Ty fiiu, Twv avStpwnwv. Dcm. Cor. 317, 273. iKmSaiy koI Cv^^ov koi \nTifiwu, & irdm-a irposTji/ Tors t6t\xe2\x82\xac irpaTTOfiivoLS wr\' ifxov. PI. Apol. 18, a. eV e/cetj/r? \nr^ (Poyrj re koI t^ TpSirw iv ofsirep irebpdfjLfjLfju. Sometimes, also, the rela- \ntive takes the gender of the last substantive, e. g. Isocr. 1. d. 163, a b. fiv Se tV \ni]pi]vt)v iroi7}(Tufx(^a, fifra iroWris a(T<pa\\eias tV ttoAlv olK-fjo-ofieu, cLTraKKay^vTes \niroXifiav KoiX KivSvvwv Kal rapaxv^, eh ^ v vvv vphs oAAtjAous KareffTiiixev. \n\n5. The following exceptions occur to the rule stated under \nNo. 1, respecting the agreement of the relative :- \n\n(a) Constructio Kara crv\'vco-tv (\'5 241, 1), not often in prose \nwith the names of persons, but frequently with collective nouns, \nor substantives which are to be considered as such. \n\nHer. 8, 128. irepieSpafJie OfiiXos \xe2\x80\x94 , ot avriKa rh rS^ev/jLa XafiSvres \xe2\x80\x94 ecpepov \nfirl Toi\xc2\xbby (TTpaT-qyous. Th. 3, 4. tJ> Twv\'A^rjualwu vavr ik6u, oi wpfJLOVj/ iu ry \nMaXea. PI. Phaedr. 260, a. irXri^ei, o\'lirep SiKacrova-i. \n\nRemark 1. The following cases belong here : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) The substantive to which the relative refers, is in the Sing., but the rela- \ntive in the P/., wlicn it does not refer to a definite individual of the class, but \nto the ichole class, and in this way takes the signification of oTos. .This usage, \nhowever, is more frequent in poetry, than in prose. Od. ft, 97. Krjros, & fj.vpia \n$6(rKfL aydcTTOvos \'AficptrpiTrj, Pi. Rp. 554, a. avxi^VP^^ 7^ \'"\xe2\x96\xa0\'^ ^^ \'^c\'^ ^\'"\'^ iraurhs \nTtepiova-iav Troiovfxfuos,^(TavpoTToihs auripy ovs ^^ [cujusmodi homines) Kal iiraiuel \nrh irXrj^os. \n\n(b) On the contrary, a relative in the singular refers to a PL substantive, \nwhen the relative has a collective signification, e. g. ostis, ts 6,v with the Subj.. \n\n\n\n\nTrarSas Kai yvyaiKas KreivovTfs. PI. Rp. 566, d. aa-rrdCeTaL rrdvTas, (p av \nir ep IT vyxdyrj. \n\nRem. 2. The relative is put in the Neut. without reference to the gender \nof its substantive, when the idea contained in the substantive is not to be con- \nsidered as a particular one, but as general (\xc2\xa7 241, 2), or when the relative is not \nso much to be referred to the substantive alone, as to the whole sentence, o. \nO. T. 542. dp\' oi\xc2\xbbxi iJi^pov eo-Tt TovyxeipVf^d (Tov, dvev re ttXtj^ous Kal (piXcoy r v - \npavui S a Sn)paVy % xP\'hl^a^^*\' i^\' aXlaKcrai. \n\n45 \n\n\n\n] \n\n\n\n530 SYNTAX. [^ 332 \n\n(b) Connection of the Dual with the Pkiral (^ 241, 5). \n\nTo) )(\xe2\x82\xac2pe, as 6 Sebs cttI to avXXafx^dveLV aXX-^Xaiv liroi-qareVy X. \nC. 2. 3, 18. \n\n(c) When a predicative substantive, in the adjective-clause, \nis in the Nom. {k 240, 2) or in the Ace. (k 280, 4), the relative, \ninstead of agreeing in Gender and Number with its substan- \ntive, by a kind of attraction often takes the Gender and Num- \nber of the predicative substantive, which is considered the more \nimportant. \n\nHer. 2, 7. r] bZhs rrphs 7]S> rpeireTcu, rh {= h) KoXUrai UriKovffioP \n(rrSfia. 5, 108. r^v 6.Kpriv, oi KoXevmcu < ATjfSes rrjs Kinrpov. 7, 54. \nU e p (T iKhu ^i<pos, rhy {=hy) clk lyaKTjv KtXfovcri. PI. Phaedr. 255, c. iy \nrod f>iVfiaTos eKfivov Trrjyr], t)v "fitpov Zevs rcu/iz/i^Sous ipwy uyofiaure. Phileb. \n40, a, \\6yoL etaiv iy (KacTTOts ijfiaiy, hs iKiriSas oyo/xd^Ofity. \n\nKem. 3. So also, when the relative does not follow its own substantive im- \nmediately, but a predicative substantive, it sometimes agrees by means of at- \ntraction with the latter, as being the more important, instead of agreeing with \nthe former. PI. L. 937, d. nal SIkv iv avbpwirois irus ov Ka\\6y,h itlyra TifiA- \npwK\xe2\x82\xac ra oLf^pwirtya ; Gorg. 460. e. ovSeiror\' h.v (Xrj i} {>TiTop ik^ iSiKoy trpay- \nfia, by oei Trepl SiKaioavyrjs roi/s \\6yovs ttokItou. \n\n6. Wlien the relative would be in the Ace, and refers to a \nsubstantive in the Gen. or Dat., then, when the adjective-clause \nhas almost entirely the force of an attributive adjective, tlie \nrelative commonly assumes the form of its substantive, i. e. the \nrelative takes the same Case as its substantive. Tliis con- \nstruction is called attraction. Attraction also takes place, when \ninstead of the substantive, a substantive demonstrative {k 331, \nRem.), is used. The demonstrative, however, is omitted, when \nit contains no special emphasis. By means of attraction, the \nsubstantive is frequently transposed and stands in the adjective- \nclause. See No. 8. \n\nTh. 7, 21. tSiyftsy airh t wv -rrSXcwv wy thnurf {= roiiv irfKTbfKTKv) arpaTidr. \nX. Cy. 3. 1, 33. (Tvy ro7s ^-qa avpo7s oTs S iraT^jp KarfXtxey (= rois irrh toS \niraTphs KaraX\xe2\x82\xaci<pb(7<Tiv). 2. 4, 17. Strore oxt irpo\xe2\x82\xac\\rt\\v^oirts <rvy p ^X<"^ Svrdfitu \n3. 1, 34. iyi} 67ri<rx\xc2\xbb\'ot5/toi, ^y 6 ^ehs \xe2\x82\xacv 5<5<^, ov^ wr tty ifiol Saye\'urps 6X\\a wKeio- \nV05 fi|ja eve/yyeri^cretv (instead of avrl Tovrocf^a.). PI. Gorg. 519, a. iray rh ao- \n;;^a?o irposaTroWvaxri vphs oTs iKTrja-ayro (instead of irpbs toutois, a). Phaed. 70, \n\xc2\xbb. (7; ^vxh) awriWayneyrf rovrajv Ttcv KaKuv wy crh vvv S)) SnjXi^s. Isoor. \nPaneg. 46, 29. S>v iXa&^y avaaiv ^creSwKev (instead of rovrwy &). Evag 198. \nroiovTots ^^eaiy olois Evayopas fx^y e?xf\xc2\xbb\'- Th. 5. 87. iK rSiy mp6vTvp \nKoi &v 6paT\xe2\x82\xac (instead of koI iK rovruy, & dpart). The preposition is frequently \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 332.] ATTRACTION OF THE RELATIVE IRONOUN. 53] \n\n\n\nL\xe2\x82\xacTor \n\n\n\nrepeated, e. g. Dem. Chers. 96, 26. o (/>\' \xc2\xab j/ ^yeipei koI TrposaiTe7 Ka\\ SavelCe \nairh Tovruv Sidyei (instead of airh tovtwv SidyiL S)v ayeipei or d^\' at \nayelpfi \xe2\x80\x94 Sidyei without avh tovtuv). \n\nRem. 4. By attraction, the adjective-clause acquires entirely the nature of \nan adjective or participle, which combines with its substantive to form a single \nidea, and which also agrees with it in form, e. g. xa/pw Tats eiria-roXals \nofs eypaxiias (= x\xc2\xab\'\'P<^ toTs inrh aov ypa0\xe2\x82\xaciaais eTncrToAarj). The blending of \nthe adjective-clause with its substantive by attraction, is still more clear and \nbeautiful, when the adjective-clause is transposed and stands in the place of the \nsubstantive, e. g. xouV"^ O\'^s typaxpas iiria-T o\\a7s. \n\nRem. 5. When predicative substances or adjectives belong to an attract- \ned relative, these also must be attracted. Dem. Cor. 325, 298. e>e ovre Kaiphs \nvposrrydyiTO wv (Kpiva SiKaiwu koI (Tv jxcp ^ p6 yr oiv rrj iraTpiSi ovSku irpoSov- \nyai (instead of a (Kpiya SUaia koI avfjLCpepovTa). Fh.2.70, 17. ols ovaiv vfisT\' \nfpois (\xe2\x99\xa6iA.iiriros), r out ov s a.(T(pa\\ws KeKrrjTai. \n\nRem. 6. The Nom. and Dat. of the relative very seldom suffer attraction, \nTh. 7, 67. ToAAol (yrjts) (taarai is rh ^Kd-rrrea^ai atp\' wv rjfuv TrapecrKevacnai \n(instead of airh rovTuv^ d). X. Cy. 5. 4, 39. ^yero Se koI twv kavrov twv re \n\xe2\x96\xa0wiffTwy, ols ^StTo, Kal us v (f<jr iKfivwv, ois) \xe2\x96\xa0^irto\'Tet iroKXovs (i. e. secum duxit \nmultus suoruiiij et jidurunt. (juibuis ddectabiitiir, et eorum, quibus diffidebat). \n\nRem. 7. Adverbs of place, also, sometimes suffer attraction, the relative \nadvorl) taking the form of the demonstrative adverb, or, when instead of the \ndemonstrative adverb a substantive precedes the form which expresses the \ndirection denoted by the substantive. Th. 1, 89. SieKoiiiCovTo cv^vs (sc. eVreO- \ndfv) o!i(y (instead of oZ, ulu) virf^f^eyro iraiSas. S. Fh. 481. ifx^aXov fj.\' otttj \ndf\\(is iywy, is dyr Kiay, is irpupav, is irpvfi,yr)v oiroi (instead of ou, \nubi) ^Kurra /icAAw foiis irapdyraLS akyvyety. \n\n7. The relatives 0109, 00-09, o<;tlsovv, rj\\Uo<s, are attracted \nf not only iu the Ace. but also in the Nom., when the verb elvat \nand a subject formally expressed are in the relative clause, \ne. g. oloi (TV tZ, olos tKilvo^ or 6 SojKparr/? iarl (such OS you are, such \nCLs lie or Socrates is). This attraction is made in the following \nmanner. The demonstrative in the Gen., Dat, or Ace, to which \nthe relation refers, is omitted, but the relative is put in the Case \nof the preceding substantive or (omitted) substantive demon- \nstrative, and the verb ctmt of the adjective-clause is also omit- \nted, and the subject of the relative clause is put in the Case \nof the relative. Such a blended or attracted adjective-clause \nhas, m all respects, the force of an inflected adjective; the \nconnection of the adjective-clause with its substantive is still \nmore complete and intimate, when the substantive is placed in \nthe adjective-clause ; for example, in the fuU and natural form \nof the sentence xap^\'^o/iat dvSpi toiovto), oXo<i av d, by omittmg the \ndemonstrative rotovra), to which the relative olo\'i refers, by at- \nti-acting olos into the Case of the preceding substantive dvS/>4 \n\n\n\n532 \n\n\n\nSYNTAX. \n\n\n\nl\\ 332. \n\n\n\nand by omitting cT of the adjective-clause and attracting the \nsubject av into the Case of the relative, we have the common \nform )(apL^ofxat avSpl olio croi, or, by transposition, \xe2\x80\xa2^aplt.oftai out* (to\\ \navhpi. In English the above relatives may be translated by as \nor such as. \n\n\n\nipu olov aov \nXapiC^fJMi otu <rol \nitraivu) olov a i \n\nip(ji> oXo) V V flUV \nXapiC\xc2\xb0f^\xc2\xb0^ oTotj vfjiiy \nitraiva) o1 ov s v fias. \n\n\n\nGen. ipu o\'lov (Tov avSp6s \n\nDat. x^\'P^C\'^M*\' o\'lca <rol a vS p i \n\nAcc. inaiyu olov at 6.vhpa \n\nGen. ipS) oloiv vfxSbv avhpuv \n\nDat. x^P^Coj"\'\'** olois iifily avZpiaiv \n\nAcc. iiraivu o\'lov s vfias &ySpas \n\nTh. 7, 21. irphs &p^pas roKfiripovs oXovs Kol \'A^tjvalovs (instead of oHoi \n*A^r]i/a7oi dffiv). Lucian. Toxar. c. 11. ov <pav\\oy rh tpyoy, aySpl olw ffol voK- \nfjiicrrfi fioi/oiJLaxv<rat. PI. Soph. 237, C. oXf -ye ifiol -rayrdircura\' iwopop \n(sc. iarl, instead of T(p toiovtw, 6i6s ye iya> ufii, &.wop6y i<my). Her. 1, 160. \niirl fiio-b(^ oao} 5^ {mercede, quantulacunque est). PI. Rp. 335, b. f<rrw ipa iiKoioh \ni.uSphs ^KdiTTfiy koI bvT ivov v avbpanruy (instead of ati^puiruy koI Smsovp \niariy). X. An. 6. 5, 8. iffrijaav oire\'xoKTcr Haoy ir f yrtKaii fKa arailovs \n(instead of rotrovro, S<rov tlal ir. trrctSioi). \n\nRem. 8. Attraction also takes place, when olos or oJos t\xc2\xab, is n\xc2\xbbed in- \nstead of \xc2\xa3sT\xe2\x82\xac, and is constructed with the Inf., sigmifving, / am of such a na- \nture, character., thai (is sum <jui with the Sulij.). lience / cftn, am \' am \nreadi/ (\xc2\xa7 341, Rem. 2). Dem. 01. 1. 23, 19. (wfpl ainhy \xe2\x99\xa6jA.ixtto. . i- - \nr ovs aybpuir ovs oXovs yah vab fvr as opx^^o^O\'i- Luc. iiermot. c. 76. \nSrciJiKcp T oiovT a) oX<f> (x-qre \\vir(7<Thai ixitr\' opy i((<rhat. Tlie demon- \nstrative is commonly omitted. X. C. 1. 4, 12. fi6yriy r^y rwy iu^dpanrwy \n{yXwrr ay) iiroiijo\'ay [oi htol) oXay kphpovy re r^y ifxayifyf k. r. K. \n\nRem. 9. When the adjective-clause has the sig:nification of a substantive \n(\xc2\xa7 331, Rem. 4). the article is sometimes placed before the attracted oTos, \nrjKiKos, and in tJiis way, the adjective substuntive-clause acquires entirely \ntlic fi)rce of an indected substantive, e. g. \n\noi otoi vfi\xc2\xab7s aySpts \nTwy oXuy vfiQ>y iwSpeiy \nrois oXois it^kiy kyipdaiw \nTovs oXovs vfJMS SiySpas. \n\nX. Cy. 6. 2,2. oi oTol irep vfieXs AySpts iroXXdiKis teal ra 0ov\\(t>6iJifya icara\' \n(xav^dvovaiy {men like you). H. 2. 3. 23. yydyres ro7s oXois Vfity t\xc2\xab ical \nv(j.7v x\'^^f""^*\' "\'oAjTf/a*\' fivai hr\\y.0KpaTiav (such men as ut and ifou). Ar. \nEocl. 465. (KeXyo Seiyhy To7<riy t] KLkoic i yify (instead of imKucovToiSy \'^Xiiroi \nv(^ ia/xfy). \n\nRem. 10. A similar kind of attraction occurs also in such modes of ex- \npi\'essiou as hav /lacrThy S<roy irpoi\xc2\xbbx\xc2\xab*\'pi7<\'\'c = davfixurrSy i<my iffoy wpovxtlt- \npriae (mirum quantum processit. instead of mirum est, quantum processerit). \nEven in PI. Rp. 351, d. juera Ibpwros b avfiaar ov Saov (instead of davfuurrSw \niariv nch\' baov). Hipp. M. 2S2. c. xP)MO\'\'\'o eXo^f davfiaark 5<ra (instead \nof hav/xaa-rdv (criv, haa). Her. 4. 194. oi 8c (sc. ttL^koi) apt &<pboyoi Saoi \n4y To7s obpfai yivoyroi. Also in the adverbs davfiaor Us oi s, hav na<r itts \nuSi etc., e. ^.bav/xaa- iws ws &h\\ios yeyovt ( instead of ^Vfuiai6y imriy, us &hKu\xc2\xbb$ \nytyove). PI. Pliaed. 66, a. ixe p<pv a> s ojs dAi}<^i) Xeytis. Symp. 173, C \nvir t p((>vw s a>s x<^P^> instead of irrfp<pv4s itrriy^ ois xaipot. \n\n\n\nNom. \nGen. \nDat. \nAcc. \n\n\n\nd 01 OS <Tv ayrip \nTOV oXov (TOV avhp6s \nT^ oto) <To\\ avhpi \nrhy oJov cf avSpa \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 332.] INVERTED ATTRACTION OF THE RELATIVE. 533 \n\nRem. 11. Sometimes an attraction takes place in the adjectire-clause di- \nrectly the opposite of that mentioned under No. 6, the substantive beins \nattracted mto the Case of the relative which refers to it, instead of the \nrelative mto the Case of the substantive. This is called invented attrac- \ntion vAttraciio mversa). This attraction occurs most frequentlv when the \nsubstantive of the principal clause attracted bv the relative, \'would -^tanc \nm the ^.ora.or Ace. S. Tr. 283. rds^ (instead of ai\'5\') fisTrep dsoois, H \n\n\n\n\nlomonstrative pronoun is found in the principal \nclause, to M. \' \'of the substantive which is attracted into the Case \n\nand mto th. ..relative. VL^Sl^n.^^, c. i^ixoXoyiiKaiJi^v, -rpdy fxa- \n\nroi ov firrrf BibatTKoAoiy fiitrf na^rjTcd eiev, tovto SiSaxrhv fj.i} ehai. \n\nRem. 12. This inverted attraction is very common with ovSels Sstis \nov after an omitted tVnV. PI. Prot. 317, c. ohSfyhs otov ov irivrav &j/ \nilJMV $fa^" riKiKlay -Kar^p (trjy (there is no one of yon all whose father I mi<jht not be, \nconsUhring my age). Phaed. 117, d. kXouuv koI ayavaKTuv ovS4va ovriva ob \nKariKKaiHTf rwv -KopovTuv. Dem. Cor. 295, 200. irepX wv ov54i>a klvSvvov \niv-riw ovx {rwffidyay ol irpoyovoi. In this way the phrase ovSels osns ov \nappears as a pronominal substantive [nemo no/ij, which can be declined throuo-h \nail the Cases, e. g. \'^ \n\n\n\nNora. \n\nGen. \n\nDat. \n\nAce. \n\n\n\novh(\\s ?jT<y ovK hv Tavra TToiriaeiev \n\novS f yhs 5tou oil KareyiKaafy \n\nouScvl Stoj oi/K aneKpiyaTo \n\noi/S ( ya SvTivo ov KaTtK\\av(T(y. \n\n\n\nRem. 13. T\' \' \xe2\x80\xa2 ion is also fonnd sometimes ^\\nth adverbs of \n\nplace, the den takinj; the form of the relative. S. 0. C. \n\n1227. finyeu \xc2\xabrc<d(v 6dey wtp V (instead of Kflaf, o^ey). PI. Crit. 45, b. \n9oWaxov ykp Kol &.K\\o(r\xe2\x82\xac Siroi tu^ aipiiaj, ayairfiaoval cr\xe2\x82\xac (instead of aWaxov \nttroi). \n\n8. The adjective-clause very frequently stands before the \nprincipal clause ; then, when the relative refers to a substan- \ntive, the sul)stantive is transferred from the principal to the \nadjective-clause (though it is not generally placed immediately \nafter the relative), and is governed by the verb in the adjective- \nclause. Tliis change of the substantive into the adjective- \nclause is called tnuisposition. When the attributive relation \nexpressed by the adjective-clau.se, is to be made emphatic, a \ndemonstrative, referring back to the substantive wliich is joined \nwith the relative, is suppHed in the principal clause ; tliis \ndemonstrative, however, is often used for perspicuity also. \nTlie substantive can also be transposed, when the demonstra- \ntive stands before the adjective-clause. \n\n*Oy TitULS -KoXXk aya^a ivoi-naey, ovros airtbav^v, OX % s was TroWa aya^h \niTroir)<T(v, airiSiaviyy or ovtos aTribayfv, %s vfuis /ct\\., OT aireStaycy, hs ktA. \xe2\x80\x94 \n\'Oy flSfS iySpOy ovr6s iariy, or ovris iariv, hv elSes &ySpa. PI. Lys. \n222, d. ireOuv &pa, ots rh irpwroy \\6yovs arreficLK6fi\xe2\x82\xac^a vepl (ptXlas, els rov- \n\n45* \n\n\n\n634 SYNTAX. [^ 333 \n\nrovs elsTreiTTdoKaixsv. Eur. Or. 63, sq. ^ v ykp kut oXkovs \xe2\x82\xac\\i<p\', or* is Tpoiar \nfTTAet, irdp^ev ou . . ravrri yeyrj^e. \n\nHem. 14. When attributive adjectives belong to the substantive, they are \nfrequently separated from their substantive in the principal clause, and intro- \nduced into the adjective-clause, when they serve at the same time to explain \nmore fully the adjective-clause or are to be made emphatic. Or the substantive \ntogether with the attributives is introduced into the adjective-clause. Some- \ntimes also the attributive adjective remains, while the substantive with which \nit agrees, is transferred to the adjective-clause ; then the attributive is emphat- \nic. Eur. Or. 842. i^6tvC \'HKeKTpa, \\6yovs 6.Kovaov, ovs <roi SvsTvxfis \'\'A\xc2\xab \n(pepwv {hear the words which I bring to you as sad, i. e. the sad words, etc.). Th. 6, \n30. ro7s OTr\\ois xal \'Sar] &\\\\tj irapacTKe vtj ^vyfiirero, irpSrepoy fXpTiTO ktK, \n(instead of kolL rfj &\\\\r] irapaaKevfj, o<Tr]). Eur. H. F. 1164. riKco ^i/y &A.Aoif, \n? Trap" \'A(T(t>Trou f)oas pifvovcriv tv ottKoi yris ^A^yatwy Kopoi. As. Ran. 889. \nCT e poi yap elcLU, oTciv etjxofj-ai ^fo7s] \n\nRem. 15. A word in apposition with the substantive to which the relative \nclause refers, is sometimes attracted into the subor<^ \n\nupon that clause for its government. In this case ju ^ ^ , - \n\ntive serves to explain more fully the adjective-clause. Od. a, 69. K6K\\uiros \nKfx^^\'^\'^\xc2\xb0-^i ^^ 6(p^a\\fA.ov aKa.u)ff(y ayrl^eov HoKv^rjfACV {whom Ulysses \nblinded, althouf/h he was the fjod-like Pol^/ihemus). PI. Ilipp. Maj. 281, c. ri wore \nrh aiTiou, OTL oi traXaiol iKc7yoi, wv oySuara nfyaKa Xty^Tou 4irl aotpia^ \nHit T aK ov K al Blayr os, (paiyoyTat airexoH-^^oi Tuy iroXiTuciiy irpa^fcey ; \n\n9. Wlien the adjective-clause has another clause subordinate \nto itself (or a participle used instead of such clause), the two \naie commonly united, the relative, instead of taking the con- \nstruction of its own adjective-clause, taking that of the subor- \ndinate clause, i. e. the relative has the constmction wliich the \nomitted demonstrative of the subordinate clause would have \nhad ; in such cases there is no relative connected with the ad- \njective-clause. \n\nIsocr. de Pace p. 16, 168. av^punrovs alpovfie^a rovs fifv dWAtSa;, tows 8* cano- \nPl6Kovs., oXs 6ir6rav ris irKelova fiiabhy SiJ^J, /xer* iKelvwy 4^\' tjhos \naKoKov^i^covaiy (instead of o", dvdray ris avroTs 5i5y, axoKov^aovtriy). \nPI. Rp. 466, a. oTi Tovs ({>v\\aKas ouk (vSaSnoyas Troio7fjLfy, ols i^hf rdrra \n^X^*** \'\'\'^ Tciv TT oKiT a>y, ovSey c x \xe2\x80\xa2" * \xc2\xbb* 5 ( instead of oT, ^{^\xc2\xbb\' ainois \xe2\x80\x94 , ovSiy \ne\'xoJei\'). Dem. Phil. 3, 128, 68. iroWa h.y (lirfly txoi^v \'\'OXvybioi yvy, & t6t* fl \nIT poeiS ovT 0, ovK &v aTTwXoyTo (instead of ot, \xe2\x82\xaci ravra t6t\xe2\x82\xac xpoeiS.f ovk tty or.). \n\n\n\n$333. Modes in Adjective- Clauses. \n\n1. Tlie Lidicative is used, when the attributive relation ex- \npressed by the adjective-clause, is to be represented as actual \nor reed, e. g. rj ttoXis, rj \'KTi^erat, rj eKTiaSTj, yj KTurStfo-CTai. The Fut. \nInd. is very frequently used (even after an historical tense, \n\n\n\n4 333.] MODES IN ADJECTIVE CLAUSES 535 \n\n^ 327, Rem. 2), to denote wliat should be done or the purpose \n\n(k 255, 3), e. g. o-rparrjyoi"; alpovvTai, ot rw ^iXtTnTia TroXefx.-^crov- \n\n<r L V {they choose generals who sliould carry on war, or to carry on \n\nwar). Also after negatives, the Greek employs the Ind., where 4%^^^^- \n\nthe Latin has the Subj., e. g. Trap c/xot ovScts, ostis /x^ iKavos \n\ncoTtv to-a TToiciv\' \xe2\x82\xac/xot {iicnio, qui lion possit). \n\n2. The Ind. is also used, as in Latm, in such adjective- \nclauses, as are introduced by the indefinite or generalizing rela- \ntives, e. g. 09Tt9, quisquis, 6<m<: ^, quicunque, octtls hrj ttotc, ocros "^^ \'^^^ \nSy, oo-os ovv, quantuscufique, ottoctos, ottoo-osoCi\', etc. \n\nHer. 6, 12. Sov\\rit7]v vwotxilvai, ^tis ear at, quaUscungiie erit. X. An. 6. 5, \n6. ^dairroy, dir6<rovs i tt \xe2\x82\xac Kdfxfi ay ey t] arpaTid. Here t le idea of indefinite- \nness is denoted by the rdative ; but ilFis othenvise, when this idea is contained \nin the predicate^ see No. 3, and 4. \n\nKeuark 1. Tlie Fut. Ind. with \xc2\xab\xe2\x82\xac (only Epic) is used, when it is to be \n.\' " * 1. that somethint; will take place in the future under some condition \n, 2. (1)]. II. <, 155. iy 5\' &v5pes vaiovffi \xe2\x96\xa0rro\\vpf>r}yes, voXvfiovTai oT k4 k \n\nhu)rnrri(Ti bthy &s T ifx-f)(r ov (T ly {w/io will fvoiior hi iiL, IF he shall C03IE to \nthem). \n\n3. Tlie relative with av, e. g. Ss av, rj av, o av, 05x15 av, etc., is \nfollowed by the Subj., when the verb of the principal clause is \na principal tense (Pres., Perf., or Fut.), if the attributive rela- \ntion expressed by the adjective-clause, is to be represented as \none merely conceived or assumed. Hence it is also used in in- \ndefinite specifications of quality or size, and also to denote \nirule finite frequency (as often as, \xc2\xa7 227**, 2). The adjective- \nclause can commonly be considered as a conditional clause, i. e. \nas one wliich expresses the condition under wliich the action \nof the principal clause will take place ; and the relative with \ndv can be resolved into the conjunction idv vnih tU or any other \npronoun followed by the Subj. \n\nX. Cy. 3. l,20.otstLy{= idyriyas) $e\\Tlovs rives eavruy fjylja-uyrai, rovrois \nwoWaKis Kol &yeu aydytajs i^eKovai ireiS^eff^ai. 1.1,2. duStpwiroi eV ovSeyas fiaWuu \navy\'iaravrai, ^ iirX rovrovs, ot>s tiv {= edv riyas) ataStwyrai &pxeiy avruv eiriX\' \nttpovyras. 7. 5, 85. & y tiv Sp a> ra Ka\\a koI raya^a iirirnSevoyras, rovrovs rifi-fj- \n<Tu. S. S,5. 6no7ol rives yap tiy ol irpoffrdrai Sxrt, roiovroi Kat 01 vn avrov5 \nws M tJ> iroXu ylyvovrai. Her. 6. 139. v Uv^in (TCpeas (KeXevei) \'ASn]vaioicri BiKas \nBiUvai ravras, rks {= as) tiv avrol \'A^va7oi SiKd(rw(ri (quascuxQDE-- \nconst it iieri lit). II. ^,391. tv 5 e \xc2\xab\' iyu>y aTrdveu^e fidxvs i^e\\oyra yo7)<rca \nmtLydCeiv irapa vnvffl Kopuylcriy, oH 01 eireira &pKioy iacre^rai ^vyeexy Kwas ^8* \naittyovg (a8 OFTEN AS / percsive or shall perceive). \n\n\n\n536 SYNTAX. [^ 333. \n\nRem. 2. Tlie Subj. is also used, when the adjectire-clause forms a member \nof a comparison, viz. when the attributive idea expressed by the adjective-clause \nis the condition or assumption, under which the object to which the adjective- \nclause refers, belongs to the comparison. In this case, the princ-ipal clause \nmay have either a principal or historical tense. II. v, 179. 6 Z\' aW iiraTevy \nfieXU] ws, 1^ t\' 6peos Kopv(p^ , . xoA/coS Tajxvofi4y7f rtpeua x^oj/i (piXXa ire Kdaerri. \np, 110. &ST\xe2\x82\xac \\7s 7]vy eyetos, \'6 y (>a Kvvts re Koi 6.vZpes airh (Tto^/xoTo Sicevrai. \n\nRem. 3. The modal adverb au is so closely united with the relative, as to \nform with it one word, as in orau, itrdu, etc., ^ 260, 2. (3) (d), and hence .should \nbe separated from the relative only by smaller words, such as 5c\', i \' \' is \nvery frequently omitted in the Homeric languafrc, often also in the Ti ,_ is, \nand sometimes in Herodotus, seldom in the Attic prose-writers. \n\n4. The relative {icitliout av) is connected with the Opt, in \n\\ki.Q first place, v^iWx the same sigLification as when followed \nby the a.v and the Subj. (No. 3), but referring to an historiccu \ntense in the principal clause, lience it is used in general and \nindefinite statements ; also in expressing indefinite frequency \n{} 227^ 2), \xe2\x80\x94 in wliich case the verb of the principal clause is \nusually in the Impf or in the Iterative Aor. Here, also, the \nadjective-clause may be resolved by ci with the Opt. \n\nTh. 7, 29.^0*^01 f|fjs Sry {=^ iX rivi) ivTvxoiev, icai vcuSas koI fvyauKOi \nKTiiuoures. II. )3, 188. \'6v t tya {= iX riva) yikv $ari\\^)a Kal ^oxoy 6ySpa kix^^V \nrhv S^ ayayo7s iirtfaffiy ipt]r ixraff kc TrapatrTds. 198. hv S\' ai Hifiov r* 6yipa \n15oi, fioSwurd r i (p tv poi, rhy (TK-fjirrp^ i \\d<rac k \xc2\xab. Th, 2, 67, \xc2\xbbi\xc2\xa3ja\'ay yiip \nS)} Kar^ apxo-S tov troXfiJ.ov ol AoKfSainuyioif oaovs {= ft rtras) KafioKy 4p \nTTJ ^a\\d(Tcrr}f is iroXefiiovs 5if<p^fipoy. X. Cy. 3. 3, 67. .\' - \' -^ f t\' o i\xc2\xbb (f i {IlisL \nPrcs.), OTOJ iyTvyx<\'-*\'0^^*\'t /^^ ^<iO\'\xc2\xab"\'\xc2\xab \n\n5. In the secoyid place, the Opt. {xcithout av) is used without \nreference to the tense of the principal clause, when the attrib- \nutive relation expressed by the adjective-clause is to be repre- \nsented as a mere siqypositioyij conjecture, or assumption. Then, \nthe adjective-clause is to be considered as an uncertain, doubt- \nful condition [k 259, 3, (a)], \n\nX. Cv. 1. 6, 19. ToG/iev avrhy Xeyeiy, & /u^ aa<p6is f IS fir), ^iStabw. 9ft {he \nmust Imcare of saying anything, which he does not knotc, or if he does not know li). \nFor examples of Optatives used by moans of an attraction of the mode, see \n\xc2\xa7 327b, 1, Ar. Yesp. 1431. (pSoi ns, i)v ckoo-tos tlSeiri t^x*^" (<"\'." \'^""\' *^^\'* \npractise the art with which he is acquainted (= if he is acquainted with it). \n\n6. The Opt. tcith av is used, when the attributive relation ex- \npressed by the adjective-clause is to be represented as a comli- \ntional supposition, conjecture, assumption, or ufidctemnticd possi\' \nhUitij \\} 260. 2, (4) (a)]. \n\n\n\n537 \n\n\n\n4 334.] ADJECTIVE AND SUBORDINATE CLAUSES. \n\nX. C. 1. 2, 6. XwKpdTT,s Tohs \\afifidvovTas t^s SfiiXias fiKr^hi^ auSpaTTodKrrhs kavrSiP \niire\xc2\xbbca\\\xe2\x82\xaci, Jii rh avaryKalov avroTs ehai dia\\4ye(r^ai, Trap\' av tv \\d&o lev rhp \niuaUv (from whom they might or could receive a reward). PL Phaed. 89. d. ohx \nHaTiyi ri &u TLs ixf7Cov roirou KaKhy ndStoi (there is no evil which any one could \nexperience greater than this). \n\n7. The Ind. of the historical tenses is used with av, when it \nis to be indicated that the attributive idea denoted by the ad- \njective -clause could exist only under a certain condition, but \ndid not exist, because the condition was not fulfilled [^ 260. 2 \n(2). (a)]. \n\nOd. \xc2\xab, 39, sq. ir6K\\\' Za" tiv ouScVotc Tpolris e^^por \'OZvaceis, elfirep ott^ \niiu)v ^\\bt, \\axiiv airh \\r)tSos aJaoLV. Eur. Med. 1339. ovk icriv \'^tis tovt\' \ntv \'EAA.tji\'Ij yvvT] (r\\rj (qitae sustinuisset hoc). PI. Apol. 38, d. ots Uv (\\6yois) \nt-Ktiffa^ \xc2\xabi tfifii}w Suy airayra Toi(7y kcu \\fyciv. On the Ind. of the historical \ntenses in intennediate clauses of a conditional proposition, see \xc2\xa7 327b, i. (a). \n\nRkm. 2. On the Inf. in adjective-clauses, in the oratio obliqua, see \xc2\xa7 345, 6. \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 334. Connection of several Adjective- Clauses. \xe2\x80\x94 Interchange of \nthe Subordinate Clause loitfi tJie Adjective- Clause. \xe2\x80\x94 Relative \ninstead of the Demonstrative. \n\n1. When two or more adjective-clauses follow each other, which either have \nthe same verb in common, or different verbs with the same government, the \nrchuive is commonly used but once, and thus the two adjective-clauses are \nunitt\'d in one, e. <^. d*7Jp, ftr iroAAo nfv aya.^a tovs (piXovs, iroAAa 5e kuko, robs \nwoKfu\'iovs fwpa^fy \xe2\x80\x94 i.y7tp, hs wop\' VH\'^f t^ ^aX (hs) inrb irdvTwv e(pi\\e7To \xe2\x80\x94 ayfjp, \nty 4davfid(onfv Kol (hy) Ttdyrts 4<p\'i\\ovy. But when the adjective-clauses have \nditferent verbs povcminjr different cases, generally, the Greek either omits the \nrelative in the sect)nd adjective-clause, or introduces, in the place of the rela- \ntive, a i! \'rative pronoun (mostly aiirSs), or a personal pronoun: in this \nway the e clause is changed into a demonstrative one, and acquires the \nnature of a principal clause, (a) Od. j, 110. ifiirfXai, a\'ire <p4pov(Tiv olvov ipier- \nrdtpvKoy Kod (sc. &i) ff<piy (KvKKwirfaari) Aihs 6/j.^pos ae^ej. Isocr. Panath. t^j/ \n\\6yov, h y oKiyu fify irp6T(poy fifd\'\' ijSoyrjs SirjKboi^, (iiKpw 5\' vcrrepou ij/xeWe p.e \nKinHiatiy (ami wmcJl ti\\is to grieve me). Lys. Dardan. 166. oTs vfj.e7s x<^P^^^(^^^ \nKol (scot\'s) -rpo^v^ioTfpovs Troiri<T\xe2\x82\xacTC. Dem. Cor. 252, 82. avrcoy, ovs t) fikv \nir6\\is ws ^X\'^poiT \xe2\x80\xa2 \xe2\x80\xa2 aiTT^Aoo-f, aol 5e fjcray <pi\\oi (sc. o\'l). X. An. 3. 2, 5. \'ApiaTos \n8\xc2\xab, hy r)ixf7i T}d(KoiJ.fy fiaffiXta KoSnardvai /col (sc. w) iSd^Kafxey Kal (sc. Trap\' ov) \ni\\d$onfV iriard . . , rj/xa \xe2\x80\xa2 tovs Kvpou <pi\\ovs KaKws Troie7u Treiparai. \xe2\x80\x94 (b) PI. Rp. 505, \ne. h h)) BiuKfi ficy diraffa ^^/uxh xoi tovtov (ViKa irdvra Tvparrei. Dem. Phil. 3 \n123. 47. \\(^K(hcu^JL6vlOl, o\\ baXdrrris /xty ^pxov kuI yrjs airdavs, ^aaihia 5e orufifia- \nXoy tJxoy, ixpiararo 5\' ovZfv avTovs ( fnstead of ovs ovhev ixpia-TaTo, quibus nihil non \ncessit). X. Cy. 3. 1. 38. ttov (Kf7y6s itrriy 6 au-hp, hs ffvve^pa r]fx7v Kal av fioi \nud\\a iS6Kns davfid^eiy avr6v. \n\n2. The adjective-clause frequently takes the place of other subordinate \nrl;in^.--. Q. ^.\'eavpLOffrhv iroius, &s r}fl7y fifu ovStv SiSws (iN THAT or BECAUSE \nyou j< re us nothing), X. C 2. 7, 13. The adjective-clause is very frequently used \n\n\n\n538 SYNTAX. [^ 335, 336 \n\ninstead of a hypothetical adverbial clause (comp. \xc2\xa7 333, 3) ; so also instead of \nan adverbial clause introduced by &st\xe2\x82\xac\\ the last case occurs : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) after o\'^tus or w5e. Dem. Chers. 100, 44. ou yhip ovtw y ^irfj^s itrrif \nvnSiu ovdeis, i>s inroAa/jifioivei (neither is there any one of you so simjile, as to \nsuppose). X. Cy. 6. 1, 14. ris ovrws \'ktx^P^s, hs \\lfita koI plyti Svyatr hy \nfxax^H-^yos (rTpaTev\xe2\x82\xac<r^ai ; \n\n(b) after TO to Oto y, ttiXikovtos, to<t ovtos. In most instances, these \ndemonstratives are followed by the corresponding relatives oloSf ivos, \nwliich, like the adverbial clause introduced by wst\xe2\x82\xac, usually have an Inf \ndepending upon them. X. An. 4. 8, 12. aXXi ftot Sojce? r oaovrov x^P\'-\' \nov Karaaxf^" (sc. rj^ias), o<rov \xe2\x82\xac|\xc2\xab roi/r i^xo-^ous X6xovs yey 4 ff^ai tup \n\xe2\x80\xa2noKfixiwy KfpaToau (it seems to me best tluit we should occupy so much (/round, \nas that, etc.). PI. Apol. iya> rxtyx^^\'^ ^v tojovtoj, otoi xnih rov ^eov \nrfi ir6\\\xe2\x82\xaci dddff^ai. \n\n3. The relative pronoun serves not only to conn- \xe2\x96\xa0 - witli \n\nthe principal one, but it is also used to connect cl. . h as \n\nit takes the place of a demonstrative which would reler to a word of the pre- \nceding clause. This mode of connecting sentences l>clongs to the Latin as \nwell as to the Greek, though it occurs very rarely in the latter compared with \nthe former. Thus in Greek, e. g. it is altogether \xc2\xab for clauses to begin \n\nwith Taina 5e finSmfs, ravra 5e OKOvaavrfs, fifrk I- a, Ik rovrov 5<, Set Z\\ \n\n\xe2\x80\xa2ravTa iyiviTOy etc, where the Latin generally uses the relative qui. \n\n\n\n^ 335. HL Adverbial Clauses. \n\nAdverbial clauses are adverbs, or participles used adverbially \n{k 326, 3), expanded into a seutence, and, like adverbs, express \nan adverbial object, i. e. an object wliich does not complete the \nidea of the predicate, but merely defines it, e. g. ore to lof) r^XSt, \n\n$336. A. Adverbial Clauses of Place. \n\nAdverbial clauses denoting place, are introduced by the \nrelative adverbs of place, ov, ^, oTnj, oirov, eySa (ubi) ; oSa\', tvSey \n{unde) ; ot, ottoi, tJ* otttj (quo), and, like adverbs of place, express \nthe tluree local relations, where, ichence, and ichither. The use \nof the Modes in these clauses, is in all respects like that in \nadjective-clauses {^ 333). \n\nHer. 3, 39. Zkov l^v<Tm (rrpaTfvfa^cuy -rdrra oi ix<^P^* evrvx^i (indefi- \nnite frequency). Th. 2,11. hrea^f (iKuae), ixoi &p ris ^^^toi. X. An. \n4. 2, 24. fiax^t^ffoi 5^ ol iro\\(fuoi Kai, 5 itt? \xe2\x82\xacf tj ffrfvhv x^P^*"\' "\'poKCcraXofifiJi^P\' \nres iK(i\\vov rhs irapoSovs (Opt. on account of iKuKvoy). Cy. 3. 3, 5. i^pa \ndirovtrfp iiriTvyx<iyoi\xe2\x82\xacV ^piois (uhereva). PI. Apol. 28, d. oC Ar ris \neak rhy r (\xc2\xa3 { 77, iyraui^a Set fxtyoyra KiySvy^veuf. \n\n\n\n4 337.] ADVERBIAL CLAUSES OF TIME. \n\n\n\n539 \n\n\n\n4 337. B. Adverbial Clauses op Time. \n\n1. Adverbial clauses denoting time, are introduced by the \nconjunctions ore, ottotc, is, rjvUa (wheii), iv cS, Iws (while) ; ^Tret, \niirtt^ (postquam), C7rei8^ raxurra {irpwrov), or ws raxKrra {as soon \nas), i$ ov, \xe2\x82\xac$ orov, also i$ (Li/, ez quo, and acf/ ov (since) ; irpiv, irplv \nri (priusquam), \xe2\x82\xaco>9, iux; ov, cts o, e<;Tt, fxexpL or a^pc ov, fiexpt orov, \n^\xe2\x82\xacxpt (tilU until). \n\n2. On the use of the modes, the following points are to be \nobserved : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n3. The Ind. is used, when the statement is to be represented \nas Si/act; hence in speaking of actual events cr facts. \n\nHer. 7, 7. i>s kyfyyiiffb-i afp^rfs arpaTevear^au eVl ttji/ \'EAAaSa, iuStavra \nvrpaT-ntify ToiffTcu {when Xerxes ivas persuaded, etc.). 1, 11. is Tj/jLep-q rdxia-Ta \n4y\xc2\xaby6p\xc2\xabt {quum primum, as soon as). X. H. 1. 1, .3. iixdxovTo, /xexpis ol \nA^yaioi iiytirKfvaay. An. 1.3, 11. koI tws fi^yo/xey aurov, (TKeTrr4ov (jloi \nioKii tlytUy inevs ics a/r<paKi<Trara ixfvovfiey. \n\n4. The conjunction \xe2\x82\xacto9 (till), is followed by the Ind. of the \nhistorical tenses, when an object is to be represented as unat- \ntaiued or not to be realized. Comp. k 327^ 1, (a). \n\nPI. Gorg. 506, b. T,hiu)i tiv KaAAtKAe? rovita tri S i e\\ey6ix7]v, eus avT$ \niir^iwKa { usque dam reddidissun ). \n\n5. The Subj. is used, when the statement is to be indicated \nas a conception or representation, and must be referred to the \npredicate of the principal clause, the verb of which is in one \nof the principal tenses. In the Common Language, the con- \njunctions take the modal adverb av, e. g. orav, oTrdrav, rjVLK av, \n<7rai\' (c7n/i/), nnvbav, ev a> av, irpw av, cws av, p-^XP\'- ^^> ^^r av [^ zoV, \n2, (3). (d)). \n\n6. Accordingly the Subj. is used with the above conjunctions \nfrom orav to TTplv av, when the statement of time is also to \nbe represented, at the same time, as the condition under which \nthe predicate of the principal clause will take place. But with \nthe conjunctions which signify until, the Subj. expresses a limit \nexpected and ainied at. The Subj. is also very frequently used, \nto denofe indefinite frequency (^ 333, 3), \n\nPI. Prot. 335. b. iimlav tru /SouA?/ liaXh^ahai, ws ly^ Sum/xai eTreo-^at \nT^f(roiSta\\4^ofiai ( whenever you wish to, if at any time you wish to discourse. \n\n\n\n540 SYNTAX. [$ 337. \n\netc.). Th, 1, 21. 01 du^puTToi, iu ^ Uv ir o\\\xe2\x82\xac fiua i, rhv irap6vTa iroX^uov ael \nfi^yicTTOu KpLvovciv. X. Cy. 3. 1, 18. iroKiv oHirw kdopaKas a.vTtraTTOfi4yri9 \nirphs Tr6\\iv eTfpav, \'/itls, iir e iS av 7]TTr)^f), irapaxpVH^ ravr-p olvti rod fui\' \nX^ff^ai Trei^recr^aL i^e\\ei. 3. 3, 26. dirorap {ol fiap^apoi BauTiAels) ffrparo \nTTcSeuwj/Tat, rdcppou rrep i^dWovrai einreTus Ota r7]y vo\\vx(ipiav {as often \nas). Dem, Ph. 3. 128, 69. ecos Uv ado^Tirai rh <rKd(pos, rSre XP^ \'^"^ ravrtfr \nKal Kv^epv-fiT-qu irpo^vfwvs ehai {durti servari possit). \n\nRemark 1. The Subj. is also used in the Epic language, when the adver- \nbial clause forms a member of a comparison, since a case is then supposed \n(comp. \xc2\xa7 333, Rem. 2). II. ^, 16. us 5\' on irop<pvpr] TriXayos . . &s d ycpar \nS)pfiaiue. 0, 624. iu 5 eTrec\', us ore Kvfxa ^ofj iv yr{t ire aria ly. \n\nRem. 2. On the Subj. after an historical tense instead of the Opt. and on \nUray, iiriv, it p\\v & v, etc. with the Opt. in the oratio obliqua, see \xc2\xa7 345, \nRem. 4. \n\nRem. 3. The mode of connection by Stc, inr6rc^ vply, etc, without &v with \nthe Subj., occurs only in the Epic language frequently, sometimes also in \nIonic prose, and not seldom in the Attic writers with /ix\xe2\x82\xacx/>* and -rpiv. \n\n7. The Opt. is used ^\\\'ith conjunctions of time, without av, just \nas the Subj. is, but referring to an historical tense of the princi- \npal clause. Wlien the Opt. is used to denote indefinite fre- \nquency (^ 327^, 2), an Impf or an Iterative Aor. usually stands \nin the principal clause, and the conjunctions ore, circ^ etc. (ex- \ncept those which signify before and until), are translated by a$ \noften as. \n\nII. K, 14. avrap Zt is vTids t\xe2\x82\xac tSoi koI Xahv \'Axouuv, iroAA^s in K((paXr)s rpo \n^iXv/jLj/ous \xe2\x82\xac\\k\xe2\x82\xac7o xa\'\'\'\'\xc2\xabs (^^ o/7en as). Her. 6, 61. Skids (= Stc) ^vci\xc2\xabrci\xc2\xab \n7] rpocphs {rh TratSiov), irp6s re T&yaXfia Itrra #tal iKlaaer o t^v ^thv avoA* \nAa|ai Tjjs SvsiJ.op(pir)s rh iraiSlou {as often as). X. An. 6. 1, 7. birorf oi"\'EXA\xc2\xbbji\'\xe2\x82\xac5 \nTois TToXf/xlois iirloieu, fiaZius iire <p\xe2\x82\xac vyoy {as often as the Greeks made an at- \ntack, whenever they made on attack). Od. e, 385. Sipae ^ iir\\ Kpatrvhv Bopftjy, irph 8< \nKv/xar ea^fv, eus oyc ^aiT\\Kf(T<n (piXripfrixoiffi fiiyt\'trf (but 6pyvci Boperfv koI \n&yvv(ri Ki\'/^oTo, ecus hu . . fi-iyfl). PI. Phaed. 59, d. irepie/icVo/ie*\' cicctirroTC, tois \navo ix^ ^^V \'\'\xe2\x96\xa0^ Secr/jLUT\'fjpiov. \n\nRem. 4. On fiv in the principal clause, see \xc2\xa7 260, 2, (2), {0). \n\n8. Moreover, the Opt. without av is used u-ith conjunctions \nof time, without reference to the time of the principal clause, \nwhen the statement of time is to be represented as an uncer- \ntain and doubtful condition, as a mere supposition, conjecture, or \n(issiwiption ; also, generally, when the subordinate clause forms \n;i part of a principal clause expressing a \\\\\'ish. \n\nPI. Aniat. 133, a. SttSt^ rh <pi\\o(ro<pe7i\' al(TXpi>y \xe2\x96\xa0fjyria at fifir flrai, oi\xc2\xbb5* hr \ndv^pw-Tov voixiaaijxi i/xavrhv fhat (tchen I shall assume, if I shall ever assume). X. \nCy. 3. 1, 16. irws hy Wre vXdarov d^iot yiyvotvr ol &vbp<aToi, 6x<Jt\xe2\x82\xac dSurovr- \n\n\n\n* 337. J ADVERBIAL CLAUSES OF TIME. 541 \n\nr\xe2\x82\xacs k\\l<TKoiuTo (ivhen they are, if the^ are, convicted of acting unjustly) - \xe2\x80\x94 11. \nff,^ 465.^ at yip (iiv S^aydroio dvsrjx^os \xc2\xa35e 5vuaifjLT,u v6c<piv hiroKpi^^ai, o\'re /xtv \nfwpos cuwhs iKdyoi, \n\n9. The conjunction vpcv (Trporepov ^), besides the construc- \ntions already mentioned, is also followed by the Lif. The dif \nfereut constructions of -rrpiv are to be distinguished as follows : \n\n(a) When a past event, one that has actually occurred, is spoken of, the Ind. \nof an historical tense is u?ed (No. 3). The principal clause is negative; yet it \nis sometimes also atfirraative, when irpiy signifies until; thus often in the Tra- \ngedians and Thucydides (in the latter irplv Sii and irpl;/ ye 5^). \n\n(b) When & future, merely conceived action is spoken of, which can be con- \nsidered as the condition of the principal clause, the Subj. is used, when the sub- \nordinate clause refers to a Prcs. Perf. or Fut. in the principal clause ; but the \nOpt., when the subordinate clause refers to an historical tense in the principal \nclause (No. 5 and 7) ; yet only when the principal clause is negative, (jc aontaina \na question implying a negative. \n\n(c) But when .|e action is to be represented only as a conception, a conceived \nlimit, not as an independent occurrence, but only as a subordinate matter, and a \ncasual or incidental designation of time, the Inf is used (= irpS with the Gen.). \nHence the Inf. can stand both for the Ind. of an historical tense, and for the \n8ubj. or Opt., both after an affirmative and a negative principal clause, when it \ndoes not serve to define more fully the subordinate clause. \n\nIsocr. de Big. 348, b. ov irpSrfpov iiravaavTO, irplv t6u re irarepa e/c Tor \nOTpaTonfSov ft(T \xe2\x82\xacir( fi\\\\>ayr 0, koI twv (p\'lKwv avrov tous fieu aireKTciuaUf \nrohs 5\' ^\xc2\xbbc T^j ir6\\e(D5 i^4 fiaKov. X. An. 6. 1, 27.01* irp6(T^eu iiravaavTo \n\xe2\x96\xa0woKtfioiyTfSf jrply tiroiriaay iraaay r^y \'rr6\\iu bfxoXoyeiv AaKedai/xouiovs \nKal avriiiv rrytfiSyas (iyai. \xe2\x80\x94 Kur. Med. 279. oi/K dneifii irphs dSfJLOus 7rd\\iy, \nvply 6,y (T( yaias rfpfj.6ywy t|w fid\\(i) (= iay /jlt] TrpoiepSv ae e\xc2\xab)8oAw). \nX. An. 5. 7, 12. n^ aT(\\br)Te, trpXy ttv aKovarfre. II. ^, 580. \'Ayfivwp \noxjK H^eXty <p(vy(iy, irplv vfip-qaaiT \'Ax\'^i\'/os (= et /x^ -irp6Tepov ireip-fi- \n(raiTo). X. An. 7. 7, 57. oi eniT\'f]5fioi iv t<^ aTpaToirfSw {avrov) iSeovro ixij \niLTrf\\^f7y, irply airaydyoi rh (TTpdrfv/ia Koi Qi^puvi irapaSoir). \xe2\x80\x94 Her. 6, \n119. AapfTos, vply fiiy oiXMo^\'^TOi\'S y eye<r^ai rovs \'Eperpieas, iyeTx^ <r(pi \n5f ivhy x^^o"- "\xc2\xbb 2. (<ray ^apflea, koI Trpdrepou ^ $aai\\\xe2\x82\xacV(rai, yeyoyores \nTp(7s vaTSfs. X. An. 1. 8, 19. irply ro^cv/xa i^iKyeTa^ai, iKKXivovariv ot \n0dp0apoi Kcd (pfvyovffi. 10, 19. vp\\y KaTa\\v<rai rh a-Tpdrevfia vphs &pi(rToy, \nfiaoriKefs i<pdvri. 4. 1,7. M rh &Kpoy aya^aivei Xeipi(TO(pos, irpiv riva alff- \nbiffbai ruv iro\\fnla>y. Cy. 7. 1, 4. irply Spay rovs iroXefiiovs, els rpls \nkv4irav<T( rh arpdrevfia. 2.2,10. iribayol olircos (lai rives, &STe irplv eiSevairh \nrposra(T<T6fJLfvov, irporepov ireibovrai. With attraction (\xc2\xa7 307. 4) : ib. 5. 2, 9. \n(iroWo\'i Av^pwiroi) airobvi](TKOV(n irp6repoy, irply S^Aot yeveffbai, ohi ^arav. \n\nRem. 5. The Homeric irdpos, when it is not used as a mere adverb, is al- \nways cor..structed with the Inf. 11. <r, 245. is 5\' ayopyjv ayepovro, irapos SdpiroM \n\nH 6 5 6 (T i& a i. \n\n46 \n\n\n\n642 SYNTAX. [j} 338, 339. \n\nC. Causal Adverbial Clauses. \n$ 338. I. Adverbial Clauses denoting Ground, Cause. \n\n1. Such adverbial clauses as express the ground or cause in \nthe form of temporal adverbial clauses by the temporal \n\nJS\'W.I.^- conjunctions ore, ottotc, ws, kiniy quoniam, puisque, because, \n^\xe2\x80\xa2\'* since, iTreiSrj, quomam, and ottov, quandoquidem. In these adver- \n\nbial clauses, the Ind. is the prevailing Mode ; but the Opt. \\^ath \nav may be used according to k 260, 2, (4) (a), and also the Ind. \nof the historical tenses with av, according lb k 260, 2, (2) (a). \n\n11.^, 95. /x^ fi6 KTeiUy 4ve\\ ohx ApKryicTpjor "E/njopor flfii (quoniam sum). \nX. An. 3. 2, 2. X\'^^f^\'ct rck vapoyra, dx6Tf aydpaiy ffrpmrrtyAy roioirtiy art- \np6fie^a KOI \\oxayuy Kcd (rrpariuTwv [since we are deprived of such generals, etc.). \nDcm. 01. 1, in. ^re roivvv rav^* ovrus ?X**\xc2\xbb ""por^ifcj wpo^fiui ibfKtuf iLKOvtw. \nX. C. 1. 4, 19. ^uKparr)! oil ii6vov rovs avy6yras ihoKti woKiy, 6ir6r( irrh rmr \niy^puTTwu Spcfirro dir\xe2\x82\xac;(\xc2\xabrc^at ruiv iiyoffiujy t\xc2\xab \xc2\xabral aZ\'iKwy, itWa xal l>it6r( iy ipTifd^ \nfl(y, iff flirt p T)y{]<T aiyT fiTjSev 6.y vore uy trpdrroify i^cour SiaXa^e7y. \xe2\x80\x94 PI. \nProt. 335, d. hiofuu oZy <rov \xe2\x96\xa0rapafi.(7ycu rjfiiy, &s iyi\xc2\xbb ovV h,v iyhs ffiioy imov \xe2\x80\xa2 \nor at fit fi ffov. \xe2\x80\x94 II. o, 228. vw6ei^fy x^^P^\' ^l*^i ^\'"\'ti 06 k*v iyiipotrl y ir\xc2\xabk- \n4a-^rj (since, if he had not escaped, the thing would not have been aecompitMhed with- \nout effort). \n\nRemark. *Eire( also introduces interrogative and imperative claosea, \nwhere we must then translate it by for. For the explanation of this use. SM \n\xc2\xa7 341, Rem. 4. \n\n2. Such adveibial clauses as express the ground or cause in \nthe form of substantive clauses by the conjunctions on and \n8 ton (arising from 8ta toOto, on) and the Poet, ovvcica (arising \nfrom TovTov ev\xe2\x82\xacKa, o) or oSovvfKa (instead of orov O\'Cica, o). \nTlie Ind is here, also, the prevailing mode, when the statement \nis not conditional. \n\nPL Euthyphr. 9, e. apa rh Hatov, S t i Sat6y ^(r t \xc2\xab, ^iXdreu irwh riiv d\xc2\xab\xc2\xabr, <J, J r \xc2\xbb \n\n^ ( \\ ( 7 T a 1, ^ai6y 4(ttl ; \n\n$339. II. Conditional Adverbial Clauses. \n\n1. The second kind of adverbial clauses are the conditional \nclauses, which are introduced by the conjunctions ti and car \n(^Vy av, which must not be confounded with the modal adverb \nav). The principal clause expresses what is conditioned by the \nsubordinate cliiuse, or the consequence and eflect of the sub- \n\n\n\n$ 339.J CONDITIONAL ADVERBIAL CLAUSES. 543 \n\nordinate clause. As the conditioning clause precedes the con. \nditioned, the cause, the effect, the subordinate clause is called \nthe introductory clause or Protasis, and the principal clause, the \nconclusion or the Apodosis. \n\n2. The Greek has the following modes of expressing condi- \ntionaJity : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nL In the first place, the condition is expressed as a reality or \nfact, as something certain, and hence by the Indicative. Two \ncases are here to be distinguished : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) Tiie Protasis has \xc2\xabt with the Ind., and the Apodosis, \nlikewise the Ind. Then both tie condition and conclusion \nare considered by the speaker as a reality or fact, and hence \nas certain, whether the thing be so objectively or not. The \nresult is very frequently a necessary one. If the Apodosis \ncontams a command, the Imp. is used, and when this command \nis negative, the Subj. also {h 259, 5). \n\nE i rovTO \\4yfts, afxaprdyfis. \xe2\x80\x94 Et ^e6s iari, (ro(p6s i(TTiy. \xe2\x80\x94 X. Cy. \n1. 5, 13. \xc2\xabi ravra iyw \\\xc2\xab7\xc2\xab wfpl vfiuv &AAa yiyvuaKoiv, ifiaurhu 6|o7roT\xc2\xab \n(here something is spoken of, which in his heart the speaker wholly denies). \xe2\x80\x94 \nE r Ti ^x*"\xc2\xbb \' <^ J\' \xe2\x80\x94 E< Toirro Tcxolrjicay, iiraivflffdai 6^ios e T. Her. 3, 62. S Secr- \n\xe2\x96\xa0"OTo, oi/K fori ravra oXT^ca, ixets (= 5ti) /tore aoi \'XfitpBis a.Sf\\<l>(hs 6 ahs iirap4<r- \nrriK* \' iyie yhp aifrhs idw^d tu\xc2\xa5 X\'P*\'\'^ \'H?*\'\'* ^M*<*\'\'^oG \xe2\x80\xa2 e i /neV wv oi re^ewres aueff- \nr t ao" I, w posS\xc2\xabKt 6 roi koI \'Affrvdyta rhy M?]Sov ivavaaT-qaecr^ai \xe2\x80\xa2 e 2 S\' carr i, 5s- \nwtp wporov, oh fi4i rl roi (k ye iKfivov yfuntpov aya$\\a(rrr}(T\xe2\x82\xaci (here in the first con- \nditional clause, something is spoken of, the opposite of which the speaker is per- \nBiuulcd is true). \xe2\x80\x94 Ef n tlx^y f*i Hihov, \xe2\x80\x94 Et rovro iireiroi-fiKeis, Cvp-las \nif 191 ^abtL. \xe2\x80\x94 El i $p6yrri<r\xc2\xab, koI fjarpa^ey. Et rovro \\4^eis, a/xap- \nT^o-p. X. Cy. 2. 1, 8. ffrj Xflcroyrai MriSoi, h Uepffas rh Scivhy t^^^ i. 7. \n1, 10. *l <pddffopi.fP robs iro\\ffiiovs KaroKTavdyres, ouSiis rj/xwy airo^avei- \nrai. \n\n(b) The Protasis has ci \\\\nth the Lid. of the historical \ntenses, and the Apodosis, also, the Ind. of an historical tense \nwith av, then the reality, both of the condition and con- \nclusion is to be denied. Tliis form is used only of the past, \nor where there is a reference to the past; here it is affirmed \nthat something could take place under a certain condition, \nbut did not, because the condition was not fulfilled. The \nuse of the tenses is the same as in simple sentences. \nSee \xe2\x99\xa6 25G. \n\nHere the negation of the reality is not contained in the form of expression \n\n\n\n544 SYNTAX. [\xc2\xa7 339 \n\nitself, for the Ind. of the historical tenses necessarily alway^ denotes a past \noccurrence or fact ; the negation is merely an inferred one, that is to say, it con- \nsists in this, that a conclusion or inference is drawn from the past and applied \nto the present, and a reality in the past is opposed to what is not a reality in \nthe present. The past reality expressed in the conditional clause stands in \nopposition to another present reality (either expressed or to be supplied from \nthe context), which contains precisely the opposite of that past reality, e. g. \nif the enemy came, we were destroyed, i. e. if the enemy had come, we should have \nbeen destroyed, but now the ekemt has not come ; from this contrast it \nis now inferred, that the assumed fact if the enemy came, did not take place. \n\nEt TovTo \xe2\x82\xacA\xe2\x82\xac7es, TjfjidpTaves &u (si hoc dixisses, errares, if you said this \nyou erred, or if you had said this, you would Jiave erred ; but you have not said it, \nconsequently you have not erred). PI. Apol. 20, b, c. ris, ?iv S\' ^yw, koL iroSa\' \n\'ir6s 5 Koi TTocrov SiSdaKci ; Evrjuos, ^(prj, & \'2<t>KpaTes, Tldpios, irevrc fivStv. Kal eyi \nThu Eijrjvou ifiaKapKra, el ws aXri^us exet Tavrrjv r^v rex^^ f^l ovrws e/x/xeAftis \nStSctCAcet \xe2\x80\xa2 iyii yovu Koi avrhs i Ka\\\\vv6 firju re Kcd tj fi pvvSixrjv &\xc2\xbb\', el \ni] TTiffrdfiTju Tavra- oAA* ou yap iirlffrafiat, & &v5pei \'A^uouoi (here also \nsomething past is spoken of, as is evident from e/xaKdpKra). 31, d. \xe2\x82\xac( eyi: \n\xe2\x80\xa2ird\\ai eTrexefpTjcra irpdrreiv to iroXniKh. rrpdyfiaTa, irdXai i.v aTroKuXr] /coJ \noVt\' it,u vfias bX^eXiiKT}, ovt tiv ifiavrdu. Th.l, 9. ovKtiv ouy vfjawv i Kpdr e i \n{\' Ayajxeixvcav) , el fii] ri koI yavriKhv elx^v (^ would not have ruled over the \nislands unless he had a fleet ; but he had a fleet, consequently he could also rule \nover the islands). PI. Gorg. 516, e. \xe2\x82\xact -fiaav dvhpes aya^oi, ovk &u noTe ravra \neiracrxov (if they \xe2\x80\x94 Cimon, Themistocles, and Mdtiades \xe2\x80\x94 had been good men, \nthey would never have experienced this injustice). X. Cy. 1. 2, 16. ravra ovk tip \niSvvavT (at Tlepffai) iroieiu, el fiT} koX dialrrj /xerpia exp^vf o. 3.3, 17. \xe2\x82\xac1 \nfxev fxei^av ris KivSvyos e /x eWep rifxiv eluai e/cet (sc. ey rfj iroXe/jLia), fj ev^dSe (sc. \niu rfj (piXia), taws rh acTcpaXecrTaTov ^v hv alpereov vvv ^eXtroi fiey eKelvoi (oi \nKLP^vvoi) eaovrai, \xc2\xa5)V re iv^dSe xnTOfievwfxeVy \xc2\xa5iv re els r^v eKeivuv (rwv voXefiiuv) \nloyres viravrwixeu avrots (here also a past action is spoken of: as long as we were \nunarmed, and therefore were in greater danger in a hostile than in a friendly \ncountry, it was necessaiy for us to remain here ; but now, since we are armed, \nthe danger here and there will be equal). 8. 3, 44. aXri^, ecprj, Xeyeis\' el ydp \nroi rh ex^iv oijTus, SsTrep rh Xan^dveiv, r)dv ^v, iroAu hv Sie<p e poy evSai/xoyia \n01 irXovffioi rwv ireu-fjrwv (in reference to the preceding conversation). An. 7. 6, \n9. 7)ixe7s fxev, S) AaKeSai/xovioi, koI irdXai av ^ /xev Trap iifuy, ^l H-h aeyo<puy Sevpo \n"finas Trei<ras air-f}yayev. Lys. defens. Call. 102, 1. el (ley irepl &Wov rivhs ^ \nrev ffci/xaros KaXXias ^ywyl^erOy i^\'f}pKei &y fioi Kol rh irapai rS\xc2\xbbv fiAAwv \nelprfuiya\' yvy 54 ixoi 5 o k e ? otVxp^J\' eTvat /x)j ;8o7j/&^^o"at KoAAta ra St/ccwo. Purg. \nsacril. 109, 15. el {lev aiffxp^v ^y fiovoy rh irpayfia^ Xaws 6.v ris rwy irapioyruy \ni) fie X7](r e\' yvy Se ov irepl alcrx^^\'H^i oAAct irepX rris fieyiarrjs ^rjixias eKiySvyevoy. \n\nRemark 1. On the omission of &y in the Apodosis, see \xc2\xa7 260, Rem. 3. Oc \nthe Ind. of the Hist, tenses in the intermediate clause of such a proposition, \n^ 327b, 1. (a). \n\n\n\n^ 339.J CONDITIONAL ADVERBIAL CLAUSES. \n\n\n\n545 \n\n\n\n11. The condition is expressed, in the second place, as a \nconception or representation. The Greek has two different fo-ms \nto denote this relation : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) The Protasis has ei with the Opt, and the Apodosis, the \nOpt. with ^v. (The Fut. Opt. is here not used.) By this form, \nboth the condition and the conclusion are represented as a \npresent or future uncertainttj, as an undetermined possibility, a \nmere conjecture, assumption, or supposition, without any refer- \nence to the thing supposed being real or not real, possible or \nimpossible. \n\nEJf Tt exoty, Sot Tjy 6v (si quid habes des, if you had anything, you would \ngive it ; here it is neither assumed nor denied that you have anything, but is \nmerely a supposition. E I radro \\eyois, afiaprdvots &v (if you should say \nthis, then you would err). \xe2\x80\x94 PI. Symp. 175, d. ^Z h.v ^xoi, ^i toiovtou etr, rj \naoipia, S)ST \xe2\x82\xac/c Tov irXrjpea-T^pou els rhu Kevwrepov ^e7u r^^xav, iav aTrT<a/ji.e^a aXK-fj- \n\\(au \xe2\x80\xa2 \xe2\x82\xact yap ovtojs exet Kal t) (ro(pia, iroWov Tifiw/xai ttjv irapa aoi KaraKXiaw. \nLysid. 206, C. iX fioi i^eXijcrais ahrhv iroirtaai els Xoyovs iXSteiv, Xaws au ^v \nvaiix-nv a- 1 (TTiSu^ai, & xph awTo3 SioA-eyeo-^at. Menex. 236, a. koI ti ttv \n6X0 ts elire7i/, el Seoi <re \\4yeiv; Hipp, Maj. 282, d. el ycip eldeirjs \'iaov \napyvpiov etpyaa-fiai, ^avudcrais &v. Ion. 537, e. eX ae epolfirjv, el {wheth&-) \nTTJ avTTJ Texvri yiyvwaKOfxev rij apL^fjLr]TiKfj to aura iyca re Kal <tv, t) &\\X-p, (pal-qs \nti,u 5-nirov T?7 avT^. 5. 6, 9. Kal 6 Uap^eyios &0aTOS\' e^\' hy eK^oire &u, el rhv \n"AKvu Sia^aivTe. 6.2,21. el KaraXnrSvTes to. arKevrf ev r^ epvfiv^ X\'^pW \nws els pidxriv TrapeffKevaa/jLeuoi toifJiev, laws Uu to. lepa fxaXXov if poxop oiri \n7]fuu. (Of the assumption of something past, in Herodotus [\xc2\xa7 260, (4) (aj] 7, \n214. e 15 elf] i>v K(d ewv p.^ M-qXievs TavTr}U rr]u arpaTrhv \'Oi/\'firrfs, el ttj x^PV \niroKKa u> puKr) kw s etri, Onetes might have known this way, if he had been very \nfamiliar with the country). \n\n(b) The Protasis has idv (^v, av) with the Subj., and the \nApodosis also, the Ind. of a principal tense, commonly the Fu- \nture (also the Imperative). By this form, the condition is rep- \nresented as a conception or supposition, the accomplishment of \nwhich, however, is expected by the speaker, and is regarded as \npossible. The conclusion resulting from the subordinate clause, \nis represented as certaiD (necessary). \n\nRem. 2. As the Greek Subj. always refers to the future, edv with the Subj. \nalmost wlioUv corresponds to e I with the Fut. Ind. ; the only distinction is, \nthat by c t with the Fut. Ind., the form of the condition implies that the action \nwill actually take place in future : but by edv with the Subj., the form of the \ncondition implies that the actual \' occurrence of the action is merely assumed \nor expected by the speaker. The reason for the use of the Subj. is not to be \nfound in the conditioned relation itself, which it is necessary to express, but in \n\n46* \n\n\n\n546 SYNTAX. [{ 339 \n\nthe fact, that, aside from this relation, it is used to denote a concession expected \nby the speaker ($259, Rem. 4). \n\n\'Eai/ TovTo Keyps, afiapr-fiirrti if J/ou say this, shall say it, you will err. \n(Whether you will actually say this, I do not yet know; but I expect, I as- \nsume that you will say it, and then it is a necessary consequence that you err.) \n\xe2\x80\x94 \'Ea*\' Tovro Xe^rjs, afiapT-f}(Tr) {si hoc dixeris, errabis). Dem. 2, 14. Sirot \n\\6yos, Uv oirp to irpdyfJiaTa, h6.tcu6v \'ti <f>aiy\xe2\x82\xacTou Kol Kev6v. PI. Rp. 473, d. ^^r \n117] ^ oi (pi\\6(ro<poi $a(r i\\\xe2\x82\xacv<T<i}a ly iv reus Tr6Kf<Tii\', ^ ol fiaaiXris re vDy Xeyofi- \ncvoi Kol ZuvdcXTai (piKoaotpijcru} (T t yvr^aius re /col Ikovus, kcu tovto fls ravrhp \n^v fxir \xe2\x82\xac (Tji, dwafiis t6 ttoKitik}) koI <pi\\o<ro<pla, ovk tar i Koxufy iroDXa reus xJXe* \n<rt. Lysid. 210, c. 4hv fikv &pa <rq<phs yfvpt 2> iroT, wdvTfs aoi tplKoi kcu -rdyres \naoi oiKfToi iffovrai. X. An. 1. 8, 12, Kh.v r ovro^ e<pi], y i k w fi \xe2\x82\xac v -rdy^\' iffuif \nirenolriTai. \n\nRem. 3. \'Edy with the Subj. and \xe2\x82\xact with the Opt. are also used to denote \nindefinite frequency. Comp. ^ 327b, 2. In the place of ^\xc2\xab\xc2\xa3i\' with the Suhj. c\xc2\xab \nwith the Opt. occurs, when the conditional clause is made to depend on \xc2\xabn \nHist, tense. Still, see $345,4. On idv with tlic Oi.t. .ind d with the Inf. \nin orat. obllg., see \xc2\xa7 345, Rem. 4, and No. G \n\n3. Besides the common forms of the Apodosis abeady men- \ntioned, which correspond to those of the Protasis, the Apodosis \nis very often found in a form that does not correspond to the \nProtasis. This interchange of forms gives great dehcacy of \nexpression. The following cases occur : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) The Opt. with Ay in the Apodosis, very often follows cl with the Ind. \nand idy with the Subj., when the conclusion as tmcertain, doublfxd, an undeter- \nmined possibility, is to be contrasted with a condition which is certain^ or which \nis expected or assuwetl as certain. But the Greek, particularly the Attic dialect, \nvery often employs this form of the Apodosis with a degree of civility, \'even \nwhen speaking of settled convictions [$ 260, 2, (4), (a)]. \n\n(o) Ei rovTo \\iyfis, atiaprdvots tiv {if you assert this^ you would err). \nPI. 30, b. ct /xey ody ravra Xcyuy S ia<pd\xe2\x82\xaclpw rovs yeovs, toDt\' tiy fttj $\\a&(pd. \nAle. II. 149, e. Kcd yap & v Seiyhy elrj, e I irpbs rk 5wpa kcu ras ^wr/as airofiKfV\' \novffiy ijfiwy ol ^(ol, aWh fi)} irphs t^v ypv^\'fiy, &y Tts 5<rios kcu Sliuuos itv Tvy \nxdiT]. X. C. 1. 2, 28. 6 1 2o\xc2\xbbcpoT7js caxppoyury 5i6T\xe2\x82\xacX\xe2\x82\xac\xc2\xbb, wis &r iiKcdms r^s \nOVK iyovffT}! airr^ kok as alriay ^ x <" i Th. 6, 92. ei wo\\4fu6s yt &r ff^dioa \n(^KaiTTov, Kol & y <p\'t.\\os i)y iKoyois wipeKoiriy. \n\n()8) X. Apol. 6. ffy Be alcr^dyu fiai x^\'V*"*\' ytyyoH-^ios koI \xc2\xabcarafi\xc2\xbbu- \nipoDfxai ifxavrSyt ttus tiy iyw &v jjBeus fi lot e voi fit; PI. Menex. 239, c. ikr \nody r)fieis ^\xe2\x96\xa0jrix^\'P\'i\'^f*\' \'\'\'^ aitrii \\&y(() \\^i\\^ KOOfieiy rdx Ai\' Sevrepoi ^aiyol- \nfie^a {then we should be inferior). \n\n{y) Ei with the Ind. of the historical tenses is used in speaking of the \ndenial of a fact, and in the Apodosis, the Opt. with Sk is used in speaking of \nthe past, instead of the usual Ind. of the Hist, tenses with &y. This use is not \n\n\n\n^ 340.] ELLIPSES OF THE PROTASIS. \n\n\n\n547 \n\n\n\nfrequent, and is found only in Homer [\xc2\xa7 260, (4), (a)]. D, ^8, 80. eJ m^V tu \nrhy iviipov \'Axaiwu iAAos ^vktv^v, ^^^vUs K\xe2\x82\xacu <f>a7fi\xe2\x82\xacp Kal vo(r((>iColfJLf \nba (ioWoy vvv 5\' rSe*/, %s ^ey\' ^piaros^Axaiuv cijx^Tai chai {if another had \ntold the dream, we should pronounce it false, and not believe it). II. e, 311. Kai v6 \nKfV tvb\' air 6 \\o no iya| av^puv Alueias, et fi^ &p o^h u6i](Te Aihs ^vyar^p \n\'A<f>poSiT-n {and J^neas would certainly have perished there, if Aphrodite had not \nobserced it). Comp. \xc2\xa7 388. p, 70. [On et with the Opt. in the Protasis and the \nOpt. with &u in the Apodosis, in speaking of something pas^, in Heroaotus, see \nNo. II. (a) at the end.] \n\n(b) On the contrary, the Ind. in the Apodosis sometimes follows et with the \nOpt. X. C. 1. 5, 2. \xe2\x82\xac1 S" iirl TeAeimj rod fiiov yeySfievQi fiovXaiixe^d rw \niirnpfy^au I) iraT^as H^fxyas vcuSfvaai, i) bvyarfpas irap^ivovs 5ia((>v\\d^ai, ^ xp\'h\' \nfiara Steur^crcu, ap* a^i6Tri<TToy els ravra f}yr]<r6 fie^a rhv aKpairj ; \n\n(c) The Ind. of the historical tenses with Ay in the Apodosis follows: \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) sometimes c I with the Ind. of a principal tense, if the condition is re- \ngarded as a fad or something actually existing, while the conclusion is consid- \nered as not real or actual. X. Ilier. 1, 9. ei yap ouru toGt\' ex ft, tws tty ttoA.- \nKol fi^y iirebvfiovy tvpeun/eTy . . , irws 8e irdyres e^ijKovy ti,y rovs Tvpdvyovs ; \n{if this it really go, why should many strive after sovereignty, and all esteem, tyrants \nas hajifiyf) Eur. Or. 565, sq. et yiip yvycuKes is t6^ t^^ovciv 3-pacrous, &v- \nSpas <poy(6eiy, Kara^vyas iroiovfxevai is TtKya . . , nap\' ovSeu aitrais ^y tiy oWvuai \nw6a(is ; \n\n(0) rarely idy with the Suhj. (PI. Phaedr. 256, c), but very often el with \nlie Opt., when, in the Apodosis. an action is to be represented as repeated in \npa.st time [see ^ 260, 2. (2), {$)], but seldom when the reality of the conclusion \n\'- to be denied, e. g. X. Cy. 2. 1, 9. el ?x<"M\'\xc2\xbb ojs TdxicT tiy Sir\\a iiroiov- \nfAt^y iraai Tl(p<rais roTs rrposiovcriy. PI. Alc. I. lll,e. ei $ov\\T)^\xe2\x82\xacir}/jiev elSe- \nyai fi^ fi6yoy, iroToi iy^pwtrol elaiy, oAA^ dxoioi vyieiyoiy fj yocrwSeis, d.pa iKavoX & y \n^<Tay hiidoKaXoi oi iroWol] \n\n(d) The Ind. of a principal tense in the Apodosis, is sometimes contrasted \nwith the Ind. of an historical tense in the Protasis: (o) affirmatively: Dem. \nCor. 293, 195. ei pLera rwv BrjjSoiwf T}fuy ayajyi^o/xeyois ovtws e\'lfiapro {fato \nconstitutuin ekat) irpa^ai, rl xph irposioKay ; \xe2\x80\x94 (/3) negatively: Th. 3, 65. el \nfify yap ijfifTs avrol irpos re tV v6\\iy i\\b6vres ipiax^t^^^f\' {pugnavissemus) \nKoi r^v yfjy iiriovfiey {devastassemus) us iroKefiioi, aSiKov/xew el Se &ydpes \nvfuHy ol irpuroi . . itreKoXeaairro {advocaverunt), rl aSiKovney. \n\n\xc2\xa7 340. Remarks. \n\n1. Ellipsis of the Protasis. The Opt. with &y often stands without the \n\xc2\xab)nditional Protasis ; yet this is contained in an adjective-clause, or in a par- \nticiple, or, in general, in a word of the sentence which may be expanded into a \nconditional Protasis, e. g. in the adverb ourasy in a preposition, or it is indiea- \n\n\n\n548 SYNTAX. [k 340 \n\nted in what precedes or follows. *Os ravra \\4yoi (=ef tij rturra ?<\xc2\xabyoi)y \na/jLaprdvoi &u ( whoever should say this, if any one should say this, he vxndd err). \nTavTa \\f^as {= el ah \\4^cu5) a^iapr dvois 6.v. Out\xc2\xab y* (= et o5t\xc2\xab y\xc2\xab \niroiiiaais) Uu a/iaprduo is. Very often, however, the Protasis is actually \nwanting ; particularly, general Protases are almost always omitted, since they \ncan be easily supplied by such phrases as : if one wishes, if it is allouxd, if I \ncan., if circumstances should favor, e. g.BovKoifiijv &v (scil. el Suvcufxriif)^ velim \n\'HSfus h.v aKovaaini; often also, the conditioned Apodosis must be supplied, \nas the conditioning Protasis, e. g. Her. 9, 71. a\\A^ rat- a. fifw koI <pb6y^ av \netiroiey (sc, el eXiroiew). Comp, \xc2\xa7 260, 2, (4), (a). So also, the Ind. of \nthe historical tenses with &v is often used without a conditional Protasis, \ne. g. ToGra \\e ^as ?! fxapr e s &v. \'\'Ayevtreicrfjiov ovk tiy rovro <rvy\xc2\xab0ri. \nEfiov\\6firiv 6.V or ^ $ov\\r)^riv &v (sc. el iSwdfiriv), ixJuissem, velkm (diflfer- \nent from fiov\\oi n-r^y dv, as vellem from velim). "Eyl^ai^i eyytfS iy (sc ci \nirapT]<r^a}, turn vero videres. See ^ 260, Rem. 2. \n\n2. Ellipsis of the Apodosis. On the contrary, the Apodosis may be omitted \nin certain cases : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) In the expression of a wish, e. g. eXbt rovro y4voiro (sc. exnvxhi ^ \neXriv), that this might be! eXbe rovro iy(yero (sc. eirrvx^s h\xc2\xbb ^y)^ O Otat \nthis had been ! Comp. ^ 259, 3, (b), and Rem. 6. \n\n(b) Often in excited, impassioned discourse {Aposioj>\xe2\x82\xacsis). II. a, 340, sq. etwort \n8* aire XP^^^ 4ne7o yevr)Ttu aeiKea Xoiyhy ktivvai rots &Wois \xe2\x80\x94 . \n\n(c) Wlien the Apodosis may be easily supplied from the context. This oc- \ncurs in Homer in the i)hrase el 5\' d^eKeis with or without an Inf 11.^, \n487. el 5\' i^eXeis iroKf/xoio Sa^fieycu (sc. &y(, y^dxov ifuoi)\' 6^\' cJ eH^s. \nVery often also in Attic writers, where two conditional clauses are placed in \ncontrast by el (^ekv) fiey \xe2\x80\x94 el {iky) Sk fi^; in the first the Apodosis Is \nomitted, since it contains a thought whirh can !>e easily supplied, and the dis- \ncourse hastens on to the following more important thought. PI. Prot. 325. d. \nKol eay /xey eKo^y irei^Toi (sc. koXus ^X*\') \' *^ ^* M^> \xe2\x80\x94 ev^yovaiy axeiXaus Koi \nTrKtjycus. \n\n3. A partial ellipsis of the Protasis occurs in the Homeric phrase el 5* &yt, \ni.e. el \xc2\xa7\xe2\x82\xac $ov\\ei. dye. II. a, 524. el S" Aye roi Ke<pa\\fj Karrayevvofjuau. Also \nwhen el Se or el 5* &ye is used as an antithesis, where a verb must be sup- \nplied from the context. II. a, 302 ; i, 46. oAA* &AA01 fxeyeovai KapriKOfiit$yres \n*AxcMo(, els6Ke irep Tpoir}y Siairepaofiey \' el Zk Kol airroi (sc. fi^ fieyeoviri)^ ^rvy^r- \nrwv ahy yrjval <pl\\riy is varplSa yahv. \n\n4. El Se instead of ei 5e /i^ and el 5^ /n^ instead of el i4. "WTien two \nhvpothetical clauses are contrasted with each other, el 8c is often used instead \nof el Sh fi-fi, since the opposed or contrasted member of itself abrogates \nthe first member. PI. Prot. 348, a. Khv /xev fiovKri Uri ipvrar, froifi6s elfil aoi \nvapexeiy (sc. ifie) aTroKpiy6neyos \' iky Se &ov\\t), irb ifui wapdaye (if yarn yrisk to \npropose further questions. I am ready to ref^y. but if you do not tcish. etc. ). On the \ncontrary, a negative clause is followed by el Se fii), instead of e* 5\xc2\xab, this form \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 341.] ADVERBIAL CLAUSES DENOTING CONSEQUENCE. \n\n\n\n549 \n\n\n\nbeing very common in abrogating or expressing the opposite of the preceding \nclause. X. Cy. 3. 1, 35. irphs -ruv beuv, fi^ ovtco Aeye- \xe2\x82\xact Se (Jii) {otherwise), oh \nhap^ovvri. fie e^eis. \n\n5. When \xe2\x82\xact fii} has the meaning of except, another el is sometimes sub- \njoined, thus ft nh e t, like nisi si, except if, unless, the predicate of d f^-f, being \nomitted. PI. Symp. 205. e. ov yap rh Uvtuv, oJnai, eKa<TToi aaTrdCoyrai, el fi^ \nc t TIT rh ^iy hya^hu oIkcIou koXu. \n\n6. "Av in the Protasis with et and the Opt. or the Ind. of the historical \ntenses. Sometimes &v is found, also, in the Protasis, so that it contains a con- \ndition for the Apodosis, but it is itself dependent on another condition, com- \nmonly not expressed, but implied, e. g. \xc2\xab ravra \\eyoi5 &v means : If you should \niay this UNDER C1KCUM8TAXCE8 (=.m case circumstances require, in case an oppor- \ntunity should present, in case one should ask you), etc. X. Cy. 3. 3, 55. roi/s S* \nkirauitvTOvs irairrdwcuny apfrris bavfjLd^oifjL 6.v^ ef TiirKiou tiv ox/ieArjo-eie \\c- \nyos KoXus ^TjbfU (Is aySpaya^lay, I) rovs araiSfvrovs fiouaiKiis StTfia fid\\a KaXus \n^ff^iy els fjLOu<TiKi\\y. Pi. Prot. 329, b. ^70* fXtrep &AAw T6i> dvi^pwTrwv irei^ol- \nfjLTfy &y, Kcd <Tol wflboftat (si ulli alii, si id mihi affirmet, fidem habeam). \n\n7. When koI is connected with ci (^dv), the hypothetical Protasis contains a \n">ncessive meaning, and the Apodosis, an adversative meaning: the Protasis \n\ndenotes a concession; the Apodosis, often in connection with 8/xws, tamen, \ndenies the expected consequence, Mid places another consequence in opposi- \ntion to that i -\xe2\x96\xa0. Koi either follows \xe2\x82\xac I, \xe2\x80\x94 e* waT or precedes it, \xe2\x80\x94 kuI \nfl \xe2\x80\x94 . In lii- - : -, Kol moans also, and refers not merely to et, but to the \nentire concessive clause, and ct Kal means although. In the last case, Kcd \nmeans even (enhansive), and refers only to the condition, and Kal el means \neven if, c. g. f i Kal dyT]T6s dfu, although I am mortal (conceding what is actu- \nally the case, Kal \xc2\xab* a^dyaros ^y, cvin if I were immortal (conceding what is \nnot the case). S. O. II. 302. \'ir6\\ty neyy ci Kal /x^ fi\\eirfis, (ppoveis 5\' oiJiuts, o\'lCf, \ny6fTw {uveffTiv, etsi (quanuptam) caeais es, vides tanien, quo in malo versetur civitas. \nAesch. Choeph. 296. Kfl fiif irfiroi^a, roZpyov ttXT iypaareov, etiamsi non fido, \n\nJ \'\xe2\x96\xa0\xe2\x96\xa0 \'-/I ficinus est. To the el (iav) Kal, the negative el {iav) fjLrjSe \n\n1\' _ J to the Kcu (t (^av), ou8\' (/xtjS\') el {idy). \n\nRemark. Concessive clauses are far oftener expressed in an abridged form \nby the participle, either alone, or in connection with Kal, Kalirep, etc., \xc2\xa7 312, 4, \n(d) and Kem. 8. \n\nk 341. III. Adverbial Clauses denoting Consequence \n\nor Effect. \n\n1. Adverbial clauses, denoting consequence or effect, are \nadverbs of manner expanded into a sentence, and are intro- \nduced by the conjunction wstc (more seldom wg), which refers \nto the demonstrative adverb ovTa)(s), either expressed or under- \nstood, in the principal clause, e. g. ovrm KaX6<i icrnv, ui<sri Sav \n\n\n\n550 SYNTAX. [\xc2\xa7 341. \n\nfxd^caSaL (== Sav fxaa-tui? KaXos eo-rtv). Yet these clauses often \nhave also the meaning of a substantive or Inf. in the Ace. and \ndenoting an efect, and must then be considered as substantive- \nclauses. In this last case, the relative a><5T\xe2\x82\xac of the subordinate \nclause corresponds to a demonstrative substantive-pronoun, \neither expressed or to be supplied, e. g. tovto, in the principal \nclause, e. g. \'AveTretcre Hep^ea tovto, wst\xe2\x82\xac ttoUuv ravra (Her.). \n\n2. The Ind. is used in these clauses, when the consequence \nor effect, is to be indicated as a fact, something real and actual. \nThe negative is in this case (ov, { 318, 2). \n\nHer. 6, 83.\'\'Apyos auBpwv ixvp<*\'^V ovra, Sisre ol SovXoi avT^ccv tffxov \nTrdvra ra irp-fiyixara. X. Cy. 1. 4, 5. Kvpos raxv koX to \\y Tcp Trapa^ii(TCf ^pla \nai/7}\\(iKeL, &STe 6\'A<TTvdyr]5 ouKer\' eXx^v avrif <TvKXe\')^iv ^rjpia. 15. ovtws \nl^tr^T} rp rSre ^pa {6 \'AcrrvdyTis), Sisre dei, 6ir6r\xe2\x82\xac 6i6y re e^jj, trvpe^\'p e i r^ \nKvpw, Koi 6,Wovs re ttoWovs Trap\xe2\x82\xac\\dfifiaye. \n\n3. The Inf , on the contrary, is used, when the consequence \nor effect is to be represented as merely a conceived or supposed \none, inferred from the inward rel(flion of things, or assumed as \npossible. (On attraction with the Inf, see k 307, 4, and on the \nnegative, $ 318, 2.) The particular cases where the Inf. is used, \nare the following : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) When an effect or consequence is specified, which results from or has its \nground in the nature or condition of an object. X. C. 1. 2, 1. ert Se irphs rh fier- \npicou de7(r^ai TreTraLSev/xevos "fjy ^WKpdrrjS ovrcos, uisr e irdvv fiiKpa KeKT-qfievos irdw \npaSictiS ex^tJ\' apKOvvra. Cy. 1. 1, .5. idwdc^ Kvpos iTri^vfiiav eiJ.$a\\\xe2\x82\xac7v roaav- \nTT}U Tov irdvras avT^ x\xc2\xb0/\'\'C\'f "\'\'^\'"\'j SI> sr e ae\\ Tp avrov yvw/xri a^iovy Kv^epvda- \n^ai. 2, 1. (pvuai 6 Kvpos Xeyerai, fpiXorifxSTaros, &STe irdvTa jxhv ttSvov avar- \n\\rjvai, irdvTa Se kIvZwov viro/xeTvai rod itraLveTa^ai evcKa. For the same \nreason, ^ asre (quam ut) is used with the Inf, after a comparative. Her. 3, \n14. S TToI Kipov, ra fikv oiKifia ^v fie^co KaKa, ^ Ssre avaKXaieiv {greater than \nthat any one can bewail, i. e. too great for one to bewail). X. C. 3. 5, 17. (pofiov/xcu \naei, jU\'/; Ti (lu^ou ^ oSsre (pepeiv Svvaa^ai KUKhy rp irSXei avfififj. Hence \nSsT6 with an Inf may also be used to explain a preceding clause, e. g. Tb. 4, \n23. \'n.eXoirovv{](noi ip rp ijireipcp (rTpaTOTreSevcrdfjievoi, Kcd irpo5$o\\as Troiovfxevoi t^ \nreix^ii o\'Koirovures KUipov, eX ris TrapaTreo\'oi, usre tovs ivSpas (Taxrai [icaich- \nmg for an opportunity, if any should occur, by which their fellow-citizens could be \nsaved). X. C. 1. 3, 6. t to7s Trhelarois ipyoy^eararSv iariv, Ssre <pv\\d^a<rd^ai rh \nvvep rhy Kaiphv e^iriTrAacriS^at, t\'-Ito ^aSioos irdvv \'2,(aKpdrr)S e<pvKdrrero. \n\n(b) When the consequence is to be represented as one merely possible. X. \nAn. 2. 2, 17. KpavyrjV iroKX^v iirolovy KaXovvres aXXriXovs, Ssre kcu tovs TroXeui- \n9VS uKoveiv {ut etiam hastes audire possent), 8}sre ol fiev e77UTaTo rav noXefxl\' \n\n\n\nf 341.] ADVERBIAL CLAUSES DENOTING CONSEQUENCE. 551 \n\nav KoL ^<pvyoy {a fact). 1.4, 8. ovre airoiri^eiyaaiv \xe2\x80\xa2 ^x\xc2\xab y^p rpLr^p^ir, & srt \n\xe2\x82\xac\\e7y rh iKeipwv w\\o7ov. \n\n(c) When the consequence or effect includes, at the same time, the idea of \npurpose or aim. Th. 2, 75. irpoKaKvfJLfiaTa elxe Seppezs koL SicpSyepas, wsre tovs \nipyaCo/xevovs koI ra |vAo fi7]r\xe2\x82\xac irvpcpopois oiaToTis ^dWecr^ai, ev a(T<pa\\eia t\xe2\x82\xac \nelvai {so that those at work and the wood might not be hit, etc.). Dem. Cor. ^ 81. \nToWa fieu tt,v xPW^Ta eSw/ce ^tAttrrtSTjs, &sr\' exeij/ \'HpeoV {ut obtineret \nOreuni). \n\n(d) When the consequence is to he indicated at the same time as a condition of \nthe statement in the principal clause {under the condition, that, or it is presupposed, \nthat). Dem. Ph. 2. 68, 11. i^hv avro7s rS>v Xoiirwv ^px^iv \'EW-fjvwv, & st avTous \nviraKoveiv fia<ri\\ei {quum possent ceteris Graecis mx imperitare, tjt ipsi dicto \naudientes essent regi, since they could rule the rest of the Greeks, provided they \nthemselves obeyed the king). X. Cy. 3. 2, 16. koL tovto eTrio-rco, ^(prj, 5 Kvpe, \'6x1 \niyci, &5T\xe2\x82\xac OTreA-acot Xa\\dalovs avh tovtwv rS>v ^kowv^ iroXKairXaaria ti.v edwKa \nXfi\'fliJ.ara, uu av vw ^xeis Trap\' ifiov. \n\n(e) When instead of an Inf. alone, the Inf. with &st\xe2\x82\xac is used for the sake \nof emphasis. Th. 1, 119. {iSe-fj^rj cav) l/cacrTwv iSla, &sTe \\l/rf^i(ra(r^ai \nrhu iroKefJioy. 2, 101. aj/aireiS-eTot inrh \'Xev^ov . . , a) s t iy rdx^i OTreAid\'ery. \n6, 88. Kol 01 Koply^ioi cv^vs i^l/Tj<pi<rayTO avrol irpwroi, &STe irdari irpo^vfxla \na/jLvveiy kt\\. X. H. 6. 1, 9. Ka\\ \'ASrTiva7oi de irdyra Troi7i<raiey &y, Hsre \navfifiaxoi VH-^t^ yevea^ai. \n\n(f) In general, when the speaker, without respect to the objective relation \nof things, apprehends, in his mind, solely the causal connection between the cause \nand the effect. In this way, a consequence actually existing may be expressed \nby &ST\xe2\x82\xac with an Inf. X. An. 1. 5, 13. ^Xauvey iirl robs Meyuyos {ffrpaTtcoTas), \nSst\' iKelvovs e/c7r67r\\^X3-ot koI avrhy Meucava Kai rpex^t\'V iirl rh oir\\a. \n\n(g) In obiique discourse. X. Cy. 1. 3, 9. {rhy Kvpov) ehffxtiP-^vws irws irpose- \nveyKelv /cat iySovvai rrjy (pLaXrjy t^ 7ro7r7r<jf>, Sosre r-p fjLTjTpl koi t^ \'Aarvdyei, iroKvy \nyeXcora Trap acx t \' \'\'\xe2\x80\xa2 \n\nRem. 1. When the Inf connected with S>st\xe2\x82\xac depends on a condition, the \nmodal adverb du is subjoined to the Inf [\xc2\xa7 260, 2, (5), (a)]. Th. 2, 49. raiyrhs \novTcos iKaiero, fisre 7)5i(Trahyis vScop ^pvxphy ccpas avTovs piirreiy. X. An. \n6. I, 31. Kai jxoi 01 ^eol ovtcos eV to7s i\xe2\x82\xacpo7s iar]ixf]vav, & st e Kol iSidorrfy ti,y yyw- \nyai, \'6ti TauTTjs t^s fioyapx^as airex^o\'^al fie Sel (i. e. koI ei tis ISkvttis etrj). \n\nRem. 2. Instead of Sisre with the Inf or Ace. with Inf, a relative, particu- \nlarly at OS, \'6<Tos, is very often used in connection with the Ace. with Jnf., \nthis relative corresponding to a demonstrative, particularly toiovtos, to(tovtos, \neither standing in the principal clause or to be supplied. PI. Crit. 4^6, b. iyib \xe2\x80\x94 \nTOIOVTOS (sc. dfii), oTos Twv i/xwy fjLrjSeyl SAAo) irei^ea-^ai, fj ry \\6yj. X. \nCy. 1. 2, 3. ot nepa-iKol ySjxoi iTrifieXovrai, Hiras T7]V apxV /"^ toioOtoi iffovTU \n\n\n\n\nI. 2. yeiJ.6fj.evoi Tk avruv eKaa-Toi, \'6 (Toy aTroC^v {so far that they could live on \nthem). On the attraction in this mode of expression, see \xc2\xa7 332, Rem. 8. \n\nRem. 3. Special mention must be made here of apparently independent \n\n\n\n552 \n\n\n\nSYNTAX. [^ 341. \n\n\n\nparenthetic clauses, which often occur, and which are intro^aced by &s (seldom \n&ST\xe2\x82\xac) with the Inf. In this way the Inf , particularly of verbs of saying, thdrX- \ning, judging, hearing, is used with d>$ for the purpose of expressing restriction or \nlimitation. That, of which such a subordinate clause expresses the consequence \nor effect, must be supplied, e. g. toiovt^ rpoTrw. Th. 4, 36. ws (iiKphv ficydKo) \ne^/cao-at (to compare small with great). So oss eiros e\'nrfty (especially with \n"iras Bind ovSeis), ut ita dicam, propemodum dixerim, ws (rvve\\6vTi elvelv, ut \npaucis nbsolvam, ws ye fxoi So/ceTj/, ut mihi quidem videtur, -properly tali mode \nut mihi videalur, cos ifie eZ /xe fiufjcr^ai (as far as I well remember). S)5 ye \novTcoa-l aKova-ai (so far as we hear). Such clauses are very often expressed in \nan abridged form without wr, e.g. OUT wo-l aKovaai, Zok^Iv ifioiy ov iroA- \n\\^ \\6ycf} el-rreTv, especially 6\\iyov, /xiKpov Se7i/,ita ut paulum absit, and \nin the still shorter form, 6\\iyov, prope, paene. \xe2\x80\x94 According to the same analogy, \nh(Tov, \'6 a a, \'6 ri connected with an Inf, are used instead of w s. (Rem. 2), e.g. \nHaou ye fx elSevai, as far as I know, quantum sciam (properly pro tanto, \nquantum scire possim), \'6 ri fi elSevai. In like manner, ws with\' the Inf is \nused in Herod, in sentences which express a limitation. 2. 8. ro &V 5/? uTrh \n*^.i\\iovTr6Kios ovK\xe2\x82\xacTi TToWhy x^P\'^o\'^j ^^ el vat AlyvirTov (ut in Aegypto, for \nEgypt, i. e. considering its whole extent). \n\n4. The Opt. with av is used when the consequence or effect \nis to be represented as a conditioned supposition or presumption \nl^ 260, 2, (4), (a)]; finally the Ind. of the historical - t>i^^\xc2\xa7 .is \nused with av, when it is to be stated, that the consequ?!l^lij \nwould take place under a certain condition \\} 260, 2, (2), (a)].^ \n\nIsocr. Archid. 130, 67. e\\s rotravrrtv a^ii^iav i\\r)\\v^a(riv, & s r\' ol fiev Keicnjfie- \npot rhs ovalas i^Siov & v els t}}v ^d\\aTTau to, <r<peT(p^ avruv e fi^dWoiev, 1) to7s \nSeofieuois iirap Kea e lav. PI. Menex. 236, d. aol ye Se7 x^^C^^^^^y S>sre \nKav 0A./70U, et /xe KeKevois airoSvuTa opx\'fio\'aabcu, xap\'<^a\'A\'i7\'\' ^^\' \xe2\x80\x94 Symp \n197, a. (JiavTiKT]v ^hirSWuv avevpev, \'Etri^viJiias Kod\'EpuTos ijye fioyevaayroSy usre \nKal ovros \'\'EpuTos "hv eHr] /jLabrjrrjs. \xe2\x80\x94 Dem. Cor. 236, 30. ovk hv upxl^ofiev \n^IXiinrov, & sre ttjs elpi]in]S tiv 5 ir} fxapTT} Ke i Kol ovk i y afitpdrefm el x^i ^^ \nr^jy elprjur^y, /col to x^P^"* ^\' -^S- ^\xe2\x80\xa2. -^- "f^dyTes TroXefiiKo, oirKa KoreffKeva^oyf \n&STe ri]y Tr6\\iy oyrus &v i]yf]cru) iroXe/jLOv ipyatrTtjpioy elycu. \n\nRem. 4. The Opt. without &y is used only in the case mentioned in \xc2\xa7 227b, \n1, (b). When wsre is connected with the Imp., or the imperative Subj. [4 269, \n1, (a)], the dependent discourse is suddenly changed, with rhetorical emphasis, \ninto the Oratio recta. Dem. Phil. 3. 129. 70. ypdpu he, Zsre, iv fiovKrja^e, \nXe ipoTovt](Tar e (I ash that you icould decree, if you icish. properly : decree, if \nyon wish). So, likewise, Zsre can be connected with a question. Dem. Aphob. \n838. 47. el 6 Trar-^p Tjiriarei tovtois, STjAoy Srt oCt\' &v ToAAa iTrerpe-rey, o&t 2t\xc2\xbb \niKe7v ovToi) KaraXiTTwy auTo7s e(ppa^ey, Sisre ir6^ey tffaaiyj {ergo wide scie- \nrunt ?) Comp. \xc2\xa7 344, Rem. 6. \n\nRem. 5. Instead of Zsre with the meaning ita or ea conditione, irf, the post- \nHomeric language also uses ^<^* ^re (more seldom itp\' ^), which refers to \nthe demonstrative iir\\ touted in the principal clause, either expressed or im- \nplied ; either the Put. Ind.. or the Inf arc here used, e.g. Her. 3, 83. iwl \nrovTCf} 8e vire^icrTaiJ.ai Tfjs apxvs, en uTe inr\' ovSevhs vixewv 6.p^o fxai. X. \nH. 2. 2, 20. eiroiovyro elp-i^vTjy, e<p\' ^ to re /xcufpa reixv kcu rhy Ueipaua Ko^ekdy- \nras AajceSai/xoylois eirea^ai. 4, 38. 01 Sc Sti^AAafeu\', i<l>\' yre elp^yni\' ^X***\'* \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 342.) COMPARATIVE ADVERBIAL CLAUSES OF MANNER. 553 \n\nD. Adverbial Clauses denoting Manner and \n\nQuantity. \n\n$ 342. I. Comparative Adverbial Clauses denoting \n\nManner. \n\n1. Comparative adverbial clauses denoting quality and mari- \nner, compare the predicate of the principal clause, in respect to \nquality and manner, with the predicate expressed in the adver- \nbial clauses. They are introduced by the relative adverbs, w?, \nw9Te, wsTrep, otto)?, which refer to a demonstrative adverb, e. g. \novTo)?, in the principal clause, either expre.4sed or understood. \n\n2. The use of the modes in these adverbial clauses corre- \nsponds with that in adjective clauses (^ 333), e. g. Aeya? ovTOi\'iy \n0)5 <f)pov\xe2\x82\xacL<; (you speak as you think) . Zeus StSojo-tv, o tt w s e .^ e - \nXci or oTTws av i^eXtf 333, 3), eKao-rw (gives to each, as he \nwishes). Very often ws av or wsTrep a v is used with the Opt. \n($ 333, 6). PI. Phaed. 87, b. lixol yap Sokcl 6/xotcos Aeyeo-^ai \nravra, ojsTrcp av ris Trepc av-^poj-rrov vcfidvTov TrpecrjSvTOV aTro^avovros \nAeyot TOVTOV tov \\6yov. \n\nHemark 1. In comparisons, either the Present tense is used, since the com- \npared objert is i)laced in present view, or the Aor. [\xc2\xa7 256, 4, (c)]. In respect \nto the Modes, it is to be noted, tliat in Homer, tlie adverbs of comparison ws, \n&sTf, ifvre, are connected either with the Pres. or Aor. Ind., when the com- \nparison is stated as an actual fact, or with the Pres. Subj., or commonly with \nthe Aor. Subj. (^ 333, Rem. 2. ; the Aor. Subj. often retains the appearance of \nthe Fut. by the shortening of the mode-vowel). II. /c, 183. ws Se Kwes vepl \nljL?]\\a Sus w pi] (T o vTa t iy avKfj \xe2\x80\x94 , &s twu viiSv/xos viryos airh fi\\\xe2\x82\xac(papouu oAwAei. \np, 434. &ST\xe2\x82\xac ffrriKj] fxeyei (/xiTfSou, t^t iirl tu/jl^co avepos ecTTrjKei. k. 485, sq. \nws Se \\e(Di/ fir]\\oiaiu aar^p^auToiffiu irreK^wv atyeatv -tj Qi\'e(T(ri KaKO, (ppovecov iuo- \npova-T]- &r fiiv QpTjiKas ivSpas iircfix^To Tv54os vl6s {as it may happen that a lion, \netc.). \n\nRem. 2. Ovtms (ws) \xe2\x80\x94 ws are used in wishes or asseverations, the clause of \ncomparison, introduced by ws, expressing the asseveration or protestation. \nThus in Latin, ita vie da anient, UT ego nunc laetor, may the gods love me, as \nI rejoice, = may the gods not love me, if t do not rejoice, or as sure as I loish the \ngods to love me, so sure I now rejoice. 11. v, 825. el yhp iywv ovrw ye Aihs irais \nalyiSxoio iXT]u . . , ws vvv rjf^^PV ^^^ Kanhv <p4pei \'Apyeioicri jaai fj.d\\a {ivould that \nI were the son of Zeus as truly as this day brings evil to all the Gh\'eeks). \n\nRem. 3. In clauses introduced by ws, &sTrep, wsre, an attraction of the \nCase sometimes occurs, particularly in the Ace. Lys. Accus. Agor. 492, 136. \nouSaixou eo-Tti/ \' Ay 6paTov "A^vaTou ehat wsirep Q paarv ^ovXou {should be \nsuch as Thrasijbuhts is). But the Nom. is often found, for which a verb must be \nsupplied from the context. Dem. Mid. 363. ixP^\'^ \xc2\xab^\'^^\'\' ^" ^""^^ avahlaKovra \nSisirep 4yw, ovrw pikv a(paipe7<r^ai tt]v viK7)V. \n\nKem. 4. An appositive is often used with ws denoting comparison, as in \n\n47 \n\n\n\n554 SYNTAX. p 343. \n\nLatin with ut, for the purpose of explaining the predicate of the principal \nclause. This cbs, ut, expresses either comparison or limitation, and in the first \ncase is to be translated by as, in the latter by for ; the former occurs, when it \nis presupposed that the object connected with w s possesses in a high dejrree \nthe thing affinned in the predicate of the sentence ; the latter, when it is pre- \nsupposed that the object possesses only in a small degree what is affirmed by \nthe predicate of the sentence, S. O. R. 1118. Aatov yap ^v, e^Trep t\xc2\xabs 6x\\os, vur- \nt6s, cos vofievs avi\\p {ut pastor, as a shepherd ; the fidelity of shepherds be- \ning presupposed). But Th. 4, 84. ^v Se \xc2\xabvBh aduvaros, us Auk f5aifi6vios, \neiireTu {ut Lacedaemonius, for a Lacedemonian ; it being presupposed of Lacede* \nmonians as a thing known, that they were not great orators). \n\n\n\n$ 343. IL Comparative Adverbial Clauses denoting \n\nQuantity. \n\n1. Comparative adverbial clauses denoting quantity, compare \nthe predicate of the principal clause, in respect to quantity or \ndegree, with its predicate. The compared predicates are con- \ntrasted either as equal or unequal to each other. \n\n2. The equality of the predicates is expressed in the follow- \ning manner : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) The adverbial clause is introduced by the relative o<r^ \n{ocrov), wliich refers to the demonstrative Tocrovna (too-oC- \nTov), in the principal clause. \n\nX. Cy. 8. 1, 4. TOffovTov Biacpepfiv Tjfjuis Sei t\xc2\xabv iov\\a\xc2\xbb^, iorop ol /liv SoDXoi \n&KovTes To7s S(air6Tais vinjpeTovffiv {it becomes us to excel slaves as much as slaves \nunwillingly serve their masters). \n\n(b) Tlie adverbial clause is hkewise introduced by oo-w \n(oo-ov), wliich refers to the demonstrative too-ovto) {Toa-ovTov)y \nin the principal clause ; the predicate of both clauses, however, \nstands either in the comparative or superlative. \n\nX. An. 1. 5, 9. {Kvpos) vo/jlI^wv, J<ro> fiiv tv barror t?^ot rovovrtf \nhvapaffKevaa-Torepa) $a(n\\f7 fjidx^r^ai {quo [quanta] cekrius \xe2\x80\x94 eo [tan!\',] \nimparatior, thinking that the quicker he came, the more unprepared he would fnJ \nthe king to fght). 0. 7,42. 5<raj tv koI ifiol Koiya}v6s, koI iraua\\y oUov <pv\\a^ \na/JLeivo}V ylyr), roffovrtp koI rtfjuur^pa iv r^ otKcp l^<rp {quo [quanta] melior \n\xe2\x80\x94 eo [tanto] honoratior, the \xe2\x80\x94 so much the). Ilier. 1, 19. So-y tiy -rXflot t\xc2\xbbj xa- \npa.^?}Tai TcnrepiTTa ruv iKva>S)V, roaovrto baaaov KOpos ifi^i-rrfi rris iSooSris. \nTh. 8, 84. oacf) ix(i\\i<rra koL i\\fvdepoi ^aav yavrcuy rotrovrta koX bpacv- \nTOT a TrposiTi(T6vres tIv fxiobhv air^Tovv. The Superlative may also stand in \nthe first member, the Comp., in the last. Dem. 01. 1. 21, 12. 5<ry 70^ krot- \nu.6rar^ ahr^ {r^ \\6ya>) BoKOVfiey x/>\'5<\'"\'^<". roaovrtfr naWoy a-rurrovn \nwdyTfS ovry. \n\n\n\n^ 344.] INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 555 \n\nKemark 1 . Sometimes Toffoircois omitted, especially when the relativa \nmember of the comparison follows PL Gorg. 458, a. ^elCov yhp ahrh ^ya- \nbhv rryovfiat, ba-cpire pfi e iCov aya^6u ianu ahrhv ^iraWaywai kokqv tovL- \nyiffr ou ^ &.K\\ov o7raAAa|at. Also after the omission of o&co \xe2\x80\x94 ToaovTw both \nclauses maybe blended into one, e. g. X. C. 4. 1, 3. at dp^arai doKovaa\\ ehai \n<t>vafis fjLoXiaTa iraioeias oeouTai. \n\nRem. 2. A comparative clause, introduced by &s, Sttws, ^ (as), Scrov, and \nexpressmg a possibdity,^ often serves to strengthen a superlative. X. C. 2. 2, 6. \niTTineKovyrai ol yoyeh irdma TToiovyrfs, Strws ol irui^is ahrois yivuvrai us 5uj/\'o- \nrhy $4\\ri<TToi {as good as possible, quam fieri potest optimi). Cv. 7. 1, 9. ^ \nhv Svywuai rdx^rra {as quick as possible). For the like purpose, also, \noTos, 8ri are used in connection with eJvai. X. C. 4. 8, 11. iSSKei roiodros \nfhai, oTos tiy etv 6.pi(Tr6s y^ ai^p evbaifiovearraTos. The foUowino- \nelliptical expressions originate from the omission of the verb: ws ^pia-r\'a \noToy x\xc2\xab^\xc2\xab\'\'^\'r\xc2\xab^oi/, OTi fid\\i<rTa, etc. (^ 239, Eem. 2). In the same \nmanner, the expressions is aK-n^wSy in fact, really, us arexvus, utterly, ws iravv, as \niirl rh iroKv, pieminque, are to be explained ; also ws eKaaToi, i. e. eKcwTot, ws \ntKcuTToi ^aay. \n\n3, The inequalitTj of the predicates compared, is expressed \nby appending to the Comparative a coordinate clause with the \ncomparative particle ^. See h 323. \n\nRem. 3, The relation of quantity is expressed by comparing the predicate \nof the principal clause, in respect to its magnitude or degree, with the conse- \nquence or eftect of that clause, the consequence being expressed by a subordi- \nnate clause with firre and the Inf. If tlie degree of the predicate in the prin- \ncipal clause stands in an equal relation with its effect, then the predicate of the \nprincipal clause is in the positive, e. g. ovtws av^pi76s iffTiv, Stsre ^av- \np.d((0-bai. But if the relation is unequal, i. e. if the predicate of the princi- \npal clause is represented as one which exists in a higher degree than another \nstanding with it, then the Comparative is used with ^ &st\xe2\x82\xac and the Inf, e. g. \nrk Koick n\xc2\xablC(i> iffriuy ^ wrrf avaKXainv {greater than that one, i. Q. too great \nto be bewaiUd). See S 341, 3, (a). \n\n\n\nCHAPTER IX. \n\n$ 344. I. Interrogative Sentences. \n\n1. Questions are either independent of a preceding sentence \nor dependent upon it, e. g. Has the friend come J and I do not \nknow w}i\xc2\xa3th\xe2\x82\xacr tlie friend has come. The first is called a direct \nquestion, the last, indirect. Both may consist either of one \nmember, or of two or more members, e. g. Has the friend come, \nor Has he not yet come? Do you not know whether he is come or \nwhether he is not coming ? According as the question refers to \nan object (person or thing) or to a predicate, the questions are \ndivided into nominal and into predicative questions, e. g. who \n\n\n\n556 SYNTAX. [$ 344. \n\nhas done this ? (nominal question), and hast thou written tJie \nletter ? (predicative question). \n\n2. The nominal questions, i. e. those questions, in which th^\xc2\xa3^ \ninquirer wishes to receive an answer on a single word in the \nsentence (subject, attributive, or object), are introduced by the \nsubstantive, adjective, or adverbial interrogative pronouns, rts, \nwdtos, -TTocros, Trorepos, ttoos, tttj, ttov, tto^l, tto^cv, ttoctc, etc. If the \nnominal questions are indirect, then they are introduced by the \ninterrogative pronouns (^ 93, Rem. 1.) compounded with a \nrelative : osrts, bTrolo<;, ottocto?, OTTorepos, ottw?, otttj, ottov, oTro-^ev, \nOTTOcre, etc. \n\nTis ^\\^ey] \xe2\x80\x94 Tt 7roie?s; \xe2\x80\x94 Iloldy ffe ^iros <pvyeu UpKos o^Sutwv ] \xe2\x80\x94 Hws Xe- \nyeis ; \xe2\x80\x94 U6a\'e (pevyere ; \xe2\x80\x94 Ouk o75a, o st is iariy. \xe2\x80\x94 Oi/K olSa, oirco s tovto rh \nvpayfjLa eirpa^ev. \n\nRemark 1. Often, however, the indirect question takes the character of \nthe direct, and then the direct interrogative pronouns are used instead of the \nindirect. Sometimes, indeed, in clauses that immediately follow each other, \nthe first clause takes the indirect interrogative, the last more seldom, the direct. \nOvK ol5a, Tis ravra eTrpa^ev. X. C. 4. 6, 2. elire /lloi \xe2\x80\x94 Tro76v ri vofii^eis evcre- \n0eLay elvai; yet there follows immediately, ex^i^s oZv flireLV, 6iro16s ris 6 ei/ae- \nfi-fjs iariu] Comp. Rem. 2. PI. Crit. 48, a. ouk &pa rjfuv ovrw (ppovriareov, ri \nipovcty ot TToAAol rifxas, ctAX*" 3 r x i ^iraCcov irepl tuv SiKaicay Kol aSiKwy, X. C. 4. \n4, 13. ov yap alcr^dyojuLal crov, 6iro7ov vS/uLifiov, ^ irolov SiKaiov Xcyeis. \xe2\x80\x94 In \nindirect questions, the simple relative is sometimes used, instead of the indirect \ninterrogative, e. g. os instead of ostis, olos instead of dirolos, etc. \n\nRem. 2. The adverb TrcJS-e, like the Latin tandem, is sometimes appended \nto the interrogative, in order to express the impatience or desire of the inquirer \nfor an answer, or to denote wonder, or emotion in general. X. C. 1. 1, 2. \nirolco iroT ixprjcrauTo TeK/j.Tjpi(i} ,- {u\'hat proof, I pra)/, did they bring?) 1. iroA.- \nKaKis i^avij.a(Ta, ricri irore \\6yois \'A^vaiovs ^ireiaav ot ypa\\pdfA.eyoi Sw/cpaTTji/, \nws 6^105 e^Tj Sfavdrov tt; TroAet. R. L. 1, 1- i^aifxaaa, Stco irore Tpoirca tqvt \niyiviTO. \n\nRem. 3. The article is prefixed to the interrogative, when one of the speak- \ners has mentioned an object or quality, in order to define it more exactly, while \nthe other does not expect this more exact definition, but interrupts the dis- \ncourse, and, by means of the article referring to that general definition, asks \n" what that means." PI. Phaedr. 277, a. \'S.wKp. Nuv 8?? in civ a f?\'5i7, 5 ^oTSpe, \nSvycifj.(^a Kpiveiv, tovtwv 6>p.o\\oyr]ix4va>v. 4". Ta irola; (in reference to the \npreceding ejcetj/a). 279, a. liOiKp. Neos ert, S> ^aTdpe, \'l(T0Kpa.Tir\\s \' h ii4vtoi fuxv- \nTevo/xai Kar avrov, Xeyeiy i^eXu. 4>. Tb iro7oy 5?); So Ta Tro7a ravra \nX4yeis ; From this mode of expressipn, that is to be distinguished, in which a \nsubstantive with the article or a demonstrative follows an interrogative with- \nout an article. In this case, the inquiry relates to the nature or quality of an \nobject already existing. II. ir, 440. iroTov rhy fiv^ov genres ; which the \nEng. translates by means of two sentences, \'\' What is that woi-d, that thou \nhast spoken 1 " The word is already spoken, and the other now asks what it \nmeans. Her. 7, 48. SaLfj.6yie aySpuy, Ko7a (= iroia) ravra \\4yeis elyai Svo fioi \nvoX^lxiwrara; (what are these two things which you say are most hostile to me?) \nPI. Gorg. 521. a. iirl Tror e pay oly fxe irapaKaXels rijy ^epdireiav rijs iroKftei \n(= TToreoa itrrly rj ^epdireia, i<p\' f}v /xe irapaKaXus ;) \n\n\n\n$ 344.] INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. \n\n\n\n557 \n\n\n\nEE3r. 4. In order to make the subject matter of the question emphatic when \nthere is an antithesis, or a transition in the discourse, the words whicli denote this \nsubject matter are often taken from their own sentence and phxced first with ri \n\n\n\n\n^ irphs rh fieKriaTou fiXiirwv iS6Kei aoi KibapwZeiv ; \n\nRem. 5. The expressions, ri fxaStuv, ti iraSKou, cur? ivhy? always ex- \npress disapprobation or censure of that respecting which the question is asked. \nThe former implies that the thing censured was done designedli/ ; the latter that \nit was done accidentally, e. g. Ti ytto^cbi/ toCto iiroirjaas ; [what has come into \nyour mind to do this, with what object in view did you do this?) Tl ira^wv tovto \n4volr](Tas ; {quid erpeiius hoc fecisti ? what happened to you that you did this ?) PI. \nApol. 36, b. ri 6^l6s el/iii Tra^eTi/, ^ aTroT7<rai, ort fxa^cSov iu tw fiiw ovx rjavxiav \n^yov ; ( what punishment do I deserve, that 1 purposely have had no rest in my life ?). \n\nEem. 6. A rhetorical turn of the Greek language, of frequent recurrence, \nconsists in suddenly changing a subordinate clause, introduced by a conjunc- \ntion, into a direct interrogative clause, yet in such a way that the earlier con- \nstruction remains unaltered. In such a case, the Eng. changes the subordinate \nclause into the principal, and the principal into the subordinate. X. C. 1. 4, \n14. (TV Se a/xcpOTepcav riau irXeiarov a^icou reruxv^^s ovk oUt crov ^eovs i7ri[jie\\c7(r- \nbai, aA.\\\' orau ri it o i-i] a (a a i, vofj-L^ls avrovs aou cppovTi^eiv ; [but what must the\' \ngods do, to make you believe that they care for thee?}. Dem. Phil. 1. 43, 10. Wre \n& XP^ \xe2\x96\xa0"\xe2\x96\xa0p^l^\'f \xe2\x80\xa2 eTreiSai\' ri yeurjrai; {but what must take place if you are to \ndo your duty?). Hence the elliptical expressions, \'Iva ri; ws ri; {scyhrj- \nrai) to what purpose, for ivhat object? or i ri; {sc. yiyverai), on what ground? \nSo also in the adjective-clause, e. g. PL Phaed. 105, b. d yap %poi6 fie, S hv r i \niv ro) (Tw/JLari iyye I\'Tjr ai, ^fp/xhu earai, ov r^u aacpaXr] aoi epw aTr6Kpi(Tiv (if \nyou would ask in what condition of body he must be, so that it might be warm ?) So \nalso ri oh is inserted in the midst of clauses without change of construction \n{nihil non). Dem. Cor. 241, 47. v0pi^o[x4u(au koI ri Kanhv ovx^ iracrxivrwv \niraffa 7) olKovfiivrj fj-ear^ yeyove irpoZorwv. \n\nRem. 7. The Greek may place two, or even more interrogatives, without \nKai, under one common predicate, e. g. Ilws ri &p tuv aywi/i^oi/xe^a ; (how and \nwhat?). [Comp. Eng. " ichat and what manner of time," riua ^ iroiov Kaipov, 1 \nPet. 1 : 11.] PI. Rp. 400, a. iro?a 5\' 6 iroiov fiiov fxifx-ffixara, ovk exw \\eyeiu \n{what imitations and of what life?). Dem. Cor. tis rivos aXrids iari ; So \nalso witli the relative. Isocr. Arcliid. 124, 42. ris ovk olSeu, \xe2\x82\xac| o\'lwv ^v/xcpopcou \n\xe2\x82\xacts offrjv ivZai^ioAav Kari(TTr](rav. \n\nRem. 8. Both the relatives and interrogatives in Greek are very often con- \nnected with a participle. Thus a great brevity in expression is effected ; the \nEng. in this case changes the Part, together with the interrogative or relatiA\'e \nbelonging to it, into a principal clause, and the finite verb into a subordinate \nclause. X. C. 3. 7, 3. rT]v Se 4ix)]V Swa/xiv, e(pT] 6 Xap/xiSrjs, iu iroiw epyco fca- \nrafxaStiav ravrd fxov KarayiyvaxxKeis ; {by ivhat icork hast thou learned my ability, \nso that thou couldst pass such a sentence about me?). The Greek may also insert \nan interrogative clause between the article and the participle belonging to it, \nand in this way blend the two questions into one. X. C. 2. 2, 1. Karafj.e,ua.^Kas \novv rovs r i TToiovvras rh ouo/xa rovro airoKaKovat ; instead of Karafiefxa^riKas, \nriuas ih Suofxa rovro airoKoXovcnu, Kai ri tvoiovctlv ovroi, ovs rh ovojxa rovro airoK- \naXovaiv ; \n\n3. Predicative questions, i. e. those where the inquirer de- \nsires only an affirmation or denial to his inquiry, are expressed \nin English merely by placing the finite verb first and by the \n\n47# \n\n\n\n558 SYNTAX. [\xc2\xa7 344. \n\naccentuation, e. g. Art thou sick ? Hast thou seen thy friend ? \nTn Greek, also, the predicative question is indicated, in the first \nplace, merely by the tone of the question and the position of \nthe words, the word on wliich the stress of the question hes, \nbeing placed first in the sentence ; still this mode of expression \nis not very common ; it is used most frequently, when the ques- \ntion involves a certain degree of emotion. \n\nOd. \xe2\x82\xac, 204. ovTO) Stj olKoi/ic \xc2\xabpl\\-t)v is TrarpiSa ya7ay avriKa vvv ibdKeis Ifvai; \nTliis is found very often with negatives, e, g. Ovk i^eKds Uvai; \n\n4. In the second place, the predicative question is introduced \nby certain interrogatives ; this is the more common usage. In \nindirect questions, these interrogatives are trans. ated hy whether. \nWhen the predicative question consists of more than one mem- \nber, and of such a nature that one member is excluded by the \nother (disjunction, ^ 323), then one of the interrogatives stands \nin the first member, while ^, or (an), stands in the second and \nfollowing members. \n\n5. The interrogatives in the predicative questions are the \nfollowing : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a)\'^H implies an asseveration (\xc2\xa7 316, 2). and hence is used when it is sap- \nposed that that which forms the subject of the question actually exists. X. Cj. \n1. 4, 19. tJ ovToiy S) iraTTTre, iroKfuioi flirtv, 6i i<pc(TTT]Kaai rois rjpfua] Tlo\\(fuoi fi4r- \nToj, ^(prj. PI. Rp. 341, e. ^ op^ws aoi Sokw, (<pr)v, tw fltrtlif ovrw Xeyttv, ^ 06 ; \n\'Op^usy ?<^7j. Very often used in connection with other particles, e. g. /x^* \n(\xc2\xa7 316, 1), 5^,, 5^ ^ov (\xc2\xa7 315, 1, 2), S^ra (\xc2\xa7 315, 3), Apa, yiip [^ 324, 2, 3, (a)l, \nKal, irov (\xc2\xa7 316, 2), irov Upa. X. 0. 4, 23. ri Keyds, 2> KOpe ; ^ yiip ab \nTois (Ta7s x^P\'^^ TovTwy ri i<pvTevaas ; (Now did you actually jJaut any of Oust \nwith your own hands ?). "^H ydp; (is it not true f). PL Ilipp. Alin. 363,c. ^ ydp^ \n2) \'lirirla, idf ri ipwraae \'SojKpaTrjs, 6.iroKpiyei ;\'*H irov; (surety f srtrdy indeed?). \nPI. Lysid. 207, d. ^ tr ov, ?iv 5\' ^7^, & Ai;<n, (r<p6Zpa <piKii are & rar^ip koI t} fi\'ffTvp] \nndvv ycy ^ S\' 8s. Still, ij irov is also used wlien the inquirer would express \ndoubt whether the actual existence of a thing is to be admitted or questioned. \nEur. Med. 695.^ irov reT6\\tiijK ipyov aXtrxurroy rdSe; (has Jason INDEED, \nACTUALLY darcd this thing ?). \n\n(b) "^Apa (only post-Homeric) originates from the inferential ipa, i^;iiur \n[^ 324,3, (a)], and hence implies the idea of consequencf, effect ; by frequent \nuse, however, the appropriate meaning (igitur), becomes weakened and ob- \nBcured : hence the inferential particles fi p o, 5 v are sometimes added to a \nquestion introduced by Sipa. "^Apa leaves it undecided, whether the inquirer \nexpects an aj[finnative or nepaiive answer. Hence, when it is to be definitely \nindicated, that either an affirmative or a negative answer is expected, then in \n\n\n\nI \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 344.] INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 55S \n\nthe first case, 5/j ou (nonne), is used; in the last case, Spo /t^ {mm, whether? \nis it not?) ] ^i-fi ahvays expresses solicitude, fear. X. C. 3. 6, 4. ^p ^n 6 Sw/cpdxTjs, \nS)SV\xe2\x82\xacp, <t>i\\ov oIkov el av^rjaai fiov\\oio, irKoua-icirepou avrhv eVixeipotT/s au Troirjo-ai ; \nndvv fihv olv, e<^77. 10,1. Spo, %<pT\\, & Uappdcne, ypacpiKT] iariv 7] eiKaaia \nrwy Spwfieyuu ] \xe2\x80\x94 \'AAtj^^ A 6 yets, \xe2\x82\xac<p7]. 2. 6, 16. Sp ovv olcr^d Tivas, ot avu- \n<p\xe2\x82\xac\\(7s iyres u(pe\\iiJLovs SvvafTaL (pi\\ovs iroie7a^ai ; Ma Ai\' ov 8t]t e(^7j. 3. 13 \n3. S. p oZv, \xe2\x82\xac4>i7, KoX oiKfTai (Tov ^X\'^o^Tfl\' TTivoi/Tes re aurh /cot Xovofievoi avTcS ; \nMa rhv Af, \xe2\x82\xac(^ (profecto non aegre ferunt). 4. 2, 22. dp\' oSv Sta tV toS x"^- \nKfViiv OLfia^iav rov 6y6fiaTos tovtov rvyxdvovaiv ; Ou Stjto. 1.5,4. a pa ye \nV XP^ irdvTa iuSpa, 7}yT)adnevou rrjv e-yKpareiav dpeTrjs fhai Kp7]ir7Sa, ravTr]v \nvpuTov 4y Trj \\iivxV KaTouncevdaatr^ai , inonne certe). 2.6,34. a pa /xt] 8ia^d\\- \nKfcrbai S6^eis xtk ifxov ; 4. 2, 10. ti Se Stj ifiov\\6fjievos ayaSths yeveaSfai, ecprj, & Eu- \n\n^i557j^6, avWeyeis ra ypdfxfiaTa ; \xe2\x80\x94 \'^Apa fi^ taroos ; ecpr] Kal 6 EvStvdrjfxos \' \n\nMa At", ^(^, ovK eyarye. 0. 4,4. Spo /*?? atVvuvi^w/xef rb;/ nep(rci)j/ fiaaiXea \nfiifi-na-cuT^ai ; Double question : PI. Euthyphr. 9, e. Spa rh oaiou, on oVtcJ;/ eVrt, \n<PikfiTai irrh riiv bewy, IJ, Sri <fn\\e7Taiy oaidu ecrrt ; {is then that which is holy loved \nby the gods because it is fioli/, or is it holy because it is loved ?) \n\n(c) Miiv (probably originating from fi-f] and the confirmatiA\'e ovv, \xc2\xa7316, \nRem.), corresponds entirely to the Latin num, is it not? is it so? whether? and \nhence always leads one to expect a negative answer. For the sake of perspi- \ncuity, the particles oZif and fir) are often added, e. g. fjLuv ovv, fiuv /n^. But \nif the negative oit is added to fiwy, then the question is affirmative {nonne). PL \nLysid. 209, c. oAA* itpx** \'\'\'^^ <tov ,- "OSc naiBayuySs, i<pT]. Mwi/ SoDAoj &v ; {hut \nnot a slave, is he ?) Eur. llec. 754. ti XPJM\'* fiacTTevovcra ; fiwv iAev^epou aiwva \ndtabca ; pdZiov yap 4iTri <roi. Hecuba answered : Ou hrira\' tovs kukovs Se ri/jLoo- \npovfx\xc2\xabvi\\ aliiva rhy ^vfjiiravra hovXewrcu beKw. Eur. Andr. 82. fiwv odv 8oKe7s \ntrot <t>poyri<rau riv kyyeXtSiv ; PI. Phaed. 84, C. t/, c^tj, viitv ret Kex^ivra, ; (xwy \nfi^ SoKft iyieSiss Kfytabai; \xe2\x80\x94 \'Ei\' oh ri XPV" iroieiy ifie; fiwu ovx airep iiroiovy; \n(nonne^ quod jlicicbiim .\xe2\x96\xa0\') \n\n(d) There is the same diflFerence between ou and fi-f} when used without \nJpa, as when used with it, see (b) : i. e. ov is used in affirmative questions, fj.^ in \nnegative. Ovk ibtkfis Itycu ; {tion or nonne vis ire *? do you not wish to go ?) PL \nProt. 309, a. ov <rv /xevrot \'Onrjpov iiraiyeTijs el; {are you not in fact an eulogist? \non /i<Woi, see \xc2\xa7 316, Rem.). Ou ovkovv {nonne igitur) and ovkow {nonne \ncerte) in a question, see \xc2\xa7 324, Rem. 7. X, C. 4. 2, 10. aAA.a fi)) apxireKTwv \n$ov\\fi ytyeabai; Ovk oZy J\'ywy\', \xe2\x82\xac*^7j. \'AAAo fxr} yewfj.eTpr)s e7rt^vij.e?s, \xe2\x82\xac<pri, \nyeyeo^ai a.ya^6s ; Ovhe yeuueTpris, e(p-n ktK. 2, 12. /t^ oZv, ecpr] o I^v^v^ixos, \nov Svyufiai iyu to Trjs SiKaiooinnjs epya e^Ttynoao^ai ; {shall I not be unable, etc.? \nthe negative ou Wlongs to the single word Svyup-ai). This inteiTogative fi-f] is \nused very often in an indirect question, after expressions of considering, ask- \ning, int/uiring, of solicitude and fear. It appropriately means, whether not, but m \nEng. can be often translated by that. X. C. 4. 2, 39. (ppovriCu, nh KpdTKXTov \n^ fioi oiyay {lam anxious whether it is not best). For more examples of ^1117 and \nalso for the construction, see \xc2\xa7 318, Rem. 6. \n\n(e) E7ra and ^ jr ft t a, and more emphatically /cfro, Ktireira, introduce \n\n\n\n560 SYNTAX. [$ 344 \n\nquestions of astonishment, indignation, and irony. They express antithesis of \ncontrast, and yet, since they show that an unexpected conclusion has been \ndrawn from a previous thought (\xc2\xa7 312, Rem. 8). X. C. 1. 4, 11. eS Xahi^ f<f>v, \nHtl, \xe2\x82\xact vo/xi^oifii ^eovs ap^pdlfvwv tj (ppovTi^eiu, ovk tiv afie\\oir]i/ airruv. 2. **\xc2\xa3 ir f \xc2\xbb t* \nouK oXei (ppouTi^iiu ; o* irpunov fieu fidvov tuw ^mcov 6,v^puirov op^hv aviffTnaav ktK. \n{and yet do you not think tliat they do care far men?). Cy. 2. 2, 31. K&Tcira \nToiouToy uvTa ov (piX^ls aur6v ; \n\n(f) n^repoi/ (TrJrepo) \xe2\x80\x94 ^ (Homer ^ \xe2\x80\x94 ^) is nscd like the Latin u/rum \xe2\x80\x94 \nan, in direct and indirect double questions. UoTfpov is sometimes omitted in \nthe first member. X. C. 2. 3, 6. koX 6 ^ZcaKpdrris t<frn\' Hot ^ pa Se, 2> Xaiptxpa- \nT6S, ovSeA apteral ZvvaTOA. Xa^pf<pwu, 1} eariv ofr koI irdw ap4<TKei ; Cy. 3. 1, 12. \nTi 8e, ^u xpijixara iroWa txxii ^9^ irXoxniiv^ fj itckijto irotetj; C. 1.4, 6. ravra \nouTW TTpoyoTjTiKws TTeTTpayfifya, avop(7sy TTorepa tvxv^j ^ yvwfjLtis tpya. iariv; \n\n(g) "A A. A T J tj (arising from &Wo ri ivrifix yiyvtraiy ^ or ytyoir\' ivy \xc2\xa5f) and \n&\\\\o Ti,has the same signification as nonne. X. An. 4. 7, 5. &X\\o ti I) ovieif \nKcoKvfi TTapUuai ; (does anything else than nothing hinder = does anyttdng hinder f) \nPL Hipparch. 236, e. &Wo ri oZv ol yf <piXoKfpS(7s tpiXovai rh Kfpios ; \n\n(h) "H, like the Lat. an, is properly used only in the second member of the \nquestion ; but often the first member is not expressed in form, bat is contained \nin what precedes or may be easily supplied from it. "H can then be translated \nby perchance. X. C. 2. 3, 14. iriur &pa av yi ri i\xc2\xbb kvbpwwois ^iKrpa 4wurrdfiit- \nvos iT(i\\ai atreKpvirrov ^ 6kv(7s, t<pi\\, if^a\'* fi^ cuVxpii <i>ayrii. iav vpirtpoi thv \na5i\\(phv (ii TToifis ; (= if &pa \xe2\x80\x94 awfKpvwTou, f} oKueis \xe2\x80\x94 .- \n\n(i) El and iiv [with the Subj., comp. ^ 339, 2, 11, (b)], u^oAer, is used only \nin indirect questions, and, indeed, properly only in double questions, and de- \nnotes a wavering or doubting between two i)Ossil>iliiJes ; but often only ono \nmember is expressed, while the other is present in the mind of the speaker. \nHence ci and idy are especially used after verbs of rejlecting, ddiberating, inquir- \ning, asking, trying, knowing, and saying. The connection must determine whether \nthe interrogative sentence has an affirmative sense (itV/Act* \xe2\x80\x94 not), or a nega- \ntive one (tvhtthcr). X. An. 7. 3. 37. <rK\xc2\xabv^ai, (16 \'LWriroep vofios itdXXtov ?x\xc2\xab*\xc2\xbb \n(whetlof \xe2\x80\x94 not). C. 1. 1, 8. of/rc ry (TTparrjiyiK^ 3^X0*\', ti {whether) avfi^ptt \ntrrpaTr)\'}f7v\' oijTe rip itoXitik^ SfjAov, d {ichcOter) cvpu^pti t^j r^Acwy \nirpoaTaTelv ovre toj Ka\\j)y yfjfiayri, Xy (v^paiyrfreUy SjjXo*\', d {whether\xe2\x80\x94\' \ntioi) Sjct Tavrrjv ayidaeToi, otre Tij3 Svyarovs 4v rp xdA.\xe2\x82\xac\xc2\xbb ioj5e<rreij Xa^mi ^r^Xoy^ \net {whether \xe2\x80\x94 not) Sia rovrovs OTep^ccTcu rris troK^ws. C 4. 4, 12. <rirr<|\xc2\xab\xc2\xabu, iiim \nTode aol /LiaWoy a p e 0* K p. PI. Apol. 1 8, a. Seofioi vpuSiv rovry rhr rovy vpost~ \npteiv, (1 S\'lKaia K^yuy fj fiij. \xe2\x80\x94 On ei after verba ajffectuum, see ^ 329, Rem. 7. \n\nRem. 9. Very frequently, especially in Homer, A-erbs wlr \' rcss some \n\naction, are constructed with this deliberative idy with the ^ <! d with \n\nthe Opt. (KjMc fX K\xe2\x82\xac, aX Kt), in which case a verb like trKonly, -rt. \'.^:*3^, \nis to be 8U}>plicd by the mind. Th. 1. 58. TloTiSaiaTcu Ircfii^cu\' ul. _. -j^\' \n\'Ai^Tji\'afous irpfo-^ns, (t irtos tc ( <r \xe2\x82\xac i a y {having sent envoys to the A e, \n\nto ascertain] whither thi y could persuade them). \' 11. u, lI\'LyKaumtittr o Av\xc2\xbbti y*/**- \nrai /leV e(, ^v riya ir 4 <pyi) dydpciy. \n\n(k) Elfre \xe2\x80\x94 \xe2\x82\xacJfT\xe2\x82\xac ai-e used in indirect questions like el \xe2\x80\x94 <, except thai \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 344.] INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 561 \n\nby eirt \xe2\x80\x94 cJt6 the indecision and hesitation of the speaker between two possi- \nbilities, are made more prominent. S. Ant. 38. kcI Sei|e<s T<ixB> e^^i" evy^v^s \nir\xe2\x82\xac<pvKaSt etr iabXcov kokt). The poets also say ejfre \xe2\x80\x94 ^, or et \xe2\x80\x94 eiVe, or they \nomit the first cfre altogether. \n\n6. On the use of Modes in interrogative sentences, the fol- \nlowing points are to be noted : The Ind. is used in direct and \nindirect questions ; it is also used after ^rj in indirect questions, \nwhen the interrogator wishes to express his conviction, that \nthat which is the object of liis anxiety or fear actually exists. \nThe Subj. and Opt. are used in deliberative questions [^ 259, 1, \n(b), and 2] ; but the Opt. also (after an Hist, tense), when the \nquestion is to be represented as the sentiment of another (^345, \n4), and also when the question depends on a clause expressing \na wish (^333, 5). The Opt. with av and the Ind. of the histor- \nical tenses with ai/, are used as in principal clauses, k 260, 2, \n(2) and (4). \n\nT( Kiytts: (Also in questions expressing wonder or astonishment, the \n\nGreeks use the Ind., e. g. irwj oISo; {how could I know?) \xe2\x80\x94 Etire, Hn Ke \n\nytis; Th. 3, 53. <^o/3ou/x\xe2\x82\xacda, ^^ an(poTfpwy r} fxapr-fjKan^v. X. Cy. 3. 1, 27. \n\ngpa, n^ iKtlvovs ai Se^aci ae aoxppoyiCfii\' hi fxaWov, ^ ^;u5s vvv iderjffev. Ti \n\ntXwwixty; (what can we say, irhat are we to say ?)--Ovk oJda, \'6 ti eXirwixep \n\n{/ knou) not what we can, shall say). Od. e, 473. 5ei5co, f^v Srfipeaffiu e\\cop /cal \n\nKipfia ytywfxai (that I shall become). X. C 4. 2, 39. cppoyriCw, [x^ Kpiriarov \n\n^ ^i eifay ( whtther it is not l>est ) . Ovk elxov, Uttol r pairoifivi^\' PL Rp- 614, \n\nb Aj/a3aioi.r (Ktyty, t iKu r 5 o i ( ichat he had seen tlies). -"Apd /xoi i^eh-fjaaLS \n\ntty uir,:y (so. cf (xc ipc^t^v^) ] X. An. 6. 1, 28. iKuyo iyyow, fih A^a" &" raxh \n\nffo\xc2\xbb<t>poyiabtivy- C. 4. 2, 30. rrphs ch airoP\\4Tw, ^t fioi e\'^eATjcrazs ^y \n\nifrrrn<ra<r2m (sc.ci $o6Koio).-^Apd ere .^Tre.cra &y (see? <roi ravra ^eXe^a); \n\ni,.. nasissemne tibif) X. Apol. 28. ch Se, & cpiKrar, \'AiroXA6dc.pe, fxaXXoy Uy \n\nid.OKov Me 6pay iixaic^s, f, A5i\'K\xc2\xabs ano^y^icrKoyra ; {vellesne?) OijK old et ere \n\niwftaa &y. \n\nRfm 10 On a4, [wkelher-nol) with the Opt. after a principal tense see \n\xc2\xbb 145 ken. 2 On he Ind. of tl c principal tenses, and also on \'he S^Vf \n\ner .; h ,ori?ul ,cL. see i 345. 5. ;\\S.en the Snbj. \'^ J" 7/^*\xe2\x80\x9e J "oSiV " \nthe latter, a, in final clauses (5 330 3), ^\'^P\xe2\x84\xa2^^\'^,\' \' = "\xc2\xb07/\xe2\x84\xa2;\'\'ilX^ \n\n7 Tlic answer made to predicative questions by yes, is cotn- \nmoaly expressed by repeating the word which contains the sub- \nstand of\' the queLn. The answer made by-, is usimUy \nexpressed by prefixing oS to the word which ^\xc2\xab\xe2\x84\xa2 ^^"^ \nstaLce of the question. Yes is also expressed by v., vr, ro. \n\n\n\n562 SYNTAX. !\xe2\x99\xa6 34A \n\nAt\'a, wavv, Kapro, cv and the like, <f>7)ixL <t>-qfjJ iytif, cyw with- \nout (jirjfxC; and tzo, by ov, ov <i>-qfxi^ ovk eyw. Commonly also \nstrengthening adverbs are joined with the words which answer \na question: ye 317, 2), e. g. cyo^c, ovk cyoryc; yap (^ 324, 2), \nTot 317, 3), /acvrot (^ 316, Rem.), oZv [^ 324, 3, (b)], ^cv- \no{!\xc2\xbb/ ($316, Rem.). The answer to nominal questions is made \nby naming the object respecting which the inquiry is made. \n\nEur. Hipp. 1395, sq. Spas nfyUcnroit^, ws ^x\xc2\xab> \'\'b*\' 6^\\ioy; \xe2\x80\x94 \'Op\xc2\xab. lb. 90, \nBq. olad^ oZv, ^poTotciv ts Ko^earriKey ySfios ; \xe2\x80\x94 Ovk olSa. X. C. 4. 6, 14 \n^j) J <Tu iLfiflyw TToAirriy tlycu, ty av itrauytis^ ^ %y ly^ j \xe2\x80\x94 ^ilh^ t^P oZp. \n\n\n\n$345. II. Oblique or Indirect Discourse. \n\n1. When the words or thoughts of a person, whether the \nsecond or third person or the speaker liimself, are again re- \npeated, unaltered^ in precisely tJie same form as iJieij were \nstated by us or another person, then the discourse or thought \nquoted, being independent of any view or representation \nof the narrator, is called direct discourse {oratio recta), e. g. 1 \nihouffht: PEACE HAS BEEN CONCLUDED. 27i\xe2\x82\xac mcssenger an- \nnounced: PEACE HAS BEEN CONCLUDED, \xe2\x80\x94 OT without a preced- \ning verb : peace has been concluded. \n\n2. AVhen the words are not repeated in the precise form in \nwhich they were first sj)oken, but are referred to the rep- \nresentation of the narrator, and thus are made to depend \nupon a verb of perception or conmiunication (verbum sen- \nti\'iuH or declaramli), standing in the principal clause, the \ndiscourse is called indirect {oratio obliqua), e. g. IVe believed, \nTHAT PEACE WAS CONCLUDED. T/ic mcsscngcr announced, that \n\nPEACE WAS CONCLUDED. \n\n3. Tlie principal clauses of direct discourse, to which also \nbelong clauses introduced by coordinate conjunctions, e. g. \nKttt, 8c, yap, ow, KOLToiy etc., are expressed in obhque discoiurse, \nwhen they contain a simple ajfirmation or an opinion, and de- \nnote something which happens, has happened, or will happen : \n(a) either by the Ace. with the Inf (k 307, 6), or by on and \nws with the finite verb ($ 329), or even by the participle [\xe2\x99\xa6 310, \n4, (a)], e. g. *E7r7/yy\xc2\xabtX\xe2\x82\xac Tovs rroXc/ixiovs dvo^ vyctF \xe2\x80\x94 ot4 o< \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 345.] OBLIQUE OR INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 563 \n\nfroX\xe2\x82\xac>.otti7ro<^vyot\xe2\x82\xaci/ \xe2\x80\x94 To{;s TroXcfJiCovs a7ro<^i;y6vTas; when \nthey express a command, wish, or desire: (b) by the Inf. and \nin continued oratio obliqua by 8 civ, xpW with the Inf., more \nseldom by the^ Inf. alone.. (^ 306), e. g. "EXeie rots crrparul^rai, \nc TT I ^ \xe2\x82\xac <r ^ a t Tots TToXc/xtots (oratio recta, cTrt^eo-^e) . \n\nRehark 1. Intermediate clauses of the oratio obliqua. and particularly \xc2\xab;uch \nas are connected with the preceding by ydp, although they are grammatically \nT \' lauses, frequently stand in oblique discourse in the Opt. without any \n\n. to introduce them; commonlv a sentence expressed by oVi or d)y \nw iih the *.>|.t. or by the Ace. with the Inf. precedes. X. An. 7. 3, 13. ^Xeyov iroXhol \nKara raWd,^ brt wavrhs i^ux keyoi Seii^s \xe2\x80\xa2 xctM^v yap etVyKot ovre oiKade airoTr\\e7,/ \nT<p fiouKofifytf ivyariy efij, \xc2\xbbc. t. \\. H. 3. 2, 23. airoKpiyaiieiywu Se twj/ \'HA^etW, \n^Ti ov voi-ntrtiay lavra\' iwiKrjtSas yap exote*\' rasir6\\eis\' (ppovpav ^-qvau ol \n\n4. The subordinate clauses of direct discc arse, undergo no \nchange in indirect discourse, except that, after an historical \ntense in the principal clause, they take the Opt. in the place of \nthe Ind. and Subj., when the indirect discourse is to be repre- \nsented as such, i. e. when the statement contained in the sub- \nordinate clause, is to be viewed as the opinion or sentiment of \ntlie person spoken of, and not that of the narrator. "Av, which \nis joined with the Opt. and Ind. of the historical tenses, still \nremains in indirect discourse. \n\nX. An. 7. 1, 33. (KcupariSiff) tkiytv^ 5x1 (toi/xos efrj Tjyeicr^ai ainois . . , ev^ \nvoXAa Koi iiyad^ A^ifotKTo (oratio recta : troifxSs dfjii . . , e^\'^a \\-f}\\p\xe2\x82\xaca^\xe2\x82\xac). Ag. 1, \n10. Tic <rwipipyr\\s &fio<rfy \'Ayr}<ri\\d(f}, d <rir( l<raiTO, eus eX^oiey, ot>s ttc/x- \n^t It wphs $a(rt\\4a iyytKous, Siairpd^fa^au out^J a(pf^yai avToy6/j.ovs ras 4y r^ \n\'Affi^ w6\\*ts \'EWr}ytias (oratio recta : iay <TVii<nj^ ecos tiy (Kbaaiy, o\'vs irei/.rj/u , . \nSiavfxl^ofuu). \n\nKi M. 2. WI \xe2\x96\xa0 \xe2\x96\xa0 " \'dinnte clauses of direct discourse would \n\n\' -\xe2\x80\xa2\xc2\xab!sf>d h. !.al tense, the Ind. remains even in indi- \n\nlu-se the Upt. would leave it undetermined, whether in direct \nw\xe2\x80\x9e.-. ...c lii.i. of a principal tense, or the Ind. of an historical tense had \n!\xe2\x96\xa0\xe2\x80\xa2 -n used. X. An. 7. 7, 55. ol arpanwrai tK^yov, ws s.ivocpuy otxoiro irphs ^ev- \n^r,y oltcftiTtty Kol & yiTf <rx\xc2\xabTo avT<f airoXrixl^Sfifyos (oratio recta: E. oKx^to Trphs \ni. 4 vw4ax*\'ro awo\\r]\\i,6/jifyos). X. C. 2. 6, 13. iJKOVffa, \'6ri UepMkris iroWas \n(ivotiki) i-Klff-rairo, ii i-rifhuy rr} ir6\\(i ^rolei alnrjv <pi\\(7u avrSy (oratio recta : \nn. i-rlarariu, tis . . iv oi( i). But subordinate clauses with on (quod, quia) fol- \nlow the principal rule (No. 4). X. 11. 7. 1, 34. fixe (neKoniSas) Aeyetv, us AaKS- \niai/xSytoi Sia rovro iroAf^Vf\'O*\' auToTs (to7s QT]&aiois), on ouk i^eXvaaiev \nu(t\' \'AyritTiKdov ^K^f7y W alr6y (rhy fiaaiKea), oratio recta: A. Sia tovto eVo- \n\\ffiri<ray, 5tj ouk Tj^fAijcra*\'. The reason wliy the Greek avoids the Subj. m \nindirect discourse after a principal tense, is, that it always uses its Subj. only \nwith reference to the Future U 257, 1, (a)]. But the use of the Opt. alter a \nI \xe2\x96\xa0 \xe2\x96\xa0 because this, as being the Subj. of the histor- \n\n1 ^ the historical tenses. There are, however, a \n\nfos - ^le examples, in which the Opt. foUows a principal tense. But then a \n\n\n\n504 SYNTAX. [^ 345 \n\nthought is quoted as the sentiment of another, who. at the moment of quota- \ntion, is to be represented as one no lonrjer present. Her. 7, 103. opo, pi^ futrrip \nk6ixitos 6 \\6yos 6 elprifiei/os eir) {whether the statement made was not idle lioasting) \nX. Cy. 2. 4, 1 7. av tis e/cetcre e 1 077 (i\\r) 9-f},us iyw ^ovKoifiJiv fnyaK-rfv ^if \npav rrotriaai [if ariy one announces t/i(re, that I iNTENDtu). C. 1. 2. .34. el ^tF \nyap {t)}u twv K6ywv rexj/Tjf ) <xvv toIs hpituiS {Keyofieyois dfcu yofti^otrres airfxfirdcu \nKeAeu\xe2\x82\xacTc), SfyAoj/ on atpeKreov ftr) rov op^us Keyetv (if you mean that piiiiosopha \n18 not to be used in reasonimj rinht, it is evident tjiut it WA8 YOUR view, that tee \nmust abstain from reasonimj ri(jht). Hence if the Greek, after a principal tense, \nwislies to rcjiresent a statement as tlie sentiment of another person, it must use \nthe Ace. with the Inf. instead of ort with the Sulj. Thus. e. g. the English \nphrase. He sai/s that we are immortal, is not to be expressed in Greek by Kiyti.^ \n5t( 7]ix\xe2\x82\xacis abavaroi S)fxfv, or ori t), oA, flutVf but by Aryct ijfias kdavd- \nT ovs elvai. \xe2\x80\x94 In hypotlietical Protases with ct and the IntL, the Ind. remains. \n\nHem. 3. The oblique discourse is sometimes used even in the subordinate \nclauses of direct discourse, when the sjK\'akcr wishes to brinj: fonvard an ex- \n\n])ressi(jn or thought, not in his own jjerson. Imt as the > K>r. Hi-r. \n\n7, 2. i<TTa<ria^oif (oi iraiZfs), 6 fxtv \'ApTafia(dirqi, Karon >^ ftrj iray- \n\nrhs Tov yoyou, Koi on vofiiCofMfva cfrj -Kfthi irdyruy ayopo/xosy, rhy Tp\xc2\xabT$\'rraToy \nT^y apxv\'\' fX*\'"\' Hf\'p^Tjs 5\xc2\xab\', is \'AToacTjj re irais (Xrj, Kod bn Ki\'pos cTtj i icniad^- \nfVQS roiai TltpaTjai tiiv iKfv^pirjy. \n\nRem. 4. When the Opt. of oblique disconrse is used instead of the Sabj. of \ndirect discourse, all the conjunctions may be connected with iy. Th. 8, 54. koI \n(\\l/r}(pi(TayT0 irKfvaayra rhy nfiatwSpoy koI itKa Swipas nfr\' airrov irpiia<r\xc2\xabWf Swri \ntiy aifTols SokoIt) &.piaTa <{\xc2\xabu\'. X. H. 2. 4, IS. 6 ndvnt irafrfjyyfiXfy airrois, fi^i \nirp6Tepoy iiriTibfa^aif irply h. y Tuy atptrfpoty ff irtiroi ris, t) r pud f it}. 5.4, \n47. iict\\eve irpoKaroiKafif\'iy re 6.Kpov koX tpuKarrruv^ (tes tiy ainhs iXboi. \n\n5. Very often, however, in Greek tlie oblique discourse takes \nthe form of the direct, since even after an liistorical tense in \nthe principal clause, the predicate of the subordinate clause is \nexpressed by the Ind. of the principal tenses and by the Subj., \nas in direct discourse. The actions and representations be- \nlonging to the past, are thus transferred to the present time of \nthe speaker, and assume a more direct and definite character \nthan if they were stated in the form of indirect discourse \n{k 3-27, Rem. 2). \n\nX. Cy. 2. 2, 1 . dfl pl\\v oZy ^X\xe2\x82\xac^\xe2\x82\xacX\xc2\xabto b Kvpos, 6ir6rt tnnncurditp^ S v w r fvxapiff- \nT^TaTOj A(i7ot ^^/SAtj^^o-o vTai. Comp. \xc2\xa7 327, Rem. 2. U. 2. 3, 2. f 8o{( ry \nSr^/xw rpidKovTa iXfffdaiy ot tovs trarpiovs yo/iovs ^vyypdii^ovffi^ ko^\' oVs \xc2\xbbo- \nKiTfvaovai, Her. 1, 1G.3. iKe \\fve t^j iamov x\xc2\xab^/"?* olxfiy, Skov fiovKor- \nrat. Th. 2, 4. oi nXaTatjjs i fiov\\evoyro^ (trt Kar aKaveovair^ Strrtp \nix^^^\'^*\'^ ^/xTrpV)(rou^c5 rh oXicnyM, drf n &Wo xp^o\'crrat. 1, 107. f 5o{c 8* \navTo7i a-Kf\\i>a(rdcu, Stoj Tp6ir((> a(r<t>a\\(<rTara itawopevvowrat. Her. 1, 29. \ndpKloKTi fi.fyd\\oiai KartlxovTO^A^ycuoi, SfKai^rcaxpi\'Tfadai yofuntri, robs &> \nc<pi ISJAa\'i\' (^ fj T o I. X. Cy. 4. 5, 30. tovs I\'lnreos 4 k f Kfva ( ^vkdrrtiy rohs iry \ny6yTas, \xe2\x82\xac us 6.V ns ar] fxdyri. H- 2. 1, 23. AvcavSpos b( ras raxioras rw r*mr \niKf\\ev(r\xe2\x82\xacy eircffi^ai Tors \'A^ycdoiS\' ixtiSay Sf ^K/Sw(ri, KorMrrms S ti \nroioGffii\', aroirKfly. Ou gri, is (that), see ^ 329, 4 and Rem. 3. \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 346.] ELLIPSIS. BRACHYLOGY. 565 \n\nRem. 5. The Imperfect (seldom the Plupf.) Indicative, referring to the hig- \ntorical tense of the principal clause, is sometimes used instead of the Pres. \n(Perf.), in a subordinate clause which is associated with other subordinate \nclauses in the Opt. X. An. 1. 2, 2. Kvpos tous <pvydl)as e/fe^euo-e aw outoJ (TTpa- \nTfvfcrdai, vKOffx^H-^vos avrols, el koXws Karairpd^deu, e(/)\' & i (Tt parev ei o, fi)] \nirp6abiv travaaabau, Trplv avrovs KaTaydyoi oJf/caSe. (Oratio recta: iav KaTairpd^ca, \ni(p\' a (TTpaTewo/xaj, ou irp. rravaofiaiy irplv &\xc2\xbb/ vfjLas Karaydyw). But the Ind. is also \nu^ed in the subordmate clauses of oblique discourse, when the narrator intro- - \nduces his own remarks and explanations into the statement or thought of \nanother, or when the thoughts in the subordinate clause do indeed belong to \nthe statement or idea of another, but are to be exhibited as definite facts or as \ngeneral truths, or when the thoughts of the other are to be represented, at the \ngame time, as those of the narrator. In oblique discourse, the Ind. and Subj. \nare often inter\' 1 with the Opt. Then there is a mingling of the direct \n\nand indirect tli in order to form a contrast between the certainty, reality, \n\nfact, and dircctutsg cxi)ressed by the two former, and the uncertainty, possibility, \nmere conception, and inilinctness denoted by the latter. X. An. 2. 3, 6. iXeyov \nSti \xe2\x82\xaciK6Ta SoKolfy Xtyfiv ^aaiKei, Kcd fiKOiev Tiyen6vas txovres, alt avTOus, \nikv ax airovZaX y ivoivr ai, 6.^ov(TiVy evbev e^ovari rb. iiriTifSeia. 3. 5, 13. \nifioioi -ftaav bavud^oims, Sirot irorc t pi-^ ovrai oi "EWrjves, koX ti iv yy \nI ;( 1 c V. \n\n6. Tlie Greek can also use the Ace. with the Inf. instead of \nthe finite verb, in every kind of subordinate clauses. \n\nHer. 6, 117. irSpa ol BoKtfiy 6ir\\iT-i]V avriarrivai fxeyav, tov (instead of ov) \nrh yivfioy tJjv iunrlia Kaaav ffKid^tiv. 6, 84. Sku^os (sc. <^o<ri) tous yo^oSay, \n^ ir \xe2\x82\xac f T \xc2\xab (r\xc2\xab^i ^ \xe2\x96\xa0" ts&a\\(7v isr})V x<^PVV, Mf^i toDto fj.efj.ouepai fiiv rlffaxT- \n\ndat {posti/tuim 0- \'^\'*i- **\xc2\xbb 9^- <"\' \'A^J\'ttTot ((paaau, et fxh imirXeov Swrj- \n\nbri vat r9is Utivf^y Kparrjaau, roOr\' tiv tx^iv (si ampUorem illorum agri partem in \nsuam potestatem rtdigere rossENT se earn retenturos). See Larger Grammar, \nFart II, S 849. \n\nRem 6 The ^ mode of representation among the Greeks, and the \n\ndesire to make pa. . ... :its appear as present, often changes the iiidn-ect dis- \ncourse into direct, or the direct into the indirect. In the first case, there is of- \nten an in " of person, comp. ^ 329 Rem 3. X. Cy. 1. 4 28. eurav^a \n\n8l^3 On the conTrar^^ An. 7. 1, 39. iKS.^y S^ KXUyZpos; MdKa ^.s, e>,, \nIZpa^c^^yos V\xc2\xab- K^y.lyyap\'Aya^lfiioy, grt oi,K i^nifSuoy \xc2\xab^, k. r.X, \n\n\xe2\x80\xa2 \n\nm. Special pkculiarities in the constbuction of \n\nWORDS AND SENTENCES. \n\niSiG. Ellipsis. Br achylogy {Zeugma). Contraction. \n\nPleonasm. \n1 Ellipsis is the omission of a sentence or a part of a sen- \ntence which is logically suhordinate, and hence of less impor- \ntance, but viewed grammatically, must necessanly ^^ \xc2\xab\xc2\xbbPP^J \nin order to express an idea or thought. The idea of the omit- \n\n48 \n\n\n\n\xe2\x96\xa0 1 \n\n\n\n566 SYNTAX. [k 346 \n\nted woid can only be of a very general and indefinite nature, \nand is frequently contained in the idea of the quahfjang word, \nas, e. g. ot SvrjToC (sc. avSponroi), rj avpiov (sc. rjfxipa), or is evident \nfrom the context or frequent usage, as e. g. in cis StSoo-KoXou \nuVat. In like manner, the omitted sentence must express a \ngeneral idea, and hence one which may be readily supphed, or \none which is indicated by the context. The single instances \nof EUipsis have been noticed in the course of the Grammar. \nSee Index under Ellipsis. \n\n2. EUipsis is to be distinguished from brevity of expression \nor Brachylogy. In Ellipsis, there is an actual omission of an \nelement, grammatically necessary to express an idea or thought; \nbut in Brachylogy, there is not a real, but only apparent omis- \nsion of such an element, that element being in some uiiy in- \nvolved in the sentence or in a member of it The simplest \ninstances of brevity of expression have already been presented \n(i 319, Rem. 1). The following additional instances may here \nbe mentioned : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) One form of a verb must often be borrowed from another. Th. 2. 11. \n(ii^iovai) tJjv Tuy ir\xc2\xab\\as {yrj*\') Sjiovy ^ t^\xc2\xa5 icurriiy Spof (sc Spovfidnip). \n\n(b) In antitheses, one member must often be supplied from the other. I> \n01. 3. 30, 17. iirpd^ofxfy r}fif7s (so. irphs iK(lvovs) koI imtiroi wpits riftis *lp4itnir. \n\n(c) From a negative word, an affirmative one mu5t often be borrowed ; this \ntakes place most frequently, when an antithetic clause is introduced by an ad- \nVJrsative conjunction. Her. 7, 104. 6 v6fjMs kytiyfi -rrnvrh ^/, \xc2\xabvir ^Ar ^vy*tM \novSh irKri^os iwbpwirwv ^k fiixv^ ixxh (sc. iytifyww) fitrorras iv rp rji^*i twucpa- \nr4uvy fl iWAAiwrdcu. PI. Apol. 36, b. hfit K-fiaaSt w** \xe2\x80\xa2\xe2\x99\xa6\' \xc2\xab"o^A\xc2\xab/ (sc. /\xc2\xab-<fi\xc2\xabXawr- \nTai). So from ovBds the idea of fls or tKcurros is to be borrowed, as in the fol- \nlowing sentence,from ovS\' fU, the subject of the first clause, tU or iitarros is to \nbe borrowed as the subject of the second clause. PI. Symp. 1 92, e. ravra ojcov- \naas oifS" iiy tTs i^aptrn^fivt i^ iT\xc2\xabx\xc2\xbb^y otoir\' tif ixjiKOtreu k. t. X. \n\n(d) From a following verb with a spedjic meaning, a verb with a gemeral \nmeaning must be borrowed, e. g. noieTi\', ipyd(*<rbat, ylyvKT^ai^ errtu, avftfialrtiw j \nThis is the ca*e in the expressions, rl iWo <f, \xe2\x80\x94 oi/iti\' &XXo ^ \xe2\x80\x94 &XA* \nTi ijy instead of rl iXXo iroi\xc2\xabror itrrip or the like, ff Sru Th. 3, 39. rl AXX* \n\xe2\x80\xa25toi, fj iwffiovKevccw \\ 4, 14. ot AoKcSeufioViot 4XXo owJir {( 4k -y^f iimtftid- \nXovv. \n\n(c) When two verbs connected together hare a common objer*^ tma if ther \ngovern different Cases, the Greek usually expresses the o*^;cct Imt once, and \nmakes this depend on the nearest verb. Indeed, the \xc2\xab//\xc2\xab<t of a clause is not \nunfrequently transferred and made the subject of th<\xc2\xbb iollowing clause, without \n\n\n\n4 346.] ELLIPSIS. \xe2\x80\x94 BRACHYLOGY. \xe2\x80\x94 ZEUGMA. 567 \n\nits place being supplied by a pronoun. X. 0. 4, 8. r o ,5 r o t . ^u^v x<ipau r^u &K. \n\\riy xposri^riiTi \xc2\xabal S<i,poLS KoafieT (sc. abrois). PI. Gorg. 460, c. oh Sei \nro:s iraiSorpi&ais iyKa\\,7, ou5\' i k fid \\\\, ,p {sc. ahrois) iK T^J^6K,c.y, \nRp. 465, a. 7rpt<r0uT4pc,> y^cvr^pwu irduruv Apx^Lu re Kal KoAdC^iu (sc. \nai,To6s) Tporrfrdi,rai. Th. 5, 54. {\'ApyuoL) is^fiaKoy is r^p \'ETtSavplau \nK(d iSrjovy (sc. avT-fjy). This case occurs most frequently where a partici- \nple is connected with a finite verb. Th. 1, 20, t<? \'lirir dpxv t^u Uaua^. \nFoiVfV iro/iw^v iiUKoafioiyTi air Ureiy ay (sc. aMu) {while Eipparchus \nwas arramjim/ Vie Pamtthenaic procession, they killed him). lb. 144. to{,tois \n&woKpiyd,xtyoi airove^t^wfify {sc. ainois). But sometimes the Case is \nmade to depend on the more remote finite verb. Th. 2, 65. oaou xpovoy \nwpoUffT-n {n\xc2\xabpiK\\^s) rrjs w6k\xc2\xabus . . , aurcpaXws SiecpvKa^ey avr-qu, koL iy^yero \n(sc avrfi) ir\' iKtirov nfyitrrri. X. An. 2. 5, 24. ravra {Ti(r<ra(p4pyris) eliriiy ^So^e \nT^ K\\(dpxv aATj^\'; Atytiy, koI dmy (sc. 6 KXiopxos). \n\n3. An important figure of Brachylogy is Zeugma, i. e. a con- \nstruction in wliich a verb, that in sense belongs only to one \nsu])ject or object, is connected with several subjects or objects. \nThe verb, however, must always be of such a nature as to ex- \npress an idea which may be taken in a wider or more limited \nsense. \n\nII. y, 326. ^x\' itdcrrte Tirroi kfpciiroifs koL rroiKika tcuxc\' cKeiTO {to lie, as \nwell as f." " to be in a place, to be in store). Her. 4, 106. cVi^tjto Se (()op4- \n\nova I irfi 1 . ,. dfioiify, yKwcaay it iSirjy (they \\^E,\\R garments like the Scythi" \nans, but IIAVK or bpcak a language of their oven). A compound verb is often \nused in a pregnant sense, since along with the signification of the compound, \ntf: M-ation of the simple is at the same time to be included. Th. 1, 44. \n\no\xc2\xab rtN^f/ruiOi iitr iyvoKT ay KtpKvpaiois ^ufi.fiaxi(iy H-h Troi-qaacr^ai {instead of /j,\xe2\x82\xac- \nT4yyw<Tay kcH tyvwvaif) CIIANGLD TiiEiR MINDS and detehaiined not to form an \nalliance with the Corcyrtutins. \\ \n\nA. Contraction in coordinate clauses has already been spoken \nof (\xe2\x99\xa6 319, Rem. 1) ; this is more seldom in subordinate clauses, \nthousrii fiiMinont with those introduced by osTrep, w^Trep. \n\nEur. McU. I ITia. (pi\\ovi yom^ovff\' ovnrep ty ir6ais cre^fy (sc. vajJ-iCv)\' PI- 1*- \n710, d. ir<\xc2\xa3Kra <rx\xc2\xab5i>\xc2\xbb\' int * ipyaffr at r^ buf airep {sc. OLTrepydCfTat) oray fiow \nXn^ iia<f>fp6yrws \xc2\xabl irp^al riya \'ir6Kiy. So also et or fUfp Tis or &Wos ris or \nt1w*p irou, ttwtp \xc2\xbb0T*, etc. Her. 9, 27. vp^y iari icoWd re /ca2 eS exoyra, el t4oi- \n91 Kol tiWoiai \'T.KKT]ywy. \n\n5. Pleonasm is the use of a word, which, in a grammatical \npoint of view, is superlluous, the idea conveyed by it having \nbeen aheady expressed in what precedes, either by the same \n\n\n\n568 SYNTAX. [* 347 \n\nor by another word. The desire of perspicaity or emphasis is \ncommonly the cause of Pleonasm. \n\nX. Cy. 1. 4, 19. 0%, ^v iir fKeluovs rjfiflf iXavvoafiev, vTOT\xe2\x82\xacnovtrrau fjnas iKf7- \nvol. 3, 15. TreipdfTOfiai ry ire^Triry aya^iuu iirircW Kpd.Tiaros itv iinreus avfifjui\' \nX\xe2\x82\xac\xc2\xab\' avT (p. \n\nRemark. Grammatical Pleonasm is to be distinguished from the rhetorical^ \nwhich consists in the use of two or e>\xc2\xabn more words of a similar significatioQ \nto strengthen an idea or make it more palpable (o) A verb with an abstract \nsubstantive, as fKixv m\'^X*\'\'\'\'^\'"* \xe2\x96\xa0n\'6\\(tiov Tro\\(fxft ; \xe2\x80\x94 (/8) A verb with a partici- \nple, as (pevywu (<piry(, (\'liroi\' Kfywv \xe2\x96\xa0. \xe2\x80\x94 (7) An adjective with an abstract substan- \ntive in the instrumental J^at., as iJL(y4i^ei fifyas, xA^^et woWol; \xe2\x80\x94 (8) An adjec- \ntive or adverb with an adverb (mostly poetic) as oi6dfy olos (vcbolly alone) ; \xe2\x80\x94 \n(e) Synonymous adverbs, as di^vs trapaxpritia, iroAiy aCbis. ad ovyex^^ \\ \xe2\x80\x94 (0 \nTlic part is very often joined with the whole by Kai or Tf, for the purpose of \nmaking the part ])rominent, as "Eicropt nty Kcd Tpwal (Ilom.); Ztv wcu dtol-j \n\'Ai^vatot Kcu \'l<f>iKp(iTr)s ; (tj) For the sake of emphasis, the same thought is \noften expressed twice, once positively and then negatively, or the reverse, as \nAt\'^o) TTphs v/j-as Kol ouK a.iroKpv\\\\>ofjMi (Dem.) ; II. a. 416. iwd roi cUco "-a \xc2\xbb\xc2\xabp, \n\na(ni fiaKa Stjv (since your life is shorty and ixot very long). See Lar^ iim&r, \n\nTart II. ^ 858. \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 347. Contraction and Blending of Sentences. \n\nAnacoluthon. \n\n1. In the contraction of a compound sentence, sometimes \nthe verb which is common to the principal and subordinate \nclauses, is placed in the subordinate clause and made to \nagree witli the subject of that clause; in this way the two \nclauses are much more closely united, than in the common \nmode of contraction {k 319, Rem. 1). \n\nX. Cy. 4. 1, 3. avrhs oTSo, oXos ^v rh. fity yitp iWa (scil. i-roiu) icvrtpf-cl/taif \n\nKol irdyrts vfxfis iiroieTrf. \n\n2. When a participle stands in a sentence with the finite \nverb, the parts of the sentence are frequently blended with \neach other, by making the substantive which would be gov- \nerned by the participle, depend upon tlie finite verb, as the \nmore important part of the seutence. Comp. Larger Grammar, \nPart II. ^ 856, b. p. 609\xe2\x80\x94611. \n\n\n\nSoph El. 47. SyyfAAc 5* SpKtp wposribflsy instead of iyytXXt voosri^ls \nX. Cy. 1. 6, 33. Swais cvv roiovrtu ^^n idi<rdeyT(s itp^6T(pci ^0X2x01 yiirouh- \nto; %d(i is here governed by avv and connected with yiyourro. instead of being \nin the Dat. depending on idia^fyres, which would have been the natural con- \nBtruction. X. Cy. 7. 1, 40. olrot St iwuSij ijropoiyroy icukK^ wdrro^tp "(^ \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 347J CONTRACTION OF SENTENCES. 569 \n\n<rdf..uoi, firre dpaaS^a. -rk 5nXa, M Ta7s h-c-ria^v iKd^yro (instead of \xc2\xab,5kAov \niroir,aat..yoi iKo^^roY 2. 3, 17. to?. ^ lre>o\xc2\xab e?7rev, o\'r: ^6.KK.^^ SeW a.a*. \n\n3. A very common mode of blending the principal with the \nsubordinate clause, in the manner of attraction, and one which \nbelongs to almost all kinds of subordinate clauses, consists in \ntransferring the subject of the subordinate into the principal \nchiuse, and making it the object of the principal clause. \n(Comp. nosti Marcellum, quam tardus sit, instead of quam \ntardus sit Marcellus). \n\nHer. 3, 68. oZros Tpunos u ir (J ir t e u o- e rhv M a 7 o \xc2\xbb/, is ovk e^rj 6 Kipov 2fJ.ep- \n6is (he Jirst suspected the Maijian, that he was not Smerdis the son of Cyrus = sus- \njyected that the Mag {an was not, etc.). 80. etSere t^v Kafifivcrew rifipiv, eV \nS<roy i-r\xc2\xab^ri\\bt {set the insolence of Cambyses what a pitch it reached = see what \na pitch the insolence, etc.). 6,48. aircirejpoTo t u 1/ \'E AAtji/w j/, ri eV y^ \nIfxoify. Th. 1,72. tijv atptrtpau ir6Kiv ifiovKovro arifialveiv, oar} dr] Zvva- \nfup. X. Cy. 5. 3, 40. ol iipxovTfS ai/Tuy 4ir inf\\fla^uv, Hirus (rv(TK\xe2\x82\xacva(rii4vot \niffi wdyra. In the same way also, when the subordinate clause forms the ob- \nject of a <^:\' \xe2\x80\xa2 - \xe2\x99\xa6ive in the principal clause, the subject of the subordinate \nclause is fi \xe2\x96\xa0 . y transferred to the principal clause, and is put in the Gen., \nas the object of that substantive. Th. 1, 61. fi\\S^e Sk koI roh "AS^vaiois iv^vs \nri kyytKia rmv TtJAcwv, in cupfaTacri (the report immediately reached the \nAt}< \' \' cities, that they had revolted = the report reached the Athe- \n\nniui.^ i reviAttd). 97. afia 5e koI ttjs apxvs airSdei^iy exet \n\nT^i Tuy \'A^yaiwy, iy oltf rpoirtf KartCTt). So also a substantive on which an \nInf depends is often attracted by the verb or substantive which governs the Inf \nTh. 3, 6. T^r daXJiffCus tlpyoy fiij XPW^(U tovs MtTv\\r]yaiovs. 5, 25. \nivt^vfila rwy hyiptlfy rwy 4k tT]s yriaov KO/iiaaa^ai. PI. Grit. 52, b. ou5* \niw tb\xc2\xbbnia at SxXtjt iroAeotfr, ou5\' fiXAcuv vS^uv eAojSev \xe2\x80\x94 eiSeVoi. \n\n4. Tlie priucumi clause is frequently blended with the sub- \nordinate clause, by making the former, as a substantive- \nclause introduced by ort or w?, or still more frequently, as a \nsubstantive-clause expressed by the Ace. with the Inf, depen- \ndent on the subordinate clause. \n\nX. An. 0. 4. i>. cl\xc2\xbbi yap iyw \xc2\xa5ikov(t6. tivos, \'oti KKeavSpos e/c Bv(avTiov ep- \nfiotrrifs fjL\xc2\xabKK\xc2\xabi fj^eif (instead of ws ijKovaa, KA. fieWei U^iv), for as I heard \nfrom some one, tfiat Cleandros is about to come, etc. =for Cleandros is about to \ncome, as I heard from some one. Her. 1, 65. is 5\' avrol AaKedai/xSuioi xiyovai \nAvKOvpyoy i ir it powe vffavr a iK Kp-qr-ns ayayeff^ai lavra. 3. 14. ws \n5i Xtyfrai inr\' Aiyvwriwy, SaKpvfiy fxtv Kpo7(Tov. 4.5. ws Se 2\xc2\xaby^a\xc2\xab \n\\4yov<Ti^ yturaroy aKoyrwy i^ytcay eJyai rh (r<p4repoy. \n\n48* \n\n\n\n570 SYNTAX. [i 348 \n\n5. Anacoluthon (from a privative and aK6\\ov^(K, -ov, following) \nis a j&giire used to denote a change in the construction. It \ntakes place when the construction "with which the sentence \nbegins, is not continued through it, but changed into another, \nwhich grammatically does not correspond with the former, but \nlogically, i. e. in relation to the signification and meaning, is \nlike or similar to it. The cause of Anacoluthon may be attrib- \nuted to the vivacity of representation among the Greeks, or to \ntheir desire of perspicuity, brevity, strength, or concinnity (pro- \npriety or keeping) of discourse. There are two kinds of Ana- \ncoluthon: (a) grammatical, (h) rhetorical. There are also in- \nstances where it ev^idently originates from carelessness and in- \nattention. The grammatical Anacoluthon, which is, for the \nmost part, caused by attraction, has been treated in several \nplaces in the course of the grammar. Only two instances of \nthe rhetorical Anacoluthon, need now be mentioned : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n(a) A very natural and fr<?qu< \xc2\xbb \xe2\x80\xa2 - \' * icolathon u, where inc word \n\nirhich gave rise to the whole ti-,.- . .ncc, is placed as the logical \n\nbuhject in the Nom. at the bepnning of the sentence, but after the interrnption \nof the sentence by an intermediate clause, is made the grammatical object of \ntlie verb of the sentence. X. Hier. 4, 6. Strrtp ol i^ Kiiral ovx, irtw tiufriii^ \nytvaiyrau KpflrroyfS, rovro ainovs fv<ppaly(ty oAA* Sray riy ijrrarfuwiariv ^frrovs^ \nrovT avTovs kvi^ (instead of rovrtp fv<ppaiyoyrau \xe2\x80\x94 di\'iuvrai), as the atkletet^ wkem \ntJiey are superior to common tnen, this does not elate them, but when they are in/erior to \ntheir competitors, this gives them pain = as the athletes are not elated whem^ etc \n\n(b) lu order to make the coir ; ideas in a sentence prominent or em- \n\nphatic, they are often placed in : \xe2\x80\x94 .:e form at the beginning: of thrir n \xc2\xabik-c- \n\ntive sentences, although the natural construction of each would necc t \n\ndifferent. PL Phaedr. 233, b. roiavra 6 (fws iwiitUanmi\' ipsrux^vwraf \nU^y, ft /uJj Xvirrfy ro7s 6.Wois \xc2\xbbof>\xc2\xab\'x<\xc2\xbb. i^iapiL 9oi(7 trofii(fiM, t vTvxovpras 8i \nKod ra /J.^ rjhoyrjs &.^ia Trap* ^Kflywy ixalyov ^ayxd^tt Tvyx^^c (instead of ntp \nfvTvxoiiyrccy be koI Tck /x^ t;5o\xc2\xbbt)s &^ia ivalpov oiwyicet^\'ci rxryxdrfiTf or tim/xovrras \nit Kol rcb fii) T}5. &{. iitaivuv ovayKii^ft)\'. \n\nCHAPTER X \n\nM48. Position of Words and Sentences. \n\n1. The intimate relation between the members of a sentence \nand between one sentence and anotlier, and the connection of \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 346.) POSITION OF WORDS AND SENTENCES. 571 \n\nthese so as to form one thought or idea, are expressed as has \nbeen seen, partly by inflection, or by formal words (^ 38 4) \nwhich supply the place of inflection, partly by the accent and \nposition of the members of a sentence and of the sentences \nthemselves. As the accent can be made prominent only in \nUving discourse, and commonly agrees with the position, only \nthe position needs to be treated. \n\nKemark. The position of particular parts of speech, as the pronouns \n[.;. ;..s,tions, etc., has already been stated, in the sections where these are \nut atud. See the index under Position. \n\n2. There are two kinds of position : the usual or grammati- \ncal, and the rhetorical or inverted. Tlie first denotes the \nIf.\'jical and grammatical relation of the members of a sentence, \nand of the sentences themselves to each other, and the union \nof these in expressing a single thought or idea; the second \nmakes one member of a sentence, which is specially important, \nmore prominent than tlie other members, by giving to it a posi- \ntion dilferent from the usual or grammatical order of the words. \n\n3. Tlie usual or grammatical position of the words in Greek \nis the following : \xe2\x80\x94 \n\nThe subject stands Jirst in the sentence, the predicate lust; \ntlie copula cifti stands after the predicative adjective or sub- \nstantive ; but the attributive follows its substantive ; the object \nis placed before the predicate ; the objectives, i. e. the qualify- \ning statements or circumstances, are so arranged, that the most \nimportant one is placed immediately before the jiredicate, and \ntlie other objectives precede this, following each other in such \norder as they would naturally be joined to the first objective, \nthe one suggesting itself last to the mind being placed before \noi.e already existing ; or in otlier words, the broader limitation \nusually precedes the narrower, the less necessanj, the more \nnecessary. \n\nKupor, 6 fieuriXtvs, koXws iirtdavtv. Kuirpioi irdyv Trpo^u/xws avT<f (rvueffTpciTev- \n9ay. na7s fityas \xe2\x80\x94 i*^p aya^6s \xe2\x80\x94 6 ircus 6 neyai \xe2\x80\x94 6 av^p & aya^os \xe2\x80\x94 6 irais 6 \nrov Kupov \xe2\x80\x94 6 ir6Ktfios 6 wphs rovs Ufptras. But the Inf. or the Ace. with the \nInf. and the Part, fv.llow the goveniing word. See the examples under H 306, \n307, 310. Oi\' \'EXXrjyfS rohs Ufptras ivlK-naav. 0/ "EMTjves eV ^apa^&ui rohi \nUipaas iyutriaay. Oi "EAATji\'ts ravry] rf} Tjixtpa iv Uapa^wvi rovs Uepcas iyUrjcrav. \nIn this waj, the adterb of place and time commonly precedes the causal ob- \n\n\n\n572 SYNTAX. [\xe2\x99\xa6 348. \n\nject {r6r\xe2\x82\xac or ravrri rf] vfifpcf, robs n. ivimjcay), the personal object precedes \nthat denoting a thing, so the Dat. the Ace. {rhy iraTSa ttiv \'ypanfiariKifiv SiScurwe* \n\xe2\x80\x94 T^ TTotSl rh fii^Kiov SlSu/xi), the adverb of time the adverb of place {T6Te or \nTavTT) rrj rjfifpq, iv MapaJ^wi/i tovs FI. ipiK-rftray). The adverb of manner, even \nwhen another word is the principal objective, usually stands immediately be- \nfore the predicate, e. g. ol "EWrfycs ravrrj rp ^^cp^ ^y Mapa^utvi rovs Htpiras \nKa\\a> s ii/iKT}<rau. \n\n4. The position of subordinate clauses corresponds with the \nposition of the words (substantive, adjective, adverb) whose \nplace they take in the sentence, i. e. the adjective-clause, fot \nexample, occupies the place which the adjective would take ; \nand so of the others. \n\nPI. Phaed. 50, c. S dvp<i>p6s, Ssirtp tlwbti viraK u ut ly^ tjwt w*f.uutr*iy. \nX. Cy. 3. 2, 3. 6 5e KDpoj, iy ^ a vvtXiyovr o, idvtTO\' iwtl 8< KaX^ ^p \nT k i\xc2\xab pk auT</J, <Tvv(Kd\\(irf rovs r\xc2\xab rwv Tltpciiv riy*fi6yas iral roi/s rmw Viifimv. \n\'Eirel 8i bfiov ^0-av, ^A\xc2\xab|e -roiiit. Yet the substantive-clauses, even when \nthey express the grammatical subject, stand after the governing verb. Ibid. 1. \nA, 1 . ol Z\' t Kf y o V, Srt &.pKTOL TtoWovi <f8e 9\\r\\<TiA.aavTai iitA^tf \noav. \n\n5. In the rhetorical or inverted^ position of words, the predi- \ncate is placed before the subject, the attributive before the sub- \nstantive to be defined, but the objective, particularly the adverb, \nis placed after the predicate. \n\n*Ayabh5 6 ayrip. \'O $a<ri\\\xc2\xabvs Kvpos. \'O wphs rohs Udpaas viXtpios. \n\'EMoxcVavTO Kahws. Th. 2. 64. ^tptof re xM "^^ "^^ ieufiotna iyayttaims, rd \nTc &irb Tuv iro\\(filwy aySptius. \n\n6. When the subject is to be specially distinguished, it is \nplaced at the end of the sentence ; and when two words in the \nsame sentence are to be made emphatic by their position, one \nis placed at the beginning, the other at the end of the sen- \ntence, C. g. Ilao-uiv apcTuiV -tjytfuiiv iariv rf cvae/Jcia. Gener- \nally, both the first and the last }>lace in a sentence is considered \ncm}>hatic, when words stand there, wliich, according to the \nusual armngement, would have a different position. \n\n7. Inversion is still more frequent in subordinate clauses \nthan in the case of the words whose place they take, perspi- \ncuity often rendering such an inversion necessary. Substan- \n\n* This inverted position is a species of Hi/pfrhatonj a constmction by whick \nthe natural order of words and sentences is inverted. \n\n\n\nf 348.] POSITION OF WORDS AND SENTENCES. 573 \n\ntive-clauses with ort, d,? (^to), and final substantive-clauses, \nare placed before the governing verb, when the ideas they \nexpress are to be brought out prominently. \n\nirao-a ff Utpaiu woKirda, fiiKphv indyufit. The inversion of adjective-clauses \n{hv (I9(s &yipay out6s (any) lias been already treated, \xc2\xa7 332, 8. Inversion ig \nnot ased in adverljial clauses of time and condition, since these, according to \nthe common position, usually precede the principal sentence. \n\n8. When a word m a subordinate clause is to be made more \nl)romincnt than the others, it is sometimes placed before the \nronnective word (relative, etc.) wliich introduces the clause, \n<\xe2\x80\xa2. g. TouxOr* i<Trl koX toAXo, ire pi c/xou aot tfoXAoI Xiyovatv. \n\n9. A means of rendering a word specially emphatic by posi- \ntion, i\xc2\xbbthe separation (Ilyperbaton) of two words which would \n1)0 naturally connected together, as forming one thought, by \nintroducing one or more less important words between them. \nBy tliis separation, only one of the two words is commonly \nmade emphatic, though often both even, especially when both \nstand in an emphatic part of the sentence. \n\nDcm. Phil. 3, 110. woXKuVf 2) 6^>hpis \'AbT)vcuoi, \\6ywv yiyvajxivoiv. X. S. 1, \n4. otfuu oiy voKv tw r^y KaraffKdrljy fioi Kofiir port pay (pavriyai (instead of iroXb \nXa^wpoT4pay. ) This separation ( Hj-perbaton) very often takes place even in sen- \nttncet as well as in case of words. This consists in placing the principal \n( 1 II\' i 1- \'V*\' one lets important, within the subordinate clause, and thereby, in a \n1 V , .il j.\'<i;.t of view, makin{^ it secondary to the subordinate clause. PI. Prot. \n.\'Ml. d. t5 yap XtvKhy t^ fitKayl iffriv Hirr) irposeoiKe (instead of ecmv yap owp \nrh X\xc2\xabi/K<(y, etc.). X. C. 3. 11, 10. <fn\\(7y yf /xV \xe2\x82\xac? olS\' Bti iiriaTaaai (instead of \ntl olV tri ^lAtt*\', etc.). Isocr. Paneg. 53. 5rrc irtpX fiev rrjs iv To7s\'\'EWr](n Svva- \ntrrtlas oi/K oli\' Svwr iv ris tratpiarfpov i-KiZii^ai Zvvr]b(ir]. Dcm. Phil, ovtoi pXv \nyap ipxoyjts ov woXvs xp^\xc2\xbb\'or i^ ou , . ^K^ov. \n\n10. Ideas that are (UiJ^e or similar, or especially such as are \nantithetic or opposite, are made emphatic in their position, by \nbeing placed near each other. \n\nThus avrhi aviov, etc. e. g. i) irdXis avri] Trap\' avTTJs 5iK7}y K^eTai. \nX. Ilicr. 6, 2. {i/KTjK flit\' r)kiKiuTcus T)S6iJifyos rjSofifyois ifioi PL L. 934, d. \nnalyom-eu woKKol voKKovs Tp6irovs. Hence, 6.\\\\os &\\\\o, alius aliud, \niKKos iWobi, alius alibi, iWos HWocre, alius alio, &A\\os &\\\\o^ev, \nalius aliunde, iXKos iXXj,, alius alid (sc. vid), etc., of which the English \nmakes two sentences, the one did tJiis, Vie other that, etc. \n\n\n\nAPPENDIX A. \n\n\n\nVERSIFICATION. \n\n? 349. Rhythm f Mrfrr Ar\\>\\ nynl Ttrc/c \n\n1. Rhythm (pi>.9/xos) is the hamion; ; by me aitcroabon of \nlong and short syllables, accompanied L; un- incurrence of an rm/)Jlanf \nat intervals ; when the cm])liasis occurs at fixed inten\'aU^ the rhythm be- \ncomes meter, each one of the intervals forming a metre or measure. \n\n2. The emphasis with which particular parts of a verse are pro- \nnounced, is called the Arsis^ and the corresponding weaker tone with \nwhich the other parts are pronounced, the Thesis. The former imphes \nan elevation of the voice with an accompanying stress (\xc2\xa7 29. 1.), the latter, \na depression of the voice. The terms Arsis and Thesis are also traD5- \nferred to the particular syllable or syllables on which they rest, and \nhence the syllable on which tlie emphasis fidls is called the Anis. The \nArsis is often called the metrical ictus, or merely the icttts, \n\n3. The Arsis is naturally on the long syllabic of a foot ; conseqnentlj \nin the spondee ( \xe2\x80\x94 ) and the tribrach (- ^*\'), the place of the Arsis can \nbe dctcmiined only by tlio kind of verse in which they are found. In \nevery verse, the original foot determines the place of the Arsis in all the \nother feet which arc sul>stituted for it Hence, as the second syllable of \nan iambus is long, and as the Arsis naturally falls on the long syllable. \nthe spondee in iambic verse would have the Arsb on the second syllable, \nthus - - ; so also in anajviestic verse. But as the first sv-llable of the \nfoot is long in the trochee and dactyl, the spondee in trochaic and dao \ntylic vei*se takes the Arsis on the first syllable, thus \xe2\x80\x94 \xe2\x80\x94 . Again, as a \nshort syllable is assumed as the unit in measuring time, and as in a long \nsyllable the emphasis or ictus necessarily faUs on the first of the two \nunits composing this long, it is evident that, in iambic verse, the tribrach \n\n\n\n* ^^^\'-J VERSIFICATION. 5-75 \n\nwould take the Arsis on the second syUable, thus --; and in trochaic \nverse on the first So where the dactjl takes the place of the spondee \nwith the Arsis on the last syllable, the arsis of the dactyl is on the first \n\nshort, thus -- -; but where the anapaest stands for the spondee (--), its \nArsis is on the first short, thus " - - . \n\n\xc2\xa7 350. Metrical Feet. \n\n1. The portions bto which every verse is divided, are called feet. \n\nThe feet are composed of a certain number of syllables, either all \nlong, all short, or long and short together. \n\nA short syllable is assumed as the tin ti in measuring time, every short \nsyllable being one mora or time, and every long one two morae. \n\nThe feet used in poetry may be divided, according to the number of \nsyllables, into four of two syllables, eight of three, and sixteen of four \nsyllables. \n\nThe dissyllabic feet are four : \n\n\xe2\x80\x94 - P>Trhich 1 (tvttov) \n\n\xe2\x80\x94 Spondee (tiVt(i>) \n" - lamb (rtTTuji\') \n\n\xe2\x80\x94 " Trochee (nWc) \n\n\' DpniVATioy OF xames op feet. \xe2\x80\x94 Pi/rrhich. This was so called from \n-^ (wvfifiixri), in which it was used, as being rapid and \n\n\xe2\x80\x94 .. . . ...in Idmrw, to abuse; because Archilochus the inventor \n\nit in violent invectives. \xe2\x80\x94 Trochee. From rpfxa, to run ; because of its \n\n-tyle. \xe2\x80\x94 7" " \' T N Rpaxvs, because consisting of three \n\n"Ttfff^. ^ aise it was used iv toTs airov5a7s, in \n\nh iiii sound. \xe2\x80\x94 Dactyl. \'Anh rod SaKTvKov] because \n\nii... ..\xe2\x80\x9e - \'. - ,... . of one long joint and two short ones. \xe2\x80\x94 Aria- \n\npaest. From arawauv, to strike back ; because the Ictus was contrary to that of \n\n111 T" \' ... \'j^^i fipaxvs; because the short syllables are on \n\n\xc2\xab\xe2\x96\xa0 i^^O \xe2\x80\x94 Cretic. Because much used by the Cretans. \n\n11 tlie l>itliyninibic Ciaines in honor of Bacchus. \xe2\x80\x94 Antihac- \n\n^^ (ami) of the fonner. \xe2\x80\x94 Proceleusmatic. From KeXeva-fxa, the \n\nwain\'s cull or command; because rapidly uttered. \xe2\x80\x94 Paeons. Because \n11 the rueonic Hvnjns. \xe2\x80\x94 CAonaniA. Trochee or Choree -f- Iamb. \xe2\x80\x94 An- \n\nI \'At^iawduf, to draw to the opj>osite side; because, being converse of \n\nt\' .r. it apnears to draw the Trochee to the other side of the Iamb. \xe2\x80\x94 \n\n/ ,\xe2\x80\x9e.,:,\xe2\x80\x9e: lofticus a minore. Feet much in use with the lonians ; a jnajore, \n\nwhen b. with the lonp syllables; a minore, when beginning with the \nshort oncv \xe2\x80\x94 /: , \' Most probably from iirl and rp^ros ; because, in addition \nto {ini) the .3d \' it has a short one over. \xe2\x80\x94 The Z)uawi6 is an Iambic \nfcyzypy, adn.ittii in the first place. \xe2\x80\x94 The Ditrochee is a Trochaic \n\n\xe2\x80\xa2jzjgj, admittiiip .\xe2\x80\x94 ^, m the second place. \n\n\n\n576 VERSIFICATION. (\xe2\x99\xa6 350. \n\nThe trisyllabic are eight : \n\n"\' " " Tribrach {ervTrov) \n\nMoloSSUS (TVTTTtO/Xai) \n\n" ^ \xe2\x80\x94 Anapaest (tct-u^ws) \n\n\xe2\x80\x94 - " Dactyl (TUTTTCTe) \n^ \xe2\x80\x94 ^ Amphibrach (trvrrov) \n\n\xe2\x80\x94 ^ \xe2\x80\x94 C re tic (rvTrrofJuox) \n\n\xc2\xab- Bacchius (rvTn^uj) \n\n^ Palimbacchius (tx-tttt/tc) \n\nThe tetrasyllabic are sixteen : \n\n" ^ " *- Proceleusmatic (cnVrro) \n\nDispondee (Tv<f>^\xe2\x82\xacLijTr]v) \n\n*\'\xe2\x80\x94\'\'\xe2\x80\x94 Diiamb (crfTrrd/xT/v) \n\n\xe2\x80\x94 w _ w Ditrochce (rvTrrtTuxrav) \n\n\xe2\x80\x94 \xe2\x80\x94 ^ Antispast (\xe2\x82\xactv<^.^t7toi\') \n~ - - \xe2\x80\x94 Choriamb (txttto/xckou) \n\n\xe2\x80\x94 " \xe2\x80\x94 lonicus a minori (ctcti\'/i/xiti\') \n\n\xe2\x80\x94 \xc2\xab - lonicus a majori (rxil/aifuSa) \n\n\xe2\x80\x94 ^ - ^ first Paeon (txitto/xcvo?) \nw _ w w second Paeon (cTtWrrc) \nV w _ ^ tliird Paeon (ctct-i-i/o) \nw w - _ fourth Paeon {irvTrofirji) \nV. first Epitrite (cTvi^tur^i\') \n\n\xe2\x80\x94 \xc2\xbb* \xe2\x80\x94 second Epitrite (u\xc2\xbb nm-oivai) \n\n\xe2\x80\x94 - - third Epitrite (Tvtf>3Tjcrofiax) \n^ fourth Epitrite (rvt^tirjaav) \n\n2. Simple metres are formed by the repetition of simple feet; \npound, by combining the simple feet with each other. \n\nSimple feet consist of but one Arsb, and one Thesis, e. g. \n\n\n\n, , , \\. i\\. \xe2\x80\xa2 \n\n\n\nComjwund feet consist of tvro Arses and Theses, of which one Arsis \nand Thesis, taken together, is considered as a single Arsis or Thesis, e- g. \n\n\n\nI \n\n\n\nf y f \\ f f \' \xc2\xab \n\n\n\nOf the simple feet, only those which have a long syllable in the Anb 4 \nand a short one in the Thesis, give natural variety, e. g. - - - \n---. Hence the trochee and dactyl, the iamb and anapaest, are ccus:\'.- \nered as the fundamental feet of all rhnhm. The other feet may be \n\n\n\n^ 351.] VERSIFICATION. \n\n\n\n577 \n\n\n\ncombined with these by resolving a long into two short syUables, or by \ncontracting two short into one long syllable. \n\n4. Iambic, Trochaic, and Anapaestic verses are not measured by single \nfeet, but by dipodies, or pairs of feet, two feet being necessary to make \nan independent metre or dipody. Hence, four iambs make an Iambic \ndimeter, and six an Iambic trimeter. Dactylic verse, on the contrary, \nis measured by the single feet ; six dactj-ls, therefore, form an htxameter, \nand five a pentameter. \n\n\n\n$ 351. Caesura. \n\nCaesura (a cutting) is the separation, by the endjig of a word, of syl- \nlables metrically connected, \xe2\x80\x94 or the cutting of a metre by the ending \nof a word, before the metre is completed. \n\nRemark I. The dcsjpn of the Caesura is to give varietv and harmony to \n\n\xc2\xbb!,,. V. r .\xe2\x80\xa2 (\xe2\x96\xa0<\xe2\x80\xa2\xe2\x96\xa0 \'f \xe2\x80\xa2 tre or foot torininatcd with the end of a word, there \n\nNv.uM !.-\xe2\x80\xa2 (.Mi\\ ;t itly rcciirriii\xc2\xab: monotony. But the Caesura, by pre- \n\nventing,\' a uniform cr.\'itir,<ience between the ending of the metre or foot, and the \nciidiii- (if \xe2\x96\xa0 "\xe2\x80\xa2 \xe2\x96\xa0 \' \xe2\x96\xa0 \xe2\x80\xa2\xe2\x80\xa2 \xe2\x96\xa0 \xe2\x80\xa2 \xe2\x80\xa2\' variety, beauty, and harmony of the verse. It \n\'\xe2\x96\xa0- I\'"\' \'" I th\xc2\xab\' rhythm of the verse that the ending of \n\n\'\'i *^"\'*1 \' s coincide; this coincidence is called \n\n\'"\' \xe2\x96\xa0 The J >f< are after the first, second, third, \n\nand fourth foot. \n\n^adtof \xe2\x80\xa2 I airrap i \\ rolaif dt^ciXcro | ydarifioy \\ ii/xap. \n\nThere are three kinds of Caesura ; \n\n1. Caesura of the foot. \n\n2. Caesura of the rhythm. \nS. Caesura of the v^rse. \n\n(1) Caesura of the foot is where the word ends before a foot is com- \npleted. \n\nNiictJ j era? iS^ j Xci oTi-yf | fi^l^ \xe2\x82\xac/^f | oiicaS\' | ayeaSot. \nIn this line there is a Caesura of the foot afler each of the syllables o-a?, \nAct, pTjVf and #ca^. Only two cases of this Caesura can occur in a dac- \ntyl ; for the word either ends afler the Arsis, - 1 - ^, and forms the mas- \ncUine Caf^sura, or in the Thesis, - " j **, and forms the feminine or trochaic \nCaesura. Thus the Caesuras after o-a?. Act and pr]v are masculine, that \nafter niKa^ is feminine or trochaic. \n\n(2) The Caesura of the rhytlun is where the Arsis falls on the last \n(O\'llable of a word, and thus separates the Arsis from the Thesis. In the \nline above quott?d, the Caesura of the rhythm occurs after the syllables \nora<:, Xci and prjv, the Arsis felling on each of these and being separated \n\n49 \n\n\n\n578 VERSIFICATION. |^ 352 \n\nfrom the following Thesis by the Caesura. This Caesura can take placi \nonly in such feet as have the Arsis on the first syllable. \n\n(3) The Caesura of the verse is a pause introduced to render the re- \ncitation more easy. This is also called the Caesural pause, and divides \nthe verse into two parts. \n\nIn several kinds of verse this Caesura has a fixed place ; this is the \ncase in the Trochaic, Iambic, and Anapaestic tetrameter, which have tb- ir \nnatural Caesura at the end of the fourth foot See under these ver > \nbelow. Other kinds of verse may have more than one Caesura, ti. \nplace of wliich is not fixed. In Hexameter verse, however, the Caesura \nof the verse more usually occurs after the Arsis of the third foot. Thus, \n\nKlXVui\' T\xe2\x82\xac ^\xc2\xabl.\'ici/l\'. II Tci\'t&MO T\xe2\x82\xac l(j>L aVUJiT<T\xe2\x82\xacLi, \n\nor in the Thesis of the third foot, thus, \n\nKcu Tore 8ij 3dp<rrj<T\xe2\x82\xac, \\\\ kox rjvSa fuxyrt^ S^vfiuiv. \n\nRem. 2. The three kinds of Caesura often occur together; for exam] \'\xe2\x80\xa2 \nftfter the - " * \' tj* of (a^driy, there is the Caesura of the foot, of the rhythm, \nand of the \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 352, Different kinds of Verse. \n\n1. A verse is often named from its pred(\xc2\xbbninant foot Thus Dacf- "\xe2\x96\xa0- \nverse is so called, because the dact]\xc2\xbb\'I is the predominant foot, an4 Iambic \nverse, because the iamb b the preilominant foot ; so TirocAotic, Anapaestic, \netc. Verses arc also named from their inventaMrs, as the Sappkk^ finom \nSappho, Alcaic, from Alcacus, etc. ; likewise from the kind of composi- \ntion in which thoy arc used, as the Heroic, used in desciiUng the \nachievements of heroes, also fn^m tho numlM^r of maainiTes. as monMn^t^r, \ndimeter, trimeter, Jtexatnctcr, etc. \n\n2. A verse is called acaialectic, when it has its full number of feet or \nsyllables, as trimeter iambics, \xc2\xbb\' \xe2\x80\x94 \xe2\x80\xa2\'-|-\xe2\x80\x94 *\xc2\xab-]--\' \xe2\x80\x94 . A verse is called \ncatalectic, when one or two sj-llables are wanting to complete the verse, \nas the <nm\xc2\xab/\xc2\xab*, ^\xe2\x80\x94 \'-- I^-\'^-j*\' \xe2\x80\x94 **. In dactylic verse, if the last loot \nwants one syllabic, the verses are called catalectic on two syllables, e. g. \nJww_ww_wj if two syllables are wanting, catalectic on one sjfUable, e. g. \nJ vw_w\xc2\xab_. Verses in which the last dipo<ly (a pair of feet) wants an \nentire foot, arc called hrach if catalectic, e.g. ^--^ --|*\' \xe2\x80\x94 *- \xe2\x80\x94 J" \xe2\x80\x94 . Verees \nwhich have one or two syllables more than enough, are called hypercaUh \nlectic, e. g. \'\'-*\' \xe2\x80\x94 I** \xe2\x80\x94 " \xe2\x80\x94 I"-"-"\'. \n\nRiiMAKK AVh.-n th.^ r.^!rn1:H- rlivthui ot averse is preceded bv an onem \n\n\n\n^ 353 \xe2\x80\x94 355.] VERSIFICATION. 579 \n\nphfttic introductory syllable, such syllable is called an Anacrusis, an upivard or \nback beat; when there are two such syllables, forming an introductory foot, \nthey are called a Biite. The atiacrxisis and base belong to Imc verse. \n\n\n\n$353. View of the different kinds of Verse. \n\nITie most usual kinds of verse are those which consist of the repeti- \ntion of the same foot Of these the most frequent are the Dacti/Uc, lam- \nhic^ Trochaic^ and Anapaestic. \n\nk 354. Dactylic Verse. \n\nThe fundamental foot in this verse is the dactjl, the place of which \nmay be supplied by a spondee. \n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 355. Hexameter. \n\nThe Hexameter was employed by the Greeks at an early period, and \nis the metre of Epic or Heroic and Pastoral poetry. \n\nThe Hexameter consists of six feet ; the fundamental foot is the dac- \ntyl, the verse being formed by five repetitions of the dactj-l with a dis- \nsyllabic catalectus. The sixth foat is usually called a spondee ; but when \nthe last syllable is short, it may be considered a trochee. \n\nIn each of the firbt four feet, a spondee may take the place of the dac- \ntyl. The fiflh foot is regularly a dactyl ; but sometimes it is a spondee, \nand the line is then called a spondaic line, as \n\nOu yap /yui Tputurtf \xe2\x82\xacV\xe2\x82\xack yjkv^ov al)(p.rjTami}V, \n\nThe principal Caesura in Hexameter vene occurs afler the Arsis or in \nthe Thesis of the third foot, and is called the Penthemim ; sometimes also a \nCaesura occurs after the Arsis of the fourth part, which is called the \nHepJdhemim, This Caesura in the fourth foot is commonly preceded by \none in the second foot, which is called the Triemim, The Caesura oc- \ncurring at the end of the fourth foot is called the Bucolic Caesura, from \nIn OM in pastoral poetr}\' \n\n\'AAA* 6 pev AlSioT-a^ i| fi\xe2\x82\xacT\xe2\x82\xacKtaS\xe2\x82\xac t7]\\6S iovTa<; \n\nAt\'^pa ^ot u\'vcTTC, MoOca, ij TroXiVpoTrov os /xoAa TroAAa \n\n*H Aia<i I; yj \'l3o/icvci-s j] i) Sw>? \'08ucro-eu5 \n\n\'Hytpovuiv, j I ooTis oi aprjv \\ j iTopoicnv d/xvvai \n\nMifiKOL^civ irapa vrpxrX Kopwvurtv, \\\\ ov ot cTrcira. \n\n\n\n580 . VERSIFICATION. [H 3-56, 357 \n\na \n\nThe beauty of Hexameter verse is promoted hj varying the feet by \nan interchange of dactjls and spondees, and by introducing these in dif- \nferent places in different verses. For the same reason it is desirable that \nthe Caesuras should occur in different places in different lines. \n\n\n\n\xc2\xa7 356. Pentameter. \n\nThis verse is divided into two parts, each of which consMts of two \ndactyls and a catalectic sj-llable, thus, \n\n-\':, -. -\' - -. -.11 -; - .--.-.:- \n\nMt/Sc ^vpa^e KcXcv j| oik fSiXovr uvau \nSpondees may take the place of the dact^-ls in the first half, but not in \nthe second, because the numbers at their conclusion should run more \nfreely, instead of being retarded by the slow movement of the spondees. \nThe long syllable at the end of the second half can be short The \nCaesura is here the same as in the Hexameter, except that there must be \na division, by the ending of the word, in the middle of the verse. When \nthe word, however, has more than two syllables. Elision may take place. \n\nThis kind of verse is commonly found only in connection with Hex- \nameter, a Hexameter and Pentameter following each other alternately. \nA poem composed of these two measures is called EUgvac^ being at first \ndevoted to plaintive melodies. \n\nApTi fx\xe2\x82\xac ycv6fi(vov ^wa^ /3p\xe2\x82\xac<f>o<: r)pTraa-\xe2\x82\xac AaifUiMf Hexam. \n\xe2\x82\xacIt aya^oji\' |j alrio^, circ Kaxun\\ \n\nt \xc2\xbb 4 jj \n\n\n\nOvK oiS* fir dyaSiav 1 1 aiTio?, circ Kaxa>\xc2\xbb\', Pentam. \n\n\n\nAnXijpoyr Atda, ti /x\xe2\x82\xac vrpnov ^pTrcura? a<f>iXi) ; Hexam. \nTi cTTTci\'Stis ; ov <roL \\\\ ircuacs o^\xe2\x82\xaciAo/K<9a ; Pentam. \n\n\n\n$ 357. Dactylic Tetrameter. \n\nThe dact}\'lic tetrameter catelectic on one sj\'llable consisti of three feet \n\nand a syllable. \n\nThe dactvlic tetrameter catalecdc on two svllables ooiUMtB of Uiree feet \nand two syllables, which may form a spondee or trochee. \n\xc2\xabi>atroucvo\xc2\xbb\' kokov oucaS* aytaSai. \n\n-\' -I- "I -\'"I - - \n\nThe dact}\'lic tetrameter acatalectic consists of four feet ; instead of a \ndactyl, in the last a cretic b admissible. \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 358\xe2\x80\x94361.] VERSIFICATION. 581 \n\nMJia\', <Iye KoAXtoVa Svyarep Ato\'s. \n\n\n\ni 358. Dactylic Trimeter. \n\nThe dactyUc trimeter catalectic on one syUable consists of two feet \nand a s^\'llable. \n\nEvSev ae^duevov. \n\nThe dactyUc trimeter catalectic on two syllables consists of two feet \nand two syllables, which may form either a spondee or trochee. \n\nEivpti KVfiara ttovtu). \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 359. Dactylic Dimeter. \n\nThe dact>\'lic dimeter catalectic on two syllables consists of a dactyl \nand a spondee or trochee. \n\n4><JUT/xaTa (TTpovSuiV \nI our 6 ofJL6<f>uiVov . \n\n\n\nThe dactylic aoatalectic dimeter consists of two dactyls, and usually \nstands in connection with tetrameters. \n\nOr? VTTO Tft^eCTL. \n\n\n\n\xc2\xab. ^ ^ I ^ ** ^ \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 360. Trochaic , Iambic and Anapaestic Verse. \n\nIt has been already observed (\xc2\xa7 350, 4.) that Trochaic, Iambic, and \nVnapaestic verse is measured by dipodies^ i. e. by pairs of feet Hence \nverses of two feet, are called monometer, of four, dimeter, of six, trime- \nter, of eight, tetrameter. The Latins named these according to the \nnumber of feet, and not by dipodies. Thus a verse of four feet was \ncalled quaitrtiiu.^. of ^^Iv. s^iuar\'nis^ of eight, octonarius. \n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 361. Trochaic Verse. \n\nThe Trochee is the predominant foot in this verse. The last syllable \nof each dipody may be doubtful ; hence the last foot of each dipody may \n\n49* \n\n\n\n582 \n\n\n\nVERSIFICATION. \n\n\n\n[^* 362, 363. \n\n\n\nbe a spondee. Therefore, a spondee is admissible in every even place \n(2, 4, 6, 8). The Arsis or long syllable of every foot can be resolved \ninto two short ones, and hence, a tribrach can stand in everj\' place ; a \ndactyl and anapaest can stand in the even places, instead of the spondee. \nA dactyl is not admitted, however, except in a proper name, and then \nmay stand in all the places but the fourth and seventh. \n\nA trochaic tetrameter acatalectic would then present the following \nscheme : \n\n\n\n/ / / / / / \n\n/ / \' \' \n\nWW_WW _bW*\xc2\xab ^ ** ** \n\nlit I \n\n\n\nRemark. Trochaic vov \niu the chonil j)arts of (\'t)ii \nordinary wit and spirit into the < > \nvary the grave monotony of the J \n\n\n\n!>ccially \n\nre than \n\nto arrest the spcctAtors attentioa aod \n\n\n\n$ 362. Tr OCha i \'^ "^Tn \xc2\xbb n m r f r r _ \n\nThe trochaic monometer acatalccuc consisu oi two feet It is gener* \nally found in systems of trochaic trimeters. \n\n\n\n^363. Trochaic Dimef^* \n\nThe trochaic dimeter acatalectic consists of four iccL \n\nThe trochaic dimeter catalcctic consbts of three feet and a sjflaUe. \nIt is usually found among acatalectic dimeters. \n\nKai ^Kv^ri<; o/xiA.09, oi yas (acatalectic). \n"^(Txarov ToTTov aix<p,l >Iou- (cataleclic). \nluriv evoixrt Xifii-av. \n\n- " I - " II - " -\' -\xe2\x80\xa2 \nill 11 / / \n\nI II \n\n* See Manual of Greek Prosody, by L. P. Mercier. \n\n\n\nH 364, 365.1 \n\n\n\nVERSIFICATION. \n\n\n\n583 \n\n\n\n$ 364. Trochaic Tetrameter Catalectic. \n\nThe trochaic tetrameter catalectic consists of seven feet and a syllable \n(two dimeters, the second catalectic). Its Caesui-a is at the end of the \nsecond dipody, and \\s often omitted by comedians, but rarely ever by \ntragedians. \n\nT]38\xe2\x82\xac TTU\'? cTTov, StcjKc | \\ KoH Tov OLvSpa TrvvSdvov \nAt TiJ\'ts rr)povfi\xe2\x82\xacv v/Aas \\ \\ rjv yap \xc2\xab ti\xc2\xa7 e^oSos. \n\n\n\nRemark. The Trochaic tetrameter acatalectic, which consists of two tro- \nalectic, and the trochaic pentameter, which consists of nine \n. are very rarely used by the Greek poets. \n\nJLvp bf^i yap Toi ^irrew^els 6\\fios ay^pwiroiai irapiiOvdiTepos, \n\n\n\ni 365. Iambic Verse. \n\nThe fundamental foot in this verse is the iamb. Instead of the first \niamb, everj\' dipody may have a spondee. Hence a spondee is admis- \nsible in the odd places (1, 8, 5, 7). \n\nAgain, as the long syllable of every iamb may be resolved into two \nshort sylhbles, a tribrach may stand in every place, except the last ; and \nas the last syllable is common, a pyrrhic is admissible. In the odd places \na dactyl or anajxiest may stand instead of a spondee. \n\nHence the iambic trimeter or senarius, would present the folloAving \nacheme : \n\n\n\n/ / \' ^ ^ ^ \n\n\n\nTU-MARK 1 The il.> vcver, is most frequent in the first place ; it occurs \n\nh/llK thrrd\'-pl\'e o... \xe2\x96\xa0. the H.t sylhible of the f^^^^^^^^^ \n\n,>.\xc2\xab/A,\xc2\xab/,\xc2\xabm,/ Caesura, or when the word is amono> liable ^^^/^^^^^^^ \n. the tifih place only in Comedy, where it is admitted in all the uneven \n\n\' R.H.2. The anapaest is admitted only in. 1^^^ \n\nand in proper names ; m tlie.e ca.c^ \'^^^^f i^^\'^.^eluded in one word, except in \nhist. The anapaest m the hrst fuo mu^t^be ^^^J^^^ ^ ^ names \n\ncase of the article or jiivposition and its Case, xne du^pa f f \n\nmust not be divided between two Avords. \n\n\n\n\n\n\n584 \n\n\n\nVEBSIFICATION. \n\n\n\n[H 366\xe2\x80\x94368 \n\n\n\nKem. 3. The Iambic is the opposite of the Trochaic, being a stcadr, grave, \nbut easy metre, and was applied to the stage as best adapted to the langaag\xc2\xab \nof ordinary life.^ \n\n\xc2\xa7 366. Iambic Monometer, \n\nIambic monometer consists of two feet Its use is yery rare, and it \noccurs mostly in systems of dimeters, \n\nKat TOtS KoXot? \n\n\n\n067. Iambic Dimeter. \nIambic dimeter acatalectic consists of four feet. \n\n"OdiV 66uiOtXTL Tols \xe2\x82\xacUOL^ \n\n\'I \' \'t \'I \' \n\nIambic dimeter catalectic consists of three feet and a syllaWe. \n\n\xc2\xa9tAo) Xcytiv Arpcioas, \nXatjpOlTC XoiTTOl\' "fjfuv \n\n\n\nThis verse is commonly found in systems of acatalectic diii.atenk \n\n\n\n^368. Iambic Trimeter Acatalectic, commonly called \n\nSenarius. \n\nThis is tlie most noted of the Iambic verses. It conasts of ax ftei. \n\nO TCfcva, Ka3/iov rov ttoXox via rpo^f \nlKTr]pLOL<i KXdSouriv c^coTf ^/uici\'oi ; \nAAAcjv dxoi\'Ctv, avTos i^ iXijkvSa \n\n\xe2\x80\xa2 I _ J \n\n\n\nThe tragedians admit a dactyl only in the first and third foot ; they ad- \nmit an anapaest chiefly in the first foot, but in proper names, in any foot \nexcept the last \n\nMcve\\(U9 "EXoTyv 6 8c KXvrou/in^oTpa? Xri<09, \nIIoTa/Ltuiv T\xe2\x82\xac TnjyaL, ttovtuov t\xe2\x82\xac Kx-naTwv \nOvK apiSfiov oAAxas oAA\' v-Trfpraroi\'s ^pvywv \n\n\n\n\' See Mercior. \n\n\n\nH 369, 370.] \n\n\n\nVERSIFICATION. \n\n\n\n585 \n\n\n\nThe most frequent Caesura here is in the third foot (Penthemim) \nThis Caesura, however, is often neglected, others being used, or some- \ntimes, none. \n\n*Ex^pC)v aSwpa II Swpa kovk ovrjaifia. \nThe Caesura is often found in the middle of the fourth foot (Hepthe. \nmim). \n\n\'Ettci Tra-njp ovtos o-o\'?, || ov ^pT/vci? det\'. \nThe Caesura at the end of the third foot is less frequent. \n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 369. Iambic Tetrameter Catalectic, \n\nThe iambic tetrameter is very much used by the comedians. It con- \nciata of seven feet and a syllable. The Caesura is usually at the end of \nthe fourth foot, but is sometimes omitted. The scheme is nearly the \nsame as the trimeter iambic. The anapaest occurs in the seventh foot \nonly in case of a proper name. \n\n\n\n\' I \' / / I / / / \n_\' / I / \n\n/ / \n\n\' ! / \' / \' f \\ / / / \n\n\n\nOv <f>jj<Ti YprjvaL Tov<; viov<! 1 1 daKeiv \xe2\x80\xa2 cyw 8e cbriai, \n\n_--\' i-\'ii--l--ll--h-\'lh-h \n\nThe iambic tetrameter acatalectic is but little used by the Greek poefa. \n\n\n\n? :M0. A7iapaestic Verse. \n\n1. The anapar-i is ihe predominant foot in this verse. But by uniting \nthe two short syllables in one long, the spondee may be substituted for \nthe anapaest Again, the second long syllable of the spondee may be \nresolved into two short svllablps. and hence a dactyl take the place of a \nspondee. \n\n2. In Anapaestic verse the most usual system is the dimeter, consist- \ning of a greater or less number of perfect dipodles, followed by a \npair of dipodles, the second of which Is catalectlc. This catalectic dime- \nter, consisting of three feet and a syllable, Is called paroemiac (-n-apoL- \n/xtai) from its use in proverbs. The anapaestic verse is, therefore, al* \nways terminated by a catalectic dipody, and also by a long syllable ; i. e, \nif the final syllable is not long by itself, it is made long by its position \n\n\n\n] \n\n\n\n586 \n\n\n\nVERSIFICATION. \n\n\n\n[*j 371\xe2\x80\x94373 \n\n\n\nYrith respect to the next line, the scanning being continuous, and an an \napaestic series being constructed as if there were but one verse. The \nfollowing is the scheme for an anapaestic tetrameter ootalectic. \n\n\n\nI / r \' j f \\ / f \n\nI I II / j \n\n- w .WW ^ _ww .WW I \n\n\n\nRemark. An anapaest docs not follow a dactyl in the same dipody ; gen- \nerally a dactyl docs not follow an anapaest or spondee in the same dipodj. \nThe third foot of the paroemiac is usually an anapaest 5 but a spondee \\a some- \ntimes found. Tlie dactyl docs not occur in tlie sixth and seventh feet. The \nAnapaestic metre was the favorite one for martial music. \n\n\n\n^371. Anapaestic Monometer Acatalectic, \nThe anapaestic monometer acatalectic consists of two feet \n\n\n\n$372. Anapaestic Dimeter Acatalectic. \n\nThe anapaestic dimeter acatalectic consists of four feet The legiti- \nmate Caesura occurs after the second Anns, at the end of the second foot \nBut the Caesura is often found after the short syllable which follows the \n\nArsis. \n\n\'AttoXci? /a*, aTToXcts. Ij ov Karapr^cis \nllpwri^t] fjuavla. \\ 1 tis 6 in;8ij<ras, \nnrepvywv cpcr/xotcriv | [ tp\xe2\x82\xaca(TOfJL\xe2\x82\xacVTj. \n\n\n\nI \\ f \' \n\nw ^ \' y\xc2\xbb-^\xc2\xbb ^\xc2\xbb v_ w w \\ _ \n\n/ ; / / ! \n\nI 2 I >- - 2 i \xe2\x80\x94 I: -~ \n\n\n\n$373. An^ipmestic Dimeter Omtmieeiic. \n\nThe anapaestic dimeter catalectic (paroemiac) coo&sts of three feet \nand a syllable, and has no Caesura, the Caesura not being used in the \npai-oemadc. \n\nAia TOt\' crov TrpioKTov o^^XtJctci. \n\n\n\n\xe2\x99\xa6 374.] \n\n\n\nABBREVIATIONS. \n\n\n\n587 \n\n\n\n^374. Anapaestic Tetrameter Catalectic. \n\nThe anapaestic tetrameter catalectic consists of seven feet and a sylla- \nble, being formed by adding the anapaestic dimeter catalectic (paroemiac) \nto the anapaestic dimeter acatalectic. This verse is also caUed Aris- \ntophanic, from its use by Aristophanes, though not invented by hhn. \nThe spondaic paroemiac, which sometimes occurs in the regular system, \nis not admissible in the tetrameter. \n\nThe Caesura is at the end of the fourth foot, sometimes, though rarely, \nafter the short syllable immediately following. There is generally also \nan incisure at the end of the second foot \n\nII \xe2\x96\xa0rt? "\xc2\xab TtLi\' opvx.9(ov 1 1 /lan-cvo/Liei/o) TTcpt Tov TrXov ; \n\nli^> \'^<av 8uxTov(T avTOL<:. \\\\ ova-av Trapa roto-t ^eot(7tv; \n\nTuM/ . ^ Ji/ \' ovTOL yap uraxri. || Acyov(n Bi tol rdSe Travres. \n\n\n\nAnapaestic tetrameter acatalectic does not seem to have been used by \nthe Greek poets. \n\n\n\nAPPENDIX B. \n\n\n\nABBREVIATIONS. \n\n1. For the convenience of those who may wish to read some of the \nearlier editions of the Greek writers, the following table, containing old \nforms of some of the letters, and also abbreviations of certain words \nor parts of words, is subjoined. \n\n2. No. I. contains certain single letters or elements^ which are of con- \nstant occurrence in tlie compound characters, and are found nowhere else. \nNo. 11. contains characters, the elements of which would not at once be \nobvious, and lor this reason alone they are not placed alphabetically in \ncolumns III \xe2\x80\x94 VI. Indeed, the characters in Nos. I. and U. might all \nliave been arranged alpliabetically in columns m \xe2\x80\x94 VI. The characters \nin columns III \xe2\x80\x94 VI. are arranged alphabetically; the initial letter of \nthese characters, by the aid of those in No. I^ will be readily known.^ \n\n\n\n\' See Robinson\'s Buttmann, p. 466. \n\n\n\n588 \n\n\n\nTABLE OF ABBREVIATIONS. \n\n\n\na \n\n\n\nr \n\ny \n\n\n\n\n\n\nc \n\n\n\nI. \n\n^ It. \n\n\n\ny \n\n\n\nF \n\nV \n\n\n\nKf \n\n\n\n\' oy yap yap \xc2\xa3i \xe2\x82\xacl \nIV. \n\n\n\n\xe2\x82\xacX \n\n\n\nIII. \n\n^^ aO-i \n\n^ ay \n"^ orp \n\n>i\' y\xc2\xabV \n\nOjT\'\' ylveiai \ny yo \n\nSj^ dia \n\n\n\n^ \n\n\n\nov \n\n\n\neivat \n\ny \n\ntv \n\n\n\nII. \n\nZcy or J^* \n\nTjV OV JCO \n\nV. \n\n\n\nxa \n\n\n\ne J \n\nVI, \n\n^^ lavO-a \n\n\n\n\n\n\n?^ ineidrj \n^ inl \n\n;)^\' x\xc2\xabra ^ \n\nJ^T^\' yecfaXaiov \n\n\n\noioy \n\n\n\nonx outog \n^t^^^napa \n\n^ 7l(p \n\nTie pi \n\n\n\n\n\n\n7f \n\n\n\nLL^ fxdlCOV \n\n\n\n\n\n\nno \n\npo \naa \n\nc&ai \noo \n\n\n\nG \n\nCUT 0^ \n\nOS 00 \n\n^ oco \n\nd -\xc2\xab\' \n\n\n\nTTJg \n\nJO \n\nJOY \n\nTOV \n\nJOV \n\n\n\nn \n\nr \nr \n\nZS \'^ \nt5 \xc2\xbb \n\n\n\nI. INDEX OF SUBJECTS. \n\n\n\nN. B. The figures refer to sections. R. is used for remark \n\n\n\nAbbreviations, Appendix B. p. 588. \n\nAblative expressed by Dat. 285, 1. \n\n^a.-./mm^ Case Absolute, sec Cases. \n\nA on of clauses by tlxAa 322, 6. \n\nAbstracts 39, in PI. 243, 3, (3). \n\nAbsorption of Diphth. in Crasis, 10, \n4,5. \n\nAcalalectic verse 352, 2. \n\nAccentuation 29 ; change and re- \nmoval of the accent by Inflec., \nC\xc2\xab^"^" \'- and Contract 30 ; in \nc*\' 1 discourse (Grave in- \n\nstead of the Acute), in Crasis, \nElision, A nastrophe 31. Accent \nof first Dec. 45 ; second Dec. 49 ; \nthinl Dec. 65 ; adjectives and \nparticiples 75 ; words ending in \nt-f, eitt, V 76, II ; tag, (dv 78. R. \n7, and 29, R. 5 ; wr, ov 78, R. 9, \nand 65, 5 ; ijj, tg 78, R. 11 ; verb \n118. \n\nAccusative 276 s(\\. ; local relation, \nlimit, aim 277 ; of the object pro- \nduced with a verb of the same \nBtem or one of a cognate signifi- \ncation (^ti/rfV fiii/tai^ai ; lf]v ^lov) \n278, 1 and 2 ; with verbs denot- \ning to shine, to flow, etc. 278, 3 ; \nobject, design 278, 4 ; manner \n278, R. 3 ; of the object on which \nthe action is perfonned or the \n\n\n\nsuffering object 279 ; with verbi \nsignifying to profit, to hurt, etc. \n279, 1 ; of doing good or evil to \nany one, etc. 279, 2; to persevere, \nto wait for, etc. 279, 3 ; to turn \nback, flee from, etc. 279, R. 3 ; to \nconceal, to be concealed, to swear, \nand with cp&dvsLv, Xhjieiv 279, 4 ; \nwith dtl XQV 279, R. 4 ; ^aivsiv, \nnkslVf etc., which denote motion, \netc., with verbs of sacrificing or \ndancmg in honor of any one 279, \nR. 5 ; denoting an affection of \nthe mind 279, 5 ; of space, time, \nquantity 279, R. 8; (xalog roc \ncfifiaza, uXyil tijv xscpah\'jv) 279, \n7 ; double accusative : (pda \n(ftXiav as, etc. 280, 1 ; xalu, \nxaxa TTO/w, Xiyo) as 280, 2 ; with \nverbs of beseeching, asking, teach- \ning, reminding, dividing, depriv- \ning, conceahng, clothing and un- \nclothing, surrounding, etc. 280, \n3 ; with verbs of appointing, \nchoosing, educating, naming, etc. \n280, 4 ; in the a/ijfia xad^ oXov \nv.. fiiQog 266, R. 4 ; Ace. in \nadverbial expressions, e. g. ^a- \n1CQ0V xXalsLV, fiiya /algsiv 278, \nR. 1 ; /\xc2\xab?\'\xc2\xbb\', dca^sdv, touto, \ntherefore, 278, R. 2 ; tovtov tov \n\n\n\n690 \n\n\n\nINDEX OF SUBJECTS. \n\n\n\nTQonov, dixrjv, ofioia 278, R. 3; \ntrjv Ta/lazrjv ; uQyJ]v, etc ; noVka^ \nsnfipe, oXlyov, etc. 279, R. 8 ; \ntVQog^ vipog, tdXXa, etc. 279, R. \n10 ; with Pass, verbs 281 ; with \nverbal Adjectives in ziog 284, \nR. 7. \n\nAccusative with Inf. 307 ; instead of \nNorn, with Inf. 307, R.4 ; instead \nof Gen. or Dat with Inf 307, R. \n2 ; as a subject after Xf/fTui, do- \nnii, etc. 307, R. 5 ; with the Art \nsec Inf ; with exclamations 308, \nR. 2 ; in the subordinate clauses \nof the oratio ohliqua 315, 6. \xe2\x80\xa2 \n\niccusative with the Part. 310, 2 ; \nabsolute 312, 6 ; with w$ 312, 6 ; \nAce. of Part, instead of another \nCase 313, 1. \n\nActive verbs 102, 248, 249. Comp. \nTransitive ; with the meaning to \ncause to do 249, R. 3. \n\nAcute accent 29, 4 (a). \n\nAddition of consonants 2-1. \n\nAdjective (and Part) 74 sq. ; Dial. \n215; Accent 75 ; of three end- \nings 76, 77 ; of two endings 78, \n79; of one ending 80; Com- \nparison of 81 ; used as a Subs. \n2G3, a ; Attributive 264 ; as Subs, \nwith the Gen. (^ nokkii Tt%\' ytji \ninstead of to noXv rffg yiig) 264, \nR. 5 ; instead of the Adv. 264, 3. \n\nAdJ \'\xe2\x96\xa0 ^ A^\'erbal, see Verbal Ad- \n\nJ\' \nAdjectives Numeral 96, 2. \n\nAdjective Substantive Clause 831, \n\nk 4. \n\nAdjective pronoun used as a Subs. \n263, a. \n\nAdjective clauses 331 ; several con- \nnected together 334, 1 ; inter- \nchanged with other subordinate \nclauses 334, 2. \n\nAdverb 100 ; formation 101 ; com- \npanson So ; expressed by an ad- \njective 264, 31 as expressing an \n\n\n\nobjective relation 314 sq.; xu&ti \nas adjectives 262, d; as substan- \ntives (ot vvv) 263, c ; in a preg \nnant sense (onoi yr^q iafitv, etc.) \n300, R, 7 ; (o ixu&sv nokifioi \ndii\'QO ilUt instead of 6 ixtl n.) \n300 R. 8 ; adverbs of place at- \ntracted 332, R, 7 ; inverse at^ \ntraction of Adv. of place 332 \nR. 13. \n\n\'// clan sq. ; of place \n\n336 ; time 337 ; cause 338 ; con- \ndition 339 ; concession 340, 7 ; \nconsf"^"\'"""*^ or effect 341 ; wtv \nand . r 342; quantity v.. U \n\noao), o<rov 343. \n\nAdversative coordinate clauses ex- \npressed by Ji, uAAo, etc. 322 ; \nnegative adversative coordinate \nclauses 321, 2. \n\nAgr 240 sq. ; of the Aitrib. \n\nA ... -.1, 1 ; of the Rel. Pron. \nin Gend. and Numb. 332 ; in \nCase 332, 6 \n\n\n\n.1\' \n\n\n\n]-}\xe2\x96\xa0 01, -.: \'. \n\n\n\n.1 .47, 5; in the Part \n\nconstruction 313, 1, (a). \n\nAnacrusis 352. R. \n\nAnapaestic dimeter a < 2. \n\nAnapaestic dimeter ca " ^. \n\nAnapaestic monometer \n371. \n\nAnapacfiic icLnuucuir acai^utrcuc \n374. \n\nAnapaestic verse 370. \n\nAnastrophe 31, IV. \n\nAnomalous substantives third Dec \n67 sq.; Dial. 214 ; verbs 157 sq. \n\nAi^wer YES or no 344, 7. \n\nAorist 103 ; Aor. Pass, with <r 131 ; \nfirst Aor. Act without c 154, 7 ; \nsecond Aor. with a 154, 8 ; sec- \nond Aor. Act. and Mid- accord- \ning to analogy of verbs in pi 191 \nSt]. ; Aor. of some verbs with \nboth a Mid. and Pass, from 197, \n\n\n\nINDEX OF SUBJECTS. \n\n\n\n591 \n\n\n\nK. 1 ; Aor. of some Md. verbs, \nwhose Fut. has a Pass, from 197, \nIL 3 ; second Aor. Act. with In- \ntrans. meaning and first Aor. Act. \nwith Trans, meaning 141, 4. \xe2\x80\x94 \nS^Titax 25 G ; iterative meaning \n256, 4, (b) ; in comparisons 256, \n4, (c) ; instead of the Pres. 256, \n4, (d) ; Aor. with it ovv ov \n256, 4, (e) ; instead of the Fut. \n256, 4, (f ) ; to denote the com- \ning into a condition 256, 4 (g) ; \nsignification of the Aor. Subj., \nOpt., Imp., Inf and Part, 257. \n\nAorist, first and second Alid. always \nrt\'llo.xivo (or Intrans.) 251, 3; \nAor. Subj. in subordinate clauses \ninstead of the Fut. Perf. as used \nin Lat 255, R. 9. \n\nAphacrtsU 14, 5. \n\nApodosis 339, 1. \n\nAr ^\'\'\xc2\xbb7, 7. \n\nA 340, 2, (b). \n\n13, It 1. \n\nApposition 26 G ; in Gen. with Poss. \nPron \' TO i* tt diiof^/oc) 200, \n2; h or Partitive apposi- \ntion 2G6, 3. \n\nArsis and Thesis 349, 2 ; place of \n349, 3. \n\nArtidt 91 ; 244 sq. ; demons, and rel- \native 247 ; as proper article 244 \nwith common nouns 244, 2 \xe2\x80\x94 5 \nwitli ab>t lis of material \n\nproper u _ . i. o and 7 ; with \n\nthe Adjective and Part used as \nsubstantives 244, 8, 9 ; with ad- \nverbs of time and place, used as \natljeclives 244, lU ; with pro- \nnouns and numerals 246 ; {xa \nT^f reoilca);, o\xc2\xbb ntql Tiva, ol vvv \navdffotnot) 244, 10. 263; with \nevery word or part of speech \n244, 11 ; position 245 ; with nag, \nokog 246, 5 ; with cardinal num- \nbers 246, 9. \n\nArticle omittod with common nouns \n\n\n\n244, E. 8 ; with abstracts 244, R. 4 ; \nwith proper names 244,7; with Adj. \nand participles 244, R. 8 ; with \ndemonstrative pronouns 246, R. 1. \n\nArticle with the subject and predi- \ncate 244, R. 1. \n\nArticle in apposition 244, R. 6. \n\nArticle repeated 245, 2. \n\nArticle in place of the Poss. pro- \nnoun (o 7r\xc2\xabT?j^ instead of ipcq \n71.) 244, 4. \n\nAsper, see Spiritus. \n\nAspirate before another aspirate \nchanged to a smooth 17, 4 ; 21, 3. \n\nAspirates 5, ^^a). \n\nAsyndeton 325. \n\nAtonies 32. \n\nAttic second Dec. 48 ; Attic Redup. \nsee Redup. \n\nAttraction of Gend. 240, 3 ; Numb. \n241, 6 ; with Prep, and Adv. 300, \n4, comp.300,3; with the Inf. 307, \n4. 308, 2; with iogje, 341,3; with \nthe Part. 310, 2; of Modes 327^ ; \nof the relative 332, 6 ; of olog, \noaog, fiXixog, 332, 7 ; inverted \nattraction 332, R. 12 ; with ovdug \nogjig ou; with adverbs of place \n332, R 13; attraction of the \nrelative in position 332, 8; at- \ntraction of the relative in a \nclause subordinate to the adjec- \ntive clause 332, 9 ; attraction of \nthe Case in comparative sen- \ntences introduced by wg, agmg, \niagie 342, R. 3., comp. 344, R. 7. \nand 324, R. 2. \n\nAttribute 239, 2. \n\nAttributive relation of sentences \n262, sq. \n\nAugment, 108, 3 ; 119 sq. and 219 ; \nin compounds 125 and 215, sq. \n\nBlending of two or more interroga- \ntive sentences into one (rig rivoi \nal\'riog iyivexo) 344, R. 7. \n\nBrachylogy 346, 2. \n\n\n\nINDEX OP SUBJECTS. \n\n\n\n692 \n\nBarytones 29, R. 7, (f). \nBucolic Caesura 355. \n\n\n\nCaesura 351. \nCardinals 96, sq. \n\nCases 41; Synt. 268, sq.; Case \nAbsolute: Gen.\' Abs. 312, 3; \nAce. Abs. 312, 5. \n\nCaialecfic verse 352, 2. \n\nCharacteristic of the verb 108, 5 ; \nof the tenses 110 ; pure and im- \npure 142, 2 ; of verbs in /it 170. \n\nCircumjiex accent 29, 4. \n\nClasses of verbs 102. 248. \n\nClauses^ principal and subordinate \n326 ; substantive clauses 328 srj.; \nadjective clauses 331 ; adverbial \nclause 335. \n\nCamparado d "23, R. 6. \n\nCom])arison o. ..., 81 sq.; \n\nDialecta 216 ; of . Lives 84, \n\nR. 4. 216, R. 2; of adverbs 85. \n\nComparative dcjjree 239 ; strength- \nened and more definitely stated \n_\'39; use of \xc2\xbbJ and of the Gen. \n\xe2\x96\xa0with the comparative 323, 2 sq. \n\nComparative without a second mem- \nber of the comparison 823, R, 7.; \na])i)arently used instead of the \npositive 323, li. 7. \n\nComparative i^ and the compar. \nGen. 323 sq. ; compendious com- \nparison 323, R. 6. \n\nComparative subordinate clauses \n342, 343. \n\nComposition of words 236. \n\nCompound wortls 236 sq. \n\nConcessive clauses 340, 7. \n\nConcretes 39. \n\nConditional sentences, see il in the \nGreek Index. \n\nConjugation 107 sq. ; in a> 115 sq. ; \nin pt 108 \xc2\xab]., in the Dialects: \nin w 219, in pt 224. \n\nConjunctions 199, 319. \n\nConsctpience, clauses denoting, with \nitQUf ovy, joivvv, etc. 323, S. \n\n\n\nI \n\n\n\nConsonants 3, 2 ; di>Tsion 5 ; mavs^ \nble at the end of a word 15 ; chan- \nges 1 7 sq. ; metathesis 22 ; doub- \nling 23 ; strengthening of and ad- \ndition 24 ; expulsion 25, 3 ; omis- \nsion 25 ; final consonant of a \npure Greek word 25, 5 ; inter- \nchange of consonants in the dia- \nlects 202 \xe2\x80\x94 204 ; changes of in \nthe dialects, 208. \n\nCoordinate attributive a^jectivet \n264, 2. \n\nCoordinate sentences 319 sq. ; cop- \nulat coordinate sentences (ii \xe2\x80\x94 \ny."\'\' 1, 1, a; negative (oiil, \noi> .y .-1,2; (ot\'/ioyor \xe2\x80\x94 alia xai^ \netc.) 321, 3. adversative coordi- \nnate sentences, (jtip\xe2\x80\x94di) 822, 1 \n\xe2\x80\x94 5; {alio) 322, 6 ; disjunctive \n(ij \xe2\x80\x94 ij, etc.) 323 ; reason, cause \n(/Off) 324, 2; consequence or \ninference (apn, toiVit) 324, 8. \n\nCopula R. 6. \n\nCopula: itr- <\xc2\xabnti\'nros 321. \n\nCorOnis 10, R. 1. \n\nCorrelative pronou n ^ ;i ; i i a\' h . : ; \n\nCrasis 10 8<j.; in tin- l>i.iU. t- _\' >\xe2\x96\xa0 ; \nin relation to the accent ;n. II. \n\nCustomary f iron/, 256, 4 (b). \n\nDative 282 sq. \n\nDative local (where f) 283, 1 : (a) \navroig toi^ Unnoig 283, J \naiQarta, cjolm^ nlt\',&n^ > u <, \netc. 285, R. 2 ; of time (ic^e/. >) \nt^hfi ttpi^a; of the oonditioa \nunder which an>thing happens, \n283, 3. \n\nDative as a penonal object 284 ; in \na local relatioo (ickitker) with \nverbs of nootion {irixftr /u^at \noi^ario) 284, R. 1 ; Dat of com- \nmunion 284, 3 ; with verbs ex- \npressing mutual interrourse, as- \nsociating with, parlicij^ation 284, \n3, (1); with verbs of contend- \ning, approaching, nelding : witi \n\n\n\nINDEX OP SUBJECTS. \n\n\n\n593 \n\n\n\nthe adjectives and adverbs, tiZij- Declension of the substantive 41, 3 ; \noiog, fvavjLog, niXag (f\'/yvg) etc. first Dec. 42\xe2\x80\x9444 ; quantity \'and \n\nDialects 211 ; second \n\n\n\n284, 3, (2) ; with verbs of com- \nman\'! - ng, counselling, \n\ninciii ^ ^, sernng, obey- \n\ning, accompan}\'ing, trusting, with \nthe adjectives and adverbs, axo- \n\n\n\n46 \xe2\x80\x94 48 ; accent 49 ; gen- \n\n\n\naccent 45 \n\nDec. \n\nder 50 ; Dialects 212 ; third Dec. \n\n51 \xe2\x80\x94 69 ; quantity 64; accent 65; \n\ngender 66 ; Dialects 213 ; anoma- \n\n\n\nlov&og, diudoxog, i$\xc2\xbb]$, etc. 284, , lous nouns 67 sq. 214; defective \n3, (3) ; with t-xpresaons of like- nouns 69. 214, K 2. \niieas ayd unlikeness 284, 3, (4) ; Declension of adjectives and partici \nwith expressions denoting to be pies 74\xe2\x80\x9479, see adjectives. \nl^^.(,r.\xe2\x96\xa0\xe2\x96\xa0 \' ...:...\xc2\xbb t .1 . :,jg 284, Declension of pronouns 87 sq. \n3, (.^ , 1, blam- Declension of numerals 99, 5. \n\n\n\ning, reproaching, being angry \nwith, envying 284, 3, (G) ; of \nhelping, averting and being use- \nful 2S4, 3, (7) ; with all verbs \nand adjectives when the action \ntakes place \' honor, advan- \n\ntage or \' aiiiage, etc. of a \n\nperson \\^i a coinmo<li et in- \n\ncammodi) 284, 3, K. 4 ; with \nTerbfl of observing, finding, meet- \nin a person \nj>0!vsession \n\n\n\nDefectives of the third Dec. 69, 73, \n2. 214, R. 2. \n\nDemonstrative pronouns, see Pro- \nnouns. \n\nDenominative verbs 232, 1. \n\nDeponents 102, 3; Passive Depo- " \nncnts 197, S}-n. 252. \n\nDerivation of words 232 sq., of ten- \nses 128. \n\nDtrivatives 231, 2, 4, (b). \n\nDtsiderative verbs 232, Rem. 3. \n\nDiaeresis 4, R. 6 ; in the Dialects \n205, 6 ; metrical diaeresis 351 R. \n\nDialects page 13 ; 202 sq. \n\nDiastole 37, 2. \n\nDifjamma 5, 2, (a) ; 25, 2 ; 200. \n\nDimeter 360. \n\n\n\ning with Bomct^ * \n\n284, 3. (8) ; 1 \n\nwith ttrai and /i/ria&ai 284, 3, \n\n(9); instead of Lat Dat (ali- \n\nquid mihi est hono- ^ "^ 1 \' (9) ; \n\nwhen an action \xe2\x80\xa2 c in \n\nreference to a person 284, 3, \n\n(10);. Dat. 284, 3, (10), Diminutives 2S3, 2, (c). \n\n(d) ; wmu ioaa. ve^^\xe2\x80\xa2 "^\\, 3, Dipody 350, 4. \n\n(11); wiih Terfaal a\xc2\xabi^ s in Diphthongs 4, 3. \n\ni6( and leag instead of vtio with Disjunctive coordinate sentence* \n\nt^ !. 284, 3, (12). 323. \n\nDa ;bc thing, or instrumental Distributive apposition 266, 3. \n\nJ \' ; of the ground or rea- Division of syllables 36. \n\nSOD with verbs denoting tlie state Double consonants 5, 4. \n\nof the \'" > 285, 1, (1); of i)ouW/n<7 of consonants 208, 4. \n\nDual number 41 ; 106 ; with a PI \nverb 241,5; interchanged with \nthe PI. 241, R. 8; Dual verb \nwith a PI. Subj. 241, R. 9 ; Dual \nof the Fem. with the Masc. (tov\' \nTw T\xc2\xab n\'xva) 241, R. 10, (b). \n\n\n\n\' 1113 .iw.i instrument with \n\na and voui^nv 285, 1, \n\nmanner, material, standard, \n\n1 measure 285, 1, (3). \niiii the Inf. 3C7, 2, (b). \nDative with the Part. 310, 2. \nDatict of participle instead of anoth- \ner Case 313, 1, (a). \n\n\n\n(2); \n\nr \nDai.\' \n\n\n\nElision 13 sq. ; in the Dialects 206, \n\n\n\n50* \n\n\n\n694 \n\n\n\nINDEX OF BCBJECTS. \n\n\n\n6 ; elision in respect to the ac- \ncent 31, in. \n\nEllipsis 346, 1 ; of the subject and \nespecially of the Subs. 238, 5 ; \nof the copula tlvui 238, R. 6 \nand 7 ; of the Subs, to which \nthe attribute belongs 2C3 ; of liv \n260, 11. 3. 6, 7 ; of the Protasis \nand Apodosis 340. \n\nEmphasis in sentences 321, 3. \n\nEnclitics 33 sq. ; accented 35. \n\nEnhansLve sentences expressed by \nxa/. Of fiovov, ulku xui 321, 3. \n\nEpicenes 40, R. 5. \n\nEsscntitU words 238, 1. 38, 4. \n\nEtymology 13. \n\nEuphonic Prothesis 16, 10. \n\nExpulsion of consonants 25. \n\nFactitive verbs 232, R. 1 and (c). \n\nFeminine PI. with Sing, verb 241, \nR, 6 ; with the neuter (ul fifia- \nfioXai XvTftjQOf) 241, 2; with a \nNeut (ro yiiuixwy ian kuXi\\) \n241, 2, sq. ; Fern. Dual with the \nMasc.(Toir(u la tixva) 241, R. 10. \n\nFinal clauses 330. \n\nFrequentative verbs 232, R. 2. \n\nFormal words 238, 1. 38, 3. \n\nFormation of words 231 sq. \n\nFuture tense 103 ; Attic 117; Doric \nin aovfjm 154, 3; without a 154, \n\n4 ; in ovftai with mute verbs 154, \n\n5 ; Mid. instead of Act (axot-oj, \naxovffOfiui instead of axotacu) \n154, 1, and 198 ; Synt 255, 3, \n4 ; Fut Inf after verbs of think- \ning, hoping, etc. 257, R. 2. \n\nFuture Perf. 103 ; in Act, form \n154, 6 ; Synt 255, 5 ; instead \nof the simple Fut 255, R. 8 ; \nthe Lat. Fut. Perf., how e.\\- \njn\'ossod ill Crook :?\'>"). R. 9. \n\nGender of the substantive 40 ; first \nDoc. 42 ; second Dec. 50 ; third \nDec. 66 ; of Aiy. and Part 74. \n\n\n\nGender of the adjective, etc. in the \nconst xarii avvtciv 241 ; in gen- \neral statements 241, 2 ; with sev- \neral subjects 242; of the SuperL \nwith Part Gen. 241, 7 ; of the \nrelative pronoun 332. \n\nGenitive, attributive 265 ; used el- \nliptically 263, (b). \n\nGenitive in the objective relation \n270. \n\nGenitive, separative, with verbs of \nremoval, scjiaration, loosing, de- \nsisting, freeing, oiisaing, depriv- \ning, differing from 271, 2, 8 ; \nwith verbs of beginning 271, 4. \n\nGenitive of ori-\'in .tud -unlior, with \nverbs of o. ig pro- \n\nduced from 2 1 3, i \n\nGej\' <metBire<, {aj wi: \n\ny^^ ; \'III. (3^ iSto; olni\' \n\n273, 2. \n\n\' \xe2\x80\xa2\xe2\x80\xa2 of quality 273, 2, (c). \n\n(./< " -\'-\xe2\x80\xa2- \xe2\x80\x94 \xe2\x96\xa0\xe2\x80\xa2\'- -"\xe2\x96\xa0} : and \n\n;, * \'"*. \n\ni,ytlaOai 273, 3, (a) ; in attribu- \ntive rtdation with sub8tantire$t \n\n?"\'^ \xe2\x80\xa2\xe2\x80\xa2\xe2\x96\xa0\'\xe2\x96\xa0\xe2\x80\xa2 i:. .:.... cubstan- \n\nti and ad- \n\nverbs 273, K rith wordf \n\n\xe2\x80\xa2f pard- \n\n\'\'^ \'o ^^ touch, be in connec- \n\ntion with ; of acquiring and at- \ntaining ; of physical and intellec- \ntual contact, of la^in \' >>old of; \nof hasty motion, s: after an \n\nobject 273,3, (b), and R. 7; with \nverbs of entreating and supjili- \ncating 273, R. 6 ; witli t1ii\xc2\xab ad- \nverbs evOVf idv, fit with \nverbs of meeting and approach- \ning 273, 3. R. 9 ; Part Gen. in \npoetry 273, R, 7. \n\nGeniiice of place 273, 4, (a). \n\nGenitive of time 273, 4, \n\nGenitive of material 27^, o, with \nverbs of making, forming 273, 6\xc2\xbb \n\n\n\nINDEX OF SUBJECTS. \n\n\n\n595 \n\n\n\n(a) ; of fulness and want (b) ; of \neating, drinking, tasting, enjoy- \ning, having the enjoyment of \nsomething iutellectuaUy, etc. (c) ; \nof smelling (d) ; of remember- \ning and forgetting ; with expres- \nsions of being acquainted and \nunacquainted with, of experience \nADd inexperience, ability, dex- \nterit)\', of making trial of, with \nverbal adjectives in -ixog, etc. ex- \npressing the idea of dexterity \n(e) ; with words of sensation and \nperception (uxoifir, ux^uuai^ui^ \n\'^oytadui, oa(f(Juiria&ui (f) \n... i R. 19.; with verbs of hear- \ning 273, It 18; with verbs of \nseeing, hearing, experiencing, \n\nwing, \n,..-, ad- \n\n20. \nQt of cause 27 i ; with verbs \n\n..i.tg a desire, longing for \n, / ; care, concern for (b); pain, \ngrief, pity, with adjectives having \na similar meaning, pa \' ly in \n\nex<LiuKitions, with i lions \n\ni^i) ; wlih verbs expi\\~-iiig au- \nger, indignation, envy, admira- \n\xe2\x80\xa2 and blame (d), (e), \niiiUi verbs expressing re- \nj^ iial, revenge, accusing and \ncondemning 274, 2; lov with \nInf. 274, 3, (a) ; with the \n\'^ >\' II\', nalbjgj fitTQiug, w?, \nio>,\', oi\' rui,-, etc. connected \nwith ix^iVf itXiiv, iivai 27-1, 3, \n\n\n\nr CUT in. \n\n\n\nOr/wiitf with verbs of rulin \n\nriority, and inferiority, \n\ntion, with the adjectives ^/x^ur/jj, \n\naKfiaii]g 275, 1. \nGenitive after the comparative 275, \n\n2 ; use of the Gen. and ij with \n\nthe comparative 323, 2 sq. \nGenitive of price 275, 3. \n\n\n\nGenitive with substantives and ad- \njectives 275, B,. 5. \n\nGenitive, double, governed by one \nsubstantive 275, R. 7. \n\nGenitive with the Inf. 307, 2, (a). \n\nGenitive with the Part, 310, 2. . \n\nGenitive absolute 312, 3 ; when the \nsubject is the same as that of the \npredicate 313, 2; with ug after \nddivai^ voelv, etc. 312, R. 12. \n\nGentile nouns 233, 2, (a). \n\nGrave accent 29 ; instead of the \nacute 31. \n\nHeteroclites 59, R. 2; 67, (b) ; 71. \nUtterogeneous substantives 70, B. \nHexameter verse 355. \nHepthemim 355. \nHiatus 8 ; 206, 7. \nHistorical tenses 103, 2; 254, 3. \nHypcrcatalectic verse 352, 2. \nHypodiastole 37. \nHypothetical sentences, see u. \n\nIambic dimeter 367. \n\nIambic monometer 366. \n\nIambic trimeter acatalectic 368. \n\nIambic tetrameter catalectic 369. \n\nIambic verse 365. \n\nImitative verbs 232, 1, (a). \n\nImperative 104, III ; Synt. 258, 1, \n(c) ; use of the Imp. 259, 4 ; \ntliird Pers. Sing. Perf. Mid. or \nPass. 255, R. 6. \n\nImperfect tense 103; analogous to \nverbs in /it 196 ; Synt. 256, 2 \xe2\x80\x94 4. \n\nImpersonal construction, see per- \nsonal construction. \n\nImpersonal verbs 238, R. 2. \n\nInclination, see Enclitic. \n\nIndeclinable nouns 73, 1. \n\nIndicative 104, 1 ; Synt. 258, (a) ; \nPut. with av 260, 2, (1); \nImpf., Plup. and Aor. with aV \n260, 2, (2) ; difference between \nthe Impf., Aor. and Plup. 256; \nPut instead of the Imp. 255, 4 j \n\n\n\n696 \n\n\n\nINDEX OF SUBJECTS. \n\n\n\n\xe2\x96\xa0with oy, e.g. ov nuvatj Xi/oiv ib.; \nInd. of the Hist, tenses with words \nexpressing a wish 259, R. 6; Ind. \nin subordinate sentences, see the \nseparate conjunctions; Ind. in \noral, ohliq. 344, 6. \n\nIndirect form of discourse, see ob- \nlique form. \n\nInfudlive 105, (a) ; Synt, the \nPres. and Aor. Inf. 257, 1, (c) ; \nAor. Pres. and Fut after verbs \nof thinking, etc. 257, R. 2 ; with \n\xc2\xabV 2G0, 2, (5). \n\nJnjinitive 305 ; without the Art 306 ; \nwith verbs of willing and the \ncontrary, etc. 306, 1. (a) ; with \nverbs of thinking, sui\'iif-i" r, \nsaying 306, 1, (b) ; after <\xe2\x96\xa0 \nsions denoting ability, cause, \npower, capacity 306, 1, (c) ; with \nadjectives and substantives, with \nuviii, TiKfVxivat and ylyriadai \nwith a substantive, after avfti^al- \nvd, dth xiiH ^^^ ^^JG Hke, after \nsub.-tantives, adjectives, demon- \nstrative pronouns, after verbs of \ngiving, sending, etc. 306, 1, (d). \n\nJnJinitivCy or Ace. Avith Inf. dilFor- \ncnt from Part. 311 ; Inf., or Ace. \nwith Inf., different from or*, wj, \nthat 329, R. 5 ; in forms express- \ning command or wish 306, R. 11 ; \nin forms expressing indignation \n306, R. 11, c ; with at ycip, \n(l&s 306, R. 11, (d). \n\nInjinitive with Nom., Gen., Dat \nand Ace. 307. \n\nInfinitive with the Art instead of \nthe Inf. without the Art, 308, R. 1. ; \nin Nom., Gen., Dat. and Ace. \n308, 2 ; in exelanuitions and \nquestions implying indignation \n308, R. 2 ; as an adverbial ex- \npression (to vvy (irai and the \nlike) 308, R. 3. \n\nInfinitive Act. instead of tho Pass. \n306, R. 10. \n\n\n\nInjlection 38. \n\n/n/?cc/ion-ending3 of the verb 109 \nsq. ; Remarks on 116 ; of verbi \nin fit 171, 172. \n\nIntensive verbs 232, R. 2. \n\nInterchange of vowels 201 ; omao* \nnants 202\xe2\x80\x94204. \n\nInter: \' /i-marks 37. \n\nInten, J ....\xe2\x96\xa0\xe2\x96\xa0 pronouns, see PrO\' \nnouns. \n\nInterrogative sentences 344 ; modes \nin 344, 6 ; connection with a \nrebtive sentence 344, R. S ; \nchange of a subordinate sentence \ninto a direct interrogative seo- \ntencc (oiar t* noirjautat^ 844, \nR. 6 ; blending of two or more \ninterrogative sentences into one \n(iLg lirog ofrio; ^au) 844, R. 7. \n\nIntransitive verbs 248, (T ^ ^^ as \nTrans, with the Ace. .... ^.- 2 ; \ninstead of the Pass. 249, 8 ; in \nthe Pass. 251, 4, and R. 6. \n\nInterrogative sentence with the Art. \n344, R. 8. \n\nInversion 348, 5. \n\nIota subscript 4, R. 4. \n\nIterative form in axov 221. \n\nLengthening of the vowels 16, 8. 207. \nLenis Spiritus 6. \n\nI . sounds of 2*. \n\nJ. m of sentences 822, 1 \xe2\x80\x94 5. \n\nLitotes 239, R. 8. \n\nLocal substantives 233, 2, (d). \n\nMasculine PI. with Sing, verb 241, \nR. 6 ; connected with the Neut \n(oi TTOJUoi dfiror) 241, 2; Masc \nwith a Neut (i;- \xe2\x80\xa2 \'-" V fan x\xc2\xabr- \nXoi) 241, 1 ; >i with Fern. \n\n241, R. 11. \n\nMctaplasm 67, (c). 72. 214, R. 1. \n\nMetathesis of the liquids 22. 208, \n3 ; of the aspirates 21, 8; verb \n156. \n\nMiddle form 102 ; Sj-nt. 248, (2) ; \n\n\n\nINDEX OP SUBJECTS. \n\n\n\n597 \n\n\n\nwith reflex, sense 250 ; with the \nmeaning to cause to do 250, R. \n2; when an action is performed \nto the advantage or disadvantage \nof the subject 250, R. 3 ; with a \nreflex Pron. 250, R. 3; with a \nsubjective m \' \' \\tively \n250, R. 4 ; WiL_ \xe2\x80\x9e , \xe2\x80\x9e\xe2\x80\x9e ._.e 251. \n\nJdodea 104 ; Synt 258 sq. ; in subor- \ndinate clauses 327^*, 1 ; attraction \nof 327^ ; comp. the separate con- \njunctions, in Greek Index. \n\nMode vowels 111; summary of 11 2 ; \nof verbs in /it 171; in the DiaL \n220. \n\nMovaU*\' fiiwU consonants 15. \n\nMulti \'.\'$ 96, 1, (d). \n\n^ Jib; accumula- \n\nL\xe2\x80\x94 .- - :-^, -s 318, C; apjja- \n\nrent Pleona-sm of 318, 6 \xe2\x80\x94 9. \n\nNeuter of i of persons con- \n\nnected wi y 241,2, \n\nR.3; ri. .. .... .-...g.with \n\nverb, adl 241, 3 ; PI. of \n\npronouns 243, 4 ; PL with Sing, \nverb 241, 4. \n\nN""\'\'\'"\'\' <nii->.tion 344, 2. \n\ni\\ I the change of the \n\nAcL construction of the verb \nwith the Gen. or Dat into the \nP;iss o. g. maitiofiui 251, 4. \n\nJ\\ :ce Case 269; with Cvofiu \n\niaii fioi, ovofta T^fo), with verbs \nof naming 2G9, R. 3 ; Noni. of \nan abstra*\' \'n-t.-aj of a Lat Dat. \n(mihi est i 269, R. 2 ; Nom. \n\ninstead of the Voc. 269, 2 ; in \najjf\'^un xatt oloy xul fiigog 266, \n\'5 ^\'? 4. \n\nA u*e with the Inf 307 ; in- \n\nstead of the Ace. with the Inf. \n307, 4. \n\nNominative with a Part. 310, 3 ; in- \nstead of another Case 313 ; with- \nout a finite verb 313, R. 1. \n\nNumerals 96 sq. 218. \n\n\n\nNuniber 41. 106 ; Synt. 243 ; in the \nconst. xuTct avvsaiv 241 ; with \nverb, adjectives iu T05 riog 241, \n3 ; the number of adjectives \nwhen they are connected with \nseveral subjects 242, 1 ; number \nof verb with several subjects 242, \n2 ; with several subjects disjunc- \ntively connected 242, R. 3 ; num- \nber of the ReL Pron. 332. \n\nObject in a sentence 239, 2. \n\nObjective construction of sentences \n267 sq. \n\nOblique discourse 345 sq. \n\nOmission of consonants 25. \n\nOptative mode 104, 1[. see the Subj. \nS}Tit. ; nature of the Opt 258, 1, \n(b). 259; with \xc2\xabV 260, 2, (4); \nwithout av 260, R. 7 ; in exhor- \ntations 259, R. 1 ; Opt Delib. \n259, 2 ; to express frequent rep- \netition {as often as) 327^, 2; to \nexpress a supposition, uncertain- \nty, possibility, presumption, ad- \nmission 259, 3, (a) ; wish 259, 3, \n(b) ; instead of the Imp. 259, 3, \n(c) ; desire, wish, inclination 259, \n3, (d) ; in direct questions 259, 3, \n(e) ; Opt without uv instead of \nwith \xc2\xabV 260, R. 7 ; Opt in sub- \nordinate clauses, see the separate \nconjunctions; in oi\'atio obliqua \n345, 4. \n\nOratio obliqua 345. \n\nOrdinals 96 sq. \n\nOrgans of speech 3. \n\nParticiple 74 sq. 105, (b) ; Synt \n309 sq. \n\nParticiple as the complement of the \nverb 310 ; Nom., Gen., Dat, Ace. \nof the Part 310, 2 ; after verba \nseutiendi 310, 4, (a) ; verba de- \nclarandi 310, 4, (b) ; verbs de- \nnoting an affection of the mind \n(verba affectuum) 310, 4, (c) ; to \n\n\n\n598 \n\n\n\nINDEX OF SUBJECTS. \n\n\n\nbe satisfied i^ith, to enjoy, be full \n310, 4, (d) ; overlooking, permit- \nting, enduring, persevering, 310, \n4, (e) ; beginning and ceasing \n310, 4, (f) ; to be fortunate, to \nexcel, to be inferior, to do well \nor ill 310, 4, (g) ; after 7r\xc2\xabt()w/i\xc2\xabi, \n7iu()u<Txivu^ofiaL, etc. 310, 4, (}]): \nafter the phrases it is Jit, ustj i^. \netc. 310, 4, (i) ; after i\'xfiv, to be \nin a condition, or stat^, e. g. t/ta \nxTTjaufxtvog 310, 4, (k) ; with \niv\'/xuvbi, ),avx>uyo), diutuut, diu- \nyo), (f.&uva), oi/ofiat, 310, 4, (1). \n\nParticiple different from Inf after \nseveral classes of verbs 311, and \nR \n\nParticiple as the expression of ad- \nverbial suljordli \n\nParticiple with oj^ ..*.. ... ., ^m \n\noJ^if, ^gnfQ, iixr, oia, o\\ov 812, 6, \nR 13. \n\nParticiple with lirui, in-t- al c-f a \nsimple verb 238, K. 5. \n\nParticiple with av 260, 2, (5). \n\nParticipials 105 ; see Inf. and Part \n\nParticijiial construction 309 ; ana- \ncoluthon 813, 1. \n\nParticles 38, R. \n\nParticles expressing purpostf design \n330. \n\nParts of Speech 38. \n\nPassive verb 102; SjTit 248, (3). \n251. \n\nPatr \\:< 233, 2, (b). \n\nPen: verse 856. \n\nPerfect tense 103 ; with <r 181 ; ;re- \nnvapai, etc. 223, 14 ; Subj. and \nOpt. Porf or Plup. Mid. or Pass, \nformed without the aid of an aux- \niliary verb 154, 9 ; Perf and \nPlupf. of verl>s in pt with short- \nened form 193; Perf and Plup. \nanalogous to verbs in pi 193 \xe2\x80\x94 \n195 ; second Perf with Intrans. \nmeaning 141, 4. 249, 2 ; Syut \n255, 2; in the tlurd Pers. Sing. \n\n\n\nImp. Mid. or Pass. 255. A. 6 ; \nwith the signif of the Pre>^ 255, \nR. 5; instead of the Fut. 255, \nR. 7. \n\nPerson of the verb 106 ; with sev- \neral subjects 242; in adjective- \nclauses 332, 2. \n\nP^- \'>-^\xc2\xb0. interchange of in the oraL \n1. 345, R. 6. \n\nPersonal construction, instead of \nthe Impers. with Inf 307, R. 6 \nand 7; with Part. 31" P 3; \nwith oTt, w^ 329, R 7. \n\nPersonal endings 111; view of 11 3 ; \ndifference between endings in \nthe principal and subordinate \ntenses 114 ; of verbs in pt 172; \nDialects 220. \n\n\' mal pronouns 87 \xe2\x80\x94 90. \n\ni ....(ii number 41 ; with the sab- \nstantire in the Gen. 241, R 2; \nPI. subst with Dual verb 241, R \n9 ; PI. of subst in proper names, \nnames of tin\xc2\xbb\'t^\'<i- -\xc2\xbb\xc2\xbb>\'^ \'\xe2\x80\xa2^\xe2\x80\xa2stracts \n243, 3; . ^. 241, \n\nR 12 ; in .lu aidress to one per- \nson 241, R la; the first Pers. \nPL instead of the Sing. 241, R \n12 ; Neut PI. in verbal adjeo* \ntives instead of the Sing. 241, S; \nn. of verbs with cf" nouns \n\nin the Sing. 241, . , .lii sub- \nstantives in the Dual 241, 5; \nTatTfc, Tci^f, /xtira used of one \ni\xc2\xabl \'V ^V 3 ; PL interchanged \nw: ^^A 241, R. 8. \n\nPluralia tantum 73, 2. \n\ni c/ 103. Comp. Per\xc2\xa3 Sj-nL \n\n\xe2\x80\xa2> \n\n1 of words 348. \n\nPosition of ac 261 : article o, ^, to \n245 ; pr ns 300, 6 ; pro* \n\nnonn^s sec tnr M.parate proDOons. \nAdverbs and particles, see die \nseparate adverbs and particles; \nof Ts 321, R 3 ; /iiy and ^\' 522, \nR2. \n\n\n\nINDEX OF SUBJECTS. \n\n\n\n599 \n\n\n\nPositive degrei, see Comparative. \nPossessive pronouns 90. \n\nP? ion of sentences 238. \n\nPregnant construction 300, 3. \n\nPr \xe2\x96\xa0 fj^ 199 ; Sj-nt 286 sq. ; as \n\n. . jS of place 300; Tmesis \n\n300, R. 4 ; in const Praeg. Tit.T- \n\nxuv iv yovvaai) 300, 4 ; with \n\nthe Art, attracted (ol in t^$ uyo- \n\n(fai uy&Qtanoi t(f v/ov) 300, 4 ; \n\nrepeated and omitted 300, 5 ; po- \n\nsitioQ 300, 6. \nPresent teoBe 103 ; Pres. and Impf. \n\nanalogous to verbs in /ut 19G; \n\nS>Tit 255, 1 ; Hist Pres. 255, 1 ; \n\ninstead of the Perf 255, R. 1 ; \n\ninatead of the Fut 255, R. 3. \niVtmiriMf 331, 2. \nPrincipal clauses 326. \nPrincipal tenses 103, 2. 254, 2. \nProclitics " \\ \nPronoun:! : . , Dialects 217; De- \n\nclenAon 87 sq. ; Synt 301\xe2\x80\x94304. \nPronoun^ correlative 94 ; demon- \n\n\xe2\x80\xa2tnuive, Duel. 91 ; Dulects 217, \n\n4. 803, 1 and 2 ; avj6g 803, 3 ; \n\nprospective and rcLros|)ective \n\n804 ; omitted before a relative \n\n831, R. 8. \nPronoun indefinite t<; t\xc2\xab DecL 93. \n\n303, 4 ; position SOS, R. 5. \nPronoun interrogative, ti( Dccl. 93 ; \n\nseo \' \xe2\x80\xa2 " with Art \n\nprv: \nPronoun personal DecL 87. 302; \n\nthird Pera. prospective 304; re- \n\ntra\xc2\xabi>ective 301, 3. \nPronoun jKiNSt\'Ssive 90 ; Dialects \n\n217, 3. \nPronoun nM.\'lpnxal Decl. 89. \n\'* \'exive Decl. 88. 302, 2 ; \n\n-. instead of the first \n\nand second 302, 8 ; instead of \n\nthe reciprocal 302, R. 7. \nPronunciation 29, 86 ; of letters 3. \nPurpose, particles denoting 330, 1. \n\n\n\nProportionals 96, 1, (e). \nProtasis 339. \n\nProthesis Euphonic 16, 10. 207, 8. \nPunctual ion-maiYks 37. \n\nQuantity 27 sq. ; in Dialects 209; \nfirst Dec. 45, (a) ; third Dec. 64 \n\nRedundant nouns 70. \n\nReduplication 108, 4. 123, 219; in \nsec. Aor. 219, 7 ; Att in Perf. \nand PIup. 124 ; second Aor. 124; \nR. 2 ; in compound words 125 \nsq. ; as strengthening of the stem \n163. \n\nReflexive verbs 102 ; Synt 248, (2). \n\nReflexive pronouns 88. \n\nRelation of the Attrib. Adj. 264, 2. \n\nRelative construction changed to the \nDemonstrative 334, 1. \n\nRelative pronoun Decl. 92; Synt \n331 sq. ; instead of the demons. \n331, R. 1; agreement of gender \nand number 332 ; Case (attrac- \ntion) 332, 6 ; attraction with \nolo,\', uaog, iiXlxog 332, 7 ; inverse \nattraction 332, R. 11 ; with ovdelg \nogng ov 332, R. 12; with ad- \nverbs of place 332, R. 13 ; at- \ntraction in position 332, 8 ; rela- \ntive pronoun of an intermediate \nclause attracted 332, 9 ; construc- \ntion of the relative pronoun 333 ; \nrel. pron. changed to a demons. \nor pcrs. 334, 1 ; rel. pron. in- \nstead of a demonstrative 334, 3. \n\nRelative clause, see adjective clause. \n\nReciprocal pronouns 89. \n\nReciprocal verbs 248, R. 1. \n\nResolution of contract verbs 222. \n\nRestriction of sentences 322, 1 \xe2\x80\x94 5. \n\nRhythm 349. \n\nRoots 231, 2. \n\nScheme, see ayvtia in Greek Index. \n\nSentences 238, 1. \n\nSentences denoting effect or re- \n\n\n\n600 \n\n\n\nINDEX OF SUBJECTS. \n\n\n\nsuit with uQu^ ovVf Tolvvv, etc. \n324, 3. \n\nSequence of tenses 327*. \n\nSkortening of the vowels 16, 4. \n207,4. \n\nSingular verb with Masc. or Fcm. \nPi. 241, R. 6 ; with Neut PI. \'J 11, \n4 ; with several common nouns \nin PI. 242, R. 2. \n\nSingular of substantives 243, 1 ; \nchanged to the PI. 241, R. 12; \nSing. Imp. e. g. tXni in an ad- \ndress to several 241, R. 13. \n\nSpiritus Lcn. and Asp. C. \n\nStem of the verb 108, 1 ; pure and \nimpure 138; strengthening the \nconsonant and prolonging the \nstem-vowel 139. \n\nStems 231, 4, (a). \n\nStrengthening of the vowels 16, 1 ; \nconsonants 24 ; stem of impure \nverbs 139. \n\nSubject 238, 2 ; cliange of the at - \ntivo construct into tlie Paas^ e. g. \nnidjiiofiai from Tuarivot tiW \n251, 4 ; ellipses of 238, 5. \n\nSubjunctive !NIode 104, II. Perf \nand Pip. Mid. or Pass, without \nan auxiliary verb 154, 9 ; Subj. \nand Opt. Act. and Mid. of verbs \nin Vfit without au.viliar)\' verb \n176,5. Sj-nt 258, 1, (b). 259; \nSubj. Aor. instead of Fut Perf \nof Latin 255, R. 9. \n\nSubjunctive with uy 260, 2, (3 ) ; \n(with and without av) instead of \nthe Fut, Ind. 259, R. 4; Subj. \nhortative 259, 1 (a) ; deUbera- \nt-vo 259, 1, (b). 260, 2, S, (b) ; \nSi\'bj. to den. indefinite frequen- \ncy {as fljlcn as) 327\'\', 2, 333, 3 ; in \ncomparisons 333, R. 2 ; with ftij \ninstead of the Imp. 259, 5 ; in \nsul)ordinate clauses, see the ^o]^- \narate conjunctions ; in Or. oUi ; \no-t o. 5. \n\n<Sii^r(fina/\xc2\xa3 sentences 326 sq.; class- \n\n\n\nes 326, 3 ; characteristics 326, R. \n\n4 ; subordinate sentences ( \' 1 \n\ninto direct interrogative =^ciii-ii- \n\nces 344, R. 6. \nSubstantive 39 sq. ; Gen. 40 ; Numb., \n\nCase and Dec. 41 ; Dec. L 42 \n\nsq. ; Dec. IL 46 sq. ; Dec. IIL \n\n51 sq. \nSubstantive 39 sq. ; number 242. \nSubstantive instead of adjective 264, \n\nR. 3. \nSubstantive clauses expretnngdesign, \n\naim, with ci^*, on^, 7wa, etc \n\n\n\nHv (\xe2\x80\xa2lau.\'i<\'5 with *T<, a\xc2\xbb,\\ that \n\n\n\n329. \n\n\n\n\xc2\xbb\xe2\x80\xa2! _ . : \'\xe2\x80\xa2 exact (leuiuuon \n\nof. - \xe2\x80\xa2, li. .; ; Gend. with the \nPart. Gen 241, 7. \nSyllmUeM^ d \n\n^\' \xe2\x96\xa0 \xe2\x96\xa0\xe2\x80\xa2- -is 1:;. i \xe2\x96\xa0 - \xe2\x96\xa0\xe2\x96\xa0. 5. \n\n\xe2\x96\xa0 16, 8. ; ill \xc2\xbbul<;Lin- \n\ntives 55, 2 ; in verbs 155. \nSjfntax 238 sq. \n\nTenses of the yerb IDS ; of themb- \nonlinate modes 257; denvatioii \n1 28 ; formatioQ of iIm secondaiy \ntenses, use of the same in con- \nnection with the primary 141 ; \nTenses primary and Sec 103, R. \n141. \n\nTenses. *5vnfAx ?\'\'\xc2\xbb4 \xe2\x80\xa2 <-i^.iii*\xc2\xbbiic\xc2\xab of \nin si: \n\nTVfUtf-fomi : verbs in m 127; \n\npure verb.- iL".\xc2\xab; mute 142 sq. ; \nliquid 14P : vitIk \\n m 17*: In \nDialects . \n\nTVfM^-characteristic, see cbarscicr> \nistic. \n\n7Vn.<^<ndings 110. \n\nTense^tQXD. 110, 2. \n\nT\' mt of the verb 138, S. \n\n^een Gen. and \nDat of time, 27S, R. 13. \n\n\n\nINDEX OF SUBJECTS. \n\n\n\n60i \n\n\n\nDnesis of Prepositions 300, R. 4. \nTrarmtice verbs 248, (a) (\xc2\xab) ; with \n\nIntrans. or Reflex, signlf. (jQenoj \n\nh \xe2\x96\xa0 \' -\xe2\x80\xa2 - - - 249, 1, 2; \n\n\\\\ . \'.- lo do 249, \n\nR. 3. \nTV\' from direct discourse to \n\niiiuir<< I and vice versa 345, R. 6. \n\nTrnn\'TJOsiUon of the attributive \n\n\'\'live and Subs. (o\xc2\xbb /^r^aro^ \n\nTuir utd{iiotitiv instead of o\xc2\xbb x^^r \n\nIff \' \'\'; ** jnoi) 264, R. 5. \nTr, \n\nTrochaic verse 361. \nTrochaic moii 862. \n\nTn \xe2\x80\xa2 \' - \xe2\x80\xa2\xe2\x80\xa2- \n\n\n\n..J. \n\n\n\nler catalectic 364. \n\n\n\nVariable vowels 16,6; In the stem \nof impure verbs 140 ; change of \nII into 01 140. 4 ; of ? imo o \n231, 6. \n\nVerb 102 sq. 219 \xc2\xa74.; divu^on of \nV. \'^18 in M acroni\'" \' \xe2\x80\xa2 \xe2\x96\xa0 \'\' \xe2\x96\xa0 char- \n. ri\xc2\xabtic 127 ; 127, \n\nK.; pure verbA (and contract) \nI jt \xe2\x80\x94 137; Peris|>oinfna 127, R; \niiM;.urt3 127. 138\xe2\x80\x94141 ; mute \nur. 142\xe2\x80\x94148; licjuid 127. 149 \n\xe2\x80\x94169 ; special peculiarities of \n\n\n\nverbs (purvj and impure) 154; \nanomalous in oj 157 sq. ; in ^ui 168 \nsq. ; in w whicli in certain tenses \nare analogous to verbs in (it, : sec- \nond Aor. Act. and Md. 191 sq. ; in \nDialects 227; Perf. and Plup. \n193\xe2\x80\x94195; in Dialects 228; \nPres. and Impf. 196 ; verbs De- \nnom.. Frequent., Imitat, Intens., \nFact, Desid. 232. \n\nVerbs active, with Mid. Fut. 198 ; \nthose which have both an active \nand middle form for the Fut. \n198, R. \n\nVerb Act Trans., Reflex., Recip., \nPass., Intrans., Mid. 248\xe2\x80\x94251. \n\nVerb Jinitum and injinitum 105, R. \n\nVerbal adjectives in to?, and xioq \n234. 1, (i) ; PI. instead of Sing. \n241, 3 ; Construction 284, 3, (12). \n\nVerb characteristic 108, 5. \n\nVersification 349. \n\nVoweU 4 ; cluinge 8 \xe2\x80\x94 16 ; weaken- \ning or attenuation of 16, 2 ; in- \nterchange in the Dialects 201; \nchange m the Dialects 205\xe2\x80\x94207. \n\nWeakening of vowels 16, 2. \n\nZeugma 346, 3. \n\n\n\n61 \n\n\n\nII. GREEK LXDEX. \n\n\n\nAbbiikviatioxs. .\\ \nDfired ; c, a. "\'\'\'/\' \'\'\xe2\x96\xa0\xe2\x96\xa0\' "\xe2\x96\xa0 \nmf. with tfu \nl)c<-. J" \nintr, iuh \ntrans, tranailive. \n\n\n\n\' nh; Bi \n\n\n\nmp. compare, \n\nI\' *^ II-, tr^ f^f^ \n\n\n\n: C \n\n\n\nA pure 43, 1, (a) ; a priv., \ncoll., int. 2.")6. ll.3,(b); \na eaph. 16, 10. \n\na.ya^6i (-ouip. 84. 1 \n\nay(liK\\f(Tiiou V. \n1,(1); r. i,.u \n\n(c). \n\nhyavaicrtti\' i. u. ^-.i. t, \n\n(1); 0. part. 310, 4, (c). \niiyarruy c. a and d. 274, \n\nn. 1; c. d. 283, 1,(1); \n\nr. i)art. 310, 4, (c). \niyacrH^ai c. ; \'\'1 flCC. \n\n12T.\'J, H. :. . riyot \n\n274, 1, un.l K. 2. \niyyiKKfiy c. Ii\xc2\xbbf an. I \n\n311, 10. \nAy>/AXc 7 \n\nand i\' \nAy* l; Ui ^\xe2\x96\xa0 \n\np. _ll, H. 1 . \n\niyyotiv c. part, 310. 4, (a). \n\n:::). 3. \n\n\\{. 2. \nA-) \\\xc2\xbb I". }r. 27.\'i. K. 9. \nt-,^1\', ir/VA, 312. K m \n\n\n\naSiKf \xc2\xabV r, a. 27y, I ; c. two \naoo.280,2; c part "in \n\notjStt\'r i1 " " T\\. 2. \n\n"A^il)tt\xe2\x80\xa2S <! .7. \n\nal soo f \xc2\xbb ; ai ydp c. inf. \n\n30i>. R. 11, (d). \naiBfTadcu c. a. 279. \n\npart. i\\nd inf. 311. 14. \nBi\'5v)ros oonip. 82. 1. (d). \nai5a>s dec. 60, (b). \n\n\n\n\n\n\nc. g. \xc2\xabod a. \n^. >. .> iw 19; c. pwt. \n310, 4. (a). \niifffftw \' 5. \n\ncJ<rxr<J< il. \n\n<uV. I. 279, 5; \n\nt .. (1); cpart. \n\nn ;ll, 14. \n\niMua.2^, S. \njjuc. 1\' 274. 2. \n\n\n\ni;. 7. \n\n\n\nout Kcd in a \xc2\xabrnpt .125. \n\n\n\n4: r/&AAo. AXA\' \n\n\n\n\n\n\nK. 1. \n\n(! \n\nc inl , 1. \n\niucparfii c. p. 27."). 1 \n\xe2\x80\xa2 . V 82. 1. \\v\\. \n\nOil. -273,6,(0 \n\nand U. 19 \niXyirv c. d. 2>:>. 1. (1). \noAYeivifj com p. 84. 4. \n\n\n\niXif c. jr. 27.1. ."\xc2\xbb. ii\xc2\xab^ \naA^<rir\xc2\xabr.)\xc2\xabu c. p 8 h\xc2\xbb. 4. (h). \ncLKKd. 322. 6; in a .jucs- \n\ntion i6. ; oAAq -^of .\xe2\x96\xa0i24, \n\nR. 1. \n\n\n\n275,3. \nAxx4\\\xc2\xabfr dec. t-^f . um: uI \n\n3U2, R 7. \n&\\Aa or &XAo rt ^ ellipti* \n\ncal346, 2. (d). \niWtues c. p. 271, \n&AAor &AAor (IXAc \n\n^v) with aaotbi \n\n266,3. \niXXo Ti 4 ftod iAAtf Ti in \n\n\xe2\x80\xa2 qaeatkm : momm 344, \n\n\'\xe2\x96\xa0 :). \n\n\xe2\x80\xa2ate. \xc2\xa3-271.3. \n&Ai di MdB. 1 \n\noXmMmi i. 2. \n\nSXwr <i \n\n(*). \nifta c d. \n\nI. art ,11 . \n\npan \nAfi\xc2\xabiB\xc2\xab\xc2\xab\xc2\xbb, -(^Oai i. g. 27^ \n\n3 ; r. a. 279, 1. \nAfi\xc2\xabinrr S4, 1. \n\n\n\n.1- \xe2\x80\xa2 1 \n\n\n\nR-6, \n\n\n\n\n\n\nGREEK INDEX.\' \n\n\n\n603 \n\n\n\n\nd. in a pregnant signif. \ni 300, 3, (a). \n\niM ;oo, R. 1. \n\nifd^ifyyuyau C two a. \n\n2\xc2\xbbLt. 3. \n4^\xc2\xbbf^irT\xc2\xabii\' c.d. 284,3, (2). \nifiip^ \xe2\x80\xa2! u. \n\nay- pri K. 3, (b). \n\n&*\' 2G0; c. ind. fut. 260, \n(1 j ; ind. imjif., plup. \nid aor. \'JCtii. <2) ainl \n\n.7;\' \noi)t. 1\' i , . ;. \n\n<J, (5); po- \n\nf \xe2\x96\xa0\'\xe2\x96\xa0\xe2\x96\xa0\' 11 of \n\nif Its 260, \n\ntfj\' >pt. \n\ni I\'ret. \n\n1 ..,. .v P \xc2\xab \n\nuikI 6. \nA*" \n\nitra \n\niya IIUI. 01 4*^aJTroi 31, \n\nU. 3 \n&>^ (irrp. 290, 1 \nLmfidJ^Xt^bmi c iuf. 306, \n\n1. fal. \nArc rm( ri 278, 4. \n\niwoMa-f-ja^ttf V. u. 279, 3. \niafatufufiiaKtir c. two a. \n\n2W. 3. \niro^ dci.". J i . , , \nai^^fur c. d. 2H4, 3, (5). \ndrrvMTiil^Mfr C. g. 273, 5, \n\nttr\xc2\xabv c. (^. 271, 3. \n\n?""\'^"\'-*ff \xe2\x80\xa2\xe2\x80\xa2 " 275, 1. \n\nf. 311, 15; \n\xe2\x80\xa2). \nif* \n\n\n\na.... ,\' 1. \n\nii.T , 280.3. \n\narytX*o^ai V. g. 273, 3, \n\nayri i.r\xc2\xbb\xc2\xbbp 2\xc2\xab7 I. \n\nijT -\xc2\xbb). \n\niia \xc2\xab -\xc2\xab3, \n\n3,(1.). \nAktioi and Oi r. -73. \n\nK. y. \n\n\n\novfitfyewi/ dec. 48. \n\nSl^ios (Ifii c. inf. 307, E. 6 \n\ni^toy, a^t\'ws, a^iovy, -ova-- \n\n^ai c. g. 275, 3 ; &|iJs \n\nTir*^? fifil Tivi 2S4, 3, \n, (10) (b). \n\no^toiV c. inf. 306, 1, (a). \naxayopfveiy (tS, Koicws) C. \n\na. 279, 2; c. inf. 306, 1, \n\n(a). \ndircuSfin-os C. g. 273. 5, (e). \niiTcuTfiy c. two a. 280, 3. \niivaWdTruy C. g. 271, 2 j \n\n-cadcu c. paru 310, 4, \n\n(f). \nATovrat- c. g. 273, R, 9 ; \n\ni.3. (1). \n"- " g. 27.3, R. 19; \n\n.-.d. 284,3, (3). \nQFiiWtrK c. part. 310, 4, (e). \n&v<ipos c. g. 273, 5, (e). \nar<ifwt Ix*"\' c. g. 273, 5, \n\ny, a\xc2\xab-\xc2\xabx\xc2\xabri^(u C. g- \n\n&\xc2\xab inf. 306, l,(b). \n\nawKovSf -ii, -otJr dec. 77. \n\n"\' \xe2\x80\xa2 82,l,(b). \n\nar "*. I i with \n\nins. ^1/ \n\nwith the art. ins. ^v \n\n( oi A V ^ r r " f \n\n4, (u). \niwh -ri.-\xc2\xaba300, R. 2. \nA* ai c. g. 273, \n\nA* oi c. g. 275, 3. \n\navo^i6fi^K*iy c. a. 379, 3. \nAroXo^iy c. g. 273, 5, (c). \nAvoAoycurdcu c. d. 284, 3, \n\n*A-r6\\Ku\'y dec. .M, 4, 1, \nR. 1. \n\nu^ r.ti^,in,<)eu c. g. 273, \n\nAwov^i II. 1. \n\n,kwofHi. \xe2\x80\x9e -73, 5,Jb). \n\niMtHTTtfuiy c. g. 271, 2; \nTi\xc2\xbb^ Ti, riy6s rt, Tiy6s \nriya 2K(\xc2\xbb. .\'i. and R. 3. \n\nir -.273.IM6. \n\na\xc2\xbb-- . . \xe2\x80\xa2 c. g. 279, \n\nR. .; \n\niwixpcui\'ni\' >-\xe2\x96\xa0. ji.u I. and inf. \n\n311, 11. \ninhjHvytiy c. a. 279, 3. \n\n\n\noTrpeTTws c. d. 284, 3, (5). \naTTTco-^at c. g. 273, 3, (b). \n&pa 324, 3. \' \xe2\x80\xa2 ^ ^ \n\nopa ins. apa 324, R. 5. \n\na/)a interrogative 344, 5. \n\n, (b). \n\napea-Keiv riva 279, 1 ; op- \neoTKca^ai c. d. 284. 3, \n(5); c. dat. of the in- \nstrument 285, 1, (1). \n\napriyeiv c. d. 284, 3, (7). \n\n"Apris dec. 59, R. 2. \n\n&pi<TTOS 84, 1. \n\'Api(TTO(f)dyT}s dec. 59, R. 2. \napK\xe2\x82\xac7(Triai c. d. 285, 1, (1). \napix6TTfiv c. d. 284, 3, (5). \napyi7(rdai c. inf. 306, l,(b). \napy6s 55, R. 3. \nap^dfifvoi a,ir6 riyos, par\' \n\nticularly 312, R. 3. \nipX*\'"* ^<^ ^^V\'"> c. g. 271, \n\n4; to rule, c. g. 275, 1. \n&pXfO\'\'^a* c. g. 271, 4 ; c. \n\npart. 310,4, (f); c.part. \n\nand inf. 311, 16. \napxoixfyos, in the berjin- \n\nuini/, originally, 312, \n\nR.3. \nafff^ety c. a. 279. 1. \nauTKov, a(TK6p.T}y 221. \n&(Tpi(yos tonip. 82, R. 6. \nicaa, aaaa 93. \na<TTi\\p dec. 55, R. 3. \naaTpcLTTTUv c. a. 278, 3. \n&,ffTv dec. 03. \noTcu ins. vrai 144, R. 1. \ndrap 322, 7. \narc c. part. 312, R. 13. \nSLTtpos 10, R. 2. \n"ATAa Voc. 53, R. 2. \nVTo ins. vTo 144, R. 1. \nOTpf\'/iafs) 25, 4, (c). \nixTo and otto 93. \nai>, aurdp 322, 7. \nawTiVa witli part. 312., R.6. \nairrcis dec. 91 ; Dial. 207, \n\n4, (c). \na{n6s u.se 302, 4; 303, \n\n3 ; with the art. 246, \n\n3, 8. \nainos in avrois \'ittttois, to- \n\nqtther with the horses etc. \n\'2S3, 2, (a) ; 6 uvtSs c. \n\nd. 284. 3, (4). \naOroD dec. 88 ; use 302, 2. \na(paipe7(r^ai c. two a. and \nTivct Tiuos, riv6s Ti 280, \n3, and R. 3. \n\n\n\n604 \n\n\n\nGBEEK INDEX. \n\n\n\nii<f>^oi/os comp. 82, R. 6. \ni.\'pUuai, -Ua^ai c g. 271, 2, \n&.(pt/(D(s} 25, 4, (c). \n&X^e<TSrai c. d. 285, 1,(1); \nc. part. 310, 4, (c). \n\nB cuph. 24, 2. \n\nfiaiyctf TToSa and the like \n\n279, K. 5. \n\nfiapfus (pep f IV C. d. 285, \n( 1 ) ; ini Tivi and c. a. \n28.5, R. 1. [(c). \n\nBapvvfCT^ai 0. part. 310, 4. \n\nBaoriKtviiv c j;. 275, 1. \n\n^turiKfit dec. 57, 2. \n\nfiatTKaipfiv c. d. and a. \n284,3, (I.). \n\nBdrTfw 212, 3. \n\nBoC 97, 2. \n\nfifATaros 84, 1, \n\n$(Krtpoi 84. 1 . \n\n^fknaTos, ^fKriuv 84, 1. \n\n^Kaimiv c. a. 279, 1. \n\nfi\\dirT(iv fitydKa, \xc2\xab\'<\xe2\x80\xa2 f a. \n\n280, R. 1. \nfikfiruv c. a. 278, ;J. \n/3o7jd\xc2\xab:j/ c. d. 284, 3, (7). \nfiop{>us Dec. 44, R. 2. \nfiovKfi c. sul>j. 259, 1, (b). \n/3ouA\xe2\x82\xac(r^ouc.inf.306,l, (a). \nfiovKtvfffdai c. inf. 306. 1. \n\n(a) ; r. Sitcdj and ind. \n\nfut. 330. 6. \n$ovs dec. 57, 2. \n/8p\xc2\xabTai dec. 61, R. 1. \nfipldfiy c. p. 273. 5, (h). \nfipinova^cu c. d. 284, 3, (6). \n\nr<\xc2\xa3Aa dec. 54. (c). \nydKus doc. 212, 7. \n7{{p 324, 2 ; in an answer \n\n344, 7. \n\xe2\x80\xa2ya<rri\\p dec. 55. 2. \n7\xc2\xab\' 317, 2 ; in an answer \n\n344, 7. \n7\xc2\xab\\ai\' c. a. 278. 3. \n7<\'Aa>s dec. 71. B, (c). \nytfieiv c. g. 273, 5, (b). \nytvvav, jxiraitem esse 255, \n\nR. 1. \nydvos dec. 61 (b). \nyf pants comp. 82, I, (c). \nytpas dec. 54, R. 4. \nyfvay^ yfvtal^ai c. g. 273, \n\n5. (c). \nyrjpas dec. 54, R. 4. \nyiyvftr^ai syncopated, \n\n155, 2 ; witli the sense \n\n\n\nof the Pres. 255, R. 1 ; \n\nc. g. orig. 273, 1 ; c. g. \n\nposses. 273, 2 ; c. g. \n\npartit. 273, 3, (a) ; c.d. \n\n284,3, (9). \nyiyvfrai fioi ri fiovKofifyoy, \n\niK-Kotifvw 284, 3.10, (c j ; \n\nyiyvfrai and an ab.\'^t^act \n\nsubstantive with an inf. \n\n306, 1, (d). \nyiypuxTKifivc. g. 273. R. 20: \n\nTi Tivi 285, 1, (3); c. \n\n]\xe2\x96\xa0 irt. 310. 4. (a);c. inf \n\n;i:i.l part. 311, 4. \nyiyvdxjKu c. \xc2\xbbr and gen. \n\nabs. 312. R. 12. \nyiy ywcKu ins. tyvutua 255. \n\nR. 1. \nyXiix^^y dec. 56, R. 1. \nyKix*<r^<u c. g. 273. 3, (b). \ny6yv dec. 54. (c) ; 68, 1. \nypavi dec. 57, 2. \nypJupta^at c. g. 274, 2. \nyufu^6s c. g. 27 1 , 3. \nyvyfi dec. 68, 2. \n\nA cnnhon. 24. 2. \n\n\xc2\xabMp Voc. 53, 4, (1) (a). \n\n8ai 315, 7. \n\nScdtadtu c. two ace. 280, 3. \n\nSd. \xe2\x96\xa0 \xe2\x80\xa2\' . 70 B. \n\n\xc2\xaba (b). \n\n3c o22. ill a <{Ur<\xc2\xabtiun R. 6. \n\n5\xc2\xab sulbx l>-i". T =111.1 Iv 1 : \naficr a \n\nSt? c. _ \n\nand dat. 279, K. 4 ; c. \n\ninf. 306, 1. (d); c. d. \n\nand ace. c. iuf. 307, \n\nR. 3. \nfiei a\' iwws 330. R. 4. \nSfucyvvcu c part. 310. 4, \n\n(b) ; c. part, and inf. \n\n311, 11. \nSflva dec. 93, R. 2. \nSfii\'6s c. inf. 306, I (c), \nSftffcu c. a, 279, 5. \nS(7(Tdcu c. g. 273, 5, (b) ; \n\ne. inf 306. 1. (a). \nBffuis e. g. 208. R. \nStvSpos doc. 72. (a). \nSrxaj dec. 61, (a). \nStpKfcr^au c. a, 27S, 3. \nSanro^fiy C. g. 275. (1). \nS\xc2\xabnr6Tt}S dec. 45, 6. \nSfiifty c. a. 278. 2. \nSfVTfpos c. g. 275, 2. \n\n\n\nifX^a^cu c. two ace. 280, \n4 ; Tiyl TI 284, R. 4. \n\nM) 95, (b); 315, 1.2. \n\n8^\xe2\x82\xacr315, 5. \n\nSrjKoy (lycu, iroifiy with \npart. 310, 4, (b) ; ir,K6s \ntlfu woiuy T< 310, R. 3. \n\niri\\6s (ifu Sri 329, R. 4. \n\niijKovy c. g. and a. 273, \nR. 20 ; c. part. 310, 4. \n(b) ; c. inf. and part. \n\n311, 12. \nAftfiip-np dec. 55. 2. \nArifiociytyyif dcc. 59. R. 2. \nHwoTt 95, (b). \nHrou^fy 315, 6. \n\nirira 315. 3. \n\n8u\xc2\xa3l\' \n\nJii \xc2\xbb^ . jL 1- \n\nSidytu^ c. part. 310, 4, ( I ). \n\n8ia7f7i^(rdcu c. part. 310, \n\n4.(1). \n8ia8\xc2\xabx\xc2\xabo\'^ai, 8i4(8ox^~ \n\nt^X\'h ^ (1- 284. 3 \n8ui8i8^rcu c. g. 273, .1 \n8tf(8oxof d d. .i,^^ \n\n3. (b) (3). \n\n8uup<tj\' c. tMu ace. 280, 3. \n8tair(<o\'i^ai r^r yrmfjoi^ \n\nwith ^f and gen. aba. \n\n312, R 12. \n8iaA(7\xc2\xabri^cu c d. 284, 3, \n\n(\xc2\xbb)\xe2\x80\xa2 \n8iaAnrwr xp^*^ 312, R. 3. \n8iaAAiiTT\xc2\xabu\' c pan. 310, \n\n4.(f). \n8<AAAarT<u\xc2\xbb, -Arrfcbtu C \n\nd. 284, 3. (1). \n8iafi\xc2\xab//3\xc2\xabrdaj c. g. 275 "^ \n8uu\'\xc2\xabV<c e. two ace. 2 ^ \nStarcMur^tu c. 8rwr c. : : . \n\nfuu 330. 6 : cits ;i: J \n\ng. aba. 312. R. 12. \n8iarp((-rrctf\'^ai c. inf. 3U6, \n\nl.(c). \nSurrcXcIr c part. 310, 4, \n\n(b). \nlia^p*tw c g. 271. 2. \nIti^popos e.g. 271,3; cd. \n\n284. 3, (4). \nitdpmws c. d. 284. 3. (4). \n\nBuixp^^*^ ^- d- \'^^ *<^ \n\n2^5. 1, (2). \nSiSdaKttr c. two acc. 280^ \n\n3; c. inf. 306, 1, (c . \nSiSoMi c g. partit. 273 \n\nS, (b) ; c. g. price, 27a< \n\n3. \n\n\n\nGREEK INDEX. \n\n\n\n605 \n\n\n\n8u\'x\xc2\xab\'\xc2\xbb\'C- g-271, 2. \n8u(2C(iv <". p. 274. 2; 5t- \n\nicoC\xc2\xab<^^aiC.d.284,3,(2). \nSiKouis (Ifu c. inf^personal \n\nins. iijctu6y ierri c. a. \n\nand inf. 307, K. 6. \niiKcuovy c. inf. 306, 1, (a). \niiKTjy c. g. 288. 11. \nSiof>i(fiy c. g. 271, 2. \n8i:yT\xc2\xab ^<e on. \nSi\'xa \'\xe2\x96\xa0 i^- 271, 3. \n6i\\la and Ji\'ifoi 70, B. \n8jC>> c. g. 274, 1. \niiu\'KfUf c. g. 274. 2. \n\n8jk*;;\' \xc2\xab\xe2\x80\xa2. ill\'\' 1- (\xc2\xab\') ; \n\nr/\'i\'/i. I"-: 1^ 7. \n\n5<iuw dec. 54. (c) and 68, 3. \niopuipop\xc2\xab7y c. &. 279, 1. \n5pa\xc2\xbb\xc2\xabT\xc2\xabw\xc2\xabiJ\' c. a. 279, 3. \nipdrr*a^at c g. 273, 3, \n\nJui\'offda* c. a. 279, 6 ; c. \n\ni- - l,(c). \nJura <\xe2\x80\xa2 i"f- 306, 1, \n\n(c) ; ; \' >n\xc2\xab. 8i/va- \n\nT^r ^t>.. \xe2\x80\xa2 ""^ iiif- \n\n307, R. 6. \ntvc dec. 99, 5 he \n\nSubst. in ill -*1. \n\nR. 10. \n9ut in <;ition, 236, \n\nR.3. ,h .;). \nBi/fx*/\'**^\'\'***\' *^\' *\xe2\x96\xa0 2<9, 5j \n. c.d. 285, 1, (j). \nB(t>p\xc2\xabap, QratU 278, R. 2. \n8u \xe2\x80\xa2 -\'y* Ti and Tiy<\xc2\xa3 \n\n7 . K. 2. \n\nAttpitifS dec. 57, R. 2. \n\n\xe2\x80\xa2E5y c. inf. SOfr, 1, (a). \n4^ cor \xe2\x96\xa0 2, II. (\xc2\xbb\xe2\x80\xa2); \n\nleAffA i44. 4 ; iky \n\n8^ins.ifiy8\xc2\xab/i^ 340.4; \n\n/Av Kol ih. 7. \nidyrt \xe2\x80\x94 idyrf 323, I. \nfo^ dec. 56, R. 2. \n^crroj, toTo ins. ii\xc2\xbb^\xc2\xab*\xc2\xbb 1>" \n\nTO, orro 220, 13. \nia. \xe2\x80\xa2 88; use 302,2. \n\nirr^ittp c. g. 273, R. 9 ; \n\nc.d. 284, 3, (2). \n^yyiJt c. g. 273, R. 9 ; C \n\n4^. g. 274, 2;c.d. \n\n284, 3, (6). \n^yifpoT^r c. g. 275, 1. \n|yx*^w\xc2\xbb dec. 63, R. 5. \n\n\n\n^w dec. 87 ; use, 302, 1. \n\neyurye 95, (a). \n\n\xe2\x82\xac^os fr jm eiis 215, R. \n\niStfKfiy c. inf. 306, 1, (a). \n\nc( ins. 7j aug. 122, 3. \n\n\xe2\x82\xac1 ins. redup. 123, 3. \n\nei II. Pers. ins. tj 116, 11. \n\n\xe2\x82\xact cons. 339. \n\nti concessive 340, 7 5 in \n\nwishes 259, 3, (b). \nCI an, whether 344, 5, (ij. \n(l yap 259, 3, (b). \nei 5\' &ye 340, 3. \nfl Sf ellipt., 340, 3 ; et 5c \nins. ct 5c fjL-f] and ct 5c \nnil ins. c( 5c 340, 4. \n(( Kol 340, 7. \ncf Kc see iiv. \n\n(I fjiri iron. 324, 3, (a); el \nfj.-\'\' \' 340, 5 ; ci /i\'J) \n\n\xc2\xab , -\', ib. \n\n(to, cias, etc, eioi\' opt. ins. \n\ncufu and etc. 116, 9. \nulivai c. g. 273, K. 20 ; C \npartie. 310, 4, (a); dif- \nference between inf. \nand part. 311, 2; c. us \nand \' :n2, R. 12. \neOe in 259, 3, (b) \n\nami K.3,6.;c. inf.306, \nR. 11. \n\xc2\xab\xc2\xbbit\xc2\xabiC"\xc2\xbb\'T^T\xc2\xabi\'\xc2\xbb 285, 1,(3). \nfU*iy c. g. 271, 2; c.d. \n\n284, 3, 2. \nuk6s, \xc2\xabIk6tws c. dat. 284, \n\n3, (5). \n,Uwy dec. 55, R. 2. \nfifify, t\'iTf, (Uy ins. ct?;- \n\nfify, etc. 116, 7. \ncli\'cu Jis copula 238, 6 ; as \nan essential word {to be, \nto exist, etc.) 238, R. 4 ; \nwith adv. 340, R. 4 ; \neiroi with a part. ins. \nof a simple verb 238, \nR.5 , omitted 238, R.6,7. \ntlyau apparently unneces- \nsary with 6vofxd(fiv, \n-c<r^\xc2\xabu 269, R. 1. \nthai c. g. orig. 273, 1 ; c. \n273,2; e.g. \n^ 3, (a); c.d. \n\n284,3,(9); ehai and a \nsubs. c. inf. 306, 1, (d). \neiVc referring to several \npersons 241, R. 13, (a). \nc\xc2\xabirt7v eS, kokus riva 279, \n2;>caxo,KaAic.a.2SO,2. \n\n51* \n\n\n\n\xe2\x82\xaciTrc7v c. d. 284, 3, (1) ; c. \nd. anda. c.inf.307,\'ll.3. \niipy^iv, -ffhai c- g. 271, 2. \n(is (es) Prep. 290, 2; in \npregnant sense ins. ci^ \nc. d. 300, 3, (b) ; with \nthe art. ins. cV (^ Xiiurq \nckSiSoT is tV \'XvpTiv \n^4s Ai^vnv) 300,4, (b). \nels, (xia, cV dec. 99, 5. \nels with Superl. 239, R. 2. \nctsoycjj/ c. g. 274, 2. \nCKrav ins. eo-av in plup. \n\n116,6. \ncisopai/, to permit c. part. \n^ 310, 4, (e). [3. \n\nilsTrpoLTT^Lv c. two.acc.280, \ncTra -^ith Part. 312, R.8; \neiTtt in a quest. 344, 5, \n(e). \ncfre\xe2\x80\x94 cfrc 323, R. 1 ; et\xe2\x80\x94 \ncrrc, Htc \xe2\x80\x94 el 5e\' etc. 323, \nR. 1 ; in an indirect \nquestion 344. 5, (k). \nciwdeVai c. inf. 306, 1, (a). \n{K,Ji 15, 3; Prep. 288,2; \nin Preg. sense ins cv \nc. d, 300, 3, (c) ; e\xc2\xab \nwith the Art. ins. ev \n(ot \xe2\x82\xacK TTJs 07 op ay \niivhpwrroi aiTiipvyoy) \n300, 4, (a). \n\xe2\x82\xacKds c. g. 271, 3. \n\xe2\x82\xacKa(TTos with the Art. 246, \n\n6. \n^KSveiv c. two ace. 280, 3. \n^Kel^^ec witli the Art. ins. \niK\xe2\x82\xac7 (6 ^ K e r,^ \xe2\x82\xac J\' TToAe- \nfjLOS 5eCpof5|ei)300,R.8. \nckcTj/os dec. 91 ; Dial. 21 7, \n4, (d); use 303, 2; with \nthe Art. 246, 3. \n4Kfivo(ri{v) 15, 1. (c). \ne\'/ceTo-e in Preg. sense ins \n\niK(: 300, R. 7. \nc\'f07T\xc2\xbb c. g. 288, R. \niK\\fiir\xe2\x82\xaciy c part. 310, 4, \n\n(0- \niKiT\\-{}TT\xe2\x82\xac(r^ai c a. 279, 5 ; \n\nc. d. 285, 1. \niK<TTr)vai c. a. 279, R. 3. \nfKTpeirea-^ai c. a. 279,R.3. \n(Kuv eJvai 306, R. 8. \niKarTOV without ^ 323, \n\nR. 4. \ni\\aTTOva^ai C. g. 275, 1. \niKoLTTwv 84, 6. \niKax^ffTos 84, 6. \n\n\n\n606 \n\n\n\nGEEEK INDEX. \n\n\n\niXtyXtiy c. part,310,4,(b). \n\n4\\4yxKTTos 84, R. 4. \n\niKe f7t^ c. g. 274, 1, (c) : \n\nc. a. 279, 5. \ni\\(v^epos, i\\(vb(povv c. \n\nK. 271,2, .3. \niXitrativ Si(6v 279, K. 5. \n\'4\\nivs dec. 54, (c). \n^ATTj\'^ftj/ r. (1. 285, 1 (1); \n\nc. inf. 306, 1, (I)), \n4fiavTov dec. 88 ; use \n\n302, 2. \n4n6s ins. fiov, 302, R. 2. \nr/x\xc2\xbbra(j)25, 4, (c). \n$fjLirfipos V. ^r. 273, 5. (e). \nifiirtKd^njbai C. ^. 273, U. \n\n9; c. d. 284,3, (2). \nifiviirKatrdeu C part. 310 \n\n4, (d). \n(nirpoff^ty c. p. 273, 3, (h). \nifKptpili V. d. 2H4. 3, (4). \n\xc2\xabi/ ins. 7;(rai\' \'2\'JO. 14. \n\n(a)j eg. 263, (\xc2\xbb.) \n^r TO?*, /i\xc2\xbb ToTr r "^ \n\n(e.g;. ir^^orroi) - J. \n\nivamiov, -loj r. : 1. \n\n273, K Hand li ^ ,_;. \nM\xc2\xab^$ c. p. 273, 5, (l\xc2\xbb). \n^KSo^tK with t\' * \'. in<. \n\nfySov (r^f rpd- \n\nirt^aj\' (\xe2\x96\xa0 \'. S. \n\n/fSi\'dv r. .. . _ \'U, 3. \n\niytiptvfiv c. a. 279, 1. \n\nf*Kfy,ovf*Ha <\xe2\x80\xa2\xe2\x80\xa2 , \nfyf<my c. inf. 3(M\xc2\xbb. I \niydvti(7(Tdcu c.p.273.1i.- \n\nc. part. 310, 4 (a). \nfyi ins. fytari 31, H. 3. \n^\xc2\xbb\'\xc2\xbb\'o\xc2\xab7\xc2\xbb\' c. p. 273. K. 20. \n/yox^iti 1-. a. 279, 1 i cd. \n\n284,3, (6). \niyTai>dA with Part. 312, \n\nK. 7. \n4yrp(Wf<Td<u 273, 3, (b). \n^^ Prv\'p. 2S8, 2 ; see />t. \ni^al<pyris with Tart. 312, \n\nK. 6. \n4llpX*ty c. p 271, 4. \nilfKtyxfiy f- prt\'t. .Tin 4 \n\n(h). \n^fOTiy c. inf. 30i.. i \n\nc. d. and a. o. int \n\nK. 3. \n;{\xc2\xabT<iC\xc2\xab"\' c. g, 373, R. 20; \n\nc two ace. 280, 3. \n\n\n\n\xc2\xab|^t c. g. 273, 3. (b) ; c. \n\nd. 284, 3, (3). \nillaraff^QU c. p. 271, 2. \ni^opKovy c. a. 279, 4. \nf^\xc2\xab 0. ;:. 271. 3. \nioiKtvat c. d. 284, 3, (4); \n\nc. inf. 307, R. 7.; c \n\npart. 310, R 2; c. inf. \n\nand part. 311, (9). \ni<Jjins.^^i, o-<^j;j02.R.8. \nifouvily c. p. and a. 273, \n\nR.20;T\xc2\xab*\'\xc2\xab\xc2\xa3T<\xc2\xbb\'Of 274, 1. \niirai. \xe2\x96\xa0 \' " 4. \n\niitaiaatty c. \n\n^TOiTuurdcu ( _ -. i. -. \ndwix^fit dec. 213. 19. \n\n^\xe2\x96\xbc(^(f >\xc2\xab\xe2\x80\xa2\xe2\x80\xa2-\xe2\x80\xa2 OTO \' : OT0. \n\nirapxt\'ty c. ;. \xe2\x96\xa0, (b) ; \n\nc. d. 284. 3. (7). \n/\xc2\xbb\xe2\x96\xa0\xc2\xab/ Rcc 5t\xc2\xab ; in interrop. \n\nand imp. clauses 341, \n\n4. ^ 1(b). \n\nVfffdoi c. p. 273, R-7, \n\n\xe2\x80\xa2 rtiid^ tee irajy under \n\nBrt. \niwtiHi gee St\' \nIwura in a question 34 ; \n\n:>, (e). \nr\xc2\xbb\xc2\xab.Tawithp\xc2\xabrt.312.R.8. \n\n. \xe2\x80\xa2 -4.2. \n\ni J.3, (3). \n\nf\xe2\x80\x9e. ri31,R.3. \n\nM ] b ; c. dat. in \n\nT ^ C. ft. \n\n... ftud \n\nILb. \n. oi c. P.273.R T \ntitu c. inf. 3t \n\n\n\nitrnrTd/jLfyos c. \n\n* \xe2\x96\xa0 \n\npan. aiid inf. 311, 2 ; c \nifs and gen. ab- <\'\xe2\x80\xa2> \nR. 12. \n\nivurraruw r ""\' \n^\xe2\x96\xa0wifff4-\'uvy \n\nt ztiy ^ \'\' ; I \n\niwtrtXXtu, , I \n\n/\'-\'-.. -^. \n\n/viTprrcir c. inf. aad pait. \n\n311. 15. \niwtrpowttnof c. g. 275, 1 ; \n\nc. E. 279. 1. \n\n274, I, (e). \niwtxt*p*\' \xe2\x80\xa2"\'\xe2\x96\xa0 \'^\'^ \' n). \n\n\n\n... \xe2\x96\xa0-:* c. tWOftCC. 2^a. \n\n.^tL^.j- c.rwo ftccsm^s. \n\n2"\' \' \'" \nfr- - 271 2. \n\n<parTar C. t^ \'^ \n\n\n\n(c; and R. 16. \n\'"\xe2\x96\xa0"\'w, t^K^ft^p 221. \n\niM see {art. \n{iT\xc2\xab tee Imt, \n\n\n\n\xe2\x80\xa2^. \n\n\n\n274,(1); \n\n\nhrt uoi ri BomKtith^ 2H \n\n\nc inf. 3o6. 1, (a). \n\n\n3 ). \n\n\n^iroAcrr c. d. 2"^ - \'^y \n\n\nr<rr. :..^i^- . .). \n\n\n4viKovp*7y c. d. \'J \xe2\x80\xa2\xe2\x80\xa2 \n\n\ni<rr. 6. \n\n\n^irtA.QM^^i\'fcr.^eu c. ^vu. \n\n\nf tfTU^ M, 4* \n\n\n273. 3. (b). \n\n\ntrruf Irt, f - \n\n\n/irtAai<dcb\'\xc2\xabri^ai c. g, 27*, \n\n\n\xe2\x80\xa2(,Xrmf> l.RS. \n\n\n5.(0); c pan,3IO,4,{e). \n\n\n. mit.i \n\n\n^\xc2\xbb<A\xc2\xab/ir*ii\' r a 279, 4 : c \n\n\nKV .V \n\n\np;v \n\n\nia,i;,2i \n\n\nt \\\xc2\xabrd\xc2\xabu, -uadat c. p. \n\n\n, - ^ \xe2\x96\xa0 \xe2\x80\x94 - - \xe2\x96\xa0 \xe2\x96\xa0 - \n\nIti with the Comp. 239, \n\n\n1 : c. 5\xc2\xbb\xc2\xab#$ c. iud. \n\n\nR-1. \n\n\n.*>. 6. \n\n\nfrt Yovx^ with the Comp. \n\n\n\xc2\xabiriT\xc2\xbb \n\n\nK. 1, \n\n\ni-WlW\\.iC,<., V. \xe2\x80\x9e \n\n\nt. td in the Aug 121, \n\n\n284,3,(6). \n\n\nR,; 125,2. \n\n\n\nGREEK INDEX. \n\n\n\n60/ \n\n\n\n, voitur, etc. c. a. \n\n(5 wottly c. part. 310.. \n\n(!/Sa. \n\nV - I. 1, (O- \n\n\n\n:hl\'art.3l2, R.6. \n\n\n\n(b] \n\n\n\n\n\n\n73, a, \n\n\n\nt\' \n\n\n\nafter the oniis.sion of \nfiaWoy 323. U. 3 : omit- \nted with irXfoi/, Tr\\flwf \n\n>n \n\n23, \n\nK. 4; with the Gen. \nafter a comparative \n323. R. 5. \n\n.r in Phip. 116, 6. \n; vowel 237, K. 1. \nfl Kard or fj vpos c. a. \n\xe2\x80\xa223, 7. \n\nre 0. inf. 341,3, (a). \n\n\xe2\x96\xa0 > \n\nr. ? \n\n:. 2. \n\nt) i Of 3.il, li. 1. \n\n-\'-.:\xe2\x80\x94. .. ;;. 273, o. ^..,. \n\nJ. 275, 1. aiKl \n\nJ. \n\n\n\nc. (;. and d. \n\n\n\n5 \n\n\n\n:e;4. 3, (bj. \n\n\n\n:.6. \netc c g. \n\n\n\ni. \n\n\n\n. . .ma g. \n\n\n\n\n\n\n/ \n\nt \ni, \n\nfy^^ k\xc2\xab\xc2\xabi\xc2\xbbii ifiXitfux it 31 \xe2\x80\xa2- . \n312, \n\n4\xc2\xab. R.1. \nhn coD\xc2\xabtruction 337. \n\nZaxfntA\xc2\xa5 213, 14. \nl" 235. H. 3. \n\n7 CS. 4. \n\nI 274, \\m t\' a. \n\nV inf. S06. 1. |r). \n\nivyot Aud C"0^\xc2\xbb\' **^\xc2\xab A,(b). \n\n\'H, (a) if a/(frii \n\n323, 2; in a .jtp - ku \n344, 5, (h)i \xe2\x80\x94 tl.) ft \nooaqiaruUcum 323, :> \n\n\n\njios. 236, K. 3, \n\n\n\n.ir ft7. R. 4. \n\n\n\n\xe2\x96\xa0 2;^ \n\n. , !i\xc2\xbbl the \n\n1 R. 5, c. \n\n4r \xc2\xbbe\xc2\xab t \n\n^r6ra, in\'irn, see Stc. \n\n1i|M\xc2\xbbr d< \n\n||i<r3ai c. a. ::7J. li. t. \nfff^wy, Attic f/TTwK 84. \n^acroMr \xc2\xabv\xc2\xabi c. inf. 30C, ] \n\n(c). \n^ffvy** f\xc2\xabrap. 82, I, (d). \n\nat <*- g. and y\xc2\xbbJ \n7;.ui 275. I. R. 2. \nrTTaa^joi with the sense \n|- liiis Terf. 255. R. 1. \n\n\n\nijTTaa^ai c. part. 310, 4, \n\n^Xw dec. 60, (b). \nr]u>s dec. 60, (b). \n\neoA^s dec. 71, A. (a). \n^(xAAeiv c. a. 278, 3, (a). \ndap^fiv c. a. and d. 279. 3, \n\nand R. 3. \nddtrafiv c. a. 279, R. 6. \nddaa-oov 83, I. \n^6.T\xe2\x82\xacpa, etc. 10, R. 2. \n^avad(^(iy c. g. and a. 273, \n\nK. 20 ; T<ra T^vos 274, \n\n1, (f) and R. 2; c. d. \n\n285, {l)]iirl rm 285, \n\nR. 1. \nbavfuurrhy Sa-oy 332, R. \n\n10. \ndcoffdai V . ;:. 273, R. 20. \nbfKtip c. inf. 306, 1, (a). \n\nN 3, and R. \n1 and 2. \n"^ - vfty c. a. 279, 1. \n. I\' doc. 68, 5. \n:., 4. \n\n\xe2\x80\x9e X 235,3. \n\nbtY)dyfiy c. g. 273, 3, (b). \ndtriiOKfiy ins. IVrf. 255, \nR I; inr6 rivos 249, 3. \nbpdaaw 17, R. 4. \nbpi^ .h-c. 54, (c). \nbiryaTrip dec. 55, 2. \n\nbvfjMia^cu c. g. 274, 1 i \n\ne. d. 284, 3, (6). \ndwrcudv, dwrn-fiy C. a. \n\n279, 1. \n\n:>t:v (!rr. CO. fa). \n\ni ii!iiiiii-vo\\> cl Sol, 1, and \nR. 2. \n\ni5\xc2\xab, referring to several \nporson.\'J, 241,R. 13, (a). \n\nRior comp. 82, I, (d). \n\nriios c. g. 273, 2. \n\nj\'S.wTTjT c. g. 273, 5, (c). \n\n/\'.irdec. 213, 7. \n\nityaij (Ifii with the mean- \ning of the Fut. 255 \nR. 3. \n\nifp6s c. g. 273, 2. \n\ni^t;(s) c. g. 273, R. 9. \n\niVai\'ds c. inf. 306, 1, (c). \n\niKfTfifiy C. g. 273, R. G \nc. inf. 306, 1, (a). \n\n\n\n608 \n\n\n\nGREEK INDEX. \n\n\n\niKvua^ou c. g. 273, R. 6. \n7</a, that, in order that 330. \n\'{i^a Ti 344, K. 6. \ntffos comp, 82, I, (d). \ntaos c. g. and d. 273, 3, \n\n(b), and 284, 3, (4). \nlaropuv c. two a. 280, 3. \nIx^vs dec. 62. \ni\\(i) ins. Ixupa 213, 11. \n\nK movable 15, 4. \n$caJ^ap6s c. g. 271, 3. \nKu-diCfiv c. a. 279, K. 6. \nKcuiiariuai c. two a. \n\n2H0, 4. \nKoudopay, to permit, c. part. \n\n310, 4, (C-). \nxal 321, 1 ; with Sup 239, \n\nII. 2; with part. 312, \n\nK.B.Ko/ ins. 5rc321,l. \nKcd ydp 324, K. 1 and 3. \nKol ^or, Kol ft 340, 7. \nKal fici\\iarra with Snp. \n\n239. H. 2. \n\xc2\xabra) 8s ins. Koi o^ror 331, \n\nK. 1. \n\nKol oil, Koi fX-\'\' \'. \n\nKoX lavTa wr. .. 312, \n\nR. 8. \nKaiir\xc2\xabp with part. 312.R.8. \nKalTn 322. 7 J with part, \n\n:n2, K. 8. \n\xc2\xbbccbc\xc2\xbb<rTos, K^KitnVy 84, 2. \n\nKCUCOAO)*?!\', KCUKOirOKlV C \n\nn. 279, 2. \nKcurd; comp. 84, 2. \nKa\xc2\xbbc<5r *.>\xc2\xbb c. inf.30f). l.(c). \nKaKovpfytlv c. li. 270. 2. \nKOKws K4y\xc2\xabiy, ironly, Spay \n\nttc. c. u. 279, 2. \ntcaXuy 0. two a. 280, 4. \nKaWiCTfVfiy V. p. 275. 1. \nKdWicrros, KoWiaiy 84, 3. \niraA<$v comp. 84, 3. \nKoXovutyost SO called 264, \n\nH. 1. \nKoXws doc. 48 ; 70, A, (a). \nHi/jLytiy c. part. 310, 4.(c). \nK&wttra with part. 318, \n\nK. 8. \nrel^a doc. 68. 6. \nKopTfpfly o.pnrt.310, 4,(o). \nKard l*iTp. 292 ; Kard in \n\ncomposition, consmic- \n\ntion with 292. K. \nK^ra with part. 312. R, 8. \nKaTaxoi\'dv, /() o/v V, c. g. \n\n273, R. 18 and 19. \n\n\n\nKaTa\\\\d.TTeiVf -drnffbai, \n\n(.: d. 284, 3, (1). \nKaravf fifty c. two a. 280 ..3. \nKaTatrK-ftTTfabai t. a. 279, \n\n5; c. d. 2^5, i). \nKaTaptarHicu c. d. 284, 3,( 1 ). \nKardpxfiy f. g. 271, 4. \nKaTaxpriCbau c. d- and a. \n\n285, 1, (2). \nKaTfyayrioy c. g. 273, R. 9. \nKaT(pyd(nrdeu c. inf. 306, \n\n1.(0). \n\nKorixfiy c. inf. 306, 1, (a). \nKvritKoos c. g. and d. 273, \n\nR. 18. \nKi, Kty, sec &y. \n\nA R. 6. \n\nKtKtvtiy c.ii (i^) i \n\nc. a. et ini. \xc2\xbb",. i;. i. \nKty6s c. p. 271, 3. \n\nK- \xe2\x96\xa0 1. \n\n*. R. 4. \nKf^Siwr 216, li. 2. \nKtf.Xi*\' c. two a. 2W), 3. \ntciiiteieu c. g- *i74, 1. \n\nK(r9i/r<i/< f. 306, 1. \n\n(b). \n\n\n\nA .\xc2\xab!> c g. 873, S| \n\n1 . \n\nK\\!\xc2\xab/rc. d. 2M. R, 4. \n273, 8. (b). \n\n\n\nKoirofytw o. \'. (b) J \n\n. d. 284. - .-, \n^\xe2\x80\xa2y6t dec. 72, (a). \n\xc2\xabi* c, a. 279, 1. \n^. ^^tu c. g. 273, &, \n\nKotfs dec. 212. 7. \nKpoTctv c. g. and a. 275, 1, \n\nand R. 1. \nKpaTfTr c. p.irt.310, 4, (g). \n\n\xe2\x99\xa6f^KlTlCTTOJ 84. 1. \n\nKptas dec. 54. K. 4. \n\nKptitrtroty^ Kpthroey 84. 1. \n\nKpiyfir * " \' <l \n\n20; K. 4 \n\n2 ; Kpirtof ri run 26J. \n\n\n\nKpivov dec 72, \',a). \nKpoia(u> 212, 3 \nKpora\\i((iy c. a. 279, R. i \nKporuy c. a. 279, R. 5. \nKptnrrtiy -fffbai c. a. 279^ \n\n4 ; c. two a. 280, 3. \nKpv^ c. ^. j"" " I\'e). \nKTuaOau c. ^ - i. \n\nKvip6% comp. 63, iL \nfri/K<\xc2\xbb56. R. 1.213, 11. \nKvyrtpos 216. R. 2. \n\nKias dec. 61, R. 1. \nir\xc2\xbbAu\xc2\xab<y c. g. 271, 2 ; c \ninf. 306, i, (a). \n\nA\xc2\xa3t dec 72, (a). \n\\afi<iy, tcilM, 3\\2, R. 10. \nX\xc2\xab7x<i*^\' - \' .\xc2\xbb73,3,(b). \nKd-ftti R. 1 ; 70, \n\nA, (a). \nkibf^ Aa^fsW c g. 273, \n\nXa^:- -"vtfy310. Tl 4. \nX\xc2\xa3lA 88, 1, t ; \n\nXafi^*\xc2\xbb>\xc2\xab\xc2\xabi\xc2\xbb\xc2\xab\xc2\xab C g. 373, 3, \n\nc. a. 27 \n\nAX)oa>fiF C. a. ^> J*. -I. \n\nXarbdrtff^Ui c g. 273, S, \n\n(c). \nAofi^^iv c. rirt. 310, 4, \n\n(I). \n\niMu a. 2^0. 4 i C \nt 1 fl); c. infl \n\n3 d. and a. \n\natiu ii:i wi, . R. 3. \nKiyitr c. in and g. aha. \n\n312. R. 12. \nK4y*tM \xe2\x80\xa2\xc2\xa3, Kwtmt c a. 879, \n\n8 ; nAi, nur^ etCC^ \n\n280, 2. \nXfvrrai c. a. ct inf. 307, \n\nX*y6mys 864, R. 1. \nAcirtiF c a. 879, 4. \nX*lrtM^ c part. 310, 4\xc2\xbb \n\nXf->\xc2\xab*r c. p *\xe2\x80\xa2(\xc2\xab)\xe2\x80\xa2 \n\nATjf>\xc2\xab4$ \xc2\xbb > \'^ 9. \n\nA/w\' <A. \nAf\xc2\xbbc. \n\n\n\n<\xe2\x96\xa0 \n\n\n\n(3). \n\n\n\n214. R- 2. \n\xe2\x80\xa2,. r r. 273. B <^ \n\n\n\nGREEK INDEX. \n\n\n\n6oa \n\n\n\n\xe2\x80\xa2l.(b). \n\xe2\x96\xa0 , .1. \n\nKoihopt\'uriiai run 2S4, 3, \n\n(G). \nAou\xc2\xabrd(u c. g. 273, R. 16. \n\nUK c. a. 279, 1. \n\\ *.y c. g. sep. 271,2; c. \n\ng. Of price 275, 3. \nKvnaittfabat c. a. S""" \' \n\nc. a 279. R. 1. \nKv d. 285, (l>. \n\nA . d.284,3.(7j. \n\nu c.tL 279, 1 J c \n\' 11. I. \n\n\n\nMet 316.4; m^ A(a279,4. \n\nuaK(>4\' And \n\nhi \n\nK. 2. \nAor Willi Com. 239, \n\nR. I. \n\nfioAAor l)oA318, R. 7. \nMAT 316, 1. \nfiop^Jn^ttv with miM of \n\nt! " I. \n\nItcvc ^ ^1.273, \n\nR SO; c part. 310, 4, \n\n(a); c. part, and in\xc2\xa3 \n\n811,3. \nftdpTvi dec 68, 10. \nItiaamv 84, 5. \n^npy, iMcOMiMi S78, R. 9. \n\n\n\n\xe2\x96\xa0!\xc2\xbb. \n\n\n\n.__:*, I. \n\n.77;comp.84,8. \nwith Sup. an" \n\n1 c part. 310, \n\n\n\n/ j^ai C g. 273, \n\nfit^.n \\\\r.\\\'.<-\\xt ^ 323, R. ; \nt<i<i 214, 4. \n\n^i.uKfcTtlr c. g. 275, 1. \n^\xc2\xabiui(Tdeu c. g. 275, 1. \nH*iuy 64 \xe2\x80\xa2 \n/i<\'A\xc2\xabi ftol Tirot and ri 27 \n\nl,and R. 1. \nIi4k\\*iy c. inf. 306, 1,{h). \n\nU<M^H^ ^< ^i^- ^* ^\'^^1 \n\nIt b. \n\n\n\nIitfxcpfff^cu c. g. and a. 273, \nK. 20; Tij/^ Tjvoy 274, \nl,(f); c d. and a. 284, \n\n3, (6). \n\nfi\xc2\xaby ins. fjL-ffy 316, R. \n/*\xc2\xabV \xe2\x80\x94 5\xc2\xab 322, 5. \nti(y^V 316, K. \n/ic>\xc2\xaby c. a. 279, 3. \n\nr o,.. R. \n\nH. 322, 7. \n\xe2\x96\xa0 (c). \n^-- , -,I, {d)and \n\nR. 5; with the Art. 245, \nR. 5. \nfurrhy thtu c, part. 310, \n\nft^ra 1\': . ; nira ins. \n\nfi*r*aji vil, K. 3. \n/i\xc2\xabTa?i?t>; ai C g. 273, 3, \n\n( \n/*rr-.-,,x4. >*o/ ruvr and ti \n\n274, 1, (b) and R. 1. \n>MTa^\xc2\xabA\xc2\xabr c part. 310, 4, \n\nfirrofuKttff^tu c.part. 31C. \n\n4. (0). \n\nUtraiO c. p. 273, 3, (b). \nfitraiv with part. 312. \n\nR. 6. \nlUrtrri fiot Tirot 273, 9, \n\n(b). \nftfrJx\'Uf <* jr- 273. 3, (t). \n\n\n\nR. 9; \nSroVf \n\n\n\nh \n\n\n\nM^ \'5. \n\nfit] .)i>, . -.ic, \n\nalter cxj,.. ^ni- \n\nfvinp to J\'tur, to doubL, \n\xe2\x80\xa2 S. \n\n344, 5, (d). \nfiri OTi, ft.il Svwf \xe2\x80\x94 diAAA \n\nfirii. \n\n.(TTOf \xc2\xbb4. \n\nM . 316, 1. \nHr)viti\xc2\xa5 C. p. 274, 1. \n/ii7^(r d\' ^\'.5. \n\nutn- -1,2, (c). \n\n.5, 2. \n\nU7; ,u. , 71, B, (C). \n\n^Tj<(ua<T^ai c. inf. 306, \n1 hrws and ind. \n\nfu 6. \n\n\n\nluyvvvai, ui-yvvcrbat c. d. \n\n284,3, (.). \ntJiiKp6s comp. 84, 6. \nfxifieTabai c. a. 279, 1. \n(jLijjiin](rKeiv -eabai C. g. \n\n273, 5, (e). \nuifiyriffKca-bai c. part. 310. \n\n4, (a) ; c. part, aud iuf. \n\n311,2. \nMluusdcc. 7!, C. \nHol, ethical Dat. 284, 3, \n\n(10) (d). \nfi6yos with the Art. 245, \n\nR. 6; dirtcrcnt from \n\nIJ.6yoy 264, R. 7. \nn6yos c. g. 271, 3. \nfwytxpayos comp. 82, 1, (f ). \n/ioC, fjLoiy fi\xe2\x82\xac use 87, R. 1. \nHVKr)s dec. 71, A, (a). \nfiuaiTTfabat c. a. 279, 5. \nuuy 344, 5, (c). \n\nN /<^\xc2\xabAjcu(rTJKoV 15, 1 and \nin tlie Dialects \n6. \ny\xc2\xabu 316, 4; vol fteb A/a \n\n279, 4. \nrcu^f und i/evs 70, A. (a). \nydirtf and ve(iror 70, B. \nydfffffty c. g. 273, 5, (b). \nrail dec. 68, 11. 214, 5. \nWttTos 82, R. 5. \nytus and ya6s 70, A, (a). \nHi 316, 4; k)) A/a 279, 4. \n#^ij from i\'\xe2\x82\xacoj b2, R. 5. \nyutay \'OAu/iirta, yywfiriy \n\n278, 2. \nrtirav with sense of the \n\n1 -., R. 1. \n\nrotu. ,.jt. 310, 4,(g). \nyiy {yiy) ins. aurovs or \n\nainds 87, R. 3. \nyody c. part. 312, R. 12. \nyofACuy c. two a. 280, 4 ; \n\nc. d. (\xc2\xab//) 285, (2) ; c \n\ninf 306, 1, (b);c. part. \n\n311, 2. \nyo<r<piC(iy c. g. 271, 2. \nyovdtr(7y c. iuf. 306, 1, (a). \nyv 316, 3. \nyanos and ywroy 70, A, \n\n(b). \n\nntyovffSfai c. d.284. 3, (1). \nliyus ^Xf"\' *^- S- 273, 5, \n\nlufi<pop6v i(TTi c. d. aud a. \nc. iuf. 307, R. 3. \n\n\n\n610 \n\n\n\nGREEK INDEX. \n\n\n\n^vi/ Prep. 289, 2. \n\nO union-vowel 237, 2, \n6- in d-rrolos, SirSaos, etc. \n\n93, K. 1. \n6, 7), t6 dec. 91 ; relat., \n\ndemons., as a prop. Art. \n\nsec under Article. \n6 i]\\iKos attract. 332. R. 9. \n6 oJos attract. 332, K. 9. \n87? use 303. U. 2. \n85\xe2\x82\xac, ^86, To8\xc2\xab dec. 91 ; \n\nDialects 217, 4, (b) ; \n\nuse 303, 1 ; with the \n\nArt. 246, 3. \n6ii 95, (c). \n6C(iy c. fr. 273, 5, (dj; c. \n\na. 278, 3. (h). \nS^owfKa : 329, R. \n\n1 ; bcru -, 2. \n\nolifKpl {iTfpl) Tjvo263,(d). \noJa c. part. 312, H. 13. \nOliivovt dec. 71, B, (b). \noiKflos c ;;. 273, 2. \noiKTtlpdy V. p. 274, 1, (c). \noiKTpis tomji. 83, II. \notov c. part. 312. R. 13. \notos with Sup. 239, li. 2: \n\noToif 01 6 1 r\' ufil c inf. \n\n306, l,(c). \n\notoi ius. 8rt ToiovTos 329, \n\nR. 8. \noTo; attracted 332, 7 ; c. \n\ninf. 332, R. 8. \noTos ins. Sirrt 341, R. 2. \n\nTolriaoi \'" \'\xe2\x96\xa0 IJ. 10. \n\notx^M*"* \' \xe2\x80\xa2 R- 3\' \n\notxo^lal c. \\t^t. olO, 4, (1). \ninyiiy c. inf. 306, 1, (a.) \ni\\iyos com p. 84, 7. \n6\\lyw, ixZ-yov with Com- \n\npaV. 239, R. 1. \niAj7a.>fifr\xc2\xbb\' c. j;:. 274. !,(\'>)\xe2\x80\xa2 \n6\\o(pvp\xc2\xabrd<u 0. p. 274, 1, \n\n(c); c. II. 279,5. \nSniXtlyC. d. 284, 3, (1). \nifiywai C. a. 279, 4. \n8/iOJo Toli c. Sup. 239, \n\nR. 2. \n8)uoiov fJvtu c. partic. 310, \n\nR. 2. \ntfioios c. p. 273, 3, (b); \n\n8/Liotos, ijuoiof\'i\', -or>(rdai, \n\ni/io(a<y c. d. 284. 3, 4. \nifioKoytly C. d. 284, 3, (6). \ni/xoXoytlrai c. iv and inf. \n\n307, R. 6. \n\n\n\n8/i\xc2\xaby 322, 7 ; with a part \n\n312, R. 8. \noyeiiiCuv c. d. 284, 3, (6). \nov(ipo% dec. 72, (a). \novivavai, -aucrbai C. a.279.1. \novofjLai iari fioi and the \n\nlike 266, R. 1. \novo^La(tiy c. two a. 280, 4. \noWo;*\' ins. (Tucray 116. 12. \n8ir\xc2\xbbad\xe2\x82\xac*\' c. g. 273, 3, (\\>). \nhroi inprepnant sense \n\nins. 5\xc2\xbbou 300. R. 7. \n^OTtu\' sec STOi* under 8t\xc2\xab. \ndiroT* sec 8t\xc2\xab. \n8\xc2\xab-oi; ia pregnant tense \n\ninfi. Iwoi 300, R. 7; \n\niwov, quandoquidem see \n\n8t#. \nh- R. 2. \n\nt- I. \n\nSiTMf, theit^ in order that^ \n\n330 ; Svwt and 8\xc2\xab-wr m4 \n\nc. ind. fut. cllip. 330, \n\nR.4. \nSirwf, %chru. \'fo Zrf. \ntwtas. Oh \n\nipOf opajr \n\nLk with \n\nTerU\xc2\xbb of ttpiK.\'Aring, \nshowing 306, R, 9 : c. \npart. 310, 4, (a). \n\nipyl(\xc2\xabadeu c. g. 274, I , c. \npart. 310. 4, (c). \n\niptyta^au c. g. 273,3, (b). \n\nSp^ptos comp. 82, I, (d). \n\ndpfiaadtu c. g. 273, H. 7, \n(b). \n\niprtdoHr<\xc2\xbb^ di\xc2\xbbc 44. R. 2. \n\nIpyts *"\'S,12. \n\nOp^KU., \n\n8j, U, 8 dec. \n\nhq \nail \n\n(\xc2\xab: \n\n\xe2\x80\xa2!\'\xe2\x80\xa2 - \n\nK. II; ji n in \n\npo \xe2\x96\xa0\xe2\x96\xa0 - "s \n\nate (.lau-^cs, attDicted \n332, 9 ; mode^ 333 ; is \nchanged into a demons. \n334, 1 ; 6s ins. the de- \nmons. 334. 3; 8s ins. \n8ti, Si -usf^ ins. \n\nIko, ul ,- r o&rwt, \nw8<, rouNTTor, TTjXuroi^ \nTor, TomHrros ) firrc, ins. \n^cU\' or (t 334, 2. \n\n\n\n8j, ^, 8 ; ftj /i\xc2\xabi> \xe2\x80\x94 hs 94 ; \n\nis Ked Ss demons. 331, \n\nR. 1. \niaotf {Setfi) \xe2\x80\x94 To<rouroy{ro \n\naolrtp) 343. \nScror, 8vy with Comp. \n\nand Sup. 239, R. 1 and \n\n2; ocoy, 5<ra c. inf.. e. \n\np. Zcov y\' ifi fiitrai \n\n341. R. 3. \nS<ror ins. 8ri riff0\xc2\xa7 329. \n\nR. 8. \nSiTos attracted 332, 7. \n8<rof ins. Arrc 341, \' \nicrtoy = iarow dt:.. i . ,.. \n8fTtj dec 93. \nic^palptcbtu c. g. 273, S, \n\n(f ), and R. 19. \nIc^ \xe2\x80\x94 raw^y 343,2, (b). \niraM see 8r\xc2\xab. \' \n5t< and 8rajr const. 337. \nIfTt fundamental mean* \n\ninp.ni*. I. \n5ti .. 239, R. 2. \n\nSri, \xc2\xabt 329; diA \n\njti, a. \n\n"\xc2\xbb It \n5 ii \n\nof aiK \n8rt. xi\'n \n\n^1 Ti .>44, K. O. \n\nM>(c) 15, 4. 17. R. 3; \xe2\x80\xa2\xc2\xab \nat the end of a sen* \ntcnce ir> 4. \n\n\xe2\x80\xa2^318: lastic af- \n\nter r\\ . -\xe2\x96\xa0 !< denot- \ning : .. :. \'U :...il. .iiicr \nComp. and i>up. cx- \n\nSressions 318. S. and \nL7. \n\n\n\na . \xe2\x96\xa0 . . \n\nov iiirrot 4AAi 322, K. 11. \n\xe2\x80\xa2*/4 318,7. \n\xe2\x80\xa2i m4 c. second pen. ind. \n\nAlt. interrog. (ci ^ \n\nfAiMipi|^\xc2\xaba ; ina. ui \n\nfA^Mi) 255. 4. \n\xe2\x80\xa2i mV AXAi 322, R \n\xe2\x80\xa2w /\xc2\xab iw w> \xe2\x80\x94 iXAa icai \n\xe2\x80\xa2S pron. dec 87 ; \xc2\xab \n\nrTtV2. R. 3. \n\n.. 61, R. I. \n\nO. r .1.2. \n\n0; :c.i ^cc 99, H. \n\n\n\nGREEK INDEX. \n\n\n\n611 \n\n\n\n\xe2\x80\xa2Mfif Srrtf ov attracted \n\n332, R. 12. \n\xe2\x80\xa2VK (rrriv &rot/, hms 331, \n\nR.6. \n&lMiou9 and o(^\xc2\xabroi\'>\' -\'^\'?^ \n\ntZf "\' " (b) ; cuu- \n^ t. 3, (b) \\ iu \n\nan answer 344, 7. \n\no{?r<ira C. g. 288, K. ; oC \nrcKa ins. Sri 329, K. I , \nutice^ becaute 338. 2. \n\n\xe2\x80\xa2\xc2\xa3i dec. 54, R. 4. \n\n\xe2\x80\xa2frr* \xe2\x80\x94 otr* ; o(rr\xc2\xab \xe2\x80\x94 t\xc2\xab \n321, 2. \n\netror der. 9! ; Dialects \n217 use 303, 1 ; \n\nwith t. 246, 3. \n\n\xe2\x80\xa2^rof , keu$ ! 269, 2, (a). \n\n\xe2\x80\xa2(W-wt. \xc2\xbbt iU \\v 142. \n\nU. 2. \n\xe2\x80\xa20rM> with part. 3 12. R.7. \n\n\xe2\x80\x94 d 3. \n\n\n\nf). \n\n\n\nHal Voc. ^i. 4. ^ I ), (\xc2\xab. /. \nTcuSit^u\' c. two a. 280. 3. \nvoAaiif com p. 82 \nvarroSBC clivi, 71; \n\nc Part. 310. 4, (h); c. \n\na. c \xe2\x96\xa0 * "1. 18. \n\n^ \n\nwapau^tuf \xc2\xab\' tl. 2^4, 9, (3) ; \n\nc. ii- I. (a). \n\nvoftoNi oi c. d. 2S4, \n\n3, (3). \nycytt>nvi/V<r\xc2\xbb.7 c. g. 275, \n\n3; c. two a. 280. 4. \nmyoarX^MV < ~ ^ H. \n\n9; c. d. 284 \nvo^o^KCud^flffdai 3o6, 1 , \n\n(a) \\ c. 8vwf c. ind. fut. \n\n330, 6 : c. part, and c. \n\nUs M \xe2\x96\xa0 (h). \n\nvopax^. ^; \n\nC d. 2\xc2\xbb4, 3, (-\') \nvoWir, T\xc2\xabi^, w\xc2\xabip\xc2\xab4, ^MW, \n\nw^erof c. inf. 306, 1, (c). \n\n\n\nI^iat \n\n\n\n\xc2\xab-apo{i;vf 11/ c. inf. 306, 1 , ( a ) \nxuj with the An. 246, 5. \nras Tis with the second \npers. imp. 241, R. 13, (c). \n\xe2\x96\xa0rda-auy 216, 2. \nwdtTXfty inr6 rtvos 249, 3. \nvar-ijp dec. 55, 2. \nreLrpvs dec. 71, B. (c). \nvai/fiy, -(0-.^ai c. g. 271,2; \n\nc. part. 310, 4, (f ) ; c \n\npan. and inf. 311, 17 \nwox^f comp. 216, 2. \nwtidttw nvd ri 278, 4 *, c. \n\na. 279, I ; c. inf 306, 1, \n\n(a) ; c. ir 306, R. 2. \n9tl^*<rbeu c. c 273, R. 18 ; \n\nc. d. 2- \nvtirijy c. ^ I. \n\nn\xc2\xabipai\xc2\xabi/f dec. 57, R 2, \nwttpic* 1:. 273, 5, (e); \n\nc. , 1, (a); c. \n\npan. ttad iiif 311, 18. \nw*\\Ji(tu^, wihAS c. g. 273, \n\nIt 9; c. d. 284, 3, (2). \n\xc2\xbb\xc2\xab\'. . wtnis c. g. 273, \n\n1. (e). \nWv\xc2\xabp\xc2\xab dec. 63, R. I. \nw. 1.284,3,(3). \n\nT. !\xc2\xab, 11. \n\nvnt. 317, 1. \n\nw/pOP C. L \n\n\xc2\xbbtp^ 1 . . 1 3. \n\nwtpl \xe2\x80\x94 <r\xc2\xab\xc2\xaba 3O0, R. 2 \nwfpl c. d. in prc^riKiiii \n\nsenM ins. of the :;>. \n\n3iK>. 3, (a). \n\xc2\xab</;i \\us. wtpltirrt 31, R. 3. \nTtpt/i^AAcu\' c.two a. 2^u.:i. \nwtpcfiywc^oi c i: "" 1. \ny j p Al a r ftai c g. - ^ \n\nv\xc2\xabPmIj\'\xc2\xabu c. g. 275, 1. \nT\xc2\xabpi\xc2\xabx\xc2\xab<rdcu c. g. 273, 3. \n\nn 2. \n\nw. c. a. 279, 3. \n\n\xc2\xbb\xc2\xab^ . K"\' c. part. 310, 4, \n\n( \xc2\xab\xe2\x96\xa0 ) ; c. part, and inf. \n\n311. 15. \nwtpiopacdai C. g. 274, 1. \nwtpl rcpo 300, R 1. \n*\xc2\xabpiTT<<j c. g. 275, 2. \nwf^i/\xc2\xab\xc2\xab\xc2\xbb\'ai c. iuf. 306, 1, (d). \n\n\n\n\xe2\x96\xa0wlcipa 78, R. 8. \n\xe2\x96\xa0iri/nr\\nfii c. g. 273, 5, (b). \nTiynv c. g. and a. 273, 5, \n\n(c) and R. 15. \nxlirrfiy inr6 rivos 249, 3. \nirKTTfVfiy c. d. 284, 3. (3). \nirlwv comp. 84, 12. \nxK(7v c. a. 279, R. 5. \nirA6?<rTov with Sup. 239, \n\nR. 2. \nir\\\xe2\x82\xac7oy without 1j 323, R *. \n\xc2\xbbA\xe2\x82\xac<W, irAeTcTTos 84, 9. \ntKiop ins. TcXiuu 78, R, 5. \nirAeW without <J 323, R. 4. \nTXcoveKTcrv c. g. 275, 1. \n\xe2\x80\xa2\xe2\x96\xa0Afds c. g. 273, 5, (b). \nit\\(ws dec. 78, R. 5. \n\xc2\xbbA^\xc2\xab c. g. 273, 5, (b). \n\xc2\xbbXV c. g. 271, 3. \n\xc2\xab-Xi^pi}r, v\\7}pow c. g. 273, \n\n5,(1.). \n\xc2\xbbX7j(r\xc2\xbboJ,\'\xc2\xabji\', trKricflov C. g. \n\n273,R.9;c.d. 284, 3,(2). \n\xc2\xbbXTi<Tiov comp. 84. \n9\\6os = irXoi); dec. 47. \nirXovaios c. g. 273, 5, (b). \nMvtlw c. g. 273, 5, (d) ; c. \n\na. 278, 3, (b). \nTKv^ dec. 68, 13. \nir - R. 1. \n\nir - ins. wov \n\n(U04) aoo, R. 7. \nvot\xc2\xabI> c. g. of material \n\n273, 5, (a) ; c. two a. \n\n280, 4. \nwoulv <^, kokHs c. part. \n\n310, 4,{g);c. a.279,2i \n\nirja^i., Koucd etc. C. a. \n\n2S0, 2; c. inf 306, l,(c). \nwoitty e. part. 310, 4, (b) ; \n\nc. pan. and inf 311, \n\n13. \nwoiflffbai c. g. 273, 2 and \n\n3, (a) ; c. g. of prico \n275,3. \n\nwo7os with the An. 344 \n\nR.3. \nwo\\fH(7y C. d. 284, 3, (2). \nir6\\is dec. 63. \n\xe2\x96\xa0woWhy (hat, iyK(7(rdaiy \n\nylyvfa^cu c. part. 310, \n\n4, (h). \n\niroXXou 8<\xc2\xbb c. mf 307, \n\nR. 6. \niroXXv) with comp. and \n\nBuperl. 239, R. 1 and 2. \nwoKv with Comp. and \n\nSuperl. 239, R. 1 and 2. \n\n\n\n612 \n\n\n\nGEEEK INDEX. \n\n\n\niroxi/s dec. 77. \n\nUoadZuv dec. 53, 4, (1) \n(d) ; 56, R. 1. \n\ntrori, ris irore etc. 344, \nK. 2. \n\nv6Tfpa, \'n6r\xe2\x82\xacpov \xe2\x80\x94 ^ in a \ndirect and indirect \nquestion 344, 5, (f ). \n\nirpuos dec. 76, XIV. \n\ntrpdTT\xe2\x82\xaciu (Zy KOKws C. n. \n279, 2 ; signification of \nthe first and second \nTerf. 249, 2 ; iLyaStd, \nKutd etc. c. a. 280, 2 ; \nirpdmiVy -ta^au, to de- \nmand, c. two ace. 280, \n3; c. d. 284, 3, (1). \n\nnptTTfiy, vp(ir6yT(i)s c. d. \n284,3, (5); c. inf. 306, \n1, (d) ; c. d. and a. c. \ninf. 307, K. 3. \n\nwpinn c. part. 310, 4, (i). \n\nwptafffis, irpffffiirrfiSf irpi- \ntrBvs 70, H. \n\nTrp>(T^(V(lV I "\', 1. \n\nirptCT^iaTOi "\xe2\x80\xa2 . 1 J. \n\nirpiaa^ai c. g. 275, 3. \nirpiv, irp\\v i*\', irpXv fi COUSt. \n\n337. \nirp6 I\'rep. 287, 2. \nwpotxfty c. {?. 275, 1. \nirpodv^hy fJyai, wpodvutuT\' \n\n3ou c. inf. 306, 1, (ft); \n\nc birws c. ind. fut. 330, 6. \nirpdiKa 278, K. 2. \nirpoKa\\u<rbcu rivd rt 278, \n\n4. \nIf. \' ,iy c. p. 275, 1. \n\nO.R.274, 1. \nirpooifxiov 17, K. 4. \nitpoopav C. g. 274, 1. \nirp6s Trcp. 298 ; c. d. in \n\nProg \xc2\xbbenso ins. c. a. \n\n300, 3, ^a). \nir/Joj/SoAAeo\' c. g. 273, 5, \n\n(d). \nwpo$5\xc2\xab5<i\xc2\xbbw C. g. 273, 3, (b). \nirpovV ,1. 284.3,(5); \n\nc. : .. 1. (d); c.d. \n\nand a. c. inf. 307, K. 3. \niiporl]K(.i fioi c. g. 273, 3, \n\n(b). \ntrposdfy 0. p. 273, 8, (b). \nirposKaXdc^eu c. g. 274, 2. \nirposKvyeiy o. a. 279, 1. \nnpo(naT(iy c. g. 275, 1. \nirposTdTTeiy c. d. 2S4, 3, \n\n(3); c inf. 306, 1, (a). \n\n\n\nirpo(T<pepiis c. d. 284, 3, (4). \nirpoTtfiay c. g. 275, 1. \nirpovpyiaiTepos 84, R. .3. \nirpo<P(p\xe2\x82\xaciy c. g. 275, 1. \nTTpoxovs dec. 71, B, (b). \nTTpdiios cornp. 82. I, (d). \nirpwTfVfiy c. g. 275, 1. \nirp&Tos and tpCiTov 264, \n\nR. 7. \nirr^orcTfJi\' c. a. 279, 5. \nxTuix^i comp. 82, I, (f ). \n\xe2\x80\xa2wvybavfobai with the sig- \n\nnif of Tcrf. 255, R. 1. \ntrvybdvftrbau c g. 273, R. \n\n20; \' 4. (a); \n\nC. par ni. C. \n\niruXtiy c. g. 27 \nir\xc2\xaby db\' C. opt. 2uu. i. (\xe2\x96\xa0*; \n\n(d). \n\n\'P^(wf ^//Mii\' c. n.irt. 310. \n4. (C). \n\nP4**Pt pa \'^ t. 1". \n\nPf7y C. ;. . (a). \n\n. tt. 27!*, R. 5. \n,- 47. \n\n2 0111 at CM \' " " VI- \n\nble at : a \n\nwoni 15; in the for- \nmation of tcnsc\xc2\xab of \npure verbs 131, and \nl"\'^ \' \xe2\x96\xa0 -n- \n\n1. - I \n\nand K 2. \n\nffdrrfiy c. g. 273. 5, (b). \n\n(Tcunov or etavrov dec \n88 ; use 302. 2. \n\nfff Snffix 235.3 and R,3. \n\'1, (a). \n\nc.,, .^. 14. \n\nff^ in inflcx. changed to \n3 25. 3. \n\ntaintlcx. 116. 2. \nwy ins. ad^KToy 1 16. 12. \nffi union syllable 2.*^" 1 \nciya-rt dec. 63. \n\n<riror, cr^ \n\n(TKOirtly c, g. and a. 273, \n\nR. 20 and 21. \nffKvp dec. 68, 15. \nffofr/AiCo/ZXi/. 284, 3.(10) \n\n(d). \ne6s ins. aov 302. R. 2. \n(nra\xc2\xbb\'t<f<iJ\' C. g. 273, 5. (b). \nairtyitcdcu C d. 284, 3, \n\n(1). \n\n\n\n<rr\xe2\x82\xac\xc2\xab/5cii/ c. a. 279, R, S. \nrrovidCfiy C. inf. 306. 1,\xc2\xab> \ncxouSoior comp. 82, R. 6- \n(TTdCtiyc. a. 278, 3, (a). \nCTcuiyMT^cd ri rwi 2S3, 1, \n\n(3J. \noTeV dec. 68, 16. \n<rrfyd(tiy c. d, 285, 1, ( 1 ). \nartpyfuf c. a. and d. 274, \n\nR. 1 ; c.d. 285, (1). \nartpfly c. g. 271, 2 ; c. \n\ntwo ace, riyd rimos 2\xc2\xab0, \n\n3 and R. 3. \ntrnivai c. a. 279, R. 6. \n\n2t: - 1. \n\nCT . g. 273. 3. \n\nav dec \n\npart, 310. R 2 \novyvrwuar; <,5, (e). \n\n\xc2\xabJV)\\\xc2\xabf^^ \' \' ;a). \n\ncv\\My \xe2\x96\xa0 J. \n\n<rvfiSalytw c. lui. ^M>6. 1, \n\ni\'<! ^ : c. d. and a. c inf. \nR. 3 ; personal 307, \n\nIV. o. \n\nevfifiovKtvttr c. in\xc2\xa3 306, \n\nI, (a). \nax/firpd-TTtiif r. d. Sd4, 3, \n\n(7). \nnfif^^it\' ( . ii \xe2\x80\xa2 : 7). \n\nr^Mf^p\xc2\xabi c 1 .4, \n\n(i). \nV^yt^op^ /<rT< r. d. and \n\nacc c ii \n\nVMxai^fWku 3, \n\n(b). \nn^Kirri 2P4 3 10. Lh). \nrvr<v\xc2\xabr^a. \'\xe2\x80\xa2). \n\n9^pyos c \n\nOVrirVai c _ - .ad \n\n^t)aDdK.19. \n\n\xc2\xabii\xc2\xbb\' ^r-jun^ c, n-irt. \n\n310. R. S. \nwrrtfUrri 384, 3, lu, ^a;. \n4rvt dec 62. \n\nff^latp i\' - _ -V- *. \n\nV 3; \n\nV .. U.4. \n\nrxo..\xe2\x80\x94 , -.1 (c), \n\nSMcp^t dec 59, 3 and \n\nR.2. \n\n\n\na-tts dec. 78, R. 6. \n9^(p Voc. 53, 4, (IJ (a). \n\nT^ Toiavra without Kod \n\nfollowinj,\' 325, 1, (e). \nrapdrTfiy v6\\.(fiov 278, 2. \nTO\'" i;^ to one \n\ni . ! , R. 3. \n\nTox^f coinii. 83, I. \nraws dec. 72, (b). \nT\xc2\xab 321, 1 ; T\xc2\xbb \xe2\x80\x94 ica/, ib. \nTtTyfiK c. a. 278, 3. \nrtK^uufuvdai ri run 285, \n\n1, (3). \nrvityoDy, paraitem eMe255, \n\nR. 1. \nrdKtio \'>, (e). \n\nrtXfuT^ * lastly \n\n312, R. 3. \nriu. 280,3. \n\nT\xc2\xab, I. \n\nripmtacui c. part. 310, 4, \nr4rrttp*t dee. 99, 5. \n\nTljXldfo" " \' \n\nTi 5\xc2\xab .. . \n\nt/ ^ta^iitPy ri wabmtf 344, \n\nR. 5. \nWov, Ti\'o2ro^256.4. (e). \n\n3,(*);c. t*. \nrdrrf ir, jooraiCCM <\xc2\xabM 255, \nR.I. \n\nrtftia^^ rtfiaffbtu c. |;. 275. 3. \nrii\xc2\xbbmf\xc2\xbb*lp c. d. 2H4. 3, ( 7 I ; \n\nrinttptlaiiui Tif-a nyos \n\n274, 2 ; 0. a. 279, 7. \ntU and t/\xc2\xbb dec. 93. \nrU or Tas T(t with the II. \n\npen. Imp. 241, R. 13. \ntU tiae 303, 4 tJt \n\nomitted 238. 5 \nris ins. hsns in iiiaiixci \n\nquestion 344. R. 1. \nT^, ToG, T^p c. inf. o\xc2\xbb c. a. \n\nc. inf. 308 ; r6 c. inf. or \n\nc. a. c, inf. in cxdam. \n\n\n\n247, 3. \n\nfjyoi, T^ iraTtt roi-roy \n\ntl^cu 308, R. 3. \nrol 317, 3: ia an-wcrs \n\n344, 7. \nro/>of>, ror)rapov>\' oz4, 3, \n\nToi7\xc2\xab(f\xc2\xbbTei 334, 3, (c). \n\n\n\nGREEK INDEX. \n\nrolvvv 324, 3 (c). \nroiovTOs dec. 91 ; roiov- \n\nr6s (l/xi c. iuf.341,K.2. \nTo7sSf<ri 217, 4. \nToX/imy c. inf. 306, 1, (a). \nro^fvfiy c. g. 273, R. 7. \nrocoxrrov \xe2\x80\x94 haov \\ roaoxrrto \n\n\xe2\x80\x94 3<ry 343, 2, (b). \nroaoino -oxnta with Com. \n\nand Sup." 229, li. 1 \n\nand 2. \nrocovros dec. 91. \nroaovrov Stu c. inf. and \n\n6srt c. inf. 307, R. 6. \nrov or TOW fjL^ c.iuf. 274.3, \n\nrpoi^it T: . R. 5. \n\nT^Zr c. a. \n\nrpiis dec. 99, 5. \nrplfitt^c. \xe2\x96\xa0\'-\xe2\x96\xa0\' \'\xe2\x96\xa0 \' \xe2\x96\xa0 \nrpt^ipris d \nrvyx^*ty f. K- :i73.3, (b); \n\nc. part. 310, 4, (1). \nrvptwytly, -rtvtiy c. g. \n\n275, I. \nTu^r dec. 72, (b). ((e). \nrttur6 ins. rh ain6 217, 4, \n\nTBpiCttp e. a. 279. 1. \n\n40^^ II. \n\nUmp \xe2\x80\xa2 \n\nv2^s dec. 72, (a;. \n\nt/iwp, C^K, {\'iu*\' 87. R. 4. \n\nOwdyttf \xc2\xab*. i.\'. 274. 2. \n\nI- M{. 1^: \n\n.._... j. \n^warirroffdai c. g- 271, 2. \n^OKTiu\', vwayrid(\xc2\xabiy c. p. \n\n273. R. 9j c. d. 284, \n\n3. (2). \n\':w.4..y_fi^ c. p. 271, 4 ; c.d. \n;, 3, (9); c part. \n\nJiu, 4, (f.) \nvv\xc2\xabtKfir c. (?. 271, 2; c.d. \n\n284,3,(2). \n{nrtK 300, U. 1. \nvwticrptvtcdttt C a. 279, \n\n- 1. (): \n\n, vf<r5a< C. a. - \ninrtp >\' \n\n27.^). 1. \ninrtpixfiy c. f;. 275, 1. \ninrtpopuy v. j:. 274. 1. \ninetp^iptw c. j;. 275, 1. \n{nrf\\Koos c- g. and d. 273, \n\nR. 18. \nvinjx\xc2\xabI> c- a- 278, 3, (b). \n02 \n\n\n\n615 \n\n{nr6 Prep. 2)9; c. d. in \nPreg. sense ins. c. a \n300, 3, (a) ; c. a. and \npart. 312, R. 5. \n\nviro ins. vir^cm 31. R. 3. \n\nvTro/LteVci;/ c. inf. 30G, 1, (a) \n311, 15; c. part. 31Q \n\nimoixifivr\\(rKiiv c. two ace \n\n280, 3. \ninrovouv c. g, 273, R. 20. \nwircKTTTJveu C. d. 284, 3, (2) \nvroxcupetv C. g. 271, 2. \xe2\x96\xa0 \n\nc. a. 279, R. 3. \nwrrtpiiv^ vaiepcv c7i/ai, \n\nv<TT(pi((iy C. g. 275, 1. \nviftiffraadat c. d. 284, 3, \n\n(2). \nv^iaros 216, R. 2. \n\n*ay\xc2\xab7y c. g. and a. 273, 5, \n\n(c) and R. 15. \n^ytiy, ipaiyfa^tu c. part \n\n31U. 4, (b) ; ipalyo^ai \n\nxoiwy Ti il). R. 3. \n^lytaliai c. inf. and part. \n\n311, 8. \n<(Kiy<u c. inf T06, 1, (b.) \n^ayfp6% tifu "Koiuy rt 310, \n\nK.3. \n^\xc2\xabt5\xc2\xab<rdai c. g. 274, 1, (b). \n^p*t referring to severa) \n\n\xe2\x96\xa0 - T1S241. R. 13, (a), \nc ^, tptpmy^ maximo \n\nudii ib. H. 10. \n^ipraios 84, I. \n<p*fn(pos, iptpiaros 84, 1. \n^(vyfiy with signif. of \n\nPerf. 255, R. 1 ; <p(v- \n\nftiy C. g. e. g. ifXoirfjs \n\n274,2; wiroTivoi 249.3. \n^txr^ay c. a. 279, 3 ; c. inf. \n\n3U6, 1, (a). \n<^a/i\xe2\x82\xac\xc2\xbb\'05, ^(fy, quickly \n\n310,4,(0). \n^eu\'Cif\' c. a. 279, 4; c. \n\npart, followed by ^, \n\nirpi*/ ^ 31u, 4, (1) \n(pdfyyfff^ai c a. 278, 3. \n^<<77os and <p^oyyii 70, \n\nR. \n<^o\'ij dec. 68, 17. \n(p^oyfly C. g. 274, I, (l); \n\nc. d. 284, 3, (6). \n<pl\\05 comp. 82, R. 4. \n<pl\\os c. g. 273, 3, (bj. \n<pl{y) suffix 210. \n\n\n\n614 \n\n\n\nGREEK INDEX. \n\n\n\ntpo^ela-^ai c. a. 279, 5 ; c. \n\ninf. 306, 1, (a). \n(poit/iKovs 70, R. 3. \nipouevu with signif. of \n\nPeif. 25.5, R. 1. \n<pp(i(fiu c. d. and a. c. inf. \n\n307, R. 3. \n<f)peap dec. 68, 16. \n<t>poi/xiov I 7, R. 4. \n^povTi^iiu e. ^^ and a. 274, \n\n1 and R. 1 ; c. is and \n\ng. abs SI 2, R. 12: c. \n\n\'6-nm c. md. fut. 330, 6. \n<ppovhos 17, R. 4. \n(pvfiu ; (pijvai v. g. 273, 1. \n(pvKdrrea-^ai c. a. 27^). 1, \n\nXafpcjf c, d. 285, ^ i ; . i; \n\njtiirt. 310, 4, (c). \nXaAtTraiVeij\' c. g. 274, 1 ; \n\nc. d. 284, 3, (G). \nXoAfWs ct/At c. inf. ins. \n\nXa\\fir6v i<TTi with ace. \n\nc. inf. 307, R. 6. \nXa\\(iru>s (pepfiv c. g. 274, \n\nl,d; c. d. 285, (1); c. \n\n4irl rivi and c. a. 285, R. \n\n1 ; c. part. 310, 4 (c). \nXdpris dec. 71. A, (o). \nXdpiu 278, R. 2 ; c. g. 288, \n\nR. ; X\'^P^" ^y^Wt <^\'h*\' \'^\' \nX\xc2\xab^p dee. 55, R. 1 . \nXfipi(rros, x^^P\'^*\' ^"^^ 2. \nXeA.j6w*/ dec. 55, R. 2. \nXVpovu c, g. 271, 2. \nXvovs dec. 47. \nXOfvs dee. 57 and 68, 18. \n\n\n\nXo\\ov(T^ai c. g. 274, 1 ; c. \n\nd. 284, 3, (6). \nXOpevfiu ^f6i/ 279, R. 5. \nXovs dec. 68, 18. \nXpaianeTu c. d. 284, 3, (7). \nXpeci\'J/ 73, 1. (c). \nXPidJS dec. 69. \nXP^ c. g. 273, 5, (b) ; c. a. \n\nand d. 279. R. 4. c. inf. \n\n306, 1, (d); xM c. d. \n\nand a. c. inf. 307, 6, \n\nand R. 3. \nXpvo\'^ai rifl ri 278, 4 ; e. \n\nd. 285, (2). \nXpdis dec. 68, 1 9. \nXU!pf7v c. d. 284, 3, {2). \nXft\'plCfty c. g. 271, 2. \nX\xc2\xabp^r c. g. 271, 3. \nXupos and x<^P\xc2\xab "^j B- \n\n^oiJfti\' c. g. 273, 3, (b). \nx^fytiy c. g. and a. 273, \n\n}{. 20. \n}^fv5\xc2\xabTdai c. g. 271. 2. \nii/\xe2\x82\xacw8^y eotnp. 82, II. \nif.X($j e.g. 271, 3. \n\n*n\xc2\xabf with Part. 312, R. 7. \n\ntl\'vo^, ii\'i/a 53. R. 4. \xe2\x80\xa2 \n\ntcufiffbcu c. g. 275, 3. \n\nus IVep. 290, 3 and R 2. \n\nd?j fA\xc2\xabf, see Srt. \n\nis h/. \xc2\xbb;i m\'slics [^uunam) \n259. 3. (b). \n\ni)S, (IS. so as. const. 342 : \noSt\xc2\xbbs (us) \xe2\x80\x94 is in wish- \nes aud asse^\'cratioiis \n\n\n\n242, R. 2; is \xc2\xabith t \nSubs, (as might be ex- \npected, is A: " j\'j- \n\nVtOi, iif JjirnJ ;. \n\nce<\' li. 4. \n\nis wr : ^ K.2. \n\nits C. d., as : is y(p6yrt^ \n\nics ifioi - \xe2\x96\xa0 \' t, \n\nipL^ZC\'i \n\nis c. pait. and \n\n312, 6: c. i.art :_ ,.j, \n\n6, (a), \nis in- - " - \n\nis, / \n\nc. \' \nis, V ...... \n\nis ins. \xc2\xa3sTe, so that^ see \n\nfisTf, ^ \n\nis (ixfrv and is i-uos \xe2\x82\xac\xc2\xbb- \nTta\'341, R. 3. \n\nis (Is, iiri, itpSs C. a., it \ni-ri c. d- 29i>, R. 2. \n\ni>i rl 344, R, 6. \n\n^s S^fXov, -fs, \xe2\x80\xa2\xc2\xab c. in\xc2\xa3 \n259, R. 6. \n\n\xc2\xa3s>r(p, as, const 342 ; with \nPart, 312. R. 13. \n\n&rtf c. i: \'^ if a sim- \n\nple in! .3. \n\nfisT\xc2\xab c. ] K. 1.3. \n\n5sT\xe2\x82\xac, so 1 ..St. 341. \n\n&iTt, as, so as, const. 342. \n\nmiT6s ins. 6 minis 2 \' ~ \' \n\nwtfuKuv c. a. 279. 1 j c \ntwo a. 280 n 1 .V d. \n279, B. I. \n\n\n\nIII. INDEX FOR THE EORMS OF THE VERBS, \n\n\n\nAbbreviations. A. Aorist ; A. l.^first Aor.; A. IL sf<vnd Aor. ; Au^\'. -4\xc2\xab"/- \nmetit : Char. Characteristic ; Comp. Com^xire ; Dial. JjiuUci : F. Futurt ; 1*. \nPassive: Pf. PirfWt; Pf. M. Pcr/icf Middle; Plup. Pluperfect; R. Ptmark ; \nRed. Ixcdui\'liciUion. \n\n\n\nAdw 230. \nd7ah\xc2\xbb,ua( 230. \nii\')a,uai 179. I. \na7do^ai, ayaio/ua* 230. \niyeipw Pf. with Att. Rod. \n124, 2, (6). Dial. 230. \n\n\n\n4Sct (Poet. a\xc2\xab:S\xc2\xab). F. d((r\xc2\xbb- \nluu (afiVrouAi). .\\tL \n\n\n\nR-)r(itCi,\' 2.30. \n\n\xc2\xab7ri-ui 187. l.Dial. 2.30. \n\n&7U\'. A.I. T5|a, a^ot in I \n\nand Xen. ; A. II. i . . .\\ _ \n\nR. 2 : 1^. I. Act. 124,2 ; atiptt23( \nPf. M. fiyMu. Dial. 230. iafilCoftm ^xu \n\n\n\na. \n\n\n\nl22,1. \n\n\n\nINDEX FOB. THE FORMS OF VERBS. \n\n\n\n615 \n\n\n\n\xe2\x80\xa2AHMI 230. \n\nuidCu Char. 143. 6. \n\nalSfOficuy auoofiai 166, 1. \nDial. 230. \n\ncufc\'v, fonnation of ten- \nses 130, (d), 2. \n\naJyvncu 230. \n\naipfuj 107. 1. Dial. 230. \n\naTj^\'u.\' -re adpa \'I\'M. \n\ncua-i6.yofixu 160, 1. \n\nataau) Aug. 122, 1. Dial. \n230. \n\nctto An- 122, 1. Dial. 230. \n\nI. \n\n\xc2\xab,.a^ . -.JO. \n\naKfomu, formation of \n\n\xe2\x96\xa0 \'), (d), 1. \n(.1 \nCLKowa, Vi. with Att. Red. \n\n124, 2; F. OLKOwronai. \n\nI\'ass. with <r 131, 2. \noxctiflio^ioi, F. \'dffofuu 129, \n\nK. 1. \niAoAoC\xc2\xab, Char. 143,6. \naKdoncu 230. \n\na\\airaC<\xc2\xbb 223, 5. "*" \n\noASoiVw 230. \na\\(l<pw, lY.witli Aft. Ro.l. \n\n124,2. \na\\t(o 106. 2. i>i.u _\'\xc2\xbb\'\xe2\x80\xa2. \nii\\fouai or dAcvo^at 230. \naA\xc2\xabu "ion of lenst\'s \n\n1..\', , . . 1. , \naK^ffKw, -d\'nTKw 230. \n\nOAiT.. \n\nd\\\xc2\xabra>>t<i/, si\'o oAc^o; 162. \n\naWdaau, Char. 7. 143, 1. \n\n\xe2\x80\x94A. I. and II. T. 141, \n\n4. (!.). \n&\\\\ouai, d in format. 149, \n\nK. 2. Dial. 230. \ndiXodu, y.-diret. 129, R. 1. \naKvicrtut 2.30. \n\na\\<pa ui 230. \n\naui^rTdLi>6o 100, 2. DiaL \n\n230. \nkn&KiaHoa 161. 2. \nA/air. 4. \n\ni^WA. .\'.\'JO. \n\na/n/rw, afiut\'o^of 162. \nfn^iipiyvoiv, Aug. 126, 1 \n\nand 3. \nkfi<pi(yyv^ 1^4, 1. \niin<pis0TiTiw, Ann. 126. 2. \naya^iuxTKOfiou 161, 3. \nkiKxXiffKv 161,4. \n\n\n\navSc^foj 230. \n\n*ANE0n 230. \n\ndj\'f\'xojucu Aug. 126, 1. \n\ndMfJj\'O.^a (Kp.; 230. \n\nd;/oi7i/t/;ai, avoiyu) 187, 6. \n\nd*\'opd(Ja>, Aug. 126, 1. \n\navTow 230. \n\ndi\'trrw, avvoi formation of \ntenses 130, (b), l.Dial. \n230. \n\nHivwya 230. \n\ndirat/paw 2-30. \n\naircupiffKU} 230. \n\ndreiAfctf 230, \n\nawtx^ayofjuu 100, 3. \n\ndxdfpffe 230. \n\n*\'\'\'<^X^^ I \'\'7, 3, contrac- \ntion 137. 3. \n\nawoxpHfjiai 230. \n\n\xe2\x80\xa2APAn 230. \n\na.p((TKti> 161. 5. \n\napKfv, \' \'\')n of ten- \n\nses 1. 1. \n\napfiArrv^r^tey Char. 143,3. \n\nifKVfuu 188, l.Comp. 230. \n\niLp6<a, fitnnation of tenses \n1 \n\nOffwa^ , M. 143, 7. \n\napvrv, ipvot, formation \nof tenses 130. (h), 1. \n\n*APn, apapi<TKu> 230. \n\naaffWy ataati) 230. \n\noucui-w, Aug. 122, 1. \n\n\xe2\x80\xa2ATAAZOMAI, Char. 143, \n6. \n\n\'ATP.An, see awavpaw. \n( ;o. \n\naw^tt.-, -.\xc2\xbb;(*>, 160.4. \n\xe2\x80\xa2ATPI2KOMAI, ^xai;p.230. \natpiKytoficu 15\'J. 2. \nd4i>t\'<r(r(tf, Char. 143.4. \n\'A^n, dira(^i<rK(i; 230. \n&X^<\'M<u 1 66, 4. \n*AXn, ^KaxiCo 230. \n\xe2\x80\xa2Afl, (F \n\niwfTTO (U , - iO. \n\nB<\xc2\xa3C\xc2\xab. Char. 143, 6. \n$aii\'w I.jS, 1. Dial. 230. \n/3oA\\a\xc2\xbb l.\'iO, 2. Com p. 230. \nfidrru, Cliar. <;>. 143, 1. \n/Sofcw 230 \n\n/3a.TTc(C\xc2\xab, Char. 143, 7. \nB.\\.1, see Balvu. \nfitio^icu, ^(Oficu 230. \nfiidofiai 230. \n\nflt/SaCctf 163, 1. Comp. \nfiaivui 230. \n\n\n\nfiifipdjo-Kd) 161, 6 Dial \n\n230. \njStJw 192, .0. \n\nfilUaKOLLUL 161, 3. \n\n^AaTTTo), Char. j8, 143, 1 \n\nlied. 123, 2. \nfiXaardvo) 160, 5. \n^Aaa-(^rjjU6a>, Ked. 123, 2, \n)3Ae\'7ra,, A. II. P. 140 H. 1. \nyQAtTTw Char. 143, 3. \n&\\w(TKa 230. \n/3o({a> 230. \n^ocTKtii 166, 5. \n^ovKofiai 1 66. 6. Dial. 230. \n^pdaaoy, Cliar. 143, 3. \n/Spe\'xw A. II. P. 140, 2. \niSpi\'Cw, Char. 143, 6. \nfipv^dofiai 230. \nfivyfu, fivyofiai, /3uw 159, 1 \n\nraM\xe2\x82\xac\xc2\xab 165, 1. Comp, 23a \n\nydyufjLai 230. \n\nTAri, see yiyyo/xcu. Comp. \n\n230. \nyeyojyiffKw 161, 7. Comp \n\nytywya 230. \n\nydyofjLai 230. \n\n7\xe2\x82\xacAao>, formation of ten- \nses 130 (c). \n\nyfyro 230. \n\nFENfl, see ylyyofiai. \n\n7\xc2\xabyft>, A. P. with <r 131, 3. \n\nyn^fw 165, 2. \n\n7ijpo[(r\xc2\xbbco>, yqpdoj 161, 8. \nDial. 230. \n\nyiyyofxaif yiyofiai 163, 2. \n\nytyy(i)(TKC6,yiyu><TK<i) 161,9 \n\nyodta 230. \n\nypi)yopiu), see iyelpw. \n\nAaiCot 143, 6. 223, 5. \n\nSaiyvfjLi 230. \n\nJafa> 230. \n\nSa/cyctf 158, 9. \n\n5a/xaw, Safid^u 156, 2. \n\nSapiydoj 230. \n\n5a/jdo\xc2\xbb\'a) 1 00, 6. Dial. 230. \n\n5aT(o/xai 230. \n\nAAA 230. \n\nSearo 230. \n\n56? 160, 7. \n\nSetSw, Pf. Se\'Sio 193. \n\nComp. 230. \n5\xe2\x82\xaci/c\xc2\xbb\'i;/uil75, 187, 2. DiaL \n\n230. \nSeTi/, sec Se?. \nAEKfl, see SeiKyv/jii and \n\nSf\'xo/iot. \n\n\n\n616 \n\n\n\nINDEX FOR THE FORMS OF VERBS. \n\n\n\nSe\'/Mo, formation of ten- \nses 156, 2. \n\nSfOfjiai contract. 137, 2. \n\nSepKOfiai, Pf. SfdopKa with \nthe meaninj^ of the \nPres. 140, 4. Dial. 230. \n\n\xc2\xab\xe2\x82\xac>\xc2\xab, A. II. P. andPf.A. \n140, 2 and 4. \n\nSfXopiai 230. \n\nSfvu 2:i0. \n\ni(a>, formation of tenses \n\n130, (d), 2, contraction \n137, 2. \n\nJ\xc2\xab\xc2\xbb, see 9(7. \nSmirdw, An{r. 126, 2. \nhiaKovtu, An;;. 126, 2. \nStoAf^o/xai, Aug. 123, R.2. \nSiSacrfw 161, K. \nAIAHMl 230. \nSiS^ao-Kw 161, 10. \nSt\'Swjut 175. \nS^jTrj/ia* 180, R. 3. Dial. \n\n230. \nAIHMI 180, R. 3. Dial. \n\n230. \n8\xc2\xab(rT<iC\xc2\xab. <^\'\'\xc2\xbb\xc2\xab>". 143, 7. \nhi\\\\iiu)y contracted 137, 3. \nZlo) 230. \n\nhlfilKW. ihl\'SiKO^OV 162. \n\nJoeCccroTo 230. \n\nBoKtw 165, 3. \n\nZoimiof 230. \n\nSfxio), formation of tenses \n\n131, 3. \n^PEMn sec rp^xV\' \nivyaficu 179, 2. Accent \n\n176, 1. Dial. 230. \nUvw, ivu, 158, 2. Dial. \n230. \n\n\'Ed<p^ sec fiirrfl# 230. \n\nddtio, Aug. 122, 3. For- \nmation of tenses 129, \nR. 1. \n\n^yefpoj Pf. with Att Red. \n124, 2. (l>); Pf II. with \nvariahle vowel 140, 4. \nAor. II. M. 155, 1. \nDial. 230. \n\n\'EFKn, see <^*\'po>. \n\n^yxtipfOy Aug. 126, 5. \n\nfdw see fVd/w. \n\nc^ouot, see frad/^w. \n\n^^f\\a> 166, 8 \n\n4diCci>, Aug. 122,3. \n\n\'Een Aug.l22,3,Dial.230. \n\n\'EIAH, see iptiw. \n\nfucd^w, Aug. 121, R. \n\n\n\n\xe2\x80\xa2EIKn, Pf ^oiKa, Plup. \n\n^aJwe/v 140, R. 3 ; Aug. \n\n122, 5. Inflection of \n\nfoiKa 1 95, 2. Dial. 230. \n(1k(i), (tKo^oy 162. \nCiAf\'ctf, ciXc\'ci?, efAActf and \n\neiAAtf, see (fXitf. \n*rXu\xc2\xab 230. \n(fAfltf 166, 9. \nc/m^ 181 bt \xe2\x96\xa0 \nfjfu 181 ai \n\nftvu/xi, see Afjipidyyvfu. \n*Einn, see tfniuL \n(Ipyfvfii 187, 3. \nftpyu 1 87, 3. Cot.\' \n\'EIPOMAI 166,11. \' \n\n230. \n\'lUPTMI, sec ipitt 230. \netpvtt, see /pvw. \ncrp\xc2\xab 230. \n\xc2\xabT<To. Aug. 122, 3. Dial. \n\nttufOa, sec idi^u!. \n\niKav^w 1 58, 3. Dial. 230. \ni\\dtt, see ^Kavyw. \n4\\tyx\xc2\xbb, l*f.wiih AU-Red. \n\n124. 2. \niKt\\i(w, Char. 143, 6. \n\nDial. 230 \n\xe2\x80\xa2EAETen. yfuu. \n\nikitraw, A-, 3.\xe2\x80\x94 Pf. \n\nwith Att. Red. 124, 2. \n\'EAKTn, sec i\\tcm. \nikKtt 166. 10. \nlAirw, IT foATo, Plup. \n\niuKKfiv 140 n .1 .\\ug. \n\n122, 5. \n\'EAfl, see o^p**-. \n//xf cr. formation of tenses \n. 1. \n\n^Mf*- \n\nifxtrfinvKt, see ^fiu\xc2\xab\xc2\xbb. \nifiwlwKrjfjii 177, 5. \n^fopi (,\'*\'\xe2\x99\xa6 Char. 143, 6. \niyavo!, Pa^s.with a 131,2. \n\'ENEen, see ir^iro^a. \n\xe2\x80\xa2ENEKH, see <f>\xc2\xabpm. \ndy^Tw, see ^fu. Comp. \n\n230. \ndy^iro^a 230. \niyiwTw 230. \niyytTotf see ^M^. Comp. \n\n230. \nIfxi\'i\'/Lii, see iLfi^^rrvfu, \n\nComp. 230. \n^wxXew, Aug. 126. 1. \n/oufo, see \'EIKG. Comp. \n\n230. \n\n\n\n\xe2\x82\xacopycu, see \'EPm. \niopTd(u, Aug. 122, 5. \ndvdia, 230. \niiravpiaKu 230. \ni-irfiyofjuu 197, R. 2. \n(TTi^v^fuiy Aug. 126, 5. \nMarofuu 179, 3. Dial \n\n230. \nrr\xc2\xbb, Aug. 122, 3. Comp \n\n230. \nfpofuu 179, 4. \n/pdLw Kee fpofuu, \nipyd(ofjLat, Aug. 122, 3. \nfpT-w 230. \n\n"EPrn. j.\'.ip. \' --\' \n\n5.\xe2\x80\x94 Pcrf. V . 1^- \n\nvowel 140. R. 3. \n(pic0 see \'EPrn. Comp. \n\n230. \nip*ih\xc2\xabty perf. with Att. \n\nRed. 124,2. Dial. 23a \nip^\'i-rm 230. \nip*aau 14" " \nipthojiym 2 \n/piCo* 230. \n\'EPOMAI see \'FTP. \nipmv^m, iprtt, 2.3 \n\nf^ 166, 12. i\'iat .^^oO. \n\ndpvyydrm 160, 13. \n\n^pudairw 230. \n\n/piMcw 230. \n\nfpvftai see VpM* S30. \n\n/puw, formation of teii*ds \n\n223, I. Comp. 230. \n(pXOfitu 167, 2. Comp. \n\n230. \niedltt, fffbti 167,3. \nIttmU*, Aug. 122, 3. \nfffcSc see oMum. Comp. \n\n230. \n\xc2\xabIS\xc2\xab see KtAtiim. \n9&pUntm 161, 11. \nc#^\xc2\xabfMi Aug. 121, R. \nix^^i^\'Ofuu see ^vcx^. \nrx\xc2\xab 166, 14. Comp. SSO \njvj-<>- ir,r. 1.\'. \n\nZc U 137, 3 \n\n((,. :.. Comp. C\xc2\xab\xc2\xab^ \n\nJfv-^i--. -r . 4. \n\n^f\xc2\xab, formation of teosM \n130. (I), d \n\nj^3<urir\xc2\xab, ^^3^, 161, IS- \n^pcdoMot see ^^ \nComp. 230. \n\n\n\nINDEX FOR THE FORMS OF VERBS. \n\n\n\n617 \n\n\n\ntlfptbofuu sec aUpct. Comp. \n\n230. \nfifuu 190. Dial. 230. \n1ifjS(>oToy sec a^iapTiivu. \nilfii 178, R. 3. \nijiwa 230. \n\ne<\xc2\xa3\xc2\xbbT\xc2\xab, Char. <> 143, 1. \ndf\\v see ^dcAw. \nbtpoiuu 230. \nd(\xc2\xab 154, 2 ; contract. 137, \n\n1. Coinp. rpfx\xc2\xbb*\' \nbriKtu 230. \n\neHnn 230. \n\ndiyyafw 160. 14. \n\nbkitt^ furraation of tenses \n\n130. {(\xe2\x80\xa2). \xe2\x80\xa2 \ndr^KM 101,I3.Comp.2dO. \nbp&TTet frum Tofidrrtt 1 56, \n\nK \ndpauM Past, with a- 131,3. \ndpvKKi(w, Char. 223, 5. \ndpvsTw, Char. ^ 143, 1. \n3^<rK\xc2\xbb 161, U. 156, 2. \n\nDial. 230. \nbvfw iinti diW 158, 4. \ndi II of tenses \n\n\n\n1. i >\xc2\xbb. \n\nTC\xc2\xab* sec tta^l(w. \nIritu IM). Dial. 230. \nUvionai^ uttt 159, 2. Se\xc2\xab \n\ndi^urvio/uu. Cuiup. 230. \nIXuriro^iai IGl, 15. \n\'UHMI 230. \nIXAw sec <tAw. \nItidaat*, Char. 143, 3. \nr^dM* 230. \nT(m;/u 175. \niVx\xc2\xbb\'aiKw, d in fonnat.I49, \n\nK. 2. \n\n\xe2\x80\xa2ee 6\xc2\xab\'urx>\'*ot^<Lf \n*ia see tJfu. \n\nKAA-, KAIA-, Me ko/- \n\nKt/UOi. \n\nifa->..\'Mi/i(, Aug. 126, 3. \nKa . 154, 5. \n\nIfa \xe2\x80\xa2 13. \n\nMu .126,3. \n\nircu^t^\'cuw set] KObdi\\\'iv. \n\xc2\xabcai>n/Axai 230. \n\nKoiw jcdw 154, 2. Dial. \n230. \n\n\n\nKoXfWy formation of ten- \nses 130, (d) 2; Opt. \nPlup. yL or. P. 154, 8; \nmetaih. in Pf 156, 2. \n\nKOfifw 149, 5, and 158,10. \nDial. 230. \n\nkIuttw pf. M. or P. 144, \nK. 2. \n\nitarrryopfw, Aug. 126, 5. \n\nKdct sec Kedu. \n\nK\xc2\xab7nai 189. Dial. 230. \n\nK > KCIfUU. \n\nK<A\xc2\xabuo\xc2\xbb, Pass, with (T, \n\n131,2. \nic\xc2\xabAX(\xc2\xbb 230. \n\nIf. m \n\n#t\xc2\xab .0. \n\nKfftAri^vfii 183, 1. Dial. \n\n230. \nir<p8aivw, d in format.149, \n\nU. T Act. 149,6. \n\nr. - K \n\ntc- \xe2\x80\xa2. \n\nmjow I\'M, 17. Dial. 230. \n\nKiiponat 23U. \n\nKit^vfiat 230. \n\nKtpp^M 230. \n\nirtX\'U\'ctf, -OM<u 230. \n\n*: \xe2\x96\xa0-- 1. \n\nmAMTfyaitm 160, 8. \n\nDial. - \nKkaiu \' itjo, ib. \n\nkXcUl\' . \'f tenses \n\n130, (c). \nmXtiv Pass, with a 131,3. \n\nDial. 23(\xc2\xbb. \nicA<Vrw, Char. \xc2\xbb 143, 1. \n\nP. M., A. II. P. 140, 2. \n\nPf. I. and l*f. M- or P. \n\n140 ^ \n\n\xc2\xabA<b< - \n\nirAiitw, KAp\xc2\xab* tee acA\xc2\xab^ \n\n230. \nkA/*w, PC A- and M. or \n\nP. and A. 1. P. 149, 7. \n\nand R 4. \nmXxm 230. \n\nKvai>0 Pass, with (T 131, 2. \nicKciw Pa^s. with <r 131, 2. \n\ncontract. 137, 3. \nKvutoau:, Char. 143, 3. \nKo\xc2\xbbi\xc2\xbb\xc2\xbb Char. 143, 6. \njcoiAouw, d in form. 149, \n\nK. 2. \nicoAoww.Pass.with <r 131 , 3. \n\n\n\nK(JxTa), Char. IT, 143, 1 \n\nDial. 230. \nKoUwvixi 182. Dial. 23a \n\nKOTfW 230. \n\nKpdCw, Char. 7 143, 6; \n\nPcrf. 194, R. Comp. \n\n230. \nKpaivw 230. \nKpeixa/jLcu 179, 5. \nKpf/xdyvvm 183, 2. \n/cpjVw Pf. A. and M. or \n\nP. and A. I. P. 149, 7, \n\nand K. 4. \nKpovo), Pass.with <r 131,3. \nKpvvru} 143, 1. \nKpdi^w, Char. 143, 6. \nKTaoficu^ Red. 123, R. 1 ; \n\nSul)j. Pf and Opt. \n\nPlup. 154, 8. \nKrdvvyn 1 88, 2. \ntcTfiyta, F. KTci/w. A. I. ^jc- \n\nrciva, (A. II. iKTovov \n\ndoubtful in prose) ; Pf. \n\nA. iKTova 141, 4; Pf. \n\nP. iitrtmai and Aor, \n\nP. itcra^v ( iKTa.vby\\v \n\nin later writers) 149, \n\nR. 3. Poet, and Dial \n\n230. \nKilvyvm see tmivvpn, \nKTUTriui 165, 4. \nKvKiu, Pass witho- 131, 2. \nri/ffw 159, 3. \nKVpffU, Kvpot 230. \n\nAayx<iyo\xc2\xbb 160, 15. Dial. \n230. \n\nAAZTMAI 230. \n\nXa^ifidyu 160, 16. Dial. \n230. \n\nXaw^ayu 160, 17. Dial. \n230. \n\nKdtTKot 230. \n\nAf7<w, (a) ^0 say, without \nPf. A.; Pf. AI. A\xe2\x82\xacA\xe2\x82\xacy- \nfiai. A. P. ^At\'x^". \xe2\x80\x94 \n(b) /o collect, and in \ncompounds Pf cfAoxa, \nM. or P. (Uey/xou 140, \n5 ; Aug. 123, 3 ; A. II. \nP. iKfyny and A. I. P. \n140,R.l. Comp.AEXn. \n\n\\cUw, A. fKiTToy, Pf. IL \nKfKoiira 140, 4. A. II. \nA. and P. 141, 3. cor- \nresponding form 160, \n18. \n\nA\xe2\x82\xacV\xc2\xab, A. IL P. 140, B. 1 \n\n\n\n618 \n\n\n\nINDEX FOE. THE FORMS OF VERBS. \n\n\n\nK(VKaiv(a,a in for.149, R. 2. \nXeva-croo, Char. 143, 3. \n\\eva}, Pass, with a 131,2. \nAEXn 230. \nKi/jLirdva} see Xeiiro). \nXificvTTco, Char. T 143, 3. \nKiaao/xai, Char. 143, 3. \n\\ovw, contract. 137, 5. \n\nDial. 230. \nKvfxaivoixai Pf. M. or P. \n\n149, 8. \n\\{jw, formation of tenses \n\n130, (h) 2. Dial. 230. \n\nVlalvoixai 230. \n/uaiofiat 230. \n\ntisLvkiduo} 1 60, 1 9. Dial.230. \nfidpvauai 230. \nfiapTvpiu} 105, 5. \n/wctjrrrai, Char. 7 143, 1. \nfia(TTl(u), (\'har. 143, 6. \nndxofxai 106, 19. Dial \n\n230. \nMAn 230. \n\nflf^VffKW 101, 10. \n\nfX\xe2\x82\xacifiO/jLai \'2\'iO. \n\nH(K\xe2\x82\xaci 106, 21. Dial. 230. \n\nfifKKo) 106, 20. \n\n/jliKu) see /LicAct. Comp. \n\n231). \n/^{foifactf 230. \n/LifW 149, .5; 166, R. 2. \n\nCom J). MAfl. \nfjifTafiiKfi, fjLfTaiJLfKofjLai, \n\n100, 21. \nHrpij.r}pi(o, Char. 223, 5. \nfi.T]Kvo/j.ai 230. \n\n/Liiaiyo), /xirjyai, fjuavai 149, \nJ\\. 2. Pf. Act. ixfuiayxa \n149, 6. Pf. M. or P. \nfitniaanai 149, S. Dial. \n230. \n\nixlyyvfii IS", .\'>. DiMl. 230. \n\nfn/.u\'T](rK(i> Subj. Pf. and \nOpt. IMpf. M. 154, 8; \n\n101, 17. \n\n/xlcryo) see fxlywfxt. ^ \nfjioKovjuai SCO ^Ku\'tTKO), \n/Lio\\iW Pf. M.or P.149,1. \nfj.vC(^\\ to siicl\\ 106, 22. \njui\'\'(,\'a\xc2\xbb, to ifnxin, 143, 7. \nfiVKdofxai 230. \n/ui\'tw, formation of tenses \n130, (b) 1. \n\nNafa> 230. \npd<r(ra! 143, 4. \nveiK\xe2\x82\xac<n 230. \n\n\n\nvelacoficu see viaaofuu. \n\nvefio) 166, R. 2. \n\nveo* 154, 2. \n\ni/ew (W)^w). Pass, with \n\n<r 131, 3. \nveco, Pf. M. or P. with \n\nand without ir 131, 3. \nvlaraofiaif Char. 143, 3. \n\nDial. 230. \nvofco contract 205, 5. \nyvard^u) 143, 7. \n\nHew, formation of tenses \n\n130. (d) 1. \n^i7pajVa>Pf. M.or P. 149,8. \n^vpfu 105, G. \xe2\x80\xa2 \n\n^va>, Pass, with a, 131, 2. \n\n\'OWC\xc2\xab, Char. 143, 6. \n\xc2\xab8i\'(ra<T.>ai OAT2- \n\n20MAI 1; \noCo -**). 23. \nolaxl^v An;:,\'. 122. 1. \noiyuvfxiy otyw sec ayoiy. \nolta see ^p(L>. Corap. \n\n230. \noiSa/fctf, oiidyUf oiidu \n\n16(>, 9. \nolKovpfu 122. 2. \no^ftoi sec ofo^Luu. \nolfidu 122. 2. \noifivCu 143, 6. \nojVjX* 122. 2. \notyoxofw 219, 5. \no\xc2\xabV(ia>, Au\'^^122. 2. \noiouai 1 00. 24. Cuuip. 230. \nol6w, oi(t>^y 122, 1. \noiarpfu) 122, 2. \nof\'^ouai 100, 25. \n\nid ^fpw. \n1 1\xc2\xbb. \n6\\Au/;m 1^2. B. \noAo\\i\'{,w, Char. 143, 6. \ndfiapTtu, Kpic dfjLOpT^jrrjy \n\n222, K. 1. \n^jLU\'u^ii 182. B. \ndfioKkdtc, Kpic ifiOKkfoy \n\n222. I. A. (2). \nOU({<ryiaiu( 187. 7. \n\n\xe2\x96\xa0\xe2\x96\xa0 Ul. \n\nji\'^Kij^ 177. 4. \nbyu^tai 230. \n\'OriTn SCO 6pda.\\ \ndpdw 167, 4. 230. \nopyaiyo), a. in form. 149. \n\nH. 2. \n\'OPEFNTMI 230. \' \n\n\n\n6p4yu 230. \nopyufjii 230. \nopv(T(Tu>y Char. \xe2\x80\xa2) 143, 1 \n\nPf. with Att. Red.l 24,2 \n6(T(ppaiyofuu 160, 11. Diftl \n\n230. \noaippaabcu see ocippalyo \n\nfiai. \novpfu, Ang. 122, 4. \notrrd\xc2\xab 230. \no<^c(Aw 166, 26. Dial \n\n230. \no<pf\\Xu> 2.30. \n\nUtpKuTKOMW 160, 12. \n\nna/C\xc2\xab, Char. 143, 7. \n\nirai\xc2\xbb 166, 27. \n\n\xe2\x96\xa0iraXaiw Pass.with c 131,2. \n\nirdWu 230. \n\nwapavo 5. \n\nvapoiy* . \n\nTopo^i/vat Pf. AL or p. \n\n149. 8. \n-rdaau. Char. 143. \'. \n\xc2\xbbd- - Dial. 23a \n\nTOT \n\nirai>w, A. p. with \xc2\xabr 131,4. \niraxv*^ Pf.M.or P. 149.8. \n\nTClt^W, Pf. II. TtVOlt^a \n\n140, 4. I \' \n\nv\xc2\xabim(\xc2\xab, COI : >7. 2. \n\nir(irrM\xc2\xbb,s-(\'irrw,T<tira\xc2\xbb 143,2. \nireA(\xc2\xa3C\xc2\xab 230. \nir\xc2\xabA\xc2\xab/iJi(w, Char. 223, 5. \n\xc2\xbb\xc2\xab>\xc2\xbb\xc2\xbb. Pf 1. and l*f. M. \n\nor P. 140. 5. \nriEXe.a. sec ycurx\xc2\xab\xc2\xbb. \nvrrcuVotf, d in the format. \n\n149. H. 2. \nir*, R. \n\n- 8. \n\nwfpdw, \'>n of ten* \n\nSOS l.i\'-. \\\\ |. \n\nir\xc2\xab/>5w 1 00, 28. \nv(>3w 230. \nTrreb\'vv/u 1S3, 3. \nvcrofiflu svncu|Mite<] Act. \n\n^\xe2\x80\x94 -* \'*\xe2\x80\xa2\xe2\x80\xa2 \'\xe2\x80\xa2\'.6, 29. \n\n1 \n\n\n\n\xc2\xab"^Kw^ 1S7. ^. i\'l.u. _M^\'. \n\nv/Aj^MiOi 230. \n\nTi.uTAn.tti 177, 5. Dial.23a \n\nwifiwfrnut 177, 6. \n\nv/r\xc2\xab 158s 5. \n\n\xc2\xbbnriVW! 161, 19. \n\n\n\nINDEX FOR THE FORMS OF VERBS. \n\n\n\n619 \n\n\n\nwtwpdtTKca 161, 20. \n\nwiTTTu) 1G3. 3. Dial 230. \n\nwiTydiij 2.J0. \n\nw\\dCw, Char, -yy U3, 8. \n\nvAdLdw, see TcAa^w. \n\nirAa<T(rw, Char. 143, 3. \n\nTAfKW A 11. P. UU. R. 1, \n\nirAf\'w, furmatiou of ten- \nses 154, 2 ; contract. \n137, 1. \n\nv\\-fiaau, Char. 7 143, 1 ; \n^V. 11. V. UU, H. 2. \n\nvAvi\'M, Pf. ..v. and M. or \nA. LP. 149,7 andU.4. \n\nir\\uu 23U. \n\nirv(u), torinatioD of ten- \nses 154, 2 J contract. \n137, 1. \n\nvod\xc2\xabu, format, of tenses \n130, (d), 2. \n\nwo\\tfjii(o>. Char. 223, 5. \n\nwoi\' Miat. of tenses \n\nI 2. [143,1. \n\nwpdffaw, wpdrritf Char, y \n\n: "Ty, 6. \n\nwith \xc2\xabr 1.31, 2. \n.5. \n\niTr__ ^- \n\n\xc2\xabT^a<r\xc2\xab 230. \n\nwriaau; \' \' \' \n\n\xc2\xabTwa\xc2\xbb 1 \n\nvtrnftctyo/MM loo, 20. \n\n\xe2\x80\xa2Pa/M\xc2\xbbPf.M. orP.149,8; \n\nMt .r. <^ 143, 1. \n\nii\\\xc2\xbb. Char. 14 !. \'\xe2\x80\xa2 \n\ni<\xc2\xab, fo of tenses \n\n154, ~ \n\n\'PF.Cl, \' \n\n. 107, \xc2\xab. \n^.,.* -;30. \n\n6ty6w, contract. 137, 3. \n(mrrof, < \xc2\xbb, 1. \n\nPuard^ttt Char. 143, 6. \n^it/yyvfjn 1^0, 2. \n\nv, Char, yy 143, 8 \n\n>0. \natifyyvfu 184, 4. \no-ctw. Pass, with (r 131, 2. \nat ill) 230. \n\nI d in for- \nmat. 149, ii. 2; Pf. M. \nUa, 8. \n\n\n\n(TKaxT&j, Char. <p 143, 1. \no-Ke5avvu/xi 182, and 183,4. \n(TKfWta), (TKeKeot 166, 30. \naKiSvafiat 230. \no-ftcui?, contract. 137, 3. \naodrai, aovao ((tov), see \n\nfffVW. \n\nc-rdw, format of tenses \n\n130, (c). \najrdpa}, Pf. tan. pa 140, 4. \na-Kiyhu> 144, li. I. \narai^ii}, Chur. 143, 6. \n<rroAoi,w, Cliar. 143, 6. \nortKXu.A. 11. P. 140,2. \n<rr\xc2\xabv<\xc2\xa3C\xc2\xab. Char. 143. G. \naripyv, Pf. IL iaropya \n\n140, 4. \n(TT*tJiiTK\xc2\xab, arfpiu 161, 21. \n\n1. 230. \n<r7. . < \'har. \xc2\xbb-t>. o. \n(TTiv ir. 143, 6. \n\naToptyyufjii,(Tr6pyvm 184,5. \narptip,^ A. II. 1*. UO, 2. \n\nPf. M. or P. 140, 6. \n(TT. 182 and 186,3. \n\navKamy iL{>. avKifTriv 222, \nM 1. \n\n(<ri\xc2\xbbp(TT\xc2\xbb), Char. \n\n14 i, 6. \n\no-^C". <r\xc2\xab;><\xc2\xa3TT\xc2\xab, Char. 7 \n\n143, 1 and 6. \na<piyyu, C\'har. 144, K. 2. \no^^vCwt Char. 143, 6. \nff^S :iiat. of tenses \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nTA \xe2\x96\xa0). \n\nrayvw, tonnat. of tenies \n\n223, 1. Comp. 230. \nrapdaau, dpirrtit 156, R. \n\nDial. 2.30. \nrdaaw, TtirTo?, Char. 7 \n\n143, 1. \nrtlyw 140, R. 3 \nrcX(\xc2\xbb, format, of tenses \n\n1 1. \n\nT\xc2\xab. 11. \n\nrtpirw 1: . \'. \nTfTfMoy, >^e\'* TEMH. \nrtrpaiyti) 163, 4. \n\nT^Ko. 140, U. -\' \nTIEn 230. \n\n\n\nTt^TJ/Xi 175. \n\nt/ktoj 143, 2. \n\nTlvvvfjLi 185 ; Comp. 230. \n\nrfyw 158, 6. \n\nrirpdci} 163, 4. \n\nTtrpuaKio 161, 22. \n\nt/w 158, 6. \n\nTAAn, 194,4. \n\nTAT^ai 177, 7. \n\nTfirjyo) 230. \n\nTpoxi^vw Pf.M. or P. 149,8. \n\nrpevu), variable vowel in \nA. II. Act. M. P. 140, \n25 A.I.Act.M.P.141, \n3 ; Pf. I. Act. and Pf. \nM. or P. 140, 5, 6. \nVerb. Adj. Tpeirr6s and \nwitli middle sense \nTpain\\Tios. \n\nTpf<pu>, Vf. r\xe2\x82\xacTpo<pa 140, \n4. Pf. M. or P. 140, 6. \nA. I. P. ibpi<p$n\\Vy ra- \nrer than A. 11. P. iTpd- \n^\xe2\x80\xa2ny 140, 2. Dial. 230. \nverb Adj. bp(irT6s. \n\nrpfxo 167, 5. \n\nrpto), format, of tenses \n130, (d), 1. \n\nTpl(\xc2\xbb, Char. 7 143, 6. \n\nrvyx<Lyoi 160, 21. \n\nrinrru 166, 31. \n\n\'Tir\xc2\xab)iu^/uivic6 sec iifjLVw 230. \nvwiaxv^oyuax 159, 4. \ninrvu>7- \' \' ir. 143,3. \n0w, t( . of tenses \n\nwith a 131, 2. \n\n\xe2\x99\xa6Arn sec iabl<a. \n\n^vo Pf. M. or P. 149,8. \n\nPf. 11. iTf^njm 149, 9. \n\n151. Dial. 236. \n^(TKCtf 161, 23. \n(pdSofjuu 230. \n\xe2\x99\xa6ENn see Tr(<pvoy 230. \n<P(pw 167, 6. comp. 230 \n<f>fvyu see (furyydy\'j). comp. \n\n230. \n<p7]}ii 167, 7, 178. \n(j^dttJ/w 158, 7. Dial. 230. \n<f>dfipco, A. II. P. 140, 2 \n\nPf.ll. 140,4. comp. 230. \n<pS>lyu 158, 8. Dial. 230. \n<pi\\(a> 135. Dial. 230. \n(p\\eyw,A. 1I.P.U0,R. 1. \n^XvCai Ciiar. 143, 6. \n<pond(i), Ep. (pQiTTiTrjv ^2^ \n\nK. 1. \n\n\n\n620 \n\n\n\nINDEX FOR THE FORMS OF VERBS. \n\n\n\n4>pdyvvij,i 187, 10. \n<ppdCa) 148. Dial. 230. \n(ppda-au. Char, y 143, 1. \nippeu, formation of ten- \nses, 131, 2, \n<Ppi(r(ru, Char. k. 143, 1. \n\xe2\x80\xa2piryyduco {(pevyw) 160, 22. \n(pvpw 230. \n<pvu3 192, 11. comp. 230. \n\nXdCofiai 230. \n\nXaipu 1 66, 32. COmp. 230. \n\nXoAttcu, formation of ten- \nses 130, (c). \n\nXovSdvu 160, 23. comp. \n230. \n\n\n\nXda-Ku 161, 24. \n\nXeC\xc2\xab. Char. 2 143, 5 ; Pf. \nII. Kfxo^a 140, 4. Fut. \nXfcrovfiai 154, 3. A. II. \nAct. according to the \nanalogy of A. 1. 154. 8. \n\nXfo, formation of tenses \n154, R. 1. 230. \n\nx6w, Pass. \\%ith <r 131, 2. \n\nXpdofmi, formation of \ntenses 129, R. 2.; A.P- \nwith \xc2\xabr 131, 4; con- \ntract. 137, 3. \n\nXpdtDy formation of ten- \nses 129, R. 2; contract \n137.3 \n\n\n\nXpil 177, 2. \n\nX/)t\xc2\xab, formation of tenses \n\n130, (a), \nXj>uvvviu 186, 4- \n\nYauoj, Pass, with (r 131,2. \n^cC\xc2\xbb, Pass, with er 131, 3; \n\ncontract. 137, 3. \n^4yu, A. II. P. 140, R. 1. \n\xc2\xabf iJx\xc2\xab, A. XL P. 141, R. \n\ni^iu 165, 7. \naWofuu, Aug. 122, \ncomp. \xe2\x80\xa2rpiairbat. \n\n\n\ny-^ \n\n\n\n; \n\n\n\nI \n\n\n\n\xe2\x80\xa2\xe2\x96\xa0\xe2\x96\xa0>-\'i \xe2\x96\xa0-;\xe2\x96\xa0.\' ^\xe2\x96\xa0\xe2\x96\xa0\'\xe2\x80\xa2^: \xe2\x96\xa0\'-\'*. SS^;:^\'\'^i<fS^ \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nLIBRARY OF CONGRESS \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nfir7^ \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n'